THK

PRODUCTS
INFORMATION
THK develops and provides a large number of linear motion systems products, including LM
Guides, Ball Screws and Actuators. All of these are used in various types of industrial equipment
such as machine tools, semiconductor manufacturing machines and industrial robots.
To respond to diversifying requirements, THK has been enhancing its high-performance and high-
quality products that can be used in widely varying operating environments.
Select the most suitable product from our broad array of product lineups that respond to various
applications.
Caged Ball LM Guide

Global standard size Radial Type Ultra-heavy Load Ultra-heavy Load
SHS A-136 SSR A-142 SNR A-148 SNS A-148
Model No.: SHS15 to 65 Model No.: SSR15 to 35 Model No.: SNR25 to 85 Model No.: SNS25 to 85
LM Guide
Wide Rail Miniature Cross LM Guide Global standard size
SHW A-156 SRS A-160 SCR A-166 HSR A-170
Model No.: SHW12 to 50 Model No.: SRS7 to 25 Model No.: SCR15 to 65 Model No.:HSR8 to 150
Radial Type Ultra-heavy Load Type Ultra-heavy Load Type Wide Rail
SR A-178 NR A-186 NRS A-186 HRW A-194
Model No.: SR15 to 150 Model No.: NR25 to 100 Model No.: NRS25 to 100 Model No.: HRW12 to 60
ii
LM Guide
Miniature Miniature Miniature (Low Cost Type) Miniature (Attached with Retainer)
RSR A-200 RSR-W A-200 RSR-Z A-208 RSH A-214
PRODUCTS INFORMATION
Model No.: RSR3 to 20 Model No.: RSR-W3 to 20 Model No.: RSR-Z7 to 15 Model No.: RSH7 to 12
Miniature (Attached with Retainer) Separate Type Separate Type Separate Type
RSH-Z A-218 HR A-224 GSR A-230 GSR-R A-236
Model No.: RSH-Z 7 to 15 Model No.: HR918 to 60125 Model No.: GSR15 to 35 Model No.: GSR-R25 to 35
Cross LM Guide Miniature Cross Guide Structural Member Rail R Guide

CSR A-244 MX A-248 JR A-252 HCR A-258
Model No.: CSR15 to 45 Model No.: MX5 to 7 Model No.: JR25 to 55 Model No.: HCR12 to 65
Straight-Curved Guide Self-aligning High Temperature High Temperature

HMG A-262 NSR-TBC A-268 HSR-M1 A-272 SR-M1 A-280
Model No.: HMG15 to 65 Model No.: NSR-TBC20 to 70 Model No.: HSR-M1 15 to 35 Model No.: SR-M1 15 to 35
iii
LM Guide Caged Roller LM Guide
High Temperature High Corrosion Resistance Ultra-high Rigidity Ultra-high Rigidity (Low Center of Gravity)
RSR-M1 A-286 HSR-M2 A-292 SRG A-300 SRN A-306
Model No.: RSR-M1 9 to 20 Model No.: HSR-M2 15 to 25 Model No.: SRG15 to 65 Model No.: SRN35 to 65
LM Guide Actuator Caged Ball LM Guide Actuator LM Actuator

Ultra-high Rigidity (Wide) Ball Screw Drive Type
SRW A-312 KR A-386 SKR A-416 GL A-438
Model No.: SRW70 to 100 Model No.: KR15 to 65 Model No.: SKR33 to 46 Model No.: GL15/20
Lead: 1 to 25 Lead: 6 to 20 Lead: 5 to 40
High Torque Type Ball Spline

Belt Drive Type
GL A-438 LBS A-484 LBST A-484 LBF A-484
Model No.: GL15/20 Shaft diameter: φ 6 to 100 Shaft diameter: φ 20 to 150 Shaft diameter: φ 15 to 100
Medium Torque Type Ball Spline
LBR A-484 LBH A-484 LT A-490 LF A-490
Shaft diameter: φ 15 to 100 Shaft diameter: φ 15 to 50 Shaft diameter: φ 4 to 100 Shaft diameter: φ 6 to 50
iv
Rotary Ball Spline
LBG A-496 LBGT A-496 LTR A-500 LTR-A A-500
Spline Nut Linear Bushing
DPM A-514 DP A-514 LM A-524 LM-GA A-524
Model No.: DPM1220 to 5080 Model No.: DP12 to 50 Shaft diameter: φ 3 to 60 Shaft diameter: φ 6 to 120
LM-MG A-524 LM-L A-524 LME A-524 LMF A-524
LMF-M A-524 LMF-L A-524 LMF-ML A-524 LMK A-524
v
Linear Bushing
LMK-M A-524 LMK-L A-524 LMK-ML A-524 LMH A-524
Linear Bushing
LMH-L A-524 SC A-524 SL A-524 SH A-524
LM Stroke
LM Shaft End Support Standard LM Shafts
SH-L A-524 SK A-524 SF A-524 ST A-554
Miniature Stroke Die-setting Ball Cage
ST-B A-554 STI A-554 MST A-560 KS A-562
vi
Die-setting Ball Cage Precision Linear Pack Cross Roller Guide Ball Guide
With Ball Cage
BS A-562 ER A-566 VR A-572 VB A-572
Shaft diameter: φ 19 to 38 Model No.: ER513 to 1025 Model No.: VR1 to 18 Model No.: VB1 to 15
Cross Roller Table Linear Ball Slide
VRT A-586 VRT-A A-586 VRU A-586 LSP A-594
Model No.: VRT1025 to 3205 Model No.: VRT1025A to 3205A Model No.: VRU1025 to 91010 Model No.: LSP1340 to 25150
Unit Base LM Roller
LS A-594 LSC A-594 LSC A-594 LR A-604
Model No.: LS827 to 1077 Model No.: LSC1015 to 1550 Model No.: LSC1515B to 1550B Model No.: LR4095 to 50130
LR-Z A-604 LRA A-604 LRA-Z A-604 LRB A-604
Model No.: LR1547Z to 3275Z Model No.: LRA4095 to 50130 Model No.: LRA1547Z to 3275Z Model No.: LRB4095 to 50130
vii
LM Roller LM Roller (Options)
Fixture Model Fixture Model
LRB-Z A-604 LRU A-604 SM A-618 SMB A-618
Model No.: LRB1547Z to 3275Z Model No.: LRU22.2 to 76.2 Model No.: SM15 to 50 Model No.: SMB15 to 50
Flat Roller
Fixture Model Fixture Model Spring Pad
SE A-618 SEB A-618 PA A-617 FT A-622
Model No.: SE15 to 50 Model No.: SEB15 to 50 Model No.: PA15 to 50 Width: 10 to 60
Length: 32 to 500
Slide Pack Slide Rail
FTW A-622 FBW A-636 FBL A-646 E15/20 A-646
Width: 30 to 70 Rail length: 160 to 1800 Rail length: 200 to 2160 Rail length: 50 to 300
Length: 150 to 500
Precision, Caged Ball Screw

High Speed Ball Screw High Speed Ball Screw High Load Ball Screw
D20 A-646 SBN A-748 SBK A-748 HBN A-748
Rail length: 80 to 300 Shaft diameter: φ 32 to 50 Shaft diameter: φ 36 to 55 Shaft diameter: φ 32 to 63

viii
Standard-Stock Precision Ball Screw
BIF A-754 BNFN A-754 MDK A-754 MBF A-754
Lead: 5 to 12 Lead: 5 to 12 Lead: 1 to 5 Lead: 1 to 4
Precision Ball Screw

Standard Ball Screw assembly
BNF A-754 BNK A-760 BIF A-764 DIK A-764

BNFN A-764 DKN A-764 BLW A-764 BNF A-764
Lead: 4 to 20 Lead: 20 Lead: 10 to 50 Lead: 4 to 20
DK A-764 MDK A-764 BLK A-764 WGF A-764

ix
Precision Ball Screw Precision Rotary Ball Screw Precision Ball Screw/Spline
BNT A-764 DIR A-772 BLR A-772 BNS-A A-780

Rolled Ball Screw

Constant Pressure Preload
BNS A-780 NS-A A-780 NS A-780 JPF A-790

BTK A-790 MTF A-790 BLK A-790 WTF A-790

Rolled Rotary Ball Screw Lead Screw Nut
CNF A-790 BNT A-790 BLR A-796 DCM A-830

x
Lead Screw Nut Change Nut Cross-Roller Ring
Integrated Inner/Outer Ring Type
DC A-830 DCMA A-842 DCMB A-842 RU A-854
Shaft diameter: φ 12 to 50 Model No.: DCMA15T to 50 Model No.: DCMB8T to 50 Inner diameter: φ 20 to 350
Separable Outer Ring Type Two-piece Inner Ring

RB A-854 RE A-854 RB-USP A-854 RE-USP A-854
Inner diameter: φ 20 to 1250 Inner diameter: φ 20 to 600 Inner diameter: φ 100 to 600 Inner diameter: φ 100 to 600
Cam Follower
Separable Outer Ring Type Separable Outer Ring Type Popular Type With a Hexagon Socket
RA A-854 RA-C A-854 CF A-880 CF-A A-880
Inner diameter: φ 50 to 200 Inner diameter: φ 50 to 200 Stud diameter: φ 5 to 30 Stud diameter: φ 3 to 30
Roller Follower
Containing Thrust Balls Eccentric Cam Follower with Hexagon Socket With a Tapped Hole for Greasing Separable Type
CFN-R-A A-880 CFH-A A-880 CFT A-880 NAST A-896
Stud diameter: φ 5 to 12 Stud diameter: φ 6 to 30 Stud diameter: φ 6 to 30 Inner diameter: φ 6 to 50
xi
Roller Follower Spherical Plain Bearing
Separable Type Non-separable Type Double-split Outer Ring Single-split Outer Ring
RNAST A-896 NART A-896 SB A-910 SA1 A-910
Inner diameter: φ 7 to 60 Inner diameter: φ 5 to 50 Inner diameter: φ 12 to 65 Inner diameter: φ 12 to 70
Link Ball
AL A-922 BL A-922 RBL A-922 RBI A-922
Shank thread diameter: Shank thread diameter: Shank thread diameter: Shank thread diameter:
M4 to M10 M6 to M16 M5 to M22 M5 to M22
Rod End
Female Threading Type Die Cast, Low Price Type No Lubrication Type
TBS A-922 PHS A-942 RBH A-942 NHS-T A-942
Shank thread diameter: Spherical inner ring: φ 5 to 30 Spherical inner ring: φ 5 to 22 Spherical inner ring: φ 3 to 22
M6 to M12
Male Threading Type No Lubrication, Male Threading Type Standard Type Die Cast Type
POS A-942 NOS-T A-942 PB A-942 PBA A-942
Spherical inner ring: φ 5 to 30 Spherical inner ring: φ 3 to 22 Spherical inner ring: φ 5 to 30 Spherical inner ring: φ 5 to 22
xii
Rod End Accessories for Lubrication
No Lubrication Type No Lubrication Type Lubrication-free, Corrosion-resistant Type Grease Gun Unit
NB-T A-942 HB A-942 HS A-942 MG70 A-970
Spherical inner ring: φ 14 to 22 Spherical inner ring: φ 5 to 12 Spherical inner ring: φ 5 to 12 For a 70-g bellows cartridge
Accessories for Lubrication Accessories for Lubrication Original Grease Original Grease
Special Plumbing Fixtures A-970 Grease Nipple A-970 AFA A-959 AFB-LF A-960
Available in various types Available in various types Base oil: High-grade synthetic oil Base oil: Refined mineral oil
Consistency enhancer: Urea-based Consistency enhancer: Lithium-based
Original Grease Original Grease Original Grease Original Grease

AFC A-961 AFE-CA A-963 AFF A-965 AFG A-968
Base oil: High-grade synthetic oil Base oil: High-grade synthetic oil Base oil: High-grade synthetic oil Base oil: High-grade synthetic oil
Consistency enhancer: Urea-based Consistency enhancer: Urea-based Consistency enhancer: Lithium-based Consistency enhancer: Urea-based
P.000
xiii
THK Technical Support Site
The THK Technical Support Site lets you access product information and technical support
online. You will also find a search feature for locating desired products and a calculation feature
for calculating service life. 2D CAD and 3D CAD data are also downloadable.
Enter here.
Product Information
View information on our products.
Search by model number, description, or any other criteria.
Detailed Dimensional Drawings Detailed Specifications

Check detailed product dimensions according Check detailed product specifications according
to model number. to model number.
xiv
Available in 3 languages: Japanese,English,and German
Technical Information FAQ

View technical information, from application View inquiries relating to products.
examples to research papers. You can search by an entire inquiry or answer.
Technical Calculation 2D CAD Data Downloads

Rated life (service life time) can be calculated simply Approximately 4,000 downloadables of 2D CAD
by entering model number, application criteria, etc. data (DXF files) are available.
3D CAD Data Downloads Catalog Information

Find 3D CAD data matching your specifications, Order any of a variety of catalogs.
from rail lengths to installation of option items. You can also view in PDF format.
◆No user registration required to access Product Information or 2D CAD Data Downloads.
◆To access other services, (free) user registration is required.
◆Use of all services is free.
xv
Guide to the General Catalog
The THK General Catalog is in two volumes, A Technical Descriptions of the Products, and B Product Specifications.
A Technical Descriptions of the Products mainly contains product

■Features and Structure
■Point of Selection
■Point of Design
■Mounting Procedure and Maintenance
■Options
■Precautions on Use
■Point of Selection include test data and service life

calculation formulas for use when considering technical
features in detail. Further, information relating generally
to lubrication and grease-type products in special
environments can be found conveniently together in
Accessories for Lubrication
A Product Technical Descriptions
B Product Specifications contains dimensional drawings

and tables according to product and model number.
All information containing product dimensional elements
is given.
B Product Specifications
With two volumes, you can compare a page of product technical information with the
product's dimensional drawings and tables to aid when considering specifications.
We at THK are sure you will be pleased in finding products among our abundant selection
in the General Catalog that fit your needs.
xvi
General Table of Contents
General Catalog
Contents A-1
THK General Catalog
Flowchart for Selecting an LM Guide ....... A-46
General Description A-1 Selecting a Type....................................... A-48
Point of Selection ................................... A-2 • Types of LM Guides ............................... A-48
Selection Flow Chart ................................ A-2 Setting Conditions .................................... A-58
Types and Features of LM Systems......... A-3 • Conditions of the LM Guide .................... A-58
Load Rating .............................................. A-7 Calculating the Applied Load.................... A-74
• Service Life of an LM System ................. A-7 • Load rating of the LM Guide in all directions .. A-74
• Nominal Life .......................................... A-7 • Calculating an Applied Load ................... A-75
• Basic Load Rating.................................. A-7 Calculating the Equivalent Load ............... A-94
Basic Dynamic Load Rating C .............. A-7 Calculating the Static Safety Factor ......... A-95
Basic Static Load Rating C0 .................. A-8 Calculating the Average Load .................. A-96
Static Permissible Moment M0 .............. A-8 • Example of Calculating the Average Load (1)
Static Safety Factor fS .......................... A-9 - with Horizontal Mount and Acceleration
Life Calculation Formula........................... A-10 /Deceleration Considered ..................... A-98
Rigidity...................................................... A-13 • Example of Calculating the Average Load (2)
• Selecting a Clearance/Preload for an LM System ... A-13 - When the Rails are Movable ................. A-99
Clearance and Preload ......................... A-13 Calculating the Nominal Life..................... A-100
Preload and Rigidity ............................ A-14 • Nominal Life Equation for an LM Guide Using Balls .. A-100
Friction coefficient .................................... A-15 • Rated Life Equation for an LM Guide Using Rollers... A-100
Accuracy................................................... A-16 • Example of Calculating the Nominal Life (1)
Lubrication................................................ A-16 - with Horizontal Mount
Safety Design ........................................... A-18 and High-speed Acceleration ............... A-103
• Determining a Material ........................... A-19 • Example of Calculating the Nominal Life (2)
Stainless steel LM Systems .................. A-19 - with Vertical Mount.............................. A-108
• Surface Treatment ................................. A-20 Predicting the Rigidity............................... A-111
AP-HC ................................................. A-20 • Selecting a Radial Clearance (Preload) .... A-111
AP-C ................................................... A-20 • Service Life with a Preload Considered ... A-112
AP-CF ................................................. A-20 • Rigidity.................................................. A-112
• Contamination Protection....................... A-23 • Radial Clearance Standard for Each Model .... A-113
Determining the Accuracy ........................ A-116
• Accuracy Standards ............................... A-116
LM Guide A-25 • Guidelines for Accuracy Grades by Machine Type .. A-117
Features and Types................................ A-28 • Accuracy Standard for Each Model ......... A-118
Features of the LM Guide......................... A-28
• Large permissible load and high rigidity . A-29 Feature of Each Model ........................... A-129
• High Precision of Motion ........................ A-31 Structure and Features
• Accuracy Averaging Effect of the Caged Ball LM Guide.................. A-130
by Absorbing Mounting Surface Error .... A-34 • Advantages of the Ball Cage Technology ... A-131
• Easy Maintenance .................................. A-36
• Improved productivity of the machine ..... A-36 Caged Ball LM Guides.............................. A-136
• Substantial Energy Savings.................... A-37 • Model SHS ............................................. A-136
• Low Total Cost ...................................... A-38 • Model SSR ............................................. A-142
• Ideal Four Raceway, Circular-Arc Groove, • Model SNR/SNS ..................................... A-148
Two-Point Contact Structure .................. A-39 • Model SHW ............................................ A-156
• Superb Error-Absorbing Capability • Model SRS ............................................. A-160
with the DF Design ................................
A-43 • Model SCR ............................................ A-166
Classification Table of the LM Guides ...... A-44
LM Guide .................................................. A-170
Point of Selection ................................... A-46 • Model HSR ............................................ A-170
Contents A-2
• Model SR ............................................... A-178 • Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS ............ A-353
• Model NR/NRS ........................................ A-186 • Light-Resistance Contact Seal LiCS ........ A-355
• Model HRW ............................................ A-194 • Dedicated bellows .................................. A-356
• Models RSR/RSR-W ................................ A-200 • Dedicated LM Cover................................ A-356

• Model RSR-Z .......................................... A-208 • Cap C ..................................................... A-357
• Model RSH ............................................. A-214 • Plate Cover SV -- Steel Tape SP ................. A-358
• Model RSH-Z .......................................... A-218
• Model HR ............................................... A-224 Lubrication................................................. A-361
• Model GSR ............................................. A-230 • QZ Lubricator ......................................... A-361
• Model GSR-R .......................................... A-236 • Lubrication Adapter ................................ A-364
• Model CSR ............................................. A-244 • Removing/mounting Jig .......................... A-365
• Model MX ............................................... A-248 • End Piece EP .......................................... A-366
• Model JR ................................................ A-252
• Model HCR ............................................. A-258 List of Parts Symbols................................. A-368
• Model HMG ............................................ A-262
• Model NSR-TBC...................................... A-268 Table of Supported Options by Models ..... A-370
• Model HSR-M1 ........................................ A-272
• Model SR-M1 .......................................... A-280 Dimensions of Each Model with an Option Attached
• Model RSR-M1 ........................................ A-286 • Seal resistance value .............................. A-372
• Model HSR-M2 ........................................ A-292 • Resistance of LaCS ................................ A-375
• Maximum Seal Resistance of LiCS........... A-376
Structure and Features • Greasing Hole ........................................ A-377
of the Caged Roller LM Guide ............... A-296
• Advantages of the Caged Roller Technology .. A-297 Precautions on Use................................. A-381
Precautions on Using the LM Guide.......... A-381
Caged Roller LM Guide............................. A-300 Precautions on Using Options for the LM Guide .. A-382
• Model SRG ............................................. A-300 • QZ Lubricator ......................................... A-382
• Model SRN ............................................. A-306 • Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS, Side Scraper .. A-382
• Model SRW ............................................ A-312 • Light sliding resistance contact seal LiCS ... A-383
Point of Design........................................ A-318

Designing the Guide System..................... A-318
LM Guide Actuator A-385
• Examples of Arrangements of the Guide System .... A-318 Model KR.................................................. A-386
• Method for Securing an LM Guide Structure and features............................... A-386
to Meet the Conditions ........................... A-322 Types and Features .................................. A-390
Designing a Mounting Surface .................. A-324 Load Ratings in All Directions
• Designing a Mounting Surface ................ A-324 and Static Permissible Moment ............. A-391
• Shoulder Height of the Mounting Base Maximum Travel Speed and the Maximum Length... A-396
and the Corner Radius ........................... A-326 Lubrication................................................. A-398
• Permissible Error of the Mounting Surface .. A-333 Service Life................................................ A-399
• Marking on the Master LM Guide Static Safety Factor ................................... A-402
and Combined Use ................................ A-338 Example of Calculating the Nominal Life... A-403
Accuracy Standards .................................. A-412
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance ... A-340
Mounting the LM Guide............................. A-340 Model SKR ............................................... A-416
• Mounting Procedure ............................... A-340 Structure and features............................... A-416
• Methods for Measuring Accuracy after Installation .. A-350 Caged Ball/Roller Technology................... A-419
• Recommended Tightening Torque for LM Rails .. A-350 Types and Features .................................. A-421
Load Ratings in All Directions
Options..................................................... A-351 and Permissible Moment ....................... A-422
Contamination Protection.......................... A-352 Lubrication................................................. A-425
• Seal and Metal Scraper ........................... A-352 Service Life................................................ A-426
Contents A-3
Accuracy Standards ................................. A-428 Determining the Accuracy ........................ A-482
• Accuracy grade ..................................... A-482
Options.................................................... A-430 • Accuracy Standards ............................... A-482
Cover ........................................................ A-431
Bellows ..................................................... A-432 High Torque Type Ball Spline
Sensor ...................................................... A-433 Model LBS, LBST, LBF, LBR and LBH........ A-484
Motor Bracket ........................................... A-434 • Structure and features............................ A-484
• Applications .......................................... A-485
Precautions on Use................................ A-436 • Types and Features................................ A-486
Precautions on Using Models KR/SKR .... A-436 • Service Life ........................................... A-489
• Clearance in the Rotation Direction ......... A-489
LM Actuator A-437 • Housing Inner-diameter Tolerance .......... A-489
Model GL • Spline shaft ........................................... A-489
Structure and features .............................. A-438 • Accessories........................................... A-489
• Feature of the LM Actuator Model GL ........... A-438
Structure and features ......................... A-438 Medium Torque Type Ball Spline
• Types of the LM Actuator Model GL ............. A-440 Models LT and LF ................................... A-490
Types and Features ............................. A-440 • Structure and features............................ A-490
• Types and Features................................ A-492
Point of Selection ..................................... A-442 • Service Life ........................................... A-494
• Load Rating ........................................... A-442 • Clearance in the Rotation Direction ......... A-494
• Maximum Travel Speed .......................... A-443 • Accuracy Standards ............................... A-494
• Accuracy Standards............................... A-443 • Housing Inner-diameter Tolerance .......... A-494
• Spline shaft ........................................... A-494
Options ..................................................... A-444 • Accessories........................................... A-494
• Cover .................................................... A-444
• Bellows ................................................. A-445 Rotary Ball Spline With Geared type
• Endplate ................................................ A-445 Models LBG and LBGT .......................... A-496
• Sensor .................................................. A-445 • Structure and features............................ A-496
• Plate Nut for Mounting the Base ............. A-445 • Types and Features................................ A-498
• Service Life ........................................... A-499
Precautions on Use .................................. A-446 • Clearance in the Rotation Direction ......... A-499
• Housing Inner-diameter Tolerance .......... A-499
Ball Spline A-447 • Spline shaft ........................................... A-499
Features and Types................................ A-450
Features of the Ball Spline ....................... A-450 Rotary Ball Spline With Support Bearing type
• Structure and features ........................... A-450 Model LTR,and LTR-A ............................ A-500
Classification of Ball Splines .................... A-452 • Structure and features............................ A-500
• Types and Features................................ A-502
Point of Selection ................................... A-454 • Service Life ........................................... A-503
Flowchart for Selecting a Ball Spline........... A-454 • Clearance in the Rotation Direction ......... A-503
• Steps for Selecting a Ball Spline ............. A-454 • Accuracy Standards ............................... A-503
• Selecting a Type .................................... A-456 • Housing Inner-diameter Tolerance .......... A-503
• Studying the Spline Shaft Strength ......... A-458 • Spline shaft ........................................... A-503
• Predicting the Service Life ..................... A-465
Selecting a Preload .................................. A-479 Point of Design ....................................... A-504
• Clearance in the Rotation Direction......... A-479 Checking List for Spline Shaft End Shape.......... A-504
• Preload and Rigidity............................... A-479 Housing Inner-diameter Tolerance ........... A-505
• Conditions and Guidelines Positions of the Spline-nut Keyway
for Selecting of a Preload ...................... A-480 and Mounting Holes .............................. A-505
Contents A-4
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance .... A-506 Point of Selection .................................... A-536
Assembling the Ball Spline........................ A-506 Flowchart for Selecting a Linear Bushing ........ A-536
• Mounting the Spline ................................ A-506 • Steps for Selecting a Linear Bushing ....... A-536
• Installing the Spline Nut .......................... A-508 Rated Load and Nominal Life.................... A-537

• Installation of the Spline Shaft ................. A-508 Table of Equivalent Factors....................... A-540
Options..................................................... A-509
Lubrication................................................. A-509 Point of Design ........................................ A-542
Material, surface treatment ....................... A-509 Assembling the Linear Bushing................. A-542
Contamination Protection.......................... A-509
• Specifications of the Bellows .................. A-510 Options..................................................... A-549
Lubrication................................................. A-549
Precautions on Use................................. A-511
• Handling ................................................ A-511 Material, surface treatment........................ A-549
• Lubrication............................................. A-511 Contamination Protection .......................... A-550
• Precautions on Use ................................ A-511 • Felt Seal Model FLM................................ A-550
• Storage .................................................. A-512
• Other ..................................................... A-512 Precautions on Use................................. A-551
Spline Nut A-513 LM Stroke A-553

Features ................................................... A-514 LM Stroke Models ST, ST-B, STI ............ A-554
Features of the Spline Nut ........................ A-514 Structure and features............................... A-554
• Structure and features ............................ A-514 Types and Features .................................. A-555
• Features of the Special Rolled Shafts ...... A-515 Rated Load and Nominal Life.................... A-556
• High Strength Zinc Alloy ......................... A-515 Accuracy Standards .................................. A-558
• Clearance in the Rotation Direction ......... A-516 Fit .............................................................. A-559
ST shaft ..................................................... A-559
Point of Selection.................................... A-517 Installation of the ST Shaft ........................ A-559
Selecting a Spline Nut............................... A-517
Miniature Stroke Model MST .................. A-560
Point of Design........................................ A-520 Structure and features............................... A-560
Fit .............................................................. A-520 Fit .............................................................. A-561
Travel Distance of the Ball Cage............... A-561
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance .... A-521
Installation ................................................. A-521 Die-setting Ball Cage Models KS and BS . A-562
Lubrication................................................. A-521 Structure and features............................... A-562
Rated Load and Service Life ..................... A-562
Fit .............................................................. A-563
Linear Bushing A-523 Installation of the Ball Cage....................... A-563
Features and Types ................................ A-524
Features of the Linear Bushing ................. A-524 Precautions on Use................................. A-564
• Structure and features ............................ A-524
• Dedicated Shafts for Model LM ................ A-526
• Standard LM Shafts ................................ A-526
Precision Linear Pack A-565
• Specially Machined Types ....................... A-526 Features ................................................... A-566
• Table of Rows of Balls and Masses Features of the Precision Linear Pack ...... A-566
for Clearance-adjustable Types • Structure and features ............................ A-566
and Open Types of the Linear Bushing ... A-527 Rated Load and Nominal Life.................... A-567
Types of the Linear Bushing ..................... A-528 Accuracy Standards .................................. A-569
• Types and Features ................................ A-528 Radial Clearance....................................... A-569
Classification Table ................................... A-534
Contents A-5
Precautions on Use................................ A-570
LM Roller A-603
Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide A-571 Features of the LM Roller ......................... A-604
Features and Types................................ A-572 • Structure and features............................ A-604
Features of the Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide ....... A-572 Types of the LM Roller ............................. A-606
• Structure and features ........................... A-572 • Types and Features................................ A-606
Types of the Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide.... A-574
• Types and Features ............................... A-574 Point of Selection ................................... A-608
Nominal Life.............................................. A-608
Point of Selection ................................... A-575 Accuracy Standards ................................. A-611
Rated Load and Nominal Life ................... A-575
Accuracy Standards ................................. A-578 Point of Design ....................................... A-612
Raceway................................................... A-612
Point of Design ....................................... A-579 Installing the LM Roller ............................. A-613
Installation procedure ............................... A-579 Guidance for Adjusting the Clearance...... A-614
Example of Clearance Adjustment ........... A-580 Examples of Arranging LM Roller Units.... A-615
Preload ..................................................... A-580 Examples of Installing the LM Roller ........ A-616
Accuracy of the Mounting Surface ........... A-580
Options .................................................... A-617
Options.................................................... A-581 Spring Pad Model PA ............................... A-617
Dedicated Mounting Bolt .......................... A-581 Fixture Models SM/SMB and SE/SEB...... A-618
Precautions on Use................................ A-582 Precautions on Use ................................ A-619
Cross Roller Table A-585 Flat Roller A-621

Features and Types................................ A-586 Features and Types................................ A-622
Features of the Cross Roller Table .......... A-586 Features of the Flat Roller ........................ A-622
• Structure and features ........................... A-586 • Structure and features............................ A-622
Types of the Flat Roller ............................ A-624
Point of Selection ................................... A-588 • Types and Features................................ A-624
Accuracy Standards ................................. A-590 Point of Selection ................................... A-625
Precautions on Use................................ A-591 Accuracy Standards ................................. A-628
Point of Design ....................................... A-629

Linear Ball Slide A-593 Raceway................................................... A-629
Features and Types................................ A-594 Installing the Flat Roller ............................ A-630
Features of the Linear Ball Slide .............. A-594
• Structure and features ........................... A-594 Precautions on Use ................................ A-632
Types of the Linear Ball Slide................... A-596
• Types and Features ............................... A-596 Slide Pack A-635
Point of Selection ................................... A-599 Features and Types................................ A-636
Rated Load and Nominal Life ................... A-599 Features of Slide Pack ............................. A-636
Accuracy Standards ................................. A-601 • Structure and features............................ A-636
Types of the Slide Pack............................ A-638
Precautions on Use................................ A-602 • Type ...................................................... A-638
• Clearance .............................................. A-639
Options .................................................... A-640
Contents A-6
Contamination Protection.......................... A-640 • Standard Combinations of Shaft Diameter
Jointed Slide Rails..................................... A-640 and Lead for the Rolled Ball Screw .............. A-693
• Permissible Axial Load ........................... A-694
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance .... A-641 • Permissible Rotational Speed.................. A-696

Installation ................................................. A-641 Selecting a Nut .......................................... A-699
Lubrication................................................. A-642 • Types of Nuts ......................................... A-699
Selecting a Model Number ........................ A-702
Precautions on Use................................. A-643 • Calculating the Axial Load ...................... A-702
• Static Safety Factor ................................ A-703
• Studying the Service Life ........................ A-704
Slide Rail A-645 Studying the Rigidity.................................. A-707
Features and Types • Axial Rigidity of the Feed Screw System .. A-707
Features of the Slide Rail.......................... A-646 Studying the positioning accuracy............. A-711
• Structure and features ............................ A-646 • Causes of Error in Positioning Accuracy.. A-711
Types of the Slide Rail .............................. A-647 • Studying the Lead Angle Accuracy .......... A-711
• Types and Features ................................ A-647 • Studying the Axial Clearance .................. A-711
Single Slides for Light Load .................. A-647 • Studying the Axial Clearance
Single Slides for Medium Load .............. A-650 of the Feed Screw System ...................... A-713
Double Slides for Light Load ................. A-650 • Studying the Thermal Displacement
Double Slides for Medium Load............. A-651 through Heat Generation ........................ A-715
Double Slides for Heavy Load ............... A-653 • Studying the orientation change during traveling .... A-716
Linear Type Slides ................................ A-654 Studying the rotational torque ................... A-717
Aluminum Alloy Slide Rail..................... A-655 • Friction Torque Due to an External Load .. A-717
Classification Table for Slide Rails............ A-656 • Torque Due to a Preload on the Ball Screw ..... A-718
• Torque required for acceleration ............. A-718
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance .... A-658 Studying the Driving Motor ........................ A-719
Mounting the Slide Rail ............................. A-658 • When Using a Servomotor ...................... A-719
• When Using a Stepping Motor (Pulse Motor) ... A-721
Precautions on Use................................. A-659 Examples of Selecting a Ball Screw.......... A-722
• High-speed Transfer Equipment (Horizontal Use) .... A-722
• Vertical Conveyance System ................... A-736
Ball Screw A-661
Features and Types ................................ A-664 Accuracy of Each Model......................... A-747
Features of the Ball Screw ........................ A-664 Precision, Caged Ball Screw
• Driving Torque One Third of the Sliding Screw ... A-664 Models SBN, SBK and HBN .................. A-748
• Ensuring High Accuracy ......................... A-667 • Structure and features ............................ A-749
• Capable of Micro Feeding ....................... A-668 • Ball Cage Effect ...................................... A-749
• High Rigidity without Backlash................ A-669 • Types and Features ................................ A-752
• Capable of Fast Feed .............................. A-670 • Service Life ............................................ A-704
Types of Ball Screws................................. A-672 • Axial clearance ....................................... A-685
Point of Selection.................................... A-674
Flowchart for Selecting a Ball Screw......... A-674 Standard-Stock Precision Ball Screw
Accuracy of the Ball Screw ....................... A-677 Unfinished Shaft Ends
• Lead angle accuracy ............................... A-677 Models BIF, BNFN, MDK, MBF and BNF ...... A-754
• Accuracy of the Mounting Surface ........... A-680 • Structure and features ............................ A-755
• Axial clearance ....................................... A-685 • Types and Features ................................ A-756
• Preload .................................................. A-686 • Service Life ............................................ A-704
Selecting a Screw Shaft ............................ A-690 • Nut Types and Axial Clearance ................ A-758
• Maximum Length of the Screw Shaft........ A-690
• Standard Combinations of Shaft Diameter Standard-Stock Precision Ball Screw
and Lead for the Precision Ball Screw .......... A-692 Finished Shaft Ends Model BNK ........... A-760
Contents A-7
• Features ................................................ A-761 Ball Screw Peripherals........................... A-801
• Types and Features ............................... A-761 Support Unit Models EK, BK, FK, EF, BF and FF.... A-802
• Table of Ball Screw Types • Structure and features............................ A-802
with Finished Shaft Ends • Type ...................................................... A-804
and the Corresponding Support Units • Types of Support Units and Applicable
and Nut Brackets .................................. A-762 Screw Shaft Outer Diameters ................. A-805
• Model Numbers of Bearings
Precision Ball Screw and Characteristic Values ...................... A-806
Models BIF, DIK, BNFN, DKN,BLW, • Example of Installation ........................... A-807
BNF, DK, MDK, BLK/WGF and BNT .... A-764 • Mounting Procedure .............................. A-808
• Structure and features ........................... A-765 • Types of Recommended Shapes
• Types and Features ............................... A-769 of the Shaft Ends .................................. A-810
• Service Life ........................................... A-704 Nut Bracket Model MC ............................. A-812
• Axial clearance ...................................... A-685 • Structure and features............................ A-812
• Accuracy Standards............................... A-678 • Type ...................................................... A-812
Lock Nut Model RN .................................. A-813
Precision Rotary Ball Screw Models DIR and BLR .. A-772 • Structure and features............................ A-813
• Structure and features ........................... A-773 • Type ...................................................... A-813
• Type ...................................................... A-775
• Service Life ........................................... A-704 Options .................................................... A-815
• Axial clearance ...................................... A-685 Lubrication ................................................ A-816
• Accuracy Standards............................... A-776 Corrosion Prevention (Surface Treatment, etc.) .. A-816
• Example of Assembly ............................ A-778 Contamination Protection ......................... A-816
• QZ Lubricator ........................................ A-817
Precision Ball Screw / Spline • Wiper Ring W ......................................... A-819
Models BNS-A, BNS, NS-A and NS ..... A-780 • Specifications of the Bellows.................. A-822
• Structure and features ........................... A-781
• Type ...................................................... A-782 Mounting Procedure and Maintenance.... A-824
• Service Life ........................................... A-704 Method for Mounting the Ball Screw Shaft... A-824
• Axial clearance ...................................... A-685 Maintenance Method ................................ A-826
• Accuracy Standards............................... A-783 • Amount of Lubricant .............................. A-826
• Action Patterns ...................................... A-784
• Example of Assembly ............................ A-787 Precautions on Use ................................ A-827
• Example of Using................................... A-788
• Precautions on Use ................................ A-789 Lead Screw Nut A-829
Rolled Ball Screw Models JPF, BTK, Features................................................... A-830
MTF, BLK/WTF, CNF and BNT ............ A-790 Features of the Lead Screw Nut............... A-830
• Structure and features ........................... A-791 • Structure and features............................ A-830
• Types and Features ............................... A-792 • Features of the Special Rolled Shafts ...... A-831
• Service Life ........................................... A-704 • High Strength Zinc Alloy ........................ A-831
• Axial clearance ...................................... A-685
• Accuracy Standards............................... A-678 Point of Selection ................................... A-833
Selecting a Lead Screw Nut ..................... A-833
Rolled Rotary Ball Screw Model BLR ....... A-796 Efficiency and Thrust ................................ A-836
• Structure and features ........................... A-797 Accuracy Standards ................................. A-837
• Type ...................................................... A-797
• Service Life ........................................... A-704 Point of Design ....................................... A-838
• Axial clearance ...................................... A-685 Fit.............................................................. A-838
• Accuracy Standards............................... A-798
• Example of Assembly ............................ A-799 Mounting Procedure and Maintenance.... A-839
Installation ................................................ A-839
Contents A-8
Lubrication................................................. A-840
Cam Follower A-879
Features and Types................................. A-880
Change Nut A-841 Features of the Cam Follower ................... A-880

Features ................................................... A-842 • Structure and features ............................ A-880
Features of the Change Nut...................... A-842 • Cam Follower with a Hexagon Socket ...... A-881
• Structure and features ............................ A-842 • Cam Follower Containing Thrust Balls ..... A-881
• Features of the Special Rolled Shafts ...... A-843 Types of the Cam Follower ....................... A-882
• High Strength Zinc Alloy ......................... A-843 • Types and Features ................................ A-882
• Types and Model Numbers of Cam Followers ..... A-883
Point of Selection.................................... A-845 Classification Table ................................... A-884
Selecting a Change Nut ............................ A-845
Efficiency, Thrust and Torque ................... A-849 Point of Selection .................................... A-885
Accuracy Standards .................................. A-849 Nominal Life .............................................. A-885
Point of Design........................................ A-850 Track load capacity ................................... A-887
Fit .............................................................. A-850 Radial Clearance....................................... A-887
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance .... A-851 Point of Design ........................................ A-888
Installation ................................................. A-851 Fit .............................................................. A-888
Lubrication................................................. A-852 Installation ................................................. A-888
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance..... A-889

Cross-Roller Ring A-853 Installation ................................................. A-889
Features and Types ................................ A-854 Contamination Protection and Lubrication.... A-891
Features of the Cross-Roller Ring............. A-854
• Structure and features ............................ A-854 Accessories ............................................. A-892
Types of the Cross-Roller Ring ................. A-857 Accessories for the Cam Follower............. A-892
• Types and Features ................................ A-857
Precautions on Use................................. A-893
Point of Selection.................................... A-859
Selecting a Cross-Roller Ring ................... A-859
Nominal Life .............................................. A-860
Roller Follower A-895
Static Safety Factor................................... A-862 Features and Types................................. A-896
Static Permissible Moment........................ A-864 Features of the Roller Follower ................. A-896
Static Permissible Axial Load.................... A-864 • Structure and features ............................ A-896
Accuracy Standards .................................. A-865 Types of the Roller Follower...................... A-898
• Accuracy Standard of the USP-Grade Series .. A-869 • Types and Features ................................ A-898
Radial Clearance....................................... A-870 Types of the Roller Follower...................... A-900
Moment Rigidity ........................................ A-871
Point of Selection .................................... A-901
Point of Design........................................ A-873 Types and Model Numbers of the Roller Follower . A-901
Fit .............................................................. A-873 Nominal Life .............................................. A-902
Designing the Housing and the Presser Flange... A-874 Accuracy Standards .................................. A-903
Track load capacity ................................... A-904
Mounting Procedure ............................... A-876 Radial Clearance....................................... A-904
Procedure for Assembly............................ A-876
Point of Design ........................................ A-905
Precautions on Use................................. A-877 Fit .............................................................. A-905
Mounting Section....................................... A-905
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance..... A-906
Contents A-9
Installation ................................................ A-906 Precautions on Use ................................ A-939
Contamination Protection and Lubrication... A-906

Rod End A-941
Features of the Rod End .......................... A-942
Spherical Plain Bearing A-909 • Features ................................................ A-942
Features and Types................................ A-910 • Special Bearing Alloy ............................. A-942
Features of the Spherical Plain Bearing... A-910 Performance Test with the Rod End......... A-944
• Structure and features ........................... A-910 Types of the Rod End............................... A-945
Types of the Spherical Plain Bearing ....... A-910 • Types and Features................................ A-945
• Types and Features ............................... A-910
Point of Selection ................................... A-948
Point of Selection ................................... A-911 Selecting a Rod End................................. A-948
Selecting a Spherical Plain Bearing ......... A-911
Accuracy Standards ................................. A-914 Point of Design ....................................... A-949
Radial Clearance ...................................... A-914 Permissible tilt angles............................... A-949
Point of Design ....................................... A-916
Fit ............................................................. A-916 Installation............................................... A-950
Permissible tilt angles............................... A-917 Installation ................................................ A-950
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance.... A-918 Precautions on Use ................................ A-951

Installation ................................................ A-918
Lubrication................................................ A-918
Contamination Protection .........................
Accessories for Lubrication A-953
A-919
Lubrication .............................................. A-954
Precautions on Use................................ A-920 Types of Lubricants .................................. A-954
• Grease Lubrication ................................ A-955
• Oil Lubrication ....................................... A-955
Link Ball A-921 Lubrication under Special Environments .. A-956
Features and Types................................ A-922 Lubrication Methods ................................. A-957
Features of the Link Ball........................... A-922 • Manual Lubrication ................................ A-957
• Structure and features ........................... A-922 • Forced Lubrication Method..................... A-957
• Alloy ..................................................... A-925 Lubrication Accessory Series for LM Systems .... A-958
• How Load Directions Are Called ............. A-927 • THK Original Grease .............................. A-958
• Pushing Load and Pulling Load .............. A-927 • AFA Grease ........................................... A-959
Performance Tests with the Link Ball ....... A-928 • AFB-LF Grease ...................................... A-960
• Tensile Strength Test with Model AL10D .... A-928 • AFC Grease ........................................... A-961
• Durability Tests with Link Ball Model AL .... A-930 • AFE-CA Grease ...................................... A-963
• Durability Tests with Link Ball Model BL .... A-932 • AFF Grease ........................................... A-965
Types of the Link Ball ............................... A-934 • AFG Grease ........................................... A-968
• Types and Features ............................... A-934 • Grease Gun Unit MG70 ........................... A-970
• Special Plumbing Fixtures ...................... A-970
Point of Selection ................................... A-936 • Grease nipple ........................................ A-970
Selecting a Link Ball ................................. A-936
Point of Design ....................................... A-937

Appendix A-971
Permissible tilt angles............................... A-937 Appendix Tables ........................................... A-972
Installation .............................................. A-938

Example of Installation ............................. A-938
Contents A-10
General Description
General Catalog
A Technical Descriptions of the Products
Point of Selection............................ A-2

Selection Flow Chart ......................... A-2
Types and Features of LM Systems . A-3
Load Rating....................................... A-7
• Service Life of an LM System ............... A-7
• Nominal Life.......................................... A-7
• Basic Load Rating................................. A-7
Basic Dynamic Load Rating C............ A-7
Basic Static Load Rating C0................ A-8
Static Permissible Moment M0 ............ A-8
Static Safety Factor fS ......................... A-9
Life Calculation Formula ................... A-10
Rigidity .............................................. A-13
• Selecting a Clearance/Preload for an LM System A-13
Clearance and Preload....................... A-13
Preload and Rigidity ........................... A-14
Friction coefficient ............................. A-15
Accuracy ........................................... A-16
Lubrication......................................... A-16
Safety Design.................................... A-18
• Determining a Material.......................... A-19
Stainless steel LM Systems ............... A-19
• Surface Treatment ................................ A-20
AP-HC ................................................ A-20
AP-C................................................... A-20
AP-CF................................................. A-20
• Contamination Protection ..................... A-23
A-1
Point of Selection General Description
Selection Flow Chart

1. Setting Conditions
Dimensions of machines and systems Speed
Space in the guide section Operating frequency (duty cycle)
Installation direction Required service life
(horizontal, vertical, slant mount, wall mount, suspended) Kinetic frequency
Magnitude and direction of the working load Environment
Stroke length
2. Selecting a Type Selecting a Drive Method

Feed screw
(ball screw, trapezoidal threads)
Select a type that meets the conditions Cylinder
LM Guide LM Stroke Belt Wire Chain
Rack and Pinion Linear motor
Miniature Guide Cross Roller Guide
Slide Pack Linear Stage
Ball Spline Roller Type
Linear Bushing etc.
3. Predicting 4. Rigidity 5. Accuracy

the Service Life
Selecting a size Selecting a clearance Selecting an accuracy
Selecting a number of blocks/nuts Selecting a preload grade
Determining a number of rails/shafts Determining a fixing method (feeding accuracy,
Determining the rigidity of the runout accuracy)
mounting section Accuracy of
the mounting surface
6. Lubrication and Safety Design

Determining a lubricant (grease, oil, special lubricant)
Determining a lubrication method (regular lubrication, forced lubrication)
Determining a material (standard material, stainless steel, high temperature material）
Determining a surface treatment (anti-rust, appearance)
Designing contamination protection (bellows, telescopic cover)
7. Calculating the Thrust Force

Obtaining the thrust force required for linear motion
Selection Completed
A-2
Point of Selection
Types and Features of LM Systems
Type LM Guide Ball Spline Linear Bushing
General Description
Appearance
• Ideal Four Raceway, Circu- • Large torque load capacity • Interchangeable type
lar-Arc Groove, Two-Point • Optimal for torque-transmitting • LM system capable of per-
Contact Structure mechanisms and locations forming infinite linear motion
• Superb error-absorbing capa- where torque and radial load at low price
bility with the DF design are simultaneously applied
• Accuracy Averaging Effect • No angular backlash
by Absorbing Mounting Sur- • Ball Retaining Type
Features face Error
• Large Permissible Load and
High Rigidity
• Low Friction Coefficient
Stroke Infinite stroke Infinite stroke Infinite stroke

• Surface grinder • Z axis of assembly robot • Measuring instruments
• Electric discharge machine • Automatic loader • Digital 3D measuring instru-
• High-speed transfer equip- • Transfer machine ment
ment • Automatic conveyance sys- • Printing machine
• NC lathe tem • OA equipment
• Injection molding machine • Wire winder • Automatic vending machine
• Woodworking machine • Spindle drive shaft of grind- • Medical equipment
Major
• Semiconductor manufacturing machine • Food packaging machine
Applications ing equipment • Steering of construction vehi-
• Inspection equipment cle
• Food-related machine • Blood test equipment
• Medical equipment • ATC
• Golf training machine
Page
introducing A-25 onward A-447 onward A-523 onward
the product
A-3
Type LM Stroke Precision Linear Pack Cross Roller Guide
Appearance
• Capable of performing rotary • Ultra-thin lightweight type • Long service life, high rigid-
motion, straight motion and • Reduced design and assem- ity
complex motion bly costs • Easy clearance adjustment
• Capable of performing roll- type
ing motion with an extremely
small friction coefficient
• Low cost
Features
Stroke Finite stroke Infinite stroke Finite stroke

• Press die setting • Magnetic disc device • Measuring instruments
• Ink roll unit of printing machine • Electronic equipment • Insertion machine
• Optical measuring instrument • Semiconductor manufactur- • Printed circuit board drilling
• Spindle ing equipment machine
• Solenoid valve guide • Medical equipment • Inspection equipment
• Press post guide • Measuring equipment • Small stage
• Load cell • Plotting machine • Handling mechanism
Major
• Photocopiers • Photocopier • Automatic lathe
Applications • Inspection machines • Tool grinder
• Internal grinding machine
• Small surface grinding machine
Page
the product
A-4
Point of Selection
Type Cross Roller Table Linear Ball Slide LM Roller
General Description
Appearance
• Easily installable unit type • Easily installable unit type • Compact, large load capac-
• Allows selection of diverse • Lightweight and Compact ity type
uses • Capable of performing roll- • Self skewing-adjusting type
ing motion with an extremely
small friction coefficient
• Capable of operating with-
out lubrication
Features • Low cost
Stroke Finite stroke Finite stroke Infinite stroke

• Measuring equipment stage • Small electronic part assem- • Precision press ram guide
• Optical stage bly machine • Press metal mold exchanger
• Tool grinder • Handler • Heavy load conveyor sys-
• Printed circuit board drilling • Automatic recorder tems
machine • Measuring equipment stage • Vendor machine
• Medical equipment • Optical stage
• Automatic lathe • Medical equipment
Major
• Tool grinder
Applications • Internal grinding machine
• Small surface grinding machine
Page
the product
A-5
Type Flat Roller Slide Pack Slide Rail
Appearance
• Large Load Capacity • Interchangeable type • Thin, compact design

• Combined accuracy of 90° • Low-cost, simple type • Low-cost, simple type
V-shape surface and flat • High strength, high durabil-
surface available as stan- ity
dard
Features
Stroke Finite stroke Infinite stroke Finite stroke

• Planer • Amusement machine • Amusement machine
• Horizontal milling machine • High-grade furniture • High-grade furniture
• Roll grinding machine • Light and heavy doors • Light and heavy doors
• Surface grinder • Tool cabinet • Office equipment
• Cylindrical grinder • Kitchen fitments • Store fixture
• Optical measuring instru- • Automatic feeder • Stocker
ment • Computer peripherals
Major
• Photocopier
Applications • Medical equipment
• Office equipment
Page
the product
A-6
Point of Selection
Load Rating
Load Rating
Service Life of an LM System
When an LM system rolls under a load, its raceway and rolling elements (balls or rollers) constantly
General Description
receive repetitive stress. If a limit is reached, the raceway fractures from fatigue and part of the sur-
face exfoliates like scales. This phenomenon is called flaking.
The service life of an LM system refers to the total travel distance until the first event of flaking occurs
due to rolling fatigue of the material on the raceway or the rolling element.
Nominal Life
The service life of an LM system is subject to slight variations even under the same operating condi-
tions. Therefore, it is necessary to use the nominal life defined below as a reference value for obtain-
ing the service life of the LM system.
The nominal life means the total travel distance that 90% of a group of identical LM system units can
achieve without flaking.
Basic Load Rating

An LM system has two types of basic load ratings: basic dynamic load rating (C), which is used to
calculate the service life, and basic static load rating (C0), which defines the static permissible limit.
Basic Dynamic Load Rating C

The basic dynamic load rating (C) indicates the load with constant direction and magnitude, under
which the rated life (L) is L = 50 km for an LM system using balls, or L = 100 km for an LM system
using rollers, when a group of identical LM system units independently operate under the same con-
ditions.
The basic dynamic load rating (C) is used to calculate the service life when an LM system operates
under a load.
Specific values of each LM system model are indicated in the specification table for the correspond-
ing model number.
A-7
Basic Static Load Rating C0
If an LM system receives an excessively large load or a large impact when it is stationary or opera-
tive, permanent deformation occurs between the raceway and the rolling element. If the permanent
deformation exceeds a certain limit, it will prevent the LM system from performing smooth motion.
The basic static load rating is a static load with a constant direction and magnitude whereby the sum
of the permanent deformation of the rolling element and that of the raceway on the contact area
under the maximum stress is 0.0001 times the rolling element diameter. With an LM system, the
basic static load rating is defined for the radial load.
Therefore, the basic static load rating is considered the limit of the static permissible load.
Specific values of each LM system model are indicated in the specification table for the correspond-
ing model number.
Static Permissible Moment M0

When an LM system receives a moment, the rolling elements on both ends receive the maximum
stress due to uneven distribution of the stress on the rolling elements within the LM system.
The permissible static moment (M0) means the moment with constant direction and magnitude, under
which the sum of the permanent deformation of the rolling element and the permanent deformation of
the raceway accounts for 0.0001 times of the rolling element's diameter in the contact area where the
maximum stress is applied.
With an LM system, the static permissible moment is defined in three directions: MA, MB and MC.
Thus, the static permissible moment is considered the limit of the static moment applied.
Pc N
Tc N•m
MA
Moment
in the pitching direction
MB
Moment
in the yawing direction
MC
Moment
in the rolling direction
PC : Radial load MA1 : Moment in the pitching direction

TC : Moment in the torque direction MA2 : Moment in the pitching direction
The specific static permissible moment value of each LM system model is provided in the section on
the permissible moments of each model.
A-8
Point of Selection
Load Rating
Static Safety Factor fS

The Linear Motion system may receive an unexpected external force while it is stationary or opera-
tive due to the generation of an inertia caused by vibrations and impact or start and stop. It is neces-
General Description
sary to consider a static safety factor against such a working load.
[Static Safety Factor fS]
The static safety factor (fs) is determined by the ratio of the load capacity (basic static load rating C0)
of an LM system to the load applied on the LM system.
fC • C0 fC •M0
fS = or fS = ………（1）
P M
fS : Static safety factor
fC : Contact factor (see Table2 on A-11)
C0 : Basic static load rating
M0 : Static permissible moment (MA, MB and MC)
P : Calculated load
M : Calculated moment
[Measure of Static Safety Factor]
Refer to the static safety factor in Table1 as a measure of the lower limit under the service conditions.
Table1 Measure of Static Safety Factor
Kinetic conditions Load conditions Lower limit of fS

Impact is small, and deflection of the shaft is also small 1.0 to 1.3
Constantly stationary
Impact is present, and a twisting load is applied 2.0 to 3.0
A normal load is applied, and the deflection of the shaft is small 1.0 to 1.5
Normal motion
Impact is present, and a twisting load is applied 2.5 to 7.0
A-9
Life Calculation Formula
The nominal life (L) of an LM system is obtained from the following equation using the basic dynamic
load rating (C) and the applied load (P).
[LM System Using Balls]
3
C
L= 50 ………（2）
P
[LM System Using Rollers]

10
C 3
L= 100 ………（3）
P
L : Nominal life (km)
C : Basic dynamic load rating (N)
P : Applied load (N)
In most cases, it is difficult to calculate a load applied on an LM system.

In actual use, most LM systems receive vibrations and impact during operation, and fluctuation of the
loads applied on them is assumed. In addition, the hardness of the raceway and the temperature of
the LM system unit greatly affect the service life.
With these conditions considered, the practical service life calculation formulas (2) and (3) should be
as follows.
[LM System Using Balls]
3
fH •fT •fC C
L= 50 ………（4）
fW P
[LM System Using Rollers]

10
fH •fT •fC C 3
L= 100 ………（5）
fW P
fH : Hardness factor (see Fig.1 on A-11)
fT : Temperature factor
(see Fig.2 on A-11)
fW : Load factor (see Table3 on A-12)
A-10
Point of Selection
Life Calculation Formula
z fH: Hardness Factor

To maximize the load capacity of the LM sys- 1.0
tem, the hardness of the raceways needs to be 0.9
between 58 and 64 HRC.
0.8
Hardness factor fH
If the hardness is lower than this range, the
0.7
General Description
basic dynamic load rating and the basic static
0.6
load rating decrease. Therefore, it is necessary
0.5
to multiply each rating by the respective hard-
0.4
ness factor (fH).
0.3
0.2
0.1
60 50 40 30 20 10
Raceway hardness (HRC)
Fig.1 Hardness Factor (fH)
z fT:Temperature Factor
If the temperature of the environment surround- 1.0
ing the operating LM System exceeds 100 ℃ ,
Temperature factor fT
0.9
take into account the adverse effect of the high
temperature and multiply the basic load ratings 0.8
by the temperature factor indicated in Fig.2. 0.7
In addition, the LM system must be of high tem- 0.6
perature type.
Note) If the temperature of the service environment exceeds
0.5
80 ℃ , it is necessary to change the materials of the
seal and end plate to high-temperature materials. 100 150 200
Note) If the temperature of the environment exceeds 120℃,
it is necessary to provide dimensional stabilization. Raceway temperature (℃)
Fig.2 Temperature Factor (fT)
z fC: Contact Factor

If multiple LM Guide blocks are closely arranged Table2 Contact Factor (fC)
with each other, it is difficult to achieve uniform Number of blocks used in
Contact factor fC
load distribution due to a moment load and the close contact
accuracy of the mounting surface. In such 2 0.81
applications, multiply basic load ratings “C” and
“C0” by the corresponding contact factors in 3 0.72
Table2. 4 0.66
Note) If uneven load distribution is expected in a large
machine, take into account the respective contact fac- 5 0.61
tor indicated in Table2.
6 or greater 0.6
Normal use 1
A-11
z fW: Load Factor
In general, reciprocating machines tend to Table3 Load Factor (fW)
involve vibrations or impact during operation. It Vibrations/
Speed(V) fW
is extremely difficult to accurately determine impact
vibrations generated during high-speed opera- Very low
Faint 1 to 1.2
tion and impact during frequent start and stop. V≦0.25m/s
Therefore, where the effects of speed and vibra- Weak
Slow
1.2 to 1.5
tion are estimated to be significant, divide the 0.25<V≦1m/s
basic dynamic load rating (C) by a load factor Medium
Medium 1.5 to 2
1<V≦2m/s
selected from Table3, which contains empiri-
High
cally obtained data. Strong 2 to 3.5
V>2m/s
A-12
Point of Selection
Rigidity
Rigidity
When using an LM system, it is necessary to select a type and a clearance (preload) that meet the
service conditions in order to achieve the required rigidity of the machine/equipment.
Selecting a Clearance/Preload for an LM System
General Description
Since clearances and preloads of LM systems are standardized for different models, you can select
a clearance and a preload according to the service conditions.
For separate-type models, THK cannot adjust their clearances at shipment. Therefore, the user
must adjust the clearance when installing the product.
Determine a clearance/preload while referring to the following section.
Clearance and Preload

[Clearance (internal clearance)]
Clearance of an LM system is a play between the block (nut), the rail (shaft) and the ball (or roller).
The sum of vertical clearances is called radial clearance, and the sum of circumferential clearances
is called angular backlash (clearance in the rotational direction).
(1) Radial clearance

With the LM Guide, a radial clearance Radial clearance
refers to the value of a movement of the
block center when the LM block is gently
moved vertically with constant force applied
in the center of the fixed LM rail in the longi-
tudinal direction.
Fig.3 Radial clearance of the LM Guide
(2) Angular backlash (clearance in the rota-

tional direction) P
With the Ball Spline, angular backlash
(clearance in the rotational direction) refers
to the value of a rotational motion of the nut T
when the nut is gently rotated forward and
backward with constant force with the
spline shaft fixed.
Fig.4 Angular backlash of the Ball Spline
A-13
[Preload] Table4 Examples of Radial Clearances for LM Guide Model HSR
Preload is a load that is preliminarily applied to Unit: μ m
the rolling elements in order to eliminate a clear- Indication
Normal
Light Medium
ance of an LM system and increase its rigidity. symbol preload preload
A negative clearance indication (negative value) Model No. No Symbol C1 C0
of an LM system means that a preload is pro- HSR 15 – 4 to +2 – 12 to – 4 —
vided. HSR 20 – 5 to +2 – 14 to – 5 – 23 to – 14
HSR 25 – 6 to +3 – 16 to – 6 – 26 to – 16
HSR 30 – 7 to +4 – 19 to – 7 – 31 to – 19
HSR 35 – 8 to +4 – 22 to – 8 – 35 to – 22
For specific clearances and preloads, see the section concerning the corresponding model.
Preload and Rigidity

Providing a preload to an LM system will
increase the rigidity according to the amount of Normal clearance
2δ 0
the preload. Fig.5 shows deflection of clear-
Clearance C1
Deflection
ances (normal clearance, clearance C1 and

clearance C0) (with LM Guide model HSR). δ0 Clearance C0
P0 Load 2.8P0
P0: Applied preload
Fig.5 Rigidity Data
Thus, a preload has an effect of up to approximately 2.8 times greater than the applied preload itself.
The deflection with a preload under a given load is smaller, and the rigidity is much greater, than that
without a preload.
Fig.6 shows how the radial deflection of an LM Guide changes with a preload. As indicated in Fig.6,
when an LM Guide block receives a radial load of 2.45 kN, the radial deflection is 9μ m if the radial
clearance is zero (normal clearance) or 2μ m if it the radial clearance is -30μ m (clearance C0), thus
increasing the rigidity by 4.5 times.
10
δ（μm）
P=2.45kN
Radial displacement
0 -7 -14 -21 -28 -35

Radial clearance (μm)
Fig.6 Radial Clearance and Deflection
For selecting a specific clearance, see the section concerning selection of a radial clearance for the
corresponding LM system model.
A-14
Point of Selection
Friction coefficient
Friction coefficient
Since an LM system makes rolling motion via its rolling elements such as balls and rollers between
the raceways, its frictional resistance is 1/20 to 1/40 smaller than a sliding guide. Its static friction is
especially small and almost the same as dynamic friction, preventing the system from experiencing
General Description
“stick-slip.”Therefore, the system is capable of being fed by the submicron distance.
The frictional resistance of an LM system varies according to the type of the LM system, preload, vis-
cosity resistance of the lubricant and the load applied on the LM system.
In particular, when a moment is given or a preload is applied to increase rigidity, the frictional resis-
tance increases.
Normal friction coefficient by LM systems are indicated in Table5.
0.015
Friction coefficient (µ)
0.010
0.005
P: Applied load
C: Basic dynamic load rating
0 0.1 0.2
Applied load ratio (P/C)
Fig.7 Relationship between Applied Load Ratio and Frictional Resistance
Table5 Frictional Resistances (μ) of LM Systems
Types of LM systems Representative types Frictional resistance (µ)

SSR, SHS, SNR/SNS, SRS, RSR, HSR, NR/NRS 0.002 to 0.003
LM Guide
SRG, SRN 0.001 to 0.002
Ball Spline LBS, LBF, LT, LF 0.002 to 0.003
Linear Bushing LM, LMK, LMF, SC 0.001 to 0.003
LM Stroke MST, ST 0.0006 to 0.0012
LM Roller LR, LRA 0.005 to 0.01
Flat Roller FT, FTW 0.001 to 0.0025
Cross-roller Guide/Cross-roller Table VR, VRU, VRT 0.001 to 0.0025
Linear Ball Slide LS 0.0006 to 0.0012
Cam Follower/Roller Follower CF, NAST 0.0015 to 0.0025
A-15
Accuracy
The motion accuracy of an LM system is defined in running accuracy for models that are fixed on the
flat surface and in runout accuracy for models whose shafts are supported, and accuracy grades are
established for each of them.
For details, see the page concerning the corresponding model.
Lubrication
When using an LM system, it is necessary to provide effective lubrication. Using the product without
lubrication may increase wear of the rolling elements or shorten the service life.
A lubricant has the following effects.
1. Minimizes friction in moving elements to prevent seizure and reduce wear.
2. Forms an oil film on the raceway to decrease stress acting on the surface and extend rolling
fatigue life.
3. Covers the metal surface to prevent rust formation.
To fully bring out an LM system's functions, it is necessary to provide lubrication according to the
conditions.
Even with an LM system with seals, the internal lubricant gradually seeps out during operation.
Therefore, the system needs to be lubricated at an appropriate interval according to the conditions.
[Types of Lubricants]
LM systems mainly use grease or sliding surface oil for their lubricants.
The requirements that lubricants need to satisfy generally consist of the following.
(1) High oil film strength
(2) Low friction
(3) High wear resistance
(4) High thermal stability
(5) Non-corrosive
(6) Highly anti-corrosive
(7) Minimal dust/water content
(8) Consistency of grease must not be altered to a significant extent even after it is repeatedly
stirred.
Lubricants that meet these requirements include the following products.
Table6 Lubricants for General Use
Lubricant Type Brand name

Super Multi 32 to 68 (Idemitsu)
Vactra No.2S (ExxonMobile)
Sliding surface oil or turbine oil
Oil DT Oil (ExxonMobile)
ISOVG32 to 68
Tonner Oil (Showa Shell Sekiyu)
or equivalent
A-16
Point of Selection
Lubrication
Table7 Lubricants Used under Special Environments
Service environment Lubricant characteristics Brand name

AFG Grease(THK) see A-968
AFA Grease(THK) see A-959
High-speed moving Grease with low torque and low heat
parts generation NBU15(NOK Kluba)
General Description
Multemp (Kyodo Yushi)
or equivalent
Fomblin Grease (Solvay Solexis)
Fluorine based vacuum grease or oil Fomblin Oil (Solvay Solexis)
Vacuum (vapor pressure varies by brand) Barrierta IEL/V (NOK Kluba)
Note 1
Isoflex(NOK Kluba)
Krytox (Dupont)
AFE-CA Grease(THK) see A-963
(The above vacuum grease products also
Clean room Grease with very low dust generation
applicable)
AFF Grease(THK) see A-965
Environments subject to
microvibrations or Grease that easily forms an oil film and
AFC Grease(THK) see A-961
microstrokes, which may has high fretting resistance
cause fretting corrosion
Highly anti-corrosive, refined mineral oil
or synthetic oil that forms a strong oil
Environments subject to Super Multi 68 (Idemitsu)
film and is not easily emulsified or
a spattering coolant such Vactra No.2S (ExxonMobile)
washed away by coolant
as machine tools or equivalent
Water-resistant grease
Note 2
Note1) When using a vacuum grease, be sure that some brands have starting resistances several times greater than ordinary
lithium-based greases.
Note2) In an environment subject to a spattering water-soluble coolant, some brands of intermediate viscosity significantly
decrease their lubricity or do not properly form an oil film. Check the compatibility between the lubricant and the cool-
ant.
Note3) Do not mix greases with different physical properties.
Note4) For THK original grease products, see A-958.
A-17
Safety Design
LM systems are used in various environments. If using an LM system in a special environment such
as vacuum, anti corrosion, high temperature and low temperature, it is necessary to select a material
and surface treatment that suit the service environment.
To support use in various special environments, THK offers the following materials and surface treat-
ments for LM systems.
Description Model No. Features/Capabilities
HSR SSR RSR SHW RSH
Martensite stainless Anti-rust property

steel HRW SRS ★★★★★
SR HR
SR-M1
HSR-M1
RSR-M1
Material
High temperature support

Martensite stainless
★★★★★
steel
* up to 150℃
HSR-M2
Austenite stainless Anti-rust property

steel ★★★★★
THK AP-HC TREATMENT

Low dust generation
★★★★★
Anti-rust property
AP-HC
★★★
Surface hardness
★★★★★
THK AP-C TREATMENT

Surface Treatment
Anti-rust property
AP-C
★★★★
THK AP-CF TREATMENT
Anti-rust property
AP-CF
★★★★★
* If you desire a surface treatment other than the above, contact THK.
A-18
Point of Selection
Safety Design
Determining a Material
In normal service conditions, LM systems use a type of steel that suits LM systems. If using an LM
system in a special environment, it is necessary to select a material that suits the service environ-
ment.
General Description
For locations that require high corrosion resistance, a stainless steel material is used.
Material Specifications
Stainless Steel LM Systems
Material…martensite stainless steel/austenite stainless steel
For use in environments where corrosion resistance is required, some LM system models can use
martensite stainless steel.
If the model number of an LM system contains symbol M, it means that the model is made of stain-
less steel. See the section concerning the corresponding model.
Model number coding
HSR25 A 2 QZ UU C0 M +1200L P M -Ⅱ
Model number With QZ Radial LM rail length Symbol for No. of rails used
Lubricator clearance (in mm) on the same plane
symbol
No. of LM blocks Stainless steel Stainless steel
used on the same rail LM block LM rail
Type of LM block Dust prevention accessory symbol Accuracy symbol
A-19
Surface Treatment
The surfaces of the rails and shafts of LM systems can be treated for anti-corrosive or aesthetic pur-
poses.
THK offers THK-AP treatment, which is the optimum surface treatment for LM systems.
The THK-AP treatment consists of the following 3 types.
AP-HC
Surface treatment…industrial-use hard chrome plating
Film hardness…750 Hv or higher
Equivalent to industrial-use hard chrome plating, AP-HC achieves almost the same level of corrosion
resistance as martensite stainless steel. In addition, it is highly wear resistant since the film hardness
is extremely high, 750 Hv or higher.
AP-C
Surface treatment…industrial-use black chrome coating
A type of industrial-use black chrome coating designed to increase corrosion resistance. It achieves
lower cost and higher corrosion resistance than martensite stainless steel.
AP-CF
Surface treatment…industrial-use black chrome coating
/special fluorocarbon resin coating
A compound surface treatment that combines black chrome coating and special fluorine resin coat-
ing and is suitable for applications requiring high corrosion resistance.
In addition to the above treatments, other surface treatments are sometimes performed on areas
other than the raceways, such as alkaline coloring treatment (black oxidizing) and color anodize
treatment. However, some of them are not suitable for LM systems. For details, contact THK.
If using an LM system whose raceways are surface treated, set a higher safety factor.
Model number coding
SR15 V 2 F + 640L F
Model number LM rail length
(in mm)
Type of LM block
No. of LM blocks With surface treatment With surface treatment
used on the same rail on the LM block on the LM block
Note) Note that the inside of the mounting hole is not provided with surface treatment.
A-20
Point of Selection
Safety Design
[Data on Comparison of Dust Generation with AP Treatment]

[Test conditions]
Item Description
SSR20WF+280LF (AP-CF, without seal)
LM Guide model number SSR20UUF+280LF (AP-CF, with seal)
General Description
SSR20WUUF+280LF (AP-HC, with seal)
Grease used THK AFE-CA Grease
Grease quantity 1cc (per LM block)
Speed 30m/min(MAX)
Stroke 200mm
Flow rate during measurement 1l /min
Clean room volume 1.7 liter (acrylic casing)
Measuring instrument Dust counter
Measured particle diameter 0.3μm or more
80
AP-CF (with seal)
Particle accumulation (p/1•min)
60
40
AP-CF (without seal)

20
AP-HC (with seal)
0 10 20 30 40 50
Time (hour)
THK AP-HC treatment provides high surface hardness and has high wear resistance. The high level
of wear in the early stage in the graph above is considered to be due to the initial wear of the end
seal.
Note) THK AP-HC treatment (equivalent to hard chrome plating)
THK AP-CF treatment (equivalent to black chrome plating + fluorine resin coating)
A-21
[Data on Comparison of Rust Prevention]
<Salt-water spray resistance cycle test>
Item Description
Spray liquid 1% NaCl solution
Spraying for 6 hours,
cycles
drying for 6 hours
35℃ during spraying
Temperature conditions
60℃ during drying
Specimen
material Austenite Martensite THK THK THK
stainless steel stainless steel AP-HC AP-C AP-CF
Time
Before test
6 hours
24 hours
96 hours
Anti-rust
property ◎ { { ◎ ◎
Wear
{ {
Test Result
Resistance ◎ ◎ △
Surface
hardness △ ◎ ◎ △ △
Adherence — — ◎ △ {
Appearance Metallic luster Metallic luster Metallic luster Black luster Black luster
A-22
Point of Selection
Safety Design
Contamination Protection
Contamination protection is the most important factor in using an LM system. Entrance of dust or
other foreign material into the LM system will cause abnormal wear or shorten the service life.
Therefore, when entrance of dust or other foreign material is predicted, it is necessary to select a
General Description
sealing device or contamination protection device that meets the service environment conditions.
(1) Dedicated seals for LM systems

For LM systems, seals made of special synthetic rubber with high wear resistance (e.g., Lami-
nated Contact Scraper LaCS) and a wiper ring are available as contamination protection seals.
For locations with adverse service environments, dedicated bellows and dedicated covers are
available for some models.
For details and symbols of these seals, see the section concerning options (contamination pro-
tection) for the corresponding model.
To provide contamination protection also for Ball Screws in service environments subject to cut-
ting chips and cutting fluids, it is advisable to use a telescopic cover that covers the whole sys-
tem and a large-size bellows.
(2) Dedicated bellows

For LM Guides, standardized bellows are available.
THK manufactures dedicated bellows also for other LM systems such as Ball Screws and Ball
Splines. Contact THK for details.
Inner seal
Plate cover Bellows
QZ Lubricator
End seal
End seal
LaCS
Metal scraper
Side seal
Contamination Protection Seal for the LM Guide Dedicated Bellows for the LM Guide
Seal snap ring

Wiper ring
Seal snap ring
Wiper ring
Ball screw shaft
Ball screw nut

Screw cover Bellows
Wiper Ring for the Ball Screw Contamination Protection Cover for the Ball Screw
A-23
A-24
LM Guide®
General Catalog
A-25
LM Guide
General Catalog
Features and Types................................ A-28 Caged Ball LM Guides............................ A-136

Features of the LM Guide ...................... A-28 • Model SHS ............................................. A-136
• Large permissible load and high rigidity ...... A-29 • Model SSR ............................................. A-142
• High Precision of Motion ........................... A-31 • Model SNR/SNS ...................................... A-148
• Accuracy Averaging Effect by Absorbing Mounting Surface Error A-34 • Model SHW ............................................ A-156
• Easy Maintenance ................................... A-36 • Model SRS ............................................. A-160
• Improved productivity of the machine.......... A-36 • Model SCR ............................................. A-166
• Substantial Energy Savings....................... A-37
• Low Total Cost ........................................ A-38 LM Guide ................................................. A-170
• Ideal Four Raceway, Circular-Arc Groove, • Model HSR ............................................. A-170
Two-Point Contact Structure ..................... A-39 • Model SR ............................................... A-178
• Superb Error-Absorbing Capability with the DF Design . A-43 • Model NR/NRS........................................ A-186
Classification Table of the LM Guides.. A-44 • Model HRW ............................................ A-194
• Models RSR/RSR-W ................................ A-200
Point of Selection ................................... A-46 • Model RSR-Z .......................................... A-208
Flowchart for Selecting an LM Guide ... A-46 • Model RSH ............................................. A-214
Selecting a Type ..................................... A-48 • Model RSH-Z .......................................... A-218
• Types of LM Guides ................................. A-48 • Model HR ............................................... A-224
Setting Conditions ................................. A-58 • Model GSR ............................................. A-230
• Conditions of the LM Guide ....................... A-58 • Model GSR-R ......................................... A-236
Calculating the Applied Load ................ A-74 • Model CSR ............................................. A-244
• Load rating of the LM Guide in all directions A-74 • Model MX ............................................... A-248
• Calculating an Applied Load ...................... A-75 • Model JR ................................................ A-252
Calculating the Equivalent Load ........... A-94 • Model HCR ............................................. A-258
Calculating the Static Safety Factor ..... A-95 • Model HMG ............................................ A-262
Calculating the Average Load ............... A-96 • Model NSR-TBC ...................................... A-268
• Example of Calculating the Average Load (1) • Model HSR-M1 ........................................ A-272
- with Horizontal Mount and Acceleration/Deceleration Considered. A-98 • Model SR-M1 .......................................... A-280
• Example of Calculating the Average Load (2) • Model RSR-M1 ........................................ A-286
- When the Rails are Movable ................... A-99 • Model HSR-M2 ........................................ A-292
Calculating the Nominal Life ................. A-100
• Nominal Life Equation for an LM Guide Using Balls . A-100 Structure and Features of the Caged Roller LM Guide ... A-296
• Rated Life Equation for an LM Guide Using Rollers . A-100 • Advantages of the Caged Roller Technology . A-297
• Example of Calculating the Nominal Life (1)
- with Horizontal Mount and High-speed Acceleration.. A-103 Caged Roller LM Guide .......................... A-300
• Example of Calculating the Nominal Life (2) • Model SRG ............................................. A-300
- with Vertical Mount ................................ A-108 • Model SRN ............................................. A-306
Predicting the Rigidity ........................... A-111 • Model SRW ............................................ A-312
• Selecting a Radial Clearance (Preload) ....... A-111
• Service Life with a Preload Considered ....... A-112 Point of Design ....................................... A-318
• Rigidity ................................................... A-112 Designing the Guide System................. A-318
• Radial Clearance Standard for Each Model . A-113 • Examples of Arrangements of the Guide System. A-318
Determining the Accuracy ..................... A-116 • Method for Securing an LM Guide to Meet the Conditions.. A-322
• Accuracy Standards ................................. A-116 Designing a Mounting Surface.............. A-324
• Guidelines for Accuracy Grades by Machine Type . A-117 • Designing a Mounting Surface ................... A-324
• Accuracy Standard for Each Model ............ A-118 • Shoulder Height of the Mounting Base and the Corner Radius . A-326
• Permissible Error of the Mounting Surface ... A-333
Feature of Each Model ........................... A-129 • Marking on the Master LM Guide and Combined Use .. A-338
Structure and Features of the Caged Ball LM Guide... A-130
• Advantages of the Ball Cage Technology .... A-131
A-26
B Product Specifications (Separate)
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance ... A-340 Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table
Mounting the LM Guide ......................... A-340 Caged Ball LM Guide
• Mounting Procedure ................................ A-340 • Model SHS ............................................. B-5
• Methods for Measuring Accuracy after Installation A-350 • Model SSR ............................................. B-15
• Recommended Tightening Torque for LM Rails . A-350 • Model SNR/SN ....................................... B-25
• Model SHW ............................................ B-43
• Model SRS ............................................. B-49
Options.................................................... A-351
• Model SCR ............................................. B-55
Contamination Protection ..................... A-352
• Seal and Metal Scraper ............................ A-352
LM Guide
• Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS .............. A-353
• Model HSR ............................................. B-61
• Light-Resistance Contact Seal LiCS ........... A-355 • Model SR ............................................... B-85
• Dedicated bellows ................................... A-356 • Model NR/NRS ....................................... B-93
• Dedicated LM Cover ................................ A-356 • Model HRW ............................................ B-107
• Cap C .................................................... A-357
• Plate Cover SV -- Steel Tape SP ................. A-358 • Models RSR/RSR-W ................................ B-113
• Model RSR-Z .......................................... B-121
Lubrication.............................................. A-361 • Model RSH ............................................. B-127
• QZ Lubricator ......................................... A-361 • Model RSH-Z .......................................... B-131
• Lubrication Adapter ................................. A-364 • Model HR ............................................... B-137
• Removing/mounting Jig ............................ A-365 • Model GSR............................................. B-145
• End Piece EP ......................................... A-366 • Model GSR-R ......................................... B-149
• Model CSR ............................................. B-153
• Model MX ............................................... B-159
List of Parts Symbols ............................ A-368
• Model JR................................................ B-163
• Model HCR............................................. B-167
Table of Supported Options by Models... A-370 • Model HMG ............................................ B-171
• Model NSR-TBC ..................................... B-177
Dimensions of Each Model with an Option Attached • Model HSR-M1 ....................................... B-181
• Seal resistance value ............................... A-372 • Model SR-M1 .......................................... B-191
• Resistance of LaCS ................................. A-375 • Model RSR-M1 ....................................... B-197
• Maximum Seal Resistance of LiCS ............ A-376 • Model HSR-M2 ....................................... B-203
• Greasing Hole ......................................... A-377
Caged Roller LM Guide
Precautions on Use................................ A-381 • Model SRG............................................. B-207
Precautions on Using the LM Guide .... A-381 • Model SRN ............................................. B-213
Precautions on Using Options for the LM Guide .. A-382 • Model SRW ............................................ B-219
• QZ Lubricator ......................................... A-382
• Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS, Side Scraper .... A-382 Options.................................................... B-223
• Light sliding resistance contact seal LiCS.... A-383 • The LM Block Dimension (Dimension L) with LaCS and Seals Attached . B-224
• Incremental dimension with grease nipple (when LaCS is attached) B-231
• LM Block Dimension (Dimension L) with LiCS Attached B-233
• Incremental dimension with grease nipple (when LiCS is attached) B-234
• Bellows .................................................. B-235
• LM cover ................................................ B-248
• Cap C .................................................... B-250
• LM Block Dimension (Dimension L) with QZ Attached B-251
• Lubrication Adapter.................................. B-254
• End Piece EP ......................................... B-255
• Greasing Hole ......................................... B-256
• Rack and Pinion............................................ B-259
* Please see the separate "B Product Specifications".
A-27
Features and Types LM Guide
Features of the LM Guide

Functions Required for Linear Guide Surface
Large permissible load Smooth motion with no clearance
Highly rigid in all directions Superbly high speed
High positioning repeatability Easy maintenance
Running accuracy can be obtained easily Can be used in various environments
High accuracy can be maintained over a long period
Large permissible load and high rigidity
Accuracy averaging effect by absorbing mounting surface error
Ideal four raceway, circular-arc groove, two point contact structure
Superb error-absorbing capability with the DF design
Low friction coefficient
Wide array of options (QZ lubricator, Laminated contact scraper LaCS, etc.)
As a result, the following

features are achieved.
Easy maintenance
Improved productivity of the machine
Substantial energy savings
Low total cost
Higher accuracy of the machine
Higher efficiency in machine design
A-28
Features and Types
Large Permissible Load and High Rigidity

[Large Permissible Load]
The LM Guide has raceway grooves with a radius almost equal to the ball radius, which is signifi-
cantly different from the linear bushing. As shown in Fig.1, which compares size between the LM
Guide and the linear bushing with similar basic dynamic load ratings, the LM Guide is much smaller
than the linear bushing, indicating that the LM Guide allows a significantly compact design.
LM Guide
The reason for this space saving is the greater difference in permissible load between the R-groove
contact structure and the surface contact structure. The R-groove contact structure (radius: 52% of
the ball radius) can bear a load per ball 13 times greater than the surface contact structure. Since
service life is proportional to the cube of the permissible load, this increased ball-bearing load trans-
lates into a service life that is approximately 2,200 longer than the linear bushing.
Housing 170
Shaft
Linear bushing
Mounting base
165
LM block
34
LM rail
24
LM Guide model SSR15XW Linear Bushing model LM80 OP

Basic dynamic load rating: 14.7 kN Basic dynamic load rating: 7.35 kN
Fig.1 Comparison between the LM Guide and the Linear Bushing
Table1 Load Capacity per Ball (P and P1)

Permissible contact surface pressure: 4,200 MPa
P P1
R-groove Flat surface
P/P1
(P) (P1)
φ 3.175 (1/8´´) 0.90 kN 0.07 kN 13
φ 4.763 (3/16´´) 2.03 kN 0.16 kN 13
φ 6.350 (1/4´´) 3.61 kN 0.28 kN 13
R-groove Flat surface
φ 7.938 (5/16´´) 5.64 kN 0.44 kN 13
φ 11.906 (15/32´´) 12.68 kN 0.98 kN 13 Fig.2 Load Capacity per Ball
A-29
[High Rigidity]
The LM Guide is capable of bearing vertical and horizontal loads. Additionally, due to the circular-arc
groove design, it is capable of carrying a preload as necessary to increase its rigidity.
When compared with a feed screw shaft system and a spindle in rigidity, the guide surface using an
LM Guide has higher rigidity.
z Example of comparing static rigidity between the LM Guide, a feed screw shaft
system and a spindle
(vertical machining center with the main shaft motor of 7.5 kW)
Table2 Comparison of Static Rigidity
[Components] Unit: N/μ m
LM Guide: SNR45LC/C0 X-axis Y-axis

Components Z-axis direction
direction direction
(C0 clearance: preload = 8.05kN)
Ball Screw: BNFN4010-5/G0 8700 (radial)
LM Guide — 2110 6730 (reverse radial)
(G0 clearance: preload = 2.64kN)
Ball screw 330 — —
Spindle: general-purpose cutting spindle
Spindle 250 250 280
Note) The rigidity of the feed screw shaft system includes
rigidity of the shaft end support bearing.
Spindle
Z
X Y
LM Guide
Ball Screw
Fig.3
A-30
Features and Types
High Precision of Motion

[Small lost motion]
The LM Guide is provided with an ideal rolling mechanism. Therefore, the difference between
dynamic and static friction is minimal and lost motion hardly occurs.
Position
Position
LM Guide
30 30
20 20
（μ m）（μ m）
14μ m
10 10
1μ m
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30

Number of commands (pulse) Number of commands (pulse)
10 10
20 20
30 30
LM Guide model HSR45 Square slide + Turcite
(Measurements are taken with the single-axis table loaded with a 500-kg weight)
Fig.4 Comparison of Lost Motion between the LM Guide and a Slide Guide
Table3 Lost Motion Comparison Unit: μ m
Test method
Type Clearance As per JIS B 6330
Based on minimum
unit feeding
10mm/min 500mm/min 4000mm/min
LM Guide C1 clearance (see table below) 2.3 5.3 3.9 0

(HSR45) C0 clearance (see table below)
3.6 4.4 3.1 1
Square slide 0.02mm 10.7 15 14.1 14

+
turcite 0.005mm 8.7 13.1 12.1 13
Radial clearance of the LM Guide Unit: μ m
Symbol C1 C0
Radial clearance – 25 to – 10 – 40 to – 25
A-31
[High running accuracy]
Use of the LM Guide allows you to achieve high running accuracy.
[Measurement method]
30
150st
200
SHS25LC
m t m
KR4610A
250 200
640
Pitching accuracy
（μm）
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.0
−0.2
−0.4
−0.6
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
（mm）
Yawing accuracy
（μm）
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.0
−0.2
−0.4
−0.6
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
（mm）
Fig.5 Dynamic Accuracy of a Single-axis Table
A-32
Features and Types
[High accuracy maintained over a long period]

As the LM Guide employs an ideal rolling mechanism, wear is negligible and high precision is main-
tained for long periods of time. As shown in Fig.6, when the LM Guide operates under both a preload
and a normal load, more than 90% of the preload remains even after running 2,000 km.
800 1000
LM Guide
1000
W W
Fig.6 Condition
[Conditions]
Model No. : HSR65LA3SSC0 + 2565LP-Ⅱ
Radial clearance
Remaining Preload (%)
: C0 (preload: 15.7 kN)

Stroke : 1,050mm 100
91.5％
Speed : 15 m/min (stops 5 sec at both ends)
Acceleration/decelelation time in rapid motion 50
: 300 ms (acceleration: α = 0.833 m/s2)
Mass : 6000kg
Drive : Ball Screws 0 500 1000 1500 2000
Lubrication : Lithium soap-based grease No. 2 Distance traveled (km)
(greased every 100 km)
Fig.7 Distance Traveled and Remaining Preload
A-33
Accuracy Averaging Effect by Absorbing Mounting Surface Error
The LM Guide contains highly spherical balls and has a constrained structure with no clearance. In
addition, it uses LM rails in parallel on multiple axes to form a guide system with multiple-axis config-
uration. Thus, the LM Guide is capable of absorbing misalignment in straightness, flatness or paral-
lelism that would occur in the machining of the base to which the LM Guide is to be mounted or in the
installation of the LM Guide by averaging these errors.
The magnitude of the averaging effect varies according to the length or size of the misalignment, the
preload applied on the LM Guide and the number of axes in the multiple-axis configuration. When
misalignment is given to one of the LM rails of the table as shown in Fig.8, the magnitude of misalign-
ment and the actual dynamic accuracy of the table (straightness in the horizontal direction) are as
shown in Fig.9.
By applying such characteristics obtained with the averaging effect, you can easily establish a guide
system with high precision of motion.
SHS30 Straight-edge Electric micrometer Table Base

265
200
Single-axis actuator 200

310 293
685 303
Fig.8
0.02 0.02
Rail 2
Misalignment (mm)
Misalignment (mm)
Rail 2
0.01 0.01
0 0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
−0.01 −0.01
Rail 1 Rail 1
−0.02 −0.02
Rail length (mm) Rail length (mm)
Misalignment curve (vertical) Misalignment curve (horizontal)
Straightness accuracy (mm)
Straightness accuracy (mm)
0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001
0.368μ m 0.601μm
0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 0 50 100 150 200 250
−0.001 −0.001
−0.002 −0.002
Stroke (mm) Stroke (mm)
Displacement of the table (vertical) Displacement of the table (horizontal)
Fig.9
A-34
Features and Types
Even on a roughly milled mounting surface, the LM Guide drastically increases running accuracy of
the top face of the table.
[Example of Installation]
When comparing the mounting surface accu- Table4 Actual Measurement of Mounting-Surface Accuracy
racy (a) and the table running accuracy (b), the Unit: μ m
results are : Mounting Average

Direction Straightness
surface (a)
LM Guide
Vertical 92.5µm → 15µm = 1/6 A 80
Side surface Horizontal

Horizontal 28µm → 4µm = 1/7 Vertical 92.5
B 105
C 40
Bottom
28
surface D 16
16μ m
40μ m
105μ m
Bottom surface B
80μ m
Side surface D
Side surface C Bottom surface A
Fig.10 Surface Accuracy of the LM Guide Mounting Base (Milled Surface Only)
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Fig.11 Running Accuracy After the LM Guide Is Mounted
Table5 Actual Measurement of Running Accuracy on the Table (Based on Measurement in Fig.10 and Fig.11)
Unit: μ m
Measurement point
Direction
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Straightness (b)
Vertical 0 +2 +8 +13 +15 +9 +5 0 15
Horizontal 0 +1 +2 +3 +2 +2 −1 0 4
A-35
Easy Maintenance
Unlike with sliding guides, the LM Guide does not incur abnormal wear. As a result, sliding surfaces
do not need to be reconditioned, and precision needs not be altered. Regarding lubrication, sliding
guides require forced circulation of a large amount of lubricant so as to maintain an oil film on the
sliding surfaces, whereas the LM Guide only needs periodical replenishing of a small amount of
grease or lubricant. Maintenance is that simple. This also helps keep the work environment clean.
Improved Productivity of the Machine

Since the LM Guide is superb in high speed, productivity of the machine is improved.
Table6 Examples of Using the LM Guide in High-speed Applications
Machine Place where

Speed (m/s) Model No.
using the LM Guide the LM Guide is used
Durability test machine X axis 5.0 SSR25XW
X axis 2.0 SSR25XW
Pick-up robot
Z axis 3.0 SSR15XW
Injection molding machine Automatic unloading unit 2.2 HSR30LR
Glass cutter Cutter sliding unit 3.7 HSR25B
Inspection equipment Work transfer unit 5.0 HRW27CA
Conveyance robot Work transport unit 4.2 HSR25R
XY table X-Y axis 2.3 RSR15WV
A-36
Features and Types
Substantial Energy Savings

As shown in Table7, the LM Guide has a substantial energy saving effect.
Table7 Comparative Data on Sliding and Rolling Characteristics
Machine Specifications
LM Guide
Single-axis surface grinding Three-axis surface grinding machine
Type of machine
machine (sliding guide) (rolling guide)
Overall length
13m×3.2m 12.6m×2.6m
× overall width
Total mass 17000kg 16000kg
Table mass 5000kg 5000kg
Grinding area 0.7m×5m 0.7m×5m
Table guide Rolling through V-V guide Rolling through LM Guide installation
Three axes (5.5 kW + 3.7 kW x 2)
No. of grinding stone axes Single axis (5.5 kW)
Grinding capacity: 3 times greater
Table Drive Specifications Ratio

Motor used 38.05kW 3.7kW 10.3
Drive hydraulic pressure Bore diameterφ 160×1.2MPa Bore diameter φ 65×0.7MPa —
Thrust 23600N 2270N 10.4
Electric Power
38kWH 3.7kWH 10.3
consumption
Drive hydraulic pressure
400l /year 250l /year 1.6
oil consumption
Lubricant consumption 60 l /year (oil) 3.6 l /year (grease) 16.7
A-37
Low Total Cost
Compared with a sliding guide, the LM Guide is easier to assemble and does not require highly
skilled technicians to perform the adjustment work. Thus, the assembly man-hours for the LM Guide
are reduced, and machines and systems incorporating the LM Guide can be produced at lower cost.
The figure below shows an example of difference in the procedure of assembling a machining center
between using siding guides and using LM Guides.
Normally, with a sliding guide, the surface on which the guide is installed must be given a very
smooth finish by grinding. However, the LM Guide can offer high precision even if the surface is
milled or planed. Using the LM Guide thus cuts down on machining man-hours and lowers machining
costs as a whole.
[Assembly Procedure for a Machining Center]
Using LM Guides Using Square Guides (Sliding Guides)
Machine base Table and saddle Machine base Table and saddle
Machining Machining Machining Machining
Accuracy (straightness Accuracy (straightness and Degreasing machined

and torsion) measurement torsion) measurement with surfaces
with a LM Guide temporarily a square guide temporarily
mounted mounted Coating surfaces
with special resin
Scraping base
mounting surface
Drying in thermally
Mounting base, table and saddle controlled chamber
Accuracy measurement
Corrective scraping
Scraping by mating base with table and saddle
Mounting base, table and saddle
When extremely high precision is not required (e.g., running accuracy), the LM Guide can be
attached to the steel plate even if the black scale on it is not removed.
A-38
Features and Types
Ideal Four Raceway, Circular-Arc Groove, Two-Point Contact Structure

The LM Guide has a self-adjusting capability that competitors' products do not have.
This feature is achieved with an ideal four raceway, circular-arc groove, two-point contact structure.
[Comparison of Characteristics between the LM Guide and Similar Products]
LM Guide: Four Raceway, Circular-arc Groove, Other Product: Two-row, Gothic-arch Groove
LM Guide
Two-point Contact Structure Four Point Contact Structure
LM Guide Model HSR Two-row Gothic-arch groove product

Contact width
d2
1
ｄ
Rotation axis
Rotation axi
Rotation axi
Contact width d1
d2
Contact width
th
id
w
ct
ta
A
on
Ball rotation axis

C
B
d2 d1 Ball rotation axis d2 d1 R R
R
R: Radius of
curvature Contact t angle
angle Contac
B A R: Radius of
curvature
Differential slip Differential slip
B’ B’
B B
d1 π×d1 d1 π×d1
A A’ A A’
d2 π×d2 d2 π×d2
Fig.12 Fig.13
As indicated in Fig.12 and Fig.13, when the ball rotates one revolution, the ball slips by the difference
between the circumference of the diameter of inner surface (πd1) and that of the outer contact diam-
eter (πd2). (This slip is called differential slip.) If the difference is large, the ball rotates while slipping,
the friction coefficient increases more than 10 times and the friction resistance steeply increases.
A-39
Four Raceway, Circular-Arc Groove, Two-Row, Gothic-Arch Groove,
Two-Point Contact Structure Four Point Contact Structure
Smooth Motion
Since the ball contacts the groove at two points in the The difference between d1 and d2 in the contact area is
load direction as shown in Fig.12 and Fig.13 on A-39 large as shown in Fig.12 and Fig.13 on A-39. There-
even under a preload or a normal load, the difference fore, if any of the following occurs, the ball will gener-
between d1 and d2 is small and the differential slip is ate differential slip, causing friction almost as large as
minimized to allow smooth rolling motion. sliding resistance and shortening the service as a
result of abnormal friction.
(1) A preload is applied.
(2) A lateral load is applied.
(3) The mounting parallelism between the two axes
is poor.
Accuracy and Rigidity of the Mounting Surface

In the ideal two-point contact structure, four rows of With the Gothic-arch groove product, each ball con-
circular arc grooves are given appropriate contact tacts the groove at four points, preventing itself from
angles. With this structure, a light distortion of the being elastically deformed and the contact points from
mounting surface would be absorbed within the LM moving (i.e., no self-adjusting capability). Therefore,
block due to elastic deformation of the balls and mov- even a slight distortion of the mounting surface or an
ing of the contact points to allow unforced, smooth accuracy error of the rail bed cannot be absorbed and
motion. This eliminates the need for a robust mounting smooth motion cannot be achieved. Accordingly, it is
base with high rigidity and accuracy for machinery necessary to machine a highly rigid mounting base
such as a conveyance system. with high precision and mount a high precision rail.
Rigidity
With the two-point contact, even if a relatively large Since differential slip occurs due to the four-point con-
preload is applied, the rolling resistance does not tact, a sufficient preload cannot be applied and high
abnormally increase and high rigidity is obtained. rigidity cannot be obtained.
Load Rating
Since the curvature radius of the ball raceway is 51 to Since the curvature radius of the gothic arch groove
52% of the ball diameter, a large rated load can be has to be 55 to 60% of the ball diameter, the rated load
obtained. is reduced to approx. 50% of that of the circular arc
groove.
Difference in Rigidity
As shown in Fig.14, the rigidity widely varies according to the difference in curvature radius or difference in pre-
load.
Curvature radius and rigidity

Comparison of rigidity by curvature Preload and deflection
Deflection (Rigidity) (μ m)
(per ball) Displacement curve of HSR30

10 60
Ball diameter (mm)
0 clearance
.6Da
a
2D
a
8
5D
0.5
R=0
0.5
40
R=
6
R=
4
20 Magnitude of the preload: 5kN
2
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 10 20
Rigidity (N/μ m) Applied load (kN)
Fig.14
Difference in Service Life

Since the load rating of the gothic arch groove is reduced to approx. 50% of that of the circular arc groove, the
service life also decreases to 87.5%.
A-40
Features and Types
[Accuracy Error of the Mounting Surface and Test Data on Rolling Resistance]
The difference between the contact structures translates into a rolling resistance.
In the gothic arch groove contact structure, each ball contacts at four points and differential slip or spinning
occurs if a preload is applied to increase rigidity or an error in the mounting precision is large. This sharply
increases the rolling resistance and causes abnormal wear in an early stage.
The following are test data obtained by comparing an LM Guide having the four raceway, circular-arc groove
two-point contact structure and a product having the two-row, Gothic-arch, four-point contact structure.
LM Guide
[Sample] [Conditions]
(1) LM Guide Radial clearance: ± 0μm
SR30W (self-adjusting type) 2 sets Without seal
HSR35A (four-way equal-load type) 2 sets Without lubrication
(2) Two-row Gothic-arch groove product Load: table mass of 30 kg
Type with dimensions similar to HSR30 2 sets
Data 1: Preload and rolling resistance

When a preload is applied, the rolling resistance of the Gothic-arch groove product steeply increases and differ-
ential slip occurs. Even under a preload, the rolling resistance of the LM Guide does not increase.
90
80
70
Rolling resistance (N)
60
Gothic-arch groove product
50
40
30
0W
20 A•SR3
HSR35
10
0
-5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40 -45
Magnitude of the preload (μ m)
A-41
Data 2: Error in parallelism between two axes and rolling resistance
As shown in the Fig.15, part of the rails mounted in parallel is parallelly displaced and the rolling resistance at
that point is measured.
With the Gothic-arch groove product, the rolling resistance is 34 N when the parallelistic error is 0.03 mm and
62 N when the error is 0.04 mm. These resistances are equivalent to the slip friction coefficients, indicating that
the balls are in sliding contact with the groove.
P
200 200
60
50
40
30
5A
20 HSR3
SR W
3 0
10
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12

Parallel displacement: P (mm)
(Parallelistic error)
Fig.15
Data 3: Difference between the levels of the right and left rails and rolling resistance
The bottom of either rail is displaced by distance S so that there is a level difference between the two axes, and
then rolling resistance is measured. If there is a level difference between the right and left rails, a moment acts
on the LM block, and in the case of the Gothic-arch groove, spinning occurs. Even if the level difference
between the two rails is as great as 0.3/200 mm, the LM Guide absorbs the error. This indicates that the LM
Guide can operate normally even when such errors are present.
200
60
50
40
30 5A
R3
HS
20
10 SR30W
0
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
Height displacement: S (mm)
(Level displacement)
A-42
Features and Types
Superb Error-Absorbing Capability with the DF Design

Since the LM Guide has a contact structure similar to the front-to-front mount of angular ball bear-
ings, it has superb self-adjusting capability.
LM Guide
Angular Ball Bearings Mounted Front-to-front (DF type) DF Type Four-row Angular Contact (LM Guide)
Angular Ball Bearings Mounted Back-to-back (DB type) Four-row Gothic-arch Contact
An LM ball guide mounted on a plane receives a moment (M) due to an error in flatness or in level or
a deflection of the table. Therefore, it is essential for the guide to have self-adjusting capability.
LM Guide Model HSR Similar Product of a Competitor
Table Block
M M
M
M
Mounting error
Mounting error
Deflection
Distance from
the application Deflection Deflection
Distance from Distance from
point the
the application application poi Deflection
nt
point Distance from
the
application poi
nt
Since the distance from the application point of the Since the distance from the application point of the
bearing is small, the internal load generated from a bearing is large, the internal load generated from a
mounting error is small and the self-adjusting capability mounting error is large and the self-adjusting capability
is large. is small.
With an LM ball guide having angular ball bearings
mounted back-to-back, if there is an error in flatness or
a deflection in the table, the internal load applied to the
block is approx. 6 times greater than that of the front-to-
front mount structure and the service life is much
shorter. In addition, the fluctuation in sliding resistance
is greater.
A-43
Classification Table of the LM Guides
LM Guide
Ball Guide
Caged Ball Type Full-ball Type
Standard Type Standard Type

Model SHS Model SSR Model HSR Model NR
Global Standard Size Radial 4-way Equal Load Ultra-heavy Load
High Rigidity
Model SR
Model SNR Model SNS Radial
Ultra-heavy Load Ultra-heavy Load Model NRS
Model NSR-TBC Ultra-heavy Load
Self-aligning High Rigidity
Wide Type
Model SHW Miniature Type

Low Center of Gravity
Model RSR Model RSR-Z

Ultra Compact Ultra Compact
High Corrosion Resistance
Miniature Type
Model SRS Model RSH Model RSH-Z
Equipped with a Ball Retainer Equipped with a Ball Retainer
Lightweight and Compact
High Corrosion Resistance
Cross Type
Wide Type
Model SCR
4-way Equal Load Model HRW
Wide Rail
4-way Equal Load
A-44
Features and Types
Classification Table of the LM Guides
LM Guide
Roller Guide
With a Caged Roller
Standard Type
Model SRG Model SRN

Cross Type Ultra-high Rigidity Ultra-high Rigidity
Low Center of Gravity
Model CSR Model MX
4-way Equal Load Miniature Cross
Wide Type
Special Environment Types
Model SRW
Model HSR-M1 Model SR-M1 Ultra-high Rigidity
High Temperature High Temperature
4-way Equal Load Radial
Model HSR-M2 Model RSR-M1 Separate Type

High Corrosion Resistance High Temperature
Model HR
4-way Equal Load
Heavy Load
R Guide Type Model GSR Model GSR-R

Interchangeable, Self-aligning Interchangeable, Self-aligning
Model HCR With Rack
Straight-Curved Type Model JR Type
Model HMG Model JR

Structural Member Rail
4-way Equal Load
A-45
Point of Selection LM Guide
Flowchart for Selecting an LM Guide

[Steps for Selecting an LM Guide]
0
The following is a flowchart as a measuring stick for selecting an LM Guide.
Selection Starts
1 Setting Conditions Set conditions necessary for designing load on the LM Guide
Change span, number
of LM blocks and Mounting orientation A-58 Symbol for number of axes A-59
number of LM rails
Select a type that meets the conditions and temporarily

2 Selecting a Type decide a rough size.
Change type and size
SHS, SSR, SNR, SNS, SHW, SRS, SCR, HSR, SR, NR, NRS, HRW, A-48
RSR, RSR-Z, RSH, RSH-Z, HR, GSR, GSR-R, CSR, MX, JR, HCR, HMG, to
NSR-TBC, HSR-M1, SR-M1, RSR-M1, HSR-M2, SRG, SRN, SRW A-57
3 Calculating the Applied Load Calculate the applied load on the LM block.
Load rating of the LM Guide in all directions A-74 Calculating the applied load A-75
4 Calculating the Equivalent Load Convert the load applied on each LM block
in each direction into an equivalent load. A-94
5 Calculating the Static Safety Factor Obtain the value of static safety factor from the basic
static load rating and the maximum applied load. A-95
Judgment on the
static safety factor
NO
YES
6 Calculating the Average Load Average the applied load fluctuating during operation
to convert the value to an average load. A-96
Calculate the the distance traveled based on the

7 Calculating the Nominal Life nominal life equation. A-100
Comparison with the

required service life
NO
YES
Selection According to the Environment
1 Lubrication Type of lubricant, lubrication method A-954-
2 Corrosion Prevention Material, surface treatment A-60-
3 Contamination Protection A-352-
Selection Completed
A-46
Point of Selection
Flowchart for Selecting an LM Guide
LM Guide
•Space in the guide section
•Dimensions (span, number of LM blocks, number of LM rails, thrust)
•Installation direction (horizontal, vertical, slant mount, wall mount, suspended)
•Magnitude, direction and position of the working load
•Operating frequency (duty cycle)
•Speed (acceleration)
•Stroke length
•Required service life
•Precision of motion
•Environment
•In a special environment (vacuum, clean room, high temperature, environment exposed to
contaminated environment, etc.), it is necessary to take into account material, surface treatment,
lubrication and contamination protection.
Prediction the Rigidity Determining the Accuracy

1 Selecting a Radial Clearance (Preload) A-111 1 Accuracy Standards A-116
Guidelines for Accuracy Grades
2 Service Life with a Preload Considered A-112 2 by Machine Type A-117
3 Rigidity A-112 3 Accuracy Standard for Each Model A-118-
4 Radial Clearance Standard for Each Model A-113-
5 Designing the Guide System A-318-
A-47
Selecting a Type
Types of LM Guides
THK offers a wide array of types and dimensions with LM Guides as standard so that you can select
the optimal product for any application. With the unit structure of each model, you can easily obtain
high running accuracy with no clearance simply by mounting the product on a plane surface with
bolts. We have a proven track record and know-how in extensive applications with LM Guides.
Basic load rating (kN)
Specifi- Load
Classification Type cation capacity Basic Basic
Table＊ diagram dynamic static
load rating load rating
SSR-XW XB-16 14.7 to 64.6 16.5 to 71.6
Caged Ball
SSR-XV XB-18 9.1 to 21.7 9.7 to 22.5
LM Guide
SSR-XTB XB-20 14.7 to 31.5 16.5 to 36.4
Model SR-W XB-86 9.51 to 411 19.3 to 537
SR-M1W XB-192 9.51 to 41.7 19.3 to 77.2
SR-V XB-86 5.39 to 23.8 11.1 to 44.1
SR-M1V XB-192 5.39 to 23.8 11.1 to 44.1

Full-ball
LM Guides
SR-TB XB-88 9.51 to 89.1 19.3 to 157
SR-M1TB XB-194 9.51 to 41.7 19.3 to 77.2
SR-SB XB-88 5.39 to 23.8 11.1 to 44.1

Radial type
SR- M1SB XB-194 5.39 to 23.8 11.1 to 44.1
SNR-C XB-30 48 to 260 79 to 409
SNR-LC XB-30 57 to 550 101 to 887
SNR-R XB-26 48 to 260 79 to 409

Caged Ball SNR-LR XB-26 57 to 550 101 to 887
LM Guide -
ultra-heavy load,
high rigidity types SNR-CH XB-38 90 to 177 144 to 292
SNR-LCH XB-38 108 to 214 188 to 383
SNR-RH XB-34 90 to 177 144 to 292
SNR-LRH XB-34 108 to 214 188 to 383
NR-A XB-98 33 to 479 84.6 to 1040

Full-ball
LM Guide -
ultra-heavy load,
NR-LA XB-98 44 to 599 113 to 1300
high rigidity types
NR-B XB-102 33 to 479 84.6 to 1040
＊For specification tables for each model, please see the separate "B Product Specifications".
A-48
Point of Selection
Selecting a Type
LM Guide
External dimensions (mm)
Features Major application
Height Width
z Long service life, long-term mainte- z Thin, compact design, large radial
24 to 48 34 to 70 nance-free operation load capacity
z Surface grinder table
z Tool grinder table
z Low dust generation, low noise, z Superb in planar running accuracy
z Electric discharge machine
24 to 33 34 to 48 acceptable running sound z Superb capability of absorbing
z Printed circuit board drilling
z Superbly high speed mounting error
machine
z Smooth motion in all mounting ori- z Stainless steel type also available
24 to 33 52 to 73 entations as standard
z Chip mounter
z High-speed transfer equip-
ment
24 to 135 34 to 250 z Traveling unit of robots
z Machining center
24 to 48 34 to 70 z NC lathe
z Five axis milling machine
z Conveyance system
24 to 48 34 to 70 z Mold guide of pressing
z Thin, compact design, large radial load capacity machines
24 to 48 34 to 70 z Superb in planar running accuracy z Inspection equipment
z Superb capability of absorbing mounting error z Testing machine
z Stainless steel type also available as standard z Food-related machine
24 to 68 52 to 140 z Medical equipment
z Type M1, achieving max service temperature of 150℃, also available
z 3D measuring instrument
24 to 48 52 to 100 z Packaging machine
z Injection molding machine
z Woodworking machine
24 to 48 52 to 100 z Ultra precision table
z Semiconductor/liquid crystal
24 to 48 52 to 100 manufacturing equipment
31 to 75 72 to 170 z Long service life, long-term maintenance-free operation

z Low dust generation, low noise, acceptable running sound
z Superbly high speed
31 to 90 72 to 215 z Smooth motion in all mounting orientations
z Ultra-heavy load capacity optimal for machine tools
31 to 75 50 to 126 z Thin, compact design, large radial load capacity
z High vibration resistance and impact resistance due to improved damping
characteristics z Machining center
31 to 90 50 to 156 z Superb in planar running accuracy z NC lathe
z Grinding machine
z Long service life, long-term mainte- z Large radial load capacity z Five axis milling machine
48 to 70 100 to 140 z Jig borer
nance-free operation z High vibration resistance and
z Low dust generation, low noise, impact resistance due to improved z Drilling machine
48 to 70 100 to 140 acceptable running sound damping characteristics z NC milling machine
z Superbly high speed z Superb in planar running accuracy z Horizontal milling machine
55 to 80 70 to 100 z Smooth motion in all mounting ori- z Has dimensions almost the same z Mold processing machine
entations as that of the full-ball type LM z Graphite working machine
z Ultra-heavy load capacity optimal Guide model HSR, which is practi- z Electric discharge machine
55 to 80 70 to 100 for machine tools cally a global standard size z Wire-cut electric discharge
machine
31 to 105 72 to 260 z Ultra-heavy load capacity optimal for machine tools

31 to 105 72 to 260 characteristics
z Thin, compact design, large radial load capacity
z Superb in planar running accuracy
31 to 105 72 to 260
A-49
Load
Specifica- Basic Basic
Classification Type tion Table＊ capacity
diagram dynamic static
NR-LB XB-102 44 to 599 113 to 1300
Radial type
Full-ball
LM Guide -
NR-R XB-94 33 to 479 84.6 to 1040
ultra-heavy load,
high rigidity types
NR-LR XB-94 44 to 599 113 to 1300
SRG-A, C XB-208 11.3 to 131 25.8 to 266
SRG-LA, LC XB-208 26.7 to 278 63.8 to 599
SRG-R, V XB-210 11.3 to 131 25.8 to 266
Caged Roller SRG-LR, LV XB-210 26.7 to 278 63.8 to 599

LM Guide -
super ultra-heavy- SRN-C XB-214 59.1 to 131 119 to 266
load, high rigidity
types SRN-LC XB-214 76 to 278 165 to 599
SRN-R XB-216 59.1 to 131 119 to 266
SRN-LR XB-216 76 to 278 165 to 599
SRW-LR XB-220 115 to 278 256 to 599
SNS-C XB-32 37 to 199 61 to 315

4-way equal load type
SNS-LC XB-32 44 to 422 78 to 679
SNS-R XB-28 37 to 199 61 to 315

Caged Ball SNS-LR XB-28 44 to 422 78 to 679
LM Guide -
ultra-heavy load,
high rigidity types SNS-CH XB-40 69 to 136 110 to 225
SNS-LCH XB-40 83 to 164 144 to 295
SNS-RH XB-36 69 to 136 110 to 225
SNS-LRH XB-36 83 to 164 144 to 295
NRS-A XB-100 25.9 to 376 59.8 to 737
NRS-LA XB-100 34.5 to 470 79.7 to 920

Full-ball NRS-B XB-104 25.9 to 376 59.8 to 737
LM Guide -
ultra-heavy load,
high rigidity types NRS-LB XB-104 34.5 to 470 79.7 to 920
NRS-R XB-96 25.9 to 376 59.8 to 737
NRS-LR XB-96 34.5 to 470 79.7 to 920
A-50
Point of Selection
Selecting a Type

Height Width
31 to 105 72 to 260
31 to 105 50 to 200 characteristics
LM Guide
z Thin, compact design, large radial load capacity
z Superb in planar running accuracy
31 to 105 50 to 200
24 to 70 47 to 140
z Long service life, long-term maintenance-free operation
30 to 90 63 to 170 z Low noise, acceptable running sound
z Smooth motion due to prevention of rollers from skewing
30 to 90 44 to 126
44 to 63 100 to 140

z Low noise, acceptable running sound
44 to 63 70 to 100 z Superbly high speed
z Smooth motion due to prevention of rollers from skewing
44 to 75 70 to 126 z Low center of gravity, ultra-high rigidity
z Machining center
z NC lathe
70 to 100 135 to 200 z Grinding machine
z Five axis milling machine
z Jig borer
31 to 75 72 to 170 z Drilling machine
z Long service life, long-term maintenance-free operation
z NC milling machine
z Horizontal milling machine
31 to 90 72 to 215 z Superbly high speed
z Mold processing machine
z Smooth motion in all mounting orientations
z Graphite working machine
z Electric discharge machine
31 to 75 50 to 126 z Thin, compact design, 4-way equal load
z Wire-cut electric discharge
machine
characteristics
31 to 90 50 to 156
z Long service life, long-term mainte- z 4-way equal load type
48 to 70 100 to 140 nance-free operation z High vibration resistance and
z Low dust generation, low noise, impact resistance due to improved
acceptable running sound damping characteristics
48 to 70 100 to 140 z Superbly high speed z Has dimensions almost the same
z Smooth motion in all mounting ori- as that of the full-ball type LM
entations Guide model HSR, which is practi-
55 to 80 70 to 100 z Ultra-heavy load capacity optimal cally a global standard size
for machine tools
55 to 80 70 to 100
31 to 105 72 to 260
31 to 105 72 to 260

characteristics
31 to 105 72 to 260 z Thin, compact design, 4-way equal load
31 to 105 50 to 200
31 to 105 50 to 200
A-51
Load
SHS-C XB-6 14.2 to 205 24.2 to 320
SHS-LC XB-6 17.2 to 253 31.9 to 408

Caged Ball SHS-V XB-8 14.2 to 205 24.2 to 320
LM Guide -
heavy-load, high
rigidity types SHS-LV XB-8 17.2 to 253 31.9 to 408
SHS-R XB-10 14.2 to 128 24.2 to 197
SHS-LR XB-10 36.8 to 161 64.7 to 259
HSR-A XB-62 8.33 to 210 13.5 to 310
HSR-M1A XB-182 8.33 to 37.3 13.5 to 61.1
HSR-LA XB-62 21.3 to 282 31.8 to 412
HSR-M1LA XB-182 21.3 to 50.2 31.8 to 81.5
HSR-CA XB-76 13.8 to 210 23.8 to 310
HSR-HA XB-76 21.3 to 518 31.8 to 728

HSR-B XB-64 8.33 to 210 13.5 to 310
HSR-M1B XB-184 8.33 to 37.3 13.5 to 61.1

Full-ball LM Guide -
heavy-load, high HSR-LB XB-64 21.3 to 282 31.8 to 412
rigidity types
HSR-M1LB XB-184 21.3 to 50.2 31.8 to 81.5
HSR-CB XB-78 13.8 to 210 23.8 to 310
HSR-HB XB-78 21.3 to 518 31.8 to 728
HSR-R XB-70 1.08 to 210 2.16 to 310
HSR-M1R XB-186 8.33 to 37.3 13.5 to 61.1
HSR-LR XB-70 21.3 to 282 31.8 to 412
HSR-M1LR XB-186 21.3 to 50.2 31.8 to 81.5
HSR-HR XB-80 351 to 518 506 to 728
HSR-YR XB-74 8.33 to 141 13.5 to 215

side mount types
HSR-M1YR XB-188 8.33 to 37.3 13.5 to 61.1
A-52
Point of Selection
Selecting a Type

Height Width
24 to 90 47 to 170
LM Guide
24 to 90 34 to 126
z Smooth motion in all mounting orientations
z Heavy load, high rigidity
24 to 90 34 to 126 z Has dimensions almost the same as that of the full-ball type LM
Guide model HSR, which is practically a global standard size
28 to 80 34 to 100 z Superb capability of absorbing mounting error z Machining center
z NC lathe
28 to 80 34 to 100 z XYZ axes of heavy cut-
ting machine tools
24 to 110 47 to 215 z Grinding head feeding
axis of grinding
24 to 48 47 to 100 machines
z Components requiring a
heavy moment and high
30 to 110 63 to 215
accuracy
z NC milling machine
30 to 48 63 to 100 z Horizontal milling
machine
30 to 110 63 to 215 z Gantry five axis milling
machine
30 to 145 63 to 350 z Z axis of electric dis-
charge machines
24 to 110 47 to 215 z Wire-cut electric dis-
z Heavy load, high rigidity
charge machine
z Practically a global standard size
24 to 48 47 to 100 z Car elevator
z Superb capability of absorbing mounting error
z Food-related machine
z Stainless steel type also available as standard
z Testing machine
30 to 110 63 to 215 z Type M1, achieving max service temperature of 150℃, also
z Vehicle doors
available
z Printed circuit board
30 to 48 63 to 100 z Type M2, with high corrosion resistance, also available
drilling machine
(Basic dynamic load rating: 2.33 to 5.57 kN)
z ATC
30 to 110 63 to 215 (Basic static load rating: 2.03 to 5.16 kN)
z Construction equipment
z Shield machine
30 to 145 63 to 350 z Semiconductor/liquid
crystal manufacturing
11 to 110 16 to 156 equipment
28 to 55 34 to 70
30 to 110 44 to 156
30 to 55 44 to 70
120 to 145 250 to 266

z Easy mounting and reduced z Heavy load, high rigidity z Cross rails of gantry
mounting height when using z Superb capability of absorb- machine tools
28 to 90 33.5 to 124.5 2 units opposed to each other ing mounting error z Z axis of woodworking
since the side faces of the LM z Stainless steel type also machines
block have mounting holes available as standard z Z axis of measuring
z Type M1, achieving max ser- instruments
28 to 55 33.5 to 69.5 vice temperature of 150℃, z Components opposed to
also available each other
A-53
Load
JR-A XB-164 19.9 to 88.5 34.4 to 137

Full-ball
LM Guides -
JR-B XB-164 19.9 to 88.5 34.4 to 137
special LM rail
types
JR-R XB-164 19.9 to 88.5 34.4 to 137
Caged Ball Cross

SCR XB-56 36.8 to 253 64.7 to 408
LM Guide
CSR XB-154 8.33 to 80.4 13.5 to 127.5
orthogonal type
SHW-CA XB-44 4.31 to 70.2 5.66 to 91.4

Caged Ball
LM Guide -
wide, low center of
gravity types SHW-CR, HR XB-46 4.31 to 70.2 5.66 to 91.4
Full-ball HRW-CA XB-108 4.31 to 63.8 81.4 to 102

LM Guide -
wide, low center of
gravity types HRW-CR, LR XB-110 3.29 to 50.2 7.16 to 81.5
Straight section
Full-ball Straight - 4.23 to 66.7
HMG XB-172 2.56 to 66.2 Curved section
Curved Guide
0.44 to 36.2
HR, HR-T XB-138 1.57 to 141 3.04 to 206
separate types
GSR-T XB-146 5.69 to 25.1 8.43 to 33.8
Interchangeable
GSR-V XB-146 4.31 to 10.29 5.59 to 12.65

designs
Full-ball LM Guides -
LM rail-rack inter- GSR-R XB-150 10.29 to 25.1 12.65 to 33.8
grated type
A-54
Point of Selection
Selecting a Type

Height Width
61 to 114 70 to 140 z Since the central part of the LM rail is

z Automated warehouse z Lifter
thinly structured, the LM Guide is capa-
z Garage z Crane
ble of absorbing an error and achieving
z Gantry robot z Forklift
smooth motion if the parallelism between
LM Guide
61 to 114 70 to 140 the two axes is poor
z FMS traveling rail z Coating machine
z Lift z Shield machine
z Since the LM rail has a highly rigid sec-
z Conveyance system z Stage setting
tional shape, it can be used as a struc-
65 to 124 48 to 100 z Welding machine
tural member
z A compact XY structure is allowed due to

an XY orthogonal, single-piece LM block
z Since a saddle-less structure is allowed,
the machine can be lightweighted and z Low center of gravity, preci- z Wire-cut electric discharge
compactly designed sion XY table machine
70 to 180 88 to 226 z Long service life, long-term maintenance- z NC lathe z Hollow table
free operation z Optical measuring instrument z Printed circuit board assem-
z Low dust generation, low noise, accept- z Automatic lathe bler
able running sound z Inspection equipment z Machine tool table
z Superbly high speed z Cartesian coordinate robot z Electric discharge machine
z Bonding machine z XY axes of horizontal
z A compact XY structure is allowed due to machining center
an XY orthogonal, single-piece LM block
47 to 118 38.8 to 129.8 z Since a saddle-less structure is allowed,
the machine can be lightweighted and
compactly designed
z Long service life, long-term maintenance-

free operation
12 to 50 40 to 162 z Low dust generation, low noise, accept-
able running sound
z Smooth motion in all mounting orientations z Z axis of IC printed circuit z APC
z Wide, low center of gravity, space saving board drilling machine z Semiconductor/liquid crystal
12 to 50 30 to 130 structure z Z axis of small electric dis- manufacturing equipment
z Stainless steel type also available as charge machine z Measuring instrument
standard z Loader z Wafer transfer equipment
z Machining center z Construction equipment
z NC lathe z Railroad vehicle
17 to 60 60 to 200 z Robot
z 4-way equal load, thin and highly rigid z Wire-cut electric discharge
z Wide, low center of gravity, space saving machine
structure
z Stainless steel type also available as
12 to 50 30 to 130 standard
z Large swivel base z CT scanner

z Pendulum vehicle for railroad z Medical equipment
z Freedom of design z Pantagraph z Stage setting
24 to 90 47 to 170 z Cost reduction through simplified struc- z Control unit z Car elevator
ture z Optical measuring machine z Amusement machine
z Tool grinder z Turntable
z X-Ray machine z Tool changer
z XYZ axes of electric dis- z Machining center
z Thin, high rigidity, space saving structure
charge machine z Wire-cut electric discharge
z Interchangeable with Cross-Roller Guide
z Precision table machine
8.5 to 60 18 to 125 z Preload can be adjusted
z XZ axes of NC lathe z Tool changer
z Stainless steel type also available as
z Assembly robot z Woodworking machine
standard
z Conveyance system
20 to 38 32 to 68 z LM block and LM rail are both inter- z Industrial robot

changeable
z Various conveyance systems
z Preload can be adjusted
z Capable of absorbing vertical level error z Automated warehouse
20 to 30 32 to 50 and horizontal tolerance for parallelism z Palette changer
z ATC
z Door closing device
z LM rail-rack integrated design eliminates z Guide using an aluminum mold base
59.91 to assembly and adjustment work z Welding machine
30 to 38 z LM rail-rack integrated design enables a z
80.18 space-saving structure to be achieved
Coating machine
z Car washing machine
z Capable of supporting long strokes
A-55
Specifica- Load capac- Basic Basic
Classification Type tion Table＊ ity diagram dynamic static
SRS XB-50 1.51 to 16.5 1.29 to 20.2
Caged Ball
LM Guides
SRS-W XB-52 2.01 to 9.12 1.94 to 8.55
RSR, RSR-K, RSR-V XB-116 0.18 to 8.82 0.27 to 12.7
RSR-M1V XB-198 1.47 to 8.82 2.25 to 12.7

Full-ball
RSR-N XB-114 0.3 to 14.2 0.44 to 20.6
LM Guides
RSR-M1N XB-198 2.6 to 14.2 3.96 to 20.6
Miniature types
RSR-Z XB-122 0.88 to 4.41 1.37 to 6.57
RSR-W, WV XB-118 0.25 to 6.66 0.47 to 9.8
RSR-M1WV XB-200 2.45 to 6.66 3.92 to 9.8

Full-ball
LM Guide - RSR-WN XB-118 0.39 to 9.91 0.75 to 14.9
wide types
RSR-M1WN XB-200 3.52 to 9.91 5.37 to 14.9
RSR-WZ XB-124 1.37 to 6.66 2.16 to 9.8
Full-ball RSH, RSH-K,

XB-128 0.88 to 2.65 1.37 to 4.02
LM Guide - RSH-V
ball-retaining
plate types RSH-Z XB-132 0.88 to 4.41 1.37 to 6.57
Full-ball
LM Guide - MX XB-160 0.59 to 2.04 1.1 to 3.21
orthogonal type
Circular arc types
Full-ball
HCR XB-168 4.7 to 141 8.53 to 215
LM Guides
Self-aligning
Full-ball
types
NSR-TBC XB-178 9.41 to 90.8 18.6 to 152

LM Guides
A-56
Point of Selection
Selecting a Type

Height Width
z Long service life, long-term mainte-

nance-free operation z IC/LSI manufacturing z Electronic components of
8 to 25 17 to 48 z Low dust generation, low noise, machine electron microscope
LM Guide
acceptable running sound z Hard disc drive z Optical stage
z Superbly high speed z Slide unit of OA equipment z Stepper
z Smooth motion in all mounting ori- z Wafer transfer equipment z Plotting machine
entations z Printed circuit board assem- z Feed mechanism of IC bond-
z Stainless steel type also available bly table ing machine
9 to 16 25 to 60
as standard z Medical equipment z Inspection equipment
z Lightweight and compact
4 to 25 8 to 46
z Stainless steel type also available
10 to 25 20 to 46 as standard
z Long type with increased load
4 to 25 8 to 46 capacity also offered as standard
z Type M1, achieving max service
temperature of 150℃, also avail-
10 to 25 20 to 46 able
z IC/LSI manufacturing machine
z Hard disc drive
8 to 16 17 to 32
z Slide unit of OA equipment
z Wafer transfer equipment
4.5 to 16 12 to 60 z Printed circuit board assembly table
z Medical equipment
z Stainless steel type also available z Electronic components of electron microscope
12 to 16 30 to 60 as standard z Optical stage
z Long type with increased load z Stepper
4.5 to 16 12 to 60 capacity also offered as standard z Plotting machine
z Type M1, achieving max service z Feed mechanism of IC bonding machine
temperature of 150℃, also avail- z Inspection equipment
12 to 16 30 to 60 able
9 to 16 25 to 60
8 to 13 17 to 27 z Equipped with a ball retainer

as standard
8 to 16 17 to 32
z IC/LSI manufacturing machine z Printed circuit board assem-
z A compact XY structure is allowed
z Inspection equipment bly table
due to an XY orthogonal, single-
z Slide unit of OA equipment z Medical equipment
10 to 14.5 15.2 to 30.2 piece LM block
z Wafer transfer equipment z Electronic components of
z Feed mechanism of IC bond- electron microscope
as standard
ing machine z Optical stage
z Circular motion guide in a 4-way

equal load design z Large swivel base z CT scanner
z Highly accurate circular motion z Pendulum vehicle for railroad z Medical equipment
without play z Pantagraph z Stage setting
18 to 90 39 to 170 z Allows an efficient design with the z Control unit z Car elevator
LM block placed in the loading z Optical measuring machine z Amusement machine
point z Tool grinder z Turntable
z Large circular motion easily z X-Ray machine z Tool changer
achieved
z Can be used in rough mount due to z XY axes of ordinary industrial machinery

self-aligning on the fit surface of z Various conveyance systems
the case z Automated warehouse
40 to 105 70 to 175 z Preload can be adjusted z Palette changer
z Can be mounted on a black steel z Automatic coating machine
sheet z Various welding machines
A-57
Setting Conditions
Conditions of the LM Guide
[Mounting Orientation]
The LM Guide can be mounted in the following five orientations. If oil is to be used as a lubricant, it is
necessary to change the lubrication routing and the related settings. When ordering an LM Guide,
please specify the mounting orientation.
[Mounting Orientation]
Horizontal (symbol: H) Inverted (symbol: R) Wall mount (symbol: K)
Up Up Up
Down Down Down
Vertical (symbol: V) Slant mount (symbol: T)
Up
Up
Down Down
A-58
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
[Symbol for Number of Axes]

With the LM Guide, the normal and high-accuracy grades are interchangeable when two or more
units of the LM Guide are used in combination on the same plane. However, when using two or more
units of a model of precision or higher grade, or with a radial clearance of C1 or C0, specify the num-
ber of LM rails (symbol for number of axes) in advance.
(For accuracy standards and radial clearance standards, see A-118 and A-113, respectively.)
LM Guide
Model number coding
SHS25C2SSCO+1000LP -Ⅱ
Model number (details are given on the Symbol for number of axes
corresponding page of the model) ("II" indicates 2 axes. No symbol for a single axis)
[Symbol for Number of Axes]

Symbol for number of axes: Symbol for number of axes: Symbol for number of axes:
none Ⅱ Ⅱ
Required number of axes: 1 Required number of axes: 2 Required number of axes: 2
Note: Note:
When placing an order, specify When placing an order, specify
the number in multiple of 2 axes. the number in multiple of 2 axes.
Symbol for number of axes: Symbol for number of axes:

Other
Ⅲ Ⅳ
Required number of axes: 3 Required number of axes: 4 Required number of axes: 2
Note:
When placing an order, specify
the number in multiple of 3 axes. Using 2 axes opposed
to each other
Note:
When placing an order, specify
the number in multiple of 4 axes.
A-59
[Service environment]
z Lubrication
When using an LM system, it is necessary to provide effective lubrication. Without lubrication, the
rolling elements or the raceway may be worn faster and the service life may be shortened.
A lubricant has effects such as the following.
(1) Minimizes friction in moving elements to prevent seizure and reduce wear.
(2) Forms an oil film on the raceway to decrease stress acting on the surface and extend rolling
fatigue life.
(3) Covers the metal surface to prevent rust formation.
conditions.
z Corrosion Prevention
Determining a Material
Any LM system requires a material that meets the environments. For use in environments where cor-
rosion resistance is required, some LM system models can use martensite stainless steel.
(Martensite stainless steel can be used for LM Guide models SSR, SHW, SRS, HSR, SR, HRW,
RSR, RSR-Z, RSH RSH-Z and HR.)
The HSR series includes HSR-M2, a highly corrosion resistant LM Guide using austenite stainless
steel, which has high anti-corrosive effect. For details, see A-292.
Surface Treatment
The surfaces of the rails and shafts of LM systems can be treated for anti-corrosive or aesthetic pur-
poses.
THK offers THK-AP treatment, which is the optimum surface treatment for LM systems.
There are roughly three types of THK-AP treatment: AP-HC, AP-C, and AP-CF. (See A-20.)
z Contamination Protection
When foreign material enters an LM system, it will cause abnormal wear or shorten the service life,
and it is necessary to prevent foreign material from entering the system. When entrance of dust or
other foreign material is predicted, it is important to select an effective sealing device or dust-control
device that meets the environment conditions.
THK offers contamination protection accessories for LM Guides by model number, such as end seals
made of special synthetic rubber with high wear resistance, and side seals and inner seals for further
increasing dust-prevention effect.
In addition, for locations with adverse environment, Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS and dedicated
bellows are available by model number. Also, THK offers dedicated caps for LM rail mounting holes,
designed to prevent cutting chips from entering the LM rail mounting holes.
When it is required to provide contamination protection for a Ball Screw in an environment exposed
to cutting chips and moisture, we recommend using a telescopic cover that protects the whole sys-
tem or a large bellows.
A-60
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
LM Guide
A-61
[Special environments]
Clean Room
In a clean environment like clean rooms,
generation of dust from the LM system Caged Ball LM Guide
has to be reduced and anti-rust oil cannot
be used. Therefore, it is necessary to
increase the corrosion resistance of the Supported SHS SSR SNR/SNS
LM system. In addition, depending on the
models
SHW SRS SCR
level of cleanliness, a dust collector is
required.
Dust Generation from the LM System Caged Roller LM Guide

■Measure to Prevent Dust Generation
Resulting from Flying Grease Supported
SRG SRN SRW
models
THK AFE-CA and AFF Grease

Use environmentally clean grease that
produces little dust.
■Measure to Prevent Dust Generation

Resulting from Metallic Abrasion Dust Stainless Steel LM Guide
Caged Ball LM Guide
Use the Caged Ball LM Guide, which has
Supported SSR SHW SRS HSR SR
no friction between balls and generates models
HRW HR RSR RSH
little metallic abrasion dust, to allow
generation of dust to be minimized.
Corrosion Prevention
■Material-based Measure
Stainless Steel LM Guide Highly Corrosion Resistant
This LM Guide uses martensite stainless LM Guide
steel, which has an anti-corrosion effect.
Highly Corrosion Resistant LM Guide

It uses austenite stainless steel, which has
a high anti-corrosion effect, in its LM rail.
Surface Treatment
■Measure Through Surface Treatment
THK AP-HC, AP-C and AP-CF Treatment
The LM system is surface treated to
increase corrosion resistance.
Grease
A-62
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
SHS SSR SNR/SNS
A-136 A-142 A-148
LM Guide
SHW SRS SCR
A-156 A-160 A-166
SRG SRN SRW
A-300 A-306 A-312
SSR SHW SRS HSR SR
A-142 A-156 A-160 A-170 A-178

HRW HR RSR RSH
A-194 A-224 A-200 A-214
HSR-M2
A-292
THK AP-HC Treatment
A-20
THK AFE-CA Grease THK AFF Grease
A-963 A-965
A-63
Vacuum High Temperature
In a vacuum environment, measures LM Guide
to prevent gas from being emitted
from a resin and grease from flying
are required and anti-rust oil cannot Supported
models HSR-M1 SR-M1 RSR-M1
be used. Therefore, it is necessary
to select a product with high
corrosion resistance.
■Measure to Prevent Emission Highly Corrosion

of Gas from Resin
Stainless Steel LM Guide
Resistant LM Guide
It uses stainless steel in the endplate (ball
circulation unit made of resin) of the LM
block to reduce emission of gas.
■Measure to Prevent Grease

from Evaporating
Vacuum Grease
If a general-purpose grease is used in a
vacuum environment, oil contained in the
grease evaporates and the grease looses
lubricity. Therefore, use a vacuum grease
that uses fluorine based oil, whose vapor Stainless Steel
pressure is low, as the base oil.
LM Guide
■Corrosion Prevention
In a vacuum environment, use a stainless
steel LM Guide, which is highly corrosion Supported SSR SHW SRS HSR SR
resistant.
models
HRW HR RSR RSH
High Temperature LM Guide
If high temperature is predicted due to
baking, use a High Temperature LM Guide,
which is highly resistant to heat and
corrosion.
■Highly Corrosion Resistant LM Guide

This LM Guide uses austenite stainless
steel, which has a high anti-corrosion
effect, in the LM rail.
Vacuum Grease
A-64
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
HSR-M1 SR-M1 RSR-M1
LM Guide
A-272 A-280 A-286
HSR-M2
A-292
SSR SHW SRS
A-142 A-156 A-160

HSR SR HRW
A-170 A-178 A-194

HR RSR RSH
A-224 A-200 A-214
A-65
Corrosion
Prevention
As with clean room applications, it is
necessary to increase corrosion
resistance through material selection and Stainless Steel
surface treatment. LM Guide

■Material-based Measure
models
HRW HR RSR RSH
This LM Guide uses martensite stainless
steel, which has an anti-corrosion effect.
Highly Corrosion Resistant LM Guide

It uses austenite stainless steel, which has
a high anti-corrosion effect, in its LM rail.
■Measure Through Surface Treatment

Highly Corrosion
THK AP-HC, AP-C and AP-CF Treatment
Resistant LM Guide
The LM system is surface treated to
increase corrosion resistance.
Surface Treatment
A-66
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
SSR SHW SRS
LM Guide
A-142 A-156 A-160
HSR SR HRW
A-170 A-178 A-194

HR RSR RSH
A-224 A-200 A-214
HSR-M2
A-292
THK AP-HC
Treatment
A-20
THK AP-C
Treatment
A-20
THK AP-CF
Treatment
A-20
A-67
High Speed
In a high speed environment, it is
necessary to apply an optimum Caged Ball LM Guide
lubrication method that reduces
heat generation during high speed
operation and increases grease Supported SHS SSR SNR/SNS
retention.
models
SHW SRS SCR
■Measures to Reduce Heat Generation

Caged Ball LM Guide
Use of a ball cage eliminates friction
between balls to reduce heat generation.
In addition, grease retention is increased,
thus to achieve long service life and high Supported
SRG SRN SRW
speed operation. models
High Speed Ball Screw with Ball Cage

Use of a ball cage and an ideal ball High Speed Ball Screw
recirculation structure enables fast
feeding, which conventional products with Ball Cage
have not achieved.
THK AFG Grease Supported

models SBK SBN
It reduces heat generation in high speed
operation and has superb lubricity.
■Measure to Improve Lubrication

QZ Lubricator
Since it supplements oil loss, the
lubrication and maintenance interval can
significantly be extended. It also applies QZ Lubricator
the right amount of oil to the raceway,
making itself an eco-friendly lubrication
system that does not contaminate the
surrounding area.
Grease
A-68
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
SHS SSR SNR/SNS
LM Guide
A-136 A-142 A-148
SHW SRS SCR
A-156 A-160 A-166
SRG SRN SRW
A-300 A-306 A-312
SBK SBN
A-748 A-748
QZ Lubricator
for the LM Guide
A-361
QZ Lubricator for
the Ball Screw
A-817
THK AFG Grease
A-968
A-69
High Temperature
In a high temperature environment, dimensional High Temperature
alteration caused by heat is problematic. Use a High
Temperature LM Guide, which is heat resistant and
whose dimensions little change after being heated, and
LM Guide
a high temperature grease.
■Heat Resistance Supported

HSR-M1 SR-M1 RSR-M1
models
High Temperature LM Guide
It is an LM Guide that is highly resistant to heat
and whose dimensions little change after being
heated and cooled.
■Grease High Temperature

High Temperature Grease
Use a high temperature grease with which the
Grease
rolling resistance of the LM system little
fluctuates even temperature changes from a
normal to high range.
Low Temperature Stainless Steel

Use an LM system whose resin component are little
affected by low temperature, as a measure to increase
corrosion resistance in transition from normal to low
LM Guide
temperature, and a grease with a low rolling resistance
fluctuation even at low temperature.

■Impact of Low Temperature on Resin Components models
HRW HR RSR RSH
The endplate (ball circulation path normally
made of resin) of the LM block is made of
stainless steel.
■Corrosion Prevention Surface Treatment

Provide surface treatment to the LM system to
increase its corrosion resistance.
■Grease
Use THK AFC Grease, with which the rolling
resistance of the system little fluctuates even
at low temperature.
Grease
Micro Motion
Micro strokes cause oil film break and poor lubrication,
resulting in early wear. In such cases, select a grease
with which the oil film strength is high and an oil film
can easily be formed.
■Grease
THK AFC Grease
Grease
AFC Grease is a urea-based grease that excels
in oil film strength and wear resistance.
A-70
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
HSR-M1 SR-M1 RSR-M1
LM Guide
A-272 A-280 A-286
SSR SHW SRS
A-142 A-156 A-160

HSR SR HRW
A-170 A-178 A-194

HR RSR RSH
A-224 A-200 A-214
THK AP-CF Treatment
A-20
THK AFC Grease
A-961
THK AFC Grease
A-961
A-71
LM Guide
Foreign Matter
If foreign matter enters the LM system, it will
+Metal Scraper
cause abnormal wear and shorten the service
life. Therefore, it is necessary to prevent such +Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS
entrance of foreign matter.
Especially in an environment containing +QZ Lubricator
minute foreign matter or a water-soluble
coolant that a telescopic cover or a bellows
cannot remove, it is necessary to attach a
contamination protection accessory capable
of efficiently removing foreign matter.
QZ Lubricator
LaCS
■Metal Scraper Metal Scraper
It is used to remove relatively large foreign

objects such as cutting chips, spatter and
sand or hard foreign matter that adhere to
the LM rail.
■Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS Supported

Caged Ball LM Guide
Unlike a metal scraper, it removes foreign
models
SHS SSR SNR/SNS SHW SRS
matter while it is in contact with the LM Full Ball LM Guide
rail. Therefore, it demonstrates a high HSR NR/NRS
contamination protection effect against
minute foreign matter, which has been
difficult to remove with conventional metal
scrapers.
■QZ Lubricator
QZ Lubricator is a lubrication system that +Metal Scraper
feeds the right amount of lubricant by
closely contacting its highly +Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS
oil-impregnated fiber net to the ball
raceway.
+QZ Lubricator
QZ Lubricator
LaCS
Metal
Scraper
Supported
models SRG
A-72
Point of Selection
Setting Conditions
Caged Ball LM Guide

SHS SSR SNR/SNS
LM Guide
A-136 A-142 A-148
SHW SRS
A-156 A-160
Full ball LM Guide

HSR NR/NRS
A-170 A-186

SRG
A-300
A-73
Calculating the Applied Load
The LM Guide is capable of receiving loads and moments in all directions that are generated due to
the mounting orientation, alignment, gravity center position of a traveling object, thrust position and
cutting resistance.
Reverse radial load Radial load
Lateral Lateral MA
Moment
load load in the pitching
direction
MB
Moment
in the yawing
direction
MC
Moment
in the rolling
direction
Fig.1 Directions of the Loads Applied on the LM Guide
Rated Load of an LM Guide in Each Direction

The LM Guide is categorized into roughly two types: the 4-way equal load type, which has the same
rated load in the radial, reverse radial and lateral directions, and the radial type, which has a large
rated load in the radial direction. With the radial type LM Guide, the rated load in the radial direction
is different from that in the reverse radial and lateral directions. When such loads are applied, multi-
ply the basic load rating by the corresponding factor. Those factors are specified in the respective
sections.
[Rated Loads in All Directions]
Type Load Distribution Curve
4-way Equal Load Type 0
– 1/2π 1/2π
Radial Type 0
– 1/2π 1/2π
A-74
Point of Selection
Calculating an Applied Load

[Single-Axis Use]
z Moment Equivalence
When the installation space for the LM Guide is limited, you may have to use only one LM block, or
double LM blocks closely contacting with each other. In such a setting, the load distribution is not uni-
form and, as a result, an excessive load is applied in localized areas (i.e., both ends) as shown in
LM Guide
Fig.2. Continued use under such conditions may result in flaking in those areas, consequently short-
ening the service life. In such a case, calculate the actual load by multiplying the moment value by
any one of the equivalent-moment factors specified in Table1 to Table9.
Moment load Moment load

Rows of balls under a load
Rows of balls under a load
LM rail Maximum applied load on a ball
Maximum ball deflection
Ball
displacement line Load distribution curve
Load distribution curve
Ball displacement line
Fig.2 Ball Load when a Moment is Applied
An equivalent-load equation applicable when a moment acts on an LM Guide is shown below.
P = K•M
P : Equivalent load per LM Guide (N)
K : Equivalent moment factor
M : Applied moment (N-mm)
A-75
z Equivalent Factor
Since the rated load is equivalent to the permissible moment, the equivalent factor to be multiplied
when equalizing the MA, MB and MC moments to the applied load per block is obtained by dividing the
rated loads in the corresponding directions.
With those models other than 4-way equal load types, however, the load ratings in the 4 directions
differ from each other. Therefore, the equivalent factor values for the MA and MC moments also differ
depending on whether the direction is radial or reverse radial.
Equivalent Factors for the MA Moment
PR=KAR•MA
Equivalent in the radial direction
PL=KAL•MA
Equivalent in the reverse-radial direction
Fig.3 Equivalent Factors for the MA Moment
Equivalent factors for the MA Moment

Equivalent factor C0
KAR=
in the radial direction MA
Equivalent factor in the C0L

KAL=
reverse radial direction MA
C0 C0L
= =1
KAR•MA KAL•MA
Equivalent Factors for the MB Moment
PT=KB•MB
Equivalent in the lateral direction
PT=KB•MB
Equivalent in the lateral direction
Fig.4 Equivalent Factors for the MB Moment
Equivalent factors for the MB Moment

Equivalent factor in C0T
KB=
the lateral directions MB
C0T
=1
KB•MB
A-76
Point of Selection
Equivalent Factors for the MC Moment
PR=KCR•MC
Equivalent in the radial direction
LM Guide
PL=KCL•MC
Equivalent in the reverse-radial direction
Fig.5 Equivalent Factors for the MC Moment
Equivalent factors for the MC Moment

Equivalent factor C0
KCR=
in the radial direction MC
Equivalent factor in the C0L

KCL=
reverse radial direction MC
C0 C0L
= =1
KCR•MC KCL•MC
C0 : Basic static load rating (radial direction) (N)
C0L : Basic static load rating (reverse radial direction) (N)
C0T : Basic static load rating (lateral direction) (N)
PR : Calculated load (radial direction) (N)
PL : Calculated load (reverse radial direction) (N)
PT : Calculated load (lateral direction) (N)
A-77
Table1 Equivalent Factors (Models SHS, SSR and SNR)
Equivalent factor
Model No.
KAR1 KAL1 KAR2 KAL2 KB1 KB2 KCR KCL
15 1.38×10-1 2.69×10-2 1.38×10-1 2.69×10-2 1.50×10-1
15L 1.07×10-1 2.22×10-2 1.07×10-1 2.22×10-2 1.50×10-1
20 1.15×10-1 2.18×10-2 1.15×10-1 2.18×10-2 1.06×10-1
20L 8.85×10 -2
1.79×10 -2
8.85×10 -2
1.79×10 -2
1.06×10-1
25 9.25×10-2 1.90×10-2 9.25×10-2 1.90×10-2 9.29×10-2
25L 7.62×10-2 1.62×10-2 7.62×10-2 1.62×10-2 9.29×10-2
30 8.47×10-2 1.63×10-2 8.47×10-2 1.63×10-2 7.69×10-2
30L 6.52×10 -2
1.34×10 -2
6.52×10 -2
1.34×10 -2
7.69×10-2
SHS
35 6.95×10 -2
1.43×10 -2
6.95×10 -2
1.43×10 -2
6.29×10-2
35L 5.43×10-2 1.16×10-2 5.43×10-2 1.16×10-2 6.29×10-2
45 6.13×10-2 1.24×10-2 6.13×10-2 1.24×10-2 4.69×10-2
45L 4.79×10 -2
1.02×10 -2
4.79×10 -2
1.02×10 -2
4.69×10-2
55 4.97×10 -2
1.02×10 -2
4.97×10 -2
1.02×10 -2
4.02×10-2
55L 3.88×10-2 8.30×10-3 3.88×10-2 8.30×10-3 4.02×10-2
65 3.87×10-2 7.91×10-3 3.87×10-2 7.91×10-3 3.40×10-2
65L 3.06×10-2 6.51×10-3 3.06×10-2 6.51×10-3 3.40×10-2
15XW (TB) 2.08×10 -1
1.04×10 -1
3.75×10 -2
1.87×10 -2
1.46×10 -1
2.59×10 -2
1.71×10-1 8.57×10-2
15XV 3.19×10-1 1.60×10-1 5.03×10-2 2.51×10-2 2.20×10-1 3.41×10-2 1.71×10-1 8.57×10-2
20XW (TB) 1.69×10-1 8.46×10-2 3.23×10-2 1.62×10-2 1.19×10-1 2.25×10-2 1.29×10-1 6.44×10-2
20XV 2.75×10-1 1.37×10-1 4.28×10-2 2.14×10-2 1.89×10-1 2.89×10-2 1.29×10-1 6.44×10-2
SSR
25XW (TB) 1.41×10-1 7.05×10-2 2.56×10-2 1.28×10-2 9.86×10-2 1.77×10-2 1.10×10-1 5.51×10-2
25XV 2.15×10-1 1.08×10-1 3.40×10-2 1.70×10-2 1.48×10-1 2.31×10-2 1.10×10-1 5.51×10-2
30XW 1.18×10-1 5.91×10-2 2.19×10-2 1.10×10-2 8.26×10-2 1.52×10-2 9.22×10-2 4.61×10-2
35XW 1.01×10-1 5.03×10-2 1.92×10-2 9.60×10-3 7.04×10-2 1.33×10-2 7.64×10-2 3.82×10-2
25 1.16×10-1 7.41×10-2 2.18×10-2 1.40×10-2 7.02×10-2 1.33×10-2 9.09×10-2 5.82×10-2
25L 8.79×10-2 5.62×10-2 1.82×10-2 1.16×10-2 5.41×10-2 1.13×10-2 9.09×10-2 5.82×10-2
30 1.02×10-1 6.51×10-2 1.86×10-2 1.19×10-2 6.16×10-2 1.13×10-2 8.11×10-2 5.19×10-2
30L 7.60×10-2 4.87×10-2 1.55×10-2 9.93×10-3 4.68×10-2 9.58×10-3 8.11×10-2 5.19×10-2
35 8.92×10-2 5.71×10-2 1.67×10-2 1.07×10-2 5.40×10-2 1.01×10-2 6.73×10-2 4.31×10-2
35L 7.01×10-2 4.48×10-2 1.37×10-2 8.79×10-3 4.27×10-2 8.41×10-3 6.73×10-2 4.31×10-2
SNR 45 6.55×10-2 4.19×10-2 1.35×10-2 8.62×10-3 4.03×10-2 8.32×10-3 5.10×10-2 3.27×10-2
45L 5.32×10-2 3.41×10-2 1.10×10-2 7.01×10-3 3.26×10-2 6.73×10-3 5.10×10-2 3.27×10-2
55 5.85×10-2 3.74×10-2 1.13×10-2 7.24×10-3 3.56×10-2 6.92×10-3 4.36×10-2 2.79×10-2
55L 4.55×10-2 2.91×10-2 9.36×10-3 5.99×10-3 2.79×10-2 5.75×10-3 4.36×10-2 2.79×10-2
65 5.07×10-2 3.25×10-2 9.92×10-3 6.35×10-3 3.09×10-2 6.06×10-3 3.70×10-2 2.37×10-2
65L 3.58×10-2 2.29×10-2 7.67×10-3 4.91×10-3 2.21×10-2 4.75×10-3 3.70×10-2 2.37×10-2
85L 2.92×10-2 1.87×10-2 6.20×10-3 4.00×10-3 1.80×10-2 3.80×10-3 2.78×10-2 1.78×10-2
KAR1 : Equivalent factor in the MA radial direction when one KAL2 : Equivalent factor in the MA reverse radial direction
LM block is used when two LM blocks are used in close contact with
KAL1 : Equivalent factor in the MA reverse radial direction each other
when one LM block is used KB1 : MB Equivalent factor when one LM block is used
KAR2 : Equivalent factor in the MA radial direction when two KB2 : MB Equivalent factor when two LM blocks are used in
LM blocks are used in close contact with each other close contact with each other
KCR : Equivalent factor in the MC radial direction
KCL : Equivalent factor in the MC reverse radial direction
A-78
Point of Selection
Table2 Equivalent Factors (Models SNS, SHW and SRS)
Equivalent factor
Model No.
25 1.12×10-1 9.42×10-2 2.11×10-2 1.78×10-2 1.02×10-1 1.91×10-2 9.41×10-2 7.90×10-2
25L 8.52×10-2 7.16×10-2 1.77×10-2 1.48×10-2 7.73×10-2 1.60×10-2 9.41×10-2 7.90×10-2
30 9.86×10-2 8.28×10-2 1.80×10-2 1.51×10-2 8.93×10-2 1.63×10-2 8.42×10-2 7.07×10-2
LM Guide
30L 7.37×10-2 6.19×10-2 1.50×10-2 1.26×10-2 6.68×10-2 1.36×10-2 8.42×10-2 7.07×10-2
35 8.64×10-2 7.26×10-2 1.61×10-2 1.36×10-2 7.83×10-2 1.46×10-2 7.01×10-2 5.89×10-2
35L 6.80×10-2 5.71×10-2 1.33×10-2 1.12×10-2 6.17×10-2 1.21×10-2 7.01×10-2 5.89×10-2
SNS 45 6.34×10-2 5.33×10-2 1.30×10-2 1.10×10-2 5.75×10-2 1.18×10-2 5.27×10-2 4.43×10-2
45L 5.17×10-2 4.34×10-2 1.06×10-2 8.94×10-3 4.69×10-2 9.64×10-3 5.27×10-2 4.43×10-2
55 5.67×10-2 4.76×10-2 1.10×10-2 9.22×10-3 5.14×10-2 9.94×10-3 4.52×10-2 3.80×10-2
55L 4.42×10-2 3.72×10-2 9.09×10-3 7.64×10-3 4.01×10-2 8.24×10-3 4.52×10-2 3.80×10-2
65 4.92×10-2 4.13×10-2 9.62×10-3 8.08×10-3 4.46×10-2 8.71×10-3 3.82×10-2 3.21×10-2
65L 3.47×10-2 2.92×10-2 7.45×10-3 6.26×10-3 3.15×10-2 6.75×10-3 3.82×10-2 3.21×10-2
85L 2.83×10-2 2.38×10-2 6.00×10-3 5.10×10-3 2.57×10-2 5.50×10-3 2.86×10-2 2.40×10-2
12 2.48×10-1 4.69×10-2 2.48×10-1 4.69×10-2 1.40×10-1
12HR 1.70×10-1 3.52×10-2 1.70×10-1 3.52×10-2 1.40×10-1
14 1.92×10-1 3.80×10-2 1.92×10-1 3.80×10-2 9.93×10-2
17 1.72×10 -1
3.41×10 -2
1.72×10 -1
3.41×10 -2
6.21×10-2
SHW
21 1.59×10-1 2.95×10-2 1.59×10-1 2.95×10-2 5.57×10-2
27 1.21×10-1 2.39×10-2 1.21×10-1 2.39×10-2 4.99×10-2
35 8.15×10-2 1.64×10-2 8.15×10-2 1.64×10-2 3.02×10-2
50 6.22×10 -2
1.24×10 -2
6.22×10 -2
1.24×10 -2
2.30×10-2
7 4.19×10 –1
7.46×10 -2
4.18×10 -1
7.45×10 -2
2.58×10-1
7W 3.01×10– 1 5.67×10-2 3.00×10-1 5.66×10-2 1.36×10-1
9 2.95×10-1 5.26×10-2 3.04×10-1 5.40×10-2 2.17×10-1
9W 2.37×10-1 4.25×10-2 2.44×10-1 4.37×10-2 1.06×10-1
12 2.94×10 -1
4.50×10 -2
2.94×10 -1
4.50×10 -2
1.53×10-1
SRS
12W 2.00×10-1 3.69×10-2 2.00×10-1 3.69×10-2 7.97×10-2
15 2.17×10-1 3.69×10-2 2.17×10-1 3.69×10-2 1.41×10-1
15W 1.67×10-1 2.94×10-2 1.67×10-1 2.94×10-2 4.83×10-2
20 1.80×10 -1
3.30×10 -2
1.86×10 -1
3.41×10 -2
9.34×10-2
25 1.14×10-1 2.17×10-2 1.14×10-1 2.17×10-2 8.13×10-2
A-79
Table3 Equivalent Factors (Models SCR and HSR)
Equivalent factor
Model No.
25 9.25×10-2 1.90×10-2 9.25×10-2 1.90×10-2 9.29×10-2
30 8.47×10-2 1.63×10-2 8.47×10-2 1.63×10-2 7.69×10-2
SCR 35 6.95×10-2 1.43×10-2 6.95×10-2 1.43×10-2 6.29×10-2
45 6.13×10 -2
1.24×10 -2
6.13×10 -2
1.24×10 -2
4.69×10-2
65 3.87×10-2 7.91×10-3 3.87×10-2 7.91×10-3 3.40×10-2
8 4.39×10-1 6.75×10-2 4.39×10-1 6.75×10-2 2.97×10-1
10 3.09×10-1 5.33×10-2 3.09×10-1 5.33×10-2 2.35×10-1
12 2.08×10 -1
3.74×10 -2
2.08×10 -1
3.74×10 -2
1.91×10-1
15 1.68×10 -1
2.95×10 -2
1.68×10 -1
2.95×10 -2
1.60×10-1
20 1.25×10-1 2.28×10-2 1.25×10-1 2.28×10-2 1.18×10-1
20L 9.83×10-2 1.91×10-2 9.83×10-2 1.91×10-2 1.18×10-1
25 1.12×10 -1
2.01×10 -2
1.12×10 -1
2.01×10 -2
1.00×10-1
25L 8.66×10 -2
1.68×10 -2
8.66×10 -2
1.68×10 -2
1.00×10-1
30 8.93×10-2 1.73×10-2 8.93×10-2 1.73×10-2 8.31×10-2
30L 7.02×10-2 1.43×10-2 7.02×10-2 1.43×10-2 8.31×10-2
35 7.81×10-2 1.55×10-2 7.81×10-2 1.55×10-2 6.74×10-2
35L 6.15×10 -2
1.28×10 -2
6.15×10 -2
1.28×10 -2
6.74×10-2
45 6.71×10-2 1.21×10-2 6.71×10-2 1.21×10-2 5.22×10-2
HSR
45L 5.20×10-2 1.00×10-2 5.20×10-2 1.00×10-2 5.22×10-2
55 5.59×10-2 1.03×10-2 5.59×10-2 1.03×10-2 4.27×10-2
55L 4.33×10 -2
8.56×10 -3
4.33×10 -2
8.56×10 -3
4.27×10-2
65 4.47×10 -2
9.13×10 -3
4.47×10 -2
9.13×10 -3
3.69×10-2
65L 3.28×10-2 7.06×10-3 3.28×10-2 7.06×10-3 3.69×10-2
85 3.73×10-2 6.80×10-3 3.73×10-2 6.80×10-3 2.79×10-2
85L 2.89×10-2 5.68×10-3 2.89×10-2 5.68×10-3 2.79×10-2
100 2.60×10 -2
5.15×10 -3
2.60×10 -2
5.15×10 -3
2.25×10-2
120 2.36×10-2 4.72×10-3 2.36×10-2 4.72×10-3 1.97×10-2
150 2.17×10-2 4.35×10-3 2.17×10-2 4.35×10-3 1.61×10-2
15M2A 1.65×10-1 2.89×10-2 1.65×10-1 2.89×10-2 1.86×10-1
20M2A 1.23×10 -1
2.23×10 -2
1.23×10 -1
2.23×10 -2
1.34×10-1
25M2A 1.10×10-1 1.98×10-2 1.10×10-1 1.98×10-2 1.14×10-1
A-80
Point of Selection
Table4 Equivalent Factors (Models SR and NR)
Equivalent factor
Model No.
15W (TB) 2.09×10-1 1.04×10-1 3.74×10-2 1.87×10-2 1.46×10-1 2.58×10-2 1.70×10-1 8.48×10-2
15V (SB) 3.40×10-1 1.70×10-1 4.94×10-2 2.47×10-2 2.35×10-1 3.32×10-2 1.70×10-1 8.48×10-2
20W (TB) 1.72×10-1 8.61×10-2 3.24×10-2 1.62×10-2 1.21×10-1 2.25×10-2 1.30×10-1 6.49×10-2
LM Guide
20V (SB) 2.72×10-1 1.36×10-1 4.33×10-2 2.16×10-2 1.88×10-1 2.94×10-2 1.30×10-1 6.49×10-2
25W (TB) 1.38×10-1 6.89×10-2 2.59×10-2 1.30×10-2 9.67×10-2 1.80×10-2 1.11×10-1 5.55×10-2
25V (SB) 2.17×10-1 1.09×10-1 3.46×10-2 1.73×10-2 1.51×10-1 2.35×10-2 1.11×10-1 5.55×10-2
SR
30W (TB) 1.15×10-1 5.74×10-2 2.22×10-2 1.11×10-2 8.06×10-2 1.55×10-2 9.22×10-2 4.61×10-2
30V (SB) 1.99×10-1 9.93×10-2 2.99×10-2 1.49×10-2 1.37×10-1 2.02×10-2 9.22×10-2 4.61×10-2
35W (TB) 1.04×10-1 5.21×10-2 1.92×10-2 9.61×10-3 7.31×10-2 1.33×10-2 7.64×10-2 3.82×10-2
35V (SB) 1.70×10-1 8.51×10-2 2.61×10-2 1.31×10-2 1.17×10-1 1.77×10-2 7.64×10-2 3.82×10-2
45W (TB) 9.12×10-2 4.56×10-2 1.69×10-2 8.47×10-3 6.39×10-2 1.17×10-2 5.71×10-2 2.85×10-2
55W (TB) 6.89×10-2 3.44×10-2 1.39×10-2 6.93×10-3 4.84×10-2 9.66×10-3 5.46×10-2 2.73×10-2
25X 1.10×10-1 7.78×10-2 2.19×10-2 1.55×10-2 8.11×10-2 1.63×10-2 9.26×10-2 6.58×10-2
25XL 8.91×10-2 6.33×10-2 1.79×10-2 1.27×10-2 6.55×10-2 1.33×10-2 9.26×10-2 6.58×10-2
30 9.66×10-2 6.86×10-2 1.84×10-2 1.31×10-2 7.05×10-2 1.35×10-2 8.28×10-2 5.88×10-2
30L 7.43×10-2 5.27×10-2 1.52×10-2 1.08×10-2 5.47×10-2 1.13×10-2 8.28×10-2 5.88×10-2
35 8.82×10-2 6.26×10-2 1.64×10-2 1.16×10-2 6.42×10-2 1.20×10-2 6.92×10-2 4.91×10-2
35L 6.67×10-2 4.74×10-2 1.35×10-2 9.61×10-3 4.90×10-2 1.00×10-2 6.92×10-2 4.91×10-2
45 6.84×10-2 4.86×10-2 1.30×10-2 9.23×10-3 5.00×10-2 9.58×10-3 5.19×10-2 3.68×10-2
45L 5.11×10-2 3.62×10-2 1.08×10-2 7.66×10-3 3.79×10-2 8.07×10-3 5.19×10-2 3.68×10-2
55 5.75×10-2 4.08×10-2 1.11×10-2 7.90×10-3 4.21×10-2 8.21×10-3 4.44×10-2 3.15×10-2
NR
55L 4.53×10-2 3.22×10-2 9.16×10-3 6.51×10-3 3.34×10-2 6.79×10-3 4.44×10-2 3.15×10-2
65 4.97×10-2 3.53×10-2 9.74×10-3 6.91×10-3 3.64×10-2 7.18×10-3 3.75×10-2 2.66×10-2
65L 3.56×10-2 2.53×10-2 7.51×10-3 5.33×10-3 2.65×10-2 5.61×10-3 3.75×10-2 2.66×10-2
75 4.21×10-2 2.99×10-2 8.31×10-3 5.90×10-3 3.08×10-2 6.13×10-3 3.16×10-2 2.24×10-2
75L 3.14×10-2 2.23×10-2 6.74×10-3 4.78×10-3 2.33×10-2 5.04×10-3 3.16×10-2 2.24×10-2
85 3.70×10-2 2.62×10-2 7.31×10-3 5.19×10-3 2.71×10-2 5.40×10-3 2.80×10-2 1.99×10-2
85L 2.80×10-2 1.99×10-2 6.07×10-3 4.31×10-3 2.08×10-2 4.55×10-3 2.80×10-2 1.99×10-2
100 3.05×10-2 2.17×10-2 6.20×10-3 4.41×10-3 2.26×10-2 4.63×10-3 2.38×10-2 1.69×10-2
100L 2.74×10-2 1.95×10-2 5.46×10-3 3.87×10-3 2.00×10-2 4.00×10-3 2.38×10-2 1.69×10-2
A-81
Table5 Equivalent Factors (Models NRS and HRW)
Equivalent factor
Model No.
25X 1.05×10-1 2.11×10-2 1.05×10-1 2.11×10-2 9.41×10-2
25XL 8.60×10-2 1.73×10-2 8.60×10-2 1.73×10-2 9.41×10-2
30 9.30×10-2 1.77×10-2 9.30×10-2 1.77×10-2 8.44×10-2
30L 7.17×10 -2
1.47×10 -2
7.17×10 -2
1.47×10 -2
8.44×10-2
35 8.47×10-2 1.57×10-2 8.47×10-2 1.57×10-2 7.08×10-2
35L 6.44×10-2 1.31×10-2 6.44×10-2 1.31×10-2 7.08×10-2
45 6.58×10-2 1.25×10-2 6.58×10-2 1.25×10-2 5.26×10-2
45L 4.92×10 -2
1.04×10 -2
4.92×10 -2
1.04×10 -2
5.26×10-2
55 5.54×10 -2
1.07×10 -2
5.54×10 -2
1.07×10 -2
4.52×10-2
NRS
55L 4.38×10-2 8.85×10-3 4.38×10-2 8.85×10-3 4.52×10-2
65 4.79×10-2 9.38×10-3 4.79×10-2 9.38×10-3 3.81×10-2
65L 3.43×10 -2
7.25×10 -3
3.43×10 -2
7.25×10 -3
3.81×10-2
75 4.05×10 -2
8.01×10 -3
4.05×10 -2
8.01×10 -3
3.20×10-2
75L 3.03×10-2 6.50×10-3 3.03×10-2 6.50×10-3 3.20×10-2
85 3.56×10-2 7.05×10-3 3.56×10-2 7.05×10-3 2.83×10-2
85L 2.70×10-2 5.87×10-3 2.70×10-2 5.87×10-3 2.83×10-2
100 2.93×10 -2
5.97×10 -3
2.93×10 -2
5.97×10 -3
2.41×10-2
100L 2.65×10-2 5.27×10-3 2.65×10-2 5.27×10-3 2.41×10-2
12 2.72×10-1 5.16×10-2 5.47×10-1 1.04×10-1 1.40×10-1
14 2.28×10-1 4.16×10-2 4.54×10-1 8.28×10-2 1.01×10-1
17 1.95×10 -1
3.33×10 -2
1.95×10 -1
3.33×10 -2
6.32×10-2
21 1.64×10 -1
2.89×10 -2
1.64×10 -1
2.89×10 -2
5.92×10-2
HRW
27 1.30×10-1 2.33×10-2 1.30×10-1 2.33×10-2 5.12×10-2
35 8.66×10-2 1.59×10-2 8.66×10-2 1.59×10-2 3.06×10-2
50 6.50×10-2 1.21×10-2 6.50×10-2 1.21×10-2 2.35×10-2
60 5.77×10 -2
8.24×10 -3
5.77×10 -2
8.24×10 -3
1.77×10-2
A-82
Point of Selection
Table6 Equivalent Factors (Model RSR)
Equivalent factor
Model No.
3M 9.20×10-1 1.27×10-1 9.20×10-1 1.27×10-1 6.06×10-1
3N 6.06×10-1 1.01×10-1 6.06×10-1 1.01×10-1 6.06×10-1
3W 7.03×10-1 1.06×10-1 7.03×10-1 1.06×10-1 3.17×10-1
LM Guide
3WN 4.76×10 -1
8.27×10 -2
4.76×10 -1
8.27×10 -2
3.17×10-1
5M 6.67×10-1 9.06×10-2 6.67×10-1 9.06×10-2 3.85×10-1
5N 5.21×10-1 8.00×10-2 5.21×10-1 8.00×10-2 3.85×10-1
5W 4.85×10-1 7.28×10-2 4.85×10-1 7.28×10-2 1.96×10-1
5WN 3.44×10 -1
5.93×10 -2
3.44×10 -1
5.93×10 -2
1.96×10-1
7M 4.66×10 -1
6.57×10 -2
4.66×10 -1
6.57×10 -2
2.74×10-1
7Z 4.66×10-1 6.60×10-2 4.66×10-1 6.60×10-2 2.74×10-1
7N 2.88×10-1 5.01×10-2 2.88×10-1 5.01×10-2 2.74×10-1
7W 3.07×10 -1
5.30×10 -2
3.07×10 -1
5.30×10 -2
1.40×10-1
7WZ 3.30×10 -1
5.12×10 -2
3.30×10 -1
5.12×10 -2
1.40×10-1
7WN 2.18×10-1 4.13×10-2 2.18×10-1 4.13×10-2 1.40×10-1
9K 3.06×10-1 5.19×10-2 3.06×10-1 5.19×10-2 2.15×10-1
9Z 3.06×10-1 5.23×10-2 3.06×10-1 5.23×10-2 2.15×10-1
9N 2.15×10 -1
4.08×10 -2
2.15×10 -1
4.08×10 -2
2.15×10-1
RSR 9WV 2.44×10-1 4.22×10-2 2.44×10-1 4.22×10-2 1.09×10-1
9WZ 2.44×10-1 4.22×10-2 2.44×10-1 4.22×10-2 1.09×10-1
9WN 1.73×10-1 3.32×10-2 1.73×10-1 4.22×10-2 1.09×10-1
12V 3.52×10 -1
2.46×10 -1
5.37×10 -2
3.76×10 -2
2.81×10 -1
4.21×10 -2
2.09×10-1 1.46×10-1
12Z 3.52×10 -1
2.46×10 -1
5.37×10 -2
3.76×10 -2
2.81×10 -1
4.21×10 -2
2.09×10-1 1.46×10-1
12N 2.30×10-1 1.61×10-1 4.08×10-2 2.85×10-2 1.85×10-1 3.25×10-2 2.09×10-1 1.46×10-1
12WV 2.47×10-1 1.73×10-1 4.38×10-2 3.07×10-2 1.99×10-1 3.49×10-2 1.02×10-1 7.15×10-2
12WZ 2.47×10-1 1.73×10-1 4.38×10-2 3.07×10-2 1.99×10-1 3.49×10-2 1.02×10-1 7.15×10-2
12WN 1.71×10-1 1.20×10-1 3.36×10-2 2.35×10-2 1.38×10-1 2.70×10-2 1.02×10-1 7.15×10-2
14WV 2.10×10-1 1.47×10-1 3.89×10-2 2.73×10-2 1.69×10-1 3.10×10-2 8.22×10-2 5.75×10-2
15V 2.77×10-1 1.94×10-1 4.38×10-2 3.07×10-2 2.21×10-1 3.45×10-2 1.69×10-1 1.18×10-1
15Z 2.77×10-1 1.94×10-1 4.38×10-2 3.07×10-2 2.21×10-1 3.45×10-2 1.69×10-1 1.18×10-1
15N 1.70×10-1 1.19×10-1 3.24×10-2 2.27×10-2 1.37×10-1 2.59×10-2 1.69×10-1 1.18×10-1
15WV 1.95×10-1 1.36×10-1 3.52×10-2 2.46×10-2 1.56×10-1 2.80×10-2 5.83×10-2 4.08×10-2
15WZ 1.95×10-1 1.36×10-1 3.52×10-2 2.46×10-2 1.56×10-1 2.80×10-2 5.83×10-2 4.08×10-2
15WN 1.34×10-1 9.41×10-2 2.68×10-2 1.88×10-2 1.09×10-1 2.16×10-2 5.82×10-2 4.08×10-2
20V 1.68×10-1 1.18×10-1 2.92×10-2 2.04×10-2 1.35×10-1 2.32×10-2 1.30×10-1 9.13×10-2
20N 1.20×10-1 8.39×10-2 2.30×10-2 1.61×10-2 9.68×10-2 1.84×10-2 1.30×10-1 9.13×10-2
A-83
Table7 Equivalent Factors (Models RSH, HR and GSR)
Equivalent factor
Model No.
7Z 4.66×10-1 6.60×10-2 4.66×10-1 6.60×10-2 2.74×10-1
7WZ 3.30×10-1 5.12×10-2 3.30×10-1 5.12×10-2 1.40×10-1
9Z 3.06×10-1 5.23×10-2 3.06×10-1 5.23×10-2 2.15×10-1
9WZ 2.44×10 -1
4.22×10 -2
2.44×10 -1
4.22×10 -2
1.09×10-1
RSH
12Z 3.52×10-1 2.46×10-1 5.37×10-2 3.76×10-2 2.81×10-1 4.21×10-2 2.09×10-1 1.46×10-1
12WZ 2.47×10-1 1.73×10-1 4.38×10-2 3.07×10-2 1.99×10-1 3.49×10-2 1.02×10-1 7.15×10-2
15Z 2.77×10-1 1.94×10-1 4.38×10-2 3.07×10-2 2.21×10-1 3.45×10-2 1.69×10-1 1.18×10-1
15WZ 1.95×10-1 1.36×10-1 3.52×10-2 2.46×10-2 1.56×10-1 2.80×10-2 5.83×10-2 4.08×10-2
918 2.65×10-1 2.65×10-1 — — 2.65×10-1 — — —
1123 2.08×10-1 2.08×10-1 — — 2.08×10-1 — — —
1530 1.56×10-1 1.56×10-1 — — 1.56×10-1 — — —
2042 1.11×10 -1
1.11×10 -1
— — 1.11×10-1 — — —
2042T 8.64×10-2 8.64×10-2 — — 8.64×10-2 — — —
2555 7.79×10-2 7.79×10-2 — — 7.79×10-2 — — —
2555T 6.13×10-2 6.13×10-2 — — 6.13×10-2 — — —
3065 6.92×10-2 6.92×10-2 — — 6.92×10-2 — — —
HR
3065T 5.45×10-2 5.45×10-2 — — 5.45×10-2 — — —
3575 6.23×10-2 6.23×10-2 — — 6.23×10-2 — — —
3575T 4.90×10-2 4.90×10-2 — — 4.90×10-2 — — —
4085 5.19×10-2 5.19×10-2 — — 5.19×10-2 — — —
4085T 4.09×10-2 4.09×10-2 — — 4.09×10-2 — — —
50105 4.15×10 4.15×10-2 -2
— — 4.15×10-2 — — —
50105T 3.27×10-2 3.27×10-2 — — 3.27×10-2 — — —
60125 2.88×10-2 2.88×10-2 — — 2.88×10-2 — — —
15T 1.61×10-1 1.44×10-1 2.88×10-2 2.59×10-2 1.68×10-1 3.01×10-2 — —
15V 2.21×10-1 1.99×10-1 3.54×10-2 3.18×10-2 2.30×10-1 3.68×10-2 — —
20T 1.28×10-1 1.16×10-1 2.34×10-2 2.10×10-2 1.34×10-1 2.44×10-2 — —
20V 1.77×10-1 1.59×10-1 2.87×10-2 2.58×10-2 1.84×10-1 2.99×10-2 — —
GSR
25T 1.07×10-1 9.63×10-2 1.97×10-2 1.77×10-2 1.12×10-1 2.06×10-2 — —
25V 1.47×10-1 1.33×10-1 2.42×10-2 2.18×10-2 1.53×10-1 2.52×10-2 — —
30T 9.17×10-2 8.26×10-2 1.68×10-2 1.51×10-2 9.59×10-2 1.76×10-2 — —
35T 8.03×10-2 7.22×10-2 1.48×10-2 1.33×10-2 8.39×10-2 1.55×10-2 — —
A-84
Point of Selection
Table8 Equivalent Factors (Model CSR, MX,JR, NSR and SRG)
Equivalent factor
Model No.
15 1.68×10-1 2.95×10-2 1.68×10-1 2.95×10-2 1.60×10-1
20S 1.25×10-1 2.28×10-2 1.25×10-1 2.28×10-2 1.18×10-1
20 9.83×10-2 1.91×10-2 9.83×10-2 1.91×10-2 1.18×10-1
LM Guide
25S 1.12×10 -1
2.01×10 -2
1.12×10 -1
2.01×10 -2
1.00×10-1
CSR 25 8.66×10-2 1.68×10-2 8.66×10-2 1.68×10-2 1.00×10-1
30S 8.93×10-2 1.73×10-2 8.93×10-2 1.73×10-2 8.31×10-2
30 7.02×10-2 1.43×10-2 7.02×10-2 1.43×10-2 8.31×10-2
35 6.15×10 -2
1.28×10 -2
6.15×10 -2
1.28×10 -2
6.74×10-2
45 5.20×10 -2
1.00×10 -2
5.20×10 -2
1.00×10 -2
5.22×10-2
5 4.27×10-1 7.01×10-2 4.27×10-1 7.01×10-2 3.85×10-2
MX
7W 2.18×10-1 4.13×10-1 2.18×10-1 4.13×10-1 1.40×10-1
25 1.12×10 -1
2.01×10 -2
1.12×10 -1
2.01×10 -2
1.00×10-1
35 7.81×10 -2
1.55×10 -2
7.81×10 -2
1.55×10 -2
6.74×10-2
JR
45 6.71×10-2 1.21×10-2 6.71×10-2 1.21×10-2 5.22×10-2
55 5.59×10-2 1.03×10-2 5.59×10-2 1.03×10-2 4.27×10-2
20TBC 2.29×10-1 2.68×10-2 2.29×10-1 2.68×10-2 — —
25TBC 2.01×10-1 2.27×10-2 2.01×10-1 2.27×10-2 — —
30TBC 1.85×10-1 1.93×10-2 1.85×10-1 1.93×10-2 — —
NSR
40TBC 1.39×10-1 1.60×10-2 1.39×10-1 1.60×10-2 — —
50TBC 1.24×10-1 1.42×10-2 1.24×10-1 1.42×10-2 — —
70TBC 9.99×10-2 1.15×10-2 9.99×10-2 1.15×10-2 — —
15 1.23×10 -1
2.07×10 -2
1.23×10-1 2.07×10-2 1.04×10-1
20 9.60×10-2 1.71×10-2 9.60×10-2 1.71×10-2 8.00×10-2
20L 7.21×10-2 1.42×10-2 7.21×10-2 1.42×10-2 8.00×10-2
25 8.96×10-2 1.55×10-2 8.96×10-2 1.55×10-2 7.23×10-2
25L 6.99×10 -2
1.31×10 -2
6.99×10 -2
1.31×10 -2
7.23×10-2
30 8.06×10-2 1.33×10-2 8.06×10-2 1.33×10-2 5.61×10-2
30L 6.12×10-2 1.11×10-2 6.12×10-2 1.11×10-2 5.61×10-2
SRG
35 7.14×10-2 1.18×10-2 7.14×10-2 1.18×10-2 4.98×10-2
35L 5.26×10 -2
9.67×10 -3
5.26×10 -2
9.67×10 -3
4.98×10-2
45 5.49×10-2 9.58×10-3 5.49×10-2 9.58×10-3 3.85×10-2
45L 4.18×10-2 7.93×10-3 4.18×10-2 7.93×10-3 3.85×10-2
55 4.56×10-2 8.04×10-3 4.56×10-2 8.04×10-3 3.25×10-2
55L 3.37×10 -2
6.42×10 -3
3.37×10 -2
6.42×10 -3
3.25×10-2
65L 2.63×10 -2
4.97×10 -3
2.63×10 -2
4.97×10 -3
2.70×10-2
A-85
Table9 Equivalent Factors (Models SRN and SRW)
Equivalent factor
Model No.
35 7.14×10-2 1.18×10-2 7.14×10-2 1.18×10-2 4.98×10-2
35L 5.26×10-2 9.67×10-3 5.26×10-2 9.67×10-3 4.98×10-2
45 5.49×10-2 9.58×10-3 5.49×10-2 9.58×10-3 3.85×10-2
SRN 45L 4.18×10 -2
7.93×10 -3
4.18×10 -2
7.93×10 -3
3.85×10-2
55 4.56×10-2 8.04×10-3 4.56×10-2 8.04×10-3 3.25×10-2
55L 3.37×10-2 6.42×10-3 3.37×10-2 6.42×10-3 3.25×10-2
65L 2.63×10-2 4.97×10-3 2.63×10-2 4.97×10-3 2.70×10-2
70 4.18×10 -2
7.93×10 -3
4.18×10 -2
7.93×10 -3
2.52×10-2
SRW 85 3.37×10 -2
6.42×10 -3
3.37×10 -2
6.42×10 -3
2.09×10-2
100 2.63×10-2 4.97×10-3 2.63×10-2 4.97×10-3 1.77×10-2
A-86
Point of Selection
[Example of calculation]
When one LM block is used
Model No.: SSR20XV1
No.3 No.4
Gravitational acceleration g=9.8 (m/s2)
Mass m=10 (kg)
l 1=200（mm）
LM Guide
l 2=100（mm） No.2 No.1
l1 l2
m m
Fig.6 When One LM Block is Used
No.1 P1=mg+KAR1•mg•l 1+KCR•mg•l 2=98+0.275×98×200+0.129×98×100=6752 (N)

No.2 P2=mg– KAL1•mg•l 1+KCR•mg•l 2=98– 0.137×98×200+0.129×98×100=– 1323 (N)
No.3 P3=mg– KAL1•mg•l 1– KCL•mg•l 2=98– 0.137×98×200– 0.0644×98×100=– 3218 (N)
No.4 P4=mg+KAR1•mg•l 1– KCL•mg•l 2=98+0.275×98×200– 0.0644×98×100=4857 (N)
When two LM blocks are used in close contact with each other
Model No.: SNS30R2
Gravitational acceleration g=9.8 (m/s2) No.3 No.4

Mass m=5 (kg)
l 1=200（mm）
l 2=150（mm） No.2 No.1
l1 l2
m m
Fig.7 When Two LM Blocks are Used in Close Contact with Each Other
mg mg•l 2 49 49×150
No.1 P1= +KAR2•mg•l 1+KCR• = +0.018×49×200+0.0842× =510.3 (N)
2 2 2 2
mg mg•l 2 49 49×150
No.2 P2= –KAL2•mg•l 1+KCR• = –0.0151×49×200+0.0842× =186 (N)
2 2 2 2
mg mg•l 2 49 49×150
No.3 P3= –KAL2•mg•l 1–KCL• = –0.0151×49×200–0.0707× =–383.3 (N)
2 2 2 2
mg mg•l 2 49 49×150
No.4 P4= +KAR2•mg•l 1–KCL• = +0.018×49×200–0.0707× =–58.9 (N)
2 2 2 2
Note1) Since an LM Guide used in vertical installation receives only a moment load, there is no need to apply a load force
(mg).
Note2) In some models, load ratings differ depending on the direction of the applied load. With such a model, calculate an
equivalent load in the direction of the smallest load rating.
A-87
[Double-axis Use]
z Setting Conditions
Set the conditions needed to calculate the LM system's applied load and service life in hours.
The conditions consist of the following items.
(1) Mass: m (kg)
(2) Direction of the working load
(3) Position of the working point (e.g., center of gravity): l 2, l 3, h1(mm)
(4) Thrust position: l 4, h2(mm)
(5) LM system arrangement: l 0, l 1(mm)
(No. of units and axes)
(6) Velocity diagram
Speed: V (mm/s)
Time constant: tn (s)
Acceleration: α n(mm/s2)
V
(αn = tn )
(7) Duty cycle
Number of reciprocations per minute: N1(min-1)
(8) Stroke length: l s(mm)
(9) Average speed: Vm(m/s)
(10) Required service life in hours: Lh(h)
Duty cycle
l1
l2
Speed (mm/s)
mg
V
h1 l 0
l3 h2 tn t1 tn （s）
l4 lS （mm）
Velocity diagram
Fig.8 Condition
A-88
Point of Selection
z Applied Load Equation

The load applied to the LM Guide varies with the external force, such as the position of the gravity
center of an object, thrust position, inertia generated from acceleration/deceleration during start or
stop, and cutting force.
In selecting an LM Guide, it is necessary to obtain the value of the applied load while taking into
account these conditions.
LM Guide
Calculate the load applied to the LM Guide in each of the examples 1 to 10 shown below.
m : Mass (kg)
l n : Distance (mm)
Fn : External force (N)
Pn : Applied load (radial/reverse radial direction) (N)
PnT : Applied load (lateral directions) (N)
g : Gravitational acceleration (m/s2)
(g =9.8m/s2)
V : Speed (m/s)
tn : Time constant (s)
α n : Acceleration (m/s2)
V
(αn = tn )
[Example]
Condition Applied Load Equation
Horizontal mount
(with the block traveling) mg mg•l 2 mg•l 3
–
2•l 0 2•l 1
P1 = +
Uniform motion or dwell 4
P3 l1 mg mg•l 2 mg•l 3
l2 mg
P2 =
4
–
2•l 0
–
2•l
1 P2
P4
mg mg•l 2 mg•l 3
–
2•l 0 2•l 1
P3 = +
4
P1
l0 mg mg•l 2 mg•l 3
l3 P4 =
4
+
2•l 0
+
2•l 1
Horizontal mount, overhung

(with the block traveling) mg mg•l 2 mg•l 3
2•l 0 2•l 1
P1 = + +
Uniform motion or dwell
P3 l1 4
mg mg•l 2 mg•l 3
–
2•l 0 2•l 1
P2 P2 = +
P4 4
2
P1 mg mg•l 2 mg•l 3
– –
2•l 0 2•l 1
P3 =
l0 4
l2 mg mg•l 2 mg•l 3
l3 mg P4 =
4
+
2•l 0
–
2•l 1
A-89
l2
P4
mg
P1T
l0 P1
mg•l 2
2•l 0
F P1 to P4 =
3
l3 mg•l 3
2•l 0
P1T to P4T =
P2
P2T
l1
E.g.: Vertical axis of industrial
robot, automatic coating
machine, lifter
Wall mount
l0
P2T
l2 P2 l1 mg•l 3
2•l 1
P1 to P4 =
P1T
l3
4 P1 mg mg•l 2
2•l 0
P1T = P4T = +
4
mg mg•l 2
–
2•l 0
P3 P2T = P3T =
4
P3T
mg
P4
P4T
E.g.: Travel axis of cross-rail loader
A-90
Point of Selection
With the LM rails movable

Horizontal mount
LM Guide
l2
–l 1
P2
mg
P3 mg mg•l 1
P1
2•l 0
P1 to P4 (max) = +
4
5
P4 mg mg•l 1
–
2•l 0
P1 to P4 (min) =
l0 4
l2
E.g.: XY table
sliding fork
Laterally tilt mount

mg•cosθ mg•cosθ•l 2
2•l 0
P1 = + +
4
mg•cosθ •l 3 mg•sinθ•h1
2•l 1 2•l 1
– +
mg•sinθ mg•sinθ•l 2
2•l 0
P1T= +
4
2•l 0
h1 P2 = + –
4
mg mg•cosθ •l 3 mg•sinθ•h1
2•l 1 2•l 1
– +
mg•sinθ•l 2
P3 P1
mg•sinθ
2•l 0
P2T= –
6 4
P1T
P2 mg•cosθ mg•cosθ•l 2
l2 P3 = +
4
–
2•l 0
l3 l0 mg•cosθ •l 3
l1 θ P2T +
2•l 1
–
mg•sinθ•h1
2•l 1
mg•sinθ mg•sinθ•l 2
2•l 0
P3T= –
4
2•l 0
P4 = + +
4
mg•cosθ •l 3 mg•sinθ •h1
2•l 1 2•l 1
+ –
E.g.: NC lathe
Carriage mg•sinθ mg•sinθ •l 2
2•l 0
P4T= +
4
A-91
Longitudinally tilt mount mg•cosθ mg•cosθ •l 2

2•l 0
P1 = + +
4
mg•cosθ •l 3 mg•sinθ•h1
2•l 1 2•l 0
– +
mg•sinθ •l 3
2•l 0
P1T = +
P3 mg•cosθ mg•cosθ •l 2
2•l 0
h1 P2 = + –
P2 4
mg P2T mg•cosθ •l 3 mg•sinθ•h1
2•l 1 2•l 0
– –
P4
P1 l2 mg•sinθ •l 3
2•l 0
P2T = –
7 l0
θ mg•cosθ mg•cosθ •l 2
2•l 0
P1T P3 = + –
l3 4
l1 mg•cosθ •l 3 mg•sinθ•h1
2•l 1 2•l 0
+ –
mg•sinθ •l 3
2•l 0
P3T = –
mg•cosθ mg•cosθ •l 2
2•l 0
P4 = + +
4
mg•cosθ •l 3
E.g.: NC lathe
mg•sinθ •h1
2•l 1 2•l 0
Tool rest + +
mg•sinθ •l 3
2•l 0
P4T = +
Horizontal mount with inertia

During acceleration
mg m•α 1•l 2
2•l 0
P1 = P4 = –
4
mg mg m•α 1•l 2
2•l 0
P2 = P3 = +
4
m•α 1•l 3
l3 P1T to P4T =
2•l 0
P1 P3
During uniform motion
8 l2 P4 P3T
mg
P1 to P4 =
F l0 4
P4T During deceleration
l1
V mg m•α 3•l 2
αn = 2•l 0
Speed V (m/s)
P1 = P4 = +
tn 4
mg m•α 3•l 2
2•l 0
P2 = P3 = –
4
m•α 3•l 3
2•l 0
t1 t2 t3 Time (s) P1T to P4T =
Velocity diagram E.g.: Conveyance truck
A-92
Point of Selection
Vertical mount
with inertia l2 During acceleration
m•(g+α 1)•l 2
2•l 0
P1 to P4 =
P4
mg
LM Guide
P1T m•(g+α 1)•l 3
2•l 0
P1T to P4T =
l0 P1
F
l3
P2 mg•l 2
2•l 0
9 P1 to P4 =
V
P2T αn =
tn mg•l 3
l1 2•l 0
P1T to P4T =
Speed V (m/s)
During deceleration
m•(g – α 3)•l 2
2•l 0
P1 to P4 =
t1 t2 t3 Time (s)
Velocity diagram m•(g – α 3)•l 3
2•l 0
P1T to P4T =
E.g.: Conveyance lift
Horizontal mount with external force Under force F1

F1•l 5
2•l 0
P1 to P4 =
l2
F1•l 4
l4 2•l 0
P1T to P4T =
Under force F2
P3 F2 F2•l 2
2•l 0
F2 P1 = P 4 = +
4
10 l5 F1 F3 P3T F2 F2•l 2
2•l 0
P4 P2 = P3 = –
4
F P4T
l0
Under force F3
l1 l3 F3•l 3
2•l 1
P1 to P4 =
E.g.: Drill unit, F3 F3•l 2

2•l 0
P1T = P4T = +
Milling machine, 4
F3•l 2
Lathe,
Machining center F3
2•l 0
P2T = P3T = –
and other cutting machine 4
A-93
Calculating the Equivalent Load
The LM Guide can bear loads and moments in all directions, including a radial load (PR), reverse
radial load (PL) and lateral loads (PT), simultaneously.
Applied loads include the following.
PR: Radial load

PL: Reverse-radial load
PT: Lateral load
MA
Moment
in the pitching
PL PR direction
MB
Moment
PT PT in the yawing
direction
MC
Moment
in the rolling
direction
Fig.9 Directions of the Loads Applied on the LM Guide
[Equivalent Load PE]

When two or more loads (e.g., radial load and lateral load) are simultaneously applied to the LM
Guide, the service life and the static safety factor are calculated using equivalent load values
obtained by converting all the loads into radial, lateral and other loads.
[Equivalent Load Equation]
The equivalent load equation for the LM Guide differs by model. For details, see the section corre-
sponding to the subject model.
Example of equation for LM Guide model HSR
The equivalent load when a radial load (PR) and a

lateral load (PT) are applied simultaneously is
obtained using the following equation.
PL PR
PE(equivalent load)=PR+PT PT PT
PR: Radial load

PT: Lateral load
Fig.10 Equivalent of Load of the LM Guide
A-94
Point of Selection
Calculating the Static Safety Factor
Calculating the Static Safety Factor

To calculate a load applied to the LM Guide, the average load required for calculating the service life
and the maximum load needed for calculating the static safety factor must be obtained first. In a sys-
tem subject to frequent starts and stops, placed under cutting forces or under a large moment
caused by an overhang load, an excessively large load may apply to the LM Guide. When selecting
a model number, make sure that the desired model is capable of receiving the required maximum
LM Guide
load (whether stationary or in motion). Table10 shows standard values for the static safety factor.
Table10 Reference Value of Static Safety Factors (fS)
Machine Lower
When the radial load is fH•fT•fC•C0
using the LM Load conditions limit ≧fS
Guide of fS large PR
General Without vibration or impact 1 to 1.3
industrial When the reverse radial fH•fT•fC•C0L
machinery With vibration or impact 2 to 3 load is large ≧fS
PL
Without vibration or impact 1 to 1.5
Machine tool When the lateral loads fH•fT•fC•C0T
With vibration or impact 2.5 to 7 ≧fS
are large
PT

C0 : Basic static load rating (N)
(radial direction)
C0L : Basic static load rating (N)
(reverse-radial direction)
C0T : Basic static load rating (N)
(lateral direction)
PR : Calculated load (radial direction) (N)
PL : Calculated load (N)
(reverse-radial direction)
PT : Calculated load (lateral direction) (N)
fT : Temperature factor (see Fig.12 on A-101)
A-95
Calculating the Average Load
In cases where the load applied to each LM block fluctuates under different conditions, such as an
industrial robot holding a work with its arm as it advances and receding with its arm empty, and a
machine tool handling various workpieces, it is necessary to calculate the service life of the LM Block
while taking into account such fluctuating loading conditions.
The average load (Pm) is the load under which the service life of the LM Guide is equivalent to that
under varying loads applied to the LM blocks.
Pm : Average load (N)

n
3
1 Pn : Varying load (N)
Pm = • ∑
L n=1
3
(Pn •Ln)
L : Total travel distance (mm)
Ln : Distance traveled under load Pn (mm)
Note) The above equation or the equation (1) below applies when the rolling elements are balls.
(1) When the load fluctuates stepwise
3
1 3 3 3
Pm = (P1 •L1 + P2 •L2 ······ +Pn •Ln) …………
（1）
L
Pm : Average load (N)
Pn : Varying load (N)
Ln : Distance traveled under Pn (mm)
P1
Pm
Load (P)
P2
Pn
L1 L2 Ln
Total travel distance (L)
A-96
Point of Selection
(2) When the load fluctuates monotonically
1
Pm (Pmin + 2•Pmax) …………
（2）
3
Pmin : Minimum load (N)
Pmax : Maximum load (N)
LM Guide
Pmax
Pm
Load (P)
Pmin
(3) When the load fluctuates sinusoidally
(a) Pm 0.65Pmax …………（3） (b) Pm 0.75Pmax …………（4）
Pmax Pmax
Pm Pm
Load (P)
Load (P)
Total travel distance (L) Total travel distance (L)
A-97
Example of Calculating the Average Load (1) - with Horizontal Mount
and Acceleration/Deceleration Considered
[Conditions] No.4 No.3
（m/s）
V
mg
l1
No.1 No.2
v l0
α1 = (m/s
t1
2
)
t1 t2 t1 mg
（S）
S1 S2 S1
（mm） l2
lS
（mm）
Ball screw
[Load Applied to the LM Block]
During uniform motion During acceleration During deceleration

mg m•α1•l 2 m•α1•l 2
P1 = + Pa1 = P1 + Pd1 = P1 –
4 2•l 0 2•l 0
P2 = + Pa2 = P2 – Pd2 = P2 +
4 2•l 0 2•l 0
P3 = + Pa3 = P3 – Pd3 = P3 +
4 2•l 0 2•l 0
P4 = + Pa4 = P4 + Pd4 = P4 –
4 2•l 0 2•l 0
[Average load]
3
1
(Pa1 •s1 + P1 •s2 + Pd1 •s3)
3 3 3
Pm1 =
l S
3
1
(Pa2 •s1 + P2 •s2 + Pd2 •s3)
3 3 3
Pm2 =
l S
3
1
(Pa3 •s1 + P3 •s2 + Pd3 •s3)
3 3 3
Pm3 =
l S
3
1 Note) Pan and Pdn represent loads applied to each LM block.
(Pa4 •s1 + P4 •s2 + Pd4 •s3)
3 3 3
Pm4 =
l S The suffix "n" indicates the block number in the dia-
gram above.
A-98
Point of Selection
Example of Calculating the Average Load (2) - When the Rails are
Movable
[Conditions] No.4 No.3
LM Guide
No.1 No.2
l1 l2
mg
l0
At the left of the arm At the right of the arm
mg mg•l 1 mg mg•l 2
Pl 1 = + + Pr1 = + –
4 2•l 0 4 2•l 0
Pl 2 = + – Pr2 = + +
4 2•l 0 4 2•l 0
Pl 3 = + – Pr3 = + +
4 2•l 0 4 2•l 0
Pl 4 = + + Pr4 = + –
4 2•l 0 4 2•l 0
[Average load]
1
Pm1 = (2•| P l 1|+|Pr1|)
3
1
Pm2 = (2•| P l 2|+|Pr2|)
3
1
Pm3 = (2•| P l 3|+|Pr3|)
3
1
Pm4 = (2•| P l 4|+|Pr4|)
3 Note) Pl n and Prn represent loads applied to each LM block.
The suffix "n" indicates the block number in the dia-
gram above.
A-99
Calculating the Nominal Life
The service life of an LM Guide is subject to variations even under the same operational conditions.
Therefore, it is necessary to use the nominal life defined below as a reference value for obtaining the
service life of the LM Guide. The nominal life means the total travel distance that 90% of a group of
units of the same LM Guide model can achieve without flaking (scale-like pieces on the metal sur-
face) after individually running under the same conditions.
Nominal Life Equation for an LM Guide Using Balls
L = ( fH • fT • fC
fW
•
C
PC ) 50

PC : Calculated load (N)
fT : Temperature factor(see Fig.12 on A-101)
Rated Life Equation for an LM Guide Using Rollers
( f •ff • f )
10
H T C C 3
L = • 100
W PC
fT : Temperature factor(see Fig.12 on A-101)
Once the nominal life (L) has been obtained, the service life time can be obtained using the following
equation if the stroke length and the number reciprocations are constant.
L 106
Lh =
2 lS n1 60
Lh : Service life time (h)
l s : Stroke length (mm)
n1 : Number of reciprocations per minute
(min-1)
A-100
Point of Selection
[fH: Hardness Factor]

To ensure the achievement of the optimum load
capacity of the LM Guide, the raceway hardness 1.0
must be between 58 and 64 HRC. 0.9
If the hardness is lower than this range, the 0.8
Hardness factor fH
basic dynamic load rating and the basic static 0.7
load rating decrease. Therefore, it is necessary 0.6
LM Guide
to multiply each rating by the respective hard- 0.5
ness factor (fH). 0.4
Since the LM Guide has sufficient hardness, the 0.3
fH value for the LM Guide is normally 1.0 unless 0.2
otherwise specified. 0.1
60 50 40 30 20 10
[fT:Temperature Factor]
If the temperature of the environment surround-
ing the operating LM Guide exceeds 100℃, take 1.0
into account the adverse effect of the high tem- 0.9

perature and multiply the basic load ratings by
0.8
the temperature factor indicated in Fig.12.
In addition, the selected LM Guide must also be 0.7
of a high temperature type. 0.6
Note) The LM Guide is designed to normally be used at
environment temperature of 80℃ or less. 0.5
100 150 200

Raceway temperature (℃)
[fC: Contact Factor]

When multiple LM blocks are used in close con- Table11 Contact Factor (fC)
tact with each other, it is difficult to achieve uni- Number of blocks used in
Contact factor fC
form load distribution due to moment loads and close contact
mounting-surface accuracy. When using multi- 2 0.81
ple blocks in close contact with each other, mul-
tiply the basic load rating (C or C0) by the 3 0.72
corresponding contact factor indicated in 4 0.66
Table11.
5 0.61
machine, take into account the respective contact fac- 6 or greater 0.6
Normal use 1
A-101
[fW: Load Factor]
Speed(V) fW
Faint 1 to 1.2
Therefore, where the effects of speed and vibra- Weak
Slow
1.2 to 1.5
tion are estimated to be significant, divide the 0.25<V≦1m/s
basic dynamic load rating (C) by a load factor Medium
Medium 1.5 to 2
1<V≦2m/s
selected from Table12, which contains empiri-
High
cally obtained data. Strong 2 to 3.5
V>2m/s
A-102
Point of Selection
Example of Calculating the Nominal Life (1) - with Horizontal Mount

and High-speed Acceleration
[Conditions]
Model No. : HSR35LA2SS+2500LP-Ⅱ
(basic dynamic load rating: C =50.2 kN)
LM Guide
(basic static load rating: C0=81.4 kN)
Mass : m1 =800 kg Distance : l 0=600 mm
m2 =500 kg l 1=400 mm
Speed : V =0.5 m/s l 2=120 mm
Time : t1 =0.05 s l 3=50 mm
t2 =2.8 s l 4=200 mm
t3 =0.15 s l 5=350 mm
Acceleration : α 1 =10 m/s2
α 3 =3.333 m/s2
Stroke : l S =1450 mm
No.4
l2 No.3
m2g
l1
l3 m1g
No.1 No.2
V l0
（m/s）
m1g
t1 t2 t3 （s）
s1 s2 s3 （mm）
lS （mm） m2g l5
l4
Ball screw
Fig.13 Condition
A-103
Calculate the load applied to each LM block.
z During uniform motion
Applied load in the radial direction Pn
m1g m1 g• l 2 m1 g• l 3 m 2g
P1 = + – + + = +2891N
4 2• l 0 2• l 1 4
m 1g m1g• l 2 m1 g• l 3 m2g
P2 = + + + + = +4459N
4 2• l 0 2• l 1 4
m1 g m1g• l 2 m1g• l 3 m2g
P3 = + + – + = +3479N
4 2• l 0 2• l 1 4
m1 g m1g• l 2 m1g• l 3 m2g
P4 = + – – + = +1911N
4 2• l 0 2• l 1 4
z During leftward acceleration
Applied load in the radial direction Pl an
m1• α1• l 5 m2• α1• l 4
P l a1 = P 1 – – = – 275.6 N
2• l 0 2• l 0
m1• α1• l 5 m2• α1• l 4
P l a2 = P2 + + = + 7625.6 N
2• l 0 2• l 0
m1• α1• l 5 m2• α1• l 4
P l a3 = P3 + + = + 6645.6 N
2• l 0 2• l 0
m1• α1• l 5 m2• α1• l 4
P l a4 = P 4 – – = – 1255.6 N
2• l 0 2• l 0
Applied load in the lateral direction Ptl an
m1• α1• l 3
Pt l a1 = – = – 333.3 N
2• l 0
m1• α1• l 3
Pt l a2 = + = + 333.3 N
2• l 0
m1• α1• l 3
Pt l a3 = + = + 333.3 N
2• l 0
m1• α1• l 3
Pt l a4 = – = – 333.3 N
2• l 0
z During leftward deceleration
Applied load in the radial direction Pl dn
m1• α3• l 5 m2• α3• l 4
P l d1 = P1 + + = + 3946.6 N
2• l 0 2• l 0
m1• α3• l 5 m2• α3• l 4
P l d2 = P2 – – = + 3403.4 N
2• l 0 2• l 0
m1• α3• l 5 m2• α3• l 4
P l d3 = P3 – – = + 2423.4 N
2• l 0 2• l 0
m1• α3• l 5 m2• α3• l 4
P l d4 = P4 + + = + 2966.6 N
2• l 0 2• l 0
A-104
Point of Selection
Applied load in the lateral direction Ptl dn

m1• α3• l 3
Pt l d1 = + = + 111.1 N
2• l 0
m1• α3• l 3
Pt l d2 = – = – 111.1 N
2• l 0
m1• α3• l 3
Pt l d3 = – = – 111.1 N
2• l 0
LM Guide
m1• α3• l 3
Pt l d4 = + = + 111.1 N
2• l 0
z During rightward acceleration
Applied load in the radial direction Pran
m1• α1• l 5 m2• α1• l 4
Pra1 = P1 + + = + 6057.6 N
2• l 0 2• l 0
m1• α1• l 5 m2• α1• l 4
Pra2 = P2 – – = + 1292.4 N
2• l 0 2• l 0
m1• α1• l 5 m2• α1• l 4
Pra3 = P3 – – = + 312.4 N
2• l 0 2• l 0
m1• α1• l 5 m2• α1• l 4
Pra4 = P4 + + = + 5077.6 N
2• l 0 2• l 0
Applied load in the lateral direction Ptran
m1• α1• l 3
Ptra1 = + = + 333.3 N
2• l 0
m1• α1• l 3
Ptra2 = – = – 333.3 N
2• l 0
m1• α1• l 3
Ptra3 = – = – 333.3 N
2• l 0
m1• α1• l 3
Ptra4 = + = + 333.3 N
2• l 0
z During rightward deceleration
Applied load in the radial direction Prdn
m1• α3• l 5 m2• α3• l 4
Prd1 = P1 – – = + 1835.4 N
2• l 0 2• l 0
m1• α3• l 5 m2• α3• l 4
Prd2 = P2 + + = + 5514.6 N
2• l 0 2• l 0
m1• α3• l 5 m2• α3• l 4
Prd3 = P3 + + = + 4534.6 N
2• l 0 2• l 0
m1• α3• l 5 m2• α3• l 4
Prd4 = P4 – – = + 855.4 N
2• l 0 2• l 0
A-105
Applied load in the lateral direction Ptrdn
m1• α3• l 3
Ptrd1 = – = – 111.1 N
2• l 0
m1• α3• l 3
Ptrd2 = + = + 111.1 N
2• l 0
m1• α3• l 3
Ptrd3 = + = + 111.1 N
2• l 0
m1• α3• l 3
Ptrd4 = + = – 111.1 N
2• l 0
[Combined Radial And Thrust Load]
z During uniform motion: z During rightward acceleration
PE1 = P1 = 2891 N PEra1 = | Pra1 | + | Ptra1 | = 6390.9 N
z During leftward acceleration z During rightward deceleration
PEl a1 = | Pl a1 | + | Ptl a1 | = 608.9 N PErd1 = | Prd1 | + | Ptrd1 | = 1946.5 N
z During leftward deceleration
PEl d1 = | Pl d1 | + | Ptl d1 | = 4057.7 N
PEl d2 = | Pl d2 | + | Ptl d2 | = 3514.5 N
PEl d3 = | Pl d3 | + | Ptl d3 | = 2534.5 N
PEl d4 = | Pl d4 | + | Ptl d4 | = 3077.7 N
[Static Safety Factor]
As indicated above, the maximum load is applied to the LM Guide during the leftward acceleration of
the second LM block. Therefore, the static safety factor (fs) is obtained in the following equation.
3
C0 81.4×10
fS = = = 10.2
PE l a 2 7958.9
A-106
Point of Selection
[Average Load Pmn]

Obtain the average load applied to each LM block.
3
1
Pm1 = (PE l a13•S1 + PE13•S2 + PE l d13•S3 + PEra13•S1 + PE13•S2 + PErd13•S3)
2• l S
3
1
= (608.93×12.5+28913×1400+4057.73×37.5+6390.93×12.5+28913×1400+1946.53×37.5)
2×1450
LM Guide
= 2940.1N
3
1
2• l S
3
1
= (7958.93×12.5+44593×1400+3514.53×37.5+1625.73×12.5+44593×1400+5625.73×37.5)
2×1450
= 4492.2N
3
1
2• l S
3
1
= (6978.93×12.5+34793×1400+2534.53×37.5+645.73×12.5+34793×1400+4645.73×37.5)
2×1450
= 3520.4N
3
1
2• l S
3
1
= (1588.93×12.5+19113×1400+3077.73×37.5+5410.93×12.5+19113×1400+966.53×37.5)
2×1450
= 1985.5N
[Nominal Life Ln]

The nominal life of the four LM blocks is obtained from the corresponding nominal life equations
shown below.
C 3
L1 = ( ) × 50 = 73700 km
fW • Pm1
C 3
L2 = ( ) × 50 = 20600 km
fW • Pm2
C 3
L3 = ( ) × 50 = 43000 km
fW • Pm3
C 3
L4 = ( ) × 50 = 239000 km
fW • Pm4
(where f w = 1.5)
Therefore, the service life of the LM Guide used in a machine or equipment under the conditions
stated above is equivalent to the nominal life of the second LM block, which is 20,600 km.
A-107
Example of Calculating the Nominal Life (2) - with Vertical Mount
[Conditions]
Model No. : HSR25CA2SS+1500L-Ⅱ
(basic dynamic load rating: C =19.9 kN)
(basic static load rating: C0=34.4 kN)
Mass : m0 =100 kg Distance : l 0=300 mm
m1 =200 kg l 1=80 mm
m2 =100 kg l 2=50 mm
Stroke : l S =1000 mm l 3=280 mm
l 4=150 mm
l 5=250 mm
The mass (m0) is loaded only during ascent; it is removed during descent.

l1 l3
Ball screw
No.3 No.2
m 1g m1g
l0
m 0g m 0g
m2g
m2g
No.4 No.1
l2 l4
l5
Fig.14 Condition
A-108
Point of Selection

z During Ascent
Load applied to each LM block in the radial direction Pun during ascent
m1g•l 4 m2g•l 5 m0g•l 3
Pu1 = + + + = + 1355.6 N
2•l 0 2•l 0 2•l 0
m1g•l 4 m2g•l 5 m0g•l 3
Pu2 = – – – = – 1355.6 N
2•l 0 2•l 0 2•l 0
LM Guide
m1g•l 4 m2g•l 5 m0g•l 3
Pu3 = – – – = – 1355.6 N
2•l 0 2•l 0 2•l 0
m1g•l 4 m2g•l 5 m0g•l 3
Pu4 = + + + = + 1355.6 N
2•l 0 2•l 0 2•l 0
Load applied to each LM block in the lateral direction Ptun during ascent
m1g•l 2 m2g•l 2 m0g•l 1
Ptu1 = + + + = + 375.7 N
2•l 0 2•l 0 2•l 0
m1g•l 2 m2g•l 2 m0g•l 1
Ptu2 = – – – = – 375.7 N
2•l 0 2•l 0 2•l 0
m1g•l 2 m2g•l 2 m0g•l 1
Ptu3 = – – – = – 375.7 N
2•l 0 2•l 0 2•l 0
m1g•l 2 m2g•l 2 m0g•l 1
Ptu4 = + + + = + 375.7 N
2•l 0 2•l 0 2•l 0
z During Descent
Load applied to each LM block in the radial direction Pdn during descent
m1g•l 4 m2g•l 5
Pd1 = + + = + 898.3 N
2•l 0 2•l 0
m1g•l 4 m2g•l 5
Pd2 = – – = – 898.3 N
2•l 0 2•l 0
m1g•l 4 m2g•l 5
Pd3 = – – = – 898.3 N
2•l 0 2•l 0
m1g•l 4 m2g•l 5
Pd4 = + + = + 898.3 N
2•l 0 2•l 0
Load applied to each LM block in the lateral direction Ptdn during descent
m1g•l 2 m2g•l 2
Ptd1 = +
2•l 0
+
2•l 0 = + 245 N
m1g•l 2 m2g•l 2
Ptd2 = – 2•l 0 = – 245 N
2•l 0
–
m1g•l 2 m2g•l 2
Ptd3 = – 2•l 0 = – 245 N
2•l 0
–
m1g•l 2 m2g•l 2
Ptd4 = + 2•l 0 = + 245 N
2•l 0
+
A-109
[Combined Radial And Thrust Load]
z During Ascent z During Descent
PEu1 = | Pu1 | + | Ptu1 | = 1731.3 N PEd1 = | Pd1 | + | Ptd1 | = 1143.3 N
The static safety factor (fS) of the LM Guide used in a machine or equipment under the conditions
stated above is obtained as follows.
3
C0 34.4×10
fS = = = 19.9
PEu2 1731.3
[Average Load Pmn]
Obtain the average load applied to each LM block.
3
1
Pm1 = (PEU13 •l S + PEd13 •l S) = 1495.1 N
2•l S
3
1
Pm2 = (PEU23 •l S + PEd23 •l S) = 1495.1 N
2•l S
3 1
Pm3 = (PEU33 •l S + PEd33 •l S) = 1495.1 N
2•l S
3
1
Pm4 = (PEU43 •l S + PEd43 •l S) = 1495.1 N
2•l S
[Nominal Life Ln]

The nominal life of the four LM blocks is obtained from the corresponding nominal life equations
shown below.
C 3
L1 = ( ) × 50 = 68200 km
fW•Pm1
C 3
L2 = ( ) × 50 = 68200 km
fW•Pm2
C 3
L3 = ( ) × 50 = 68200 km
fW•Pm3
C 3
L4 = ( ) × 50 = 68200 km
fW•Pm4
(where f w = 1.2)
Therefore, the service life of the LM Guide used in a machine or equipment under the conditions
stated above is 68,200 km.
A-110
Point of Selection
Predicting the Rigidity

Selecting a Radial Clearance (Preload)
Since the radial clearance of an LM Guide greatly affects the running accuracy, load carrying capac-
ity and rigidity of the LM Guide, it is important to select an appropriate clearance according to the
application. In general, selecting a negative clearance (i.e., a preload* is applied) while taking into
LM Guide
account possible vibrations and impact generated from reciprocating motion favorably affects the
service life and the accuracy.
For specific radial clearances, contact THK. We will help you select the optimal clearance according
to the conditions.
The clearances of all LM Guide models (except model HR, GSR and GSR-R, which are separate
types) are adjusted as specified before shipment, and therefore they do not need further preload
adjustment.
Preload is an internal load applied to the rolling elements (balls, rollers, etc.) of an LM block in advance in order to increase its
rigidity.
Table13 Types of Radial Clearance
Normal Clearance Clearance C1 (Light Preload) Clearance C0 (Medium Preload)

z The loading direction is fixed, z An overhang load or moment z High rigidity is required and
impact and vibrations are mini- load is applied. vibrations and impact are
mal and 2 rails are installed in z LM Guide is used in a single- applied.
Condition
parallel. rail configuration. z Heavy-cutting machine tool

z Very high precision is not z Light load and high accuracy
required, and the sliding resis- are required.
tance must be as low as possi-
ble.
• Beam-welding machine • Grinding machine table feed • Machining center
• Book-binding machin axis • NC lathe
• Automatic packaging machine • Automatic coating machine • Grinding stone feed axis of
Examples of applications
• XY axes of general industrial • Industrial robot grinding machine

machinery • various kinds of material high • Milling machine
• Automatic sash-manufacturing speed feeder • Vertical/horizontal boring
machine • NC drilling machine machine
• Welding machine • Vertical axis of general indus- • Tool rest guide
• Flame cutting machine trial machinery • Vertical axis of machine tool
• Tool changer • Printed circuit board drilling
• Various kinds of material machine
feeder • Electric discharge machine
• Measuring instrument
• Precision XY table
A-111
Service Life with a Preload Considered
When using an LM Guide under a medium preload (clearance C0), it is necessary to calculate the
service life while taking into account the magnitude of the preload.
To identify the appropriate preload for any selected LM Guide model, contact THK.
Rigidity
When the LM Guide receives a load, its rolling element, LM blocks and LM rails are elastically
deformed within a permissible load range. The ratio between the displacement and the load is called
rigidity value. (Rigidity values are obtained using the equation shown below.) The LM Guide's rigidity
increases according to the magnitude of the preload. Fig.15 shows rigidity difference between nor-
mal, C1 and C0 clearances.
The effect of a preload for a 4-way equal load type is translated into the calculated load approx. 2.8
times greater than the magnitude of the preload.
2δ 0 Normal clearance
Clearance C1
Deflection
δ0 Clearance C0
P0 Load 2.8P0
P0 : Magnitude of clearance C0
Fig.15 Rigidity Data
P
K=
δ
K : Rigidity value (N/μ m)
δ : Deflection (μ m)
P : Calculated load (N)
A-112
Point of Selection
Radial Clearance Standard for Each Model

[Radial clearances of models SHS and SCR]
Radial clearance Unit: μ m
Indication Light Medium
Normal
symbol preload preload
Model No. No Symbol C1 C0
LM Guide
15 – 5 to 0 – 12 to – 5 —
20 – 6 to 0 – 12 to – 6 – 18 to – 12
25 – 8 to 0 – 14 to – 8 – 20 to – 14
30 – 9 to 0 – 17 to – 9 – 27 to – 17
35 – 11 to 0 – 19 to – 11 – 29 to – 19
45 – 12 to 0 – 22 to – 12 – 32 to – 22
55 – 15 to 0 – 28 to – 16 – 38 to – 28
65 – 18 to 0 – 34 to – 22 – 45 to – 34
[Radial clearance for model SSR] [Radial clearance for models SNR/SNS and
Unit: μ m NR/NRS]
Indication Unit: μ m
Normal Light preload
symbol Indication Light Medium
Normal
Model No. No Symbol C1 symbol preload preload
15 – 4 to +2 – 10 to – 4 Model No. No Symbol C1 C0
20 – 5 to +2 – 12 to – 5 25 – 3 to +2 – 6 to – 3 – 9 to – 6
25 – 6 to +3 – 15 to – 6 30 – 4 to +2 – 8 to – 4 – 12 to – 8
30 – 7 to +4 – 18 to – 7 35 – 4 to +2 – 8 to – 4 – 12 to – 8
35 – 8 to +4 – 20 to – 8 45 – 5 to +3 – 10 to – 5 – 15 to – 10
55 – 6 to +3 – 11 to – 6 – 16 to – 11
65 – 8 to +3 – 14 to – 8 – 20 to – 14
75 – 10 to +4 – 17 to – 10 – 24 to – 17
85 – 13 to +4 – 20 to – 13 – 27 to – 20
100 – 14 to +4 – 24 to – 14 – 34 to – 24
[Radial clearance for model SHW] [Radial clearance for model SRS]
Unit: μ m Unit: μ m
Indication Light Medium Indication
Normal Normal Light preload
symbol preload preload symbol
Model No. No Symbol C1 C0 Model No. No Symbol C1
12 – 1.5 to 0 – 4 to – 1 — 7 – 2 to +2 – 3 to 0
14 – 2 to 0 – 5 to – 1 — 9 – 2 to +2 – 4 to 0
17 – 3 to 0 – 7 to – 3 — 12 – 3 to +3 – 6 to 0
21 – 4 to +2 – 8 to – 4 — 15 – 5 to +5 – 10 to 0
27 – 5 to +2 – 11 to – 5 — 20 – 5 to +5 – 10 to 0
35 – 8 to +4 – 18 to – 8 – 28 to – 18 25 – 7 to +7 – 14 to 0
50 – 10 to +5 – 24 to – 10 – 38 to – 24
A-113
[Radial clearance for models HSR, CSR and HSR-M1]
Indication Light Medium Indication Light Medium
Normal Normal
symbol preload preload symbol preload preload
Model No. No Symbol C1 C0 Model No. No Symbol C1 C0
8 – 1 to +1 – 4 to – 1 — 45 – 10 to +5 – 25 to – 10 – 40 to – 25
10 – 2 to +2 – 5 to – 1 — 55 – 12 to +5 – 29 to – 12 – 46 to – 29
12 – 3 to +3 – 6 to – 2 — 65 – 14 to +7 – 32 to – 14 – 50 to – 32
15 – 4 to +2 – 12 to – 4 — 85 – 16 to +8 – 36 to – 16 – 56 to – 36
20 – 5 to +2 – 14 to – 5 – 23 to – 14 100 – 19 to +9 – 42 to – 19 – 65 to – 42
25 – 6 to +3 – 16 to – 6 – 26 to – 16 120 – 21 to +10 – 47 to – 21 – 73 to – 47
30 – 7 to +4 – 19 to – 7 – 31 to – 19 150 – 23 to +11 – 51 to – 23 – 79 to – 51
35 – 8 to +4 – 22 to – 8 – 35 to – 22
[Model HSR Grade Ct Radial Clearance] [Radial clearances of models SR and SR-M1]
Indication symbol Normal Indication Light Medium
Normal
Model No. No Symbol symbol preload preload
15 – 8 to +2 Model No. No Symbol C1 C0
20 – 14 to +2 15 – 4 to +2 – 10 to – 4 —
25 – 16 to +2 20 – 5 to +2 – 12 to – 5 – 17 to – 12
30 – 18 to +4 25 – 6 to +3 – 15 to – 6 – 21 to – 15
35 – 20 to +4 30 – 7 to +4 – 18 to – 7 – 26 to – 18
35 – 8 to +4 – 20 to – 8 – 31 to – 20
45 – 10 to +5 – 24 to – 10 – 36 to – 24
55 – 12 to +5 – 28 to – 12 – 45 to – 28
70 – 14 to +7 – 32 to – 14 – 50 to – 32
85 – 20 to +9 – 46 to – 20 – 70 to – 46
100 – 22 to +10 – 52 to – 22 – 78 to – 52
120 – 25 to +12 – 57 to – 25 – 87 to – 57
150 – 29 to +14 – 69 to – 29 – 104 to – 69
[Radial clearance for model HRW] [Radial clearance for models RSR, RSR-W,
Unit: μ m RSR-Z, RSR-WZ, RSH, RSH-Z and RSR-M1]
Indication Light Medium Unit: μ m
Normal
symbol preload preload Indication
Model No. No Symbol C1 C0 symbol
12 – 1.5 to +1.5 – 4 to – 1 — Model No. No Symbol C1
14 – 2 to +2 – 5 to – 1 — 3 0 to +1 – 0.5 to 0
17 – 3 to +2 – 7 to – 3 — 5 0 to +1.5 – 1 to 0
21 – 4 to +2 – 8 to – 4 — 7 – 2 to +2 – 3 to 0
27 – 5 to +2 – 11 to – 5 — 9 – 2 to +2 – 4 to 0
35 – 8 to +4 – 18 to – 8 – 28 to – 18 12 – 3 to +3 – 6 to 0
50 – 10 to +5 – 24 to – 10 – 38 to – 24 15 – 5 to +5 – 10 to 0
60 – 12 to +5 – 27 to – 12 – 42 to – 27 20 – 7 to +7 – 14 to 0
A-114
Point of Selection
[Radial clearance for model MX] [Radial clearance for model JR]
Indication Indication symbol Normal
symbol Model No. No Symbol
Model No. No Symbol C1 25 0 to +30
5 0 to +1.5 – 1 to 0 35 0 to +30
7 – 2 to +2 – 3 to 0 45 0 to +50
LM Guide
55 0 to +50
[Radial clearances for models HCR and HMG] [Radial clearance for model NSR-TBC]
Indication Indication Light Medium
Normal Light preload Normal
symbol symbol preload preload
Model No. No Symbol C1 Model No. No Symbol C1 C0
12 – 3 to +3 – 6 to – 2 20 – 5 to +5 – 15 to – 5 – 25 to – 15
15 – 4 to +2 – 12 to – 4 25 – 5 to +5 – 15 to – 5 – 25 to – 15
25 – 6 to +3 – 16 to – 6 30 – 5 to +5 – 15 to – 5 – 25 to – 15
35 – 8 to +4 – 22 to – 8 40 – 8 to +8 – 22 to – 8 – 36 to – 22
45 – 10 to +5 – 25 to – 10 50 – 8 to +8 – 22 to – 8 – 36 to – 22
65 – 14 to +7 – 32 to – 14 70 – 10 to +10 – 26 to – 10 – 42 to – 26
[Radial clearance for model HSR-M2] [Radial clearances for models SRG and SRN]
Indication Indication Light Medium
Normal Light preload Normal
symbol symbol preload preload
Model No. No Symbol C1 Model No. No Symbol C1 C0
15 – 4 to +2 – 12 to – 4 15 – 0.5 to 0 – 1 to – 0.5 – 2 to – 1
20 – 5 to +2 – 14 to – 5 20 – 0.8 to 0 – 2 to – 0.8 – 3 to – 2
25 – 6 to +3 – 16 to – 6 25 – 2 to – 1 – 3 to – 2 – 4 to – 3
30 – 2 to – 1 – 3 to – 2 – 4 to – 3
35 – 2 to – 1 – 3 to – 2 – 5 to – 3
45 – 2 to – 1 – 3 to – 2 – 5 to – 3
55 – 2 to – 1 – 4 to – 2 – 6 to – 4
65 – 3 to – 1 – 5 to – 3 – 8 to – 5
[Radial clearance for model SRW]

Unit: μ m
Indication Light Medium
Normal
symbol preload preload
Model No. No Symbol C1 C0
70 – 2 to – 1 – 3 to – 2 – 5 to – 3
85 – 2 to – 1 – 4 to – 2 – 6 to – 4
100 – 3 to – 1 – 5 to – 3 – 8 to – 5
A-115
Determining the Accuracy
Accuracy Standards
Accuracy of the LM Guide is specified in terms of running parallelism, dimensional tolerance for
height and width, and height and width difference between a pair when 2 or more LM blocks are used
on one rail or when 2 or more rails are mounted on the same plane.
For details, see“Accuracy Standard for Each Model”on A-118 to A-128.
[Running of Parallelism]
It refers to the tolerance for parallelism between the LM block and the LM rail reference surface when
the LM block travels the whole length of the LM rail with the LM rail secured on the reference refer-
ence surface using bolts.
Fig.16 Running of Parallelism
[Difference in Height M]
Indicates a difference between the minimum and maximum values of height (M) of each of the LM
blocks used on the same plane in combination.
[Difference in Width W2]
Indicates a difference between the minimum and maximum values of the width (W2) between each of
the LM blocks, mounted on one LM rail in combination, and the LM rail.
Note1) When 2 or more rails are used on the same plane in parallel, only the width (W2) tolerance and the difference on the
master rail apply. The master LM rail is imprinted with "KB" (except for normal grade products) following the serial num-
ber.
Serial number
Master side symbol

Fig.17 Master LM Rail
Note2) Accuracy measurements each represent the average value of the central point or the central area of the LM block.
Note3) The LM rail is smoothly curved so that the required accuracy is easily achieved by pressing the rail to the reference sur-
face of the machine.
If it is mounted on a less rigid base such as an aluminum base, the curve of the rail will affect the accuracy of the
machine. Therefore, it is necessary to define straightness of the rail in advance.
A-116
Point of Selection
Guidelines for Accuracy Grades by Machine Type

Table14 shows guidelines for selecting an accuracy grade of the LM Guide according to the machine
type.
Table14 Guideline for Accuracy Grades by Machine Type
Accuracy grades
LM Guide
Type of machine
Ct7 Ct5 Normal H P SP UP
Machining center z z
Lathe z z
Milling machine z z
Boring machine z z
Jig borer z z
Grinding machine z z
Electric discharge machine z z z
Machine tool
Punching press z z
Laser beam machine z z z
Woodworking machine z z z z z
NC drilling machine z z
Tapping center z z
Palette changer z
ATC z z z
Wire cutting machine z z
Dressing machine z z
Cartesian coordinate z z z
Industrial
robot
Cylindrical coordinate z z
Wire bonding machine z z

Semiconductor
manufacturing
equipment
Prober z z
Electronic component inserter z z
Printed circuit board drilling
z z z
machine
Injection molding machine z z
3D measuring instrument z z
Office equipment z z z z
Other equipment
Conveyance system z z z z
XY table z z z
Coating machine z z z z
Welding machine z z z z
Medical equipment z z
Digitizer z z z
Inspection equipment z z z
Ct7 : Grade Ct7 Ct5 : Grade Ct5
Normal : Normal grade
H : High accuracy grade
P : Precision Grade
SP : Super precision grade
UP : Ultra precision grade
A-117
Accuracy Standard for Each Model
z Accuracies of models XSHS, SSR, SNR/SNS, SHW, HSR, SR, NR/NRS, HRW, NSR-TBC, HSR-
M1, SR-M1 HSR-M2, SRG and SRN are categorized into Ct7 grade (Ct7), Ct5 grade (Ct5), Normal
grade (no symbol), High accuracy grade (H), Precision grade (P), Super precision grade (SP) and
Ultra precision grade (UP) by model numbers, as indicated in Table16 on A-119.
A B
W2
Fig.18
Table15 LM Rail Length and Running Parallelism by Accuracy Standard Unit: μ m
LM rail length (mm) Running Parallelism Values

High- Super
Grade Grade Normal Precision Ultra preci-
Above Or less accuracy precision
Ct7 Ct5 grade grade sion grade
grade grade
— 50 6 6 5 3 2 1.5 1
50 80 6 6 5 3 2 1.5 1
80 125 6 6 5 3 2 1.5 1
125 200 7 6 5 3.5 2 1.5 1
200 250 9.5 6.5 6 4 2.5 1.5 1
250 315 11 7.5 7 4.5 3 1.5 1
315 400 13 8.5 8 5 3.5 2 1.5
400 500 16 11 9 6 4.5 2.5 1.5
500 630 18 13 11 7 5 3 2
630 800 20 15 12 8.5 6 3.5 2
800 1000 23 16 13 9 6.5 4 2.5
1000 1250 26 18 15 11 7.5 4.5 3
1250 1600 28 20 16 12 8 5 4
1600 2000 31 23 18 13 8.5 5.5 4.5
2000 2500 34 25 20 14 9.5 6 5
2500 3150 36 27 21 16 11 6.5 5.5
3150 4000 40 29 23 17 12 7.5 6
4000 5000 41 30 24 18 13 8.5 6.5
Note) Ct7 and Ct5 class are only applicable for model HSR.
A-118
Point of Selection
Table16 Accuracy Standards for Models SHS, SSR, SNR/SNS, SHW, HSR, SR, NR/NRS,
HRW, NSR-TBC, HSR-M1, SR-M1, HSR-M2, SRG, and SRN.
Unit: mm
Grade Grade Normal High- Precision Super Ultra

Accuracy standards grade
accuracy
grade
precision precision
Model Ct7 Ct5 grade grade grade
No.
No Sym-
Item Ct7 Ct5 H P SP UP
bol
Dimensional tolerance in height M — — ±0.07 ± 0.03 ± 0.015 ± 0.007 —
LM Guide
Difference in height M — — 0.015 0.007 0.005 0.003 —
8 Dimensional tolerance in width W2 — — ±0.04 ± 0.02 ± 0.01 ± 0.007 —
10 Difference in width W2 — — 0.02 0.01 0.006 0.004 —
12 Running parallelism of surface C
14 against surface A
Δ C (as shown in A-118 Table15)
Running parallelism of surface D
against surface B
Δ D (as shown in A-118 Table15)
0 0 0
Dimensional tolerance in height M ± 0.12 ± 0.12 ±0.07 ± 0.03
– 0.03 – 0.015 – 0.008
Difference in height M 0.025 0.025 0.02 0.01 0.006 0.004 0.003
15 0 0 0
Dimensional tolerance in width W2 ± 0.12 ± 0.12 ±0.06 ± 0.03
17 – 0.02 – 0.015 – 0.008
20 Difference in width W2 0.025 0.025 0.02 0.01 0.006 0.004 0.003
against surface A
against surface B
0 0 0
Dimensional tolerance in height M ± 0.12 ± 0.12 ±0.08 ± 0.04
– 0.04 – 0.02 – 0.01
Difference in height M 0.025 0.025 0.02 0.015 0.007 0.005 0.003
25 0 0 0
Dimensional tolerance in width W2 ± 0.12 ± 0.12 ±0.07 ± 0.03
27 – 0.03 – 0.015 – 0.01
30 Difference in width W2 0.035 0.035 0.025 0.015 0.007 0.005 0.003
against surface A
against surface B
0 0 0
Dimensional tolerance in height M — — ±0.08 ± 0.04
– 0.05 – 0.03 – 0.015
Difference in height M — — 0.025 0.015 0.007 0.005 0.003
40 0 0 0
45 Dimensional tolerance in width W2 — — ±0.07 ± 0.04
– 0.04 – 0.025 – 0.015
50
55 Difference in width W2 — — 0.03 0.015 0.007 0.005 0.003
against surface A
against surface B
0 0 0
Dimensional tolerance in height M — — ±0.08 ± 0.04
– 0.05 – 0.04 – 0.03
65 Difference in height M — — 0.03 0.02 0.01 0.007 0.005
70 0 0 0
75 Dimensional tolerance in width W2 — — ±0.08 ± 0.04
– 0.05 – 0.04 – 0.03
85
100 Difference in width W2 — — 0.03 0.02 0.01 0.007 0.005
against surface A
Δ C (as shown in A-118 Fig.18)
150
against surface B
Δ D (as shown in A-118 Fig.18)
Note) XFor models SRG and SRN, only precision or higher grades apply. (Ct7 grade, Ct5 grade, normal grade and high accu-
racy grade are not available.)
Note) Ct7 and Ct5 class are only applicable for model HSR.
A-119
z Accuracies of model HMG are defined by model number as indicated in Table17.
D
C
A
W2
B
Fig.19
Table17 Model HMG Accuracy Standard Table18 LM Rail Length and Running Parallelism by Accuracy Standard
Unit: mm Unit: μ m
Model Accuracy Standards Normal grade LM rail length (mm) Running Parallelism Values
No. Item No symbol Above Or less Normal grade
Dimensional tolerance — 125 30
±0.1
in height M 125 200 37
Difference in height M 0.02 200 250 40
250 315 44
Dimensional tolerance
±0.1 315 400 49
in width W2
400 500 53
15 Difference in width W2 0.02
500 630 58
Running parallelism of 630 800 64
ΔC
surface C against
(as shown in Table18) 800 1000 70
surface A
1000 1250 77
Running parallelism of 1250 1600 84
ΔD
surface D against
(as shown in Table18) 1600 2000 92
surface B
±0.1
in height M
Difference in height M 0.02
±0.1
in width W2
35
Running parallelism of
ΔC
surface C against
(as shown in Table18)
surface A
ΔD
surface D against
surface B
±0.1
in height M
Difference in height M 0.03
±0.1
in width W2
65
ΔC
surface C against
surface A
ΔD
surface D against
surface B
A-120
Point of Selection
z Accuracies of model HCR are categorized into normal and high accuracy grades by model number
as indicated in Table19.
LM Guide
A
Fig.20
Table19 Accuracy Standard for Model HCR Table20 LM Rail Length and Running Parallelism by Accuracy Standard
Unit: mm Unit: μ m
Normal High-accuracy LM rail length (mm) Running Parallelism Values
Model Accuracy standards grade grade
No. High-accuracy
Item No Symbol H Above Or less Normal grade grade
Dimensional
±0.2 ± 0.2 — 125 30 15
12 tolerance in height M 125 200 37 18
15 Difference in height M 0.05 0.03 200 250 40 20
25 Running parallelism of
35 ΔC 250 315 44 22
surface C against
surface A (as shown in Table20) 315 400 49 24
Dimensional 400 500 53 26
tolerance in height M ±0.2 ± 0.2
500 630 58 29
45 Difference in height M 0.06 0.04 630 800 64 32
65 Running parallelism of ΔC 800 1000 70 35
surface C against
surface A (as shown in Table20) 1000 1250 77 38
1250 1600 84 42
1600 2000 92 46
z Accuracies of model JR are defined by model number as indicated in Table21.
Table22 LM Rail Length and Running Parallelism by Accuracy Standard
C Unit: μ m
Running Parallelism
LM rail length (mm)
Values
M Above Or less Normal grade
— 50 5
50 80 5
80 125 5
A
125 200 6
Fig.21
200 250 8
Table21 Accuracy Standard for Model JR 250 315 9
Unit: mm 315 400 11
Accuracy standards Normal grade 400 500 13
Model
No. 500 630 15
Item No Symbol
630 800 17
25 Running parallelism of 1000 1250 21
35 ΔC
surface C against 1250 1600 23
surface A 1600 2000 26
45 Running parallelism of 2500 3150 30
55 ΔC
surface C against 3150 4000 33
surface A 4000 5000 34
A-121
z Accuracies of models SCR and CSR are categorized into precision, super precision and ultra pre-
cision grades by model number as indicated in Table23.
E F D C
A B
Fig.22
Table23 Accuracy Standard for Models SCR and CSR Table24 LM Rail Length and Running Parallelism by Accuracy Standard
Unit: mm Unit: μ m
Precision Super Ultra

Model Accuracy standards grade precision precision
No. grade grade
Super Ultra
Item P SP UP Precision
Above Or less grade
precision precision
Difference in height M 0.01 0.007 0.005 grade grade
Perpendicularity of surface
0.005 0.004 0.003 — 50 2 1.5 1
D against surface B
15 ΔC 50 80 2 1.5 1
20 surface E against surface B (as shown in Table24) 80 125 2 1.5 1
Running parallelism of ΔD 125 200 2 1.5 1
surface F against surface D (as shown in Table24)
200 250 2.5 1.5 1
Difference in height M 0.01 0.007 0.005
Perpendicularity of surface 250 315 3 1.5 1
D against surface B 0.008 0.006 0.004
315 400 3.5 2 1.5
25 Running parallelism of ΔC
surface E against surface B (as shown in Table24) 400 500 4.5 2.5 1.5
Running parallelism of ΔD 500 630 5 3 2
630 800 6 3.5 2
Perpendicularity of surface 800 1000 6.5 4 2.5
30 1000 1250 7.5 4.5 3
Running parallelism of ΔC
35 surface E against surface B (as shown in Table24) 1250 1600 8 5 4
Running parallelism of ΔD 1600 2000 8.5 5.5 4.5
2000 2500 9.5 6 5
2500 3150 11 6.5 5.5
0.012 0.008 0.006
D against surface B 3150 4000 12 7.5 6
45 Running parallelism of ΔC 4000 5000 13 8.5 6.5
surface E against surface B (as shown in Table24)
Running parallelism of ΔD
65 Running parallelism of ΔC
surface E against surface B (as shown in Table24)
A-122
Point of Selection
z Accuracies of model HR are categorized into normal, high accuracy, precision, super precision and
ultra precision grades as indicated in Table25.
B
M
LM Guide
A W0
Fig.23
Table25 Accuracy Standard for Model HR Unit: mm

High- Super Ultra
Normal Precision
Accuracy standards accuracy precision precision
grade grade
grade grade grade
Item No Symbol H P SP UP
Dimensional tolerance in height M ± 0.1 ±0.05 ±0.025 ± 0.015 ± 0.01
Difference in height M Note 1) 0.03 0.02 0.01 0.005 0.003
Dimensional tolerance for total width W0 ± 0.1 ±0.05
Difference in total width W0Note 2) 0.03 0.015 0.01 0.005 0.003
Parallelism of the raceway against surfaces
ΔC (as shown in Table26)
A and B
Note1) Difference in height M applies to a set of LM Guides used on the same plane.
Note2) Difference in total width W0 applies to LM blocks used in combination on one LM rail.
Note3) Dimensional tolerance and difference in total width W0 for precision and higher grades apply only to the master-rail side
among a set of LM Guides. The master rail is imprinted with "KB" following a serial number.
Table26 LM Rail Length and Running Parallelism by Accuracy Standard Unit: μ m
High-accuracy Super precision Ultra precision
Above Or less Normal grade Precision grade
grade grade grade
— 50 5 3 2 1.5 1
50 80 5 3 2 1.5 1
80 125 5 3 2 1.5 1
125 200 5 3.5 2 1.5 1
200 250 6 4 2.5 1.5 1
250 315 7 4.5 3 1.5 1
315 400 8 5 3.5 2 1.5
400 500 9 6 4.5 2.5 1.5
500 630 11 7 5 3 2
630 800 12 8.5 6 3.5 2
800 1000 13 9 6.5 4 2.5
1000 1250 15 11 7.5 4.5 3
1250 1600 16 12 8 5 4
1600 2000 18 13 8.5 5.5 4.5
2000 2500 20 14 9.5 6 5
2500 3150 21 16 11 6.5 5.5
3150 4000 23 17 12 7.5 6
4000 5000 24 18 13 8.5 6.5
A-123
z Accuracies of model GSR are categorized into normal, high accuracy and precision grades by
model number as indicated in Table27.
D
M
A
B
Fig.24
Table27 Accuracy Standard for Model GSR Table28 LM Rail Length and Running Parallelism by Accuracy Standard
Unit: mm Unit: μ m
High- LM rail length (mm) Running Parallelism Values
Normal accuracy Precision
Accuracy standards grade grade
Model grade High-
No. Normal Precision
No Above Or less accuracy
grade
Item Symbol H P grade grade
Dimensional tolerance in
±0.02 — 50 5 3 2
height M
50 80 5 3 2
15 surface C against sur- 80 125 5 3 2
20 face A (as shown in Table28)
125 200 5 3.5 2
surface D against sur- 200 250 6 4 2.5
face B (as shown in Table28)
250 315 7 4.5 3
Dimensional tolerance in
height M ±0.03 315 400 8 5 3.5
25 Running parallelism of ΔC 400 500 9 6 4.5
surface C against
30 surface A (as shown in Table28) 500 630 11 7 5
35
Running parallelism of ΔD 630 800 12 8.5 6
surface D against
surface B (as shown in Table28) 800 1000 13 9 6.5
1000 1250 15 11 7.5
1250 1600 16 12 8
1600 2000 18 13 8.5
2000 2500 20 14 9.5
2500 3150 21 16 11
3150 4000 23 17 12
4000 5000 24 18 13
A-124
Point of Selection
z Accuracies of model GSR-R are categorized into normal and high accuracy grades by model num-
ber as indicated in Table29.
LM Guide
M
A
B
Fig.25
Table29 Accuracy Standard for GSR-R Table30 LM Rail Length and Running Parallelism by Accuracy Standard
Unit: mm Unit: μ m
Accuracy standards Normal grade High-accuracy LM rail length (mm) Running Parallelism Values
grade
Model
No. No Normal High-accuracy
Item H Above Or less
Symbol grade grade
Dimensional — 50 5 3
±0.03
tolerance in height M
50 80 5 3
Running parallelism
25 ΔC 80 125 5 3
of surface C against
30 (as shown in Table30)
surface A 125 200 5 3.5
35
Running parallelism 200 250 6 4
ΔD
of surface D against 250 315 7 4.5
surface B
315 400 8 5
400 500 9 6
500 630 11 7
630 800 12 8.5
800 1000 13 9
1000 1250 15 11
1250 1600 16 12
1600 2000 18 13
2000 2500 20 14
2500 3150 21 16
3150 4000 23 17
4000 5000 24 18
A-125
z Accuracies of models SRS, RSR, RSR-M1, RSR-W, RSR-Z, RSR-WZ, RSH and RSH-Z are cate-
gorized into normal, high accuracy and precision grades by model number as indicated in Table31.
Table33 LM Rail Length and Running Parallelism for Models
C SRS, RSR7 to 25, and RSH by Accuracy Standard
Unit: μ m
D
M High-
Normal Precision
Above Or less grade
accuracy
grade
grade
A B — 40 8 4 1
W2 40 70 10 4 1
Fig.26 70 100 11 4 2
100 130 12 5 2
Table31 Accuracy Standards for Models SRS, RSR, RSR- 130 160 13 6 2
M1, RSR-W, RSR-Z, RSR-WZ, RSH and RSH-Z 160 190 14 7 2
Unit: mm 190 220 15 7 3
High-
220 250 16 8 3
Accuracy Normal Precision 250 280 17 8 3
accuracy
standards grade grade
Model grade 280 310 17 9 3
No.
No 310 340 18 9 3
Item H P
Symbol 340 370 18 10 3
Dimensional tolerance 370 400 19 10 3
in height M ±0.03 — ±0.015
400 430 20 11 4
Difference in height M 0.015 — 0.005 430 460 20 12 4
Dimensional tolerance 460 490 21 12 4
in width W2 ±0.03 — ±0.015
3 490 520 21 12 4
Difference in width W2 0.015 — 0.005
5 520 550 22 12 4
surface C against ΔC (as shown in Table32) 550 580 22 13 4
surface A 580 610 22 13 4
Running parallelism of 610 640 22 13 4
surface D against ΔD (as shown in Table32) 640 670 23 13 4
surface B
670 700 23 13 5
in height M ±0.04 ± 0.02 ±0.01 700 730 23 14 5
Difference in height M 0.03 0.015 0.007 730 760 23 14 5
7 760 790 23 14 5
9 Dimensional tolerance
±0.04 ± 0.025 ±0.015
in width W2 790 820 23 14 5
12
Difference in width W2 0.03 0.02 0.01 820 850 24 14 5
14
15 Running parallelism of 850 880 24 15 5
20 surface C against sur- ΔC (as shown in Table33) 880 910 24 15 5
face A 910 940 24 15 5
25
Running parallelism of 940 970 24 15 5
surface D against ΔD (as shown in Table33) 970 1000 25 16 5
surface B
1000 1030 25 16 5
1030 1060 25 16 6
1060 1090 25 16 6
Table32 LM Rail Length and Running Parallelism for Models 1090 1120 25 16 6
RSR3 and 5 by Accuracy Standard 1120 1150 25 16 6
Unit: μ m 1150 1180 26 17 6
LM rail length (mm) Running Parallelism Values 1180 1210 26 17 6
Precision 1210 1240 26 17 6
Above Or less Normal grade 1240 1270 26 17 6
grade
— 25 2.5 1.5 1270 1300 26 17 6
1300 1330 26 17 6
25 50 3.5 2
1330 1360 27 18 6
50 100 5.5 3 1360 1390 27 18 6
100 150 7 4 1390 1420 27 18 6
150 200 8.4 5 1420 1450 27 18 7
1450 1480 27 18 7
1480 1510 27 18 7
1510 1540 28 19 7
1540 1570 28 19 7
1570 1600 28 19 7
A-126
Point of Selection
z Accuracies of model MX are categorized into normal and precision grades by model number as
indicated in Table34.
E F D
C
M
LM Guide
A
B
Fig.27
Table34 Accuracy Standard for Model MX Table36 LM Rail Length and Running Parallelism for Model
Unit: mm MX7 by Accuracy Standard
Normal Precision Unit: μ m
Accuracy standards
Model grade grade LM rail length (mm) Running Parallelism Values
No. No
Item P
Symbol Normal Precision
Above Or less
Difference in height M 0.015 0.005 grade grade
Perpendicularity of — 40 8 1
surface D against 0.003 0.002
surface B 40 70 10 1
5 Running parallelism 70 100 11 2
ΔC
of surface E against
surface B 100 130 12 2
Running parallelism
ΔD 130 160 13 2
of surface F against
surface D
160 190 14 2
Difference in height M 0.03 0.007
190 220 15 3
Perpendicularity of
surface D against 0.01 0.005 220 250 16 3
surface B
7 Running parallelism 250 280 17 3
ΔC
of surface E against
(as shown in Table36) 280 310 17 3
surface B
Running parallelism 310 340 18 3
ΔD
of surface F against
surface D 340 370 18 3
370 400 19 3
Table35 LM Rail Length and Running Parallelism for Model 400 430 20 4
MX5 by Accuracy Standard
Unit: μ m 430 460 20 4
LM rail length (mm) Running Parallelism Values 460 500 21 4
Precision
Above Or less Normal grade
grade
— 25 2.5 1.5
25 50 3.5 2
50 100 5.5 3
100 150 7 4
150 200 8.4 5
A-127
z Accuracies of model SRW are categorized into precision, super precision and ultra precision
grades by model number as indicated in Table37.
D
C
A
W2
B
Fig.28
Table37 Accuracy Standard for Model SRW Table38 LM Rail Length and Running Parallelism by Accuracy Standard
Unit: mm Unit: μ m
Accuracy Super Ultra
Precision precision precision LM rail length (mm) Running Parallelism Values
Model standards grade grade grade
No. Super Ultra
Precision
Item P SP UP Above Or less grade
precision precision
grade grade
Dimensional tolerance 0 0 0 — 50 2 1.5 1
in height M – 0.05 – 0.03 – 0.015
50 80 2 1.5 1
80 125 2 1.5 1
Dimensional tolerance 0 0 0
in width W2 – 0.04 – 0.025 – 0.015 125 200 2 1.5 1
70
85 Difference in width W2 0.007 0.005 0.003 200 250 2.5 1.5 1
Running parallelism of 250 315 3 1.5 1
ΔC
surface C against
surface A (as shown in Table38) 315 400 3.5 2 1.5
Running parallelism of ΔD 400 500 4.5 2.5 1.5
surface D against
surface B (as shown in Table38) 500 630 5 3 2
Dimensional tolerance 0 0 0 630 800 6 3.5 2
in height M – 0.05 – 0.04 – 0.03 800 1000 6.5 4 2.5
Difference in height M 0.01 0.007 0.005 1000 1250 7.5 4.5 3
Dimensional tolerance 0 0 0 1250 1600 8 5 4
in width W2 – 0.05 – 0.04 – 0.03
100 Difference in width W2 1600 2000 8.5 5.5 4.5
0.01 0.007 0.005
2000 2500 9.5 6 5
surface C against 2500 3000 11 6.5 5.5
surface A (as shown in Table38)
surface D against
surface B (as shown in Table38)
A-128
LM Guide
Feature of Each Model
A-129
Structure
Structureand and
Features of the Caged
Features Ball
of the LM Guide
Caged Ball LM Guide
0
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
End seal
Ball
Ball cage
Fig.1 Structural Drawing of the Caged Ball LM Guide Model SHS
Endplate Unloaded ball circulation path Ball Ball cage

(Turn-around section)
Loaded raceway area of the LM block
LM rail
Grease pocket
Fig.2 Circulation Structure inside the LM Block of the Caged Ball LM Guide
With the Caged Ball LM Guide, the use of a ball cage allows lines of evenly spaced balls to circulate,
thus to eliminate friction between the balls.
In addition, grease held in a space between the ball circulation path and the ball cage (grease
pocket) is applied on the contact surface between each ball and the ball cage as the ball rotates,
forming an oil film on the ball surface. As a result, an oil film is not easily broken.
A-130
Features of Each Model
Structure and Features of the Caged Ball LM Guide
Advantages of the Ball Cage Technology

(1) The absence of friction between balls, together with increased grease retention, achieves long
service life and long-term maintenance-free (lubrication-free) operation.
(2) The absence of ball-to-ball collision achieves low noise and acceptable running sound.
(3) The absence of friction between balls achieves low heat generation and high speed operation.
(4) The circulation of lines of evenly spaced balls ensures smooth ball rotation.
LM Guide
(5) The absence of friction between balls allows high grease retention and low dust generation.
[Long Service Life and Long-term Maintenance-free Operation]
z Nominal Life Equation for the LM Guide
L= ( ) × 50
C
P
As indicated in the equation, the greater the basic dynamic load rating, the longer the nominal
life of the LM Guide.
[Example of Calculation]
Comparison of Nominal Life Between the Caged Ball LM Guide model SHS25LR and the Conven-
tional Full-ball Type Model HSR25LR
Calculation Assuming P = 13.6 kN
Basic dynamic rated load (C) of SHS25LR = 36.8 kN
Basic dynamic rated load (C) of HSR25LR = 27.2 kN
3 3
C 36.8
Model SHS25LR L= ( ) P ( )
× 50 =
13.6
× 50 = 990 km
3 3
C 27.2
L= (
P )
× 50 = (
13.6 )
Model HSR25LR × 50 = 400 km
The nominal life of the Caged Ball LM Guide model SHS25LR is 2.4 times* longer than the conventional full-ball
type model HSR25LR.
* When selecting a model number, it is necessary to perform a service life calculation according to the conditions.
A-131
z Data on Long Service Life and Long-term Maintenance-free Operation
Use of a ball cage eliminates friction between balls and increases grease retention, thus to achieve
long service life and long-term maintenance-free operation.
[Condition]
Model No. : SHS25/HSR25
Speed : 60m/min
Stroke : 350mm
Acceleration: 9.8m/s2
Orientation : horizontal
Load : Caged Ball LM Guide model SHS: 11.1kN
Conventional full-ball type model HSR: 9.8kN
HSR25
(Conventional full-ball type) L = 435 km
Lubricated every 100 km
Nominal life: 400 km L = 1347 km
SHS25
(Caged Ball LM Guide)
Initial lubrication only
0 400 800 1200 1600
Distance traveled (km)
A-132
[Low Noise, Acceptable Running Sound]

z Noise Level Data
Since the ball circulation path inside the LM block is made of resin, metallic noise between balls and
the LM block is eliminated. In addition, use of a ball cage eliminates metallic noise of ball-to-ball colli-
sion, allowing a low noise level to be maintained even at high speed.
Model SHS35LV: Caged Ball LM Guide
Model HSR35LR: conventional full-ball type
LM Guide
90 50
80
Noise level (dBA)
40
Noise level (dBA)

70
HSR35LR 30
60 HSR35LR
20
50
SHS35LV
40 10 SHS35LV
9.6dBA
30 0
0 25 50 75 100 125 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000
Speed (m/min) Frequency (Hz)
Comparison of Noise Levels between Model SHS35LV and Comparison of Noise Levels between Model SHS35LV and
Model HSR35LR Model HSR35LR (at speed of 50 m/min)
[High Speed]
z High-speed Durability Test Data
Since use of a ball cage eliminates friction between balls, only a low level of heat is generated and
superbly high speed is achieved.
[Condition]
Model No. : Caged Ball LM Guide Model SHS65LVSS
Speed : 200m/min
Stroke : 2500mm
Calculated service life 19718km
Lubrication : initial lubrication only
Applied load: 34.5kN
Travel distance
Acceleration: 1.5G
30000km
0 5000 10000 15000 20000 25000 30000

Grease remains, and no anomaly is observed in
the balls and grease.
Detail view of the ball cage
A-133
[Smooth Motion]
z Rolling Resistance Data
Use of a ball cage allows the balls to be uniformly aligned and prevents a line of balls from meander-
ing as they enter the LM block. This enables smooth and stable motion to be achieved, minimizes
fluctuations in rolling resistance, and ensures high accuracy, in any mounting orientation.
Model SHS25LV: Caged Ball LM Guide
Model HSR25LR: conventional full-ball type
20 20

18 18
16 16
14 14
12 12
10 10
8 8
6 6
4 4
2 2
0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
Stroke (mm) Stroke (mm)
Rolling Resistance Fluctuation Data with HSR25LR Rolling Resistance Fluctuation Data with SHS25LV
(Feeding speed: 10mm/sec) (Feeding speed: 10mm/sec)
[Low dust generation]

z Low Dust Generation Data
In addition to friction between balls, metallic contact has also been eliminated by using resin for the
through holes. Furthermore, the Caged Ball LM Guide has a high level of grease retention and mini-
mizes fly loss of grease, thus to achieve superbly low dust generation.
Particle diameter (µm) 0.3-0.5 2.0-5.0

0.5-1.0 5.0-
1.0-2.0
Particle accumulation (No. of particles per 2min. • liter)
Particle accumulation (No. of particles per 2min. • liter)
300 300
200 200
100 100
0 0
0 5 10 15 20 0 5 10 15 20
Time (hour) Time (hour)
Conventional Full-ball Type Caged Ball LM Guide Model SSR20
A-134
LM Guide
A-135
SHS
Global Standard Size Model SHS
Global Standard Size Caged Ball LM Guide Model SHS
Caged Ball LM Guide

0
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
End seal
45°
Ball
45°
Ball cage
Cross section
* For the ball cage, see A-130.
Structure and Features XXX A-137

Types and Features XXX A-138
Rated Loads in All Directions XXX A-140
Equivalent Load XXX A-140
Service Life XXX A-100
Radial Clearance Standard XXX A-113
Accuracy Standards XXX A-119
Shoulder Height of the Mounting Base and the Corner Radius XXX A-327
Error Allowance in the Parallelism between Two Rails XXX A-333
Error Allowance in Vertical Level between Two Rails XXX A-336
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table, Example of Model Number Coding XXX B-6
Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail XXX B-12
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model SHS XXX B-13
A-136
Structure and Features

Balls roll in four rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and an LM block, and ball cages
and endplates incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate.
Each row of balls is placed at a contact angle of 45° so that the rated loads applied to the LM block
are uniform in the four directions (radial, reverse radial and lateral directions), enabling the LM Guide
to be used in all orientations. In addition, the LM block can receive a well-balanced preload, increas-
LM Guide
ing the rigidity in the four directions while maintaining a constant, low friction coefficient. With the low
sectional height and the high rigidity design of the LM block, this model achieves highly accurate and
stable straight motion.
[4-way Equal Load]
to be used in all orientations and in extensive applications.
[Self-adjustment Capability]
The self-adjustment capability through front-to-front configuration of THK's unique circular-arc
grooves (DF set) enables a mounting error to be absorbed even under a preload, thus to achieve
highly accurate, smooth straight motion.
[Global Standard Size]
SHS is designed to have dimensions almost the same as that of Full Ball LM Guide model HSR,
which THK as a pioneer of the linear motion system has developed and is practically a global stan-
dard size.
[Low Center of Gravity, High Rigidity]
As a result of downsizing the LM rail section, the center of gravity is lowered and the rigidity is
increased.
A-137
Types and Features
Model SHS-C Specification Table⇒B-6

The flange of the LM block has tapped holes.
Can be mounted from the top or the bottom.
Used in places where the table cannot have
through holes for mounting bolts.
Model SHS-V Specification Table⇒B-8

With this type, the LM block has a smaller width
(W) and tapped holes.
Used in places where the space for table width
is limited.
Model SHS-R Specification Table⇒B-10

The LM block has a smaller width (W) and the
mounting holes are tapped.
It succeeds the height dimension of full-ball type
LM Guide HSR-R.
A-138
Model SHS-LC Specification Table⇒B-6

The LM block has the same cross-sectional
shape as model SHS-C, but has a longer overall
LM block length (L) and a greater rated load.
LM Guide
Model SHS-LV Specification Table⇒B-8
shape as model SHS-V, but has a longer overall
Model SHS-LR Specification Table⇒B-10

shape as model SHS-R, but has a longer overall
A-139
Rated Loads in All Directions
Model SHS is capable of receiving loads in four
directions: radial, reverse radial and lateral
directions.
The basic load ratings are uniform in the four PL PR
directions (radial, reverse radial and lateral
directions), and their actual values are provided
in the specification table for SHS. PT
PT
Fig.1
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model SHS receives loads in all directions simultaneously, the equivalent load
is obtained from the equation below.
PE PR PL PT
PE : Equivalent load (N)
: Radial direction
: Reverse radial direction
: Lateral direction
PR : Radial load (N)
PL : Reverse radial load (N)
PT : Lateral load (N)
A-140
Service Life
For details,see A-100.
Radial Clearance Standard
LM Guide
Accuracy Standards
Shoulder Height of the Mounting Base and the Corner Radius

Error Allowance in the Parallelism between Two Rails

Error Allowance in Vertical Level between Two Rails

A-141
SSR
Radial Type Model SSR
Radial Type Caged Ball LM Guide Model SSR
Caged Ball LM Guide

0
LM block
Endplate
End seal
LM rail 90°
30°
Ball cage
Ball Cross section

Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model SSR XXX B-23
A-142

Use of the ball cage eliminates friction between balls and increases grease retention, thus to achieve
low noise, high speed and long-term maintenance-free operation.
LM Guide
[Compact, Radial Type]
The compact design with a low sectional height and the ball contact structure at 90° make SSR an
optimal model for horizontal guides.
[Superb Planar Running Accuracy]
Use of a ball contact structure at 90° in the radial direction reduces displacement in the radial direc-
tion under a radial load and achieves highly accurate, smooth straight motion.
[Stainless Steel Type also Available as Standard]
A stainless steel type with its LM block, LM rail and balls all made of stainless steel, which is superbly
corrosion resistant, is also available as standard.
A-143
Types and Features
Model SSR-XW Specification Table⇒B-16

Model SSR-XV Specification Table⇒B-18

This type has the same cross-sectional shape
as SSR-XW but has a shorter overall LM block
length (L).
Model SSR-XTB Specification Table⇒B-20

Since the LM block can be mounted from the
bottom, this type is optimal for applications
where through holes for mounting bolts cannot
be drilled on the table.
A-144

Model SSR is capable of receiving loads in four
directions. CL C
Its basic dynamic load rating is represented by PL C0L C0
the symbol in the radial direction indicated in
LM Guide
CT CT
Fig.1, and the actual value is provided in the
C0T C0T
specification table for SSR. The values in the
reverse radial and lateral directions are obtained PT PT
from Table1 below.
Fig.1
Table1 Rated Load of Model SSR in All Directions
Basic dynamic Basic static

Direction
Radial
C C0
direction
Reverse
radial CL=0.50C C0L=0.50C0
direction
Lateral
CT=0.53C C0T=0.43C0
directions
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model SSR receives a Table2 Equivalent Factor of Model SSR
reverse radial direction and a lateral direction PE X Y
simultaneously, the equivalent load is obtained
Equivalent load in
in the equation below. reverse radial direction
1 1.155
PE X•PL Y•PT Equivalent load in

0.866 1
lateral direction
: Lateral direction
X, Y : Equivalent factor (see Table2)
A-145
Service Life

Accuracy Standards



A-146
LM Guide
A-147
SNR/SNS
Ultra-heavy Load Type Models SNR/SNS
Ultra-heavy Load Type Caged Ball LM Guide Model SNR/SNS
Caged Ball LM Guide

0
90
°
LM block
40°
Endplate
Radial type model SNR
Cross section
50°
End seal
LM rail
40°
Ball cage
Ball 4-way equal load type model SNS

Cross section
Error Allowance in the Parallelism between Two Rails XXX A-333/A-334
Error Allowance in Vertical Level between Two Rails XXX A-336/A-337

A-148

and endplates incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate. Use of the ball cage elimi-
nates friction between balls and increases grease retention, thus to achieve low noise, high speed
and long-term maintenance-free operation.
LM Guide
[High Rigidity]
Models SNR/SNS are the most rigid types among the Caged Ball LM Guide series.
Both the radial type SNR and the 4-way equal load type SNS are available for each size variation.
Depending on the intended use, you can select either type.
[Ultra-heavy Load]
Since the curvature of the raceway is approximated to the ball diameter, the ball contact area under
a load is increased and the LM Guide is capable of receiving an ultra-heavy load.
[Increased Damping Effect]
In rapid traverse where the LM block travels at high speed, no differential slip occurs and smooth
motion is maintained, thus achieving highly accurate positioning. In heavy cutting where the LM block
travels at low speed, favorable differential slip according to the cutting load occurs to increase fric-
tional resistance, thus increasing the damping capacity.
A-149
Types and Features
Models SNR-R/SNS-R Specification Table⇒B-26/B-28

is limited.
Models SNR-C/SNS-C Specification Table⇒B-30/B-32

Models SNR-RH/SNS-RH (Build to Order) Specification Table⇒B-34/B-36

The dimensions are almost the same as that of
LM Guide models SHS and HSR, and the LM
block has tapped holes.
A-150
Models SNR-CH/SNS-CH (Build to Order) Specification Table⇒B-38/B-40

The dimensions are almost the same as that of
LM Guide models SHS and HSR, and the flange
of the LM block has tapped holes.
LM Guide
Models SNR-LR/SNS-LR Specification Table⇒B-26/B-28
shape as models SNR-R/SNS-R, but has a
longer overall LM block length (L) and a greater
rated load.
Models SNR-LC/SNS-LC Specification Table⇒B-30/B-32

shape as models SNR-C/SNS-C, but has a
rated load.
A-151
Models SNR-LRH/SNS-LRH (Build to Order) Specification Table⇒B-34/B-36
shape as models SNR-RH/SNS-RH, but has a
rated load.
Models SNR-LCH/SNS-LCH (Build to Order) Specification Table⇒B-38/B-40

shape as models SNR-CH/SNS-CH, but has a
rated load.
A-152

Model SNR/SNS is capable of receiving loads in
four directions: radial, reverse radial and lateral CL C
directions. Their basic dynamic load ratings are PL C0L C0 PR
represented by the symbols in the radial direc- CT CT
tion indicated in Fig.1, and the actual values are
LM Guide
C0T C0T
provided in the specification tables for SNR/ PT PT
SNS. The values in the reverse radial and lat-
eral directions are obtained from Table1 and
Fig.1
Table2 below.
Table1 Basic Load Ratings of Model SNR in All Directions Table2 Basic Load Ratings of Model SNS in All Directions
SNR SNS
Direction Basic dynamic Basic static Direction Basic dynamic Basic static
load rating load rating load rating load rating
Radial direction C C0 Radial direction C C0
Reverse radial direction CL=0.64C C0L=0.64C0 Reverse radial direction CL=0.84C C0L=0.84C0
Lateral directions CT=0.47C C0T=0.38C0 Lateral directions CT=0.84C C0T=0.84C0
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model SNR receives a reverse radial load and a lateral load simultaneously,
the equivalent load is obtained from the equation below.
Table3 Equivalent Factor of Model SNR
PE X•PL Y•PT PE X Y
PE : Equivalent load (N) Equivalent load in reverse
1 1.678
: Reverse radial direction radial direction
Equivalent load in lateral
: Lateral direction direction
0.596 1
When the LM block of model SNS receives a radial load and a lateral load, or a reverse radial load
and a lateral load, simultaneously, the equivalent load is obtained from the equation below.
Table4 Equivalent Factor of Model SNS
PE X•PR (PL) Y•PT (When radial and lateral loads are applied)
PE : Equivalent load (N) PE X Y
: Radial direction Equivalent load in the
1 0.935
radial direction
: Reverse radial direction Equivalent load in lateral
: Lateral direction 1.07 1
direction
Table5 Equivalent Factor of Model SNS
PL : Reverse radial load (N) (When reverse radial load and lateral load are applied)
PE X Y
X, Y : Equivalent factor Equivalent load in reverse
1 1.02
(see Table4 and Table5) radial direction
0.986 1
direction
A-153
Service Life

Accuracy Standards


For details, A-333 and A-334.

A-154
LM Guide
A-155
SHW
Wide Rail Model SHW
Wide Rail Type Caged Ball LM Guide Model SHW
Caged Ball LM Guide

Wide Rail Model SHW
0
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
End seal
45
°
Ball
°
Ball cage
45

A-156
Wide Rail Model SHW

A wide and highly rigid LM Guide that uses ball cages to achieve low noise, long-term maintenance-
free operation and high speed.
[Wide, Low Center of Gravity]
Model SHW, which has a wide LM rail and a low center of gravity, is optimal for locations requiring
LM Guide
space saving and large MC moment rigidity.
[4-way Equal Load]
[Low Dust Generation]
Use of ball cages eliminates friction between balls and retains lubricant, thus achieving low dust gen-
eration.
A-157
Types and Features
Model SHW-CA Specification Table⇒B-44

Model SHW-CR Specification Table⇒B-46

The LM block has tapped holes.

Model SHW is capable of receiving loads in four
directions.
The basic load ratings are uniform in the four
directions (radial, reverse radial and lateral PL PR
in the specification table for SHW.
PT PT
Fig.1
A-158
Wide Rail Model SHW
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model SHW receives loads in all directions simultaneously, the equivalent load
PE PR PL PT
LM Guide
: Radial direction
: Lateral direction
Service Life

Accuracy Standards



A-159
SRS
Miniature Type Model SRS
Miniature Type Caged Ball LM Guide Model SRS
Caged Ball LM Guide

0
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
End seal
Compact type
Model SRS-M
Side seal
Ball
Ball cage
Wide type
Model SRS-WM

Flatness of the LM Rail and the LM Block Mounting Surface XXX A-164
A-160

Caged Ball LM Guide model SRS has a structure where two raceways are incorporated into the com-
pact body, enabling the model to receive loads in all directions, and to be used in locations where a
moment is applied with a single rail. In addition, use of ball cages eliminates friction between balls,
thus achieving high speed, low noise, acceptable running sound, long service life, and long-term
maintenance-free operation.
LM Guide
[Low Dust Generation]
Use of ball cages eliminates friction between balls and retains lubricant, thus achieving low dust gen-
eration. In addition, the LM block and LM rail use stainless steel, which is highly resistant to corro-
sion.
[4-way Equal Load Type]
Since the right and left rows of balls under a load contact the raceway at 45° , this LM Guide is capa-
ble of receiving loads in the radial, reverse radial and lateral directions at equal values and being
used in any orientations. With this well-balanced structure, this model can be used in extensive appli-
cations.
[Compact]
Since SRS has a compact structure where the rail cross section is designed to be low and that con-
tains only two rows of balls, it can be installed in space-saving locations.
[Lightweight]
Since part of the LM block (e.g., around the ball relief hole) is made of resin and formed through
insert molding, SRS is a lightweight, low inertia type of LM Guide.
A-161
Types and Features
Model SRS-M Specification Table⇒B-50

A standard type of SRS.
Note) In addition to model SRS-M, a full-ball type without
ball cage is also available.If desiring this type, indicate
type "SRS-G" when placing an order.However, since
SRS-G does not have a ball cage, its dynamic load
rating is smaller than SRS-M. See the table of basic
load ratings for SRS-G on B-51 for details.
Model SRS-WM Specification Table⇒B-52

Has a longer overall LM block length (L), a
greater width and a larger rated load and per-
missible moment than SRS-M.
Note) In addition to model SRS-WM, a full-ball type without
ball cage is also available.If desiring this type, indicate
type "SRS-G" when placing an order.However, since
SRS-G does not have a ball cage, its dynamic load
rating is smaller than SRS-WM. See the table of basic
load ratings for SRS-G on B-53 for details.
A-162

Model SRS is capable of receiving loads in four
directions. CL C
Their basic dynamic load ratings are repre- PL C0L C0 PR
sented by the symbols in the radial direction CT CT
LM Guide
C0T C0T
indicated in Fig.1, and the actual values are pro-
vided in the specification table for SRS. The val- PT PT
ues in the reverse radial and lateral directions
are obtained from Table1 below.
Fig.1
Table1 Rated Loads of Model SRS in All Directions

Basic dynamic Basic static load
Direction
load rating rating
Radial
C C0
direction
Reverse radial
CL=C C0L=C0
direction
Lateral directions
(7M/7WM/ CT=1.19C C0T=1.19C0
9M/9WM/20M)
Lateral directions
(12M/12WM/ CT=C C0T=C0
15M/15WM/25M)
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model SRS receives a Table2 Equivalent Factor of Model SRS
reverse radial load and a lateral load simulta- Equivalent Load PE Model No. X Y
neously, the equivalent load is obtained from the 7M/7WM/9M/
equation below. Radial and 1 0.839
9WM/20M
reverse radial
direction 12M/12WM/15M/
1 1
PE X•PR PL Y•PT 15WM/25M
PE : Equivalent load (N) 7M/7WM/9M/
1.192 1
Lateral 9WM/20M
: Radial direction directions 12M/12WM/15M/
: Reverse radial direction 1 1
15WM/25M
: Lateral direction
A-163
Service Life

Accuracy Standards



Flatness of the LM Rail and the LM Block Mounting Surface

The values in Table3 apply when the clearance Table3 Flatness of the LM Rail and the LM Block Mounting Surface
Unit: mm
is a normal clearance. If the clearance is C1
clearance and two rails are used in combination, Model No. Flatness error
we recommend using 50% or less of the value in SRS 7M 0.025/200
the table.
SRS 7WM 0.025/200
Note) Since SRS has Gothic-arch grooves, any accuracy SRS 9M 0.035/200
error in the mounting surface may negatively affect the
operation. Therefore, we recommend using SRS on a SRS 9WM 0.035/200
highly accurate mounting surface.
SRS 12M 0.050/200
SRS 12WM 0.050/200
SRS 15M 0.060/200
SRS 15WM 0.060/200
SRS 20M 0.070/200
SRS 25M 0.070/200
A-164
LM Guide
A-165
SCR
Cross LM Guide Model SCR
Cross Guide Type Caged Ball LM Guide Model SCR
Caged Ball LM Guide

0
LM rail
End seal
Endplate
Grease nipple
LM block
Ball
Ball cage
Side seal
LM rail

Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model SCR XXX B-59
A-166

This model is an integral type of Caged Ball LM Guide that squares an internal structure similar to
model SHS, which has a proven track record and is highly reliable, with another and uses two LM
rails in combination. Since an orthogonal LM system can be achieved with model SCR alone, a con-
LM Guide
ventionally required saddle is no longer necessary, the structure for X-Y motion can be simplified and
the whole system can be downsized.
[4-way Equal Load]
[High Rigidity]
Since balls are arranged in four rows in a well-balanced manner, this model is stiff against a moment,
and smooth straight motion is ensured even a preload is applied to increase the rigidity.
Since the rigidity of the LM block is higher than that of a combination of two LM blocks of the conven-
tional type secured together back-to-back with bolts, this model is optimal for building an X-Y table
that requires a high rigidity.
[Compact]
This model is an integral type of Caged Ball LM Guide that squares an internal structure similar to
model SHS, which has a proven track record and is highly reliable, with another and uses two LM
rails in combination. Since an orthogonal LM Guide can be achieved with model SCR alone, a con-
ventionally required saddle is no longer necessary, the structure for X-Y motion can be simplified and
the whole system can be downsized.
A-167
Types and Features
Model SCR Specification Table⇒B-56

This model is a standard type.
Drawing of Using an Inner Saddle

Model SCR can easily be assembled and
adjusted by using an inner saddle to link four
LM blocks together. When installed on an
inner saddle, model SCR achieves a highly
accurate X-Y guide and high rigidity moment
in the yawing direction (as indicated by
the arrow in the figure).
Inner saddle
Ball screw mounting location

Ball screw mounting on the X axis
location on the Y axis
A-168

Model SCR is capable of receiving loads in four
Reverse radial direction Radial direction
PL PR
directions.
The basic load ratings are defined with a LM rail
and a LM block, and uniform in the four direc-
LM Guide
tions (radial, reverse radial and lateral direc-
tions). Their actual values are provided in the
specification table for SCR. Lateral Latera
direction directio
PT PT
Fig.1
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model SCR receives loads in all directions simultaneously, the equivalent load
PE PR PL PT
: Radial direction
: Lateral direction
Service Life

Accuracy Standards

A-169
HSR
Global Standard Size Model HSR
Global Standard Size LM Guide Model HSR
LM Guide
0
Retainer plate
LM block
Endplate
End seal
LM rail
Grease nipple
45°
Ball
Retainer plate
Inner seal (Optional)
45°
Side seal
Cross section

Types XXX A-172
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model HSR XXX B-83
A-170

Balls roll in four rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and an LM block, and endplates
incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate.
Since retainer plates hold the balls, they do not fall off even if the LM rail is pulled out (except models
HSR 8, 10 and 12).
LM Guide
ing the rigidity in the four directions while maintaining a constant, low friction coefficient. With the low
sectional height and the high rigidity design of the LM block, this model achieves highly accurate and
stable straight motion.
[High Rigidity Type]
Since balls are arranged in four rows in a well-balanced manner, a large preload can be applied and
the rigidity in four directions can easily be increased.
[High Durability]
Even under a preload or excessive biased load, differential slip of balls does not occur. As a result,
smooth motion, high wear resistance, and long-term maintenance of accuracy are achieved.
[Stainless Steel Type also Available]
A special type which LM block, LM rail and balls are made of stainless steel is also available.
A-171
Types
Model HSR-A Specification Table⇒B-62

The flange of its LM block has tapped holes.
Model HSR-B Specification Table⇒B-64

The flange of the LM block has through holes.
Model HSR-R Grade Ct Specification Table⇒B-66

Model HSR-R Specification Table⇒B-70

Having a smaller LM block width (W) and
tapped holes, this model is optimal for compact
design.
Low-priced LM rails and LM blocks are individu-
ally stocked. We also have Ct grade model
HSR-R available with a short delivery time.
A-172
Model HSR-YR Specification Table⇒B-74

When using two units of LM Guide facing each
other, the previous model required much time in
machining the table and had difficulty achieving
LM Guide
the desired accuracy and adjusting the clear-
ance. Since model HSR-YR has tapped holes
on the side of the LM block, a simpler structure
is gained and reduced man-hour and increase in
accuracy can be achieved.
Fig.1 Conventional Structure Fig.2 Mounting Structure for Model HSR-YR
Model HSR-LA Specification Table⇒B-62

shape as model HSR-A, but has a longer overall
Model HSR-LB Specification Table⇒B-64

shape as model HSR-B, but has a longer overall
A-173
Model HSR-LR Specification Table⇒B-70
shape as model HSR-R, but has a longer overall
Model HSR-CA Specification Table⇒B-76

Has six tapped holes on the LM block.
Model HSR-CB Specification Table⇒B-78

The LM block has six through holes. Used in
places where the table cannot have through
holes for mounting bolts.
A-174
Model HSR-HA Specification Table⇒B-76

shape as model HSR-CA, but has a longer over-
all LM block length (L) and a greater rated load.
LM Guide
Model HSR-HB Specification Table⇒B-78
The LM block has the same cross sectional
shape as model HSR-CB, but has a longer over-
Models HSR 100/120/150 HA/HB/HR Specification Table⇒B-80

Large types of model HSR that can be used in
large-scale machine tools and building struc-
tures.
A-175
The basic load ratings are uniform in the four directions (radial, reverse radial and lateral directions),
and their actual values are provided in the specification table for HSR.
PL PR PR PL
PT PT
PT
Fig.3 Model HSR Fig.4 Model HSR-YR
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model HSR receives loads in the reverse radial and lateral directions simulta-
neously, the equivalent load is obtained from the equation below.
PE PR PL PT
: Radial direction
: Lateral direction
A-176
Service Life
LM Guide
Accuracy Standards



A-177
SR
Radial Type Model SR
Radial Type LM Guide Model SR
LM Guide
0
LM block
Endplate
Grease nipple
End seal
90°
LM rail
Ball
Retainer plate 30°
Side seal (Optional)
Cross section

Characteristics of Model SR XXX A-182
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model SR XXX B-91
A-178

incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate. Since a retainer plate holds the balls, they
will not fall off even if the LM block is removed from the LM rail. With the low sectional height and the
high rigidity design of the LM block, this model achieves highly accurate and stable straight motion.
LM Guide
[Compact, Heavy Load]
Since it is a compact designed model that has a low sectional height and a ball contact structure rigid
in the radial direction, this model is optimal for horizontal guide units.
[Mounting accuracy can easily be achieved]
Since this model is a self-adjusting type capable of easily absorbing an accuracy error in parallelism
and level between two rails, highly accurate and smooth motion can be achieved.
[Low Noise]
The endplate installed at each end of the LM block is designed to ensure the smooth and low-noise
circulation of the balls at the turning areas.
[High Durability]
Even under a preload or excessive biased load, differential slip of balls is minimal. As a result, high
wear resistance and long-term maintenance of accuracy are achieved.
A special type which LM block, LM rail and balls are made of stainless steel is also available.
A-179
Types and Features
Model SR-W Specification Table⇒B-86

Model SR-TB Specification Table⇒B-88

The LM block has the same height as model
SR-W and can be mounted from the bottom.
Model SR-V Specification Table⇒B-86

A space-saving type whose LM block has the
same cross-sectional shape as model SR-W,
but has a smaller overall LM block length (L).
A-180
Model SR-SB Specification Table⇒B-88

same cross-sectional shape as model SR-TB,
LM Guide
A-181
Characteristics of Model SR
When compared to models having a contact angle of 45° , model SR shows excellent characteristics
as indicated below. Using these characteristics, you can design and manufacture highly accurate
and highly rigid machines or equipment.
Difference in Rated Load and Service Life

Since SR has a contact angle of 90°, its rated load and service life are different from those with a contact angle
of 45°. When comparing model SR with a model that has a contact angle of 45° and when the same radial load
is applied to the two models with the same ball diameter as shown in the figure below, the load applied to SR is
70% of the other model. As a result, the service life of SR is more than twice that of the other model.
90
°
45°
Ball diameter and nominal life
(when the number of balls Z=24)
30°
45°
108
Contact Structure Contact Structure
Nominal life (km)
of Model SR 107 of Model HSR
P P
106
105
45°
90
°
Contact structure of 90° 104 Contact structure of 45°

3 5 10 (Model HSR)
(Model SR)
Ball diameter (mm)
Ball Diameter and Nominal Life
Fig.1
Difference in Accuracy
If a machining error (grinding error) occurs in the LM rail or LM block, it will affect the running accuracy. Assum-
ing that there is a machining error of Δ on the raceway, it results in an error in the radial direction, and the error
with the contact angle of 45° (model HSR) is 1.4 times greater than that of the contact angle of 90° (model SR).
As for the machining error resulting in horizontal direction error, the error with the contact angle of 45° is 1.22
times greater than the contact angle of 30° .
rΔ
ro
Gr
er
ind
G
ng
Error in radial direction Δ 1
rin
ing
di
di
90
err
45°
rin
30°
ng
or
45°
°
Δ
Error in radial direction Δ 2 G
er
Grinding error Δ
ro
rΔ
Horizontal direction error Δ 1 Horizontal direction error Δ 2

Upper Lower Upper Lower
groove groove groove groove
Contact structure of 90° (Model SR) Contact structure of 45° (Model HSR)
Fig.2 Machining Error and Accuracy
A-182
Difference in Rigidity
The 90° contact angle adopted by model SR has a difference with the 45° contact angle also in rigidity.
When the same radial load "P" is applied, the displacement in the radial direction with model SR is only 56% of
that with the contact angle of 45°. Accordingly, where high rigidity in the radial direction is required, model SR is
more advantageous. The figure below shows the difference in radial load and displacement.
Deflection in radial direction δ 2

Deflection in radial direction δ 1
LM Guide
δ2
n
tio
c
le
Deflection δ 1
ef
P1
D
P
P
45°
90
°
Fig.3 Deflection under a Radial Load
Load and deflection when contact angles are not the same (Da=6.35mm)
(deflection per ball)
25 When the contact angle is 45°
20
Deflection (µm)
When the contact angle is 90°
15
10
0
100 200 300 400 500 600
Applied load (N)
Fig.4 Radial Load and Deflection
Conclusion
As suggested above, model SR, which has a contact angle of 90° in the radial direction, is optimal for locations
where the radial load is large, high rigidity is required or high running accuracy in the vertical and horizontal
directions is required.
However, if the reverse radial load, the lateral load or the moment is large, we recommend model HSR, which
has a contact angle of 45° (4-way equal load).
A-183
Model SR is capable of receiving loads in four
directions: radial, reverse radial and lateral CL C
PL C0L C0 PR
directions.
The basic load ratings indicate the values in the CT CT
radial directions in Fig.5, and their actual values C0T C0T
are provided in the specification table for SR.
The values in the reverse radial and lateral PT PT
directions are obtained from Table1 below.
Fig.5
Table1 Rated Loads in All Directions with Model SR
Basic Basic
Model
Direction dynamic static load
No.
load rating rating
Radial
C C0
direction
SR Reverse radial
CL=0.62C C0L=0.50C0
15 to 70 direction
Lateral
CT=0.56C C0T=0.43C0
directions
Radial
C C0
direction
SR Reverse radial
CL=0.78C C0L=0.71C0
85 to 150 direction
Lateral
CT=0.48C C0T=0.35C0
directions
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model SR receives loads Table2 Equivalent Factor of Model SR
in the reverse radial and lateral directions simul- Model
PE X Y
taneously, the equivalent load is obtained from No.
the equation below. Equivalent load in
1 1.155
SR reverse radial direction
PE X•PL Y•PT 15 to 70 Equivalent load
0.866 1
in lateral direction
PE : Equivalent load (N) Equivalent load in
1 2
SR reverse radial direction
: Reverse radial direction 85 to 150 Equivalent load
A-184
Service Life
LM Guide
Accuracy Standards



A-185
NR/NRS
Ultra-heavy Load Type Models NR/NRS
Ultra-heavy Load Type LM Guide Model NR/NRS
LM Guide
0
LM rail
LM block
Inner seal
Endplate
End seal
90
°
45°
Ball
Side seal
°
°
45
45
Oil valve
Radial type 4-way equal load type
Grease nipple
Model NR Model NRS
Cross section
Characteristics of Models NR and NRS XXX A-190
Error Allowance in the Parallelism between Two Rails XXX A-333/A-334

Error Allowance in Vertical Level between Two Rails XXX A-336/A-337
A-186

incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate. The raceways are cut into deep grooves that
have a radius closer to that of the balls than in the conventional design, using special equipment and
an extremely precise cutting technique. This design allows high rigidity, high vibration/impact resis-
tance and high damping capacity, all of which are required for machine tools, thus making these
LM Guide
models capable of bearing ultra-heavy loads.
[Improved Damping Capacity]
While the machine tool (equipped with NR or NRS) is not cutting a workpiece during operation, the
LM Guide travels normally and smoothly. While the machine tool is cutting the workpiece, the cutting
force is applied to the LM Guide to increase and the contact area between the balls and the raceway,
allowing an appropriate mixture of rolling and sliding motions to be achieved. Accordingly, the friction
resistance is increased and the damping capacity is improved.
Since the absolute slip during the rolling and sliding motion is insignificant, it causes little wear and
does not affect the service life.
[Highly Rational LM Guide]
The excessively large differential slip occurring in a Gothic-arch groove does not happen with these
models. They smoothly travel and achieve high positioning accuracy during fast feeding. During the
cutting operation, appropriate slip occurs according to the cutting load, the rolling resistance is
increased and the damping capacity is increased. Thus, models NR and NRS are highly rational LM
Guides.
[High Rigidity]
To increase the rigidity of the LM block and the LM rail, which may deteriorate the overall rigidity of
the LM Guide in the reverse radial and lateral directions, THK made full use of FEM to achieve opti-
mal design within the limited dimensional range.
For both the radial type model NR and the 4-way equal load type model NRS, THK offers two types
with the same dimensions and different characteristics. It allows you to select the desired type
according to the application.
[Ultra-heavy Load]
Since the curvature of the raceway is approximated to the ball diameter, the ball contact area under
a load is increased and the LM Guide is capable of receiving an ultra-heavy load.
A-187
Types and Features
Models NR-R/NRS-R Specification Table⇒B-94/B-96

(W) and tapped holes. Used in places where the
space for table width is limited.
Models NR-A/NRS-A Specification Table⇒B-98/B-100

Models NR-B/NRS-B Specification Table⇒B-102/B-104

A-188
Models NR-LR/NRS-LR Specification Table⇒B-94/B-96

shape as models NR-R/NRS-R, but has a
LM Guide
rated load.
Models NR-LA/NRS-LA Specification Table⇒B-98/B-100

shape as models NR-A/NRS-A, but has a longer
overall LM block length (L) and a greater rated
load.
Models NR-LB/NRS-LB Specification Table⇒B-102/B-104

shape as models NR-B/NRS-B, but has a longer
load.
A-189
Characteristics of Models NR and NRS
[Increased Rigidity in Major Load Directions]
Deflection in radial direction δ’1

The structure with a contact angle of 90° used in
Deflection δ 1
model NR differs from that with a 45° contact
Deflection in radial direction δ’2
angle also in rigidity. Under the same radial load
2
nδ
P, the displacement in the radial direction with P1
ctio
P P
fle
model NR having a contact angle of 90° is 44%
De
less than the 45° .
45°
90°
Contact structure of 90° Contact structure of 45°

(Model NR)
Fig.2 shows the difference in radial load and dis- Fig.1 Deflection under a Radial Load
placement. Accordingly, where high rigidity in
the radial direction is required, model NR is
Load and deflection when contact angles are not the same (Da=6.35mm)
more advantageous. (deflection per 24 balls)
25 Deflection (µm)
When the contact angle is 45°
20
15
10
5 When the contact angle is 90°
[Increased Rigidity in the Lateral and Reverse- 0 2 4 6 8 10
radial Directions] Applied load (kN)
Since with LM Guide model NR, the distance
"H" between the rail bottom and the lower- Fig.2 Radial Load and Deflection (normal clearance, no pre-
groove balls (balls receiving lateral loads) is load)
short, the ratio between the rail width "W" and
the distance "H" is small, and the distance "T"
between the LM rail mounting bolt seat and the
LM rail bottom is short. Accordingly, the defor-
mation of the LM rail under a lateral load is mini-
B
mal, and the rigidity in the lateral directions is
increased. H
T A
Since the dimension "B" of the LM block is short
and the thickness "A" is large, the lateral exten- W
sion of the LM block under a reverse radial or
Radial type structure
lateral load is minimized. This structure allows
the rigidity in the reverse radial direction to be Fig.3 Cross Section of Model NR
increased.
In comparison to the old model with the same
model number, the ball diameter of NR is
smaller and the number of effective balls is
approximately 1.3 times greater, thus increasing
the static rigidity.
A-190
[Comparison of Contact Surface and Internal Stress between Different Contact Structures]
As shown in Fig.4, the contact area and the internal stress of a ball greatly vary depending on the
shape of contact surface.
With the conventional roller guide, the effective length is shorter than the apparent value due to the
retention of the rollers. Additionally, the change of stress distribution in the contact section caused by
a mounting error significantly affects the differential slip.
LM Guide
0.51Da 0.52Da 0.55Da
Distribution of contact stress 1 d2 d1 d1d2
Normal clearance contact area

1.8 1.2 1.0 1.0 3.6
Contact area under a preload
Change in contact surface due

to a mounting error
d1d2
d2 d1 d 2 d1
Distribution of contact stress 2
d1 ＜ d 2 d1≒d2 d1≪d2
≒
Change in differential Change in differential Change in differential Change in differential
slip: none slip: none slip: large slip: large
Fig.4 Comparison of Contact Surface (φ 6.350 ball, φ 6 x 6l roller)
A-191
Models NR/NRS are capable of receiving loads
in all four directions: radial, reverse radial and CL C
lateral directions. PL C0L C0 PR
The basic load ratings of model NR are indi-
cated by the values in the radial directions in CT CT
C0T C0T
Fig.5, and their actual values are provided in the
specification table for NR/NRS. The values in PT PT
the reverse radial and lateral directions are
obtained from table 1 below.
The basic load ratings of model NRS are equal Fig.5
in all the four directions (radial, reverse radial
Table1 Rated Loads in All Directions with Model NR
and lateral directions), and their actual values
are provided in the specification table for NR/ Direction
NRS. load rating rating
Radial
C C0
direction
Reverse
radial direc- CL=0.78C C0L=0.71C0
tion
Lateral
CT=0.48C C0T=0.45C0
directions
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model NR receives loads in the reverse radial and lateral directions simulta-
Table2 Equivalent Factor of Model NR
1 2
: Reverse radial direction reverse radial direction
: Lateral direction Equivalent load in
0.5 1
PL : Reverse radial load (N) lateral direction
When the LM block of model NRS receives loads in the reverse radial and lateral directions simulta-
PE PR PL PT
: Radial direction
: Lateral direction
A-192
Service Life
LM Guide
Accuracy Standards



A-193
HRW
Wide Rail Model HRW
Wide Rail Type LM Guide Model HRW
LM Guide
Wide Rail Model HRW
0
Endplate
End seal 90°
Grease nipple
45°
LM block Models HRW12 and 14
Ball 45°
Retainer plate
Side seal 45°

LM rail Models HRW17 to 60
Cross section

A-194
Wide Rail Model HRW

Since retainer plates hold the balls, they do not fall off even if the LM rail is pulled out. (except models
HRW 12 and 14LR).
LM Guide
ing the rigidity in four directions while maintaining a constant, low friction coefficient. In a low center
of gravity structure with a large rail width and a low overall height, this model can be used in places
where space saving is required or high rigidity against a moment is required even in a single axis
configuration.
[Compact, Heavy Load]
Since the number of effective balls is large, this model is highly rigid in all directions. It can ade-
quately receive a moment even in a single rail configuration.
Additionally, since the second moment of inertia of the rail is large, the rigidity in the lateral directions
is also high. Accordingly, it does not need reinforcement such as a side support.
A-195
Types and Features
Model HRW-CA Specification Table⇒B-108

The flange of this LM block has tapped holes.
Model HRW-CR Specification Table⇒B-110

Miniature Type Model HRW-LR Specification Table⇒B-110

A-196
Wide Rail Model HRW

Model HRW is capable of receiving loads in four
PL PR
directions.
The basic load ratings of model HRW 17 to 60
are equal in all the four directions (radial,
LM Guide
PT PT
reverse radial and lateral directions), and their
actual values are provided in the specification
table for HRW. Fig.1
The basic load ratings of models HRW 12 and
Table1 Rated Loads in All Directions with Models HRW 12 and 14
14 indicate the values in the radial directions in
Fig.1, and their actual values are provided in the Basic dynamic Basic static load
Direction
load rating rating
specification table for HRW. The values in the
reverse radial and lateral directions are obtained Radial
C C0
direction
from Table1 below. Reverse
tion
Lateral
CT=0.48C C0T=0.35C0
directions
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of models HRW 17 to 60 receives loads in the reverse radial and lateral direc-
tions simultaneously, the equivalent load is obtained from the equation below.
PE PR PL PT
: Radial direction
: Lateral direction
When the LM block of models HRW 12 and 14 receives loads in the reverse radial and lateral direc-
tions simultaneously, the equivalent load is obtained from the equation below.
Table2 Equivalent Factor of Models HRW12 and 14

1 2
: Reverse radial direction reverse radial direction
: Lateral direction Equivalent load
0.5 1
PL : Reverse radial load (N) in lateral direction
A-197
Service Life

Accuracy Standards



A-198
Wide Rail Model HRW
LM Guide
A-199
RSR/RSR-W
Miniature Type Models RSR/RSR-W
Miniature Type LM Guide Models RSR/RSR-W
LM Guide
0
Endplate
LM block
End seal
LM rail
Ball
Grease nipple
Cross section

Comparison of Model RSR-W with Other Model Numbers XXX A-204
Accuracy of the Mounting Surface XXX A-206
Flatness of the Mounting Surface XXX A-335
A-200

With models RSR and RSR-W, balls roll in two rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and
an LM block, and endplates incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate.
Balls circulate in a compact structure and perform infinite straight motion with no limit in stroke.
The LM block is designed to have a shape with high rigidity in a limited space, and in combination
with large-diameter balls, demonstrates high rigidity in all directions.
LM Guide
[Ultra Compact]
The absence of cage displacement, a problem that cross-roller guides and types of ball slides with
finite stroke tend to cause, make these models highly reliable LM systems.
[Capable of Receiving Loads in All Directions]
These models are capable of receiving loads in all directions, and a single-rail guide can adequately
operate under a small moment load. Model RSR-W, in particular, has a greater number of effective
balls and a broader LM rail to increase its rigidity against a moment. Thus, it achieves a more com-
pact structure and more durable straight motion than a pair of linear bushes in parallel use.
A special type where LM block, LM rail and balls are made of stainless steel is also available.
A-201
Types and Features
Models RSR/RSR-K/RSR-V Specification Table⇒B-116

Models RSR-W/WV Specification Table⇒B-118

These models have greater overall LM block
lengths (L), broader widths (W) and greater
rated loads and permissible moments than stan-
dard types.
Model RSR-N Specification Table⇒B-114

It has a longer overall LM block length (L) and a
greater rated load than standard types.
A-202
Model RSR-WN Specification Table⇒B-118

It has a longer overall LM block length (L), a
Achieves the greatest load capacity among the
LM Guide
miniature type LM Guide models.
A-203
Comparison of Model RSR-W with Other Model Numbers
[Locations where a Pair of Linear Bushes are Used]

z Unlike the linear bushes, model RSR-W can be used in a single-rail configuration and allows space
saving.
z Since model RSR-W has more load-bearing balls per row and wider LM block and LM rail, thus to
achieve high rigidity against an overhung load.
z Accuracy can be achieved simply by mounting the LM rail using bolts. Therefore, the assembly
time can be shortened.
Example of comparing model RSR12W with model LM 10 in use
MA＝24.5N•m MA＝0.42N•m
Indicates permissible moments in vertical directions
Mc＝59.5N•m Mc＝26.1N•m
C = 746N
C =4020N φ 10 Radial load
40 Radial load C0=6080N C0=1098N
25
14
24 LM10 47.5
72.5
Model RSR12WV
Linear Bushing Model LM10
Fig.1
[Locations where a Cross-roller Table is Used]

z Does not show cage displacement even with vertical mount, and capable of performing infinite
straight motion.
z Eliminates the need for difficult clearance adjustment and achieves long-term, smooth motion over
a long period of time.
z Since the LM block width is large, the model can be used as a miniature table without any modifi-
cation.
Example of comparing model RSR9WV with model VRM1035 in use
Mc＝2.7N-m
Mc＝36N-m
C =380N
Radial load
C =2450N C0=412N
Radial load
C0=3920N
17
12
30 Model RSR9WV 30 Model VRU1035
Fig.2
A-204

Model RSR is capable of receiving loads in four
directions: radial, reverse radial and lateral CL C
directions. PL C0L C0 PR
CT CT
The basic load ratings of models RSR3 to 9 are C0T C0T
uniform in the four directions (radial, reverse
LM Guide
radial and lateral directions), and their actual PT PT
values are provided in the specification table for
RSR.
Fig.3
The basic load ratings of models RSR12 to 20
indicate the values in the radial direction in Table1 Basic Load Ratings of Models RSR12 to 20 in All Directions
Fig.3, and their actual values are provided in the Basic dynamic Basic static load
Direction
load rating rating
specification table for RSR. The values in the
Radial direction C C0
reverse radial and lateral directions are obtained Reverse radial
from Table1 below. CL=0.78C C0L=0.70C0
direction
Lateral directions CT=0.78C C0T=0.71C0
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of models RSR3 to 9 receives loads in all four directions simultaneously, the
equivalent load is obtained from the equation below.
PE PR PL PT
: Radial direction
: Lateral direction
When the LM block of model RSR12 to 20 receives loads in the radial and lateral directions, or the
reverse radial and lateral directions, simultaneously, the equivalent load is obtained from the equa-
tion below.
Table2 Equivalent Factor of Models RSR12 to 20
PE X•PR PL Y•PT (When radial and lateral loads are applied)
1 0.83
radial direction
direction
Table3 Equivalent Factor of Models RSR12 to 20
PL : Reverse radial load (N) (When reverse radial and lateral loads are applied)
PE X Y
1 0.99
(see Table2 and Table3) radial direction
1.01 1
direction
A-205
Service Life

Accuracy Standards



Accuracy of the Mounting Surface

Model RSR uses Gothic arch grooves in the ball raceways. When two rails of RSR are used in paral-
lel, any error in accuracy of the mounting surface may increase rolling resistance and negatively
affect the smooth motion of the guide. For specific accuracy of the mounting surface, see Permissi-
ble Error of the Mounting Surface on A-333.
When using this model in locations where it is difficult to obtain satisfactory accuracy of the mounting
surface, we recommend using types RSR…A (semi standard) whose ball raceways have circular-arc
grooves. (avoid using these types in a single-rail configuration).
For specific accuracy of the mounting surface for types RSR…A, Permissible Error of the Mounting
Surface is on A-333.
Flatness of the Mounting Surface

A-206
LM Guide
A-207
RSR-Z
Miniature Type (Low Cost Type) Model RSR-Z
Miniature (Low Cost) Type LM Guide Model RSR-Z
LM Guide
0
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
End seal
(Optional)
Side seal
Ball

A-208

Balls roll in two rows of raceways precision-ground on an LM rail and an LM block, and endplates
Balls of model RSR-Z circulate in a compact structure and perform infinite straight motion with no
limit in stroke.
Also, it has the same dimensions as models RSR/RSR-W, but achieves a lighter weight and a lower
LM Guide
price.
[Lightweight]
Since part of the LM block body uses a resin material, the block mass is reduced by up to 28% from
the conventional type model RSR-V. This makes RSR-Z a low-inertia type.
[Smooth Motion]
The unique structure of the endplate allows the balls to circulate smoothly and infinitely.
[Highly Corrosion Resistant]
Since the LM block, LM rail and balls use stainless steel, which is highly corrosion resistant, this
model is optimal for clean room applications.
[Low Noise]
60
Since the unloaded ball path is made of resin, RSR12V
Noise level (dBA)
55
there is no metal to metal contact and low noise
50
is achieved.
45
40
RSR12Z
35
30
0
20 40 60 80 100
Speed (m/min)
Fig.1 Noise Levels of Models RSR12Z and RSR12V
A-209
Types and Features
Model RSR-Z Specification Table⇒B-122

Models RSR-WZ Specification Table⇒B-124

broader width (W) and greater rated load and
permissible moment than RSR-Z.
A-210

Model RSR-Z is capable of receiving loads in
PL C0L C0 PR
directions.
CT CT
The basic load ratings of models RSR7Z/WZ C0T C0T
and 9Z/WZ are uniform in the four directions
LM Guide
(radial, reverse radial and lateral directions), PT PT
and their actual values are provided in the spec-
ification table for RSR-Z.
Fig.2
The basic load ratings of models RSR12Z/WZ
and 15Z/WZ indicate the values in the radial Table1 Basic Load Ratings of Models RSR12Z/WZ
and 15Z/WZ in All Directions
direction in Fig.2, and their actual values are
provided in the specification table for RSR-Z. Direction load rating rating
The values in the reverse radial and lateral Radialdirection C C0
directions are obtained from Table1. Reverse radial
CL=0.78C C0L=0.70C0
direction
Lateraldirections CT=0.78C C0T=0.71C0
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of models RSR7Z/WZ and 9Z/WZ receives loads in all four directions simulta-
PE PR PL PT
: Radial direction
: Lateral direction
When the LM block of model RSR12Z/WZ and 15Z/WZ receives loads in the radial and lateral direc-
tions, or the reverse radial and lateral directions, simultaneously, the equivalent load is obtained from
the equation below.
Table2 Equivalent Factor of Models RSR12Z/WZ and 15Z/WZ
PE X•PR PL Y•PT (when radial and lateral loads are applied)

Equivalent load in the
: Radial direction radial direction
1 0.83
1.2 1
: Lateral direction direction
PR : Radial load (N) Table3 Equivalent Factor of Models RSR12Z/WZ and 15Z/WZ
PL : Reverse radial load (N) (when reverse radial and lateral loads are applied)
PT : Lateral load (N) PE X Y
1 0.99
radial direction
(see Table2 and Table3)
1.01 1
direction
A-211
Service Life

Accuracy Standards




Model RSR-Z uses Gothic arch grooves in the ball raceways. When two rails are used in parallel, any
error in accuracy of the mounting surface may increase rolling resistance and negatively affect the
smooth motion of the guide. For specific accuracy of the mounting surface, see Permissible Error of
the Mounting Surface on A-333.

A-212
LM Guide
A-213
RSH
Miniature Type (with a Ball Retainer) Model RSH
Miniature (Attached with Retainer) Type LM Guide Model RSH
LM Guide
0
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
End seal
(Optional)
Side seal
Ball
Wire
(Retainer)

A-214

incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate. Since a retainer holds the balls, they will not
fall off even if the LM block is removed from the LM rail.
With the Miniature Type LM Guide Equipped with a Ball Retainer model RSH, balls circulate in a
compact structure and perform infinite straight motion with no limit in stroke. The LM block is
LM Guide
designed to have a shape with high rigidity in a limited space, and in combination with large-diameter
balls, demonstrates high rigidity in all directions.
[Miniature Size]
This model is a highly reliable, ultra compact LM Guide that responds to weight saving and space
saving.
This model is capable of receiving loads in all directions, and has a high load capacity because of
large-diameter balls incorporated in two rows of raceways.
[Equipped with a Ball Retainer]
The LM block contains a retainer capable of preventing balls from falling off. Since the balls will not
fall even if the LM block is removed from the LM rail, you can use this LM Guide at ease.
Types and Features
Model RSH Specification Table⇒B-128

A-215
Model RSH is capable of receiving loads in four
directions. PL PR
The basic load ratings of models RSH7 and 9
are uniform in the four directions (radial, reverse
radial and lateral directions), and their actual
values are provided in the specification table for PT PT
RSH.
The basic load ratings of model RSH12 indicate
Fig.1
the values in the radial direction in Fig.1, and
their actual values are provided in the specifica- Table1 Basic Load Ratings of Model RSH12 in All Directions
tion table for RSH. The values in the reverse Basic dynamic Basic static
Direction
radial and lateral directions are obtained from
Table1 below. Reverse radial
CL=0.78C C0L=0.70C0
direction
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of models RSH7 and 9 receives loads in all four directions simultaneously, the
PE PR PL PT
: Radial direction
: Lateral direction
When the LM block of model RSH12 receives loads in the radial and lateral directions, or the reverse
radial and lateral directions, simultaneously, the equivalent load is obtained from the equation below.
Table2 Equivalent Factor of Model RSH12
PE X•PR PL Y•PT (when radial and lateral loads are applied)
: Radial direction Equivalent load
1 0.83
in the radial direction
: Reverse radial direction Equivalent load
Table3 Equivalent Factor of Model RSH12
PL : Reverse radial load (N) (when reverse radial and lateral loads are applied)
PE X Y
X, Y : Equivalent factor Equivalent load
1 0.99
(see Table2 andTable3) in reverse radial direction
1.01 1
direction
A-216
Service Life
LM Guide
Accuracy Standards




Model RSH uses Gothic arch grooves in the ball raceways. When two rails are used in parallel, any
error in accuracy of the mounting surface may increase rolling resistance and negatively affect the
smooth motion of the guide. For specific accuracy of the mounting surface, see Permissible Error of
the Mounting Surface on A-333.

A-217
RSH-Z
Miniature Type (with a Ball Retainer) Model RSH-Z
Miniature (attached with retainer) Type LM Guide Model RSH-Z
LM Guide
0
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
End seal
Side seal
Wire Ball
(Retainer)

A-218

incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate. Since a retainer holds the balls, they will not
fall off even if the LM block is removed from the LM rail.
With model RSH-Z, balls circulate in a compact structure and perform infinite straight motion with no
limit in stroke.
LM Guide
Also, it has the same dimensions as the conventional model, but achieves a lower price.
[Equipped with a Ball Retainer]
Model RSH-Z has a retainer capable of preventing balls from falling off. Since the balls will not fall
even if the LM block is removed from the LM rail, you can use this LM Guide at ease.
[Lightweight]
Since part of the LM block body uses a resin material, the block mass is reduced by up to 30% from
the conventional type. This makes RSH-Z a low-inertia type.
[Low Noise]
Since the unloaded ball path is made of resin, there is no metal to metal contact and low noise is
achieved.
A-219
Types and Features
Model RSH-Z Specification Table⇒B-132

Model RSH-WZ Specification Table⇒B-134

This model has a greater overall LM block
length (L), broader width (W) and greater rated
load and permissible moment than model RSH-
Z.
A-220

Model RSH-Z is capable of receiving loads in
CL C
four directions: radial, reverse radial and lateral PL C0L C0 PR
directions. CT CT
The basic load ratings of models RSH7Z/WZ C0T C0T
and 9Z/WZ are uniform in the four directions
LM Guide
PT PT
(radial, reverse radial and lateral directions),
and their actual values are provided in the spec-
ification table for RSH-Z.
Fig.1
The basic load ratings of models RSH12Z/WZ
and 15Z/WZ indicate the values in the radial Table1 Basic Load Ratings of Models RSH12Z/WZ
and 15Z/WZ in All Directions
direction in Fig.1, and their actual values are
provided in the specification table for RSH-Z. Basic dynamic Basic static load
Direction
load rating rating
The values in the reverse radial and lateral Radial direction C C0
directions are obtained from Table1 below. Reverse radial
CL=0.78C C0L=0.70C0
direction
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of models RSH7Z/WZ and 9Z/WZ receives loads in all four directions simulta-
PE PR PL PT
: Radial direction
: Lateral direction
When the LM block of models RSH12Z/WZ and 15Z/WZ receives loads in the radial and lateral direc-
tions, or the reverse radial and lateral directions, simultaneously, the equivalent load is obtained from
the equation below.
PE X•PR PL Y•PT Table2 Equivalent Factor of Models RSH12Z/WZ and 15Z/WZ

(when radial and lateral loads are applied)
: Radial direction Equivalent load in the radial direction 1 0.83
: Reverse radial direction Equivalent load in lateral direction 1.2 1
: Lateral direction Table3 Equivalent Factor of Models RSH12Z/WZ and 15Z/WZ
PR : Radial load (N) (when reverse radial and lateral loads are applied)
PL : Reverse radial load (N) PE X Y
PT : Lateral load (N) Equivalent load
1 0.99
in reverse radial direction
X, Y : Equivalent factor
Equivalent load in lateral direction 1.01 1
(see Table2 andTable3)
A-221
Service Life

Accuracy Standards




Models RSH-Z and WZ uses Gothic arch grooves in the ball raceways. When two rails are used in
parallel, any error in accuracy of the mounting surface may increase rolling resistance and negatively
affect the smooth motion of the guide. For specific accuracy of the mounting surface, see Permissi-
ble Error of the Mounting Surface on A-333.

A-222
LM Guide
A-223
HR
Separate Type (4-way Equal Load) Model HR
Separate (4-way Equal Load) Type LM Guide Model HR
LM Guide
0
LM rail
End seal
Endplate
45ﾟ
LM block
Ball
Retainer plate 45ﾟ

Cross section

Example of Clearance Adjustment XXX A-228
Comparison of Model Numbers with Cross-roller Guides XXX A-229
Accessories XXX B-143
A-224

incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate. Since retainer plates hold the balls, they do
not fall off.
Because of the angular contact structure where two rows of balls rolling on the LM rail each contact
the raceway at 45° , the same load can be applied in four directions (radial, reverse radial and lateral
LM Guide
directions) if a set of LM rails and LM block is mounted on the same plane (i.e., when two LM rails are
combined with an LM block on the same plane). Furthermore, since the sectional height is low, a
compact and stable linear guide mechanism is achieved.
This structure makes clearance adjustment relatively easy, and is highly capable of absorbing a
mounting error.
[Easy Installation]
Model HR is easier to adjust a clearance and achieve more accuracy than cross-roller guides.
Even if the parallelism or the level between the two rails is poorly established, the self-adjustment
capability through front-to-front configuration of THK's unique circular-arc grooves (DF set) enables a
mounting error to be absorbed and smooth straight motion to be achieved even under a preload.
When the two rails are mounted in parallel, each row of balls is placed at a contact angle of 45° so
that the rated loads applied to the LM block are uniform in the four directions (radial, reverse radial
and lateral directions), enabling the LM Guide to be used in various orientations and in applications.
[Sectional Dimensions Approximate to Cross-roller Guides]
Since model HR is an infinite motion type whose retainer plate does not move, it is not associated
with cage displacement that occurs with cross-roller guides. In addition, the sectional shape of model
HR is approximate to that of cross-roller guides, therefore, its components are interchangeable with
that of cross-roller guides.
A special type whose LM block, LM rail and balls are made of stainless steel is also available.
A-225
Types and Features
Model HR - Heavy-load Type Specification Table⇒B-138

The LM blocks can be mounted from the top and
the bottom.
Model HR-T-Ultra-heavy Load Type Specification Table⇒B-140

Has the same cross-sectional shape as model
HR, but has a greater overall LM block length
(L) and a higher load rating.
A-226

When installed, one set of model HR is capable
of receiving loads in all four directions: radial,
reverse radial and lateral directions. 2C 2C
PL 2C0 2C0 PR
The basic load ratings of an installed set of 2C 2C
model HR are equal in all four directions (radial, 2C0 2C0
LM Guide
reverse radial and lateral directions). The basic PT PT
load ratings in the specification table for model
HR indicate the values in the radial direction per
LM block as shown in Fig.1. Fig.1
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model HR receives loads in the reverse radial and lateral directions simulta-
1
PE PR PL PT
2
: Radial direction
: Lateral direction
Service Life
A-227
Example of Clearance Adjustment
Design the clearance adjustment bolt so that it presses the center of the side face of the LM block.
1 2
a. Using an adjustment screw b. Using tapered gibs

Normally, an adjustment screw is used to When high accuracy and high rigidity are
press the LM block. required, use tapered gibs 1) and 2).
c. Using an eccentric pin

A type using an eccentric pin to adjust the clearance is also available.
Accuracy Standards



A-228
Comparison of Model Numbers with Cross-roller Guides

Each type of LM Guide model HR has sectional dimensions approximate to that of the corresponding
cross roller guide model.
30 30
LM Guide
18 18 15 15
8.5 8 HR1530 VR6
HR918 VR3
42 40
23 22
20 20
11 11
HR1123 VR4 HR2042 VR9
58
55
25 28
HR2555 VR12
71
75
35 36
HR3575 VR15
85 83
40 40
HR4085 VR18
Fig.2
A-229
GSR
Separate Type (Radial) Model GSR
Separate (Radial) Type LM Guide Model GSR
LM Guide
0
LM block
Endplate
End seal
LM rail
Ball
Retainer plate
Side seal
Cross section

Example of Clearance Adjustment XXX A-234
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model GSR XXX B-148
A-230

not fall off.
As the top face of the LM block is inclined, a clearance is eliminated and an appropriate preload is
applied simply by securing the LM block with mounting bolts.
LM Guide
Model GSR has a special contact structure using circular-arc grooves. This increases self-adjusting
capability and makes GSR an optimal model for places associated with difficulty establishing high
accuracy and for general industrial machinery.
[Interchangeability]
Both the LM block and LM rail are interchangeable and can be stored separately. Therefore, it is pos-
sible to store a long-size LM rail and cut it to a desired length before using it.
[Compact]
Since model GSR has a low center of gravity structure with a low overall height, the machine can be
downsized.
[Capable of Receiving a Load in any Direction]
The ball contact angle is designed so that this model can receive a load in any direction. As a result,
it can be used in places where a reverse radial load, lateral load or a moment in any direction is
applied.
A-231
Types and Features
Model GSR-T Specification Table⇒B-146

Model GSR-V Specification Table⇒B-146

A space-saving type that has the same cross-
sectional shape as GSR-T, but has a shorter
overall LM block length (L).
A-232

Model GSR is capable of receiving loads in four
directions. CL C
PL C0L C0 PR
The basic load ratings indicate the values in the CTt CTc
radial direction in Fig.1, and their actual values
LM Guide
C0Tt C0Tc
are provided in the specification table for GSR.
The values in the radial direction, tensile lateral PTt PTc
direction and compressive lateral direction are
obtained from Table1.
Note) Not available for a single-axis configuration. Fig.1
Table1 Basic Load Ratings of Model GSR in All Directions

Direction
load rating rating
Radial
C C0
direction
Reverse
tion
Tensile lat-
CTt=0.84C C0Tt=0.78C0
eral direction
Compressive
lateral direc- CTc=0.93C C0Tc=0.90C0
tion
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model GSR receives Table2 Equivalent Factor of Model GSR
loads in the radial, tensile lateral, reverse radial (when radial and tensile lateral loads are applied)
and compressive lateral directions simulta- PE X Y

neously, the equivalent load is obtained from the
equation below. 1 1.28
radial direction
PE X•PR Y•PTt Equivalent load in tensile

lateral direction
0.781 1
PE PL PTc
: Radial direction
: Tensile lateral direction
: Compressive lateral direction
PTt : Tensile lateral load (N)
PTc : Compressive lateral direction load
(N)
A-233
Service Life

By providing a shoulder maybe on the side face of each LM block and pressing either LM block with
a bolt, a preload is applied and the rigidity is increased.
Preload adjustment bolt
Fig.2 Example of Adjusting a Preload with a Push Bolt
Accuracy Standards



A-234
LM Guide
A-235
GSR-R
Separate Type (Radial) Model GSR-R
Separate (Radial) Type LM Guide Model GSR-R
LM Guide
0
Rail with rack
LM block
Endplate
End seal

Rack and Pinion XXX A-240
Standard Length of the LM Rail XXX B-152
A-236

not fall off.
As the top face of the LM block is inclined, a clearance is eliminated and an appropriate preload is
applied simply by securing the LM block with mounting bolts.
LM Guide
Model GSR-R is based on model GSR, but has rack teeth on the LM rail. This facilitates the design
and assembly of drive mechanisms.
[Reduced Machining and Assembly Costs]
The single-piece structure integrating the LM rail (linear guide) and rack (drive) reduces labor and
time for machining the rack mounting surface and assembling and adjusting the guide system, thus
to achieve significant cost reduction.
[Easy Designing]
The travel distance per turn of the pinion is specified by the integer value. This makes it easy to cal-
culate the travel distance per pulse when the LM Guide is used in combination with a stepping motor
or servomotor.
[Space Saving]
Since the rail has a rack, the machine size can be reduced.
[Long Stroke]
The end faces of the LM rail are machined for jointed use. To obtain a long stroke, simply joint LM
rails of the standard length.
[High Durability]
The rack tooth has a width equal to the LM rail height, the rack uses high-grade steel with proven
performance and the tooth surface are heat-treated, thereby to ensure high durability.
A-237
Types and Features
Model GSR-R (Rail with Rack) Specification Table⇒B-150

Since the thrust load on the pinion shaft can be
kept low due to rack-pinion meshing, it is easy to
design systems with pinion shaft bearings and
tables that are not so rigid.

Model GSR-R is capable of receiving loads in
four directions: radial, reverse radial and lateral
CL C
directions. C0L C0
PL PR
The basic load ratings indicate the values in the CTt CTc
radial direction in Fig.1, and their actual values C0Tt C0Tc
are provided in the specification table for GSR-
PTt PTc
R. The values in the radial direction, tensile lat-
eral direction and compressive lateral direction
are obtained from Table1.
Fig.1
Table1 Basic Load Ratings of Model GSR-R in All Directions

Direction
Reverse radial
CL=0.93C C0L=0.90C0
direction
Tensile lateral
CTt=0.84C C0Tt=0.78C0
direction
Compressive
CTc=0.93C C0Tc=0.90C0
lateral direction
A-238
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model GSR-R receives Table2 Equivalent Factor of Model GSR-R
loads in the radial, tensile lateral, reverse radial (when radial and tensile lateral loads are applied)
and compressive lateral directions simulta- PE X Y

neously, the equivalent load is obtained from the
equation below. 1 1.28
LM Guide
radial direction
PE X•PR Y•PTt Equivalent load in tensile

lateral direction
0.781 1
PE PL PTc
: Radial direction
: Tensile lateral direction
: Compressive lateral direction
PTt : Tensile lateral load (N)
PTc : Compressive lateral direction load
(N)
Service Life
Accuracy Standards



A-239
Rack and Pinion
[Joining Two or More Rails]

The end faces of the rail with rack are machined
so that a clearance is left after assembly in order Rack-aligning jig
to facilitate the assembly.
Use of a special jig as shown in Fig.2 will make
the connection easier.
(THK also offers the rack-aligning jig.)
[Reworking the Pinion Hole]

Only the teeth of the reworkable pinion-hole- Fig.2 Rack Connection Method
diameter type (type C) are heat-treated. The
hole and keyway can therefore be reworked by Scroll
Chuck
the user to the desired diameter and shape.
When reworking the pinion hole, be sure to take
the following into account.
The material of the reworkable hole diameter
type (type C): S45C
(1) When chucking the teeth of a reworkable
hole diameter type, use a jaw scroll chuck
or something like it to maintain the tooth
profile.
(2) The pinion is produced using the center of Fig.3
the hole as a reference point. The center of
the hole should therefore be used as a ref-
erence point when the pinion is aligned.
When checking the pinion runout, refer to
the boss sides.
(3) Keep the reworked hole diameter within
roughly 60 to 70% of the boss diameter.
[Lubricating the Rack and Pinion]
To ensure smooth sliding on tooth surfaces and prevent wear, the teeth should be provided with a
lubricant.
Note) Use a lubricant of the same type as that contained in the LM Guide.
A-240
[Checking Strength]
The strength of the assembled rack and pinion must be checked in advance.
(1) Calculate the maximum thrust acting on the pinion.
(2) Divide the permissible power transmission capacity of the pinion to be used (Table3) by an over-
load factor (Table4).
(3) By comparing the thrust acting on the pinion obtained in step 1 with the pinion power transmis-
sion capacity obtained in step 2, make sure the applied thrust does not exceed the permissible
LM Guide
power transmission capacity.
[Example of calculation] Table3 Permissible Power transmission Capacity

Model GSR-R is used in a horizontal convey- Unit: kN
ance system receiving a medium impact Permissible Power

Supported
Model No. transmission
(assuming external load to be zero). model
Capacity
z Conditions GP 6-20A 2.33
Subject model No. (pinion) GP6-20A
Mass (table + work) m=100kg GP 6-20C 2.05
GSR 25-R
Speed v=1 m/s GP 6-25A 2.73
Acceleration/deceleration time T1 =0.1 s
GP 6-25C 2.23
z Consideration
GP 8-20A 3.58
(1) Calculating the maximum thrust
Calculated the thrust during acceleration/ GP 8-20C 3.15
GSR 30-R
deceleration. GP 8-25A 4.19
v GP 8-25C 3.42
Fmax ＝ m • ＝1.00kN
T1
GP10-20A 5.19
(2) Permissible power transmission capacity of GP10-20C 4.57
the pinion GSR 35-R
GP10-25A 6.06
Permissible power
transmission capacity GP10-25C 4.96
(see Table 3) 2.33
Pmax ＝＝ Table4 Overload Factor
Overload factor 1.25
(see Table 4)
Impact from the driven machine
＝1.86kN Impact from the
(3) Comparison between the maximum thrust prime mover Uniform Medium Large
load impact impact
and the permissible power transmission
Uniform load
capacity of the pinion
(electric motor, tur-
Fmax<Pmax 1.0 1.25 1.75
bine, hydraulic
Therefore, it is judged that the subject motor, etc.)
model number can be used. (Excerpt from JGMA401-01)
V
Speed (mm/sec)
T1 T1
Time (sec)
Fig.4
A-241
[Example of Assembling Model GSR-R with the Table]
Clearance adjustment bolt Pulley

(Pinion)
LM block
Rail with rack

Pinion
Motor
Motor
Belt
Clearance adjustment bolt Pulley

(Pinion, LM Guide)
LM block
Pinion
Rail with rack
A-242
LM Guide
A-243
CSR
Cross LM Guide Model CSR
Cross Guide Type LM Guide Model SCR
LM Guide
0
LM rail
End seal
Endplate
Grease nipple
LM block
Ball
Retainer plate
Side seal
LM rail

Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model CSR XXX B-157
A-244

Balls roll in four rows of raceways precision-ground on a LM rail and a LM block, and endplates incor-
porated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate. Since retainer plates hold the balls, they do not
fall off even if the LM rail is pulled out.
This model is an integral type of LM Guide that squares an internal structure similar to model HSR,
which has a proven track record and is highly reliable, with another and uses two LM rails in combi-
LM Guide
nation. It is machined with high precision so that the perpendicularity of the hexahedron of the LM
block is within 2 μ m per 100 mm in error. The two rails are also machined with high precision in rela-
tive straightness. As a result, extremely high accuracy in orthogonality is achieved. Since an orthog-
onal LM system can be achieved with model CSR alone, a conventionally required saddle is no
longer necessary, the structure for X-Y motion can be simplified and the whole system can be down-
sized.
to be used in all orientations.
[High Rigidity]
Since balls are arranged in four rows in a well-balanced manner, this model is stiff against a moment,
and smooth straight motion is ensured even a preload is applied to increase the rigidity.
The rigidity of the LM blocks is 50% higher than that of a combination of two HSR LM blocks secured
together back-to-back with bolts. Thus, CSR is an optimal LM Guide for building an X-Y table that
requires high rigidity.
A-245
Types and Features
Model CSR-S Specification Table⇒B-154

Model CSR Specification Table⇒B-154

greater rated load.

Model CSR is capable of receiving loads in four
PL PR
directions.
The basic load ratings are defined with an LM
rail and two LM blocks, and uniform in the four
directions). Their actual values are provided in
the specification table for CSR.
PT PT
Fig.1
A-246
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model CSR receives loads in the reverse radial and lateral directions simulta-
PE PR PL PT
LM Guide
: Radial direction
: Lateral direction
Service Life

Accuracy Standards



A-247
MX
Miniature Cross Guide Model MX
Miniature Cross Guide Type LM Guide Model MX
LM Guide
0
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
End seal
Ball
LM rail

A-248

incorporated in the LM block allow the balls to circulate. This model is an integral type of LM Guide
that squares a unit of miniature LM Guide model RSR with another and uses two LM rails in combi-
nation. Since an orthogonal LM system with an extremely low height can be achieved with model MX
alone, a conventionally required saddle is no longer necessary and the whole system can be down-
LM Guide
sized.
[Tapped-hole LM Rail Type]
There are two types of the LM rail: one designed to be mounted from the top with bolts, and a semi-
standard type whose bottom face has tapped holes, allowing the rail to be mounted from the bottom.
A-249
Types and Features
Model MX Specification Table⇒B-160

MX is divided into two types: RSR5M cross type
and RSR7WM cross type.

Model MX is capable of receiving loads in four
directions.
The basic load ratings are defined with an LM PL PR
rail and an LM block, and uniform in the four
directions). Their actual values are provided in
the specification table for MX.
PT PT
Fig.1
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model MX receives loads in the radial, reverse radial and lateral directions
simultaneously, the equivalent load is obtained from the equation below.
PE PR PL PT
: Radial direction
: Lateral direction
A-250
Service Life
LM Guide
Accuracy Standards

A-251
JR
Structural Member Rail Model JR
Structural Member Rail LM Guide Model JR
LM Guide
0
Upper plate LM rail

LM block
Endplate
End seal
Grease nipple
45°
Ball
Lower plate
45°
Side seal
Cross section

Second Moment of Inertia of the LM Rail XXX A-253
A-252

not fall off even if the LM rail is pulled out.
Model JR uses the same LM block as model HSR, which has a proven track record and is highly reli-
able. The LM rail has a sectional shape with high flexural rigidity, and therefore can be used as a
LM Guide
structural member.
Unlike the conventional LM Guide type, whose LM rail was secured onto the base with bolts when
installed, model JR's LM rail is integrated with the mounting base, and the top of the LM rail has the
same structure as LM Guide model HSR. The lower part of the LM rail has a hardness of HRC25 or
less, making it easy to cut the rail and enabling the rail to be welded.
When welding the rail, we recommend using welding rods compliant with JIS D 5816. (suggested
manufacturer and model number: Kobelco LB-52).
[Can be Mounted Even Under Rough Conditions]
Since the central part of the LM rail is slightly thinner than the ends, even if the parallelism between
two rails is poor the LM rail is capable of absorbing the error by bending inward or outward.
[Sectional Shape with High Flexural Rigidity]
Since the LM rail has a sectional shape with
high flexural rigidity, it can also be used as a
structural member. In addition, even when the
LM rail is partially fastened or supported in can-
tilever, the distortion is minimal.
Fig.1
Second Moment of Inertia of the LM Rail

Geometrical Modulus of
moment of inertia section Height of
Y axis
I [×10 5
mm ]
4
Z [×104 mm3] gravitational
center
About About About About H [mm]
X axis Y axis X axis Y axis
Center point of gravity JR 25 1.90 0.51 0.69 0.21 19.5
JR 35 4.26 1.32 1.43 0.49 24.3
JR 45 12.1 3.66 3.31 1.04 33.1
X axis
JR 55 27.6 6.54 5.89 1.40 43.3
H
Fig.2
A-253
Types and Features
Model JR-A Specification Table⇒B-164

Model JR-B Specification Table⇒B-164

Model JR-R Specification Table⇒B-164

A-254

Model JR is capable of receiving loads in four
PL PR
directions.
LM Guide
directions), and their actual values are provided PT PT
in the specification table for JR.
Fig.3
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model JR receives loads in the radial, reverse radial and lateral directions
simultaneously, the equivalent load is obtained from the equation below.
PE PR PL PT
: Radial direction
: Lateral direction
A-255
Service Life

Accuracy Standards



A-256
LM Guide
A-257
HCR
R Guide Model HCR
R Guide Type LM Guide Model HCR
LM Guide
R Guide Model HCR
0
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
Grease nipple
End seal
Ball

A-258
R Guide Model HCR

With a structure that is basically the same as four-way equal load type LM Guide model HSR, which
has a proven track record, this R Guide is a new concept product that allows highly accurate circular
motion.
LM Guide
[Freedom of Design]
Multiple LM blocks can individually move on the same rail. By arranging LM blocks on the load
points, efficient structural design is achieved.
[Shortened Assembly Time]
This model allows clearance-free, highly accurate circular motion as opposed to sliding guides or
cam followers. You can easily assemble this model simply by mounting the LM rail and LM blocks
with bolts.
[Allows Circular Motion of 5m or Longer]
It allows circular motion of 5 m or longer, which is impossible with swivel bearings.
In addition, use of this model makes it easy to assemble, disassemble and reassemble equipment
that circularly moves.
This model is capable of receiving loads in all directions since it has a structure that is basically the
same as model HSR.
A-259
Types and Features
Model HCR Specification Table⇒B-168


Model HCR is capable of receiving loads in four
directions. PL PR
in the specification table for HCR.
Fig.1
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model HCR receives loads in all four directions simultaneously, the equivalent
load is obtained from the equation below.
PE PR PL PT
: Radial direction
: Lateral direction
A-260
R Guide Model HCR
Service Life
LM Guide
Accuracy Standards

A-261
HMG
Straight-Curved Guide Model HMG
Straight-Curved Guide Type LM Guide Model HMG
LM Guide
0
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
Straight-Curved seal
Ball
Curved rail Joint rail Straight rail

Examples of Table Mechanisms XXX A-267
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table XXX B-172
Jointed LM rail, example of model number coding XXX B-174
A-262

The Straight-Curved Guide HMG is a new straight-curved guide that allows the same type of LM
blocks to continuously move on straight and curved rails by combining the technologies of the LM
Guide HSR and the R Guide HCR. It achieves drastic cost reduction through improvement of work
efficiency at the assembly and conveyance lines and the inspection equipment and simplification of
the structure by eliminating a lift and a table.
LM Guide
[Freedom of Design]
It allows free combinations of straight and curved shapes.
Since LM blocks can smoothly transit between the straight and curved sections, various combina-
tions of straight and curved rails can be joined into various shapes such as O, U, L and S shapes. In
addition, HMG allows a large table to be mounted and a heavy object to be carried through combina-
tions of multiple blocks on a single rail or 2 or more LM rails. Thus, it provides great freedom of
design.
O shape U shape L shape S shape

Fig.1 Examples of Joining Rails into Different Shapes
A-263
[Shortened Transportation Time]
Unlike the shuttle method, using HMG units in a circulating system allows workpieces to be placed
while other workpieces are being inspected or mounted, thus to significantly improve process time.
Increasing the number of tables can further shorten process time.
Returning a workpiece
Feeding a workpiece
Workpiece carried in Operation
Operation
Returning a workpiece
Workpiece carried out
Operation
Feeding a workpiece Workpiece
Workpiece placement → feeding → operation carried in
→ returning → workpiece placement•••
Operation Operation
Shuttle method Circulation method
Fig.2 Improved process time
[Cost Reduction through a Simplified Mechanism]

Combination of straight and curved rails eliminates a lift and a turntable conventionally used for
changing directions in the conveyance and production lines. Therefore, use of HMG simplifies the
mechanism and eliminates a large number of parts, allowing the cost to be reduced. Additionally,
man-hours in designing can also be reduced.
Turntable Turntable is not required

Conventional method Using model HMG
Fig.3
A-264
Types and Features
Model HMG Specification Table⇒B-172

LM Guide
Model HMG is capable of receiving loads in all
Reverse radial direction Radial direction
four directions: radial, reverse radial and lateral
directions.
PL PR
in the specification table for HMG. Lateral direction Lateral direction
Fig.4
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model HMG receives loads in all directions simultaneously, the equivalent load
PE PR PL PT
: Radial direction
: Lateral direction
A-265
Service Life

Accuracy Standards

A-266
Examples of Table Mechanisms

The Straight-Curved Guide HMG requires a rotating mechanism or a slide mechanism for the table to
rotate the curved sections when 2 or more rails are used or when 2 or more LM blocks are connected
on a single rail. Refer to Fig.5 for examples of such mechanisms.
Four LM blocks on 2 rails
LM Guide
Two LM blocks on single rail
（1）（2）
Three or more LM blocks on single rail

Two LM blocks on 2 rails Six or more LM blocks on 2 rails
: Rotating mechanism
: Rotating mechanism and slide mechanism
Fig.5 Examples of Table Mechanisms
Fig.6 shows examples of designing a table when units are used on multiple axes. HMG requires a
rotating mechanism and a slide mechanism since the table is decentered when an LM block transits
from a straight section to a curved section. The amount of decentering differs according to the radius
of the curved section and the LM block span. Therefore, it is necessary to design the system in
accordance with the corresponding specifications.
Fig.7 shows detail drawings of the slide and rotating mechanisms. In the figure, LM Guides are used
in the slide mechanism and Cross-Roller Rings in the rotating mechanism to achieve smooth sliding
and rotating motions.
For driving the Straight-Curved Guide, belt drives and chain drives are available.
Slide distance
Straight section
of the table
LM Guide Cross roller ring

Rotation + slide
Rotation + slide Rotation + slide Rotation + slide Rotation
LM Guide Cross roller ring

Rotation + slide
Rotation Rotation
Curved section Rotation + slide Rotation

Fig.6 Fig.7
A-267
NSR-TBC
Self-aligning Type Model NSR-TBC
Self-aligning Type LM Guide Model NSR-TBC
LM Guide
0
Spline nut
LM casing
LM rail
End seal
Clearance adjustment bolt

Grease nipple 90°
Side plate
Ball
Side seal 30°
(Optional) Retainer
Cross section

A-268

Model NSR-TBC is the only LM Guide whose casing consists of two pieces instead of a single-piece
LM block. The rigid, cast iron casing contains a cylindrical spline nut that is partially cut at an angle of
120° . This enables the model to self-aligning on the fitting surface with the casing, thus to permit
rough installation.
LM Guide
NSR-TBC has four rows of balls. The balls are arranged in two rows on each shoulder of the LM rail,
and can receive loads in all four directions: upward, downward and lateral directions. Due to the self-
aligning structure, however, a rotational moment (MC) cannot be applied in a single-rail configuration.
[Easy Installation and Accuracy Establishment]
Model NSR-TBC is highly capable of performing self-adjustment and self-alignment. As a result,
even if two rails are not mounted with accuracy, the LM casing absorbs the error and it does not
affect the traveling performance. Accordingly, the machine performance will not be deteriorated.
Types and Features
Model NSR-TBC Specification Table⇒B-178

The flange of the LM casing has through holes,
allowing the LM Guide to be mounted from the
bottom.
A-269
Model NSR-TBC is capable of receiving loads in
The basic load ratings indicate the values in the CT CT
C0T C0T
radial direction in Fig.1, and their actual values
are provided in the specification table for NSR-
TBC. The values in the reverse radial and lateral PT PT
directions are obtained from Table1 below.
Fig.1
Table1 Basic Load Ratings of Model NSR-TBC

in All Directions

Direction
Reverse radial
CL=0.62C C0L=0.50C0
direction
Equivalent Load
When the LM casing of model NSR-TBC Table2 Equivalent Factor of Model NSR-TBC
receives loads in the reverse radial and lateral PE X Y
directions simultaneously, the equivalent load is Equivalent load in reverse
obtained from the equation below. 1 1.155
radial direction
0.866 1
PE X•PL Y•PT direction
: Lateral direction
A-270
Service Life
LM Guide
Accuracy Standards



A-271
HSR-M1
High Temperature Type Model HSR-M1
High Temperature Type LM Guide Model HSR-M1
LM Guide
0
LM block
（THK-EX50）
Endplate
（SUS304） LM rail
（THK-EX50）
End seal
(High temperature
rubber material)
45 °
Ball
（SUS440C）
45°
Side seal
(High temperature Cross section
rubber material)

A-272

LM Guide
The high temperature type LM Guide is capable of being used at service temperature up to 150 ℃
thanks to THK's unique technologies in material, heat treatment and lubrication.
[Maximum Service Temperature: 150℃]
Use of stainless steel in the endplates and high temperature rubber in the end seals achieves the
maximum service temperature of 150℃.
[Dimensional Stability]
Since it is dimensionally stabilized, it demonstrates superb dimensional stability after being heated or
cooled (note that it shows linear expansion at high temperature).
[High Temperature Grease]
This model uses high temperature grease that shows little grease-based fluctuation in rolling resis-
tance even if temperature changes from low to high levels.
A-273
z Dimensional Stability Data
Since this model has been treated for dimensional stability, its dimensional change after being
cooled or heated is only minimal.
Dimensional change (mm)
0.02
Dimensional change (mm)

0.2
0 Vertical
-0.02 0.15 Horizontal
-0.04
-0.06 0.1
-0.08
-0.1 0.05
-0.12
-0.14 0
High Standard Stainless High Standard Stainless
temperature type steel temperature type steel
type type type type
Overall LM Rail Length Curvature of the LM Rail
Note1) The above data on overall length and curvature indicate dimensional change when the LM rail is cooled to normal tem-
perature after being heated at 150℃ for 100 hours.
Note2) The samples consist of high temperature, standard and stainless steel types of model HSR25 + 580L.
z Rolling Resistance Data in Relation to Grease
Use a high temperature grease with which the rolling resistance of the LM system little fluctuates
even temperature changes from a normal to high range.
8 14
Fluctuation value (N)
THK’ s high temperature THK’ s high temperature

Average value (N)
grease 12 grease
6 Competitor’
s high temperature Competitor’
s high temperature
grease 10 grease
8
4
6
2 4
2
0 0
Normal 150℃ Normal 150℃
Temperature Temperature
temperature temperature
measurement measurement
Average Value Fluctuation Value
For the measurements above, model HSR25M1R1C1 is used.

z Thermal Characteristics of LM Rail and LM Block Materials
Specific heat capacity: 0.481 J/(g•K)
Thermal conductivity: 20.67 W/(m•K)
Average coefficient of linear expansion: 11.8×10– 6/℃
A-274
Types and Features
Model HSR-M1A Specification Table⇒B-182

LM Guide
Model HSR-M1LA Specification Table⇒B-182
shape as model HSR-M1A, but has a longer
load.
Model HSR-M1B Specification Table⇒B-184

Model HSR-M1LB Specification Table⇒B-184

The LM block has the same sectional shape as
model HSR-M1B, but has a longer overall LM
block length (L) and a greater rated load.
A-275
Model HSR-M1R Specification Table⇒B-186
Model HSR-M1LR Specification Table⇒B-186

The LM block has the same sectional shape as
model HSR-M1R, but has a longer overall LM
block length (L) and a greater rated load.
Model HSR-M1YR Specification Table⇒B-188

When using two units of LM Guide facing each
other, the previous model required much time in
machining the table and had difficulty achieving
the desired accuracy and adjusting the clear-
ance. Since model HSR-M1YR has tapped
holes on the side of the LM block, a simpler
structure is gained and significant man-hour cut-
ting and accuracy increase can be achieved.
Fig.1 Conventional Structure Fig.2 Mounting Structure for Model HSR-M1YR
A-276

Model HSR-M1 is capable of receiving loads in four directions: radial, reverse radial and lateral direc-
tions.
The basic load ratings are uniform in the four directions (radial, reverse radial and lateral directions),
and their actual values are provided in the specification table for HSR-M1.
LM Guide
PL PR PR PL
PT PT
PT
Fig.3 Model HSR-M1 Fig.4 Model HSR-M1YR
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model HSR-M1 receives loads in all directions simultaneously, the equivalent
PE PR PL PT
: Radial direction
: Lateral direction
A-277
Service Life

Accuracy Standards



A-278
LM Guide
A-279
SR-M1
High Temperature Type Model SR-M1
High Temperature Type LM Guide Model SR-M1
LM Guide
0
LM block
（THK-EX50）
Endplate
（SUS304）
Grease nipple
（SUS304）
End seal
(High temperature
rubber material)
LM rail
（THK-EX50）
90°
Ball
（SUS440C）
Retainer plate
（SUS304） 30°
Side seal
(High temperature Cross section
rubber material)

Thermal Characteristics of LM Rail and LM Block Materials XXX A-281
A-280

Since it is a compactly designed model that has a low sectional height and a ball contact structure
rigid in the radial direction, this model is optimal for horizontal guide units.
High temperature type LM Guide model SR-M1 is capable of being used at service temperature up to
LM Guide
150℃ thanks to THK's unique technologies in material, heat treatment and lubrication.
Thermal Characteristics of LM Rail and LM Block Materials

z Specific heat capacity: 0.481 J/(g•K)
z Thermal conductivity: 20.67 W/(m•K)
z Average coefficient of linear expansion: 11.8×10– 6/℃
A-281
Types and Features
Model SR-M1W Specification Table⇒B-192

Model SR-M1V Specification Table⇒B-192

same cross-sectional shape as model SR-M1W,
Model SR-M1TB Specification Table⇒B-194

The LM block has the same height as model
SR-M1W and can be mounted from the bottom.
Model SR- M1SB Specification Table⇒B-194

same sectional shape as model SR-M1TB, but
has a smaller overall LM block length (L).
A-282

Model SR-M1 is capable of receiving loads in
The basic load ratings indicate the values in the
radial directions in Fig.1, and their actual values
LM Guide
CT CT
are provided in the specification table for SR- C0T C0T
M1. The values in the reverse radial and lateral
directions are obtained from Table1 below. PT PT
Fig.1
Table1 Rated Loads in All Directions with Model SR-M1
Basic Basic
Model
Direction dynamic static load
No.
load rating rating
Radial
C C0
direction
SR-M1 Reverse radial
CL=0.62C C0L=0.50C0
15 to 35 direction
Lateral
CT=0.56C C0T=0.43C0
directions
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model SR-M1 receives
loads in the reverse radial and lateral directions Table2 Equivalent Factor of Model SR-M1
simultaneously, the equivalent load is obtained
from the equation below. Model
PE X Y
No.
PE X•PL Y•PT Equivalent load in
reverse radial direction
1 1.155
PE : Equivalent load (N) SR-M1
15 to 35 Equivalent load
: Reverse radial direction in lateral direction
0.866 1
: Lateral direction
A-283
Service Life

Accuracy Standards



A-284
LM Guide
A-285
RSR-M1
High Temperature Type Model RSR-M1
High Temperature Type LM Guide Model RSR-M1
LM Guide
0
Endplate
（SUS304）
LM block
（THK EX50）
End seal
(High temperature rubber)
LM rail
（THK EX50）
Ball
（SUS440C）
Grease nipple
（SUS304）

Thermal Characteristics of LM Rail and LM Block Materials XXX A-287
A-286

High temperature type miniature LM Guide model RSR-M1 is capable of being used at service tem-
perature up to 150℃ thanks to THK's unique technologies in material, heat treatment and lubrication.
LM Guide
Thermal Characteristics of LM Rail and LM Block Materials

z Specific heat capacity: 0.481 J/(g•K)
z Thermal conductivity: 20.67 W/(m•K)
z Average coefficient of linear expansion: 11.8×10-6/℃
A-287
Types and Features
Models RSR-M1, RSR-M1K, M1V Specification Table⇒B-198

Model RSR-M1N Specification Table⇒B-198

Models RSR-M1W, M1WV Specification Table⇒B-200

These models have greater overall LM block
lengths (L), broader widths (W) and greater
rated loads and permissible moments than stan-
dard types.
Model RSR-M1WN Specification Table⇒B-200

Achieves the greatest load capacity among the
high temperature type miniature LM Guide mod-
els.
A-288

Model RSR-M1 is capable of receiving loads in
PL C0L C0 PR
directions. CT CT
The basic load ratings of models RSR9M1/M1W C0T C0T
are uniform in the four directions (radial, reverse
LM Guide
PT PT
radial and lateral directions), and their actual
values are provided in the specification table for
RSR-M1. Fig.1
The basic load ratings of models RSR12M1 to Table1 Basic Load Ratings of Models RSR12M1 to 20M1
20M1 indicate the values in the radial direction in All Directions
in Fig.1, and their actual values are provided in Basic dynamic Basic static
Direction
the specification table for RSR-M1. The values load rating load rating
in the reverse radial and lateral directions are Radial direction C C0
Reverse radial
obtained from Table1 below. direction
CL=0.78C C0L=0.70C0
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of models RSR9M1/M1W receives loads in all four directions simultaneously, the
PE PR PL PT
: Radial direction
: Lateral direction
When the LM block of models RSR12M1 to 20M1 receives loads in the radial and lateral directions,
or the reverse radial and lateral directions, simultaneously, the equivalent load is obtained from the
equation below.
Table2 Equivalent Factor of Models RSR12M1 to
PE X•PR PL Y•PT 20M1(when radial and lateral loads are applied)
1 0.83
: Reverse radial direction radial direction
: Lateral direction Equivalent load
1.2 1
PL : Reverse radial load (N) Table3 Equivalent Factor of Models RSR12M1 to 20M1
PT : Lateral load (N) (when reverse radial and lateral loads are applied)
X, Y : Equivalent factor PE X Y
(see Table2 and Table3) Equivalent load in reverse
1 0.99
radial direction
Equivalent load
1.01 1
A-289
Service Life

Accuracy Standards



A-290
LM Guide
A-291
HSR-M2
High Corrosion Resistance Type Model HSR-M2
High Corrosion Resistance Type LM Guide Model HSR-M2
LM Guide
0
LM rail
Retainer plate （SUS304）
（SUS304）
LM block
（SUS431）
Endplate
(Synthetic resin)
End seal
(Synthetic rubber)
45 °
Ball
（SUS431）
45°
Retainer plate
（SUS304）
Side seal
(Synthetic rubber)
Grease nipple
（SUS304）

A-292

LM Guide
The LM rail, LM block and balls are made of highly corrosion resistant stainless steel and the other
metal parts are made of stainless steel, allowing superb corrosion resistance to be achieved. As a
result, the need for surface treatment is eliminated.
Types and Features
Model HSR-M2A Specification Table⇒B-204


Model HSR-M2 is capable of receiving loads in
four directions: radial, reverse radial and lateral PL PR
directions.
PT PT
in the specification table for HSR-M2.
Fig.1 Model HSR-M2
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model HSR-M2 receives loads in all directions simultaneously, the equivalent
PE PR PL PT
PE : Equivalent load (N) PR : Radial load (N)
: Radial direction PL : Reverse radial load (N)
: Reverse radial direction PT : Lateral load (N)
: Lateral direction
A-293
Service Life

Accuracy Standards



A-294
LM Guide
A-295
Structure
Structureand Features
and of the
Features Caged
of the Roller
Caged LM Guide
Roller LM Guide
0
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
End seal
Retainer plate
Roller cage
Roller
Roller cage (component to retain rollers)
45° 45°
45° 45°
Magnified view of the circulation path Cross section
Fig.1 Structural Drawing of the Caged Roller LM Guide Model SRG
Caged Roller LM Guide is a roller guide that achieves low-friction, smooth motion and long-term
maintenance-free operation by using a roller cage. In addition, to ensure ultra-high rigidity, rollers
with low elastic deformation are used as the rolling elements and the roller diameter and the roller
length are optimized.
Furthermore, the lines of rollers are placed at a contact angle of 45° so that the same rated load is
applied in the four (radial, reverse and lateral) directions.
A-296
Structure and Features of the Caged Roller LM Guide
Advantages of the Caged Roller Technology

(1) Evenly spaced and aligned rollers circulate, Roller cage
preventing the rollers from skewing, mini- Roller
mizing rolling resistance fluctuations and
achieving smooth and stable motion.
(2) The absence of friction between rollers
LM Guide
allows grease to be retained in grease
pockets and achieves long-term mainte-
nance-free operation.
(3) The absence of friction between rollers Grease pocket
achieves low heat generation and superbly
high speed.
(4) The absence of roller-to-roller collision
ensures low noise and acceptable running
sound.
[Smooth Motion]
z Rolling Resistance Data
Evenly spaced and aligned rollers circulate, minimizing rolling resistance fluctuations and achieving
smooth and stable motion.
60
Conventional roller guide
Rolling resistance F (N)
50 ＃45
10.63N
40
30
20 SRG45LC
2.26N
10
0
0 100 200 300 400 500
Stroke(mm)
Result of Measuring Rolling Resistance Fluctuations
[Conditions]
Feeding speed: 10mm/s
Applied load: no load (one block)
Feeding device (model KR)
Measurement direction
Load cell
Roller guide measured
Rolling Resistance Measuring Machine
A-297
[Long-term Maintenance-free Operation]
z High-speed Durability Test Data
Use of a roller cage eliminates friction between rollers, minimizes heat generation and increases
grease retention, thus to achieve long-term maintenance-free operation.
[Conditions]
A sufficient amount
Model No.: SRG45LC of grease remains
Magnitude of preload: clearance C0 Roller
Speed: 180m/min
Acceleration: 1.5G
Stroke: 2300mm
Lubrication : Initial lubrication only
(THKAFB-LF Grease)
Detail view of the roller cage area
Stroke
Test result: No anomaly observed after running 15,000 km
Result of High-speed Durability Test
A-298
Structure and Features of the Caged Roller LM Guide
[Ultra-high Rigidity]
z High Rigidity Evaluation Data
[Preload] SRG ： radial clearance C0
Conventional type ： radial clearance equivalent to C0
Radial rigidity
Radial rigidity
LM Guide
12
10
Deflection (µm)
8 #45
6
4
SRG45LC
2 (with a caged roller)
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Radial load (kN)
Reverse radial rigidity

Reverse radial rigidity
20
15
Deflection (µm)

10 #45
5
SRG45LC
(with a caged roller)
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Reverse radial load (kN)
Horizontal rigidity
Horizontal rigidity
40
Table bolt fixed Bolt not fixed Conventional roller guide
Deflection (µm)
(free) 30 #45
20
10 SRG45LC
(with a caged roller)
0
Rigidity is measured with the two axes placed in 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
parallel and one of the axes not fixed with a bolt in Horizontal load (kN)
order not to apply a moment.
A-299
SRG
Ultra-high Rigidity Type Model SRG
Ultra-high Rigidity type Caged Roller LM Guide Model SRG

0
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
End seal
45° 45°
45° 45°
Caged roller
Roller
Cross section
* For the caged roller, see A-296.

Error Allowance of the Mounting Surface XXX A-305
A-300

SRN is an ultra-high rigidity Roller Guide that uses roller cages to allow low-friction, smooth motion
and achieve long-term maintenance-free operation.
A higher rigidity is achieved by using highly rigid rollers as the rolling elements and having the overall
LM Guide
roller length more than 1.5 times greater than the roller diameter.
[4-way Equal Load]
Since each row of rollers is arranged at a contact angle of 45° so that the LM block receives an equal
load rating in all four directions (radial, reverse radial and lateral directions), high rigidity is ensured in
all directions.
[Smooth Motion through Skewing Prevention]
The roller cage allows rollers to form an evenly spaced line while circulating, thus preventing the roll-
ers from skewing as the block enters an loaded area. As a result, fluctuation of the rolling resistance
is minimized, and stable, smooth motion is achieved.
Use of roller cages eliminates friction between rollers and increases grease retention, enabling long-
term maintenance-free operation to be achieved.
SRG is designed to have dimensions almost the same as that of Full Ball LM Guide model HSR,
dard size.
A-301
Types and Features
Models SRG-15A, 20A Specification Table⇒B-208

Model SRG-20L Specification Table⇒B-208

shape as model SRG-A, but has a longer overall
Model SRG-C Specification Table⇒B-208

A-302
Model SRG-LC Specification Table⇒B-208

shape as model SRG-C, but has a longer over-
LM Guide
Model SRG-R Specification Table⇒B-210
is limited.
Model SRG-R Specification Table⇒B-210

shape as model SRG-R, but has a longer over-
A-303
Model SRG is capable of receiving loads in four
PL PR
directions.
directions (radial, reverse radial and lateral PT PT
in the specification table for SRG.
Fig.1
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model SRG receives loads in all directions simultaneously, the equivalent load
PE PR PL PT
: Radial direction
: Lateral direction
Service Life

Accuracy Standards

A-304
Error Allowance of the Mounting Surface

Caged Roller LM Guide model SRG is highly rigid since it uses rollers as its rolling elements, and the
roller cage prevents the rollers from skewing. However, the mounting surface needs to be finished
with high accuracy. If the error on the mounting surface is large, it will affect the rolling resistance and
the service life. The following shows the maximum permissible value (limit value) according to the
radial clearance.
LM Guide
Table1 Error Allowance in Parallelism (P) between Two Rails Unit: mm
Radial clearance
Normal C1 C0
Model No.
SRG 15 0.005 0.003 0.003
SRG 20 0.008 0.006 0.004
SRG 25 0.009 0.007 0.005
SRG 30 0.011 0.008 0.006
SRG 35 0.014 0.010 0.007
SRG 45 0.017 0.013 0.009
SRG 55 0.021 0.014 0.011
SRG 65 0.027 0.018 0.014
for parallelism P
Tolerance
Fig.2
Table2 Error Allowance in Level (X) between the Rails Unit: mm

Radial clearance Normal C1 C0
Permissible error on the
0.00030 a 0.00021 a 0.00011 a
mounting surface X
X＝X1 ＋X2 X1 : Level difference on the rail mounting surface

X2 : Level difference on the block mounting surface
X2
Example of calculation
Rail span when a ＝ 500mm
X1
Error allowance X ＝ 0.0003 × 500
of the mounting ＝ 0.15 a
surface
Fig.3
Table3 Error Allowance in Level (Y) in the Axial Direction Unit: mm

Permissible error on the mounting surface 0.000036 b
Fig.4
A-305
SRN
Ultra-high Rigidity Type (Low Center of Gravity) Model SRN
Ultra-high Rigidity (Low Center of Gravity) Type Caged Roller LM Guide Model SRN

0
LM rail
LM block
Endplate
End seal
45° 45°
Roller
45° 45°
Caged roller
Cross section

Error Allowance of the Mounting Surface XXX A-310
A-306

SRN is an ultra-high rigidity Roller Guide that uses roller cages to allow low-friction, smooth motion
and achieve long-term maintenance-free operation.
A higher rigidity is achieved by using highly rigid rollers as the rolling elements and having the overall
LM Guide
roller length more than 1.5 times greater than the roller diameter.
[4-way Equal Load]
Since each row of rollers is arranged at a contact angle of 45° so that the LM block receives an equal
load rating in all four directions (radial, reverse radial and lateral directions), high rigidity is ensured in
all directions.
[Smooth Motion through Skewing Prevention]
Use of roller cages eliminates friction between rollers and increases grease retention, enabling long-
term maintenance-free operation to be achieved.
SRG is designed to have dimensions almost the same as that of Full Ball LM Guide model HSR,
dard size.
[Thin, Low Center of Gravity]
Since the overall height is lower than Caged Roller LM Guide model SRG, this model is optimal for
compact design.
A-307
Types and Features
Model SRN-C Specification Table⇒B-214

Model SRN-LC Specification Table⇒B-214

shape as model SRN-C, but has a longer overall
Model SRN-R Specification Table⇒B-216

is limited.
Model SRN-LR Specification Table⇒B-216

shape as model SRN-R, but has a longer overall
A-308

Model SRN is capable of receiving loads in four
PL PR
directions.
LM Guide
PT PT
in the specification table for SRN.
Fig.1
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model SRN receives loads in all directions simultaneously, the equivalent load
PE PR PL PT
: Radial direction
: Lateral direction
Service Life

Accuracy Standards

A-309
Error Allowance of the Mounting Surface
Caged Roller LM Guide model SRN is highly rigid since it uses rollers as its rolling elements, and the
radial clearance.
Table1 Error Allowance in Parallelism (P) between Two Rails Unit: mm
Radial clearance
Normal C1 C0
Model No.
SRN 35 0.014 0.010 0.007
SRN 45 0.017 0.013 0.009
SRN 55 0.021 0.014 0.011
SRN 65 0.027 0.018 0.014
for parallelism P
Tolerance
Fig.2
Table2 Error Allowance in Level (X) between the Rails Unit: mm

Radial clearance Normal C1 C0
Permissible error on the
0.00030 a 0.00021 a 0.00011 a
mounting surface X
X＝X1 ＋X2 X1 : Level difference on the rail mounting surface

X2 : Level difference on the block mounting surface
X2
Rail span when a ＝ 500mm
X1
Error allowance X ＝ 0.0003 × 500
of the mounting a
＝ 0.15
surface
Fig.3
Table3 Error Allowance in Level (Y) in the Axial Direction Unit: mm

Permissible error on the mounting surface 0.000036 b
Fig.4
A-310
LM Guide
A-311
SRW
Ultra-high Rigidity Type (Wide) Model SRW
Ultra-high Rigidity (Wide) Type Caged Roller LM Guide Model SRW

0
LM block
Endplate
End seal
LM rail
Pipe
Retainer plate 45° 45°
Caged roller
Roller
45° 45°
Cross section

Radial Clearance XXX A-115
Permissible Error of the Mounting Surface XXX A-316
A-312

Based on Caged Roller LM Guide model SRG, this model has a wider rail and two rows of LM rail
mounting holes to achieve high mounting strength and mounting stability. SRW is an ultra-high rigid-
ity Roller Guide that uses roller cages to allow low-friction, smooth motion and achieve long-term
maintenance-free operation.
LM Guide
Since it has a wide rail and can be secured on the table using two rows of mounting bolts, the mount-
ing strength is significantly increased. In addition, since the crosswise raceway distance (L) is large,
model SRW is structurally strong against a moment load (Mc moment) in the rolling direction.
Furthermore, model SRW uses rollers that show little elastic deformation as its rolling elements, and
the overall length of each roller is 1.5 times greater than the diameter, thus to increase the rigidity.
Rolling direction moment
(Mc moment)
Slant tanθ 0.0015
0.001
SRG45LR
0.0005
SRW70LR
L 0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Applied moment M (kN•m)
Fig.1 Result of Comparison between Models SRW and SRG in Moment Rigidity in the Rolling Direction (Mc Moment)
Width dimension: approx. 1.5 times greater
Fixed using two rows of mounting bolt
Fig.2 Comparison between Models SRW and SRG in Cross Section
A-313
[Smoothness Achieved through Skewing Prevention]
Use of the roller cage eliminates friction
between rollers and enables the lubricant to be
retained in grease pockets formed between
adjacent rollers. As the rollers circulate, the
grease pocket serves to provide the required
amount of lubricant to the contact curvature of
the spacer and the roller, thus to achieve long-
Grease pocket
term maintenance-free operation.
Fig.3
Types and Features
Model SRW-LR Specification Table⇒B-220


Model SRW is capable of receiving loads in four
PL PR
directions.
The basic load ratings are uniform in the four PT PT
in the specification table.
Fig.4
A-314
Equivalent Load
When the LM block of model SRW receives loads in all directions simultaneously, the equivalent load
PE PR PL PT
LM Guide
: Radial direction
: Lateral direction
Service Life
Radial Clearance
Accuracy Standards

A-315
Permissible Error of the Mounting Surface
Caged Roller LM Guide model SRW is highly rigid since it uses rollers as its rolling elements, and the
radial clearance.
Table1 Error in Parallelism (P) between Two Rails
Unit: mm
Radial clearance
for parallelism P
Normal C1 C0
Model No.
Tolerance
SRW 70 0.013 0.009 0.007
SRW 85 0.016 0.011 0.008
SRW 100 0.020 0.014 0.011
Fig.5
Table2 Error in Level (X) between Two Rails
Unit: mm Table3 Error in Level (Y) in the Axial Direction
Radial clearance Normal C1 C0 Unit: mm
Accuracy of the Accuracy of the

mounting surface X 0.00020a 0.00014a 0.000072a
mounting surface
0.000036 b
X=X1+X2
X1: Level difference on the rail mounting surface
X2: Level difference on the block mounting surface
When the rail span :
a=500mm
Accuracy of the mounting surface
X=0.0002 500
=0.1 X2
X1
a
Fig.6
Fig.7
A-316
LM Guide
A-317
Point of Design LM Guide
Designing the Guide System

THK offers various types of LM Guides in order to meet diversified conditions. Supporting ordinary
0
horizontal mount, vertical mount, inverted mount, slant mount, wall mount and single-axis mount, the
wide array of LM Guide types makes it easy to achieve a linear guide system with a long service life
and high rigidity while minimizing the required space for installation.
Examples of Arrangements of the Guide System

The following are representative guide systems and arrangements when installing the LM Guide.
(For indication of the reference surface, see A-338.)
Double-rail configuration when high rigidity is required in all directions
Load direction Reverse radial load

Lateral load
Radial load
Model SHS
Double-rail configuration when high rigidity is required in the radial direction

Lateral load Model SSR
Radial load
When high rigidity is required in all directions and the installation space is limited in height

Model HSR-YR
Lateral load Radial load
A-318
Point of Design
Single-rail configuration
Load direction
Reverse radial load
Lateral load
Model SHW
LM Guide
Radial load
When the minimum possible height of the equipment is allowed (Adjustable preload type)
Load direction
Reverse radial load
Lateral load Model HR
Radial load
When a medium load is applied and the mounting surface is rough (Preload, self-adjusting type)
Load direction
Reverse radial load
Lateral load Model GSR
Radial load
A-319
Single-rail configuration Triple-rail configuration
LM block reference surface
LM rail reference surface
Double-rail configuration
Model HSR-YR Model HSR-HR
Model HSR-YR Model HSR-YR

LM rail reference surface LM rail reference surface
LM block reference surface Model HSR-HR
Model HR Model CF
(Cam follower)
Model HSR-HR
LM rail reference surface Model HSR-YR
A-320
Point of Design
4-rail configuration
LM Guide
A-321
Method for Securing an LM Guide to Meet the Conditions
LM Guides are categorized into groups of types by mounting space and structure: a group of types to
be mounted with bolts from the top, and another of types to be mounted from the bottom. LM rails are
also divided into types secured with bolts and those secured with clamps (model JR). This wide array
of types allows you to make a choice according to the application.
There are several ways of mounting the LM Guide as shown in Table1. When the machine is subject
to vibrations that may cause the LM rail(s) or LM blocks to loosen, we recommend the securing
method indicated by Fig.1 on A-323. (If 2 or more rails are used in parallel, only the LM block on the
master rail should be secured in the crosswise direction.) If this method is not applicable for a struc-
tural reason, hammer in knock pins to secure the LM block(s) as shown in Table2 on A-323 When
using knock pins, machine the top/bottom surfaces of the LM rail by 2 to 3 mm using a carbide end
mill before drilling the holes since the surfaces are hardened.
Table1 Major Securing Methods on the Master-rail Side
(a) Secured only with side reference surfaces (b) Secured with set screws
(c) Secured with a presser plate (d) Secured with tapered gibs
(e) Secured with pins
A-322
Point of Design
Table2 Major Securing Methods on the Subsidiary-rail Side
(a) Secured only with the side reference sur- (b) Secured only with the side reference sur-
face of the rail face of the block
LM Guide
(c) Secured without a side reference surface (d) Secured with dowel pins
LM block set screw
Table
Base
LM rail set screw
Master rail side Subsidiary-rail side
Fig.1 When the Machine Receives Vibrations or Impact
A-323
Designing a Mounting Surface
If particularly high accuracy is required for the machine to which an LM Guide is to be mounted, it is
necessary to mount the LM rail with high accuracy. To achieve the desired accuracy, be sure to
design the mounting surface while taking the following points into account.
B C
[Corner Shape]
If the corner on the surface on which the LM rail
or LM block is to be mounted is machined to be r
shaped R, which is greater than the chamfer
r
dimension of the LM rail or LM block, then the
rail or the block may not closely contact its refer-
r
ence surface. Therefore, when designing a r
mounting surface, it is important to carefully
read the description on the “corner shape”of A B
the subject model . (Fig.2) Fig.2
[Perpendicularity with the Reference Surface]

If the perpendicularity between the base mount-
ing surface for the LM rail or the LM block and
θ
the reference surface is not accurate, the rail or
the block may not closely contact the reference
surface. Therefore, it is important to take into
account an error of the perpendicularity
between the mounting surface and the refer-
ence surface . (Fig.3) θ
B
Fig.3
A-324
Point of Design
[Dimensions of the Reference Surface]

When designing the reference surface, be sure
to take into account the height and the thickness
of the datum area. If the datum area is too high, W2
W1
it may interfere with the LM block. If it is too low, H1
the LM rail or the LM block may not closely con-
tact the reference-surface depending on the H2
LM Guide
chamfer of the rail or the block. Additionally, if
the datum area is too thin, the desired accuracy A B
may not be obtained due to poor rigidity of the
datum area when a lateral load is applied or
when performing positioning using a lateral Fig.4
mounting bolt . (Fig.4)

[Dimensional Tolerance between the Reference Surface and the Mounting Hole]
If the dimensional tolerance between the refer-
ence surface of the LM rail or the LM block and
the mounting hole is too large, the rail or the W3
block may not closely contact the reference sur-
face when mounted on the base. D
Normally, the tolerance should be within ±0.1
mm depending on the model. (Fig.5)
Fig.5
[Chamfer of the Tapped Mounting Hole]

To mount the LM rail, the mounting surface
needs to be tapped and the tapped hole has to
be chamfered. If the chamfer of the tapped hole W3
is too large or too small, it may affect the accu-
racy . (Fig.6) D
Guidelines for the chamfer dimension:

Chamfer diameter D = nominal diameter of the
bolt + pitch
C
Example: Chamfer diameter D with M6 (pitch):
D=6+1=7 Fig.6
A-325
Normally, the mounting base for the LM rail and the LM block has a reference-surface on the side
face of the shoulder of the base in order to allow easy installation and highly accurate positioning.
The height of the datum shoulder varies with model numbers. See A-326 to A-332 for details.
The corner of the mounting shoulder must be machined to have a recess, or machined to be smaller
than the corner radius "r," to prevent interference with the chamfer of the LM rail or the LM block.
The corner radius varies with model numbers. See A-326 to A-332 for details.
r
r
H2
H1 E
r
r
Shoulder for the LM Rail Shoulder for the LM Block (LM casing)
Fig.7
[Model SR, SR-M1] [Model CSR]

Unit: mm Unit: mm
Corner Shoulder Maximum Shoulder height

Model height for shoulder height Model Corner radius
radius for the LM rail
No. the LM rail for the LM block No.
r(max) H1 H2 E r(max) H1 E
15 0.5 3.8 4 4.5 15 0.5 3 3.5
20 0.5 5 5 6 20 0.5 3.5 4
25 1 5.5 5 7 25 1 5 5.5
30 1 8 6 9.5 30 1 5 7
35 1 9 6 11.5 35 1 6 7.5
45 1 10 8 12.5 45 1 8 10
55 1.5 11 8 13.5 [Model NSR-TBC]
70 1.5 12 10 15 Unit: mm
85 1.2 8 12 18.5 Shoulder Shoulder
Corner
100 1.2 10 15 19 Model height for the height for the
radius LM rail LM block
120 1.2 12 20 15 No.
r(max) H1 H2 E
150 1.2 12 20 22
20 1 5 5 5.5
[Model JR] 25 1 6 6 6.5
Unit: mm 30 1 7 6 9
Shoulder height for 40 1 7 8 10.5
Model Corner radius
the LM block 50 1 7 8 8
No.
r(max) H2 70 1 7 10 9.5
25 1 5
35 1 6
45 1 8
55 1.5 10
A-326
Point of Design
H2
E H1
LM Guide
r
Shoulder for the LM Rail Shoulder for the LM Block
Fig.8
[Model SHS] [Model SCR]

Unit: mm Unit: mm
Shoulder
Corner Shoulder
height for Model Corner radius Shoulder height
for the LM rail
Model radius
height for
the LM No.
No. the LM rail
block
r(max) H1 E
r(max) H1 H2 E 15 0.5 2.5 3
15 0.5 2.5 4 3 20 0.5 3.5 4.6
20 0.5 3.5 5 4.6 25 1 5 5.8
25 1 5 5 5.8 30 1 5 7
30 1 5 5 7 35 1 6 7.5
35 1 6 6 7.5 45 1 7.5 8.9
45 1 7.5 8 8.9 65 1.5 15 19
55 1.5 10 10 12.7
65 1.5 15 10 19
[Models SNR/SNS, SNR/SNS-H and NR/NRS] [Model MX]

Unit: mm Unit: mm
Shoulder
Shoulder Corner radius Shoulder height
Corner height for Model for the LM rail for the LM rail
Model radius
height for
the LM No.
No. the LM rail r(max) H1 E
block
r(max) H1 H2 E 5 0.1 1.2 1.5
25X 1.5 5 5 5.5 7W 0.1 1.7 2
30 1 5 5 7
35 1 6 6 9
45 1 8 8 11.5
55 1.5 10 10 14
65 1.5 10 10 15
75 1.5 12 12 15
85 1.5 14 14 17
100 2 16 16 20
A-327
r2
r
r2 r
H2
H2
E H1
r1 r
r
H1
r1
E
Fig.9 Fig.10
[Model HSR, HSR-M1 and HSR-M2] [Model HSR-YR]

Unit: mm Unit: mm
Corner Corner Shoulder Shoulder Shoulder
Corner Shoulder
radius for radius for height for height for height for
Model the LM the LM the LM the LM Model radius
height for the LM
No. block block No. the LM rail
rail rail block
r1(max) r2(max) H1 H2 E r(max) H1 H2 E
8 0.3 0.5 1.6 6 2.1 15 0.5 3 4 3.5
10 0.3 0.5 1.7 5 2.2 20 0.5 3.5 5 4
12 0.8 0.5 2.6 4 3.1 25 1 5 5 5.5
15 0.5 0.5 3 4 4.7 30 1 5 5 7
20 0.5 0.5 3.5 5 4 35 1 6 6 7.5
25 1 1 5 5 5.5 45 1 8 8 10
30 1 1 5 5 7 55 1.5 10 10 13
35 1 1 6 6 7.5 65 1.5 10 10 14
45 1 1 8 8 10
55 1.5 1.5 10 10 13
65 1.5 1.5 10 10 14
85 1.5 1.5 12 14 16
100 2 2 16 16 20.5
120 2.5 2.5 17 18 20
150 2.5 2.5 20 20 22.5
[Models HCR and HMG]

Unit: mm
Corner Corner Shoulder Maximum
radius for radius for height for shoulder
Model the LM the LM the LM height for the
No. rail block rail LM block
r1(max) r2(max) H1 H2 E
12 0.8 0.5 2.6 6 3.1
15 0.5 0.5 3 4 3.5
25 1 1 5 5 5.5
35 1 1 6 6 7.5
45 1 1 8 8 10
65 1.5 1.5 10 10 14
A-328
Point of Design
r2
r2
E
H2
LM Guide
H 1 r1
r1
Fig.11
[Model SRG] [Model SRN]

Unit: mm Unit: mm
Corner Corner Shoulder Shoulder Corner Corner Shoulder Shoulder
radius for radius for height for height for radius for radius for height for height for
Model the LM the LM the LM the LM Model the LM the LM the LM the LM
No. rail block rail block No. rail block rail block
r1(max) r2(max) H1 H2 E r1(max) r2(max) H1 H2 E
15 0.5 0.5 2.5 4 3.0 35 1 1 5 6 6
20 0.5 0.5 3.5 5 4.6 45 1.5 1.5 6 8 7
25 1 1 4 5 4.5 55 1.5 1.5 8 10 10
30 1 1 4.5 5 5 65 1.5 2 8 10 10
35 1 1 5 6 6
45 1.5 1.5 6 8 8
55 1.5 1.5 8 10 10
65 1.5 2 9 10 11.5
[Model SRW]
Unit: mm
Corner Corner Shoulder Shoulder
radius for radius for height for height for
Model the LM the LM the LM the LM
No. rail block rail block
70 1.5 1.5 6 8 8
85 1.5 1.5 8 10 10
100 1.5 2 9 10 11.5
A-329
r
r
r
H2 r H2
r H1 E E H1 r
r D r
Shoulder for the LM Rail Shoulder for the LM Block Shoulder for the LM Rail Shoulder for the LM Block
Fig.12 Fig.13
[Model SSR] [Models SHW and HRW]

Unit: mm Unit: mm
Shoulder Maximum Shoulder
Corner height for shoulder Corner Shoulder
height for
Model radius the LM height for the Model radius
height for the LM
No. LM block No. the LM rail
rail block
r(max) H1 H2 E D r(max) H1 H2 E
15 X 0.5 3.8 5.5 4.5 0.3 12 0.5 1.5 4 2
14 0.5 1.5 5 2
20 X 0.5 5 7.5 6 0.3 17 0.4 2 4 2.5
25 X 1 5.5 8 6.8 0.4 21 0.4 2.5 5 3
27 0.4 2.5 5 3
30 X 1 8 11.5 9.5 0.4 35 0.8 3.5 5 4
50 0.8 3 6 3.4
35 X 1 9 16 11.5 0.4
60 1 5 8 6.5
Note) When closely contacting the LM block with the datum
shoulder, the resin layer may stick out from the overall
width of the LM block by the dimension D. To avoid
this, machine the datum shoulder to have a recess or
limit the datum shoulder's height below the dimension
H2.
A-330
Point of Design
r
r
r
H2
r
H2
r H1
E H1 r
LM Guide
r
r
Fig.14 Fig.15
[Model HR] [Model GSR]

Unit: mm Unit: mm
Model Corner radius Shoulder height Shoulder height

for the LM rail for the LM block Corner Shoulder
Shoulder
height for
No. Model radius
height for
the LM
r(max) H1 H2 No. the LM rail
block
918 0.3 5 6 r(max) H1 H2 E
1123 0.5 6 7 15 0.6 7 7 8
1530 0.5 8 10 20 0.8 9 8 10.4
2042 0.5 11 15 25 0.8 11 11 13.2
2555 1 13 18 30 1.2 11 13 15
3065 1 16 20 35 1.2 13 14 17.5
3575 1 18 26
4085 1.5 21 30
50105 1.5 26 32
60125 1.5 31 40
EH r
r
Fig.16
[Model GSR-R]
Unit: mm
Model Corner radius Shoulder height

for the LM rail
No. r(max) H E
25 0.8 4 4.5
30 1.2 4 4.5
35 1.2 4.5 5.5
A-331
r2
r2
E
H2
r1
H1 r1

Fig.17
[Model SRS] [Model RSR, RSR-M1 and RSH]

Unit: mm Unit: mm
Corner Shoulder Corner Shoulder
Corner radius for Shoulder height for Corner radius for Shoulder height for
Model radius for the LM height for the LM Model radius for the LM height for the LM
No. the LM rail block the LM rail block No. the LM rail block the LM rail block
r1(max) r2(max) H1 H2 E r1(max) r2(max) H1 H2 E
7M 0.1 0.2 0.9 3.3 1.3 3 0.1 0.3 0.8 1.2 1
7 WM 0.1 0.1 1.4 3.8 1.8 5 0.1 0.3 1.2 2 1.5
9M 0.1 0.3 0.5 4.9 0.9 7 0.1 0.5 1.2 3 1.5
9 WM 0.1 0.5 2.5 4.9 2.9 9 0.3 0.5 1.9 3 2.2
12 M 0.3 0.2 1.5 5.7 2 12 0.3 0.3 1.4 4 3
12 WM 0.3 0.3 2.5 5.7 3 15 0.3 0.3 2.3 5 4
15 M 0.3 0.4 2.2 6.5 2.7 20 0.5 0.5 5.5 5 7.5
15 WM 0.3 0.3 2.2 6.5 2.7 3W 0.1 0.3 0.7 2 1
20 M 0.3 0.5 3 8.7 3.4 5W 0.1 0.3 1.2 2 1.5
25 M 0.5 0.5 4.5 10.5 5 7W 0.1 0.1 1.7 3 2
9W 0.1 0.1 3.9 3 4.2
[Models RSR-Z and RSH-Z] 12 W 0.3 0.3 3.7 4 4
Unit: mm
14 W 0.3 0.3 3.2 5 3.5
Corner Shoulder
Corner
radius for
Shoulder
height for 15 W 0.3 0.3 3.7 5 4
Model radius for the LM height for the LM
No. the LM rail the LM rail
block block
7Z 0.1 0.5 1.2 3 1.5
9Z 0.3 0.5 1.9 3 2.2
12 Z 0.3 0.3 2.1 4 2.4
15 Z 0.3 0.3 2.5 5 3.4
7 WZ 0.1 0.1 1.7 3 2
9 WZ 0.1 0.1 2.5 3 2.9
12 WZ 0.3 0.3 3 4 3.4
15 WZ 0.3 0.3 3 5 3.4
A-332
Point of Design
Permissible Error of the Mounting Surface

The LM Guide allows smooth straight motion through its self-aligning capability even when there is a
slight distortion or error on the mounting surface.
[Error Allowance in the Parallelism between Two Rails]
The following tables show error allowances in parallelism between two rails that will not affect the
LM Guide
service life in normal operation.
Fig.18 Error Allowance in Parallelism (P) between Two Rails
[Models SHS, HSR, CSR, HSR-M1, and HSR-M2] [Model SSR, SR, SR-M1]
Model Clearance Clearance Normal Model Clearance Clearance Normal

No. C0 C1 clearance No. C0 C1 clearance
8 — 10 13 15 — 25 35
10 — 12 16 20 25 30 40
12 — 15 20 25 30 35 50
15 — 18 25 30 35 40 60
20 18 20 25 35 45 50 70
25 20 22 30 45 55 60 80
30 27 30 40 55 65 70 100
35 30 35 50 70 65 80 110
45 35 40 60 85 80 90 120
55 45 50 70 100 90 100 130
65 55 60 80 120 100 110 140
85 70 75 90 150 110 120 150
100 85 90 100
120 100 110 120
[Models SNR, SNR-H and NR]
Unit: μ m
150 115 130 140
Model Clearance Clearance Normal
[Model JR] No. C0 C1 clearance
Unit: μ m
25 14 15 21
Model No. — 30 19 21 28
25 100 35 21 25 35
35 200 45 25 28 42
45 300 55 32 35 49
55 400 65 39 42 56
75 44 47 60
85 49 53 63
100 60 63 70
A-333
[Models SNS, SNS-H and NRS] [Model HR]

25 10 11 15 918 — 7 10
30 14 15 20 1123 — 8 14
35 15 18 25 1530 — 12 18
45 18 20 30 2042 14 15 20
55 23 25 35 2555 20 24 35
65 28 30 40 3065 22 26 38
75 31 34 43 3575 24 28 42
85 35 38 45 4085 30 35 50
100 43 45 50 50105 38 42 55
60125 50 55 65
[Models SHW and HRW]
Unit: μ m [Models GSR and GSR-R]
Unit: μ m
No. C0 C1 clearance Model No. —
12 — 10 13 15 30
14 — 12 16 20 40
17 — 15 20 25 50
21 — 18 25 30 60
27 — 20 25 35 70
35 20 22 30
50 27 30 40 [Model NSR-TBC]
Unit: μ m
60 30 35 50
Normal
[Models SRS, RSR, RSR-W, RSR-Z, RSH, Model No. Clearance C1
clearance
RSH-Z and RSR-M1]
Unit: μ m 20 40 50
25 50 70
Circular-arc
Gothic-arch groove 30 60 80
Model groove
40 70 90
No. Clearance Normal Normal
50 80 110
C1 clearance clearance
70 90 130
3 — 2 —
5 — 2 —
7 — 3 —
9 3 4 11
12 5 9 15
14 6 10 —
15 6 10 18
20 8 13 25
25 10 15 30
A-334
Point of Design
[Flatness of the Mounting Surface]

The following tables show errors in flatness of the mounting surface with models SRS, RSR, RSR-W
and RSH that will not affect their service lives in normal operation. Note that if the flatness of the
mounting surface is poorly established for models other than those above, it may affect the service
life.
[Model SRS] [Models RSR, RSR-W, RSR-Z, RSH and RSH-Z]
Unit: mm Unit: mm
LM Guide
Model No. Flatness error Model No. Flatness error
7M 0.025/200 3 0.012/200
7 WM 0.025/200 5 0.015/200
9M 0.035/200 7 0.025/200
9 WM 0.035/200 9 0.035/200
12 M 0.050/200 12 0.050/200
12 WM 0.050/200 15 0.060/200
15 M 0.060/200 20 0.110/200
15 WM 0.060/200 7A 0.100/200
20 M 0.070/200 9A 0.160/200
25 M 0.070/200 12 A 0.200/200
15 A 0.250/200
20 A 0.300/200
Note1) With the mounting surface, multiple accuracies are
combined in many cases. Therefore, we recommend
using 70% or less of the values above.
Note2) The above figures apply to normal clearances. When
using two or more rails with clearance C1, we recom-
mend using 50% or less of the values above.
A-335
[Error Allowance in Vertical Level between Two Rails]
The values in the tables on A-336 and A-337 represent error allowances in vertical level between two
rails per axis-to-axis distance of 500 mm and are proportionate to axis-to-axis distances (200 mm for
model RSR).
500
Fig.19 Error Allowance in Vertical Level (S) between Two Rails
[Models SHS, HSR, CSR, HSR-M1, and HSR- [Models SNR, SNR-H and NR]
M2] Unit: μ m
Unit: μ m
Model Clearance Clearance Normal No. C0 C1 clearance
No. C0 C1 clearance 25 35 43 65
8 — 11 40 30 45 55 85
10 — 16 50 35 60 75 105
12 — 20 65 45 70 85 125
15 — 85 130 55 85 105 150
20 50 85 130 65 100 125 175
25 70 85 130 75 110 135 188
30 90 110 170 85 120 145 200
35 120 150 210 100 140 165 225
45 140 170 250
55 170 210 300
[Model JR]
Unit: μ m
65 200 250 350
85 240 290 400 Model No. —
100 280 330 450 25 400
120 320 370 500 35 500
150 360 410 550 45 800
[Model SSR, SR, SR-M1] 55 1000
Unit: μ m

No. C0 C1 clearance
15 — 100 180
20 80 100 180
25 100 120 200
30 120 150 240
35 170 210 300
45 200 240 360
55 250 300 420
70 300 350 480
85 350 420 540
100 400 480 600
120 450 540 720
150 500 600 780
A-336
Point of Design
[Models SNS, SNS-H and NRS] [Model HR]


25 49 60 91 918 — 15 45
30 63 77 119 1123 — 20 50
35 84 105 147 1530 — 60 90
LM Guide
45 98 119 175 2042 50 60 90
55 119 147 210 2555 85 100 150
65 140 175 245 3065 95 110 165
75 154 189 263 3575 100 120 175
85 168 203 280 4085 120 150 210
100 196 231 315 50105 140 175 245
60125 170 200 280
[Models SRS, RSR, RSR-W, RSR-Z, RSH,
RSH-Z and RSR-M1] [Models GSR and GSR-R]
Circular-arc Model No. —
Gothic-arch groove
Model groove
15 240
No. Clearance Normal Normal
20 300
C1 clearance clearance
25 360
3 — 15 — 30 420
5 — 20 — 35 480
7 — 25 —
9 6 35 160 [Model NSR-TBC]
12 12 50 200 Unit: μ m
14 20 60 — Normal
15 20 60 250 Model No. Clearance C1
clearance
20 30 70 300
20 210 300
25 40 80 350
25 240 360
[Models SHW and HRW] 30 270 420
Unit: μ m 40 360 540
50 420 600
70 480 660
No. C0 C1 clearance
12 — 11 40
14 — 16 50
17 — 20 65
21 — 85 130
27 — 85 130
35 70 85 130
50 90 110 170
60 120 150 210
A-337
Marking on the Master LM Guide and Combined Use
[Marking on the Master LM Guide]
All LM rails mounted on the same plane are
marked with the same serial number. Of those
LM rails, the one marked with "KB" after the
serial number is the master LM rail. The LM
block on the master LM rail has its reference
surface finished to a designated accuracy,
Master LM Guide
allowing it to serve as the positioning reference
for the table. (See Fig.20.)
LM Guides of normal grade are not marked with
"KB." Therefore, any one of the LM rails having
the same serial number can be used as the
master LM rail.
Subsidiary LM Guide
Y2F123 KB
Master mark
Serial number
Fig.20 Master LM Guide and Subsidiary LM Guide
[Markings on the Reference Surface]

In the LM Guide, the reference surface of the
LM block is opposite the surface marked with Reference surface
the THK logo, and that of the LM rail is on the
surface marked with a line (see Fig.21). If it is
necessary to reverse the reference surface of THK logo
the LM rail and block, or if the grease nipple Reference surface
must be oriented in the opposite direction, spec-
ify it. Line marking
Master LM Guide
THK logo
Reference surface
Line marking
Subsidiary LM Guide
Fig.21 Markings on the Reference Surface
A-338
Point of Design
[Serial Number Marking and Combined Use of an LM Rail and LM Blocks]

An LM rail and LM block(s) used in combination must have the same serial number. When removing
an LM block from the LM rail and reinstalling the LM block, make sure that they have the same serial
number and the numbers are oriented in the same direction. (Fig.22)
LM Guide
Fig.22 Serial Number Marking and Combined Use of an LM Rail and LM Blocks
[Use of Jointed Rails]

When a long LM rail is ordered, two or more rails will be jointed together to the desired length. When
jointing rails, make sure that the joint match marks shown in Fig.23 are correctly positioned.
When two LM Guides with connected rails are to be arranged in parallel to each other, the two LM
Guides will be manufactured so that the two LM Guides are axisymmetrically aligned.
Joint match mark Joint match mark

B1 B2
Joint match mark
Subsidiary-rail axis
Reference surface Reference surface
Master rail axis

Joint match mark
A1 A2
Joint match mark Joint match mark
Joint match mark indication
Fig.23 Use of Jointed Rails
A-339
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance LM Guide
Mounting the LM Guide

0
Mounting Procedure
[Example of Mounting the LM Guide When an Impact Load is Applied to the Machine and
therefore Rigidity and High Accuracy are Required]
LM block set screw
Table
LM rail set screw

Base
Subsidiary-rail side Master rail side
Fig.1 When an Impact Load is Applied to the Machine
z Mounting the LM Rail(s)

(1) Be sure to remove burr, dent and dust from
the mounting surface of the machine to
which the LM Guide is to be mounted
before installing the LM Guide. (Fig.2)
Note) Since the LM Guide is coated with anti-rust oil,
remove it from the reference surface by wiping
the surface with washing oil before using the
guide. Once the anti-rust oil has been removed,
the reference surface is prone to getting rusted.
We recommend applying low-viscosity spindle Fig.2 Checking the Mounting Surface
oil.
(2) Gently place the LM rail onto the base, and

temporarily secure the bolts to the extent
that the LM rail lightly contacts the mounting
surface (align the line-marked side of the
LM rail with the side reference-surface of
the base). (Fig.3)
Note) The bolts for securing the LM Guide must be
clean. When placing the bolts into the mounting Fig.3 Aligning the LM Rail with the Reference-Surface
holes of the LM rail, check if the bolt holes are
displaced.(Fig.4) Forcibly tightening the bolt into
a displaced hole may deteriorate the accuracy.
Fig.4 Checking with the Bolt for an Allowance
A-340
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance
(3) Secure the set screws for the LM rail in

order with a tightening force just enough to
have the rail closely contact the side mount-
ing surface. (Fig.5)
(4) Tighten the mounting bolts at the desig-

nated torque using a torque wrench. (See
LM Guide
Fig.6, and Table1 and Table2 on A-350.)
Note) To achieve stable accuracy when tightening the Fig.5 Tightening the Set screws
LM rail mounting bolts, tighten them in order
from the center to the rail ends.
(5) Mount the other rail in the same manner to

complete the installation of the LM rails.
(6) Hammer in caps into the bolt holes on the

top face of each LM rail until the top of the
cap is on the same level as the top face of
the rail.
Fig.6 Fully Fastening the Mounting Bolts
z Mounting the LM Blocks

(1) Gently place the table on the LM blocks and
temporarily fasten the mounting bolts.
(2) Press the master side LM blocks to the side 1 6 4

reference surface of the table using set
screws and position the table. (See Fig.1 on
A-340.)
(3) Fully fasten the mounting bolts on the mas-

ter side and the subsidiary side to complete
the installation.
Note) To evenly secure the table, tighten the mounting
bolts in diagonal order as shown in Fig.7.
This method saves time in establishing straight- 3 5 2

ness of the LM rail and eliminates the need to
machine securing dowel pins, thus to drastically
shorten the installation man-hours. Fig.7 Sequence of Tightening the LM Blocks
A-341
[Example of Mounting the LM Guide When the Master LM Rail is not Provided with Set screws]
LM block set screw
Table
Master rail side Base Subsidiary-rail side
Fig.8 When the Master LM Rail is not Provided with Set screws
z Mounting the Master LM Rail

After temporarily fastening the mounting bolts,
firmly press the LM rail to the side reference sur-
face at the position of each mounting bolt using
a small vice and fully fasten the bolt. Perform
this in order from either rail end to the other.
(Fig.9)
Fig.9
z Mounting the Subsidiary LM Rail

To mount the subsidiary LM rail in parallel with the master LM rail, which has been correctly installed,
we recommend adopting the methods below.
Using a Straight-edge
Place straight-edges between the two rails, and
arrange the straight-edges in parallel with the
side reference surface of the master LM rail
using a dial gauge. Then, secure the mounting
bolts in order while achieving straightness of the
subsidiary rail with the straight edge as the ref-
erence by using the dial gauge. (Fig.10)
Fig.10
A-342
Using Parallelism of the Table

Secure the two LM blocks on the master LM rail
with the table (or a temporary table for measure-
ment), and temporarily fasten the LM rail and
the LM block on the subsidiary LM rail with the
table. Place a dial gauge to the side face of the
LM block on the subsidiary rail from the dial
LM Guide
stand fixed on the table top, then fasten the
bolts in order while achieving parallelism of the
subsidiary LM rail by moving the table from the
rail end. (Fig.11)
Fig.11
Having the Subsidiary LM Rail Follow the Master LM Rail

Place the table on the blocks of the correctly
mounted master LM rail and the temporarily fas-
tened subsidiary LM rail, and fully fasten the two
LM blocks on the master rail and one of the two
LM blocks on the subsidiary rail with bolts. Fully
tighten the mounting bolts on the subsidiary LM
rail in order while temporarily fastening the
remaining LM block on the subsidiary LM rail.
(Fig.12)
Fig.12
Using a Jig
Use a jig like the one shown in Fig.13 to achieve
parallelism of the reference surface on the sub-
sidiary side against the side reference surface of
the master side from one end of the rail by the
mounting pitch, and at the same time, fully fas-
ten the mounting bolts in order. (Fig.13)
（a）（b）
Fig.13
A-343
[Example of Mounting the LM Guide When the Master LM Rail Does not Have a Reference Surface]
LM block set screw
Table
Base
Master rail side Subsidiary-rail side
Fig.14
z Mounting the Master LM Rail

Using a Temporary Reference Surface
You can temporarily set a reference surface
near the LM rail mounting position on the base
to achieve straightness of the LM rail from the
rail end. In this method, two LM blocks must be
joined together and attached to a measurement
plate, as shown in Fig.15.
Fig.15
Using a Straight-edge
After temporarily fastening the mounting bolts,
use a dial gauge to check the straightness of the
side reference surface of the LM rail from the rail
end, and at the same time, fully fasten the
mounting bolts.(Fig.16)
To mount the subsidiary LM rail, follow the pro-
cedure described on A-342.
Fig.16
A-344
[Procedure for Assembling Model HR]

The following procedure is recommended for
assembling model HR.
(1) Remove burr or knots from the LM rail
mounting surface of the base using an oil-
stone. (Fig.17)
LM Guide
(2) Use a small vice to press the two LM rails to
the base so that they closely contact the
reference surface, then tighten the mount-
ing bolts to the recommended torque (see
Fig.17
A-350). (Fig.18)
a. Check if any of the bolts has a sinking.
b. Use a torque wrench to tighten the bolts
in order from the center to both ends.
(3) Mount the LM blocks on the table, then

install them onto the LM rails. Be sure the
mounting bolts for the LM blocks are tempo-
rarily fastened.
(4) Tighten the clearance adjustment bolt alter- Fig.18

nately to adjust the clearance.
If a relatively large preload is applied in
order to achieve high rigidity, control the
tightening torque or the rolling resistance.
a. It is preferable to use three clearance
adjustment bolts for each LM block as
shown in Fig.19.
b. To obtain a favorable result of the clear-
ance adjustment, set the tightening
torque of the two outside screws at
approx. 90% of that of the enter screw. Fig.19
(5) Secure each LM block by gradually tighten-

ing the two LM block mounting bolts, which
have temporarily been fastened, while slid-
ing the table. (Fig.20)
Torque wrench
Tension gauge
Fig.20
A-345
z Example of Clearance Adjustment
Design the clearance adjustment bolt so that it presses the center of the side face of the LM block.
a. Using an adjustment screw
Normally, an adjustment screw is used to press the LM block.
b. Using tapered gibs

When high accuracy and high rigidity are required, use tapered gibs 1) and 2).
1 2
c. Using an eccentric pin

A type using an eccentric pin to adjust the clearance is also available.
A-346
[Procedure for Assembling Model GSR]

The procedure for assembling model GSR is as
follows:
(1) Align the table with the reference-surface of
each LM block and fully fasten the mounting Table
bolts to secure the blocks.
Both ends of the table must have a datum
LM Guide
surface. (Fig.21) Reference surface Reference surface
Fig.21
(2) Place LM rail A onto the base and align the
rail with a straight-edge.
Fully fasten the mounting bolts using a Straight-edge LM rail A
torque wrench. (Fig.22)
(3) Temporarily secure LM rail B onto the base,

then mount the blocks on the rail by sliding Base
the blocks.
Temporarily fasten LM rail B while pressing Fig.22
it toward the LM blocks. (Fig.23)
(4) Slide the table a few strokes to fit the LM Table

blocks to LM rail B, then fully fasten LM rail
Press the LM rail
B using a torque wrench. (Fig.24)
Base
If there are more GSR units to be assembled, LM rail B LM rail A

we recommend producing a jig like the one Fig.23
shown in Fig.25 first. You can easily mount LM
rails while achieving parallelism of the LM rails LM rail B
using the jig.
Torque
wrench
LM rail A
Fig.24
Mounting jig
Base
LM rail
Fig.25
A-347
[Procedure for Assembling Model JR]
z Mounting the LM Rails
When two LM rails are to be used in parallel as
shown in Fig.26, first secure one LM rail on the
base, and place a dial gauge on the LM block.
Then, place the pointer of the dial gauge on the
side face and top face of the other LM rail to
simultaneously adjust the parallelism and the
level, thus to complete mounting the LM rails.
Fig.26
z Jointing LM Rails
When two or more LM rails are to be jointed, a
special metal fitting as shown in Fig.27 is avail-
able. For such applications, specify this fitting
when ordering the LM Guide.
Fig.27
z Welding the LM Rail

When welding the LM rail, it is best to weld the
LM rail while clamping it at the welding point
with a small vice or the like as shown in Fig.28.
For effective welding, we recommend the follow-
ing welding conditions. (During welding the LM
rail, take care to prevent spatter from contacting
the LM rail raceway.)
[Welding conditions]
Preheating temperature:200℃
Postheating temperature:350℃
Note) If the temperature exceeds 750℃, the LM rail may be
hardened again.
[For shielded metal arc welding]

Welding rod: LB-52 (Kobelco) Fig.28
[For carbon dioxide arc welding]

Wire: YGW12
Electric current: 200A
A-348
[Procedure for Assembling Model HCR]

To install the LM rails of R Guide model HCR, we recommend having any form of datum point (such
as a pin) on the reference side (inside) of the LM rail, and pressing the LM rail to the datum point then
stopping the LM rail with a presser plate from the counter-reference surface.
LM Guide
Joint
Fig.29 Method for Securing the LM Rails at the Joint Fig.30 Method for Securing the LM Rail Using a Pin
as a Datum Point
A-349
Methods for Measuring Accuracy after Installation
[When Measuring Running Accuracy for Single Rail Application]
When measuring running accuracy of the LM block, stable accuracy can be obtained by securing two
LM blocks on an inspection plate, as shown in Fig.31. When using a dial gauge, we recommend
placing the straight-edge as close as possible to the LM block in order to perform accurate measure-
ment.
1) Measurement method using an auto-collimator 2) Measurement method using a dial gauge
Fig.31 Methods for Measuring Accuracy after Installation
Recommended Tightening Torque for LM Rails

With high-precision LM rails for the LM Guide, their raceways are ground and accuracy is inspected
with the rails tightened with bolts. When mounting a high-precision LM rail on a machine, we recom-
mend using the corresponding tightening torque indicated in Table1 or Table2
Table1 Tightening Torques when Pan Head Screws are Used Table2 Tightening Torques when
Unit: N-cm Hexagonal-Socket-Head Type Bolts are Used
Unit: N-cm
Screw Tightening torque
model No. Screw Tightening torque
Not hardened Hardened
model No. Iron Casting Aluminum
M2 17.6 21.6
M2 58.8 39.2 29.4
M 2.3 29.4 35.3
M 2.3 78.4 53.9 39.2
M 2.6 44.1 52.9 M 2.6 118 78.4 58.8
M3 196 127 98
M4 412 274 206
M5 882 588 441
M6 1370 921 686
M8 3040 2010 1470
M 10 6760 4510 3330
M 12 11800 7840 5880
M 14 15700 10500 7840
M 16 19600 13100 9800
M 20 38200 25500 19100
M 22 51900 34800 26000
M 24 65700 44100 32800
M 30 130000 87200 65200
A-350
LM Guide
Options
A-351
Seal and Metal Scraper
Seal and Metal scraper
For the supported models, see the table of options by model number on A-370.
For the LM block dimension (dimension L) with seal attached, see B-224 to B-230.
For the seal resistance, see A-372 to A-374.
Item name Schematic diagram / mounting location Purpose/location of use
End seal End seal
Used in locations exposed to

End Seal dust
Used in locations where dust

may enter the LM block from the
Side Seal side or bottom surface, such as
vertical, horizontal and inverted
Side seal mounts
Side seal
Inner seal Inner seal
Used in locations severely

Inner Seal exposed to dust or cutting chips
End seal End seal

Spacer
Used in locations exposed to
Double Seals much dust or many cutting chips
End seal
Hexagon socket
button bolt
End seal Metal scraper

Metal scraper
Used in locations where welding
Metal Scraper
spatter may adhere to the LM
(Non-contact) rail
Hexagon socket
button bolt
Symbol Contamination protection accessory

UU End seal
SS With end seal + side seal + inner seal
DD With double seals + side seal + inner seal
ZZ With end seal + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper
KK With double seals + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper
A-352
Options
LaCS
Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS

For the LM block dimension (dimension L) with LaCS attached, see B-224 to B-230.
For the resistance of LaCS, see A-375.
LM Guide(Options)
0
For locations with adverse environment, Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS is available.
LaCS removes minute foreign material adhering to the LM rail in multiple stages and prevents it from
entering the LM block with laminated contact structure (3-layer scraper).
LM block
Contact scraper
Mounting bolt
Metal scraper
End seal
Liquid
LM rail Large amount

QZ Lubricator of foreign material

Appearance Drawing Structural Drawing
[Features]
z Since the 3 layers of scrapers fully contact the LM rail, LaCS is highly capable of removing minute
foreign material.
z Since it uses oil-impregnated, foam synthetic rubber with a self-lubricating function, low friction
resistance is achieved.

SSHH With end seal + side seal + inner seal + LaCS
DDHH With double seals + side seal + inner seal + LaCS
ZZHH With end seal + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper + LaCS
KKHH With double seals + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper + LaCS
A-353
z Test under an Environment with a Water-soluble Coolant
[Test conditions] Test environment: water-soluble coolant
Magnified view of the end seal lip
Item Description
No. 1: without LaCS - lip fractured at 1,700 km
Tested No.1 SHS45R1SS+3000L (end seal only)
model No.2 SHS45R1SSHH+3000L (end seal and LaCS)
Maximum
200m/min
speed
Environmen-
tal conditions Coolant sprayed: 5 time per day
[Test result]
Areas marked with arrow are fractured

No.1 End seal lip fractured No. 2: with LaCS - no anomaly observed after traveling 5,000 km
without at 1,700 km
LaCS
No.2
with
LaCS Not fractured at 5,000 km
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000

Lip has not been fractured

z Test under an Environment with Minute Foreign Matter
[Test conditions] Test environment: minute foreign material
Item Description No. 1 Traveled 100 km (double-seal configuration)
Tested No.1 SNR45R1DD+600L (double seals only)

model No.2 SNR45R1HH+600L (LaCS only)
Max speed/
60m/min, 1G
acceleration
External
9.6kN
load
Type: FCD450#115
Foreign (particle diameter: 125 µm or less)
material
conditions Sprayed amount: 1g/1hour Large amount of foreign matter has entered the raceway
(total sprayed amount: 120 g)
No. 2 Traveled 100 km (LaCS only)

[Test result] Amount of foreign material entering the raceway
Amount of foreign
Seal configuration material entering
the raceway g
Tested
Double-seal model 1 0.3
configuration Tested
model 2 0.3
(2 end seals superposed
with each other) Tested
0.3
model 3
Tested
model 1 0 No foreign matter entering the raceway observed
Tested
LaCS model 2 0
Tested
model 3 0
A-354
Options
LiCS
Light-Resistance Contact Seal LiCS

Light-Resistance Contact Seal LiCS
For the LM block dimension (dimension L) with LiCS attached, see B-233.
For the resistance of LiCS, see A-376.
LM Guide(Options)
LiCS is a light sliding resistance contact seal. It is effective in removing dust on the raceway and
0
retaining a lubricant such as grease. It achieves extremely low drag and smooth, stable motion.
LiCS
Fig.1 Structural Drawing of SSR + LiCS
[Features]
Light-Resistance Contact Seal LiCS is a seal that uses a light-resistance material in its sealing ele-
ment and contacts the LM rail raceway to achieve low drag resistance. It is optimal for applications
where low drag resistance is required, such as semiconductor-related devices, inspection devices
and OA equipment all of which are used in favorable environments.
• Since the sealing element contacts the LM rail raceway, it is effective in removing dust on the race-
way.
• Use of oil-impregnated, expanded synthetic rubber, which has excellent self-lubricating property,
achieves low drag resistance.
Model number coding
SSR20 XW 2 GG C1 +600L P -Ⅱ
LM Guide Type of With LiCS seal LM rail length Symbol for
model LM block on both ends (in mm) number of axes
number Radial clearance symbol Accuracy symbol
No. of LM blocks Normal grade (No Symbol) / High accuracy grade (H)
Normal (No symbol)
used on the same rail Light preload (C1) Precision grade (P) / Super precision grade (SP)
Medium preload (C0) Ultra precision grade (UP)

GG LiCS
PP With LiCS + side seal + inner seal
A-355
Dedicated Bellows
Dedicated Bellows
For the dedicated bellows dimensions, see B-235 to B-247.
Bellows
Dedicated Used in locations exposed to dust or

Bellows cutting chips
Dedicated LM Cover
Dedicated LM Cover
For the dimensions of the dedicated LM cover, see B-248 to B-249.
LM cover
Used in locations exposed to dust or

cutting chips
Dedicated
Used in locations where high tem-
LM Cover perature foreign material such as fly-
ing spatter
A-356
Options
Cap C
Cap C
Cap C
LM Guide(Options)
If any of the LM rail mounting holes of an LM Guide is filled with cutting chips or foreign material, they
0
may enter the LM block structure. Entrance of such foreign material can be prevented by covering
each LM rail mounting hole with the dedicated cap.
Since the dedicated cap C for LM rail mounting holes uses a special synthetic resin with high oil
resistance and high wear resistance, it is highly durable. Different sizes of the dedicated cap C are in
stock as standard for hexagonal-socket-head type bolts of M3 to M22.
To attach the dedicated cap to the mounting hole, place a flat metal piece like one shown in Fig.1 on
the cap and gradually hammer in the cap until it is on the same level as the top face of the LM rail.
When attaching the dedicated cap C for LM rail mounting holes, do not remove any of the LM blocks
from the LM rail.
Plastic hammer
D
H Flat metal piece
Fig.1 Cap C
Table1 List of Model Numbers Supported for the Dedicated Cap C for LM Rail Mounting Holes
Main dimen-
sions (mm) Supported model number
Model Bolt SHS
No. used SNR NR HSR SHW SRG SRS SRS-W NSR-
D H SSR SCR SR HMG
HRW SRN GSR HR RSH RSH-W TBC
RSR RSR-W SRW
SNS NRS CSR
HCR
C3 M3 6.3 1.2 — — 15 — — 12 — — — — 1123 12 9 — —
1530 15
12,14,
C4 M4 7.8 1.0 15Y — — — — 15 15 17,21, 15 15 — 14 — — —
27
C5 M5 9.8 2.4 20 — 20 25 25X 20 — — 20 20 2042 20 — 20 —
C6 M6 11.4 2.7 25Y 25 25Y 30 30 25 25 35 25 25 — 25 — 25 —
30 30 30
C8 M8 14.4 3.7 35 30 35 35 35 30 35 50 30 30 2555 — — 40 —
35 35 35 3065
C10 M10 18.0 3.7 — — 45 — — — — 60 — 35 3575 — — 50 70
C12 M12 20.5 4.7 — 45 55 45 45 45 45 — 45 — 4085 — — 70 85
C14 M14 23.5 5.7 — — — 55 55 55 — — 55 — — — — — 100
C16 M16 26.5 5.7 — 65 70 65 65 65 65 — 65 — 50105 — — — —
85
C22 M22 35.5 5.7 — — — — 85 85 — — — — — — — — —
Note) The dedicated cap for the LM rail mounting hole can be made of other materials (e.g., metal). Contact THK for details.
A-357
Plate Cover SV
Plate Cover SV -- Steel Tape SP
Steel Tape SP

For the LM Guide, steel tapes are
available as an essential means of
contamination protection for
LM rail machine tools. By covering the LM
Plate cover: SV rail mounting holes with an ultra-thin
stainless steel (SUS304) plate, the
Fixing-jig: NT plate cover SV drastically increases
sealability, thus to prevent the pene-
Plate Cover SV tration of a coolant or cutting chips
from the top face of the LM rail,
which was previously impossible.
For the mounting method, see A-
Case fixing bolt 359.
Slide piece Note) When mounting the plate cover,
Tension screw the LM rail needs to be machined.
Indicate that the plate cover is
required when ordering the LM
Guide.
Steel tape: SP
For the LM Guide, steel tapes are
available as an essential means of
contamination protection for
Setscrew machine tools. By covering the LM
rail mounting holes with an ultra-thin
stainless steel (SUS304) plate, the
plate cover SV drastically increases
End piece: EP sealability, thus to prevent the pene-
tration of a coolant or cutting chips
Tap for attaching a bellows from the top face of the LM rail,
Steel Tape SP which was previously impossible.
(When mounting the steel tape, end
LM block piece EP can be used as a means to
secure the cover.)
LM block mounting/ For the mounting method, see A-
removing jig 360.
Note) When mounting the steel tape, the
LM rail needs to be machined.
Indicate that the steel tape is
required when ordering the LM
Guide.
A-358
Options
Plate Cover SV -- Steel Tape SP
[Mounting Procedure for Plate Cover SV]

(1) Attach slide pieces to the plate cover.
Place the slide pieces on the plate cover Plate cover
with their chamfered sides facing outward, Slide piece Chamfer
hold the plate cover with the slide pieces Mounting
hole
and the securing plates, and then secure Fixing plate
them with countersunk screws.
LM Guide(Options)
(2) Use an LM block mounting/removing jig to Fig.1
remove the LM block from the LM rail, and
then mount the fixing-jigs onto the LM rail.
Position for fixing
Identify the positions of the mounting holes
on the fixing jigs, then secure the jigs with
hexagonal-socket-head type bolts. LM rail
(3) Temporarily secure either slide piece.
Insert either slide piece into one of the fix- Fig.2
ing-jigs, then attach the slide piece to the
LM rail's end face using the tension adjust-
ment bolt and gently secure the bolt until Tension adjustment bolt
the bolt head is inside the fixing-jig.
(4) Temporarily secure the other slide piece.
Temporarily secure the other slide piece in
the same manner as above.
Fig.3
(5) Apply tension to the plate cover.
Apply tension to the plate cover by evenly
securing the tension adjustment bolts on
both ends of the LM rail. Make sure there is
only a small difference between the H and
H' dimensions in Fig.5. If the difference is
too large, there may be no interference left
on either end. Fig.4
(6) Mount the LM block on the LM rail.
Identity the reference surface of the LM rail
H H’
and the LM block, then insert the LM rail
into the LM block using the LM block
mounting /removing jig.
Note1) When removing or the mounting the LM block, use
much care not to let the balls fall off.
Note2) The plate cover is an ultra-thin stainless steel Fig.5
(SUS304) plate. When handing it, use much care not
to bend it.
Note3) The plate cover is available for models SNR/SNS35
to 65 and models NR/NRS35 to 100.
A-359
[Mounting Procedure for Steel Tape SP]
(1) Use an LM block mounting/removing jig to
End piece: EP
remove the LM block from the LM rail.
(2) Thoroughly degrease and clean the top
face of the LM rail, to which the steel tape is Steel tape: SP
to be adhered. For degreasing, use an ade-
quately volatile detergent (e.g., industrial
alcohol).
(3) Carefully adhere the steel tape from the
Fig.6
end with care not to let it bend or sag, while
gradually peeling the release paper from
the steel tape. LM block
(4) Have the steel tape settle on the rail by rub- LM block mounting/removing jig
bing the tape. The adhesive strength
increases with time. The adhering tape can
be peeled off by pulling its end upward.
(5) Mount the LM block onto the LM rail using Fig.7
the LM block mounting/removing jig.

(6) Attach the end pieces on both ends of the Mounting surface
LM rail and further secure the steel tape.
When securing the end pieces, fasten only
the setscrew on the top face of each end
piece.
(The tap on the end face of the end piece is Fig.8
used for mounting a bellows.)
Note1) The setscrew on the side face is used to lightly Steel tape
secure the bent steel tape. Be sure to stop fastening Release paper
the screw as soon as it hits the end face, and do not
force the screw further.
Note2) Since the steel tape is a thin steel plate, mishandling
it may cause an accident such as cutting your finger.
When handling it, take an effective safety measure
such as wearing rubber gloves.
Fig.9
Steel tape
Do not make an acute angle
LM block
LM block mounting/removing jig
Fig.10
Steel tape: SP
Setscrew
End piece: EP
Tap for attaching a bellows
Fig.11
A-360
Options
QZ Lubricator
QZ Lubricator
QZ Lubricator
For the LM block dimension with QZ attached, see B-251 to B-253.
LM Guide(Options)
QZ Lubricator feeds the right amount of lubricant to the raceway on the LM rail. This allows an oil film
0
to continuously be formed between the rolling element and the raceway, and drastically extends the
lubrication and maintenance intervals.
The structure of QZ Lubricator consists of three major components: (1) a heavy oil-impregnated fiber
net (function to store lubricant), (2) a high-density fiber net (function to apply lubricant to the raceway)
and (3) an oil-control plate (function to adjust oil flow). The lubricant contained in QZ Lubricator is fed
by the capillary phenomenon, which is used also in felt pens and many other products, as the funda-
mental principle.
Case (2) High-density fiber net
(1) Heavy oil-impregnated fiber net Ball
End seal
QZ Lubricator
(3) Oil control plate

Ball cage
Flow of lubricant
[Features]
z Since it supplements an oil loss, the lubrication maintenance interval can be significantly extended.
z Eco-friendly lubrication system that does not contaminate the surrounding area since it feeds the
right amount of lubricant to the ball raceway.

QZUU With end seal + QZ
QZSS With end seal + side seal + inner seal + QZ
QZDD With double seals + side seal + inner seal + QZ
QZZZ With end seal + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper + QZ
QZKK With double seals + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper + QZ
QZGG With LiCS + QZ
QZPP With LiCS + side seal + inner seal + QZ
QZSSHH With end seal + side seal + inner seal + LaCS + QZ
QZDDHH With double seals + side seal + inner seal + LaCS + QZ
QZZZHH With end seal + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper + LaCS + QZ
QZKKHH With double seals + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper + LaCS + QZ
A-361
z Significantly Extended Maintenance Interval
Attaching QZ Lubricator helps extend the maintenance interval throughout the whole load range from
the light load area to the heavy load area.
LM Guide: HSR35R1SS
Calculated service life of heavy load = 400 km
Condition Heavy load Medium load Light load
Grease lubrication only 465km Load 18.6kN 9.3kN 1.4kN
Heavy load
Speed 50m/min 50m/min 300m/min

Grease + QZ Lubricator 962km Calculated service life 400km 3200km
Grease: 2cc/1 LM block - initial lubrication only
QZ Lubricator: 5cc ×2/1 LM block - initial lubrication only
Light Medium
load
Grease + QZ Lubricator 3500km

30000km
load
Grease + QZ Lubricator
0 500 1000 1500 3500 30000

LM Guide Running Test without Replenishment of Lubricant
z Effective Use of Lubricant

Since the lubricator feeds the right amount of lubricant to the ball raceway, lubricant can be used effi-
ciently.
[Test conditions] speed: 300 m/min
Comparison of 0.332
SHW21QZ
lubricant
consumption
after traveling
5,000 km Forced lubrication 83.3
0 20 40 60 80 100
3
Supplied amount of lubricant cm
Amount of oil contained in QZ Lubricator Forced lubrication

0.166cm3/ 2 units
(attached to both ends of the LM block)
Compared 0.03cm3/6min× 16667min
＝0.332cm3 ＝83.3cm3
Lubricant consumption is 1/250 less than forced lubrication.
A-362
Options
QZ Lubricator
z Effective in Helping Lubrication under Severe Environments

A 5,000 km durability test was conducted under severe environments (containing coolant and con-
taminated environment).
[Test conditions] [Test result]
Model No. SNS45 HSR45
Load 8kN 6kN QZ+LaCS No
SNS45 breakage
LM Guide(Options)
Speed 60m/min
Coolant Immersed 48 hrs, dried 96 hrs Standard
model Flaking occurs at 3,500km
Foreign HSR45
Foundry dust (125 µm or less)
material
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
Super Multi 68 Distance traveled (km)
Oiling cycle:
Lubrication AFA Grease + QZ 0.1cc/shot
Periodically
lubricated
every 16 min
* When using the LM system under severe environment, use QZ Lubricator and Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS (see "Lam-
inated Contact Scraper LaCS" on A-353) in combination.
A-363
Lubrication Adapter
Lubrication Adapter
An oil lubricant-only lubrication adapter is available for models NR/NRS.

0
Even if the LM Guide is installed in an orientation where oil lubrication is difficult, such as wall mount
and inversed mount, the adapter is capable of feeding a constant quantity of lubricant to the four
raceways.
[Features]
The dedicated lubrication adapter for models
Lubrication plate
NR-NRS is built in with a constant quantity dis-
tributor. Therefore, the adapter can accurately
feed a constant quantity of lubricant to each
raceway regardless of the mounting orientation. To lubrication
pump
The adapter is economical since it is capable of Lubrication plate
constantly feeding the optimum amount of lubri-
cant and helping eliminate the supply of surplus Constant quantity
lubricant. distributor
To provide pipe arrangement, simply connect an
To lubrication pump
intermittent lubrication pump widely used for Fig.1 Structural Drawing
ordinary machine tools to the greasing holes
(M8) on the front and the side of the lubrication
adapter.
[Specifications]
Viscosity range of M×l 2-M1×l 1

32 to 64 mm2/s recommended W T
lubricant used 2-d through hole B T1
Discharge 0.03×4, 0.06×4cc/1shot N
N
Diameter of pipe M1 E
φ 4, φ 6 M
connected
Material Aluminum alloy
W1
Fig.2
Table1 Dimension Table for Lubrication Adapter Unit: mm

Main dimensions Quantity
Model No. Width Height per shot
W M T W1 M1 B E N T1 d M×l M1×l 1 (cc/shot)
A30N 56 29 25 29 14.5 46 14 5 5.3 3.5 M8×8 M8×8
A35N 66 33 25 35 17 54 16.5 6 5.3 4.5 M8×8 M8×8 0.03×4
A45N 81 38 25 48 20 67 16.5 7 7.8 6.6 M8×8 M8×8
A55N 94 45.5 25 56 22 76 20.5 7 7.8 6.6 M8×8 M8×8
A65N 119 55.5 25 67 26.3 92 25.5 11.5 7.8 9 M8×8 M8×8 0.06×4
A85N 147 68.5 25 92 34 114 32 15.5 7.8 9 M8×8 M8×8
A-364
Options
Removing/mounting Jig
LM Guide(Options)
When assembling the guide, do not remove the LM block from the LM rail whenever possible. If it is
0
inevitable to remove the LM block due to the plate cover type or the assembly procedure, be sure to
use the removing/mounting jig.
Mounting the LM block without using the removing/mounting jig may cause rolling elements to fall
from the LM block due to contamination by foreign material, damage to internal components or slight
inclination. Mounting the LM block with some of the rolling elements missing may also cause damage
to the LM block at an early stage.
When using the removing/mounting jig, do not incline the jig and match the ends of both LM rails.
If any of the rolling elements falls from the LM block, contact THK instead of using the product.
Note that the removing/mounting jig is not included in the LM Guide package as standard. When
desiring to use it, contact THK.
LM block
LM rail
(Material: ABS resin)
A-365
End Piece EP
End Piece EP
For those models whose balls may fall if the LM rail is pulled out of the LM block, an end piece is
0
attached to the product to prevent the LM block from being removed from the LM rail.
For models that can use the end piece, see the table below.
If removing the end piece when using the LM Guide, be sure that the LM block will not overshoot.
The end piece can also be used as a fixing jig for a steel tape, and is available also for the LM rail of
models SSR, SR and HSR.
Table1 Dimension Table for End Piece EP for Models NR/
NRS
Unit: mm
A B Model No. A B C T
NR/NRS 25X 26 14 25 1.5
NR/NRS 30 31 14 31 1.5
NR/NRS 35 38 16 32.5 2
C
NR/NRS 45 49 18 41 2
T
NR/NRS 55 57 20 46.5 2
NR/NRS 65 69.4 22 59 3.2
NR/NRS 75 81.7 28 56 3.2
Fig.1 End Piece EP for Models NR/NRS NR/NRS 85 91.4 22 68 3.2
NR/NRS 100 106.4 25 73 3.2
A-366
Options
End Piece EP
LM Guide(Options)
A-367
List of Parts Symbols
zFor supported model numbers, see the correspondence table of options by model number on A-
0
370.
Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS (see A-353) Side seal (see A-352)
Inner seal (see A-352)
Metal scraper (see A-352)
QZ Lubricator (see A-361)
End seal (see A-352)
Double seal (see A-352)
Symbol Lubrication and Dust Prevention Accessories

UU End seal
SS With end seal + side seal + inner seal
DD With double seals + side seal + inner seal
ZZ With end seal + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper
KK With double seals + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper
GG LiCS
PP With LiCS + side seal + inner seal
SSHH With end seal + side seal + inner seal + LaCS
DDHH With double seals + side seal + inner seal + LaCS
ZZHH With end seal + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper + LaCS
KKHH With double seals + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper + LaCS
QZUU With end seal + QZ
QZSS With end seal + side seal + inner seal + QZ
QZDD With double seals + side seal + inner seal + QZ
QZZZ With end seal + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper + QZ
QZKK With double seals + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper + QZ
QZGG With LiCS + QZ
QZPP With LiCS + side seal + inner seal + QZ
QZSSHH With end seal + side seal + inner seal + LaCS + QZ
QZDDHH With double seals + side seal + inner seal + LaCS + QZ
QZZZHH With end seal + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper + LaCS + QZ
QZKKHH With double seals + side seal + inner seal + metal scraper + LaCS + QZ
A-368
Options
List of Parts Symbols
UU SS DD
LM Guide (Options)
ZZ KK GG
PP SSHH DDHH
ZZHH KKHH QZUU
QZSS QZDD QZ Z Z
QZKK QZGG QZPP
QZSSHH QZDDHH QZZZHH
QZKKHH
A-369
Table of Supported Options by Models
For the overall length with an option attached, see B-224 to B-255.
Caged Ball
＊1 ＊2 ＊3 ＊4 ＊5 ＊6 ＊7 ＊8 ＊9
Model No.
Type SNR NR
SHS SSR SHW SRS SCR HSR SR HRW
SNS NRS
Symbol Reference A-136 A-142 A-148 A-156 A-160 A-166 A-170 A-178 A-186 A-194
page
End seal UU { {★ { {★ { { {★ {★ {★ {★
SS ◇★ { ◇★ ◇ {★ {★ △ { { {
DD A-352 ◇ { ◇ ◇ — { △ △ { △
[2] [1] to
ZZ A-353 ◇ { ◇ ◇ — { △ △ { △
KK ◇ { ◇ ◇ — { △ △ { △
LaCS+[1] HH { { { △ △ { △ — △ —
Low- LL — — — — — — — △ △ — —
resistance
end seal + Side seal RR — — — — — — — { { — —
GG — { — — — — — — — —
LiCS A-355
PP — { — — — — — — — —
Plate Cover SV Z — — △ — — — — — { —
A-358
Steel Tape SP Z { △ △ — — — △ △ △ —
Dedicated cap C *15 — A-357 { { { { △ { { { { {
Dedicated bellows — B-235 B-236 B-237 B-238 — — B-239 B-241 B-243 B-244
A-356
Dedicated cover — — — — — — — B-248 B-249 — —
Tapped-hole LM rail type K — { { — — — B-59 B-83 B-91 — —
QZ
Corrosion Lubrication
QZ+[2] QZ A-361 { { { { { { △ — △ —
Lubricator
End plate with/without
— — ◎ ◎ ◎ △ △ { — — { —
side nipple
Prevention
AP-HC, AP-C, AP-CF F A-20 { { { { — { { { { {
Stainless Steel
M A-19 — △ — △ { — △ △ — △
LM Guide
*1. Model SHS: steel tape SP – applicable to models SHS15 to 65.

*2. Model SSR: steel tape SP – not applicable to model SSR15; stainless steel type – not applicable to model SSR35.
*3. Models SNR/SNS: plate cover SV – applicable to models SNR/SNS35 to 65;
steel tape SP – applicable to models SNR/SNS25 to 65.
*4. Model SHW: inner seal and LaCS are not applicable to models SHW12, 14 and 17.
Models SHW12 and 14 cannot have a grease nipple; instead, a greasing hole is available.
stainless steel type – not applicable to some models (contact THK for details).
*5. Model SRS: LaCS – applicable to models SRS20 and 25.
Models SRS9M, 9WM, 12M and 12WM cannot have a grease nipple; instead, a greasing hole is available.
*6. Model HSR: SS – applicable to models HSR15 to 150; DD, ZZ and KK -- applicable to models HSR15 to 65;
LaCS -- applicable to models HSR15 to 35;
LL -- applicable to models HSR15 to 65;
steel tape SP: applicable to models HSR15 to 100; for models HSR8 to 12, only UU is applicable;
for model Model HSR-R Grade Ct, only SS is applicable.
*7. Model SR: DD, ZZ and KK – applicable to models SR15 to 70; LL -- applicable to models SR15 to 25;
steel tape SP: applicable to models SR20 to 70;
for models SR85 to 150, only UU and SS are applicable;
A-370
Options
Table of Supported Options by Models
◎: Option {: Applicable △: Not applicable for some models

★: THK recommendation (standard stock product) ◇: With inner seal attached
Full-ball Caged roller
＊10 ＊11 ＊12 ＊13 ＊14
RSR RSR-Z RSH-Z NSR- HSR- SR- RSR- HSR-

RSH HR GSR GSR-R CSR MX JR HCR HMG SRG SRN SRW
RSR-W RSR-WZ RSH-WZ TBC M1 M1 M1 M2
LM Guide (Options)
A-200 A-208 A-214 A-218 A-224 A-230 A-236 A-244 A-248 A-252 A-258 A-262 A-268 A-272 A-280 A-286 A-292 A-300 A-306 A-312
{★ { {★ { {★ {★ { { {★ { { { { { { { { { { {
— △ ★
— △ ★
— { { { — { { — { { { — { {★ {★ {
— — — — — { { { — { △ — — — — — — { { {
— — — — — { { { — { △ — — — — — — { { {
— — — — — { { { — { △ — — — — — — { { {
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — △ △ {
— — — — — — — { — — { — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — { — — { — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — △ — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — △ — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — △ △ {
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
△ △ △ △ { { { { { — { { { { { { { { { {
— — — — — — — — — — — — B-245 — — — — B-246 — B-247
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — B-157 — — — — — — — — — — — —
△ — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — { { {
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — { { {
{ — { — { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { {
{ { { { △ — — — { — — — — — — — — — — —
*8. Models NR/NRS: LaCS and QZ – applicable to models NR/NRS25 to 65;

steel tape SP -- applicable to models NR/NRS25 to 100
*9. Model HRW: for models HRW12 and 14, only UU and SS is applicable; model HRW17 and 21 cannot have a side seal;
stainless steel type – not applicable to models HRW50 and 60
*10. Model RSR: QZ – applicable to models RSR9 to 15.
*11. Model HR: stainless steel type – applicable to models HR918 to 2555.
For locations where adequate dust prevention cannot be provided with the end seal alone, consider using
also a bellows and a cover.
*12. Model HCR: DD, ZZ and KK – may not applicable depending on R; for model HCR12, only UU is applicable.
*13. Model SRG: LaCS – applicable to all model numbers except model SRG15;
plate cover SV – applicable to models SRG35 to 65; GG and PP – applicable to only model SRG15.
*14. Model SRN: LaCS – applicable to all model numbers except model SRN15;
plate cover SV – applicable to models SRN35 to 65.
*15. Dedicated cap C – may not be attached depending on the size of the model.
A-371
Seal Resistance Value
Unit: N Unit: N
Seal Seal resistance Seal Seal resistance
Model No. Model No.
symbol value symbol value
15 4.5 7M 0.08
20 7.0 7WM 0.12
25 10.5 9M 0.2
30 17.0 9WM 1.0
SHS SS
35 20.5 12M 0.6
SRS SS
45 30.0 12WM 1.3
55 31.5 15M 1.0
65 43.0 15WM 1.6
15X 2.0 20M 1.3
20X 2.6 25M 1.6
SSR 25X UU 3.5 15 2.5MAX
30X 4.9 20 3MAX
35X 6.3 25 5MAX
25 8 SCR 30 SS 10MAX
30 14 35 12MAX
35 14 45 20MAX
SNR/SNS 45 SS 16 65 30MAX
55 20 8 0.5
65 25 10 0.8
85 30 12 1.2
12CA/CR 1.0 15 2.0
12HR 1.0 20 2.5
14 1.2 25 3.9
HSR UU
17 1.4 30 7.8
UU
21 4.9 35 11.8
27 4.9 45 19.6
35 9.8 55 19.6
50 14.7 65 34.3
SHW
12CA/CR 1.4 85 34.3
12HR 1.8 15 2.5
14 1.8 20 3.4
17 2.2 25 4.4
SS
21 6.9 30 8.8
SR UU
27 8.9 35 11.8
35 15.8 45 12.7
50 22.7 55 15.7
70 19.6
A-372
Options
Unit: N Unit: N
Model No. Model No.
25X 15 7 0.08
30 17 9 0.1
35 23 12 0.4
45 24 7Z 0.08
LM Guide (Options)
NR/NRS 55 UU 29 9Z 0.1
65 42 RSH 12Z UU 0.4
75 42 15Z 0.8
85 42 7WZ 0.4
100 51 9WZ 0.8
12 0.2 12WZ 1.1
14 0.3 15WZ 1.3
17 2.9 918 0.5
21 4.9 1123 0.7
HRW UU
27 4.9 1530 1.0
35 9.8 2042 2.0
50 14.7 2555 2.9
HR UU
60 19.6 3065 3.4
5 0.06 3575 3.9
7 0.08 4085 4.4
9 0.1 50105 5.9
12 0.4 60125 9.8
15 0.8 15 2.5
20 1.0 20 3.1
3W 0.2 25 4.4
5W 0.3 30 6.3
GSR UU
7W 0.4 35 7.6
9W 0.8 25-R 4.4
RSR 12W UU 1.1 30-R 6.3
14W 1.2 35-R 7.6
15W 1.3 15 2.0
7Z 0.08 20 2.5
9Z 0.1 25 3.9
CSR UU
12Z 0.4 30 7.8
15Z 0.8 35 11.8
7WZ 0.4 45 19.6
9WZ 0.8 5 0.06
MX UU
12WZ 1.1 7W 0.4
15WZ 1.3
A-373
Unit: N Unit: N
Model No. Model No.
25 3.9 9M1 0.1
35 11.8 12M1 0.4
JR UU
45 19.6 15M1 0.8
55 19.6 RSR 20M1 UU 1.0
12 1.2 9M1W 0.8
15 2.0 12M1W 1.1
25 3.9 15M1W 1.3
HCR UU
35 11.8 15M2 2.0
45 19.6 HSR 20M2 UU 2.5
65 34.3 25M2 3.9
15 3 15 13
25 6 20 18
HMG 35 UU 8 25 19
45 12 30 24
SRG SS
65 40 35 30
20TBC 4.9 45 30
25TBC 4.9 55 35
30TBC 6.9 65 40
NSR UU
40TBC 9.8 35 30
50TBC 14.7 45 30
SRN SS
70TBC 24.5 55 35
15M1 2.0 65 40
20M1 2.5 70 32
HSR 25M1 UU 3.9 SRW 85 SS 37
30M1 7.8 100 43
35M1 11.8
15M1 2.5
20M1 3.4
SR 25M1 UU 4.4
30M1 8.8
35M1 11.8
A-374
Options
Resistance of LaCS
Unit: N Unit: N
Model No. Resistance of LaCS Model No. Resistance of LaCS

15 5.2 15 5.2
LM Guide (Options)
20 6.5 20 6.5
25 11.7 25 11.7
30 18.2 30 18.2
SHS SCR
35 20.8 35 20.8
45 26.0 45 26.0
55 32.5 65 39.0
65 39.0 15 3.8
15 5.9 20 5.6
20 6.9 HSR 25 7.5
SSR 25 8.1 30 14.9
30 12.8 35 22.4
35 15.1 20 6.1
25 8.1 25 6.9
30 13.4 30 8.2
35 15.5 SRG 35 9.1
SNR/SNS
45 23.3 45 14.3
NR/NRS
55 28.6 55 18.2
65 39.6 65 26.0
85 52.7 35 9.1
21 3.9 45 14.3
SRN
27 6.5 55 18.2
SHW
35 13.0 65 22.1
50 19.5 70 32.8
20 5.2 SRW 85 39.7
SRS
25 7.8 100 58.3
Note1) Each resistance value in the table only consists of that of LaCS, and does not include sliding resistances of seals and
other accessories.
Note2) For the maximum service speed of LaCS, contact THK.
A-375
Maximum Seal Resistance of LiCS
Unit: N
Model No. Resistance of LiCS

15X 1
20X 1.1
SSR 25X 1.6
30X 1.6
35X 2
SRG 15 0.7
Note) The value indicates the sliding resistance of two LiCS

units per LM block and does not include the sliding
resistances of the LM block and the side seals.
A-376
Options
Greasing Hole
[Grease Nipple and Greasing Hole for Models SHW and SRS]
Models SHW and SRS do not have a grease nipple as standard. Installation of a grease nipple and
the drilling of a greasing hole is performed at THK. When ordering SHW and SRS, indicate that the
desired model requires a grease nipple or greasing hole. (For greasing hole dimensions and sup-
ported grease nipple types and dimensions, see Table1.)
LM Guide (Options)
When using SHW and SRS under harsh conditions, use QZ Lubricator* (optional) or Laminated Con-
tact Scraper LaCS* (optional).
Note1) Grease nipple is not available for models SHW12, SHW14, SRS9M, SRS9WM, SRS12M and SRS12WM. They can
have a greasing hole.
Note2) Using a greasing hole other than for greasing may cause damage.
Note3) For QZ Lubricator*, see A-361. For Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS*, see A-353.
Note4) When desiring a grease nipple for a model attached with QZ Lubricator, contact THK.
Table1 Table of Grease Nipple and Greasing Hole Dimen-

sions
Unit: mm
E L
Grease nipple or
Model No. E
End seal End seal greasing hole
12 — φ 2.2 drilled hole
17 5 PB107
SHW 21 5.5 PB1021B
Fig.1 Dimensions of the Grease Nipple for Model SHW 27 12 B-M6F
35 12 B-M6F
End seal 50 16 B-PT1/8
E L
9M — φ 1.5 drilled hole
End seal
9WM — φ 1.6 drilled hole
Fig.2 Dimensions of the Grease Nipple for Model SRS SRS 15M 4.0 PB107
(5.0)
Note) For the L dimension, see the corresponding specifica- 4.0
tion table. 15WM (5.0) PB107
20M 3.5 PB107

(5.0)
25M 4.0 PB1021B
(5.5)
Note) Figures in the parentheses indicate dimensions with-
out a seal.
A-377
[Greasing Hole for Model SRG]
Model SRG allows lubrication from both the side and top faces of the LM block. The greasing hole of
standard types is not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the LM block.
When using the greasing hole, contact THK.
When using the greasing hole on the top face of models SRG-R and SRG-LR, a greasing adapter is
separately required. Contact THK for details.
Greasing hole on the top face
φ D2 depth 1
e1
φ D0
e0 Side nipple
(M6 pilot hole)
f0
V
Unit: mm
Pilot hole for side nipple Applicable Greasing hole on the top face
Model No.
e0 f0 D0 nipple D2 (O-ring) V e1
15A 4 4 2.9 PB107 9.2 (P6) 0.5 5.5
15V
20A 4 5 2.9 PB107 9.2 (P6) 0.5 6.5
20LA
20V 4 5 2.9 PB107 9.2 (P6) 0.5 6.5
20LV
25C 6 6.3 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.5 6
25LC
25R 6 10.3 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 4.5 6
25LR
30C 6 5.8 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 6
30LC
30R 6 8.8 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 3.4 6
30LR
SRG 35C
35LC 6 6 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 6
35R 6 13 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 7.4 6
35LR
45C 7 7 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 7
45LC
45R 7 17 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 10.4 7
45LR
55C 9 8.5 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 11
55LC
55R 9 18.5 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 10.4 11
55LR
65LC 9 13.5 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 10
65LV 9 13.5 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 10
Note) The greasing interval is longer than that of full-roller types because of the roller cage effect. However, the actual greas-
ing interval may vary depending on the service environment, such as a high load and high speed. Contact THK for
details.
A-378
Options
[Greasing Hole for Model SRN]

Model SRN allows lubrication from both the side and top faces of the LM block. The greasing hole of
LM Guide (Options)
φ D2 depth 1
e1
φ D0
e0 Side nipple
(M6 pilot hole)
f0
V
Unit: mm
Model No.
35C 8 6.5 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 6
35LC
35R 8 6.5 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 6
35LR
45C 8.5 7 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 7
45LC
45R 8.5 7 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 7
SRN 45LR
55C 10 8 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 11
55LC
55R 10 8 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 11
55LR
65LC 9 11 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 10
65LR 9 11 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 10
details.
A-379
[Greasing Hole for Model SRW]
Model SRW allows lubrication from both the side and top faces of the LM block. The greasing hole of
φ D2 depth 1 e1 Greasing hole on the top face

φ D0 e0 Side nipple
V
f0
Unit: mm
Model No.
70 7 17 5.2 M6F 13 (P10) 0.4 33.7
SRW 85 9 17.7 5.2 M6F 13 (P10) 0.4 42.75
100 9 22.4 5.2 M6F 13 (P10) 0.4 55
details.
[Semi-standard Greasing Hole for Model HSR]
For model HSR, a semi-standard greasing hole is available. Specify the appropriate model number
according to the application.
Greasing hole
Greasing hole
Type with a Greasing Hole Drilled on the Side Surface Type with a Greasing Hole Drilled on the Top Face
[Lubrication for Model HR]
The LM block has a greasing hole in the center
Table
of its top face. To provide lubrication through
this hole, the table must be machined to also
have a greasing hole as shown in Fig.3 and
attach a grease nipple or the like. When using
oil lubrication, it is necessary to identify the lubri-
cation route. Contact THK for details.
Fig.3 Example of Machining a Greasing Hole
A-380
Precautions on Use LM Guide
Precautions on Using the LM Guide

[Handling]
0
(1) Disassembling components may cause dust to enter the system or degrade mounting accuracy
of parts. Do not disassemble the product.
LM Guide
(2) Tilting an LM block or LM rail may cause them to fall by their own weight.
(3) Dropping or hitting the LM Guide may damage it. Giving an impact to the product could also
cause damage to its function even if the product looks intact.
[Lubrication]
(1) Thoroughly remove anti-rust oil and feed lubricant before using the product.
(2) Do not mix lubricants of different physical properties.
(3) In locations exposed to constant vibrations or in special environments such as clean rooms, vac-
uum and low/high temperature, normal lubricants may not be used. Contact THK for details.
(4) When planning to use a special lubricant, contact THK before using it.
(5) When adopting oil lubrication, the lubricant may not be distributed throughout the LM system
depending on the mounting orientation of the system. Contact THK for details.
(6) Lubrication interval varies according to the conditions. Contact THK for details.
[Precautions on Use]
(1) Entrance of foreign material may cause damage to the ball (roller) circulating path or functional
loss. Prevent foreign material, such as dust or cutting chips, from entering the system.
(2) When planning to use the LM system in an environment where the coolant penetrates the LM
block, it may cause trouble to product functions depending on the type of the coolant. Contact
THK for details.
(3) Contact THK if you desire to use the product at a temperature of 80℃ or higher.
(4) If foreign material such as dust or cutting chips adheres to the product, replenish the lubricant
after cleaning the product with pure white kerosene. For available types of detergent, contact
THK.
(5) When using the LM Guide with inverted mount, breakage of the endplate due to an accident or
the like may cause balls (rollers) to fall and the LM block to come off from the LM rail and fall. In
these cases, take preventive measures such as adding a safety mechanism for preventing such
falls.
(6) When using the product in locations exposed to constant vibrations or in special environments
such as clean rooms, vacuum and low/high temperature, contact THK in advance.
(7) When removing the LM block from the LM rail and then replacing the block, an LM block mount-
ing/removing jig that facilitates such installation is available. Contact THK for details.
[Storage]
When storing the LM Guide, enclose it in a package designated by THK and store it in a horizontal
orientation while avoiding high temperature, low temperature and high humidity.
A-381
Precautions on Using Options for the LM Guide
QZ Lubricator
[Handling]
Dropping or hitting the product may damage it. Use much care when handling it.
Do not block the vent hole with grease or the like.
[Service Environment]
Be sure the service temperature of this product is between -10 to +50℃, and do not clean the prod-
uct by immersing it in an organic solvent or white kerosene, or leave it unpacked. When using it out
of the service temperature range, contact THK in advance.
[Use in a Special Environment]
When desiring to use the product in a special environment, contact THK.
[Precaution on Selection]
Secure a stroke longer than the overall LM block with QZ Lubricator attached.
[Corrosion Prevention]
QZ is a lubricating device designed to feed a minimum amount of oil to the raceway, and does not
provide an anti-rust effect to the whole LM Guide. When using it in an environment subject to a cool-
ant or the like, we strongly recommend applying grease to the mounting base of the LM Guide and to
the rail ends as an anti-rust measure.
Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS, Side Scraper

uct by immersing it in an organic solvent or white kerosene, or leave it unpacked.
[Impregnating Oil]
The lubricant impregnated into the scraper is used to increase its sliding capability. For lubrication of
the LM Guide, attach QZ Lubricator, or the grease nipple on the side face of the end plate of the LM
block, before providing a lubricant.
[Function]
It is specifically designed to provide dust prevention capability to remove foreign material and liquid.
To seal oil, an end seal is required.
[Design]
When using the product, be sure to attach the rail cap C or the plate cover.
A-382
Precautions on Use
Precautions on Using Options for the LM Guide
Light Sliding Resistance Contact Seal LiCS

uct by immersing it in an organic solvent or white kerosene, or leave it unpacked.
It contacts only with the LM rail raceway. Do not use it in harsh environments.
LM Guide
[Impregnating Oil]
The lubricant impregnated into LiCS is used to increase its sliding capability. For lubrication of the
LM Guide, attach the grease nipple on the end plate of the LM block before providing a lubricant.
A-383
A-384
LM Guide Actuator
General Catalog
A Technical Descriptions of the Products B Product Specifications (Separate)
Model KR.......................................... A-386 Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table

Structure and features....................... A-386 Model KR .......................................... B-263
Types and Features .......................... A-390 Model Number Coding ...................... B-290
Load Ratings in All Directions Mass of Moving Element................... B-290
and Static Permissible Moment ..... A-391
Maximum Travel Speed and the Maximum Length A-396 Model SKR ........................................ B-291
Lubrication......................................... A-398 Model Number Coding ...................... B-300
Service Life ....................................... A-399 Mass of Moving Element................... B-300
Static Safety Factor........................... A-402
Example of Calculating the Nominal Life. A-403 Options............................................. B-301
Accuracy Standards .......................... A-412 Bellows.............................................. B-302
Sensor............................................... B-308
Model SKR ....................................... A-416 Motor Bracket.................................... B-312
Structure and features....................... A-416 Motor Wrap Type (for Reference) ..... B-342
Caged Ball/Roller Technology........... A-419 XY Bracket (for Reference) ............... B-343
Types and Features .......................... A-421
and Permissible Moment ............... A-422
Lubrication......................................... A-425
Service Life ....................................... A-426
Accuracy Standards .......................... A-428
Options............................................. A-430
Cover................................................. A-431
Bellows.............................................. A-432
Sensor............................................... A-433
Motor Bracket.................................... A-434
Precautions on Use......................... A-436

Precautions on Using Models KR/SKR A-436
A-385
LM Guide Actuator
LM Guide Actuator Model KR
Model KR
LM Guide + Ball Screw = Integral-structure Actuator Stopper
Housing B
Ball screw
Nut block
Grease nipple
LM rail Bearing (supported side)
Housing A Stopper
Double-row ball circuit
Bearing (fixed side)
Fig.1 Structure of LM Guide Actuator Model KR

Because of its integral-structure nut block consisting of a highly rigid LM rail with a U-shaped cross
section, LM Guide units on both side faces and a Ball Screw unit in the center, LM Guide Actuator
model KR achieves a highly rigid and highly accurate actuator in a minimal space.
In addition, since the housings A and B also serve as support units and the nut block as a table, the
this model allows significant reduction of man-hours and time required for design and assembly since
it incorporates a support unit and a table, thus to contribute to total cost cutting.
A-386
[4-way Equal Load]

Each train of balls is arranged at a contact angle
of 45° so that the rated load on the nut block is
45° 45°
radial and lateral directions). As a result, model
KR can be used in any mounting orientation.
45° 45°
LM Guide Actuator
Fig.2 Load Capacity and Contact Angle of Model KR
[High Rigidity]
Unlike the conventional LM Guide, model KR Table1 Cross-sectional Characteristics of the LM Rail
uses an outer rail structure to achieve higher Unit: mm4
rigidity against an overhung load. Mass

Model No. IX IY
(kg/100mm)
The LM rail has a wide U-shaped cross section
KR15 9.08 × 102 1.42 × 104 0.104
to reduce the weight and minimize deflection.
KR20 6.1 × 10 3
6.2 × 10 4
0.26
Y axis
Center point of gravity
KR26 1.7 × 104 1.5 × 105 0.39
KR30H 2.7 × 10 4
2.8 × 10 5
0.5
KR33 6.2 × 104 3.8 × 105 0.66
KR45H 8.4 × 104 8.9 × 105 0.9
X axis
KR46 2.4 × 105 1.5 × 106 1.26
Fig.3 Cross Section of the LM Rail KR55 2.2 × 105 2.3 × 106 1.5
KR65 4.6 × 105 5.9 × 106 2.31
lX=geometrical moment of inertia around X axis

lY=geometrical moment of inertia around Y axis
[High Accuracy]
Since the linear guide section consists of 4 rows
Center of ball rotation
of circular-arc grooves that enable balls to
smoothly move even under a preload, a highly
rigid guide with no clearance is achieved. Addi-
tionally, variation in frictional resistance caused
by load fluctuation is minimized, allowing the
system to follow highly accurate feed.
Fig.4 Contact Structure of Model KR
A-387
[Space Saving]
Use of a nut block integrating LM Guide units on both ends and a Ball Screw unit in the center makes
model KR a highly rigid and highly accurate actuator in a minimal space.
10mm
Model KR55 Model KR33 Model KR20 Model KR15 Model KR26 Model KR46 Model KR65
10mm
Fig.5 Cross Sectional Drawing
10mm
Model KR45H Model KR30H
10mm
A-388
[Seal]
Model KR is equipped with end seals and side seals for dust prevention as standard.
Side seal
LM Guide Actuator
End seal
Table2 shows the rolling resistance and seal resistance per nut block (guide section).
Table2 Maximum Resistance Value Unit: N
Rolling Seal
Model No. resistance resistance Total
value value
KR15 0.2 0.7 0.9
KR20 0.5 0.7 1.2
KR26 0.6 0.8 1.4
KR30H 1.5 2.0 3.5
KR33 1.5 1.9 3.4
KR45H 2.5 2.6 5.1
KR46 2.5 2.5 5
KR55 5.0 3.8 8.8
KR65 6.0 4.1 10.1
Note) The rolling resistance represents the value when a
lubricant is not used.
A-389
Types and Features
Model KR-A (with a Single Long Nut Block)

Representative model of KR.
Model KR-A
Model KR-B (with Two Long Nut Blocks)

Equipped with two units of the nut block of
model KR-A, this model achieves higher rigidity,
higher load capacity and higher accuracy.
Model KR-B
Model KR-C (with a Single Short Nut Block)

This model has a shorter overall length of the
nut block and a longer stroke than model KR-A.
(Supported models: model KR30H, 33, 45H, 46)
Model KR-C
Model KR-D (with Two Short Nut Blocks)

model KR-C, this design allows a span between
blocks that suits the equipment, thus to achieve
high rigidity.
(Supported models: model KR30H, 33, 45H, 46)
Model KR-D
A-390
Load Ratings in All Directions and Static Permissible Moment
[Load Rating]
PL PR
PT PT
LM Guide Actuator
z LM Guide Unit
Model KR is capable of receiving loads in four directions: radial, reverse radial and lateral directions.
Its basic load ratings are equal in all four directions (radial, reverse radial and lateral directions), and
their values are indicated in Table3 on A-392 and A-393.
z Ball Screw Unit
Since the nut block is incorporated with a Ball Screw, model KR is capable of receiving an axial load.
The basic load rating value is indicated in Table3 on A-392 and A-393.
z Bearing Unit (Fixed Side)
Since housing A contains an angular bearing, model KR is capable of receiving an axial load.
The basic load rating value is indicated in Table3 on A-392 and A-393.
[Equivalent Load (LM Guide Unit)]
The equivalent load when the LM Guide unit of model KR simultaneously receives loads in all direc-
tions is obtained from the following equation.
PE = PR (PL) + PT
: Radial direction
: Lateral direction
A-391
Table3 Load Rating of Model KR
KR15 KR20 KR26

Model No.
KR1501 KR1502 KR2001 KR2006 KR2602 KR2606
Long nut block
Basic dynamic types A, B 1930 3590 7240
load rating
C (N) Short nut block
— — —
types C, D
LM guide unit
Long nut block

Basic static 3450 6300 12150
types A, B
load rating
C0 (N) Short nut block
— — —
types C, D
Normal grade, – 0.001 to – 0.003 to – 0.004 to
Radial high accuracy grade +0.002 +0.002 +0.002
clearance
(mm) – 0.005 to – 0.007 to – 0.01 to
Precision grade
– 0.002 – 0.003 – 0.004
Normal grade,
Basic dynamic 340 230 660 860 2350 1950
high accuracy grade
load rating
Ca (N) Precision grade 340 230 660 1060 2350 2390
Normal grade,
660 410 1170 1450 4020 3510
Ball screw unit
Basic static high accuracy grade

load rating
C0a (N) Precision grade 660 410 1170 1600 4020 3900
Screw shaft diameter (mm) 5 6 8

Lead (mm) 1 2 1 6 2 6
Thread minor diameter (mm) 4.5 5.3 5.0 6.6 6.7
Ball center-to-center diameter (mm) 5.15 6.15 6.3 8.3 8.4
Bearing unit (Fixed side)
Basic dynamic
load rating 590 1000 1380
Ca (N)
Axial direction
Static permissible
load 290 1240 1760
P0a (N)
Note1) The load ratings in the LM Guide unit each indicate the load rating per LM block.
Note2) The Ball Screw of precision grade (grade P) for models KR30H, KR33, KR45H10 and KR4610 is incorporated with
spacer balls in the proportion of one to one.
Note3) The Ball Screw of precision grade (grade P) for models KR45H20, KR4620, KR55 and KR65 is incorporated with
spacer balls in the proportion of two to one.
A-392
Symbols in the parentheses indicate units.

KR30H KR33 KR45H KR46
KR55 KR65
KR30H06 KR30H10 KR3306 KR3310 KR45H10 KR45H20 KR4610 KR4620
11600 11600 23300 27400 38100 50900
4900 4900 11900 14000 — —
LM Guide Actuator
20200 20200 39200 45500 61900 80900
10000 10000 19600 22700 — —
– 0.004 to – 0.004 to – 0.006 to – 0.006 to – 0.007 to – 0.008 to

+0.002 +0.002 +0.003 +0.003 +0.004 +0.004
– 0.012 to – 0.012 to – 0.016 to – 0.016 to – 0.019 to – 0.022 to
– 0.004 – 0.004 – 0.006 – 0.006 – 0.007 – 0.008
2840 1760 2840 1760 3140 3040 3140 3040 3620 5680
2250 1370 2250 1370 2940 3430 2940 3430 3980 5950
4900 2840 4900 2840 6760 7150 6760 7150 9290 14500
2740 1570 2740 1570 3720 5290 3720 5290 6850 10700
10 10 15 15 20 25
6 10 6 10 10 20 10 20 20 25
7.8 7.8 12.5 12.5 17.5 22
10.5 10.5 15.75 15.75 20.75 26
1790 1790 6660 6660 7600 13700
2590 2590 3240 3240 3990 5830
A-393
[Static Permissible Moment (LM Guide Unit)]
The LM Guide unit of model KR is capable of receiving moments in four directions only with a single
nut block.
Table4 on A-395 shows static permissible moments in the MA, MB and MC directions.
With a single long nut block (type A)
With double long nut blocks (type B)
With a single short nut block (type C)
With double short nut blocks (type D)
A-394
Table4 Static Permissible Moments of Model KR Unit: N-m
Static permissible moment

Model No.
MA MB MC
KR15-A 12.1 12.1 38
KR15-B 70.3 70.3 76
KR20-A 31 31 83
KR20-B 176 176 165
LM Guide Actuator
KR26-A 84 84 208
KR26-B 480 480 416
KR30H-A 166 166 428
KR30H-B 908 908 857
KR30H-C 44 44 214
KR30H-D 319 319 427
KR33-A 166 166 428
KR33-B 908 908 857
KR33-C 44 44 214
KR33-D 319 319 427
KR45H-A 486 486 925
KR45H-B 2732 2732 1850
KR45H-C 130 130 463
KR45H-D 994 994 925
KR46-A 547 547 1400
KR46-B 2940 2940 2800
KR46-C 149 149 700
KR46-D 1010 1010 1400
KR55-A 870 870 2280
KR55-B 4890 4890 4570
KR65-A 1300 1300 3920
KR65-B 7230 7230 7840
Note1) Symbols A, B, C or D in the end of each model number indicates the nut block size and the number of nut blocks used.
A: With a single long nut block
B: With double long nut blocks
C: With a single short nut block
D: With double short nut blocks
Note2) The values for models KR - B/D indicate the values when double nut blocks are used in close contact with each other.
A-395
Maximum Travel Speed and the Maximum Length
The maximum travel speed of model KR is limited by the dangerous speed of the ball screw shaft and the
DN value regardless of the maximum rotation speed of the motor. These factors must be taken into account
especially when model KR operates at high speed.
The maximum lengths are indicated in terms of LM rail length.
Table5 Maximum Travel Speed and the Maximum Length
Maximum travel speed (mm/s) Maximum length(mm)
Ball Screw LM rail Precision High-accuracy Normal Precision High-accuracy Normal High-accuracy
Model No. grade Precision
lead (mm) length (mm) grade grade grade grade grade grade,
Long block Short block grade normal grade
01 — 160 160 — — —
KR15 — 250 250
02 — 330 330 — — —
01 — 190 190 — — —
KR20 250 250
06 — 1100 790 — — —
02 — 280 280 — — —
KR26 350 350
06 — 830 590 — — —
150 660 470 660 470
200 660 470 660 470
300 660 470 660 470
06
400 660 470 660 470
500 590 360 530 470
600 395 395 360 360
KR30H 600 700
150 1100 790 1100 790
200 1100 790 1100 790
300 1100 790 1100 790
10
400 1100 790 1100 790
500 980 790 880 790
600 650 650 600 600
150 660 470 660 470
200 660 470 660 470
300 660 470 660 470
06
400 660 470 660 470
500 590 360 530 470
600 395 395 360 360
KR33 600 700
150 1100 790 1100 790
200 1100 790 1100 790
300 1100 790 1100 790
10
400 1100 790 1100 790
500 980 790 880 790
600 650 650 600 600
340 740 520 740 520
440 740 520 740 520
540 740 520 740 520
10 640 740 520 740 520
740 730 520 640 520
840 — 520 — 520
940 — 430 — 380
KR45H 800 1200
340 1480 1050 1480 1050
440 1480 1050 1480 1050
540 1480 1050 1480 1050
20 640 1480 1050 1480 1050
740 1430 1050 1280 1050
840 — 1050 — 1050
940 — 840 — 770
A-396
Maximum travel speed (mm/s) Maximum length(mm)
LM Guide Actuator
Ball Screw LM rail Precision High-accuracy Normal Precision High-accuracy Normal High-accuracy
Model No. grade Precision
lead (mm) length (mm) grade grade grade grade grade grade,
Long block Short block grade normal grade
340 740 520 740 520
440 740 520 740 520
540 740 520 740 520
10 640 740 520 740 520
740 730 520 650 520
840 — 520 — 520
940 — 430 — 390
KR46 800 1200
340 1480 1050 1480 1050
440 1480 1050 1480 1050
540 1480 1050 1480 1050
20 640 1480 1050 1480 1050
740 1440 1050 1300 1050
840 — 1050 — 1050
940 — 840 — 780
980 1120 800 — — —
1080 900 800 — — —
KR55 20 1180 740 740 — — — 1180 2000
1280 — 620 — — —
1380 — 530 — — —
980 1120 800 — — —
1180 1120 800 — — —
KR65 25 1380 2000
1380 840 800 — — —
1680 — 550 — — —
* Any rail length greater than the standard rail length is limited by the dangerous speed. If desiring such a rail length, contact
THK.
A-397
Lubrication
Table6 shows standard greases used in model KR and grease nipple types.
Table6
Model No. Standard grease Grease nipple

KR15 THK AFF Grease —
KR20 THK AFA Grease PB107
KR26 THK AFA Grease PB107
KR30H THK AFB-LF Grease PB107
KR33 THK AFB-LF Grease PB107
KR45H THK AFB-LF Grease A-M6F
KR46 THK AFB-LF Grease A-M6F
A-398
Service Life
Model KR consists of an LM Guide, a Ball Screw and a support bearing. The nominal life of each
component can be obtained using the basic dynamic load rating indicated in Table3 on A-392 and A-
393 (Rated Load of Model KR).
[LM Guide Unit]
z Nominal Life
LM Guide Actuator
fC • C 3
L= 50
f W • PC
(The total travel distance that 90% of a group of identical LM Guide units independently oper-
ating under the same conditions can achieve without showing flaking)
PC : Calculated applied load (N)
z If a moment is applied to model KR-A/C or model KR-B/D using two nut blocks in close contact
with each other, calculate the equivalent load by multiplying the applied moment by the equivalent
factor indicated in Table9 on A-401.
Pm = K • M
Pm : Equivalent load (per nut block) (N)
K : Equivalent moment factor(see Table9 on A-401)
(If planning to use three or more nut blocks, or use nut blocks with a wide span, contact
THK.)
z If moment Mc is applied to model KR-B/D

KC • MC
Pm =
2
z If a radial load (P) and a moment are simultaneously applied to model KR
P E = Pm + P
PE : Total equivalent radial load (N)
Perform a nominal life calculation using the above data.
A-399
z Service Life Time
When the nominal life (L) has been obtained, if the stroke length and the number of reciprocations
are constant, the service life time is obtained using the equation below.
6
L 10
Lh =
2 • l S • n1 60
l S : Stroke length (mm)
n1 : Number of reciprocations per minute(min– 1)
[Ball Screw Unit/Bearing Unit(Fixed Side)]
z Nominal Life
Ca 3
6
L= 10
fW •Fa
L : Nominal life (rev)
(The total number of revolutions that 90% of a group of identical Ball Screw units indepen-
dently operating under the same conditions can achieve without showing flaking)
Ca : Basic dynamic load rating (N)
Fa : Applied axial load (N)
When the nominal life has been obtained from the equation above, if the stroke length and the num-
ber of reciprocations per minute are constant, the service life time is obtained using the following
equation.
z Service Life Time
L• l
Lh =
2 •l S• n1 60
n1 : Number of reciprocations per minute(min– 1)
l : Ball Screw lead (mm)
A-400
fC: Contact Factor

If two nut blocks are used in close contact with Table7 Contact Factor (fC)
each other with model KR-B/D, multiply the Block type Contact factor fC
basic load rating by the corresponding contact
A, C type 1
factor indicated in Table7.
B, D type 0.81
fW: Load Factor

Table8 shows load factors. Table8 Load Factor (fW)
LM Guide Actuator
Vibrations/
Speed(V) fW
impact
Very low
Faint 1 to 1.2
V≦0.25m/s
Slow
Weak 1.2 to 1.5
0.25<V≦1m/s
Medium
Medium 1.5 to 2
1<V≦2m/s
High
Strong 2 to 3.5
V>2m/s
K: Moment Equivalent Factor (LM Guide Unit)

When model KR travels under a moment, the Table9 Equivalent moment factor(K)
distribution of load applied to the LM Guide is Model No. KA KB KC
locally large (see A-75). In such cases, calculate KR15-A 3.2 × 10– 1 3.2 × 10– 1 9.09 × 10– 2
the load by multiplying the moment value by the KR15-B 5.96 × 10– 2 5.96 × 10– 2 9.09 × 10– 2
corresponding moment equivalent factor indi- KR20-A 2.4 × 10– 1 2.4 × 10– 1 7.69 × 10– 2
cated in Table9. KR20-B 4.26 × 10– 2 4.26 × 10– 2 7.69 × 10– 2
Symbols KA, KB and KC indicate the moment KR26-A 1.73 × 10– 1 1.73 × 10– 1 5.88 × 10– 2
equivalent loads in the MA, MB and MC directions, KR26-B 3.06 × 10– 2 3.06 × 10– 2 5.88 × 10– 2
KR30H-A 1.51 × 10– 1 1.51 × 10– 1 4.78 × 10– 2
respectively.
KR30H-B 2.76 × 10– 2 2.76 × 10– 2 4.78 × 10– 2
KR30H-C 2.77 × 10– 1 2.77 × 10– 1 4.78 × 10– 2
KR30H-D 3.99 × 10– 2 3.99 × 10– 2 4.78 × 10– 2
KR33-A 1.51 × 10– 1 1.51 × 10– 1 4.93 × 10– 2
KR33-B 2.57 × 10– 2 2.57 × 10– 2 4.93 × 10– 2
KR33-C 2.77 × 10– 1 2.77 × 10– 1 4.93 × 10– 2
KR33-D 3.55 × 10– 2 3.55 × 10– 2 4.93 × 10– 2
KR45H-A 9.83 × 10– 2 9.83 × 10– 2 3.45 × 10– 2
KR45H-B 1.87 × 10– 2 1.87 × 10– 2 3.45 × 10– 2
KR45H-C 1.83 × 10– 1 1.83 × 10– 1 3.45 × 10– 2
KR45H-D 2.81 × 10– 2 2.81 × 10– 2 3.45 × 10– 2
KR46-A 1.01 × 10– 1 1.01 × 10– 1 3.38 × 10– 2
KR46-B 1.78 × 10– 2 1.78 × 10– 2 3.38 × 10– 2
KR46-C 1.85 × 10– 1 1.85 × 10– 1 3.38 × 10– 2
KR46-D 2.5 × 10– 2 2.5 × 10– 2 3.38 × 10– 2
KR55-A 8.63 × 10– 2 8.63 × 10– 2 2.83 × 10– 2
KR55-B 1.53 × 10– 2 1.53 × 10– 2 2.83 × 10– 2
KR65-A 7.55 × 10– 2 7.55 × 10– 2 2.14 × 10– 2
KR65-B 1.35 × 10– 2 1.35 × 10– 2 2.14 × 10– 2
Note) The values for models KR-B/D indicate the values
when double nut blocks are used in close contact with
each other.
A-401
Static Safety Factor
[Calculating the Static Safety Factor]

z LM Guide Unit
To calculate a load applied to the LM Guide of model KR, the average load required for calculating
the service life and the maximum load needed for calculating the static safety factor must be
obtained first. In particular, if the system starts and stops frequently, or if a large moment caused by
an overhung load is applied to the system, it may receive an unexpectedly large load.
When selecting a model number, make sure that the desired model is capable of receiving the
required maximum load (whether stationary or in motion).
C0
fs =
Pmax
Pmax : Maximum applied load (N)
* The basic static load rating is a static load with a constant direction and magnitude whereby the sum of the permanent defor-
mation of the rolling element and that of the raceway on the contact area under the maximum stress is 0.0001 times the roll-
ing element diameter.
z Ball Screw Unit/Bearing Unit(Fixed Side)
If an unexpected external force is applied in the axial direction as a result of an inertia caused by an
impact or start and stop while model KR is stationary or operating, it is necessary to take into account
the static safety factor.
C0a
fs =
Fmax
C0a : Basic static load rating (N)
Fmax : Maximum applied load (N)
[Standard Values for the Static Safety Factor (fS)]
Machine using the

Load conditions Lower limit of fS
LM system
General industrial Without vibration or impact 1 to 1.3

machinery With vibration or impact 2 to 3
* The standard value of the static safety factor may vary according to the conditions such as environment, lubrication status,
mounting section accuracy or rigidity.
A-402
Example of Calculating the Nominal Life
[Condition (Horizontal Installation)]

Assumed model number : KR 5520A
LM Guide unit (C=38100N, C0=61900N)
Ball Screw unit (Ca=3620N, C0a=9290N)
Bearing unit(Fixed Side) (Ca=7600N, P0a=3990N)
Mass : m = 30kg
LM Guide Actuator
Speed : v = 500mm/s
Acceleration : α =2.4m/s2
Stroke : l s = 1200mm
Gravitational acceleration : g = 9.807m/s2
Velocity diagram : see Fig.7
（mm/s）
v
m m
193
0.21 2.19 0.21 （s）

Thrust center 40 52.5 1095 52.5 （mm）
2.61 （s）
1200 （mm）
Fig.7
[Consideration]
z Studying the LM Guide Unit
Load Applied to the Nut Block
* Assuming that a single nut block is used, convert applied moments MA and MB into applied load by
multiplying them by the moment equivalent factor (KA=KB=8.63 × 10-2).
* Assuming that a single shaft is used, convert applied moment MC into applied load by multiplying it
by the moment equivalent factor (KC=2.83 × 10-2).
A-403
z During uniform motion:
P1 = mg + KC•mg×40 = 627 N
z During acceleration:
P1a = P1 + KA•mα ×193 = 1826 N
P1aT = – KB•mα×40 = – 249 N
z During deceleration:
P1d = P1– KA•mα ×193 = – 572 N
P1dT = KB•mα ×40 = 249 N
* Since the groove under a load is different from the assumed groove, give "0" (zero) to P1aT and P1d.
Combined Radial And Thrust Load
P1E = P1 = 627 N
P1aE = P1a + P1aT = 1826 N
P1dE = P1d + P1dT = 249 N
C0 C0
fs = = = 33.9
Pmax P1aE
Nominal Life
z Average load
3
1 3 3 3
Pm = (P1E × 1095 + P1aE × 52.5+P1dE × 52.5) = 790 N
l S
z Nominal life
3
L= ( f CP ) ×50 = 3.25×10 km
w · m
6
fW : Load factor (1.2)
A-404
z Studying the Ball Screw Unit

Axial load
z During forward uniform motion:
Fa1 = μ •mg + f = 11 N
μ : Friction coefficient(0.005)
f : Rolling resistance of one KR block + seal resistance(10.0 N)
z During forward acceleration:
Fa2 = Fa1 + mα = 83 N
z During forward deceleration:
LM Guide Actuator
Fa3 = Fa1– mα = – 61 N
z During uniform backward motion
Fa4 = – Fa1 = – 11 N
z During backward acceleration:
Fa5 = Fa4– mα = – 83 N
z During backward deceleration:
Fa6 = Fa4 + mα = 61 N
* Since the groove under a load is different from the assumed groove, give "0" (zero) to Fa3, Fa4 and Fa5.
C 0a C 0a
fs = = = 111.9
Famax Fa2
Buckling Load
n · π2 · E · I
P1 = ×0.5 = 11000 N
l a
2
P1 : Buckling load (N)

l a : Distance between two mounting surfaces (1300 mm)
E : Young's modulus (2.06×105 N/mm2)
n : Factor for mounting method (fixed-fixed: 4.0, see A-694)
0.5 : Safety factor
I : Minimum geometrical moment of inertia of the shaft (mm4)
π
I= · d14
64
d1 : Screw-shaft thread minor diameter (17.5 mm)
A-405
Permissible tensile Compressive Load
π
P2 = δ · · d12 = 35300 N
4
P2 : Permissible tensile compressive load (N)
δ : Permissible tensile compressive stress (147 N/mm2)
d1 : Screw-shaft thread minor diameter (17.5mm)
Dangerous Speed
60 · λ
2 3
E×10 · I
N1 = 2 · ×0.8 = 1560 min−1
2π · l b γ ·A
N1 : Dangerous speed (min-1)
l b : Distance between two mounting surfaces (1300mm)
γ : Density (7.85×10– 6kg/mm3)
λ : Factor according to the mounting method (fixed-supported 3.927, see A-696)
0.8 : Safety factor
DN Value
DN=31125(≦50000)
D : Ball center-to-center diameter (20.75mm)
N : Maximum working rotation speed (1500min– 1)
Nominal Life
z Average axial load
3
1 3 3 3
Fam = (Fa1 ×1095 + Fa2 ×52.5 + Fa6 ×52.5) = 26.2 N
2·lS
z Nominal life
3
L= ( f CF ) ・l = 3.05× 10 km
w ·
a
am
7

l : Ball Screw lead (20mm)
A-406

Axial Load (Same as the Ball Screw Unit)
Fa1 = 11 N
Fa2 = 83 N
Fa3 = 0 N
Fa4 = 0 N
Fa5 = 0 N
Fa6 = 61 N
LM Guide Actuator
P0a P 0a
fs = = = 48.0
Famax Fa2
Nominal Life
3
1 3 3 3
Fam = (Fa1 ×1095 + Fa2 ×52.5 + Fa6 ×52.5) = 26.2 N
2·lS
z Nominal life
3
Ca
L= ( )
fw · Fam
6 13
×10 = 1.41×10 rev

* Convert the above nominal life into the service life in travel distance of the Ball Screw.
LS = L•l ×10– 6 = 2.82×108 km
[Result]
The table below shows the result of the examination.
KR5520A LM guide unit Ball screw unit Bearing unit (Fixed side)
Static safety factor 33.9 111.9 48.0
Buckling load(N) — 11000 —
Permissible tensile
— 35300 —
compressive load(N)
Dangerous speed(min-1) — 1560 —
DN Value — 31125 —
Nominal life(km) 3.25 × 10 6
3.05 × 10 7
2.82 × 108
Maximum axial load(N) — 76 —
Maximum working
— 1500 —
rotation speed(min– 1)
Note1) From the static safety coefficient and other values above, it is judged that the assumed model can be used.
Note2) Of the rated lives of the three components, the shortest value (of LM Guide unit) is considered the nominal life of the
assumed model KR 5520A.
A-407
[Condition (Vertical Installation)]
Assumed model number : KR 5520A
LM Guide Unit (C = 38100 N, C0 = 61900N)
Ball Screw Unit (Ca=3620 N, C0a=9290 N)
Bearing Unit(Fixed Side) (Ca=7600 N, P0a=3990 N)
Mass : m = 30 kg
Speed : v = 500mm/s
Acceleration : α =2.4 m/s2
Stroke : l s = 1200 mm
Gravitational acceleration : g = 9.807 m/s2
Velocity diagram see Fig.8
40
m
Thrust center
193
Fig.8
A-408
[Consideration]
z Studying the LM Guide Unit
Load Applied to the Block
* Assuming that a single block is used, convert applied moments MA and MB into applied load by mul-
tiplying them by the moment equivalent factor (KA=KB=8.63x10 -2).
P1 = KA•mg×193 = 4900 N
P1T = KB•mg×40 = 1016 N
LM Guide Actuator
P1a = P1 + KA•mα×193 = 6100 N
P1aT =P1T + KB•mα ×40 = 1264 N
P1d = P1 – KA•mα×193 = 3701 N
P1dT = P1d – KB•mα ×40 = 767 N
Combined Radial And Thrust Load
P1E = P1 + P1T = 5916 N
P1aE = P1a + P1aT = 7364 N
P1dE = P1d + P1dT = 4468 N
C0 C0
fs = = = 8.4
Pmax P1aE
Nominal Life
z Average load
3
1 3 3 3
Pm = (P1E × 1095 + P1aE × 52.5+P1dE × 52.5) = 5947 N
l S
z Nominal life
3
C
L= ( fw · Pm ) ×50 = 7.61×10 km3
A-409
z Studying the Ball Screw Unit
Axial Load
z During upward uniform motion:
Fa1 = mg + μ •mg + f = 306 N
μ : Friction coefficient (0.005) f : Sliding resistance per block (10.0 N)
z During upward acceleration:
Fa2 = Fa1 + mα = 378 N
z During upward deceleration:
Fa3 = Fa1 – mα = 234 N
z During downward uniform motion:
Fa4 = mg – μ •mg – f = 283 N
z During downward acceleration:
Fa5 = Fa4 – mα = 211 N
z During downward deceleration:
Fa6 = Fa4 + mα = 355 N
C 0a C 0a
fs = = = 24.5
Fmax Fa2
Buckling Load
Same as Horizontal Installation
Permissible Tensile Compressive Load
Dangerous Speed
DN Value
Nominal Life
3
1 3 3 3 3 3 3
Fm = (Fa1 ×1095 + Fa2 ×525 + Fa3 ×525 + Fa4 ×1095 + Fa5 ×525 + Fa6 ×525) = 296 N
2·lS
z Nominal life
3
Ca × l = 2.12 × 104 km
L= ( )
fw · Fm
fW : Load factor (1.2) l : Lead (20mm)
A-410

Axial Load (Same as the Ball Screw Unit)
Fa1 = 306 N
Fa2 = 378 N
Fa3 = 234 N
Fa4 = 283 N
Fa5 = 211 N
Fa6 = 355 N
LM Guide Actuator
P0a P 0a
fs = = = 10.5
Fmax Fa2
Nominal Life
3
1 3 3 3 3 3 3
Fm = (Fa1 ×1095 + Fa2 ×525 + Fa3 ×525 + Fa4 ×1095 + Fa5 ×525 + Fa6 ×525) = 296 N
2·lS
z Nominal life
3
L= ( f CF ) ×10 = 9.80×10 rev
w ·
a
m
6 9

* Convert the above nominal life into the service life in travel distance of the Ball Screw.
LS = L•l ×10– 6 = 1.96×105 km
[Result]
The table below shows the result of the examination.
Bearing unit
KR5520A LM guide unit Ball screw unit
(Fixed side)
Static safety factor 8.4 24.5 10.5
Buckling load(N) — 11000 —
Permissible tensile
— 35300 —
compressive load(N)
Dangerous speed(min-1) — 1560 —
DN Value — 31125 —
Nominal life(km) 7.61×103 2.12×104 1.96×105
Maximum axial load(N) — 76 —
Maximum working
— 1500 —
rotation speed(min-1)
Note1) From the static safety coefficient and other values above, it is judged that the assumed model can be used.
Note2) Of the rated lives of the three components, the shortest value (of LM Guide unit) is considered the nominal life of the
assumed model KR 5520A.
A-411
Accuracy Standards
The accuracy of model KR is defined in positioning repeatability, positioning accuracy, backlash and
running parallelism.
[Positioning Repeatability]
t1
After repeating positioning to a given point in the
same direction seven times, measure the halt-
ing point and obtain the value of half the maxi- t2
mum difference. Perform this measurement in
the center and both ends of the travel distance, t3
use the maximum value as the measurement
value and express the value of half the maxi-
mum difference with symbol "±" as positioning Fig.9 Positioning Repeatability
repeatability.
[Positioning Accuracy] （＋）

Using the maximum stroke as the reference △A
length, express the maximum error between the (Error)
actual distance traveled from the reference point A Command value
Reference point
0
and the command value in an absolute value as A Travel distance
positioning accuracy.
A=｜Actual distance traveled - travel distance of
the command value｜
（ー）
Fig.10 Positioning Accuracy
Place a straightedge on the surface table where Straightedge
model KR is mounted, measure almost through-
out the travel distance of the nut block using a
test indicator. Use the maximum difference
among the readings within the travel distance as
the running parallelism measurement.
[Backlash]
Feed and slightly move the nut block and read
Return
the measurement on the test indicator as the Backlash
reference value. Subsequently, apply a load to
Feed screw feed
the nut block from the same direction (table feed
direction), and then release the nut block from Load displacement
Load
(including elastic displacement)
the load. Use the difference between the refer-
ence value and the return as the backlash mea-
surement.
Perform this measurement in the center and Fig.12 Backlash
near both ends, and use the maximum value as
the measurement value.
A-412
The accuracies of model KR are classified into normal grade (no symbol), high accuracy grade (H)
and precision grade (P). Tables below show standards for all the accuracies.
Table10 Normal Grade (No Symbol) Unit: mm
Positioning Positioning Running of Starting torque
Model No. Rail length Backlash
Repeatability Accuracy parallelism (N•cm)
100
No standard No standard
KR20 150 ±0.01 0.02 0.5
defined defined
200
150
LM Guide Actuator
200 No standard No standard
KR26 ±0.01 0.02 1.5
250 defined defined
300
150
200
KR30H ±0.01 0.02 7
400 defined defined
500
600
150
200
KR33 ±0.01 0.02 7
400 defined defined
500
600
340
440
540
KR45H 640 ±0.01 defined 0.02 10
defined
740
840
940
340
440
KR46 ±0.01 0.02 10
640 defined defined
740
940
980
1080
KR55 1180 ±0.01 0.05 12
defined defined
1280
1380
980
1180 ±0.01 No standard No standard 12
KR65 0.05
1380 defined defined
1680 ±0.012 15
Note1) The evaluation method complies with THK standards.
Note2) Measurement is performed using an inspection-use motor. For motor wrap types, measurement with motor wrap com-
pletion is not performed.
Note3) The starting torque represents the value when THK AFB-LF Grease is used.
However, that of models KR20 and KR26 represents the value when THK AFA Grease is used, and that of KR15 rep-
resents the value when THK AFF Grease is used.
Note4) If highly viscous grease such as vacuum grease and clean room grease is used, the actual starting torque may exceed
the corresponding value in the table. Use much care in selecting a motor.
Note5) For accuracy with a rail length longer than the standard rail length, contact THK.
A-413
Table11 High Accuracy Grade (H) Unit: mm
75
100
125
KR15 ±0.004 0.04 0.02 0.01 0.4
150
175
200
100
KR20 150 ±0.005 0.06 0.025 0.01 0.5
200
150
200
KR26 ±0.005 0.06 0.025 0.01 1.5
250
300
150
200
0.06 0.025
300
KR30H ±0.005 0.02 7
400
500
0.1 0.035
600
150
200
0.06 0.025
300
KR33 ±0.005 0.02 7
400
500
0.1 0.035
600
340
440
0.1 0.035
540
KR45H 640 ±0.005 0.02 10
740 0.12 0.04
840
0.15 0.05
940
340
440
0.1 0.035
540
KR46 ±0.005 0.02 10
640
740 0.12 0.04
940 0.15 0.05
980
0.18
1080
KR55 1180 ±0.005 0.05 0.05 12
1280 0.25
1380
980 0.18
1180 0.05 12
KR65 ±0.008 0.2 0.05
1380
1680 0.28 0.055 15
A-414
Table12 Precision Grade (P) Unit: mm

75
100
125
KR15 ±0.003 0.02 0.01 0.002 0.8
LM Guide Actuator
150
175
200
100
KR20 150 ±0.003 0.02 0.01 0.003 1.2
200
150
200
KR26 ±0.003 0.02 0.01 0.003 4
250
300
150
200
0.02 0.01
300
KR30H ±0.003 0.003 15
400
500
0.025 0.015
600
150
200
0.02 0.01
300
KR33 ±0.003 0.003 15
400
500
0.025 0.015
600
340
440 15
0.025 0.015
KR45H 540 ±0.003 0.003
640
17
740 0.03 0.02
340
440 15
0.025 0.015
KR46 540 ±0.003 0.003
640
17
740 0.03 0.02
980
0.035 0.025 17
KR55 1080 ±0.005 0.003
1180 0.04 0.03 20
980
0.035 0.025 20
KR65 1180 ±0.005 0.005
1380 0.04 0.03 22
Note2) Measurement is performed using an inspection-use motor. For motor wrap types, measurement with motor wrap com-
pletion is not performed.
However, that of models KR20 and KR26 represents the value when THK AFA Grease is used, and that of KR15 rep-
resents the value when THK AFF Grease is used.
A-415
Caged Ball LM Guide Actuator
Caged Ball LM Guide Actuator Model SKR
Model SKR
Nut block
Ball screw shaft
LM rail
Ball
Ball cage
Fig.1 Structure of Caged Ball LM Guide Model SKR

Caged Ball LM Guide Actuator model SKR is a compact actuator that has a nut block consisting of
LM blocks and a ball screw nut integrated inside a U-shaped LM rail.
In addition, this model achieves high speed operation, lower noise and longer-term maintenance-free
operation by using ball cages in the LM Guide units and the Ball Screw unit.
[4-way Equal Load]
Each train of balls is arranged at a contact angle
of 45° so that the rated load on the nut block is
45° 45°
radial and lateral directions). As a result, model
SKR can be used in any mounting orientation.
45° 45°
Fig.2 Load Capacity and Contact Angle of Model SKR
A-416
[High Rigidity]
Use of an LM rail with a U-shaped cross section Table1 Cross-sectional Characteristics of the LM Rail
increases the rigidity against a moment and tor- Unit: mm4
sion. Mass
Model No. lX lY
(kg/100mm)
Y axis SKR33 5.35×104 3.52×105 0.61
Center point of gravity
SKR46 2.05×10 5
1.45×10 6
1.26
lX=geometrical moment of inertia around X axis

lY=geometrical moment of inertia around Y axis
LM Guide Actuator
X axis
Fig.3 Cross Section of the LM Rail
[High Accuracy]
Since the linear guide section consists of 4 rows Center of ball rotation
of circular-arc grooves that enable balls to
smoothly move even under a preload, a highly
rigid guide with no clearance is achieved. Addi-
tionally, variation in frictional resistance caused
by load fluctuation is minimized, allowing the
system to follow highly accurate feed.
Fig.4 Contact Structure of SKR
[Space Saving]
Due to an integral structure where LM Guide units are placed on both side faces of the nut block and
a Ball Screw unit is placed in the center of the nut block, a highly rigid and highly accurate actuator
with a minimal space is achieved.
10mm
Model SKR46 Model SKR33
10mm
A-417
[High Speed]
Model SKR supports a latest high-rotation servomotor (6,000 min-1) using a ball cage and is capable
of operating at higher speed than the conventional model KR.
In addition, a new type with a 20 -mm lead is added to lineups of the new model SKR33 in order to
achieve fast feed (formerly, only 6 mm and 10 mm ball screw leads were available for the conven-
tional model KR33).
Table2 Maximum Travel Speed
Ball Screw lead LM rail length Maximum travel speed (mm/s) Maximum
Model No.
(mm) (mm) Long block Short block length(mm)
150 600
200 600
300 600
6 400 600
500 600
600 552 503
700 393 364
150 1000
200 1000
300 1000
SKR33 10 400 1000 700
500 1000
600 920 839
700 656 607
150 2000 —
200 2000 —
300 2000 —
20 400 2000 —
500 2000 —
600 1780 —
700 1276 —
340 1000
440 1000
540 1000
10
640 1026 914
740 736 667
940 431 400
SKR46 940
340 2000
440 2000
540 2000
20
640 1988 1774
740 1433 1300
940 845 784
The maximum travel speed of model SKR is limited by the dangerous speed of the ball screw shaft
despite the maximum rotation speed of the motor (6,000 min-1). Take much care when using the
product at high speed.
When considering the use of this model at speed higher than the maximum speed indicated above,
contact THK.
A-418
Caged Ball/Roller Technology
[High Lubricity]
Model SKR uses ball cages to eliminate friction between balls and significantly improve torque char-
acteristics. As a result, the torque fluctuation is reduced and superb lubricity is achieved.
Item Description
Shaft diameter/lead φ 13/10mm
LM Guide Actuator
Shaft rotation speed 60min-1
0.06
Model SKR3310A (Caged Ball)
0.04
Model KR3310A (Conventional type)
Torque (N•m)
0.02
–0.02
–0.04
–0.06
0 20 40 60 80
Time (s)
Fig.6 Comparison of Torque Fluctuation between Model SKR and Model KR

Model SKR uses ball cages in the LM Guide unit and the Ball Screw unit. As a result, low noise and
acceptable running sound are achieved.
70
SKR4610A
KR4610A
Noise level (dBA)
60
50
40
0 200 400 600 800
Speed: v (mm/s)
Fig.7 Comparison of Noise between Model SKR4610A and Model KR4610A
A-419
With model SKR, the ball cage effect helps increase grease retention and achieve long-term mainte-
nance-free operation.
[Long Service Life – 3 Times Longer (with Model *KR3310. Calculated from the Following Equation)]
With model SKR, both the LM Guide unit and the Ball Screw unit have larger basic dynamic load rat-
ings, and therefore a longer service life is achieved.
The rated service life is calculated from the following equation.
LM guide unit Ball screw unit
L=(C/P)3×50 L=(Ca/Fa)3×106
L : Nominal life (km) L : Nominal life (rev)
C : Basic dynamic load rating (N) Ca : Basic dynamic load rating (N)
P : Applied load (N) Fa : Applied axial load (N)
As indicated in the equation above, the greater the basic dynamic load rating, the longer the service
life of both the LM Guide unit and the Ball Screw unit.
Table3 Comparison of Basic Dynamic Load Rating between Model SKR and Model KR Unit: N
Basic dynamic load rating SKR3310 KR3310 SKR4620 KR4620
LM guide Long type block 17000 11600 39500 27400

unit Short type block 11300 4900 28400 14000
Ball screw unit 2700 1760 4240 3040
[Seal]
Model SKR is equipped with end seals and side seals for contamination protection as standard.
Side seal
End seal
Table4 shows the rolling resistance and seal resistance per nut block (guide section).
Table4 Maximum Resistance Value Unit: N
Rolling resis- Seal resis-
Model No. Total
tance value tance value
SKR33 3.0 1.4 4.4
SKR46 2.5 1.8 4.3
Note) The rolling resistance represents the value when a
lubricant is not used.
A-420
Types and Features
Model SKR-A
Representative model of SKR.
LM Guide Actuator
Model SKR-A
Model SKR-B
model SKR-A, this model achieves higher rigid-
ity, higher load capacity and higher accuracy.
Model SKR-B
Model SKR-C
This model has a shorter overall length of the
block and a longer stroke than model SKR-A.
* With model SKR3320, a short-block type is not available.
Model SKR-C
Model SKR-D
model SKR-C, this design allows a span
between blocks that suits the equipment, thus to
achieve high rigidity.
* With model SKR3320, a short-block type is not available.
Model SKR-D
A-421
Load Ratings in All Directions and Permissible Moment
[Load Rating]
PL PR
Caged Ball LM Guide Actuator Model SKR con-
sists of an LM Guide, a Ball Screw and a sup- PT PT
port bearing.
z LM Guide Unit
Model SKR is capable of receiving loads in four directions: radial, reverse radial and lateral direc-
tions. Its basic load ratings are equal in all four directions (radial, reverse radial and lateral direc-
tions), and their values are indicated in Table5.
z Ball Screw Unit
Since the nut block is incorporated with a ball screw nut, model SKR is capable of receiving an axial
load. The basic load rating value is indicated in Table5.
Since housing A contains an angular bearing, model SKR is capable of receiving an axial load. The
basic load rating value is indicated in Table5.
[Equivalent Load (LM Guide Unit)]
The equivalent load when the LM Guide unit of model SKR simultaneously receives loads in all direc-
tions is obtained from the following equation.
PE = PR (PL) + PT
: Radial direction
: Lateral directions
A-422
Table5 Load Rating of Model SKR Symbols in the parentheses indicate units.
SKR33 SKR46
Model No.
SKR3306 SKR3310 SKR3320 SKR4610 SKR4620
Long nut block
Basic dynamic types A, B 17000 39500
load rating
C (N) Short nut block
11300 28400
types C, D
LM guide unit
Long nut block

Basic static 20400 45900
types A, B
load rating
LM Guide Actuator
C0 (N) Short nut block
11500 28700
types C, D
Normal grade, high
0 to – 0.004 0 to – 0.006
Radial accuracy grade
clearance (mm)
Precision grade – 0.004 to – 0.012 – 0.006 to – 0.016
Basic dynamic load rating Ca (N) 4400 2700 2620 4350 4240
Ball screw unit
Basic static load rating C0a (N) 6290 3780 3770 6990 7040
Screw shaft out diameter (mm) 13 15
Lead (mm) 6 10 20 10 20
Thread minor diameter (mm) 10.8 12.5
Ball center-to-center diameter (mm) 13.5 15.75
Bearing unit (Fixed side)
Basic dynamic
6250 6700
load rating Ca (N)
Axial direction
Static permissible
2700 3330
load P0a (N)
Note1) The load ratings in the LM Guide unit each indicate the load rating per LM block.
Note2) With model SKR3320, a short-block type is not available.
A-423
[Permissible Moment (LM Guide Unit)]
The LM Guide unit of model SKR is capable of receiving moments in four directions only with a single
nut block. Table6 on A-425 shows static permissible moments in the MA, MB and MC directions.
With a single long nut block (type A)
With double long nut blocks (type B)
With a single short nut block (type C)
With double short nut blocks (type D)
A-424
Table6 Static Permissible Moments of Model SKR Unit: N-m
Static permissible moment

Model No.
MA MB MC
SKR33-A 173 173 424
SKR33-B 990 990 848
SKR33-C 58 58 240
SKR33-D 390 390 480
LM Guide Actuator
SKR46-A 579 579 1390
SKR46-B 3240 3240 2780
SKR46-C 236 236 870
SKR46-D 1460 1460 1740
Note1) Symbols A, B, C or D in the end of each model number indicates the nut block size and the number of nut blocks used.
A: With a single long nut block
B: With double long nut blocks
C: With a single short nut block
D: With double short nut blocks
Note2) The values for models SKR-B/D indicate the values when double nut blocks are used in close contact with each other.
Lubrication
Standard greases used in model SKR are indicated below. For model SKR, a grease nipple can be
attached per your request.
Table7
THK grease
Model No. Standard grease nipples that can
be attached
SKR33 THK AFB-LF Grease PB107
SKR46 THK AFB-LF Grease A-M6F
A-425
Service Life
Caged Ball LM Guide Actuator Model SKR consists of an LM Guide, a Ball Screw and a support
bearing. The service life of each component can be obtained using the basic dynamic load rating
indicated in Table5 on A-423 (Rated Load of Model KR).
[LM Guide Unit]
z Nominal Life
The nominal life (L) means the total travel distance that 90% of a group of units of the same LM
Guide model can achieve without flaking (scale-like pieces on the metal surface) after individually
running under the same conditions.
The nominal life of the LM Guide is obtained using the following equation.
fC • C 3
L= 50
f W • PC
L : Nominal life (km) fW : Load factor (see Table8 on A-427)
C : Basic dynamic load rating (N) fC : Contact factor (see Table9 on A-427)
PC : Calculated applied load (N)
z If a moment is applied to model SKR-A/C or model SKR-B/D using two nut blocks in close contact
with each other, calculate the equivalent load by multiplying the applied moment by the equivalent
factor indicated in Table10 on A-427.
Pm = K • M
Pm : Equivalent load (per nut block) (N)
K : Equivalent moment factor
(If planning to use three or more nut blocks, or use nut blocks with a wide span, contact THK.)
If moment Mc is applied to model SKR-B/D
KC • MC
Pm =
2
z If a radial load (P) and a moment are simultaneously applied to model SKR
P E = Pm + P
PE : Overall equivalent radial load (N)
Perform a nominal life calculation using the above data.
z Service Life Time
6
L 10
Lh =
2 • l S • n1 60
Lh : Service life time (h) n1 : Number of reciprocations per minute
l s : Stroke length (mm) (min– 1)
A-426
[Ball Screw Unit/Bearing Unit(Fixed Side)]

z Nominal Life
The nominal life (L) means the total travel distance that 90% of a group of units of the same Ball
Screw (bearing) can achieve without flaking after individually running under the same conditions.
The nominal life of the Ball Screw unit/bearing unit (fixed side) is obtained using the following equa-
tion.
Table8 Load Factor (fW)
Ca 3
6 Vibrations/impact Speed(V) fW
L= 10
fW •Fa Very low
LM Guide Actuator
Faint 1 to 1.2
V≦0.25m/s
L : Nominal life (rev)
Slow
Ca : Basic dynamic load rating (N) Weak 1.2 to 1.5
0.25<V≦1m/s
Fa : Axial load (N) Medium
fW : Load factor (see Table8) Medium 1.5 to 2
1<V≦2m/s
High
Strong 2 to 3.5
V>2m/s
z Service Life Time
L• l
Lh =
2 •l S• n1 60
Lh : Service life time (h) n1 : Number of reciprocations per minute
l s : Stroke length (mm) (min– 1)
l : Ball Screw lead (mm)
fC: Contact Factor
If two nut blocks are used in close contact with Table9 Contact Factor (fC)
each other with model SKR-B/D, multiply the Block type Contact factor fC
basic load rating by the corresponding contact A, C type 1.0
factor indicated in Table9. B, D type 0.81
fW: Load Factor

Table8 shows load factors.
K: Moment Equivalent Factor (LM Guide Unit)
When model SKR travels under a moment, the Table10 Equivalent moment factor(K)
distribution of load applied to the LM Guide is Model No. KA KB KC
locally large. In such cases, calculate the load SKR33-A 1.42×10– 1 1.42×10– 1 5.05×10– 2
by multiplying the moment value by the corre- SKR33-B 2.47×10– 2 2.47×10– 2 5.05×10– 2
SKR33-C 2.39×10– 1 2.39×10– 1 5.05×10– 2
sponding moment equivalent factor indicated in
SKR33-D 3.54×10– 2 3.54×10– 2 5.05×10– 2
Table10. SKR46-A 9.51×10– 2 9.51×10– 2 3.46×10– 2
Symbols KA, KB and KC indicate the moment SKR46-B 1.70×10– 2 1.70×10– 2 3.46×10– 2
equivalent loads in the MA, MB and MC directions, SKR46-C 1.46×10– 1 1.46×10– 1 3.46×10– 2
respectively. SKR46-D 2.36×10– 2 2.36×10– 2 3.46×10– 2
KA: Moment equivalent factor in the MA direction.
KB: Moment equivalent factor in the MB direction.
KC: Moment equivalent factor in the MC direction.
Note) The values for models SKR-B/D indicate the values
when double nut blocks are used in close contact with
each other.
A-427
Accuracy Standards
The accuracy of model SKR is defined in positioning repeatability, positioning accuracy, backlash
and running parallelism.
t1
t2
ing point and obtain the value of half the maxi-
t3
the center and both ends of the travel distance,
Fig.8 Positioning Repeatability
mum difference with symbol "±" as positioning
repeatability.
[Positioning Accuracy]
（＋）
Using the maximum stroke as the reference △A
length, express the maximum error between the (Error)
actual distance traveled from the reference point A Command value
Reference point
0
and the command value in an absolute value as A Travel distance
positioning accuracy. A=｜Actual distance traveled - travel distance
（ー） of the command value｜
Fig.9 Positioning Accuracy
Place a straightedge on the surface table where Straightedge
model SKR is mounted, measure almost
throughout the travel distance of the nut block
using a test indicator. Use the maximum differ-
ence among the readings within the travel dis-
tance as the running parallelism measurement.
[Backlash]
Return
Feed and slightly move the nut block and read Backlash
the measurement on the test indicator as the
Feed screw feed
reference value. Subsequently, apply a load to
the nut block from the same direction (table feed Load displacement
Load
(including elastic displacement)
direction), and then release the nut block from
the load. Use the difference between the refer-
ence value and the return as the backlash mea-
Fig.11 Backlash
surement.
Perform this measurement in the center and
near both ends, and use the maximum value as
the measurement value.
A-428
The accuracies of model SKR are classified into normal grade (no symbol), high accuracy grade (H)
and precision grade (P). Tables below show standards for all the accuracies.
Table11 Normal Grade (No Symbol) Unit: mm
150
200
300
SKR33 400 ±0.010 0.020 7
LM Guide Actuator
defined defined
500
600
700
340
440
SKR46 ±0.010 0.020 10
640 defined defined
740
940
Table12 High Accuracy Grade (H) Unit: mm

150
200
0.060 0.025
300
SKR33 400 ±0.005 0.020 7
500
0.100 0.035
600
700 0.120 0.040
340
440
0.100 0.035
540
SKR46 ±0.005 0.020 10
640
740 0.120 0.040
940 0.150 0.050
Table13 Precision Grade (P) Unit: mm

150
200
0.020 0.010
300
SKR33 400 ±0.003 0.003 15
500
0.025 0.015
600
700 0.030 0.020
340
440 15
0.025 0.015
SKR46 540 ±0.003 0.003
640
17
740 0.030 0.020
A-429
Options LM Guide Actuator
Various types of options are available for models KR and SKR. Select an appropriate model accord-
0
ing to your application.

Reference
Name page Overview
Cover A-431 Serve as contamination protection accessories or the

Cover
Bellows B-302 likes
Proximity sensor B-309 Supporting manufacturer: Yamatake, SUNX

Sensor Photo sensor B-310 Supporting manufacturer: Omron
Sensor rail B-311 For mounting a sensor
For standard type model KR without a motor
Housing A-434 If the customer manufactures a motor braket
For motor wrap type
Table of Motors Used in Model Supporting manufacturer: Yaskawa Electric, Mitsub-
KR and Corresponding Motor B-312 ishi Electric, Matsushita Electric,.Sanyo Electric,
Brackets Omron, Fanuc and Oriental Motor
Motor
Motor bracket dimensional table
bracket B-314 —
for model KR
Table of Motors Used in Model Supporting manufacturer: Yaskawa Electric, Mitsub-
SKR and Corresponding Motor B-336 ishi Electric, Matsushita Electric,.Sanyo Electric,
Brackets Omron, Fanuc and Oriental Motor
Motor bracket dimensional table
B-337 —
for model SKR
Table1 Table of Applicable Options

Housing A
Proximity Photo Turnaround Intermediate
Model No. Cover Bellows for a Separate
sensor sensor Housing A Flange
Motor
KR15 { { { — — — {
KR20 { { { { — — {
KR26 { { { { — — {
KR30H { { { { — — {
KR33 { { { { { { {
KR45H { { { { — — {
KR46 { { { { { { {
KR55 { { { { — { {
KR65 { { { { — { {
SKR33 { — { { — — {
SKR46 { — { { — — {
A-430
Options
Cover
Cover
Cover
For models KR and SKR, covers are available as an option.

LM Guide Actuator (Options)

Cover
Model SKR33(with a Cover)
A-431
Bellows
Bellows
●For dimensions of the bellows, see B-302 to B-307.
For model KR, a bellows is available for contamination protection in addition to a cover.
A-432
Options
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
●For detailed dimensions, see B-308 to B-311.
Optional proximity sensors and photo sensors are available for models KR and SKR. Models
equipped with a sensor are also provided with a dedicated sensor rail/sensor dog (detecting plate).
Some models with a short rail are attached with a sensor and sensor rail on both sides. See the table

below.
Model No. Rail length
75L
KR15A
100L
KR15B 125L
75L
KR20A 100L
125L
125L
KR20B
150L
100L
KR26A 125L
150L
175L
KR26B
200L
A-433
Motor Bracket
Motor Bracket
●For detailed dimensions, see B-312 to B-345.
[Housing]
z Housing A
THK also offers Housing A for a separate motor and Turnaround Housing A as options in order to
support a motor bracket or a turnaround section that the customer individually manufactures.
z Housing A for a Separate Motor
By using the fitting difference, the user can easily mount a separately manufactured motor bracket.
Fitting difference
Outer rail
Housing A
z Turnaround Housing A
Since the mounting holes are drilled in constant pitches, the user can select how to mount the motor
bracket.
°
90
A-434
Options
Motor Bracket
Motor Wrap Type (for Reference)

Motor wrap types are available that allow the motor to be turned around in order to minimize the
dimension in the longitudinal direction. Contact THK for details. (Pulley ratio: 1:1)
XY Bracket (for Reference)

Brackets for installing models KR33 and 46 only are available as standard. The brackets use alumi-

num to reduce the weights and keep the inertia as low as possible.
A-435
Precautions on Use LM Guide Actuator
Precautions on Using Models KR/SKR

[Handling]
(2) Dropping or hitting the product may damage it. Giving an impact to the product could also cause
damage to its function even if the product looks intact.
[Lubrication]
(5) When adopting oil lubrication, contact THK in advance.
(6) To maximize the performance, lubrication is required. Using the product without lubrication may
increase wear of the rolling elements or shorten the service life. In normal use, the lubricant must
be replenished every 100 km as a guide. However, the greasing interval varies according to the
conditions. We recommend determining the greasing interval based on the result of the initial
inspection. For clean room applications, low dust generative AFF Grease is available. Contact
THK for details.
(1) Entrance of foreign material may cause damage to the ball circulating component or functional
(2) When planning to use the product in an environment where the coolant penetrates the nut block,
contact THK in advance.
(3) The service temperature range of this product is 0 to 40℃ (no freezing or condensation). If you
consider using this product outside the service temperature range, contact THK.
(4) Exceeding the dangerous speed may lead the components to be damaged or cause an acci-
dent. Be sure to use the product within the specification range designated by THK.
[Safety precautions]
(1) If the product is operating or in the ready state, never touch a moving part. In addition, do not
enter the operating area of the actuator.
(2) If two or more people are involved in the operation, confirm the procedures such as a sequence,
signs and anomalies in advance, and appoint another person for monitoring the operation.
[Storage]
When storing the product, enclose it in a package designated by THK and store it in a horizontal ori-
entation while avoiding high temperature, low temperature and high humidity.
A-436
LM Actuator
General Catalog
Model GL Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table

Structure and features....................... A-438 Model GL........................................... B-347
• Feature of the LM Actuator Model GL .. A-438 • Ball Screw Drive Type
Structure and features .................... A-438 Long table type of model GL15 ........ B-348
• Types of the LM Actuator Model GL .... A-440 Short table type of model GL15 ........ B-349
Types and Features........................ A-440 Long table type of model GL20 ........ B-350
Short table type of model GL20 ........ B-351
Point of Selection .............................. A-442
• Load Rating ..................................... A-442 • Belt Drive Type
• Maximum Travel Speed .................... A-443 Long table type of model GL15 ........ B-352
• Accuracy Standards.......................... A-443 Short table type of model GL15 ........ B-353
Long table type of model GL20 ........ B-354
Options.............................................. A-444 Short table type of model GL20 ........ B-355
• Cover ............................................. A-444
• Bellows ........................................... A-445 • Model Number Coding ...................... B-356
• Endplate ......................................... A-445
• Sensor ............................................ A-445 Options............................................. B-358
• Plate Nut for Mounting the Base ......... A-445 • Bellows ........................................... B-358
• Endplate ......................................... B-362
Precautions on Use........................... A-446 • Plate Nut for Mounting the Base ......... B-362
A-437
Structure and Features LM Actuator
Feature of the LM Actuator Model GL

Support unit supported side Cover
Nut bracket
Aluminum table
Timing pulley & pulley mounting base

Support unit fixed side
Cover
Timing belt
LM Guide model GSR Aluminum table
Aluminum base Belt fixing-plate
Rolled Ball Screw
Endplate Endplate
Case
Ball Screw Drive Type Aluminum base
LM Guide model GSR
Belt Drive Type
Fig.1 Structures of the Ball Screw Drive Type of Model GL and the Belt Drive Type of Model GL

Model GL is a single-axis actuator that allows a ball screw drive or a belt drive to be integrated with
an aluminum base on which the LM Guide model GSR is mounted. For the ball screw drive type of
model GL, several ball screw leads are available to select from. The belt drive type of model GL sup-
ports a long stroke.
Model GL is used mainly in conveyance-related applications.
A-438
Feature of the LM Actuator Model GL
[Drive Methods are Selectable]

With model GL, two drive types are available to select from: a ball screw drive type and a belt drive
type
• Ball screw specifications Table1 Ball Screw Leads by Model Numbers
Different ball screw leads are selectable for Ball Screw lead (mm)
each model number.
GL 15 5, 16, 30
GL 20 5, 20, 40
• Belt drive type
Since it uses a highly rigid belt (wire woven), Table2 Pitch Circle Diameter of the Timing Pulley
LM Actuator
this type excels in high speed operation, and Pitch circle diameter (P.C.D) (mm)
is not subject to restriction by dangerous
GL 15 35.01
speed as opposed to ball screw type. There-
fore , it supports a longer stroke (up to 2720 GL 20 38.20
mm for model GL20) than ball screw type. In Note) When using AC servomotor drive, we recommend
addition, this type uses a timing pulley with also using a reducer. For details, contact THK.
different pitch circle diameter according to the
model number.
[Lightweight, High Rigidity]
The base using an extruded aluminum material has a hollow sectional shape, thus achieving light-
weight and high rigidity.
Table3 Geometrical Moment of Inertia and Mass of the Aluminum Base
Geometrical moment of inertia Mass

IX (mm4) IY (mm4) (kg/1000mm)
GL15 2.0×105 2.7×106 5.1

GL20 4.62×10 5
4.62×106 6.8
GL15
GL20
Fig.2 Cross Section of the Aluminum Base
A-439
Types of the LM Actuator Model GL
Types and Features
[Ball Screw Drive Type]
Long Table
This type has 4 units of LM Guide model GSR --- T
(long type) attached with a dedicated table.
Short Table
This type has 4 units of LM Guide model GSR --- V
(short type) attached with a dedicated table.
A-440
Types of the LM Actuator Model GL
[Belt Drive Type]
LM Actuator
Long Table
This type has 4 units of LM Guide model GSR --- T
(long type) attached with a dedicated table.
Short Table
This type has 4 units of LM Guide model GSR --- V
(short type) attached with a dedicated table.
A-441
Point of Selection LM Actuator
Load Rating
The following table shows the load ratings of the LM Guide, the Ball Screw and the support bearing
0
used in model GL, which will help select a specific GL model.

[LM Guide Unit] Table1 Load Rating of an LM Guide
Model GL uses LM Guide model GSR for its Basic dynamic Basic static
guide unit. Model No. load rating load rating
C (kN) C0 (kN)
Table1 shows the load ratings of the LM Guide
model GSR used in model GL. GSR 15V 4.31 5.59
GL 15
GSR 15T 5.69 8.43
GSR 20V 7.01 8.82
GL 20
GSR 20T 9.22 13.2
[Ball Screw Unit] Table2 Load Ratings of the Ball Screw Unit
The ball screw drive type of model GL uses a Basic dynamic Basic static
THK Ball Screw for its ball screw unit. Model No. load rating load rating
Ca (kN) C0a (kN)
Table2 shows the load ratings of the ball screw
used in the ball screw drive type of model GL. BTK1605-2.6ZZ 5.4 13.3
GL 15 BLK1616-3.6ZZ 10.5 25.9
WTF1530-2ZZ 5.6 12.4
BTK2005-2.6ZZ 6 16.5
GL 20 BLK2020-3.6ZZ 7.7 22.3
WTF2040-2ZZ 5.4 13.6
[Support Bearing Unit] Table3 Load Ratings of and the Static Permissible Load of
The ball screw drive type of model GL uses a the Support Bearing Unit
THK Ball Screw for its ball screw unit. Basic dynamic Static permissible
Model No. load rating load
Table3 shows the load ratings of the ball screw P0a (N)
Ca (N)
used in the ball screw drive type of model GL.
GL 15 GK 10 6080 2100
GL 20 GK 12 6660 2200
A-442
Point of Selection
Maximum Travel Speed
Maximum Travel Speed

The maximum travel speed of the ball screw Table4 Maximum Travel Speed Unit: mm/sec
drive type of model GL is limited by the DN Base GL 15 GL 20
value of and the dangerous speed of the ball length Lead (mm) Lead (mm)
(mm) 5 16 30 5 20 40
screw regardless of the maximum rotation
speed of the motor. 340 248 1120 2220 — — —
460 248 1120 2220 203 740 2247
580 248 1120 2220 203 740 2247
700 248 1120 2220 203 740 2247
LM Actuator
820 248 1120 2120 203 707 2247
1060 203 667 1145 203 382 2127
1240 141 464 795 180 265 1480
1420 104 341 585 133 195 1087
1600 — — — 102 150 833
1780 — — — 81 118 660
Accuracy Standards
The accuracy of model GL is defined in terms of positioning repeatability.
t1
ing point and obtain the value of half the maxi- t2
the center and both ends of the travel distance, t3
mum difference with symbol "± " as positioning
repeatability. Fig.1 Positioning Repeatability
Table5 Accuracy of Each Model Unit: mm
Model No.
Drive method
GL 15 GL 20
Ball screw ± 0.02 ±0.02
Belt ± 0.08 ±0.08
A-443
Options LM Actuator
Various types of options are available for model GL. Select an appropriate model according to your
0
application.
Reference
Name page Overview
Cover A-444 Serve as contamination protection accessories or the

Bellows A-445 likes
Endplate A-445 For ball screw drive type

Sensor A-445 Proximity sensor, photo sensor
Plate nut for mounting the base A-445 Used for securing the base mounting bolt
Cover
Cover
For model GL, a cover is available for contamination protection from entering the top face.
0
Fig.1 Outline Drawing of the Cover

* Greater the base length, the greater the defection of the cover. To prevent the cover from deflecting, attach a cover support
on the table (see figure below). The cover is attached as standard for models with a base length of 1060 mm or longer.
Cover support
Model GL15 Model GL20

Cross section of the cover support
A-444
Options
Bellows
Bellows
●For dimensions of the bellows, see B-358 to B-361.
For model GL, a bellows is available for contamination protection in addition to a cover.
0
Endplate
Endplate
LM Actuator (Options)
●For detailed dimensions, see B-362.
With the ball screw drive type of model GL, the end plate on the motor mounting side is machined
0
according to the motor used. Indicate the motor to be used when placing an order to THK.
Sensor
Sensor
Various types of sensors can be mounted for model GL. Contact THK for details.
0
GXL-N12F TL-W3MC1 EE-SX671
GXL-N12F (SUNX)
Proximity sensor
TL-W3MC1 (Omron)
Photo micro sensor EE-SX671 (Omron)
Plate Nut for Mounting the Base

Plate nut for mounting the base
For model GL, a plate nut for mounting the base is available. It is attached as standard when mode
0
GL is delivered.
A-445
Precautions on Use LM Actuator
[Handling]
(1) Disassembling parts may cause foreign material to enter the system or deteriorate the accuracy.
Do not disassemble the product.
(2) Dropping or hitting the LM Actuator model GL may damage it. Giving an impact to the Slide Rail
could also cause damage to its function even if the product looks intact.
[Lubrication]
uum and low/high temperature, normal lubricants may not be used. Contact THK for details. For
clean room applications, low dust-generative grease is available. Contact THK for details.
(5) To maximize the performance of the LM Actuator model GL, lubrication is required. Using the
product without lubrication may increase wear of the rolling elements or shorten the service life.
(6) In normal use, the lubricant must be replenished every 100 km as a guide. However, the greas-
ing interval varies according to the conditions. We recommend determining the greasing interval
based on the result of the initial inspection.
(2) When planning to use the LM system in an environment where the coolant penetrates the LM
Actuator model GL, it may cause trouble to product functions depending on the type of the cool-
ant. Contact THK for details.
(3) The service temperature range of this product is 0 to 40℃ (no freezing or condensation). If you
consider using this product outside the service temperature range, contact THK.
(4) When using the LM system in locations exposed to constant vibrations or in special environ-
ments such as clean rooms, vacuum and low/high temperature, contact THK in advance.
(5) Exceeding the permissible rotational speed may lead the components to be damaged or cause
an accident. Be sure to use the product within the specification range designated by THK.
[Safety precautions]
(1) If the product is operating or in the ready state, never touch a moving part. In addition, do not
enter the operating area of the actuator.
(2) If two or more people are involved in the operation, confirm the procedures such as a sequence,
signs and anomalies in advance, and appoint another person for monitoring the operation.
[Storage]
When storing the LM Actuator model GL, enclose it in a package designated by THK and store it in a
horizontal orientation while avoiding high temperature, low temperature and high humidity.
A-446
Ball Spline
General Catalog
A-447
Ball Spline
General Catalog
Features and Types................................ A-450 • Spline shaft ............................................. A-499

Features of the Ball Spline .................... A-450
• Structure and features .............................. A-450 Rotary Ball Spline With Support Bearing type
Classification of Ball Splines ................ A-452 Model LTR,and LTR-A ............................ A-500
• Structure and features .............................. A-500
Point of Selection ................................... A-454 • Types and Features ................................. A-502
Flowchart for Selecting a Ball Spline....... A-454 • Service Life ............................................. A-503
• Steps for Selecting a Ball Spline ................ A-454 • Clearance in the Rotation Direction ............ A-503
• Selecting a Type...................................... A-456 • Accuracy Standards ................................. A-503
• Studying the Spline Shaft Strength ............. A-458 • Housing Inner-diameter Tolerance ............. A-503
• Predicting the Service Life ........................ A-465 • Spline shaft ............................................. A-503
Selecting a Preload ................................ A-479
• Clearance in the Rotation Direction ............ A-479 Point of Design ....................................... A-504
• Preload and Rigidity ................................. A-479 Checking List for Spline Shaft End Shape ..... A-504
• Conditions and Guidelines for Selecting of a Preload ... A-480 Housing Inner-diameter Tolerance ....... A-505
Determining the Accuracy ..................... A-482 Positions of the Spline-nut
• Accuracy grade ....................................... A-482 Keyway and Mounting Holes ............. A-505
• Accuracy Standards ................................. A-482
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance.... A-506
High Torque Type Ball Spline Assembling the Ball Spline ................... A-506
Model LBS, LBST, LBF, LBR and LBH . A-484 • Mounting the Spline ................................. A-506
• Structure and features .............................. A-484 • Installing the Spline Nut ............................ A-508
• Applications ............................................ A-485 • Installation of the Spline Shaft ................... A-508
• Types and Features ................................. A-486
• Service Life............................................. A-489 Options .................................................... A-509
• Clearance in the Rotation Direction ............ A-489 Lubrication .............................................. A-509
• Accuracy Standards ................................. A-489 Material, surface treatment.................... A-509
• Housing Inner-diameter Tolerance ............. A-489 Contamination Protection...................... A-509
• Spline shaft............................................. A-489 • Specifications of the Bellows ..................... A-510
• Accessories ............................................ A-489
Precautions on Use ................................ A-511
Medium Torque Type Ball Spline • Handling ................................................. A-511
Models LT and LF ................................... A-490 • Lubrication .............................................. A-511
• Structure and features .............................. A-490 • Precautions on Use .................................. A-511
• Types and Features ................................. A-492 • Storage .................................................. A-512
• Service Life............................................. A-494 • Other ..................................................... A-512
• Clearance in the Rotation Direction ............ A-494
• Housing Inner-diameter Tolerance ............. A-494
• Spline shaft............................................. A-494
• Accessories ............................................ A-494
Rotary Ball Spline With Geared type

Models LBG and LBGT .......................... A-496
• Structure and features .............................. A-496
• Service Life............................................. A-499
A-448
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table

Model LBS, LBF, LBH, LBST and LBR .... B-367
• Miniature Ball Spline ................................ B-368
• Model LBS (Medium Load Type) ............... B-370
• Model LBST (Heavy Load Type) ................ B-372
• Model LBF (Medium Load Type)................ B-374
• Type LBR ............................................... B-376
• Type LBH ............................................... B-378
• Model LBS with Recommended Shaft End Shape .. B-380
• Spline shaft ............................................ B-381

• Accessories ............................................ B-384

Models LT and LF ............................... B-385
• Model LT................................................ B-386
• Model LF................................................ B-388
• Model LT with Recommended Shaft End Shape . B-390
• Spline shaft ............................................ B-391

• Accessories ............................................ B-393

Models LBG and LBGT ...................... B-395
• Type LBG............................................... B-396
• Model LBG ............................................. B-398
• Spline shaft ............................................ B-400
Rotary Ball Spline With Support Bearing type

Model LTR,and LTR-A ........................ B-403
• Models LTR-A Compact type .................... B-404
• Model LTR ............................................. B-406
• Spline shaft ............................................ B-408
Maximum Manufacturing Length by Accuracy ... B-410
A-449
Features and Types Ball Spline
Features of the Ball Spline
Seal
Spline shaft
Spline nut
Ball
Retainer
Snap ring
Model LBS
Seal
Ball
Retainer
Spline nut
Snap ring
Spline shaft
Model LT
Fig.1 Structure of Ball Spline Models LBS and LT

The Ball Spline is an innovative linear motion system in which balls accommodated in the spline nut
transmit torque while linearly moving on precision-ground raceways on the spline shaft.
Unlike the conventional structure, a single spline nut can provide a preload with THK's Ball Spline. As
a result, the Ball Spline demonstrates high performance in environments subject to vibrations and
impact loads, locations where a high level of positioning accuracy is required or areas where high-
speed kinetic performance is required.
In addition, even when used as an alternative to a linear bushing, the Ball Spline achieves a rated
load more than 10 times greater than the linear bushing with the same shaft diameter, allowing it to
compactly be designed and used in locations where an overhung load or a moment load is applied.
Thus, the Ball Spline provides a high degree of safety and long service life.
A-450
Features and Types
Features of the Ball Spline
Ball Spline
A-451
Classification of Ball Splines
Ball Spline
High Torque Type Medium Torque Type
Standard Type Long Type
Cylindrical Type Cylindrical Type Cylindrical Type

Model LBS Model LBST Model LT
Intermediate
Flanged Type Flange Type Flanged Type
Model LBF Model LBR Model LF
Square Nut Type

Model LBH
A-452
Features and Types
Classification of Ball Splines
Rotary Type
Ball Spline
With Geared Type With Support Bearing Type

Model LBG Model LTR
With a Thrust
Raceway Type Compact Type
Model LBGT Model LTR-A
A-453
Point of Selection Ball Spline
Flowchart for Selecting a Ball Spline

0
Steps for Selecting a Ball Spline

The following is a flowchart as a measuring stick for selecting a Ball Spline.
Selection Starts
1 Setting Conditions
Stroke length: Ls Required service life
Velocity: V Dimensions (No.of spline nuts, span)
Magnitude of the applied load: W Installation direction
Mounting space Environment
Operating frequency (duty cycle) Accuracy
2 Selecting a Type
Select a type that meets the conditions from the classification
table for Ball Splines and temporarily decide a rough size. A-456 to A-457
3 Examining Strength of the Spline Shaft A-458 to A-464

Estimating the spline shaft diameter Permissible load on the spline shaft
Estimating the spline shaft length Displacement of the spline shaft (deflection, torsion)
Method for fixing the spline shaft
4 Predicting the Service Life

Calculate the applied load and obtain the
nominal life from the life calculation formula. A-465 to A-478
Comparison with the

NO
YES
5 Selecting a Preload Select a clearance in the rotational direction. A-479 to A-481
6 Determining the Accuracy Select an accuracy grade A-482 to A-483
7 Selection According to the Environment A-509

Determining a lubricant Determining a surface treatment
Determining a lubrication method Designing contamination protection
Selection Completed
A-454
Point of Selection
Ball Spline
A-455
Selecting a Type
There are three types of the Ball Spline: high torque type, medium torque type and rotary type. You
can choose a type according to the intended use. In addition, wide arrays of spline nut shapes are
available for each type, enabling the user to choose a desired shape according to the mounting or
service requirements.
Classification Type Shape Shaft diameter
Nominal shaft
Type LBS
diameter
Type LBST
6 to 150mm
Nominal shaft
High torque type
Type LBF diameter

15 to 100mm
Nominal shaft
Type LBR diameter
15 to 100mm
Nominal shaft
Type LBH diameter
15 to 50mm
Nominal shaft
Medium torque type
Type LT diameter
4 to 100mm
Nominal shaft
Type LF diameter
6 to 50mm
Rotation
Nominal shaft
Type LBG
diameter
Type LBGT
20 to 85mm
Rotary type
Rotation
Nominal shaft
Type LTR-A
diameter
Type LTR
8 to 60mm
*For specification tables for each model, please see the separate "B Product Specifications".
A-456
Point of Selection
Specification Table* Structure and features Major application
B-368
z The spline shaft has three crests equidis-
Ball Spline
tantly formed at angles of 120°. On both
z Column and arm of industrial robot
sides of each crest, two rows (six rows in
z Automatic loader
total) of balls are arranged to hold the crest
z Transfer machine
from both sides. The angular-contact design
B-374 z Automatic conveyance system
of the ball contact areas allows an appropri-
z Tire molding machine
ate preload to be evenly applied.
z Spindle of spot-welding machine
z Since the balls circulate inside the spline nut,
z Guide shaft of high-speed automatic coating
the outer dimensions of the spline nut are
machine
compactly designed.
z Riveting machine
z Even under a large preload, smooth straight
z Wire winder
B-376 motion is achieved.
z Work head of electric discharge machine
z Since the contact angle is large (45° ) and the
z Spindle drive shaft of grinding machine
displacement is minimal, high rigidity is
z Speed gears
achieved.
z Precision indexing machine
z No angular backlash occurs.
z Capable of transmitting a large torque.
B-378
z Die-set shaft and simi- z Column and arm of

lar applications requir- industrial robot
z The spline shaft has two to three crests. On ing straight motion z Spot-welding
B-386 under a heavy load
both sides of each crest, two rows (four to six z Loading system and machine
rows in total) of balls are arranged to hold the similar applications z Riveting machine
crest from both sides. This design allows an requiring rotation to a z Book-binding
appropriate preload to be evenly applied. given angle at a fixed machine
z The contact angle of 20° and an appropriate position z Automatic filler
preload level eliminate angular backlash, z Automatic gas-welding z XY recorders
B-388 machine spindle and
providing high-torque moment rigidity. similar applications z Automatic spinner
requiring a whirl-stop z Optical measuring
on one shaft instrument
z A unit type that has the same contact struc-

ture as model LBS. The flange circumference
on the spline nut is machined to have gear
B-396 z Speed gears for high torque transmission
teeth, and radial and thrust needle bearings
are compactly combined on the circumfer-
ence of the spline nut.
z A lightweight and compact type based on

model LT, but has a spline nut circumference z Z axis of scalar robot
B-404
machined to have angular-contact type ball z Wire winder
raceways to accommodate support bearings.
A-457
Studying the Spline Shaft Strength
The spline shaft of the Ball Spline is a compound shaft capable of receiving a radial load and torque.
When the load and torque are large, the spline shaft strength must be taken into account.
[Spline Shaft Receiving a Bending Load]
When a bending load is applied to the spline
shaft of a Ball Spline, obtain the spline shaft
diameter using the equation (1) below.
M
M = σ•Z and Z= …………
（1）
σ
M : Maximum bending moment acting
M: Bending
on the spline shaft (N-mm)
moment
σ : Permissible bending stress of the
spline shaft (98N/mm2)
Z : Modulus section factor of the
spline shaft (mm3)
(see Table3 on A-463 and Table4
on A-464)
[Spline Shaft Receiving a Torsion Load]

When a torsion load is applied on the spline
shaft of a Ball Spline, obtain the spline shaft
diameter using the equation (2) below.
T T: Torsion moment
T = τa• ZP and ZP = …………（2）
τa
T : Maximum torsion moment (N-mm)
τa : Permissible torsion stress of the
spline shaft (49N/mm2)
Zp : Polar modulus of section of the
spline nut (mm3)
on A-464)
A-458
Point of Selection
[When the Spline Shaft Simultaneously Receives a Bending Load and a Torsion Load]
When the spline shaft of a Ball Spline receives a bending load and a torsion load simultaneously, cal-
culate two separate spline shaft diameters: one for the equivalent bending moment (Me) and the
other for the equivalent torsion moment (Te). Then, use the greater value as the spline shaft diame-
ter.
Equivalent bending moment
2 2
M+ M +T M T 2
Me = = 1+ 1+ …………（3）
2 2 M
Me = σ • Z
Ball Spline
Equivalent torsion moment
2 2 T 2
Te = M + T = M• 1 + …………（4）
M
Te = τ a • Zp
[Rigidity of the Spline Shaft]

The rigidity of the spline shaft is expressed as a
torsion angle per meter of shaft length. Its value
should be limited within 1° /4.
T•L
θ = 57.3 …………（5） L
G • IP
Torsion angle θ・l 1°

Rigidity of the shaft = = < A θ
Unit length L 4 B
θ : Torsion angle (° ) B'

L : Spline shaft length (mm)
G : Transverse elastic modulus
(7.9×104N/mm2)
l : Unit length (1000mm)
Ip : Polar moment of inertia (mm4)
on A-464)
A-459
[Deflection and Deflection Angle of the Spline Shaft]
The deflection and deflection angle of the Ball Spline shaft need to be calculated using equations that
meet the relevant conditions. Table1 and Table2 represent these conditions and the corresponding
equations.
Table3 and Table4 (A-463 and A-464) show the modulus section (Z) and the geometrical moments
of inertia (I) of the spline shaft. Using Z and I values in the tables, the strength and displacement
(deflection) of a typical Ball Spline model can be obtained.
Table1 Deflection and Deflection Angle Equations
Support
Condition Deflection equation Deflection angle equation
method
l /2
i i
δmax
Both 1 =0
P
Pl
2 3
ends
δmax = Pl
i
2
free
48EI =
l
2
16EI
l /2
Both
i
δmax
=0
Pl
1
ends P 3
fas- δmax =
tened
l
192EI i 2 =0
i
δmax
pl
Both Uniform load p
5p l
3
i
2 4
ends =
free δmax = 2
24EI
l 384EI
δmax
Both Uniform load p

ends pl i
4
fas- δmax = 2 =0
tened 384EI
l
A-460
Point of Selection
Table2 Deflection and Deflection Angle Equations

Support
Condition Deflection equation Deflection angle equation
method
δmax
One Pl
2
end
P
Pl
3
i 1 =
fas- δmax = 2EI
l
i
tened 3EI
1 i 2 =0
Ball Spline
δmax
Pl
One Uniform load p 3
end Pl
4
i 1 =
fas- δmax = 6EI
tened 8EI
l
i1 i 2 =0
M0 l
l /2 i
δmax
=
δmax
i
1
Both
3M0 l
M0 2 12EI
ends 1
δmax =
free
i M0 l
l 2
216EI
i 2 =
24EI
δmax
l /2 M0 l
Both
i
δmax
ends
fas-
i 1
M0
δmax =
M0 l
2 1 =
16EI
tened
l
216EI
i 2 =0
δ max: Maximum deflection(mm) i : Deflection angle at supporting point

2
M0: Moment(N-mm) P: Concentrated load(N)

l : Span (mm) p: Uniform load(N/mm)
I: Geometrical moment of inertia(mm4) E: Modulus of longitudinal elasticity 2.06×105
i 1: Deflection angle at loading point (N/mm2)
A-461
[Dangerous Speed of the Spline Shaft]
When a Ball Spline shaft is used to transmit
power while rotating, as the rotational speed of
Fixed Free
the shaft increases, the rotation cycle nears the
natural frequency of the spline shaft. It may
cause resonance and eventually result in inabil-
ity to move. Therefore, the maximum shaft
speed must be limited to a level that does not
cause resonance. If the shaft's rotation cycle Fixed - free
exceeds or nears the resonance point during
operation, it is necessary to reconsider the
spline shaft diameter. The critical speed of the
spline shaft is obtained using the equation (6)
below, in which the value is multiplied by a
safety factor of 0.8.
z Critical Speed Supported Supported
2 3
60λ E 10 •I
Nc = 2 • 0.8 …（6）
2π • l b γ•A
Nc : Dangerous speed (min-1)
l b : Distance between two mounting surfaces Supported - supported
(mm)
I : Minimum geometrical moment of
inertia of the shaft (mm4)
π Fixed
I ＝ d 4 d: Minor diameter (mm) Supported
64
(see Table7 and Table8 on A-468)
γ : Density (specific gravity)

(7.85×10-6kg/mm3)
Fixed - supported
π
A ＝ d 2 d: Minor diameter (mm)
4
A : Spline shaft cross-sectional area (mm2)

λ : Factor according to the mounting method Fixed Fixed
(1)Fixed - free λ =1.875
(2)Supported - supported λ=3.142
(3)Fixed - supported λ =3.927
(4)Fixed - fixed λ =4.73
Fixed - fixed
A-462
Point of Selection
[Cross-sectional Characteristics of the Spline Shaft]

z Cross-sectional Characteristics of the Spline Shaft for Ball Spline Models LBS, LBST,
LBF, LBR, LBH, LBG and LBGT
Table3 Cross-sectional Characteristics of the Spline Shaft for Models LBS, LBST, LBF, LBR, LBH, LBG and LBGT
I: Geometrical Z: Modulus IP: Polar ZP: Section
Nominal shaft diameter moment of inertia section momentof inertia modulus
mm4 mm3 mm4 mm3
6 Solid shaft 50.6 17.8 1.03×102 36.2
8 Solid shaft 1.64×10 2
42.9 3.35×10 2
87.8
10 Solid shaft 3.32×102 73.0 6.80×102 1.50×102
15 Solid shaft 1.27×103 2.00×102 2.55×103 4.03×102
Ball Spline
Solid shaft 3.82×103 4.58×102 7.72×103 9.26×102
20
Hollow shaft 3.79×10 3
4.56×10 2
7.59×10 3
9.11×102
Solid shaft 9.62×103 9.14×102 1.94×104 1.85×103
25
9.05×10 2
1.90×10 4
1.81×103
Solid shaft 1.87×104 1.50×103 3.77×104 3.04×103
30
1.44×10 3
3.57×10 4
2.88×103
Solid shaft 6.17×104 3.69×103 1.25×105 7.46×103
40
3.42×10 3
1.14×10 5
6.84×103
Solid shaft 1.49×105 7.15×103 3.01×105 1.45×104
50
Hollow shaft 1.34×105 6.46×103 2.69×105 1.29×104
Solid shaft 3.17×10 5
1.26×10 4
6.33×10 5
2.53×104
60
Hollow shaft 2.77×105 1.11×104 5.54×105 2.21×104
1.97×10 4
1.16×10 6
3.99×104
70
Hollow shaft 5.07×105 1.74×104 1.01×106 3.49×104
3.69×10 4
2.62×10 6
7.32×104
85
Hollow shaft 1.11×106 3.10×104 2.22×106 6.20×104
6.25×10 4
5.33×10 6
1.25×105
100
Hollow shaft 2.18×106 5.10×104 4.37×106 1.02×105
1.13×10 5
1.18×10 7
2.26×105
120
Hollow shaft 5.28×106 1.01×105 1.06×107 2.02×105
2.40×10 5
3.20×10 7
4.76×105
150
Hollow shaft 1.40×107 2.08×105 2.79×107 4.16×105
Note) For the hole-shape of the hollow spline shaft, see B-381 and B-400.
A-463
z Cross-sectional Characteristics of the Spline Shaft for Ball Spline Models LT, LF, LTR
and LTR-A
Table4 Cross-sectional Characteristics of the Spline Shaft for Models LT, LF, LTR and LTR-A
I: Geometrical Z: Modulus IP: Polar ZP: Section
Nominal shaft diameter moment of inertia section moment of inertia modulus
mm4 mm3 mm4 mm3
4 Solid shaft 11.39 5.84 22.78 11.68
5 Solid shaft 27.88 11.43 55.76 22.85
Solid shaft 57.80 19.7 1.19×102 40.50
6
Hollow shaft Type K 55.87 18.9 1.16×102 39.20
Solid shaft 1.86×102 47.4 3.81×102 96.60
8
Hollow shaft Type K 1.81×102 46.0 3.74×102 94.60
Solid shaft 4.54×102 92.6 9.32×102 1.89×102
10
Hollow shaft Type K 4.41×102 89.5 9.09×102 1.84×102
2.09×10 2
2.70×10 3
4.19×102
13
Hollow shaft Type K 1.29×10 3
2.00×10 2
2.63×10 3
4.09×102
Solid shaft 3.09×103 3.90×102 6.18×103 7.80×102
16 Type K 2.97×103 3.75×102 5.95×103 7.51×102
Hollow shaft
Type N 2.37×103 2.99×102 4.74×103 5.99×102
7.67×10 2
1.52×10 4
1.53×103
20 Type K 7.12×103 7.18×102 1.42×104 1.43×103
Hollow shaft
Type N 5.72×103 5.77×102 1.14×104 1.15×103
Solid shaft 1.86×104 1.50×103 3.71×104 2.99×103
25 Type K 1.75×10 4
1.41×10 3
3.51×10 4
2.83×103
Hollow shaft
Type N 1.34×10 4
1.08×10 3
2.68×10 4
2.16×103
Solid shaft 3.86×104 2.59×103 7.71×104 5.18×103
30 Type K 3.53×104 2.37×103 7.07×104 4.74×103
Hollow shaft
Type N 2.90×104 1.95×103 5.80×104 3.89×103
3.15×10 3
9.90×10 4
6.27×103
32 Type K 4.50×104 2.83×103 8.87×104 5.61×103
Hollow shaft
Type N 3.64×104 2.29×103 7.15×104 4.53×103
Solid shaft 1.22×105 6.14×103 2.40×105 1.21×104
40 Type K 1.10×10 5
5.55×10 3
2.17×10 5
1.10×104
Hollow shaft
Type N 8.70×10 4
4.39×10 3
1.71×10 5
8.64×103
Solid shaft 2.97×105 1.20×104 5.94×105 2.40×104
50 Type K 2.78×105 1.12×104 5.56×105 2.24×104
Hollow shaft
Type N 2.14×10 5
8.63×10 3
4.29×10 5
1.73×104
2.07×10 4
1.23×10 6
4.14×104
60
Hollow shaft Type K 5.56×105 1.90×104 1.13×106 3.79×104
Solid shaft 1.95×106 4.91×104 3.90×106 9.82×104
80
9.62×10 4
9.56×10 6
1.92×105
100
Note) For the hole-shape of the hollow spline shaft.
For type K: see B-391 and B-408.
For type N: see B-391 and B-408.
A-464
Point of Selection
Predicting the Service Life

[Nominal Life]
The service life of a Ball Spline varies from unit
to unit even if they are manufactured through Pc N
the same process and used in the same operat- Tc N•m
ing conditions. Therefore, the nominal life
defined below is normally used as a guidepost
for obtaining the service life of a Ball Spline.
Nominal life is the total travel distance that 90%
of a group of identical ball splines independently
operating under the same conditions can
Ball Spline
achieve without showing flaking (scale-like
pieces on a metal surface).
[Calculating the Nominal Life]
The nominal life of a Ball Spline varies with types of loads applied during operation: torque load,
radial load and moment load. The corresponding nominal life values are obtained using the equa-
tions (7) to (10) below. (The basic load ratings in these loading directions are indicated in the specifi-
cation table for the corresponding model number.)
z When a Torque Load is Applied
fT • fC CT 3
L= • 50 ………（7）
fW TC
z When a Radial Load is Applied
f T • fC C 3
L= • 50 ………（8）
fW PC
CT : Basic dynamic torque rating (N-m)
TC : Calculated torque applied (N-m)
PC : Calculated radial load (N)
(see Fig.1 on A-467)
fC : Contact factor
(see Table5 on A-467)
A-465
z When a Torque Load and a Radial Load are Simultaneously Applied
When a torque load and a radial load are simultaneously applied, calculate the nominal life by obtain-
ing the equivalent radial load using the equation (9) below.
3
4•TC 10
PE = P C +
i
• dp• cosα
………（9）
PE : Equivalent radial load (N)

i
cosα : Contact angle =Number of rows of balls under a load
Type LBSα =45° i=2(LBS10 or smaller)

i=3(LBS15 or greater)
Type LTα =70° i=2(LT13 or smaller)
i=3(LT16 or greater)
dp : Ball center-to-center diameter (mm)
z When a Moment Load is Applied to a Single Nut or Two Nuts in Close Contact with
Each Other
Obtain the equivalent radial load using the equation (10) below.
Pu = K•M ………（10）
Pu : Equivalent radial load (N)

(with a moment applied)
K : Equivalent Factors (see Table9 on A-471, Table10 on A-472)
However, M should be within the range of the static permissible moment.
z When a Moment Load and a Radial Load are Simultaneously Applied
Calculated the nominal life from the sum of the radial load and the equivalent radial load.
z Calculating the Service Life Time
When the nominal life (L) has been obtained in the equation above, if the stroke length and the num-
ber of reciprocations per minute are constant, the service life time is obtained using the equation (11)
below.
3
L 10
Lh = ………（11）
2 lS n1 60
l S : Stroke length (m)
(opm)
A-466
Point of Selection
fT:Temperature Factor
ing the operating Ball Spline exceeds 100 ℃ , 1.0
take into account the adverse effect of the high 0.9
temperature and multiply the basic load ratings
0.8
by the temperature factor indicated in Fig.1.
In addition, the Ball Spline must be of a high 0.7
temperature type. 0.6
Note) If the environment temperature exceeds 80 ℃ , high- 0.5
tem-perature types of seal and retainer are required.
ContactTHK for details.
100 150 200
Ball Spline
fC: Contact Factor

When multiple spline nuts are used in close con- Table5 Contact Factor (fc)
tact with each other, their linear motion is Number of spline nuts in close
Contact factor fc
affected by moments and mounting accuracy, contact with each other
making it difficult to achieve uniform load distri- 2 0.81
bution. In such applications, multiply the basic 3 0.72
load rating (C) and (C0) by the corresponding
4 0.66
contact factor in Table5.
Note) If uneven load distribution is expected in a large 5 0.61
machine, take into account the respective contact fac-
tor indicated in Table5. Normal use 1
fW: Load Factor

In general, reciprocating machines tend to Table6 Load Factor (fw)
Speed(V) fw
tion and impact during frequent start and stop. Faint 1 to 1.2
V≦0.25m/s
When loads applied on a Ball Spline cannot be
Slow
measured, or when speed and impact have a Weak 1.2 to 1.5
0.25<V≦1m/s
significant influence, divide the basic load rating
Medium
(C or C0), by the corresponding load factor in the Medium 1.5 to 2
1<V≦2m/s
table of empirically obtained data on Table6.
High
Strong 2 to 3.5
V>2m/s
A-467
Table7 Sectional Shape of the Spline Shaft for Models LBS, LBST, LBF, LBR, LBH, LBG and LBGT
Unit: mm
Nominal shaft
15 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 85 100 120 150
diameter
Minor
11.7 15.3 19.5 22.5 31 39 46.5 54.5 67 81 101 130
diameter φ d
Outer
14.5 19.7 24.5 29.6 39.8 49.5 60 70 84 99 117 147
diameter φ D0
Ball
center-to-center 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 85 100 120 150
diameter φ dp
* The minor diameter φ d must be a value at which no groove is left after machining.
φd
φ D0
φ dp
Table8 Sectional Shape of the Spline Shaft for Models LT, LF, LTR and LTR-A Unit: mm
Nominal shaft
4 5 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 30 32 40 50 60 80 100
diameter
Minor
3.5 4.5 5 7 8.5 11.5 14.5 18.5 23 28 30 37.5 46.5 56.5 75.5 95
diameter φ d
Outer
4 5 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 30 32 40 50 60 80 100
diameter φ D0
Ball
center-to-center 4.6 5.7 7 9.3 11.5 14.8 17.8 22.1 27.6 33.2 35.2 44.2 55.2 66.3 87.9 109.5
diameter φ dp
Outer
diameter 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
– 0.012 – 0.015 – 0.018 – 0.021 – 0.025 – 0.03 – 0.035
tolerance
φd
φ D0 φ D0
φd
φ dp
φ dp
Nominal shaft diameter: 13 mm or less Nominal shaft diameter: 16 mm or more
A-468
Point of Selection
[Calculating the Average Load]

When the load applied on the spline shaft fluctuates according to varying conditions, such as an
industrial robot arm traveling forward while holding a workpiece and traveling backward with empty
weight, and a machine tool handling various workpieces, this varying load condition must be taken
into account in service life calculation.
The average load (Pm) is a constant load under which the service life of an operating Ball Spline with
its spline nut receiving a fluctuation load in varying conditions is equivalent to the service life under
this varying load condition.
The following is the basic equation.
Pm : Average Load (N)
n
3
1 Pn : Varying load (N)
Pm = •
L n=1
∑ 3
(Pn • Ln)
Ball Spline
Ln : Distance traveled under Pn (mm)
z When the Load Fluctuates Stepwise
3
1 3 3 3
Pm = (P1 •L1 + P2 •L2 ••••••+ Pn •Ln) …………（1）
L
Pm : Average Load (N)
Pn : Varying load (N)
L : Total travel distance (m)
Ln : Distance traveled under load Pn (m)
P1
Pm
P2
Load (P)
Pn
L1 L2 Ln

Fig.2
A-469
z When the Load Fluctuates Monotonically
1
Pm (Pmin + 2•Pmax) …………（2）
3
Pmin : Minimum load (N)
Pmax : Maximum load (N)
Pmax
Pm
Load (P)
Pmin
Fig.3
z When the Load Fluctuates Sinusoidally

(a) Pm 0.65Pmax …………（3） (b) Pm 0.75Pmax …………（4）
Pmax
Pmax
Pm Pm
Load (P)
Load (P)

Fig.4
A-470
Point of Selection
[Equivalent Factor]
Table9 below and Table10 on A-472 show equivalent radial load factors calculated under a moment
load.
z Table of Equivalent Factors for Ball Spline Model LBS
Table9
M A1 Equivalent factor: K
Model No.
Single spline nut Two spline nuts in close
contact with each other
LBS 6 0.61 0.074
LBS 8 0.46 0.060
LBS 10 0.54 0.049
Ball Spline
LBS 15 0.22 0.022
LBS 20 0.24 0.03
LBST 20 0.17 0.027
LBS 25 0.19 0.026
LBST 25 0.14 0.023
M A2
LBS 30 0.16 0.022
LBST 30 0.12 0.02
LBS 40 0.12 0.017
LBST 40 0.1 0.016
LBS 50 0.11 0.015
LBST 50 0.09 0.014
LBS 60 0.08 0.013
LBS 70 0.1 0.013
LBST 70 0.08 0.012
LBS 85 0.08 0.011
LBST 85 0.07 0.01
LBS 100 0.08 0.009
LBST 100 0.06 0.009
LBST 120 0.05 0.008
LBST 150 0.045 0.006
Note1) Values of equivalent factor K for model LBF are the

same as that for model LBS.
Note2) Values of equivalent factor K for models LBR, LBG,
LBGT and LBH are the same as that for model
LBST.
However the values of model LBF60 are the same as
that for model LBST60.
The values of model LBH15 are the same as that for
model LBS15.
A-471
z Table of Equivalent Factors for Ball Spline Model LT
Table10
Equivalent factor: K
M A.1 Model No.
Single spline nut Two spline nuts in close
LT 4 0.65 0.096
LT 5 0.55 0.076
LT 6 0.47 0.06
LT 8 0.47 0.058
LT 10 0.31 0.045
LT 13 0.3 0.042
LT 16 0.19 0.032
LT 20 0.16 0.026
M A.2 LT 25 0.13 0.023

LT 30 0.12 0.02
LT 40 0.088 0.016
LT 50 0.071 0.013
LT 60 0.07 0.011
LT 80 0.062 0.009
LT100 0.057 0.008
Note) Values of equivalent factor K for model LF are the

same as that for model LT.
A-472
Point of Selection
[Example of Calculating the Service Life]

z Example of Calculation - 1
An industrial robot arm (horizontal)
[Conditions]
Mass applied to the arm end m=50kg Arm length at maximum stroke Lmax=400mm
Stroke l S=200mm L2=325mm
Spline nut mounting span (estimate)L1=150mm L3=50mm
Lmax
Spline nut 1 P2
A
Ball Spline
m
P1 Spline nut 2
L2 L1
L3
A arrow view (The Ball Spline type is LBS in this example.)

Fig.5
Shaft Strength Calculation

Calculate the bending moment (M) and the torsion moment (T) applied on the shaft.
M=m×9.8×Lmax =196000N-mm
T=m×9.8×L3 = 24500N-mm
Since the bending and torsion moments are applied simultaneously, obtain the corresponding bend-
ing moment (Me) and torsion moment (Te), and then determine the shaft diameter based on the
greater value. From equations (3) and (4) on A-459,
2 2
M+ M +T
Me = ≒ 196762.7N · mm
2
2 2
Te = M +T ≒ 197525.3N · mm
Me ＜ Te
∴Te = τa×ZP Hence,

Te 3
ZP = ≒ 4031mm
τa
Thus, judging from Table3 on A-463, the nominal shaft diameter that meets Zp is at least 40 mm.
A-473
Average Load Pm
Obtain an applied load value when the arm is extended to the maximum length (Pmax), and another
when the arm is contracted (Pmin). Based on the values obtained, calculate the average load on the
spline shaft nut.
m × 9.8（L1+L2）
P1max ＝ ≒ 1551.7N
L1
m × 9.8 × L2
P2max ＝ ≒ 1061.7N
L1
When the arm is contracted
〔(L2– l S) + L1〕
m × 9.8 ×
P1min = ≒ 898.3N
L1
m × 9.8 × (L2 – l S)
P2min = ≒ 408.3N
L1
As this load is monotonically varying as shown in the Fig.3 on A-470, calculate the average load
using the equation (2) on A-470.
The average load (P1m) on spline nut 1
1
P1m ≒ (P1min + 2P1max) = 1333.9N
3
The average load (P2m) on spline nut 2
1
P2m ≒ (P2min + 2P2max) = 843.9N
3
Obtain the torque applied on one spline nut.
m × 9.8 × L3
T= = 12250N•mm
2
Since the radial load and the torque are simultaneously applied, calculate the equivalent radial load
using equation (9) on A-466.
4×T
P1E = P1m + = 1911.4N
3 × dp × cosα
4×T
P2E = P2m + = 1421.4N
3 × dp × cosα
Nominal Life Ln
Based on the nominal life equation (8) on A-465, each nominal life is obtained as follows.
3
Nominal life of the spline nut L1 = ( f ×f f

T
W
C
× )
C
P1E
× 50 = 68867.4km
3
f ×f
=(
P )
T C C
Nominal life of the spline nut L2 × × 50 = 167463.2km
f W 2E
A-474
Point of Selection
fT: Temperature factor = 1 (from Fig.1 on A-467)

fC: Contact factor = 1 (from Table5 on A-467)
fW: Load factor = 1.5 (from Table6 on A-467)
C: Basic dynamic load rating = 31.9 kN (model LBS40)
Given the nominal life obtained for each spline nut above, the nominal life of the Ball Spline unit is
equal to that of spline nut 1, which is 68867.4km.
z Example of Calculation - 2
[Conditions]
Thrust position: FS Distance from the thrust position to each mass
Stroke velocity: Vmax = 0.25m/sec l 1=200mm l 2=500mm
Acceleration: a=0.36m/sec2 (from the respective l 3=1276mm
Ball Spline
velocity diagram) Cycle (1 cycle: 30 sec)
Stroke: S=700mm 1. Descent (3.5sec) 2.Dwell (1sec): with a work
Housing mass: m1=30kg 3. Ascend (3.5sec) 4.Dwell (7sec)
Arm mass : m2=20kg 5. Descent (3.5sec) 6.Dwell (1sec): without a work
Head mass: m3=15kg 7. Ascend (3.5sec) 8.Dwell (7sec)
Work mass: m4=12kg
l1
（m/sec）
0.25
l3
l2
m1
（sec）
t m3
0.7 2.1 0.7

l1 S
m2
3.5
Velocity diagram
FS
m4
(The Ball Spline type is LBF in this example.)
Fig.6
A-475
Shaft Strength Calculation
Calculate the shaft strength while assuming the shaft diameter to be 60 mm. (with double spline nut
in contact with each other)
Calculating the Moment (Mn) Applying on the Spline Nut during Acceleration, Uniform
Motion and Deceleration with Different Masses (mn)
Applied moment during deceleration: M1
a
M1 = mn 9.8 1 ln ………(a)
g
Applied moment during uniform motion: M2
M2 = mn 9.8 ln ………(b)
Applied moment during deceleration: M3

a
M3 = mn 9.8 1 ln ………(c)
g
mn: Mass (kg)
a : Acceleration (m/sec2)
g : Gravitational acceleration(m/sec2)
l n : Offset from each loading point to the trust center(mm)
Assume:
a a
A= 1+( g ), B= 1– ( g )
z During descent
From equation (c), during acceleration
Mm1 =m1×9.8×B×l 1+m2×9.8×B×(l 1+l 2)+m3×9.8×B×(l 1+l 3)
=398105.01N-mm
From equation (b), during uniform motion
Mm2 =m1×9.8×l 1+m2×9.8×(l 1+l 2)+m3×9.8×(l 1+l 3)
=412972N-mm
From equation (a), during deceleration
Mm3 =m1×9.8×A×l 1+m2×9.8×A×(l 1+l 2)+m3×9.8×A×(l 1+l 3)
=427838.99N-mm
z During ascent
From equation (a), during acceleration
Mm1' =m1×9.8×A×l 1+m2×9.8×A×(l 1+l 2)+m3×9.8×A×(l 1+l 3)
=427838.99N-mm
Mm2' =m1×9.8×l 1+m2×9.8×(l 1+l 2)+m3×(l 1+l 3)
=412972N-mm
A-476
Point of Selection
From equation (c), during deceleration

Mm3' =m1×9.8×B×l 1+m2×9.8×B×(l 1+l 2)+m3×9.8×B×(l 1+l 3)
=398105.01N-mm
z During descent (with a work loaded)
From equation (c), during acceleration
Mm1'' =Mm1+m4×9.8×B×(l 1+ l 3)
=565433.83N-mm
Mm2'' =Mm2+m4×9.8×(l 1+ l 3)
=586549.6N-mm
From equation (a), during deceleration
Mm3'' =Mm3+m4×9.8×A×(l 1 + l 3)
Ball Spline
=607665.37N-mm
z During ascent (with a work loaded)
From equation (a), during acceleration
Mm1''' =Mm1'+m4×9.8×A×(l 1+l 3)
=607665.37N•mm
Mm2''' =Mm2'+m4×9.8×(l 1+l 3)
=586549.6N-mm
From equation (c), during deceleration
Mm3''' =Mm3'+m4×9.8×B×(l 1+l 3)
=565433.83N-mm
∴M1=Mm1=Mm3'=398105.01N-mm
M2=Mm2=Mm2'=412972N-mm
M3=Mm3=Mm1'=427838.99N-mm
M1'=Mm1''=Mm3'''=565433.83N-mm
M2'=Mm2''=Mm2'''=586549.6N-mm
M3'=Mm3''=Mm1'''=607665.37N-mm
A-477
Calculating the Equivalent Radial Load Considered to be Applied to the Spline Nut with Different Moments
Relational expression between moment Mn and Pn
Calculate the equivalent radial load with differ-
Pn = M n K ………(d)
ent applied moments using equation (d).
Pn : Equivalent radial load (N) Pm1 = Pm3' = M1×0.013≒5175.4N
Mn : Applied moment (N-mm) Pm2 =Pm2'=M2×0.013≒5368.6N
K : Equivalent factor (from Table9 to A-471) Pm3 = Pm1' = M3×0.013≒5561.9N
(If two spline nuts of LBF60 contact with Pm1'' = Pm3''' = M1'×0.013≒7350.7N
each other, K = 0.013) Pm2'' = Pm2''' = M2'×0.013≒7625.2N
Pm3'' = Pm1''' = M3'×0.013≒7899.7N
Pm1'' Pm3'''
Pm2'' Pm2'''
Pm3'' Pm1'''
Pm3 Pm1'
Pm2 Pm2'
Pm1 Pm3'
S1 S2 S3 S1'' S2'' S3'' S1''' S2''' S3''' S1' S2' S3'

Sa Sb SC Sd
Descent Ascent Descent Ascent
P1 = Pm1 = Pm3' ≒5175.4N P4 = Pm1'' = Pm3''' ≒7350.7N S = Sa = Sb = Sc = Sd = 700mm

P2 = Pm2 = Pm2' ≒5368.6N P5 = Pm2'' = Pm2''' ≒7625.2N S1 = S1 = S1' = S1'' = S1''' = 87.5mm
P3 = Pm3 = Pm1' ≒5561.9N P6 = Pm3'' = Pm1''' ≒7899.7N S2 = S2 = S2' = S2'' = S2''' = 525mm
S3 = S3 = S3' = S3'' = S3''' = 87.5mm
Calculating the Average Load Pm
Using equation (1) on A-469,
1 3
3 3 3 3 3 3
Pm = 〔 2 { (P1 ×S1) + (P2 ×S2) + (P3 ×S3) } + 2{ (P4 ×S3) + (P5 ×S2) + (P6 ×S1) } 〕
4×S
≒ 6689.5N
Calculating the Rated Life L from the Average Load
Using equation (8) on A-465,
fT : Temperature factor = 1
fT · fC C 3
(
L = •
fW Pm ) × 50
fC
(from Fig.1 on A-467)
: Contact factor=0.81
(from Table5 on A-467)
= 7630km
fW : Load factor=1.5
(from Table6 on A-467)
C : Basic dynamic load rating = 66.2 kN
(model LBF60)
Given the result above, the nominal life of model LBF60 with double spline nuts used in close contact
with each other is 7,630 km.
A-478
Point of Selection
Selecting a Preload
Selecting a Preload
A preload on the Ball Spline significantly affects its accuracy, load resistance and rigidity. Therefore,
it is necessary to select the most appropriate clearance according to the intended use.
Specific clearance values are standardized for each model, allowing you to select a clearance that
meets the conditions.
Clearance in the Rotation Direction

With the Ball Spline, the sum of clearances in
Clearance in the rotational direction (BCD)
the circumferential direction is standardized as
the clearance in the rotational direction. For
Ball Spline
models LBS and LT, which are especially suit-
able for transmission of rotational torque, clear-
ances in the rotational directions are defined.
Fig.7 Measurement of Clearance in the Rotational Direction
Preload and Rigidity

Preload is defined as the load preliminarily
applied to the ball in order to eliminate angular
Rotation angle (tanθ )
backlash (clearance in the rotational direction)

and increase rigidity. When given a preload, the 2i0
Normal clearance
Ball Spline is capable of increasing its rigidity by
Clearance CL
eliminating the angular backlash according to i0
the magnitude of the preload. Fig.8 shows the Clearance CM
displacement in the rotational direction when a
0
rotational torque is applied. 0 T0 2.8T0
Thus, the effect of a preload can be obtained up Torque (N•m)
to 2.8 times that of the applied preload. When T0: Applied preload
given the same rotational torque, the displace-
Fig.8
ment when a preload is applied is 0.5 or less of
that without a preload. The rigidity with a pre-
load is at least twice greater than that without a
preload.
A-479
Conditions and Guidelines for Selecting of a Preload
Table11 provides guidelines for selecting a clearance in the rotational direction with given conditions
of the Ball Spline.
The rotational clearance of the Ball Spline significantly affects the accuracy and rigidity of the spline
nut. Therefore, it is essential to select a correct clearance according to the intended use. Generally,
the Ball Spline is provided with a preload. When it is used in repeated circular motion or reciprocating
straight motion, the Ball Spline is subject to a large vibration impact, and therefore, its service life and
accuracy are significantly increased with a preload.
Table11 Guidelines for Selecting a Clearance in the Rotational Direction for the Ball Spline
Clearance in the
Condition Examples of applications
rotation direction
z Smooth motion with a small force is desired. • Measuring instruments
z A torque is always applied in the same direction. • Automatic drafting machine
• Geometrical measuring equip-
ment
Normal grade
• Dynamometer
(No symbol)
• Wire winder
• Automatic welding machine
• Main shaft of horning machine
• Automatic packing machine
z An overhang load or moment load is present. • Industrial robot arm
z High positioning accuracy is required. • Automatic loaders
z Alternating load is applied. • Guide shaft of automatic coating
Light preload machine
(CL) • Main shaft of electric discharge
machine
• Guide shaft for press die setting
• Main shaft of drilling machine
z High rigidity is required and vibrations and impact are • Steering shaft of construction
applied. vehicle
Medium preload
z Receives a moment load with a single spline nut. • Shaft of spot-welding machine
(CM)
• Indexing shaft of automatic lathe
tool rest
〔x10−4 〕〔x10−4 〕
40 40
LT30
30 30 LT30
20 20
LBS30 LBS30
10 10
0 0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 0 25 50 75 100 125 150
Torque (N•m) Torque (N•m)
Fig.9 Comparison between LBS and LT for Zero Clearance Fig.10 Comparison between LBS and LT for Clearance CL
A-480
Point of Selection
Selecting a Preload
Table12 Clearance in the Rotational Direction for Models LBS, LBF, LBST, LBR and LBH Unit: μ m
Symbol Normal Light preload Medium preload

Nominal shaft diameter No Symbol CL CM
6 8 – 2 to +1 – 6 to – 2 —
10 15 – 3 to +2 – 9 to – 3 – 15 to – 9
20 25 30 – 4 to +2 – 12 to – 4 – 20 to – 12
40 50 60 – 6 to +3 – 18 to – 6 – 30 to – 18
70 85 – 8 to +4 – 24 to – 8 – 40 to – 24
100 120 – 10 to +5 – 30 to – 10 – 50 to – 30
Ball Spline
150 – 15 to +7 – 40 to – 15 – 70 to – 40
Table13 Clearance in the Rotational Direction for Models LT and LF Unit: μ m

4 5 6 8 10 13 – 2 to +1 – 6 to – 2 —
16 20 – 2 to +1 – 6 to – 2 – 9 to – 5
25 30 – 3 to +2 – 10 to – 4 – 14 to – 8
40 50 – 4 to +2 – 16 to – 8 – 22 to – 14
60 80 – 5 to +2 – 22 to – 12 – 30 to – 20
100 – 6 to +3 – 26 to – 14 – 36 to – 24
Table14 Clearance in the Rotational Direction for Models LBG and LBGT Unit: μ m

20 25 30 – 4 to +2 – 12 to – 4 – 20 to – 12
40 50 60 – 6 to +3 – 18 to – 6 – 30 to – 18
70 85 – 8 to +4 – 24 to – 8 – 40 to – 24
Table15 Clearance in the Rotational Direction for Model LTR Unit: μ m

8 10 – 2 to +1 – 6 to – 2 —
16 20 – 2 to +1 – 6 to – 2 – 9 to – 5
25 32 – 3 to +2 – 10 to – 4 – 14 to – 8
40 50 – 4 to +2 – 16 to – 8 – 22 to – 14
60 – 5 to +2 – 22 to – 12 – 30 to – 20
A-481
Accuracy Grades
The accuracy of the Ball Spline is classified into three grades: normal grade (no symbol), high accu-
racy grade (H) and precision grade (P), according to the runout of spline nut circumference in relation
to the support of the spline shaft. Fig.11 shows measurement items.
Table 17 A Table 16 AB Table 17 B
Table 18 A Spline nut Table 18 B

A B
Mounting part Mounting part

Supporting portion Splined portion Supporting portion
Table 19 AB
Fig.11 Accuracy Measurement Items of the Ball Spline
Accuracy Standards
Table16 to Table19 show measurement items of the Ball Spline.
Table16 Runout of the Spline Nut Circumference in Relation to the Support of the Spline Shaft Unit: μ m
Accuracy Runout(max)
Nominal shaft
diameter
4 to 8 Note 10 13 to 20 25 to 32 40, 50 60 to 80 85 to 120 150
Overall spline
shaft length (mm)
Precision
Precision
Precision
Precision
Precision
Precision
Precision
Precision
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Above Or less
— 200 72 46 26 59 36 20 56 34 18 53 32 18 53 32 16 51 30 16 51 30 16 — — —
200 315 133 (89) — 83 54 32 71 45 25 58 39 21 58 36 19 55 34 17 53 32 17 — — —
315 400 — — — 103 68 — 83 53 31 70 44 25 63 39 21 58 36 19 55 34 17 — — —
400 500 — — — 123 — — 95 62 38 78 50 29 68 43 24 61 38 21 57 35 19 46 36 19
500 630 — — — — — — 112 — — 88 57 34 74 47 27 65 41 23 60 37 20 49 39 21
630 800 — — — — — — — — — 103 68 42 84 54 32 71 45 26 64 40 22 53 43 24
800 1000 — — — — — — — — — 124 83 — 97 63 38 79 51 30 69 43 24 58 48 27
1000 1250 — — — — — — — — — — — — 114 76 47 90 59 35 76 48 28 63 55 32
1250 1600 — — — — — — — — — — — — 139 93 — 106 70 43 86 55 33 80 65 40
1600 2000 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 128 86 54 99 65 40 100 80 50
2000 2500 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 156 — — 117 78 49 125 100 68
2500 3000 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 143 96 61 150 129 84
Note) Dimensions in parentheses do not apply to nominal shaft diameter of 4.

Note) Applicable to models LBS, LBST, LBF, LBR, LT and LF.
A-482
Point of Selection
Table17 Perpendicularity of the Spline Shaft End Face in Relation to the Support of the Spline Shaft Unit: μ m
Accuracy Perpendicularity (max)

Nominal shaft diameter Normal grade (No symbol) High accuracy grade (H) Precision Grade (P)
4 5 6 8 10 22 9 6
13 15 16 20 27 11 8
25 30 32 33 13 9
40 50 39 16 11
60 70 80 46 19 13
85 100 120 54 22 15
Ball Spline
150 63 25 18
Table18 Concentricity of the Part-mounting in Relation to the Support of the Spline Shaft Unit: μ m
Accuracy Concentricity (max)

4 5 6 8 33 14 8
10 41 17 10
13 15 16 20 46 19 12
25 30 32 53 22 13
40 50 62 25 15
60 70 80 73 29 17
85 100 120 86 34 20
150 100 40 23
Table19 Straightness of the Flange-mounting Surface of the Spline Nut in Relation to the Support of the Spline Shaft
Unit: μ m
Accuracy Perpendicularity (max)

6 8 27 11 8
10 13 33 13 9
15 16 20 25 30 39 16 11
40 50 46 19 13
60 70 80 85 54 22 15
100 63 25 18
Note) This table does not apply to models LBG, LBGT, LTR and LTR-A.
A-483
Model LBS, LBF, LBH, LBST and LBR

0
Models LBS, LBF, LBH, LBST and LBR
Seal
Spline shaft
Spline nut
Ball
Retainer
Snap ring
Fig.1 Structure of High Torque Type Ball Spline Model LBS

With the high torque type Ball Spline, the spline shaft has three crests positioned equidistantly at
120°, and along both sides of each crest, two rows of balls (six rows in total) are arranged so as to
hold the crest, as shown in Fig.1.
The raceways are precision ground into R-shaped grooves whose diameters are approximate to the
ball diameter. When a torque is generated from the spline shaft or the spline nut, the three rows of
balls on the load-bearing side evenly receive the torque, and the center of rotation is automatically
determined. When the rotation reverses, the remaining three rows of balls on the unloaded side
receive the torque.
The rows of balls are held in a retainer incorporated in the spline nut so that they smoothly roll and
circulate. With this design, balls will not fall even if the spline shaft is removed from the nut.
[No Angular Backlash]
With the high torque type Ball Spline, a single spline nut provides a preload to eliminate angular
backlash and increase the rigidity.
Unlike conventional ball splines with circular-arc groove or Gothic-arch groove, the high torque type
Ball Spline eliminates the need for twisting two spline nuts to provide a preload, thus allowing com-
pact design to be achieved easily.
A-484
[High Rigidity and Accurate Positioning]

Since this model has a large contact angle and provides a preload from a single spline nut, the initial
displacement is minimal and high rigidity and high positioning accuracy are achieved.
[High-speed Motion, High-speed Rotation]
Adoption of a structure with high grease retention and a rigid retainer enables the ball spline to oper-
ate over a long period with grease lubrication even in high-speed straight motion. Since the distance
in the radius direction is almost uniform between the loaded balls and the unloaded balls, the balls
are little affected by the centrifugal force and smooth straight motion is achieved even during high-
speed rotation.
[Compact Design]
Unlike conventional ball splines, unloaded balls do not circulate on the outer surface of the spline nut
with this model. As a result, the outer diameter of the spline nut is reduced and a space-saving and
Ball Spline
compact design is achieved.
[Ball Retaining Type]
Use of a retainer prevents the balls from falling even if the spline shaft is pulled out of the spline nut.
[Can be Used as a Linear Bushing for Heavy Loads]
Since the raceways are machined into R grooves whose diameter is almost equal to the ball diame-
ter, the contact area of the ball is large and the load capacity is large also in the radial direction.
[Double, Parallel Shafts can be Replaced with a Single Shaft]
Since a single shaft is capable of receiving a load in the torque direction and the radial direction, dou-
ble shafts in parallel configuration can be replaced with a single-shaft configuration. This allows easy
installation and achieves space-saving design.
Applications
The high torque type Ball Spline is a reliable straight motion system used in a wide array of applica-
tions such as the columns and arms of industrial robot, automatic loader, transfer machine, auto-
matic conveyance system, tire forming machine, spindle of spot welding machine, guide shaft of
high-speed automatic coating machine, riveting machine, wire winder, work head of electric dis-
charge machine, spindle drive shaft of grinding machine, speed gears and precision indexing shaft.
A-485
Types and Features
[Types of Spline Nuts]

Cylindrical Type Ball Spline Model LBS (Medium Load Type) Specification Table⇒B-368
The most compact type with a straight cylindri-
cal spline nut. When transmitting a torque, a key
is driven into the body. The outer surface of the
spline nut is provided with anti-carbonation
treatment.
Cylindrical Type Ball Spline Model LBST (Heavy Load Type) Specification Table⇒B-372
A heavy load type that has the same spline nut
diameter as model LBS, but has a longer spline
nut length. It is optimal for locations where the
space is small, a large torque is applied, and an
overhang load or moment load is applied.
Flanged Type Ball Spline Model LBF Specification Table⇒B-374

The spline nut can be attached to the housing
via the flange, making assembly simple. It is
optimal for locations where the housing may be
deformed if a keyway is machined on its sur-
face, and where the housing width is small.
Since it allows a dowel pin to be driven into the
flange, angular backlash occurring in the fitting
can completely be eliminated.
A-486
Flanged Type Ball Spline Model LBR Specification Table⇒B-376

Based on the heavy load type model LBST, this
model has a flange in the central area, making
itself optimal for locations under a moment load
such as arms of industrial robots.
Ball Spline
Rectangular Type Ball Spline Model LBH Specification Table⇒B-378
Its rigid rectangular spline nut does not require a
housing and can be directly mounted on the
machine body. Thus, a compact, highly rigid lin-
ear guide system is achieved.
A-487
[Types of Spline Shafts]
Precision Solid Spline Shaft (Standard Type)
The spline shaft is cold-drawn and its raceway is
precision ground. It is used in combination with
a spline nut.
Special Spline Shaft

THK manufactures a spline shaft with thicker
ends or thicker middle area through special pro-
cessing at your request.
Hollow Spline Shaft (Type K)

A drawn, hollow spline shaft is available for
requirements such as piping, wiring, air-vent
and weight reduction.
A-488
Service Life

Accuracy Standards
Ball Spline
Housing Inner-diameter Tolerance
When fitting the Ball Spline with the housing, tight fitting is normally recommended. If the accuracy of
the Ball Spline does not need to be very high, clearance fitting is also acceptable.
Table1 Housing Inner-diameter Tolerance
General conditions H7
Housing Inner-diameter
Tolerance When clearance
J6
needs to be small
Spline Shaft
Spline shafts are divided in shape into precision solid spline shaft, special spline shaft and hollow
spline shaft (type K), as described on A-488.
For details, see B-381 to B-383.
Accessories
Ball Spline models LBS and LBST are provided with a standard key.
For detailed dimensions, see B-384.
A-489
Models LT and LF
0
Models LT and LF
Ball
Spline nut
Snap ring
Seal
Retainer
Spline shaft
Fig.1 Structure of Medium Torque Type Ball Spline Model LT

With the medium torque type Ball Spline, the spline shaft has two to three crests on the circumfer-
ence, and along both sides of each crest, two rows of balls (four or six rows in total) are arranged to
hold the crest so that a reasonable preload is applied.
The rows of balls are held in a special resin retainer incorporated in the spline nut so that they
smoothly roll and circulate. With this design, balls will not fall even if the nut is removed from the
spline shaft.
[Large Load Capacity]
The raceways are formed into circular-arc grooves approximate to the ball curvature and ensure
angular contact. Thus, this model has a large load capacity in the radial and torque directions.
Two rows of balls facing one another hold a crest, formed on the circumference of the spline nut, at a
contact angle of 20° to provide a preload in an angular-contact structure. This eliminates an angular
backlash in the rotational direction and increases the rigidity.
A-490
[High Rigidity]
Since the contact angle is large and an appropriate preload is given, high rigidity against torque and
moment is achieved.
[Ball Retaining Type]
Use of a retainer prevents the balls from falling even if the spline shaft is pulled out of the spline nut.
(except for models LT4 and 5)
Ball Spline
A-491
Types and Features

Cylindrical Type Ball Spline Model LT Specification Table⇒B-386
The most compact type with a straight cylindri-
cal spline nut. When transmitting a torque, a key
is driven into the body.
Flanged Type Ball Spline Model LF Specification Table⇒B-388

The spline nut can be attached to the housing
via the flange, making assembly simple.
It is optimal for locations where the housing may
be deformed if a keyway is machined on its sur-
face, and where the housing width is small.
Since it allows a dowel pin to be driven into the
flange, angular backlash occurring in the fitting
can completely be eliminated.
A-492

Precision Solid Spline Shaft (Standard Type)
The raceway of the spline shaft is precision
ground. It is used in combination with a spline
nut.
Ball Spline
Special Spline Shaft
THK manufactures a spline shaft with thicker
ends or thicker middle area through special pro-
cessing at your request.
Hollow Spline Shaft (Type K)

Thick
Hollow Spline Shaft (Type N)

Thin
A-493
Service Life

Accuracy Standards

When fitting the Ball Spline with the housing, tight fitting is normally recommended. If the accuracy of
J6
needs to be small
Spline Shaft
spline shaft (types K and N), as described on A-493.
Accessories
Ball Spline model LT is provided with a standard key.
A-494
Ball Spline
A-495
Rotary Ball Spline
Rotary Ball Spline
With Geared type
Models LBG and LBGT
0
Models LBG and LBGT
Spline shaft
Gear
Outer ring
Thrust bearings
Radial bearings
Fig.1 Structure of Rotary Ball Spline Model LBG

With the Rotary Ball Spline, the spline shaft has three crests, and along both sides of each crest, two
rows of balls (six rows in total) are arranged to hold the crest so that a reasonable preload is applied.
These models are unit types based on model LBR, but have gear teeth on the flange circumference
and radial and thrust bearings on the spline nut, all compactly integrated.
The rows of balls are held in a special resin retainer so that they smoothly roll and circulate. With this
design, balls will not fall even if the spline shaft is removed.
The spline shaft has three crests positioned equidistantly at 120° and along both sides of each crest,
two rows of balls (six rows in total) are arranged so as to hold the crest at a contact angle of 45° and
provide a preload. As a result, backlash in the rotational direction is eliminated and the rigidity is
increased.
[Compact Design]
The spline nut is compactly integrated with radial and thrust bearings, allowing compact design to be
achieved.
A-496
Rotary Ball Spline
[High Rigidity]
moment is achieved.
Use of needle bearings in the support unit achieves a rigid nut support strong against a radial load.
[Optimal for Torque Transmission with Spline Nut Drive]
Since the support bearings allow a rigid nut support, these models are optimal for torque transmis-
sion with spline nut drive.
Ball Spline
A-497
Types and Features

Ball Spline with Gears Model LBG Specification Table⇒B-396
These models are unit types based on model
LBR, but have gear teeth on the flange circum-
ference and radial and thrust bearings on the
spline nut, all compactly integrated. It is optimal
for a torque transmission mechanism with spline
nut drive.
Without a thrust raceway
Ball Spline with Gears Model LBGT Specification Table⇒B-398

These models are unit types based on model
LBR, but have gear teeth on the flange circum-
ference and radial and thrust bearings on the
spline nut, all compactly integrated. It is optimal
for a torque transmission mechanism with spline
nut drive.
With a thrust raceway

A-498
Rotary Ball Spline
Service Life

Accuracy Standards
Ball Spline
Table1 shows housing inner-diameter tolerance for models LBG and LBGT.
J6
needs to be small
Spline Shaft
A-499
Rotary Ball Spline
Rotary Ball Spline
With Support Bearing Type
Models LTR and LTR-A
0
Seal
Outer ring
Ball
Flange outer ring
Seal
Retainer
Spline nut
Spacer
Retainer
Spline shaft
Fig.1 Structure of Rotary Ball Spline Model LTR

With the Rotary Ball Spline model LTR, the spline shaft has three crests on the circumference, and
along both sides of each crest, two rows of balls (six rows in total) are arranged to hold the crest so
that a reasonable preload is applied.
Angular-contact ball raceways are machined on the outer surface of the spline nut to constitute sup-
port bearings, allowing the whole body to be compactly and lightly designed.
The rows of balls are held in a special resin retainer so that they smoothly roll and circulate. With this
design, balls will not fall even if the spline shaft is removed.
In addition, a dedicated seal for preventing foreign material from entering the support bearings is
available.
Two rows of balls facing one another hold a crest, formed on the circumference of the spline nut, at a
contact angle of 20° to provide a preload in an angular-contact structure. This eliminates an angular
backlash in the rotational direction and increases the rigidity.
[Compact Design]
The spline nut is integrated with the support bearings, allowing highly accurate, compact design to be
achieved.
A-500
Rotary Ball Spline
[Easy Installation]
This ball spline can easily be installed by simply securing it to the housing using bolts.
[High Rigidity]
moment is achieved.
The support bearing has a contact angle of 30° to secure high rigidity against a moment load, thus to
achieve a rigid shaft support.
Model LTR-A, a compact type of LTR, has a contact angle of 45° .
Ball Spline
30° 30° 45° 45°
Model LTR Model LTR-A
A-501
Types and Features

Ball Spline Model LTR Specification Table⇒B-406
A compact unit type whose support bearings are
directly integrated with the outer surface of the
spline nut.
Ball Spline Model LTR-A Specification Table⇒B-404

A compact type even smaller than LTR.

A-502
Rotary Ball Spline
Service Life

Accuracy Standards
Ball Spline
For the housing inner-diameter tolerance for model LTR, class H7 is recommended.
Spline Shaft
A-503
Point of Design Ball Spline
Checking List for Spline Shaft End Shape

If desiring a ball spline type with its end specially machined, check the following items when placing
0
an order.
The diagram below shows a basic configuration of the Ball Spline.
k
e i e
n m a a m k k´
1.6 G j
j j´
1.6 1.6 1.6

G G G
12.5 12.5
0
+0.1
0´ 0
h´ ☆h h´ f´ f´
f´ g f
f
[Check Items]
a. Type of the spline nut to be fit j. Spline shaft end shape (thicker than the min-
b. Number of spline nuts imum spline diameter?) (black, mill scale)
c. Clearance in the rotation direction k. Positional relationship between the spline
d. Accuracy nut and the spline shaft end shape (keyway
e. With/without a seal (for a single seal, check of the spline nut, flange mounting hole)
its orientation) l. Indication of chamfering for each part
f. Overall length (including all dimensions? m. Shape of chamfer on the spline shaft end
Total value correct?) (see B-382)
g. Effective spline length n. Intended purpose of the though hole in the
h. Hardened area (mark the location with sym- spline shaft if any
bol ☆ and indicate the purpose of harden- o. o'. Snap ring groove
ing) p. Maximum length
i. Orientation of the flange (for flanged type) q. Precedented or not
A-504
Point of Design

When fitting the spline nut with the housing, tight fitting is normally recommended. If the accuracy of
Note) For the housing inner-diameter tolerance of Rotary
General conditions H7 Ball Spline model LTR, H7 is recommended.
J6
needs to be small
Positions of the Spline-nut Keyway and Mounting Holes

The keyways formed on the outer surface of straight nuts for Ball Spline models are positioned where
Ball Spline
balls under a load are placed as shown in Fig.1.
The flange-mounting holes of the flange types are positioned as shown in Fig.2.
When placing an order, indicate their positions in relation to the keyway or the like to be formed on
the spline shaft.
Model LT13 or smaller Model LT16 or greater

Model LBS Model LT
Fig.1 Positions of Keyways
Model LF13 or smaller Model LF16 or greater
Model LBF Model LF

Fig.2 Positions of Flange Mounting Holes
A-505
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance Ball Spline
Assembling the Ball Spline

0
Mounting the Spline

Fig.1 and Fig.2 shows examples of mounting the spline nut. Although the Ball Spline does not require
a large strength for securing it in the spline shaft direction, do not support the spline only with driving
fitting.
Straight nut type
Fig.1 Examples of Fitting the Spline Nut
A-506
Assembling the Ball Spline
Model LBH
Ball Spline
Flanged type
Model LTR
Pulley Pulley
Model LBG
Fig.2 Examples of Fitting the Spline Nut
A-507
Installing the Spline Nut
When installing the spline nut into the housing,
do not hit the side plate or the seal, but gently
insert it using a jig (Fig.3).
D-0.5
di
Fig.3
Table1 Dimensions of the Jig for Model LBS Unit: mm

Nominal
shaft 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 85 100 120 150
diameter
di 12.5 16.1 20.3 24.4 32.4 40.1 47.8 55.9 69.3 83.8 103.8 131.8
Table2 Dimensions of the Jig for Model LT Unit: mm

Nominal
shaft 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 30 40 50 60 80 100
diameter
di 5.0 7 8.5 11.5 14.5 18.5 23 28 37.5 46.5 56 75.5 94.5
Installation of the Spline Shaft

When installing the spline shaft into the spline
nut, identify the matching marks (Fig.4) on the Serial number
spline shaft and the spline nut, and then insert Matching mark Matching mark
the shaft straightforward while checking their Serial number
relative positions.
Note that forcibly inserting the shaft may cause
balls to fall off.
If the spline nut is attached with a seal or given a
preload, apply a lubricant to the outer surface of
Matching mark
the spline shaft.
Matching mark Matching mark
Fig.4
A-508
Options Ball Spline (Options)
Lubrication
To prevent foreign material from entering the spline nut and the lubricant from leaking, special syn-
0
thetic resin seals with high wear resistance are available for the Ball Spline.
Spline nuts with seals (seal for both ends type UU, and seal for one end) contain high-quality lithium-
soap group grease No. 2. However, if using them at high speed or with a long stroke, replenish
grease of the same type through the greasing hole on the spline nut after running in.
Afterward, replenish grease of the same type as necessary according to the service conditions.
The greasing interval differs depending on the conditions. Normally, replenish the lubricant (or
replace the product) roughly every 100 km of travel distance (six months to one year) as a rule of
Ball Spline (Options)

thumb.
For a Ball Spline model type without a seal, apply grease to the interior of the spline nut or to the
raceways of the spline shaft.
Material and Surface Treatment

Depending on the service environment, the Ball Spline requires anticorrosive treatment or a different
material. For details of anticorrosive treatment and material change, contact THK.
Entrance of dust or other foreign material into the spline nut will cause abnormal wear or shorten the
service life. Therefore, it is necessary to prevent detrimental foreign material from entering the Ball
Spline. When entrance of dust or other foreign material is predicted, it is important to select an effec-
tive sealing device or dust-control device that meets the environment conditions.
For the Ball Spline, a special synthetic rubber seal that is highly resistant to wear is available as a
contamination protection accessory. If desiring a higher contamination protection effect, a felt seal is
also available for some types. For details about the felt seal, contact THK.
In addition, THK produces round bellows. Contact us for details.
Table1 Contamination protection accessory symbol

No Symbol Without seal
Rubber seal attached on both ends of
UU
spline nut
Rubber seal attached on either end of
U
spline nut
Felt seal attached on both ends of spline
DD
nut
Felt seal attached on either end of spline
D
nut
Rubber seal attached on both ends of
ZZ
support bearings
Rubber seal attached on either end of
Z
support bearings
A-509
Specifications of the Bellows
Bellows are available as a contamination protection accessory. Use this specification sheet.
L MAX
MIN 4-φ
φ φ ID φ OD φ φ
MAX
MIN
(Band type) (Flange type)
Supported Ball Screw models:
Dimensions of the Bellows

Stroke: mm MAX: mm MIN: mm
Permissible outer diameter: φ OD Desired inner diameter: φ ID
How It Is Used
Installation direction:(horizontal, vertical, slant) Speed: ( )mm/sec. min.
Motion:(reciprocation, vibration)
Conditions
Resistance to oil and water: (necessary, unnecessary) Oil name
Chemical resistance: Name × ％
Location: (indoor, outdoor)
Remarks:
Number of Units To Be Manufactured:
A-510
Precautions on Use Ball Spline
[Handling]
0
(2) Tilting a spline nut or spline shaft may cause them to fall by their own weight.
(3) Dropping or hitting the Ball Spline may damage it. Giving an impact to the product could also
[Lubrication]
Ball Spline
(5) When adopting oil lubrication, the lubricant may not be distributed throughout the product
depending on the mounting orientation of the system. Contact THK for details.
(6) Lubrication interval varies according to the conditions. Contact THK for details.
(3) When planning to use the product in an environment where the coolant penetrates the spline
nut, it may cause trouble to product functions depending on the type of the coolant. Contact THK
for details.
(4) If foreign material adheres to the product, replenish the lubricant after cleaning the product.
(6) Do not remove the spline nut from the spline shaft unnecessarily. If you inevitably reassemble
the product, check the relative positions of the spline nut and the spline shaft by identifying the
matching marks on them. Be sure not to twist the spline nut and the spline shaft when inserting
the shaft into the nut. Forcibly inserting it may cause balls to fall. For a type equipped with seals,
apply a lubricant to the circumference of the shaft.
(7) When installing the spline shaft into the housing, do not hit the seal section or the stop ring sec-
tion. Doing so may cause malfunction.
(8) Giving a shock to the product may cause a functional loss. Do not drop the product or hit it with a
tool.
(9) Take care not to let the spline nut run on the incomplete spline section. Doing so may cause mal-
function.
A-511
[Storage]
When storing the Ball Spline, enclose it in a package designated by THK and store it in a horizontal
orientation while avoiding high temperature, low temperature and high humidity. If the product is
stored in an inappropriate position, the spline shaft could bend.
[Other]
If you have any trouble or question when handling the product, contact THK.
A-512
Spline Nut
General Catalog
Features ........................................... A-514 Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table.. B-411

Features of the Spline Nut ................ A-514 Model DPM ....................................... B-412
• Structure and features....................... A-514 Model DP .......................................... B-414
• Features of the Special Rolled Shafts .. A-515
• High Strength Zinc Alloy .................... A-515
• Clearance in the Rotation Direction ..... A-516

Selecting a Spline Nut....................... A-517
Point of Design................................ A-520

Fit ...................................................... A-520
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance... A-521

Installation ......................................... A-521
Lubrication......................................... A-521
A-513
Features Spline Nut
Features of the Spline Nut
Model DPM
Model DP

Spline Nut models DPM and DP are low price bearings that are made of a special alloy (see A-515)
formed by die casting and use highly accurate spline shafts as the core. Unlike conventional
machined spline nuts, the sliding surface of these models maintains a chill layer formed in the rolling
process, thus achieving high wear resistance.
The surface of the spline shafts to be used in combination with the nuts is hardened through rolling
and is mirror-finished. Accordingly, smooth sliding motion is achieved.
The specially designed teeth of the spline have large contact areas, as well as concentricity, which
enable the shaft to automatically establish the center as a torque is applied. Therefore, the teeth
demonstrate stable performance in transmitting a torque.
A-514
Features
Features of the Spline Nut
Features of the Special Rolled Shafts

Dedicated rolled shafts with standardized lengths are available for the Spline Nut.
[Increased Wear Resistance]
The shaft teeth are formed by cold gear rolling, and the surface of the tooth surface is hardened to
over 250 HV and mirror-finished. As a result, the shafts are highly wear resistant and achieve signifi-
cantly smooth motion when used in combination with nuts.
[Improved Mechanical Properties]
Inside the teeth of the rolled shaft, a fiber flow occurs along the contour of the tooth surface of the
shaft, making the structure around the teeth roots dense. As a result, the fatigue strength is
increased.
[Additional Machining of the Shaft End Support]
Spline Nut
Since each shaft is rolled, additional machining of the support bearing of the shaft end can easily be
performed by lathing or milling.
High Strength Zinc Alloy

The high strength zinc alloy used in the spline nuts is a material that is highly resistant to seizure and
wear and has a high load carrying capacity. Its composition, mechanical properties, physical proper-
ties and wear resistance are given below.
[Composition]
Table1 Composition of the High Strength Zinc Alloy
Unit: %
Item Description
Al 3 to 4
Cu 3 to 4
Mg 0.03 to 0.06
Be 0.02 to 0.06
Ti 0.04 to 0.12
Zn Remaining portion
A-515
[Mechanical Properties]
Item Description
Tensile strength 275 to 314 N/mm2
Tensile yield
216 to 245 N/mm2
strength (0.2%)
Compressive
539 to 686 N/mm2
strength
Compressive yield
294 to 343 N/mm2
strength (0.2%)
Fatigue strength 132 N/mm2×107 (Schenk bending test)
Charpy impact 0.098 to 0.49 N-m/mm2
Elongation 1 to 5 %
Hardness 120 to 145 HV
[Physical Properties]
Item Description
Specific gravity 6.8
Specific heat 460 J/ (kg•K)
Melting point 390 ℃
Thermal expansion
24×10-6
coefficient
[Wear Resistance]
[Test conditions: Amsler wear-tester]
80
Item Description
Wear loss (mg)
THK high strength zinc alloy
Test piece 60
185 min-1 Class-3 bronze
rotational speed
Class-3 brass
40
Load 392 N
Lubricant Dynamo oil 20
Class-2 phosphor bronze

0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Distance (km)
Fig.1 Wear Resistance of the High Strength Zinc Alloy

Clearance in the rotational direction: α≦20' MAX
A-516
Point of Selection Spline Nut
Selecting a Spline Nut

[Dynamic Permissible Torque T and Dynamic Permissible Thrust F]
0
The dynamic permissible torque (T) and the dynamic permissible thrust (F) are the torque and the
thrust at which the contact surface pressure on the tooth surface of the bearing is 9.8 N/mm2. These
values are used as a measuring stick for the strength of the spline nut.
[pV Value]
With a sliding bearing, a pV value, which is the
10
product of the contact surface pressure (p) and
7
the sliding speed (V), is used as a measuring
Surface pressure p (N/mm2)

5
stick to judge whether the assumed model can
Spline Nut
be used. Use the corresponding pV value indi- 3
cated in Fig.1 as a guide for selecting a spline 2
nut. The pV value also varies according to the
lubrication conditions. 1
0.7
0.5
0.3
0.2
1 2 3 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100
Sliding speed V (m/min)
Fig.1 pV Value
z fS: Safety Factor Table1 Safety Factor (fS)
To calculate a load applied to the spline nut, it is
necessary to accurately obtain the effect of the Type of load Lower limit of fS
inertia that changes with the weight and For a static load less frequently
1 to 2
dynamic speed of an object. In general, with used
reciprocating or rotating machines, it is not easy For an ordinary single-directional
2 to 3
to accurately obtain all the factors such as the load
effect of the start and stop, which are always For a load accompanied by vibra-
4 or greater
repeated. Therefore, if the actual load cannot be tions/impact
obtained, it is necessary to select a bearing
while taking into account the empirically
obtained safety factors (fS) shown in Table1.
A-517
z fT:Temperature Factor
If the temperature of the spline nut exceeds the 1.0
normal temperature range, the seizure resis-
0.8
tance of the nut and the strength of the material
0.6
will decrease. Therefore, it is necessary to multi-
ply the dynamic permissible torque (T) and the 0.4
dynamic permissible thrust (F) by the corre- 0.2
sponding temperature factor indicated in Fig.2.
–20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Accordingly, when selecting a spline nut, the fol-
Service temperature (℃)
lowing equations need to be met in terms of its
strength. Fig.2 Temperature factor
Dynamic permissible torque (T)
fT•T
fS
PT
Static permissible thrust (F)
fT•F
fS
PF
fT : Temperature factor (see Fig.2)
T : Dynamic permissible torque (N-m)
PT : Applied torque (N-m)
F : Dynamic permissible thrust (N)
PF : Axial load (N)
z Hardness of the Surface and Wear Resistance
The hardness of the shaft significantly affects
1.1
the wear resistance of the spline nut. If the hard-
ness is equal to or less than 250 HV, the abra-
Abrasion loss (mm)
1.0
sion loss increases as indicated in Fig.3. The
0.9
roughness of the surface should preferably be
0.80a or less. 0.8
A specially rolled shaft achieves surface hard- 0.7
ness of 250 HV or greater, through hardening as
a result of rolling, and a surface roughness of 0.6
0.20a or less. Thus, the dedicated rolled shaft is 0.5
highly wear resistant. 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Hardness of the mating surface (HV)
Fig.3 Hardness of the Surface and Wear Resistance
[Calculating the Contact Surface Pressure p]

PT
p= 9.8
T
p : Contact surface pressure on the tooth under a load torque (PT) (N/mm2)
A-518
Point of Selection
Selecting a Spline Nut
[Calculating the Sliding Speed]

With splines, the sliding speed of the tooth surface is equal to the feeding speed.
V : Sliding speed of the tooth (m/min)
[Example of calculation]
Use Spline Nut DPM and reciprocate it at a speed in the axial direction of 5 m/min while transmitting a load
torque of 78 N-m. Since the applied torque is not consistent in direction, it is important to select a spline nut that
can be used in locations accompanied by vibrations and impact.
First, select a nut that has a dynamic permissible torque (T) at which it can be used.
Safety factor (fS) =4

f S• P T 4 78 Temperature factor (fT) = 1
T≧ = = 312N•m
fT 1 Applied torque (PT) =78 N-m
Select Spline Nut model DPM3560 (dynamic permissible torque T = 443 N-m), which satisfies the dynamic per-
Spline Nut
missible torque (T) above.
Obtain the pV value.
Obtain the contact surface pressure (p).
PT 78
p= 9.8 = 9.8 ≒ 1.73 N/mm2
T 443
Obtain the sliding speed (V).
V = 5m/min
From the diagram of pV values (see Fig.1 on A-517), it is judged that there will be no abnormal wear if the slid-
ing speed (V) is 13.5 m/min or below against the "p" value of 1.73 N/mm2. Therefore, it is appropriate to select
model DPM3560.
A-519
Point of Design Spline Nut
Fit
For the fitting between the spline nut circumference and the housing, we recommend loose fitting or
tight fitting.
Housing inner-diameter tolerance: H8 or J8
A-520
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance Spline Nut
Installation
[About Chamfer of the Housing's Mouth]
0
To increase the strength of the root of the flange of the spline nut, the corner is machined to have an
R shape. Therefore, it is necessary to chamfer the inner edge of the housing's mouth.
Table1 Chamfer of the Housing's Mouth
Unit: mm
Model No. Chamfer of the mouth

C chamfer C
DPM (Min.)
12
15
2
Spline Nut
17
20
25
2.5
30
35
40
3
45
50
Fig.1
Lubrication
Select a lubrication method according to the conditions of the spline nut.
[Oil Lubrication]
For the lubrication of the spline nut, oil lubrication is recommended. Specifically, oil-bath lubrication
or drop lubrication is particularly effective. Oil-bath lubrication is the most appropriate method since it
meets harsh conditions such as high speed, heavy load or external heat transmission, and it cools
the spline nut. Drop lubrication suits low to medium speed and a light to medium load. Select a lubri-
cant according to the conditions as indicated in Table2.
Table2 Selection of a Lubricant
Condition Types of Lubricants

Low speed,
High-viscosity sliding surface oil or
high load,
turbine oil
high temperature
Low speed,
Low-viscosity sliding surface oil or
light load,
turbine oil
low temperature
[Grease Lubrication]
In low-speed feed, which occurs less frequently, the user can lubricate the slide system by manually
applying grease to the shaft on a regular basis or using the greasing hole on the spline nut. We rec-
ommend using lithium-soap group grease No. 2.
A-521
A-522
Linear Bushing
General Catalog
Features and Types ........................ A-524 Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table.. B-417
Features of the Linear Bushing ......... A-524 Model LM .......................................... B-418
• Structure and features....................... A-524 Model LM-GA (Metal Retainer Type) ... B-420
• Dedicated Shafts for Model LM........... A-526 Model LM-MG (Stainless Steel Type) .. B-422
• Standard LM Shafts .......................... A-526 Model LME ........................................ B-424
• Specially Machined Types ................. A-526 Model LM-L ....................................... B-426
• Table of Rows of Balls and Masses for Model LMF ........................................ B-428
Clearance-adjustable Types and Open Model LMF-M (Stainless Steel Type)... B-430
Types of the Linear Bushing .............. A-527 Model LMK ........................................ B-432
Types of the Linear Bushing ............. A-528 Model LMK-M (Stainless Steel Type)... B-434
• Types and Features .......................... A-528 Model LMF-L ..................................... B-436
Classification Table ........................... A-534 Model LMF-ML (Stainless Steel Type). B-438
Model LMK-L..................................... B-440
Point of Selection............................ A-536 Model LMK-ML (stainless steel type) ... B-442
Flowchart for Selecting a Linear Bushing ... A-536 Model LMH........................................ B-444
• Steps for Selecting a Linear Bushing ... A-536 Model LMH-L..................................... B-446
Rated Load and Nominal Life............ A-537 Models SC6 to 30.............................. B-448
Table of Equivalent Factors .............. A-540 Models SC35 to 50............................ B-450
Accuracy Standards .......................... A-541 Model SL ........................................... B-452
Model SH .......................................... B-454
Point of Design................................ A-542 Model SH-L ....................................... B-456
Assembling the Linear Bushing......... A-542 Model SK........................................... B-458
Options............................................. A-549 Dedicated Shafts for Model LM......... B-459

Lubrication......................................... A-549 Standard LM Shafts .......................... B-460
Material, surface treatment ............... A-549 Options............................................. B-461

Contamination Protection.................. A-550 Felt Seal Model FLM ......................... B-461
• Felt Seal Model FLM ......................... A-550
A-523
Features and Types Linear Bushing
Features of the Linear Bushing
LM shaft
Retainer
Nut
Ball
Seal
Fig.1 Structure of Linear Bushing Model LM…UU

Linear Bushing model LM is a linear motion system used in combination with a cylindrical LM shaft to
perform infinite straight motion. The balls in the loaded area of the nut are in point contact with the
LM shaft. This allows straight motion with minimal friction resistance and achieves highly accurate
and smooth motion despite the small permissible load.
The nut uses high-carbon chromium bearing steel and its outer and inner surfaces are ground after
being heat-treated.
The Linear Bushing is used in a broad array of applications, such as slide units of precision equip-
ment including OA equipment and peripherals, measuring instruments, automatic recorders and dig-
ital 3D measuring instruments, industrial machines including multi-spindle drilling machine, punching
press, tool grinder, automatic gas cutting apparatus, printing machine, card selector and food pack-
ing machine.
A-524
Features and Types
[Interchangeability]
Since the dimensional tolerances of the Linear Bush's components are standardized, they are inter-
changeable. The LM shaft is machined through cylindrical grinding, which can easily be performed,
and it allows highly accurate fitting clearance to be achieved.
[Highly Accurate Retainer Plate]
Since the retainer, which guides three to eight rows of balls, is integrally molded, it is capable of
accurately guiding the balls in the traveling direction and achieving stable running accuracy.
Small-diameter types use integrally molded retainers made of synthetic resin. It reduces noise gener-
ated during operation and allows for superb lubrication.
[Wide Array of Types]
A wide array of types are available, such as standard type, clearance-adjustable type, open type,
long type and flanged linear bushing, allowing the user to select a type that meets the intended use.
Linear Bushing
A-525
Dedicated Shafts for Model LM
The LM shaft of the Linear Bushing needs to be manufactured with much consideration for hardness,
surface roughness and dimensional accuracy of the shaft since balls roll directly on it.
THK manufactures dedicated LM shafts for the Linear Bushing.
Standard LM Shafts
THK manufactures high quality, dedicated LM
shafts for Linear Bushing model LM series.
Specially Machined Types

THK also supports special machining processes such as tapping, milling, threading, through hole
and joggling, as shown in the Fig.2, at your request.
Joggled Keyway
Threaded Flat Tapped for support Tapped
Fig.2
A-526
Features and Types
Table of Rows of Balls and Masses for Clearance-adjustable Types

and Open Types of the Linear Bushing
Clearance-adjustable type Open type

Shaft
diameter Mass Mass
Model No. Rows of balls Model No. Rows of balls
g g
6 LM 6-AJ 4 7.8 — — —
LM 8S-AJ 4 10 — — —
8
LM 8-AJ 4 14.7 — — —
10 LM 10-AJ 4 29 — — —
12 LM 12-AJ 4 31 LM 12-OP 3 25
Linear Bushing
13 LM 13-AJ 4 42 LM 13-OP 3 34
16 LM 16-AJ 5(4) 68 LM 16-OP 4(3) 52
20 LM 20-AJ 5 85 LM 20-OP 4 69
25 LM 25-AJ 6(5) 216 LM 25-OP 5(4) 188
30 LM 30-AJ 6 245 LM 30-OP 5 210
35 LM 35-AJ 6 384 LM 35-OP 5 350
38 LM 38-AJ 6 475 LM 38-OP 5 400
40 LM 40-AJ 6 579 LM 40-OP 5 500
50 LM 50-AJ 6 1560 LM 50-OP 5 1340
60 LM 60-AJ 6 1820 LM 60-OP 5 1650
80 LM 80-AJ 6 4320 LM 80-OP 5 3750
100 LM 100-AJ 6 8540 LM 100-OP 5 7200
120 LM 120-AJ 8 14900 LM 120-OP 6 11600
Note) The numbers of ball rows in the table apply to types using a resin retainer. Those of types using a metal retainer are indi-
cated in parentheses.
A-527
Linear Bushing Types
Types and Features
Standard Type
With the Linear Bushing nut having the most
accurate cylindrical shape, this type is widely
used.
There are two series of the Linear Bushing in
dimensional group.
• Model LM
Metric units series used most widely in Japan
• Model LM-MG
Stainless steel version of type LM
• Model LME
Metric units series commonly used in Europe Standard Type
Open Type
The nut is partially cut open by one row of balls
(50° to 80° ). This enables the Linear Bushing to
be used even in locations where the LM shaft is
supported by a column or fulcrum. In addition, a
clearance can easily be adjusted.
Models LM-OP/LME-OP
Model LM-MG-OP
Open Type
A-528
Features and Types
Clearance-adjustable Type
This type has the same dimensions as the stan-
dard type, but the nut has a slit in the direction of
the LM shaft. This allows the linear bushing to
be installed in a housing whose inner diameter
is adjustable, and enables the clearance
between the LM shaft and the housing to easily
be adjusted.
Models LM-AJ/LME-AJ
Linear Bushing
Model LM-MG-AJ
Long Type
Containing two units of the standard retainer
plate, this type is optimal for locations where a
moment load is present and reduces man-hours
in installation.
Model LM-L…………Standard type
Long Type
Flanged Type (Round)

The nut of the standard type Linear Bushing is
integrated with a flange. This enables the Linear
Bushing to be directly mounted onto the housing
with bolts, thus achieving easy installation.
Model LMF……………Standard type
Model LMF-M…………Made of stainless steel
Flanged Type (Round)
A-529
Flanged Type (Square)
Like model LMF, this type also has a flange, but
the flange is cut to a square shape. Since the
height is lower than the circular flange type,
compact design is allowed.
Model LMK……………Standard type
Model LMK-M…………Made of stainless steel
Flanged Type (Square)
Flanged Type (Round) - Long

The nut of the long type Linear Bushing is inte-
grated with a flange. This enables the Linear
Bushing to be directly mounted onto the housing
with bolts, thus achieving easy installation. Con-
taining two units of the standard retainer plate,
this type is optimal for locations where a
moment load is present.
Model LMF-L…………Standard type
Model LMF-ML………Made of stainless steel
Flanged Type (Round) - Long
Flanged Type (Square) - Long

Like model LMF-L, this type also has a flange,
but the flange is cut to a square shape. Since
the height is lower than the circular flange type,
compact design is allowed.
Model LMK-L…………Standard type
Model LMK-ML………Made of stainless steel
Flanged Type (Square) - Long
A-530
Features and Types
Flanged Type (Cut Flange)

The nut is integrated with a cut flange. Since the
height is lower than model LMK, compact
design is allowed. Since the rows of balls in the
Linear Bushing are arranged so that two rows
receive the load from the flat side, a long service
life can be achieved.
Model LMH……………Standard type
Linear Bushing
Flanged Type (Cut Flange)
Flanged Type (Cut Flange) - Long

The flange is a cut flange and lower than model
LMK-L, allowing compact design. Containing
two units of the standard retainer plate, this type
is optimal for locations where a moment load is
present. Since the rows of balls in the Linear
Bushing are arranged so that two rows receive
the load from the flat side, a long service life can
be achieved.
Model LMH-L…………Standard type
Flanged Type (Cut Flange) - Long
Linear Bushing Model SC

It is a case unit where the standard type of Lin-
ear Bushing is incorporated into a small, light-
weight aluminum casing. This model can easily
be mounted simply by securing it to the table
with bolts.
Linear Bushing Model SC
A-531
Linear Bushing (Long) Model SL
A long version of model SC, this model contains
two units of the standard type Linear Bushing in
an aluminum casing.
Linear Bushing (Long) Model SL
Linear Bushing Model SH

It is a case unit where the standard type of Lin-
ear Bushing is incorporated into a smaller and
lighter aluminum casing than model SC. This
model allows even more compact design than
model SC. It also has flexibility in mounting ori-
entation. Additionally, it is structured so that two
rows of balls receive the load from the top of the
casing, allowing a long service life to be
achieved.
Linear Bushing Model SH
Linear Bushing (Long) Model SH-L

A long version of model SH, this model is a case
unit that contains two units of the standard type
Linear Bushing in an aluminum casing.
Linear Bushing (Long) Model SH-L
A-532
Features and Types
LM Shaft End Support Model SK

An aluminum-made light fulcrum for securing an
LM shaft. The LM shaft mounting section has a
slit, enabling the linear bushing to firmly secure
an LM shaft using bolts.
Linear Bushing
LM Shaft End Support Model SK
Standard LM Shafts
THK manufactures high quality, dedicated LM
shafts for Linear Bushing model LM series.
Standard LM Shafts
Build-to-order LM Shafts
THK also manufactures hollow LM shafts and
specially machined shafts at your request.
Build-to-order LM Shafts
A-533
Classification Table
Linear Bushing
Flange Type
Circular Flange Square Flange Cut Flange
Standard Type Standard Type Standard Type

Model LMF Model LMK Model LMH
SUJ2 SUJ2 SUJ2
Resin Resin Resin
Model LMF-M Model LMK-M

SUS SUS
Resin Resin
Long Type Long Type Long Type

Model LMF-L Model LMK-L Model LMH-L
SUJ2 SUJ2 SUJ2
Resin Resin Resin
Model LMF-ML Model LMK-ML

SUS SUS
Resin Resin
LM Shaft
Standard Build-to-order LM Shaft End Support

LM Shafts LM Shafts
Model SK
Model SF SUJ2
Resin
A-534
Features and Types
Flange-less Type Encased Type

Model LM Model LME Model SC Model SH
SUJ2 SUJ2 SUJ2 SUJ2
Linear Bushing
Resin Resin Resin Resin
Model LM-GA Model LM-MG

SUJ2 SUS
Metal Resin
Long Type
Model SL Model SH-L
Open Type SUJ2 SUJ2
Resin Resin
Model LM-OP Model LME-OP
SUJ2 SUJ2
Resin Resin
Model LM-MG-OP
SUS
Resin
Long Type
Model LM-L
SUJ2
Resin
Model LM-AJ Model LME-AJ
SUJ2 SUJ2 Type of Material
Resin Resin
Model No.
Model LM-MG-AJ Nut Material SUJ2 (High-carbon Chromium
SUS Bearing Steel)
Resin Retainer Material SUS (Stainless Steel)
A-535
Point of Selection Linear Bushing
Flowchart for Selecting a Linear Bushing

0
Steps for Selecting a Linear Bushing

The following flowchart should be used as a guide for selecting a Linear Bushing.
Selection Starts
1 Setting Conditions
Stroke length: LS Required service life
Velocity: V Dimensions (No. of nuts, shafts, span)
Magnitude of the applied load: W Installation direction
Mounting space Environment
Operating frequency (duty cycle) Accuracy
A-534 to A-535
Select a type that meets the conditions from the classification table
2 Selecting a Type for Linear Bushings and temporarily decide a rough size.
3 Examining Strength of the Shaft (Examining the LM Shaft Strength)

Estimating the shaft diameter Permissible load of the shaft
Estimating the shaft length Displacement(deflection) of the shaft
Method for fixing the shaft
Calculate the applied load and obtain the

4 Predicting the Service Life nominal life from the life calculation formula. A-537 to A-539
Comparison with the

NO
YES
5 Determining the Accuracy Select an accuracy grade A-541
6 Selection According to the Environment A-549 to A-550

Determining a lubricant Determining a surface treatment
Determining a lubrication method Designing contamination protection
Selection Completed
A-536
Point of Selection
Rated Load and Nominal Life

[Load Rating]
The rated load of the Linear Bushing varies Table1
according to the position of balls in relation to Rows of balls Ball position Load Rating
the load direction. The basic load ratings indi-
cated in the specification tables each indicate
the value when one row of balls receiving a load
are directly under the load. 3 rows 1×C
If the Linear Bushing is mounted so that two
rows of balls evenly receive the load in the load
direction, the rated load changes as shown in
table 1.
4 rows 1.41×C
Linear Bushing
5 rows 1.46×C
6 rows 1.28×C
For specific values for "C" above, see the respective specifi-
cation table.
A-537
[Calculating the Nominal Life]
The nominal life of the Linear Bushing is obtained using the following equation.
fH •fT •fC C 3 C : Basic dynamic load rating (N)
L= • 50
fW PC PC : Calculated load (N)
fH : Hardness factor (see Fig.1)
z When a Moment Load is Applied to a Single Nut or Two Nuts in Close Contact with
Each Other
When a moment load is applied to a single nut or two nuts in close contact with each other, calculate
the equivalent radial load at the time the moment is applied.
Pu = K • M
Pu : Equivalent radial load (N)
(with a moment applied)
K : Equivalent factors
(see Table4 to Table6 on A-540)
However, "Pu" is assumed to be within the basic static load rating (C0).
z When a Moment Load and a Radial Load are Simultaneously Applied
When a moment and a radial load are applied simultaneously, calculate the service life based on the
sum of the radial load and the equivalent radial load.
fH: Hardness Factor
To maximize the load capacity of the Linear
Bushing, the hardness of the raceways needs to 1.0
be between 58 to 64 HRC. 0.9
If the hardness is lower than this range, the 0.8
Hardness factor fH
basic dynamic load rating and the basic static 0.7

load rating decrease. Therefore, it is necessary 0.6
to multiply each rating by the respective hard- 0.5
ness factor (fH). 0.4
Normally, fH=1.0 since the Linear Bushing has 0.3
sufficient hardness. 0.2
0.1
60 50 40 30 20 10
A-538
Point of Selection
fT:Temperature Factor
ing the operating Linear Bushing exceeds 100℃ 1.0
, take into account the adverse effect of the high 0.9
temperature and multiply the basic load ratings
0.8
by the temperature factor indicated in Fig.2.
Also note that the Linear Bushing itself must be 0.7
of high temperature type. 0.6
0.5
Note) If the environment temperature exceeds 80 ℃ , use a
Linear Bushing type equipped with metal retainer 100 150 200
plates.
fC: Contact Factor

When multiple nuts are used in close contact Table2 Contact Factor (fC)
with each other, their linear motion is affected by
Linear Bushing
Number of nuts in close
Contact factor fC
moments and mounting accuracy, making it dif- contact with each other
ficult to achieve uniform load distribution. In 2 0.81
such applications, multiply the basic load rating
(C) and (C0) by the corresponding contact factor 3 0.72
in Table2. 4 0.66
5 0.61
machine, take into account the respective contact fac- Normal use 1
fW: Load Factor

Speed(V) fW
is difficult to accurately determine vibrations impact
generated during high-speed operation and Very low
impact during frequent start and stop motion. Faint 1 to 1.2
V≦0.25m/s
Therefore, when loads applied on a Linear
Slow
Bushing cannot be measured, or when speed Weak 1.2 to 1.5
0.25<V≦1m/s
and impact have a significant influence, divide
Medium
the basic load rating (C or C0), by the corre- Medium 1.5 to 2
1<V≦2m/s
sponding load factor in Table3.
High
Strong 2 to 3.5
V>2m/s
[Calculating the Service Life Time]

per minute are constant, the service life time is obtained using the following equation.
3
L 10 l S : Stroke length (m)
Lh =
2 l S n1 60 n1 : Number of reciprocations per minute
(min-1)
A-539
Table of Equivalent Factors
Table4 Equivalent Factors of Model LM Table5 Equivalent Factors of Model LM-L
Equivalent factor: K Equivalent factor: K

Model No. Model No.
Single nut Double blocks Single nut
LM 3 1.566 0.26 LM 3L 0.654
LM 4 1.566 0.21 LM 4L 0.578
LM 5 1.253 0.178 LM 5L 0.446
LM 6 0.553 0.162 LM 6L 0.402
LM 8S 0.708 0.166 LM 8L 0.302
LM 8 0.442 0.128 LM 10L 0.236
LM 10 0.389 0.101 LM 12L 0.226
LM 12 0.389 0.097 LM 13L 0.214
LM 13 0.343 0.093 LM 16L 0.192
LM 16 0.279 0.084 LM 20L 0.164
LM 20 0.257 0.071 LM 25L 0.12
LM 25 0.163 0.054 LM 30L 0.106
LM 30 0.153 0.049 LM 35L 0.1
LM 35 0.143 0.045 LM 40L 0.086
LM 38 0.127 0.042 LM 50L 0.068
LM 40 0.117 0.04 LM 60L 0.062
LM 50 0.096 0.032 Note) Equivalent factors for models LMF-L, LMK-L and
LM 60 0.093 0.028 LMH-L are the same as that for model LM-L.
LM 80 0.077 0.022 Table6 Equivalent Factors of Model LME
LM 100 0.065 0.017 Equivalent factor: K

Model No.
LM 120 0.051 0.015 Single nut Double blocks
Note) Equivalent factors for models LMF, LMK, LMH and SC LME 5 0.669 0.123
are the same as that for model LM.
LME 8 0.514 0.116
LME 12 0.389 0.09
LME 16 0.343 0.081
LME 20 0.291 0.063
LME 25 0.209 0.052
LME 30 0.167 0.045
LME 40 0.127 0.039
LME 50 0.105 0.031
LME 60 0.093 0.024
LME 80 0.077 0.018
A-540
Point of Selection
Accuracy Standards
Accuracy Standards
The accuracy of the Linear Bushing in inscribed bore diameter, outer diameter, width and eccentricity
is described in the corresponding specification table. The accuracy of mode LM in inscribed bore
diameter and eccentricity is classified into high accuracy grade (no symbol) and precision grade (P).
(Accuracy symbol is expressed at the end of the model number.)
The accuracy of clearance-adjustable types (-AJ) and open types (-OP) in inscribed bore diameter
and outer diameter indicates the value before division.
Linear Bushing
A-541
Point of Design Linear Bushing
Assembling the Linear Bushing

[Inner Diameter of the Housing]
Table1 shows recommended housing inner-diameter tolerance for the Linear Bushing. When fitting
the Linear Bushing with the housing, loose fit is normally recommended. If the clearance needs to be
smaller, provide transition fit.
Type Housing
Model No. Accuracy Loose fit Transition fit
High accuracy
grade H7 J7
LM (no symbol)
Precision
H6 J6
Grade (P)
LME — H7 K6, J6
LMF
LMK
LMH High accuracy
LM-L grade H7 J7
LMF-L (no symbol)
LMK-L
LMH-L
[Clearance between the Nut and the LM Shaft]

When using the Linear Bushing in combination with an LM shaft, use normal clearance in ordinary
use and small gap if the clearance is to be minimized.
Note1) If the clearance after installation is to be negative, it is preferable not to exceed the radial clearance tolerance indicated
Note2) The shaft tolerance for Linear Bushing models SC, SL SH and SH-L falls under high accuracy grade (no symbol).
Table2 Shaft Outer-diameter Tolerance
Type LM Shaft
Normal
Model No. Accuracy Small gap
clearance
High accuracy
grade f6, g6 h6
LM (no symbol)
Precision
f5, g5 h5
Grade (P)
LME — h7 k6
LMF
LMK
LMH High accuracy
LM-L grade f6, g6 h6
LMF-L (no symbol)
LMK-L
LMH-L
A-542
Point of Design
[Mounting the Nut]

Although the Linear Bushing does not require a large amount of strength for securing it in the axial
direction, do not rely only on a press fit to support the nut. For the housing inner-diameter tolerance,
see Table1 on A-542.
z Installing the Standard Type
Fig.1 and Fig.2 show examples of installing the standard type Linear Bushing.
When securing the Linear Bushing, use snap rings or stopper plates.
Linear Bushing
Fig.1 Snap Ring Fig.2 Stopper Plate
A-543
Snap Ring for Installation
To secure Linear Bushing model LM, snap rings Table3 Types of Snap Rings
indicated in Table3 are available. Snap ring
Note1) For models indicated with parentheses, use C-shape
concentric snap rings. For outer surface For inner surface
Note2) The Table3 commonly applies to models LM, LM-
GA, LM-MG and LM-L. Model No. Needle Needle
C-shape C-shape
snap snap
snap ring snap ring
ring ring
LM 3 — — AR 7 —
LM 4 — — 8 —
LM 5 WR 10 10 10 10
LM 6 12 12 12 12
LM 8 — 15 15 15
LM 8S — 15 15 15
LM 10 19 19 19 19
LM 12 21 21 21 21
LM 13 23 22 23 —
LM 16 28 — 28 28
LM 20 32 — 32 32
LM 25 40 40 40 40
LM 30 45 45 45 45
LM 35 52 52 52 52
LM 38 — 56•58 57 —
LM 40 — 60 60 60
LM 50 — 80 80 80
LM 60 — 90 90 90
LM 80A — 120 120 120
LM 100A — (150) 150 —
LM 120A — (180) 180 —
Set Screws Not Allowed
Securing the nut by pressing the outer surface
with one set screw as shown in Fig.3 will cause
the nut to be deformed. Set screw
Nut Housing
Fig.3
A-544
Point of Design
z Installing a Flanged Type

With models LMF, LMK and LMH, the nut is integrated with a flange. Therefore, the Linear Bushing
can be mounted only via the flange.
Linear Bushing
Nut mounted via socket and spigot joint Mounted via a flange only
z Installing a Clearance-adjustable Type

To adjust the clearance of a clearance-adjust-
able type (-AJ), use a housing that allows
adjustment of the nut outer diameter so as to
facilitate the adjustment of the clearance
between the Linear Bushing and the LM shaft.
Positioning the slit of the Linear Bushing at an
angle of 90° with the housing's slit will provide
uniform deformation in the circumferential direc-
tion. (See Fig.4.)
Fig.4
z Mounting an Open Type

For an open type (-OP), also use a housing that
allows adjustment of the nut outer diameter as
Housing
shown in Fig.5.
Open types are normally used with a light pre-
load. Be sure not to give an excessive preload.
Adjustment bolt
Whirl-stop plate Whirl-stop plate
Fig.5
A-545
[Mounting the Shaft End Support]
Shaft end support model SK can easily be
Tightening bolt
secured to the table using mounting bolts.
Model SK enables the LM shaft to firmly be
secured using tightening bolts.
Mounting bolt
Washer
THK
SK30
Reference surface
[Installing an LM Case Unit]

z Attaching Model SC (SL)
Since models SC and SL can be attached from
the top or bottom by simply tightening it using
bolts, the installation time can be shortened.
(See Fig.6.)
Fig.6
z Attaching Model SH (SH-L)

Since models SH and SH-L can be attached
Basic installation
from the top or bottom by simply tightening it
using bolts, the installation time can be short-
ened.(See Fig.7.)
Alternative installation
Fig.7
A-546
Point of Design
[Incorporating the Nut]

When incorporating the standard Linear Bush-
ing into a housing, use a jig and drive in the nut,
D : Nut outer diameter
or use a flatter plate and gently hit the nut, D-0.3
dr: Bore diameter
instead of directly hitting the side plate or the
seal. (See Fig.8.)
dr-0.3
Fig.8
[Inserting the LM Shaft]

When inserting the LM shaft into the Linear
Bushing, align the center of the shaft with that of
Linear Bushing
the nut and gently insert the shaft straightfor-
ward into the nut. If the shaft is slanted while it is
inserted, balls may fall off or the retainer may be
deformed. (See Fig.9.)
Fig.9
[When Under a Moment Load]

When using the Linear Bushing, make sure the load is evenly distributed on the whole ball raceway.
In particular, if a moment load is applied, use two or more Linear Bushing units on the same LM shaft
and secure an adequately large distance between the units.
If using the Linear Bushing under a moment load, also calculate the equivalent radial load and iden-
tify the correct model number. (See A-538.)
[Rotational Use Not Allowed]
The Linear Bushing is not suitable for rotational
use for a structural reason. (See Fig.10.)
Forcibly rotating it may cause an unexpected
accident.
Fig.10
A-547
[Precautions on Installing an Open Three-ball-row Type Linear Bushing]
When installing an open three-ball-row type Lin-
ear Bushing, mount it while taking into account Load
the load distribution as indicated in Fig.11.
LM12
13
Fig.11
[Attaching Felt Seal Model FLM]

The felt seal can be press-fit into a housing fin-
ished to H7, but cannot be used as a stopper for
preventing the Linear Bushing from coming off.
Be sure to use the felt seal by attaching it as
indicated in the Fig.12.
Also make sure to impregnate the felt with suffi-
cient lubricant before attaching it.
Fig.12
A-548
Options Linear Bushing (Options)
Lubrication
The Linear Bushing requires grease or oil as a lubricant for its operation.
0
When installing a type attached with seals on both sides (…UU) to the LM shaft, apply grease to
rows of balls in the Linear Bushing.
When installing standard types (without seal), perform the same as above or apply grease to the LM
shaft.
Afterward, replenish grease of the same type as necessary according to the service conditions.
We recommend using high-quality lithium-soap group grease No. 2.
[Oil Lubrication]
Turbine oil, machine oil and spindle oil are com-
Linear Bushing (Options)

monly used as a lubricant. Housing
When oiling the Linear Bushing, drop oil on the
LM shaft, or infuse it from the greasing hole on
the housing as shown in Fig.1.
Spacer
Fig.1
Material and Surface Treatment

For the Linear Bushing and the LM shaft, highly corrosion-resistant stainless steel types are available
for some models.
Although the LM shaft can be surface treated, some types may not be suitable for the treatment.
Contact THK for details.
A-549
Entrance of dust or other foreign material into the Linear Bushing will cause abnormal wear or
shorten the service life. When nut contamination is expected, it is important to select an effective
sealing device or dust-control device that meets the environment conditions.
For the Linear Bushing, a special synthetic rubber seal that is highly resistant to wear and a felt seal
(highly dust preventive with low seal resistance) are available as contamination protection accesso-
ries.
In addition, THK produces round bellows. Contact us for details.
Felt Seal Model FLM

Felt Seal Model FLM
Linear Bushing model LM series include types equipped with a special synthetic rubber seal (LM…
UU, U). If desiring to have an additional contamination protection measure, or desiring to lower the
seal resistance, use the felt seal model FLM.
A-550
Precautions on Use Linear Bushing
[Handling]
0
(2) Dropping or hitting the Linear Bushing may damage it. Giving an impact force to the bushing
could also cause damage even if the product looks intact.
[Lubrication]
Linear Bushing
(2) Do not use the product at temperature of 80 ℃ or higher. Contact THK if you desire to use the
product at a temperature of 80℃ or higher.
(3) Please be careful when using the product in an environment with excessive coolant. The cool-
ant may cause premature failure if it penetrates the bushing nut. Contact THK for further details.
[Storage]
When storing the Linear Bushing, enclose it in a package designated by THK and store it while
avoiding high temperature, low temperature and high humidity.
A-551
A-552
LM Stroke
General Catalog
LM Stroke Models ST, ST-B, STI ......... A-554 Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table.. B-463
Structure and features....................... A-554 LM Stroke Models ST, ST-B and STI
Types and Features .......................... A-555 • Models ST and ST-B ........................ B-464
Rated Load and Nominal Life............ A-556 • Models ST…UU and ST…UUB B-468
Fit ...................................................... A-559 Miniature Stroke Model MST
ST shaft............................................. A-559 • Model MST...................................... B-472
Installation of the ST Shaft ................ A-559
Die-setting Ball Cage Models KS and BS
Miniature Stroke Model MST .......... A-560 • Models KS / BS ................................ B-474
Structure and features....................... A-560
Fit ...................................................... A-561
Travel Distance of the Ball Cage....... A-561
Die-setting Ball Cage Models KS and BS ... A-562

Rated Load and Service Life............. A-562
Fit ...................................................... A-563
Installation of the Ball Cage .............. A-563
A-553
LM Stroke
LM Stroke
Models ST , ST-B and STI

Models ST, ST-B and STI
Ball
Ball cage
ST shaft
Nut
Seal
Fig.1 Structure of LM Stroke Model ST

Model ST has a ball cage and balls both incorporated into a precision-ground cylindrical nut as
shown in Fig.1. The balls are arranged in zigzags so as to evenly receive a load. The ball cage is a
drilled cage made of a light alloy with high rigidity, and is capable of high-speed motion. A thrust ring
and a snap ring are installed on both sides of the inner surface of the nut to prevent the ball cage
from overshooting.
This structure allows rotational motion, reciprocal motion and complex motion with a small friction
coefficient. Model ST has a stroke length up to twice the range within which the ball cage can travel.
Since high accuracy can be obtained at a low price, this model is used in a broad array of applica-
tions such as press die setting, ink roll unit of printing machine, workpiece chuck unit of punching
press, press feeder, work head of electric discharge machine, wound roll corrector, spinning and
weaving machine, distortion measuring equipment, spindle of optical measuring instrument, and
photocopiers.
A-554
LM Stroke
[Minimal Friction Coefficient]

The balls and the ball raceway are in point contact, which causes the smallest rolling loss, and the
balls are individually retained in the ball cage. This allows the LM stroke to perform rolling motion at a
minimal friction coefficient (μ =0.0006 to 0.0012).
[Compact Design]
Since it consists only of a thin nut and balls, the outer diameter of the bearing is minimized and a
light, space-saving, compact design is achieved.
[High Accuracy at a Low Price]
A highly accurate slide unit can be produced at a low price.
Types and Features
Light Load Type Model ST Specification Table⇒B-464

Model ST is a light load type that allows for a
long stroke.
Shaft diameter:φ 6 to φ 100
LM Stroke
In addition, a type attached with seal is avail-
able. Model ST-UU
Model ST
Medium Load Type Model ST-B Specification Table⇒B-464

It has the same dimensions as model ST, but
has a shorter stroke and achieves a rated load
twice that of ST.
Shaft diameter:φ 8 to φ 100
In addition, a type attached with seal is avail-
able. Model ST-UUB
Model ST-B
Inner Ring Type Model STI

If the LM shaft cannot be hard quenched, STI
allows an inner ring to be incorporated. The
inner ring is available build-to-order.
Model STI
A-555
[Load Rating]
The basic load ratings for model ST are indicated in the respective specification tables.
[Nominal Life]
The nominal life of model ST is obtained using the following equation.
f H • fT • fC C 3
L= •
fW PC
L : Nominal life (rotating 106 times)
(The total number of revolutions that 90% of a group of identical LM strokes independently
operating under the same conditions can achieve without showing flaking)
C : Basic dynamic load rating (kN)
PC : Calculated radial load (kN)
When the nominal life (L) has been obtained, if the number of revolutions per minute and the number
of reciprocations per minute are constant, the service life time is obtained using the following equa-
tion.
z For Rotating Motion or Complex Motion
6
10 L
Lh =
2
60 (dm • n) + (10
2
α • l S • n1) /dm
z For Reciprocating Motion
6
10 L
Lh =
60 10 α • l S • n1 / (π • dm)
n : Revolutions per minute (min– 1)
(min– 1)
l s : Stroke length (mm)
dm : Pitch circle diameter (mm)
(dm≒1.15×dr)
dr : Ball inscribed bore diameter (mm)
α : Factor for cage material
(α=0.7)
A-556
LM Stroke
[Tolerance Value in Rotation and Reciprocating Speed]

The permissible speed limit of model ST is obtained using the following equation.
DN dm • n + 10 l s • n1
For the DN value above, the following value applies as a standard value.
For oil lubrication DN=600000
For grease lubrication DN=300000
However, the following points must be taken into account.
n1 ≦5000
l S•n1 ≦50000
To maximize the load capacity of model ST, the
1.0
hardness of the raceways needs to be between
0.9
58 to 64 HRC.
0.8
If the hardness is lower than this range, the
Hardness factor fH
0.7
basic dynamic load rating and the basic static
0.6
load rating decrease. Therefore, it is necessary
LM Stroke
0.5
to multiply each rating by the respective hard-
0.4
ness factor (fH).
0.3
Normally, fH=1.0 since model ST has sufficient
0.2
hardness.
0.1
60 50 40 30 20 10
z fT: Temperature Factor

1.0
ing the operating model ST exceeds 100℃, take
0.9
into account the adverse effect of the high tem-
perature and multiply the basic load ratings by 0.8
the temperature factor indicated in Fig.3. 0.7
Note) If the environment temperature exceeds 80℃, contact
THK. 0.6
0.5
100 150 200

A-557
When multiple nuts of model ST are used in Table1 Contact Factor (fc)
close contact with each other, their linear motion Number of nuts in close
Contact factor fc
is affected by moments and mounting accuracy, contact with each other
bution. In such applications, multiply the basic
load rating (C) and (C0) by the corresponding 3 0.72
contact factor in Table1. 4 0.66
machine, take into account the respective contact fac- 5 0.61
tor indicated in table 1.
Normal use 1
z fW: Load Factor

Speed(V) fw
Faint 1 to 1.2
Therefore, when speed and vibrations have a Weak
Slow
1.2 to 1.5
significant influence, divide the basic dynamic 0.25<V≦1m/s
load rating (C or C0), by the corresponding load Medium
Medium 1.5 to 2
1<V≦2m/s
factor in Table2 of empirically obtained data.
High
Strong 2 to 3.5
V>2m/s
Accuracy Standards
The tolerance value in inscribed bore diameter
(dr), nut outer diameter (D) and nut length (L) is
indicated in the corresponding specification L
table. W W
The end of the nut may be deformed due to ten-
sion of the snap ring. Therefore, when measur-
ing the nut outer diameter, it is necessary to
calculate the measurement range using the fol-
lowing equation, and obtain the average diame-
ter value within the range.
The tolerance value in the nut outer diameter is
equal to the calculated average value of the
maximum diameter and the minimum diameter Fig.4 Measurement Range of the Nut
obtained through two-point measurement of the
outer diameter.
L
W=4+
8
W : Length out of the measurement range
(mm)
L : Nut length (mm)
A-558
LM Stroke
Fit
In theory, the ball cage of model ST moves in Normal Vertical shaft or
the same direction as the ST shaft by 1/2 of the Item
conditions high accuracy
shaft (or nut). However, to minimize the travel ST shaft k5, m5 n5, p5
distance error caused by uneven load distribu- Housing H6, H7 J6, J7
tion or vibrations, it is necessary to reduce the
clearance. If high accuracy is required or if the
LM Stroke is used on a vertical shaft, we recom-
mend setting the radial clearance between 0
and 10 μ m.
ST Shaft
With the ST shaft, used in model ST, balls roll directly on the shaft surface. Therefore, it is necessary
to pay much attention to the hardness, surface roughness and dimensional accuracy when manufac-
turing it.
LM Stroke
Since the hardness of the ST shaft has especially large impact on the service life, use much care in
selecting a material and heat treatment method.
THK also manufactures high-quality ST shafts. Contact us for details.
[Material]
Generally, the following materials are used as suitable for surface hardening through induction-hard-
ening.
• SUJ2 (JIS G 4805: high-carbon chromium bearing steel)
• SK3 to 6 (JIS G 4401: carbon tool steel)
• S55C (JIS G 4051: carbon steel for machine structural use)
[Hardness]
We recommend surface hardness of 58 HRC (≒653 HV) or higher. The depth of the hardened layer
is determined by the shaft diameter; we recommend approximately 2 mm for general use.
The ST shaft can have a hardened inner ring attached on the shaft raceway.
[Surface Roughness]
To achieve smooth motion, the surface is normally finished to 0.40a or less. If higher wear resistance
is required, finish the surface to 0.20a or less.
Installation of the ST Shaft

To install the ST shaft, drive it in to the designated depth. If the clearance is negative, a large driving
force is required. However, do not forcibly hammer the shaft. Instead, apply a lubricant on the ST
shaft first, and then gradually drive it in with a slight back action.
A-559
Miniature Stroke
Miniature Stroke
Model MST
Model MST
ST shaft
Nut
Ball
Ball cage
Fig.1 Structure of Miniature Stroke Model MST

Model MST consists of an ST shaft, ball cage and nut. These components can freely be combined
according to the application. The sectional shape is small, the clearance is minimal and the motion is
extremely light and smooth. Accordingly, model MST can be used in a variety of small, precision
measuring equipment such as optic measuring instrument's spindle, pen plotter, OA equipment,
computer terminals, automatic scale, digital length measuring machine and solenoid valve.
[Highly Accurate Bearing]
Precision steel balls (sphericity in mutual difference: 0.0003 mm) compliant with JIS B 1501 are
incorporated in a copper alloy ball cage to ensure high accuracy. The ball cage serves to prevent the
balls from falling off with a unique ball-retaining design.
[Highly Durable Bearing]
The nut of the ST shaft uses a selected material, and is heat-treated and ground. In addition, the
raceways are finished with ultra fine finish. The rows of balls are densely arranged in the ball cage,
and the balls are placed so that the ball raceways do not overlap with each other. It enables this
model to be used over a long period without wear and to demonstrate high durability.
A-560
Miniature Stroke
[Compact Bearing]
Use of a combination of balls with a 1 mm diameter and a thin nut allows a small sectional shape and
space-saving design.
[Bearing with Extremely Low Frictional Resistance]
Since the balls are in point-contact with the raceways, rolling loss is minimal and rolling motion with
low-friction is achieved.
Fit
The inner surface of the housing must be finished to H6 to H7, and secured with an adhesive after
the nut is inserted.
When press fitting is required, mounting the nut to the hole will reduce the inner diameter. Therefore,
be sure to check the inner diameter after press fitting the nut and adjust the shaft diameter so that a
correct preload is achieved. Also make sure that the preload must not exceed -2μ m.
Travel Distance of the Ball Cage
LM Stroke
The ball cage can travel up to 1/2 of the stroke length (l S) of the nut or the ST shaft in the same direc-
tion.
A-561
Die-setting Ball Cage
Models KS and BS
Models KS and BS
Ball Retainer
Fig.1 Structure of Die-setting Ball Cage Model KS

With models KS and BS, a large number of precision steel balls (sphericity in mutual difference:
0.0005 mm) compliant with JIS B 1501 are incorporated in a lightweight, highly rigid ball cage. The
balls are arranged along the circumference of the ball cage in spirals so that the ball raceways do not
overlap with each other. It enables these models to be used over a long period without wear and to
demonstrate high durability.
In addition, the ball pockets, which hold the balls, are finished with precision and continuously
caulked with a unique process, enabling them to prevent the balls from falling. It allows the system to
travel smoothly even if the ball cage is longer than the housing.
These ball cages are used in precision press die set, spinning and weaving machine, precision mea-
suring instrument, automatic recorder, medical equipment and various machine tools.
Rated Load and Service Life

The rated loads of models KS and BS are indicated in the respective specification tables. Their ser-
vice lives are obtained using the service life equation for LM Stroke model ST on A-556.
A-562
Fit
When using the Die-setting Ball Cage in the exceed the tolerance value of the radial clear-
guide unit of the guide post of a precision press ance indicated in the specification table.
die set, normally select a negative clearance in Table1 Fitting between Holes and Shaft
order to increase the accuracy and the ball cage
rigidity. Table1 shows typical fitting between the Tolerance in hole dimensions: D K5
hole and the shaft. Select a combination of a Dimensional tolerance of the shaft: d h5
hole and a shaft so that the clearance does not
Installation of the Ball Cage

Fig.2 shows examples of mounting the Die-setting Ball Cage.
LM Stroke
Fig.2 Example of Installation
A-563
Precautions on Use LM Stroke
[Handling]
(2) Dropping or hitting the LM Stroke may damage it. Giving an impact force to the product could
also cause damage even if the product looks intact.
[Lubrication]
(1) LM Stroke model ST can use either oil or grease as a lubricant. Select either lubricant according
to the DN value. When using grease, we recommend high-quality lithium-soap group grease No.
2.
(1) Entrance of foreign material into LM Stroke model ST may cause abnormal wear or shorten the
service life. When entrance of foreign material is predicted, it is important to select an effective
sealing device or dust-control device that meets the environment conditions. For LM Stroke
model ST, a special synthetic rubber seal (ST …UU) that is highly resistant to wear and a felt
seal with high contamination protection effect and low seal resistance (ST…DD) are available for
some types as contamination protection accessories.
(2) If foreign material adheres to the product,
replenish the lubricant after cleaning the
product.
(3) Contact THK if you desire to use the prod-
uct at a temperature of 80℃ or higher.
(4) Please be careful when using the product in
an environment with excessive coolant.
The coolant may cause premature failure if
it penetrates the bushing nut. Contact THK
for further details.
(5) When using the product in locations
Rubber seal Felt seal
exposed to constant vibrations or in special (standard) (designated)
environments such as clean rooms, vac-
uum and low/high temperature, contact Fig.1 Types of the Seal for the LM Stroke
THK in advance.
[Storage]
When storing the LM Stroke, enclose it in a package designated by THK and store it while avoiding
high temperature, low temperature and high humidity.
A-564
Precision Linear Pack
General Catalog

Features of the Precision Linear Pack .... A-566 Model ER .......................................... B-476
• Structure and features....................... A-566
Rated Load and Nominal Life............ A-567
Radial Clearance............................... A-569
A-565
Features Precision Linear Pack
Features of the Precision Linear Pack
Inner block
Outer rail
Ball
Ball case
Fig.1 Structure of Precision Linear Pack Model ER

Model ER is a slide unit using a stainless steel plate that is precision formed, heat-treated and then
ground. It has a structure where balls roll between the V-shaped grooves machined on the outer rail
and the inner block to allow the system to slide. It is an ultra-thin, lightweight unit in which the balls
circulate in a ball case incorporated in the inner block to perform infinite straight motion.
This model is used in extensive applications such as magnetic disc devices, electronic equipment,
semiconductor manufacturing equipment, medical equipment, measuring equipment, plotting
machines and photocopiers.
[Reduced Design and Assembly Costs]
It provides a highly accurate linear guide system with lower design cost and fewer assembly man-
hours than the conventional miniature ball bearings used in precision machines and other equip-
ment.
[Maintains Long-term Stability]
It is a ball-circulating type slide unit with an extremely small friction coefficient. This slide unit main-
tains stable performance over a long period of time.
[Lightweight, Compact Design and High-speed Response]
The outer rail and the inner block are composed of very thin stainless steel plates.
Since the linear pack is light, it has a small inertial moment and demonstrates superb high-speed
response.
A-566
Features

The basic load rating in the specification table
indicates the rated load in the radial direction as
shown in Fig.2. The rated loads in the reverse
CL C
radial and lateral directions are obtained from C0L C0
CT CT
Table1 below.
C0T C0T
Fig.2 Rated Loads in All Directions
Table1 Rated Loads in All Directions
Basic dynamic load rating Basic static load rating

Radial direction C (indicated in the specification table) C0 (indicated in the specification table)
Reverse
CL=C C0L=C0

radial direction

Model ER may receive an unexpected external force while it is stationary or operative due to the gen-
eration of an inertia caused by vibrations and impact or start and stop. It is necessary to consider a
static safety factor against such a working load.
fC • CO
fS =
PC
fS : Static safety factor (see Table2)
fC : Contact factor
z Reference Value of Static Safety Factor
The static safety factors indicated in Table2 are the lower limits of reference values in the respective
conditions.
Machine using Lower

Condition
the LM system limit of fS

A-567
[Nominal Life]
The nominal life of model ER is obtained using the following equation.
fC C 3
L= • 50
fW P C
(The total number of revolutions that 90% of a group of identical ER units independently
fC : Contact factor (see Table3)
6
L 10
Lh =
2 lS n1 60
n1 : Number of reciprocations
per minute (min– 1)
When multiple inner blocks are used in close contact with each other, their linear motion is affected
by a moment load and mounting accuracy, making it difficult to achieve uniform load distribution. In
such applications, multiply the basic load rating (C) and (C0) by the corresponding contact factor in
Table3.
Table3 Contact Factor (fC)
Number of inner blocks in close
Contact factor fC
2 0.81
3 0.72
Normal use 1 1
A-568
Features
Accuracy Standards
z fW: Load Factor

In general, reciprocating machines tend to involve vibrations or impact during operation. It is
extremely difficult to accurately determine vibrations generated during high-speed operation and
impact during frequent start and stop. Therefore, when the actual load applied on model ER cannot
be obtained, or when speed and vibrations have a significant influence, divide the basic dynamic
load rating (C) by the corresponding load factor in Table4 of empirically obtained data.
Vibrations/
Speed(V) fW
impact
Very low
Faint 1 to 1.2
V≦0.25m/s
Slow
Weak 1.2 to 1.5
0.25<V≦1m/s
Accuracy Standards
The running straightness of model ER is indicated in Table5. (See Fig.3.)
Table5 Running Straightness Unit: mm

Stroke lengthRunning straight- Running straight-
ness of inner ness of inner
Δ2 Δ1 Above Or less block in vertical block in horizon-
Straight directions Δ1 tal directions Δ2
-edge — 20 0.002 0.004
20 40 0.003 0.006
40 60 0.004 0.008
60 80 0.005 0.010
80 100 0.006 0.012
Fig.3 Method for Measuring Running Straightness
100 120 0.008 0.016
Radial Clearance
The radial clearance of model ER means the Table6 Radial Clearance Unit: μ m
value for the motion of the central part of the Radial clearance
inner block when the inner block is slightly Model No.
Normal C1
moved with a vertically constant force in the
middle of the outer rail in the longitudinal direc- ER 513 ±2 – 2 to 0
tion. The negative values in table 6 indicate that ER 616 ±2 – 3 to 0
the respective models are provided with a pre-
ER 920 ±2 – 4 to 0
load when assembled and have no clearance
between their inner blocks and the outer rails. ER 1025 ±3 – 6 to 0
Note) When desiring normal clearance, add no symbol;

when desiring C1 clearance, indicate "C1" in the
model number.
(see "Model number coding" on B-476 )
A-569
Precautions on Use Precision Linear Pack
[Handling]
0
(2) Dropping or hitting the Precision Linear Pack may damage it. Giving an impact to the product
(3) Removing the inner block of the Precision Linear Pack from the outer rail or letting it overshoot
will cause balls to fall off.
[Lubrication]
(1) Thoroughly remove anti-rust oil with a cleaning detergent and apply lubricant before using the
product. As the most suitable grease, we recommend THK AFC Grease, which maintains lubric-
ity over a long period of time. For lubrication in a clean room, low dust generation THK AFE-CA
Grease and THK AFF Grease are recommended.
[Installation]
The mounting surface of Precision Linear Pack Table1 Outer Rail Fixing Screws for Models ER513 and
model ER must be finished to the maximum ER616
accuracy. Nominal name of

Model No. Type
For securing the outer rail of models ER513 and screw × pitch
ER613, also purchase and use No. 0 screws for ER 513 M2×0.4
No. 0 pan-head
precision equipment (see Table1). (If using ordi- screw (class 1)
ER 616 M2.6×0.45
nary screws, the inner block may hit the screw
head.) Japan Camera Industry Association Standard JCIS 10-70
Cross-recessed screw for precision equipment (No. 0 screw)
(2) If foreign material such as dust of cutting chips adheres to the product, replenish the lubricant
after cleaning the product with pure white kerosene.
[Storage]
When storing the Precision Linear Pack, enclose it in a package designated by THK and store it
while avoiding high temperature, low temperature and high humidity.
A-570
Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide
General Catalog
Features and Types ........................ A-572 Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table .. B-479
Features of the Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide A-572 Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR1).... B-480
• Structure and features....................... A-572 Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR2).... B-482
Types of the Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide ... A-574 Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR3).... B-484
• Types and Features .......................... A-574 Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR4).... B-486
Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR6).... B-488
Point of Selection............................ A-575 Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR9).... B-490
Rated Load and Nominal Life............ A-575 Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR12).. B-492
Accuracy Standards .......................... A-578 Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR15).. B-494
Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR18).. B-496
Point of Design................................ A-579 Ball Cage Model B ............................ B-498
Installation procedure........................ A-579
Example of Clearance Adjustment.... A-580 Options............................................. B-499
Preload.............................................. A-580 Dedicated Mounting Bolt ................... B-499
Accuracy of the Mounting Surface .... A-580
Options............................................. A-581
Dedicated Mounting Bolt ................... A-581
A-571
Features and Types Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide
Features of the Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide
Dedicated rail Dedicated rail
Stopper Stopper
Roller Ball
Roller cage Ball cage
Cross Roller Guide Model VR Ball Guide Model VB
Stoppers of models
V1 to V4 have round
shapes.
Fig.1 Structure of Cross Roller Guide Model VR and Ball Guide Model VB

In model VR, precision rollers are orthogonally aligned one after another in a roller cage that is com-
bined with a dedicated rail having a raceway cut into a V-shape groove. When two units of the Cross
Roller Guide are mounted in parallel, the guide system is capable of receiving loads in the four direc-
tions. In addition, since the Cross Roller Guide can be given a preload, a clearance-free, highly rigid
and smooth slide mechanism is achieved.
Model VB is a low-friction, high-accuracy, finite LM system consisting of precision steel balls,
arranged in short pitches in a ball cage model B, and a dedicated rail model V.
The Cross Roller Guide and the Ball Guide are used in the slide unit of various devices such as OA
equipment and its peripherals, measuring instruments, precision equipment including a printed circuit
board drilling machine, optic measuring machines, optic stages, handling mechanisms and X-Ray
machines.
A-572
Features and Types
Features of the Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide
[Long Service Life, High Rigidity]

With a unique roller retaining mechanism, the effective contact length of the rollers is 1.7 times
greater than the conventional type. Furthermore, the roller pitch interval is short and a sufficient num-
ber of rollers are installed, thus increasing the rigidity by two and the service life by six times greater
than the conventional type. As a result, a safety-oriented design against vibrations and impact, which
commonly occur in ordinary straight motion mechanisms, can be achieved.
[Smooth Motion]
With model VR, the rollers are individually held in a cage and roller pockets formed on the cage are
in surface contact with the rollers to increase grease retention. Thus, smooth motion with little wear
and friction is achieved.
Model VR series and model VB series both include types made of stainless steel, which is highly cor-
rosion resistant.
A-573
Types of the Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide
Types and Features
Cross Roller Guide Model VR Specification Table⇒B-480

A compact, highly rigid LM system whose roller
cage holding precision rollers orthogonally
aligned one after another travels by half the
stroke on a V-shaped groove formed on a rail.
Model VR
Ball Guide Model VB Specification Table⇒B-498

A low-friction, highly accurate LM system whose
ball cage holding precision balls in short pitches
travels by half the stroke on a V-shaped groove
formed on a rail.
Model VB
A-574
Point of Selection Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide

0
The basic load ratings (CZ and C0Z) in the specification table indicate the values per rolling element in
the directions shown in Fig.1. When obtaining the nominal life, calculate the basic load ratings (C and
C0) of the actually used rolling elements from the equation below.
z For Model VR C
Z 3 C0
C = CL = 4
CZ, CT = 2C
2
CT
C0T
Z
C0 = C0L = C0Z, C0T = 2C0
2
Z
For , truncate the decimals.
2 CL
C0L
Model VR

z For Model VB
C
2 C0
3
C = CL = Z CZ, CT = 2C
CT
C0T
C0 = C0L = Z C0Z, C0T = 2C0

C0 : Basic static load rating (kN) CL
CZ : Basic dynamic load rating in the C0L
specification table (kN) Model VB
C0Z : Basic static load rating in the
specification table (kN) Fig.1
Z : Number of rolling elements used

(number of rolling elements within
the effective load range)
A-575
Models VR and VB may receive an unexpected external force while it is stationary or operative due
to the generation of an inertia caused by vibrations and impact or start and stop. It is necessary to
consider a static safety factor against such a working load.
Table1 Reference Values of Static Safety Factor (fS)
C0
fS = Machine using Basic dynamic load Lower
PC the LM system rating limit of fS
C0 : Basic static load rating (kN) machinery With vibration or impact 2 to 3
PC : Calculated load (kN)
[Nominal Life]
When the basic dynamic load ratings have been obtained, the rated lives of model VR and model VB
are obtained using the following equations.
z For Model VR
fT C 10
L= • 3
100
fW P C
z For Model VB
fT C 3
L= • 50
fW P C
(The total number of revolutions that 90% of a group of identical VR (VB) units independently
6
L 10
Lh =
2 l S n1 60
n1 : Number of reciprocations per
minute (min-1)
A-576
Point of Selection

ing the operating model VR or VB exceeds 100
1.0
℃ , take into account the adverse effect of the
high temperature and multiply the basic load rat- 0.9
ings by the temperature factor indicated in Fig.2. 0.8
Note) If the environment temperature exceeds 100 ℃ , con- 0.7
tact THK.
0.6
0.5
100 150 200

z fW: Load Factor

Speed(V) fw
Faint 1 to 1.2
Therefore, when the actual load applied on Slow

Weak 1.2 to 1.5
model VR or VB cannot be obtained, or when 0.25<V≦1m/s
speed and vibrations have a significant influ-
ence, divide the basic load rating (C or C0), by
the corresponding load factor in Table2 of
empirically obtained data.
A-577
Accuracy Standards
The accuracy of the dedicated rail for the Cross Roller Guide is classified into high accuracy grade
(H) and precision grade (P) as shown in Table3.
Table3 Accuracy Standards for Dedicated Rail Model V
B Unit: mm
High-accuracy Precision
Accuracy grades
grade grade
E
Symbol
H P
A Item
Parallelism of the
raceway against As per Fig.4
surfaces A and B
Dimensional toler-
±0.02 ± 0.01
ance in height E
Difference in height
0.01 0.005
E (note)
M Dimensional toler- 0 0
ance in width M – 0.2 – 0.1
Fig.3
Note) The difference in height E applies to four rails used on
the same plane.
Parallelism of the raceway (μm)
16
12
8
High accuracy grade (H)
Precision grade (P)

0
200 400 600 800 1000
Rail length L0 (mm)
Fig.4 Rail Length and Parallelism of the Raceway
A-578
Point of Design Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide
Installation Procedure
When using clearance adjustment bolts:
0
(1) Closely contact rails 2 and 3 onto the base,

and rail 1 onto the table, and then firmly Table
tighten the rail mounting bolts. Hutch
(2) Temporarily fasten rail 4 to the table.
Note) The rail mounting bolts must be designed so Base
that they can be fully fastened while maintaining
the rail installed. 1 2 3 4
(3) Place the base and the tables as shown in
Fig.1, and then insert the roller cage from
the end. If the cage does not enter because
there is no clearance, slide rail 4 toward the Fig.1 Installation of the Cross Roller Guide
adjustment bolt first, and then insert the
cage again.
(4) Place a dial gauge as shown in Fig.1. Then,
lightly screw all adjustment bolts evenly 1）
until the clearance is almost eliminated

while gently pressing the table sideways.
(5) Attach the stopper to the rail end.
(6) Slide the table and adjust the cage position
so as to achieve the required stroke. a b c d e
(7) Position the roller cage in the center of the
rail as shown in Fig.2-1. Then, evenly
tighten the adjustment bolts (b, c and d) that 2）
are within the area where the roller is
present until the dial gauge indicates the
required displacement. Fully fasten the
mounting bolts where adjustment was per-
formed. a b c d e
Note) The displacement indicated on the gauge repre-
sents the preload per roller cage.
(8) Slide the table as shown in Fig.2-2, and Fig.2 Sequence of Tightening the Adjustment Bolts
adjust the remaining adjustment bolts (a
and e) in the same manner.
Note) When installing two or more units, first measure
the tightening torque of the adjustment bolts for
the first unit or the sliding resistance of the fist
unit. Then, install the second (and later) unit so
that its/their tightening torque(s) or sliding resis-
tance(s) equal(s) that of the first unit. In this
way, almost uniform preloads can be provided.
A-579
Design the adjustment bolt so that it presses the rail on the same level as the roller.
1 2
Normally, press the rail with the When a certain level of accuracy When high accuracy and high
adjustment bolt. and rigidity is required, use a rigidity are required, use tapered
presser plate. gibs 1 and 2.
Fig.3 Example of Clearance Adjustment
Preload
An excessive preload may cause indentation, shorten the service life or cause trouble. The permissi-
ble preload per roller cage is indicated in the specification table. Tighten the adjustment bolts while
monitoring the displacement of the roller contact area.

To achieve a high level of running accuracy, it is also necessary to establish a certain level of accu-
racy in parallelism and straightness. Preferably, the parallelism and the flatness of the rail-mounting
surface should be finished by grinding or similar machining to at least the same degree as the paral-
lelism of the rail (see A-578). Also, mount the rail so that it closely contacts the mounting surface.
A-580
Options Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide (Options)
Dedicated Mounting Bolt

To mount the rail where normal clearance is to

0
be adjusted, use the screw hole drilled on the D1

rail as shown in Fig.1. The holes of the bolt (d1
and D1) must be machined so that they are
d1
greater by the adjustment allowance.
Fig.1
If it is inevitable to adopt a mounting method like
Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide (Options)

the one shown in Fig.2 for a structural reason,
use the dedicated mounting bolt (S) indicated in
Fig.3.
Dedicated mounting bolt (S)
Fig.2
Table1 Dedicated Mounting Bolt

Unit: mm
Supported
Model No. S d D H L B rail
S3 M3 2.3 5 3 12 2.5 V3
S4 M4 3.1 5.8 4 15 3 V4
S6 M5 3.9 8 5 20 4 V6 C D d S
S9 M6 4.6 8.5 6 30 5 V9
S 12 M8 6.25 11.3 8 40 6 V12 B H L
S 15 M10 7.9 13.9 10 45 8 V15
S 18 M12 9.6 15.8 12 50 10 V18
Fig.3 Dedicated Mounting Bolt
A-581
Precautions on Use Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide
[Handling]
0
(2) Dropping or hitting the Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide may damage it. Giving an impact to it
[Lubrication]
[Rail Length]
The roller cage and the ball cage move half the Lk
travel distance of the table in the same direction.
To prevent the cage from overhanging from the
raceway base when the cage length is "l " and l lS
the stroke length is "l S", the rail length (Lk) must 2
be at least the following. Lk

lS
ls
Lk≧l ＋
2
Lk
[Offset of the Cage]
The cage, which retains rollers (or balls), demonstrates extremely accurate motion. However, it may
be offset as affected by driving vibrations, inertia or impact.
If using the Cross Roller Guide or Ball Guide in the following conditions, contact THK.
z Vertical use
z Pneumatic cylinder drive
z Cam drive
z High speed crank drive
z Under a large moment load
z Butting the guide's external stopper with the table
A-582
Precautions on Use
[Stopper]
Stoppers are attached to the rail ends in order to prevent the cage from falling off. Note, however,
that frequently colliding the cage with the stopper may cause wear of the stopper and loosening of
the stopper fastening screws, and may cause the cage to fall off.
[Contamination Protection]
As a means to prevent foreign material from entering the Cross Roller Guide or the Ball Guide, con-
tamination protection accessories for the side faces as shown in Fig.1 are available. For contamina-
tion protection in the front and rear directions, consider using a bellows or a telescopic cover.
Labyrinth cover Wiper seal

Fig.1 Contamination Protection Methods
[Storage]
When storing the Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide, enclose it in a package designated by THK and
store it while avoiding high temperature, low temperature and high humidity.
A-583
A-584
Cross Roller Table
General Catalog
Features of the Cross Roller Table ... A-586 Model VRT Miniature Type (Tapped Base Type)..... B-502
• Structure and features....................... A-586 Model VRT-A Miniature Type (Tapped Base Type) .. B-504
Model VRU........................................ B-506
A-585
Features and Types Cross Roller Table
Features of the Cross Roller Table
Table
Stopper bolt
Rail
Rail
Base
Roller
Cage
Fig.1 Structure of the Cross Roller Table

The Cross Roller Table is a compact, highly rigid finite linear guide unit that has the Cross Roller
Guide(s) between the precision-machined table and base.
There are two types of the Cross Roller Table: model VRU, and a miniature type model VRT. The
Cross Roller Table is used in extensive applications such as OA equipment and peripherals, measur-
ing instruments and printed circuit board drilling machines.
A-586
Features and Types
Features of the Cross Roller Table
[Easy Installation]
Since the Cross Roller Guide(s) is installed
between the precision-machined table and
base, a highly accurate linear guide mechanism
is achieved simply by mounting the product with
bolts.
[Large Permissible Load]
Since rollers with large rated loads are installed
in short pitches, the cross roller guide is capable
of bearing a heavy load, achieving a highly rigid Model VRT
linear guide mechanism and gaining a long ser-
vice life.
[Diversified Usage]
Since the rollers are orthogonally arranged one
after another, the guide system is capable of
evenly receiving loads in the four directions
applied on the table. (See Fig.2.)
Model VRT-A
Cross Roller Table

Model VRU
Fig.2 Load Directions

The base and the table of models VRT-M and
VRT-AM use stainless steel. Their rails, rollers,
roller cages and screws are also made of stain-
less steel. As a result, these guide systems
have significantly high corrosion resistance.
The base and the table of model VRU-M are
made of aluminum.
A-587
Point of Selection Cross Roller Table

The rated loads of models VRT, VRT-A and VRU are equal in four directions (radial, reverse radial
and lateral directions), and their values are expressed as C and C0 in the corresponding specification
tables.
The Cross Roller Table may receive an unexpected external force while it is stationary or operative
due to the generation of an inertia caused by vibrations and impact or start and stop. It is necessary
to consider a static safety factor against such a working load.
C0 M0 MA
fS = or fS =
PC M

C0 : Basic static load rating (kN)
M0 : Static permissible moment
MB
(MA, MB and MC)
M : Calculated moment (kN)
MC
z Reference value of static safety factor

conditions.
Table1 Reference Values of Static Safety Factor (fS)
Machine using Lower

Basic dynamic load rating

industrial
A-588
Point of Selection
[Nominal Life]
The nominal life of the Cross Roller Table is obtained using the following equation.
fT C 10
L= • 3
100
fW PC

(The total number of revolutions that 90% of a group of identical VRT, VRT-A or VRU
units independently operating under the same conditions can achieve without showing
flaking)
6
L 10
Lh =
2 l S n1 60
Cross Roller Table

per minute (min-1)
A-589
If the temperature of the environment surround- 1.0
ing the operating model VRT, VRT-A or VRU
0.9
exceeds 100 ℃ , take into account the adverse
0.8
effect of the high temperature and multiply the
basic load ratings by the temperature factor indi- 0.7
cated in Fig.1. 0.6
tact THK.
100 150 200

z fW: Load Factor Table2 Load Factor (fW)

In general, reciprocating machines tend to
Speed(V) fW
impact
is extremely difficult to accurately determine
Faint 1 to 1.2
V≦0.25m/s
tion and impact during frequent start and stop.
Therefore, when the actual load applied on Slow
Weak 1.2 to 1.5
0.25<V≦1m/s
model VRT, VRT-A or VRU cannot be obtained,
or when speed and vibrations have a significant
influence, divide the basic load rating (C or C0),
by the corresponding load factor in Table2 of
Accuracy Standards
The dimensional tolerances of Cross Roller Table models VRT, VRT-A and VRU in height (M) and
width (W), and the running accuracy of the base against the mounting surfaces C and D are indi-
cated in the corresponding specification tables.
W
W D
D
C C
M
M
Models VRT and VRT-A Model VRU
Fig.2 Accuracy Standards
A-590
Precautions on Use Cross Roller Table
[Handling]
(2) Dropping or hitting the Cross Roller Table may damage it. Giving an impact to it could also
[Lubrication]
(1) For lubrication of the Cross Roller Table, use lithium-soap group grease or oil when it is neces-
sary as with ordinary bearings.
[Additional Machining of the Table and the Base]
When additionally machining the table and the base of the Cross Roller Table according to the condi-
tions such as drilling mounting holes, adhere to the following precautions.
(1) Do not let cutting chips enter the Cross Roller Guide unit.
(2) Machine the mounting holes as blind holes, not though holes.
THK can perform additional machining such as mounting holes as requested.
Cross Roller Table

The clearance of the Cross Roller Table is adjusted to the appropriate preload. Do not touch the
clearance adjustment screw.
[Offset of the Cage]
The cage, which retains rollers (or balls), demonstrates extremely accurate motion. However, it may
be offset as affected by driving vibrations, inertia or impact.
If using the Cross Roller Guide or Ball Guide in the following conditions, contact THK.
z Vertical use
z Pneumatic cylinder drive
z Cam drive
z High speed crank drive
z Under a large moment load
z Butting the guide's external stopper with the table
A-591
[Storage]
When storing the Cross Roller Table, enclose it in a package designated by THK and store it while
A-592
Linear Ball Slide
General Catalog
Features of the Linear Ball Slide ....... A-594 Model LSP......................................... B-514
• Structure and features....................... A-594 Model LS ........................................... B-516
Types of the Linear Ball Slide ........... A-596 Model LSC ........................................ B-518
• Types and Features .......................... A-596
Speed Controller ............................... B-520
Point of Selection............................ A-599 Dedicated Unit Base Model B ........... B-520
Rated Load and Nominal Life............ A-599 Limit Switch ....................................... B-521
A-593
Features and Types Linear Ball Slide
Features of the Linear Ball Slide
Slider
Stopper
Endplate Base
Section A

Rack
Pinion
Rack Ball
Cage
Needle roller raceway Magnified view of section A
Fig.1 Structure of Linear Ball Slide Model LSP

The Linear Ball Slide is a highly corrosion resistant slide unit that has an extremely low friction coeffi-
cient because stainless steel balls roll on four stainless steel needle roller raceways that are hard-
ened and ground.
In addition, model LSP has a pinion gear in the center and a rack on the base to prevent the cage
from slipping.
A ball slide equipped with a cylinder model LSC has a cylinder for drive in the base to downsize the
system and reduce the space and the weight.
Its components are all made of stainless steel, which is highly corrosion resistant. Furthermore, since
its inertia is small, the slide system is highly responsive to high speed. By simply securing the Linear
Ball Slide on the mounting surface, the user can easily achieve a linear guide mechanism. Thus, this
slide system is optimal for locations requiring high accuracy, such as optic measuring machines,
automatic recorders, small electronic-parts assembling machines, OA equipment and its peripherals.
A-594
Features and Types
Features of the Linear Ball Slide
[A Unit Type That Allows Easy Installation]

The clearance and motion of the slider is adjusted to the best state. Therefore, a highly accurate
slide mechanism can be gained by simply mounting the unit on the flat-finished mounting surface.
[Lightweight and Compact]
A light aluminum alloy is used in the base and the slider to reduce the weight.
[Smooth Motion]
The balls and the raceway (needle roller raceway) are in point contact, which causes the smallest
rolling loss, and the balls are evenly retained in the ball cage. This allows the slide system to perform
rolling motion at a minimal coefficient of friction (μ = 0.0006 to 0.0012).
The base and the slider are made of an aluminum alloy and their surfaces are treated with alumite
(anodization processing), which is highly resistant to corrosion and wear.
The balls, needle roller raceways and screws are made of stainless steel, making the system highly
corrosion resistant.
Linear Ball Slide
A-595
Types of the Linear Ball Slide
Types and Features
Linear Ball Slide with a Rack Model LSP Specification Table⇒B-514

With model LSP, the cage has a rack and pinion
mechanism, thus to prevent the cage from slip-
ping.
Also, since the cage does not slip even in verti-
cal mount, this model is used in an even broader
range of applications.
Note) Do not use the stopper as a mechanical stopper.
Model LSP
Linear Ball Slide Model LS Specification Table⇒B-516

Model LS is a unit-type linear system for finite
motion that has a structure where balls are
arranged between the base and the slider via a
needle roller raceway.
It is incorporated with a stopper mechanism,
thus to prevent damage deformation caused by
collision between the cage and the endplate.
Model LS
Linear Ball Slide with a Cylinder Model LSC Specification Table⇒B-518

Model LSC contains an air cylinder for drive
inside the base. Feeding air from the two ports
on the side face of the base allows the slide to
perform reciprocating motion. Since the cylinder
is of double-acting type, horizontal traveling
speed can be adjusted using the speed control-
ler. The cylinder and the piston are made of a
corrosion resistant aluminum alloy, and their
surfaces are specially treated to increase wear
Model LSC
resistance and durability. Additionally, the cage
has a rack and pinion mechanism, thus enabling
the cage to operate without slipping. <Cylinder specifications>
Air-feeding ports for piping are provided on one
Type of action Double-acting
side face, ensuring a certain degree of operabil-
ity and easy assembly even if the installation Fluid used air (no lubrication)
site has a limited space and is complex. 100 kPa to 700 kPa
Working pressure
The table on the right shows the specifications (1 kgf/cm2 to 7 kgf/cm2)
of the air cylinder incorporated in model LSC. Stroke velocity 50 to 300mm/s
A-596
Features and Types
Types of the Linear Ball Slide
[Speed Controller]
Fig.2 shows the shape of the speed controller.
10
Note) The speed controller is optional.
(control method: meter out) 9.8
Opposite side8 φ4
11
27 to 29.7 φ 9.8
22.8
2.9
M5
Fig.2 Shape of the Speed Controller (common to all model
numbers)
[Dedicated Unit Base Model B]

With Linear Ball Slide model LSC, a limit switch
Slider
for detecting the stroke end can be mounted Detecting-bar stage 15.5
using a dedicated unit base (Fig.3). When fine Detecting collar
positioning is required, a dedicated stopper can Bar
be mounted on the unit base to adjust the posi-
tion. (excluding model LSC1015) Limit switch
Limit switch Stopper screw for
mounting plate Unit base fine adjustment
Fig.3 Unit Base and Limit Switch Installation
Linear Ball Slide

L
18.5 n K n
10 F G
4-M6
59
45
30
70
9 2×2-M5 f1 g1
N g2
5.5
10
4.3
5.5
2×4-M3×8
9
Unit: mm
Unit base dimensions

Unit base
Length Mass
Model B
L F G f1 g1 K n N g2 kg
LSC1515 80 40 21 23 29.5 56 12 68 6 0.12
LSC1530 110 60 25 40 35 74 18 94 8 0.16
LSC1550 150 100 25 78 36 114 18 134 8 0.21
A-597
[Limit Switch]
The specifications of the limit switch are as follows.
<Limit switch specifications>
Type D2VW-5L2A-1 (Omron)

NC
Contact type contact (1C contact)
NO
COM
<Rated Specifications>
Non-inductive load (A) Inductive load (A)

Rated voltage Resistance load Ramp load Inductive load
Type
(V)
Normally Normally Normally Normally Normally Normally
closed open closed open closed open
125 5 0.5 4
AC
250 5 0.5 4
D2VW-5
30 5 3 4
DC
125 0.4 0.1 0.4
Note1) The above figures indicate the constant current.

Note2) Inductive load refers to power factor of 0.7 or greater (alternate current) and time constant of 7 ms or less (direct cur-
rent).
Note3) Ramp load implies a rush current 10 times greater.
Note4) The above rated values apply when a test is conducted with the following conditions in accordance with JIS C 4505.
(1) Ambient temperature: 20℃± 2℃
(2) Ambient humidity: 65% ± 5% RH
(3) Operating frequency: 30 times/min
Note) For applications under a minute load (5 to 24 VDC), a minute-load type is available. Contact THK for details.
A-598
Point of Selection Linear Ball Slide

0
The rated loads of models LS, LSP and LSC are identical in the vertical and horizontal directions.
Linear Ball Slide models LS, LSP or LSC may receive an unexpected external force while it is sta-
tionary or operative due to the generation of an inertia caused by vibrations and impact or start and
stop. It is necessary to consider a static safety factor against such a working load.
C0 M0 MA
fS = or fS =
PC M
M0 : Static permissible moment
MB
(MA, MB and MC) (N-m)
M : Calculated moment (N-m)
MC
Linear Ball Slide

conditions.
Machine using Lower

Load conditions
industrial
A-599
[Nominal Life]
The service life of the Linear Ball Slide is obtained using the following equation.
1 C 3
L= • 50
fW P C
(The total number of revolutions that 90% of a group of identical Linear Ball Slide units
independently operating under the same conditions can achieve without showing flaking)
fW : Load factor (see Table2)
6
L 10 l S : Stroke length (mm)
Lh =
2 lS n1 60 n1 : Number of reciprocations
z fW: Load Factor
Speed(V) fW
tion and impact during frequent start and stop. Faint 1 to 1.2
V≦0.25m/s
Therefore, when the actual load applied on
Slow
model VR or VB cannot be obtained, or when Weak 1.2 to 1.5
0.25<V≦1m/s
speed and vibrations have a significant influ-
ence, divide the basic load rating (C or C0), by
the corresponding load factor in Table2 of
A-600
Point of Selection
Accuracy Standards
Accuracy Standards
The accuracies of Linear Ball Slide models LS,
LSP and LSC are defined as follows.
Running parallelism of the top face of the slide

: 0.010mm MAX/10mm
Positioning repeatability of the top face of the slide
: 0.0015mm MAX
Fig.1 Accuracy Standards
Linear Ball Slide
A-601
Precautions on Use Linear Ball Slide
[Handling]
0
(2) Dropping or hitting the Linear Ball Slide may damage it. Giving an impact to the product could
also cause damage to its function even if the product looks intact.
[Lubrication]
(1) Apply lubricant before using the product.
(2) If foreign material such as dust of cutting chips adheres to the product, replenish the lubricant
(5) The Linear Ball Slide is incorporated with a stopper mechanism that prevents the slider from
coming off. If impact is given, the stopper may be damaged. Do not use this stopper as a
mechanical stopper.
[Storage]
When storing the Linear Ball Slide, enclose it in a package designated by THK and store it while
A-602
LM Roller
General Catalog
Features of the LM Roller.................. A-604 Models LR and LR-Z ......................... B-524
• Structure and features....................... A-604 Models LRA and LRA-Z .................... B-525
Types of the LM Roller ...................... A-606 Models LRB and LRB-Z .................... B-526
• Types and Features .......................... A-606 Model LRU ........................................ B-527
Point of Selection............................ A-608 Options............................................. B-528

Nominal Life ...................................... A-608 Spring Pad ........................................ B-528
Accuracy Standards .......................... A-611 Models SM and SMB ........................ B-529
Models SE and SEB.......................... B-530
Point of Design................................ A-612
Raceway ........................................... A-612
Installing the LM Roller...................... A-613
Guidance for Adjusting the Clearance . A-614
Examples of Arranging LM Roller Units .. A-615
Examples of Installing the LM Roller. A-616
Options............................................. A-617
Spring Pad Model PA........................ A-617
Fixture Models SM/SMB and SE/SEB .... A-618
A-603
Features and Types LM Roller
Features of the LM Roller
Retainer
Raceway base
Roller
Retainer
Fig.1 Structure of LM Roller Model LR

In the LM Roller, dual rollers assembled on the circumference of the precision-ground, rigid raceway
base travel in infinite circulation while being held by a retainer. A center guide integrated with the
raceway base is formed in the central part of the loaded area of the raceway base to constantly cor-
rect skewing of the rollers. This unique structure ensures smooth rolling motion. The LM Roller is
used in applications such as the XYZ guide of NC machine tools, precision press ram guides, press
dies changers and heavy-load conveyance systems.
A-604
Features and Types
Features of the LM Roller
[Supports an Ultra Heavy Load and Ensures Smooth Motion]

The LM Roller is compact and capable of carrying a heavy load, and one unit of model LR50130
(length: 130 mm; width: 82 mm; height: 42 mm) is capable of receiving a 255 kN load. Moreover,
because of rolling motion, this model has a low friction coefficient (μ = 0.005 to 0.01) and is free from
stick-slip, thus achieving highly accurate straight motion.
[High Combined Accuracy]
In general, when supporting a single plane with LM rollers, multiple units of LM rollers are combined
on the same plane, and therefore, the height difference between the rollers significantly affects the
machine accuracy and service life. With THK LM Roller, the user can select a combination of models
with a height difference of up to 2 μ m.
[Rational Skewing-preventing Structure]
With an LM system using rollers, once the rollers skew, it increases friction resistance or decreases
running accuracy.
To prevent skewing, the LM Roller has roller guides on the center of the retainer full circle, and in the
center of the loaded area on the raceway base. This structure enables the LM Roller to automatically
correct skewing caused by a mounting accuracy error and the rollers to travel in an orderly manner. It
also allows the LM Roller to be installed with slant mount or wall mount while demonstrating high per-
formance.
LM Roller
A-605
Types of the LM Roller
Types and Features
Model LR Specification Table⇒B-524

This model is designed to be fit into a groove
machined on the mounting surface. By screwing
bolts into four holes on the raceway base, it is
secured on the mounting surface. (Fixture mod-
els SM and SE are also available.)
Model LR
Model LR-Z Specification Table⇒B-524

A lighter type that uses a resin retainer and is
designed to be mounted in the same manner as
model LR. Since it has a groove for installing a
seal, a special rubber seal with a high contami-
nation protection effect can easily be attached.
In addition, this model is capable of high-speed
traveling at 1 m/s.
Model LR-Z
Model LRA Specification Table⇒B-525

Just like model LR, this model is also designed
to be fit into a groove. It is a compact type that
can be mounted using fixture model SM or SE
and bolts.
Model LRA
Model LRA-Z Specification Table⇒B-525

model LRA. Since it has a groove for installing a
traveling at 1 m/s.
Model LRA-Z
A-606
Features and Types
Types of the LM Roller
Model LRB Specification Table⇒B-526

Since this model does not require a groove on
the mounting surface, man-hours for machining
can be reduced. It can be mounted using fixture
model SMB or SE and bolts.
Model LRB
Model LRB-Z Specification Table⇒B-526

model LRB. Since it has a groove for installing a
traveling at 1 m/s.
Model LRB-Z
LM Roller
Model LRU Specification Table⇒B-527
Since this model does not require a groove on
the mounting surface, man-hours for machining
can be reduced. By screwing bolts into four
holes on the raceway base, it is secured on the
mounting surface.
Model LRU
A-607
Point of Selection LM Roller
Nominal Life
The LM Roller may receive an unexpected external force while it is stationary or operative due to the
generation of an inertia caused by vibrations and impact or start and stop. It is necessary to consider
a static safety factor against such a working load.
fC •CO
fS =
PC

fC : Contact factor
conditions.
Machine using Lower
industrial

Machine tool
With vibration or impact 2.5 to 7
A-608
Point of Selection
Nominal Life
[Nominal Life]
The nominal life of the LM Roller is obtained using the basic dynamic load rating (C) indicated in the
corresponding specification table, and the following equation.
fH •fC •fT C 10
L= • 3
100
fW PC
(The total number of revolutions that 90% of a group of identical LM Roller units indepen-
dently operating under the same conditions can achieve without showing flaking)
fH : Hardness factor (see Fig.1)
fC : Contact factor
6
L 10
Lh =
2 l S n1 60

l
LM Roller
S : Stroke length (mm)
To maximize the load capacity of the LM sys-
between 58 to 64 HRC. If the hardness is lower 0.9
Hardness factor fH
0.8
than this range, the basic dynamic load rating 0.7
and the basic static load rating decrease. There- 0.6
fore, it is necessary to multiply each rating by 0.5
0.4
the respective hardness factor (fH). 0.3
0.2
0.1
60 50 40 30 20 10
A-609
ing the operating LM Roller exceeds 100℃, take
1.0
into account the adverse effect of the high tem-
perature and multiply the basic load ratings by 0.9
the temperature factor indicated in Fig.2. 0.8
Note) The normal service temperature of the LM Roller is 80 0.7
℃ at a maximum. If the ambient temperature exceeds
80℃, contact THK. 0.6
0.5
100 150 200


When multiple LM Roller units are used in near Table2 Contact Factor (fC)
close contact with each other, their linear motion Number of LM Roller units in
Contact factor fC
is affected by moments and mounting accuracy, close contact with each other
bution. In such applications, multiply the basic 3 0.72
load rating (C) and (C0) by the corresponding 4 0.66
contact factor in Table2. 5 0.61
Note) If uneven load distribution is expected in a large Normal use 1
machine, take into account the respective contact fac-
z fW: Load Factor

Speed(V) fW
Faint 1 to 1.2
V≦0.25m/s
tion and impact during frequent start and stop.
Therefore, when the actual load applied to the Slow
Weak 1.2 to 1.5
0.25<V≦1m/s
LM Roller cannot be obtained, or when speed
Medium
and impact have a significant influence, divide Medium 1.5 to 2
1<V≦2m/s
the basic load rating (C or C0) by the corre- High
sponding load factor in Table3 of empirically Strong 2 to 3.5
V>2m/s
obtained data.
A-610
Point of Selection
Accuracy Standards
Accuracy Standards
When multiple LM Roller units are arranged on the same plane, the mounting heights of the LM
Roller units must be identical in order to achieve uniform load distribution. The dimensional tolerance
of the LM Roller in height (A) is defined as indicated in Table4. When ordering LM Roller units to be
used on the same plane, specify their tolerances with the same classification symbol.
Each classification symbol is marked on the package box and on the side face of the LM Roller's
raceway base as indicated in Fig.4. (except for normal grade)
Table4 Classification of Dimensional Tolerances in Height (A)
Unit: μ m
Accuracy Dimensional Classification
Grades tolerance for A symbol
A Normal grade 0 to – 10 No Symbol
A
0 to – 5 H5
High grade
– 5 to – 10 H10
0 to – 3 P3
– 3 to – 6 P6
Precision grade
Fig.3 Mounting Height (A) of the LM Roller – 6 to – 9 P9
– 9 to – 12 P12
0 to – 2 SP2
– 2 to – 4 SP4
Ultra-precision
– 4 to – 6 SP6
grade
P3 – 6 to – 8 SP8
– 8 to – 10 SP10
Classification symbol for height tolerance
LM Roller
Fig.4
A-611
Point of Design LM Roller
Raceway
To maximize the performance of the LM Roller, it is necessary to take into account the hardness, sur-
0
face roughness and accuracy of the raceway, on which the rollers directly roll, when manufacturing
the product. In particular, the hardness significantly affects the service life. Therefore, it is important
to take much care in selecting a material and heat treatment method.
[Hardness]
We recommend surface hardness of 58 HRC (≒ 653 HV) or higher. The depth of the hardened layer
is determined by the size of the LM Roller; we recommend approximately 2 mm for general use. If the
hardness of the raceway is lower or the raceway cannot be hardened, multiply the load rating by the
corresponding hardness factor (see Fig.1 on A-609).
[Material]
The following materials are generally used as suitable for surface hardening through induction-hard-
ening and flame quenching.
If the machine body is a mold, depending on the conditions, a hardened steel plate may not be used
and instead, the surface of mold itself may be hardened.
[Surface Roughness]
To achieve smooth motion, the surface should preferably be finished to 0.40a or less. If slight wear is
allowed in the initial stage, the surface may be finished to approximately 0.80a.
[Accuracy]
When high accuracy is required, securing a hardened steel plate to the machine body may cause
undulation on the raceway. To avoid this, secure the LM Roller with bolts before grinding the hard-
ened steel plate as with when mounting the product, or tightening it to the machine body before
grinding and finishing the raceway, to produce a good result.
A-612
Point of Design
Installing the LM Roller
Installing the LM Roller

Fig.1 shows examples of installing the LM Roller. To minimize the gradient of the LM Roller in the
traveling direction, provide a reference surface on the mounting surface and press the LM Roller
toward it. The mounting reference surface of the LM Roller is opposite of the THK logo marked on the
raceway base.
(a) Installing models LR, LRU and LR-Z

THK logo
Use the four mounting bolt holes on the raceway base to
mount the LM Roller.
G+0.3MIN
LR W1+0.1MIN
For G and W1, see the specification table.
(b) Installing models LRA and LRA-Z

The LM Roller can easily be secured using fixture model SM
or SE. SE is provided with a wiper to increase contamination
protection effect.
THK logo
SM LRA SE
W1+0.1MIN
For W1, see the specification table.
LM Roller
(c) Installing models LRB and LRB-Z
The LM Roller can easily be secured using fixture model

SMB or SEB. SEB is provided with a wiper to increase con-
tamination protection effect. THK logo
SMB LRB SEB
Fig.1 Installing the LM Roller
A-613
Guidance for Adjusting the Clearance
To secure stable accuracy during operation, the LM Roller is provided with a light preload. Provision
of a preload is especially effective also in increasing the service life for applications where a vibration
impact load or overhang load is applied.
Fig.2 shows clearance adjusting methods that are commonly practiced.
Normally, it is preferable to provide a preload that is approximately 3% of the basic dynamic load rat-
ing (C). Providing a preload to the LM Roller will stabilize the accuracy.
(a) Using a dedicated stopper (b) Using a set screw
(c) Adjusting a tapered gib
Fig.2 Methods for Adjusting the Clearance of the LM Roller
A-614
Point of Design
Examples of Arranging LM Roller Units
Examples of Arranging LM Roller Units
LM Roller
A-615
Examples of Installing the LM Roller
Assembling the slide section
Model LRA Fixture (SM, SE)
Tapered gib
Using the cross rail of a vertical lathe
Model LRA
Model LRA
A-616
Options LM Roller (Options)
Spring Pad Model PA

Spring Pad Model PA
By attaching this spring pad to the

back of the LM Roller as shown in
Spring Pad Fig.2 (a) on A-614 . Turning the
Model PA adjustment bolt, adjustment of a
clearance and a preload can easily
be done.
[Guidance for Using the Spring Pad]

Spring pad model PA is a low price item that enables easy adjustment and achieves self-aligning. A
preload can easily be adjusted by installing the spring pad to the machine and externally tightening
the adjustment bolt using a torque wrench. As a result, the need for troublesome shim adjustment
and machining for matching is eliminated.
z Example of Using the Spring Pad
(1) When using the spring pad in the opposite
LM Roller (Options)
position to provide a preload
To prevent the table from lifting or guiding it
horizontally, using the spring pad on one
side as shown in Fig.1 will easily provide a
preload and eliminate vibrations and play of
the machine.
(2) When applying both sliding and rolling on
the same plane
When desiring to increase friction resist-
ance because the table inertia is large, or
desiring to increase rigidity under a heavy
Fig.1
load, the spring pad can be used in combi-
nation with the sliding surface. To do so,
install the LM Roller and the spring pad to
several locations on the table as shown in
Fig.2, and then tighten the adjustment bolt
by the load to be allocated to the LM Roller.
Fig.2
A-617
z Guidance for Installing the Spring Pad
Fig.3 shows examples of installing the spring pad model PA to the bottom of the LM Roller and
adjusting the clearance and providing a preload.
The dimensions in this example are indicated in the specification table for the spring pad model PA.
The following is the procedure for the installation.
(1) Secure the fixture and the spacer. Adjust them so that the LM Roller can move vertically.
(2) Turn the adjustment bolt until the LM Roller hits the raceway.
(3) Turn the adjustment bolt using a torque wrench and tighten it until the desired torque is reached.
A preload is provided via the spring pad model PA.
Fixture
ΔC=0.5mm 0.5mm
A
H
F h
1mm
Spring pad Spacer
Adjustment bolt
P S
Fig.3
Fixture Models SM/SMB and SE/SEB

Fixture Models SM/SMB and SE/SEB
Use of fixture model SM or SE elimi-

nates the need to machine thin
Fixture Models tapped holes for mounting the LM
Roller, and allows the roller to firmly
SM/SMB and be secured. Models SE and SEB
SE/SEB each have a special rubber wiper
with double lips to achieve a high
contamination protection effect.
A-618
Precautions on Use LM Roller
[Handling]
0
(2) Dropping or hitting the LM Roller may damage it. Giving an impact to the product could also
[Contamination Protection and Lubrication]
With the LM Roller, once foreign material enters the raceway due to poor contamination protection, it
cannot be removed easily and tends to severely damage the raceway or the LM rollers. Therefore,
use much care in contamination protection.
Fixture for the LM Roller models SE and SEB each have a special rubber wiper with double lips to
achieve a high contamination protection effect. Feeding grease between the double lips when attach-
ing the fixture, as shown in Fig.1, will further increase the effect.
For locations subject to cutting chips or welding spatter, it is necessary to use a contamination pro-
tection cover such as a bellows and a telescopic cover, or a wiper reinforced with a metal plate as
indicated in Fig.2.
Fig.1 Wiper of Fixture Models SE and SEB Fig.2 Reinforced Wiper
LM Roller
For contamination protection of the side faces, items as shown in Fig.3 are available.
The required quantity of lubricant is much smaller than sliding guides, making the lubrication control
easy.
As for the lubricant, the same type of grease or lubricant as that of ordinary bearings will be ade-
quately effective. To achieve a high level of grease retention, it is preferable to use lithium-soap
group grease No. 1 or 2, or slightly viscous sliding surface oil or turbine oil.
To replenish the lubricant to the LM Roller, drop the lubricant from the greasing hole provided on the
back of the retainer as necessary, or directly drop it to the raceway. If the LM Roller is not used fre-
quently, it is also possible to apply grease to the rollers of the product.
Labyrinth plate Sponge or felt
Fig.3
A-619
[Mounting Reference Surface]
To help correctly mount the LM Roller in the traveling direction, it has a mounting reference surface
on the side face of the raceway base. The reference surface is on the opposite side of the THK logo.
[Mounting Precision]
To maximize the performance of the LM Roller, it is necessary to distribute the load as evenly as pos-
sible when mounting the product. For the parallelism between the roller and the raceway indicated in
Fig.4, we recommend 0.015 mm or less against 100 mm. For the allowable tilt of the roller in the lon-
gitudinal direction, 0.01 mm or less against 100 mm is recommended.
0.01MAX/100
0.015MAX/100
(a) Parallelism between the LM Roller and the raceway (b) Allowable tilt of the roller in the longitudinal direction
0.01MAX/100
(c) Parallelism between the LM Roller and the raceway in the horizontal direction
Fig.4 LM Roller and Mounting Precision
(2) Do not use the resin retainer for LM Roller model LR (A, B)-Z and seals (including SE and SEB)
in an environment at temperature of 80℃ or higher.
[Storage]
When storing the LM Roller, enclose it in a package designated by THK and store it while avoiding
A-620
Flat Roller
General Catalog
Features of the Flat Roller................. A-622 Model FT ........................................... B-532
• Structure and features....................... A-622 Model FTW........................................ B-533
Types of the Flat Roller ..................... A-624

Point of Design................................ A-629

Raceway ........................................... A-629
Installing the Flat Roller..................... A-630
A-621
Features and Types Flat Roller
Features of the Flat Roller
Cage
Roller
Fig.1 Structure of LM Flat Roller Model FT

With the Flat Roller, precision rollers compliant with JIS B 1506 are installed in pockets of a cage
made of a thin steel plate pressed into M shape (in cross section) to increase its rigidity. Thanks to its
structural design, the rollers do not fall off because they are held in cage pockets. Since the cage,
which is incorporated with rollers having a diameter of 5 mm or larger, is of roller-lifter type, smooth
motion is achieved without damaging the raceway even if the hardness of the raceway is low. The
Flat Roller is sandwiched between the two raceways. As the table moves, the Flat Roller travels by
half the distance of the table in the same direction. For example, if the table moves 500 mm, the Flat
Roller travels 250 mm in the same direction.
The Flat Roller is optimal for large machine tools such as planer, horizontal milling machines and
cylindrical grinding machines, and for locations requiring high accuracy such as surface grinding
machines, cylindrical grinder and optic measuring machines.
A-622
Features and Types
Features of the Flat Roller

Sine rollers are installed in short pitches, the Flat Roller has a large load capacity, and depending on
the conditions, it can be used on the raceway of a mold that is little hardened. In addition, the deflec-
tion rigidity of the table is almost the same as that of a sliding surface.
[Combined Accuracy of 90° V Surface and Flat Surface Supported as Standard]
The Flat Roller is designed so that it can be mounted on the 90° V-flat sliding surface, which is the
most common configuration among narrow guide types of tables and saddles of machinery. It allows
the product to be used without major design change.
[Lowest Friction among Roller Type LM Systems]
Since the rollers are evenly held in a light, rigid cage, friction between rollers is eliminated and skew-
ing of the rollers is minimized. As a result, a small friction coefficient (μ = 0.001 to 0.0025) is
achieved, and stick-slip, which is problematic with sliding surfaces, does not occur.
[Instant Connection of the Cage]
When installing the Flat Roller in a large machine, it can easily be connected on the bed. This allows
the Flat Roller to be installed even with the longest type.
Flat Roller
A-623
Types of the Flat Roller
Types and Features
Model FT/FT-V Specification Table⇒B-532

These models have a single row of rollers and
are mainly used on the flat surface.
Models FT/FT-V
Model FTW/FTW-V Specification Table⇒B-533

These models have two or more rows of rollers,
and their cages are shaped to bend at 90°.
Each model uses rollers with a diameter 0.7071
times greater than that of the rollers on the flat
surface so that model FT or FT-V can be
mounted on the 90° V surface at the same
height if model FT or FT-V is used on the flat
surface.
Models FTW/FTW-V
A-624
Point of Selection Flat Roller

The Flat Roller may receive an unexpected external force while it is stationary or operative due to the
generation of an inertia caused by vibrations and impact or start and stop. It is necessary to consider
a static safety factor against such a working load.
fC •CO
fS =
PC

fC : Contact factor
(see [Load Rating] and [Nominal Life] on A-626)
conditions.
Machine using Lower

industrial
Flat Roller
Machine tool
A-625
[Load Rating]
C, C0 C, C0
The rated loads shown in the specification
tables represent the rated loads with a unit
length (l ) in the directions indicated in the figure
below.
Model FT or FT-V Model FTW or FTW-V

If the length of the Flat Roller in the effective load range differs from the unit length (l ), approximate
rated loads (Cl and C0l ) can be obtained using the following equation.
Cl =
l 0
3
4
C
l
C0 l =
l 0
• C0
l
Cl : Basic dynamic load rating
in the effective load range (kN)
l 0 : Length in effective load range (mm)
l : Unit length
(see the specification table) (mm)
C0 l : Basic static load rating
in the effective load range (kN)
Note) Note that if the hardness of the raceway is lower than 58 HRC, the rated loads will be decreased. (See Fig.2 on A-627.)
[Nominal Life]
When the basic dynamic load rating (Cl ) of the Flat Roller in the effective load range has been
obtained from the equation above, the nominal life is obtained using the following equation.
fH •fC •fT C l 10
L= • 3
100
fW PC
(The total number of revolutions that 90% of a group of identical Flat Roller units inde-
pendently operating under the same conditions can achieve without showing flaking)
Cl : Basic dynamic load rating (kN)
fC : Contact factorNote)
Note) Contact factor is determined according to the contact state of the two planes between which the rollers travel. If the con-
tact ratio between the two planes is 50%, set the contact factor as fC = 0.5 for safety's sake.
A-626
Point of Selection

L 10
6
Lh =
2 Sl n1 60 n1 : Number of reciprocations per minute
(min-1)

ing the operating Flat Roller exceeds 100 ℃ , 1.0
take into account the adverse effect of the high 0.9
temperature and multiply the basic load ratings 0.8
by the temperature factor indicated in Fig.1. 0.7
tact THK.
0.5
100 150 200


To maximize the load capacity of the LM sys- 1.0
Hardness factor fH
between 58 to 64 HRC. If the hardness is lower 0.8

than this range, the basic dynamic load rating 0.7
0.6
and the basic static load rating decrease. There- 0.5
fore, it is necessary to multiply each rating by 0.4
the respective hardness factor (fH). 0.3
Flat Roller
0.2
0.1
60 50 40 30 20 10
z fW: Load Factor

Speed(V) fW
Faint 1 to 1.2
Therefore, when the actual load applied cannot Weak
Slow
1.2 to 1.5
be obtained, or when speed and impact have a 0.25<V≦1m/s
significant influence, divide the basic load rating Medium
Medium 1.5 to 2
1<V≦2m/s
(C or C0), by the corresponding load factor in
High
Table2 of empirically obtained data. Strong 2 to 3.5
V>2m/s
A-627
Accuracy Standards
The accuracy of the Flat Roller is classified into normal grade, high accuracy grade and precision
grade according to the difference in diameter between the rollers incorporated in a single cage.
When it is necessary to specify the dimensional tolerance in the roller diameter for reasons related to
the required accuracy or combination, select the desired accuracy from Table3 and specify the corre-
sponding accuracy symbol.
Table3 Classification of Roller Diameters for Selection
Unit: μ m
Dimensional Accuracy
Accuracy Diameter
tolerance indication
grades difference
in diameter symbol
Normal
3 0 to – 3 No Symbol
grade
0 to – 2 H2
High
2 – 2 to – 4 H4
P1 grade
– 4 to – 6 H6
Accuracy indication symbol Precision
1 0 to – 1 P1
grade
Fig.3
Note) The accuracy indication symbol is marked on the end
of the cage as shown in Fig.3.
A-628
Point of Design Flat Roller
Raceway
To maximize the performance of the Flat Roller, it is necessary to take into account the hardness,
0
surface roughness and accuracy of the raceway, on which the rollers directly roll, when manufactur-
ing the product. In particular, the hardness significantly affects the service life. Therefore, it is impor-
tant to take much care in selecting a material and heat treatment method.
[Hardness]
We recommend surface hardness of 58 HRC (≒ 653 HV) or higher. The depth of the hardened layer
is determined by the size of the Flat Roller; we recommend approximately 2 mm for general use. If
the hardness of the raceway is lower or the raceway cannot be hardened, multiply the load rating by
the corresponding hardness factor indicated in Fig.2 on A-627.
[Material]
The following materials are generally used as suitable for surface hardening through induction-hard-
ening and flame quenching.
If the machine body is a mold, depending on the conditions, a hardened steel plate may not be used
and instead, the surface of mold itself may be hardened.
[Surface Roughness]
To achieve smooth motion, the surface should preferably be finished to 0.40a or less. If slight wear is
allowed in the initial stage, the surface may be finished to approximately 0.80a.
[Accuracy]
When high accuracy is required, securing a hardened steel plate to the machine body may cause
Flat Roller
undulation on the raceway. To avoid this, secure the Flat Roller with bolts before grinding the hard-
ened steel plate as with when mounting the product, or tightening it to the machine body before
grinding and finishing the raceway, to produce a good result.
A-629
Installing the Flat Roller
[Combination of 90° V Surface and Flat Surface]
The Flat Roller can be mounted directly onto the Table1 Example of Combinations
guide surface on the 90° V surface and flat sur- 90°V surface Flat surface
face. Table1 shows examples of their combina- Roller Roller
tions. Model No. diameter Model No. diameter
Da Da
Note)The roller diameter (Da) for model numbers
FTW 4030V 2.828 FT 4030 4
containing symbol V at the end represents the
1
value 2 times that of types for the same model FTW 4030V 2.828 FT 4035 4
number with no symbol.
FTW 5035V 3.535 FT 5038 5
The diameter of the roller to be combined with
90° V surface will be 12 times that of the roller on FTW 5035V 3.535 FT 5043 5
the flat surface.
FTW 5045 5 FT 10060V 7.071
For example, when using model FT4035 (roller
diameter: φ 4) on the flat surface, use model FTW 5050 5 FT 10060V 7.071
FTW4030V (roller diameter: φ 2.828) on the V FTW 10070V 7.071 FT 10080 10
surface. Performance of the Flat Roller is
significantly affected by the contact state of the
upper and lower raceways. You can check the fit
before installing the Flat Roller by designing the
raceways as indicated in Fig. 1. 90°
Model FTW 4030V Model FT 4035
Fig.1 Example of Combinations
[Other Example of Installation]

In locations where a lifting load or an overhang
load is applied, the Flat Roller can be installed
as shown in Fig.2.
For details on clearance adjustment from the
side face, see Example of Clearance Adjust-
ment for the Cross Roller Guide on A-580.
Fig.2 Location where a Lifting Load is Applied
A-630
Point of Design
Installing the Flat Roller
[Determining the Flat Roller Length]

The Flat Roller travels 1/2 of the travel distance
of the table in the same direction. Therefore, it is
necessary to calculate the stroke length and the LB
Flat Roller length as indicated below. LT
To keep the Flat Roller under the table, obtain

Flat Roller length l S as follows.
l S≦LB—LT
The Flat Roller length: l
l l S
= LT＋ = 0.5 (LB＋LT)
Fig.3
2
[Connecting Flat Roller Units]

When it is necessary to joint two or more Flat
Roller units, use a joint plate as shown in Fig.4
to join them on the base. When placing an
order, indicate the overall length for actual use.
Note, however, that model FT2010 units cannot
be joined together.
Flat Roller
Fig.4 Connection of Model FT Units
[Guiding the Flat Roller]

To guide model FT or FT-V, follow the instruc-
tion as shown in Fig.5.
b+0.5MIN
For "b", see the specification table.
Fig.5 Guiding the Flat Roller
A-631
Precautions on Use Flat Roller
[Handling]
0
(2) Dropping or hitting the Flat Roller may damage it. Giving an impact to the product could also
With the Flat Roller, once foreign material enters
the raceway due to poor contamination protec-
tion, it cannot be removed easily and tends to
severely damage the raceway or the Flat rollers.
Therefore, use much care in contamination pro- (a) Copper cover or telescopic cover
tection. Normally, for contamination protection
of the Flat Roller, a bellows or a telescopic cover
that covers the whole sliding surface, as shown
in Fig.1, is effective.
The required quantity of lubricant is much
smaller than sliding metals, making the lubrica- (b) Bellows or roller blind
tion control easy.
Fig.1 Contamination Protection Methods
Since the Flat Roller has high lubricant reten-
tion, it is suitable for grease lubrication. It is pref-
erable to use lithium-soap group grease No. 1 or
2, or slightly viscous sliding surface oil or turbine
oil.
[Attaching the Stopper]
Although the Flat Roller performs extremely accurate motion, it may cause a traveling error due to
uneven load distribution or non-uniform stop. Therefore, we recommend attaching a stopper on the
end of the base or the table.
[Chamfering the End Face of the Table]
If the Flat Roller is longer than the overall table length, finely chamfer the end face of the table so that
the rollers are easily fed to the table.
A-632
Precautions on Use
[Mounting Precision]
To maximize the performance of the Flat Roller,
it is necessary to distribute the load as evenly as
possible when mounting the product. For the
allowable tilt as shown in Fig.2, we recommend
0.1 mm or less against 1,000 mm.
0.1MAX/1000
Fig.2 Mounting Precision
(4) The Flat Roller cannot be used as a roller conveyor.
(5) A moment, vertical mount, uneven contact and machine vibrations may cause the cage to slip. If
slippage of the cage is inevitable, we recommend using an LM Guide system designed for infi-
nite motion.
[Storage]
When storing the Flat Roller, enclose it in a package designated by THK and store it while avoiding
Flat Roller
A-633
A-634
Slide Pack
General Catalog
Features and Types ........................ A-636 Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table

Features of Slide Pack ...................... A-636 Models FBW 2560R and 3590R ....... B-536
• Structure and features....................... A-636 Models FBW 50110R and 50110H ...... B-537
Types of the Slide Pack .................... A-638
• Type ............................................... A-638 Options............................................. B-538
• Clearance ....................................... A-639 Metal Dustproof Cover ...................... B-538
Options............................................. A-640 Mounting Procedure and Maintenance... B-539

Contamination Protection.................. A-640 Installation ......................................... B-539
Metal Dustproof Cover ...................... A-640
Jointed Slide Rails............................. A-640

Installation ......................................... A-641
Lubrication......................................... A-642
A-635
Features and Types Slide Pack
Features of the Slide Pack
Mounting plate
Ball
Ball case
Slide rail
Seal
Guide plate
Slider
Stopper
Fig.1 Structure of Slide Pack Model FBW-RUU

Slide Pack model FBW is an LM system in which a precision press molded slider that contains balls
performs infinite straight motion. Used in combination with a slide rail, the Slide Pack achieves light-
weight and compact design and smooth straight motion at a low price.
The ball case and the slide rail are nitrided to ensure high wear resistance. (The slide rail of model
FBW 2560R is made of stainless steel.)
The Slide Pack is optimal for slide units of photocopiers, tool cabinets, electronic equipment cabi-
nets, moving seats, automatic vending machines, machine tool slide covers, cash registers, heavy
doors and curtain walls.
A-636
Features and Types
Features of the Slide Pack
[Low Cost, Interchangeable]

Since it is press molded with precision, this LM system achieves stable quality and interchangeability
at low cost.
[Infinite Stroke Length]
Unlike the conventional finite stroke type, the slider is capable of performing infinite motion. When
connected with a slide rail, it can be used in long-stroke applications.
[Easy Installation and Handling]
Because of the structure that prevents balls from falling off even if the slider is removed from the slide
rail, this model is easy to handle and can be used in a complex construction where it is impossible to
install an LM system unless it is disassembled.
[A Type Equipped with a Contamination Protection Seal Also Standardized]
A type equipped with a contamination protection seal is standardized for locations where cutting
chips or dust may enter the system.
Slide Pack
A-637
Types of the Slide Pack
Type
Model FBW 2560R Specification Table⇒B-536

This model is a compact type.


This model is a heavy load type.
Model FBW 50110H Specification Table⇒B-537

This model is a high rigidity type.
A-638
Features and Types
Types of the Slide Pack
Clearance
Model FBW is manufactured to the following
accuracies.
Vertical clearance: 0.03 mm or less
Vertical direction
Horizontal clearance: 0.1 mm or less
These specifications are values when the slide Horizontal direction
rail is attached to a rigid base.
Fig.2
Slide Pack
A-639
Options Slide Pack (Options)
For Slide Pack model FBW-R (H), a special syn-
0
thetic rubber seal with high contamination pro-

tection characteristics, capable of preventing
foreign material from entering the slider and the
lubricant from leaking, is available. The seal
increases the contamination protection effect by
contacting both the slide rail raceway where
balls roll and the slide rail itself.
Metal Dustproof Cover

For Slide Pack model FBW, steel covers that cover the whole slide rail to prevent foreign material
from entering the slide are available.
Jointed Slide Rails

If the required specifications exceed the stan-
dard stroke, two or more slide rails can be con-
nected. When placing an order, indicate the
overall length.
A-640
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance Slide Pack
Installation
[Mounting Screws of the Slide Rail]
0
Since the space for securing the mounting screws of the slide rail is small as shown in Fig.1, we rec-
ommend using button-head bolt or binding-head bolt (JIS B 1111 annex).
Note) The slide rail of model FBW 50110H is countersunk. We recommend mounting the slide rail using hexagonal-socket-
head type bolts (M5).
Unit: mm
Model No. t
FBW 2560R 3.2
FBW 3590R 3.4
φ 9.5
FBW 50110R 3.4
5.3 FBW 50110H —
t
Model FBW50110H
Fig.1
[Attaching the Stopper]

If the slider may overshoot and come off of the
slide rail, attach the dedicated stopper to the
Slide Pack
slide rail end as shown in Fig.2.
Fig.2
[Installing the Slider]

With model FBW-R (H), balls will not fall off even if the slider is removed from the slide rail. However,
they could fall if the slider is twisted when reattaching it to the slide rail. Whenever possible, do not
remove the slider from the slide rail when installing the Slide Pack.
[Groove Dimensions]
Fig.3 shows the dimensions of grooves for applications where model FBW-R (H) is installed in a
groove.
Unit: mm
Model No. W H
+0.15
FBW 2560R 24.8 7.4
+0.1
W
+0.15
FBW 3590R 37 10
+0.1
+0.15
H FBW 50110R 50 10
+0.1
Fig.3 +0.15
FBW 50110H 54.4 13
+0.1
A-641
Lubrication
Apply high-quality lithium soap group grease to the raceway of the slide rail before using the product.
A-642
Precautions on Use Slide Pack
[Handling]
0
(2) Tilting the slider or slide rail may cause them to fall by their own weight.
(3) Dropping or hitting the Slide Pack may damage it. Giving an impact to the Slide Pack could also
[Lubrication]
(1) Apply high-quality lithium soap group grease to the raceway of the slide rail before using the
product.
(1) The static permissible load of the Slide Pack varies according to the direction.
(3) If foreign material such as dust or cutting chips adheres to the product, replenish the lubricant
(4) Avoid using the product at other than normal temperature, or using it in harsh conditions such as
intensive reciprocations that generate frictional heat and environments with water or dust.
(5) When using the Slide Pack with inverted mount, breakage of the slider due to an accident or the
Slide Pack
like may cause balls to fall and the slider to come off from the slide rail and fall. In these cases,
take preventive measures such as adding a safety mechanism for preventing such falls.
(6) When you remove the slider from the slide rail and then reassemble them, inserting the slide rail
into the slider while twisting them may cause balls to fall or damage the slider. Be sure to gently
insert the rail straight into the slider while checking the position of the slider balls and that of the
rail raceway.
[Storage]
When storing the Slide Pack, enclose it in a package designated by THK and store it while avoiding
A-643
A-644
Slide Rail
General Catalog
Features and Types Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table

Features of the Slide Rail.................. A-646 Model FBL 27S ................................. B-542
• Structure and features....................... A-646 Model FBL 27S-P14.......................... B-543
Types of the Slide Rail ...................... A-647 Model FBL 35S ................................. B-544
• Types and Features .......................... A-647 Model FBL 35M................................. B-545
Single Slides for Light Load ............. A-647 Model FBL 35J .................................. B-546
Single Slides for Medium Load ......... A-650 Model FBL 35J-P13 .......................... B-547
Double Slides for Light Load ............ A-650 Model FBL 35J-P14 .......................... B-548
Double Slides for Medium Load ........ A-651 Model FBL 35B ................................. B-549
Double Slides for Heavy Load .......... A-653 Model FBL 35T.................................. B-550
Linear Type Slides ......................... A-654 Model FBL 27D ................................. B-551
Aluminum Alloy Slide Rail ................ A-655 Model FBL 35E-P14.......................... B-552
Classification Table for Slide Rails.... A-656 Model FBL 35G-P13 ......................... B-553
Model FBL 35G-P14 ......................... B-554
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance... A-658 Model FBL 35D ................................. B-555
Mounting the Slide Rail ..................... A-658 Model FBL 35W ................................ B-556
Model FBL 51H ................................. B-557
Precautions on Use......................... A-659 Model FBL 51H-P13.......................... B-558
Model FBL 51H-P14.......................... B-559
Model FBL 35K ................................. B-560
Model FBL 56H ................................. B-561
Model FBL 56H-P13.......................... B-562
Model FBL 56H-P14.......................... B-563
Model FBL 35F.................................. B-564
Model FBL 56F.................................. B-565
Model FBL 48DR............................... B-566
Model E15 ......................................... B-567
Model E20 ......................................... B-568
Model D20......................................... B-569
A-645
Features and Types Slide Rail
Features of the Slide Rail
Outer rail
Inner rail
Cage
Ball
Fig.1 Structure of Slide Rail Model FBL

Slide Rail model FBL is a thin, compact, lightweight and ultra-low price slide unit for finite motion. It
has two rows of balls placed between an inner rail (made of a steel sheet roll-formed with precision)
and an outer rail. The balls are evenly spaced by a cage press-molded with precision, thus eliminat-
ing friction between balls and achieving a smooth slide mechanism.
Since model FBL achieves smooth straight motion with easy installation, it can be used in a wide
range of applications such as photocopiers, measuring instruments, telecommunication equipment,
medical equipment, automatic vending machines and various types of office equipment.
[Unit Type That Allows Easy Installation]
Since the clearance and the motion of the slide unit are optimally adjusted, simply mounting the unit
onto the base or the table using screws will achieve a slide mechanism with virtually no running
noise.
[Thin and Compact]
Since the sectional shape is thin designed, this slide pack only requires a small side space for instal-
lation. In addition, a desired number of slide pack units can be installed in parallel according to the
load conditions.
[Maintenance-free Operation]
Since the slide rail is treated with zinc plating, it is highly corrosion resistant. In addition, the slide unit
contains lithium soap-based grease, which is highly stable against oxidation.
A-646
Features and Types
Types of the Slide Rail

Types and Features
[Single Slides for Light Load]
Model FBL 27S Specification Table⇒B-542
The most compact slide rail from THK.
Model FBL 27S
Model FBL 27S-P14 Specification Table⇒B-543

An inner rail pulling type of model FBL 27S.
Releasing the automatic free disconnection
spring attached on the inner rail allows the slide
rail to be pulled out. When stored, the spring is
Slide Rail
automatically released unidirectionally under a
certain pressure.
Model FBL 27S-P14
Model FBL 35S Specification Table⇒B-544

A single slide type of Slide Rail with the most
fundamental shape.
Model FBL 35S
A-647
Model FBL 35M Specification Table⇒B-545
An inner rail pulling type of model FBL 35S. It
stops by frictional resistance when the slide rail
is fully opened, and is pulled out when being
pulled further with force.
(brake-stop type)
Model FBL 35M
Model FBL 35J Specification Table⇒B-546

Based on model FBL 35M, this model has a
lead ball that serves as a guide when the inner
rail is inserted.
Model FBL 35J
Model FBL 35J-P13 Specification Table⇒B-547

Releasing the disconnection spring attached on
the inner rail allows the slide rail to be pulled
out. When folded, the locked state with the dis-
connect spring is manually released.
Model FBL 35J-P13
A-648
Features and Types
Model FBL 35J-P14 Specification Table⇒B-548

Releasing the automatic free disconnection
spring attached on the inner rail allows the slide
rail to be pulled out. When stored, the spring is
automatically released unidirectionally under a
certain pressure.
Model FBL 35J-P14
Model FBL 35B Specification Table⇒B-549

A brake-stop type of model FBL 35M. It can be
mounted on the bottom face of a moving object
when used.
Slide Rail
Model FBL 35B
A-649
[Single Slides for Medium Load]
Model FBL 35T Specification Table⇒B-550
A single slide combining two units of model FBL
35S. When folded, the locked state with the dis-
connect spring is manually released.
Model FBL 35T
[Double Slides for Light Load]

Model FBL 27D Specification Table⇒B-551
A double-slide type that combines two units of
model FBL 27S back-to-back. It is widely used
in various types of OA equipment.
Model FBL 27D
Model FBL 35E-P14 Specification Table⇒B-552

A three-rail, double-slide type that allows a long
stroke in a small space. Releasing the automatic
free disconnection spring attached on the inner
rail allows the inner rail to be pulled out. When
folded, the locked state is automatically
released under a certain pressure in the folding
direction.
Model FBL 35E-P14
A-650
Features and Types
[Double Slides for Medium Load]

Model FBL 35G-P13 Specification Table⇒B-553
model FBL 35S front-to-front. Releasing the
automatic free disconnection spring attached on
the inner rail allows the inner rail to be pulled
out. When folded, the locked state with the dis-
connect spring is manually released. It is also
equipped with a pull-lock mechanism that func-
tions when the slide rail is fully opened.
Model FBL 35G-P13
Model FBL 35G-P14 Specification Table⇒B-554

model FBL 35S front-to-front. Releasing the
automatic free disconnection spring attached on
the inner rail allows the inner rail to be pulled
out. When folded, the lock state with the discon-
nect spring can automatically be released under
a certain pressure in the folding direction. It is
also equipped with a pull-lock mechanism that
functions when the slide rail is fully opened. Model FBL 35G-P14
Model FBL 35D
Slide Rail
Specification Table⇒B-555
model FBL 35S back-to-back. It is extensively
used regardless of the industry.
Model FBL 35D
Model FBL 35W Specification Table⇒B-556

A double-slide type based on model FBL 35S
that achieves a thickness of one single-slide
unit.
Model FBL 35W
A-651
Model FBL 51H Specification Table⇒B-557
A three-rail, double-slide type that allows for a
long stroke. With the smallest thickness, this
model can be used in a space-saving location
even under a large load.
Model FBL 51H
Model FBL 51H-P13 Specification Table⇒B-558

stroke. With the smallest thickness, this model
can be used in a space-saving location even
under a large load. Releasing the automatic free
disconnection spring attached on the inner rail
allows the inner rail to be pulled out. When
folded, the locked state with the disconnect
spring is manually released. It is also equipped
with a lock mechanism that functions when the
slide rail is fully opened.
Model FBL 51H-P13

stroke. With the smallest thickness, this model
can be used in a space-saving location even
under a large load. Releasing the automatic free
disconnection spring attached on the inner rail
allows the inner rail to be pulled out. When
folded, the locked state is automatically
direction.
Model FBL 51H-P14
A-652
Features and Types
[Double Slides for Heavy Load]

Model FBL 35K Specification Table⇒B-560
A double-slide type combining 4 units of model
FBL 35S. It achieves the largest permissible
load among all types and is optimal for opening/
closing heavy objects.
Model FBL 35K
Model FBL 56H Specification Table⇒B-561

A double-slide type with the largest permissible
load among the three rails. It is used extensively
in various types of OA furniture.
Model FBL 56H
Slide Rail
load among the three rails. Releasing the auto-
matic free disconnection spring attached on the
inner rail allows the inner rail to be pulled out.
When folded, the locked state with the discon-
nect spring is manually released. It is also
equipped with a lock mechanism that functions
when the slide rail is fully opened.
Model FBL 56H-P13

load among the three rails. Releasing the auto-
matic free disconnection spring attached on the
inner rail allows the inner rail to be pulled out.
When folded, the locked state is automatically
direction.
Model FBL 56H-P14
A-653
[Linear Type Slides]
Light Load Type Model FBL 35F Specification Table⇒B-564
Using a flange type that can easily be mounted,
this slide-type model is capable of performing
straight, finite motion.
Light Load Type Model FBL 35F
Medium Load Type Model FBL 56F Specification Table⇒B-565

Using a flange type that can easily be mounted,
this slide-type model is capable of performing
straight, finite motion. It is optimal for locations
under a large working load.
Medium Load Type Model FBL 56F
Heavy Load Type Model FBL 48DR Specification Table⇒B-566

A heavy-load, low-friction slide rail developed
for sliding heavy doors.
Heavy Load Type Model FBL 48DR
A-654
Features and Types
[Aluminum Alloy Slide Rail]

Light Load Type Model E15 Specification Table⇒B-567
The lightest and most compact single slide in
the aluminum alloy series. It is especially suit-
able for locations with magnetism, locations
requiring antirust measures and locations where
much importance is given to appearance.
Light Load Type Model E15
Light Load Type Model E20 Specification Table⇒B-568

A single-slide with the most fundamental shape
in the aluminum alloy series. It is especially suit-
Slide Rail
Light Load Type Model E20
Light Load Type Model D20 Specification Table⇒B-569

The lightest and most compact double slides in
the aluminum alloy series. It is especially suit-
Light Load Type Model D20
A-655
Classification Table for Slide Rails
Slide Rail
Single Slide Double Slide
For Light Load For Light Load

Model FBL27S Model FBL35J Model FBL27D Model FBL35E-P14
Model FBL27S-P14 Model FBL35J-P13
35.3
27
Model FBL35J-P14
27
19.1
13
35.3
9.5
Model D20 (Made of Aluminum)
Model FBL35S
9.5
20
35.3
Model E15
16
(Made of Aluminum)
9.5
Model FBL35M
15
5
For Heavy Load
35.3
Model FBL56H
9.5 Model E20
56
(Made of Aluminum) Model FBL56H-P13

Model FBL35B
Model FBL56H-P14 16
20
48.5
Model FBL35K
8
33
71.4
For Medium Load 23.9
Model FBL35T
71.4
12.7
A-656
Features and Types
Classification Table for Slide Rails
Linear Type Slide
For Medium Load For Light Load

Model FBL35G-P13 Model FBL51H Model FBL35F
Model FBL35G-P14 Model FBL51H-P13
Model FBL51H-P14
35.3
35.3
11.1
51.5
19.1
Model FBL35D 12.7
Model FBL35W
Slide Rail
For Medium Load
35.3
Model FBL56F
81.3
19.1
12.7
56
14
For Heavy Load

Model FBL48DR
48
14.6
A-657
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance Slide Rail
Mounting the Slide Rail

[Mounting Screws of the Slide Rail]
The slide rail is designed to be mounted using
M4 screws. Since the mounting space is small
as shown in Fig.1, we recommend using button-
head bolt or binding-head bolt (JIS B 1111
annex).
Note) For models FBL27S/27S-P14/27D, use M4 binding-
head bolt, or M3 button-head bolt or binding-head bolt.
Note) For model FBL48DR, use M5×8 mounting screw.
Note) For model E15, use M2.6 countersunk screw.
Note) For models E20 and D20, use M3 countersunk screw.
Note) For model FBL 35E, use M3 button-head bolts or bind-
ing-head bolts.
Fig.1
[Attaching the Slide Rail]

While keeping the maximum stroke, mount the
outer rail at the section where the inner rail and
the outer rail overlap, slide the inner rail back-
ward, and then secure the rail using a screw
through the access hole.
Access hole
Fig.2
[Permissible Load and Mounting Orientation]

For use other than with the mounting orientation
shown in Fig.3, contact THK. Top
The permissible load of the Slide Rail indicates
the load in the direction Pa that two rails can
receive in the middle of the inner rail length at Pa
Pa
the maximum stroke.
Bottom
Fig.3
[Surface Treatment]
The surface of the Slide Rail is treated with electro-galvanizing (gloss chromate treatment) as stan-
dard. Colored chromate treatment and chrome plating are also available. Contact THK for details.
A-658
Precautions on Use Slide Rail
[Handling]
0
(1) Tilting a slide rail may cause it to fall by its own weight.
(2) Dropping or hitting the Slide Rail may damage it. Giving an impact force to the slide rail could
also cause damage even if the product looks intact.
(1) When mounting the Slide Rail, use care to always keep both rails in parallel.
(2) Entrance of foreign material may cause damage to the Slide Rail or functional loss.
(3) Avoid using the product at other than normal temperature, or using it in harsh conditions such as
intensive reciprocations that generate frictional heat and environments with water or dust.
(4) The durability of the Slide Rail varies depending on factors such as the drawing dimension,
travel distance, mounting conditions and environment in addition to operating frequency. Take
these factors into account when making a selection.
[Storage]
When storing the Slide Rail, avoid high temperature, low temperature and high humidity.
Slide Rail
A-659
A-660
Ball Screw
General Catalog
A-661
Ball Screw
General Catalog
Features and Types................................ A-664 Accuracy of Each Model ........................ A-747

Features of the Ball Screw .................... A-664 Precision, Caged Ball Screw Models SBN, SBK and HBN... A-748
• Driving Torque One Third of the Sliding Screw A-664 • Structure and features .............................. A-749
• Ensuring High Accuracy ........................... A-667 • Ball Cage Effect....................................... A-749
• Capable of Micro Feeding ......................... A-668 • Types and Features ................................. A-752
• High Rigidity without Backlash ................... A-669 • Service Life ............................................. A-704
• Capable of Fast Feed ............................... A-670 • Axial clearance ........................................ A-685
Types of Ball Screws ............................. A-672 • Accuracy Standards ................................. A-678
Point of Selection ................................... A-674 Standard-Stock Precision Ball Screw Unfinished Shaft Ends
Flowchart for Selecting a Ball Screw.... A-674 Models BIF, BNFN, MDK, MBF and BNF.. A-754
Accuracy of the Ball Screw ................... A-677 • Structure and features .............................. A-755
• Lead angle accuracy ................................ A-677 • Types and Features ................................. A-756
• Accuracy of the Mounting Surface .............. A-680 • Service Life ............................................. A-704
• Axial clearance ........................................ A-685 • Nut Types and Axial Clearance .................. A-758
• Preload .................................................. A-686
Selecting a Screw Shaft......................... A-690 Standard-Stock Precision Ball Screw Finished Shaft Ends Model BNK A-760
• Maximum Length of the Screw Shaft .......... A-690 • Features ................................................. A-761
• Standard Combinations of Shaft Diameter and Lead for the Precision Ball Screw A-692 • Types and Features ................................. A-761
• Standard Combinations of Shaft Diameter and Lead for the Rolled Ball Screw .. A-693 • Table of Ball Screw Types with Finished Shaft Ends
• Permissible Axial Load ............................. A-694 and the Corresponding Support Units and Nut Brackets ... A-762
• Permissible Rotational Speed .................... A-696
Selecting a Nut ....................................... A-699 Precision Ball Screw Models BIF, DIK, BNFN,
• Types of Nuts.......................................... A-699 DKN, BLW, BNF, DK, MDK, BLK/WGF and BNT .. A-764
Selecting a Model Number .................... A-702 • Structure and features .............................. A-765
• Calculating the Axial Load......................... A-702 • Types and Features ................................. A-769
• Static Safety Factor.................................. A-703 • Service Life ............................................. A-704
• Studying the Service Life .......................... A-704 • Axial clearance ........................................ A-685
Studying the Rigidity ............................. A-707 • Accuracy Standards ................................. A-678
• Axial Rigidity of the Feed Screw System ..... A-707
Studying the positioning accuracy....... A-711 Precision Rotary Ball Screw Models DIR and BLR .. A-772
• Causes of Error in Positioning Accuracy...... A-711 • Structure and features .............................. A-773
• Studying the Lead Angle Accuracy ............. A-711 • Type ...................................................... A-775
• Studying the Axial Clearance..................... A-711 • Service Life ............................................. A-704
• Studying the Axial Clearance of the Feed Screw System .. A-713 • Axial clearance ........................................ A-685
• Studying the Thermal Displacement through Heat Generation . A-715 • Accuracy Standards ................................. A-776
• Studying the orientation change during traveling . A-716 • Example of Assembly ............................... A-778
Studying the rotational torque .............. A-717
• Friction Torque Due to an External Load ..... A-717 Precision Ball Screw / Spline Models BNS-A, BNS, NS-A and NS A-780
• Torque Due to a Preload on the Ball Screw . A-718 • Structure and features .............................. A-781
• Torque required for acceleration ................ A-718 • Type ...................................................... A-782
Studying the Driving Motor ................... A-719 • Service Life ............................................. A-704
• When Using a Servomotor ........................ A-719 • Axial clearance ........................................ A-685
• When Using a Stepping Motor (Pulse Motor) ............ A-721 • Accuracy Standards ................................. A-783
Examples of Selecting a Ball Screw ..... A-722 • Action Patterns ........................................ A-784
• High-speed Transfer Equipment (Horizontal Use) A-722 • Example of Assembly ............................... A-787
• Vertical Conveyance System ..................... A-736 • Example of Using .................................... A-788
• Precautions on Use .................................. A-789
A-662
Rolled Ball Screw Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table

Models JPF, BTK, MTF, BLK/WTF, CNF and BNT .... A-790 Precision, Caged Ball Screw
• Structure and features.............................. A-791 Models SBN, SBK and HBN ............... B-575
• Types and Features ................................. A-792 Standard-Stock Precision Ball Screw Unfinished Shaft Ends
• Service Life ............................................ A-704 Models BIF, BNFN, MDK, MBF and BNF.. B-583
• Axial clearance ....................................... A-685 Standard-Stock Precision Ball Screw
• Accuracy Standards................................. A-678 Finished Shaft Ends Model BNK ....... B-607
Rolled Rotary Ball Screw Model BLR... A-796 Models BIF, DIK, BNFN, DKN, BLW,
• Structure and features.............................. A-797 BNF, DK, MDK, BLK/WGF and BNT .. B-651
• Type ...................................................... A-797 Precision Rotary Ball Screw
• Service Life ............................................ A-704 Models DIR and BLR .......................... B-719
• Axial clearance ....................................... A-685 Precision Ball Screw / Spline
• Accuracy Standards................................. A-798 Models BNS-A, BNS, NS-A and NS ... B-725
• Example of Assembly .............................. A-799 Rolled Ball Screw
Models JPF, BTK, MTF, BLK/WTF, CNF and BNT .... B-735
Ball Screw Peripherals .......................... A-801 Rolled Rotary Ball Screw Model BLR ... B-747
Support Unit Models EK, BK, FK, EF, BF and FF .... A-802
• Structure and features.............................. A-802 Maximum Length of the Ball Screw Shaft... B-750
• Type ...................................................... A-804
• Types of Support Units and Applicable Ball Screw Peripherals........................... B-753
Screw Shaft Outer Diameters ................... A-805 Model EK Square Type Support Unit on the Fixed Side. B-754
• Model Numbers of Bearings and Characteristic Values A-806 Model BK Square Type Support Unit on the Fixed Side. B-756
• Example of Installation ............................. A-807 Model FK Round Type Support Unit on the Fixed Side . B-758
• Mounting Procedure ................................ A-808 Model EF Square Type Support Unit on the Supported Side . B-762
• Types of Recommended Shapes of the Shaft Ends. A-810 Model BF Square Type Support Unit on the Supported Side . B-764
Nut Bracket Model MC ........................... A-812 Model FF Round Type Support Unit on the Supported Side.. B-766
• Structure and features.............................. A-812 Recommended Shapes of Shaft Ends - Shape
• Type ...................................................... A-812 H (H1, H2 and H3) (Support Unit Models FK and EK) B-768
Lock Nut Model RN ................................ A-813 Recommended Shapes of Shaft Ends - Shape
• Structure and features.............................. A-813 J (J1, J2 and J3) (Support Unit Model BK) ..... B-770
• Type ...................................................... A-813 Recommended Shapes of Shaft Ends - Shape K
(Support Unit Models FF, EF and BF)............ B-772
Options.................................................... A-815 Nut bracket.............................................. B-774
Lubrication.............................................. A-816 Lock Nut .................................................. B-776
Corrosion Prevention (Surface Treatment, etc.) ..... A-816
Contamination Protection ..................... A-816 Options.................................................... B-777
• QZ Lubricator ......................................... A-817 Dimensions of the Ball Screw Nut Attached
• Wiper Ring W ......................................... A-819 with Wiper Ring W and QZ Lubricator .... B-778
• Specifications of the Bellows ..................... A-822
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance ... A-824

Method for Mounting the Ball Screw Shaft . A-824
Maintenance Method.............................. A-826
• Amount of Lubricant................................. A-826
A-663
Features and Types Ball Screw
Features of the Ball Screw

Driving Torque One Third of the Sliding Screw
With the Ball Screw, balls roll between the screw shaft and the nut to achieve high efficiency. Its
required driving torque is only one third of the conventional sliding screw. (See Fig.1 and Fig.2.) As a
result, it is capable of not only converting rotational motion to straight motion, but also converting
straight motion to rotational motion.
100 100
.003 .003
90 μ =0 90 μ =0
5 μ=0.01 5
.00 .00 μ =0.01
μ=
0 μ =0
80 80
Ball Screw Reverse efficiency η2 (%) Ball Screw
Positive efficiency η1 (%)
70 70
60 60
50 50
40 1 40
0. 0.2
μ= μ=
30 30
0.1
Sliding screw
20 20 μ=
Sliding screw
10 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Lead angle (degree) Lead angle (degree)
Fig.1 Positive Efficiency (Rotational to Linear) Fig.2 Reverse Efficiency (Linear to Rotational)
[Calculating the Lead Angle]
Ph
tanβ = ………（1）
π • dP
β : Lead angle (° )
dP : Ball center-to-center diameter (mm)
Ph : Feed screw lead (mm)
A-664
Features and Types
[Relationship between Thrust and Torque]

The torque or the thrust generated when thrust or torque is applied is obtained from equations (2) to
(4).
z Driving Torque Required to Gain Thrust
Fa • Ph
T= ………（2）
2π • η 1
Fa: Frictional resistance
T : Driving torque (N-mm)
Fa : Frictional resistance on
the guide surface (N) m: Mass
Fa=μ ×mg T: Driving torque
Feed screw
μ : Frictional coefficient of
the guide surface
g : Gravitational acceleration (9.8 m/s2)
m : Mass of the transferred object (kg)
Ph : Feed screw lead (mm) Guide surface
η1 : Positive efficiency of feed screw
z Thrust Generated When Torque is Applied
2π • η1 • T
Fa = ………（3）
Ph
Fa : Thrust generated (N)

T : Driving torque (N-mm)
Ball Screw
η1 : Positive efficiency of feed screw
z Torque Generated When Thrust is Applied
Ph• η2 • Fa
T= ………（4）
2π
T : Torque generated (N-m)

η2 : Reverse efficiency of feed screw
A-665
[Examples of Calculating Driving Torque]
When moving an object with a mass of 500 kg using a screw with an effective diameter of 33 mm and a lead
length of 10 mm (lead angle: 5°30'), the required torque is obtained as follows.
Rolling guide (μ= 0.003)

Ball Screw (from μ = 0.003, η = 0.96)

（14.7N）
m: Mass
T: Driving torque （500kg） Feed screw
（24N・mm） (Ball screw efficiency
η = 96％)
Guide surface
(Rolling friction coefficient μ= 0.003)
Frictional resistance on the guide surface Driving torque

Fa=0.003×500×9.8=14.7N 14.7 × 10
T= = 24 N • mm
2π × 0.96
Rolling guide (μ= 0.003)
Ball Screw (from μ = 0.2, η = 0.32)

（14.7N）
m: Mass
T: Driving torque （500kg） Feed screw
（73N・mm） (Sliding screw efficiency
η= 32％)
Guide surface
(Rolling friction coefficient μ = 0.003)
Frictional resistance on the guide surface Driving torque

Fa=0.003×500×9.8=14.7N 14.7 × 10
T= = 73 N • mm
2π × 0.32
A-666
Features and Types
Ensuring High Accuracy

The Ball Screw is ground with the highest-level facilities and equipment at a strictly temperaturecon-
trolled factory, Its accuracy is assured under a thorough quality control system that covers assembly
to inspection.
Automatic lead-measuring machine using laser
20
Lead deviation (μm)
10 +MAX a = 0.9
Length (mm)
0 100 200 300 400 500
Ball Screw
0
–10 –MAX a = –0.8
ACCUMULATED LEAD
–20
Fig.3 Lead Accuracy Measurement
[Conditions] Table1 Lead Accuracy Measurement Unit: mm

Model No.: BIF3205-10RRG0+903LC2 Standard Actual
Item
value measurement
Directional
0 —
target point
Representative
± 0.011 – 0.0012
travel distance error
Fluctuation 0.008 0.0017
A-667
Capable of Micro Feeding
The Ball Screw requires a minimal starting torque due to its rolling motion, and does not cause a slip,
which is inevitable with a sliding motion. Therefore, it is capable of an accurate micro feeding.
Fig.4 shows a travel distance of the Ball Screw in one-pulse, 0.1-μ m feeding. (LM Guide is used for
the guide surface.)
Travel distance (μm)
0.2μm
Time (s)
Fig.4 Data on Travel in 0.1-μ m Feeding
A-668
Features and Types
High Rigidity without Backlash

Since the Ball Screw is capable of receiving a preload, the axial clearance can be reduced to below
zero and the high rigidity is achieved because of the preload. In Fig.5, when an axial load is applied
in the positive (+) direction, the table is displaced in the same (+) direction. When an axial load is pro-
vided in the reverse (-) direction, the table is displaced in the same (-) direction. Fig.6 shows the rela-
tionship between the axial load and the axial displacement. As indicated in Fig.6, as the direction of
the axial load changes, the axial clearance occurs as a displacement. Additionally, when the Ball
Screw is provided with a preload, it gains a higher rigidity and a smaller axial displacement than a
zero clearance in the axial direction.
Axial displacement
ー
（）（＋）
Axial load
（＋）
ー
（）
Ball Screw
Fig.5
（＋）
Axial displacement
2
: 0.0
arance
l cle :0
Axia nce
l c l eara .1× C
a)
Axia e lo ad (0
r
ed p
ー
（） Appli （＋）
Axial load
ー
（）
Fig.6 Axial Displacement in Relation to Axial Load
A-669
Capable of Fast Feed
Since the Ball Screw is highly efficient and generates little heat, it is capable of a fast feed.
[Example of High Speed]
Fig.7 shows a speed diagram for a large lead rolled Ball Screw operating at 2 m/s.
[Conditions]
Item Description
Large Lead Rolled Ball Screw
Sample WTF3060
(Shaft diameter: 30mm; lead: 60mm)
2m/s
Maximum speed
(Ball Screw rotational speed: 2,000 min-1)
Guide surface LM Guide model SR25W
2
Speed (m/s)
2000ms
Time (ms)
Fig.7 Velocity diagram
A-670
Features and Types
[Example of Heat Generation]

Fig.8 shows data on heat generation from the screw shaft when a Ball Screw is used in an operating
pattern indicated in Fig.9
[Conditions]
Item Description
Double-nut precision Ball Screw
Sample BNFN4010-5
(Shaft diameter: 40 mm; lead: 10 mm; applied preload: 2,700 N)
0.217m/s (13m/min)
Maximum speed
(Ball Screw rotational speed: 1300 min-1)
0.0042m/s (0.25m/min)
Low speed
(Ball Screw rotational speed: 25 min-1)
Guide surface LM Guide model HSR35CA
Lubricant Lithium-based grease (No. 2)
0.217m/s t1 = 0.2
t2 = 1.4, 1.3
Speed (m/s)
(1) (1) t3 = 0.2 (2)

0.0042m/s Time
（s）
t1 t2 = 1.4 t3 0.1 15.9 t1 t2 = 1.3 t3

1.9 t = 19.6 × 3 cycles
Ball Screw
Fig.8 Operating Pattern
30
Temperature (℃)
25
20
0 30 60 90 120 150 180
Time (min)
Fig.9 Ball Screw Heat Generation Data
A-671
Types of Ball Screws
Ball Screw
Precision Grade
Caged Ball Full-Ball
Preload No Preload Preload No Preload

Model SBN Model HBN Model BIF Model BNF
Offset Preload High Load With Unfinished Shaft Ends Standard Nut
High Speed
Model DIK Model BNT
Model SBK Slim Nut Square Nut
Offset Preload
High Speed Large Lead Model BNFN Model DK
With Unfinished Shaft Ends Slim Nut
Model DKN Model MDK

Slim Nut Miniature
Precision Rotary
Model BLW Model BLK
Large Lead Large Lead
Preload No Preload Model WGF

Super Lead
Model DIR Model BLR
Rotary Nut Large Lead
Rotary Nut
Standard-Stock Precision Ball Screw/Spline
Preload No Preload Preload, No Preload

Model BIF Model MDK
No Preload Model BNS
With Unfinished Shaft Ends With Unfinished Shaft Ends Standard Nut
Model BNK
Finished Shaft Ends
Model BNFN Model MBF Model NS
With Unfinished Shaft Ends With Unfinished Shaft Ends Standard Nut
Model BNF
With Unfinished Shaft Ends
A-672
Features and Types
Types of Ball Screws
Ball Screw Peripherals
Rolled
Full-Ball
Nut Bracket Lock Nut
Support
Preload No Preload Unit
Model JPF Model BTK Model MC Model RN
Constant Pressure Standard Nut
Preload
Slim Nut Model BNT
Square Nut
Model MTF
Miniature
Fixed Side Supported Side
Model BLK
Ball Screw
Large Lead Model EK Model EF
Model WTF
Super Lead
Model BK Model BF
Model CNF
Super Lead
Model FK Model FF
Rolled Rotary
No Preload
Model BLR
Large Lead
Rotary Nut
A-673
Point of Selection Ball Screw
Flowchart for Selecting a Ball Screw

[Ball Screw Selection Procedure]
0
When selecting a Ball Screw, it is necessary to make a selection while considering various parame-
ters. The following is a flowchart for selecting a Ball Screw.
Selection Starts
Selecting conditions A-676
Selecting Ball Screw accuracy
1 Lead angle accuracy A-677-
Selecting axial clearance
Axial clearance of Axial clearance of

Precision Ball Screw A-685 Rolled Ball Screw A-685
Estimating the shaft length A-690-
2 Selecting lead A-692-
3 Selecting a shaft diameter A-692-
4 Selecting a method for mounting the screw shaft A-824-
Studying the permissible axial load A-694- 3 4
Selecting the permissible rotational speed A-696- 3 2 4
5 Selecting a model number (type of nut) A-699-
Calculating the permissible axial load A-702- 5 2 3
A-674
Point of Selection
Flowchart for Selecting a Ball Screw
Studying the service life A-704- 5 2 3
Studying the rigidity

Calculating the axial rigidity of the screw shaft A-707-
Calculating the rigidity of the nut A-709-
Calculating the rigidity of the support bearing A-710-
Studying the rigidity 3 4 5
Ball Screw
Studying the positioning accuracy A-711- 1 3 4 5
Studying the rotational torque

Calculating the friction torque from an external load A-717-
Calculating the torque from the preload on the Ball Screw A-718-
Calculating the torque required for acceleration A-718-
Studying the rotational torque 2 3 5
Studying the driving motor A-719-
Safety design
Studying the lubrication and contamination protection A-816-
Selection Completed
A-675
[Conditions of the Ball Screw]
The following conditions are required when selecting a Ball Screw.
Transfer orientation (horizontal, vertical, etc.)

Transferred mass m (kg)
Table guide method (sliding, rolling)
Frictional coefficient of the guide surface μ (-)
Guide surface resistance f (N)
External load in the axial direction F (N)
Desired service life time Lh (h)
Stroke length l S (mm) （m/s）

Operating speed Vmax (m/s) Vmax
Acceleration time t1 (s)
Even speed time t2 (s)
Deceleration time t3 (s)
Acceleration Vmax
α= (m/s 2 )
t1
Vmax
Acceleration distance l 1=Vmax×t1×1000/2 (mm) l1 l2 l3 l1 l2 l3 （mm）
Even speed distance l 2=Vmax×t2×1000 (mm)
t1 t2 t3 t1 t2 t3 （s）
Deceleration distance l 3=Vmax×t3×1000/2 (mm)
lS lS （mm）
Number of reciprocations per minute n (min– 1)
Velocity diagram
Positioning accuracy (mm)
Positioning accuracy repeatability (mm)
Backlash (mm)
Minimum feed amount s (mm/pulse)
Driving motor (AC servomotor, stepping motor, etc.)

The rated rotational speed of the motor NMO (min-1)
Inertial moment of the motor JM (kg•m2)
Motor resolution (pulse/rev)
Reduction ratio A (-)
A-676
Point of Selection
Accuracy of the Ball Screw

Lead Angle Accuracy
The accuracy of the Ball Screw in the lead angle is controlled in accordance with the JIS standards
(JIS B 1192 - 1997).
Accuracy grades C0 to C5 are defined in the linearity and the directional property, and C7 to C10 in
the travel distance error in relation to 300 mm.
Effective thread length
Nominal travel distance
Reference travel distance
Target value for reference travel distance

Travel distance error
Fluctuation/2π
Representative travel distance error

Actual travel distance
Fluctuation
Ball Screw
Representative travel distance
Fig.1 Terms on Lead Angle Accuracy
[Actual Travel Distance] [Representative Travel Distance]

An error in the travel distance measured with an It is a straight line representing the tendency in
actual Ball Screw. the actual travel distance, and obtained with the
least squares method from the curve that indi-
[Reference Travel Distance]
Generally, it is the same as nominal travel dis- cates the actual travel distance.
tance, but can be an intentionally corrected [Representative Travel Distance Error (in ± )]
value of the nominal travel distance according to Difference between the representative travel
the intended use. distance and the reference travel distance.
[Target Value for Reference Travel Distance] [Fluctuation]
You may provide some tension in order to pre- The maximum width of the actual travel distance
vent the screw shaft from runout, or set the ref- between two straight lines drawn in parallel with
erence travel distance in "negative" or "positive" the representative travel distance.
value in advance given the possible expansion/
[Fluctuation/300]
contraction from external load or temperature. In Indicates a fluctuation against a given thread
such cases, indicate a target value for the refer- length of 300 mm.
ence travel distance.
[Fluctuation/2π ]
A fluctuation in one revolution of the screw
shaft.
A-677
Table1 Lead Angle Accuracy (Permissible Value) Unit: μ m

Rolled Ball Screw
Accuracy
C0 C1 C2 C3 C5 C7 C8 C10
grades
Effective thread Representa- Fluc- Representa- Fluc- Representa- Fluc- Representa- Fluc- Representa- Fluc-
length Travel Travel Travel
tive travel tua- tive travel tua- tive travel tua- tive travel tua- tive travel tua-
distance error distance error distance error
Above Or less distance error tion distance error tion distance error tion distance error tion distance error tion
— 100 3 3 3.5 5 5 7 8 8 18 18
100 200 3.5 3 4.5 5 7 7 10 8 20 18
200 315 4 3.5 6 5 8 7 12 8 23 18
315 400 5 3.5 7 5 9 7 13 10 25 20
400 500 6 4 8 5 10 7 15 10 27 20
500 630 6 4 9 6 11 8 16 12 30 23
630 800 7 5 10 7 13 9 18 13 35 25
800 1000 8 6 11 8 15 10 21 15 40 27
1000 1250 9 6 13 9 18 11 24 16 46 30 ±50/ ±100/ ±210/
1250 1600 11 7 15 10 21 13 29 18 54 35 300mm 300mm 300mm
1600 2000 — — 18 11 25 15 35 21 65 40
2000 2500 — — 22 13 30 18 41 24 77 46
2500 3150 — — 26 15 36 21 50 29 93 54
3150 4000 — — 30 18 44 25 60 35 115 65
4000 5000 — — — — 52 30 72 41 140 77
5000 6300 — — — — 65 36 90 50 170 93
6300 8000 — — — — — — 110 60 210 115
8000 10000 — — — — — — — — 260 140
Note) Unit of effective thread length: mm
Table2 Fluctuation in Thread Length of 300 mm and in One Revolution (permissible value) Unit: μ m
Accuracy
C0 C1 C2 C3 C5 C7 C8 C10
grades
Fluctuation/300 3.5 5 7 8 18 — — —
Fluctuation/2π 3 4 5 6 8 — — —
Table3 Types and Grades
Type Series symbol Grade Remarks

For positioning Cp 1, 3, 5
ISO compliant
For conveyance Ct 1, 3, 5, 7, 10
Note) Accuracy grades apply also to the Cp series and Ct series. Contact THK for details.
A-678
Point of Selection
Example: When the lead of a Ball Screw manufactured is measured with a target value for the refer-
ence travel distance of – 9 μ m/500 mm, the following data are obtained.
Table4 Measurement Data on Travel Distance Error Unit: mm
Command position (A) 0 50 100 150

Travel distance (B) 0 49.998 100.001 149.996
Travel distance error (A– B) 0 – 0.002 +0.001 – 0.004
Command position (A) 200 250 300 350

Travel distance (B) 199.995 249.993 299.989 349.885
Travel distance error (A– B) – 0.005 – 0.007 – 0.011 – 0.015
Command position (A) 400 450 500

Travel distance (B) 399.983 449.981 499.984
Travel distance error (A– B) – 0.017 – 0.019 – 0.016
The measurement data are expressed in a graph as shown in Fig.2.

The positioning error (A-B) is indicated as the actual travel distance while the straight line represent-
ing the tendency of the (A-B) graph refers to the representative travel distance.
The difference between the reference travel distance and the representative travel distance appears
as the representative travel distance error.
Ball Screw
Measurement point on the thread (mm)
+10 Target value for
Travel distance error (μ m)
100 200 300 400 500 reference travel distance

0 –9μm/500mm
–10 Representative
travel distance error
Fluctuation
–7μ m
–20 8.8μ m
Actual travel distance
（A–B）
–30 Representative travel distance
Fig.2 Measurement Data on Travel Distance Error
[Measurements]
Representative travel distance error: -7μ m
Fluctuation: 8.8μ m
A-679
The accuracy of the Ball Screw mounting surface complies with the JIS standard (JIS B 1192-1997).
Table 9 C
Square nut
Table 6 EF Table 7 G Table 5 EF
Table 5 EF Note EF Table 8 C Table 6 EF
E C F G
Note) For the overall radial runout of the screw shaft axis, refer to JIS B 1192-1997.
Fig.3 Accuracy of the Mounting Surface of the Ball Screw
A-680
Point of Selection
[Accuracy Standards for the Mounting Surface]

Table5 to Table9 show accuracy standards for the mounting surfaces of the precision Ball Screw.
Table5 Radial Runout of the Circumference of the Thread Root
in Relation to the Supporting Portion Axis of the Screw Shaft
Unit: μ m
Screw shaft outer

Runout (maximum)
diameter (mm)
Above Or less C0 C1 C2 C3 C5 C7
— 8 3 5 7 8 10 14
8 12 4 5 7 8 11 14
12 20 4 6 8 9 12 14
20 32 5 7 9 10 13 20
32 50 6 8 10 12 15 20
50 80 7 9 11 13 17 20
80 100 — 10 12 15 20 30
Note) The measurements on these items include the effect

of the runout of the screw shaft diameter. Therefore, it
is necessary to obtain the correction value from the
overall runout of the screw shaft axis, using the ratio of
the distance between the fulcrum and measurement
point to the overall screw shaft length, and add the
obtained value to the table above.
Example: model No. DIK2005-6RRGO+500LC5
Ball Screw
L=500
E1 E-F E2 E-F
Measurement point L1=80 Surface table

V block
E1 = e + Δ e
e : Standard value in Table5 (0.012)
Δe : Correction value
L1
Δe = E2
L
80 E2 : Overall radial runout of the screw shaft axis (0.06)
= × 0.06
500
= 0.01
E1 = 0.012 + 0.01
= 0.022
A-681
Table6 Perpendicularity of the Supporting Portion End of the Table7 Perpendicularity of the Flange Mounting Surface of
Screw Shaft to the Supporting Portion Axis the Screw Shaft to the Screw Shaft Axis
Screw shaft outer Nut diameter (mm) Perpendicularity (maximum)

Perpendicularity (maximum)
diameter (mm)
— 20 5 6 7 8 10 14
— 8 2 3 3 4 5 7
20 32 5 6 7 8 10 14
8 12 2 3 3 4 5 7
32 50 6 7 8 8 11 18
12 20 2 3 3 4 5 7
50 80 7 8 9 10 13 18
20 32 2 3 3 4 5 7
80 125 7 9 10 12 15 20
32 50 2 3 3 4 5 8
125 160 8 10 11 13 17 20
50 80 3 4 4 5 7 10
160 200 — 11 12 14 18 25
80 100 — 4 5 6 8 11
Table8 Radial Runout of the Nut Circumference in Relation to Table9 Parallelism of the Nut Circumference (Flat Mounting
the Screw Shaft Axis Surface) to the Screw Shaft Axis
Nut diameter (mm) Runout (maximum) Mounting reference

Parallelism (maximum)
length (mm)
Above Or less C0 C1 C2 C3 C5 C7 Above Or less C0 C1 C2 C3 C5 C7
— 20 5 6 7 9 12 20 — 50 5 6 7 8 10 17
20 32 6 7 8 10 12 20 50 100 7 8 9 10 13 17
32 50 7 8 10 12 15 30 100 200 — 10 11 13 17 30
50 80 8 10 12 15 19 30
80 125 9 12 16 20 27 40
125 160 10 13 17 22 30 40
160 200 — 16 20 25 34 50
[Method for Measuring Accuracy of the Mounting Surface]

z Radial Runout of the Circumference of the Part Mounting Section in Relation to the
Supporting Portion Axis of the Screw Shaft (see Table5 on A-681)
Support the supporting portion of the screw shaft with V blocks. Place a probe on the circumference
of the part mounting section, and read the largest difference on the dial gauge as a measurement
when turning the screw shaft by one revolution.
Dial gauge
V block V block
Surface table
A-682
Point of Selection
z Radial Runout of the Circumference of the Thread Root in Relation to the Supporting
Portion Axis of the Screw Shaft (see Table5 on A-681)
of the nut, and read the largest difference on the dial gauge as a measurement when turning the
screw shaft by one revolution without turning the nut.
Dial gauge
V block V block
Surface table
z Perpendicularity of the Supporting Portion End of the Screw Shaft to the Supporting
Portion Axis (see Table6 on A-682)
Support the supporting portion of the screw shaft with V blocks. Place a probe on the screw shaft's
supporting portion end, and read the largest difference on the dial gauge as a measurement when
turning the screw shaft by one revolution.
Dial gauge
Ball Screw
V block V block
Surface table
z Perpendicularity of the Flange Mounting Surface of the Screw Shaft to the Screw
Shaft Axis (see Table7 on A-682)
Support the thread of the screw shaft with V blocks near the nut. Place a probe on the flange end,
and read the largest difference on the dial gauge as a measurement when simultaneously turning the
screw shaft and the nut by one revolution.
Dial gauge
V block V block
Surface table
A-683
z Radial Runout of the Nut Circumference in Relation to the Screw Shaft Axis (see
Table8 on A-682)
Support the thread of the screw shaft with V blocks near the nut. Place a probe on the circumference
of the nut, and read the largest difference on the dial gauge as a measurement when turning the nut
by one revolution without turning the screw shaft.
Dial gauge
V block V block
Surface table
z Parallelism of the Nut Circumference (Flat Mounting Surface) to the Screw Shaft Axis
Support the thread of the screw shaft with V blocks near the nut. Place a probe on the circumference
of the nut (flat mounting surface), and read the largest difference on the dial gauge as a measure-
ment when moving the dial gauge in parallel with the screw shaft.
Dial gauge
V block V block
Surface table
z Overall Radial Runout of the Screw Shaft Axis

of the screw shaft, and read the largest difference on the dial gauge at several points in the axial
directions as a measurement when turning the screw shaft by one revolution.
Dial gauge
V block V block
Surface table
Note) For the overall radial runout of the screw shaft axis, refer to JIS B 1192-1997.
A-684
Point of Selection
Axial Clearance
[Axial Clearance of the Precision Ball Screw]
Table10 shows the axial clearance of the precision Screw Ball. If the manufacturing length exceeds
the value in Table11, the resultant clearance may partially be negative (preload applied).
Table10 Axial Clearance of the Precision Ball Screw Unit: mm
Clearance symbol G0 GT G1 G2 G3
Axial clearance 0 or less 0 to 0.005 0 to 0.01 0 to 0.02 0 to 0.05
Table11 Maximum Length of the Precision Ball Screw in Axial Clearance Unit: mm
Overall thread length

Screw shaft
Clearance GT Clearance G1 Clearance G2
outer diameter
C0 to C3 C5 C0 to C3 C5 C0 to C3 C5 C7
4 to 6 80 100 80 100 80 100 120
8 to 10 250 200 250 250 250 300 300
12 to 16 500 400 500 500 700 600 500
18 to 25 800 700 800 700 1000 1000 1000
28 to 32 900 800 1100 900 1400 1200 1200
36 to 45 1000 800 1300 1000 2000 1500 1500
50 to 70 1200 1000 1600 1300 2500 2000 2000
Ball Screw
80 to 100 — — 1800 1500 4000 3000 3000
* When manufacturing the Ball Screw of precision-grade accuracy C7 with clearance GT or G1, the resultant clearance is par-
tially negative.
[Axial Clearance of the Rolled Ball Screw]
Table12 shows axial clearance of the rolled Ball Screw.
Table12 Axial Clearance of the Rolled Ball Screw
Unit: mm
Screw shaft outer diameter Axial clearance (maximum)

6 to 12 0.05
14 to 28 0.1
30 to 32 0.14
36 to 45 0.17
50 0.2
A-685
Preload
A preload is provided in order to eliminate the axial clearance and minimize the displacement under
an axial load.
When performing a highly accurate positioning, a preload is generally provided.
[Rigidity of the Ball Screw under a Preload]
When a preload is provided to the Ball Screw, the rigidity of the nut is increased.
Fig.4 shows elastic displacement curves of the Ball Screw under a preload and without a preload.
Without a preload
2δ ao
Axial displacement
Parallel
δ ao
With a preload
0
Ft=3Fao
Axial load
Fig.4 Elastic Displacement Curve of the Ball Screw
A-686
Point of Selection
Fig.5 shows a double-nut type of the Ball Screw.
ut A
Dis
Nut B Spacer Nut A
of n
pla
cem
ent
Fa0 Fa0
Axial load
ent
cem
of n
pla
Ft
Dis
ut B
External load: 0 Fa•Fa'
Fa
Fa' FA
Nut A Fa0
Nut B Spacer Fa FB
FB FA δa
δA δB
δa0 δa0
External load: Fa Nut A Nut B
Axial displacement
Fig.5 Fig.6
Nuts A and B are provided with preload Fa0 from the spacer. Because of the preload, nuts A and B
are elastically displaced by δ a0 each. If an axial load (Fa) is applied from outside in this state, the dis-
placement of nuts A and B is calculated as follows.
δA = δa0 + δa δB = δa0 -- δa
In other words, the loads on nut A and B are expressed as follows:
FA = Fa0 + (Fa -- Fa') FB = Fa0 -- Fa'
Ball Screw
Therefore, under a preload, the load that nut A receives equals to Fa - Fa'. This means that since
load Fa', which is applied when nut A receives no preload, is deducted from Fa, the displacement of
nut A is smaller.
This effect extends to the point where the displacement (δ a0) caused by the preload applied on nut B
reaches zero.
To what extent is the elastic displacement reduced? The relationship between the axial load on the
Ball Screw under no preload and the elastic displacement can be expressed by δ a∝Fa2/3. From Fig.6,
the following equations are established.
2/3
δa0 = KFa0 （K：constant ）
2/3
2δa0 = KFt
2
( )
Ft
Fa0
3
= 2 Ft = 2
3/2
Fa0 = 2.8Fa0 3Fa0
Thus, the Ball Screw under a preload is displaced by δ a0 when an axial load (Ft) approximately three
times greater than the preload is provided from outside. As a result, the displacement of the Ball
Screw under a preload is half the displacement (2δ a0) of the Ball Screw without a preload.
As stated above, since the preloading is effective up to approximately three times the applied pre-
load, the optimum preload is one third of the maximum axial load.
Note, however, that an excessive preload adversely affects the service life and heat generation. As a
guideline, the maximum preload should be set at 10% of the basic dynamic load rating (Ca) at a max-
imum.
A-687
[Preload Torque]
The preload torque of the Ball Screw in lead is controlled in accordance with the JIS standard (JIS B
1192-1997).
Actual starting Negative actual-torque

torque fluctuation
Torque fluctuation
Actual torque
（＋）
(Forward)
（—）
Mean actual torque
Reference torque
Friction torque
Actual torque Effective running distance of the nut

(minimum)
Effective running distance of the nut Mean

actual torque Reference
Actual torque
torque
(maximum)
（—）
(Backward)
（＋）
Actual torque
Torque fluctuation
Actual starting torque
Positive actual torque fluctuation
Fig.7 Terms on Preload Torque
z Dynamic Preload Torque z Reference Torque

A torque required to continuously rotate the A dynamic preload torque set as a target.
screw shaft of a Ball Screw under a given pre- z Calculating the Reference Torque
load without an external load applied. The reference torque of a Ball Screw provided
z Actual Torque with a preload is obtained in the following equa-
A dynamic preload torque measured with an tion (5).
actual Ball Screw.
–0.5 Fa0 •Ph
z Torque Fluctuation Tp = 0.05 (tanβ) ………
（5）
2π
Variation in a dynamic preload torque set at a
target value. It can be positive or negative in Tp : Reference torque (N-mm)
relation to the reference torque. β : Lead angle
Fa0 : Applied preload (N)
z Coefficient of Torque Fluctuation
Ratio of torque fluctuation to the reference Ph : Lead (mm)
torque.
A-688
Point of Selection
Example: When a preload of 3,000 N is provided to the Ball Screw model BNFN4010-5G0 +
1500LC3 with a thread length of 1,300 mm (shaft diameter: 40 mm; ball center-to-center diame-
ter: 41.75 mm; lead: 10 mm), the preload torque of the Ball Screw is calculated in the steps
below.
Calculating the Reference Torque
β : Lead angle
lead 10
tanβ = = = 0.0762
π× ball center-to-center diameter π×41.75
Fa0 : Applied preload=3000N
Ph : Lead = 10mm
Fa 0 •Ph 3000 × 10
= 865N • mm
–0.5 –0.5
Tp = 0.05 (tanβ) = 0.05 (0.0762)
2π 2π
Calculating the Torque Fluctuation
thread length 1300
= = 32.5 ≦ 40
screw shaft outer diameter 40
Thus, with the reference torque in Table13 being between 600 and 1,000 N-mm, effective thread
length 4,000 mm or less and accuracy grade C3, the coefficient of torque fluctuation is obtained as
±30%.
As a result, the torque fluctuation is calculated as follows.
865×(1±0.3) = 606 N• mm to 1125 N• mm
Result
Reference torque : 865 N-mn
Ball Screw
Torque fluctuation : 606 N-mm to 1125 N-mm
Table13 Tolerance Range in Torque Fluctuation
Effective thread length

Above 4,000 mm
4000mm or less and 10,000 mm
Reference torque or less
N•mm thread length thread length
≦40 40＜＜60 —
screw shaft outer diameter screw shaft outer diameter
Accuracy
Accuracy grades Accuracy grades
grades
Above Or less C0 C1 C2, C3 C5 C0 C1 C2, C3 C5 C2, C3 C5
200 400 ±35% ± 40% ± 45% ± 55% ±45% ±45% ±55% ± 65% — —
400 600 ±25% ± 30% ± 35% ± 45% ±38% ±38% ±45% ± 50% — —
600 1000 ±20% ± 25% ± 30% ± 35% ±30% ±30% ±35% ± 40% ± 40% ± 45%
1000 2500 ±15% ± 20% ± 25% ± 30% ±25% ±25% ±30% ± 35% ± 35% ± 40%
2500 6300 ±10% ± 15% ± 20% ± 25% ±20% ±20% ±25% ± 30% ± 30% ± 35%
6300 10000 — — ± 15% ± 20% — — ±20% ± 25% ± 25% ± 30%
A-689
Selecting a Screw Shaft
Maximum Length of the Screw Shaft
The maximum length of the precision Ball Screw and the rolled Ball Screw are shown in Table14 and
Table15 (A-691) respectively.
If the shaft dimensions exceed the manufacturing limit in Table14 or Table15, contact THK.
Table14 Maximum Length of the Precision Ball Screw by Accuracy Grade Unit: mm
Screw shaft Overall screw shaft length

outer diameter C0 C1 C2 C3 C5 C7
4 90 110 120 120 120 120
6 150 170 210 210 210 210
8 230 270 340 340 340 340
10 350 400 500 500 500 500
12 440 500 630 680 680 680
13 440 500 630 680 680 680
14 530 620 770 870 890 890
15 570 670 830 950 980 1100
16 620 730 900 1050 1100 1400
18 720 840 1050 1220 1350 1600
20 820 950 1200 1400 1600 1800
25 1100 1400 1600 1800 2000 2400
28 1300 1600 1900 2100 2350 2700
30 1450 1700 2050 2300 2570 2950
32 1600 1800 2200 2500 2800 3200
36 2100 2550 2950 3250 3650
40 2400 2900 3400 3700 4300
45 2750 3350 3950 4350 5050
50 3100 3800 4500 5000 5800
55 2000 3450 4150 5300 6050 6500
63 5200 5800 6700 7700
70 6450 7650 9000
4000
80 6300 7900 9000
10000
100 10000 10000
A-690
Point of Selection
Table15 Maximum Length of the Rolled Ball Screw by Accu-

racy Grade
Unit: mm

outer diameter C7 C8 C10
6 to 8 320 320 —
10 to 12 500 1000 —
14 to 15 1500 1500 1500
16 to 18 1500 1800 1800
20 2000 2200 2200
25 2000 3000 3000
28 3000 3000 3000
30 3000 3000 4000
32 to 36 3000 4000 4000
40 3000 5000 5000
45 3000 5500 5500
50 3000 6000 6000
Ball Screw
A-691
Standard Combinations of Shaft Diameter and Lead for the Precision Ball Screw
Table16 shows the standard combinations of shaft diameter and lead for the precision Ball Screw.
If a Ball Screw not covered by the table is required,contact THK.
Table16 Standard Combinations of Screw Shaft and Lead (Precision Ball Screw) Unit: mm
Screw Lead
shaft outer
diameter 1 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 15 16 20 24 25 30 32 36 40 50 60 80 90 100
4 z
5 z
6 z
8 z z z {
10 z z z {
12 z z z
13 {
14 z z z z
15 z z { {
16 { z { { z
18 z
20 { z { { z { z { {
25 { z { { z { { z { {
28 { z { {
30 { {
32 { z z { z { { {
36 { { z { { { { {
40 { { { z z { { { { {
45 { { { { { {
50 { { z { { { { { { {
55 { { { { { {
63 { { { {
70 { { {
80 { { {
100 {
z: off-the-shelf products [standard-stock products equipped with the standardized screw shafts
(with unfinished shaft ends/finished shaft ends)]
{: Semi-standard stock
A-692
Point of Selection
Standard Combinations of Shaft Diameter and Lead for the Rolled Ball Screw
Table17 shows the standard combinations of shaft diameter and lead for the rolled Ball Screw.
Table17 Standard Combinations of Screw Shaft and Lead (Rolled Ball Screw) Unit: mm
Screw shaft Lead

outer diameter 1 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20 24 25 30 32 36 40 50 60 80 100
6 z
8 z
10 z {
12 z {
14 z z
15 z z z
16 z z
18 z
20 z z z z
25 z z z z
28 z
30 z
32 z z
Ball Screw
36 z z z z
40 z z z
45 z
50 z z z
z: Standard stock
{: Semi-standard stock
A-693
Permissible Axial Load
[Buckling Load on the Screw Shaft]
With the Ball Screw, it is necessary to select a screw shaft so that it will not buckle when the maxi-
mum compressive load is applied in the axial direction.
Fig.8 on A-695 shows the relationship between the screw shaft diameter and a buckling load.
If determining a buckling load by calculation, it can be obtained from the equation (6) below. Note
that in this equation, a safety factor of 0.5 is multiplied to the result.
2 4
η1• π • E • I d1 4
P1 = 2 0.5 = η 2 2 10 ………
（6）
la la
P1 : Buckling load (N)
l a : Distance between two mounting
surfaces (mm)
I : Minimum geometrical moment of
inertia of the shaft (mm4)
π
I= d14 d1: screw-shaft thread minor diameter (mm)
64
η 1, η 2=Factor according to the mounting method
Fixed - free η 1=0.25 η 2=1.3
Fixed - supported η 1=2 η 2=10
Fixed - fixed η 1=4 η 2=20
[Permissible Tensile Compressive Load on the Screw Shaft]
If an axial load is applied to the Ball Screw, it is necessary to take into account not only the buckling
load but also the permissible tensile compressive load in relation to the yielding stress on the screw
shaft.
The permissible tensile compressive load is obtained from the equation (7).
π 2 2
P2 = σ d1 = 116d1 ………（7）
4
P2 : Permissible tensile compressive load (N)
σ : Permissible tensile compressive
stress (147 MPa)
d1 : Screw-shaft thread minor diameter (mm)
A-694
Point of Selection
10000
8000
6000
Distance between two mounting surfaces (mm)
φ 100
4000
φ 80
φ 45 φ 70
φ 40 φ 63
2000
φ 36 φ 55
φ 32
φ 50
φ 30
1000
800
φ 28
φ 25
600
φ 20
φ 18
400
φ 16
φ 10 φ 15
Ball Screw
φ 14
φ8
200 φ 12
φ6
Fixed - free
0.4 0.6 0.8 1 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 102 2
Fixed - supported 2 3
2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10 2
Fixed - fixed
4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 102 2 4 6 8 103 2 4
Mounting method Axial load (kN)
Fig.8 Permissible Tensile Compressive Load Diagram
A-695
Permissible Rotational Speed
[Dangerous Speed of the Screw Shaft]
When the rotational speed reaches a high magnitude, the Ball Screw may resonate and eventually
become unable to operate due to the screw shaft's natural frequency. Therefore, it is necessary to
select a model so that it is used below the resonance point (dangerous speed).
Fig.9 on A-698 shows the relationship between the screw shaft diameter and a dangerous speed.
If determining a dangerous speed by calculation, it can be obtained from the equation (8) below.
Note that in this equation, a safety factor of 0.8 is multiplied to the result.
2 3
60 • λ1 E 10 • I d1 7
N1 = 2 0.8 = λ2 • 2 • 10 ………
（8）
2π • l b γ•A lb
N1 : Permissible rotational speed determined
by dangerous speed (min– 1)
l b : Distance between two mounting
surfaces (mm)
I : Minimum geometrical moment of inertia
of the shaft (mm4)
π
I= d14 d1: screw-shaft thread minor diameter (mm)
64
γ : Density (specific gravity)
(7.85×10– 6kg/mm3)
A : Screw shaft cross-sectional area (mm2)
π
A= d12
4
λ 1, λ 2 : Factor according to the mounting method
Fixed - free λ 1=1.875 λ 2=3.4
Supported - supported λ 1=3.142 λ 2=9.7
Fixed - supported λ 1=3.927 λ 2=15.1
Fixed - fixed λ 1=4.73 λ 2=21.9
A-696
Point of Selection
[DN Value]
The permissible rotational speed of the Ball Screw must be obtained from the dangerous speed of
the screw shaft and the DN value.
The permissible rotational speed determined by the DN value is obtained using the equations (9) to
(13) below.
z Ball Screw with Ball Cage
Models SBN and HBN
130000
N2 = ………（9）
D
N2 : Permissible rotational speed determined by the DN value (min-1(rpm))
D : Ball center-to-center diameter
(indicated in the specification tables of the respective model number)
Model SBK
160000
N2 = ………（10）
D
z Precision Ball Screw
70000
N2 = ………（11）
D
z Rolled Ball Screw
(excluding large lead type)
50000
N2 = ………（12）
D
Ball Screw
z Large-Lead Rolled Ball Screw
70000
N2 = ………（13）
D
Of the permissible rotational speed determined by dangerous speed (N1) and the permissible rota-
tional speed determined by DN value (N2), the lower rotational speed is regarded as the permissible
rotational speed.
If the working rotational speed exceeds N2, a high-speed type Ball Screw is available. Contact THK
for details.
A-697
10000
8000
6000
4000
2000
1000
φ 100
φ 80
800 φ 70
φ 63
φ 55φ 50
600 φ 45φ 40
φ 36
φ 32φ 30
φ 28φ 25
400 φ 20
φ 18φ 16φ 15
φ 14φ 12
φ 10
φ8
φ6
200
Fixed - free
4 6 8 102 2 4 6 8 103 2
Fixed - supported
2 4 6 8 103 2 4 6 8 104
Fixed - fixed
4 6 8 103 2 4 6 8 104 2
Mounting method
Rotational speed (min-1)
Fig.9 Permissible Rotational Speed Diagram
A-698
Point of Selection
Selecting a Nut
Selecting a Nut
Types of Nuts
The nuts of the Ball Screws are categorized by the ball circulation method into the return-pipe type,
the deflector type and end the cap type. These three nut types are described as follows.
In addition to the circulation methods, the Ball Screws are categorized also by the preloading
method.
[Types by Ball Circulation Method]
z Return-pipe Type
(Models SBN, BNF, BNT, BNFN, BIF and Screw shaft
BTK) Pipe presser
Return-piece Type (Model HBN) Spacer (shim plate)
These are most common types of nuts that use Return pipe
a return pipe for ball circulation. The return pipe Labyrinth seal
allows balls to be picked up, pass through the Ball screw nut
pipe, and return to their original positions to Key
complete infinite motion. Ball
Ball screw nut
Example of Structure of Return-Pipe Nut
z Deflector Type
(Models DK, DKN, DIK, JPF and DIR) Deflector Screw shaft
These are the most compact type of nut. The
balls change their traveling direction with a Labyrinth seal
Ball Screw
deflector, pass over the circumference of the
screw shaft, and return to their original positions
Ball screw nut
to complete an infinite motion.
Ball
Greasing hole
Example of Structure of Simple Nut
z End-cap Type: Large lead Nut

End cap
(Models SBK, BLK, WGF, BLW, WTF,
CNF and BLR) Ball screw nut
These nuts are most suitable for the fast feed. End cap
The balls are picked up with an end cap, pass
through the through hole of the nut, and return
Screw shaft
to their original positions to complete an infinite
motion. Ball
Greasing hole
Example of Structure of Large lead Nut
A-699
[Types by Preloading Method]
z Fixed-point Preloading
Double-nut Preload (Models BNFN, DKN and BLW)
A spacer is inserted between two nuts to provide a preload.
(3.5 to 4.5) pitches + preload

Spacer
Applied preload Applied preload
Model BNFN Model DKN Model BLW
Offset Preload (Models SBN, BIF, DIK, SBK and DIR)

More compact than the double-nut method, the offset preloading provides a preload by changing the
groove pitch of the nut without using a spacer.
0.5 pitch + preload
Model SBN Model BIF Model DIK
Model SBK Model DIR
A-700
Point of Selection
Selecting a Nut
z Constant Pressure Preloading (Model JPF)

With this method, a spring structure is installed almost in the middle of the nut, and it provides a pre-
load by changing the groove pitch in the middle of the nut.
4 pitches - preload
Spring section
Model JPF
Ball Screw
A-701
Selecting a Model Number
Calculating the Axial Load
[In Horizontal Mount]
With ordinary conveyance systems, the axial load (Fan) applied when horizontally reciprocating the
work is obtained in the equation below.
Fa1 = μ • mg + f + mα ……………（14）
Fa2 = μ • mg + f ……………………（15） Mass: m
Axial load: Fan
Fa3 = μ • mg + f − mα ……………（16）
Fa4 = −μ • mg − f − mα ……………（17）
Fa5 = −μ • mg − f ……………………（18）
Fa6 = −μ • mg − f + mα ……………（19）
Vmax : Maximum speed (m/s)
Guide surface
t1 : Acceleration time (m/s)
Friction coefficient :μ
Vmax Resistance without load : f
α= : Acceleration (m/s 2 ) Gravitational acceleration: g
t1
Fa1 : Axial load during forward acceleration(N) Fa6 : Axial load during backward deceleration (N)
Fa2 : Axial load during forward uniform motion (N) m : Transferred mass (kg)
Fa3 : Axial load during forward deceleration (N) μ : Frictional coefficient of the guide surface (– )
Fa4 : Axial load during backward acceleration (N) f : Guide surface resistance (without load) (N)
Fa5 : Axial load during uniform backward motion (N)
[In Vertical Mount]
With ordinary conveyance systems, the axial load (Fan) applied when vertically reciprocating the
work is obtained in the equation below.
Fa1 = mg + f + mα …………………（20）
Fa2 = mg + f …………………………（21）
Guide surface
Fa3 = mg + f − mα …………………（22） Friction coefficient :μ
Fa4 = mg − f − mα …………………（23） Resistance without load: f
Descent
Mass: m
Ascent
Fa5 = mg − f …………………………（24）
Fa6 = mg − f + mα
α …………………（25）
Vmax : Maximum speed (m/s)
t1 : Acceleration time (m/s)
Vmax
α= : Acceleration (m/s 2 ) Axial
t1 load: Fan
Fa1 : Axial load during upward acceleration(N)
Fa2 : Axial load during uniform upward motion (N)
Fa3 : Axial load during upward deceleration (N) Fa6 : Axial load during downward deceleration (N)
Fa4 : Axial load during downward acceleration (N) m : Transferred mass (kg)
Fa5 : Axial load during uniform downward motion (N) f : Guide surface resistance (without load) (N)
A-702
Point of Selection

The basic static load rating (C0a) generally equals to the permissible axial load of a Ball Screw.
Depending on the conditions, it is necessary to take into account the following static safety factor
against the calculated load. When the Ball Screw is stationary or in motion, unexpected external
force may be applied through an inertia caused by the impact or the start and stop.
C0a
Famax = ………（26）
fS
Famax : Permissible Axial Load (kN)
C0a : Basic static load rating* (kN)
Table18 Static Safety Factor (fS)
Machine
Lower
using Load conditions
limit of fS
the LM system
General indus- Without vibration or impact 1 to 1.3

trial machinery With vibration or impact 2 to 3
Machine tool
The basic static load rating (C0a) is a static load with a constant direction and magnitude whereby the sum of the permanent
deformation of the rolling element and that of the raceway on the contact area under the maximum stress is 0.0001 times
the rolling element diameter. With the Ball Screw, it is defined as the axial load. (Specific values of each Ball Screw model
are indicated in the specification tables for the corresponding model number.)
Ball Screw
A-703
Studying the Service Life
[Service Life of the Ball Screw]
The Ball Screw in motion under an external load receives the continuous stress on its raceways and
balls. When the stress reaches the limit, the raceways break from the fatigue and their surfaces par-
tially disintegrate in scale-like pieces. This phenomenon is called flaking. The service life of the Ball
Screw is the total number of revolutions until the first flaking occurs on any of the raceways or the
balls as a result of the rolling fatigue of the material.
The service life of the Ball Screw varies from unit to unit even if they are manufactured in the same
process and used in the same operating conditions. For this reason, when determining the service
life of a Ball Screw unit, the nominal life as defined below is used as a guideline.
The nominal life is the total number of revolutions that 90% of identical Ball Screw units in a group
achieve without developing flaking (scale-like pieces of a metal surface) after they independently
operate in the same conditions.
[Calculating the Rated Life]
The service life of the Ball Screw is calculated from the equation (27) below using the basic dynamic
load rating (Ca) and the applied axial load.
z Nominal Life (Total Number of Revolutions)
( )
3
Ca 6
L= 10 ………（27） Vibrations/
fW•Fa impact
Speed(V) fW
L : Nominal life (rev) Very low

(total number of revolutions) Faint 1 to 1.2
V≦0.25m/s
Ca : Basic dynamic load rating* (N)
Slow
Fa : Applied axial load (N) Weak 1.2 to 1.5
0.25<V≦1m/s
fw : Load factor (see Table19)
Medium
Medium 1.5 to 2
1<V≦2m/s
High
Strong 2 to 3.5
V>2m/s
* The basic dynamic load rating (Ca) is used in calculating the service life when a Ball Screw operates under a load. The basic
dynamic load rating is a load with interlocked direction and magnitude under which the nominal life (L) equals to 106rev.
when a group of the same Ball Screw units independently operate. (Specific basic dynamic load ratings (Ca) are indicated in
the specification tables of the corresponding model numbers.)
A-704
Point of Selection
z Service Life Time

If the revolutions per minute is determined, the service life time can be calculated from the equation
(28) below using the nominal life (L).
L L Ph
Lh = = ………（28）
60 N 2 60 n lS
N : Revolutions per minute (min-1)
n : Number of reciprocations
Ph : Ball Screw lead (mm)
z Service Life in Travel Distance
The service life in travel distance can be calculated from the equation (29) below using the nominal
life (L) and the Ball Screw lead.
L Ph
LS = 6 ………（29）
10
LS : Service Life in Travel Distance (km)
z Applied Load and Service Life with a Preload Taken into Account
If the Ball Screw is used under a preload (medium preload), it is necessary to consider the applied
preload in calculating the service life since the ball screw nut already receives an internal load. For
details on applied preload for a specific model number, contact THK.
z Average Axial Load
Ball Screw
If an axial load acting on the Ball Screw is present, it is necessary to calculate the service life by
determining the average axial load.
The average axial load (Fm) is a constant load that equals to the service life in fluctuating the load
conditions.
If the load changes in steps, the average axial load can be obtained from the equation below.
3
1
(Fa1 l 1 + Fa2 l 2 + •••• + Fan l n)
3 3 3
Fm = ………（30）
l
Fm : Average Axial Load (N)
Fan : Varying load (N)
l n : Distance traveled under load (Fn)
l : Total travel distance
A-705
To determine the average axial load using a rotational speed and time, instead of a distance, calcu-
late the average axial load by determining the distance in the equation below.
l = l 1 + l 2 + •••l n
l 1 = N 1 • t1
l 2 = N 2 • t2
l n = N n • tn
N: Rotational speed
t: Time
When the Applied Load Sign Changes
When all signs for fluctuating loads are the
Positive-sign load
same, the equation (30) applies without prob-
lem. However, if the sign for the fluctuating load Negative-sign load
changes according to the operation, it is neces-
sary to calculate both the average axial load of
the positive-sign load and that of the negative-
sign load while taking in to account the load
direction (when calculating the average axial
load of the positive-sign load, assume the nega-
tive-sign load to be zero). Of the two average
axial loads, the greater value is regarded as the
average axial load for calculating the service
life.
Example: Calculate the average axial load
with the following load conditions.
Varying load Travel distance

Operation No.
Fan(N) l n(mm)
No.1 10 10
No.2 50 50
No.3 – 40 10
No.4 – 10 70
The subscripts of the fluctuating load symbol and the travel distance symbol indicate operation numbers.
z Average axial load of positive-sign load

To calculate the average axial load of the positive-sign load, assume Fa3 and Fa4 to be zero.
Fm1 =
3
Fa1 × l 1+ Fa2 × l 2
3
= 35.5N
l1+ l 2 + l 3 + l 4
z Average axial load of negative-sign load

To calculate the average axial load of the negative-sign load, assume Fa1 and Fa2 to be zero.
3
Fa3 × l 3 + Fa4 × l 4 = 17.2N

3 3
Fm2 =
l1+ l2+ l3+ l4
Accordingly, the average axial load of the positive-sign load (Fm1) is adopted as the average axial
load (Fm) for calculating the service life.
A-706
Point of Selection
Studying the Rigidity

To increase the positioning accuracy of feed screws in NC machine tools or the precision machines,
or to reduce the displacement caused by the cutting force, it is necessary to design the rigidity of the
components in a well-balanced manner.
Axial Rigidity of the Feed Screw System

When the axial rigidity of a feed screw system is K, the elastic displacement in the axial direction can
be obtained using the equation (31) below.
Fa
δ= ………（31）
K
δ : Elastic displacement of a feed screw
system in the axial direction (μ m)
The axial rigidity (K) of the feed screw system is obtained using the equation (32) below.
1 1 1 1 1
= + + + ………（32）
K KS KN KB KH
K : Axial Rigidity of the Feed
Screw System (N/μ m)
KS : Axial rigidity of the screw shaft (N/μ m)
KN : Axial rigidity of the nut (N/μ m)
Ball Screw
KB : Axial rigidity of the support bearing(N/μ m)
KH : Rigidity of the nut bracket and
the support bearing bracket (N/μ m)
[Axial rigidity of the screw shaft]
The axial rigidity of a screw shaft varies depending on the method for mounting the shaft.
z For Fixed-Supported (or -Free) Configuration
A•E
KS = ………（33）
1000• L
A : Screw shaft cross-sectional area (mm2)
A=
π d12
L
4
d1 : Screw-shaft thread minor diameter (mm)
E : Young's modulus (2.06×105 N/mm2) Fixed Supported
L : Distance between two mounting surfaces (Free)
(mm)
Fig.10 onA-708 shows an axial rigidity diagram
for the screw shaft.
A-707
z For Fixed-Fixed Configuration
A•E•L
KS = ………（34）
1000• a• b
KS becomes the lowest and the elastic
L
displacement in the axial direction is the a b
L
greatest at the position of a = b = .
2
4A• E
KS =
1000L Fixed Fixed
Fig.11 on A-709 shows an axial rigidity diagram
of the screw shaft in this configuration.
10
8
6 φ 100
4 φ 80
φ 70
φ 63
Rigidity of the screw shaft (kN/μm)
2
φ 55
φ 50
1 φ 45
8 φ 40
6 φ 36
φ 32
4 φ 30
φ 28
φ 25
2 φ 20
φ 14 φ 18
φ 12 φ φ 16
10‐1 15
8 φ 10
φ8
6
φ6
4 φ
4
6 8 102 2 4 6 8 103 2 4 6 8 104
Fig.10 Axial Rigidity of the Screw Shaft (Fixed-Free, Fixed-Supported)
A-708
Point of Selection
10
8 φ 63
φ 55
6 φ 50
φ 45 φ 100
4
φ 40 φ 80
φ 36
Rigidity of the screw shaft (kN/μ m)
φ 32 φ 70
2 φ 30
φ 20 φ 28
φ 18 φ 25
1
φ 16
8 φ 15
6 φ 14
4 φ 12
φ 10
φ8
2
φ6
‐1
10
8
φ4
6
4
6 8 102 2 4 6 8 103 2 4 6 8 104
Fig.11 Axial Rigidity of the Screw Shaft (Fixed-Fixed)
Ball Screw
[Axial rigidity of the nut]
The axial rigidity of the nut varies widely with preloads.
z No Preload Type
The logical rigidity in the axial direction when an axial load accounting for 30% of the basic dynamic
load rating (Ca) is applied is indicated in the specification tables of the corresponding model number.
This value does not include the rigidity of the components related to the nut-mounting bracket. In
general, set the rigidity at roughly 80% of the value in the table.
The rigidity when the applied axial load is not 30% of the basic dynamic load rating (Ca) is calculated
using the equation (35) below.
( 0.3Ca
Fa
)
1
KN = K 3
0.8 ………
（35）

K : Rigidity value in the specification
tables (N/μ m)
A-709
z Preload Type
The logical rigidity in the axial direction when an axial load accounting for 10% of the basic dynamic
load rating (Ca) is applied is indicated in the dimensional table of the corresponding model number.
This value does not include the rigidity of the components related to the nut-mounting bracket. In
general, generally set the rigidity at roughly 80% of the value in the table.
The rigidity when the applied preload is not 10% of the basic dynamic load rating (Ca) is calculated
using the equation (36) below.
( 0.1Ca
Fa
)
1
0
KN = K 3
0.8 ………（36）

K : Rigidity value in the specification
tables (N/μ m)
Fa0 : Applied preload (N)
[Axial rigidity of the support bearing]
The rigidity of the Ball Screw support bearing varies depending on the support bearing used.
The calculation of the rigidity with a representative angular ball bearing is shown in the equation (37)
below.
3Fa0
KB ………（37）
δa0
KB : Axial rigidity of the support
bearing (N/μ m)
Fa0 : Applied preload of the support
bearing (N)
δa0 : Axial displacements (μ m)
2 1
0.45 Q
δa0 =
sinα
( Da ) 3
Fa0
Q=
Zsinα
Q : Axial load (N)
Da : Ball diameter of the support bearing(mm)
α : Initial contact angle of the support
bearing (° )
Z : Number of balls
For details of a specific support bearing, contact its manufacturer.
[Axial Rigidity of the Nut Bracket and the Support Bearing Bracket]
Take this factor into consideration when designing your machine. Set the rigidity as high as possible.
A-710
Point of Selection
Studying the Positioning Accuracy

Causes of Error in the Positioning Accuracy
The causes of error in the positioning accuracy include the lead angle accuracy, the axial clearance
and the axial rigidity of the feed screw system. Other important factors include the thermal displace-
ment from heat and the orientation change of the guide system during traveling.
Studying the Lead Angle Accuracy

It is necessary to select the correct accuracy grade of the Ball Screw that satisfies the required posi-
tioning accuracy from the Ball Screw accuracies (Table1 on A-678). Table20 on A-712 shows exam-
ples of selecting the accuracy grades by the application.
Studying the Axial Clearance

The axial clearance is not a factor of positioning accuracy in single-directional feed. However, it will
cause a backlash when the feed direction is inversed or the axial load is inversed. Select an axial
clearance that meets the required backlash from Table10 and Table12 on A-685.
Ball Screw
A-711
Table20 Examples of Selecting Accuracy Grades by Application
Accuracy grades
Applications Shaft
C0 C1 C2 C3 C5 C7 C8 C10
X z z z z
Lathe
Z z z
XY z z z
Machining center
Z z z z
XY z z
Drilling machine
Z z z
XY z z
Jig borer
Z z z
X z z
NC machine tools
Surface grinder Y z z z z
Z z z z z
X z z z
Cylindrical grinder
Z z z z
Electric discharge XY z z z
machine Z z z z z
Electric discharge XY z z z
machine Z z z z z
Wire cutting machine UV z z z
Punching press XY z z z
X z z z
Laser beam machine
Z z z z
Woodworking machine z z z z
General-purpose machine;
z z z z z
dedicated machine
Assembly z z z z
Industrial robot
Cartesian coordinate
Other z z z z
Assembly z z z
Vertical articulated type
Other z z
Cylindrical coordinate z z z
Semiconductor manufacturing machine
Photolithography machine z z
Chemical treatment machine z z z z z z
Wire bonding machine z z
Prober z z z z
Printed circuit board

z z z z z
drilling machine
Electronic component inserter z z z z
3D measuring instrument z z z
Image processing machine z z z
Injection molding machine z z z
Office equipment z z z z
A-712
Point of Selection
Studying the Axial Clearance of the Feed Screw System

Of the axial rigidities of the feed screw system, the axial rigidity of the screw shaft fluctuates accord-
ing to the stroke position. When the axial rigidity is large, such change in the axial rigidity of the screw
shaft will affect the positioning accuracy. Therefore, it is necessary to take into account the rigidity of
the feed screw system (A-707 to A-710).
Example: Positioning error due to the axial rigidity of the feed screw system during a vertical transfer
Ball Screw
1000N
500N
[Conditions]
Transferred weight: 1,000 N; table weight: 500 N
Ball Screw used: model BNF2512– 2.5 (screw-shaft thread minor diameter d1 = 21.9 mm)
Stroke length: 600 mm (L=100 mm to 700 mm)
Screw shaft mounting type: fixed-supported
[Consideration]
The difference in axial rigidity between L = 100 mm and L = 700 mm applied only to the axial rigidity
of the screw shaft.
Therefore, positioning error due to the axial rigidity of the feed screw system equals to the difference
in the axial displacement of the screw shaft between L = 100 mm and L = 700 mm.
A-713
[Axial Rigidity of the Screw Shaft (see A-707 and A-708)]
5 3
Ks = A•E = 376.5× 2.06×10 = 77.6×10

1000L 1000 ×L L
π 2 π 2 2
A= d1 = ×21.9 = 376.5mm
4 4
5 2
E = 2.06× 10 N/mm
(1) When L = 100 mm
3
KS1 = 77.6× 10 = 776 N/μm
100
(2) When L = 700mm
3
KS2 = 77.6× 10 = 111 N/μm
700
[Axial Displacement due to Axial Rigidity of the Screw Shaft]

(1) When L = 100 mm
δ1 = Fa = 1000 + 500 = 1.9μm

KS1 776
(2) When L = 700mm
δ2 = Fa = 1000 + 500 = 13.5μm

KS2 111
[Positioning Error due to Axial Rigidity of the Feed Screw System]

Positioning accuracy=δ 1– δ 2=1.9– 13.5
=– 11.6μ m
Therefore, the positioning error due to the axial rigidity of the feed screw system is 11.6 μ m.
A-714
Point of Selection
Studying the Thermal Displacement through Heat Generation

If the temperature of the screw shaft increases during operation, the screw shaft is elongated due to
heat thereby to lowering the positioning accuracy. The expansion and contraction of the screw shaft
is calculated using the equation (38) below.
Δl = ρ Δt l ………
（38）
Δl : Axial expansion/contraction of
the screw shaft (mm)
ρ : Thermal expansion coefficient (12×10-6/℃)
Δ t : Temperature change in
the screw shaft (℃)
l : Effective thread length (mm)
Thus, if the temperature of the screw shaft increases by 1℃, the screw shaft is elongated by 12 μ m
per meter. Therefore, as the Ball Screw travels faster, the more heat is generated. So, as the temper-
ature increases, the positioning accuracy lowers. Accordingly, if high accuracy is required, it is nec-
essary to take measures to cope with the temperature increase.
[Measures to Cope with the Temperature Rise]
z Minimize the Heat Generation
z Minimize the preloads on the Ball Screw and the support bearing.
z Increase the Ball Screw lead and reduce the rotational speed.
z Select a correct lubricant. (See Accessories for Lubrication on A-954.)
z Cool the circumference of the screw shaft with a lubricant or air.
z Avoid Effect of Temperature Rise through Heat Generation
z Set a negative target value for the reference travel distance of the Ball Screw.
Ball Screw
Generally, set a negative target value for the reference travel distance assuming a temperature
increase of 2℃ to 5℃ by heat.
(– 0.02mm to – 0.06 mm/m)
z Preload the shaft screw with tension. (See Fig.3 of the structure on A-825.)
A-715
Studying the Orientation Change during Traveling
The lead angle accuracy of the Ball Screw equals the positioning accuracy of the shaft center of the
Ball Screw. Normally, the point where the highest positioning accuracy is required changes accord-
ing to the ball screw center and the vertical or horizontal direction. Therefore, the orientation change
during traveling affects the positioning accuracy.
The largest factor of orientation change affecting the positioning accuracy is pitching if the change
occurs in the ball screw center and the vertical direction, and yawing if the change occurs in the hori-
zontal direction.
Accordingly, it is necessary to study the orientation change (accuracy in pitching, yawing, etc.) during
the traveling on the basis of the distance from the ball screw center to the location where positioning
accuracy is required.
Positioning error due to pitching and yawing is obtained using the equation (39) below.
A= l sinθ ………（39）
A: Positioning accuracy due to pitching (or yawing) (mm)
l : Vertical (or horizontal) distance from the ball screw center (mm) (see Fig.12)
θ : Pitching (or yawing) (°)
l
θ
Fig.12
A-716
Point of Selection
Studying the Rotational Torque
Studying the Rotational Torque

The rotational torque required to convert rotational motion of the Ball Screw into straight motion is
obtained using the equation (40) below.
[During Uniform Motion]
T t = T1 + T2 + T 4 ………（40）
Tt : Rotational torque required during uniform
motion (N-mm)
T1 : Frictional torque due to an external load
(N-mm)
T2 : Preload torque of the Ball Screw (N-mm)
T4 : Other torque (N-mm)
(frictional torque of the support bearing
and oil seal)
[During Acceleration]
T K = T t + T3 ………（41）
TK : Rotational torque required during
acceleration (N-mm)
T3 : Torque required for acceleration (N-mm)
[During Deceleration]
T g = T t - T3 ………（42）
Tg : Rotational torque required for
Ball Screw
deceleration (N-mm)
Frictional Torque Due to an External Load

Of the turning forces required for the Ball Screw, the rotational torque needed for an external load
(guide surface resistance or external force) is obtained using the equation (43) below
Fa •Ph
T1 = •A ………（43）
2π • η
T1 : Frictional torque due to an
external load (N-mm)
η : Ball Screw efficiency (0.9 to 0.95)
A : Reduction ratio
A-717
Torque Due to a Preload on the Ball Screw
For a preload on the Ball Screw, see "Preload Torque" on A-688.
T2 = T d • A ………（44）
T2 : Preload torque of the Ball Screw (N-mm)

Td : Preload torque of the Ball Screw (N-mm)
A : Reduction ratio
Torque Required for Acceleration
3
T3 = J ω′ 10 ………（45）
T3 : Torque required for acceleration (N-mm)

J : Inertial moment (kg•m2)
ω´ : Angular acceleration (rad/s2)
2
J=m ( Ph
2π )
• A • 10
2 -6
+ JS • A + JA • A + JB
2 2
m : Transferred mass (kg)

JS : Inertial moment of the screw shaft (kg•m2)
(indicated in the specification tables of the respective model number)
A : Reduction ratio
JA : Inertial moment of gears, etc. attached to the screw shaft side (kg•m2)
JB : Inertial moment of gears, etc. attached to the motor side d (kg•m2)
2π• Nm
ω′ =
60t
Nm : Motor revolutions per minute (min-1)
t : Acceleration time (s)
[Ref.] Inertial moment of a round object
m•D
2
J=
8 • 10
6
J : Inertial moment (kg•m2)

m : Mass of a round object (kg)
D : Screw shaft outer diameter (mm)
A-718
Point of Selection
Studying the Driving Motor

When selecting a driving motor required to rotate the Ball Screw, normally take into account the rota-
tional speed, rotational torque and minimum feed amount.
When Using a Servomotor

[Rotational Speed]
The rotational speed required for the motor is obtained using the equation (46) based on the feed
speed, Ball Screw lead and reduction ratio.
V 1000 60 1
NM = ………（46）
Ph A
NM : Required rotational speed
of the motor (min– 1)
V : Feeding speed (m/s)
A : Reduction ratio
The rated rotational speed of the motor must be equal to or above the calculated value (NM) above.
NM≦NR
NR : The rated rotational speed
of the motor (min-1)
[Required Resolution]
Resolutions required for the encoder and the driver are obtained using the equation (47) based on
the minimum feed amount, Ball Screw lead and reduction ratio.
Ball Screw
Ph• A
B= ………（47）
S
B : Resolution required for the encoder
and the driver (p/rev)
A : Reduction ratio
S : Minimum feed amount (mm)
A-719
[Motor Torque]
The torque required for the motor differs between uniform motion, acceleration and deceleration. To
calculate the rotational torque, see "Studying the Rotational Torque" on A-717.
a. Maximum torque
The maximum torque required for the motor must be equal to or below the maximum peak torque
of the motor.
Tmax≦Tpmax
Tmax : Maximum torque acting on the motor
Tpmax : Maximum peak torque of the motor
b. Effective torque value

The effective value of the torque required for the motor must be calculated. The effective value of
the torque is obtained using the equation (48) below.
2 2 2
T1 t1 + T2 t2 + T3 t3
Trms = ………（48）
t
Trms : Effective torque value (N-mm)
Tn : Fluctuating torque (N-mm)
tn : Time during which the torque
Tn is applied (s)
t : Cycle time (s)
(t=t1+t2+t3)
The calculated effective value of the torque must be equal to or below the rated torque of the motor.
Trms≦TR
TR : Rated torque of the motor (N-mm)
[Inertial Moment]
The inertial moment required for the motor is obtained using the equation (49) below.
J
JM = ………（49）
C
JM : Inertial moment required for the motor (kg•m2)
C : Factor determined by the motor and the driver
(It is normally between 3 to 10. However, it varies depending on the motor and the driver. Check the
specific value in the catalog by the motor manufacturer.)
The inertial moment of the motor must be equal to or above the calculated JM value.
A-720
Point of Selection
When Using a Stepping Motor (Pulse Motor)

[Minimal Feed Amount(per Step)]
The step angle required for the motor and the driver is obtained using the equation (50) below based
on the minimum feed amount, the Ball Screw lead and the reduction ratio.
360S
E= ………（50）
Ph• A
E : Step angle required for the motor and the driver (° )
(per step)
A : Reduction ratio
[Pulse Speed and Motor Torque]
a. Pulse speed
The pulse speed is obtained using the equation (51) below based on the feed speed and the min-
imum feed amount.
f= V 1000 ………（51）
S
f : Pulse speed (Hz)
V : Feeding speed (m/s)
b. Torque required for the motor
Ball Screw
The torque required for the motor differs between the uniform motion, the acceleration and the
deceleration. To calculate the rotational torque, see "Studying the Rotational Torque" on A-717.
Thus, the pulse speed required for the motor and the required torque can be calculated in the man-
ner described above.
Although the torque varies depending on the motors, normally the calculated torque should be dou-
bled to ensure safety. Check if the torque can be used in the motor's speed-torque curve.
A-721
Examples of Selecting a Ball Screw
High-speed Transfer Equipment (Horizontal Use)
[Selection Conditions]
Table Mass m1 =60kg Positioning Repeatability ±0.1 mm
Work Mass m2 =20kg Minimum feed amount s = 0.02mm/pulse
Stroke length l S=1000mm Desired service life time 30000h
Maximum speed Vmax=1m/s Driving motor AC servo motor
Acceleration time t1 = 0.15s Rated rotational speed:
Deceleration time t3 = 0.15s 3,000 min-1
Number of reciprocations per minute Inertial moment of the motor
n =8min-1 Jm =1×10– 3 kg•m2
Backlash 0.15mm Reduction gear None (direct coupling)
Positioning accuracy ±0.3 mm/1000 mm A=1
(Perform positioning from Frictional coefficient of the guide surface
the negative direction) μ =0.003 (rolling)
Guide surface resistance f=15 N (without load)
Work mass
+
Table mass
m2
+
m1
Motor Ball screw shaft Ball screw nut
[Selection Items]
Screw shaft diameter
Lead
Nut model No.
Accuracy
Axial clearance
Screw shaft support method
Driving motor
A-722
Point of Selection
[Selecting Lead Angle Accuracy and Axial Clearance]

z Selecting Lead Angle Accuracy
To achieve positioning accuracy of ± 0.3 mm/1,000 mm:
±0.3 ±0.09
=
1000 300
The lead angle accuracy must be ±0.09 mm/300 mm or higher.
Therefore, select the following as the accuracy grade of the Ball Screw (see Table1 on A-678).
C7 (travel distance error: ± 0.05mm/300mm)
Accuracy grade C7 is available for both the Rolled and the Precision Ball Screws. Assume that a
Rolled Ball Screw is selected here because it is less costly.
z Selecting Axial Clearance
To satisfy the backlash of 0.15 mm, it is necessary to select a Ball Screw with an axial clearance of
0.15 mm or less.
Therefore, a Rolled Ball Screw model with a screw shaft diameter of 32 mm or less that meets the
axial clearance of 0.15 mm or less (see Table12 on A-685) meets the requirements.
Thus, a Rolled Ball Screw model with a screw shaft diameter of 32 mm or less and an accuracy
grade of C7 is selected.
[Selecting a Screw Shaft]
z Assuming the Screw Shaft Length
Assume the overall nut length to be 100 mm and the screw shaft end length to be 100 mm.
Therefore, the overall length is determined as follows based on the stroke length of 1,000 mm.
1000 + 200 = 1200 mm
Thus, the screw shaft length is assumed to be 1,200 mm.
z Selecting a Lead
Ball Screw
With the driving motor's rated rotational speed being 3,000 min-1 and the maximum speed 1 m/s, the
Ball Screw lead is obtained as follows:
1×1000×60
= 20 mm
3000
Therefore, it is necessary to select a type with a lead of 20 mm or longer.
In addition, the Ball Screw and the motor can be mounted in direct coupling without using a reduction
gear. The minimum resolution per revolution of an AC servomotor is obtained based on the resolu-
tion of the encoder (1,000 p/rev; 1,500 p/rev) provided as a standard accessory for the AC servomo-
tor, as indicated below.
1000 p/rev(without multiplication)
2000 p/rev(doubled)
3000 p/rev(doubled)
4000 p/rev(quadrupled)
A-723
To meet the minimum feed amount of 0.02 mm/pulse, which is the selection requirement, the follow-
ing should apply.
Lead 20mm —— 1000 p/rev
30mm —— 1500 p/rev
40mm —— 2000 p/rev
60mm —— 3000 p/rev
80mm —— 4000 p/rev
z Selecting a Screw Shaft Diameter
Those Ball Screw models that meet the requirements defined in Section [Selecting Lead Angle
Accuracy and Axial Clearance] on A-723: a rolled Ball Screw with a screw shaft diameter of 32 mm or
less; and the requirement defined in Section [Selecting a Screw Shaft] on A-723: a lead of 20, 30, 40,
60 or 80 mm (see Table17 on A-693) are as follows.
Shaft diameter Lead
15mm —— 20mm
15mm —— 30mm
20mm —— 20mm
20mm —— 40mm
30mm —— 60mm
Since the screw shaft length has to be 1,200 mm as indicated in Section [Selecting a Screw Shaft] on
A-723, the shaft diameter of 15 mm is insufficient. Therefore, the Ball Screw should have a screw
shaft diameter of 20 mm or greater.
Accordingly, there are three combinations of screw shaft diameters and leads that meet the require-
ments: screw shaft diameter of 20 mm/lead of 20 mm; 20 mm/40 mm; and 30 mm/60 mm.
z Selecting a Screw Shaft Support Method
Since the assumed type has a long stroke length of 1,000 mm and operates at high speed of 1 m/s,
select either the fixed-supported or fixed-fixed configuration for the screw shaft support.
However, the fixed-fixed configuration requires a complicated structure, needs high accuracy in the
installation.
Accordingly, the fixed-supported configuration is selected as the screw shaft support method.
A-724
Point of Selection
z Studying the Permissible Axial Load

Calculating the Maximum Axial Load
Table Mass m1 =60 kg
Work Mass m2 =20 kg
Frictional coefficient of the guide surface μ = 0.003
Maximum speed Vmax=1 m/s
Gravitational acceleration g = 9.807 m/s2
Acceleration time t1 = 0.15s
Accordingly, the required values are obtained as follows.
Acceleration:
Vmax
α= = 6.67 m/s2
t1
During forward acceleration:
Fa1 = μ • (m1 + m2) g + f + (m1 + m2) •α = 550 N
During forward uniform motion:
Fa2 = μ • (m1 + m2) g + f = 17 N
During forward deceleration:
Fa3 = μ • (m1 + m2) g + f – (m1 + m2) •α = – 516 N
During backward acceleration:
Fa4 = – μ • (m1 + m2) g – f – (m1 + m2) •α = – 550 N
During uniform backward motion:
Fa5 = – μ • (m1 + m2) g – f = – 17 N
During backward deceleration:
Fa6 = – μ • (m1 + m2) g – f + (m1 + m2) •α = 516 N
Ball Screw
Thus, the maximum axial load applied on the Ball Screw is as follows:
Famax = Fa1 = 550 N
Therefore, if there is no problem with a shaft diameter of 20 mm and a lead of 20 mm (smallest
thread minor diameter of 17.5 mm), then the screw shaft diameter of 30 mm should meet the require-
ments. Thus, the following calculations for the buckling load and the permissible compressive and
tensile load of the screw shaft are performed while assuming a screw shaft diameter of 20 mm and a
lead of 20 mm.
A-725
Buckling Load on the Screw Shaft
Factor according to the mounting method η 2=20 (see A-694)
Since the mounting method for the section between the nut and the bearing, where buckling is to
be considered, is "fixed-fixed: "
Distance between two mounting surfaces l a=1100 mm (estimate)
Screw-shaft thread minor diameter d1=17.5 mm
4 4
d1 17.5
P1 = η2 •
4 4
× 10 = 20× 2 ×10 = 15500 N
la2
1100
Permissible Compressive and Tensile Load of the Screw Shaft
P2 = 116 × d12 = 116 × 17.52 = 35500 N
Thus, the buckling load and the permissible compressive and the tensile load of the screw shaft are
at least equal to the maximum axial load. Therefore, a Ball Screw that meets these requirements can
be used without a problem.
z Studying the Permissible Rotational Speed
Maximum Rotational Speed
z Screw shaft diameter: 20 mm; lead: 20 mm
Lead Ph= 20 mm
3
Vmax × 60× 10 –1
Nmax = = 3000 min
Ph
z Screw shaft diameter: 20 mm; lead: 40mm
Lead Ph= 40 mm
3
Vmax × 60× 10 –1
Nmax = = 1500 min
Ph
z Screw shaft diameter: 30mm; lead: 60mm
Lead Ph= 60 mm
3
Vmax × 60× 10 –1
Nmax = = 1000 min
Ph
A-726
Point of Selection
Permissible Rotational Speed Determined by the Dangerous Speed of the Screw Shaft
Factor according to the mounting method λ 2=15.1 (see A-696)
Since the mounting method for the section between the nut and the bearing, where dangerous
speed is to be considered, is "fixed-supported: "
Distance between two mounting surfaces l b=1100 mm (estimate)
z Screw shaft diameter: 20 mm; lead: 20 mm and 40 mm
Screw-shaft thread minor diameter d1=17.5mm
d1 17.5
N1 = λ2×
7 7 –1
10 = 15.1× 2 × 10 = 2180 min
lb
2
1100
Screw-shaft thread minor diameter d1=26.4mm
d1 26.4
N1 = λ2×
7 7 –1
10 = 15.1× 2 × 10 = 3294 min
lb
2
1100
Permissible Rotational Speed Determined by the DN Value
z Screw shaft diameter: 20 mm; lead: 20 mm and 40mm (large lead Ball Screw)
Ball center-to-center diameter D=20.75 mm
70000 70000 –1
N2 = = = 3370 min
D 20.75
z Screw shaft diameter: 30 mm; lead: 60 mm (large lead Ball Screw)
70000 70000 –1
N2 = = = 2240 min
D 31.25
Thus, with a Ball Screw having a screw shaft diameter of 20 mm and a lead of 20 mm, the maximum
Ball Screw
rotational speed exceeds the dangerous speed.
In contrast, a combination of a screw shaft diameter of 20 mm and a lead of 40 mm, and another of a
screw shaft diameter of 30 mm and a lead of 60 mm, meet the dangerous speed and the DN value.
Accordingly, a Ball Screw with a screw shaft diameter of 20 mm and a lead of 40 mm, or with a screw
shaft diameter of 30 mm and a lead of 60 mm, is selected.
[Selecting a Nut]
z Selecting a Nut Model Number
Rolled Ball Screw models with a screw shaft diameter of 20 mm and a lead of 40 mm, or with a screw
shaft diameter of 30 mm and a lead of 60 mm, are large lead Rolled Ball Screw model WTF varia-
tions.
WTF2040-2
(Ca=5.4 kN, C0a=13.6 kN)
WTF2040-3
(Ca=6.6 kN, C0a=17.2 kN)
WTF3060-2
(Ca=11.8 kN, C0a=30.6 kN)
WTF3060-3
(Ca=14.5 kN, C0a=38.9 kN)
A-727
Study the permissible axial load of model WTF2040-2 (C0a = 13.6 kN).
Assuming that this model is used in high-speed transfer equipment and an impact load is applied
during deceleration, set the static safety factor (fS) at 2.5 (see Table18 on A-703).
C 0a 13.6
= = 5.44 kN = 5440 N
fS 2.5
The obtained permissible axial load is greater than the maximum axial load of 550 N, and therefore,
there will be no problem with this model.
Calculating the Travel Distance
Deceleration time t3 = 0.15s
z Travel distance during acceleration
Vmax • t1 1×0.15
l 1、
4 = × 103 = ×103 = 75 mm
2 2
z Travel distance during uniform motion
Vmax • t1 + Vmax • t3 1×0.15 + 1 ×0.15
l 2、
5 = lS – ×103 = 1000 – ×103 = 850 mm
2 2
z Travel distance during deceleration
Vmax • t3 1×0.15
l 3、6 = × 103 = ×103 = 75 mm
2 2
Based on the conditions above, the relationship between the applied axial load and the travel dis-
tance is shown in the table below.
Applied Travel
Motion axial load distance
FaN(N) l N(mm)
No.1: During
550 75
forward acceleration
No.2: During
17 850
forward uniform motion
No.3: During
– 516 75
forward deceleration
No.4: During
– 550 75
backward acceleration
No.5: During
– 17 850
uniform backward motion
No.6: During
516 75
backward deceleration
* The subscript (N) indicates a motion number.
Since the load direction (as expressed in positive or negative sign) is reversed with Fa3, Fa4 and Fa5,
calculate the average axial load in the two directions.
A-728
Point of Selection
Average Axial Load

z Average axial load in the positive direction
Since the load direction varies, calculate the average axial load while assuming Fa3, 4, 5 = 0N.
3
Fa1 × l 1 + Fa2 × l 2 + Fa6 × l 6
3 3 3
Fm1 = = 225 N
l1+ l2+ l3+ l4+ l5+ l6
z Average axial load in the negative direction
Since the load direction varies, calculate the average axial load while assuming Fa1, 2, 6 = 0N.
3
Fa3 × l 3 + Fa4 × l 4 + Fa5 × l 5 = 225 N

3 3 3
Fm2 =
l1+ l2+ l3+ l4+ l5+ l6
Since Fm1 = Fm2, assume the average axial load to be Fm = Fm1 = Fm2 = 225 N.
Nominal Life
Load factor fW= 1.5 (see Table19 on A-704)
Average load Fm= 225 N
Nominal life L (rev)
3
L= ( f CaF ) ×10
w· m
6
Dynamic
Assumed model Nominal life
load rating
number L(rev)
Ca(N)
WTF 2040-2 5400 4.1×109
WTF 2040-3 6600 7.47×109
WTF 3060-2 11800 4.27×1010
Ball Screw
WTF 3060-3 14500 7.93×1010
A-729
Average Revolutions per Minute
Number of reciprocations per minute n =8min-1
Stroke l S=1000 mm
z Lead: Ph = 40 mm
2× n × l s 2×8 ×1000
Nm = = = 400 min–1
Ph 40
z Lead: Ph = 60 mm
2× n × l s 2×8 ×1000
Nm = = = 267 min–1
Ph 60
Calculating the Service Life Time on the Basis of the Nominal Life
z WTF2040-2
Nominal life L=4.1×109 rev
Average revolutions per minute Nm = 400 min-1
L 4.1×109
Lh = = = 171000 h
60× Nm 60×400
z WTF2040-3
L 7.47×109
Lh = = = 311000 h
60× Nm 60×400
z WTF3060-2
L 4.27×1010
Lh = = = 2670000 h
60× Nm 60×267
z WTF3060-3
L 7.93×1010
Lh = = = 4950000 h
60× Nm 60×267
A-730
Point of Selection
Calculating the Service Life in Travel Distance on the Basis of the Nominal Life
z WTF2040-2
Lead Ph= 40 mm
LS = L × Ph× 10-6 = 164000 km
z WTF2040-3
Lead Ph= 40 mm
LS = L × Ph× 10-6 = 298800 km
z WTF3060-2
Lead Ph= 60 mm
LS = L × Ph× 10-6 = 2562000 km
z WTF3060-3
Lead Ph= 60 mm
LS = L × Ph× 10-6 = 4758000 km
With all the conditions stated above, the following models satisfying the desired service life time of
30,000 hours are selected.
WTF 2040-2
WTF 2040-3
WTF 3060-2
WTF 3060-3
Ball Screw
A-731
[Studying the Rigidity]
Since the conditions for selection do not include rigidity and this element is not particularly neces-
sary, it is not described here.
[Studying the Positioning Accuracy]
z Studying the Lead Angle Accuracy
Accuracy grade C7 was selected in Section [Selecting Lead Angle Accuracy and Axial Clearance] on
A-723.
z Studying the Axial Clearance
Since positioning is performed in a given direction only, axial clearance is not included in the posi-
tioning accuracy. As a result, there is no need to study the axial clearance.
WTF2040: axial clearance: 0.1 mm
WTF3060: axial clearance: 0.14 mm
z Studying the Axial Rigidity
Since the load direction does not change, it is unnecessary to study the positioning accuracy on the
basis of the axial rigidity.
z Studying the Thermal Displacement through Heat Generation
Assume the temperature rise during operation to be 5℃.
The positioning accuracy based on the temperature rise is obtained as follows:
Δl = ρ×Δ t ×l
= 12 × 10– 6× 5 × 1000
= 0.06 mm
z Studying the Orientation Change during Traveling
Since the ball screw center is 150 mm away from the point where the highest accuracy is required, it
is necessary to study the orientation change during traveling.
Assume that pitching can be done within ±10 seconds because of the structure. The positioning error
due to the pitching is obtained as follows:
Δa = l × sinθ
= 150 × sin (± 10´´)
= ± 0.007 mm
Thus, the positioning accuracy (Δ p) is obtained as follows:
0.05× 1000
Δp = 0.007 + 0.06 = 0.234 mm
300
Since models WTF2040-2, WTF2040-3, WTF3060-2 and WTF3060-3 meet the selection require-
ments throughout the studying process in Section [Selecting Lead Angle Accuracy and Axial Clear-
ance] on A-723 to Section [Studying the Positioning Accuracy] on A-732, the most compact model
WTF2040-2 is selected.
A-732
Point of Selection
[Studying the Rotational Torque]

z Friction Torque Due to an External Load
The friction toruque is obtained as follows:
Fa •Ph 17× 40
T1 = •A = × 1 = 120 N •mm
2π •η 2 × π×0.9
z Torque Due to a Preload on the Ball Screw
The Ball Screw is not provided with a preload.
z Torque Required for Acceleration
Inertial Moment
Since the inertial moment per unit length of the screw shaft is 1.23 x 10-3 kg•cm2/mm (see the specifi-
cation table), the inertial moment of the screw shaft with an overall length of 1200 mm is obtained as
follows.
Js = 1.23 × 10– 3× 1200 = 1.48 kg • cm2
= 1.48 × 10– 4 kg • m2
2 2
Ph 40
J = (m1 + m2) ( 2× π )
• A ×10 +Js •A = (60+20)
2 –6 2
2 ×π (
2 –6
) –4
×1 ×10 + 1.48×10 ×1
2
–3 2
= 3.39 × 10 kg• m
Angular acceleration:
2π• Nm 2π × 1500
ω′ = 60• t1 = 60× 0.15 = 1050 rad/s
2
Based on the above, the torque required for acceleration is obtained as follows.
T2 = (J + Jm) ×ω ´ = (3.39 × 10– 3 + 1 × 10– 3) × 1050 = 4.61N • m
Ball Screw
= 4.61 × 103 N • mm
Therefore, the required torque is specified as follows.
During acceleration
Tk = T1 + T2 = 120 + 4.61×103 = 4730 N • mm
Tt = T1 = 120 N • mm
During deceleration
Tg = T1– T2 = 120 – 4.61×103 = – 4490 N • mm
A-733
[Studying the Driving Motor]
z Rotational Speed
Since the Ball Screw lead is selected based on the rated rotational speed of the motor, it is unneces-
sary to study the rotational speed of the motor.
Maximum working rotational speed: 1500 min-1
Rated rotational speed of the motor: 3000 min– 1
z Minimum Feed Amount
As with the rotational speed, the Ball Screw lead is selected based on the encoder normally used for
an AC servomotor. Therefore, it is unnecessary to study this factor.
Encoder resolution : 1000 p/rev.
Doubled : 2000 p/rev
z Motor Torque
The torque during acceleration calculated in Section [Studying the Rotational Torque] on A-733 is
the required maximum torque.
Tmax = 4730 N • mm
Therefore, the instantaneous maximum torque of the AC servomotor needs to be at least 4,730 N-
mm.
z Effective Torque Value
The selection requirements and the torque calculated in Section [Studying the Rotational Torque] on
A-733 can be expressed as follows.
During acceleration:
Tk = 4730 N • mm
t1 = 0.15 s
During uniform motion:
Tt = 120 N • mm
t2 = 0.85 s
During deceleration:
Tg = 4490 N • mm
t3 = 0.15 s
When stationary:
TS = 0
t4 = 2.6 s
The effective torque is obtained as follows, and the rated torque of the motor must be 1305 N•mm or
greater.
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Tk t1
Tt t2 Tg t3 Ts t4 4730 0.15 120 0.85 4490 0.15 0
Trms
t1 t2 t3 t4 0.15 0.85 0.15 2.6
1305 N mm
A-734
Point of Selection
z Inertial Moment
The inertial moment applied to the motor equals to the inertial moment calculated in Section [Study-
ing the Rotational Torque] on A-733.
J = 3.39 × 10– 3 kg • m2
Normally, the motor needs to have an inertial moment at least one tenth of the inertial moment
applied to the motor, although the specific value varies depending on the motor manufacturer.
Therefore, the inertial moment of the AC servomotor must be 3.39 × 10– 4kg-m2 or greater.
The selection has been completed.
Ball Screw
A-735
Vertical Conveyance System
[Selection Conditions]
Table Mass m1 =40kg
Work Mass m2 =10kg
Stroke length l s= 600mm
Maximum speed Vmax=0.3m/s
Number of reciprocations per minute
n =5min-1
Backlash 0.1mm
Positioning accuracy ±0.7mm/600mm
Positioning Repeatability ± 0.05mm
Minimum feed amount s = 0.01mm/pulse 600
Service life time 20000h
Driving motor AC servo motor
Rated rotational speed:
m2
3,000 min-1
Inertial moment of the motor
Jm =5×10– 5 kg•m2
Reduction gear None (direct coupling) m1
Frictional coefficient of the guide surface
μ =0.003 (rolling)
Guide surface resistance
f=20 N (without load)
[Selection Items]
Screw shaft diameter
Lead
Nut model No.
Accuracy
Axial clearance
Screw shaft support method
Driving motor
A-736
Point of Selection
[Selecting Lead Angle Accuracy and Axial Clearance]

z Selecting the Lead Angle Accuracy
To achieve positioning accuracy of ± 0.7mm/600mm:
±0.7 ±0.35
=
600 300
The lead angle accuracy must be ±0.35mm/300 mm or higher.
Therefore, the accuracy grade of the Ball Screw (see Table1 on A-678) needs to be C10 (travel dis-
tance error: ± 0.21 mm/300 mm).
Accuracy grade C10 is available for low priced, Rolled Ball Screws. Assume that a Rolled Ball Screw
is selected.
z Selecting the Axial Clearance
The required backlashes is 0.1 mm or less. However, since an axial load is constantly applied in a
single direction with vertical mount, the axial load does not serve as a backlash no matter how large
it is.
Therefore, a low price, rolled Ball Screw is selected since there will not be a problem in axial clear-
ance.
[Selecting a Screw Shaft]
z Assuming the Screw Shaft Length
Assume the overall nut length to be 100 mm and the screw shaft end length to be 100 mm.
Therefore, the overall length is determined as follows based on the stroke length of 600mm.
600 + 200 = 800 mm
Thus, the screw shaft length is assumed to be 800 mm.
z Selecting the Lead
With the driving motor's rated rotational speed being 3,000 min– 1 and the maximum speed 0.3 m/s,
Ball Screw
the Ball Screw lead is obtained as follows:
0.3×60×1000
= 6 mm
3000
Therefore, it is necessary to select a type with a lead of 6mm or longer.
In addition, the Ball Screw and the motor can be mounted in direct coupling without using a reduction
gear. The minimum resolution per revolution of an AC servomotor is obtained based on the resolu-
tion of the encoder (1,000 p/rev; 1,500 p/rev) provided as a standard accessory for the AC servomo-
tor, as indicated below.
2000 p/rev(doubled)
3000 p/rev(doubled)
A-737
To meet the minimum feed amount of 0.010mm/pulse, which is the selection requirement, the follow-
ing should apply.
Lead 6mm —— 3000 p/rev
8mm —— 4000 p/rev
10mm —— 1000 p/rev
20mm —— 2000 p/rev
40mm —— 2000 p/rev
However, with the lead being 6 mm or 8 mm, the feed distance is 0.002 mm/pulse, and the starting
pulse of the controller that issues commands to the motor driver needs to be at least 150 kpps, and
the cost of the controller may be higher.
In addition, if the lead of the Ball Screw is greater, the torque required for the motor is also greater,
and thus the cost will be higher.
Therefore, select 10 mm for the Ball Screw lead.
z Selecting the Screw Shaft Diameter
Those Ball Screw models that meet the lead being 10 mm as described in Section [Selecting Lead
Angle Accuracy and Axial Clearance] on A-737 and Section [Selecting a Screw Shaft] on A-737 (see
Table17 on A-693) are as follows.
Shaft diameter Lead
15mm —— 10mm
20mm —— 10mm
25mm —— 10mm
Accordingly, the combination of a screw shaft diameter of 15 mm and a lead 10 mm is selected.
z Selecting the Screw Shaft Support Method
Since the assumed Ball Screw has a stroke length of 600 mm and operates at a maximum speed of
0.3 m/s (Ball Screw rotational speed: 1,800 min-1), select the fixed-supported configuration for the
screw shaft support.
A-738
Point of Selection

Calculating the Maximum Axial Load
Table Mass m1 =40 kg
Work Mass m2 =10 kg
Maximum speed Vmax=0.3 m/s
Accordingly, the required values are obtained as follows.
Acceleration
Vmax
α= = 1.5 m/s2
t1
During upward acceleration:
Fa1 = (m1 + m2) •g + f + (m1 + m2) •α = 585 N
During upward uniform motion:
Fa2 = (m1 + m2) •g + f = 510 N
During upward deceleration:
Fa3 = (m1 + m2) •g + f – (m1 + m2) •α = 435 N
During downward acceleration:
Fa4 = (m1 + m2) •g – f – (m1 + m2) •α = 395 N
During downward uniform motion:
Fa5 = (m1 + m2) •g – f = 470 N
During downward deceleration:
Fa6 = (m1 + m2) •g – f + (m1 + m2) •α = 545 N
Thus, the maximum axial load applied on the Ball Screw is as follows:
Famax = Fa1 = 585 N
Ball Screw
Buckling Load of the Screw Shaft
Factor according to the mounting method η 2=20 (see A-694)
Since the mounting method for the section between the nut and the bearing, where buckling is to
be considered, is "fixed-fixed: "
Distance between two mounting surfaces l a=700 mm (estimate)
4 4
d1 12.5
P1 = η2 •
4 4
× 10 = 20× 2 ×10 = 9960 N
la2
700
Permissible Compressive and Tensile Load of the Screw Shaft
P2 = 116d12 = 116 × 12.52 = 18100 N
Thus, the buckling load and the permissible compressive and tensile load of the screw shaft are at
least equal to the maximum axial load. Therefore, a Ball Screw that meets these requirements can
be used without a problem.
A-739
z Studying the Permissible Rotational Speed
Maximum Rotational Speed
Lead Ph= 10 mm
3
Vmax × 60× 10 –1
Nmax = = 1800 min
Ph
Permissible Rotational Speed Determined by the Dangerous Speed of the Screw Shaft
Factor according to the mounting method λ 2=15.1 (see A-696)
Since the mounting method for the section between the nut and the bearing, where dangerous
speed is to be considered, is "fixed-supported: "
Distance between two mounting surfaces l b=700 mm (estimate)
d1 12.5
N1 = λ2×
7 7 –1
10 = 15.1× 2 × 10 = 3852 min
lb
2
700
Permissible Rotational Speed Determined by the DN Value
z Screw shaft diameter: 15mm; lead: 10mm (large lead Ball Screw)
70000 70000 –1
N2 = = = 4444 min
D 15.75
Thus, the dangerous speed and the DN value of the screw shaft are met.
A-740
Point of Selection
[Selecting a Nut]
z Selecting a Nut Model Number
The Rolled Ball Screw with a screw shaft diameter of 15 mm and a lead of 10 mm is the following
large-lead Rolled Ball Screw model.
BLK1510-5.6
(Ca=9.8 kN, C0a=25.2 kN)
Assuming that an impact load is applied during an acceleration and a deceleration, set the static
safety factor (fS) at 2 (see Table18 on A-703).
C 0a 25.2
Famax = = = 12.6 kN = 12600 N
fS 2
The obtained permissible axial load is greater than the maximum axial load of 585 N, and therefore,
there will be no problem with this model.
z Studying the Service Life
Calculating the Travel Distance
z Travel distance during acceleration
Vmax • t1 1.3×0.2
l 1, 4 = × 103 = ×103 = 30 mm
2 2
z Travel distance during uniform motion
Vmax • t1 + Vmax • t3 0.3×0.2 + 0.3 ×0.2
l = lS –
Ball Screw
2, 5 ×103 = 600 – ×103 = 540 mm
2 2
z Travel distance during deceleration
Vmax • t3 0.3×0.2
l 3, 6 = × 103 = ×103 = 30 mm
2 2
Based on the conditions above, the relationship between the applied axial load and the travel dis-
tance is shown in the table below.
Applied axial Travel dis-

Motion load tance
FaN(N) l N(mm)
No1: During upward
585 30
acceleration
No2: During upward
510 540
uniform motion
No3: During upward
435 30
deceleration
No4: During down-
395 30
ward acceleration
No5: During down-
470 540
ward uniform motion
No6: During down-
545 30
ward deceleration
* The subscript (N) indicates a motion number.
A-741
Average Axial Load
3
(Fa1 • l 1 + Fa2 • l 2 + Fa3 • l 3 + Fa4 • l 4 + Fa5 • l 5 + Fa6 • l 6) = 225 N

1 3 3 3 3 3 3
Fm =
2× l S
Nominal Life
Dynamic load rating Ca= 9800 N
Load factor fW= 1.5 (see Table19 on A-704)
Average load Fm= 492 N
Nominal life L (rev)
3 3
L= ( Ca
fw · Fm ) 6
× 10 = ( 9800
1.5×492 ) ×10 = 2.34 × 10 rev
6 9
Average Revolutions per Minute

Number of reciprocations per minute n = 5 min-1
Stroke l S=600 mm
Lead Ph= 10 mm
2× n × l s 2×5×600
Nm = = = 600 min–1
Ph 10
Calculating the Service Life Time on the Basis of the Nominal Life
L 2.34×109
Lh = = = 65000 h
60 • Nm 60×600
Calculating the Service Life in Travel Distance on the Basis of the Nominal Life
Lead Ph= 10 mm
LS = L × Ph× 10-6 = 23400 km
With all the conditions stated above, model BLK1510-5.6 satisfies the desired service life time of
20,000 hours.
A-742
Point of Selection
[Studying the Rigidity]

Since the conditions for selection do not include rigidity and this element is not particularly neces-
sary, it is not described here.
[Studying the Positioning Accuracy]
z Studying the Lead Angle Accuracy
Accuracy grade C10 was selected in Section [Selecting Lead Angle Accuracy and Axial Clearance]
on A-737.
z Studying the Axial Clearance
Since the axial load is constantly present in a given direction only because of vertical mount, there is
no need to study the axial clearance.
z Studying the Axial Rigidity
Since the lead angle accuracy is achieved beyond the required positioning accuracy, there is no
need to study the positioning accuracy determined by axial rigidity.
z Studying the Thermal Displacement through Heat Generation
Since the lead angle accuracy is achieved beyond the required positioning accuracy, there is no
need to study the positioning accuracy determined by the heat generation.
z Studying the Orientation Change during Traveling
Since the lead angle accuracy is achieved at a much higher degree than the required positioning
accuracy, there is no need to study the positioning accuracy.
[Studying the Rotational Torque]
z Frictional Torque Due to an External Load
Fa2 • Ph
Ball Screw
510×10
T1 = = = 900 N•mm
2 × π ×η 2×π×0.9
Fa5• Ph 470×10
T2 = = = 830 N• mm
2 × π ×η 2×π×0.9
z Torque Due to a Preload on the Ball Screw
The Ball Screw is not provided with a preload.
A-743
z Torque Required for Acceleration
Inertial Moment:
Since the inertial moment per unit length of the screw shaft is 3.9 x 10-4 kg•cm2/mm (see the specifi-
cation table), the inertial moment of the screw shaft with an overall length of 800mm is obtained as
follows.
JS = 3.9 × 10– 4× 800 = 0.31 kg • cm2
= 0.31 × 10– 4 kg • m2
2 2
Ph 10
J = (m1 + m2) ( 2×π )
• A ×10 +Js •A = (40+10)
2 –6 2
2 ×π (
2 –6
) –4
×1 ×10 + 0.31×10 ×1
2
–4 2
= 1.58 × 10 kg• m
Angular acceleration:
2π • Nm 2π × 1800
ω′ = 60• t = 60× 0.2 = 942 rad/s
2
Based on the above, the torque required for acceleration is obtained as follows.
T3 = (J + Jm) •ω ´ = (1.58 × 10– 4 + 5 × 10– 5) × 942 = 0.2 N•m = 200 N•mm
Therefore, the required torque is specified as follows.
Tk1 = T1 + T3 = 900 + 200 = 1100 N•mm
Tt1 = T1 = 900 N•mm
Tg1 = T1– T3 = 900 – 200 = 700 N•mm
Tk2 = 630 N•mm
Tt2 = 830 N•mm
Tg2 = 1030 N-mm
A-744
Point of Selection
[Studying the Driving Motor]

z Rotational Speed
Since the Ball Screw lead is selected based on the rated rotational speed of the motor, it is unneces-
sary to study the rotational speed of the motor.
Maximum working rotational speed: 1800 min-1
Rated rotational speed of the motor: 3000 min– 1
z Minimum Feed Amount
As with the rotational speed, the Ball Screw lead is selected based on the encoder normally used for
an AC servomotor. Therefore, it is unnecessary to study this factor.
Encoder resolution: 1000 p/rev.
z Motor Torque
The torque during acceleration calculated in Section [Studying the Rotational Torque] on A-743 is the
required maximum torque.
Tmax = Tk1 = 1100 N•mm
Therefore, the maximum peak torque of the AC servomotor needs to be at least 1100 N-mm.
z Effective Torque Value
The selection requirements and the torque calculated in Section [Studying the Rotational Torque] on
A-743 can be expressed as follows.
Tk1 = 1100 N•mm
t1 = 0.2 s
Tt1 = 900 N•mm
t2 = 1.8 s
Ball Screw
Tg1 = 700 N•mm
t3 = 0.2 s
Tk2 = 630 N•mm
t1 = 0.2 s
Tt2 = 830 N•mm
t2 = 1.8 s
Tg2 = 1030 N-mm
t3 = 0.2 s
When stationary(m2=0):
TS = 658 N•mm
t4 = 7.6 s
A-745
The effective torque is obtained as follows, and the rated torque of the motor must be 743 N•mm or
greater.
Tk12 • t1 ＋ Tt12 • t2＋Tg12 •t3＋Tk22 •t1＋Tt22 •t2＋Tg22 •t3＋Ts2 •t4

Trms =
t1 ＋t2 ＋t3＋t1＋t2 ＋t3＋t4
11002 ×0.2＋9002 ×1.8＋7002 ×0.2＋6302 ×0.2＋8302 ×1.8＋10302 ×0.2＋6582 ×7.6
=
0.2＋1.8＋0.2 ＋0.2＋1.8＋0.2 ＋7.6
= 743 N• mm
z Inertial Moment
The inertial moment applied to the motor equals to the inertial moment calculated in Section [Study-
ing the Rotational Torque] on A-743.
J = 1.58 × 10– 4 kg • m2
Normally, the motor needs to have an inertial moment at least one tenth of the inertial moment
applied to the motor, although the specific value varies depending on the motor manufacturer.
Therefore, the inertial moment of the AC servomotor must be 1.58 × 10– 5kg-m2 or greater.
The selection has been completed.
A-746
Ball Screw
Accuracy of Each Model
A-747
Precision,
Caged Ball Screw

Models SBN, SBK and HBN

0
Screw shaft
Pipe presser
Return pipe
Ball screw nut
Ball cage
Ball
Fig.1 Structure of High-Speed Ball Screw with Ball Cage Model SBN

Ball Cage Effect XXX A-749
Axial Clearance XXX A-685
A-748

The use of a ball cage in the Ball Screw with the Ball Cage eliminates collision and friction between
balls and increases the grease retention. This makes it possible to achieve a low noise, a low torque
fluctuation and a long-term maintenance-free operation.
In addition, this Ball Screw is superbly capable of responding to the high speed because of an ideal
ball recirculation structure, a strengthened circulation path and an adoption of the ball cage.
Ball Cage Effect

The use of the ball cage eliminates the collision
Point (metal) contact
noise between the balls. Additionally, as balls
are picked up in the tangential direction, the col-
lision noise from the ball circulation has also
been eliminated.
The friction between the balls has been elimi-
nated, and the grease retention has been
improved through the provision of grease pock- Conventional Structure
ets. As a result, the long-term maintenance-free
operation (i.e., lubrication is unnecessary over a
long period) is achieved. Grease pocket
Oil film contact
[Smooth Motion]
Ball Screw
The use of a ball cage eliminates the friction
between the balls and minimizes the torque fluc-
tuation, thus allowing the smooth motion to be
achieved.
Structure of the Ball Screw with Ball Cage
A-749
[Low Noise]
z Noise Level Data
Since the balls in the Ball Screw with the Ball Cage do not collide with each other, they do not pro-
duce a metallic sound and a low noise level is achieved.
Noise Measurement
[Conditions]
Item Description
High load ball screw with ball cage
Sample HBN3210-5
Conventional type: model BNF3210-5
Stroke 600mm
Grease lubrication
Lubrication (lithium-based grease containing
extreme pressure agent)
Noise meter
FFT analyzer
Soundproof material
1000mm
Noise measurement instrument
90
85 Conventional type
(BNF3210-5)
80 Model HBN
75 (HBN3210-5)
Noise level [dB(A)]
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
10000 100000 1000000 10000000
Ball diameter × ball center diameter × rotational speed
Fig.2 Ball Screw Noise Level
A-750

z High speed, Load-bearing Capacity
Thanks to the ball circulating method supporting high speed and the caged ball technology, the Ball
Screw with Ball Cage excels in high speed and load-bearing capacity.
High Speed Durability Test Load Bearing Test
[Test conditions] [Test conditions]
Item Description Item Description
High Speed Ball Screw with Ball Cage High Speed Ball Screw with Ball Cage
Sample Sample
SBN3210-7 SBN3210-7
Speed 3900(min– 1)(DN value*: 130,000) Speed 1500(min– 1)(DN value*: 50,000)
Stroke 400mm Stroke 300mm
Lubricant THK AFG Grease Lubricant THK AFG Grease
Quantity 12cm3(lubricated every 1000km) Quantity 12cm3
Applied load 1.73kN Applied load 17.3kN(0.5Ca)
Acceleration 1G Acceleration 0.5G
* DN value: Ball center-to-center diameter x revolutions per

minute
[Test result] [Test result]
Shows no deviation after running 10,000 km. Shows no deviation after running a distance 2.5
times the calculated service life.
[Smooth Motion]
z Low Torque Fluctuation
Ball Screw
The caged ball technology allows smoother motion than the conventional type to be achieved, thus
to reduce torque fluctuation.
[Conditions]
Item Description
Shaft diameter/
32/10mm
lead
Shaft rotational
60min-1
speed
1.0
Model SBN
Conventional type
0.5
Torque (N•m)
0
0 20 40 60
–0.5
–1.0
Time (s)
Fig.3 Torque Fluctuation Data
A-751
Types and Features
[Preload Type]
Model SBN Specification Table⇒B-576
Model SBN has a circulation structure where
balls are picked up in the tangential direction
and is provided with a strengthened circulation
path, thus to achieve a DN value of 130,000.
Model SBK Specification Table⇒B-578

As a result of adopting the offset preloading
method, which shifts two rows of grooves of the
ball screw nut, a compact structure is achieved.
[No Preload Type]

Model HBN Specification Table⇒B-580
With the optimal design for high loads, this Ball
Screw model achieves a rated load more than
twice the conventional type.
A-752
Service Life
Axial Clearance
Accuracy Standards
Ball Screw
A-753
Standard-Stock
Standard-Stock Precision Ball Screw (Unfinished Shaft Ends)

Models BIF, BNFN, MDK, MBF and BNF
Unfinished Shaft Ends

0

Nut Types and Axial Clearance XXX A-758
A-754

This type of Ball Screw is mass manufactured by cutting the standardized screw shafts of Precision
Ball Screws to regular lengths. Additional machining of the shaft ends can easily be performed.
To meet various intended purposes, THK offers several Ball Screw models with different types of
nuts: the double-nut type (model BNFN), the single-nut type (model BNF), the offset preload-nut type
(model BIF) and the miniature Ball Screw (models MDK and MBF).
[Contamination Protection]
Nuts of the following model numbers are attached with a labyrinth seal.
z All variations of models BNFN, BNF and BIF
z Model MDK0802/1002/1202/1402/1404/1405
When dust or other foreign materials may enter the Ball Screw, it is necessary to use a contamina-
tion protection device (e.g., bellows) to completely protect the screw shaft.
[Lubrication]
The ball screw nuts are supplied with lithium soap-group grease with shipments.
(Models MDK and MBF are applied only with an anti-rust oil.)
[Additional Machining of the Shaft End]
Since only the effective thread of the screw shaft is surface treated with induction-hardening (all vari-
ations of models BNFN, BNF and BIF; model MDK 1405) or carburizing (all variations of model MBF;
model MDK0401 to 1404), the shaft ends can additionally be machined easily either by grinding or
milling.
In addition, since both ends of the screw shaft have a center hole, they can be cylindrically ground.
Surface hardness of the effect thread : HRC58 to 64
Ball Screw
Hardness of the screw shaft ends
All variation of models BNFN, BNF and BIF; model MDK 1405 : HRC22 to 27
All variations of model MBF; model MDK0401 to 1404 : HRC35 or below
THK has standardized the shapes of the screw shaft ends in order to allow speedy estimation and
manufacturing of the Ball Screws.
The shapes of shaft ends are divided into those allowing the standard support units to be used (sym-
bols H, K and J) and those compliant with JIS B 1192-1997 (symbols A, B and C). See A-810 for
details.
A-755
Types and Features
[Preload Type]
Model BIF Specification Table⇒B-594
The right and left screws are provided with a
phase in the middle of the ball screw nut, and an
axial clearance is set at a below-zero value
(under a preload). This compact model is capa-
ble of a smooth motion.
Model BNFN Specification Table⇒B-594

The most common type with a preload provided
via a spacer between the two combined ball
screw nuts to eliminate backlash. It can be
mounted using the bolt holes drilled on the
flange.
A-756
[No Preload Type]

Models MDK and MBF Specification Table⇒B-584
A miniature type with a screw shaft diameter of
φ 4 to φ 14 mm and a lead of 1 to 5mm.
Model BNF Specification Table⇒B-594

The simplest type with a single ball screw nut. It
is designed to be mounted using the bolt holes
drilled on the flange.
Ball Screw
A-757
Service Life
Nut Types and Axial Clearance
Screw shaft outer

φ 4 to 14
diameter (mm)
Model MDK Model MBF
Nut type
No preload type No preload type

Accuracy grades C3, C5 C7 C3, C5 C7
Axial clearance
0.005 or less (GT) 0.02 or less (G2) 0.005 or less (GT) 0.02 or less (G2)
(mm)
Preload — —
Note) The symbols in the parentheses indicate axial clearance symbols.
Screw shaft out

φ 16 to 50
diameter (mm)
Model BIF Model BNFN Model BNF
Nut type
Preload Type Preload Type No preload type

Accuracy grades C5 C7 C5 C7 C5 C7
Axial clearance 0.01 or less 0.02 or less
0 or less (G0) 0 or less (G0) 0 or less (G0) 0 or less (G0)
(mm) (G1) (G2)
Preload 0.05Ca 0.05Ca 0.05Ca 0.05Ca — —
Note1) The symbols in the parentheses indicate axial clearance symbols.
Note2) Symbol "Ca" for preload indicates the basic dynamic load rating.
A-758
Ball Screw
A-759
Standard-Stock
Standard-Stock Precision Ball Screw (Finished Shaft Ends)

Model BNK
Finished Shaft Ends

0
Model BNK
Features XXX A-761

Table of Ball Screw Types with Finished Shaft Ends and the Corresponding Support Units and Nut Brackets XXX A-762
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table XXX B-608
A-760
Features
To meet the space-saving requirement, this type of Ball Screw has a standardized screw shaft and a
ball screw nut. The ends of the screw shaft are standardized to fit the corresponding support unit.
The shaft support method with models BNK0401, 0501 and 0601 is "fixed-free," while other models
use the "fixed-supported" method with the shaft directly coupled with the motor.
Screw shafts and nuts are compactly designed. When a support unit and a nut bracket are combined
with a Ball Screw, the assembly can be mounted on your machine as it is. Thus, a high-accuracy
feed mechanism can easily be achieved.
Each ball screw nut contains a right amount of grease. In addition, the ball nuts of model BNK0802 or
higher contain a labyrinth seal (with models BNK1510, BNK1520, BNK1616, BNK2020 and
BNK2520, the end cap also serves as a labyrinth seal).
When foreign materials may enter the screw nut, it is necessary to use a dust-prevention device
(e.g., bellows) to completely protect the screw shaft.
Types and Features
Model BNK Specification Table⇒B-608

For this model, screw shafts with a diameter φ 4
to φ 25 mm and a lead 1 to 20 mm are available
as the standard.
Ball Screw
A-761
Table of Ball Screw Types with Finished Shaft Ends and the Corresponding
Support Units and Nut Brackets
BNK
Model No.
0401 0501 0601 0801 0802 0810 1002 1004 1010
Accuracy grades C3, C5, C7 C3, C5, C7 C3, C5, C7 C3, C5, C7 C3, C5, C7 C5, C7 C3, C5, C7 C3, C5, C7 C5, C7
Axial clearanceNote G0 GT G2 G0 GT G2 G0 GT G2 G0 GT G2 G0 GT G2 — GT G2 G0 GT G2 G0 GT G2 G0 GT G2
20 z z
30
40 z z z z z
50 z z
60
70 z z z z z
100 z z z z z z z
120
150 z z z z z z
170
200 z z z z
250 z z z
Stroke (mm)
300 z z
350
400
450
500
550
600
700
800
900
1000
1100
1200
1400
1600
Support unit: square on fixed side EK4 EK4 EK5 EK6 EK6 EK6 EK8 EK10 EK10
Support unit: round on fixed side FK4 FK4 FK5 FK6 FK6 FK6 FK8 FK10 FK10
Support unit: square on supported side — — — EF6 EF6 EF6 EF8 EF10 EF10
Support unit: round on supported side — — — FF6 FF6 FF6 FF8 FF10 FF10
Nut bracket — — — — — — — MC1004 MC1004
Note) Axial clearance: G0: 0 or less
GT: 0.005 mm or less
G2: 0.02 mm or less
For details of the support unit and the nut bracket, see A-802 onward and A-812 onward, respectively.
A-762
BNK
1202 1205 1208 1402 1404 1408 1510 1520 1616 2010 2020 2520
C3, C5, C7 C3, C5, C7 C7 C3, C5, C7 C3, C5, C7 C5, C7 C5, C7 C5, C7 C5, C7 C5, C7 C5, C7 C5, C7
G0 GT G2 G0 GT G2 — — G2 G0 GT G2 G0 GT G2 G0 GT G2 G0 GT G2 G0 GT G2 G0 GT G2 G0 GT G2 G0 GT G2 G0 GT G2
z z z z
z z z z z
z z z z z z z z z
z z z z z z z z z
z z z z z z z
z z z z z z z z
z z z z
z z z z z z z
Ball Screw
z z z z
z z z z z z z
z z z z
z z z z z z z
z z z z z z
z z z z z z
z z
z z z
z z
z
z
z
EK10 EK10 EK10 EK12 EK12 EK12 EK12 EK12 EK12 EK15 EK15 EK20
FK10 FK10 FK10 FK12 FK12 FK12 FK12 FK12 FK12 FK15 FK15 FK20
EF10 EF10 EF10 EF12 EF12 EF12 EF12 EF12 EF12 EF15 EF15 EF20
FF10 FF10 FF10 FF12 FF12 FF12 FF12 FF12 FF12 FF15 FF15 FF20
— MC1205 MC1205 — — MC1408 MC1408 MC1408 MC1408 MC2010 MC2020 —
A-763
Models BIF, DIK, BNFN, DKN, BLW, BNF, DK, MDK, BLK/WGF and BNT
Models BIF, DIK, BNFN, DKN, BLW, BNF, DK, MDK,

0
BLK/WGF and BNT
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table (Preload Type) XXX B-652

Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table (No Preload Type)XXX B-686
Model number coding XXX B-718
A-764
For THK Precision Ball Screws, a wide array of precision-ground screw shafts and ball screw nuts
are available as standard to meet diversified applications.
[Combinations of Various shaft Diameters and Leads]

You can select the combination of a shaft diameter and a lead that meet the intended use from the
various nut types and the screw shaft leads. Those nut types include the return-pipe nuts, which rep-
resent the most extensive variations among the series, the compact simple nuts and the large-lead
end-cap nuts.
[Standard-stock Types (with Unfinished Shaft Ends/Finished Shaft Ends) are Available]
The unfinished shaft end types, which are mass manufactured by cutting the standardized screw
shafts to the standard lengths, and those with finished shaft ends, for which the screw shaft ends are
machined to match the corresponding the support units, are available as the standard.
[Accuracy Standards Compliant with JIS (ISO)]
The accuracy of the Ball Screw is controlled in accordance with the JIS standards (JIS B1192-1997).
Precision Ball Screw Rolled Ball Screw

Accuracy
C0 C1 C2 C3 C5 C7 C8 C10
grades
Type Series symbol Grade Remarks

C 0, 1, 3, 5 JIS series
For positioning
Ball Screw
Cp 1, 3, 5
ISO compliant
For conveyance Ct 1, 3, 5, 7, 10
[Options that Meet the Environment are Available]

Options are available consisting of a lubricator (QZ), which enables the maintenance interval to be
significantly extended, and a wiper ring (W), which improves the ability to remove foreign materials in
adverse environments.
A-765
[Structure and Features of Offset Preload Type Simple-Nut Ball Screw Model DIK]
The Simple-Nut Ball Screw model DIK is an offset preload type in which a phase is provided in the
middle of a single ball screw nut, and an axial clearance is set at a below-zero value (under a pre-
load).
Model DIK has a more compact structure and allows smoother motion than the conventional double-
nut type (spacer inserted between two nuts).
[Comparison between the Simple Nut and the Double-Nuts]
Conventional Double-Nut Type Ball Screw

Simple-Nut Ball Screw Model DIK
Model BNFN
Ball screw nut Ball screw nut Ball screw nut

Spacer
Preloading Structure
Applied preload Applied preload Applied preload Applied preload

Pitch (Pitch + preload) Pitch Pitch (4 to 5 pitches + preload) Pitch
Ball screw nut Ball screw nut Spacer Ball screw nut
Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch
Screw shaft Screw shaft
A-766
Conventional Double-Nut Type Ball Screw

Model BNFN
Rotational Performance
The preload adjustment with Simple Nut Ball Screw The use of a spacer in the double-nuts tends to cause
model DIK is performed according to the ball diameter. inconsistency in the contact angle due to inaccurate
This eliminates the inconsistency in the contact angle, flatness of the spacer surface and an inaccurate per-
which is the most important factor of the Ball Screw pendicularity of the nut. This results in a non-uniform
performance. It also ensures the high rigidity, the ball contact, an inferior rotational performance and a
smooth motion and the high wobbling accuracy. low wobbling accuracy.
Dimensions
Since Simple-Nut Ball Screw model DIK is based on a
preloading mechanism that does not require a spacer,
the overall nut length can be kept short. As a result,
the whole nut can be lightly and compactly designed.
Ball Screw
76
61
φ 67 φ 44
φ 58 φ 34
Unit: mm Unit: mm
Model DIK 2005-6 Model BNFN 2005-2.5
A-767
[Comparison between the Offset Preload Type of Simple-Nut Ball Screw and the Oversize Preload Nut Ball Screw]
Conventional Oversize Preload Nut Ball Screw

Model BNF
Ball screw nut Ball screw nut
Preloading Structure
Preload Preload
Pitch Pitch Pitch
Pitch Pitch + preload Pitch
Ball screw nut Ball screw nut
Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch Pitch
Screw shaft Screw shaft
Accuracy Life
Simple-Nut Ball Screw model DIK has a similar pre- With the oversize preload nut Ball Screw, a preload is
loading structure to that of the double-nut type provided through the balls each in contact with the
although the former only has one ball screw shaft. As raceway at four points. This causes differential slip
a result, no differential slip or spin occurs, thus to mini- and spin to increase the rotational torque, resulting in
mize the increase in the rotational torque and the gen- an accelerated wear and a heat generation. Therefore,
eration of heat. Accordingly, a high level of accuracy the accuracy deteriorates in a short period.
can be maintained over a long period.
2 point contact structure 4 point contact structure

C
C
on
A
on
B
d2
ta
ta
ct
ct
d1
w
w
id
id
B
t
A
t
h
h
d2 d1 Ball rotational axis
Ball rotational axis
Differential slip Differential slip

d1 B’ B’
B B
π×d1 A’ π×d1 A’
A A
d2 π×d2 d2 π×d2
A-768
Types and Features
[Preload Type]
Model BIF Specification Table⇒B-652
The right and the left screws are provided with a
Model DIK Specification Table⇒B-652

The right and the left screws are provided with a
Ball Screw
Model BNFN Specification Table⇒B-652
The most common type with a preload provided
via a spacer between the two combined ball
screw nuts to eliminate the backlash. It can be
mounted using the bolt holes drilled on the
flange.
Model DKN Specification Table⇒B-672

A preload is provided via a spacer between the
two combined ball screw nuts to achieve a
below-zero axial clearance (under a preload).
A-769
Model BLW Specification Table⇒B-652
Since a preload is provided through a spacer
between two large lead nuts, high-speed feed
without by backlash is ensured.
[No Preload Type]

Model BNF Specification Table⇒B-686
The simplest type with a single ball screw nut. It
is designed to be mounted using the bolt holes
drilled on the flange.
Model DK Specification Table⇒B-686

The most compact type, with a ball screw nut
diameter 70 to 80% of that of the return-pipe
nut.
Model MDK Specification Table⇒B-686

This model is a miniature nut with a screw shaft
diameter of φ 4 to 14 mm and a lead of 1 to 5
mm.
A-770
Models BLK/WGF Specification Table⇒B-686

With model BLK, the shaft diameter is equal to
the lead dimension. Model WGF has a lead
dimension 1.5 to 3 times longer than the shaft
diameter.
Square Ball Screw Nut Model BNT Specification Table⇒B-716

Since mounting screw holes are machined on
the square ball screw nut, this model can com-
pactly be mounted on the machine without a
housing.
Ball Screw
Service Life
Axial Clearance
Accuracy Standards
A-771
Precision Rotary Ball Screw
Models DIR and BLR
Models DIR and BLR

0
Ball screw nut

Outer ring Deflector
Section A
Screw shaft
Ball
Retainer
End cap
Structure of Standard-Lead Rotary Nut Ball Screw Model DIR Spacer Ball Screw shaft
Seal
Collar
End cap
Outer ring
Ball screw nut
Retainer
Outer ring
Ball
Structure of Large Lead Rotary Nut Ball Screw Model BLR

Type XXX A-775
Example of Assembly XXX A-778
A-772
[Model DIR]
Standard-Lead Rotary-Nut Ball Screw model The support bearing comprises of two rows of
DIR is a rotary-nut Ball Screw that has a struc- DB type angular bearings with a contact angle
ture where a simple-nut Ball Screw is integrated of 45° to provide a preload. The collar, previ-
with a support bearing. ously used to mount a pulley, is integrated with
Its ball screw nut serves as a ball recirculation the ball screw nut. (See the A section.)
structure using deflectors. Balls travel along the
groove of the deflector mounted in the ball
screw nut to the adjacent raceway, and then cir-
culate back to the loaded area to complete an
infinite rolling motion.
Being an offset preload nut, the single ball
screw nut provides different phases to the right
and left thread in the middle of the nut, thus to
set the axial clearance below zero (a preload is
provided). This allows more compact, smoother
motion to be achieved than the conventional
double-nut type (a spacer is inserted between
two nuts). 45°
45°
Fig.1 Structure of the Support Bearing
z Compact
Ball Screw
Because of the internal circulation mechanism using a deflector, the outer diameter is only 70 to
80%, and the overall length is 60 to 80%, of that of the return-pipe nut, thus to reduce the weight and
decrease the inertia during acceleration.
Since the nut and the support bearing are integrated, a highly accurate, and a compact design is
achieved.
In addition, small inertia due to the lightweight ball screw nut ensures high responsiveness.
z Capable of Fine Positioning
Being a Standard-Lead Ball Screw, it is capable of fine positioning despite that the ball screw nut
rotates.
z Accuracy can Easily be Established
As the support bearing is integrated with the outer ring, the bearing can be assembled with the nut
housing on the end face of the outer ring flange. This makes it easy to center the ball screw nut and
establish accuracy.
z Well Balanced
Since the deflector is evenly placed along the circumference, a superb balance is ensured while the
ball screw nut is rotating.
A-773
z Stability in the Low-speed Range
Traditionally, motors tend to have an uneven torque and a speed in the low-speed range due to the
external causes. With model DIR, the motor can be connected independently with the screw shaft
and the ball screw nut, thus to allow micro feeding within the motor's stable rotation range.
[Model BLR]
The Rotary Ball Screw is a rotary-nut ball screw unit that has an integrated structure consisting of a
ball screw nut and a support bearing. The support bearing is an angular bearing that has a contact
angle of 60° , contains an increased number of balls and achieves large axial rigidity.
Model BLR is divided into two types: Precision Ball Screw and Rolled Screw Ball.
z Smooth Motion
It achieves smoother motion than rack-and-pinion based straight motion. Also, since the screw shaft
does not rotate because of the ball screw nut drive, this model does not show skipping, produces low
noise and generates little heat.
z Low Noise even in High-speed Rotation
Model BLR produces very low noise when the balls are picked up along the end cap. In addition, the
balls circulate by passing through the ball screw nut, allowing this model to be used at high speed.
z High Rigidity
The support bearing of this model is larger than that of the screw shaft rotational type. Thus, its axial
rigidity is significantly increased.
z Compact
achieved.
z Easy Installation
By simply mounting this model to the housing with bolts, a ball screw nut rotating mechanism can be
obtained. (For the housing's inner-diameter tolerance, H7 is recommended.)
A-774
Type
[Preload Type]
Model DIR Specification Table⇒B-720
[No Preload Type]

Model BLR Specification Table⇒B-722
Service Life Ball Screw
Axial Clearance
A-775
Accuracy Standards
[Model DIR]
The accuracy of model DIR is compliant with a the JIS standard (JIS B 1192-1997) except for the
radial runout of the circumference of the ball screw nut from the screw axis (D) and the perpendicu-
larity of the flange-mounting surface against the screw axis (C).
C A
B
D B
Unit: mm
Accuracy grades C3 C5 C7
Model No. C D C D C D
DIR 16□□ 0.013 0.017 0.016 0.020 0.023 0.035
DIR 20□□ 0.013 0.017 0.016 0.020 0.023 0.035
DIR 25□□ 0.015 0.020 0.018 0.024 0.023 0.035
DIR 32□□ 0.015 0.020 0.018 0.024 0.023 0.035
DIR 36□□ 0.016 0.021 0.019 0.025 0.024 0.036
DIR 40□□ 0.018 0.026 0.021 0.033 0.026 0.036
A-776
[Model BLR]
The accuracy of model BLR is compliant with a the JIS standard (JIS B 1192-1997) except for the
C A
A B
Ball Screw
D B
Unit: mm
Lead angle accuracy C3 C5 C7
Accuracy grades C3 C5 C7
Model No. C D C D C D
BLR 1616 0.013 0.017 0.016 0.020 0.023 0.035
BLR 2020 0.013 0.017 0.016 0.020 0.023 0.035
BLR 2525 0.015 0.020 0.018 0.024 0.023 0.035
BLR 3232 0.015 0.020 0.018 0.024 0.023 0.035
BLR 3636 0.016 0.021 0.019 0.025 0.024 0.036
BLR 4040 0.018 0.026 0.021 0.033 0.026 0.046
BLR 5050 0.018 0.026 0.021 0.033 0.026 0.046
A-777
Example of Assembly
[Example of Mounting Ball Screw Nut Model DIR]
Installation to the housing can be performed

on the end face of the outer ring flange.
[Example of Mounting Ball Screw Nut Model BLR]
Pulley Pulley
Standard installation method Inverted flange

Note) If the flange is to be inverted, indicate“K”in the model number. (applicable only to model BLR)
Example: BLR 2020-3.6 K UU
Symbol for inverted flange (No symbol for standard flange orientation)
A-778
[Example of Mounting Model BLR on the Table]

(1) Screw shaft free, ball screw nut fixed
(Suitable for a long table)
LM Guide Table
Motor Ball Screw (Model BLR)
Fig.2 Example of Installation on the Table (Ball Screw Nut Fixed)
(2) Ball screw nut free, screw shaft fixed

(Suitable for a short table and a long stroke)
LM Guide Table
Motor
Ball Screw (Model BLR)
Ball Screw
Fig.3 Example of Installation on the Table (Screw Shaft Fixed)
A-779
Precision Ball Screw/Spline
Models BNS-A, BNS, NS-A and NS

0
Shaft
Seal Collar
Shim plate
Seal
End cap
Seal
Outer ring
Shim plate
Seal Ball
Spline nut Outer ring
Ball screw nut
Outer ring
Ball Retainer
Retainer
Outer ring

Type XXX A-782
Action Patterns XXX A-784
Example of Using the Spring Pad XXX A-788
Precautions on Use XXX A-789
A-780

The Ball Screw/Spline contains the Ball Screw grooves and the Ball Spline groove crossing one
another. The nuts of the Ball Screw and the Ball Spline have dedicated support bearings directly
embedded on the circumference of the nuts.
The Ball Screw/Spline is capable of performing three (rotational, linear and spiral) modes of motion
with a single shaft by rotating or stopping the spline nut.
It is optimal for machines using a combination of rotary and straight motions, such as scholar robot's
Z-axis, assembly robot, automatic loader, and machining center's ATC equipment.
[Zero Axial Clearance]
The Ball Spline has an angular-contact structure that causes no backlash in the rotational direction,
enabling highly accurate positioning.
[Lightweight and Compact]
Since the nut and the support bearing are integrated, highly accurate, compact design is achieved. In
addition, small inertia because of the lightweight ball screw nut ensures high responsiveness.
[Easy Installation]
The Ball Spline nut is designed so that balls do not fall off even if the spline nut is removed from the
shaft, making installation easy. The Ball Screw/Spline can easily be mounted simply by securing it to
the housing with bolts. (For the housing's inner-diameter tolerance, H7 is recommended.)
[Smooth Motion with Low Noise]
As the Ball Screw is based on an end cap mechanism, smooth motion with low noise is achieved.
[Highly Rigid Support Bearing]
The support bearing on the Ball Screw has a contact angle of 60° in the axial direction while that on
Ball Screw
the Ball Spline has a contact angle of 30° in the moment direction, thus to provide a highly rigid shaft
support.
In addition, a dedicated rubber seal is attached as standard to prevent entry of foreign materials.
Ball Screw
（ 60° 60
°
45°
45 30
° °））
3 0°
（
Ball Spline
Fig.1 Structure of Support Bearing Model BNS-A Fig.2 Structure of Support Bearing Model BNS
A-781
Type
[No Preload Type]

Model BNS-A Specification Table⇒B-726 Model BNS Specification Table⇒B-728
(Compact type: straight-curved motion) (Heavy-load type: straight-curved motion)
Model NS-A Specification Table⇒B-730 Model NS Specification Table⇒B-732
(Compact type: straight motion) (Heavy-load type: straight motion)
Service Life
Axial Clearance
A-782
Accuracy Standards
The Ball Screw/Spline is manufactured with the following specifications.
[Ball Screw]
Axial clearance: 0 or less
Lead angle accuracy: C5
(For detailed specifications, see A-678.)
[Ball Spline]
Clearance in the rotational direction: 0 or less (CL: light preload)
Accuracy grade: class H
C A E A H A
A B A B
I B Ball screw nut
D B F B
Spline nut
Spline nut Ball screw nut
Model BNS Model NS
Ball Screw
Unit: mm
Model No. C D E F H I
BNS 0812
0.014 0.017 0.014 0.016 0.010 0.013
NS 0812
BNS 1015
0.014 0.017 0.014 0.016 0.010 0.013
NS 1015
BNS 1616
0.018 0.021 0.016 0.020 0.013 0.016
NS 1616
BNS 2020
0.018 0.021 0.016 0.020 0.013 0.016
NS 2020
BNS 2525
0.021 0.021 0.018 0.024 0.016 0.016
NS 2525
BNS 3232
0.021 0.021 0.018 0.024 0.016 0.016
NS 3232
BNS 4040
0.025 0.025 0.021 0.033 0.019 0.019
NS 4040
BNS 5050
0.025 0.025 0.021 0.033 0.019 0.019
NS 5050
A-783
Action Patterns
[Model BNS Basic Actions]
＋
Ball screw nut Ball screw nut pulley: N1
Spline nut
Shaft ＋
Spline nut pulley: N2
l : Ball screw lead (mm)

＋
N1: Ball screw nut rotational speed (min‐1)
N2: Spline nut rotational speed (min-1)
＋
Input Shaft motion

Action
Motion Ball screw Ball spline Vertical direction Rotational direction
direction
pulley pulley (speed) (rotation speed)
Vertical direc-
1. Vertical tion→down N1 V=N1•l
(1) 0 0
Rotational (Forward) (N1≠0)
direction→0
Vertical direc-
tion→up – N1 V=– N1•l
1 2 (2) 0 0
Rotational (Reverse) (N1≠0)
direction→0
Vertical
2. Rotation direction→0 N2 N2(Forward)
(1) N1 0
Rotational direc- (Forward) (N1=N2≠0)
tion→forward
Vertical
direction→0 -N2(Reverse)
1 – N2
(2) – N1 0 (– N1=– N2≠
Rotational direc- (Reverse)
2 0)
tion→reverse
Vertical direc-
3. Spiral tion→up N2 N2
(1) 0 V=N2•l
Rotational direc- (N2≠0) (Forward)
tion→forward
Vertical direc-
tion→down – N2 – N2
2 (2) 0 V=– N2•l
1 Rotational direc- (-N2≠0) (Reverse)
tion→reverse
A-784
[Model NS Basic Actions]
＋
Ball screw nut Ball screw nut pulley: N1
Spline nut
Shaft
l : Ball screw lead (mm)

N1: Ball screw nut rotational speed (min‐1)
＋
Input Shaft motion

Motion Action direction Vertical direction
Ball screw pulley
(speed)
1. Vertical Vertical direction N1 V=N1•l

(1)
→down (Forward) (N1≠0)
Ball Screw
Vertical direction – N1 V=– N1•l
1 (2)
2 →up (Reverse) (N1≠0)
A-785
[Model BNS Extended Actions]
Input Shaft motion

Action
Motion Ball screw Ball spline Vertical direction Rotational direction
direction
pulley pulley (speed) (rotational speed)
Vertical direc- – N1 V=– N1•l
(1) 0 0
1. Up→down→forward tion→up (Reverse) (N1≠0)
→up→down→reverse Vertical direc- N1 V=N1•l
(2) 0 0
tion→down (Forward) (N1≠0)
Rotational direc- N2 N2(Forward)
(3) N1 0
tion→forward (Forward) (N1=N2≠0)
Vertical direc- V=– N1•l
(4) – N1 0 0
tion→up (N1≠0)
1 2 4 5
Vertical direc- V=N1•l
3 (5) N1 0 0
tion→down (N1≠0)
6 Rotational direc- – N2 -N2(Reverse)

(6) – N1 0
tion→reverse (Reverse) (– N1=N2≠0)
(1) N1 0 0
2. Down→up→forward tion→down (N1≠0)
→down→up→reverse Vertical direc- V=– N1•l
(2) – N1 0 0
tion→up (N1≠0)
Rotational direc- N2
(3) N1 N2 0
tion→forward (N1=N2≠0)
(4) N1 0 0
tion→down (N1≠0)
6
(5) – N1 0 0
3
tion→up (N1≠0)
1 5
2 4 Rotational direc- – N2
(6) – N1 – N2 0
tion→reverse (– N1=N2≠0)
(1) N1 0 0
3. Down→forward tion→down (N1≠0)
→up→reverse
Rotational direc- N2
(2) N1 N2 0
tion→forward (N1=N2≠0)
(3) – N1 0 0
4 tion→up (N1≠0)
1 2 3 Rotational direc- – N2
(4) – N1 – N2 0

(1) N1 0 0
4. Down→up tion→down (N1≠0)
→reverse→forward
(2) – N1 0 0
tion→up (N1≠0)
Rotational direc- – N2
4 (3) – N1 – N2 0
3 Rotational direc- N2
(4) N1 N2 0
2 1 tion→forward (N1=N2≠0)
A-786
Example of Assembly
Pulley
Seal
Support bearing
Ball screw nut Support bearing

Spline nut
Shaft
Seal
Pulley
Example of installing the ball screw nut input pulley Example of installing the ball screw nut pulley
and the spline nut input pulley, both outside the housing. inside the housing.
The housing length is minimized.
Ball Screw
Fig.3 Example of Assembling Model BNS
Pulley
Seal
Support bearing
Ball screw nut
Shaft
Spline nut
Example of installing the ball screw nut Example of installing the ball screw nut pulley
pulley outside the housing. inside the housing.
The housing length is minimized.
Fig.4 Example of Assembling Model NS
A-787
Example of Using the Spring Pad
Shaft
Ball screw input motor
Stroke
Pulley
Spline input motor
Ball screw nut
Support bearing
Pulley
Spline nut
Chuck
Stroke
Fig.5 Example of Using Model BNS
A-788
Precautions on Use
[Lubrication]
When lubricating the Ball Screw/Spline, attach the greasing plate to the housing in advance.
Greasing plate Grease nipple
Housing
Fig.6 Lubrication Methods
Ball Screw
A-789
Rolled Ball Screw
Rolled Ball Screw
Models JPF, BTK, MTF, BLK/WTF, CNF and BNT

0
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table (Preload Type) XXX B-736

Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table (No Preload Type)XXX B-738
Model number coding XXX B-746
A-790
Rolled Ball Screw

THK Rolled Ball Screws are low priced feed screws that use a screw shaft rolled with high accuracy
and specially surface-ground, instead of a thread-ground shaft used in the Precision Ball Screws.
The ball raceways of the ball screw nut are all thread-ground, thus to achieve a smaller axial clear-
ance and smoother motion than the conventional rolled ball screw.
In addition, a wide array of types are offered as standard in order to allow optimal products to be
selected according to the application.
[Achieves Lead Angle Accuracy of Class C7]
Screw shafts with travel distance error of classes C7 and C8 are also manufactured as the standard
in addition to class C10 to meet a broad range of applications.
Travel distance C7: ± 0.05/300 (mm)
C8: ± 0.10/300 (mm)
C10: ± 0.21/300 (mm)
(For maximum length of screw shaft by accuracy grade, see A-691.)
[Achieves Roughness of the Ball Raceways of the Screw Shaft at 0.20 a or Less]
The surface of the screw shaft's ball raceways is specially ground after the shaft is rolled to ensure
surface roughness of 0.20 a or less, which is equal to that of the ground thread of the Precision Ball
Screw.
[The Ball Raceways of the Ball Screw Nut are All Finished by Grinding]
THK finishes the ball raceways of Rolled Ball Screw nuts by grinding, just as the Precision Ball
Screws, to secure the durability and the smooth motion.
[Low Price]
The screw shaft is induction-hardened or carburized after being rolled, and its surface is then spe-
Ball Screw
cially ground. This allows the rolled Ball Screw to be priced lower than the Precision Ball Screw with
a ground thread.
[High Dust-prevention Effect]
The ball screw nut is incorporated with a compact labyrinth seal or a brush seal. This achieves a low
friction, a high dust-prevention effect and a longer service life of the Ball Screw.
A-791
Types and Features
[Preload Type]
Model JPF Specification Table⇒B-736
This model achieves a zero-backlash through a
constant preloading method by shifting the
phase with the central part of a simple nut as the
spring structure.
The constant preload method allows the ball
screw to absorb a pitch error and achieve a
smooth motion.
Axial clearance: 0 or less
[No Preload Type]

Model BTK Specification Table⇒B-738
A compact type with a round nut incorporated
with a return pipe. The flange circumference is
cut flat at the top and bottom, allowing the shaft
center to be positioned lower.
Model MTF Specification Table⇒B-738

A miniature type with a screw shaft diameter of
φ 6 to φ 12 mm and a lead of 1 to 2 mm.
A-792
Rolled Ball Screw
Models BLK/WTF Specification Table⇒B-738

Using an end-cap method, these models
achieve stable motion in a high-speed rotation.
Model CNF Specification Table⇒B-738

With a combination of 4 rows of large-lead
loaded grooves and a long nut, a long service
life is achieved.
Ball Screw
Square Ball Screw Nut Model BNT Specification Table⇒B-744
Since the mounting screw holes are machined
on the square ball screw nut, this model can
compactly be mounted on the machine without a
housing.
A-793
Service Life
Axial Clearance
Accuracy Standards
A-794
Rolled Ball Screw
Ball Screw
A-795
Rolled Rotary Ball Screw
Model BLR
Model BLR
0
End cap
Screw shaft
Spacer Ball
Seal
Collar
End cap
Outer ring
Ball screw nut
Retainer
Outer ring
Ball
Fig.1 Structure of Large Lead Rotary Nut Ball Screw Model BLR

Type XXX A-797
A-796

The Rotary Ball Screw is a rotary-nut ball screw unit that has an integrated structure consisting of a
ball screw nut and a support bearing. The support bearing is an angular bearing that has a contact
angle of 60° , contains an increased number of balls and achieves a large axial rigidity.
Model BLR is divided into two types: the Precision Ball Screw and the Rolled Screw Ball.
[Smooth Motion]
It achieves smoother motion than the rack-and-pinion based straight motion. Also, since the screw
shaft does not rotate because of the ball screw nut drive, this model does not show skipping, pro-
duces low noise and generates little heat.
[Low Noise even in High-speed Rotation]
Model BLR produces very low noise when the balls are picked up along the end cap. In addition, the
balls circulate by passing through the ball screw nut, allowing this model to be used at high speed.
[High Rigidity]
The support bearing of this model is larger than that of the screw shaft rotational type. Thus, its axial
rigidity is significantly increased.
[Compact]
achieved.
[Easy Installation]
By simply mounting this model to the housing using bolts, a ball screw nut rotating mechanism can
be obtained. (For the housing's inner-diameter tolerance, H7 is recommended.)
Type
Ball Screw
[No Preload Type]
Model BLR Specification Table⇒B-748
A-797
Service Life
Axial Clearance
Accuracy Standards
The accuracy of model BLR is compliant with the JIS standard (JIS B 1192-1997) except for the
C A
A B
D B
Unit: mm
Lead angle accuracy C7, C8, C10
Accuracy grades C10
Model No. C D
BLR 1616 0.035 0.065
BLR 2020 0.035 0.065
BLR 2525 0.035 0.065
BLR 3232 0.035 0.065
BLR 3636 0.036 0.066
BLR 4040 0.046 0.086
BLR 5050 0.046 0.086
A-798
Example of Assembly
[Example of Mounting Ball Screw Nut Model BLR]
Pulley Pulley
Standard installation method Inverted flange

Note) If the flange is to be inverted, indicate“K”in the model number. (applicable only to model BLR)
Example: BLR 2020-3.6 K UU
Symbol for invert
(No symbol for standard flange orientation)
[Example of Mounting Model BLR on the Table]
(1) Screw shaft free, ball screw nut fixed
(Suitable for a long table)
LM Guide Table
Ball Screw
Motor Ball Screw (Model BLR)
Fig.2 Example of Installation on the Table (Ball Screw Nut Fixed)
(2) Ball screw nut free, screw shaft fixed

(Suitable for a short table and a long stroke)
LM Guide Table
Motor
Ball Screw (Model BLR)
Fig.3 Example of Installation on the Table (Screw Shaft Fixed)
A-799
A-800
Ball Screw
A-801
Support Unit
Support Unit
Models EK, BK, FK, EF, BF and FF
Models EK, BK, FK, EF, BF and FF

0
Seal
Housing
Bearing
Holding lid
Hexagonal socket-head
setscrew Collar
Housing
Set piece Bearing
Lock nut Snap ring
Fixed side Supported side
Fig.1 Structure of the Support Unit

The Support Unit comes in six types: models EK, FK, EF, and FF, which are standardized for the
standard Ball Screw assembly provided with the finished shaft ends, and models BK and BF, which
are standardized for ball screws in general.
The Support Unit on the fixed side contains a JIS Class 5-compliant angular bearing provided with an
adjusted preload. The miniature type Support Unit models EK/FK 4, 5, 6 and 8, in particular, incorpo-
rate a miniature bearing with a contact angle of 45° developed exclusively for miniature Ball Screws.
This provides stable rotational performance with a high rigidity and an accuracy.
The Support Unit on the supported side uses a deep-groove ball bearing.
The internal bearings of the Support Unit models EK, FK and BK contain an appropriate amount of
lithium soap-group grease that is sealed with a special seal. Thus, these models are capable of oper-
ating over a long period.
A-802
Support Unit
[Uses the Optimal Bearing]

To ensure the rigidity balance with the Ball Screw, the Support Unit uses an angular bearing (contact
angle: 30° ; DF configuration) with a high rigidity and a low torque. Miniature Support Unit models EK/
FK 4, 5, 6 and 8 are incorporated with a miniature angular bearing with a contact angle of 45° devel-
oped exclusively for miniature Ball Screws. This bearing has a greater contact angle of 45° and an
increased number of balls with a smaller diameter. The high rigidity and accuracy of the miniature
angular bearing provides the stable rotational performance.
[Support Unit Shapes]
The square and round shapes are available for the Support Unit to allow the selection according to
the intended use.
[Compact and Easy Installation]
The Support Unit is compactly designed to accommodate the space in the installation site. As the
bearing is provided with an appropriately adjusted preload, the Support Unit can be assembled with a
Ball Screw unit with no further machining. Accordingly, the required man-hours in the assembly can
be reduced and the assembly accuracy can be increased.
A-803
Type
[For the Fixed Side]

Square Type Model EK Square Type Model BK
Specification Table⇒B-754 Specification Table⇒B-756
(Inner diameter: φ 4 to φ 20) (Inner diameter: φ 10 to φ 40)
Round Type Model FK

(Inner diameter: φ 4 to φ 30)
[For the Supported Side]

Square Type Model EF Square Type Model BF
Specification Table⇒B-762 Specification Table⇒B-764
(Inner diameter: φ 6 to φ 20) (Inner diameter: φ 8 to φ 40)
Round Type Model FF

(Inner diameter: φ 6 to φ 30)
A-804
Support Unit
Types of Support Units and Applicable Screw Shaft Outer Diameters
Applicable model
Inner diameter of Applicable model Inner diameter of
No. of the sup- Applicable screw shaft
the fixed side Sup- No. of the fixed the supported side
ported side Sup- outer diameter (mm)
port Unit (mm) side Support Unit Support Unit (mm)
port Unit
EK 4
4 — — φ4
FK 4
EK 5
5 — — φ6
FK 5
EK 6 EF 6
6 6 φ8
FK 6 FF 6
EK 8 EF 8
8 6 φ 10
FK 8 FF 6
EK 10 EF 10
10 FK 10 8 FF 10 φ 12, φ 14
BK 10 BF 10
EK 12 EF 12
12 FK 12 10 FF 12 φ 14, φ 15, φ 16
BK 12 BF 12

EK 15 EF 15
15 FK 15 15 FF 15 φ 20
BK 15 BF 15
17 BK 17 17 BF 17 φ 20, φ 25
EK 20 EF 20
20 FK 20 20 FF 20 φ 25, φ 28, φ 32
BK 20 BF 20
FK 25 FF 25
25 25 φ 36
BK 25 BF 25
FK 30 FF 30
30 30 φ 40, φ 45
BK 30 BF 30
35 BK 35 35 BF 35 φ 45
40 BK 40 40 BF 40 φ 50
Note) The Supports Units in this table apply only to those Ball Screw models with recommended shaft ends shapes H, J and K,
indicated on A-810.
A-805
Model Numbers of Bearings and Characteristic Values
Angular ball bearing on the fixed side Deep-groove ball bearing on the supported side
Axial direction Radial direction
Support Basic Note) Support Basic
Bearing Rigidity Bearing Basic static
Unit dynamic Permissi- Unit dynamic
model No. model No. load rating
model No. load rating ble load model No. load rating
(N/μ m) C0(kN)
Ca (kN) (kN) C(kN)
EK 4
AC4-12P5 0.93 1.1 27 — — — —
FK 4
EK 5
AC5-14P5 1 1.24 29 — — — —
FK 5
EK 6 EF 6
AC6-16P5 1.38 1.76 35 606ZZ 2.19 0.87
FK 6 FF 6
EK 8 79M8DF
2.93 2.15 49 EF 8 606ZZ 2.19 0.87
FK 8 GMP5
EK 10 EF 10
7000HTDF
FK 10 6.08 3.1 65 FF 10 608ZZ 3.35 1.4
GMP5
BK 10 BF 10
EK 12 EF 12
7001HTDF
FK 12 6.66 3.25 88 FF 12 6000ZZ 4.55 1.96
GMP5
BK 12 BF 12
EK 15 EF 15
7002HTDF
FK 15 7.6 4 100 FF 15 6002ZZ 5.6 2.84
GMP5
BK 15 BF 15
7203HTDF
BK 17 13.7 5.85 125 BF 17 6203ZZ 9.6 4.6
GMP5
EK 20 7204HTDF EF 20
17.9 9.5 170 6204ZZ 12.8 6.65
FK 20 GMP5 FF 20
7004HTDF
BK 20 12.7 7.55 140 BF 20 6004ZZ 9.4 5.05
GMP5
FK 25 7205HTDF FF 25
20.2 11.5 190 6205ZZ 14 7.85
BK 25 GMP5 BF 25
FK 30 7206HTDF FF 30
28 16.3 195 6206ZZ 19.5 11.3
BK 30 GMP5 BF 30
7207HTDF
BK 35 37.2 21.9 255 BF35 6207ZZ 25.7 15.3
GMP5
7208HTDF
BK 40 44.1 27.1 270 BF 40 6208ZZ 29.1 17.8
GMP5
Note) "Permissible load" indicates the static permissible load.
A-806
Support Unit
Example of Installation
[Square Type Support Unit]
Fig.2 Example of Installing a Square Type Support Unit
[Round Type Support Unit]
Fig.3 Example of Installing a Round Type Support Unit
A-807
Mounting Procedure
[Installing the Support Unit]

(1) Install the fixed side Support Unit with the screw shaft.
(2) After inserting the fixed side Support Unit, secure the lock nut using the fastening set piece and
the hexagonal socket-head setscrews.
(3) Attach the supported side bearing to the screw shaft and secure the bearing using the snap ring,
and then install the assembly to the housing on the supported side.
Note1) Do no disassemble the Support Unit.
Note2) When inserting the screw shaft to the Support Unit, take care not to let the oil seal lip turn outward.
Note3) When securing the set piece with a hexagonal socket-head setscrew, apply an adhesive to the hexagonal socket-head
setscrew before tightening it in order to prevent the screw from loosening. If planning to use the product in a harsh envi-
ronment, it is also necessary to take a measure to prevent other components/parts from loosening. Contact THK for
details.
Snap ring Hexagonal socket-head setscrew

Bearing Set piece
Lock nut
Spacer
Supported side Fixed side
[Installation onto the Table and the Base]

(1) If using a bracket when mounting the ball screw nut to the table, insert the nut into the bracket
and temporarily fasten it.
(2) Temporarily fasten the fixed side Support Unit to the base.
In doing so, press the table toward the fixed side Support Unit to align the axial center, and
adjust the table so that it can travel freely.
z If using the fixed side Support Unit as the reference point, secure a clearance between the ball
screw nut and the table or inside the bracket when making adjustment.
z If using the table as the reference point, make the adjustment either by using the shim (for a
square type Support Unit), or securing the clearance between the outer surface of the nut and
the inner surface of the mounting section (for a round type Support Unit).
(3) Press the table toward the fixed-side Support Unit to align the axial center. Make the adjustment
by reciprocating the table several times so that the nut travels smoothly throughout the whole
stroke, and temporarily secure the Support Unit to the base.
Table Bracket
Supported side support unit Fixed side support unit
Base
A-808
Support Unit
[Checking the Accuracy and Fully Fastening the Support Unit]

While checking the runout of the ball screw shaft end and the axial clearance using a dial gauge, fully
fasten the ball screw nut, the nut bracket, the fixed side Support Unit and the supported-side Support
Unit, in this order.
Adjust the nut by moving the table so that the nut

Measure the axial clearance travels smoothly throughout the whole stroke. Measure the runout
[Connection with the Motor]

(1) Mount the motor bracket to the base.
(2) Connect the motor and the ball screw using a coupling.
Note) Make sure the mounting accuracy is maintained.
(3) Thoroughly perform the break-in for the system.
Motor
Coupling
A-809
Types of Recommended Shapes of the Shaft Ends
To ensure speedy estimates and manufacturing of Ball Screws, THK has standardized the shaft end
shapes of the screw shafts. The recommended shapes of shaft ends consist of shapes H, K and J,
which allow standard Support Units to be used.
Symbol for
Mounting Supported Support
shaft end Shape
method Unit
shape
FK
H1
EK
J1 BK
FK
H2
EK
Fixed H J
J2 BK
FK
H3
EK
J3 BK
FF
Sup-
K EF
ported
BF
A-810
Support Unit
A-811
Nut bracket
Nut Bracket
Model MC
Model MC
0
Nut bracket
Fig.1 Structure of the Nut Bracket

The Nut Bracket is standardized for the standard Ball Screw assembly provided with finished shaft
ends. It is designed to be secured directly on the table with bolts. Since the height is low, it can be
mounted on the table only using bolts.
Type
Nut Bracket Model MC Specification Table⇒B-774
A-812
Lock Nut
Lock nut
Lock Nut
Model RN
Model RN
0
Hexagonal socket-head setscrew
Set piece
Lock nut

Fig.1 Structure of the Lock Nut

The Lock Nut for the Ball Screws is capable of fastening the screw shaft and the bearing with a high
accuracy.
The provided hexagonal socket-head setscrew and the set piece prevent the Lock Nut from loosen-
ing and ensure firm fastening. The Lock Nut comes in various types ranging from model M4 to model
M40.
Type
Lock Nut Model RN Specification Table⇒B-776
A-813
A-814
Ball Screw
Options
A-815
Lubrication
To maximize the performance of the Ball Screw, it is necessary to select a lubricant and a lubrication
0
method according to the conditions.

For types of lubricants, characteristics of lubricants and lubrication methods, see the section on
“Accessories for Lubrication” on A-954.
Also, QZ Lubricator is available as an optional accessory that significantly increases the mainte-
nance interval.
Corrosion Prevention (Surface Treatment, etc.)

Depending on the service environment, the Ball Screw requires anticorrosive treatment or a different
material. For details of an anticorrosive treatment and a material change, contact THK. (see A-18)
The dust and foreign materials that enter the Ball Screw may cause accelerated wear and breakage,
as with roller bearings. Therefore, on parts where contamination by dust or foreign materials (e.g.,
cutting chips) is predicted, screw shafts must always be completely covered by contamination pro-
tection devices (e.g., bellows, screw cover, wiper ring).
If the Ball Screw is used in an atmosphere free from the foreign materials but with suspended dust, a
labyrinth seal (for precision Ball Screws) with symbol RR and a brush seal (for rolled Ball Screws)
with symbol ZZ can be used as contamination protection devices.
The labyrinth seal is designed to maintain a slight clearance between the seal and the screw shaft
raceway so that torque does not develop and no heat is generated, though its effect in contamination
protection is limited.
With Ball Screws except the large lead and super lead types, there is no difference in nut dimensions
between those with and without a seal.
With the wiper ring, special resin with high wear resistance and low dust generation removes foreign
materials while closely contacting the circumference of the ball screw shaft and the screw thread. It is
capable of preventing foreign materials from entering the Ball Screw even in a severe environment.
Screw cover Bellows
Fig.1 Contamination Protection Cover
A-816
Options
QZ Lubricator
QZ Lubricator
QZ Lubricator
For the supported models and the ball screw nut dimension with QZ attached, see B-778 to B-783.
QZ Lubricator feeds a right amount of lubricant to the ball raceway of the ball screw shaft. This allows
0
an oil film to be constantly formed between the balls and the raceway, improves lubrications and sig-
nificantly extends the lubrication maintenance interval.
The structure of QZ Lubricator consists of three major components: (1) a heavily oil-impregnated
fiber net (stores the lubricant), (2) a high-density fiber net (applies the lubricant to the raceway) and
(3) an oil-control plate (adjusts the oil flow). The lubricant contained in the QZ Lubricator is fed by the
capillary phenomenon, which is used also in felt pens and many other products.
QZ Lubricator Ball screw shaft

①Heavily oil-impregnated fiber net
QZ fixing screw Sealed case Ball screw nut
Ball screw shaft
QZ Lubricator
Applied directly to the raceway
Ball Screw (Options)

Ball
Ball screw nut
Model number indication ②High-density fiber net
Flow of lubricant ③Oil control plate
Air vent (Note)
[Features]
z Since it supplements an oil loss, the lubrication maintenance interval can be significantly extended.
z Since the right amount of lubricant is applied to the ball raceway, an environmentally friendly lubri-
cation system that does not contaminate the surroundings is achieved.
Note) QZ Lubricator has a vent hole. Do not block the hole with grease or the like.
A-817
z Significantly extended maintenance interval
Since QZ Lubricator continuously feeds a lubricant over a long period, the maintenance interval can
be extended significantly.
QZ Lubricator only No anomaly observed after running 10000km
0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000

Distance traveled km (linear travel distance)
[Test conditions]
Item Description
Ball Screw BIF2510
Maximum rotational speed 2500min-1
Maximum speed 25m/min
Stroke 500mm
Load Internal preload only
z Environmentally friendly lubrication system

Since the QZ Lubricator feeds the right amount of lubricant directly to the raceway, the lubricant can
effectively be used without waste.
Model No.: BNFN3612-5G0+1500LC5

Traveling speed: 20km/d
32 Travel distance: 2500km
QZ Lubricator
Forced lubrication 15000
0 5000 10000 15000

Amount of oil cm3
QZ Lubricator + THK AFA Grease Forced lubrication

32cm 3
Compared 0.25cm3/3min×24h×125d
(QZ Lubricator attached to both ends of
＝15000cm3
the ball screw nut)
1
Reduced to approx.
470
A-818
Options
Wiper Ring W
Wiper Ring W
Wiper Ring W
For the supported models and the ball screw nut dimension with Wiper ring W attached, see B-778
to B-783.
With the wiper ring W, special resin with a high wear resistance and a low dust generation which
0
removes and prevents foreign materials from entering the ball screw nut while elastically contacting
the circumference of the ball screw shaft and the screw thread.
Seal snap ring

Spring Multi-slit
Wiper ring
Seal snap ring Foreign material
A
Wiper ring
Multi-slit
Ball screw shaft
Ball screw shaft

Ball screw nut
Rotational direction
Grease nipple Detail view of section A

[Features]
z A total of eight slits on the circumference remove foreign materials in succession, and prevent
entrance of foreign material.
z Contacts the ball screw shaft to reduce the flowing out of grease.
z Contacts the ball screw shaft at a constant pressure level using a spring, thus to minimize the heat
generation.
z Since the material is highly resistant to the wear and the chemicals, its performance will not easily
be deteriorated even if it is used over a long period.
A-819
z Test in an environment exposed to contaminated environment
[Test conditions]
Item Description
Model No. BIF3210– 5G0+1500LC5
Maximum rotational speed 1000min-1
Maximum speed 10m/min
Maximum circumferential
speed 1.8m/s
Time constant 60ms
Dowel 1s
Stroke 900mm
Load
1.31kN
(through internal load)
THK AFG Grease 8cm3
Grease
(Initial lubrication to the ball screw nut only)
Foundry dust FCD400 average particle diameter: 250µm
Volume of foreign
material per shaft 5g/h
[Test result]
z Type with wiper ring
Slight flaking occurred in the ball screw shaft
Type with at travel distant of 1,000 km.
wiper ring z Type with labyrinth seal
Flaking occurred throughout the circumfer-
Type with
ence of the screw shaft raceway at travel dis-
labyrinth seal
tance of 200 km.
Flaking occurred on the balls after traveling
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000
Distance traveled (km) 1,500 km.
No problem Flaking occurrs on the ball screw shaft raceway Flaking occurrs on the ball
Change in the ball after traveling 2000 km

12
(1) Type with wiper ring (2) Type with labyrinth seal
10 Type with labyrinth seal
Wear of ball (μm)
Type with wiper ring

8
4
Unused ball Ball after traveling Unused ball Ball after traveling
2
zDiscolored, but no breakage zFlaking occurs
0
0 500 1000 1500 2000
z Type with wiper ring
Wear of balls at a travel distance of 2,000 km:
1.4 μ m.
z Type with labyrinth seal
Starts to be worn rapidly after 500 km, and the
ball wear amount at the travel distance of
2,000 km: 11 μ m
A-820
Options
Wiper Ring W
z Heat Generation Test

[Test conditions] [Test result]
Item Description
Temperature at shaft center area (℃)

Model No. BLK3232– 3.6G0+1426LC5 60
Maximum
1000min-1 50
rotational speed
Maximum speed 32m/min 40
Maximum
circumferential 1.7m/s 30
speed
20
Time constant 100ms With wiper ring
Stroke 1000mm 10 Without seal
Load 0
(through inter- 0.98kN 0 15 30 45 60 75 90
nal load) Travel time (min)
THK AFG Grease 5cm3 Unit: ℃
Grease
(contained in the ball screw nut)
Item With wiper ring Without seal
Heat generation
37.1 34.5
temperature
Temperature
12.2 8.9
rise
A-821
Bellows are available as a contamination protection accessory. Use this specification sheet.
L MAX
MIN 4-φ
φ φ ID φ OD φ φ
MAX
MIN
(Band type) (Flange type)
Supported Ball Screw models:
Dimensions of the Bellows

Stroke: mm MAX: mm MIN: mm
Permissible outer diameter: φ OD Desired inner diameter: φ ID
How It Is Used
Installation direction:(horizontal, vertical, slant) Speed: ( )mm/sec. mm/min.
Motion:(reciprocation, vibration)
Conditions
Resistance to oil and water: (necessary, unnecessary) Oil name
Chemical resistance: Name × ％
Location: (indoor, outdoor)
Remarks:
Number of Units To Be Manufactured:
A-822
Options
A-823
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance Ball Screw
Method for Mounting the Ball Screw Shaft

Fig.1 to Fig.4 show the representative mounting methods for the screw shaft.
0
The permissible axial load and the permissible rotational speed vary with mounting methods for the
screw shaft. Therefore, it is necessary to select an appropriate mounting method according to the
conditions.
Distance between two mounting surfaces (permissible rotational speed)
Fixed Fixed Free
Distance between two mounting surfaces (permissible axial load)
Fig.1 Screw Shaft Mounting Method: Fixed - Free
Fixed Fixed Supported
Fig.2 Screw Shaft Mounting Method: Fixed - Supported
A-824
Method for Mounting the Ball Screw Shaft
Fixed Fixed Fixed
Ball Screw
Fig.3 Screw Shaft Mounting Method: Fixed - Fixed
Fixed Fixed
Fixed
Fig.4 Screw Shaft Mounting Method for Rotary Nut Ball Screw: Fixed - Fixed
A-825
Maintenance Method
Amount of Lubricant
If the amount of the lubricant to the Ball Screw is insufficient, it may cause a lubrication breakdown,
and if it is excessive, it may cause heat to be generated and the resistance to be increased. It is nec-
essary to select an amount that meets the conditions.
[Grease]
The feed amount of grease is generally approximately one third of the spatial volume inside the nut.
[Oil]
Table 1 shows a guideline for the feed amount of oil.
Note, that the amount varies according to the stroke, the oil type and the conditions (e.g., suppressed
heat generation).
Table1 Guideline for the Feed Amount of Oil
(Interval: 3 minutes)
Shaft diameter (mm) Amount of lubricant (cc)

4 to 8 0.03
10 to 14 0.05
15 to 18 0.07
20 to 25 0.1
28 to 32 0.15
36 to 40 0.25
45 to 50 0.3
55 to 63 0.4
70 to 100 0.5
A-826
Precautions on Use Ball Screw
[Handling]
0
(1) Disassembling the components may cause dust to enter the system or degrade the mounting
accuracy of parts. Do not disassemble the product.
(2) Tilting the screw shaft and the ball screw nut may cause them to fall by their own weight.
(3) Dropping or hitting the Ball Screw may damage the ball circulation section, which may cause the
functional loss. Giving an impact to the product could also cause a damage to its function even if
the product looks intact.
[Lubrication]
(2) Do not mix the lubricants of different physical properties.
(3) In locations exposed to constant vibrations or in special environments such as clean rooms, a
vacuum and a low/high temperature, normal lubricants may not be used. Contact THK for
details.
(5) The lubrication interval varies according to the conditions. Contact THK for details.
(1) Do not remove the ball screw nut from the ball screw shaft. Doing so may cause the balls or the
nut to fall off.
(2) Entrance of foreign materials to the ball screw nut may cause damages to the ball circulating
path or functional loss. Prevent foreign materials, such as dust or cutting chips, from entering the
system.
(3) If the foreign materials such as dust or cutting chips adheres to the product, replenish the lubri-
Ball Screw
cant after cleaning the product with pure white kerosene. For available types of detergent, con-
tact THK.
(4) When planning to use the product in an environment where the coolant penetrates the spline
nut, it may cause problems to product functions depending on the type of the coolant. Contact
THK for details.
(6) If using the product with vertical mount, the ball screw nut may fall by its weight. Attach a mech-
anism to prevent it from falling.
(7) Exceeding the permissible rotational speed may lead the components to be damaged or cause
an accident. Be sure to use the product within the specification range designated by THK.
(8) Forcefully driving in the ball screw shaft or the ball screw nut may cause an indentation on the
raceway. Use care when mounting the components.
(9) If an offset or skewing occurs with the ball screw shaft support and the ball screw nut, it may
substantially shorten the service life. Pay attention to components to be mounted and to the
mounting accuracy.
such as clean rooms, a vacuum and a low/high temperature, contact THK in advance.
(11) Letting the ball screw nut overshoot will cause balls to fall off or the ball-circulating components
to be damaged.
A-827
[Storage]
When storing the Ball Screw, enclose it in a package designated by THK and store it in a horizontal
orientation while avoiding a high temperature, a low temperature and a high humidity.
A-828
Lead Screw Nut
General Catalog

Features of the Lead Screw Nut ....... A-830 Model DCM ....................................... B-786
• Structure and features....................... A-830 Model DC .......................................... B-788

Selecting a Lead Screw Nut.............. A-833
Efficiency and Thrust......................... A-836
Point of Design................................ A-838

Fit ...................................................... A-838
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance A-839

Installation ......................................... A-839
Lubrication......................................... A-840
A-829
Features Lead Screw Nut
Features of the Lead Screw Nut
Model DCM
Model DC

The lead Screw Nut models DCM and DC are manufactured to meet the standards for the 30° trape-
zoidal threads. They use a special alloy (see A-831) for the nuts and have a precision male thread,
formed through die casting, as the core. As a result, these bearings achieve less unevenness in
accuracy and higher accuracy and wear resistance than the machined lead screw nuts.
For the screw shafts to be used with this product, the rolled shafts are available as the standard.
In addition, the cut screw shafts and the ground screw shafts are also available according to the
application. Contact THK for details.
A-830
Features
Features of the Lead Screw Nut

The dedicated rolled shafts with the standardized lengths are available for the Lead Screw Nut.
The shaft teeth are formed by cold gear rolling, and the surface of the tooth surface is hardened to
over 250 HV and are mirror-finished. As a result, the shafts are highly wear resistant and achieve sig-
nificantly smooth motion when used in combination with lead screw nuts.
increased.

The high strength zinc alloy used in the lead screw nuts is a material that is highly resistant to seizure
and the wear and has a high load carrying capacity. Its composition, the mechanical properties, the
physical properties and the wear resistance are given below.
[Composition]
Unit: %
Lead Screw Nut

Item Description
Al 3 to 4
Cu 3 to 4
Mg 0.03 to 0.06
Be 0.02 to 0.06
Ti 0.04 to 0.12
A-831
Item Description
Tensile yield
216 to 245 N/mm2
strength (0.2%)
Compressive
539 to 686 N/mm2
strength
Compressive yield
294 to 343 N/mm2
strength (0.2%)
Elongation 1 to 5 %
Item Description
Specific heat 460 J/ (kg•K)
Thermal expansion
24×10-6
coefficient
[Wear Resistance]
80
Item Description
Wear loss (mg)

60 Test piece rotational
Class-3 bronze 185 min-1
Class-3 brass speed
40
Load 392 N
20 Lubricant Dynamo oil

0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Distance (km)
A-832
Point of Selection Lead Screw Nut
Selecting a Lead Screw Nut

0
values are used as a measuring stick for the strength of the lead screw nut.
[pV Value]
10
7
5

cated in Fig.1 as a guide for selecting a lead 2
screw nut. The pV value varies also according
to the lubrication conditions. 1
0.7
0.5
0.3
0.2
1 2 3 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100
Lead Screw Nut

Fig.1 pV Value
z fS: Safety Factor

To calculate a load applied to the lead screw Table1 Safety Factor (fS)
nut, it is necessary to accurately obtain the Type of load Lower limit of fS
effect of the inertia that changes with the weight
For a static load less frequently
and dynamic speed of an object. In general, with used
1 to 2
the reciprocating or the rotating machines, it is
not easy to accurately obtain all the factors such For an ordinary single-directional
2 to 3
load
as the effect of the start and stop, which are
always repeated. Therefore, if the actual load For a load accompanied by
4 or greater
vibrations/impact
cannot be obtained, it is necessary to select a
bearing while taking into account the empirically
A-833
If the temperature of the lead screw nut exceeds 1.0
the normal temperature range, the seizure resis-
0.8
0.6
–20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Accordingly, when selecting a lead screw nut,
Service temperature (℃)
the following equations need to be met in terms
of its strength. Fig.2 Temperature Factor
Dynamic permissible torque(T)
fT•T
fS
PT
Static permissible thrust(F)
fT•F
fS
PF
fS : Safety factor (see A-833Table1)
PF : Axial load (N)
z Hardness of the Surface and the Wear Resistance
1.1
the wear resistance of the lead screw nut. If the
Abrasion loss (mm)
hardness is equal to or less than 250 HV, the 1.0

abrasion loss increases as indicated in Fig.3.
0.9
The roughness of the surface should preferably
be 0.80a or less. 0.8
A special rolled shaft achieves the surface hard- 0.7
ness of 250 HV or greater, through hardening as
a result of rolling, and surface roughness of 0.6
0.20a or less. Thererfore, the dedicated rolled 0.5
shaft is highly wear resistant. 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
A-834
Point of Selection
Selecting a Lead Screw Nut

The value of "p" is obtained as followed.
PF
p= 9.8
F
p : Contact surface pressure on the tooth from an axial load (PF N) (N/mm2)
PF : Axial load (N)
[Calculating the Sliding Speed V on the Teeth]
The value of "V" is obtained as followed.
π• Do •n
V= 3
cosα 10
V : Sliding speed (m/min)
Do : Effective diameter (mm)
(see specification table)
n : Rotation speed per minute (min-1)
α : Lead angle (degree)
(see specification table)
R : Lead (mm)
Assuming that Lead Screw Nut model DCM is used, select a lead screw nut that travels at feed speed S = 3 m/
min while receiving an axial load PF = 1,080 N, which is applied in one direction. First, tentatively select model
DCM32 (dynamic permissible thrust F = 21,100 N). Obtain the contact surface pressure (p).
PF 1080
Lead Screw Nut

p= × 9.8 = ×9.8 ≒ 0.50 N/mm2
F 21100
Obtain the sliding speed (V).
The rotation speed per minute (n) of the screw shaft needed to move it at feed speed S = 3 m/min is calculated
as follows.
S 3
n= = = 500 min–1
l ×10 –3
–3
6×10
π•Do•500 π×29×500
V= = 3 ≒ 45.6 m/min
cos3° 46'×10
3
cosα×10
From the diagram of pV values (see Fig.1 on A-833), it is judged that there will be no abnormal wear if the sliding
speed (V) is 47 m/min or below against the "p" value of 0.50 N/mm2. Second, obtain the safety factor (fS) against
the dynamic permissible thrust (F). Given the conditions: temperature factor fT = 1 and applied load PF= 1,080 N,
the safety factor is calculated as follows.
f T •F 1 ×21100
fS ≦ = = 19.5
PF 1080
Since the required strength will be met if "fS" is at least 2 because of the type of load, it is appropriate to select
model DCM32.
A-835
Efficiency and Thrust
The efficiency (η ) at which the screw transfers a torque into thrust is obtained from the following
equation.
1 – μtanα
η=
1 + μ/tanα
η : Efficiency
α : Lead angle
μ : Frictional resistance
Fig.4 shows the result of the above equation.
The thrust generated when a torque is applied is obtained from the following equation.
2•π•η•T
Fa =
R 10–3
T : Torque (input) (N-m)
R : Lead (mm)
μ= 0.1
0.4
Efficiency η
μ= 0.15
0.3
0.257 μ= 0.2
0.2
0.1
2° 3° 4° 4°
0.3' 5°
Lead angle α
Fig.4 Efficiency
Assuming that Lead Screw Nut model DCM20 is used and the input torque T = 19.6 N-m, obtain the thrust to be
generated.
Calculate the efficiency (η) when μ = 0.2.
The lead angle (α) of model DCM20: 4°03'
From the diagram in Fig.4, the efficiency (η ) when the friction coefficient μ = 0.2 is obtained as η = 0.257.
Obtain the thrust generated.
2 •π • η • T 2×π×0.25×19.6
Fa = = ≒ 7700 N
R × 10–3 4×10–3
A-836
Point of Selection
Accuracy Standards
Accuracy Standards
Table2 Accuracy of the Screw Shaft of Models DCM and DC Unit: mm
Shaft symbol Rolled shaft Cut shaft Ground shaft

Accuracy TNote KNote GNote
Single pitch error (max) ± 0.020 ±0.015 ± 0.005
Accumulated pitch error
± 0.15/300 ±0.05/300 ± 0.015/300
(max)
Note) Symbols T, K and G indicate machining methods for the screw shaft. The cut shafts and ground shafts are build-to-order.
Lead Screw Nut
A-837
Point of Design Lead Screw Nut
Fit
For the fitting between the lead screw nut circumference and the housing, we recommend a loose fit-
ting or a tight fitting.
A-838
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance Lead Screw Nut
Installation
0
Table1 Chamfer of the Housing's Mouth
To increase the strength of the root of the flange Unit: mm
of the lead screw nut, the corner is machined to Model No. Chamfer of the mouth
have an R shape. Therefore, it is necessary to C
DCM (Min.)
chamfer the inner edge of the housing's mouth.
12
14
C chamfer
16 2
18
20
22
25
2.5
28
32
36
40
Fig.1 3
45
Lead Screw Nut

50
[Recommended Mounting Orientation]

When vertically conveying a heavy object using
the screw shaft, it is safe to mount the screw as
shown in Fig.2 where supports are provided on Lead screw nut
the mounting holes to prevent the moving object
from falling even if the lead screw nut is broken
due to an overload or an impact.
Travel
Screw shaft
Shaft rotation
(Shaft side fixed)
Fig.2 Recommended Mounting Orientation
A-839
Fig.3 shows examples of mounting the lead screw nuts. When mounting a lead screw nut, secure
sufficient tightening strength in the axial direction. For the housing inner-diameter tolerance, see the
section concerning fitting on A-838.
Fig.3 Examples of Installing the Lead Screw Nut
Lubrication
Select a lubrication method according to the conditions of the lead screw nut.
[Oil Lubrication]
For a lubrication of the lead screw nut, an oil lubrication is recommended. Specifically, an oil-bath
lubrication or drop the lubrication is particularly effective. An oil-bath lubrication is the most appropri-
ate method since it meets harsh conditions such as high speed, a heavy load or an external heat
transmission and it cools the lead screw nut. The drop lubrication is appropriate for low to medium
speed and a light to medium load. Select a lubricant according to the conditions as indicated in
Table2.
Condition Types of Lubricants

Low speed,
High-viscosity sliding surface oil or
high load,
turbine oil
high temperature
High speed,
Low-viscosity sliding surface oil or
light load,
turbine oil
low temperature
In the low-speed feed, which occurs less frequently, the user can lubricate the slide system by man-
ually applying grease to the shaft on a regular basis or using the greasing hole on the lead screw nut.
We recommend using lithium-soap group grease No. 2.
A-840
Change Nut
General Catalog

Features of the Change Nut.............. A-842 Models DCMA and DCMB ................ B-792
• Structure and features....................... A-842

Selecting a Change Nut .................... A-845
Efficiency, Thrust and Torque ........... A-849
Point of Design................................ A-850

Fit ...................................................... A-850

Installation ......................................... A-851
Lubrication......................................... A-852
A-841
Features Change Nut
Features of the Change Nut
Model DCMA
Lubrication-free Miniature Change Nut

Models DCMB8T and DCMB12T
Model DCMB

The Change Nut models DCMA and DCMB have a lead angle of 45°, which is difficult to achieve
through machining. Each model is capable of converting a straight motion to a rotary motion, or a
vise versa, at 70% efficiency. Because of the large leads, they are optimal for providing a fast feed
mechanism at a low-speed rotation. The multi-thread screw shafts to be combined with these change
nuts are formed through cold gear rolling. The surface of the teeth is hardened to over 250 HV and
mirror-finished. As a result, the shafts are highly wear resistant and achieve significantly smooth
motion when used in combination with these change nuts. Models DCMA40, DCMB40 or higher are
designed for use in combination with the cut screw shafts.
The Miniature Change Nuts are made of an oil-impregnated plastic, and have a wear resistance and
excel in lubrication especially in an oil-less operation. In addition, since the high level of their perfor-
mances can be maintained for a long period, they allow long-term maintenance-free operation.
A-842
Features
Features of the Change Nut

Dedicated rolled shafts with the standardized lengths are available for the Change Nut.
The shaft teeth are formed by cold gear rolling, and the tooth surface is hardened to over 250 HV and
mirror-finished. As a result, the shafts are highly wear resistant and achieve significantly smooth
motion when used in combination with the nuts.
increased.

The high strength zinc alloy used in the change nuts is a material that is highly resistant to seizure
and the wear and has a high load carrying capacity. Its composition, the mechanical properties, the
physical properties and the wear resistance are given below.
[Composition]
Unit: %
Item Description
Al 3 to 4
Cu 3 to 4
Change Nut
Mg 0.03 to 0.06
Be 0.02 to 0.06
Ti 0.04 to 0.12
A-843
Item Description
Tensile yield strength (0.2%) 216 to 245 N/mm2
Compressive strength 539 to 686 N/mm2
Compressive yield strength (0.2%) 294 to 343 N/mm2
Elongation 1 to 5 %
Item Description
Specific heat 460 J/(kg•K)
Thermal expansion coefficient 24×10-6
[Wear Resistance]
80
Item Description
Wear loss (mg)

60 Test piece rotational speed 185 min-1
Class-3 bronze
Class-3 brass Load 392 N
40
Lubricant Dynamo oil
20

0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Distance (km)
A-844
Point of Selection Change Nut
Selecting a Change Nut

0
values are used as a measuring stick for the strength of the chang nut.
[pV Value]
10
7

5
cated in Fig.1 as a guide for selecting a change 2
nut. The pV value varies also according to the
lubrication conditions. 1
0.7
0.5
0.3
0.2
1 2 3 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100
Fig.1 pV Value
Change Nut
z fS: Safety Factor Table1 Safety Factor (fS)
To calculate a load applied to the change nut, it
is necessary to accurately obtain the effect of Type of load Lower limit of fS
the inertia that changes with the weight and the For a static load less frequently
1 to 2
dynamic speed of an object. In general, with the used
reciprocating or the rotating machines, it is not For an ordinary single-directional
2 to 3
easy to accurately obtain all the factors such as load
the effect of the start and stop, which are always For a load accompanied by vibra-
4 or greater
repeated. Therefore, if the actual load cannot be tions/impact
obtained, it is necessary to select a bearing
while taking into account the empirically
A-845
If the temperature of the change nut exceeds 1.0
the normal temperature range, the seizure resis-
0.8
0.6
–20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Note) In the case of a miniature Change Nut, be sure to use
it at 60℃ or below. Service temperature (℃)
Accordingly, when selecting a change nut, the
following equations need to be met in terms of Fig.2 Temperature Factor
its strength.
Dynamic permissible torque(T)
fT•T
fS
PT
Static permissible thrust(F)
fT•F
fS
PF
PF : Axial load (N)
z Hardness of the Surface and Wear Resistance
1.1
the wear resistance of the change nut. If the
Abrasion loss (mm)
hardness is equal to or less than 250 HV, the 1.0

abrasion loss increases as indicated in Fig.3.
0.9
The roughness of the surface should preferably
be 0.80a or less. 0.8
A special rolled shaft achieves surface hardness 0.7
of 250 HV or greater, through hardening as a
result of rolling, and surface roughness of 0.20a 0.6
or less. Thus, the dedicated rolled shaft is highly 0.5
wear resistant. 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
A-846
Point of Selection
Selecting a Change Nut

The value of "p" is obtained as followed.
z If an axial load is applied:
PF
p= 9.8
F
p : Contact surface pressure on the tooth from an axial load (PF N) (N/mm2)
PF : Axial load (N)
z If a torque is applied:
PT
p= 9.8
T
p : Contact surface pressure on the tooth under a load torque (PT N-m) (N/mm2)
[Calculating the Sliding Speed V on the Teeth]
The value of "V" is obtained as followed.
2 • π • Do •n
V=
103
V : Sliding speed (m/min)
Do : Effective diameter
(see specification table) (mm)
R : Lead (mm)
Change Nut
A-847
Assuming that Change Nut model DCMB is used, select a screw nut that travels at feed speed S = 10 m/min
while receiving an axial load PF = 1,760 N accompanied by vibrations.
Obtain the pV value.
First, tentatively select model DCMB25T (dynamic permissible thrust F = 12,700 N).
Obtain the contact surface pressure (p).
PF 1760
p= × 9.8 = × 9.8 ≒ 1.36 N/mm2
F 12700
Obtain the sliding speed (V). The revolutions per minute (n) of the screw shaft needed to move it at feed speed
S = 10 m/min is calculated as follows.
S 3 –1
n= –3 = –3 ≒ 136min
R × 10 73.3 ×10
2 • π • Do• n 2 × π × 23.1×136
V= = ≒ 14.0 m/min
103 103
From the diagram of pV values (see Fig.1 on A-845), it is judged that there will be no abnormal wear if the slid-
ing speed (V) is 16m/min or below against the "p" value of1.36 N/mm2.
Second, obtain the safety factor (fS) against the dynamic permissible thrust (F).
Given the conditions:
Temperature factor fT = 1, and
Applied load PF= 1,760 N, the safety factor is calculated as follows.
f T •F 1 12700
fS ≦ = = 7.2
PF 1760
Since the required strength will be met if "fS" is at least 4 because of the type of load, it is appropriate to select
model DCMB25T.
A-848
Point of Selection
Efficiency, Thrust and Torque
Efficiency, Thrust and Torque

The efficiency (η ) of the change nut in relation to the friction coefficient (μ ) is indicated in Table2.
Table2 Friction Coefficient and Efficiency
Frictional coefficient (µ) 0.1 0.15 0.2
Efficiency (η) 0.82 0.74 0.67
The thrust generated when a torque is applied is obtained from the following equation.
Fa =2 •π • η • T/R 10–3
T : Torque (input) (N-m)
R : Lead (mm)
Also, the torque generated when a thrust is applied is obtained from the following equation.
T = η • Fa • R 10–3/2π
T : Torque generated (N-m)
Fa : Thrust (input) (N)
R : Lead (mm)
[Example of Calculation - 1]
Assuming that Change Nut model DCMB20T is used and the torque T is equal to 19.6 N-m, obtain the thrust to
be generated.
If "μ " is 0.2, the efficiency "η" is 0.67 (see Table2), and the generated thrust (Fa) is calculated as follows.
2 ×π×0.67 ×19.6
Fa = 2 •π • η • T/R×10 =
-3
-3 ≒1370 N
60 × 10
Change Nut
[Example of Calculation - 2]
Assuming that Change Nut model DCMB20T is used and the thrust Fa is equal to 980 N, obtain the torque to be
generated.
If "μ " is 0.2, the efficiency "η" is 0.67 (see Table2), and the generated torque (T) is calculated as follows.
η • Fa •R × 10
-3 -3
0.67×980×60×10
T= = = 6.27 N•m
2π 2π
Accuracy Standards
Table3 Accuracy of the Screw Shaft of Models DCMA and DCMB Unit: mm
Shaft symbol Rolled shaft
Accuracy TNote
Single pitch error (max) ±0.025
Accumulated pitch error (max) ±0.2/300
Note) Symbol T indicates the machining method for the screw shaft.
A-849
Point of Design Change Nut
Fit
For the fitting between the change nut circumference and the housing, we recommend a loose fitting
or a tight fitting.
A-850
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance Change Nut
Installation
0
To increase the strength of the root of the flange Table1 Chamfer of the Housing's Mouth
of the change nut, the corner is machined to Unit: mm
have an R shape. Therefore, it is necessary to Model No. Chamfer of the mouth

chamfer the inner edge of the housing's mouth. C
DCMA
DCMB (Min.)
8 1.2
C chamfer
12 1.5
15
17 2
20
25
2.5
30
35
40
3
Fig.1 45
50
[Recommended Mounting Orientation]
Change Nut
When vertically conveying a heavy object using
the screw shaft, it is safe to mount the screw as
shown in Fig.2 where supports are provided on Change nut
the mounting holes to prevent the moving object
from falling even if the change nut is broken due
to an overload or an impact.
Travel
Screw shaft
Shaft rotation
(Shaft side fixed)
Fig.2 Recommended Mounting Orientation
A-851
Lubrication
Select a lubrication method according to the conditions of the change nut.
[Oil Lubrication]
For the lubrication of the change nut, an oil lubrication is recommended. Specifically, an oil-bath
lubrication or a drop lubrication is particularly effective. An oil-bath lubrication is the most appropriate
method since it meets the harsh conditions such as a high speed, a heavy load or an external heat
transmission and it cools the change nut. The drop lubrication is appropriate for the low to medium
speed and a light to medium load. Select a lubricant according to the conditions as indicated in
Table2.
Conditions Types of Lubricants

Low speed, high load, High-viscosity sliding
high temperature surface oil or turbine oil
High speed, light load, Low-viscosity sliding
low temperature surface oil or turbine oil
In a low-speed feed, which occurs less frequently, the user can lubricate the slide system by manu-
ally applying the grease to the shaft on a regular basis or using the greasing hole on the change nut.
We recommend using the lithium-soap group grease No. 2.
[Initial Lubrication of the Miniature Change Nut]
Since the Miniature Change Nut is made of oil-impregnated plastics, it can be used without the lubri-
cation during an operation. For the initial lubrication, use some oil or grease. Note that lubricants con-
taining large amount of extreme pressure agent are not suitable.
A-852
Cross-Roller Ring
General Catalog
Features of the Cross-Roller Ring..... A-854 Model RU (Integrated Inner/Outer Ring Type) B-796
• Structure and features....................... A-854 Model RB (Separable Outer Ring Type).. B-798
Types of the Cross-Roller Ring ......... A-857 Model RE (Two-piece Inner Ring Type) .. B-801
• Types and Features .......................... A-857 USP-Grade Models RB and RE ........ B-804
Model RA (Separable Outer Ring Type).. B-805
Point of Selection............................ A-859 Model RA-C (Single-Split Type) ........ B-806
Selecting a Cross-Roller Ring ........... A-859
Nominal Life ...................................... A-860
Static Permissible Moment................ A-864
Static Permissible Axial Load............ A-864
• Accuracy Standard of the USP-Grade Series . A-869
Moment Rigidity ................................ A-871
Point of Design................................ A-873

Fit ...................................................... A-873
Designing the Housing and the Presser Flange .. A-874
Mounting Procedure ....................... A-876

Procedure for Assembly.................... A-876
A-853
Features and Types Cross-Roller Ring
Features of the Cross-Roller Ring
Inner ring
Outer ring
Roller
Spacer retainer
Fig.1 Structure of Cross Roller-Ring Model RB

With the Cross-Roller Ring, cylindrical rollers are arranged with each roller perpendicular to the adja-
cent roller, in a 90° V groove, separated from each other by a spacer retainer. This design allows just
one bearing to receive loads in all directions including radial, axial and moment loads.
Since the Cross-Roller Ring achieves high rigidity despite the minimum possible dimensions of the
inner and outer rings, it is optimal for applications such as joints and swiveling units of industrial
robots, swiveling tables of machining centers, rotary units of manipulators, precision rotary tables,
medical equipment, measuring instruments and IC manufacturing machines.
[High Rotation Accuracy]
The spacer retainer fitting among cross-arrayed rollers prevents rollers from skewing and the rota-
tional torque from increasing due to friction between rollers. Unlike conventional types using steel
sheet retainers, the Cross-Roller Ring does not cause unilateral contact of roller or seize. Thus, even
under a preload, the Cross-Roller Ring provides stable rotation.
Since the inner and outer rings are designed to be separable, the bearing clearance can be adjusted.
In addition, a preload can be applied. These features enable accurate rotation.
A-854
Features and Types
Features of the Cross-Roller Ring
[Easy Handling]
The inner and outer rings, which are separable, are secured to the Cross-Roller Ring body after
being installed with rollers and spacer retainers in order to prevent the rings from separating from
each other. Thus, it is easy to handle the rings when installing the Cross-Roller Ring.
[Skewing Prevention]
The spacer retainer keeps rollers in their proper Roller Spacer retainer
position, thereby preventing them from skewing
(tilted rollers). This eliminates friction between
rollers, and therefore secures a stable rotational
torque.
[Increased Rigidity (Three to Four Times Greater than the Conventional Type)]
Unlike the thin angular ball bearings installed in double rows, the cross array of rollers allows a single
Cross-Roller Ring unit to receive loads in all directions, increasing the rigidity to three to four times
greater than the conventional type.
Moment Rigidity Diagram

M (moment)
×10-4
10 15.876
9
ing
7.938
ear
8
ll b
r ba
7 φ 50.8
ula
Gradient angle: rad
ang
6
ow
Angular Ball Bearing

le-r
Cross-Roller Ring
5
M (moment)
ub
Do
4 M (moment) 13
8
3 8
5 00
RA 15
2 0 13 8
RB5
1 φ 50
φ 50
0
9.8 19.6 29.4 39.2 Model RA5008 Model RB5013
Moment: M （N・m）
Cross Roller Ring
A-855
(1) Compared with conventional steel sheet retainers, the spacer retainer allows a longer effective
contact length of each roller, thus significantly increasing the load capacity.
The spacer retainer guides rollers by supporting them over the entire length of each roller,
whereas the conventional type of retainer supports them only at a point at the center of each
roller. Such one-point contact cannot sufficiently prevent skewing.
Roller contact length
l1 l 1＞l 2 l2
l1 l2
With a spacer retainer With a steel sheet retainer (conventional type)
(2) In conventional types, the loaded areas are asymmetrical between the outer ring and the inner
ring sides around the roller longitudinal axis. The greater the applied load is, the greater the
moment becomes, leading end-face contact to occur. This causes frictional resistance, which
hinders smooth rotation and quickens wear.
End-face contact
Loaded areas symmetrical Loaded areas asymmetrical

With a spacer retainer With a steel sheet retainer (conventional type)
A-856
Features and Types
Types of the Cross-Roller Ring
Types of the Cross-Roller Ring

Types and Features
Model RU (Integrated Inner/Outer Ring Type) Specification Table⇒B-796

Since holes are drilled for mounting, the need
for a presser flange and a housing is elimi-
nated.Also, owing to the integrated inner/outer
ring type stryucture with washer, there is almost
no effect from installation on performance,
allowing stable rotational accuracy and torque to
be obtained.
Can be used for both outer and inner ring rota-
tion.
Model RU
Model RB (Separable Outer Ring Type for Inner Ring Rotation) Specification Table⇒B-798
Cross-Roller Ring basic type, with a separable
outer ring, and an inner ring integrated with the
main body.It is used in locations where the rota-
tional accuracy of the inner ring is required.
It is used, for example, in the swivel portions of
index tables of machine tools.
Cross-Roller Ring
Model RB
Model RE (Two-piece Inner Ring Type for Outer Ring Rotation) Specification Table⇒B-801
Main dimensions are the same as model RB.
This model is used in locations where the rota-
tional accuracy of the outer ring is required.
Model RE
A-857
USP-Grade Series of Models RB and RE Specification Table⇒B-804
The rotation accuracy of the USP-Grade Series
achieves the ultra precision grade that sur-
passes the world's highest accuracy standards
such as JIS Class 2, ISO Class 2, DIN P2 and
AFBMA ABCE9.
Model RA (Separable Outer Ring Type for Inner Ring Rotation) Specification Table⇒B-805
A compact type similar to model RB with the
thinnest possible inner and outer rings.
Optimal for locations requiring a light-weight and
compact design such as the swivel portions of
robots and manipulators.
Model RA
Model RA-C (Singe-Split Type) Specification Table⇒B-806

The main dimensions are the same as that of
model RA.Owing to its Single-split Outer Ring
structure with a highly rigid outer ring, this model
can be used for outer ring rotation.
Model RA-C
A-858
Point of Selection Cross-Roller Ring
Selecting a Cross-Roller Ring

The following diagram shows a typical procedure for selecting a Cross-Roller Ring.
0
Predicting Selecting a bearing size

Determining the Conditions
Lubrication Methods
the Service Life
Rotational Torque
Selecting a Type
Clearance
Rigidity Rigidity of the mounting section
Accuracy Accuracy grade
Inner ring rotating……Model RB

Outer ring rotating……Model RE
Mounting space…Models RA-C and RA
Cross-Roller Ring
A-859
Nominal Life
The service life of the Cross-Roller Ring is obtained from the following equation.
fT • C
10
L 3
106 1.0
fW • PC 0.9
0.8
L : Nominal life 0.7
(The total number of revolutions that 0.6
90% of a group of identical Cross- 0.5
Roller Ring units independently 100 150 200 250
operating under the same condi- Temperature of the bearing unit (℃)
tions can achieve without showing
flaking from rolling fatigue)
C : Basic dynamic load rating* (N) Note) The normal service temperature is 80 ℃ or below. If
the product is to be used at a higher temperature, con-
PC : Dynamic equivalent radial load (N) tact THK.
fW : Load factor (see Table1) Table1 Load Factor (fW)
* The basic dynamic load rating (C) of the Cross-Roller Ring
shows the radial load with interlocked direction and magni- Service condition fW
tude, under which the nominal life (L) is 1 million revolu-
tions when a group of identical Cross-Roller Ring units Smooth motion without impact 1 to 1.2
independently operate under the same conditions. The
basic dynamic load rating (C) is indicated in the specifica- Normal motion 1.2 to 1.5
tion tables.
Motion with severe impact 1.5 to 3
[Dynamic Equivalent Radial Load PC]

Moment (M)
The dynamic equivalent radial load of the Cross-
Roller Ring is obtained from the following equa-
tion. Axial load
Radial load (Fa)
2M (Fr)
PC X Fr Y•Fa
dp Moment
(M)
PC : Dynamic equivalent radial load (N) Fig.2
Fr : Radial load (N)
Table2 Dynamic Radial Factor and Dynamic Axial Factor
Fa : Axial load (N)
M : Moment (N-mm) Classification X Y
X : Dynamic radial facto (see Table2) Fa
Y : Dynamic axial factor (see Table2) ≦ 1.5 1 0.45
Fr + 2M/dp
dp : Roller pitch circle diameter (mm)
Fa 0.67 0.67
＞ 1.5
Fr + 2M/dp
z If Fr = 0N and M = 0 N-mm, perform calculation while

assuming that X = 0.67 and Y = 0.67.
z For service life calculation with a preload taken into
account, contact THK.
A-860
Point of Selection
Nominal Life
[Example of Calculating the Nominal Life]

Assuming that model RB25025 is used under the following condi-
tions, calculate its nominal life (L). D1
m1 =100 kg D2
m2 =200 kg
m3 =300 kg m2 m1
D1 =300 mm
D2 =150 mm
H =200 mm H m3
C =69.3 kN
C0 =150 kN
dp =277.5 mm
F =100 N F
ω =2 rad/s(ω : angular velocity)
Angular velocity ω
Fig.3
Radial load : Fr =F+m1•D1×10-3•ω 2+m2•D2×10-3•ω 2

= 100+100•300×10-3•22+200•150×10-3•22
=340 N
Axial load : Fa =(m1+m2+m3)×g
=(100+200+300) ×9.807
=5884.2 N
Moment :M =m1•g×D1+m2•g×D2+(m1•D1×10-3•ω 2+m2•D2×10-3•ω 2)×H
=100•9.807×300+200•9.807×150+
(100•300×10-3•22+200•150×10-3•22) ×200
=636420 N•mm
Fa 5884.2
= = 1.19 ≦ 1.5
Fr + 2M/dp 340 + 2 × 636420/277.5
∴X =1 , Y =0.45
Therefore, the dynamic equivalent radial load (Pc) is obtained as follows.
(
PC = X Fr +
2M
) (
+ Y • Fa = 1 × 340 +
2•636420
) + 0.45 × 5884.2 = 7574.7 N
Cross-Roller Ring
dp 277.5
If fW = 1.2, the nominal life is calculated as follows.Thus, the nominal life (L) is 8.7×108 revolutions.
( ) =( )
10 10
fT•C 3 1 × 69.3 × 103 3
L= × 106 = 8.7 × 108 Rotation
fw•PC 1.2 × 7574.7
A-861
The basic static load rating C0 refers to the static load with constant direction and magnitude, under
which the calculated contact stress in the center of the contact area between the roller and the race-
way under the maximum load is 4000 MPa. (If the contact stress exceeds this level, it will affect the
rotation.) This value is indicated as "C0" in the specification tables. When a load is statically or
dynamically applied, it is necessary to consider the static safety factor as shown below.
C0
fS Table3 Static Safety Factor (fS)
P0
Load conditions Lower limit of fS
fS : Static safety factor (see Table3) Normal load 1 to 2
Impact load 2 to 3
P0 : Static equivalent radial load (N)
[Static Equivalent Radial Load P0]
The static equivalent radial load of the Cross-Roller Ring is obtained from the following equation.
2M
P0 X0• Fr Y0•Fa
dp
Moment (M)
P0 : Static equivalent radial load (N)
Fr : Radial load (N) Axial load
Fa : Axial load (N) Radial load (Fa)
M : Moment (N-mm) (Fr)
X0 : Static radial factor (X0=1) Moment
(M)
Y0 : Static axial factor (Y0=0.44)
Fig.4
A-862
Point of Selection
[Example of Calculating a Static Safety Factor]

Assuming that model RB25025 is used under the following condi-
tions, calculate its static safety factor (fs). D1
m1 =100 kg D2
m2 =200 kg
m3 =300 kg m2 m1
D1 =300 mm
D2 =150 mm
H =200 mm H m3
C =69.3 kN
C0 =150 kN
dp =277.5 mm
F =100 N F
ω =2 rad/s(ω : angular velocity)
Angular velocity ω
Fig.5
Radial load : Fr =F+m1•D1×10-3•ω 2+m2•D2×10-3•ω 2

= 100+100•300×10-3•22+200•150×10-3•22
=340 N
Axial load : Fa =(m1+m2+m3)×g
= (100+200+300) ×9.807
=5884.2 N
Moment :M =m1•g×D1+m2•g×D2+(m1•D1×10-3•ω 2+m2•D2×10-3•ω 2)×H
= 100•9.807×300+200•9.807×150+
(100•300×10-3•22+200•150×10-3•22) ×200
=636420 N•mm
Therefore, the static equivalent radial load (P0) is obtained as follows.
(
P0 = X Fr +
2M
dp ) + Y • Fa = 1 × (340 + 2•636420
277.5 ) + 0.44 × 5884.2 = 7515.8 N
3
150 × 10
∴fS = = 20
7515.8
Thus, the static safety factor (fs) is 20.
Cross-Roller Ring
A-863
Static Permissible Moment
The static permissible moment (M0) of the Cross-Roller Ring is obtained from the following equation.
dp
M0 C0 10–3
2
M0 : Static permissible moment (kN-m)
[Example of Calculating a Static Permissible Moment]
Model No. RB25025
C =69.3 kN
C0 =150 kN
dp =277.5 mm
The static permissible moment is calculated as follows.
dp 277.5
M0 = C0 • × 10-3 = 150 • × 10-3 = 20.8 kN • m
2 2
Static Permissible Axial Load

The static permissible axial load (Fao) of the Cross-Roller Ring is obtained from the following equa-
tion.
C0
Fa0
Y0
Fa0 : Static permissible axial load (kN)
Y0 : Static axial factor (Y0=0.44)
[Example of Calculating a Static Permissible Axial Load]
Model No. RB25025
C =69.3 kN
C0 =150 kN
The static permissible axial load (FaO) is calculated as follows.
C0 150
Fa0 = = = 340.9 kN
Y0 0.44
A-864
Point of Selection
Accuracy Standards
Accuracy Standards
The Cross-Roller Ring is manufactured with the accuracy and the dimensional tolerance according to
Table4 to Table13.
Table4 Rotational Accuracy of the Inner Ring of Model RU Unit: μ m
Radial runout tolerance of the inner ring Axial runout tolerance of the inner ring
Model No.
Grade P5 Grade P4 Grade P2 Grade P5 Grade P4 Grade P2
RU42 4 3 2.5 4 3 2.5
RU66 5 4 2.5 5 4 2.5
RU85 5 4 2.5 5 4 2.5
RU124 5 4 2.5 5 4 2.5
RU148 6 5 2.5 6 5 2.5
RU178 6 5 2.5 6 5 2.5
RU228 8 6 5 8 6 5
RU297 10 8 5 10 8 5
RU445 15 12 7 15 12 7
Note) For model RU, grade P5 is standard rotational accuracy.(Not indicated in model number.)
Table5 Rotational Accuracy of the Outer Ring of Model RU Unit: μ m

Radial runout tolerance of the outer ring Axial runout tolerance of the outer ring
Model No.
Grade P5 Grade P4 Grade P2 Grade P5 Grade P4 Grade P2
RU42 8 5 4 8 5 4
RU66 10 6 5 10 6 5
RU85 10 6 5 10 6 5
RU124 13 8 5 13 8 5
RU148 15 10 7 15 10 7
Cross-Roller Ring
RU178 15 10 7 15 10 7
RU228 18 11 7 18 11 7
RU297 20 13 8 20 13 8
RU445 25 16 10 25 16 10
Note) For model RU, grade P5 is standard rotational accuracy.(Not indicated in model number.)
A-865
Table6 Rotational Accuracy of the Inner Ring of Model RB Unit: μ m
Nominal dimension Radial runout tolerance of the inner ring Axial runout tolerance of the inner ring
of the bearing inner Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade
diameter (d) (mm) Grade PE6 PE5 PE4 PE2 Grade PE6 PE5 PE4 PE2
0 Grade Grade Grade Grade 0 Grade Grade Grade Grade
Above Or less
P6 P5 P4 P2 P6 P5 P4 P2
18 30 13 8 4 3 2.5 13 8 4 3 2.5
30 50 15 10 5 4 2.5 15 10 5 4 2.5
50 80 20 10 5 4 2.5 20 10 5 4 2.5
80 120 25 13 6 5 2.5 25 13 6 5 2.5
120 150 30 18 8 6 2.5 30 18 8 6 2.5
150 180 30 18 8 6 5 30 18 8 6 5
180 250 40 20 10 8 5 40 20 10 8 5
250 315 50 25 13 10 — 50 25 13 10 —
315 400 60 30 15 12 — 60 30 15 12 —
400 500 65 35 18 14 — 65 35 18 14 —
500 630 70 40 20 16 — 70 40 20 16 —
630 800 80 — — — — 80 — — — —
800 1000 90 — — — — 90 — — — —
1000 1250 100 — — — — 100 — — — —
Table7 Rotational Accuracy of the Outer Ring of Model RE Unit: μ m

Nominal dimension Radial runout tolerance of the outer ring Axial runout tolerance of the outer ring
of the bearing outer Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade
diameter (D) (mm) Grade PE6 PE5 PE4 PE2 Grade PE6 PE5 PE4 PE2
0 Grade Grade Grade Grade 0 Grade Grade Grade Grade
Above Or less
P6 P5 P4 P2 P6 P5 P4 P2
30 50 20 10 7 5 2.5 20 10 7 5 2.5
50 80 25 13 8 5 4 25 13 8 5 4
80 120 35 18 10 6 5 35 18 10 6 5
120 150 40 20 11 7 5 40 20 11 7 5
150 180 45 23 13 8 5 45 23 13 8 5
180 250 50 25 15 10 7 50 25 15 10 7
250 315 60 30 18 11 7 60 30 18 11 7
315 400 70 35 20 13 8 70 35 20 13 8
400 500 80 40 23 15 — 80 40 23 15 —
500 630 100 50 25 16 — 100 50 25 16 —
630 800 120 60 30 20 — 120 60 30 20 —
800 1000 120 75 — — — 120 75 — — —
1000 1250 120 — — — — 120 — — — —
1250 1600 120 — — — — 120 — — — —
Table8 Rotational Accuracy of the Inner Ring of Model RA and RA-C Table9 Rotational Accuracy of the Outer Ring of Model RA-C
Nominal dimension of the bearing Tolerance in Nominal dimension of the bearing Tolerance in
inner diameter (d) (mm) radial runout outer diameter (D) (mm) radial runout
Above Or less and axial runout Above Or less and axial runout
40 65 13 65 80 13
65 80 15 80 100 15
80 100 15 100 120 15
100 120 20 120 140 20
120 140 25 140 180 25
140 180 25 180 200 25
180 200 30 200 250 30
Note) If higher accuracy than the above values is required Note) The rotational accuracy of the outer ring for model RA-
for the inner ring in rotational accuracy for models RA C indicates the value before separation.
and RA-C, contact THK.
A-866
Point of Selection
Accuracy Standards
Table10 Dimensional Tolerance of the Bearing Inner Diameter Unit: μ m
Nominal dimension Tolerance of dm(note 2)

of the bearing inner Grades 0, P6, P5, P4
diameter (d) (mm) Grade PE6 Grade PE5 Grade PE4 and PE2
and P2
Above Or less Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower
18 30 0 – 10 0 –8 0 –6 0 –5
30 50 0 – 12 0 – 10 0 –8 0 –6
50 80 0 – 15 0 – 12 0 –9 0 –7
80 120 0 – 20 0 – 15 0 – 10 0 –8
120 150 0 – 25 0 – 18 0 – 13 0 – 10
150 180 0 – 25 0 – 18 0 – 13 0 – 10
180 250 0 – 30 0 – 22 0 – 15 0 – 12
250 315 0 – 35 0 – 25 0 – 18 — —
315 400 0 – 40 0 – 30 0 – 23 — —
400 500 0 – 45 0 – 35 — — — —
500 630 0 – 50 0 – 40 — — — —
630 800 0 – 75 — — — — — —
800 1000 0 – 100 — — — — — —
1000 1250 0 – 125 — — — — — —
Note1) Standard inner diameter accuracy of models RA, RA-C and RU is 0. For higher accuracy than 0, contact THK.
Note2) "dm" represents the arithmetic average of the maximum and minimum diameters obtained in measuring the bearing
inner diameter at two points.
Note3) For accuracy grades in bearing inner diameter with no values indicated in the table, the highest value among low accu-
racy grades applies.
Table11 Dimensional Tolerance of the Bearing Outer Diameter Unit: μ m
Nominal dimension Tolerance of Dm(note 2)

of the bearing outer Grades 0, P6, P5, P4
diameter (D) (mm) Grade PE6 Grade PE5 Grade PE4 and PE2
and P2
Cross-Roller Ring
Above Or less Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower
30 50 0 – 11 0 –9 0 –7 0 –6
50 80 0 – 13 0 – 11 0 –9 0 –7
80 120 0 – 15 0 – 13 0 – 10 0 –8
120 150 0 – 18 0 – 15 0 – 11 0 –9
150 180 0 – 25 0 – 18 0 – 13 0 – 10
180 250 0 – 30 0 – 20 0 – 15 0 – 11
250 315 0 – 35 0 – 25 0 – 18 0 – 13
315 400 0 – 40 0 – 28 0 – 20 0 – 15
400 500 0 – 45 0 – 33 0 – 23 — —
500 630 0 – 50 0 – 38 0 – 28 — —
630 800 0 – 75 0 – 45 0 – 35 — —
800 1000 0 – 100 — — — — — —
1000 1250 0 – 125 — — — — — —
1250 1600 0 – 160 — — — — — —
Note1) Standard outer diameter accuracy of models RA, RA-C and RU is 0. For higher accuracy than 0, contact THK.
Note2) "Dm" represents the arithmetic average of the maximum and minimum diameters obtained in measuring the bearing
outer diameter at two points.
Note3) For accuracy grades in bearing outer diameter with no values indicated in the table, the highest value among low accu-
racy grades applies.
A-867
Table12 Tolerance in the Width of the Inner and Outer Rings
for Models RU
Unit: μ m
Tolerrance of B
Model No.
Upper Lower
RU42 0 – 75
RU66 0 – 75
RU85 0 – 75
RU124 0 – 75
RU148 0 – 75
RU178 0 – 100
RU228 0 – 100
RU297 0 – 100
RU445 0 – 100
Table13 Tolerance in the Width of the Inner and Outer Rings (Common to All Grades) for Models RB and RE
Unit: μ m
Tolerrance of B Tolerrance of B1
Nominal dimension of the bearing
inner diameter (d) (mm) Applied to the inner ring of RB Applied to the outer ring of RB
and the outer ring of RE and the inner ring of RE
Above Or less Upper Lower Upper Lower
18 30 0 – 75 0 – 100
30 50 0 – 75 0 – 100
50 80 0 – 75 0 – 100
80 120 0 – 75 0 – 100
120 150 0 – 100 0 – 120
150 180 0 – 100 0 – 120
180 250 0 – 100 0 – 120
250 315 0 – 120 0 – 150
315 400 0 – 150 0 – 200
400 500 0 – 150 0 – 200
500 630 0 – 150 0 – 200
630 800 0 – 150 0 – 200
800 1000 0 – 300 0 – 400
1000 1250 0 – 300 0 – 400
Note) All B and B1 types of models RA and RA-C are manufactured with tolerance between -0.120 and 0.
A-868
Point of Selection
Accuracy Standards
Accuracy Standard of the USP-Grade Series

[Examples of Rotational Accuracy of the USP-Grade Series Cross-Roller Rings]
The rotation accuracy of the USP-Grade Series achieves the ultra precision grade that surpasses the
world's highest accuracy standards such as JIS Class 2, ISO Class 2, DIN P2 and AFBMA ABEC9.
Radial runout Axial runout

2μm 2.5μm
(standard: 5μm MAX.) (standard: 5μm MAX.)
40
φ 500
φ 600
Rotational Accuracy of the Inner Ring of Model RB50040CC0USP
Axial runout
3μm
(standard: 7μm MAX.)
40
Radial runout
2.5μm
φ 500 (standard: 7μm MAX.)
φ 600
Cross-Roller Ring
Rotational Accuracy of the Outer Ring of Model RE50040CC0USP
[Accuracy Standards]
The USP-grade series of models RB and RE are manufactured with runout accuracies according to
Table14.
Table14 Runout Accuracies of the USP-grade Series
Unit: μ m
Nominal inner
Runout accuracy Runout accuracy
diameter (d)
of the inner ring of the outer ring
and outer diameter
of model RB of model RE
(D) (mm)
Radial Axial Radial Axial
Above Or less runout runout runout runout
tolerance tolerance tolerance tolerance
80 180 2.5 2.5 3 3
180 250 3 3 4 4
250 315 4 4 4 4
315 400 4 4 5 5
400 500 5 5 5 5
500 630 6 6 7 7
630 800 — — 8 8
A-869
Radial Clearance
Table15 shows the radial clearance of model RU, Table16 that of the standard type of models RB
and RE, Table17 that of the USP-grade series of models RB and RE, and Table18 that of the thin
type of models RA and RA-C.
Table15 Radial clearance for model RU Table17 Radial Clearances of USP-grade Series of Models RB and RE
Pitch circle diameter
CC0 C0 of the roller (dp) (mm) CC0 C0
Model
No. Starting torque (N•m) Radial clearance (μm) Above Or less Min. Max. Min. Max.
Min. Max. Min. Max. 120 160 – 10 0 0 40
RU42 0.1 0.5 0 25 160 200 – 10 0 0 50
RU66 0.3 2.2 0 30 200 250 – 10 0 0 60
RU85 0.4 3 0 40 250 280 – 15 0 0 80
RU124 1 6 0 40 280 315 – 15 0 0 100
RU148 1 10 0 40 315 355 – 15 0 0 110
RU178 3 15 0 50 355 400 – 15 0 0 120
RU228 5 20 0 60 400 500 – 20 0 0 130
RU297 10 35 0 70 500 560 – 20 0 0 150
RU445 20 55 0 100 560 630 – 20 0 0 170
Note) Model RU clearance CC0 is controlled by starting 630 710 – 20 0 0 190
torque.Starting torque for clearance CC0 does not
include seal resistance value.
Table16 Radial Clearances of Models RB and RE Table18 Radial Clearances of Models RA and RA-C
Pitch circle diameter Pitch circle diameter
CC0 C0 C1 CC0 C0
of the roller (dp) (mm) of the roller (dp) (mm)
Above Or less Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Above Or less Min. Max. Min. Max.
18 30 –8 0 0 15 15 35
50 80 –8 0 0 15
30 50 –8 0 0 25 25 50
80 120 –8 0 0 15
50 80 – 10 0 0 30 30 60
120 140 –8 0 0 15
80 120 – 10 0 0 40 40 70
140 160 –8 0 0 15
120 140 – 10 0 0 40 40 80
160 180 – 10 0 0 20
140 160 – 10 0 0 40 40 90
180 200 – 10 0 0 20
160 180 – 10 0 0 50 50 100
200 225 – 10 0 0 20
180 200 – 10 0 0 50 50 110
200 225 – 10 0 0 60 60 120
225 250 – 10 0 0 60 60 130
250 280 – 15 0 0 80 80 150
280 315 – 15 0 30 100 100 170
315 355 – 15 0 30 110 110 190
355 400 – 15 0 30 120 120 210
400 450 – 20 0 30 130 130 230
450 500 – 20 0 30 130 130 250
500 560 – 20 0 30 150 150 280
560 630 – 20 0 40 170 170 310
630 710 – 20 0 40 190 190 350
710 800 – 30 0 40 210 210 390
800 900 – 30 0 40 230 230 430
900 1000 – 30 0 50 260 260 480
1000 1120 – 30 0 60 290 290 530
1120 1250 – 30 0 60 320 320 580
1250 1400 – 30 0 70 350 350 630
A-870
Point of Selection
Moment Rigidity
Moment Rigidity
Fig.6 to Fig.9 show moment rigidity diagrams for the Cross-Roller Ring as a separate unit. Rigidity is
affected by the deformation of the housing, presser flange and bolts. Therefore, the strength of these
parts must be taken into account.
(Radial clearance: 0)
×10–4
3
8 08
8
08
00 80
500
7
60
RA RA RA
RA
8
900
RA
Gradient angle: rad
2
8
000
RA1
1008
RA1
008
RA12
1 08
RA130 08
RA140
RA15008
RA19013 RA20013
RA16013 RA17013 RA18013
0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2
Moment: M (kN•m)
Fig.6
Cross-Roller Ring
×10–4
3
16 16
80
13
3
013
90
01
RB RB
70
6
RB5
RB
RB
20
100
RB
Gradient angle: rad
2
0
102
RB1
2016
RB1
025
RB12
B 1 3 0 25
1 R
1 4 0 2 5
RB
5
RB1502
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4

Moment: M (kN•m)
Fig.7
A-871
×10–4
3
5 40
25
02
25 50
35
2
160
0
18
24 RB
00
RB
RB
2
RB
RB
0
004
Gradient angle: rad
2 RB3
0
502
RB3
040
1 RB40
5
RB5002
RB50040
RB60040
0 2 4 6 8 10
Moment: M (kN•m)
Fig.8
× 10–4
1.5
0
45 07
0 80
70 RB
RB
Gradient angle: rad
0
1 007
RB9
0
0011
RB10
0.5
110
RB1250
0 20 40 60 80 100
Moment: M (kN•m)
Fig.9
A-872
Point of Design Cross-Roller Ring
Fit
[Fitting of Models RU]
0
Fitting for model RU is basically not required. However, for fitting requiring positioning accuracy, h7
and H7 are recommended.
[Fitting of Models RB, RE and RA]
For the fitting of models RB, RE and RA, we recommend using the combinations indicated in Table1.
Table1 Fitting of Models RB, RE and RA
Radial clearance Service condition Shaft Housing
Inner ring Normal load h5 H7

rotational load Large impact and moment h5 H7
C0
Outer ring Normal load g5 Js7
rotational load Large impact and moment g5 Js7
Inner ring Normal load j5 H7
rotational load Large impact and moment k5 Js7
C1
Outer ring Normal load g6 Js7
rotational load Large impact and moment h5 K7
Note) For the fitting for clearance CC0, avoid interference because it will cause an excessive preload. As for the fitting when
you have selected clearance CC0 for the joints or swiveling unit of a robot, the combination of g5 and H7 is recom-
mended.
[Fitting of the USP-grade]
For the fitting of the USP-grade series of models RB and RE, we recommend using the combinations
indicated in Table2.
Cross-Roller Ring
Table2 Fitting of the USP-grade
Radial clearance Condition Shaft Housing

Inner ring
h5 J7
rotational load
CC0
Outer ring
g5 Js7
rotational load
Inner ring
j5 J7
rotational load
C0
Outer ring
g5 K7
rotational load
[Fitting for Model RA-C]

For the fitting of model RA-C, we recommend using the combinations indicated in Table3.
Table3 Fitting for Model RA-C
Radial clearance Condition Shaft Housing

Inner ring
h5 J7
rotational load
CC0
Outer ring
g5 Js7
rotational load
Inner ring
j5 J7
rotational load
C0
Outer ring
g5 K7
rotational load
A-873
Designing the Housing and the Presser Flange
Since the Cross-Roller Ring is a compact, thin device, special consideration must be given to the
rigidity of the housing and the presser flange.
With types having a separable outer ring, insufficiency in the strength of the housing, pressure flange
or the presser bolt will result in the inability to evenly hold the inner or outer ring, or the deformation of
the bearing when a moment load is applied. Consequently, the contact area of the rollers will become
uneven, causing the bearing's performance to significantly deteriorate.
Fig.2 shows examples of installing the Cross-Roller Ring.
[Housing]
When determining the thickness of the housing,
make sure it is at least 60% of the sectional
height of the bearing as a guide.
D– d T
Housing thickness T= X 0.6 or greater
2 Ring removal tapped hole
(D: outer diameter of the outer ring;
d: inner diameter of the inner ring)
If tapped holes for removing the inner or outer
ring (Fig.1) are provided, the ring can be
removed without causing damage to the bear- Ring removal tapped hole
ing. When removing the outer ring, do not press
the inner ring, or vise versa. For the dimensions
of the presser on the side(s), see the shoulder
Fig.1
dimensions indicated in the corresponding spec-
ification table.
a. Outer ring rotating in the swiveling unit

b. Inner ring rotating in the swiveling unit c. Inner and outer rings secured in the
A heavy body part is mounted after the inner (with seals attached) same direction in the swiveling unit
and outer rings are secured. (with seals attached)
Fig.2 Example of Installation
A-874
Point of Design
Designing the Housing and the Presser Flange
[Presser Flange and Presser Bolt]

When determining the thickness of the presser
flange (F) or the clearance of the flange section
(S), refer to the dimensions indicated below as a S
F
guide.
As for the number of the presser bolts, the
greater the number of the bolts, the more stable H B
the system becomes. As a guide, however, it is
normally appropriate to use the number of bolts
indicated in Table4 and equidistantly arrange
them.
Table4 Number of Presser Bolts and Bolt Sizes
F = B×0.5 to B×1.2 Unit: mm
0
H = B -0.1 Outer diameter of the
S = 0.5 mm outer ring (D) Bolt size
No. of bolts
(reference value)
Even if the shaft and the housing are made of Above Or less
light alloy, it is recommendable to select a steel- — 100 8 or more M3 to M5
based material for the presser flange.
100 200 12 or more M4 to M8
When tightening the presser bolts, firmly secure
them using a torque wrench or the like so that 200 500 16 or more M5 to M12
they will not loosen. Table5 shows tightening 500 — 24 or more M12 or thicker
torques for the housing and presser flanges
made of typical steel materials with medium Table5 Bolt Tightening Torque Unit: N-m
hardness. Screw Tightening Screw Tightening

model No. torque model No. torque
M3 2 M10 70
M4 4 M12 120
Cross-Roller Ring
M5 9 M16 200
M6 14 M20 390
M8 30 M22 530
A-875
Mounting Procedure Cross-Roller Ring
Procedure for Assembly

When assembling the Cross-Roller Ring, follow the steps below.
0
[Inspecting the Parts before Assembling Them]

Thoroughly clean the housing and other parts to be assembled, and check if there is no burr or knots.
[Installing the Cross-Roller Ring into the Housing or onto the Shaft]
Since the Cross-Roller Ring is a thin bearing, it tends to tilt as it is installed. To prevent it, gradually
drive the Cross-Roller Ring into the housing or onto the shaft by gently hitting it with a plastic hammer
while keeping it horizontal. Be sure to keep hammering it with much care until you hear it fully contact
the reference surface.
[Attaching the Presser Flange]
(1) Place the presser flange onto the Cross-Roller Ring. Rock the flange several times to match the
bolt holes.
(2) Insert the presser bolts into the holes. Manually turn the bolts and make sure they do not show
skewing caused by misalignment of the holes.
(3) Fasten the presser bolts in three to four steps from temporary to full fastening by repeatedly
securing the bolts in the diagonal order, as shown in Fig.1. When tightening the separable inner
or outer ring, slightly turning the integral outer or inner ring will correct the dislocation between
the ring and the body.
Fig.1 Tightening Sequence
A-876
Precautions on Use Cross-Roller Ring
[Handling]
0
(1) The separable inner or outer ring is fastened in place using special rivets, bolts or nuts when
delivered. When installing it to the system, do not disassemble it. Also, erroneously installing the
spacer retainer will significantly affect the rotational performance of the system. Do not disas-
semble the bearing.
(2) The matching mark of the inner or outer ring may be slightly misaligned when delivered. In that
case, loosen the bolts that secure the inner or outer ring, and correct the alignment using a plas-
tic hammer or the like, before installing it to the housing. (Let the securing rivets follow the hous-
ing.)
(3) When installing or removing the Cross-Roller Ring, do not apply force to the fixing rivets or the
bolts.
(4) When mounting the presser flange, take into account the dimensional tolerances of the parts so
that the flange firmly holds the inner and outer ring from the side.
(5) Dropping or hitting the Cross-Roller Ring may damage it. Giving an impact force to the bushing
could also cause damage even if the product looks intact.
[Lubrication]
(1) Since each Cross-Roller Ring unit contains high-quality lithium soap group grease No. 2, you
can start using the product without replenishing grease. However, the product requires regular
lubrication since it has a smaller internal space than ordinary roller bearings and because the
rollers need frequent lubrication due to their rolling contact structure.
To replenish grease, it is necessary to secure greasing holes that lead to the oil grooves formed
on the inner and outer rings. As for the lubrication interval, normally replenish grease of the
same group so that it is distributed throughout the interior of the bearing at least every six to
twelve months.
When the bearing is filled up with grease, the initial rotational torque temporarily increases. How-
Cross-Roller Ring
ever, surplus grease will run off of the seals and the torque will return to the normal level in a
short period. The thin type does not have an oil groove. Secure an oil groove inside the housing
for lubrication.
(2) Do not mix greases with different physical properties.
(1) Entrance of foreign material may cause damage to the ball circulating path or functional loss.
Prevent foreign material, such as dust or cutting chips, from entering the system.
(3) If planning to use the Cross-Roller Ring in an environment where a coolant penetrates into the
product, contact THK.
A-877
A-878
Cam Follower
General Catalog
Features of the Cam Follower........... A-880 Model CF(Popular Type (Cylindrical Outer Ring)),
• Structure and features....................... A-880 Model CF-M (Stainless Steel Type),
• Cam Follower with a Hexagon Socket . A-881 Model CF-R(Popular Type (Spherical Outer Ring)),
• Cam Follower Containing Thrust Balls . A-881 Model CF-MR (Stainless Steel Type) ................ B-808
Types of the Cam Follower ............... A-882
• Types and Features .......................... A-882 Model CF-A(Cam Follower with Hexagon Socket (Cylindrical Outer Ring)),
• Types and Model Numbers of Cam Followers A-883 Model CF-M-A (Stainless Steel Type),
Classification Table ........................... A-884 Model CF-R-A(Cam Follower with Hexagon Socket (Spherical Outer Ring)),
Model CF-MR-A (Stainless Steel Type) ............................ B-810
Nominal Life ...................................... A-885 Model CF-B(Cam Follower with Hexagon Socket (Cylindrical Outer Ring)),
Accuracy Standards .......................... A-886 Model CF-M-B (Made of Stainless Steel)
Track load capacity ........................... A-887 Model CF-R-B(Cam Follower with Hexagon Socket (Spherical Outer Ring)),
Radial Clearance............................... A-887 Model CF-MR-B (Made of Stainless Steel) ......................... B-812
Point of Design................................ A-888 Model CFH-A(Eccentric Cam Follower with Hexagon Socket (Cylindrical Outer Ring)),
Fit ...................................................... A-888 Model CFH-M-A (Made of Stainless Steel)
Installation ......................................... A-888 Model CFH-R-A(Eccentric Cam Follower with Hexagon Socket (Spherical Outer Ring)),
Model CFH-MR-A (Made of Stainless Steel) ............................. B-814

Installation ......................................... A-889 Model CFN-R-A(Cam Follower Containing Thrust Balls) .. B-816
Contamination Protection and Lubrication .. A-891
Model CFT (Cam Follower with Tapped Greasing Hole (Cylindrical Outer Ring)),
Accessories ..................................... A-892 Model CFT-M (Made of Stainless Steel)
Accessories for the Cam Follower .... A-892 Model CFT-R (Cam Follower with Tapped Greasing Hole (Spherical Outer Ring)),
Model CFT-MR (Made of Stainless Steel) ............................. B-818
Accessories....................................... B-820
Accessories for the Cam Follower .... B-820
A-879
Features and Types Cam Follower
Features of the Cam Follower
Outer ring Seal Side plate Stud
Needle roller Cage
Fig.1 Structure of Cam Follower Model CF…UU-A

The Cam Follower is a compact and highly rigid bearing with a shaft. It contains needle bearings and
is used as a guide roller for cam mechanisms or straight motion.
Since its outer ring rotates while keeping direct contact with the mating surface, this product is thick-
walled and designed to bear an impact load.
Inside the outer ring, needle rollers and a precision cage are incorporated. This prevents the product
from skewing and achieves a superb rotation performance. And, as a result, the product is capable of
easily withstanding high-speed rotation.
There are two types of the outer ring in shape: spherical and cylindrical. The spherical outer ring eas-
ily absorbs a distortion of the shaft center when the cam follower is installed and helps lighten a
biased load.
The Cam Follower is used in a wide range of applications such as cam mechanisms of automatic
machines, dedicated machines as well as carrier systems, conveyors, bookbinding machines, tool
changers of machining centers, pallet changers, automatic coating machines, and sliding forks of
automatic warehouses.
A-880
Features and Types
Features of the Cam Follower
Cam Follower with a Hexagon Socket

For Cam Follower model CF, Cam Follower Containing Thrust Balls model CFN and Eccentric Cam
Follower model CFH, hexagon socket studs that allow easy eccentricity adjustment are available.
If desiring a hexagon socket on the stud head, add "A" to the end of the model number. If desiring a
hexagon socket on the stud thread, add "B". ("B" applies to model CF12 or higher.)
Model CF-A
Model CF-B
The Same Dimension of the Hexagonal Width Across Flats (H Dimension) Applies to Both Type A and Type B.
Cam Follower Containing Thrust Balls

Even a slight mounting error in a high speed
cam mechanism operating in a harsh environ-
Cam Follower
ment could cause abnormal wear to the thrust
unit of the cam follower. In such a case, using
Cam Follower Containing Thrust Balls model
CFN will bring about a significant effect in
increasing the durability.
Models CFN5 to 12 are standard-stock items. If
desiring a size other than the standard items,
contact THK.
Model CFN is capable of receiving a thrust load
caused by a slight mounting error. However, it is
necessary to minimize a component of thrust Fig.2
force, or prevent it from occurring, when design-
ing the cam mechanism and installing the Cam
Follower.
A-881
Types of the Cam Follower
Types and Features
Popular Type Cam Follower Model CF Specification Table⇒B-808

It is a popular type of Cam Follower provided
with a driver groove on the head of the stud. A
highly corrosion resistant stainless steel type
(symbol M) is also available.
Model CF
Cam Follower with a Hexagon Socket Model CF-A Specification Table⇒B-810

Since the stud head has a hexagon socket, this
model can easily be installed using a hexagon
wrench.
A type whose stud screw has a hexagon socket
(CF-B) is also available. (applicable to stud
diameter of 12 or greater)
Model CF-A
Eccentric Cam Follower with a Hexagon Socket Model CFH-A Specification Table⇒B-814
This model can be installed in the same mounting
hole as that of model CF. Since the mounting shaft
of the stud and the stud head are eccentric by 0.25
mm to 1.0 mm, the position of this model can eas-
ily be adjusted simply by turning the stud. Thus, it
is a compact, highly accurate eccentric cam fol-
lower with an integral structure. As a result, the
man-hours for machining and assembly can signif-
icantly be reduced because it is unnecessary to
align the cam follower with the cam groove and
machine the mounting-hole area with precision. Model CFH-A
Cam Follower Containing Thrust Balls Model CFN Specification Table⇒B-816

Based on the popular type Cam Follower, this
model is incorporated with thrust load balls.
Model CFN
A-882
Features and Types
Types of the Cam Follower
Cam Follower with a Tapped Hole for Greasing Model CFT Specification Table⇒B-818
Basically the same as the popular type Cam
Follower, this model is provided with tapped
holes for piping on the stud head and the thread.
It is optimal for locations where an integrated
piping for greasing is required.
Model CFT
Types and Model Numbers of Cam Followers

The Cam Follower is divided into several types as indicated in Table1.
Table1 Types and Model Numbers of Cam Followers
Type Popular Type Eccentric Cam Follower Containing Thrust Balls
Shape
Stud with a hexagon

Cylindrical outer ring
CF-A (CF…UU-A) CFH-A (CFH…UU-A) ———

socket
Stud with a driver
CF (CF…UU) CFH (CFH…UU) ———
Cam Follower
groove
With a tapped hole for
CFT (CFT…UU) CFHT (CFHT…UU) ———
greasing
Made of stainless steel CF-M (CF…MUU) CFH-M (CFH…MUU) ———
Stud with a hexagon
Spherical outer ring
CF-R-A (CF…UUR-A) CFH-R-A (CFH…UUR-A) CFN-R-A

socket
Stud with a driver
CF-R (CF…UUR) CFH-R (CFH…UUR) ———
groove
With a tapped hole for
CFT-R (CFT…UUR) CFHT-R (CFHT…UUR) ———
greasing
Made of stainless steel CF-MR (CF…MUUR) CFH-MR (CFH…MUUR) ———
Note1) The symbols in the parentheses indicate model numbers of types with seals.
Note2) THK also manufactures low-speed full-roller types with long service lives. For these full-roller types, symbol "V" is indi-
cated.
Note3) Symbol M indicates stainless steel type.
Example: CF 12 V UUR
Full-roller type
A-883
Cam Follower
Popular Type
Stud with a Hexagon Socket Type

Model CF-A Model CF-B Model CF-R-A
Cylindrical Outer Ring Cylindrical Outer Ring Spherical Outer Ring
Stud with a Driver Groove Type With a Tapped Hole for Greasing Type
Model CF Model CF-R Model CFT Model CFT-R
Cylindrical Outer Ring Spherical Outer Ring Cylindrical Outer Ring Spherical Outer Ring
Eccentricity Type
Stud with a Hexagon Socket Type With a Tapped Hole for Greasing Type
Model CFH-A Model CFH-R-A Model CFHT Model CFHT-R
Cylindrical Outer Ring Spherical Outer Ring Cylindrical Outer Ring Spherical Outer Ring
Stud with a Driver Groove Type

Model CFH Model CFH-R
Cylindrical Outer Ring Spherical Outer Ring
Containing Thrust Balls
Stud with a Hexagon Socket T ype

Model CFN-R-A
Spherical Outer Ring
A-884
Point of Selection Cam Follower
Nominal Life
0
rotation.) This value is indicated as "C0" in the dimensional tables. When a load is statically or dynam-
ically applied, it is necessary to consider the static safety factor as shown below.
C0
= fS
P0
fS : Static safety factor in relation to C0
(see Table1)
P0 : Radial load (kN)
The permissible load (F0) indicates the permissible value of the applied load determined by the
strength of the stud section of the Cam Follower. Therefore, it is necessary to consider the static
safety factor fM against F0 as well as fS.
Table1 Static Safety Factor (fS, fM)
F0
= fM Lower limit of fS
P0 Load conditions
and fM
fM : Static safety factor in relation to F0
Normal load 1 to 2
(see Table1)
F0 : Permissible load (kN) Impact load 2 to 3
P0 : Radial load (kN)
[Nominal Life]
The service life of the Cam Follower is obtained from the following equation.
Cam Follower
fT • C 10
6
L= 3
10
fW • PC
L : Nominal life
(The total number of revolutions that 90% of a group of identical Cam Follower units
independently operating under the same conditions can achieve without showing flaking
from rolling fatigue)
C : Basic dynamic load rating* (kN)
PC : Radial load (kN)
* The basic dynamic load rating (C) of the Cam Follower shows the load with interlocked direction
and magnitude, under which the nominal life (L) is 1 million revolutions when a group of identical
Cam Follower units independently operate. The basic dynamic load rating (C) is indicated in the
corresponding specification table.
A-885
When the nominal life (L) has been obtained, the service life time (Lh) is obtained from the following
equation.
z For Linear Motion
D•π•L
Lh =
1.0
2 l S • n1 60 0.9
Lh : Service life time (h) 0.8
D : Bearing outer diameter (mm) 0.6
0.5
n1 : Number of reciprocations per minute 100 150 200 250
(min-1) Temperature of the bearing unit (℃)

Note) The normal service temperature is 80 ℃ or below. If
tact THK.
z For Rotary Motion
D•L
Lh = Condition fW
D1 • n 60
D1 : Outer ring contact average diameter Smooth motion without impact 1 to 1.2
of the cam (mm) Normal motion 1.2 to 1.5
n : Revolutions per minute of the cam
Motion with severe impact 1.5 to 3
(min-1)
Accuracy Standards
Cam Followers are manufactured with accuracies according to Table3.
(1) Dimensional tolerance of the cylindrical outer ring in outer diameter D: Table3
0
(2) Dimensional tolerance of the spherical outer ring in outer diameter D:–0.05
(3) Dimensional tolerance of the Cam Follower in stud diameter d: h7
0
(4) Dimensional tolerance of the outer ring in width B:–0.12
Table3 Accuracy of the Outer Ring (JIS Class 0)
Unit: μ m
Nominal dimension of Tolerance of the bearing

the bearing outer Tolerance of
in outer diameter (Dm) (note) the outer ring
diameter (D) (mm)
in radial
runout (max)
Above Or less Upper Lower
6 18 0 –8 15
18 30 0 –9 15
30 50 0 – 11 20
50 80 0 – 13 25
80 120 0 – 15 35
Note) "Dm" represents the arithmetic average of the maxi-
mum and minimum diameters obtained in measuring
the bearing outer diameter at two points.
A-886
Point of Selection
Track Load Capacity
Track Load Capacity

The track load capacity means the permissible
load at which the outer ring of a bearing and the
mating surface are capable of withstanding
repeated use over a long period. 6
The track load capacity provided in the specifi-
Track capacity factor

5
cation table indicates the value when using a
steel material with tensile strength of 1.24 kN/ 4
Spherical outer ring
mm2 as the mating material. Therefore, it is pos- 3
sible to increase the track load capacity by 2
increasing the hardness of the material. Fig.2
1 Cylindrical outer ring
shows the hardness of the mating material and
the track capacity factor in relation to tensile 0
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 58
strength. To obtain the track load capacity of Raceway surface hardness HRC
each mating material, multiply the track load 775 863 981 1118 1245 1442 1648 1922 2108
capacity shown in the corresponding specifica- Tensile strength (N/mm2)
tion table by the respective track load factor.
Fig.2 Track Capacity Factor
Note) For the mating material, we recommend using those

materials with the raceway hardness of 20 HRC or
higher and the tensile strength of 775 N/mm2 or
higher.
[Example of Calculating a Track Load Capacity]

Obtain the track load capacity when heat-treating the mating material, which a bearing whose outer ring has a
track load capacity of 5.29 kN contacts, to hardness of 50 HRC.
The track capacity factor when the hardness is 50 HRC is 2.32, as indicated in Fig.2. Therefore, the desired
track load capacity is calculated as follows.
The track load capacity=5.29kN×2.32=12.3kN
Radial Clearance
The radial clearances of Cam Followers meet clearance C2 (see Table4).
Cam Follower
(Normal clearance applies to full-roller types.)
Table4 Radial Clearance Unit: μ m
Clearance Normal
Model No. C2 clearance
(with cage) (full rollers)
CF, CFN, CFH, CFT and CFHT Min. Max. Min. Max.
3 to 4 3 17 10 25
5 to 8 5 20 15 30
10 to 12−1 5 25 15 35
16 to 20−1 10 30 20 40
24 to 30−2 10 40 25 55
A-887
Point of Design Cam Follower
Fit
For the dimensional tolerance of the Cam Follower in stud-mounting hole, we recommend the follow-
0
ing fitting.
The dimensional tolerance of the stud-mounting hole: H7
Installation
[Mounting Section]
Establish perpendicularity between the stud-
mounting hole and the mounting surface, and
chamfer the mouth of the hole to the smallest
possible radius, preferably C0.5. Also, the diam-
eter of the mounting surface should preferably
f
be at least equal to the dimension "f" indicated
If the outer ring unilaterally or unevenly contacts
the mating raceway, we recommend using
model CF-R, whose outer ring circumference is
spherically ground.
[Mating Raceway]
For the material of the mating raceway, see
Track Load Capacity on A-887.
[About the Mounting Method]
Do not tap the bracket and directly tighten the
product without using a nut as shown in Fig.1.
A B
Doing so may result in an insufficient tightening
torque, or cause the bending stress to concen-
trate in the male thread and damage the stud if
the thread is loosened.
Fig.1
A-888
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance Cam Follower
Installation
[Installing the Cam Follower]
0
If the Cam Follower is to be used under a heavy

load, it is necessary to install the product so that
the greasing hole on the stud is out of the
loaded area. To help identify the position of the
greasing hole, the THK logo is marked on the
side face of the stud collar. (See Fig.1.)
The vertical hole in the middle of the stud is
used as a whirl stop or a greasing hole.
Load Load
Make sure that the outer ring is evenly in contact
with the mating surface. When installing the
Cam Follower, also make sure its axis is per- Fig.1 Positions of the THK Logo and the Greasing Holes
pendicular to the traveling direction.

z Tightening Torque for the Stud
Since the stud of the Cam Follower receives Table1 Maximum Tightening Torque of the Screw
bending stress and tensile stress caused by a Model No Maximum tightening
bearing load, it is necessary to keep the tighten- torque
CF, CFN, CFH, CFT N-m
ing torque of the screw from exceeding the val-
3 0.392
ues indicated in Table1.
4 0.98
If the mounting screw may be loosened due to 5 1.96
vibrations or impact, use a spring washer, thin 6 2.94
nuts of JIS B 1811 Class 3 as double-nuts or a 8 7.84
special nut capable of preventing itself from 10 10-1 16.7
loosening. 12 12-1 29.4
Cam Follower
16 70.6
18 98
20 20-1 137
24 24-1 245
30 30-1 30-2 480
Note) 1 N-m equals to 0.102 kgf-m.
A-889
[Installing the Eccentric Cam Follower]
The eccentricity is adjusted in the following
For model CFH12 or For model CFH10-1 or
steps. higher with a greasing hole lower without a greasing hole
(1) Insert the stud into the mounting hole, and e e
lightly tighten the nut until the nut starts
turning. In doing so, position the THK logo
in relation to the load direction as shown in
Fig.2.
(2) Use the hexagon socket on the stud head
to turn the stud and adjust the clearance
between the stud and the mating contact
surface. Load Load
(3) After adjusting the clearance, tighten the
The figure shows the For model CFH10-1 or
nut while keeping the stud from turning. Be
position of the THK lower without a greasing
sure the maximum tightening torque in logo in relation to the hole, the“O” mark
Table1 on A-889 is not exceeded. eccentricity direction for indicates the eccentricity
model CFH12 or higher direction. There is no
The surface of the Cam Follower stud is hard- with a greasing hole. relationship between
the THK logo and the
ened. Take this into account when machining eccentricity direction.
the stud.
Fig.2
A-890
Contamination Protection and Lubrication

The Cam Follower models include seal types (model numbers: "…UU"), which are incorporated with
special synthetic rubber seals that are highly resistant to wear in order to prevent foreign material
from entering the interior of the cam follower and the lubricant from leaking.
Since each Cam Follower unit with seals contains high-quality lithium soap group grease No. 2, you
can start using the product without replenishing grease. Exceptionally, model CFN contains AFC
Grease.
If your Cam Follower does not have seals, fill grease from the greasing hole on the stud or the inner
ring. However, some of the model numbers with stud diameters of 10 mm or less do not have a
greasing hole and are provided with initial lubrication only, and therefore do not allow replenishment
of grease.
The appropriate fill quantity is a half to one third of the space inside the bearing. The lubrication inter-
val varies depending on the operating conditions. As a guide, however, replenish grease of the same
group every six months to two years for types with a cage, or every one to 6 months for full-roller
types.
Even with types equipped with seals (" …UU"), surplus grease may seep during the initial operation
period or immediately after resumption of grease replenishment. If desiring to avoid contamination of
the surrounding area of the machine by grease, first perform seasoning or the like in advance, and
then wipe the seeping surplus grease.
When driving the dedicated grease nipple onto the Cam Follower, use a jig like the one shown in
Fig.3 to provide pressure to the flange of the nipple.
Fig.3
Cam Follower
A-891
Accessories Cam Follower
Accessories for the Cam Follower

Table1 shows accessories for standard types of
0
Table1 Accessories
Cam Followers. The dedicated grease nipple is Model No. Plugnote 1 Plugnote 2
Nut
Greasenote 3
attached at your request. If desiring the dedi- JIS Class 2
cated grease nipple, add symbol“N”to the end CF Without seal Included in Included in Included in
package package package contained
Not
of the model number. CFH With seal Included in Included in Included in Filled with
package package package grease
Included in Included in Included in Filled with
CFN package package package grease
Example: CF 12 UUR -N Without seal — — Included in Not con-
package tained
Dedicated grease nipple CFT
Included in Filled with
With seal — — package grease
Note1) The plug is used to prevent grease from leaking.
However, it is not included in the packages of model
CF5, and hexagon socket types of models CFN10
(R)-A and CF (CFH) 10-1 (R)-A or lower.
Note2) The plug is used to close an unused greasing hole.
However, it is not attached to model CF (CFH) 10-1
or lower.
Note3) All models without a greasing hole are filled with
grease when assembled regardless of whether a
seal is attached or not.
Table2 Specification Table for Grease Nipples
L
Supported
Nipple dimensions Nipple
L1 models
model No.
h CF, CFN, CFH d b D h L L1
5 3.1 6 7.5 1.5 9 5.5 NP3.2×3.5
6 to 10 4 6 7.5 1.5 10 5.5 PB1021B
b d D
12 to 18 6 6 8 2 11 6 NP6×5
20 to 30 8 6 10 3 16 7 NP8×9
Note) The grease nipple is not attached to models CFN10

(R)-A and CF (CFH) 10-1 (R)-A or lower.
A-892
Precautions on Use Cam Follower
[Handling]
0
(2) Dropping or hitting the Cam Follower may damage it. Giving an impact to it could also cause
[Lubrication]
(1) Some types of the Cam Follower do not contain grease depending on the size and on whether
seals are attached. Carefully refer to Table1 on A-892, and if the desired model does not contain
grease, apply grease to the product as necessary before using it. Lithium soap-based grease
No. 2 is available as standard. (Use THK AFC Grease for model CFN.)
(2) Do not mix lubricants of different physical properties. In addition, replenish a lubricant also dur-
ing operation as necessary.
(3) We recommend applying a lubricant to the mating surface where the Cam Follower travels.
(1) When securing the Cam Follower, use a torque wrench or the like to tighten the product at a
torque equivalent to the corresponding value in Table1 on A-889.
(2) When using the product in locations exposed to vibrations or an impact load or in a special envi-
ronment such as a clean room, vacuum and low/high temperature, contact THK in advance.
(3) Entrance of foreign material such as dust may cause damage or functional loss. Prevent foreign
material, such as dust and cutting chips, from entering the product.
(4) Cam Followers are designed for use under a radial load. Do not use the product under a thrust
load.
[Storage]
When storing the Cam Follower, enclose it in a package designated by THK and store it while avoid-
ing high temperature, low temperature and high humidity.
Cam Follower
A-893
A-894
Roller Follower
General Catalog
Features of the Roller Follower ......... A-896 Models NAST (Separable Type
• Structure and features....................... A-896 with a Cylindrical Outer Ring),
Types of the Roller Follower ............. A-898 NAST-R (Separable Type
• Types and Features .......................... A-898 with a Spherical Outer Ring).......... B-822
Types of the Roller Follower ............. A-900
Models NAST-ZZ (Separable Type with a
Point of Selection............................ A-901 Cylindrical Outer Ring and Side Plates),
Types and Model Numbers NAST-ZZR (Separable Type with a Spherical
of the Roller Follower..................... A-901 Outer Ring and Side Plates)................... B-823
Nominal Life ...................................... A-902
Accuracy Standards .......................... A-903 Models RNAST (Separable Type with a
Track load capacity ........................... A-904 Cylindrical Outer Ring and No Inner Ring),
Radial Clearance............................... A-904 RNAST-R (Separable Type with a Spherical
Outer Ring and No Inner Ring)................ B-824
Point of Design................................ A-905
Fit ...................................................... A-905 Models NART-R (Non-separable Type
Mounting Section .............................. A-905 with a Spherical Outer Ring),
NART-VR (Non-separable Type with a
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance... A-906 Spherical Outer Ring and Full Balls) ... B-825
Installation ......................................... A-906
Contamination Protection and Lubrication .. A-906
A-895
Features and Types Roller Follower
Features of the Roller Follower
Outer ring
Seal
Inner ring
Side plate
Needle roller
Cage
Fig.1 Structure of Roller Follower Model NAST-ZZUU

The Roller Follower is a compact and highly rigid bearing system. It contains needle bearings and is
used as a guide roller for cam discs and straight motion.
Since its outer ring rotates while keeping direct contact with the mating surface, this product is thick-
walled and designed to bear an impact load.
Inside the outer ring, needle rollers and a precision cage are incorporated. This prevents the product
from skewing and achieves a superb rotation performance. And, as a result, the product is capable of
easily withstanding high-speed rotation.
Roller Followers are divided into two types: separable type whose inner ring can be separated, and
non-separable type whose inner ring cannot be separated.
There are two types of the outer ring in shape: spherical and cylindrical. The spherical outer ring eas-
ily absorbs a distortion of the shaft center when the cam follower is installed and helps lighten a
biased load.
The Roller Follower is used in a wide range of applications such as cam mechanisms of automatic
machines, dedicated machines as well as carrier systems, conveyors, bookbinding machines, tool
changers of machining centers, pallet changers, automatic coating machines, and sliding forks of
automatic warehouses.
A-896
Features and Types
Features of the Roller Follower
Roller Follower
A-897
Types of the Roller Follower
Types and Features
Model NAST (Separable Type) Specification Table⇒B-822

Model NAST is a separable type of bearing sys-
tem that combines a thick-wall outer ring, an
inner ring and needle rollers equipped with a
precision cage.
Model NAST
Model NAST-R (Separable Type) Specification Table⇒B-822

This model is a spherical outer ring type of
model NAST.
Since the circumference of the outer ring is
spherically ground, it helps lighten a biased load
(symbol R).
Model NAST-R
Model NAST-ZZ (Separable Type) Specification Table⇒B-823

This separable type of bearing system has a
labyrinth seal consisting of a pair of side plates
formed on both sides of the inner ring of model
NAST. (Model number of the type attached with
seals is NAST-ZZUU.)
Model NAST-ZZ
Model NAST- ZZR (Separable Type) Specification Table⇒B-823

This model is a spherical outer ring type of
model NAST-ZZ.
It easily corrects a distortion of the shaft center
when the roller follower is installed.
(symbol R). (Model number of the type attached
with seals is NAST-ZZUUR.) Model NAST-ZZR
A-898
Features and Types
Model RNAST (Separable Type) Specification Table⇒B-824

This model is basically the same as model
NAST, but does not have an inner ring.
Model RNAST
Model RNAST-R (Separable Type) Specification Table⇒B-824

This model is basically the same as model
NAST-R, but does not have an inner ring.
(symbol R).
Model RNAST-R
Model NART-R(Non-separable Type) Specification Table⇒B-825

This model is a non-separable type of bearing
system whose inner ring is fixed to the side
plates.
Roller Follower
with seals is NART-UUR.)
Model NART-R
Model NART-VR (Non-separable Type) Specification Table⇒B-825

Based on model NART-R, this model is a full-
roller bearing suitable for locations where a
heavy load is applied in low speed operation.
with seals is NART-VUUR.)
Model NART-VR
z Stainless steel types are available for all the above models. (symbol M)
A-899
Roller Follower
Separable Type Non-separable Type

Model NAST Model NART-R
Standard Type Full-roller Type

Model NAST-R Model NART-VR
Type with Side Plate

Model NAST-ZZ
Type with Side Plate

Model NAST-ZZR
Type without Inner Ring

Model RNAST
Type without Inner Ring

Model RNAST-R
A-900
Point of Selection Roller Follower
Types and Model Numbers of the Roller Follower

The Roller Follower is divided into several types as indicated in Table1.
Table1 Types of Roller Follower
Non-separable
Separable type
type
Classification
Type with Type without Standard type
Standard type
side plate inner ring Full-roller type
Main model No. NAST NAST-ZZ RNAST NART
Shape
NAST NAST-ZZ RNAST

Without seal —
Cylindrical NAST-M NAST-ZZM RNAST-M
outer ring NAST-ZZUU
With seal — — —
NAST-ZZMUU
NAST-R NAST-ZZR RNAST-R NART-R
Without seal
Spherical NAST-MR NAST-ZZMR RNAST-MR NART-MR
outer ring NAST-ZZUUR NART-UUR
With seal — —
NAST-ZZMUUR NART-MUUR
NART-VR
Without seal — — —
NART-VMR
Full rollers
NART-VUUR
With seal — — —
NART-VMUUR
Symbol M indicates stainless steel type. Roller Follower
A-901
Nominal Life
rotation.) This value is indicated as "C0" in the specification tables. When a load is statically or
dynamically applied, it is necessary to consider the static safety factor as shown below.
C0
fS Table2 Static Safety Factor (fS)
P0 Load conditions Lower limit of fS
Normal load 1 to 3
P0 : Radial load (kN) Impact load 3 to 5
[Nominal Life]
The service life of the Roller Follower is obtained from the following equation.
fT • C 10
6
L 3 10
f W • PC
L : Nominal life
(The total number of revolutions that 90% of a group of identical Roller Follower units
independently operating under the same conditions can achieve without showing flaking
from rolling fatigue)
C : Basic dynamic load rating＊ (kN)
Pc : Radial load (kN)
＊The basic dynamic load rating (C) of the Roller Follower shows the load with interlocked direc-
tion and magnitude, under which the nominal life (L) is 1 million revolutions when a group of
identical Roller Follower units independently operate. The basic dynamic load rating (C) is
indicated in the corresponding specification table.
A-902
Point of Selection
Accuracy Standards

When the nominal life (L) has been obtained, the service life time (Lh) is obtained from the following
equation.
z For Linear Motion
D• π • L 1.0
Lh
2 ℓ S • n1 60 0.9
0.8
Lh : Service life time (h) 0.7
D : Bearing outer diameter (mm) 0.5
100 150 200 250
Temperature of the bearing unit (℃)
per minute (min-1)
z For Rotary Motion Note) The normal service temperature is 80 ℃ or below. If
D•L tact THK.
Lh
D1 •n 60 Table3 Load Factor (fW)
D1 : Outer ring contact average Service condition fW

diameter of the cam (mm) Smooth motion without impact 1 to 1.2
n : Rotation speed per minute Normal motion 1.2 to 1.5
of the cam (min-1) Motion with severe impact 1.5 to 3
Accuracy Standards
Roller Followers are manufactured with accura- Table4 Dimensional tolerance of model NART in bearing width B1
cies in accordance with the following. Model No. Dimensional tolerance (h12)
(1) Dimensional tolerance of the spherical NART Upper limit Lower limit
0
outer ring in outer diameter D: –0.05 5 to 12 0 – 0.18
15 to 35 0 – 0.21
(2) Dimensional tolerance of model RNAST in
40 to 50 0 – 0.25
inscribed bore diameter dr: F6
(3) Dimensional tolerance of model NART in
bearing width B1: Table4
Roller Follower
(4) Accuracy of the inner ring and accuracy of
the outer ring in width: Table5
(5) Accuracy of the outer ring: Table6
Table5 Accuracy of the Inner Ring and Accuracy of the Outer Table6 Accuracy of the Outer Ring (JIS Class 0)
Ring in Width (JIS Class 0) Unit: μ m
Unit: μ m Nominal dimension of Tolerance of the bearing Tolerance of
Nominal dimension Tolerance of the Tolerance of the Tolerance of the bearing outer in outer diameter the outer ring
of the bearing inner bearing in outer inner ring (or outer the inner ring diameter (D) (mm) (Dm) (note) in radial
diameter (di) (mm) diameter (dm) (note) ring) in width in radial runout Above Or less Upper Lower runout (max)
Above Or less Upper Lower Upper Lower (max)
6 18 0 –9 15
2.5 10 0 –8 0 – 120 10
18 30 0 –9 15
10 18 0 –8 0 – 120 10
30 50 0 – 11 20
18 30 0 – 10 0 – 120 13
50 80 0 – 13 25
30 50 0 – 12 0 – 120 15
80 120 0 – 15 35
Note) "dm" represents the arithmetic average of the maxi-
mum and minimum diameters obtained in measuring Note) "Dm" represents the arithmetic average of the maxi-
the bearing inner diameter at two points. mum and minimum diameters obtained in measuring
the bearing outer diameter at two points.
A-903
Track Load Capacity
The track load capacity means the permissible
load at which the outer ring of a Roller Follower
and the mating surface are capable of with-
standing repeated use over a long period. 6
The track load capacity provided in the specifi-
Track capacity factor

5
cation table, indicates the value when using a
4
steel material with tensile strength of 1.2 kN/ Spherical outer ring
3
mm2 as the mating material. Therefore, it is pos-
sible to increase the track load capacity by 2
increasing the hardness of the material. Fig.2 1 Cylindrical outer ring
shows the hardness of the mating material and 0
the track capacity factor in relation to tensile 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 58
strength. To obtain the track load capacity of Raceway surface hardness HRC
each mating material, multiply the track load 775 863 981 1118 1245 1442 1648 1922 2108
capacity shown in the corresponding specifica- Tensile strength (N/mm2)
tion table by the respective track load factor.
Note) For the mating material, we recommend using those Fig.2 Track Capacity Factor
materials with the raceway hardness of 20 HRC or
higher and the tensile strength of 775 N/mm2 or
higher.
[Example of Calculating a Track Load Capacity]

Obtain the track load capacity when heat-treating the mating material, which a bearing whose outer ring has a
track load capacity of 5.29 kN contacts, to hardness of 50 HRC.
The track capacity factor when the hardness is 50 HRC is 2.32, as indicated in Fig.2. Therefore, the desired
track load capacity is calculated as follows.
The track load capacity=5.29kN×2.32=12.3kN
Radial Clearance
The radial clearances of Roller Followers meet the clearance indicatedin the table below. (Normal
clearance applies to full-roller types.)
Model NAST, NAST-ZZ Unit: μ m Model NART Unit: μ m
Clearance C2 (with cage) Clearance C2 Normal clearance
Model No. (with cage) (full rollers)
Min. Max. Model No.
6 5 20 Min. Max. Min. Max.
8 to 12 5 25 5 to 6 5 20 15 30
15 to 25 10 30 8 to 12 5 25 15 35
30 to 40 10 40 15 to 20 10 30 20 40
45 to 50 15 50 25 to 40 10 40 25 55
45 to 50 15 50 30 65
Model RNAST Unit: μ m
Clearance C2 (with cage)
Model No.
Min. Max.
5 to 6 5 20
8 to 12 5 25
15 to 25 10 30
30 to 40 10 40
45 to 50 15 50
A-904
Point of Design Roller Follower
Fit
For the fitting of the Roller Follower with the shaft, we recommend the combinations indicated in
0
Table1.
Table1 Fitting with the Shaft
No Inner Ring Inner Ring

k5, k6 g6, h6
Mounting Section
z To protect the side plate of models NART and NAST-ZZ, the height of the mounting section must
be equal to or greater than the“a”dimension indicated in the specification table
z The surface hardness of the shaft to be used with a Roller Follower without inner ring must be
between 54 and 64 HRC. For the surface roughness, we recommend 0.2 μ m Ra or below.
z For the mating raceway, see "Track Load Capacity" on A-904.
z If the outer ring unilaterally or unevenly contacts the mating raceway, we recommend using a type
whose outer ring circumference is spherically ground.
z The side plate of model NART is press-fit onto the inner ring. If the plate is pressed under an exter-
nal force, it may cause abnormal rotation. Do not use the product in the manner that the side plate
is pressed.
z The structure of the Roller Follower is designed to receive a radial load. If it receives a thrust load,
the side plates or the outer ring may be damaged. Therefore, it is necessary to design the system
and install the product so that the generation of a component of the thrust is limited to a minimum.
Roller Follower
A-905
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance Roller Follower
Installation
Fig.1 shows examples of installing the Roller Follower.
0
z If the Roller Follower is to be used under a heavy load, it is necessary to install the product so that
the greasing hole of the inner ring is out of the loaded area.
Radial load
Thrust load
Fig.1 Examples of Installing the Roller Follower

The Roller Follower models include seal types (model numbers: "…UU"), which are incorporated with
special synthetic rubber seals that are highly resistant to wear in order to prevent foreign material
from entering the interior of the roller follower and the lubricant from leaking.
Some models are not filled with grease when assembled. When using a model not filled with grease,
apply and fill grease to the interior first (lithium-based grease with consistency of No. 2).
Model No. Grease

NAST(R) Not filled with
No seal setting
RNAST(R) grease
NAST-ZZ(R) Without seal Filled with

NART-(V)R With seal grease
The lubrication interval varies depending on the operating conditions. As a guide, however, replenish
grease of the same group every six months to two years for types with a cage, or every one to six
months for full-roller types.
Even with types equipped with seals ("…UU"), surplus grease may seep during the initial operation
period or immediately after resumption of grease replenishment. If desiring to avoid contamination of
the surrounding area of the machine by grease, first perform seasoning or the like in advance, and
then wipe the seeping surplus grease.
A-906
Precautions on Use Roller Follower
[Handling]
(2) Dropping or hitting the Roller Follower may damage it. Giving an impact to it could also cause
[Lubrication]
(1) Some types of the Roller Follower do not contain grease depending on the model number. Care-
fully refer to A-906, and if the desired model does not contain grease, apply grease to the prod-
uct as necessary before using it. Lithium soap-based grease No. 2 is available as standard.
(2) Do not mix lubricants of different physical properties. In addition, replenish a lubricant also dur-
ing operation as necessary.
(3) We recommend applying a lubricant to the mating surface where the Roller Follower travels.
(2) Entrance of foreign material such as dust may cause damage or functional loss. Prevent foreign
material, such as dust and cutting chips, from entering the product.
(3) Roller Followers are designed for use under a radial load. Do not use the product under a thrust
load.
[Storage]
When storing the Roller Follower, enclose it in a package designated by THK and store it while
Roller Follower
A-907
A-908
Spherical Plain Bearing
General Catalog
Features of the Spherical Plain Bearing .. A-910 Model SB........................................... B-828
• Structure and features....................... A-910 Model SA1......................................... B-830
Types of the Spherical Plain Bearing ... A-910

Selecting a Spherical Plain Bearing .. A-911
Point of Design................................ A-916

Fit ...................................................... A-916
Permissible tilt angles ....................... A-917

Installation ......................................... A-918
Lubrication......................................... A-918
Contamination Protection.................. A-919
A-909
Features and Types Spherical Plain Bearing
Features of the Spherical Plain Bearing

Spherical Bearings models SB and SA1 are self-aligning plain bearings designed for heavy loads.
The inner and outer rings of these models use high-carbon chromium bearing steel that is hardened
and ground, are treated with phosphate coating, which is highly resistant to corrosion and wear, and
seized with molybdenum disulfide (MoS2).
The Spherical Plain Bearing is capable of receiving a large radial load and thrust loads in both direc-
tions. Furthermore, because of its high resistance to impact loads, the Spherical Plain Bearing is
optimal for low speed, heavy load rocking components such as the cylinder clevises or hinges of con-
struction and civil-engineering machinery and the suspensions of trucks.
Types of the Spherical Plain Bearing

Types and Features
Model SB Specification Table⇒B-828

The most popular type of Spherical Plain Bear-
ing in Japan, model SB has wide spherical con-
tact areas and is used as a bearing for heavy
loads. The outer ring is split at two points,
enabling the inner ring to be accommodated.
Model SB
Model SA1 Specification Table⇒B-830

This type of Spherical Plain Bearing is widely
used in Europe. The outer ring is split at one
point (outer rings with diameter of φ 100 or
thicker are split at two points), and the width and
thickness are smaller than model SB. Thus, this
model can be used in small spaces. Types
attached with highly dust-preventive dust seals
on both ends (model SA1 …UU) are also avail- Model SA1
able.
A-910
Point of Selection Spherical Plain Bearing
Selecting a Spherical Plain Bearing

When selecting a Spherical Plain Bearing, follow the instructions below while referring to the basic
0
dynamic load rating (C) and the basic static load rating (C0) indicated in the corresponding specifica-
tion table, as a measuring stick.
[Spherical Plain Bearing Service Life G]
The basic dynamic load rating (C) is used to calculate the service life when the bearing oscillates
under a load.
The basic dynamic load rating is calculated based on the contact surface pressure of the spherical
sliding section.
The Spherical Plain Bearing service life G is expressed in the total number of rocking motions until it
becomes impossible for the bearing to perform normal operation due to the increase in the radial
clearance or in the temperature of the bearing as a result of wear on the spherical sliding section.
Since the bearing service life is affected by various factors such as the material of the bearing, mag-
nitude and direction of the load, lubrication conditions and sliding speed, the calculated value can be
used as an empirical, practical value.
Table1
3 C 8
G = b1 • b2 • b3 • b4 • b5 • 10 b1 b2 b3
Da•β P
Load Regular
G : Bearing service life Type direction lubrication
Temperature ℃
(total number of rocking motions or
Alter- Not pro- Pro- – 30 +80 +150
total number of revolutions) Fixed
nating vided vided +80 +150 +180
C : Basic dynamic load rating (N) Sphe With
P : Equivalent radial load (N) rical out 1 5 0.08 1 1 1 0.7
b1 : Load direction factor (see Table1) Plain seal
Bear- With
b2 : Lubrication factor (see Table1) ing 1 5 0.08 1 1 — —
seal
b3 : Temperature factor (see Table1)
b4 : Dimension factor (see Fig.1)

b5 : Material factor (see Fig.2) Da 40 100 150 200 300
Da : Spherical diameter (mm)
b4 1 2 3 4 5
(see the specification table)
β : Oscillation half angle (degree) Fig.1 Dimension Factor
(for rotary motion, β=90° )
C/P 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 2 4 10 20 30
b5 0.3 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.4 2.0 2.8
Fig.2 Material Factor
A-911
[Equivalent Radial Load]
The Spherical Plain Bearing is capable of receiving a radial load and a thrust load simultaneously. If
the magnitude and direction of the load applied are constant, the equivalent radial load is obtained
from the following equation.
P = Fr + YFa
P : Equivalent radial load (N) Table2 Thrust Load Factor
Fr : Radial load (N) Fa/Fr≦ 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5

Fa : Trust load (N) Thrust load factor (Y) 0.8 1 1.5 2.5 3
Y : Thrust load factor (see Table2)
If the Spherical Plain Bearing is to be used under a stationary load or in slight rocking motion, select
a model using the basic static load rating (C0) as a guide. The basic static load rating refers to the
stationary load that the bearing can receive without damaging the bearing and without causing per-
manent deformation that would prevent smooth motion.
In general, set the safety factor at three or greater taking into account the rigidity of the shaft and the
housing.
C0
fS 3
P
C0 : Basic static load rating
P : Equivalent radial load
A-912
Point of Selection
Selecting a Spherical Plain Bearing
[pV Value]
The permissible sliding speed at which the Spherical Plain Bearing can be used varies depending on
the load, lubrication conditions and cooling status. The recommended pV value for continuous
motion under a load applied in a constant direction is calculated as follows.
pV 400 N/mm2•mm/sec

If the Spherical Plain Bearing performs adiabatic operation or the load direction changes, the heat
produced on the sliding surface easily radiates. Therefore, it is possible to set a higher pV value.
The contact surface pressure (p) of the Spherical Plain Bearing is obtained from the following equa-
tion.
P
p
Da•B
p : Contact surface pressure (N/mm2)
P : Equivalent radial load (N)
Da : Spherical diameter (see the specification table) (mm)
B : Outer ring width (see the specification table) (mm)
The sliding speed is calculated as follows.
π •Da •β•f
V
90 60
V : Sliding speed (mm/sec)
β : Oscillation half angle (degree)
f : Number of rocking motions per minute (min-1)
The Spherical Plain Bearing can be used at sliding speed of up to 100 mm/sec in oscillating motion,
or up to 300 mm/sec in rotary motion in favorable lubrication status.
[Example of Calculating a pV Value]
Assuming that model SB25 is used in a location where the shaft rotates 60 turns per minute at an angle of
40°(oscillation half angle : 20°) and the maximum varying load of 1,500 N is applied, determine whether the
model number is appropriate and calculate the service life under these conditions. Assume that the bearing

temperature is +80 ℃ or less and the product is regularly provided with sufficient lubrication. Calculate the pV
value and examine if the bearing size is appropriate.
The contact surface pressure (p) is calculated as follows.
P 1500 B: outer ring width of model SB25 = 18
p=
Da•B
=
36 × 18
= 2.31 N/mm2 （Da: spherical diameter of model SB25 = 36）
The sliding speed (V) is obtained from the following equation.
40
3.14 36 2 60
π •Da•β •f
V= = = 25.12 mm/sec
90 60 90 60
The pV value is calculated as follows.
pV=58.0N/mm2•mm/sec
Since both the pV value and the sliding speed (V) meet the requirements, model SB25 can be used.
Next, calculate the service life of the bearing (G) as follows.
3 C
G = b1 • b2 • b3 • b4 • b5 Da•β • × 108
P
3 15300
= 5 × 1 × 1 × 1 × 2.2 × × × 108 = 4.7 × 107 (min-1)
36 × 20 1500
A-913
Accuracy Standards
The dimensional tolerances of the Spherical Plain Bearing are defined as indicated in Table3.
Table3 Accuracy of the Spherical Plain Bearing Unit: μ m
Nominal dimension of the
Tolerance in inner diameter Tolerance in outer diameter Tolerance of the inner outer
inner diameter (d) and
(dm) (Dm) ring in width (B1, B)
outer diameter (D) (mm)
Above Or less Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower
10 18 0 –8 — — 0 – 120
18 30 0 – 10 0 –9 0 – 120
30 50 0 – 12 0 – 11 0 – 120
50 80 0 – 15 0 – 13 0 – 150
80 120 0 – 20 0 – 15 0 – 200
120 150 0 – 25 0 – 18 0 – 250
150 180 0 – 25 0 – 25 0 – 250
180 250 0 – 30 0 – 30 0 – 300
250 315 — — 0 – 35 0 – 350
315 400 — — 0 – 40 0 – 400
Note1) "dm" and "Dm" represent the arithmetic averages of the maximum and minimum diameters obtained in measuring the
inner and outer diameters at two points.
Note2) The dimensional tolerances of the inner and outer diameters are the values before they are surface treated.
Note3) The dimensional tolerance of the outer ring is the value before it is split.
Note4) Tolerances of the inner and outer diameters in width (B1, B) are assumed to be equal, and obtained from the nominal
dimension of the inner diameter of the inner ring.
Radial Clearance
Table4 shows radial clearances of the Spherical Plain Bearing.
Table4 Radial Clearances of the Spherical Plain Bearing
Unit: μ m
Berring inner diameter (d) (mm) Radial clearance

Above Or less Min. Max.
— 17 70 125
17 30 75 140
30 50 85 150
50 65 90 160
65 80 95 170
80 100 100 185
100 120 110 200
120 150 120 215
150 240 130 230
Note1) The radial clearance indicates the value before the
outer ring is split.
Note2) The axial clearance is approximately twice the radial
clearance.
A-914
Point of Selection
Radial Clearance
A-915
Point of Design Spherical Plain Bearing
Fit
The fitting between the Spherical Plain Bearing and the shaft or the housing is selected according to
0
the conditions. Table1 shows recommended values.

Table1 Recommended Fitting Values
Service condition Shaft Housing
Inner ring Normal load k6 H7

rotational load Indeterminate load m6 H7
Outer ring Normal load g6 M7

rotational load Indeterminate load h6 N7
Note1) If the product is to be installed so that the inner ring

rotates and the fitting with the shaft is to be clearance
fitting, harden the surface of the shaft in advance.
Note2) "N7" is recommended for light alloy housings.
[Shaft Designing]
If the inner ring is to be fit onto the shaft in loose fitting and the product is to be used under a heavy
load, the shaft may slip on the inner circumference of the inner ring. To prevent the slippage, the
shaft hardness must be 58 HRC or higher and the surface roughness must be 0.80 a or below.
A-916
Point of Design
Permissible Tilt Angles

The permissible tilt angle of the Spherical Plain Bearing varies according to the shaft shape as indi-
cated in Table2.
α3
α1 α2
Table2 Permissible Tilt Angles

Unit: degree Unit: degree
Permissible tilt angles Permissible tilt angles

Model No. Model No.
α1 α2 α3 α1 α 2Note α3
SB 12 5 7 18 SA1 12 8 11 (6) 25
SB 15 4 6 18 SA1 15 6 8 (5) 18
SB 20 3 4 14 SA1 17 7 10 (7) 23
SB 22 4 6 16 SA1 20 6 9 (6) 21
SB 25 4 5 16 SA1 25 6 7 (4) 18
SB 30 4 6 17 SA1 30 4 6 (4) 16
SB 35 4 5 14 SA1 35 5 6 (4) 16
SB 40 4 6 12 SA1 40 5 7 (4) 16
SB 45 4 5 13 SA1 45 6 7 (4) 16
SB 50 4 5 16 SA1 50 5 6 (4) 15

SB 55 4 6 16 SA1 60 5 6 (3) 14
SB 60 4 6 18 SA1 70 5 6 (4) 14
SB 65 4 5 16 SA1 80 4 6 (4) 14
SB 70 4 5 15 SA1 90 4 5 (3) 12
SB 75 4 5 18 SA1 100 5 7 (5) 14
SB 80 4 5 18 SA1 110 5 6 (4) 15
SB 85 4 6 16 SA1 120 4 6 (4) 15
SB 90 4 5 16 SA1 140 5 7 (5) 16
SB 95 4 5 17 SA1 160 6 8 (6) 13
SB 100 4 5 18 SA1 180 5 6 (5) 16
SB 110 4 5 16 SA1 200 6 7 (6) 13
SB 115 4 5 14 SA1 220 6 8 (6) 15
SB 120 4 6 15 SA1 240 6 8 (6) 17
SB 130 4 5 14 Note) The values in the parentheses apply to types attached
SB 150 4 5 12 with a seal.
A-917
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance Spherical Plain Bearing
Installation
(1) Do not use the product in the manner that the permissible tilting angle is exceeded since doing
0
so may damage the product.

(2) The Spherical Plain Bearing is designed for use under a radial load. Do not use the product if the
trust load component or the load component in the thrust direction exceeds 50% of the resultant
force consisting of the radial load and the thrust load.
(3) When installing the Spherical Plain Bearing, pay attention to the mounting orientation so that the
slit of the outer ring receives a minimum load.
[Temperature Range]
The permissible temperature range of the Spherical Plain Bearing is limited between -30℃ and 80℃
depending on the seal material and determined by the permissible temperature range of the grease
used.
Lubrication
The spherical sliding surface of the Spherical Plain Bearing is seized with a solid lubricant film of
molybdenum disulfide. This enables the Spherical Plain Bearing to be used over a relatively long
period without further lubrication under a static load, in low-speed rocking motion or in intermittent
rotary motion. However, it is generally necessary to replenish grease on a regular basis. If a heavy
load is applied, consider using lithium soap group grease containing molybdenum disulfide. The
inner and outer rings of the Spherical Plain Bearing have greasing holes as a means to facilitate the
flow of the lubricant inside the bearing.
[Lubrication Interval]
Since the Spherical Plain Bearing is delivered without being applied with a lubricant, it is necessary
to replenish an appropriate amount of grease after installing the Spherical Plain Bearing. We recom-
mend filling grease also to the space surrounding the Spherical Plain Bearing. It is also recommend-
able to shorten the lubrication interval in the start-up period in order to lighten the initial wear and
extend the service life.
The lubrication interval varies according to the magnitude of the load, frequency of the vibrations and
other conditions. Provide lubrication while referring to the values in Table1 as a guide.
Table1 Lubrication Interval
Type of load Required minimum lubrication interval

Unilateral load G/ 40
Fluctuating load G/ 180
G: Service life of the bearing (total number of rocking

motions or total number of revolutions)
A-918
Spherical Bearing model SA1 is provided with a seal designed to prevent humidity or other deleteri-
ous material from entering the bearing. This seal is effective in increasing the service life of the bear-
ing. The seal for Spherical Bearing model SA1 is made of oil-resistant synthetic rubber and has
double lips as the sealing element. These lips closely contact the spherical inner ring. The seal can
be used within the temperature range between -30 ℃ and 80 ℃ , and is highly resistant to wear and
capable of operating for a long period of time. If the product is used in an environment where sand or
soil matter may enter the bearing, the service life of the seal is shortened. We recommend lubricating
the product on a regular basis.
A-919
Precautions on Use Spherical Plain Bearing
[Handling]
0
(1) When installing model SA1 or model SB, they must not be disassembled before installation.
(2) Dropping or hitting the Spherical Plain Bearing may damage it.
Giving an impact to it could also cause damage to its function even if the product looks intact.
[Lubrication]
(1) For details of the lubrication, see A-918.
(2) Entrance of foreign material such as dust between the outer and inner rings may cause damage
or functional loss. Prevent foreign material, such as dust and cutting chips, from entering the
product.
[Storage]
When storing the Spherical Plain Bearing, avoid high temperature, low temperature and high humid-
ity.
A-920
Link Ball®
General Catalog
Features of the Link Ball ................... A-922 Model AL ........................................... B-834
• Structure and features....................... A-922 Model BL ........................................... B-836
• Alloy ............................................... A-925 Model RBL ........................................ B-838
• How Load Directions Are Called ......... A-927 Model RBI ......................................... B-840
• Pushing Load and Pulling Load .......... A-927 Model TBS ........................................ B-842
Performance Tests with the Link Ball... A-928
• Tensile Strength Test with Model AL10D A-928
• Durability Tests with Link Ball Model AL . A-930
• Durability Tests with Link Ball Model BL . A-932
Types of the Link Ball........................ A-934

Selecting a Link Ball.......................... A-936
Point of Design................................ A-937

Permissible tilt angles ....................... A-937
Installation ....................................... A-938

Example of Installation ...................... A-938
A-921
Features and Types Link Ball
Features of the Link Ball
Fig.1 Structure of Link Ball Model BL

With the Link Ball, a highly accurate bearing steel ball used in the spherical area is first encased in
the holder by die cast molding, and then is specially welded with the shank. This unique process
enables the mirror surface of the steel ball to be transferred or duplicated on the spherical surface
inside the holder to ensure full contact between the ball and the holder. As a result, smooth motion is
achieved with a minimum clearance.
A-922
Features and Types
[Compact Design]
Model AL has an adequately firm and yet extremely compact shape because of a highly balanced
design. Together with use of an A-1 alloy, a light-weight, compact design has been achieved. Thus,
this model is optimal for use in an automobile height sensor or transmission control.
[Achieves Sphericity of 0.001 mm]
The spherical surface of the shank ball is transferred on the inner surface of the holder while main-
taining the sphericity of the bearing steel ball. This allows smooth motion to be achieved with a mini-
mum clearance and provides favorable operability and feel to the link motion.
Sphericity: 0.001 mm
Sphericity of the spherical surface of the ball shank
VER.x HOR.x λc= mm

0.1mm
1μ m
0.2μ m
Roughness of the spherical surface of the ball shank
TOKYO SEIMITSU VER.x HOR.x

0.1mm
1μ m
0.4μ m
Cut sample of the spherical area of model BL

Link Ball
Roughness of the spherical surface of the holder
A-923
[Two Types of Holder Material]
Model AL uses the newly developed high
strength aluminum alloy “A-1 Alloy” (see A- 2α
925), which is light and highly resistant to wear.
Models BL, RBL and RBI use the proven, high
strength zinc alloy (see A-926). A
[High Lubricity]
Since models AL and BL and those models
A
attached with boots contain grease, they have
high lubricity and increased wear resistance.
[Large Hexagonal Bolt Seat]
The hexagonal bolt seat of the shank has the
same dimensions as the seating surface for
small hexagon head bolts in accordance with
automotive specifications. This prevents the
seating surface from sinking and ensures a sta- 14 12
ble link motion mechanism.
[Lightweight, High Strength]
Use of the A-1 Alloy enables the Link Ball to
achieve mechanical strength approximately
twice that of the commonly used aluminum die Model AL10 Model equivalent
to similar product
cast material ADC 12, or almost equal to the Model BL10
high strength zinc alloy, while maintaining alumi- A-A cross section
num alloys' advantages: lightweight and corro-
sion resistance. Jaw Span for Wrenching
[Equipped with a Boot for Protection against
Muddy Water]
Use of a boot with high trackability in the ball
shank prevents muddy water from entering the
spherical area even in a muddy atmosphere.
Accordingly, those types equipped with boots
are used also in outdoor applications and auto-
mobile parts under the chassis. For details, see
the muddy water test data (A-930 and A-931).
A-924
Features and Types
Alloy
[High Strength Aluminum Alloy“A-1 Alloy”]
“A-1 Alloy,”a newly developed high strength aluminum alloy, is an alloy with Al -Zn-Si3 being the
main components, is used in the holder of model AL.
z Features of the A-1 Alloy
• Achieves one of the highest strengths among the existing aluminum die cast alloys.
• Has yield strength approximately twice that of the commonly used aluminum die cast alloy (ADC
12).
• Has hardness equal to the high strength zinc alloy and achieves high wear resistance.
• Achieves specific gravity less than a half of the high strength zinc alloy to allow significant weight
saving.
• Highly corrosion resistance and can be used as an automotive part related to wheel control.
z Mechanical Properties
Tensile strength : 343 to 392 N/mm2
Tensile yield strength (0.2%) : 245 to 294 N/mm2
Compressive strength : 490 to 637 N/mm2
Compressive yield strength (0.2%) : 294 to 343 N/mm2
Charpy impact : 0.098 to 0.196 N-m/mm2
Elongation : 2 to 3 %
Hardness : 140 to 160 HV
z Physical Properties
Specific gravity :3
Melting point : 570℃
Specific heat : 793 J/(kg•k)
Linear expansion rate : 22×10-6
z Wear Resistance
The result of our test has proven that the wear resistance of the A-1 alloy is equivalent to the high
strength zinc alloy.
Rotation-and-rocking durability test between model AL10D (A-1 alloy) and model BL10D (high
strength zinc alloy)
<Test conditions> <Test result: change in clearance (mm)> Unit: mm
Item Description BL10D (high
Model No. AL10D (A-1 alloy)
Environment strength zinc alloy)
Normal temperature Perpendicu-
temperature 0.036 0.033
lar to the axis
Applied load ±1.9kN (perpendicular to the axis) (note)
Link Ball
Axial
Loading 0.052 0.045
0.6Hz direction
frequency
Kinematic
Rotation ± 20° Rocking ±20°
angle
No. of cycles 40 times/min. 40 times/min.
Total No. of
1,000,000 cycles
cycles
Note) For the load direction, see A-927.
A-925
[High Strength Zinc Alloy]
The high strength zinc alloy used in the holders of models BL, RBL, RBI and TBS has been devel-
oped as a bearing alloy by mixing Al , Cu, Mg, Be and Ti as well as zinc as the base component. It is
excellent in mechanical properties, seizure resistance and wear resistance.
z Composition
Unit: %
Item Description
Al 3 to 4
Cu 3 to 4
Mg 0.03 to 0.06
Be 0.02 to 0.06
Ti 0.04 to 0.12
Fatigue strength : 132 N/mm2×107 (Schenk bending test)
Elongation : 1 to 5%
Specific gravity : 6.8
Specific heat : 460 J/(kg•k)
z Wear Resistance
The wear resistance of the high strength zinc 80
alloy is superior to that of class-3 brass and
Wear loss (mg)
class-3 bronze, almost equal to that of class-2 60

Class-3 bronze
phosphor bronze. Class-3 brass
40
Amsler wear-tester
Test piece rotation speed : 185 min-1 20
Load : 392 N
Lubricant : Dynamo oil 0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Distance (km) (load:392N)
A-926
Features and Types
How Load Directions Are Called

Regardless of the shape, the direction of the load applied to the Link Ball is called "axial direction" if it
is parallel to the axis of the ball shank, and "perpendicular-to-axis direction" if it is perpendicular to
the axis.
Pushing Load and Pulling Load

Of the loads applied in the axial direction, the load in the direction of the ball shank being pressed
toward the holder is called "pushing load" and the load in the direction of the ball shank being pulled
from the holder is called "pulling load."
Axial direction
Pushing load Pulling load
Ball shank
Holder
Perpendicular to the axis
Link Ball
A-927
Performance Tests with the Link Ball
Tensile Strength Test with Model AL10D
[Test Method]
Place model AL10D on an Amsler universal testing machine as shown in Fig.3, then apply a load
perpendicular to the axis to measure the tensile break load.
[Test Result]
All samples are broken in the shank, indicating that the holder has sufficient strength.
Breaking load
Sample No. Broken point
(kN)
1 18.82 A
2 18.72 A
3 18.6 A F
4 18.78 A
5 18.45 A
6 18.95 A
7 18.65 A
8 18.91 A
A
9 18.55 A
10 18.5 A
X 18.693 —
R 0.5 —
Fig.3
A-928
Features and Types
Link Ball
A-929
Durability Tests with Link Ball Model AL
[Purpose of the Tests]
The tests were conducted to identify the durability of Link Ball model AL while assuming that it is
used for automobile suspensions.
[Tested Product]
Link Ball model AL10D
[Test Items, Test Conditions and Test Results]
Test conditions
Test item Rotation or Total num- Service
Applied ber of rev-
rocking Frequency olutions or environ- Load conditions, etc.
load
angle time ment
Rotation θ
1960N Rotation Rotation:
Load angle: 25 α
Rotation- direction: 500,000 Normal Rocking
θ =±5° times/min. Load
and-rocking Perpendic- cycles temper-
Rocking Rocking:
durability ular to the (rocking) ature
axis (one angle: 75
direction) θ=±10° times/min.
Load
± 1960N N
Load – Load + +1960
direction: 1 million Normal
Fatigue 180
Perpendic- — cycles temper- 0
durability test ular to the times/min.
(rocking) ature
axis (both – 1960
directions)
3 cycles/sec.
Discharge muddy Rotation
water to the boot θ
Muddy-water Rotation Rotation: z Discharge rate: 1
α
rotation-and- angle: 25 l /min.
500,000 Normal z Contaminates
rocking dura- θ=±12° times/min. Rocking
— cycles temper- 10% of JIS Class-
bility (identify Rocking Rocking:
(rocking) ature 8 Kanto loamy
sealability of angle: 75
the boot) θ=±12° times/min. layer powder
96 hours −30℃ Left standing

— —
Boot weath- 96 hours 70℃ Left standing
—
ering test Rotation
60 144
angle: 40℃ z Ozone concentration: 80pphm
times/min. hours
θ=±10°
z Salt-water concentration: 5%
Salt-water z Spray solution temperature: 33 to 37℃
200
spray resis- — — — 35℃ z Spray pressure: 0.098MPa
hours
tance test z Following spray test, apply pushing load to
measure strength
A-930
Features and Types
[Comprehensive Evaluation]
The results of the durability tests indicate that Link Ball model AL has sufficient strength, wear resis-
tance, corrosion resistance and boot sealability.
This is attributable to the superb characteristics of the newly developed alloy A-1 and the effect of
THK's unique manufacturing process. Thus,THK Link Ball model AL provides a high level of perfor-
mance as a lightweight component.
Test Result Evaluation
Change in clearance (mm)

Sample No.
Perpendicular to the axis Axial direction z Despite harsh test conditions where complex link
motion was required under an axial load, no anomaly
(1) 0.038 0.02 was observed in the samples after the test, and the
(2) 0.04 0.03 abrasion loss was minimal and consistent among the
samples. This indicates that the Link Ball has superb
(3) 0.042 0.04 wear resistance and stable quality.
(4) 0.038 0.03
z Appearance
No anomaly was observed including fracture of the z No anomaly in appearance or function was observed in
samples. the sample after the fatigue durability test involving 1
z Motion million cycles of rocking. This indicates that the product
The ball shank was capable of smoothly oscillating is sufficiently capable of continuously operating and has
after the test, without any anomaly such as heavy superb wear resistance.
and jerky motion.
z Motion
The ball shank was capable of smoothly oscillating
after the test, without any anomaly such as heavy
and jerky motion. z No anomaly in motion was observed in the sample, and
z Muddy water penetration no muddy water penetration into the boot or no grease
No muddy water penetration was observed in deterioration was found after the test. This verifies that
visual inspection with the boot removed. the boot has reliable sealability.
z Boot status
No breakage of the boot or abnormal wear of the lip
was observed.
z No anomaly was observed in the sample after the test.

z Boot status
The fact that no muddy water penetration into the boot
The boot showed no harmful ozone crack and
or no grease deterioration was found in the sample after
maintained its pre-test status, including softness,
Link Ball
the above durability test verifies that the boot has reli-
after the test.
able weatherability.
z Appearance
No erosion was observed in the holder, and no
z No erosion-based deterioration of the sample was
other anomaly including breakage was found
observed in function and performance.
either.
This demonstrates that the A-1 alloy has superb corro-
z Appearance
sion resistance.
The ball shank was capable of smoothly oscillating
after the test.
A-931
Durability Tests with Link Ball Model BL
[Purpose of the Tests]
The tests were conducted to identify the performance difference between THK Link Ball model BL
and an equivalent product of a competitor. As a result, model BL has been used in joints for transmis-
sion control units of automobiles, trucks and buses and for steering mechanisms of agricultural trac-
tors.
[Tested Product, Test Items, Test Conditions and Test Results]
Test conditions
Tested
Test Rotation Total num- Service
model Applied
item or ber of rev-
No. olutions or environ- Load conditions, etc.
Frequency
load rocking
angle time ment
The loading diagram is as follows.

Load: N 1 cycle 1.5 sec.
Compar- +1760
ison of
THK ±1760N Rotation 0
Rotation- Link Ball (load angle:
Normal
and-rock- model direction: θ=±20° 40
ing temper-
BL10D perpen- Rocking times/min. –1760
durability ature
and dicular to angle:
compet- the axis) α=±20° The motion direction is as follows:
itor's θ θ
product Rotation Rocking
Low-
tempera- Low-temperature retention time: 280 hours
ture −30℃
rotation Motion in the rotational direction
1,000,000
durability
cycles
High
tempera- THK High temperature retention time: 280 hours
ture Link 100℃
Rotation Motion in the rotational direction
rotation Ball
durability model angle:
θ=±30°
BL10D
only ±1225N Motion: rotational direction and oscillation on a
Muddy- (load separate basis
water
rotation direction: 60 Muddy water discharge pattern
durability perpen- times/min. Muddy water concentration: 5 Wt% of salt and
dicular to dust each in 1 liter of water
the axis) Discharge direction: against the boot lip
Compar- Normal Discharge pressure: 5 kg/cm3
ison of temper-
THK ature
Muddy- Link Ball
Rocking
water model
rocking BL10D angle: Muddy water Dry
durability and α=±20° (5Hr) (19Hr)
compet- 1 cycle ×23 cycles
itor's (24Hr) (552Hr)
product
A-932
Features and Types
[Comprehensive Evaluation]
As a result of comparing THK Link Ball model BL10D and a competitor's product in representative
durability tests, it is demonstrated that model BL10D is superior in strength and wear resistance of
the holder and sealability of the boot.
These features are achieved through THK's unique manufacturing process for the holder and the
shank, the material used, the structure of upper and lower grease pockets on the spherical area and
the development of a highly sealable boot.
Test Result
Change in
Sample clearance (μ m) Evaluation
Perpen- Conditions of the holder, etc.
No. Axial
dicular to
the axis direction
(1) 26 42 The shank was capable of

z Even in complex link motion, THK model
THK smoothly rotating after the
BL10D demonstrated higher durability and
model 1-million cycle test, and
wear resistance of the holder than competi-
BL10D capable of continuously
tor's product.
(2) 25 40 operating.
Broke in the holder

neck after 8,600
(1) cycles
Wear and damage were z The abrasion loss of the competitor's product
Com- 154 60 observed in the holder's immediately before the breakage of the
petitor's
Broke in the holder spherical area in approx. holder was 6 times greater than THK model
product neck after 151,300 150,000-cycle operation. BL10D (perpendicular to the axis).
(2) cycles
62 20
(1) 63 65 The boot did not show a z This indicates that THK model BL10D is suf-
crack or the like at low tem- ficiently capable of operating in outdoor
(2) 56 59 perature applications in cold climates.
(1) 79 84 The holder did not show

z This indicates that THK model BL10D is suf-
abnormal wear and the boot
THK ficiently capable of operating in hot areas of
did not show thermal deteri-
model (2) 74 78 a truck engine.
oration at high temperature.
BL10D
(1) 48 51 z This indicates that THK model BL10D is suf-
ficiently capable of operating in environ-
(2) 57 63 No muddy-water penetra-
ments subject to muddy water such as
tion that may cause wear
trucks, construction vehicles and agricultural
Link Ball
(1) 32 38 was observed.

machines since the sealing effect of the boot
(2) 35 42 prevents penetration of muddy water.
(1) 240 105 z The competitor's product cannot be used in

Muddy water penetrated the environments subject to muddy water since
Com-
boot, the spherical area chipping or the like may occur in such envi-
petitor's
showed chipping and the ronments. In addition, wear of the spherical
product
boot had cuts. area reached 0.24 mm, 7.4 times greater
(2) 246 107 than THK model BL10D.
A-933
Types of the Link Ball
Types and Features
Model AL Specification Table⇒B-834

The holder is connected in perpendicular to the
shank, which comprises a male thread specially
welded with a highly accurate steel ball. With a
grease pocket formed on the top and bottom of
the spherical area, this model achieves high
lubricity and high wear resistance.
Use of the A-1 alloy in the holder significantly
reduces the weight.
Model AL
“A-1 Alloy,” a high strength aluminum alloy

newly developed for the Link Ball, has yield
strength approximately twice that of the com-
monly used aluminum die cast material ADC 12, A-1 alloy Tensile
and its strength and wear resistance are equiva- strength
lent to the high strength zinc alloy. 0.2% yield
ADC12 strength
With its specific gravity less than that of the high
strength zinc alloy, model AL is optimal as an
automotive part that requires lightweight, high 100 200 300 400 500
strength, high corrosion resistance and high Tensile strength (N/mm2)
wear resistance.
Fig.4 Tensile Strength and Yield Strength of THK A-1 Alloy
and ADC 12
Model BL Specification Table⇒B-836

A compact type of model RBL, this model's
holder made of the high strength-zinc alloy is
connected in perpendicular to the shank, which
is incorporated with a ball.
With a grease pocket formed on the top and bot-
tom of the spherical area, this model achieves
high lubricity and high wear resistance.
Model BL
A-934
Features and Types
Types of the Link Ball
Model RBL Specification Table⇒B-838

The holder made of the high strength zinc alloy
is connected in perpendicular to the shank,
which is incorporated with a ball.
Since grease is contained in the boot, this
model achieves high lubricity and high wear
resistance.
Model RBL
Model RBI Specification Table⇒B-840

With this Link Ball model, the high strength zinc
alloy is used in its holder and the mounting bolt
and the holder are arranged on the same axis,
allowing this model to receive both a compres-
sive load and a pulling load.
Since grease is contained in the boot, this
model achieves high lubricity and high wear
resistance.
Model RBI
Model TBS Specification Table⇒B-842

The rolled thread on the circumference of the
outer ring allows this model to easily be
mounted on the housing. Simply by tightening
the screw, the user can achieve play-free, firm
installation.
Since the coating area of sphere is large, the
Link Ball
model is capable of receiving a large axial load.
Model TBS
A-935
Point of Selection Link Ball
Selecting a Link Ball

The selected bearing must meet both the permissible load obtained from equation (1) and the
0
dynamic load capacity obtained from equation (2).

[Permissible Load P]
The yield-point strength indicated in the specification tables refers to the mechanical strength of the
bearing. With models AL, BL and RBL, the yield point strength indicates the strength when a load is
applied perpendicular to the ball shank axis. With model RBI, it indicates the strength when an axial
load is applied to the holder in the shank axis direction.
Table1 Safety Factor (fS)
Type of load Lower limit of fS

Constant load in a constant direction 2 to 3
Fluctuating load in a constant direction 3 to 5
Load in varying directions 5 to 8
According to the type of the load, select a bearing that satisfies the following equation from a
mechanical strength's viewpoint.
Pk
P …………(1)
fS
P : Permissible Load (N)

Pk : Yield-point strength (N)
fS : Safety factor (see Table1)
[Dynamic Load Capacity Cd]
The dynamic load capacity (Cd) refers to the upper limit of load that the spherical area of the Link Ball
can receive without showing seizure while the Link Ball is rotating or oscillating. The dynamic load
capacity is obtained from the following approximation formula using the static load capacity (CS) (note)
indicated in the dimensional table.
CS
Cd = 3 …………(2)
n
Cd : Dynamic load capacity (N)
Cs : Static load capacity (N)
Note) Static load capacity (CS) refers to the value obtained by multiplying the projected area on the spherical section by the
permissible surface pressure, and is used to obtain the dynamic load capacity.
A-936
Point of Design Link Ball

The permissible tilting angles of Link Ball models are indicated in the corresponding specification
0
tables.
Note) If the permissible tilt angle is exceeded, it may cause serious damage to the holder or the boot. Be sure to use the Link
Ball within its permissible tilt angle.
Link Ball
A-937
Installation Link Ball
Example of Installation
[Comparison of THK Link Ball and the Conventional Rod End]
0
Washer
Shaft
Flange
THK model BL Conventional Rod End model PHS
z Sine it has a shaft, model BL can easily be installed (especially useful for rod assembly).
z Because of the improved shape of the boot lip, the spherical area is protected from muddy water
even in a muddy atmosphere.
z Since it contains grease, it can be used without further lubrication. (with the boot attached)
z Unlike the conventional type, which has a clearance between the shaft and the inner circumfer-
ence of the inner ring and cannot be fixed completely, model BL has minimum distortion and high
rigidity since the shank is integrated with the ball.
[Examples of Installing Model RBI]
Joint for cylinder end metal fitting

Force
Suspending a light object
Connecting a rod in the axial direction

Force Force
Force
Rotation support
Rotation
A-938
Precautions on Use Link Ball
[Temperature Range]
0
The temperature range of the Link Ball series is basically between -20℃ and 80℃. If the service tem-
perature exceeds this range, contact THK(see examples of testing the product at temperature other
than the above temperature range on A-930 to A-933)
[Handling]
Dropping or hitting the Link Ball may damage it. Giving an impact to it could also cause functional
damage to it even if the product looks intact.
[Lubrication]
(1) All Link Ball models except model TBS contain lithium soap-based grease in their boots and can
be used without further greasing. For model TBS and those models without boot, apply grease
to the spherical section as necessary.
(3) Entrance of foreign material such as dust between the holder and the inner ring may cause dam-
age or functional loss. Prevent foreign material, such as dust and cutting chips, from entering the
product.
(4) Models AL, BL and RBL are designed for use under a load in the direction perpendicular to the
axis, while models RBI and TBS are designed for use under an axial load. Take this into account
when selecting a model.
[Storage]
When storing the Link Ball, avoid high temperature, low temperature and high humidity.
Link Ball
A-939
A-940
Rod End
General Catalog
Features of the Rod End ................... A-942 Model PHS (Female Threading Type) . B-846
• Features ......................................... A-942 Model RBH (Die Cast, Low Price Type) .. B-848
• Special Bearing Alloy ........................ A-942 Model NHS-T (No Lubrication Type). B-850
Performance Test with the Rod End . A-944 Model POS (MaleThread Type) ........ B-852
Types of the Rod End ....................... A-945 Model NOS-T (No Lubrication,
• Types and Features .......................... A-945 Male Thread Type) ........................ B-854
Model PB (Standard Type)................ B-856
Point of Selection............................ A-948 Model PBA (Die Cast Type) .............. B-857
Selecting a Rod End ......................... A-948 Model NB-T (No Lubrication Type) ... B-858
Model HS (No Lubrication,
Point of Design................................ A-949 Corrosion-resistant Type) .............. B-860
Permissible tilt angles ....................... A-949 Model HB (No Lubrication Type)....... B-862
Installation ....................................... A-950

Installation ......................................... A-950
A-941
Features and Types Rod End
Features of the Rod End

Features
The Rod End is a self-aligning plain bearing that uses a spherical inner ring which has the same level
of accuracy and hardness as bearing steel balls. With the combination of a spherical inner ring
whose sliding surface is mirror-finished and a rationally designed holder, the Rod End ensures play-
free, extremely smooth rotation and oscillation.
Special Bearing Alloy

[High Strength Zinc Alloy]
The high strength zinc alloy, developed as an alloy for bearings, is composed of Al , Cu, Mg, Be and
Ti as well as zinc as the base. It is excellent in mechanical properties, seizure resistance and wear
resistance.
z Composition
Unit: %
Item Description
Al 3 to 4
Cu 3 to 4
Mg 0.03 to 0.06
Be 0.02 to 0.06
Ti 0.04 to 0.12
Fatigue strength : 132 N/mm2×107 (Schenk bending test)
Elongation : 1 to 5%
A-942
Features and Types
Features of the Rod End
Specific gravity : 6.8
Specific heat : 460 J/ (kg•k)
z Wear Resistance
The wear resistance of the high strength zinc 80
alloy is superior to that of class-3 brass and THK high strength zinc alloy
Wear loss (mg)

class-3 bronze, almost equal to that of class-2 60
phosphor bronze. Class-3 bronze
Class-3 brass
40
Amsler wear-tester
Test piece rotation speed : 185 min-1
20
Load : 392 N
Lubricant : Dynamo oil Class-2 phosphor bronze
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Distance (km) (load:392N)
Rod End
A-943
Performance Test with the Rod End
This test has been conducted to identify the difference in performance between THK Rod End model
HS and an equivalent product by a competitor.
[Wear Test Conditions]
Item Description
THK: Model HS8
Subject Rod End Stainless steel model equivalent
of the above
Type of test Rocking test
Applied load ± 1,180 N in the radial direction
Kinematic angle Oscillation angle: 2θ=40°(±20°)
Lubrication No lubrication
Number of cycles per minute 60opm
Total number of cycles 1 million cycles
Bench testing machine
Testing equipment
(normal temperature)
The applied load diagram is shown below. The kinematic angle is shown below.
Load (N) 2θ
1180
Time
0
−1180
1 cycle 2 cycles
Rocking test
[Result of the Wear Test]
Table2 Change in the Spherical Clearance Unit: mm
0.3
Abrasion loss after 1-million-cycle test
Radial clearance (mm)
Model Number Rocking test

Equivalent model fractured
No. of times Radial direction Axial direction
Initial stage 0.2
0.008 0.01
(at start-up)
HS 8 1 million
0.035 0.075
cycles
Change 0.027 0.065 0.1
Initial stage
0.005 0.005
(at start-up) THK HS 8
Stainless 40,000
steel 0.22 0.2
cycles 0 （×104）
model
Change after 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
equivalent
of the 40,000 0.215 0.065 Number of repeated rocking motions (number of times)
above cycles
Note: The holder is elongated and fractured Fig.2 Wear Diagram
after 76,300 cycles.
(1) Although model HS8 withstood the repeated dura- (2) The result shows that the increase in wear of
bility test with an applied load of ±1,180 N and the model HS8 in the radial direction since the initial
total number of cycles being 1 million, the holder wear (approximately 100,000 cycles) was mini-
of the stainless steel equivalent model was elon- mal.
gated and fractured after only 76,300 cycles.
A-944
Features and Types
Types of the Rod End

Types and Features
Type Provided with a Female Threading - Model PHS Specification Table⇒B-846

With model PHS, a special copper alloy with
high conformability is inserted between the
chromate treatment steel holder and the spheri-
cal inner ring in which only the circumference of
the spherical area is hard chrome plated. This
structure ensures high rigidity, high wear resis-
tance and high corrosion resistance.
The grease nipple on the holder allows grease Model PHS
to be applied to the sliding surface as neces-
sary.
Die Cast, Low Price Type - Model RBH Specification Table⇒B-848

This model is a high-accuracy, low cost rod end
in which the spherical inner ring serves as the
core and the holder is formed by die casting.
The holder is made of a high strength zinc alloy
(see A-942), which is superb in mechanical
properties and bearing characteristics.
Model RBH
No Lubrication Type - Model NHS-T Specification Table⇒B-850

This no lubrication rod end uses self-lubricating
synthetic resin formed between the steel holder
and the spherical inner ring.
Since the clearance on the sliding surface is
minimized, an accurate link motion is achieved.
Model NHS-T
Male thread Type - Model POS Specification Table⇒B-852

Rod End
This model is a highly rigid rod end that is basi-

cally the same as the female threading type
model PHS, but has a male thread on the holder
end.
Model POS
A-945
No Lubrication, Male thread Type - Model NOS-T Specification Table⇒B-854
This model is a no lubrication rod end that is
basically the same as the female threading type
model NHS-T, but has a male thread on the
holder end.
Model NOS-T
Standard Type - Model PB Specification Table⇒B-856

With model PB, a special copper alloy with high
conformability is inserted between the steel
outer ring and the spherical inner ring in which
only the spherical area is hard chrome plated.
This structure makes this model a high rigid
Spherical Plain Bearing with high corrosion
resistance and high wear resistance.
The oil groove and the greasing hole on the Model PB
outer ring allow grease to be applied to the slid-
ing surface as necessary.
Die Cast Type - Model PBA Specification Table⇒B-857

This model is a high-accuracy, low cost Spheri-
cal Plain Bearing in which the spherical inner
ring serves as the core and the outer ring is
formed by die casting.
The outer ring is made of a high strength zinc
alloy (see A-942), which is superb in bearing
characteristics.
Model PBA
No Lubrication Type - Model NB-T Specification Table⇒B-858

This no lubrication bearing uses self-lubricating
synthetic resin formed between the steel outer
ring and the spherical inner ring.
Model NB-T
A-946
Features and Types
[Build to Order]
No Lubrication, Corrosion-resistant Type - Model HS Specification Table⇒B-860
This no lubrication Spherical Plain Bearing uses
a special fluorine sheet adhering to the holder's
spherical area. The holder is made of an alumi-
num alloy.
This product is built to order. Contact THK for
details.
Model HS
[Build to Order]
No Lubrication Type - Model HB Specification Table⇒B-862
This no lubrication Spherical Plain Bearing uses
a special fluorine sheet adhering to the outer
ring's spherical area.
This product is built to order. Contact THK for
details.
Model HB
Rod End
A-947
Point of Selection Rod End
Selecting a Rod End

[Permissible Load P]
0
The static load capacity (Cs) indicated in the specification tables, is presented as a guide for the
mechanical strength of the Rod End. Select a bearing while taking into account the safety factor (fS)
indicated in Table1 according to the type of the load.
Table1 Safety Factor (fS)
Type of load Lower limit of fS

Constant load in a constant direction 2 to 3
Fluctuating load in a constant direction 3 to 5
Load in varying directions 5 to 8
According to the type of load, select a bearing that satisfies the following equation from a mechanical
strength's viewpoint.
CS
P ・
・・・
・・・
・・
（1）
fS
P : Permissible Load (N)
CS : Static load capacity (N)
fS : Safety factor (see Table1)
[Dynamic Load Capacity Cd]
The dynamic load capacity refers to the upper limit of load that the spherical area can receive without
showing seizure while the Rod End is rotating or oscillating. The dynamic load capacity is obtained
from the following approximation formula using the static load capacity (CS) (note 1) indicated in the
specification table.
Cs
Cd 3 ・
・・・
・・・
・・
（2）
n
Cd : Dynamic load capacity (N)

CS : Static load capacity (N)
The selected bearing must meet both the permissible load obtained from equation (1) and the
dynamic load capacity obtained from equation (2).
Note1) Static load capacity (Cs) refers to the value obtained by multiplying the projected area on the spherical section by the
permissible surface pressure, and is used to obtain the dynamic load capacity.
A-948
Point of Design Rod End

The permissible tilt angles α 1, α 2 and α 3 of the Rod End are indicated in Table1.
0
α3
α1 α2
Table1 Permissible Tilt Angles
Permissible tilt angles

Model No.
α1 α2 α3
NHS 3T, NOS 3T 8 10 42
NHS 4T, NOS 4T 9 11 35
PHS 5, RBH 5, NHS 5T, POS 5, NOS 5T, PB 5, PBA 5 8 13 30
PHS 14, RBH 14, NHS 14T, POS 14, NOS 14T, PB 14, PBA 14, NB 14T 10 16 24
PHS 25, POS 25, PB 25 9 15 23
PHS 30, POS 30, PB 30 10 17 23
Rod End
A-949
Installation Rod End
Installation
Please note that the Rod End is not capable of receiving a thrust load indicated in Fig.1.
0
Thrust load
Thrust load
Radial load
Radial load
Fig.1 Examples of Installing the Rod End
A-950
Precautions on Use Rod End
[Service Temperature]
0
If any of models RBH, PBA, HS and HB, all of which use the high strength zinc alloy and an alumi-
num alloy in the holder and the outer ring, and of models NHS-T, NOS-T and NB-T, which use syn-
thetic-resin bushes, is to be used at temperature of 80 ℃ or higher, or receives an impact at low
temperature, contact THK.
[Handling]
Dropping or hitting the Rod End may damage it. Giving an impact to it could also cause damage to its
function even if the product looks intact.
[Lubrication]
All Rod End models except lubrication-free types must be greased before being used (lithium soap-
based grease No. 2 is recommended). When greasing the Rod End before using it, do not mix lubri-
cants of different physical properties. In addition, replenish a lubricant also during operation as nec-
essary.
(3) Entrance of foreign material such as dust between the holder and the inner ring may cause dam-
age or functional loss. Prevent foreign material, such as dust and cutting chips, from entering the
product.
(4) The Rod End is designed for use under a radial load. Do not use the product under a thrust
load.
[Storage]
When storing the Rod End, avoid high temperature, low temperature and high humidity.
Rod End
A-951
A-952
General Catalog
Lubrication....................................... A-954 Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table.. B-863

Types of Lubricants........................... A-954 Grease Gun Unit MG70 .................... B-864
• Grease Lubrication ........................... A-955 Special Plumbing Fixtures................. B-865
• Oil Lubrication .................................. A-955 Grease nipple.................................... B-866
Lubrication under Special Environments . A-956
Lubrication Methods.......................... A-957
• Manual Lubrication ........................... A-957
• Forced Lubrication Method ................ A-957
Lubrication Accessory Series for LM Systems .... A-958
• THK Original Grease ........................ A-958
• AFA Grease .................................... A-959
• AFB-LF Grease ................................ A-960
• AFC Grease .................................... A-961
• AFE-CA Grease ............................... A-963
• AFF Grease..................................... A-965
• AFG Grease .................................... A-968
• Grease Gun Unit MG70 ..................... A-970
• Special Plumbing Fixtures ................. A-970
• Grease nipple .................................. A-970
A-953
Lubrication Accessories for Lubrication
When using an LM system, it is necessary to provide effective lubrication. Without lubrication, the
rolling elements or the raceway may be worn faster and the service life may be shortened.
A lubricant has effects such as the following.
(1) Minimizes friction in moving elements to prevent seizure and reduce wear.
(2) Forms an oil film on the raceway to decrease stress acting on the surface and extend rolling
fatigue life.
(3) Covers the metal surface to prevent rust formation.
conditions.
Types of Lubricants
LM systems mainly use grease or sliding surface oil for their lubricants.
The requirements that lubricants need to satisfy generally consist of the following.
(1) High oil film strength
(2) Low friction
(3) High wear resistance
(4) High thermal stability
(5) Non-corrosive
(6) Highly anti-corrosive
(7) Minimal dust/water content
(8) Consistency of grease must not be altered to a significant extent even after it is repeatedly
stirred.
For lubricants that meet these requirements, see A-955.
A-954
Lubrication
Types of Lubricants
Grease Lubrication
Greasing intervals vary depending on the conditions and environments. For normal use, we recom-
mend greasing the system approximately every 100 km of travel distance.
Normally, replenish grease of the same group from the grease nipple or greasing hole provided on
the LM system. Mixing different types of grease may deteriorate the system's performance, such as
increased consistency.

AFA Grease (THK) see A-959
AFB-LF Grease (THK) see A-960
AFC Grease (THK) see A-961
AFE-CA Grease (THK) see A-963
Lithium-based grease (JIS No. 2) AFF Grease (THK) see A-965
Grease
Urea-based grease (JIS No. 2) AFG Grease (THK) see A-968
Albania Grease No.2 (Showa Shell Sekiyu)
Daphne Exponex Grease No.2 (Idemitsu)
or equivalent
* Recommended greases vary according to the conditions and environment. See A-958 to A-969 for details.
Oil Lubrication
LM systems that require oil lubrication are shipped with only anti-rust oil applied. When placing an
order, specify the required lubricant oil. If the LM system is to be mounted other than in horizontal ori-
entation, part of the raceway may be poorly lubricated. Therefore, be sure to inform us of the mount-
ing orientation of the LM system. (For details on mounting orientations, see A-58.)
z The amount of oil to be supplied varies with stroke length. For a long stroke, increase the lubrica-
tion frequency or the amount of oil so that an oil film reaches the stroke end of the raceway.
z In environments where a liquid coolant is spattered, the lubricant will be mixed with the coolant,
and this can result in the lubricant being emulsified or washed away, causing significantly
degraded lubrication performance. In such settings, apply a lubricant with high viscosity (kinematic
viscosity: approx. 68 cst) and high emulsification-resistant, and adjust the lubrication frequency or
the amount of the feed lubricant.
For machine tools and similar devices that are subject to heavy loads and require high rigidity and
operate at high speed, it is advisable to apply oil lubrication. Accessories for Lubrication
z Make sure that lubrication oil normally discharges from the ends of your lubrication piping, i.e., the
oiling ports that connect to your LM system.

Super Multi 32 to 68 (Idemitsu)
Vactra No.2S (ExxonMobile)
Sliding surface oil or turbine oil
Oil DT Oil (ExxonMobile)
ISOVG32 to 68
Tonner Oil (Showa Shell Sekiyu)
or equivalent
A-955
Lubrication under Special Environments
For use under special conditions, such as continual vibrations, clean room, vacuum, low temperature
and high temperature, normal grease may not be used in some cases. For lubricants that meet such
conditions, contact THK.
Table1 Lubricants Used under Special Environments
Service environment Lubricant characteristics Brand name

AFG Grease(THK) see A-968
AFA Grease(THK) see A-959
High-speed moving Grease with low torque and low heat
parts generation NBU15(NOK Kluba)
Multemp (Kyodo Yushi)
or equivalent
Fomblin Grease (Solvay Solexis)
Fluorine based vacuum grease or oil Fomblin Oil (Solvay Solexis)
Vacuum (vapor pressure varies by brand) Barrierta IEL/V (NOK Kluba)
Note 1
Isoflex(NOK Kluba)
Krytox (Dupont)
AFE-CA Grease(THK) see A-963
Clean room Grease with very low dust generation
AFF Grease(THK) see A-965
Environments subject to
microvibrations or Grease that easily forms an oil film and
AFC Grease(THK) see A-961
microstrokes, which may has high fretting resistance
cause fretting corrosion
Highly anti-corrosive, refined mineral oil
or synthetic oil that forms a strong oil
Environments subject to Super Multi 68 (Idemitsu)
film and is not easily emulsified or
a spattering coolant such Vactra No.2S (ExxonMobile)
washed away by coolant
as machine tools or equivalent
Water-resistant grease
Note 2
Note1) When using a vacuum grease, be sure that some brands have starting resistances several times greater than ordinary
lithium-based greases.
Note2) In an environment subject to a spattering water-soluble coolant, some brands of intermediate viscosity significantly
decrease their lubricity or do not properly form an oil film. Check the compatibility between the lubricant and the cool-
ant.
Note3) Do not mix greases with different physical properties.
A-956
Lubrication
Lubrication Methods
Lubrication Methods
There are roughly three methods of lubricating LM systems: manual lubrication using a grease gun
or manual pump; forced oiling with the aid of an automatic pump; and oil-bath lubrication.
Manual Lubrication
Generally, grease is replenished periodically, fed through a grease nipple provided on the LM sys-
tem, using a grease gun. (Fig.1)
For systems that have many locations to be lubricated, establish a centralized piping system and
periodically provide grease from a single point using a manual pump. (Fig.2)
Fig.1 Lubrication Using a Grease Gun Fig.2 Lubrication through a Centralized Piping System
Note) When a centralized piping system is used, lubricant may not reach the pipe end due to the viscous resistance inside the
pipe. Select the right type of grease while taking into account the consistency of the grease and the pipe diameter.
Forced Lubrication Method

In this method, a given amount of lubricant is forcibly fed at a given interval. Normally, the lubricant is
not collected after use. (Fig.3)
Although a special lubrication system using a piping or the like needs to be designed, this method
reduces the likelihood of forgetting to replenish lubricant.
This method is used mainly for oil lubrication. If using grease, it is necessary to examine the appro-
priate piping diameter and the required grease consistency.
Fig.3 Forced Lubrication Method
A-957
Lubrication Accessory Series for LM Systems
THK provides a wide array of lubrication accessories such as grease, grease guns, grease nipples
and plumbing fixtures available for various applications. (A-959 to A-970)
THK Original Grease

THK provides various types of THK original greaseneeded for the lubrication of LM systems. They
are available for various conditions and environments.
[Table for Grease Selection]
Refer to the table below that allows you to select a type of grease according to the application of the
LM system.
Also note that the color of the decorative package varies according to the type (both 70 g and 400 g).
Name of grease AFA Grease AFB-LF Grease AFC Grease AFE-CA Grease AFF Grease AFG Grease
High-speed/ Grease for Grease for Grease for
Long service All-purpose
Features micro-vibra- clean envi- clean envi- heat of Ball
life grease
tion grease ronment ronment Screw
high-grade refined min- high-grade high-grade high-grade high-grade
Base oil
synthetic oil eral oil synthetic oil synthetic oil synthetic oil synthetic oil
Consistency
Urea-based Lithium-based Urea-based Urea-based Lithium-based Urea-based
enhancer
Service Tempera- – 40 to 160
– 45 to 160 – 15 to 100 – 54 to 177 – 40 to 120 – 45 to 160
ture Range (℃) (200)
General
industrial z z — — — —
machinery
Applications
Machine tool — z z — — z
Semiconduc-
tor manufactur- — z z z z —
ing equipment
Special envi-
— — z z z z
ronments
Capacity
70g z z z z z z
400g z z z z z z
Color of decora-
Green Orange Mazarine Lime green Light blue Blue
tive package
Reference page A-959 A-960 A-961 A-963 A-965 A-968
Model number coding
Type of packing…bellows cartridge AFC + 70

Cartridge capacity (70 g / 400 g)
Type of grease (AFA Grease, AFB-LF Grease, AFC Grease, AFE Grease, AFF Grease, AFG Grease)
A-958
Lubrication
AFA Grease
THK Original Grease

AFA Grease
AFA Grease
Base oil: high-grade synthetic oil
Consistency enhancer: urea-based
AFA Grease is a high-grade, long-life grease developed with a urea-based consistency enhancer
0
using a high-grade synthetic oil as the base oil.

[Features] [Representative Physical Properties]
(1) Long service life
Repre-
Unlike ordinary soap based grease for Test item sentative Test method
value
metal lubrication, AFA Grease excels in
Worked penetration (25℃, 60W) 285 JIS K 2220 7
antioxidation stability and therefore can be
Dropping point: ℃ 261 JIS K 2220 8
used for a long period of time.
Copper plate corrosion
(2) Wide temperature range (B method, 100℃, 24h)
Accepted JIS K 2220 9
The lubricating performance remains high
Evaporation amount: mass%
over a wide range of temperatures from -45 0.2 JIS K 2220 10
(99℃, 22h)
℃ to +160℃. Oil separation rate: mass%
0.5 JIS K 2220 11
Even at low temperatures, AFA Grease (100℃, 30h)
requires only a low starting torque. Stability of oxidation: kPa
80 JIS K 2220 12
(3) High water resistance (99℃, 100h)
AFA Grease is less vulnerable to moisture Mixing stability (100,000 W) 329 JIS K 2220 15
penetration than other types of grease Grease removal resistance during
0.6 JIS K 2220 16
because of its high water resistance. water rinse: mass% (38℃, 1h)
(4) High mechanical stability Start 0.17
Low temperature
AFA Grease is not easily softened and (revo- JIS K 2220 18
torque: N-m (-20℃) 0.07
lutions)
demonstrates excellent mechanical stabil-
ity even when used for a long period of Anticorrosive test: (52℃, 48h) Accepted ASTM D1743-73
– 45 to
time. Service Temperature Limit (℃) —
160
[Rotation Torque Testing with Ball Screw Grease]
<Test method>
Apply 1 cc of grease to the LM Guide of KR4620A+640L and 2 cc to the Ball Screw (initial lubrication Accessories for Lubrication
only), and then measure the torque at each motor rotation speed.
In torque measurement, output values on the driver torque monitor are used.
Comparative Table of Rotation Torque of Ball Screws by Grease Unit: N-cm
Central value of Dynamic viscosity Rotational speed

Grease dynamic viscosity range
CST (mm /S)(40℃) CST (mm2/S)(40℃)
2 100min– 1 1000min– 1 2000min– 1 4000min– 1
AFA Grease 25 22.5 to 27.5 11.27 11.27 12.25 14.6
Grease of manu-
130 117 to 143 14.6 23.13 31.16 43.12
facturer I
Grease of manu-
15.3 13.8 to 16.8 12.64 12.05 13.03 14.41
facturer K
Lubricant VG32 32 28.8 to 35.2 11.17 10.78 13.43 14.7
Note) The values of the competitors' greases are that of low-torque greases.
A-959
THK Original Grease
AFB-LF Grease
AFB-LF Grease
Base oil: refined mineral oil
Consistency enhancer: lithium-based
AFB-LF Grease is a general-purpose grease developed with a lithium-based consistency enhancer

0
using refined mineral oil as the base oil. It excels in extreme pressure resistance and mechanical sta-
bility.
(1) High extreme pressure resistance
Repre-
Compared with lithium-based greases Test item sentative Test method
value
available on the market, AFB-LF Grease
has higher wear resistance and outstanding
resistance to extreme pressure.
(2) High mechanical stability (B method, 100℃, 24h)
AFB-LF Grease is not easily softened and
demonstrates excellent mechanical stabil- 0.36 JIS K 2220 10
(99℃, 22h)
ity even when used for a long period of Oil separation rate: mass%
0.6 JIS K 2220 11
time. (100℃, 24h)
(3) High water resistance Stability of oxidation: kPa
15 JIS K 2220 12
AFB-LF Grease is a highly water resistant (99℃, 100h)
grease that is less vulnerable to moisture Mixing stability (100,000 W) 345 JIS K 2220 15
penetration and little decreases resistance Timken load capacity: N 200 JIS K 2220 20
to extreme pressure. Grease removal resistance during
1.8 JIS K 2220 16
water rinse: mass% (38℃, 1h)
Anticorrosive test: (52℃, 48h) Accepted ASTM D1743-73
– 15 to
Service Temperature Limit (℃) —
100
A-960
Lubrication
AFC Grease
THK Original Grease

AFC Grease
AFC Grease
AFC Grease has high fretting-corrosion resistance due to a special additive and a urea-based con-
0
sistency enhancer using a high-grade synthetic oil as the base oil.

(1) High fretting-corrosion resistance
Repre-
AFC Grease is designed to be highly effec- Test item sentative Test method
value
tive in preventing fretting corrosion.
(2) Long service life
Unlike ordinary soap based grease for
metal lubrication, AFC Grease excels in (B method, 100℃, 24h)
antioxidation stability and therefore can be
used for a long period of time. As a result, 7.9 JIS K 2220 10
(177℃, 22h)
maintenance work is reduced. Oil separation rate: mass%
2 JIS K 2220 11
(3) Wide temperature range (177℃, 30h)
Since a high-grade synthetic oil is used as Stability of oxidation: MPa
0.065 JIS K 2220 12
the base oil, the lubricating performance (99℃, 100h)
remains high over a wide range of tempera- No. of contaminants: pieces/
cm3 25 to 75 μ m 370 JIS K 2220 13
tures from -54 ℃ to +177 ℃.
75μm or more 0
Mixing stability (100,000 W) 341 JIS K 2220 15
Grease removal resistance during
0.6 JIS K 2220 16
water rinse: mass% (38℃, 1h)
Start 0.63
Low temperature
(revo- JIS K 2220 18
torque: N-m (– 54℃) 0.068
lutions)
Anticorrosive test: (52℃, 48h) Accepted ASTM D1743-73
Vibration test (200h) Accepted —
– 54 to
177 Accessories for Lubrication
A-961
[Test Data on Fretting-corrosion Resistance]
z Test Data on AFC Grease (Comparison of Raceway Conditions)
The test data in the figure shows the result of comparing AFC Grease with an ordinary bearing
grease.
<Test conditions>
Item Description
Stroke 3mm
Number of strokes per
200min-1
minute
Total number of
2.88×105 (24 hours)
strokes
Surface pressure 1118MPa
12g/1LM block
Grease quantity
(replenished every 8 hours)
AFC Grease General-purpose bearing grease

Before travel Before travel
1mm 1mm
1μm 1μm
After travel (no fretting corrosion observed) After travel (fretting corrosion observed)
1mm 1mm
2μ m 2μ m
A-962
Lubrication
AFE-CA Grease
THK Original Grease

AFE-CA Grease
AFE-CA Grease
AFE-CA Grease uses urea as a consistency enhancer and a high-grade synthetic oil as the base oil.
0
It has low dust generative characteristics and is therefore a suitable grease for clean room environ-
ments.
(1) Low dust generation
Repre-
Compared with vacuum greases in conven- Test item sentative
Test
tional use, AFE-CA Grease generates less method
value
dust and therefore is ideal for use in clean Worked penetration (25℃, 60W) 260 JIS K 2220 7
rooms. Dropping point: ℃ 240< JIS K 2220 8
(2) Long service life Copper plate corrosion (100℃, 24h) Accepted JIS K 2220 9
Unlike ordinary soap based grease for Evaporation amount: mass%
0.1 JIS K 2220 10
metal lubrication, AFE-CA Grease excels in (99℃, 22h)
antioxidation stability and therefore can be Oil separation rate: mass%
0.8 JIS K 2220 11
used for a long period of time. As a result, (100℃, 24h)
maintenance work is reduced. Stability of oxidation: kPa
20 JIS K 2220 12
(99℃, 100h)
No. of contami- 75μm or more 0
JIS K 2220 13
nants: pieces/cm3 125μm or more 0
Low tempera Start 0.130
ture torque: N-m JIS K 2220 18
(-20℃) (revolutions) 0.078
Apparent viscosity: Pa•s
230 JIS K 2220 19
(-10℃, 10S-1)
Bearing rust prevention:
#1 ASTM D1743-73
(52℃, 48h)
– 40 to
180 Accessories for Lubrication
A-963
[Test Data on Low Dust Generative Characteristics]
z Test Data on AFE-CA Grease (Comparison of Particle Accumulation)
The test data in the figure shows the result of comparing particle accumulation between AFE-CA
Grease with another grease.
<Test conditions>
Item Description
Sample model No. THK KR4610
Screw Ball rotational
1000min-1
speed
Stroke 210mm
2 cc in both the Ball Screw and
Grease quantity
the LM Guide
Flow rate during
1l /min
measurement
Measuring instrument Dust counter
Particle size 0.5μ m
5000
Particle accumulation (P/l min)
4000
3000
AFE-CA Grease
Ordinary low dust
2000 generation grease
Vacuum grease
General use grease
1000
0 20 40 60 80 100
Operating time (h)
A-964
Lubrication
AFF Grease
THK Original Grease

AFF Grease
AFF Grease
Consistency enhancer: lithium-based
AFF Grease uses a high-grade synthetic oil, lithium-based consistency enhancer and a special addi-
0
tive. It achieves stable rolling resistance, low dust generation and high fretting resistance, at a level
that conventional vacuum greases or low dust generation greases have not reached.
(1) Stable rolling resistance
Repre-
Since the viscous resistance is low, the roll- Test item sentative Test method
value
ing resistance fluctuation is also low. Thus,
superb conformity is achieved at low speed.
(2) Low dust generation
AFF Grease generates little dust, making (100℃, 24h)
itself an ideal grease for use in clean
rooms. 0.43 JIS K 2220 10
(99℃, 22h)
(3) Fretting resistance Oil separation rate: mass%
0.57 JIS K 2220 11
Since AFF Grease is highly resistant to (100℃, 24h)
wear from microvibrations, it allows the Stability of oxidation: kPa
39 JIS K 2220 12
greasing interval to be extended. (99℃, 100h)
No. of contaminants: pieces/cm 3
25μm or more 0
JIS K 2220 13
75μm or more 0
125μm or more 0
Start 0.22
Low temperature
(revo- JIS K 2220 18
torque: N-m (-20℃) 0.04
lutions)
Apparent viscosity: Pa•s
3400 JIS K 2220 19
(-10℃, 10S-1)
Timken load capacity: N 88.2 JIS K 2220 20
4-ball testing (burn-in load): N 3089 ASTM D2596 Accessories for Lubrication
ASTM D4170
Fretting resistance: mg 3.8
compliant
Bearing rust prevention: (52℃, 48h) #1 ASTM D1743-73
– 40 to
120
A-965
[Test Data on Low Dust Generative Characteristics]
z Test Data on AFF Grease (Comparison of Particle Accumulation)
The test data in the figure shows the result of comparing particle accumulation between AFF Grease
with another grease.
<Test conditions>
Item Description
Model No. SR20W1+280LP
1cm3/ LM block
Grease quantity
(initial lubrication only)
Amount of air supplied 500cm3/min
[Measurement
Particle counter
instrument]
Diameter of particle
0.3μ m or more
measured
Feeding speed 30m/min
Stroke 200mm
3000
Particle accumulation (No. of particles per 2min.・liter)
AFF Grease
AFE Grease
Competitor's low dust generative grease
Competitor's general use grease
2000
1000
AFF
0
0 300 600 900
Time (min)
A-966
Lubrication
AFF Grease
[Rolling Resistance Characteristics at Low Speed]

z Rolling Resistance at Low Speed
The data in the figure represent the test results of comparing rolling resistances at low speed
between AFF Grease and other greases.
<Test conditions>
Item Description
Model No. HSR35RC0+440LP
4cm3/ LM block
Grease quantity
(initial lubrication only)
Feeding speed 1mm/s
Stroke 3mm
60
AFF Grease
AFB-LF Grease
50 Ordinary low dust generation grease A
Ordinary low dust generation grease B
40
30
20
AFF
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Operating time (min)
A-967
THK Original Grease
AFG Grease
AFG Grease
AFG Grease is a high-grade grease for Ball Screws that uses a high-grade synthetic oil as the base
0
oil and a urea-based consistency enhancer. It excels in low heat generation and supports a wide
temperature range from low to high temperature.
(1) Low heat generation
Repre-
Since the viscous resistance is low, the Test item sentative Test method
value
grease generates only a minimal level of
Worked penetration (25℃, 60W) 285 JIS K 2220 5.3
heat even during high-speed operation.
Dropping point: ℃ 261 JIS K 2220 5.4
(2) Low viscosity
Copper plate corrosion (100℃, 24h) Accepted JIS K 2220 5.5
Since the viscosity is low, a stable rotational
torque is achieved. Evaporation amount: mass%
0.2 JIS K 2220 5.6
(99℃, 22h)
(3) Wide temperature range
Oil separation rate: mass%
Maintains a high level of lubricity in a wide 0.5 JIS K 2220 5.7
(100℃, 24h)
temperature range of -45℃ to +160℃. Stability of oxidation: MPa
(4) Long service life 0.029 JIS K 2220 5.8
(99℃, 100h)
AFG Grease is not easily softened and Mixing stability (100,000 W) 329 JIS K 2220 5.11
excels in antioxidation stability even after a Grease removal resistance during
0.6 JIS K 2220 5.12
long-term operation. water rinse: mass% (38℃, 1h)
(5) Water resistance Start 0.439
Low temperature
AFG Grease is a highly water resistant torque: N-m (-20℃) (revo- JIS K 2220 5.14
0.049
grease that is less vulnerable to moisture lutions)
penetration and little decreases resistance Anticorrosive test: (52℃, 48h) 1,1,1 ASTM D1743
to extreme pressure. – 45 to
Service Temperature Range (℃) —
160
A-968
Lubrication
AFG Grease
[Test Data on Low Heat Generation Characteristics]

z Test Data on AFG Grease (Comparison of Heat Generation)
The test data in the figure represent the results of comparing heat generation between AFG Grease
and other greases.
<Test conditions>
Item Description
Shaft diameter/lead 32/10mm
Feeding speed 67 to 500mm/s
Shaft rotation speed 400 to 3000 min-1
Stroke 400mm
Grease quantity 12cm3
Temperature
Nut circumference
measurement point
60
Saturation temperature on the circumference of the nut (℃)
AFG Grease
THK all-purpose grease
50
40
30
20
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500
-1
Shaft rotational speed (min )
A-969
Lubrication
Grease Gun Unit Equipment
MG70
Grease Gun Unit MG70

Grease Gun Unit MG70 is capable of lubricating small to large types of LM Guides by replacing ded-
0
icated nozzles (attached). For small LM Guides, MG70 is provided with dedicated attachments. The
user can select from these attachments according to the model number and the installation space.
MG70 has a slit window, allowing the user to check the remaining amount of grease.
It is equipped with a bellows cartridge that can hold 70 g of grease and is replaceable without smirch-
ing your hand. It supports a wide range of grease products, including AFA Grease, AFB-LF Grease,
AFC Grease and AFE-CA Grease, to meet varied conditions. This enables you to make a selection
according to the area requiring grease. (See A-959 to A-969.)
Since the grease to be used is sold separately, you must purchase it separately.
Special Plumbing Fixtures

Special Plumbing Fixtures
For centralized greasing and oil lubrication, special plumbing fixtures are available from THK. When
0
ordering an LM system, specify the model number, mounting orientation and piping direction. We will
ship the LM system attached with the corresponding fixture.
Grease Nipple
Grease Nipple
THK provides various types of grease nipples needed for the lubrication of LM systems.
0
A-970
Appendix
General Catalog
A-971
Appendix
Appendix Tables
Tightening Torques and Theoretical Thrusts for Hexagonal Socket-head Setscrew
[M2 to M5, Cut-point]
（×103）
4
M
4
5
M
3
Theoretical thrust (N)
2
M3
.5
M2
1
M2
0
0 0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.0
Tightening torque (N•m)
Note) The theoretical thrust may vary depending on the lubrication and the conditions of the surfaces of the setscrew or the ref-
erence surface (μ = 0.13).
A-972
Appendix Tables
[M5 to M10, Cut-point]
（×103）
30
10
M
20
Theoretical thrust (N)
M8
10
M6
M5
0
0 10 20 30
Appendix
Tightening torque (N•m)
Note) The theoretical thrust may vary depending on the lubrication and the conditions of the surfaces of the setscrew or the ref-
erence surface (μ = 0.13).
A-973
Dimensional Tolerances of the Shafts
Dimension
classification e f g h js
(mm)
Or
Above e6 f5 f6 g5 g6 h5 h6 h7 h8 h9 h10 js5 js6 js7
less
– 20 – 10 – 10 –4 –4 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 6 ± 2.5 ±4 ±6
– 28 – 15 – 18 –9 – 12 –5 –8 – 12 – 18 – 30 – 48
– 25 – 13 – 13 –5 –5 0 0 0 0 0 0
6 10 ±3 ± 4.5 ±7.5
– 34 – 19 – 22 – 11 – 14 –6 –9 – 15 – 22 – 36 – 58
10 14 – 32 – 16 – 16 –6 –6 0 0 0 0 0 0
±4 ± 5.5 ±9
14 18 – 43 – 24 – 27 – 14 – 17 –8 – 11 – 18 – 27 – 43 – 70
18 24 – 40 – 20 – 20 –7 –7 0 0 0 0 0 0
± 4.5 ± 6.5 ±10.5
24 30 – 53 – 29 – 33 – 16 – 20 –9 – 13 – 21 – 33 – 52 – 84
30 40 – 50 – 25 – 25 –9 –9 0 0 0 0 0 0
± 5.5 ±8 ±12.5
40 50 – 66 – 36 – 41 – 20 – 25 – 11 – 16 – 25 – 39 – 62 – 100
50 65 – 60 – 30 – 30 – 10 – 10 0 0 0 0 0 0
± 6.5 ± 9.5 ± 15
65 80 – 79 – 43 – 49 – 23 – 29 – 13 – 19 – 30 – 46 – 74 – 120
80 100 – 72 – 36 – 36 – 12 – 12 0 0 0 0 0 0
± 7.5 ± 11 ±17.5
100 120 – 94 – 51 – 58 – 27 – 34 – 15 – 22 – 35 – 54 – 87 – 140
120 140
– 85 – 43 – 43 – 14 – 14 0 0 0 0 0 0
140 160 ±9 ± 12.5 ± 20
– 110 – 61 – 68 – 32 – 39 – 18 – 25 – 40 – 63 – 100 – 160
160 180
180 200
– 100 – 50 – 50 – 15 – 15 0 0 0 0 0 0
200 225 ±10 ± 14.5 ± 23
– 129 – 70 – 79 – 35 – 44 – 20 – 29 – 46 – 72 – 115 – 185
225 250
250 280 – 110 – 56 – 56 – 17 – 17 0 0 0 0 0 0
±11.5 ± 16 ± 26
280 315 – 142 – 79 – 88 – 40 – 49 – 23 – 32 – 52 – 81 – 130 – 210
315 355 – 125 – 62 – 62 – 18 – 18 0 0 0 0 0 0
±12.5 ± 18 ±28.5
355 400 – 161 – 87 – 98 – 43 – 54 – 25 – 36 – 57 – 89 – 140 – 230
400 450 – 135 – 68 – 68 – 20 – 20 0 0 0 0 0 0
±13.5 ± 20 ±31.5
450 500 – 175 – 95 – 108 – 47 – 60 – 27 – 40 – 63 – 97 – 155 – 250
500 560 – 145 – 76 – 76 – 22 – 22 0 0 0 0 0 0
±15 ± 22 ± 35
560 630 – 189 – 106 – 120 – 52 – 66 – 30 – 44 – 70 – 110 – 175 – 280
630 710 – 160 – 80 – 80 – 24 – 24 0 0 0 0 0 0
±17.5 ± 25 ± 40
710 800 – 210 – 115 – 130 – 59 – 74 – 35 – 50 – 80 – 125 – 200 – 320
800 900 – 170 – 86 – 86 – 26 – 26 0 0 0 0 0 0
±20 ± 28 ± 45
900 1000 – 226 – 126 – 142 – 66 – 82 – 40 – 56 – 90 – 140 – 230 – 360
1000 1120 – 195 – 98 – 98 – 28 – 28 0 0 0 0 0 0
±23 ± 33 ±52.5
1120 1250 – 261 – 144 – 164 – 74 – 94 – 46 – 66 – 105 – 165 – 260 – 420
1250 1400 – 220 – 110 – 110 – 30 – 30 0 0 0 0 0 0
±27 ± 39 ±62.5
1400 1600 – 298 – 164 – 188 – 84 – 108 – 54 – 78 – 125 – 195 – 310 – 500
A-974
Appendix Tables
Unit: μ m=0.001mm
Dimension
j k m n p classification
(mm)
Or
j5 j6 k5 k6 k7 m5 m6 n5 n6 p5 p6 Above
less
+3 +6 +6 +9 +13 +9 +12 +13 +16 +17 +20
3 6
–2 –2 +1 +1 +1 +4 +4 +8 +8 +12 +12
+4 +7 +7 +10 +16 +12 +15 +16 +19 +21 +24
6 10
–2 –2 +1 +1 +1 +6 +6 +10 +10 +15 +15
+5 +8 +9 +12 +19 +15 +18 +20 +23 +26 +29 10 14
–3 –3 +1 +1 +1 +7 +7 +12 +12 +18 +18 14 18
+5 +9 +11 +15 +23 +17 +21 +24 +28 +31 +35 18 24
–4 –4 +2 +2 +2 +8 +8 +15 +15 +22 +22 24 30
+6 +11 +13 +18 +27 +20 +25 +28 +33 +37 +42 30 40
–5 –5 +2 +2 +2 +9 +9 +17 +17 +26 +26 40 50
+6 +12 +15 +21 +32 +24 +30 +33 +39 +45 +51 50 65
–7 –7 +2 +2 +2 +11 +11 +20 +20 +32 +32 65 80
+6 +13 +18 +25 +38 +28 +35 +38 +45 +52 +59 80 100
–9 –9 +3 +3 +3 +13 +13 +23 +23 +37 +37 100 120
120 140
+7 +14 +21 +28 +43 +33 +40 +45 +52 +61 +68
140 160
– 11 – 11 +3 +3 +3 +15 +15 +27 +27 +43 +43
160 180
180 200
+7 +16 +24 +33 +50 +37 +46 +51 +60 +70 +79
200 225
– 13 – 13 +4 +4 +4 +17 +17 +31 +31 +50 +50
225 250
+7 +16 +27 +36 +56 +43 +52 +57 +66 +79 +88 250 280
– 16 – 16 +4 +4 +4 +20 +20 +34 +34 +56 +56 280 315
+7 +18 +29 +40 +61 +46 +57 +62 +73 +87 +98 315 355
– 18 – 18 +4 +4 +4 +21 +21 +37 +37 +62 +62 355 400
+7 +20 +32 +45 +68 +50 +63 +67 +80 +95 +108 400 450
– 20 – 20 +5 +5 +5 +23 +23 +40 +40 +68 +68 450 500
+30 +44 +70 +56 +70 +74 +88 +108 +122 500 560
— —
0 0 0 +26 +26 +44 +44 +78 +78 560 630
+35 +50 +80 +65 +80 +85 +100 +123 +138 630 710
— —
0 0 0 +30 +30 +50 +50 +88 +88 710 800
+40 +56 +90 +74 +90 +96 +112 +140 +156 800 900
— —
0 0 0 +34 +34 +56 +56 +100 +100 900 1000
+46 +66 +105 +86 +106 +112 +132 +166 +186 1000 1120
— —
0 0 0 +40 +40 +66 +66 +120 +120 1120 1250
+54 +78 +125 +102 +126 +132 +156 +194 +218 1250 1400
Appendix
— —
0 0 0 +48 +48 +78 +78 +140 +140 1400 1600
A-975
Dimensional Tolerances of Housing Holes
Dimension
classification E F G H
(mm)
Or
Above E6 E7 F6 F7 F8 G6 G7 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10
less
+28 +32 +18 +22 +28 +12 +16 +5 +8 +12 +18 +30 +48
3 6
+20 +20 +10 +10 +10 +4 +4 0 0 0 0 0 0
+34 +40 +22 +28 +35 +14 +20 +6 +9 +15 +22 +36 +58
6 10
+25 +25 +13 +13 +13 +5 +5 0 0 0 0 0 0
10 14 +43 +50 +27 +34 +48 +17 +24 +8 +11 +18 +27 +43 +70
14 18 +32 +32 +16 +16 +16 +6 +6 0 0 0 0 0 0
18 24 +53 +61 +33 +41 +53 +20 +28 +9 +13 +21 +33 +52 +84
24 30 +40 +40 +20 +20 +20 +7 +7 0 0 0 0 0 0
30 40 +66 +75 +41 +50 +64 +25 +34 +11 +16 +25 +39 +62 +100
40 50 +50 +50 +25 +25 +25 +9 +9 0 0 0 0 0 0
50 65 +79 +90 +49 +60 +76 +29 +40 +13 +19 +30 +46 +74 +120
65 80 +60 +60 +30 +30 +30 +10 +10 0 0 0 0 0 0
80 100 +94 +107 +58 +71 +90 +34 +47 +15 +22 +35 +54 +87 +140
100 120 +72 +72 +36 +36 +36 +12 +12 0 0 0 0 0 0
120 140
+110 +125 +68 +83 +106 +39 +54 +18 +25 +40 +63 +100 +160
140 160
+85 +85 +43 +43 +43 +14 +14 0 0 0 0 0 0
160 180
180 200
+129 +146 +79 +96 +122 +44 +61 +20 +29 +46 +72 +115 +185
200 225
+100 +100 +50 +50 +50 +15 +15 0 0 0 0 0 0
225 250
250 280 +142 +162 +88 +108 +137 +49 +69 +23 +32 +52 +81 +130 +210
280 315 +110 +110 +56 +56 +56 +17 +17 0 0 0 0 0 0
315 355 +161 +182 +98 +119 +151 +54 +75 +25 +36 +57 +89 +140 +230
355 400 +125 +125 +62 +62 +62 +18 +18 0 0 0 0 0 0
400 450 +175 +198 +108 +131 +165 +60 +83 +27 +40 +63 +97 +155 +250
450 500 +135 +135 +68 +68 +68 +20 +20 0 0 0 0 0 0
500 560 +189 +215 +120 +146 +186 +66 +92 +30 +44 +70 +110 +175 +280
560 630 +145 +145 +76 +76 +76 +22 +22 0 0 0 0 0 0
630 710 +210 +240 +130 +160 +205 +74 +104 +35 +50 +80 +125 +200 +320
710 800 +160 +160 +80 +80 +80 +24 +24 0 0 0 0 0 0
800 900 +226 +260 +142 +176 +226 +82 +116 +40 +56 +90 +140 +230 +360
900 1000 +170 +170 +86 +86 +86 +26 +26 0 0 0 0 0 0
1000 1120 +261 +300 +164 +203 +263 +94 +133 +46 +66 +105 +165 +260 +420
1120 1250 +195 +195 +98 +98 +98 +28 +28 0 0 0 0 0 0
1250 1400 +298 +345 +188 +235 +305 +108 +155 +54 +78 +125 +195 +310 +500
1400 1600 +220 +220 +110 +110 +110 +30 +30 0 0 0 0 0 0
A-976
Appendix Tables
Unit: μ m=0.001mm
Dimension
Js J K M N P classification
(mm)
Or
Js6 Js7 J6 J7 K6 K7 M6 M7 N6 N7 P6 P7 Above
less
+5 +6 +2 +3 –1 0 –5 –4 –9 –8
±4 ±6 3 6
–3 –6 –6 –9 –9 – 12 – 13 – 16 – 17 – 20
+5 +8 +2 +5 –3 0 –7 –4 – 12 –9
± 4.5 ± 7.5 6 10
–4 –7 –7 – 10 – 12 – 15 – 16 – 19 – 21 – 24
+6 +10 +2 +6 –4 0 –9 –5 – 15 – 11 10 14
± 5.5 ±9
–5 –8 –9 – 12 – 15 – 18 – 20 – 23 – 26 – 29 14 18
+8 +12 +2 +6 –4 0 – 11 –7 – 18 – 14 18 24
± 6.5 ± 10.5
–5 –9 – 11 – 15 – 17 – 21 – 24 – 28 – 31 – 35 24 30
+10 +14 +3 +7 –4 0 – 12 –8 – 21 – 17 30 40
±8 ± 12.5
–6 – 11 – 13 – 18 – 20 – 25 – 28 – 33 – 37 – 42 40 50
+13 +18 +4 +9 –5 0 – 14 –9 – 26 – 21 50 65
± 9.5 ±15
–6 – 12 – 15 – 21 – 24 – 30 – 33 – 39 – 45 – 51 65 80
+16 +22 +4 +10 –6 0 – 16 – 10 – 30 – 24 80 100
±11 ± 17.5
–6 – 13 – 18 – 25 – 28 – 35 – 38 – 45 – 52 – 59 100 120
120 140
+18 +26 +4 +12 –8 0 – 20 – 12 – 36 – 28
±12.5 ±20 140 160
–7 – 14 – 21 – 28 – 33 – 40 – 45 – 52 – 61 – 68
160 180
180 200
+22 +30 +5 +13 –8 0 – 22 – 14 – 41 – 33
±14.5 ±23 200 225
–7 – 16 – 24 – 33 – 37 – 46 – 51 – 60 – 70 – 79
225 250
+25 +36 +5 +16 –9 0 – 25 – 14 – 47 – 36 250 280
±16 ±26
–7 – 16 – 27 – 36 – 41 – 52 – 57 – 66 – 79 – 88 280 315
+29 +39 +7 +17 – 10 0 – 26 – 16 – 51 – 41 315 355
±18 ± 28.5
–7 – 18 – 29 – 40 – 46 – 57 – 62 – 73 – 87 – 98 355 400
+33 +43 +8 +18 – 10 0 – 27 – 17 – 55 – 45 400 450
±20 ± 31.5
–7 – 20 – 32 – 45 – 50 – 63 – 67 – 80 – 95 – 108 450 500
– 26 – 26 – 44 – 44 – 78 – 78 500 560
±22 ±35 — — — —
– 70 – 96 – 88 – 114 – 122 – 148 560 630
– 30 – 30 – 50 – 50 – 88 – 88 630 710
±25 ±40 — — — —
– 80 – 110 – 100 – 130 – 138 – 168 710 800
– 34 – 34 – 56 – 56 – 100 – 100 800 900
±28 ±45 — — — —
– 90 – 124 – 112 – 146 – 156 – 190 900 1000
– 40 – 40 – 66 – 66 – 120 – 120 1000 1120
±33 ± 52.5 — — — —
– 106 – 145 – 132 – 171 – 186 – 225 1120 1250
– 48 – 48 – 78 – 78 – 140 – 140 1250 1400
Appendix
±39 ± 62.5 — — — —
– 126 – 173 – 156 – 203 – 218 – 265 1400 1600
A-977
SI Unit Conversion Table
[Conversion to SI Units]
Factor of
Amount Name of unit Symbol Name of SI unit Symbol
conversion to SI
Degree ° π/180
Angle Minute ´ π/10800 Radian rad
Second ´´ π/648000
Meter m 1
Angstrom Å 10– 10
Length Meter m
X-ray unit ≈1.00208×10– 13
Nautical mile n mile 1852
Square meter m2 1
Area Are a 102 Square meter m2
Hectare ha 104
Cubic meter m3 1
Volume Cubic meter m3
Liter l (L) 10– 3
Kilogram kg 1
Mass Ton t 103 Kilogram kg
Atomic-mass unit u ≈1.66057×10– 27
Second s 1
Minute min 60
Time Second S
Hour h 3600
Day d 86400
Meter per second m/s 1
Speed Meter per second m/s
Knot kn 1852/3600
Frequency cycle s– 1 1 Hertz Hz
Rotational speed Revolution per minute rpm 1 Per minute min– 1
Angular velocity Radian per minute rad/s 1 Radian per minute rad/s
Meter per second per second m/s2 1 Meter per second
Acceleration m/s2
G G 9.80665 per second
Weight kilogram kgf 9.80665
Force Weight ton tf 9806.65 Newton N
Dyne dyn 10– 5
Moment of force Weight kilogram meter kgf-m 9.80665 Newton meter N-m
Weight kilogram per square meter kgf/m2 9.80665
Stress and pressure Weight kilogram per square centimeter kgf/cm2 9.80665×104 Pascal Pa
Weight kilogram per square millimeter kgf/mm2 9.80665×106
Water column meter mH2O 9806.65
Mercury column meter mmHg 101325/760
Pressure Torr Torr 101325/760 Pascal Pa
Atmosphere atm 101325
Bar bar 105
Erg erg 10– 7
IT calorie calIT 4.1868
Weight kilogram meter kgf-m 9.80665
Energy Joule J
Kilowatt hour kW•h 3.600×106
Metric Horsepower hour PS•h ≈2.64779×106
Electron volt eV ≈1.60219×10– 19
Watt W 1
Power Metric Horsepower PS ≈735.5 Watt W
Kilogram force-meter kgf-m/s 9.80665
A-978
Appendix Tables
Factor of
Amount Name of unit Symbol Name of SI unit Symbol
conversion to SI
Poise P 10 –1
Viscosity Centipoise cP 10– 3 Pascal second Pa-s

Kilogram force-second per square meter kgf-s/m2 9.80665
Stokes St 10– 1 Square meter per
Kinematic viscosity m2/s
Centistokes cSt 10– 6 second
Temperature Degree ℃ +273.15 Kelvin K
Radioactivity Curie Ci 3.7×1010 Becquerel Bq
Dose Roentgen R 2.58×10– 4 Coulomb per kilogram C/kg
Absorbed dose Rad rad 10– 2 Gray Gy
Equivalent dose Rem rem 10– 2 Sievert Sv
Magnetic flux Maxwell Mx 10– 8 Weber Wb
Gamma γ 10– 9
Magnetic flux density Tesla T
Gauss Gs 10– 4
Magnetic-field
Oersted Oe 103/4π Ampere per meter A/m
intensity
Quantity of electricity Coulomb C 1 Coulomb C
Voltage potentialdifference bolt V 1 bolt V
Electrostatic capacity Farad F 1 Farad F
(Electric) resistance Ohm Ω 1 Ohm Ω
(Electric) conductance Siemens S 1 Siemens S
Inductance Henry H 1 Henry H
Current Ampere A 1 Ampere A
Appendix
A-979
[Comparative Table of SI, CGS System and Gravitational System Units]
Amount Length Mass Time

Unit Acceleration Force Stress Pressure Energy
L M T
system
SI m kg s m/s2 N Pa Pa J
CGS system cm g s Gal dyn dyn/cm2 dyn/cm2 erg
Gravitational m kgf-s2/m s m/s2 kgf kgf/m2 kgf/m2 kgf-cm
system
Amount
Kinematic Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic-field
Unit Power Temperature Viscosity
viscosity flux flux density intensity
system
SI W K Pa-s m2/s Wb T A/m
CGS system erg/s ℃ P St Mx Gs Oe
Gravitational kgf-m/s ℃ kgf-s/m2 m2/s — — —
system
[Integer Multipliers of 10 of SI Units]
Number of Prefix Number of Prefix

digits multiplied digits multiplied
to unit Name Symbol to unit Name Symbol
10 18
Exa E 10 –1
Deci d
1015 Peta P 10– 2 Centi c
1012 Tera T 10– 3 Milli m
109 Giga G 10– 6 Micro μ
106 Mega M 10– 9 Nano n
103 Kilo k 10– 12 Pico p
102 Hecto h 10– 15 Femto f
10 Deca da 10– 18 Atto a
[Hardness Conversion Table]

Vickers Shore
Rockwell Brinell hardness HB Rockwell hardness
hardness hardness
HRB
HRA
B scale
C-scale hardness Hardness Tungsten A scale Hardness
Standard ball Load: 980.7N
HRC (load: 1471 N) HV carbide ball Load: 588.4N HS
Ball with diam of
Brale indenter
1/16 in.
68 940 — — 85.6 — 97
67 900 — — 85.0 — 95
66 865 — — 84.5 — 92
65 832 — 739 83.9 — 91
64 800 — 722 83.4 — 88
63 772 — 705 82.8 — 87
62 746 — 688 82.3 — 85
61 720 — 670 81.8 — 83
60 697 — 654 81.2 — 81
59 674 — 634 80.7 — 80
58 653 — 615 80.1 — 78
57 633 — 595 79.6 — 76
56 613 — 577 79.0 — 75
55 595 — 560 78.5 — 74
54 577 — 543 78.0 — 72
53 560 — 525 77.4 — 71
A-980
Appendix Tables
Vickers Shore
Rockwell Brinell hardness HB Rockwell hardness
hardness hardness
HRB
HRA
B scale
C-scale hardness Hardness Tungsten A scale Hardness
Standard ball Load: 980.7N
HRC (load: 1471 N) HV carbide ball Load: 588.4N HS
Ball with diam of
Brale indenter
1/16 in.
52 544 500 512 76.8 — 69
51 528 487 496 76.3 — 68
50 513 475 481 75.9 — 67
49 498 464 469 75.2 — 66
48 484 451 455 74.7 — 64
47 471 442 443 74.1 — 63
46 458 432 432 73.6 — 62
45 446 421 421 73.1 — 60
44 434 409 409 72.5 — 58
43 423 400 400 72.0 — 57
42 412 390 390 71.5 — 56
41 402 381 381 70.9 — 55
40 392 371 371 70.4 — 54
39 382 362 362 69.9 — 52
38 372 353 353 69.4 — 51
37 363 344 344 68.9 — 50
36 354 336 336 68.4 (109.0) 49
35 345 327 327 67.9 (108.5) 48
34 336 319 319 67.4 (108.0) 47
33 327 311 311 66.8 (107.5) 46
32 318 301 301 66.3 (107.0) 44
31 310 294 294 65.8 (106.0) 43
30 302 286 286 65.3 (105.5) 42
29 294 279 279 64.7 (104.5) 41
28 286 271 271 64.3 (104.0) 41
27 279 264 264 63.8 (103.0) 40
26 272 258 258 63.3 (102.5) 38
25 266 253 253 62.8 (101.5) 38
24 260 247 247 62.4 (101.0) 37
23 254 243 243 62.0 100.0 36
22 248 237 237 61.5 99.0 35
21 243 231 231 61.0 98.5 35
20 238 226 226 60.5 97.8 34
(18) 230 219 219 — 96.7 33
(16) 222 212 212 — 95.5 32
(14) 213 203 203 — 93.9 31
(12) 204 194 194 — 92.3 29
(10) 196 187 187 — 90.7 28
(8) 188 179 179 — 89.5 27
(6) 180 171 171 — 87.1 26
(4) 173 165 165 — 85.5 25
(2) 166 158 158 — 83.5 24
(0) 160 152 152 — 81.7 24
Appendix
A-981
THK General Catalog
Index of Model Numbers
Model C-MT6×1 [Accessories for Lubrication].... A-970
A Model CNF [Ball Screw] ..................................... A-790
AFA [Accessories for Lubrication] ....................... A-959 Model C-PT1/8 [Accessories for Lubrication] ..... A-970
AFB-LF [Accessories for Lubrication].................. A-960 Model CSR [LM Guide]....................................... A-244
AFC [Accessories for Lubrication] ....................... A-961
AFE-CA [Accessories for Lubrication] ................. A-963
AFF [Accessories for Lubrication] ....................... A-965
D
AFG [Accessories for Lubrication] ....................... A-968 Model D20 [Slide Rail] ........................................ A-646
Model AL [Link Ball]............................................. A-922 Model DC [Lead Screw Nut] ............................... A-830
Model A-M6F [Accessories for Lubrication]......... A-970 Model DCM [Lead Screw Nut] ............................ A-830
Model A-MT6×1 [Accessories for Lubrication]..... A-970 Model DCMA [Change Nut] ................................ A-842
Model A-PT1/8 [Accessories for Lubrication] ...... A-970 Model DCMB [Change Nut] ................................ A-842
Model DIK [Ball Screw]....................................... A-764
Model DIR [Ball Screw]....................................... A-772
B Model DK [Ball Screw]........................................ A-764
Model BF [Ball Screw (Peripherals)] ................... A-802 Model DKN [Ball Screw] ..................................... A-764
Model BIF [Ball Screw (Finished Shaft Ends)] .... A-764 Model DP [Spline Nut] ........................................ A-514
Model BIF [Ball Screw (Unfinished Shaft Ends)] . A-754 Model DPM [Spline Nut] ..................................... A-514
Model BK [Ball Screw (Peripherals)] ................... A-802
Model BL [Link Ball]............................................. A-922
Model BLK [Ball Screw]....................................... A-764
E
Model BLK [Ball Screw (Rolled)] ......................... A-790 Model E15 [Slide Rail] ........................................ A-646
Model BLR [Ball Screw (Precision)] .................... A-772 Model E20 [Slide Rail] ........................................ A-646
Model BLR [Ball Screw (Rolled)] ......................... A-796 Model EF [Ball Screw (Peripherals)]................... A-802
Model BLW [Ball Screw] ...................................... A-764 Model EK [Ball Screw (Peripherals)] .................. A-802
Model B-M6F [Accessories for Lubrication]......... A-970 Model EP [LM Guide (Options)].......................... A-366
Model B-MT6×1 [Accessories for Lubrication]..... A-970 Model ER [Precision Linear Pack] ...................... A-566
Model BNF [Ball Screw (Finished Shaft Ends)] ... A-764
Model BNF [Ball Screw (Unfinished Shaft Ends)] ... A-754
Model BNFN [Ball Screw (Finished Shaft Ends)] .... A-764
F
Model BNFN [Ball Screw (Unfinished Shaft Ends)]. A-754 Model FBL27D [Slide Rail] ................................. A-646
Model BNK [Ball Screw] ...................................... A-760 Model FBL27S [Slide Rail].................................. A-646
Model BNS [Ball Screw] ...................................... A-780 Model FBL27S-P14 [Slide Rail] .......................... A-646
Model BNS-A [Ball Screw]................................... A-780 Model FBL35B [Slide Rail].................................. A-646
Model BNT [Ball Screw (Precision)] .................... A-764 Model FBL35D [Slide Rail] ................................. A-646
Model BNT [Ball Screw (Rolled)] ......................... A-790 Model FBL35E-P14 [Slide Rail] .......................... A-646
Model B-PT1/8 [Accessories for Lubrication] ...... A-970 Model FBL35F [Slide Rail].................................. A-646
Model BS [LM Stroke] ......................................... A-562 Model FBL35G-P13 [Slide Rail].......................... A-646
Model BTK [Ball Screw]....................................... A-790 Model FBL35G-P14 [Slide Rail].......................... A-646
Model FBL35J [Slide Rail] .................................. A-646
Model FBL35J-P13 [Slide Rail]........................... A-646
C Model FBL35J-P14 [Slide Rail]........................... A-646
Cap C [LM Guide (Options)]................................ A-357 Model FBL35K [Slide Rail].................................. A-646
Model CF [Cam Follower].................................... A-880 Model FBL35M [Slide Rail] ................................. A-646
Model CF-A [Cam Follower] ................................ A-880 Model FBL35S [Slide Rail].................................. A-646
Model CFH-A [Cam Follower] ............................. A-880 Model FBL35T [Slide Rail].................................. A-646
Model CFN [Cam Follower] ................................. A-880 Model FBL35W [Slide Rail]................................. A-646
Model CFT [Cam Follower] ................................. A-880 Model FBL48DR [Slide Rail]............................... A-646
Model C-M6F [Accessories for Lubrication] ........ A-970 Model FBL51H [Slide Rail] ................................. A-646
IndexA-1
Model FBL51H-P13 [Slide Rail] .......................... A-646 Model LBS [Ball Spline]....................................... A-484
Model FBL51H-P14 [Slide Rail] .......................... A-646 Model LBST [Ball Spline] .................................... A-484
Model FBL56F [Slide Rail] .................................. A-646 Model LD [Accessories for Lubrication]............... A-970
Model FBL56H [Slide Rail].................................. A-646 Model LF [Ball Spline] ......................................... A-490
Model FBL56H-P13 [Slide Rail] .......................... A-646 Model LF-A [Accessories for Lubrication] ........... A-970
Model FBL56H-P14 [Slide Rail] .......................... A-646 Model LF-B [Accessories for Lubrication] ........... A-970
Model FBW [Slide Pack] ..................................... A-636 Model LF-C [Accessories for Lubrication] ........... A-970
Model FF [Ball Screw (Peripherals)] ................... A-802 Model LF-D [Accessories for Lubrication] ........... A-970
Model FK [Ball Screw (Peripherals)] ................... A-802 Model LF-E [Accessories for Lubrication] ........... A-970
Model FLM [Linear Bushing (Option)] ................. A-550 LiCS [LM Guide (Options)] .................................. A-355
Model FT [Flat Roller] ......................................... A-622 Model LM [Linear Bushing] ................................. A-524
Model FT-V [Flat Roller]...................................... A-622 Model LME [Linear Bushing] ............................... A-524
Model FTW [Flat Roller] ...................................... A-622 Model LMF [Linear Bushing] ............................... A-524
Model FTW-V [Flat Roller] .................................. A-622 Model LMF-L [Linear Bushing] ............................ A-524
Model LMH [Linear Bushing]............................... A-524
Model LMH-L [Linear Bushing]............................ A-524
G Model LMK [Linear Bushing] ............................... A-524
Model GL [LM Actuator] ...................................... A-438 Model LMK-L [Linear Bushing]............................ A-524
Model GSR [LM Guide]....................................... A-230 Model LM-L [Linear Bushing] .............................. A-524
Model GSR-R [LM Guide] ................................... A-236 Model LR [LM Roller] .......................................... A-604
Model LRA [LM Roller] ........................................ A-604
Model LRA-Z [LM Roller]..................................... A-604
H Model LRB [LM Roller] ........................................ A-604
Model HB [Rod End] ........................................... A-942 Model LRB-Z [LM Roller]..................................... A-604
Model HBN [Ball Screw (Caged Ball)]................. A-748 Model LRU [LM Roller]........................................ A-604
Model HCR [LM Guide]....................................... A-258 Model LR-Z [LM Roller] ....................................... A-604
Model HMG [LM Guide] ...................................... A-262 Model LS [Linear Ball Slide] ................................ A-594
Model HR [LM Guide] ......................................... A-224 Model LSC [Linear Ball Slide] ............................. A-594
Model HRW [LM Guide] ...................................... A-194 Model LSP [Linear Ball Slide].............................. A-594
Model HS [Rod End] ........................................... A-942 Model LT [Ball Spline] ......................................... A-490
Model HSR [LM Guide] ....................................... A-170 Model LTR [Ball Spline]....................................... A-500
Model HSR-M1 [LM Guide]................................. A-272 Model LTR-A [Ball Spline] ................................... A-500
Model HSR-M2 [LM Guide]................................. A-292
M
J Model MBF [Ball Screw (Precision)].................... A-754
Model JPF [Ball Screw]....................................... A-790 Model MC [Ball Screw (Peripherals)] .................. A-812
Model JR [LM Guide] .......................................... A-252 Model MDK [Ball Screw (Finished Shaft Ends)].. A-764
Model MDK [Ball Screw (Unfinished Shaft Ends)] .. A-754
MG70 [Accessories for Lubrication] .................... A-970
K Model MST [LM Stroke] ...................................... A-560
Model KR [LM Guide] Actuator ........................... A-386 Model MTF [Ball Screw] ...................................... A-790
Model KS [LM Stroke] ......................................... A-562 Model MX [LM Guide] ......................................... A-248
L N
LaCS [LM Guide (Options)]................................. A-353 Model NART-R [Roller Follower]......................... A-896
Model LBF [Ball Spline]....................................... A-484 Model NART-VR [Roller Follower] ...................... A-896
Model LBG [Ball Spline] ...................................... A-496 Model NAST [Roller Follower]............................. A-896
Model LBGT [Ball Spline].................................... A-496 Model NAST-R [Roller Follower] ......................... A-896
Model LBH [Ball Spline] ...................................... A-484 Model NAST-ZZ [Roller Follower] ....................... A-896
Model LBR [Ball Spline] ...................................... A-484 Model NAST-ZZR [Roller Follower]..................... A-896
IndexA-2
Model NB-T [Rod End] ........................................ A-942 Model SBN [Ball Screw] ..................................... A-748
Model NHS-T [Rod End]...................................... A-942 Model SC [Linear Bushing] ................................. A-524
Model NOS-T [Rod End] ..................................... A-942 Model SCR [LM Guide]....................................... A-166
Model NP3.2×3.5 [Accessories for Lubrication] .. A-970 Model SE [LM Roller (Options)].......................... A-618
Model NP6×5 [Accessories for Lubrication] ........ A-970 Model SEB [LM Roller (Options)] ....................... A-618
Model NP8×9 [Accessories for Lubrication] ........ A-970 Model SF [Linear Bushing] ................................. A-524
Model NR/NRS [LM Guide] ................................. A-186 Model SF-A [Accessories for Lubrication] .......... A-970
Model NS [Ball Screw]......................................... A-780 Model SF-B [Accessories for Lubrication] .......... A-970
Model NS-A [Ball Screw] ..................................... A-780 Model SF-C [Accessories for Lubrication] .......... A-970
Model NSR-TBC [LM Guide] ............................... A-268 Model SF-D [Accessories for Lubrication] .......... A-970
Model SF-E [Accessories for Lubrication] .......... A-970
Model SH [Linear Bushing] ................................. A-524
P Model SH-L [Linear Bushing].............................. A-524
Model PA [LM Roller (Options)]........................... A-617 Model SHS [LM Guide]....................................... A-136
Model PB [Rod End]............................................ A-942 Model SHW [LM Guide] ...................................... A-156
Model PB1021B [Accessories for Lubrication] .... A-970 Model SK [Linear Bushing] ................................. A-524
Model PB107 [Accessories for Lubrication]......... A-970 Model SKR [LM Guide] Actuator ........................ A-416
Model PBA [Rod End] ......................................... A-942 Model SL [Linear Bushing] ................................. A-524
Model PHS [Rod End] ......................................... A-942 Model SM [LM Roller (Options)] ......................... A-618
Model POS [Rod End] ......................................... A-942 Model SMB [LM Roller (Options)]....................... A-618
Model SNR/SNS [LM Guide] .............................. A-148
Model SP [LM Guide (Options)].......................... A-358
Q Model SR [LM Guide] ......................................... A-178
QZ [LM Guide (Options)] ..................................... A-361 Model SRG [LM Guide] ...................................... A-300
QZ [Ball Screw (Options)].................................... A-817 Model SR-M1 [LM Guide] ................................... A-280
Model SRN [LM Guide]....................................... A-306
Model SRS [LM Guide]....................................... A-160
R Model SRW [LM Guide] ...................................... A-312
Model RA [Cross-Roller Ring] ............................. A-854 Model SSR [LM Guide]....................................... A-142
Model RA-C [Cross-Roller Ring] ......................... A-854 Model ST [LM Stroke]......................................... A-554
Model RB [Cross-Roller Ring] ............................. A-854 Model ST-B [LM Stroke] ..................................... A-554
Model RBH [Rod End] ......................................... A-942 Model STI [LM Stroke]........................................ A-554
Model RBI [Link Ball] ........................................... A-922 Model SV [LM Guide (Options)].......................... A-358
Model RBL [Link Ball] .......................................... A-922
Model RE [Cross-Roller Ring] ............................. A-854
Model RE-USP-Grade [Cross-Roller Ring] ......... A-854
T
Model RN [Ball Screw (Peripherals)] ................... A-813 Model TBS [Link Ball] ......................................... A-922
Model RNAST [Roller Follower] .......................... A-896
Model RNAST-R [Roller Follower]....................... A-896
Model RSH [LM Guide] ....................................... A-214
V
Model RSH-Z [LM Guide] .................................... A-218 Model VB [Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide] ......... A-572
Model RSR-M1 [LM Guide] ................................. A-286 Model VR [Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide] ......... A-572
Model RSR-Z [LM Guide] .................................... A-208 Model VRT [Cross Roller Table] ......................... A-586
Models RSR/RSR-W [LM Guide] ........................ A-200 Model VRU [Cross Roller Table] ........................ A-586
Model RU [Cross-Roller Ring] ............................. A-854
W
S W [Ball Screw (Options)] .................................... A-819
Bolt S [Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide] .................. A-581 Model WGF [Ball Screw] .................................... A-764
Model SA1 [Spherical Plain Bearing] .................. A-910 Model WTF [Ball Screw] ..................................... A-790
Model SB [Spherical Plain Bearing] .................... A-910
Model SBK [Ball Screw] ...................................... A-748
IndexA-3
IndexA-4
Head Office 3-11-6 Nishi-Gotanda, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 141-8503 JAPAN
International Sales Department Phone:+81-3-5434-0351 Fax:+81-3-5434-0353
NORTH AMERICA SINGAPORE

THK America, Inc. SINGAPORE REPRESENTATIVE OFFICE
HEADQUARTERS
200 East Commerce Drive, Schaumburg, IL. 60173, U.S.A. INDIA
Phone:+1-847-310-1111 Fax:+1-847-310-1271 BANGALORE REPRESENTATIVE OFFICE
CHICAGO OFFICE 1050, 11th main R.P.C Layout Bangalore 560040, India
200 East Commerce Drive, Schaumburg, IL. 60173, U.S.A. Phone:+91-080-2330-1524 Fax:+91-080-2330-1524
Phone:+1-847-310-1111 Fax:+1-847-310-1182
EUROPE
NEW YORK OFFICE
400 Rella BLVD, Suite 208, Montebello, NY. 10901, U.S.A.
THK GmbH
Phone:+1-845-369-4035 Fax:+1-845-369-4909 EUROPEAN HEADQUARTERS
Hubert-Wollenberg-Strasse 13-15, D-40878 Ratingen, Germany
ATLANTA OFFICE
Phone:+49-2102-7425-0 Fax:+49-2102-7425-217
3000 Northwoods Parkway, Suite 200, Norcross, GA 30071-1525,U.S.A.
Phone:+1-770-840-7990 Fax:+1-770-840-7897 DÜSSELDORF OFFICE
Hubert-Wollenberg-Strasse 13-15, D-40878 Ratingen, Germany
LOS ANGELES OFFICE
Phone:+49-2102-7425-0 Fax:+49-2102-7425-299
34 Executive Park, Suite 215 Irvine, CA. 92614, U.S.A.
Phone:+1-949-955-3145 Fax:+1-949-955-3149 STUTTGART OFFICE
SAN FRANCISCO OFFICE Heinrich-Lanz-Strasse 3, D-70825 Korntal-Münchingen, Germany
Phone:+49-7150-9199-0 Fax:+49-7150-9199-888
4603-E Las Positas RD. Livermore, CA. 94551, U.S.A.
Phone:+1-925-455-8948 Fax:+1-925-455-8965 MÜNCHEN OFFICE
BOSTON OFFICE Max-Planck-Strasse 13, D-85716 Unterschleissheim, Germany
Phone:+49-8937-0616-0 Fax:+49-8937-0616-26
480 Neponset St. #10B, Canton, MA. 02021, U.S.A.
Phone:+1-781-575-1151 Fax:+1-781-575-9295 U.K. OFFICE
DETROIT OFFICE 1 Harrison Close Knowlhill Milton Keynes MK5 8PA
Phone:+44-1908-30-3050 Fax:+44-1908-30-3070
2600 South Telegraph Road, Suite 190 Bloomfield Hills, MI. 48302, U.S.A.
Phone:+1-248-858-9330 Fax:+1-248-858-9455 ITALY MILANO OFFICE
TORONTO OFFICE Via Buonarroti, 182, 20052 Monza (MI), Italy
Phone:+39-039-284-2079 Fax:+39-039-284-2527
3600B Laird Road, Unit #10 Mississauga, ONT Canada L5L 6A7
Phone:+1-905-820-7800 Fax:+1-905-820-7811 ITALY BOLOGNA OFFICE
Via Della Salute, 16/2, 40132 Bologna(BO), Italy
SOUTH AMERICA Phone:+39-051-641-2211 Fax:+39-051-641-2230
THK Brasil LTDA SWEDEN OFFICE
Av. Corifeu de Azevedo Marques,4.077 Butanta-Sao Paulo-Sao Paulo Brazil Veddestavägen 15B, S-17562 Järfälla, Sweden
05339-002 Phone:+46-8-445-7630 Fax:+46-8-445-7639
Phone:+55-11-3767-0100 Fax:+55-11-3767-0101 AUSTRIA OFFICE
Edelmüllerstrasse 2, A-4061 Pasching, Austria
CHINA Phone:+43-7229-51400 Fax:+43-7229-51400-79
THK (CHINA) CO., LTD. SPAIN OFFICE
HEADQUARTERS C/Andorra 19A, Sant Boi de Llobregat, 08830 Barcelona, Spain
No.41 Dalian Economic & Technical Development Zone, Phone:+34-93-652-5740 Fax:+34-93-652-5746
Liaoning Province 116600, China TURKEY OFFICE
Phone:+86-411-8733-7111 Fax:+86-411-8733-7000
Huseyin Colak Street Nail Ergin Business Center No:7 Ground
SHANGHAI OFFICE Floor Apartment No:2 Kozyatagi Kadikoy / Istanbul, Turkey
1002 Kirin Plaza, 666 Gubei Road, Shanghai 200336, China Phone:+90-216-463-0047 Fax:+90-216-463-0042
Phone:+86-21-6219-3000 Fax:+86-21-6219-9890
THK France S. A. S.
BEIJING OFFICE Les carres du Parc 10 rue des Rosieristes Immeuble A 69410 Champagne
2 Xin Yuan nan Road, Chaoyang District, Beijing 100004, Mont D'or, France
China KUNLUN HOTEL, Room No,417, China Phone:+33-4-3749-1400 Fax:+33-4-3749-1401
Phone:+86-10-6590-3259 Fax:+86-10-6590-3557
CHENGDU OFFICE AFRICA
Room No.2002 Western Tower No.19, Sec4, THK GmbH
Renmin nan Rd Chengdu 610041, China SOUTH AFRICA REPRESENTATIVE OFFICE
Phone:+86-28-8525-2356 Fax:+86-28-8525-6357 P.O.Box 13033 Witfield Johannesburg 1467, South Africa
GUANGZHOU OFFICE Phone:+27-11-821-3666 Fax:+27-11-821-3661
Room No,A625 Landmark Canton Hotel, No 8,
Qiao Guang Rd, Guangzhou 510000, China PRODUCTION FACILITY
Phone:+86-20-8333-9770 Fax:+86-20-8333-9726 THK Manufacturing of America, Inc.
THK (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD. P.O.Box 759, 471 North High Street, Hebron, OH. 43025, U.S.A.
1003-A Kirin Plaza, 666 Gubei Road, Shanghai 200336, China Phone:+1-740-928-1415 Fax:+1-740-928-1418
Phone:+86-21-6725-5280 Fax:+86-21-6219-9890 THK Manufacturing of Europe S. A. S.
Parc d'Activités la Passerelle, 68190 Ensisheim, France
TAIWAN Phone:+33-3-8983-4400 Fax:+33-3-8983-4409
THK TAIWAN CO., LTD. PGM Ballscrews Ireland Ltd.
TAIPEI OFFICE Tallaght Business Park, Whitestown, Industrial Estate, Tallaght, Dublin24, Ireland
Suite A, 7Fl., No.152, Sec 4, Chengde Rd., Shrlin Chiu, Taipei, Taiwan 112, R.O.C. Phone:+353-1-462-8101 Fax:+353-1-462-9080
Phone:+886-2-2888-3818 Fax:+886-2-2888-3819 DALIAN THK CO., LTD.
TAICHUNG OFFICE No.29 Huo Ju Road, Qi Xian Ling, Gan Jing Zi District, Dalian City,
2, 35th Rd., Taichung Ind. Park, Taichung, Taiwan 40707, R.O.C. Liao Ning Sheng, China 116023
Phone:+886-4-2359-1505 Fax:+886-4-2359-1506 Phone:+86-411-8479-0999 Fax:+86-411-8479-0111
SOUTHERN OFFICE THK MANUFACTURING OF CHINA (WUXI) CO., LTD.
6F. 2, NO.77, Sec.2, Jhonghua E.Rd., East District, Tainan city, 701 Taiwan R.O.C. No.19, Changjiang South Road, Wuxi, Jiangsu, 214028, China
Phone:+886-6-289-7668 Fax:+886-6-289-7669 Phone:+86-510-8534-4333 Fax:+86-510-8534-4666
THK MANUFACTURING OF CHINA(LIAONING) CO., LTD.
KOREA No.41, Dalian Economic & Technical Development Zone.
SEOUL REPRESENTATIVE OFFICE Liaoning Province. China
Geumgang Tower Bldg 16F.,889-13, Daechi-dong, Gangnam-gu, Seoul 135-280, Phone:+86-411-8733-7333 Fax:+86-411-8733-7222
Korea SAMICK THK CO., LTD.
Phone:+82-2-3468-4351 Fax:+82-2-3468-4353 1005, Weolam-dong, Dalseo-gu, Daegu, Korea
Phone:+82-53-665-7000 Fax:+82-53-581-8272
All rights reserved.
“LM Guide,” “Caged Ball” and “QZ” are registered trademarks of THK CO., LTD.
The appearance and specifications of each product are subject to change without notice for improvement.
Although great care has been taken in the production of this catalog, THK will not take any responsibility for
damage resulting from typographical errors or omissions. This catalog uses recycled paper.
©THK CO., LTD. 20061211 Printed in Japan
LIMITED WARRANTY
LIMITED WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY: THK CO. LTD., FOR ITSELF AND ITS RELATED COMPANIES AND
SUBSIDIARIES (HEREINAFTER DESCRIBED COLLECTIVELY AS “THK” ) WARRANTS THAT ALL THK PRODUCTS SOLD WILL BE
FREE OF DEFECTS IN MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP FOR A PERIOD OF TWELVE (12) MONTHS FROM DATE OF DELIVERY.
THE FOREGOING TWELVE (12) MONTH WARRANTY SHALL NOT BE EXTENDED OR CHANGED BY THK FURNISHING ANY
REPLACEMENTS, ADDITIONS, ATTACHMENTS, ACCESSORIES OR REPAIRS TO THE PRODUCT SUBSEQUENT TO THE DATE OF
DELIVERY OR ACCEPTANCE. THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY OF THK REGARDING THE
PRODUCT.
DISCLAIMER OF OTHER WARRANTIES: OTHER THAN THE FOREGOING WARRANTY, THERE ARE NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR ANY AFFIRMATIONS OF FACT OR PROMISES BY THK WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. THK DISCLAIMS ANY
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, NOT SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH ABOVE. WITHOUT LIMITING THE
GENERALITY OF THE FOREGOING, THK EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE, INFRINGEMENT OR ANY REPRESENTATIONS OF FACT OR QUALITY NOT EXPRESSLY SET
FORTH HEREIN.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND REMEDIES: THK'S SOLE RESPONSIBILITY AND LIABILITY INCURRED AS A RESULT OF THE SALE
AND/OR USE OF THE PRODUCT, AND THE PURCHASER'S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AGAINST THK UNDER ANY WARRANTY SHALL
BE LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT, AT THK'S OPTION, OF PRODUCT COMPONENTS NOT CONFORMING TO THE
WARRANTY. THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF THK SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID TO THK BY
PURCHASER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. THIS LIMITATION OF REMEDY IS INTENDED BY THE PARTIES TO SURVIVE
EVEN IF THE REMEDY IS CLAIMED TO HAVE FAILED OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. PURCHASER'S FULL AND COMPLETE
PERFORMANCE OF ALL OBLIGATIONS OF PURCHASER RECITED IN THIS AGREEMENT IS A CONDITION PRECEDENT TO THK'S
WARRANTY OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITIES HEREIN.
PURCHASER'S DAMAGES AND LIMITATIONS: IN NO EVENT SHALL THK BE LIABLE TO PURCHASER, ITS ASSIGNS OR AGENTS,
FOR ECONOMIC LOSS, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, IN CONTRACT OR IN TORT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, ANY DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS, DOWN-TIME, LOST PRODUCTION, FAILURE TO MEET PURCHASER'S SALES
CONTRACTS, OR DEFECTS IN PURCHASER'S MATERIALS OR WORKMANSHIP ARISING DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY FROM THE
USE OF THE PRODUCT.
DISCLAIMER
This Catalog provides basic information relating to THK linear motion and related products. The Catalog, including all information, charts,
formulas, factors, accuracy standards, tolerances and application recommendations contained herein, is only a starting point for the
customer’ s selection of appropriate products, and may not apply in all intended applications. The Catalog is not a substitute for a proper
application analysis conducted by an experienced, knowledgeable design engineer. Product selection should be based upon your specific
application needs and conditions, which will vary greatly depending on many factors. No specific product application should be based solely
on the information contained in this Catalog. All purchases of THK Products are subject to the limited warranty offered by THK Co., Ltd, for
itself and on behalf of its related companies and subsidiaries. Customers should confirm independently that a contemplated application is
safe, appropriate and effective.
"All trademarks used in this Catalog are registered trademarks in the Country of Japan. If there is any question as to the validity of such
trademarks outside of Japan, an inquiry should be made in that particular country."
Line Up
General Description
LM Guide
LM Guide Actuator
LM Actuator
Ball Spline
Spline Nut
Linear Bushing
LM Stroke
Cross Roller Table
Linear Ball Slide
LM Roller
Flat Roller
Slide Pack
Slide Rail
Ball Screw
Lead Screw Nut
Change Nut
Cross-Roller Ring
Cam Follower
Roller Follower
Link Ball
Rod End
Appendix
Line Up
General Description
LM Guide
LM Guide Actuator
LM Actuator
Ball Spline
Spline Nut
Linear Bushing
LM Stroke
Cross Roller Table
Linear Ball Slide
LM Roller
Flat Roller
Slide Pack
Slide Rail
Ball Screw
Lead Screw Nut
Change Nut
Cross-Roller Ring
Cam Follower
Roller Follower
Link Ball
Rod End
Appendix
For inquiries, please contact :
For the export of our products or technologies and for the sale for exports, THK in principle complies with the
foreign exchange law and the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Law as well as other relevant laws.
For export of THK products as single items, contact THK in advance.
THK Technical Support Site
The THK Technical Support Site lets you access product information and technical support
online. You will also find a search feature for locating desired products and a calculation feature
for calculating service life. 2D CAD and 3D CAD data are also downloadable.
Enter here.
Product Information
View information on our products.
Search by model number, description, or any other criteria.
Detailed Dimensional Drawings Detailed Specifications

Check detailed product dimensions according Check detailed product specifications according
to model number. to model number.
ii
Available in 3 languages: Japanese,English,and German
Technical Information FAQ

View technical information, from application View inquiries relating to products.
examples to research papers. You can search by an entire inquiry or answer.
Technical Calculation 2D CAD Data Downloads

Rated life (service life time) can be calculated simply Approximately 4,000 downloadables of 2D CAD
by entering model number, application criteria, etc. data (DXF files) are available.
3D CAD Data Downloads Catalog Information

Find 3D CAD data matching your specifications, Order any of a variety of catalogs.
from rail lengths to installation of option items. You can also view in PDF format.
◆No user registration required to access Product Information or 2D CAD Data Downloads.
◆To access other services, (free) user registration is required.
◆Use of all services is free.
iii
Guide to the General Catalog
The THK General Catalog is in two volumes, A Technical Descriptions of the Products, and B Product Specifications.
A Technical Descriptions of the Products mainly contains product

■Features and Structure
■Point of Selection
■Point of Design
■Mounting Procedure and Maintenance
■Options
■Precautions on Use
■Point of Selection include test data and service life

calculation formulas for use when considering technical
features in detail. Further, information relating generally
to lubrication and grease-type products in special
environments can be found conveniently together in
A Product Technical Descriptions
B Product Specifications contains dimensional drawings

and tables according to product and model number.
All information containing product dimensional elements
is given.
With two volumes, you can compare a page of product technical information with the
product's dimensional drawings and tables to aid when considering specifications.
We at THK are sure you will be pleased in finding products among our abundant selection
in the General Catalog that fit your needs.
iv
General Catalog
Contents B-1
THK General Catalog
• Bellows ................................................. B-235
LM Guide B-1 • LM cover ............................................... B-248
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table • Cap C .................................................... B-250
Caged Ball LM Guide • LM Block Dimension (Dimension L)
• Model SHS............................................. B-5 with QZ Attached .................................. B-251
• Model SSR............................................. B-15 • Lubrication Adapter ............................... B-254
• Model SNR/SNS ..................................... B-25 • End Piece EP ......................................... B-255
• Model SHW ............................................ B-43 • Greasing Hole ........................................ B-256
• Model SRS............................................. B-49 • Rack and Pinion ..................................... B-259
• Model SCR ............................................ B-55
LM Guide
LM Guide Actuator B-261
• Model HSR ............................................ B-61 Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table
• Model SR ............................................... B-85 Model KR.................................................. B-263
• Model NR/NRS ....................................... B-93 Model Number Coding.............................. B-290
• Model HRW ........................................... B-107 Mass of Moving Element .......................... B-290
• Models RSR/RSR-W ............................... B-113
• Model RSR-Z ......................................... B-121 Model SKR ............................................... B-291
• Model RSH ............................................ B-127 Model Number Coding.............................. B-300
• Model RSH-Z ......................................... B-131 Mass of Moving Element .......................... B-300
• Model HR .............................................. B-137
• Model GSR ............................................ B-145 Options .................................................... B-301
• Model GSR-R ......................................... B-149 Bellows ..................................................... B-302
• Model CSR ............................................ B-153 Sensor ...................................................... B-308
• Model MX .............................................. B-159 Motor Bracket ........................................... B-312
• Model JR ............................................... B-163 Motor Wrap Type (for Reference)............. B-342
• Model HCR ............................................ B-167 XY Bracket (for Reference) ...................... B-343
• Model HMG ............................................ B-171
• Model NSR-TBC ..................................... B-177
• Model HSR-M1 .......................................
LM Actuator B-347
B-181
• Model SR-M1 ......................................... B-191 Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table
• Model RSR-M1 ....................................... B-197 Model GL .................................................. B-347
• Model HSR-M2 ....................................... B-203 • Ball Screw Drive Type
Long table type of model GL15 ............. B-348
Caged Roller LM Guide Short table type of model GL15 ............ B-349
• Model SRG ............................................ B-207 Long table type of model GL20 ............. B-350
• Model SRN ............................................ B-213 Short table type of model GL20 ............ B-351
• Model SRW ............................................ B-219
• Belt Drive Type
Options.................................................... B-223 Long table type of model GL15 ............. B-352
• The LM Block Dimension (Dimension L) Short table type of model GL15 ............ B-353
with LaCS and Seals Attached ............... B-224 Long table type of model GL20 ............. B-354
• Incremental dimension with grease nipple Short table type of model GL20 ............ B-355
(when LaCS is attached) ........................ B-231
• LM Block Dimension (Dimension L) • Model Number Coding............................ B-356
with LiCS Attached................................ B-233
• Incremental dimension with grease nipple Options .................................................... B-358
(when LiCS is attached) ......................... B-234 • Bellows ................................................. B-358
Contents B-2
• Endplate ................................................ B-362
• Plate Nut for Mounting the Base .............. B-362
Linear Bushing B-417
Model LM................................................... B-418
Ball Spline B-363

Model LM-GA (Metal Retainer Type) ........ B-420
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table Model LM-MG (Stainless Steel Type) ....... B-422
High Torque Type Ball Spline Model LME ................................................ B-424
Model LBS, LBF, LBH, LBST and LBR..... B-367 Model LM-L ............................................... B-426
• Miniature Ball Spline ............................... B-368 Model LMF ................................................ B-428
• Model LBS (Medium Load Type) .............. B-370 Model LMF-M (Stainless Steel Type) ........ B-430
• Model LBST (Heavy Load Type) ............... B-372 Model LMK ................................................ B-432
• Model LBF (Medium Load Type) .............. B-374 Model LMK-M (Stainless Steel Type)........ B-434
• Type LBR ............................................... B-376 Model LMF-L ............................................. B-436
• Type LBH ............................................... B-378 Model LMF-ML (Stainless Steel Type) ...... B-438
• Model LBS Model LMK-L ............................................. B-440
with Recommended Shaft End Shape ..... B-380 Model LMK-ML (stainless steel type) ........ B-442
Model LMH ................................................ B-444
• Spline shaft ............................................ B-381 Model LMH-L............................................. B-446
• Accessories ........................................... B-384 Models SC6 to 30...................................... B-448
Models SC35 to 50.................................... B-450
Medium Torque Type Ball Spline Model SL ................................................... B-452
Models LT and LF.................................. B-385 Model SH................................................... B-454
• Model LT ................................................ B-386 Model SH-L ............................................... B-456
• Model LF ................................................ B-388 Model SK................................................... B-458
• Model LT with Recommended Shaft End Shape .. B-390
Dedicated Shafts for Model LM ................. B-459
• Spline shaft ............................................ B-391 Standard LM Shafts................................... B-460
• Accessories ........................................... B-393
Options..................................................... B-461
Rotary Ball Spline With Geared type Felt Seal Model FLM ................................. B-461
Models LBG and LBGT ......................... B-395
• Type LBG ............................................... B-396
• Model LBG ............................................. B-398
LM Stroke B-463
• Spline shaft ............................................ B-400 LM Stroke Models ST, ST-B and STI
• Models ST and ST-B ............................... B-464
Rotary Ball Spline With Support Bearing type • Models ST…UU and ST…UUB ................. B-468
Model LTR,and LTR-A........................... B-403
• Models LTR-A Compact type ................... B-404 Miniature Stroke Model MST
• Model LTR .............................................. B-406 • Model MST ............................................. B-472
• Spline shaft ............................................ B-408 Die-setting Ball Cage Models KS and BS

• Models KS / BS ....................................... B-474
Maximum Manufacturing Length by Accuracy.. B-410
Precision Linear Pack B-475
Spline Nut B-411 Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table Model ER................................................... B-476
Model DPM ............................................... B-412
Model DP .................................................. B-414
Contents B-3
Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide B-479 Flat Roller B-531
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table
Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR1)........... B-480 Model FT .................................................. B-532
Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR2)........... B-482 Model FTW ............................................... B-533
Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR3)........... B-484
Slide Pack B-535
Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR9)........... B-490 Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table
Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR12) ......... B-492 Models FBW 2560R and 3590R............... B-536
Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR15) ......... B-494 Models FBW 50110R and 50110H.............. B-537
Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR18) ......... B-496
Ball Cage Model B.................................... B-498 Options .................................................... B-538
Metal Dustproof Cover.............................. B-538
Options.................................................... B-499
Dedicated Mounting Bolt .......................... B-499 Mounting Procedure and Maintenance.... B-539
Installation ................................................ B-539
Cross Roller Table B-501
Slide Rail B-541
Model VRT Miniature Type Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table
(Tapped Base Type) ............................. B-502 Model FBL 27S......................................... B-542
Model VRT-A Miniature Type Model FBL 27S-P14 ................................. B-543
(Tapped Base Type) ............................. B-504 Model FBL 35S......................................... B-544
Model VRU ............................................... B-506 Model FBL 35M ........................................ B-545
Model FBL 35J ......................................... B-546
Model FBL 35J-P13.................................. B-547
Linear Ball Slide B-513 Model FBL 35J-P14.................................. B-548
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table Model FBL 35B......................................... B-549
Model LSP................................................ B-514 Model FBL 35T ......................................... B-550
Model LS .................................................. B-516 Model FBL 27D......................................... B-551
Model LSC................................................ B-518 Model FBL 35E-P14 ................................. B-552
Model FBL 35G-P13................................. B-553
Speed Controller ...................................... B-520 Model FBL 35G-P14................................. B-554
Dedicated Unit Base Model B .................. B-520 Model FBL 35D......................................... B-555
Limit Switch .............................................. B-521 Model FBL 35W........................................ B-556
Model FBL 51H......................................... B-557
Model FBL 51H-P13 ................................. B-558
LM Roller B-523 Model FBL 51H-P14 ................................. B-559
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table Model FBL 35K......................................... B-560
Models LR and LR-Z ................................ B-524 Model FBL 56H......................................... B-561
Models LRA and LRA-Z ........................... B-525 Model FBL 56H-P13 ................................. B-562
Models LRB and LRB-Z ........................... B-526 Model FBL 561H-P14 ............................... B-563
Model LRU ............................................... B-527 Model FBL 35F ......................................... B-564
Model FBL 56F ......................................... B-565
Options.................................................... B-528 Model FBL 48DR ...................................... B-566
Spring Pad................................................ B-528 Model E15 ................................................ B-567
Models SM and SMB................................ B-529 Model E20 ................................................ B-568
Models SE and SEB................................. B-530 Model D20 ................................................ B-569
Contents B-4
Ball Screw B-571 Lead Screw Nut B-785
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table
Precision, Caged Ball Screw Model DCM ............................................... B-786

Models SBN, SBK and HBN.................. B-575 Model DC .................................................. B-788
Standard-Stock Precision Ball Screw
Unfinished Shaft Ends Models BIF,
BNFN, MDK, MBF and BNF .................. B-583
Change Nut B-791
Standard-Stock Precision Ball Screw Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table
Finished Shaft Ends Model BNK ........... B-607 Models DCMA and DCMB......................... B-792
Models BIF, DIK, BNFN, DKN,BLW,
BNF, DK, MDK, BLK/WGF and BNT ..... B-651
Cross-Roller Ring B-795
Precision Rotary Ball Screw Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table
Models DIR and BLR............................. B-719 Model RU (Integrated Inner/Outer Ring Type) . B-796
Precision Ball Screw / Spline Model RB (Separable Outer Ring Type) ... B-798
Models BNS-A, BNS, NS-A and NS ...... B-725 Model RE (Two-piece Inner Ring Type) .... B-801
Rolled Ball Screw Models JPF, BTK, USP-Grade Models RB and RE ................ B-804
MTF, BLK/WTF, CNF and BNT ............. B-735 Model RA (Separable Outer Ring Type) ... B-805
Rolled Rotary Ball Screw Model BLR........ B-747 Model RA-C (Single-Split Type) ................ B-806
Maximum Length of the Ball Screw Shaft . B-750

Cam Follower B-807
Ball Screw Peripherals ........................... B-753 Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table
Model EK Square Type Support Unit Model CF
on the Fixed Side................................... B-754 (Popular Type (Cylindrical Outer Ring)),
Model BK Square Type Support Unit Model CF-M (Stainless Steel Type),
on the Fixed Side................................... B-756 Model CF-R (Popular Type
Model FK Round Type Support Unit (Spherical Outer Ring)),
on the Fixed Side................................... B-758 Model CF-MR (Stainless Steel Type)........ B-808
Model EF Square Type Support Unit
on the Supported Side........................... B-762 Model CF-A
Model BF Square Type Support Unit (Cam Follower with Hexagon Socket
on the Supported Side........................... B-764 (Cylindrical Outer Ring)),
Model FF Round Type Support Unit Model CF-M-A (Stainless Steel Type),
on the Supported Side........................... B-766 Model CF-R-A
Recommended Shapes (Cam Follower with Hexagon Socket
of Shaft Ends - Shape H (H1, H2 and H3) (Spherical Outer Ring)),
(Support Unit Models FK and EK) ......... B-768 Model CF-MR-A (Stainless Steel Type) .... B-810
Recommended Shapes
of Shaft Ends - Shape J (J1, J2 and J3) Model CF-B
(Support Unit Model BK)........................ B-770 (Cam Follower with Hexagon Socket
Recommended Shapes (Cylindrical Outer Ring)),
of Shaft Ends - Shape K Model CF-M-B (Made of Stainless Steel)
(Support Unit Models FF, EF and BF) ... B-772 Model CF-R-B
Nut bracket................................................ B-774 (Cam Follower with Hexagon Socket
Lock Nut .................................................... B-776 (Spherical Outer Ring)),
Model CF-MR-B
Options..................................................... B-777 (Made of Stainless Steel)....................... B-812
Dimensions of the Ball Screw Nut Attached
with Wiper Ring W and QZ Lubricator ...... B-778
Contents B-5
Model CFH-A Models NART-R
(Eccentric Cam Follower with Hexagon (Non-separable Type with a Spherical
Socket (Cylindrical Outer Ring)), Outer Ring),
Model CFH-M-A (Made of Stainless Steel) NART-VR
Model CFH-R-A (Non-separable Type with a Spherical
(Eccentric Cam Follower with Hexagon Outer Ring and Full Balls).................... B-825
Socket (Spherical Outer Ring)),
Model CFH-MR-A
(Made of Stainless Steel)...................... B-814
Spherical Plain Bearing B-827
Model CFN-R-A Model SB .................................................. B-828
(Cam Follower Containing Thrust Balls) .. B-816 Model SA1 ................................................ B-830
Model CFT
(Cam Follower with Tapped Greasing
Link Ball B-833
Hole (Cylindrical Outer Ring)), Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table
Model CFT-M Model AL .................................................. B-834
(Made of Stainless Steel) Model BL .................................................. B-836
Model CFT-R Model RBL................................................ B-838
(Cam Follower with Tapped Model RBI................................................. B-840
Greasing Hole (Spherical Outer Ring)), Model TBS................................................ B-842
Model CFT-MR
(Made of Stainless Steel)........................ B-818
Rod End B-845
Accessories .............................................. B-820 Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table
Accessories for the Cam Follower............ B-820 Model PHS (Female Threading Type)...... B-846
Model RBH (Die Cast, Low Price Type) ... B-848
Model NHS-T (No Lubrication Type) ........ B-850
Model POS (MaleThread Type)................ B-852
Roller Follower B-821 Model NOS-T
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table (No Lubrication, Male Thread Type) ..... B-854
Models NAST Model PB (Standard Type) ....................... B-856
(Separable Type with a Cylindrical Model PBA (Die Cast Type) ..................... B-857
Outer Ring), Model NB-T (No Lubrication Type)........... B-858
NAST-R Model HS (No Lubrication,
(Separable Type with a Spherical Corrosion-resistant Type) ..................... B-860
Outer Ring) .......................................... B-822 Model HB (No Lubrication Type) .............. B-862
Models NAST-ZZ
(Separable Type with a Cylindrical
Accessories for Lubrication B-863
Outer Ring and Side Plates), Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table
NAST-ZZR Grease Gun Unit MG70............................ B-864
(Separable Type with a Spherical Special Plumbing Fixtures ........................ B-865
Outer Ring and Side Plates) ................ B-823 Grease nipple ........................................... B-866
Models NAST RNAST

(Separable Type with a Cylindrical
Outer Ring and No Inner Ring),
RNAST-R
(Separable Type with a Spherical
Outer Ring and No Inner Ring) ............ B-824
Contents B-6
LM Guide®
General Catalog
B-1
LM Guide
General Catalog
B Product Specifications A Technical Descriptions of the Products
(Separate)
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table Features and Types................................ A-28
Caged Ball LM Guide Features of the LM Guide ...................... A-28
• Model SHS ............................................. B-5 • Large permissible load and high rigidity....... A-29
• Model SSR ............................................. B-15 • High Precision of Motion ........................... A-31
• Model SNR/SNS...................................... B-25 • Accuracy Averaging Effect by Absorbing Mounting Surface Error A-34
• Model SHW ............................................ B-43 • Easy Maintenance ................................... A-36
• Model SRS ............................................. B-49 • Improved productivity of the machine .......... A-36
• Model SCR ............................................. B-55
• Substantial Energy Savings ....................... A-37
• Low Total Cost ........................................ A-38
LM Guide
• Ideal Four Raceway, Circular-Arc Groove,
• Model HSR ............................................. B-61
• Model SR ............................................... B-85 Two-Point Contact Structure ..................... A-39
• Model NR/NRS ....................................... B-93 • Superb Error-Absorbing Capability with the DF Design . A-43
• Model HRW ............................................ B-107 Classification Table of the LM Guides.. A-44
• Models RSR/RSR-W ................................ B-113 Point of Selection ................................... A-46

• Model RSR-Z .......................................... B-121 Flowchart for Selecting an LM Guide ... A-46
• Model RSH ............................................. B-127 Selecting a Type ..................................... A-48
• Model RSH-Z .......................................... B-131 • Types of LM Guides ................................. A-48
• Model HR ............................................... B-137 Setting Conditions.................................. A-58
• Model GSR ............................................. B-145 • Conditions of the LM Guide ....................... A-58
• Model GSR-R ......................................... B-149 Calculating the Applied Load ................ A-74
• Model CSR ............................................. B-153 • Load rating of the LM Guide in all directions A-74
• Model MX ............................................... B-159
• Calculating an Applied Load ...................... A-75
• Model JR ................................................ B-163
Calculating the Equivalent Load ........... A-94
• Model HCR ............................................. B-167
• Model HMG ............................................ B-171
Calculating the Static Safety Factor ..... A-95
• Model NSR-TBC...................................... B-177 Calculating the Average Load ............... A-96
• Model HSR-M1 ....................................... B-181 • Example of Calculating the Average Load (1)
• Model SR-M1 .......................................... B-191 - with Horizontal Mount and Acceleration/Deceleration Considered . A-98
• Model RSR-M1 ....................................... B-197 • Example of Calculating the Average Load (2)
• Model HSR-M2 ....................................... B-203 - When the Rails are Movable ................... A-99
Calculating the Nominal Life ................. A-100
Caged Roller LM Guide • Nominal Life Equation for an LM Guide Using Balls . A-100
• Model SRG ............................................. B-207 • Rated Life Equation for an LM Guide Using Rollers . A-100
• Model SRN ............................................. B-213 • Example of Calculating the Nominal Life (1)
• Model SRW ............................................ B-219 - with Horizontal Mount and High-speed Acceleration .. A-103
• Example of Calculating the Nominal Life (2)
Options.................................................... B-223 - with Vertical Mount ................................ A-108
• The LM Block Dimension (Dimension L) with LaCS and Seals Attached . B-224
Predicting the Rigidity ........................... A-111
• Incremental dimension with grease nipple (when LaCS is attached). B-231
• Selecting a Radial Clearance (Preload) ....... A-111
• LM Block Dimension (Dimension L) with LiCS Attached . B-233
• Service Life with a Preload Considered ....... A-112
• Incremental dimension with grease nipple (when LiCS is attached) B-234
• Rigidity ................................................... A-112
• Bellows .................................................. B-235
• LM cover ................................................ B-248 • Radial Clearance Standard for Each Model . A-113
• Cap C .................................................... B-250 Determining the Accuracy ..................... A-116
• LM Block Dimension (Dimension L) with QZ Attached B-251 • Accuracy Standards ................................. A-116
• Lubrication Adapter .................................. B-254 • Guidelines for Accuracy Grades by Machine Type . A-117
• End Piece EP.......................................... B-255 • Accuracy Standard for Each Model ............ A-118
• Greasing Hole ......................................... B-256
• Rack and Pinion ...................................... B-259
B-2
Accuracy of Each Model........................ A-129 Designing a Mounting Surface.............. A-324
Structure and Features of the Caged Ball LM Guide .. A-130 • Designing a Mounting Surface ................... A-324
• Advantages of the Ball Cage Technology .... A-131 • Shoulder Height of the Mounting Base and the Corner Radius . A-326
• Permissible Error of the Mounting Surface .. A-333
Caged Ball LM Guides ........................... A-136 • Marking on the Master LM Guide and Combined Use . A-338
• Model SHS ............................................. A-136
• Model SSR ............................................. A-142 Mounting Procedure and Maintenance.... A-340
• Model SNR/SNS ..................................... A-148 Mounting the LM Guide ......................... A-340
• Model SHW ............................................ A-156 • Mounting Procedure ................................ A-340
• Model SRS ............................................. A-160 • Methods for Measuring Accuracy after Installation A-350
• Model SCR ............................................. A-166 • Recommended Tightening Torque for LM Rails . A-350
LM Guide................................................. A-170 Options.................................................... A-351

• Model HSR ............................................. A-170 Contamination Protection ..................... A-352
• Model SR ............................................... A-178 • Seal and Metal Scraper ............................ A-352
• Model NR/NRS ....................................... A-186 • Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS .............. A-353
• Model HRW ............................................ A-194 • Light-Resistance Contact Seal LiCS ........... A-355
• Models RSR/RSR-W................................ A-200 • Dedicated bellows ................................... A-356
• Model RSR-Z .......................................... A-208 • Dedicated LM Cover ................................ A-356
• Model RSH ............................................. A-214 • Cap C .................................................... A-357
• Model RSH-Z .......................................... A-218 • Plate Cover SV -- Steel Tape SP ................. A-358
• Model HR ............................................... A-224
• Model GSR ............................................ A-230 Lubrication.............................................. A-361
• Model GSR-R ......................................... A-236 • QZ Lubricator.......................................... A-361
• Model CSR ............................................. A-244 • Lubrication Adapter.................................. A-364
• Model MX............................................... A-248 • Removing/mounting Jig ............................ A-365
• Model JR ............................................... A-252 • End Piece EP ......................................... A-366
• Model HCR ............................................ A-258
• Model HMG ............................................ A-262 List of Parts Symbols............................. A-368
• Model NSR-TBC ..................................... A-268
• Model HSR-M1 ....................................... A-272 Table of Supported Options by Models... A-370
• Model SR-M1 ......................................... A-280
• Model RSR-M1 ....................................... A-286 Dimensions of Each Model with an Option Attached
• Model HSR-M2 ....................................... A-292 • Seal resistance value ............................... A-372
• Resistance of LaCS ................................. A-375
Structure and Features of the Caged Roller LM Guide... A-296 • Maximum Seal Resistance of LiCS ............ A-376
• Advantages of the Caged Roller Technology . A-297 • Greasing Hole ......................................... A-377
Caged Roller LM Guide.......................... A-300 Precautions on Use................................ A-381

• Model SRG ............................................ A-300 Precautions on Using the LM Guide..... A-381
• Model SRN ............................................. A-306 Precautions on Using Options for the LM Guide .. A-382
• Model SRW ............................................ A-312 • QZ Lubricator.......................................... A-382
• Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS, Side Scraper .... A-382
Point of Design....................................... A-318 • Light sliding resistance contact seal LiCS .... A-383
Designing the Guide System ................ A-318
• Examples of Arrangements of the Guide System A-318
• Method for Securing an LM Guide to Meet the Conditions . A-322
* Please see the separate "A Technical Descriptions of the Products".
B-3
B-4
SHS
Caged Ball LM Guides
(Separate)
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table Technical Descriptions
Models SHS-C and SHS-LC ............. B-6 Structure and features....................... A-137
Models SHS-V and SHS-LV.............. B-8 Types and Features .......................... A-138
Models SHS-R and SHS-LR ............. B-10 Rated Loads in All Directions ............ A-140
Equivalent Load ................................ A-140
Standard Length and Maximum Length Service Life ....................................... A-100
of the LM Rail................................... B-12 Radial Clearance Standard ............... A-113
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model SHS... B-13 Accuracy Standards .......................... A-119
Shoulder Height of the Mounting Base
Options............................................. B-223 and the Corner Radius ...................... A-327
The LM Block Dimension (Dimension L) Error Allowance in the Parallelism
with LaCS and Seals Attached ........... B-224 between Two Rails ........................ A-333
Incremental dimension with grease nipple Error Allowance in Vertical Level
(when LaCS is attached) ..................... B-231 between Two Rails ........................ A-336
Dedicated Bellows JSH for Model SHS... B-235
Cap C ................................................ B-250
LM Block Dimension (Dimension L)
with QZ Attached ........................... B-251
* Please see the separate "A Technical Descriptions of

the Products".
B-5
Models SHS-C and SHS-LC
W
4-S
B
(φ H through)
T1 T
（K）
M
H3
W2 W1
Pilot hole for

Outer dimensions LM block dimensions
side nipple＊＊
Height Width Length

Model No.
Grease
nipple
M W L B C S H L1 T T1 K N E e0 f0 D0
SHS 15C 64.4 48

24 47 38 30 M5 4.4 5.9 8 21 5.5 5.5 PB1021B 4 4 3
SHS 15LC 79.4 63
SHS 20C 79 59
30 63 53 40 M6 5.4 7.2 10 25.4 6.5 12 B-M6F 4.3 5.3 3
SHS 20LC 98 78
SHS 25C 92 71
36 70 57 45 M8 6.8 9.1 12 30.2 7.5 12 B-M6F 6 5.5 3
SHS 25LC 109 88
SHS 30C 106 80
42 90 72 52 M10 8.5 11.5 15 35 8 12 B-M6F 5.5 6 5.2
SHS 30LC 131 105
SHS 35C 122 93
48 100 82 62 M10 8.5 11.5 15 40.5 8 12 B-M6F 6.5 5.5 5.2
SHS 35LC 152 123
SHS 45C 140 106
60 120 100 80 M12 10.5 14.1 18 51.1 10.5 16 B-PT1/8 8 8 5.2
SHS 45LC 174 140
SHS 55C 171 131
70 140 116 95 M14 12.5 16 21 57.3 11 16 B-PT1/8 10 8 5.2
SHS 55LC 213 173
SHS 65C 221 175
90 170 142 110 M16 14.5 18.8 24 71 19 16 B-PT1/8 10 12 5.2
SHS 65LC 272 226
Model number coding
SHS25 LC 2 QZ KKHH C0 +1200L P T Z -Ⅱ

Model Type of With QZ Contamination LM rail length Symbol for
With steel
Lubricator protection (in mm) tape No. of rails used
number LM block accessory on the same
symbol (*1) Symbol for LM rail plane (*4)
No. of LM blocks Radial clearance symbol (*2) jointed use
used on the same rail Normal (No symbol)
Accuracy symbol (*3)
Light preload (C1)
Medium preload (C0) Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
Ultra precision grade (UP)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A-368. (*2) See A-113. (*3) See A-119. (*4) See A-59.
Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
used in parallel is 2 at a minimum.)
Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
B-6
（E） L
4-φ D0
＊＊
L1 e0
C
f0
φ d2
N
LM Guide
h
M1
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
Basic Static permissible
LM rail dimensions Mass
load rating moment kN-m＊
MA MB MC LM LM
Width Height Pitch Length＊ C C0
block rail
W1
1 Double 1 Double 1
H3 0 W2 M1 F d1×d2×h Max kN kN kg kg/m
block blocks block blocks block
-0.05
14.2 24.2 0.175 0.898 0.175 0.898 0.16 0.23
3 15 16 13 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 2500 1.3
17.2 31.9 0.296 1.43 0.296 1.43 0.212 0.29
22.3 38.4 0.334 1.75 0.334 1.75 0.361 0.46
4.6 20 21.5 16.5 60 6×9.5×8.5 3000 2.3
28.1 50.3 0.568 2.8 0.568 2.8 0.473 0.61
31.7 52.4 0.566 2.75 0.566 2.75 0.563 0.72
5.8 23 23.5 20 60 7×11×9 3000 3.2
36.8 64.7 0.848 3.98 0.848 3.98 0.696 0.89
44.8 66.6 0.786 4.08 0.786 4.08 0.865 1.34
7 28 31 23 80 9×14×12 3000 4.5
54.2 88.8 1.36 6.6 1.36 6.6 1.15 1.66
62.3 96.6 1.36 6.76 1.38 6.76 1.53 1.9
7.5 34 33 26 80 9×14×12 3000 6.2
72.9 127 2.34 10.9 2.34 10.9 2.01 2.54
82.8 126 2.05 10.1 2.05 10.1 2.68 3.24
8.9 45 37.5 32 105 14×20×17 3090 10.4
100 166 3.46 16.3 3.46 16.3 3.53 4.19
128 197 3.96 19.3 3.96 19.3 4.9 5.35
12.7 53 43.5 38 120 16×23×20 3060 14.5
161 259 6.68 31.1 6.68 31.1 6.44 6.97
205 320 8.26 40.4 8.26 40.4 9.4 10.7
19 63 53.5 53 150 18×26×22 3000 23.7
253 408 13.3 62.6 13.3 62.6 11.9 13.7
Note) Pilot holes for side nipples are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.
＊＊
THK will mount grease nipples per your request. Therefore, do not use the side nipple pilot holes ＊＊ for purposes other
than mounting a grease nipple.
The maximum length under “Length＊” indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See B-12.)
Static permissible moment＊: 1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with 2 blocks closely contacting with each other
Description of Each Option ⇒A-351 Dimensions⇒B-223 B-7

Models SHS-V and SHS-LV
W
4-S×l
B
M （K）
H3
W2 W1
Pilot hole for

side nipple＊＊
Height Width Length

Model No.
Grease
nipple
M W L B C S×l L1 T K N E e0 f0 D0
SHS 15V 64.4 26 48

24 34 26 M4×4 5.9 21 5.5 5.5 PB1021B 4 4 3
SHS 15LV 79.4 34 63
SHS 20V 79 36 59
30 44 32 M5×5 8 25.4 6.5 12 B-M6F 4.3 5.3 3
SHS 20LV 98 50 78
SHS 25V 92 35 71
36 48 35 M6×6.5 8 30.2 7.5 12 B-M6F 6 5.5 3
SHS 25LV 109 50 88
SHS 30V 106 40 80
42 60 40 M8×8 8 35 8 12 B-M6F 5.5 6 5.2
SHS 30LV 131 60 105
SHS 35V 122 50 93
48 70 50 M8×10 14.7 40.5 8 12 B-M6F 6.5 5.5 5.2
SHS 35LV 152 72 123
SHS 45V 140 60 106
60 86 60 M10×15 14.9 51.1 10.5 16 B-PT1/8 8 8 5.2
SHS 45LV 174 80 140
SHS 55V 171 75 131
70 100 75 M12×15 19.4 57.3 11 16 B-PT1/8 10 8 5.2
SHS 55LV 213 95 173
SHS 65V 221 70 175
90 126 76 M16×20 19.5 71 19 16 B-PT1/8 10 12 5.2
SHS 65LV 272 120 226
Model number coding
SHS30 V 2 QZ KKHH C1 +1240L P T Z -Ⅱ

Model Type of With QZ Contamination LM rail length With steel Symbol for
Lubricator protection (in mm) tape No. of rails used
used on the same rail Normal (No symbol) Accuracy symbol (*3)
Light preload (C1) Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
Medium preload (C0) Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
B-8
（E） L
4-φ D0
＊＊
L1 e0
C
f0
φ d2
LM Guide
N
M1
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
W1
1 Double 1 Double 1
-0.05
14.2 24.2 0.175 0.898 0.175 0.898 0.16 0.19
3 15 9.5 13 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 2500 1.3
17.2 31.9 0.296 1.43 0.296 1.43 0.212 0.22
22.3 38.4 0.334 1.75 0.334 1.75 0.361 0.35
4.6 20 12 16.5 60 6×9.5×8.5 3000 2.3
28.1 50.3 0.568 2.8 0.568 2.8 0.473 0.46
31.7 52.4 0.566 2.75 0.566 2.75 0.563 0.54
5.8 23 12.5 20 60 7×11×9 3000 3.2
36.8 64.7 0.848 3.98 0.848 3.98 0.696 0.67
44.8 66.6 0.786 4.08 0.786 4.08 0.865 0.94
7 28 16 23 80 9×14×12 3000 4.5
54.2 88.8 1.36 6.6 1.36 6.6 1.15 1.16
62.3 96.6 1.38 6.76 1.38 6.76 1.53 1.4
7.5 34 18 26 80 9×14×12 3000 6.2
72.9 127 2.34 10.9 2.34 10.9 2.01 1.84
82.8 126 2.05 10.1 2.05 10.1 2.68 2.54
8.9 45 20.5 32 105 14×20×17 3090 10.4
100 166 3.46 16.3 3.46 16.3 3.53 3.19
128 197 3.96 19.3 3.96 19.3 4.9 4.05
12.7 53 23.5 38 120 16×23×20 3060 14.5
161 259 6.68 31.1 6.68 31.1 6.44 5.23
205 320 8.26 40.4 8.26 40.4 9.4 8.41
19 63 31.5 53 150 18×26×22 3000 23.7
253 408 13.3 62.6 13.3 62.6 11.9 10.7
＊＊

Models SHS-R and SHS-LR
W
4-S×l
B
M （K）
H3
W2 W1
Pilot hole for

side nipple＊＊
Height Width Length

Model No.
Grease
nipple
M W L B C S×l L1 T K N E e0 f0 D0
SHS 15R 28 34 64.4 26 26 M4×5 48 5.9 25 9.5 5.5 PB1021B 4 8 3

SHS 25R 92 35 71
40 48 35 M6×8 8 34.2 11.5 12 B-M6F 6 9.5 3
SHS 25LR 109 50 88
SHS 30R 106 40 80
45 60 40 M8×10 8 38 11 12 B-M6F 5.5 9 5.2
SHS 30LR 131 60 105
SHS 35R 122 50 93 12.
55 70 50 M8×12 14.7 47.5 15 12 B-M6F 6.5 5.2
SHS 35LR 152 72 123 5
SHS 45R 140 60 106
70 86 60 M10×17 14.9 61.1 20.5 16 B-PT1/8 8 18 5.2
SHS 45LR 174 80 140
SHS 55R 171 75 131
80 100 75 M12×18 19.4 67.3 21 16 B-PT1/8 10 18 5.2
SHS 55LR 213 95 173
Model number coding
SHS45 LR 2 QZ KKHH C0 +1200L P T -Ⅱ

Contamination Symbol for
Model Type of With QZ LM rail length Symbol for No. of rails used
Lubricator protection (in mm) LM rail
jointed use plane (*4)
symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks
Radial clearance symbol (*2) Accuracy symbol (*3)
used on the same rail Normal (No symbol) Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
Light preload (C1) Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
B-10
（E） L
＊＊
4-φ D０
L1 e0
C
φ d２ N f0
LM Guide
h
M１
φ d１
F
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
Lengt
Width Height Pitch h＊ C C0
block rail
W1
1 Double 1 Double 1
-0.05
3 15 9.5 13 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 2500 14.2 24.2 0.175 0.898 0.175 0.898 0.16 0.22 1.3
31.7 52.4 0.556 2.75 0.566 2.75 0.563 0.66
5.8 23 12.5 20 60 7×11×9 3000 3.2
36.8 64.7 0.848 3.98 0.848 3.98 0.696 0.8
44.8 66.6 0.786 4.08 0.786 4.08 0.865 1.04
7 28 16 23 80 9×14×12 3000 4.5
54.2 88.8 1.36 6.6 1.36 6.6 1.15 1.36
62.3 96.6 1.38 6.76 1.38 6.76 1.53 1.8
7.5 34 18 26 80 9×14×12 3000 6.2
72.9 127 2.34 10.9 2.34 10.9 2.01 2.34
82.8 126 2.05 10.1 2.05 10.1 2.68 3.24
8.9 45 20.5 32 105 14×20×17 3090 10.4
100 166 3.46 16.3 3.46 16.3 3.53 4.19
128 197 3.96 19.3 3.96 19.3 4.9 5.05
12.7 53 23.5 38 120 16×23×20 3060 14.5
161 259 6.68 31.1 6.68 31.1 6.44 6.57
Note) Pilot holes for side nipples＊＊ are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.

Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail
Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model SHS variations. If the maxi-
mum length of the desired LM rail exceeds them, jointed rails will be used. Contact THK for details.
For the G dimension when a special length is required, we recommend selecting the corresponding
G value from the table. The longer the G dimension is, the less stable the G area may become after
installation, thus causing an adverse impact to accuracy.
G F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model SHS Unit: mm
Model No. SHS 15 SHS 20 SHS 25 SHS 30 SHS 35 SHS 45 SHS 55 SHS 65
160 220 220 280 280 570 780 1270
220 280 280 360 360 675 900 1570
280 340 340 440 440 780 1020 2020
340 400 400 520 520 885 1140 2620
400 460 460 600 600 990 1260
460 520 520 680 680 1095 1380
520 580 580 760 760 1200 1500
580 640 640 840 840 1305 1620
640 700 700 920 920 1410 1740
700 760 760 1000 1000 1515 1860
760 820 820 1080 1080 1620 1980
820 940 940 1160 1160 1725 2100
940 1000 1000 1240 1240 1830 2220
1000 1060 1060 1320 1320 1935 2340
1060 1120 1120 1400 1400 2040 2460
LM rail standard
1120 1180 1180 1480 1480 2145 2580
length (L0)
1180 1240 1240 1560 1560 2250 2700
1240 1360 1300 1640 1640 2355 2820
1360 1480 1360 1720 1720 2460 2940
1480 1600 1420 1800 1800 2565 3060
1600 1720 1480 1880 1880 2670
1840 1540 1960 1960 2775
1960 1600 2040 2040 2880
2080 1720 2200 2200 2985
2200 1840 2360 2360 3090
1960 2520 2520
2080 2680 2680
2200 2840 2840
2320 3000 3000
2440
Standard pitch F 60 60 60 80 80 105 120 150

G 20 20 20 20 20 22.5 30 35
Max length 2500 3000 3000 3000 3000 3090 3060 3000
Note1) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
Note2) If jointed rails are not allowed and a greater length than the maximum values above is required, contact THK.
B-12
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model SHS
The model SHS variations include a type with its LM rail bottom tapped. This type is useful when
desiring to mount the LM Guide from the bottom of the base and when desiring to increase the con-
tamination protection effect.
Clearance
LM Guide
l1
S1 F
(1) Determine the bolt length so that a clear- Table2 Dimensions of the LM Rail Tap
ance of 2 to 5 mm is secured between the Unit: mm
bolt end and the bottom of the tap (effective Model No. S1 Effective tap depth l 1
tap depth). (See figure above.) SHS 15 M5 8
(2) For standard pitches of the taps, see SHS 20 M6 10
Table1 on B-12. SHS 25 M6 12
SHS 30 M8 15
SHS 35 M8 17
SHS 45 M12 24
SHS 55 M14 24
SHS 65 M20 30
Model number coding
SHS35 LC2UU +1000LH K

Symbol for
tapped-hole LM rail type
B-13
B-14
SSR
(Separate)
Models SSR-XW and SSR-XWM...... B-16 Structure and features....................... A-143
Models SSR-XV and SSR-XVM....... B-18 Types and Features .......................... A-144
Model SSR-XTB................................ B-20 Rated Loads in All Directions ............ A-145
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model SSR... B-23 Accuracy Standards .......................... A-119
Incremental dimension with grease nipple Error Allowance in Vertical Level
with LiCS Attached ........................... B-233
Incremental dimension with grease nipple
(when LiCS is attached) ...................... B-234
Dedicated Bellows JSSR-X for Model SSR .... B-236
Cap C ................................................ B-250
with QZ Attached ............................ B-251

the Products".
B-15
Models SSR-XW and SSR-XWM
W
4-S×l B
（K）
M
H3
W2 W1
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions
Model No. Height Width Length

Grease
nipple
M W L B C S×l L1 T K N E f0 e0 D0 H3
SSR 15XWY
24 34 56.9 26 26 M4×7 39.9 6.5 19.5 4.5 5.5 2.7 4.5 3 PB1021B 4.5
SSR 15XWMY
SSR 20XW
28 42 66.5 32 32 M5×8 46.6 8.2 22 5.5 12 2.8 5.2 3 B-M6F 6
SSR 20XWM
SSR 25XWY
33 48 83 35 35 M6×9 59.8 8.4 26.2 6 12 3.3 7 3 B-M6F 6.8
SSR 25XWMY
SSR 30XW
42 60 97 40 40 M8×12 70.7 11.3 32.5 8 12 4.5 7.6 4 B-M6F 9.5
SSR 30XWM
SSR 35XW 48 70 110.9 50 50 M8×12 80.5 13 36.5 8.5 12 4.7 8.8 4 B-M6F 11.5
Note) Symbol M indicates that stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls. Those models marked with this symbol
are therefore highly resistant to corrosion and environment.
Model number coding
SSR25X W 2 UU C1 M +1200L Y P T M -Ⅱ
Model Type of Contamination Stainless LM rail length Stainless steel Symbol for
protection steel (in mm) LM rail No. of rails used
symbol (*1) LM block
Applied to only Symbol for LM rail plane (*4)
No. of LM blocks Radial clearance symbol (*2) 15 and 25 jointed use
used on the same Normal (No symbol) Accuracy symbol (*3)
rail Light preload (C1) Normal grade (No Symbol)
Medium preload (C0) High accuracy grade (H)/Precision grade (P)
Super precision grade (SP)/Ultra precision grade (UP)
B-16
（E） L
L1 e0
＊＊
4-φ D0
C
f0
LM Guide
φ d2 N
M1
φ d1
Unit: mm
Basic load Static permissible
rating moment kN-m＊
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
W1 1 Double 1 Double 1
W2 M1 F d1×d2×h Max kN kN kg kg/m
±0.05 block blocks block blocks block
2500
15 9.5 12.5 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 14.7 16.5 0.0792 0.44 0.0486 0.274 0.0962 0.15 1.2
(1240)
3000
20 11 15.5 60 6×9.5×8.5 19.6 23.4 0.138 0.723 0.0847 0.448 0.18 0.25 2.1
(1480)
3000
23 12.5 18 60 7×11×9 31.5 36.4 0.258 1.42 0.158 0.884 0.33 0.4 2.7
(2020)
3000
28 16 23 80 7×11×9 46.5 52.7 0.446 2.4 0.274 1.49 0.571 0.8 4.3
(2520)
34 18 27.5 80 9×14×12 3000 64.6 71.6 0.711 3.72 0.437 2.31 0.936 1.1 6.4
Note1) Pilot holes for side nipples＊＊ are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.
THK will mount grease nipples per your request. Therefore, do not use the side nipple pilot holes＊＊ for purposes other
Note2) The LM rail mounting hole of SSR15X is drilled for M4 screws as standard (with Y indication). If you order the hole to
be drilled for M3 screws (without Y indication), contact THK. When replacing this model with model SR, pay attention
to the dimension of the rail mounting hole.

Models SSR-XV and SSR-XVM
2-S×l B
（K）
M
H3
W2 W1
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions

Grease
nipple
M W L B S×l L1 T K N E f0 e0 D0 H3
SSR 15XVY
24 34 40.3 26 M4×7 23.3 6.5 19.5 4.5 5.5 2.7 4.5 3 PB1021B 4.5
SSR 15XVMY
SSR 20XV
28 42 47.7 32 M5×8 27.8 8.2 22 5.5 12 2.8 5.2 3 B-M6F 6
SSR 20XVM
SSR 25XVY
33 48 60 35 M6×9 36.8 8.4 26.2 6 12 3.3 7 3 B-M6F 6.8
SSR 25XVMY
Model number coding
SSR25X V 2 UU C1 M +1200L Y P T M -Ⅲ
Model Type of Contamination Stainless LM rail length Stainless steel Symbol for
protection steel (in mm) No. of rails used
number LM block accessory LM rail
on the same
symbol (*1)
LM block
Applied to only Symbol for LM rail plane (*4)
No. of LM blocks
Radial clearance symbol (*2) 15 and 25 jointed use
rail Light preload (C1) Normal grade (No Symbol)
B-18
（E） L
L1 e0 ＊＊
4-φ D0
〃〃
f0
LM Guide
N
φ d2
h
M1
φ d1
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
2500
15 9.5 12.5 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 9.1 9.7 0.0303 0.192 0.0189 0.122 0.0562 0.08 1.2
(1240)
3000
20 11 15.5 60 6×9.5×8.5 13.4 14.4 0.0523 0.336 0.0326 0.213 0.111 0.14 2.1
(1480)
3000
23 12.5 18 60 7×11×9 21.7 22.5 0.104 0.661 0.0652 0.419 0.204 0.23 2.7
(2020)
Note1) Pilot holes for side nipples＊＊ are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.

Model SSR-XTB
W
4-φ H
B
（K）
M
H3
W2 W1
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions

Grease
nipple
M W L B C H L1 T K N E f0 e0 D0 H3
SSR 15XTBY 24 52 56.9 41 26 4.5 39.9 6.1 20 4.5 5.5 2.7 4.5 3 PB1021B 4.5
SSR 20XTB 28 59 66.5 49 32 5.5 46.6 9 22 5.5 12 2.8 5.2 3 B-M6F 6
SSR 25XTBY 33 73 83 60 35 7 59.8 10 26.2 6 12 3.3 7 3 B-M6F 6.8
Model number coding
SSR15X TB 2 SS C1 +820L Y T -Ⅱ
Model Type of Contamination LM rail length Symbol for
protection (in mm) LM rail Symbol for
number LM block accessory jointed use No. of rails used
symbol (*1) on the same plane (*3)
No. of LM blocks Applied to
used on the same Radial clearance symbol (*2)
Normal (No symbol) only 15 and 25
rail
Light preload (C1)
Medium preload (C0)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A-368. (*2) See A-113. (*3) See A-59.
B-20
（E） L
L1 e0 ＊＊
4-φ D0
C
f0
LM Guide
N
φ d2
h
M1
φ d1
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
2500
15 18.5 12.5 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 14.7 16.5 0.0792 0.44 0.0486 0.274 0.0962 0.19 1.2
(1240)
3000
20 19.5 15.5 60 6×9.5×8.5 19.6 23.4 0.138 0.723 0.0847 0.448 0.18 0.31 2.1
(1480)
3000
23 25 18 60 7×11×9 31.5 36.4 0.258 1.42 0.158 0.884 0.33 0.53 2.7
(2020)
Note1) Pilot holes for side nipples are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign material from entering the product.
＊＊

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model SSR variations. If the maxi-
G F F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail Unit: mm
Model No. SSR 15X SSR 20X SSR 25X SSR 30X SSR 35X
160 220 220 280 280
220 280 280 360 360
280 340 340 440 440
340 400 400 520 520
400 460 460 600 600
460 520 520 680 680
520 580 580 760 760
580 640 640 840 840
640 700 700 920 920
700 760 760 1000 1000
760 820 820 1080 1080
820 940 940 1160 1160
940 1000 1000 1240 1240
1000 1060 1060 1320 1320
1060 1120 1120 1400 1400
1120 1180 1240 1480 1480
1180 1240 1300 1640 1640
1240 1300 1360 1720 1720
LM rail standard 1800 1800
1300 1360 1420
length (LO) 1880 1880
1360 1420 1480
1420 1480 1540 1960 1960
1480 1540 1600 2040 2040
1540 1600 1660 2120 2120
1660 1720 2200 2200
1720 1780 2280 2280
1780 1840 2360 2360
1840 1900 2440 2440
1900 1960 2520 2520
1960 2020 2600 2600
2020 2080 2680 2680
2080 2140 2760 2760
2140 2200 2840 2840
2260 2920 2920
2320
2380
2440
Standard pitch F 60 60 60 80 80
G 20 20 20 20 20
Max length 2500 (1240) 3000 (1480) 3000 (2020) 3000 (2520) 3000
Note3) The values in the parentheses indicate the maximum lengths of stainless steel types.
B-22
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model SSR
The model SSR variations include a type with its LM rail bottom tapped. This type is useful when
Clearance
LM Guide
l1
S1
(1) A tapped-hole LM rail type is available only Table2 Dimensions of the LM Rail Tap
for high accuracy or lower grades. Unit: mm
(2) Determine the bolt length so that a clear- Model No. S1 Effective tap depth l 1
ance of 2 to 5 mm is secured between the SSR 15X M5 7
bolt end and the bottom of the tap (effective SSR 20X M6 9
tap depth). (See figure above.)
SSR 25X M6 10
(3) For standard pitches of the taps, see
SSR 30X M8 14
Table1 on B-22.
SSR 35X M8 16
Model number coding
SSR20X W2UU +1200LH K

Symbol for
B-23
B-24
SNR/SNS
(Separate)
Models SNR-R and SNR-LR............. B-26 Structure and features....................... A-149
Models SNS-R and SNS-LR ............. B-28 Types and Features .......................... A-150
Models SNR-C and SNR-LC............. B-30 Rated Loads in All Directions ............ A-153
Models SNS-C and SNS-LC ............. B-32 Equivalent Load ................................ A-153
Models SNR-RH (Build to Order) Service Life ....................................... A-100
and SNR-LRH (Build to Order) ...... B-34 Radial Clearance Standard ............... A-113
Models SNS-RH (Build to Order) Accuracy Standards .......................... A-119
and SNS-LRH (Build to Order) ...... B-36 Shoulder Height of the Mounting Base
Models SNR-CH (Build to Order) and the Corner Radius ...................... A-327
and SNR-LCH (Build to Order) ...... B-38 Error Allowance in the Parallelism
Models SNS-CH (Build to Order) between Two Rails ................ A-333/A-334
and SNS-LCH (Build to Order) ...... B-40 Error Allowance in Vertical Level
between Two Rails ................ A-336/A-337
Standard Length and Maximum Length
of the LM Rail................................... B-42
Options............................................. B-223
The LM Block Dimension (Dimension L)
with LaCS and Seals Attached ........... B-224
(when LaCS is attached) ..................... B-231
Dedicated Bellows JSN
for Models SNR and SNS.............. B-237
Cap C ................................................ B-250

the Products".
B-25
Models SNR-R and SNR-LR
W 4-S×l
（E） L
B
L1 e0
＊＊
4-φ D0
C
T φ d2 f0
N
M （K） h
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Model SNR-R
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions

Grease
nipple
M W L B C S×l L1 T K N f0 E e0 D0 H3
SNR 25R 83.6 35 62.4

31 50 32 M6×8 9.7 25.5 7 6 12 4 3.9 B-M6F 5.5
SNR 25LR 102.8 50 81.6
SNR 30R 98 40 72.1
38 60 40 M8×10 9.7 31 7 7 12 6.5 3.9 B-M6F 7
SNR 30LR 120.5 60 94.6
SNR 35R 110.3 50 79
44 70 50 M8×12 11.7 35 8 8 12 6 5.2 B-M6F 9
SNR 35LR 135.8 72 104.5
SNR 45R 139 60 105
52 86 60 M10×17 14.7 40.4 10 8 16 8.5 5.2 B-PT1/8 11.5
SNR 45LR 171.8 80 137.8
SNR 55R 163.3 75 123.6
63 100 65 M12×18 17.7 49 11 10 16 10 5.2 B-PT1/8 14
SNR 55LR 200.5 95 160.8
SNR 65R 186.4 70 143.6
75 126 76 M16×20 21.6 60 16 15 16 9 8.2 B-PT1/8 15
SNR 65LR 246.4 110 203.6
SNR 85LR 90 156 302.8 100 140 M18×25 251 27.3 73 20 20 16 10 8.2 B-PT1/8 17
Model number coding
SNR45 LR 2 QZ KKHH C0 +1200L P T Z -Ⅱ

Model Type of With QZ Contamination LM rail length Symbol for
Symbol for
Lubricator protection (in mm) LM rail
No. of rails used
number LM block jointed use
on the same
accessory
symbol (*1) plane (*5)
No. of LM blocks With plate cover
Radial clearance symbol (*2) or steel tape (*4)
Light preload (C1) Normal grade (No Symbol)
(*4) Specify the plate cover or the steel tape. (*5)See A-59.
B-26
6-S×l
（E） L
L1 e0
C 4-φ D0
＊＊
〃〃
f0
φ d2
LM Guide
N
h
M1
φ d1
F
Model SNR-LR
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
W1
1 Double 1 Double 1
0 W2 M1 F d1×d2×h Max kN kN kg kg/m
-0.05
48 79 0.682 3.62 0.427 2.25 0.868 0.4
25 12.5 17 40 6×9.5×8.5 2500 3.1
57 101 1.14 5.55 0.708 3.4 1.1 0.6
68 106 1.04 5.7 0.653 3.56 1.3 0.7
28 16 21 80 7×11×9 3000 4.4
81 138 1.81 8.89 1.12 5.47 1.69 0.9
90 144 1.61 8.64 1.01 5.39 2.13 1
34 18 24.5 80 9×14×12 3000 6.2
108 188 2.68 13.6 1.67 8.49 2.79 1.4
132 216 3.29 16 2.03 9.86 4.21 1.9
45 20.5 29 105 14×20×17 3090 9.8
161 288 5.4 26.2 3.35 16.2 5.64 2.4
177 292 4.99 25.7 3.11 16 6.69 3.1
53 23.5 36.5 120 16×23×20 3060 14.5
214 383 8.41 40.9 5.22 25.3 8.78 4
260 409 8.05 41.2 5.03 25.6 11 5.6
63 31.5 43 150 18×26×22 3000 20.5
340 572 15.9 74.5 9.84 45.7 15.4 8
85 35.5 48 180 24×35×28 3000 550 887 30.3 142 18.7 87.6 31.9 14.8 29.5

Models SNS-R and SNS-LR
W 4-S×l
（E） L
B
L1 e0
＊＊
4-φ D0
C
T φ d2 f0
N
M （K） h
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Model SNS-R
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions

Grease
nipple
SNS 25R 83.6 35 62.4

31 50 32 M6×8 9.7 25.5 7 6 12 4 3.9 B-M6F 5.5
SNS 25LR 102.8 50 81.6
SNS 30R 98 40 72.1
38 60 40 M8×10 9.7 31 7 7 12 6.5 3.9 B-M6F 7
SNS 30LR 120.5 60 94.6
SNS 35R 110.3 50 79
44 70 50 M8×12 11.7 35 8 8 12 6 5.2 B-M6F 9
SNS 35LR 135.8 72 104.5
SNS 45R 139 60 105
52 86 60 M10×17 14.7 40.4 10 8 16 8.5 5.2 B-PT1/8 11.5
SNS 45LR 171.8 80 137.8
SNS 55R 163.3 75 123.6
63 100 65 M12×18 17.7 49 11 10 16 10 5.2 B-PT1/8 14
SNS 55LR 200.5 95 160.8
SNS 65R 186.4 70 143.6
75 126 76 M16×20 21.6 60 16 15 16 9 8.2 B-PT1/8 15
SNS 65LR 246.4 110 203.6
SNS 85LR 90 156 302.8 100 140 M18×25 251 27.3 73 20 20 16 10 8.2 B-PT1/8 17
Model number coding
SNS45 LR 2 QZ KKHH C0 +1200L P T Z -Ⅱ

Model Type of With QZ Contamination LM rail length Symbol for Symbol for
protection (in mm) LM rail No. of rails used
number LM block Lubricator accessory jointed use on the same
With plate cover
No. of LM blocks Radial clearance symbol (*2) or steel tape (*4)
Light preload (C1) Accuracy symbol (*3)
(*4) Specify the plate cover or the steel tape. (*5) See A-59.
B-28
6-S×l
（E） L
L1 e0
C 4-φ D0
＊＊
〃〃
f0
φ d2
N
LM Guide
h
M1
φ d1
F
Model SNS-LR
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
W1
1 Double 1 Double 1
-0.05
37 61 0.544 2.88 0.504 2.67 0.648 0.4
25 12.5 17 40 6×9.5×8.5 2500 3.1
44 78 0.915 4.41 0.847 4.09 0.826 0.6
52 81 0.821 4.5 0.761 4.17 0.962 0.7
28 16 21 80 7×11×9 3000 4.4
62 106 1.43 7.04 1.33 6.53 1.25 0.9
69 110 1.27 6.81 1.17 6.32 1.56 1
34 18 24.5 80 9×14×12 3000 6.2
83 144 2.11 10.7 1.96 10 2.05 1.4
101 167 2.63 12.7 2.43 11.8 3.15 1.9
45 20.5 29 105 14×20×17 3090 9.8
123 222 4.29 20.8 3.97 19.3 4.21 2.4
136 225 3.96 20.4 3.67 19 4.97 3.1
53 23.5 36.5 120 16×23×20 3060 14.5
164 295 6.66 32.4 6.17 30 6.52 4
199 315 6.4 32.7 5.93 30.3 8.24 5.6
63 31.5 43 150 18×26×22 3000 20.5
261 441 12.7 59.1 11.7 54.8 11.5 8
85 35.5 48 180 24×35×28 3000 422 679 23.9 112 22.1 104 23.7 14.8 29.5
＊＊

Models SNR-C and SNR-LC
4-S
φ
W （E） ( H through) L
e0
＊＊
4-φ D0
B L1
C
f0
φ d2
N
t T T1 h
M （K）
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Model SNR-C
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions

Grease
nipple
M W L B C S H L1 t T T1 K N f0 E e0 D0 H3
SNR 25C 83.6 62.4

31 72 59 45 M8 6.8 16 14.8 12 25.5 7 6 12 4 3.9 B-M6F 5.5
SNR 25LC 102.8 81.6
SNR 30C 98 72.1
38 90 72 52 M10 8.5 18 16.8 14 31 7 7 12 6.5 3.9 B-M6F 7
SNR 30LC 120.5 94.6
SNR 35C 110.3 79
44 100 82 62 M10 8.5 20 18.8 16 35 8 8 12 6 5.2 B-M6F 9
SNR 35LC 135.8 104.5
SNR 45C 139 105
52 120 100 80 M12 10.5 22 20.5 20 40.4 10 8 16 8.5 5.2 B-PT1/8 11.5
SNR 45LC 171.8 137.8
SNR 55C 163.3 123.6
63 140 116 95 M14 12.5 24 22.5 22 49 11 10 16 10 5.2 B-PT1/8 14
SNR 55LC 200.5 160.8
SNR 65C 186.4 143.6
75 170 142 110 M16 14.5 28 26 25 60 16 15 16 9 8.2 B-PT1/8 15
SNR 65LC 246.4 203.6
SNR 85LC 90 215 302.8 185 140 M20 17.6 251 34 32 28 73 20 20 16 10 8.2 B-PT1/8 17
Model number coding
SNR45 LC 2 QZ KKHH C0 +1200L P T Z -Ⅱ

number LM block Lubricator protection
accessory
(in mm) LM rail No. of rails used
jointed use on the same
No. of LM blocks With plate cover
Radial clearance symbol (*2) or steel tape (*4)
B-30
6-S
(φ H through)
（E） L
L1 e0
4-φ D0
＊＊
〃〃
f0
φ d2 N
LM Guide
h
M1
φ d1
F
Model SNR-LC
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
W1
1 Double 1 Double 1
-0.05
48 79 0.682 3.62 0.427 2.25 0.868 0.6
25 23.5 17 40 6×9.5×8.5 2500 3.1
57 101 1.14 5.55 0.708 3.4 1.1 0.8
68 106 1.04 5.7 0.653 3.56 1.3 1
28 31 21 80 7×11×9 3000 4.4
81 138 1.81 8.89 1.12 5.47 1.69 1.3
90 144 1.61 8.64 1.01 5.39 2.13 1.5
34 33 24.5 80 9×14×12 3000 6.2
108 188 2.68 13.6 1.67 8.49 2.79 2
132 216 3.29 16 2.03 9.86 4.21 2.3
45 37.5 29 105 14×20×17 3090 9.8
161 288 5.4 26.2 3.35 16.2 5.64 3.4
177 292 4.99 25.7 3.11 16 6.69 3.6
53 43.5 36.5 120 16×23×20 3060 14.5
214 383 8.41 40.9 5.22 25.3 8.78 5.5
260 409 8.05 41.2 5.03 25.6 11 7.4
63 53.5 43 150 18×26×22 3000 20.5
340 572 15.9 74.5 9.84 45.7 15.4 10.5
85 65 48 180 24×35×28 3000 550 887 30.3 142 18.7 87.6 31.9 20.0 29.5
＊＊

Models SNS-C and SNS-LC
4-S
φ
W （E） ( H through) L
e0
＊＊
4-φ D0
B L1
C
f0
φ d2
N
t T T1 h
M （K）
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Model SNS-C
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions

Grease
nipple
SNS 25C 83.6 62.4

31 72 59 45 M8 6.8 16 14.8 12 25.5 7 6 12 4 3.9 B-M6F 5.5
SNS 25LC 102.8 81.6
SNS 30C 98 72.1
38 90 72 52 M10 8.5 18 16.8 14 31 7 7 12 6.5 3.9 B-M6F 7
SNS 30LC 120.5 94.6
SNS 35C 110.3 79
44 100 82 62 M10 8.5 20 18.8 16 35 8 8 12 6 5.2 B-M6F 9
SNS 35LC 135.8 104.5
SNS 45C 139 105
52 120 100 80 M12 10.5 22 20.5 20 40.4 10 8 16 8.5 5.2 B-PT1/8 11.5
SNS 45LC 171.8 137.8
SNS 55C 163.3 123.6
63 140 116 95 M14 12.5 24 22.5 22 49 11 10 16 10 5.2 B-PT1/8 14
SNS 55LC 200.5 160.8
SNS 65C 186.4 143.6
75 170 142 110 M16 14.5 28 26 25 60 16 15 16 9 8.2 B-PT1/8 15
SNS 65LC 246.4 203.6
SNS 85LC 90 215 302.8 185 140 M20 17.6 251 34 32 28 73 20 20 16 10 8.2 B-PT1/8 17
Model number coding
SNS45 LC 2 QZ KKHH C0 +1200L P T Z -Ⅱ

number LM block Lubricator protection (in mm) LM rail No. of rails used
accessory jointed use on the same
symbol (*1) With plate cover plane (*5)
No. of LM blocks or steel tape (*4)
Radial clearance symbol (*2)
B-32
6-S
(φ H through)
（E） L
L1 e0
4-φ D0
＊＊
〃〃
f0
φ d2 N
LM Guide
h
M1
φ d1
F
Model SNS-LC
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
W1
1 Double 1 Double 1
-0.05
37 61 0.544 2.88 0.504 2.67 0.648 0.6
25 23.5 17 40 6×9.5×8.5 2500 3.1
44 78 0.915 4.41 0.847 4.09 0.826 0.8
52 81 0.821 4.5 0.761 4.17 0.962 1
28 31 21 80 7×11×9 3000 4.4
62 106 1.43 7.04 1.33 6.53 1.25 1.3
69 110 1.27 6.81 1.17 6.32 1.56 1.5
34 33 24.5 80 9×14×12 3000 6.2
83 144 2.11 10.7 1.96 10 2.05 2
101 167 2.63 12.7 2.43 11.8 3.15 2.3
45 37.5 29 105 14×20×17 3090 9.8
123 222 4.29 20.8 3.97 19.3 4.21 3.4
136 225 3.96 20.4 3.67 19 4.97 3.6
53 43.5 36.5 120 16×23×20 3060 14.5
164 295 6.66 32.4 6.17 30 6.52 5.5
199 315 6.4 32.7 5.93 30.3 8.24 7.4
63 53.5 43 150 18×26×22 3000 20.5
261 441 12.7 59.1 11.7 54.8 11.5 10.5
85 65 48 180 24×35×28 3000 422 679 23.9 112 22.1 104 23.7 20.0 29.5
＊＊

Models SNR-RH (Build to Order)
and SNR-LRH (Build to Order)
W
4-S×l B
（K）
M
H3
W2 W1
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions

Grease
nipple
SNR 35RH 110.3 50 79

55 70 50 M8×12 11.7 46 19 19 12 6 5.2 B-M6F 9
SNR 35LRH 135.8 72 104.5
SNR 45RH 139 60 105
70 86 60 M10×17 14.7 58.4 28 26 16 8.5 5.2 B-PT1/8 11.5
SNR 45LRH 171.8 80 137.8
SNR 55RH 163.3 75 123.6
80 100 75 M12×18 17.7 66 28 27 16 10 5.2 B-PT1/8 14
SNR 55LRH 200.5 95 160.8
Model number coding
SNR35 RH 2 QZ KKHH C0 +920L H T Z -Ⅱ

LM rail No. of rails used
accessory
(in mm)
B-34
（E） L
L1 e0
4-φ D0
＊＊
LM Guide
N f0
φ d2
M1
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
W1
1 Double 1 Double 1
-0.05
90 144 1.61 8.64 1.01 5.39 2.13 1.5
34 18 24.5 80 9×14×12 3000 6.2
108 188 2.68 13.6 1.67 8.49 2.79 2
132 216 3.29 16 2.03 9.86 4.21 3.2
45 20.5 29 105 14×20×17 3090 9.8
161 288 5.4 26.2 3.35 16.2 5.64 4.1
177 292 4.99 25.7 3.11 16 6.69 4.7
53 23.5 36.5 120 16×23×20 3060 14.5
214 383 8.41 40.9 5.22 25.3 8.78 6.2

Models SNS-RH (Build to Order)
and SNS-LRH (Build to Order)
W
4-S×l B
（K）
M
H3
W2 W1
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions

Grease
nipple
SNS 35RH 110.3 50 79

55 70 50 M8×12 11.7 46 19 19 12 6 5.2 B-M6F 9
SNS 35LRH 135.8 72 104.5
SNS 45RH 139 60 105
70 86 60 M10×17 14.7 58.4 28 26 16 8.5 5.2 B-PT1/8 11.5
SNS 45LRH 171.8 80 137.8
SNS 55RH 163.3 75 123.6
80 100 75 M12×18 17.7 66 28 27 16 10 5.2 B-PT1/8 14
SNS 55LRH 200.5 95 160.8
Model number coding
SNS35 RH 2 QZ KKHH C0 +920L H T Z -Ⅱ

Model Type of With QZ Contamination LM rail length
Symbol for Symbol for
protection (in mm) LM rail No. of rails used
number LM block Lubricator accessory on the same
jointed use
With plate cover
No. of LM blocks Radial clearance symbol (*2) or steel tape (*4)
B-36
（E） L
L1 e0
4-φ D0
＊＊
LM Guide
N f0
φ d2
M1
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
W1
1 Double 1 Double 1
-0.05
69 110 1.27 6.81 1.17 6.32 1.56 1.5
34 18 24.5 80 9×14×12 3000 6.2
83 144 2.11 10.7 1.96 10 2.05 2
101 167 2.63 12.7 2.43 11.8 3.15 3.2
45 20.5 29 105 14×20×17 3090 9.8
123 222 4.29 20.8 3.97 19.3 4.21 4.1
136 225 3.96 20.4 3.67 19 4.97 4.7
53 23.5 36.5 120 16×23×20 3060 14.5
164 295 6.66 32.4 6.17 30 6.52 6.2

Models SNR-CH (Build to Order)
and SNR-LCH (Build to Order)
W
4-S B
(φ H through)
t T T1
（K）
M
H3
W2 W1
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions

Grease
nipple
SNR 35CH 110.3 79

48 100 82 62 M10 8.5 20 18.8 16 39 12 12 12 6 5.2 B-M6F 9
SNR 35LCH 135.8 104.5
SNR 45CH 139 105
60 120 100 80 M12 10.5 22 20.5 20 48.4 18 16 16 8.5 5.2 B-PT1/8 11.5
SNR 45LCH 171.8 137.8
SNR 55CH 163.3 123.6
70 140 116 95 M14 12.5 24 22.5 22 56 18 17 16 10 5.2 B-PT1/8 14
SNR 55LCH 200.5 160.8
Model number coding
SNR45 LCH 2 QZ KK C0 +1000L P T Z -Ⅱ

Lubricator protection (in mm) LM rail No. of rails used
number LM block accessory jointed use on the same
rail Light preload (C1) Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
B-38
（E） L
L1 e0 4-φ D0
＊＊
LM Guide
N f0
φ d2
h
M1
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
W1
1 Double 1 Double 1
-0.05
90 144 1.61 8.64 1.01 5.39 2.13 1.7
34 33 24.5 80 9×14×12 3000 6.2
108 188 2.68 13.6 1.67 8.49 2.79 2.2
132 216 3.29 16 2.03 9.86 4.21 3
45 37.5 29 105 14×20×17 3090 9.8
161 288 5.4 26.2 3.35 16.2 5.64 4.2
177 292 4.99 25.7 3.11 16 6.69 4.4
53 43.5 36.5 120 16×23×20 3060 14.5
214 383 8.41 40.9 5.22 25.3 8.78 6.5

Models SNS-CH (Build to Order)
and SNS-LCH (Build to Order)
W
4-S B
(φ H through)
t T T1
（K）
M
H3
W2 W1
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions

Grease
nipple
SNS 35CH 110.3 79

48 100 82 62 M10 8.5 20 18.8 16 39 12 12 12 6 5.2 B-M6F 9
SNS 35LCH 135.8 104.5
SNS 45CH 139 105
60 120 100 80 M12 10.5 22 20.5 20 48.4 18 16 16 8.5 5.2 B-PT1/8 11.5
SNS 45LCH 171.8 137.8
SNS 55CH 163.3 123.6
70 140 116 95 M14 12.5 24 22.5 22 56 18 17 16 10 5.2 B-PT1/8 14
SNS 55LCH 200.5 160.8
Model number coding
SNS45 LCH 2 QZ KK C0 +1000L P T Z -Ⅱ

With plate cover
B-40
（E） L
L1 e0 4-φ D0
＊＊
LM Guide
N f0
φ d2
h
M1
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
Width Height Pitch Length ＊ C C0
block rail
W1
1 Double 1 Double 1
-0.05
69 110 1.27 6.81 1.17 6.32 1.56 1.7
34 33 24.5 80 9×14×12 3000 6.2
83 144 2.11 10.7 1.96 10 2.05 2.2
101 167 2.63 12.7 2.43 11.8 3.15 3
45 37.5 29 105 14×20×17 3090 9.8
123 222 4.29 20.8 3.97 19.3 4.21 4.2
136 225 3.96 20.4 3.67 19 4.97 4.4
53 43.5 36.5 120 16×23×20 3060 14.5
164 295 6.66 32.4 6.17 30 6.52 6.5

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model SNR/SNS variations. If the
maximum length of the desired LM rail exceeds them, jointed rails will be used. Contact THK for
details.
G F F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Models SNR/SNS Unit: mm
Model No. SNR/SNS 25 SNR/SNS 30 SNR/SNS 35 SNR/SNS 45 SNR/SNS 55 SNR/SNS 65 SNR/SNS 85

230 280 280 570 780 1270 1530
270 360 360 675 900 1570 1890
350 440 440 780 1020 2020 2250
390 520 520 885 1140 2620 2610
470 600 600 990 1260
510 680 680 1095 1380
590 760 760 1200 1500
630 840 840 1305 1620
710 920 920 1410 1740
750 1000 1000 1515 1860
830 1080 1080 1620 1980
950 1160 1160 1725 2100
990 1240 1240 1830 2220
1070 1320 1320 1935 2340
1110 1400 1400 2040 2460
LM rail standard 1190 1480 1480 2145 2580
length (LO) 1230 1560 1560 2250 2700
1310 1640 1640 2355 2820
1350 1720 1720 2460 2940
1430 1800 1800 2565 3060
1470 1880 1880 2670
1550 1960 1960 2775
1590 2040 2040 2880
1710 2200 2200 2985
1830 2360 2360 3090
1950 2520 2520
2070 2680 2680
2190 2840 2840
2310 3000 3000
2430
2470
Standard pitch F 40 80 80 105 120 150 180

G 15 20 20 22.5 30 35 45
Max length 2500 3000 3000 3090 3060 3000 3000
B-42
SHW
(Separate)
Model SHW-CA................................. B-44 Structure and features....................... A-157
Models SHW-CR and SHW-HR ........ B-46 Types and Features .......................... A-158
Rated Loads in All Directions ............ A-158
Standard Length and Maximum Length Equivalent Load ................................ A-159
of the LM Rail................................... B-48 Service Life ....................................... A-100
Radial Clearance Standard ............... A-113
Options............................................. B-223 Accuracy Standards .......................... A-119
The LM Block Dimension (Dimension L) Shoulder Height of the Mounting Base
with LaCS and Seals Attached ........... B-225 and the Corner Radius ...................... A-330
Incremental dimension with grease nipple Error Allowance in the Parallelism
Dedicated Bellows JSHW for Model SHW .. B-238 Error Allowance in Vertical Level
Cap C ................................................ B-250 between Two Rails ........................ A-337
Gease Nipple and Greasing Hole Model SHW B-256

the Products".
B-43
Model SHW-CA
L
W L1
4-S B φ H through C
φ d2
〃〃
N
T h
M （K） M1
H3 φ d1
F
W2 W1
Models SHW12CAM and SHW14CAM
M W L B C S H L1 T K N H3
SHW 12CAM 12 40 37 35 18 M3 2.5 27 4 10 2.8 2

SHW 14CAM 14 50 45.5 45 24 M3 2.5 34 5 12 3.3 2
SHW 17CAM 17 60 51 53 26 M4 3.3 38 6 14.5 4 2.5
SHW 21CA 21 68 59 60 29 M5 4.4 43.6 8 17.7 5 3
SHW 27CA 27 80 72.8 70 40 M6 5.3 56.6 10 23.5 6 3
SHW 35CA 35 120 107 107 60 M8 6.8 83 14 31 7.6 4
SHW 50CA 50 162 141 144 80 M10 8.6 107 18 46 14 3.4
Model number coding
SHW17 CA 2 QZ UU C1 M +580L P M -Ⅱ
Model Type of With QZ Contamination Stainless LM rail length Stainless Symbol for
number LM block Lubricator protection steel (in mm) steel No. of rails used
accessory LM block LM rail on the same
No. of LM blocks Accuracy symbol (*3)
Radial clearance symbol (*2) Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
used on the same Normal (No symbol) Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
rail Light preload (C1) Ultra precision grade (UP)
Medium preload (C0)
B-44
L
W
6-S L1
B
(φ H through) C
LM Guide
〃〃 φ d2
N
T h
M （K） M1
φ d1
W3 F
W2 W1
Models SHW17CAM and SHW21 to 50CA

Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
1 Double 1 Double 1
W1 W2 W3 M1 F d1×d2×h Max kN kN kg kg/m
18 11 — 6.6 40 4.5×7.5×5.3 1000 4.31 5.66 0.0228 0.12 0.0228 0.12 0.0405 0.05 0.8
24 13 — 7.5 40 4.5×7.5×5.3 1430 7.05 8.98 0.0466 0.236 0.0466 0.236 0.0904 0.1 1.23
33 13.5 18 8.6 40 4.5×7.5×5.3 1800 7.65 10.18 0.0591 0.298 0.0591 0.298 0.164 0.15 1.9
37 15.5 22 11 50 4.5×7.5×5.3 1900 8.24 12.8 0.0806 0.434 0.0806 0.434 0.229 0.24 2.9
42 19 24 15 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 3000 16 22.7 0.187 0.949 0.187 0.949 0.455 0.47 4.5
69 25.5 40 19 80 7×11×9 3000 35.5 49.2 0.603 3 0.603 3 1.63 1.4 9.6
90 36 60 24 80 9×14×12 3000 70.2 91.4 1.46 7.37 1.46 7.37 3.97 3.7 15
Note) If a grease nipple is required, indicate "with grease nipple;" if a greasing hole is required, indicate "with a tapped hole for
greasing."

Models SHW-CR and SHW-HR
W L
6-S×l B L1
〃〃 C
N φ d2
T
（K） h
M
M1
H3
W3 φ d1
W2 W1 F
Models SHW27 to 50CR
M W L B C S×l L1 T K N H3
SHW 12CRM 12 30 37 21 12 M3×3.5 27 4 10 2.8 2

SHW 12HRM 12 30 50.4 21 24 M3×3.5 40.4 4 10 2.8 2
SHW 14CRM 14 40 45.5 28 15 M3×4 34 5 12 3.3 2
SHW 17CRM 17 50 51 29 15 M4×5 38 6 14.5 4 2.5
SHW 21CR 21 54 59 31 19 M5×6 43.6 8 17.7 5 3
SHW 27CR 27 62 72.8 46 32 M6×6 56.6 10 23.5 6 3
SHW 35CR 35 100 107 76 50 M8×8 83 14 31 7.6 4
SHW 50CR 50 130 141 100 65 M10×15 107 18 46 14 3.4
are therefore highly corrosion resistance and environment.
Model number coding
SHW27 CR 2 QZ KKHH C1 +820L P

Model Type of With QZ Contamination LM rail length
accessory
(in mm) Accuracy symbol (*3)
Normal grade (No Symbol)
symbol (*1) High accuracy grade (H)
No. of LM blocks Precision grade (P)
Radial clearance symbol (*2) Super precision grade (SP)
used on the same Normal (No symbol) Ultra precision grade (UP)
rail Light preload (C1)
Medium preload (C0)
Note) Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple.
B-46
W L
4-S×l
B L1
φ d2 C
N
T h
M （K）
M1
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Models SHW12CRM, SHW12HRM and SHW14CRM
LM Guide
4-S×l
W L
B L1
C
N φ d2
T h
M （K）
M1
W3 φ d1
W2 W1 F
Models SHW17CRM and SHW21CR
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM
Width Height Pitch Length＊ C C0 LM rail
block
1 Double 1 Double 1
18 6 — 6.6 40 4.5×7.5×5.3 1000 4.31 5.66 0.0228 0.12 0.0228 0.12 0.0405 0.04 0.8
18 6 — 6.6 40 4.5×7.5×5.3 1000 5.56 8.68 0.0511 0.246 0.0511 0.246 0.0621 0.06 0.8
24 8 — 7.5 40 4.5×7.5×5.3 1430 7.05 8.98 0.0466 0.236 0.0466 0.236 0.0904 0.08 1.23
33 8.5 18 8.6 40 4.5×7.5×5.3 1800 7.65 10.18 0.0591 0.298 0.0591 0.298 0.164 0.13 1.9
37 8.5 22 11 50 4.5×7.5×5.3 1900 8.24 12.8 0.0806 0.434 0.0806 0.434 0.229 0.19 2.9
42 10 24 15 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 3000 16 22.7 0.187 0.949 0.187 0.949 0.455 0.36 4.5
69 15.5 40 19 80 7×11×9 3000 35.5 49.2 0.603 3 0.603 3 1.63 1.2 9.6
90 20 60 24 80 9×14×12 3000 70.2 91.4 1.46 7.37 1.46 7.37 3.97 3 15
Note) If a grease nipple is required, indicate "with grease nipple;" if a greasing hole is required, indicate "with a tapped hole for
greasing."

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model SHW variations. If the maxi-
G F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model SHW Unit: mm
Model No. SHW 12 SHW 14 SHW 17 SHW 21 SHW 27 SHW 35 SHW 50

70 70 110 130 160 280 280
110 110 190 230 280 440 440
150 150 310 380 340 760 760
190 190 470 480 460 1000 1000
230 230 550 580 640 1240 1240
LM rail standard 270 270 780 820 1560 1640
length (LO) 310 310 2040
390 390
470 470
550
670
Standard pitch F 40 40 40 50 60 80 80
G 15 15 15 15 20 20 20
Max length 1000 1430 1800 1900 3000 3000 3000
Note3) Models SHW12, 14 and 17 are made of stainless steel.
B-48
SRS
(Separate)
Model SRS-M.................................... B-50 Structure and features....................... A-161
Model SRS-WM ................................ B-52 Types and Features .......................... A-162
Incremental dimension with grease nipple Error Allowance in the Parallelism
Cap C ................................................ B-250 Error Allowance in Vertical Level
LM Block Dimension (Dimension L) between Two Rails ........................ A-337
with QZ Attached ........................... B-252 Flatness of the LM Rail
Gease Nipple and Greasing Hole Model SRS. B-256 and the LM Block Mounting Surface A-164

the Products".
B-49
Model SRS-M
W
4-S×l
B
T
M （K）
H3
W2 W1
SRS 7M 8 17 23.4 12 8 M2×2.3 13.4 3.3 6.7 1.6 1.3
SRS 9M 10 20 30.8 15 10 M3×2.8 19.8 4.9 9.1 2.4 0.9
SRS 12M 13 27 34.4 20 15 M3×3.2 20.6 5.7 11 3 2
SRS 15M 16 32 43 25 20 M3×3.5 25.7 6.5 13.3 3 2.7
SRS 20M 20 40 50 30 25 M4×6 34 9 16.6 4 3.4
SRS 25M 25 48 77 35 35 M6×7 56 11 20 5 5
Note) Since stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls, these models are highly resistant to corrosion and envi-
ronment.
Model number coding
2 SRS20M QZ UU C1 +220L P M -Ⅱ
Model With QZ Contamination LM rail length Stainless
Symbol for
number Lubricator protection (in mm) steel
No. of rails used
accessory LM rail
No. of LM blocks
used on the same rail Radial clearance symbol (*2) Accuracy symbol (*3)
Normal (No symbol) Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
B-50
L
L1
C
φ d2
LM Guide
h
M1
φ d1
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions rating Mass
moment N-m＊
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
1 Double 1 Double 1
W1 W2 M1 F d1×d2×h Max kN kN kg kg/m
0
7 5 4.7 15 2.4×4.2×2.3 300 1.51 1.29 3.09 — 3.69 — 5.02 0.009 0.25
– 0.02
0
9 5.5 5.5 20 3.5×6×3.3 1000 2.69 2.31 7.82 43.9 9.03 50.8 10.6 0.016 0.32
– 0.02
0
12 7.5 7.5 25 3.5×6×4.5 1340 4 3.53 12 78.5 12 78.5 23.1 0.027 0.65
– 0.02
0
15 8.5 9.5 40 3.5×6×4.5 1430 6.66 5.7 26.2 154 26.2 154 40.4 0.047 0.96
– 0.02
0
20 10 11 60 6×9.5×8 1800 7.75 9.77 54.3 296 62.4 341 104 0.11 1.68
– 0.03
0
23 12.5 15 60 7×11×9 1800 16.5 20.2 177 932 177 932 248 0.24 2.6
– 0.03
Note) If a grease nipple is required, indicate“with grease SRS-G Basic Load Ratings
nipple” . (available for models SRS 15M/15WM/20M/
25M) Basic load rating
If a greasing hole is required, indicate“with greasing hole”. Model No. C C0
(available for models SRS 7M/7WM/9M/9WM/12M/12WM).
The maximum length under “Length ＊ ” indicates the kN kN
standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See B-54.) SRS 9GM 2.07 2.32
Static Permissible Moment＊
1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM
block SRS 12GM 3.36 3.55
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with
2 blocks closely contacting with each SRS 15GM 5.59 5.72
other
SRS 20GM 5.95 9.40
SRS 25GM 13.3 22.3

Model SRS-WM
W
W 4-S×l
4-S×l B
B
N
N
T
T M （K）
M （K）
H3
W3
W2 W1 W2 W1
Models SRS7WM, 9WM and 12WM Model SRS15WM
SRS 7WM 9 25 31 19 10 M3×2.8 20.4 3.8 7.2 1.8 1.8
SRS 9WM 12 30 39 21 12 M3×2.8 27 4.9 9.1 2.3 2.9
SRS 12WM 14 40 44.5 28 15 M3×3.5 30.9 5.7 11 3 3
SRS 15WM 16 60 55.5 45 20 M4×4.5 38.9 6.5 13.3 3 2.7
ronment.
Model number coding
2 SRS15WM QZ UU C1 +550L P M -Ⅱ
Model With QZ Contamination LM rail length Stainless
Symbol for
number Lubricator protection
accessory
(in mm) steel
No. of rails used
LM rail
No. of LM blocks
B-52
L
L1
C
φ d2
LM Guide
h
M1
φ d1
Unit: mm
moment N-m＊
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
1 Double 1 Double 1
0
14 5.5 — 5.2 30 3.5×6×3.2 400 2.01 1.94 6.47 — 7.71 — 14.33 0.018 0.56
– 0.02
0
18 6 — 7.5 30 3.5×6×4.5 1000 3.29 3.34 14 78.6 16.2 91 31.5 0.031 1.01
– 0.02
0
24 8 — 8.5 40 4.5×8×4.5 1430 5.48 5.3 26.4 143 26.4 143 66.5 0.055 1.52
– 0.02
0
42 9 23 9.5 40 4.5×8×4.5 1800 9.12 8.55 51.2 290 51.2 290 176 0.13 2.87
– 0.02
Note) If a grease nipple is required, indicate“with grease SRS-G Basic Load Ratings
nipple” . (available for models SRS 15M/15WM/20M/
25M) Basic load rating
If a greasing hole is required, indicate“with greasing hole”. Model No. C C0
(available for models SRS 7M/7WM/9M/9WM/12M/12WM).
The maximum length under “Length ＊ ” indicates the kN kN
standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See B-54.) SRS 9WGM 2.67 3.35
Static Permissible Moment＊
1 block: static permissible moment value with 1 LM
block SRS 12WGM 4.46 5.32
Double blocks: static permissible moment value with
2 blocks closely contacting with each SRS 15WGM 7.43 8.59
other

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model SRS variations. If the maxi-
G F F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model SRS Unit: mm
Model No. SRS 7M SRS 7WM SRS 9M SRS 9WM SRS 12M SRS 12WM SRS 15M SRS 15WM SRS 20M SRS 25M
40 50 55 50 70 70 70 110 220 220
55 80 75 80 95 110 110 150 280 280
70 110 95 110 120 150 150 190 340 340
85 140 115 140 145 190 190 230 460 460
100 170 135 170 170 230 230 270 640 640
115 200 155 200 195 270 270 310 880 880
LM rail 130 260 175 260 220 310 310 430 1000 1000
standard length 290 195 290 245 390 350 550
(LO) 275 320 270 470 390 670
375 320 550 430 790
370 470
470 550
570 670
870
Standard pitch F 15 30 20 30 25 40 40 40 60 60
G 5 10 7.5 10 10 15 15 15 20 20
Max length 300 400 1000 1000 1340 1430 1430 1800 1800 1800
B-54
SCR
(Separate)
Model SCR........................................ B-56 Structure and features....................... A-167
Standard Length and Maximum Length Rated Loads in All Directions ............ A-169
of the LM Rail................................... B-58 Equivalent Load ................................ A-169
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model SCR .. B-59 Service Life ....................................... A-100
Cap C ................................................ B-250

the Products".
B-55
Model SCR
F
C C1
φ d1
〃〃
M1
L2
φ d2
B3
M
B
B4
H3
N
B1
2×5-S×l W1
W2
W
L （E）
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions
Height Width Length
Model No.
M W L B1 B3 B4 B C C1 S×l L2 H3 N E
SCR 15S 47 48 64.4 — 11.3 34.8 — 20 14 M4×6 33.4 3 18.5 5.5

SCR 20S 57 59 79 — 13 42.5 — 30 14.5 M5×8 43 4.6 23.5 12
SCR 20 57 78 98 13 7.5 37 24 56 11 M5×8 43 4.6 23.5 12
SCR 25 70 88 109 18 9 44 26 64 12 M6×10 47.4 5.8 28.5 12
SCR 30 82 105 131 21 12 53 32 76 14.5 M6×10 58 7 34 12
SCR 35 95 123 152 24 14 61 37 90 16.5 M8×14 68 7.5 40 12
SCR 45 118 140 174 30 16.5 75 45 110 15 M10×15 84.6 8.9 49.5 16
SCR 65 180 226 272 40 27.5 116 76 180 23 M14×22 123 19 71 16
Model number coding
4 SCR25 QZ KKHH C0 +1200/1000L P

Model number Contamination LM rail length LM rail length
protection on the X axis on the Y axis
accessory symbol (*1) (in mm) (in mm)
Total No. of With QZ Radial clearance symbol (*2) Accuracy symbol (*3)
LM blocks Lubricator Normal (No symbol)/Light preload (C1) Precision grade (P)
Medium preload (C0) Super precision grade (SP)
B-56
（E） L
W
W2 2×5-S×l
W1
B1
LM Guide
N
H3
B4
B
M
φ d2
B3
h
L2
M1
φ d1 〃〃
C1 C
F
Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions moment Mass
rating
Mounting
Width Height Pitch C C0 MO MB LM block LM rail
hole
Grease
W1
nipple
0 W2 M1 F d1×d2×h kN kN kN-m kN-m kg kg/m
– 0.05
PB-1021B 15 31.5 13 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 14.2 24.2 0.16 0.296 0.54 1.3
B-M6F 20 39.5 16.5 60 6×9.5×8.5 22.3 38.4 0.361 0.334 0.88 2.3
B-M6F 20 49 16.5 60 6×9.5×8.5 28.1 50.3 0.473 0.568 1.7 2.3
B-M6F 23 55.5 20 60 7×11×9 36.8 64.7 0.696 0.85 3.4 3.2
B-M6F 28 66.5 23 80 9×14×12 54.2 88.8 1.15 1.36 4.6 4.5
B-M6F 34 78.5 26 80 9×14×12 72.9 127 2.01 2.34 6.8 6.2
B-PT1/8 45 92.5 32 105 14×20×17 100 166 3.53 3.46 10.8 10.4
B-PT1/8 63 144.5 53 150 18×26×22 253 408 11.9 13.3 44.5 23.7
MB
M0

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model SCR variations. If the maxi-
G value from the table.
The longer the G dimension is, the less stable the G area may become after installation, thus causing
an adverse impact to accuracy.
G F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model SCR Unit: mm
Model No. SCR 15 SCR 20 SCR 25 SCR 30 SCR 35 SCR 45 SCR 65

160 220 220 280 280 570 1270
220 280 280 360 360 675 1570
280 340 340 440 440 780 2020
340 400 400 520 520 885 2620
400 460 460 600 600 990
460 520 520 680 680 1095
520 580 580 760 760 1200
580 640 640 840 840 1305
640 700 700 920 920 1410
700 760 760 1000 1000 1515
760 820 820 1080 1080 1620
820 940 940 1160 1160 1725
940 1000 1000 1240 1240 1830
1000 1060 1060 1320 1320 1935
LM rail standard 1060 1120 1120 1400 1400 2040
length (L0) 1120 1180 1180 1480 1480 2145
1180 1240 1240 1560 1560 2250
1240 1360 1300 1640 1640 2355
1360 1480 1360 1720 1720 2460
1480 1600 1420 1800 1800 2565
1600 1720 1480 1880 1880 2670
1840 1540 1960 1960 2775
1960 1600 2040 2040 2880
2080 1720 2200 2200 2985
2200 1840 2360 2360 3090
1960 2520 2520
2080 2680 2680
2200 2840 2840
2320 3000 3000
2440
Standard pitch F 60 60 60 80 80 105 150
G 20 20 20 20 20 22.5 35
Max length 2500 3000 3000 3000 3000 3090 3000
B-58
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model SCR
The model SCR variations include a type with its LM rail bottom tapped. With the X-axis LM rail hav-
ing tapped holes, this model can be secured with bolts from the top.
Table2 Dimensions of the LM Rail Tap
Tapped-hole Unit: mm
F rail
Model No. Tap diamete Tap depth
LM Guide
15 M5 8
X-axis LM rail 20 M6 10
25 M6 12
30 M8 15
Y-axis LM rail 35 M8 17
45 M12 20
65 M20 30
Model number coding
4 SCR35 KKHH C0 +1000L P K/1000L P

Symbol for
B-59
B-60
HSR
LM Guide
(Separate)
Models HSR-A and HSR-AM, Structure and features....................... A-171
Models HSR-LA and HSR-LAM..... B-62 Types and Features .......................... A-172
Models HSR-B, HSR-BM, Rated Loads in All Directions ............ A-176
HSR-LB and HSR-LBM ................. B-64 Equivalent Load ................................ A-176
Model HSR-C Grade Ct .................... B-66 Service Life ....................................... A-100
Model HSR-RM ................................. B-68 Radial Clearance Standard ............... A-114
Models HSR-R, HSR-RM, Accuracy Standards .......................... A-119
HSR-LR and HSR-LRM................. B-70 Shoulder Height of the Mounting Base
Model HSR-R Grade Ct .................... B-72 and the Corner Radius ...................... A-328
Models HSR-YR and HSR-YRM ....... B-74 Error Allowance in the Parallelism
Models HSR-CA, HSR-CAM, between Two Rails ........................ A-333
HSR-HA and HSR-HAM ................ B-76 Error Allowance in Vertical Level
Models HSR-CB, HSR-CBM, between Two Rails ........................ A-336
HSR-HB and HSR-HBM ................ B-78
Models HSR-HA, HSR-HB and HSR-HR. B-80
Standard Length and Maximum Length

of the LM Rail................................... B-82
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model HSR .. B-83
Options............................................. B-223
The LM Block Dimension (Dimension L)
with LaCS and Seals Attached ........... B-225
Dedicated Bellows JH for Model HSR B-239
Dedicated Bellows DH for Model HSR .... B-240
Dedicated LM Cover TPH for Model HSR B-248
Cap C ................................................ B-250
with QZ Attached.............................. B-252
the Products".
B-61
Models HSR-A and HSR-AM, Models HSR-LA and HSR-LAM
W W
4-S 4-S
B B
T
T1 T t T1
M （K）（K）
M
H3 H3
W2 W1 W2 W1
Models HSR15 to 35A/LA/AM/LAM Models HSR45 to 85A/LA

Grease
nipple
M W L B C S L1 t T T1 K N E H3
HSR 15A
HSR 15AM 24 47 56.6 38 30 M5 38.8 — 7 11 19.3 4.3 5.5 PB1021B 3.5
HSR 20A
HSR 20AM 30 63 74 53 40 M6 50.8 — 10 9.5 26 5 12 B-M6F 4
HSR 20LA
HSR 20LAM 30 63 90 53 40 M6 66.8 — 10 9.5 26 5 12 B-M6F 4
HSR 25A
HSR 25AM 36 70 83.1 57 45 M8 59.5 — 11 16 30.5 6 12 B-M6F 5.5
HSR 25LA
HSR 25LAM
36 70 102.2 57 45 M8 78.6 — 11 16 30.5 6 12 B-M6F 5.5
HSR 30A
HSR 30AM 42 90 98 72 52 M10 70.4 — 9 18 35 7 12 B-M6F 7
HSR 30LA —
HSR 30LAM 42 90 120.6 72 52 M10 93 9 18 35 7 12 B-M6F 7
HSR 35A
HSR 35AM 48 100 109.4 82 62 M10 80.4 — 12 21 40.5 8 12 B-M6F 7.5
HSR 35LA 48 100 134.8 82 62 M10 105.8 — 12 21 40.5 8 12 B-M6F 7.5
HSR 35LAM
HSR 45A 139 98
60 120 100 80 M12 25 13 15 50 10 16 B-PT1/8 10
HSR 45LA 170.8 129.8
HSR 55A 70 140 163 116 95 M14 118 29 13.5 17 57 11 16 B-PT1/8 13
HSR 55LA 201.1 156.1
HSR 65A 90 170 186 142 110 M16 147 37 21.5 23 76 19 16 B-PT1/8 14
HSR 65LA 245.5 206.5
HSR 85A 245.6 178.6
HSR 85LA 110 215 303 185 140 M20 236 55 28 30 94 23 16 B-PT1/8 16
Model number coding
HSR25 A 2 QZ UU C0 M +1200L P T M -Ⅱ
Model Type of With QZ Contamination Stainless steel LM rail length Stainless steel Symbol for
protection LM rail No. of rails used
number LM block Lubricator accessory LM block (in mm) Symbol for LM rail on the same
symbol (*1) jointed use plane (*4)
No. of LM blocks Normal (No symbol) Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
used on the same Light preload (C1) Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
rail Medium preload (C0) Ultra precision grade (UP)
B-62
（E） L
L1
C
φ d2
N
LM Guide
M1
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
Basic load
LM rail dimensions rating Static permissible moment kN-m＊ Mass
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
± 0.05 block blocks block blocks block
3000
15 16 15 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 8.33 13.5 0.0805 0.457 0.0805 0.457 0.0844 0.2 1.5
(1240)
3000
20 21.5 18 60 6×9.5×8.5 (1480) 13.8 23.8 0.19 1.04 0.19 1.04 0.201 0.35 2.3
3000
20 21.5 18 60 6×9.5×8.5 (1480) 21.3 31.8 0.323 1.66 0.323 1.66 0.27 0.47 2.3
3000
23 23.5 22 60 7×11×9 (2020) 19.9 34.4 0.307 1.71 0.307 1.71 0.344 0.59 3.3
3000
23 23.5 22 60 7×11×9 (2020) 27.2 45.9 0.529 2.74 0.529 2.74 0.459 0.75 3.3
3000
28 31 26 80 9×14×12 (2520) 28 46.8 0.524 2.7 0.524 2.7 0.562 1.1 4.8
28 31 26 80 9×14×12 3000 37.3 62.5 0.889 4.37 0.889 4.37 0.751 1.3 4.8
(2520)
3000
34 33 29 80 9×14×12 (2520) 37.3 61.1 0.782 3.93 0.782 3.93 0.905 1.6 6.6
34 33 29 80 9×14×12 3000 50.2 81.5 1.32 6.35 1.32 6.35 1.2 2 6.6
(2520)
60 95.6 1.42 7.92 1.42 7.92 1.83 2.8
45 37.5 38 105 14×20×17 3090 11
80.4 127 2.44 12.6 2.44 12.6 2.43 3.3
88.5 137 2.45 13.2 2.45 13.2 3.2 4.5
53 43.5 44 120 16×23×20 3060 119 183 4.22 21.3 4.22 21.3 4.28 5.7 15.1
63 53.5 53 150 18×26×22 3000 141 215 4.8 23.5 4.8 23.5 5.82 8.5 22.5
192 286 8.72 40.5 8.72 40.5 7.7 10.7
210 310 8.31 45.6 8.31 45.6 11 17
85 65 65 180 24×35×28 3000 35.2
282 412 14.2 72.5 14.2 72.5 14.7 23

Models HSR-B, HSR-BM, HSR-LB and HSR-LBM
W
4-φ H B
t T T1
M （K）
H3
W2 W1

Grease
nipple
M W L B C H L1 t T T1 K N E H3
HSR 15B
HSR 15BM 24 47 56.6 38 30 4.5 38.8 11 7 7 19.3 4.3 5.5 PB1021B 3.5
HSR 20B
HSR 20BM 30 63 74 53 40 6 50.8 10 9.5 10 26 5 12 B-M6F 4
HSR 20LB
HSR 20LBM 30 63 90 53 40 6 66.8 10 9.5 10 26 5 12 B-M6F 4
HSR 25B
36 70 83.1 57 45 7 59.5 16 11 10 30.5 6 12 B-M6F 5.5
HSR 25BM
HSR 25LB
HSR 25LBM 36 70 102.2 57 45 7 78.6 16 11 10 30.5 6 12 B-M6F 5.5
HSR 30B
HSR 30BM 42 90 98 72 52 9 70.4 18 9 10 35 7 12 B-M6F 7
HSR 30LB
HSR 30LBM 42 90 120.6 72 52 9 93 18 9 10 35 7 12 B-M6F 7
HSR 35B
48 100 109.4 82 62 9 80.4 21 12 13 40.5 8 12 B-M6F 7.5
HSR 35BM
HSR 35LB
HSR 35LBM 48 100 134.8 82 62 9 105.8 21 12 13 40.5 8 12 B-M6F 7.5
HSR 45B 60 120 139 100 80 11 98 25 13 15 50 10 16 B-PT1/8 10
HSR 45LB 170.8 129.8
HSR 55B 70 140 163 118
116 95 14 29 13.5 17 57 11 16 B-PT1/8 13
HSR 55LB 201.1 156.1
HSR 65B 90 170 186 142 110 16 147 37 21.5 23 76 19 16 B-PT1/8 14
HSR 65LB 245.5 206.5
HSR 85B 110 215 245.6 178.6
185 140 18 55 28 30 94 23 16 B-PT1/8 16
HSR 85LB 303 236
Model number coding
HSR25 B 2 QZ UU C0 M +1200L P T M -Ⅱ
Model Type of With QZ Contamination Stainless steel LM rail length Stainless steel Symbol for
accessory LM block (in mm) LM rail No. of rails used
Symbol for LM rail on the same
symbol (*1)
jointed use plane (*4)
No. of LM blocks Radial clearance symbol (*2) Accuracy symbol (*3)
B-64
（E） L
L1
C
φ d2
N
LM Guide
M1
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
Basic load
LM rail dimensions rating Static permissible moment kN-m＊ Mass
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
15 16 15 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 3000 8.33 13.5 0.0805 0.457 0.0805 0.457 0.0844 0.2 1.5
(1240)
3000
20 21.5 18 60 6×9.5×8.5 (1480) 13.8 23.8 0.19 1.04 0.19 1.04 0.201 0.35 2.3
3000
20 21.5 18 60 6×9.5×8.5 (1480) 21.3 31.8 0.323 1.66 0.323 1.66 0.27 0.47 2.3
3000
23 23.5 22 60 7×11×9 19.9 34.4 0.307 1.71 0.307 1.71 0.344 0.59 3.3
(2020)
3000
23 23.5 22 60 7×11×9 (2020) 27.2 45.9 0.529 2.74 0.529 2.74 0.459 0.75 3.3
3000
28 31 26 80 9×14×12 (2520) 28 46.8 0.524 2.7 0.524 2.7 0.562 1.1 4.8
3000
28 31 26 80 9×14×12 37.3 62.5 0.889 4.37 0.889 4.37 0.751 1.3 4.8
(2520)
3000
34 33 29 80 9×14×12 37.3 61.1 0.782 3.93 0.782 3.93 0.905 1.6 6.6
(2520)
3000
34 33 29 80 9×14×12 (2520) 50.2 81.5 1.32 6.35 1.32 6.35 1.2 2 6.6
45 37.5 38 105 14×20×17 3090 60 95.6 1.42 7.92 1.42 7.92 1.83 2.8 11
80.4 127 2.44 12.6 2.44 12.6 2.43 3.3
88.5 137 2.45 13.2 2.45 13.2 3.2 4.5
53 43.5 44 120 16×23×20 3060 119 183 4.22 21.3 4.22 21.3 4.28 5.7 15.1
63 53.5 53 150 18×26×22 3000 141 215 4.8 23.5 4.8 23.5 5.82 8.5 22.5
192 286 8.72 40.5 8.72 40.5 7.7 10.7
210 310 8.31 45.6 8.31 45.6 11 17
85 65 65 180 24×35×28 3000 35.2
282 412 14.2 72.5 14.2 72.5 14.7 23

Model HSR-C Grade Ct
W
4-S B
(φ H through)
T1 T
M （K）
H3
W2 W1
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions

Grease
nipple
M W L B C S H L1 T T1 K N E H3
HSR 15C (Ct) 24 47 56.6 38 30 M5 4.4 38.8 7 11 19.3 4.3 5.5 PB1021B 3.5
HSR 20C (Ct) 30 63 74 53 40 M6 5.4 50.8 10 9.5 26 5 12 B-M6F 4
HSR 25C (Ct) 36 70 83.1 57 45 M8 6.8 59.5 11 16 30.5 6 12 B-M6F 5.5
HSR 30C (Ct) 42 90 98 72 52 M10 8.5 70.4 9 18 35 7 12 B-M6F 7
HSR 35C (Ct) 48 100 109.4 82 62 M10 8.5 80.4 12 21 40.5 8 12 B-M6F 7.5
Model number coding
Block: HSR25 C 1 SS Ct BLOCK

Model Type of Accuracy symbol
number LM block Indicates Ct Class
Contamination protection
This variant: 1 accessory symbol (*1) Block symbol
Rail: HSR25 -3000L Ct7 RAIL

LM rail length Rail symbol
(in mm)
Accuracy symbol
Ct 7 Class (Ct7) / Ct 5 Class (Ct5)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A-368.
B-66
（E） L
L1
LM Guide
φ d2
N
h
M1
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
Basic load
LM rail dimensions Static permissible moment kN-m＊ Mass
rating
MA MB MC LM
Width Height Pitch Length ＊ C C0 LM rail
block
15 16 15 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 3000 8.33 13.5 0.0805 0.457 0.085 0.457 0.0844 0.2 1.5
20 21.5 18 60 6×9.5×8.5 3000 13.8 23.8 0.19 1.04 0.19 1.04 0.201 0.35 2.3
23 23.5 22 60 7×11×9 3000 19.9 34.4 0.307 1.71 0.307 1.71 0.344 0.59 3.3
28 31 26 80 9×14×12 3000 28 46.8 0.524 2.7 0.524 2.7 0.562 1.1 4.8
34 33 29 80 9×14×12 3000 37.3 61.1 0.782 3.93 0.782 3.93 0.905 1.6 6.6
Note) The maximum length under“Length＊”indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (see B-82)
Static permissible moment＊: static permissible moment value with 1 LM block

Model HSR-RM
W L
4-S×l
B L1
φd
C
N φ d2
h
M （K）
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Models HSR8RM and 10RM
Grea
Model No. Height Width Length sing
hole Grease
nipple
M W L B C S×l L1 T K N E d H3
HSR 8RM 11 16 24 10 10 M2×2.5 15 — 8.9 2.6 — 2.2 — 2.1

HSR 10RM 13 20 31 13 12 M2.6×2.5 20.1 — 10.8 3.5 — 2.5 — 2.2
HSR 12RM 20 27 45 15 15 M4×4.5 30.5 6 16.9 5.2 4 — PB107 3.1
Model number coding
HSR12 R 2 UU C1 M +670L H T M -Ⅱ
Model Type of Contamination Stainless LM rail length Symbol for
Stainless
protection No. of rails used
number LM block accessory steel (in mm) steel LM rail
symbol (*1) LM block on the same
Symbol for LM rail plane (*4)
used on the same Normal (No symbol)
rail Light preload (C1) Accuracy symbol (*3)
Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
B-68
W （E） L
4-S×l L1
B
C
φ d2
LM Guide
T N
h
M （K）
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Model HSR12RM
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
8 4 6 20 2.4×4.2×2.3 (275) 1.08 2.16 0.00492 0.0319 0.00492 0.0319 0.00727 0.012 0.3
10 5 7 25 3.5×6×3.3 (470) 1.96 3.82 0.0123 0.0716 0.0123 0.0716 0.0162 0.025 0.45
12 7.5 11 40 3.5×6×4.5 (670) 4.7 8.53 0.0409 0.228 0.0409 0.228 0.0445 0.08 0.83
ronment.

Models HSR-R, HSR-RM, HSR-LR and HSR-LRM
W
4-S×l
B
M （K）
H3
W2 W1

Grease
nipple
M W L B C S×l L1 T K N E H3
HSR 15R
HSR 15RM 28 34 56.6 26 26 M4×5 38.8 6 23.3 8.3 5.5 PB1021B 3.5
HSR 20R 30 44 74 32 36 M5×6 50.8 8 26 5 12 B-M6F 4
HSR 20RM
HSR 20LR
30 44 90 32 50 M5×6 66.8 8 26 5 12 B-M6F 4
HSR 20LRM
HSR 25R
HSR 25RM 40 48 83.1 35 35 M6×8 59.5 9 34.5 10 12 B-M6F 5.5
HSR 25LR
HSR 25LRM 40 48 102.2 35 50 M6×8 78.6 9 34.5 10 12 B-M6F 5.5
HSR 30R
HSR 30RM 45 60 98 40 40 M8×10 70.4 9 38 10 12 B-M6F 7
HSR 30LR
HSR 30LRM 45 60 120.6 40 60 M8×10 93 9 38 10 12 B-M6F 7
HSR 35R 55 70 109.4 50 50 M8×12 80.4 11.7 47.5 15 12 B-M6F 7.5
HSR 35RM
HSR 35LR 55 70 134.8 50 72 M8×12 105.8 11.7 47.5 15 12 B-M6F 7.5
HSR 35LRM
HSR 45R 70 86 139 60 60 M10×17 98 15 60 20 16 B-PT1/8 10
HSR 45LR 170.8 80 129.8
HSR 55R 163 75 118 20.5
80 100 201.1 75 M12×18 156.1 67 21 16 B-PT1/8 13
HSR 55LR 95
HSR 65R 90 126 186 76 70 M16×20 147 23 76 19 16 B-PT1/8 14
HSR 65LR 245.5 120 206.5
HSR 85R 110 156 245.6 100 80 M18×25 178.6 29 94 23 16 B-PT1/8 16
HSR 85LR 303 140 236
Model number coding
HSR35 R 2 QZ SS C0 M +1400L P T M -Ⅱ
Model Type of With QZ Contamination
protection Stainless steel LM rail length Stainless steel Symbol for
LM rail No. of rails used
number LM block Lubricator accessory LM block (in mm)
symbol (*1) Symbol for on the same
LM rail jointed use plane (*4)
used on the same Normal (No symbol) Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
rail Light preload (C1) Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
B-70
（E） L
L1
C
φ d2
N
LM Guide
M1
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
Basic load
LM rail dimensions rating
Static permissible moment kN-m＊ Mass
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
3000
15 9.5 15 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 8.33 13.5 0.0805 0.457 0.0805 0.457 0.0844 0.18 1.5
(1240)
20 12 18 60 3000
6×9.5×8.5 (1480) 13.8 23.8 0.19 1.04 0.19 1.04 0.201 0.25 2.3
3000
20 12 18 60 6×9.5×8.5 (1480) 21.3 31.8 0.323 1.66 0.323 1.66 0.27 0.35 2.3
3000
23 12.5 22 60 7×11×9 (2020) 19.9 34.4 0.307 1.71 0.307 1.71 0.344 0.54 3.3
3000
23 12.5 22 60 7×11×9 (2020) 27.2 45.9 0.529 2.74 0.529 2.74 0.459 0.67 3.3
3000
28 16 26 80 9×14×12 (2520) 28 46.8 0.524 2.7 0.524 2.7 0.562 0.9 4.8
3000
28 16 26 80 9×14×12 (2520) 37.3 62.5 0.889 4.37 0.889 4.37 0.751 1.1 4.8
34 18 29 80 9×14×12 3000 37.3 61.1 0.782 3.93 0.782 3.93 0.905 1.5 6.6
(2520)
3000
34 18 29 80 9×14×12 50.2 81.5 1.32 6.35 1.32 6.35 1.2 2 6.6
(2520)
45 20.5 38 105 14×20×17 3090 60 95.6 1.42 7.92 1.42 7.92 1.83 2.6 11
80.4 127 2.44 12.6 2.44 12.6 2.43 3.1
53 23.5 44 120 16×23×20 3060 88.5 137 2.45 13.2 2.45 13.2 3.2 4.3 15.1
119 183 4.22 21.3 4.22 21.3 4.28 5.4
63 31.5 53 150 18×26×22 3000 141 215 4.8 23.5 4.8 23.5 5.82 7.3 22.5
192 286 8.72 40.5 8.72 40.5 7.7 9.3
210 310 8.31 45.6 8.31 45.6 11 13
85 35.5 65 180 24×35×28 3000 282 412 14.2 72.5 14.2 72.5 14.7 16 35.2

Model HSR-R Grade Ct
W
4-S×l B
M （K）
H3
W2 W1

Grease
nipple
HSR 15R (Ct) 28 34 56.6 26 26 M4×5 38.8 6 23.3 8.3 5.5 PB1021B 3.5
HSR 20R (Ct) 30 44 74 32 36 M5×6 50.8 8 26 5 12 B-M6F 4
HSR 25R (Ct) 40 48 83.1 35 35 M6×8 59.5 9 34.5 10 12 B-M6F 5.5
HSR 30R (Ct) 45 60 98 40 40 M8×10 70.4 9 38 10 12 B-M6F 7
HSR 35R (Ct) 55 70 109.4 50 50 M8×12 80.4 11.7 47.5 15 12 B-M6F 7.5
Model number coding
Block: HSR35 R 1 SS Ct BLOCK

Model Type of Accuracy symbol
number LM block Indicates Ct Class
Contamination protection
This variant: 1 accessory symbol (*1) Block symbol
Rail: HSR25 -3000L Ct5 RAIL

LM rail length Rail symbol
(in mm)
Accuracy symbol
Ct 7 Class (Ct7) / Ct 5 Class (Ct5)
B-72
（E） L
L1
LM Guide
φ d2
N
h
M1
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
Basic load
LM rail dimensions Static permissible moment kN-m＊ Mass
rating
MA MB MC LM
Width Height Pitch Length ＊ C C0 LM rail
block
15 9.5 15 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 3000 8.33 13.5 0.0805 0.457 0.085 0.457 0.0844 0.18 1.5
20 12 18 60 6×9.5×8.5 3000 13.8 23.8 0.19 1.04 0.19 1.04 0.201 0.25 2.3
23 12.5 22 60 7×11×9 3000 19.9 34.4 0.307 1.71 0.307 1.71 0.344 0.54 3.3
28 16 26 80 9×14×12 3000 28 46.8 0.524 2.7 0.524 2.7 0.562 0.9 4.8
34 18 29 80 9×14×12 3000 37.3 61.1 0.782 3.93 0.782 3.93 0.905 1.5 6.6
Note) The maximum length under“Length＊”indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (see B-82)

Models HSR-YR and HSR-YRM
W
4-S×l
B1
B
（K）
M
H3
W1
W2

Grease
nipple
M W L B1 B C S×l L1 K N E H3
HSR 15YR
28 33.5 56.6 4.3 11.5 18 M4×5 38.8 23.3 8.3 5.5 PB1021B 3.5
HSR 15YRM
HSR 20YR
30 43.5 74 4 11.5 25 M5×6 50.8 26 5 12 B-M6F 4
HSR 20YRM
HSR 25YR
40 47.5 83.1 6 16 30 M6×6 59.5 34.5 10 12 B-M6F 5.5
HSR 25YRM
HSR 30YR
45 59.5 98 8 16 40 M6×9 70.4 38 10 12 B-M6F 7
HSR 30YRM
HSR 35YR
55 69.5 109.4 8 23 43 M8×10 80.4 47 15 12 B-M6F 7.5
HSR 35YRM
HSR 45YR 70 85.5 139 10 30 55 M10×14 98 60 20 16 B-PT1/8 10
HSR 55YR 80 99.5 163 12 32 70 M12×15 118 67 21 16 B-PT1/8 13
HSR 65YR 90 124.5 186 12 35 85 M16×22 147 76 19 16 B-PT1/8 14
Model number coding
HSR25 YR 2 UU C0 M +1200L P T M -Ⅱ
Model Type of Contamination Stainless LM rail length Stainless Symbol for
protection steel No. of rails used
number LM block accessory steel (in mm)
symbol (*1) LM block LM rail on the same
Symbol for LM rail plane (*4)
B-74
（E） L
L1
C
φ d2 N
LM Guide
h
M1
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
3000
15 24 15 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 8.33 13.5 0.0805 0.457 0.0805 0.457 0.0844 0.18 1.5
(1240)
3000
20 31.5 18 60 6×9.5×8.5 13.8 23.8 0.19 1.04 0.19 1.04 0.201 0.25 2.3
(1480)
3000
23 35 22 60 7×11×9 19.9 34.4 0.307 1.71 0.307 1.71 0.344 0.54 3.3
(2020)
3000
28 43.5 26 80 9×14×12 28 46.8 0.524 2.7 0.524 2.7 0.562 0.9 4.8
(2520)
3000
34 51.5 29 80 9×14×12 37.3 61.1 0.782 3.93 0.782 3.93 0.905 1.5 6.6
(2520)
45 65 38 105 14×20×17 3090 60 95.6 1.42 7.92 1.42 7.92 1.83 2.6 11
53 76 44 120 16×23×20 3060 88.5 137 2.45 13.2 2.45 13.2 3.2 4.3 15.1
63 93 53 150 18×26×22 3000 141 215 4.8 23.5 4.8 23.5 5.82 7.3 22.5

Models HSR-CA, HSR-CAM, HSR-HA and HSR-HAM
W W
6-S B 6-S B
T
t T1
T1 T （K）
（K） M
M
H3 H3
W2 W1 W2 W1
Models HSR20 to 35CA/HA/CAM/HAM Models HSR45 to 85CA/HA

Grease
nipple
M W L B C S L1 t T T1 K N E H3
HSR 20CA
HSR 20CAM 30 63 74 53 40 M6 50.8 — 9.5 10 26 5 12 B-M6F 4
HSR 20HA
HSR 20HAM 30 63 90 53 40 M6 66.8 — 9.5 10 26 5 12 B-M6F 4
HSR 25CA
HSR 25CAM 36 70 83.1 57 45 M8 59.5 — 11 16 30.5 6 12 B-M6F 5.5
HSR 25HA
HSR 25HAM 36 70 102.2 57 45 M8 78.6 — 11 16 30.5 6 12 B-M6F 5.5
HSR 30CA
HSR 30CAM 42 90 98 72 52 M10 70.4 — 9 18 35 7 12 B-M6F 7
HSR 30HA 42 90 120.6 72 52 M10 93 — 9 18 35 7 12 B-M6F 7
HSR 30HAM
HSR 35CA 48 100 109.4 82 62 M10 80.4 — 12 21 40.5 8 12 B-M6F 7.5
HSR 35CAM
HSR 35HA
HSR 35HAM 48 100 134.8 82 62 M10 105.8 — 12 21 40.5 8 12 B-M6F 7.5
HSR 45CA 60 120 139 100 80 M12 98 25 13 15 50 10 16 B-PT1/8 10
HSR 45HA 170.8 129.8
HSR 55CA 163 118
HSR 55HA 70 140 201.1 116 95 M14 156.1 29 13.5 17 57 11 16 B-PT1/8 13
HSR 65CA 186 147
HSR 65HA 90 170 245.5 142 110 M16 206.5 37 21.5 23 76 19 16 B-PT1/8 14
HSR 85CA 245.6 178.6
110 215 185 140 M20 55 28 30 94 23 16 B-PT1/8 16
HSR 85HA 303 236
Model number coding
HSR25 HA 2 QZ KKHH C0 M +1300L P T M -Ⅱ

Model Type of With QZ Contamination Stainless steel LM rail length Stainless
protection
number LM block Lubricator accessory LM block (in mm) steel
symbol (*1) Accuracy symbol (*3) LM rail
Radial clearance symbol (*2) Normal grade (No Symbol)
No. of LM blocks High accuracy grade (H) Symbol Symbol for
used on the same Normal (No symbol) Precision grade (P) for LM rail No. of rails used
rail Light preload (C1) Super precision grade (SP) jointed use on the same
Medium preload (C0) Ultra precision grade (UP) plane (*4)
B-76
（E） L
L1
C
φ d2
N
LM Guide
h
M1
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
20 21.5 18 60 6×9.5×8.5 3000 13.8 23.8 0.19 1.04 0.19 1.04 0.201 0.35 2.3
(1480)
3000
20 21.5 18 60 6×9.5×8.5 21.3 31.8 0.323 1.66 0.323 1.66 0.27 0.47 2.3
(1480)
3000
23 23.5 22 60 7×11×9 (2020) 19.9 34.4 0.307 1.71 0.307 1.71 0.344 0.59 3.3
3000
23 23.5 22 60 7×11×9 (2020) 27.2 45.9 0.529 2.74 0.529 2.74 0.459 0.75 3.3
3000
28 31 26 80 9×14×12 (2520) 28 46.8 0.524 2.7 0.524 2.7 0.562 1.1 4.8
28 31 26 80 9×14×12 3000 37.3 62.5 0.889 4.37 0.889 4.37 0.751 1.3 4.8
(2520)
3000
34 33 29 80 9×14×12 37.3 61.1 0.782 3.93 0.782 3.93 0.905 1.6 6.6
(2520)
3000
34 33 29 80 9×14×12 (2520) 50.2 81.5 1.32 6.35 1.32 6.35 1.2 2 6.6
45 37.5 38 105 14×20×17 3090 60 95.6 1.42 7.92 1.42 7.92 1.83 2.8 11
80.4 127 2.44 12.6 2.44 12.6 2.43 3.3
88.5 137 2.45 13.2 2.45 13.2 3.2 4.5
53 43.5 44 120 16×23×20 3060 119 183 4.22 21.3 4.22 21.3 4.28 5.7 15.1
63 53.5 53 150 18×26×22 3000 141 215 4.8 23.5 4.8 23.5 5.82 8.5 22.5
192 286 8.72 40.5 8.72 40.5 7.7 10.7
210 310 8.31 45.6 8.31 45.6 11 17
85 65 65 180 24×35×28 3000 35.2
282 412 14.2 72.5 14.2 72.5 14.7 23

Models HSR-CB, HSR-CBM, HSR-HB and HSR-HBM
W
6-φ H
B
t T T1
M （K）
H3
W2 W1
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions

Grease
nipple
HSR 20CB
HSR 20CBM 30 63 74 53 40 6 50.8 10 9.5 10 26 5 12 B-M6F 4
HSR 20HB
30 63 90 53 40 6 66.8 10 9.5 10 26 5 12 B-M6F 4
HSR 20HBM
HSR 25CB
HSR 25CBM 36 70 83.1 57 45 7 59.5 16 11 10 30.5 6 12 B-M6F 5.5
HSR 25HB
HSR 25HBM 36 70 102.2 57 45 7 78.6 16 11 10 30.5 6 12 B-M6F 5.5
HSR 30CB
HSR 30CBM 42 90 98 72 52 9 70.4 18 9 10 35 7 12 B-M6F 7
HSR 30HB 42 90 120.6 72 52 9 93 18 9 10 35 7 12 B-M6F 7
HSR 30HBM
HSR 35CB 48 100 109.4 82 62 9 80.4 21 12 13 40 8 12 B-M6F 7.5
HSR 35CBM
HSR 35HB
HSR 35HBM 48 100 134.8 82 62 9 105.8 21 12 13 40 8 12 B-M6F 7.5
HSR 45CB 60 120 139 100 80 11 98 25 13 15 50 10 16 B-PT1/8 10
HSR 45HB 170.8 129.8
HSR 55CB 163 118
HSR 55HB 70 140 201.1 116 95 14 156.1 29 13.5 17 57 11 16 B-PT1/8 13
HSR 65CB 186 147
90 170 142 110 16 37 21.5 23 76 19 16 B-PT1/8 14
HSR 65HB 245.5 206.5
HSR 85CB
110 215
245.6 178.6
185 140 18 55 28 30 94 23 16 B-PT1/8 16
HSR 85HB 110 303 236
Model number coding
HSR35 CB 2 QZ ZZHH C0 M +1400L P T M -Ⅱ

Model Type of With QZ Contamination Stainless steel LM rail length Stainless
protection
number LM block Lubricator accessory LM block (in mm) steel
symbol (*1) Accuracy symbol (*3) LM rail
Normal grade (No Symbol) Symbol for
No. of LM blocks Radial clearance symbol (*2) High accuracy grade (H) Symbol No. of rails used
used on the same Normal (No symbol) Precision grade (P) for LM rail on the same
rail Light preload (C1) Super precision grade (SP) jointed use plane (*4)
B-78
（E） L
L1
C
φ d2
N
LM Guide
h
M1
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
20 21.5 18 60 6×9.5×8.5 3000 13.8 23.8 0.19 1.04 0.19 1.04 0.201 0.35 2.3
(1480)
3000
20 21.5 18 60 6×9.5×8.5 21.3 31.8 0.323 1.66 0.323 1.66 0.27 0.47 2.3
(1480)
3000
23 23.5 22 60 7×11×9 (2020) 19.9 34.4 0.307 1.71 0.307 1.71 0.344 0.59 3.3
3000
23 23.5 22 60 7×11×9 (2020) 27.2 45.9 0.529 2.74 0.529 2.74 0.459 0.75 3.3
3000
28 31 26 80 9×14×12 (2520) 28 46.8 0.524 2.7 0.524 2.7 0.562 1.1 4.8
28 31 26 80 9×14×12 3000 37.3 62.5 0.889 4.37 0.889 4.37 0.751 1.3 4.8
(2520)
3000
34 33 29 80 9×14×12 37.3 61.1 0.782 3.93 0.782 3.93 0.905 1.6 6.6
(2520)
3000
34 33 29 80 9×14×12 (2520) 50.2 81.5 1.32 6.35 1.32 6.35 1.2 2 6.6
45 37.5 38 105 14×20×17 3090 60 95.6 1.42 7.92 1.42 7.92 1.83 2.8 11
80.4 127 2.44 12.6 2.44 12.6 2.43 3.3
88.5 137 2.45 13.2 2.45 13.2 3.2 4.5
53 43.5 44 120 16×23×20 3060 119 183 4.22 21.3 4.22 21.3 4.28 5.7 15.1
63 53.5 53 150 18×26×22 3000 141 215 4.8 23.5 4.8 23.5 5.82 8.5 22.5
192 286 8.72 40.5 8.72 40.5 7.7 10.7
210 310 8.31 45.6 8.31 45.6 11 17
85 65 65 180 24×35×28 3000 35.2
282 412 14.2 72.5 14.2 72.5 14.7 23

Models HSR-HA, HSR-HB and HSR-HR
W W
9-S B 9-φ H B
T1 T T1 T
（K）（K）
M M
H3 H3
W2 W1 W2 W1
Models HSR100 to 150HA Models HSR100 to 150HB
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions

Grease
nipple
M W L B C H S×l L1 T T1 K N E H3
HSR 100HA 250 220 — M18 ＊

32 35
HSR 100HB 120 250 334 220 200 20 — 261 32 35 100 23 16 B-PT1/4 20.5
HSR 100HR 200 130 — M18×27 33 —
HSR 120HA 290 250 — M20＊ 34 38
HSR 120HB 130 290 365 250 210 22 — 287 34 38 110 26.5 16 B-PT1/4 20
HSR 120HR 220 146 — M20×30 33.7 —
HSR 150HA 350 300 — M24＊ 36 40
HSR 150HB 145 350 396 300 230 26 — 314 36 40 123 29 16 B-PT1/4 22.5
HSR 150HR 266 180 — M24×35 33 —
Note) "＊" indicates a through hole.
Model number coding
HSR150 HR 2 UU C1 +2350L H T -Ⅱ
Model Type of Contamination LM rail length Symbol Symbol for
number LM block protection (in mm) for LM rail No. of rails used
accessory jointed use on the same plane (*4)
symbol (*1)
rail Light preload (C1) Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
B-80
（E） L
L1
W
C
6-S×l B
φ d2
N
LM Guide
T h
M （K）
M1
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Models HSR100 to 150HR

Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
75
100 75 70 210 26×39×32 3000 351 506 19.4 98.2 19.4 98.2 22.4 32 49
50
88
114 88 75 230 33×48×43 3000 429 612 25.9 129 25.9 129 31.1 43 61
53
103
144 103 85 250 39×58×46 3000 518 728 33.6 167 33.6 167 45.2 62 87
61
Note) The maximum length under “Length＊” indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See B-82.)

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model HSR variations. If the maxi-
G F F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model HSR Unit: mm
Model No. HSR 8 HSR 10 HSR 12 HSR 15 HSR 20 HSR 25 HSR 30 HSR 35 HSR 45 HSR 55 HSR 65 HSR 85 HSR 100 HSR 120 HSR 150
35 45 70 160 160 220 280 280 570 780 1270 1530 1340 1470 1600
55 70 110 220 220 280 360 360 675 900 1570 1890 1760 1930 2100
75 95 150 280 280 340 440 440 780 1020 2020 2250 2180 2390 2350
95 120 190 340 340 400 520 520 885 1140 2620 2610 2600
115 145 230 400 400 460 600 600 990 1260
135 170 270 460 460 520 680 680 1095 1380
155 195 310 520 520 580 760 760 1200 1500
175 220 350 580 580 640 840 840 1305 1620
195 245 390 640 640 700 920 920 1410 1740
215 270 430 700 700 760 1000 1000 1515 1860
235 295 470 760 760 820 1080 1080 1620 1980
255 320 510 820 820 940 1160 1160 1725 2100
275 345 550 940 940 1000 1240 1240 1830 2220
370 590 1000 1000 1060 1320 1320 1935 2340
LM rail standard 395 630 1060 1060 1120 1400 1400 2040 2460
length (LO) 420 670 1120 1120 1180 1480 1480 2145 2580
445 1180 1180 1240 1560 1560 2250 2700
470 1240 1240 1300 1640 1640 2355 2820
1360 1360 1360 1720 1720 2460 2940
1480 1480 1420 1800 1800 2565 3060
1600 1600 1480 1880 1880 2670
1720 1540 1960 1960 2775
1840 1600 2040 2040 2880
1960 1720 2200 2200 2985
2080 1840 2360 2360 3090
2200 1960 2520 2520
2080 2680 2680
2200 2840 2840
2320 3000 3000
2440
Standard pitch F 20 25 40 60 60 60 80 80 105 120 150 180 210 230 250

G 7.5 10 15 20 20 20 20 20 22.5 30 35 45 40 45 50
3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
Max length (275) (470) (670) (1240) (1480) (2020) (2520) (2520) 3090 3060 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
Note3) The figures in the parentheses indicate the maximum lengths of stainless steel made models.
Note4) Ct7 and Ct5 grades are not applicable where the LM rail standard length appears in dimmed type for models HSR 15 to
HSR 35.
B-82
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model HSR
The model HSR variations include a type with its LM rail bottom tapped. This type is useful when
LM Guide
Clearance
l1
S1 F
(1) Determine the bolt length so that a clear- Table2 Dimensions of the LM Rail Tap
ance of 2 to 5 mm is secured between the Unit: mm
bolt end and the bottom of the tap (effective Model No. S1 Effective tap depth l 1
tap depth). (See figure above.) HSR 15 M5 8
(2) A tapped-hole LM rail type is available also HSR 20 M6 10
for model HSR-YR. HSR 25 M6 12
(3) For standard pitches of the taps, see HSR 30 M8 15
HSR 35 M8 17
Table1 on B-82.
HSR 45 M12 24
HSR 55 M14 24
HSR 65 M20 30
Model number coding
HSR30 A2UU +1000LH K

Symbol for tapped-hole LM rail type
Note) Ct7 and Ct5 grades are not applicable.
B-83
B-84
SR
LM Guide
(Separate)
Models SR-W, SR-WM, SR-V and SR-VM . B-86 Structure and features....................... A-179
Models SR-TB, SR-TBM, SR-SB and SR-SBM... B-88 Types and Features .......................... A-180
Characteristics of Model SR.............. A-182
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model SR . B-91 Service Life ....................................... A-100
Dedicated Bellows JS for Model SR . B-241 Error Allowance in the Parallelism
Dedicated Bellows DS for Model SR. B-242 between Two Rails ........................ A-333
Dedicated LM Cover TPS for Model SR.. B-249 Error Allowance in Vertical Level

the Products".
B-85
Models SR-W, SR-WM, SR-V and SR-VM
W
B
T
（K）
M
H3
W2 W1

Grease
nipple
SR 15W/WM 57 26 39.5
SR 15V/VM 24 34 40.4 26 — M4×7 22.9 5.7 19.5 6 5.5 PB1021B 4.5
SR 20W/WM 66.2 32 46.7
SR 20V/VM 28 42 47.3 32 — M5×8 27.8 7.2 22 6 12 B-M6F 6
SR 25WY/WMY 33 48 83 35 35 M6×9 59 7.7 26 7 12 B-M6F 7
SR 25VY/VMY 59.2 — 35.2
SR 30W/WM 96.8 40 69.3
SR 30V/VM 42 60 67.9 40 — M8×12 40.4 8.5 32.5 8 12 B-M6F 9.5
SR 35W/WM 111 50 79
48 70 50 M8×12 12.5 36.5 8.5 12 B-M6F 11.5
SR 35V/VM 77.6 — 45.7
SR 45W 60 86 126 60 60 M10×15 90.5 15 47.5 11.5 16 B-PT1/8 12.5
SR 55W 68 100 156 75 75 M12×20 117 16.7 54.5 12 16 B-PT1/8 13.5
SR 70T 85 126 194.6 90 90 M16×25 147.6 24.5 70 12 16 B-PT1/8 15
SR 85T 110 156 180 100 80 M18×30 130 25.5 91.5 27 12 A-PT1/8 18.5
SR 100T 120 178 200 120 100 M20×35 150 29.5 101 32 12 A-PT1/8 19
SR 120T 110 205 235 160 120 M20×35 180 24 95 14 13.5 B-PT1/4 15
SR 150T 135 250 280 200 160 M20×35 215 24 113 17 13.5 B-PT1/4 22
Model number coding
SR25 W 2 UU C0 M +1240L Y P T M -Ⅱ
Model Type of Contamination Stainless steel LM rail length Stainless steel
protection LM block (in mm) LM rail Symbol for
number LM block accessory No. of rails used
symbol (*1) Applied to Symbol for LM rail on the same plane (*4)
No. of LM blocks Radial clearance symbol (*2) only 25 jointed use
rail Medium preload (C0) Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
B-86
2-S×l 4-S×l
（E） L （E） L
L1 L1
C
LM Guide
φ d2 φ d2
N N
h h
M1 M1
φ d1 φ d1
F F
Model SR-V Model SR-W
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
W2 M1 F d1×d2×h Max kN kN blocks block blocks block kg kg/m
± 0.05 block
2500 9.51 19.3 0.0925 0.516 0.0567 0.321 0.113 0.2
15 9.5 12.5 60 3.5×6×4.5 (2500) 1.2
5.39 11.1 0.0326 0.224 0.0203 0.143 0.0654 0.12
4000 12.5 25.2 0.146 0.778 0.0896 0.481 0.194 0.3
20 11 15.5 60 6×9.5×8.5 (3000) 7.16 14.4 0.053 0.332 0.0329 0.21 0.11 0.2 2.1
4000 20.3 39.5 0.286 1.52 0.175 0.942 0.355 0.4
23 12.5 18 60 7×11×9 (3000) 11.7 22.5 0.103 0.649 0.0642 0.41 0.201 0.3 2.7
4000 30 56.8 0.494 2.55 0.303 1.57 0.611 0.8
28 16 23 80 7×11×9 (3000) 17.2 32.5 0.163 1.08 0.102 0.692 0.352 0.5 4.3
4000 41.7 77.2 0.74 4.01 0.454 2.49 1.01 1.2
34 18 27.5 80 9×14×12 6.4
(3000) 23.8 44.1 0.259 1.68 0.161 1.07 0.576 0.8
45 20.5 35.5 105 11×17.5×14 3500 55.3 101 1.1 5.96 0.679 3.69 1.77 2.2 11.3
48 26 38 120 14×20×17 3000 89.1 157 2.27 11.3 1.39 6.98 2.87 3.6 12.8
70 28 47 150 18×26×22 3000 156 266 2.54 13.2 2.18 11.3 4.14 7 22.8
85 35.5 65.5 180 18×26×22 3000 120 224 2.54 15.1 1.25 7.47 5.74 10.1 34.9
100 39 70.3 210 22×32×25 3000 148 283 3.95 20.9 1.95 10.3 8.55 14.1 46.4
114 45.5 65 230 26×39×30 3000 279 377 5.83 32.9 2.87 16.2 13.7 — —
144 53 77 250 33×48×36 3000 411 537 9.98 55.8 4.92 27.5 24.3 — —
Note1) Symbol M indicates that stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls. Those models marked with this sym-
bol are therefore highly resistant to corrosion and environment.
Those model numbers including and greater than SR85T are semi-standard models. If desiring these models, contact
THK.
Models SR85T and SR100T are equipped with grease nipple on the side face of the LM block.
Note2) The LM rail mounting hole of SR15 is drilled for M3 screws as standard (without Y indication). If you order the hole to
be drilled for M4 screws (with Y indication), contact THK. When replacing this model with model SSR, pay attention to
the dimension of the rail mounting hole.

Models SR-TB, SR-TBM, SR-SB and SR-SBM
W
B
T1 T
（K）
M
H3
W2 W1

Grease
nipple
M W L B C H L1 T T1 K N E H3
SR 15TB/TBM 57 26 39.5
24 52 41 4.5 6.1 7 19.5 6 5.5 PB1021B 4.5
SR 15SB/SBM 40.4 — 22.9
SR 20TB/TBM 66.2 32 46.7
28 59 49 5.5 8 9 22 6 12 B-M6F 6
SR 20SB/SBM 47.3 — 27.8
SR 25TBY/TBMY 83 35 59
33 73 60 7 9.1 10 26 7 12 B-M6F 7
SR 25SBY/SBMY 59.2 — 35.2
SR 30TB/TBM 96.8 40 69.3
42 90 72 9 8.7 10 32.5 8 12 B-M6F 9.5
SR 30SB/SBM 67.9 — 40.4
SR 35TB/TBM 111 50 79
48 100 82 9 11.2 13 36.5 8.5 12 B-M6F 11.5
SR 35SB/SBM 77.6 — 45.7
SR 45TB 60 120 126 100 60 11 90.5 12.8 15 47.5 11.5 16 B-PT1/8 12.5
SR 55TB 68 140 156 116 75 14 117 15.3 17 54.5 12 16 B-PT1/8 13.5
Model number coding
SR25 TB 2 UU C1 +1200L Y H T -Ⅱ
number LM block accessory Applied to jointed use No. of rails used
symbol (*1) only 25 on the same plane (*4)
rail Medium preload (C0) Ultra precision grade (UP)
B-88
2-φ H 4-φ H
（E）（E）
LM Guide
L L
L1 L1
C
φ d2 φ d2
N N
h h
M1 M1
φ d1 φ d1
F F
Model SR-SB Model SR-TB
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM
Width Height Pitch Length＊ C C0 LM rail
block
W2 M1 F d1×d2×h Max kN kN blocks block blocks block kg kg/m
± 0.05 block
2500 9.51 19.3 0.0925 0.516 0.0567 0.321 0.113 0.2
15 18.5 12.5 60 3.5×6×4.5 1.2
(1240) 5.39 11.1 0.0326 0.224 0.0203 0.143 0.0654 0.15
3000 12.5 25.2 0.146 0.778 0.0896 0.481 0.194 0.4
20 19.5 15.5 60 6×9.5×8.5 2.1
(1480) 7.16 14.4 0.053 0.332 0.0329 0.21 0.11 0.3
3000 20.3 39.5 0.286 1.52 0.175 0.942 0.355 0.6
23 25 18 60 7×11×9 2.7
(2020) 11.7 22.5 0.103 0.649 0.0642 0.41 0.201 0.4
3000 30 56.8 0.494 2.55 0.303 1.57 0.611 1.1
28 31 23 80 7×11×9 4.3
(2520) 17.2 32.5 0.163 1.08 0.102 0.692 0.352 0.8
3000 41.7 77.2 0.74 4.01 0.454 2.49 1.01 1.5
34 33 27.5 80 9×14×12 6.4
(2520) 23.8 44.1 0.259 1.68 0.161 1.07 0.576 1
45 37.5 35.5 105 11×17.5×14 3000 55.3 101 1.1 5.96 0.679 3.69 1.77 2.5 11.3
48 46 38 120 14×20×17 3000 89.1 157 2.27 11.3 1.39 6.98 2.87 4.2 12.8
Note1) The maximum length under “Length＊” indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See B-90.)
Note2) The LM rail mounting hole of SR15 is drilled for M3 screws as standard (without Y indication). If you order the hole to
be drilled for M4 screws (with Y indication), contact THK. When replacing this model with model SSR, pay attention to
the dimension of the rail mounting hole.

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model SR variations. If the maxi-
G F F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model SR Unit: mm
Model No. SR 15 SR 20 SR 25 SR 30 SR 35 SR 45 SR 55 SR 70 SR 85 SR 100 SR 120 SR 150
160 220 220 280 280 570 780 1270 1520 1550 1700 1600
220 280 280 360 360 675 900 1570 2060 1970 2390 2100
280 340 340 440 440 780 1020 2020 2600 2600
340 400 400 520 520 885 1140 2620
400 460 460 600 600 990 1260
460 520 520 680 680 1095 1380
520 580 580 760 760 1200 1500
580 640 640 840 840 1305 1740
640 700 700 920 920 1410 1860
700 760 760 1000 1000 1515 1980
760 820 820 1080 1080 1725 2100
820 940 940 1160 1160 1830 2220
940 1000 1000 1240 1240 1935 2340
1000 1060 1060 1320 1320 2040 2460
1060 1120 1120 1400 1400 2145 2580
1120 1180 1180 1480 1480 2250 2700
1180 1240 1240 1640 1640 2355 2820
1240 1300 1300 1720 1720 2460 2940
LM rail standard 1800 1800 2565
1300 1360 1360
length (LO) 1880 1880 2670
1360 1420 1420
1420 1480 1480 1960 1960 2775
1480 1540 1540 2040 2040 2880
1540 1600 1600 2120 2120 2985
1660 1660 2200 2200
1720 1720 2280 2280
1780 1780 2360 2360
1840 1840 2440 2440
1900 1900 2520 2520
1960 1960 2600 2600
2020 2020 2680 2680
2080 2080 2760 2760
2140 2140 2840 2840
2200 2920 2920
2260
2320
2380
2440
Standard pitch F 60 60 60 80 80 105 120 150 180 210 230 250
G 20 20 20 20 20 22.5 30 35 40 40 45 50
Max length 2500 3000 3000 3000 3000
(1240) (1480) (2020) (2520) (2520) 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
Note3) Those model numbers including and greater than SR85T are semi-standard models. If desiring these models, contact
THK.
B-90
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model SR
The model SR variations include a type with its LM rail bottom tapped. This type is useful when desir-
ing to mount the LM Guide from the bottom of the base and when desiring to increase the contamina-
tion protection.
LM Guide
Clearance
l1
S1
(1) A tapped-hole LM rail type is available only Table2 Dimensions of the LM Rail Tap
for high accuracy or lower grades. Unit: mm
(2) Determine the bolt length so that a clear- Model No. S1 Effective tap depth l 1
ance of 2 to 5 mm is secured between the SR 15 M5 7
bolt end and the bottom of the tap (effective SR 20 M6 9
SR 25 M6 10
tap depth). (See figure above.)
SR 30 M8 14
(3) For standard pitches of the taps, see SR 35 M8 16
Table1 on B-90. SR 45 M12 20
SR 55 M14 22
Model number coding
SR30 W2UU +1000LH K

Symbol for
B-91
B-92
NR/NRS
LM Guide
(Separate)
Models NR-R and NR-LR.................. B-94 Structure and features....................... A-187
Models NRS-R and NRS-LR............. B-96 Types and Features .......................... A-188
Models NR-A and NR-LA .................. B-98 Characteristics of Models NR and NRS .. A-190
Models NRS-A and NRS-LA ............. B-100 Rated Loads in All Directions ............ A-192
Models NR-B and NR-LB .................. B-102 Equivalent Load ................................ A-192
Models NRS-B and NRS-LB ............. B-104 Service Life ....................................... A-100
Standard Length and Maximum Length Accuracy Standards .......................... A-119
of the LM Rail................................... B-106 Shoulder Height of the Mounting Base
and the Corner Radius ...................... A-327
Options............................................. B-223 Error Allowance in the Parallelism
The LM Block Dimension (Dimension L) between Two Rails ................ A-333/A-334
with LaCS and Seals Attached ........... B-226 Error Allowance in Vertical Level
Incremental dimension with grease nipple between Two Rails ................ A-336/A-337
Simplified Bellows JN Dedicated
for Models NR/NRS......................... B-243
Cap C ................................................ B-250
Lubrication Adapter ........................... B-254
End Piece EP .................................... B-255

the Products".
B-93
Models NR-R and NR-LR
4-S×l
W （E） L ＊＊
4-φ D0
B L1 e0
C
f0
φ d2
T N
（K） h
M
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Model NR-R
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions
Height Width Length

Model No.
Grease
nipple
NR 25XR 82.8 35 62.4

31 50 32 M6×8 9.7 25.5 7 7 12 4 3.9 B-M6F 5.5
NR 25XLR 102 50 81.6
NR 30R 98 40 70.9
38 60 40 M8×10 9.7 31 7 7 12 5 3.9 B-M6F 7
NR 30LR 120.5 60 93.4
NR 35R 109.5 50 77.9
44 70 50 M8×12 11.7 35 8 8 12 6 5.2 B-M6F 9
NR 35LR 135 72 103.4
NR 45R 139 60 105
52 86 60 M10×17 14.7 40.5 10 8 16 7 5.2 B-PT1/8 11.5
NR 45LR 171 80 137
NR 55R 162.8 75 123.6
63 100 65 M12×18 17.5 49 11 10 16 8 5.2 B-PT1/8 14
NR 55LR 200 95 160.8
NR 65R 185.6 70 143.6
75 126 76 M16×20 21.5 60 16 15 16 9 8.2 B-PT1/8 15
NR 65LR 245.6 110 203.6
NR 75R 218 80 170.2
83 145 95 M18×25 25.3 68 18 17 16 9 8.2 B-PT1/8 15
NR 75LR 274 130 226.2
NR 85R 246.7 80 194.9
90 156 100 M18×25 27.3 73 20 20 16 10 8.2 B-PT1/8 17
NR 85LR 302.8 140 251
NR 100R 288.8 150 223.4
105 200 130 M18×27 34.3 85 23 23 10 12 8.2 B-PT1/4 20
NR 100LR 328.8 200 263.4
Model number coding
NR35 LR 2 QZ KKHH C0 +1240L P T Z -Ⅱ

With plate cover or
No. of LM blocks Radial clearance symbol (*2) steel tape (*4)
B-94
6-S×l
（E） L
e0
＊＊
4-φ D0
L1
C
f0
φ d2
N
h
LM Guide
M1
φ d1
F
Model NR-LR
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
W1
1 Double 1 Double 1
-0.05
33 84.6 0.771 3.86 0.469 2.33 0.91 0.43
25 12.5 17 40 6×9.5×8.5 2500 3.1
44 113 1.26 6.29 0.775 3.82 1.21 0.55
48.7 122 1.26 6.63 0.778 4.05 1.47 0.74
28 16 21 80 7×11×9 3000 4.3
64.9 162 2.18 10.6 1.33 6.47 1.95 1
63.1 155 1.75 9.47 1.08 5.8 2.24 1.1
34 18 24.5 80 9×14×12 3000 6.2
85.7 210 3.14 15.5 1.92 9.43 3.03 1.4
96 231 3.37 17.7 2.07 10.8 4.45 2
45 20.5 29 105 14×20×17 3090 9.8
126 303 5.93 28 3.59 16.9 5.82 2.8
131 310 5.39 27.8 3.3 16.9 6.98 3.3
53 23.5 36.5 120 16×23×20 3060 14.5
170 402 8.87 43.8 5.41 26.6 9.05 4.3
189 436 8.76 44.7 5.39 27.3 11.6 6
63 31.5 43 150 18×26×22 3000 20.3
260 600 16.8 79.9 10.1 48 15.9 8.7
271 610 14.4 73.3 8.91 44.7 19.3 8.7
75 35 44 150 22×32×26 3000 24.6
355 800 25.4 118 15.4 71.4 25.2 11.6
336 751 20.3 102 12.4 62.6 26.8 12.3
85 35.5 48 180 24×35×28 3000 30.5
435 972 34.7 160 21 96.2 34.6 15.8
479 1040 34 167 20.7 101 43.4 21.8
100 50 57 210 26×39×32 2500 42.6
599 1300 47.3 238 29.2 146 54.6 26.1
＊＊

Models NRS-R and NRS-LR
4-S×l
W （E） L ＊＊
4-φ D0
B L1 e0
C
f0
φ d2
T N
（K） h
M
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Model NRS-R
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions
Height Width Length

Model No.
Grease
nipple
NRS 25XR 82.8 35 62.4

31 50 32 M6×8 9.7 25.5 7 7 12 4 3.9 B-M6F 5.5
NRS 25XLR 102 50 81.6
NRS 30R 98 40 70.9
38 60 40 M8×10 9.7 31 7 7 12 5 3.9 B-M6F 7
NRS 30LR 120.5 60 93.4
NRS 35R 109.5 50 77.9
44 70 50 M8×12 11.7 35 8 8 12 6 5.2 B-M6F 9
NRS 35LR 135 72 103.4
NRS 45R 139 60 105
52 86 60 M10×17 14.7 40.5 10 8 16 7 5.2 B-PT1/8 11.5
NRS 45LR 171 80 137
NRS 55R 162.8 75 123.6
63 100 65 M12×18 17.5 49 11 10 16 8 5.2 B-PT1/8 14
NRS 55LR 200 95 160.8
NRS 65R 185.6 70 143.6
75 126 76 M16×20 21.5 60 16 15 16 9 8.2 B-PT1/8 15
NRS 65LR 245.6 110 203.6
NRS 75R 218 80 170.2
83 145 95 M18×25 25.3 68 18 17 16 9 8.2 B-PT1/8 15
NRS 75LR 274 130 226.2
NRS 85R 246.7 80 194.9
90 156 100 M18×25 27.3 73 20 20 16 10 8.2 B-PT1/8 17
NRS 85LR 302.8 140 251
NRS 100R 288.8 150 223.4
105 200 130 M18×27 34.3 85 23 23 10 12 8.2 B-PT1/4 20
NRS 100LR 328.8 200 263.4
Model number coding
NRS45 LR 2 QZ ZZHH C0 +1200L P T Z -Ⅱ

accessory (in mm) LM rail No. of rails used
symbol (*1)
With plate cover or plane (*5)
Normal (No symbol)/Light preload (C1)
used on the same rail Medium preload (C0) Accuracy symbol (*3)
B-96
6-S×l
（E） L
L1 e0 4-φ D0
＊＊
C
f0
φ d2
N
LM Guide
h
M1
φ d1
F
Model NRS-LR
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
W1
1 Double 1 Double 1
-0.05
25.9 59.8 0.568 2.84 0.568 2.84 0.633 0.43
25 12.5 17 40 6×9.5×8.5 3000 3.1
34.5 79.7 0.926 4.6 0.926 4.6 0.846 0.55
38.2 86.1 0.926 4.86 0.926 4.86 1.02 0.74
28 16 21 80 7×11×9 3000 4.3
51 115 1.6 7.83 1.6 7.83 1.36 1
49.5 109 1.28 6.92 1.28 6.92 1.54 1.1
34 18 24.5 80 9×14×12 3000 6.2
67.2 148 2.29 11.3 2.29 11.3 2.09 1.4
75.3 163 2.47 13 2.47 13 3.09 2
45 20.5 29 105 14×20×17 3000 9.8
98.8 214 4.34 20.5 4.34 20.5 4.06 2.8
103 220 3.97 20.5 3.97 20.5 4.86 3.3
53 23.5 36.5 120 16×23×20 3000 14.5
133 284 6.49 32 6.49 32 6.28 4.3
148 309 6.45 32.9 6.45 32.9 8.11 6
63 31.5 43 150 18×26×22 3000 20.3
204 425 12.3 58.6 12.3 58.6 11.1 8.7
212 431 10.6 53.8 10.6 53.8 13.4 8.7
75 35 44 150 22×32×26 3000 24.6
278 566 18.6 87 18.6 87 17.6 11.6
264 531 14.9 75.3 14.9 75.3 18.7 12.3
85 35.5 48 180 24×35×28 3000 30.5
342 687 25.4 117 25.4 117 24.2 15.8
376 737 25.1 123 25.1 123 30.4 21.8
100 50 57 210 26×39×32 3000 42.6
470 920 34.6 174 34.6 174 38.1 26.1

Models NR-A and NR-LA
4-S
W （E） L ＊＊
4-φ D0
B L1 e0
C f0
φ d2
N
T1 T h
M （K）
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Model NR-A
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions
Height Width Length

Model No.
Grease
nipple
M W L B C S×l L1 T T1 K N f0 E e0 D0 H3
NR 25XA 82.8 62.4

31 72 59 45 M8×16 14.8 16 25.5 7 7 12 4 3.9 B-M6F 5.5
NR 25XLA 102 81.6
NR 30A 98 70.9
38 90 72 52 M10×18 16.8 18 31 7 7 12 5 3.9 B-M6F 7
NR 30LA 120.5 93.4
NR 35A 109.5 77.9
44 100 82 62 M10×20 18.8 20 35 8 8 12 6 5.2 B-M6F 9
NR 35LA 135 103.4
NR 45A 139 105
52 120 100 80 M12×22 20.5 22 40.5 10 8 16 7 5.2 B-PT1/8 11.5
NR 45LA 171 137
NR 55A 162.8 123.6
63 140 116 95 M14×24 22.5 24 49 11 10 16 8 5.2 B-PT1/8 14
NR 55LA 200 160.8
NR 65A 185.6 143.6
75 170 142 110 M16×28 26 28 60 16 15 16 9 8.2 B-PT1/8 15
NR 65LA 245.6 203.6
NR 75A 218 170.2
83 195 165 130 M18×30 28 30 68 18 17 16 9 8.2 B-PT1/8 15
NR 75LA 274 226.2
NR 85A 246.7 194.9
90 215 185 140 M20×34 32 34 73 20 20 16 10 8.2 B-PT1/8 17
NR 85LA 302.8 251
NR 100A 288.8 150 223.4
105 260 220 M20×38 35 38 85 23 23 10 12 8.2 B-PT1/4 20
NR 100LA 328.8 200 263.4
Model number coding
NR35 A 2 QZ KKHH C0 +1400L P T Z -Ⅱ

number LM block Lubricator accessory (in mm)
symbol (*1)
B-98
6-S
（E） L
e0 4-φ D0
＊＊
L1
C
f0
φ d2
N
h
LM Guide
M1
φ d1
F
Model NR-LA
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
W1
1 Double 1 Double 1
-0.05
33 84.6 0.771 3.86 0.469 2.33 0.91 0.58
25 23.5 17 40 6×9.5×8.5 3000 3.1
44 113 1.26 6.29 0.775 3.82 1.21 0.77
48.7 122 1.26 6.63 0.778 4.05 1.47 1.1
28 31 21 80 7×11×9 3000 4.3
64.9 162 2.18 10.6 1.33 6.47 1.95 1.4
63.1 155 1.75 9.47 1.08 5.8 2.24 1.5
34 33 24.5 80 9×14×12 3000 6.2
85.7 210 3.14 15.5 1.92 9.43 3.03 1.9
96 231 3.37 17.7 2.07 10.8 4.45 2.7
45 37.5 29 105 14×20×17 3000 9.8
126 303 5.93 28 3.59 16.9 5.82 3.5
131 310 5.39 27.8 3.3 16.9 6.98 4.4
53 43.5 36.5 120 16×23×20 3000 14.5
170 402 8.87 43.8 5.41 26.6 9.05 5.7
189 436 8.76 44.7 5.39 27.3 11.6 7.6
63 53.5 43 150 18×26×22 3000 20.3
260 600 16.8 79.9 10.1 48 15.9 10.9
271 610 14.4 73.3 8.91 44.7 19.3 11.3
75 60 44 150 22×32×26 3000 24.6
355 800 25.4 118 15.4 71.4 25.2 15
336 751 20.3 102 12.4 62.6 26.8 16.2
85 65 48 180 24×35×28 3000 30.5
435 972 34.7 160 21 96.2 34.6 20.7
479 1040 34 167 20.7 101 43.4 26.7
100 80 57 210 26×39×32 3000 42.6
599 1300 47.3 238 29.2 146 54.6 31.2

Models NRS-A and NRS-LA
4-S
W （E） L
L1 e0 4-φ D0
＊＊
B
C
f0
φ d2
N
T1 T h
M （K）
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Model NRS-A
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions
Height Width Length

Model No.
Grease
nipple
M W L B C S×l L1 T T1 K N f0 E e0 D0 H3
NRS 25XA 82.8 62.4

31 72 59 45 M8×16 14.8 16 25.5 7 7 12 4 3.9 B-M6F 5.5
NRS 25XLA 102 81.6
NRS 30A 98 70.9
38 90 72 52 M10×18 16.8 18 31 7 7 12 5 3.9 B-M6F 7
NRS 30LA 120.5 93.4
NRS 35A 109.5 77.9
44 100 82 62 M10×20 18.8 20 35 8 8 12 6 5.2 B-M6F 9
NRS 35LA 135 103.4
NRS 45A 139 105
52 120 100 80 M12×22 20.5 22 40.5 10 8 16 7 5.2 B-PT1/8 11.5
NRS 45LA 171 137
NRS 55A 162.8 123.6
63 140 116 95 M14×24 22.5 24 49 11 10 16 8 5.2 B-PT1/8 14
NRS 55LA 200 160.8
NRS 65A 185.6 143.6
75 170 142 110 M16×28 26 28 60 16 15 16 9 8.2 B-PT1/8 15
NRS 65LA 245.6 203.6
NRS 75A 218 170.2
83 195 165 130 M18×30 28 30 68 18 17 16 9 8.2 B-PT1/8 15
NRS 75LA 274 226.2
NRS 85A 246.7 194.9
90 215 185 140 M20×34 32 34 73 20 20 16 10 8.2 B-PT1/8 17
NRS 85LA 302.8 251
NRS 100A 288.8 150 223.4
105 260 220 M20×38 35 38 85 23 23 10 12 8.2 B-PT1/4 20
NRS 100LA 328.8 200 263.4
Model number coding
NRS45 LA 2 QZ SSHH C0 +2040L P T Z -Ⅱ

With plate cover or
B-100
6-S
（E） L
e0
＊＊
4-φ D0
L1
C
f0
φ d2
N
LM Guide
h
M1
φ d1
F
Model NRS-LA
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
W1
1 Double 1 Double 1
-0.05
25.9 59.8 0.568 2.84 0.568 2.84 0.633 0.58
25 23.5 17 40 6×9.5×8.5 3000 3.1
34.5 79.7 0.926 4.6 0.926 4.6 0.846 0.77
38.2 86.1 0.926 4.86 0.926 4.86 1.02 1.1
28 31 21 80 7×11×9 3000 4.3
51 115 1.6 7.83 1.6 7.83 1.36 1.4
49.5 109 1.28 6.92 1.28 6.92 1.54 1.5
34 33 24.5 80 9×14×12 3000 6.2
67.2 148 2.29 11.3 2.29 11.3 2.09 1.9
75.3 163 2.47 13 2.47 13 3.09 2.7
45 37.5 29 105 14×20×17 3000 9.8
98.8 214 4.34 20.5 4.34 20.5 4.06 3.5
103 220 3.97 20.5 3.97 20.5 4.86 4.4
53 43.5 36.5 120 16×23×20 3000 14.5
133 284 6.49 32 6.49 32 6.28 5.7
148 309 6.45 32.9 6.45 32.9 8.11 7.6
63 53.5 43 150 18×26×22 3000 20.3
204 425 12.3 58.6 12.3 58.6 11.1 10.9
212 431 10.6 53.8 10.6 53.8 13.4 11.3
75 60 44 150 22×32×26 3000 24.6
278 566 18.6 87 18.6 87 17.6 15
264 531 14.9 75.3 14.9 75.3 18.7 16.2
85 65 48 180 24×35×28 3000 30.5
342 687 25.4 117 25.4 117 24.2 20.7
376 737 25.1 123 25.1 123 30.4 26.7
100 80 57 210 26×39×32 3000 42.6
470 920 34.6 174 34.6 174 38.1 31.2

Models NR-B and NR-LB
4-φ H
W （E） L
e0
＊＊
4-φ D0
B L1
C f0
φ d2
N
t T T1 h
M （K）
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Model NR-B
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions
Height Width Length

Model No.
Grease
nipple
M W L B C H L1 t T T1 K N f0 E e0 D0 H3
NR 25XB 82.8 62.4

31 72 59 45 7 16 14.8 12 25.5 7 7 12 4 3.9 B-M6F 5.5
NR 25XLB 102 81.6
NR 30B 98 70.9
38 90 72 52 9 18 16.8 14 31 7 7 12 5 3.9 B-M6F 7
NR 30LB 120.5 93.4
NR 35B 109.5 77.9
44 100 82 62 9 20 18.8 16 35 8 8 12 6 5.2 B-M6F 9
NR 35LB 135 103.4
NR 45B 139 105
52 120 100 80 11 22 20.5 20 40.5 10 8 16 7 5.2 B-PT1/8 11.5
NR 45LB 171 137
NR 55B 162.8 123.6
63 140 116 95 14 24 22.5 22 49 11 10 16 8 5.2 B-PT1/8 14
NR 55LB 200 160.8
NR 65B 185.6 143.6
75 170 142 110 16 28 26 25 60 16 15 16 9 8.2 B-PT1/8 15
NR 65LB 245.6 203.6
NR 75B 218 170.2
83 195 165 130 18 30 28 26 68 18 17 16 9 8.2 B-PT1/8 15
NR 75LB 274 226.2
NR 85B 246.7 194.9
90 215 185 140 18 34 32 28 73 20 20 16 10 8.2 B-PT1/8 17
NR 85LB 302.8 251
NR 100B 288.8 150 223.4
105 260 220 20 38 35 32 85 23 23 10 12 8.2 B-PT1/4 20
NR 100LB 328.8 200 263.4
Model number coding
NR35 B 2 QZ DDHH C0 +1080L P T Z -Ⅱ

With plate cover or
B-102
6-φ H
（E） L
e0 4-φ D0
＊＊
L1
C
f0
φ d2
N
LM Guide
h
M1
φ d1
F
Model NR-LB
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
W1
1 Double 1 Double 1
-0.05
33 84.6 0.771 3.86 0.469 2.33 0.91 0.58
25 23.5 17 40 6×9.5×8.5 3000 3.1
44 113 1.26 6.29 0.775 3.82 1.21 0.77
48.7 122 1.26 6.63 0.778 4.05 1.47 1.1
28 31 21 80 7×11×9 3000 4.3
64.9 162 2.18 10.6 1.33 6.47 1.95 1.4
63.1 155 1.75 9.47 1.08 5.8 2.24 1.5
34 33 24.5 80 9×14×12 3000 6.2
85.7 210 3.14 15.5 1.92 9.43 3.03 1.9
96 231 3.37 17.7 2.07 10.8 4.45 2.7
45 37.5 29 105 14×20×17 3000 9.8
126 303 5.93 28 3.59 16.9 5.82 3.5
131 310 5.39 27.8 3.3 16.9 6.98 4.4
53 43.5 36.5 120 16×23×20 3000 14.5
170 402 8.87 43.8 5.41 26.6 9.05 5.7
189 436 8.76 44.7 5.39 27.3 11.6 7.6
63 53.5 43 150 18×26×22 3000 20.3
260 600 16.8 79.9 10.1 48 15.9 10.9
271 610 14.4 73.3 8.91 44.7 19.3 11.3
75 60 44 150 22×32×26 3000 24.6
355 800 25.4 118 15.4 71.4 25.2 15
336 751 20.3 102 12.4 62.6 26.8 16.2
85 65 48 180 24×35×28 3000 30.5
435 972 34.7 160 21 96.2 34.6 20.7
479 1040 34 167 20.7 101 43.4 26.7
100 80 57 210 26×39×32 3000 42.6
599 1300 47.3 238 29.2 146 54.6 31.2
＊＊

Models NRS-B and NRS-LB
4-φ H
W （E） L ＊＊
4-φ D0
B L1 e0
C f0
φ d2
N
t T T1 h
M （K）
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Model NRS-B
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions
Height Width Length

Model No.
Grease
nipple
M W L B C H L1 t T T1 K N f0 E e0 D0 H3
NRS 25XB 82.8 62.4

31 72 59 45 7 16 14.8 12 25.5 7 7 12 4 3.9 B-M6F 5.5
NRS 25XLB 102 81.6
NRS 30B 98 70.9
38 90 72 52 9 18 16.8 14 31 7 7 12 5 3.9 B-M6F 7
NRS 30LB 120.5 93.4
NRS 35B 109.5 77.9
44 100 82 62 9 20 18.8 16 35 8 8 12 6 5.2 B-M6F 9
NRS 35LB 135 103.4
NRS 45B 139 105
52 120 100 80 11 22 20.5 20 40.5 10 8 16 7 5.2 B-PT1/8 11.5
NRS 45LB 171 137
NRS 55B 162.8 123.6
63 140 116 95 14 24 22.5 22 49 11 10 16 8 5.2 B-PT1/8 14
NRS 55LB 200 160.8
NRS 65B 185.6 143.6
75 170 142 110 16 28 26 25 60 16 15 16 9 8.2 B-PT1/8 15
NRS 65LB 245.6 203.6
NRS 75B 218 170.2
83 195 165 130 18 30 28 26 68 18 17 16 9 8.2 B-PT1/8 15
NRS 75LB 274 226.2
NRS 85B 246.7 194.9
90 215 185 140 18 34 32 28 73 20 20 16 10 8.2 B-PT1/8 17
NRS 85LB 302.8 251
NRS 100B 288.8 150 223.4
105 260 220 20 38 35 32 85 23 23 10 12 8.2 B-PT1/4 20
NRS 100LB 328.8 200 263.4
Model number coding
NRS45 B 2 QZ KKHH C0 +2040L P T Z -Ⅱ

number LM block Lubricator accessory (in mm)
symbol (*1)
B-104
6-φ H
（E） L
e0
＊＊
4-φ D0
L1
C
f0
φ d2
N
LM Guide
h
M1
φ d1
F
Model NRS-LB
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
W1
1 Double 1 Double 1
-0.05
25.9 59.8 0.568 2.84 0.568 2.84 0.633 0.58
25 23.5 17 40 6×9.5×8.5 3000 3.1
34.5 79.7 0.926 4.6 0.926 4.6 0.846 0.77
38.2 86.1 0.926 4.86 0.926 4.86 1.02 1.1
28 31 21 80 7×11×9 3000 4.3
51 115 1.6 7.83 1.6 7.83 1.36 1.4
49.5 109 1.28 6.92 1.28 6.92 1.54 1.5
34 33 24.5 80 9×14×12 3000 6.2
67.2 148 2.29 11.3 2.29 11.3 2.09 1.9
75.3 163 2.47 13 2.47 13 3.09 2.7
45 37.5 29 105 14×20×17 3000 9.8
98.8 214 4.34 20.5 4.34 20.5 4.06 3.5
103 220 3.97 20.5 3.97 20.5 4.86 4.4
53 43.5 36.5 120 16×23×20 3000 14.5
133 284 6.49 32 6.49 32 6.28 5.7
148 309 6.45 32.9 6.45 32.9 8.11 7.6
63 53.5 43 150 18×26×22 3000 20.3
204 425 12.3 58.6 12.3 58.6 11.1 10.9
212 431 10.6 53.8 10.6 53.8 13.4 11.3
75 60 44 150 22×32×26 3000 24.6
278 566 18.6 87 18.6 87 17.6 15
264 531 14.9 75.3 14.9 75.3 18.7 16.2
85 65 48 180 24×35×28 3000 30.5
342 687 25.4 117 25.4 117 24.2 20.7
376 737 25.1 123 25.1 123 30.4 26.7
100 80 57 210 26×39×32 3000 42.6
470 920 34.6 174 34.6 174 38.1 31.2
＊＊

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of models NR/NRS variations. If the
details.
G F F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Models NR/NRS Unit: mm
Model No. NR/NRS25X NR/NRS30 NR/NRS35 NR/NRS45 NR/NRS55 NR/NRS65 NR/NRS75 NR/NRS85 NR/NRS100
230 280 280 570 780 1270 1280 1530 1340
270 360 360 675 900 1570 1580 1890 1760
350 440 440 780 1020 2020 2030 2250 2180
390 520 520 885 1140 2620 2630 2610 2600
470 600 600 990 1260
510 680 680 1095 1380
590 760 760 1200 1500
630 840 840 1305 1620
710 920 920 1410 1740
750 1000 1000 1515 1860
830 1080 1080 1620 1980
950 1160 1160 1725 2100
990 1240 1240 1830 2220
1070 1320 1320 1935 2340
1110 1400 1400 2040 2460
LM rail 1190 1480 1480 2145 2580
standard
1230 1560 1560 2250 2700
length (LO)
1310 1640 1640 2355 2820
1350 1720 1720 2460 2940
1430 1800 1800 2565
1470 1880 1880 2670
1550 1960 1960 2775
1590 2040 2040 2880
1710 2200 2200 2985
1830 2360 2360
1950 2520 2520
2070 2680 2680
2190 2840 2840
2310 3000 3000
2430
2470
Standard pitch
40 80 80 105 120 150 150 180 210
F
G 15 20 20 22.5 30 35 40 45 40
Max length 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
B-106
HRW
LM Guide
(Separate)
Models HRW-CA and HRW-CAM ..... B-108 Structure and features....................... A-195
Models HRW-CR, HRW-CRM and HRW-LRM B-110 Types and Features .......................... A-196
Dedicated Bellows JHRW for Model HRW.. B-244 Error Allowance in the Parallelism
Error Allowance in Vertical Level
between Two Rails ........................ A-337

the Products".
B-107
Models HRW-CA and HRW-CAM
W
6-S
(φ H through) B
T1 T
M （K）
H3
W3
W2 W1
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions

Grease
nipple
M W L B C H S L1 T T1 K N E H3
HRW 17CA
17 60 50.8 53 26 3.3 M4 33.6 5.5 6 14.5 4 2 PB107 2.5
HRW 17CAM
HRW 21CA
21 68 58.8 60 29 4.4 M5 40 7.3 8 18 4.5 12 B-M6F 3
HRW 21CAM
HRW 27CA
27 80 72.8 70 40 5.3 M6 51.8 9.5 10 24 6 12 B-M6F 3
HRW 27CAM
HRW 35CA
35 120 106.6 107 60 6.8 M8 77.6 13 14 31 8 12 B-M6F 4
HRW 35CAM
HRW 50CA 50 162 140.5 144 80 8.6 M10 103.5 16.5 18 46.6 14 16 B-PT1/8 3.4
HRW 60CA 60 200 158.9 180 80 10.5 M12 117.5 23.5 25 53.5 15 16 B-PT1/8 6.5
Model number coding
HRW35 CA 2 UU C1 M +1000L P T M
Model Type of Contamination Stainless steel LM rail length Symbol
protection Stainless steel
number LM block LM block (in mm) for LM rail LM rail
accessory jointed use
symbol (*1)
B-108
（E） L
L1
LM Guide
C
φ d2
N
h
M1
φ d1
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
1900
33 13.5 18 9 40 4.5×7.5×5.3 4.31 8.14 0.0417 0.244 0.0417 0.244 0.128 0.15 2.1
(800)
1900
37 15.5 22 11 50 4.5×7.5×5.3 6.18 11.5 0.0701 0.398 0.0701 0.398 0.194 0.25 2.9
(1000)
3000
42 19 24 15 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 11.5 20.4 0.156 0.874 0.156 0.874 0.398 0.5 4.3
(1200)
69 25.5 40 19 80 7×11×9 3000 27.2 45.9 0.529 2.89 0.529 2.89 1.49 1.4 9.9
90 36 60 24 80 9×14×12 3000 50.2 81.5 1.25 6.74 1.25 6.74 3.46 4 14.6
120 40 80 31 105 11×17.5×14 3000 63.8 102 1.76 12.3 1.76 12.3 5.76 5.7 27.8
Note) The maximum length under “Length ” indicates the standard maximum length of an LM rail. (See B-112.)
＊

Models HRW-CR, HRW-CRM and HRW-LRM
W L
4-S×l
B L1
φd C
N φ d2
T h
M （K）
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Models HRW12 and 14LRM
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions

Greas- Grease
ing hole nipple
HRW 12LRM 12 30 37 21 12 M3×3.5 27 4 10 2.8 — 2.2 — 2

HRW 14LRM 14 40 45.5 28 15 M3×4 32.9 5 12 3.3 — 2.2 — 2
HRW 17CR
17 50 50.8 29 15 M4×5 33.6 6 14.5 4 2 — PB107 2.5
HRW 17CRM
HRW 21CR
21 54 58.8 31 19 M5×6 40 8 18 4.5 12 — B-M6F 3
HRW 21CRM
HRW 27CR
27 62 72.8 46 32 M6×6 51.8 10 24 6 12 — B-M6F 3
HRW 27CRM
HRW 35CR
35 100 106.6 76 50 M8×8 77.6 14 31 8 12 — B-M6F 4
HRW 35CRM
HRW 50 CR 50 130 140.5 100 65 M10×15 103.5 18 46.6 14 16 — B-PT1/8 3.4
Model number coding
HRW27 CR 2 UU C1 M +820L P T M
Model Type of Contamination Stainless LM rail length Symbol
protection Stainless steel
number LM block steel (in mm) for LM rail LM rail
accessory LM block jointed use
symbol (*1)
B-110
W
4-S×l B
T
M （K）
H3
W3
W2 W1
LM Guide
Models HRW17 and 21CR/CRM
（E） L
W
6-S×l B L1
C
φ d2
T N
M （K）
h
M1
H3
W3 φ d1
W2 W1 F
Models HRW27 to 50CR/CRM

Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
W1 1 Double 1 Double 1 kg/m

W2 W3 M1 F d1×d2×h Max kN kN kg
18 6 — 6.5 40 4.5×8×4.5 (1000) 3.29 7.16 0.0262 0.138 0.013 0.069 0.051 0.045 0.79
24 8 — 7.2 40 4.5×7.5×5.3 (1430) 5.38 11.4 0.0499 0.273 0.025 0.137 0.112 0.08 1.2
1900
33 8.5 18 9 40 4.5×7.5×5.3 4.31 8.14 0.0417 0.244 0.0417 0.244 0.128 0.12 2.1
(800)
1900
37 8.5 22 11 50 4.5×7.5×5.3 6.18 11.5 0.0701 0.398 0.0701 0.398 0.194 0.19 2.9
(1000)
3000
42 10 24 15 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 11.5 20.4 0.156 0.874 0.156 0.874 0.398 0.37 4.3
(1200)
69 15.5 40 19 80 7×11×9 3000 27.2 45.9 0.529 2.89 0.529 2.89 1.49 1.2 9.9
90 20 60 24 80 9×14×12 3000 50.2 81.5 1.25 6.74 1.25 6.74 3.46 3.2 14.6

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model HRW variations. If the maxi-
G F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model HRW Unit: mm
Model No. HRW 12 HRW 14 HRW 17 HRW 21 HRW 27 HRW 35 HRW 50 HRW 60
70 70 110 130 160 280 280 570
110 110 190 230 280 440 440 885
150 150 310 380 340 760 760 1200
190 190 470 480 460 1000 1000 1620
230 230 550 580 640 1240 1240 2040
LM rail
270 270 780 820 1560 1640 2460
standard length
310 310 2040
(LO)
390 390
470 470
550
670
Standard pitch F 40 40 40 50 60 80 80 105

G 15 15 15 15 20 20 20 22.5
1900 1900 3000
Max length (1000) (1430) 3000 3000 3000
(800) (1000) (1200)
B-112
RSR/RSR-W
LM Guide
(Separate)
Models RSR-M and RSR-N .............. B-114 Structure and features....................... A-201
Models RSR-M, RSR-KM, Types and Features .......................... A-202
RSR-VM and RSR-N ..................... B-116 Comparison of Model RSR-W
Model RSR-WM(WV), with Other Model Numbers............ A-204
RSR-WVM and RSR-WN .............. B-118 Rated Loads in All Directions ............ A-205
Options............................................. B-223 Shoulder Height of the Mounting Base
The LM Block Dimension (Dimension L) and the Corner Radius ...................... A-332
with LaCS and Seals Attached ........... B-226 Error Allowance in the Parallelism
LM Block Dimension (Dimension L) Error Allowance in Vertical Level
with QZ Attached ........................... B-252 between Two Rails ........................ A-337
Flatness of the Mounting Surface ..... A-335

the Products".
B-113
Models RSR-M and RSR-N
L
L1
Ｗ 2-Ｓ× l Ｃ
M1.6 through
M （K）
M1
H3
W2 W1 Ｆ
Model RSR3M
L
L1
Ｗ 2-Ｓ× l Ｃ
M1.6 through
M （K）
M1
H3
W2 W1 Ｆ
Model RSR3N
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions
Greas-
Model No. Height Width Length ing
hole Grease
nipple
RSR 3M 12 3.5 M1.6×1.3 6.7

4 8 — — 3 — — — — 1
RSR 3N 16 5.5 M2×1.3 10.7
RSR 5M 16.9 8 — M2×1.5 8.8
6 12 — 4.5 0.8 — 0.8 — 1.5
RSR 5N 20.1 — 7 M2.6×1.8 12
ronment.
Models RSR3M and 3N do not have an oil hole. When lubricating them, apply a lubricant directly to the LM rail raceways.
To secure the LM rail of models RSR5M and 5N, use cross-recessed head screws for precision equipment (No. 0 pan
head screw, class 1) M2.
Model number coding
2 RSR5 M UU C1 +130L P M -Ⅱ
Model number Contamination LM rail length Stainless
protection Symbol for
accessory (in mm) steel No. of rails used
symbol (*1) LM rail on the same plane (*4)
No. of LM blocks
Light preload (C1) Precision grade (P)
B-114
W 2-S×l
B L
φd
φ d2 L1
N
h
M （K）
H3 M1
φ d1
LM Guide
W2 W1 F
Model RSR5M
L
W 2-S×l L1
φd φ d2 C
N
h
M （K）
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Model RSR5N
Unit: mm
rating moment N-m＊
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
1 Double 1 Double 1
0 0.18 0.27 0.293 2.11 0.293 2.11 0.45 0.0011
3 2.5 2.6 10 — 200 0.055
– 0.02 0.3 0.44 0.726 4.33 0.726 4.33 0.73 0.0016
0 0.32 0.59 0.884 6.51 0.884 6.51 1.53 0.003
5 3.5 4 15 2.4×3.5×1 200 0.14
– 0.02 0.55 0.96 1.84 11.9 1.84 11.9 2.49 0.004
z Recommended tightening torque when mounting the LM rail/block

Table1 shows recommended bolt tightening torques when mounting the LM block and LM rail of
models RSR3M/3N.
Table1 Recommended Tightening Torques of Mounting Bolts
Recommended
Model No. of screw
tightening torque (N-m)
M1.6 0.09
M2 0.19
Note) Applicable to austenite stainless steel hexagonal-

socket-head type bolts.

Models RSR-M, RSR-KM, RSR-VM and RSR-N
W L
4-S×l
B L1
φd C
φ d2
N
（K） h
M M1
H3 φ d1
W2 W1 F
Models RSR7 to 12N/7M/9KM/12VM
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions
Greas-
hole Grease
nipple
RSR 7M 23.4 8 13.4

8 17 12 M2×2.5 — 6.5 1.7 — 1.2 — 1.5
RSR 7N 33 13 23
RSR 9KM 30.8 10 19.8
10 20 15 M3×3 — 7.8 2.4 — 1.5 — 2.2
RSR 9N 41 16 29.8
RSR 12VM 35 15 20.6
13 27 20 M3×3.5 — 10 3 — 2 — 3
RSR 12N 47.7 20 33.3
RSR 15VM 43 20 25.7 3.6
16 32 25 M3×4 — 12 3.5 — PB107 4
RSR 15N 61 25 43.5 3.7
RSR 20VM 66.5 45.2
25 46 38 38 M4×6 5.7 17.5 5 6.4 — A-M6F 7.5
RSR 20N 86.3 65
ronment.
Model number coding
2 RSR15V M UU C1 +230L P M -Ⅱ
Model number Contamination LM rail length Stainless Symbol for
protection (in mm) steel No. of rails used
accessory LM rail on the same plane (*4)
No. of LM blocks symbol (*1)
used on the same rail
B-116
W （E） L
4-S×l B L1
C
φ d2
LM Guide
T N
（K）
M h
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Models RSR15 and 20VM/N

Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
1 Double 1 Double 1
0 0.88 1.37 2.93 20.8 2.93 20.8 5 0.013
7 5 4.7 15 2.4×4.2×2.3 300 0.23
– 0.02 1.59 2.5 8.68 49.9 8.68 49.9 9.12 0.018
0 1.47 2.25 7.34 43.3 7.34 43.3 10.4 0.018
9 5.5 5.5 20 3.5×6×3.3 1000 0.32
– 0.02 2.6 3.96 18.4 97 18.4 97 18.4 0.027
0 2.65 4.02 11.4 74.9 10.1 67.7 19.2 0.037
12 7.5 7.5 25 3.5×6×4.5 1340 0.58
– 0.025 4.3 6.65 28.9 163 25.5 145 31.8 0.055
0 4.41 6.57 23.7 149 21.1 135 38.8 0.069
15 8.5 9.5 40 3.5×6×4.5 1430 0.925
– 0.025 7.16 10.7 63.1 330 55.6 293 63 0.093
0 8.82 12.7 75.4 435 66.7 389 96.6 0.245
20 13 15 60 6×9.5×8.5 1800 1.95
– 0.03 14.2 20.6 171 897 151 795 157 0.337

Models RSR-WM (WV), RSR-WVM and RSR-WN
2-S×l L
W L1
φd φ d2 C
N
h
M （K）
H3 M1
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Models RSR3 to 7WM/WN
Outer LM block dimensions

dimensions
Greas-
Height Width Length ing
Model No. hole Grease
nipple
＊ RSR 3WM 14.9 — 4.5 8.5

＊ RSR 3WN 4.5 12 19.9 8 M2×1.7 13.3 — 3.5 0.8 — 0.8 — 1
＊ RSR 5WM 6.5 17 22.1 — 6.5 M3×2.3 13.7 — 5 1.1 — 0.8 — 1.5
＊ RSR 5WN 28.1 11 19.7
＊ RSR 7WM 9 25 31 — 12 M4×3.5 20.4 — 7 1.6 — 1.2 — 2
＊ RSR 7WN 40.9 18 30.3
RSR 9WV 39 21 12 M2.6×3 27
＊ RSR 9WVM 12 30 39 21 12 M2.6×3 27 — 7.8 2 — 1.6 — 4.2
＊ RSR 9WN 50.7 23 24 M3×3 38.7
RSR 12WV 44.5 15 30.9
＊ RSR 12WVM 14 40 44.5 28 15 M3×3.5 30.9 4.5 10 3 — 2 — 4
＊ RSR 12WN 59.5 28 45.9
RSR 14WV 15 50 50 35 18 M4×4.5 34.3 6 11.5 3 4 — PB107 3.5
RSR 15WV 55.5 20 38.9
＊ RSR 15WVM 16 60 55.5 45 20 M4×4.5 38.9 5.6 12 3.5 3 — PB107 4
＊ RSR 15WN 74.5 35 57.9
Note) ＊indicates that since stainless steel is used in the LM block, LM rail and balls, these models are highly resistance to cor-
rosion and environment.
To secure the LM rail of models RSR3WM and 3WN, use cross-recessed head screws for precision equipment (No. 0
pan head screw, class 1) M2.
Model number coding
2 RSR12WV M UU C1 +310L H M
Model number Contamination LM rail length Stainless steel
protection (in mm) LM rail
accessory Accuracy symbol (*3)
No. of LM blocks symbol (*1) Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
used on the same rail Radial clearance symbol (*2) Precision grade (P)
Normal (No symbol)/Light preload (C1)
B-118
W L
4-S×l
B L1
φd C
φ d2
N
T h
M （K）
H3 M1
φ d1
W2 W1 F
LM Guide
Models RSR9 and 12WV/WVM/WN
W （E） L
4-S×l L1
B
C
φ d2
T N
M （K）
M1 h
H3
W3 φ d1
W2 W1 F
Models RSR14WV and 15WV/WVM/WN

Unit: mm
LM rail dimensions Basic load Static permissible Mass

MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
1 Double 1 Double 1
6 –00.02 3 — 2.6 15 2.4×4×1.5 100 0.25

0.39
0.47
0.75
0.668
1.57
4.44
9.06
0.668
1.57
4.44
9.06
1.48
2.36
0.002
0.003 0.12
0
10 – 0.025 3.5 — 4 20 3×5.5×3 200 0.51 0.96 1.97 13.1 1.97 13.1 4.89 0.007 0.28
0.75 1.4 4.06 23.5 4.06 23.5 7.13 0.01
14 – 0
0.05 5.5 — 5.2 30 3.5×6×3.2 400 1.37
2.04
2.16
3.21
7.02
14.7
40.7
77.6
7.02
14.7
40.7
77.6
15.4
22.9
0.021
0.026 0.51
2.45 3.92 16 92.9 16 92.9 36 0.035
18 – 0
0.05 6 — 7.5 30 3.5×6×4.5 1000 2.45 3.92 16 92.9 16 92.9 36 0.035 1.08
3.52 5.37 31 161 31 161 49.4 0.051
4.02 6.08 24.5 138 21.7 123 59.5 0.075
24 – 0
0.05 8 — 8.5 40 4.5×8×4.5 1430 4.02 6.08 24.5 138 21.7 123 59.5 0.075 1.5
5.96 9.21 53.9 274 47.3 242 90.1 0.101
30 – 0
0.05 5 — 9 40 4.5×7.5×5.3 1800 6.01 9.08 43.2 233 38.2 208 110 0.096 2
6.66 9.8 50.3 278 44.4 248 168 0.17
42 – 0
0.05 9 23 9.5 40 4.5×8×4.5 1800 6.66 9.8 50.3 278 44.4 248 168 0.17 3
9.91 14.9 110 555 97.3 490 255 0.21

Table2 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model RSR variations.
G F G
L0
Table2 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model RSR/RSR-W Unit: mm
Model
RSR 3 RSR 5 RSR 7 RSR 9 RSR 12 RSR 15 RSR 20 RSR 3W RSR 5W RSR 7W RSR 9W RSR 12W RSR 14W RSR 15W
No.
30 40 40 55 70 70 220 40 50 50 50 70 110 110
40 55 55 75 95 110 280 55 70 80 80 110 150 150
60 70 70 95 120 150 340 70 90 110 110 150 190 190
80 100 85 115 145 190 460 110 140 140 190 230 230
100 130 100 135 170 230 640 130 170 170 230 270 270
160 130 155 195 270 880 150 200 200 270 310 310
LM rail 175 220 310 1000 170 260 260 310 430 430
standard 195 245 350 290 290 390 550 550
length (LO) 275 270 390 320 470 670 670
375 320 430 550 790 790
370 470
470 550
570 670
870
Standard
10 15 15 20 25 40 60 15 20 30 30 40 40 40
pitch F
G 5 5 5 7.5 10 15 20 5 5 10 10 15 15 15
Max
200 200 300 1000 1340 1430 1800 100 200 400 1000 1430 1800 1800
length
Note2) The LM rail mounting hole of model RSR3 is an M1.6 through hole.
B-120
RSR-Z
LM Guide
(Separate)
Model RSR-ZM ................................. B-122 Structure and features....................... A-209
Models RSR-WZM ............................ B-124 Types and Features .......................... A-210
Error Allowance in the Parallelism

the Products".
B-121
Model RSR-ZM
W L
4-S×l
B L1
φd C
φ d2
N
T h
M （K）
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Models RSR7 to 12ZM
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions
Greas-
hole Grease
nipple
RSR 7ZM 8 17 23.4 12 8 M2×2.5 13.2 3.4 6.5 1.6 — 1.5 — 1.5
RSR 9ZM 10 20 30.8 15 10 M3×2.7 19.4 4.6 7.8 2.4 — 1.6 — 2.2
RSR 12ZM 13 27 35 20 15 M3×3.2 20.4 4.5 10.6 3.1 — 2 — 2.4
RSR 15ZM 16 32 43 25 20 M3×3.5 26.5 5.5 12.6 2.9 3.6 — PB107 3.4
ronment.
Model number coding
2 RSR15Z M UU C1 +230L P M -Ⅱ
symbol (*1)
No. of LM blocks
B-122
（E）
W L
B 4-S×l L1
LM Guide
C
φ d2
T N
M （K） h
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Model RSR15ZM
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
1 Double 1 Double 1
0
7 5 4.7 15 2.4×4.2×2.3 300 0.88 1.37 2.93 20.7 2.93 20.7 5 0.008 0.23
– 0.02
0
9 5.5 5.5 20 3.5×6×3.3 1000 1.47 2.25 7.34 43 7.34 43 10.4 0.014 0.32
– 0.02
0
12 7.5 7.5 25 3.5×6×4.5 1340 2.65 4.02 11.4 74.9 10.1 67.7 19.2 0.028 0.58
– 0.025
0
15 8.5 9.5 40 3.5×6×4.5 1430 4.41 6.57 23.7 149 21.1 135 38.8 0.05 0.925
– 0.025
＊

Model RSR-WZM
W L
4-S×l
B L1
φd φ d2 C
N
T
M （K） h
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Models RSR7 to 12WZM
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions
Greas-
hole Grease
nipple
RSR 7WZM 9 25 31.5 19 10 M3×2.5 19.7 3.4 7 1.8 — 1.6 — 2
RSR 9WZM 12 30 39 21 12 M3×2.8 27 3.9 9.1 2.3 — 1.6 — 2.9
RSR 12WZM 14 40 44.5 28 15 M3×3.6 29.3 4.5 10.6 3 — 2 — 3.4
RSR 15WZM 16 60 55.5 45 20 M4×4.5 39.3 5.4 12.6 3 3.6 — PB107 3.4
ronment.
Model number coding
2 RSR12WZ M SS C1 +390L H M
accessory
No. of LM blocks symbol (*1) Accuracy symbol (*3)
used on the same rail Radial clearance symbol (*2) Normal grade (No Symbol)
Normal (No symbol) High accuracy grade (H)
B-124
W （E） L
4-S×l
B L1
LM Guide
C
φ d2
T N
M （K）
M1 h
H3
W3 φ d1
W2 W1 F
Model RSR15WZM
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
1 Double 1 Double 1
0
14 5.5 — 5.2 30 3.5×6×3.2 400 1.37 2.16 6.54 42.1 6.54 42.1 15.4 0.018 0.51
– 0.05
0
18 6 — 7.5 30 3.5×6×4.5 1000 2.45 3.92 16 92.9 16 92.9 36 0.03 1.08
– 0.05
0
24 8 — 8.5 40 4.5×8×4.5 1430 4.02 6.08 24.5 138 21.7 123 59.5 0.06 1.5
– 0.05
0
42 9 23 9.5 40 4.5×8×4.5 1800 6.66 9.8 50.3 278 44.4 248 168 0.135 3
– 0.05
＊

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model RSR-Z/WZ variations.
G F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model RSR-Z/WZ Unit: mm
Model No. RSR 7Z RSR 9Z RSR 12Z RSR 15Z RSR 7WZ RSR 9WZ RSR 12WZ RSR 15WZ
40 55 70 70 50 50 70 110
55 75 95 110 80 80 110 150
70 95 120 150 110 110 150 190
85 115 145 190 140 140 190 230
100 135 170 230 170 170 230 270
130 155 195 270 200 200 270 310
175 220 310 260 260 310 430
LM rail standard
195 245 350 290 290 390 550
length (LO)
275 270 390 320 470 670
375 320 430 550 790
370 470
470 550
570 670
870
Standard pitch F 15 20 25 40 30 30 40 40
G 5 7.5 10 15 10 10 15 15
Max length 300 1000 1340 1430 400 1000 1430 1800
Note2) The LM rails of these models are all made of stainless steel.
B-126
RSH
LM Guide
(Separate)
Models RSH-M, RSH-KM and RSH-VM B-128 Structure and features....................... A-215
Service Life ....................................... A-100
Options............................................. B-223 Radial Clearance Standard ............... A-114
The LM Block Dimension (Dimension L) Accuracy Standards .......................... A-126
with LaCS and Seals Attached ........... B-227 Shoulder Height of the Mounting Base
Cap C ................................................ B-250 and the Corner Radius ...................... A-332

the Products".
B-127
Models RSH-M, RSH-KM and RSH-VM
W
B
φd
N
（K）
M
H3
W2 W1
Model No. Greas-

Height Width Length
ing hole
M W L B C S×l L1 K N d H3
RSH 7M 8 17 23.4 12 8 M2×2.5 13.4 6.5 1.7 1.2 1.5
RSH 9KM 10 20 30.8 15 10 M3×3 19.8 7.8 2.4 1.5 2.2
RSH 12VM 13 27 35 20 15 M3×3.5 20.6 10 3 2 3
ronment.
Model number coding
2 RSH9K M UU C1 +100L P M -Ⅱ
Normal (No symbol) Normal grade (No Symbol)
Light preload (C1) High accuracy grade (H)
Precision grade (P)
B-128
L
4-S×l
L1
C
LM Guide
φ d2
h
M1
φ d1
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
1 Double 1 Double 1
0
7 5 4.7 15 2.4×4.2×2.3 300 0.88 1.37 2.93 20.8 2.93 20.8 5 0.01 0.23
– 0.02
0
9 5.5 5.5 20 3.5×6×3.3 1000 1.47 2.25 7.34 43.3 7.34 43.3 10.4 0.018 0.32
– 0.02
0
12 7.5 7.5 25 3.5×6×4.5 1340 2.65 4.02 11.4 74.9 10.1 67.7 19.2 0.037 0.58
– 0.025
＊

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model RSH variations.
G F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model RSH Unit: mm
Model No. RSH 7 RSH 9 RSH 12

40 55 70
55 75 95
70 95 120
85 115 145
100 135 170
130 155 195
length (LO) 195 245
275 270
375 320
370
470
570
Standard pitch F 15 20 25
G 5 7.5 10
Max length 300 1000 1340
Note) The maximum length varies with accuracy grades. Contact THK for details.
B-130
RSH-Z
LM Guide
(Separate)
Model RSH-ZM ................................. B-132 Structure and features....................... A-219
Model RSH-WZM .............................. B-134 Types and Features .......................... A-220

the Products".
B-131
Model RSH-ZM
W L
B 4-S×l L1
φd C
N φ d2
T h
M （K）
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Models RSH7 to 12ZM
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions
Greas-
hole Grease
nipple
RSH 7ZM 8 17 23.4 12 8 M2×2.5 13.2 3.4 6.5 1.6 — 1.5 — 1.5
RSH 9ZM 10 20 30.8 15 10 M3×2.8 19.4 4.6 7.8 2.4 — 1.6 — 2.2
RSH 12ZM 13 27 35 20 15 M3×3.2 20.4 4.5 10.6 3.1 — 2 — 2.4
RSH 15ZM 16 32 43 25 20 M3×3.5 26.5 5.5 12.6 2.9 3.6 — PB107 3.4
ronment.
Model number coding
2 RSH15Z M UU C1 +230L P M -Ⅱ
Light preload (C1) High accuracy grade (H)
Precision grade (P)
B-132
4-S×l
W （E） L
B L1
C
φ d2
LM Guide
T N
（K） h
M
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Model RSH15ZM
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
1 Double 1 Double 1
0
7 5 4.7 15 2.4×4.2×2.3 300 0.88 1.37 2.93 20.7 2.93 20.7 5 0.008 0.23
– 0.02
0
9 5.5 5.5 20 3.5×6×3.3 1000 1.47 2.25 7.34 43 7.34 43 10.4 0.014 0.32
– 0.02
0
12 7.5 7.5 25 3.5×6×4.5 1340 2.65 4.02 11.4 74.9 10.1 67.7 19.2 0.028 0.58
– 0.025
0
15 8.5 9.5 40 3.5×6×4.5 1430 4.41 6.57 23.7 149 21.1 135 38.8 0.05 0.925
– 0.025
＊

Model RSH-WZM
4-S×l
W L
B L1
φd C
N φ d2
T h
M （K）
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Models RSH7 to 12WZM
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions
Greas-
hole Grease
nipple
RSH 7WZM 9 25 31.5 19 10 M3×2.5 19.7 3.4 7 1.8 — 1.5 — 2
RSH 9WZM 12 30 39 21 12 M3×2.8 27 3.9 9.1 2.3 — 1.6 — 2.9
RSH 12WZM 14 40 44.5 28 15 M3×3.6 29.3 4.5 10.6 3 — 2 — 3.4
RSH 15WZM 16 60 55.5 45 20 M4×4.5 39.3 5.4 12.6 3 3.6 — PB107 3.4
ronment.
Model number coding
2 RSH9WZ M SS C1 +170L P M
accessory
used on the same rail Accuracy symbol (*3)
Radial clearance symbol (*2) Normal grade (No Symbol)
Normal (No symbol) High accuracy grade (H)
B-134
4-S×l
W （E） L
B L1
C
φ d2
LM Guide
T h N
M （K）
M1
H3
W3 φ d1
W2 W1 F
Model RSH15WZM
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
1 Double 1 Double 1
0
14 5.5 — 5.2 30 3.5×6×3.2 400 1.37 2.16 6.54 42.1 6.54 42.1 15.4 0.018 0.51
– 0.05
0
18 6 — 7.5 30 3.5×6×4.5 1000 2.45 3.92 16 92.9 16 92.9 36 0.03 1.08
– 0.05
0
24 8 — 8.5 40 4.5×8×4.5 1430 4.02 6.08 24.5 138 21.7 123 59.5 0.06 1.5
– 0.05
0
42 9 23 9.5 40 4.5×8×4.5 1800 6.66 9.8 50.3 278 44.4 248 168 0.135 3
– 0.05
＊

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model RSH-Z/WZ variations.
G F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model RSH-Z/WZ Unit: mm
Model No. RSH 7Z RSH 9Z RSH 12Z RSH 15Z RSH 7WZ RSH 9WZ RSH 12WZ RSH 15WZ
40 55 70 70 50 50 70 110
55 75 95 110 80 80 110 150
70 95 120 150 110 110 150 190
85 115 145 190 140 140 190 230
100 135 170 230 170 170 230 270
130 155 195 270 200 200 270 310
LM rail 175 220 310 260 260 310 430
standard length 195 245 350 290 290 390 550
(LO) 275 270 390 320 470 670
375 320 430 550 790
370 470
470 550
570 670
870
Standard pitch F 15 20 25 40 30 30 40 40
G 5 7.5 10 15 10 10 15 15
Max length 300 1000 1340 1430 400 1000 1430 1800
B-136
HR
LM Guide
(Separate)
Models HR, HR-T, HR-M and HR-TM.. B-138 Structure and features....................... A-225
Accessories....................................... B-143 Service Life ....................................... A-100
Example of Clearance Adjustment.... A-228
Cap C ................................................ B-250 Error Allowance in the Parallelism
Comparison of Model Numbers
with Cross-roller Guides .................. A-229

the Products".
B-137
Models HR, HR-T, HR-M and HR-TM
B1
φd
2-S
C
W0 L
φ d2 L1
W
h
M T（K） M1
W4
φ d1
W1
A F
Models HR918 and 918M
Greasing
Model No. Height Width Length hole
M W W0 L B1 C H S h2 L1 T K d D1
HR 918
8.5 11.4 18 45 5.5 15 — M3 — 25 7.5 8 1.5 —
HR 918M
HR 1123
11 13.7 23 52 7 15 2.55 M3 3 30 9.5 10 2 5
HR 1123M
HR 1530
15 19.2 30 69 10 20 3.3 M4 3.5 40 13 14 2 6.5
HR 1530M
HR 2042
20 26.3 42 91.6 13 35 5.3 M6 5.5 56.6 17.5 19 3 10
HR 2042M
HR 2042T
20 26.3 42 110.7 13 50 5.3 M6 5.5 75.7 17.5 19 3 10
HR 2042TM
HR 2555
25 33.3 55 121 16 45 6.8 M8 7 80 22.5 24 3 11
HR 2555M
HR 2555T
25 33.3 55 146.4 16 72 6.8 M8 7 105.4 22.5 24 3 11
HR 2555TM
Model number coding
2 HR2555 UU M +1000L P T M
Model number Contamination LM rail length Symbol for Stainless steel
protection (in mm) LM rail LM rail
accessory jointed use
No. of LM blocks symbol (*1) Stainless steel Accuracy symbol (*2)
used on the same rail LM block Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
(*1) See contamination protection accessory on A-368. (*2) See A-123.
Note) One set of model HR means a combination of two LM rails and an LM blocks used on the same plane.
B-138
B1
φd
2-S
(φ H through) C
LM Guide
W0 L
W L1
φ d2
h
M T（K） M1
W4 φ D1 h2
W1 φ d1
A F
Models HR1123 to 2555M/T/TM

Unit: mm
MA MB LM LM
block rail
1 Double 1 Double
W1 W4 A M1 F d1×d2×h Max kN kN kg kg/m
block blocks block blocks
6.7 3.5 8.7 6.5 25 3×5.5×3 300 1.57 3.04 0.0229 0.17 0.0229 0.17 0.01 0.3
9.5 5 11.6 8 40 3.5×6×4.5 500 2.35 4.31 0.0414 0.272 0.0414 0.272 0.03 0.5
10.7 6 13.5 11 60 3.5×6×4.5 1600 4.31 7.65 0.0982 0.641 0.0982 0.641 0.08 1
15.6 8 19.5 14.5 60 6×9.5×8.5 2200 9.9 17.2 0.308 1.91 0.308 1.91 0.13 1.8
15.6 8 19.5 14.5 60 6×9.5×8.5 2200 13.6 22.9 0.53 2.99 0.53 2.99 0.26 1.8
22 10 27 18 80 9×14×12 2600 18.6 30.5 0.783 4.41 0.783 4.41 0.43 3.2
22 10 27 18 80 9×14×12 2600 25.1 40.8 1.33 6.95 1.33 6.95 0.5 3.2
Note) A moment in the direction MC can be received if two rails are used in parallel. However, since it depends on the distance
between the two rails, the moment in the direction MC is omitted here.
Static permissible moment＊: Static permissible moment value with one set of model HR

Models HR, HR-T, HR-M and HR-TM
W0
W
M T（K）
W4
W1
A
Greasing
Model No. Height Width Length hole
M W W0 L B1 C H S h2 L1 T K d D1
HR 3065 145 50 90
30 40.3 65 19 8.6 M10 9 27.5 29 4 14
HR 3065T 173.5 80 118.5
HR 3575 154.8 60 103.8
35 44.9 75 21.5 10.5 M12 12 32 34 4 18
HR 3575T 182.5 92.5 131.5
HR 4085 177.8 70 120.8
40 50.4 85 24 12.5 M14 13 36 38 4 20
HR 4085T 215.9 110 158.9
HR 50105 227 85 150
50 63.4 105 30 14.5 M16 15.5 45 48 5 23
HR 50105T 274.5 130 197.5
HR 60125 60 74.4 125 329 35 160 18 M20 18 236 55 58 5 26
Model number coding
2 HR4085T UU +1500L P T
Model number Contamination LM rail length Symbol for LM rail
protection (in mm) jointed use
accessory
symbol (*1) Accuracy symbol (*2)
No. of LM blocks Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
used on the same rail Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
Note) One set of model HR means a combination of two LM rails and an LM blocks used on the same plane.
B-140
B1
φd
2-S
LM Guide
(φ H through) C
L
L1
φ d2
h
M1
φ D1 h2
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
MA MB LM LM
block rail
1 Double 1 Double
W1 W4 A M1 F d1×d2×h Max kN kN kg kg/m
24.2 38.6 1.11 6.72 1.11 6.72 0.7
25 12 31.5 22.5 80 9×14×12 3000 4.6
32.1 51.6 1.89 10.4 1.89 10.4 0.9
30 47.8 1.53 8.84 1.53 8.84 1.05
30.5 14.5 37 26 105 11×17.5×14 3000 6.4
40.2 63.6 2.59 13.5 2.59 13.5 1.4
44.1 68.6 2.64 14.4 2.64 14.4 1.53
35 16 42.5 29 120 14×20×17 3000 8
59.5 91.7 4.48 23 4.48 23 1.7
70.7 107 5.15 28.9 5.15 28.9 3.06
42 20 51.5 37 150 18×26×22 3000 12.1
96 143 8.74 45.7 8.74 45.7 3.5
51 25 65 45 180 22×32×25 3000 141 206 14.3 79.6 14.3 79.6 7.5 19.3
Static permissible moment＊: Static permissible moment value with one set of model HR

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model HR variations. If the maxi-
G value from the table. The longer the G dimension is the less stable the G area may become after
G F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model HR Unit: mm
Model No. HR 918 HR 1123 HR 1530 HR 2042 HR 2555 HR 3065 HR 3575 HR 4085 HR 50105 HR 60125
70 110 160 220 280 280 570 780 1270 1530

120 230 280 280 440 440 885 1020 1570 1890
LM rail 220 310 340 340 600 600 1200 1260 2020 2250
standard length 295 390 460 460 760 760 1620 1500 2620 2610
(LO) 580 640 1000 1000 2040 1980
1240 1240 2460 2580
Standard pitch F 25 40 60 60 80 80 105 120 150 180

G 10 15 20 20 20 20 22.5 30 35 45
Max length 300 500 1600 2200 2600 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
B-142
Accessories
[Dedicated Mounting Bolt]

Normally, when mounting the LM block to adjust a clearance, use the tapped hole provided on the
LM block to secure it as shown in Fig.1.
The holes of the bolt (d1 and D1) must be machined so that they are greater by the adjustment allow-
LM Guide
ance.
If it is inevitable to use the mounting method as indicated by Fig.2 for a structural reason, the dedi-
cated mounting bolt as shown in Fig.3 is required for securing the LM block. Be sure to specify that
the dedicated mounting bolt is required when ordering the LM Guide.
D1
d1
Fig.1 Fig.2
Table2 Dedicated Mounting Bolt Unit: mm

l Supported
Model No. S d D H L l model
number
B3 M3 2.4 5.5 3 17 5 HR 1530
D d S B5 M5 4.1 8.5 5 22 7 HR 2042
B6 M6 4.9 10 6 28 9 HR 2555
B8 M8 6.6 13 8 34 12 HR 3065
B 10 M10 8.3 16 10 39 15 HR 3575
H L B 12 M12 10.1 18 12 45 18 HR 4085
B 14 M14 11.8 21 14 55 21 HR 50105
Fig.3
B 16 M16 13.8 24 16 66 24 HR 60125
B-143
B-144
GSR
LM Guide
(Separate)
Models GSR-T and GSR-V ............... B-146 Structure and features....................... A-231
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model GSR B-148 Service Life ....................................... A-100
Example of Clearance Adjustment.... A-234

the Products".
B-145
Models GSR-T and GSR-V
2-S×l
W （E） L
B B1 L1
N1
φ d2
N
T h
（K1）
M （K）
M1
H3
W4
φ d1
W1
F
W2
Model GSR15T/V Models GSR15 to 25V
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions

Grease
nipple
M W L B1 B C S×l L1 T K K1 N N1 E H3
GSR 15T 59.8 26 40.2

20 32 5 15 M4×7 8.25 17.5 12 4.5 3 5.5 PB107 8
GSR 15V 47.1 — 27.5
GSR 20T 74 30 50.2
24 43 7 20 M5×8 9.7 20.6 13.6 5 — 12 B-M6F 10.4
GSR 20V 58.1 — 34.3
GSR 25T 88 40 60.2
30 50 7 23 M6×10 12.7 25.5 16.8 7 — 12 B-M6F 13.2
GSR 25V 69 — 41.2
GSR 30T 33 57 103 8 26 45 M8×12 70.3 14.6 28.5 18 7 — 12 B-M6F 15
GSR 35T 38 68 117 9 32 50 M8×15 80.3 15.6 32.5 20.5 8 — 12 B-M6F 17.5
Model number coding
Combination of LM rail and LM block
GSR25 T 2 UU +1060L H T K
Contamination Symbol for
Model Type of LM rail length Symbol tapped-hole LM rail type
number LM block protection
accessory (in mm) for LM rail
symbol (*1) jointed use
No. of LM blocks Accuracy symbol (*2)
Precision grade (P)

Note) One set of model GSR: This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set.
B-146
4-S×l
W （E） L
B B1 L1
C
φ d2
N
LM Guide
（K1） T h
M （K）
M1
H3
W4
W1 φ d1
W2 F
Models GSR20 to 35T, Models GSR20V and 25V Models GSR15 to 35T
Unit: mm
MA MB LM LM
block rail
1 Double 1 Double
5.69 8.43 0.0525 0.292 0.0452 0.252 0.13
15 25 7.5 11.5 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 2000 1.2
4.31 5.59 0.0252 0.158 0.0218 0.136 0.08
9.22 13.2 0.102 0.564 0.0885 0.486 0.25
20 33 10 13 60 6×9.5×8.5 3000 1.8
7.01 8.82 0.0498 0.307 0.0431 0.265 0.17
13.5 19 0.177 0.965 0.152 0.831 0.5
23 38 11.5 16.5 60 7×11×9 3000 2.6
10.29 12.65 0.0858 0.522 0.0742 0.451 0.29
28 44.5 14 19 80 9×14×12 3000 18.8 25.9 0.282 1.54 0.243 1.32 0.6 3.6
34 54 17 22 80 11×17.5×14 3000 25.1 33.8 0.421 2.28 0.362 1.96 1 5
Model number coding
LM block LM rail
GSR25 T UU GSR25 -1060L H K

Model Contamination protection Model LM rail length Symbol for
number accessory symbol (*1) number (in mm) tapped-hole
LM rail type
Type of LM block Accuracy symbol (*2)
Precision grade (P)

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model GSR variations.
In case the required quantity is large and the lengths are not the same, we recommend preparing an
LM rail of the maximum length in stock. This is economical since it allows you to cut the rail to the
desired length as necessary.
G F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model GSR Unit: mm
Model No. GSR 15 GSR 20 GSR 25 GSR 30 GSR 35

460 460 460 1240 1240
LM rail 820 820 820 1720 1720
standard length 1060 1060 1060 2200 2200
(LO) 1600 1600 1600 3000 3000
G 20 20 20 20 20
Max length 2000 3000 3000 3000 3000
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model GSR

z Since the bottom of the LM rail has a tapped hole, this model can easily be installed on an H-shape
steel and channel.
z Since the top face of the LM rail has no mounting hole, the sealabilitiy is increased and entrance of
foreign material (e.g., cutting chips) can be prevented.
(1) Determine the bolt length so that a clearance of 2 to 3 mm is secured between the bolt end and
the bottom of the tap (effective tap depth).
(2) As shown in Fig.1, a tapered washer is also available that allows GSR to be mounted on a sec-
tion steel.
(3) For model number coding, see B-146 to B-147.
Table2 Tap Position and Depth Shape
Model No. W1 B2 M1 S×l

M1
GSR 15 15 7.5 11.5 M4×7
l
GSR 20 20 10 13 M5×8
B2 S
Tapered washer GSR 25 23 11.5 16.5 M6×10
W1
Fig.1 GSR 30 28 14 19 M8×12
GSR 35 34 17 22 M10×14
B-148
GSR-R
LM Guide
(Separate)
Model GSR-R.................................... B-150 Structure and features....................... A-237
Standard Length of the LM Rail ........ B-152 Rated Loads in All Directions ............ A-238
Options............................................. B-223 Service Life ....................................... A-100
Rack and Pinion ................................ B-259 and the Corner Radius ...................... A-331
Rack and Pinion ................................ A-240
* Please see the separate "A Technical
B-149
Model GSR-R
P
Rh
4-S×l C
W （E） L
B B1 L1
φ d2
T N
h
（K）M
M1 M2 M1
W4 H3
W1 W2 φ d1
W0 F
Model GSR-T-R
Outer
Rack LM block dimensions
dimensions
Reference Pitch
Model No. pitch Module line Height Width Length
dimension height Grease
nipple
P Rh M W W0 L B1 B C S×l L1 T K N E H3
GSR 25T-R 88 40 60.2

6 1.91 43 30 50 59.91 7 23 M6×10 12.7 25.5 7 12 B-M6F 4.5
GSR 25V-R 69 — 41.2
GSR 30T-R 8 2.55 48 33 57 67.05 103 8 26 45 M8×12 70.3 14.6 28.5 7 12 B-M6F 4.5
GSR 35T-R 10 3.18 57 38 68 80.18 117 9 32 50 M8×15 80.3 15.6 32.5 8 12 B-M6F 5.5
Note) A special type with a module pitch is also available. Contact THK for details.
For checking the pinion strength, see A-241.
Model number coding
Single-rail LM Guide
GSR25T 2 UU +5000L H R T
Model number Contamination LM rail length Symbol for LM rail jointed use
protection (in mm)
accessory Symbol for rail with rack type
symbol (*1) R: Symbol for rail with rack type
No. of LM blocks

Note) This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set.
B-150
P
Rh
LM Guide
2-S×l
W （E） L
B B1 L1
φ d2
T N
h
（K）M
M 1 M2 M1
W4 φ d1
H3
W1 W2 F
W0
Model GSR25V-R
Unit: mm
MA MB
LM LM
Width Height Pitch C C0
block rail
1 Double 1 Double
W1 W2 W4 M1 F M2 d1×d2×h kN kN kg kg/m
13.5 19 0.177 0.965 0.152 0.831 0.5
44.91 15 11.5 16.5 60 11.5 7×11×9 4.7
10.29 12.65 0.0858 0.522 0.0742 0.451 0.29
50.55 16.5 14 19 80 12 9×14×12 18.8 25.9 0.282 1.54 0.243 1.32 0.6 5.9
60.18 20 17 22 80 14.5 11×17.5×14 25.1 33.8 0.421 2.28 0.362 1.96 1 8.1
Model number coding
LM block Rail with rack
GSR25T UU GSR25-2004L H R
Model Contamination protection R: Symbol for rail
number accessory symbol (*1) with rack type

Standard Length of the LM Rail
Table1 shows the standard LM rail lengths of model GSR-R variations.
Since both end faces of the LM rail of model GSR-R are machined, it can be joined with another rail
without additional machining.
G F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length of the LM Rail for Model GSR-R Unit: mm
Model No. GSR 25-R GSR 30-R GSR 35-R

LM rail
Standard
1500 2004 1504 2000 1500 2000
length
(LO)
Standard pitch
60 60 80 80 80 80
F
G 30 42 32 40 30 40
B-152
CSR
LM Guide
(Separate)
Model CSR........................................ B-154 Structure and features....................... A-245
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model CSR B-157 Service Life ....................................... A-100

the Products".
B-153
Model CSR
C C1 （E） L
W
L2 F W2
2×5-S×l φ d1 W1
H3
M1 N B1
h
φ d2 B3 B B 4
B
B3 M M φ d2
B4
B1 N M1 h
W1 H3 φ d1 2×5-S×l
W2 F L2
W
L （E） C1 C
Models CSR20 to 45
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions
Grease
M W L B1 B3 B4 B C C1 S×l L2 H3 N E nipple H3
CSR 15 47 38.8 56.6 — 11.3 34.8 — 20 9.4 M4×6 32 3.5 19.5 5.5 PB1021B 3.5
CSR 20S 50.8 74 — 13.3 42.5 — 30 10.4
57 M5×8 42 4 25 12 B-M6F 4
CSR 20 66.8 90 13 7.8 37 24 56 5.4
CSR 25S 59.5 83.1 — 17 52 — 34 12.75
70 M6×10 46 5.5 30 12 B-M6F 5.5
CSR 25 78.6 102.2 18 9 44 26 64 7.3
CSR 30S 70.4 98 — 20 61 — 40 15.2
82 M6×10 58 7 35 12 B-M6F 7
CSR 30 93 120.6 21 12 53 32 76 8.5
CSR 35 95 105.8 134.8 24 14 61 37 90 7.9 M8×14 68 7.5 40 12 B-M6F 7.5
CSR 45 118 129.8 170.8 30 16 75 45 110 9.9 M10×15 84 10 50 16 B-PT1/8 10
Model number coding
4 CSR25 UU C0 +1200/1000L P
Model Contamination LM rail length LM rail length
number protection on the X axis on the Y axis
accessory (in mm) (in mm)
symbol (*1)
Total No. of LM blocks Radial clearance symbol (*2) Accuracy symbol (*3)
Normal (No symbol)/Light preload (C1) Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
B-154
（E） L
W
L2 F W2
2×2-S×l C C1 φ d1 W1
H3
M1 N
h φ d2 B3 B4
φ d2 h
LM Guide
B4 B3 M M
N M1
W1 H3 φ d1 C1 C 2×2-S×l
W2 F L2
W
L （E）
Models CSR15, 20S to 30S

Unit: mm
Basic Static permissi-
load rating ble moment
Width Height Pitch Length＊ C C0 M0 LM block LM rail
W1
W2 M1 F d1×d2×h Max kN kN kN-m kg kg/m
± 0.05
15 26.9 15 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 2500 8.33 13.5 0.0805 0.34 1.5
35.4 13.8 23.8 0.19 0.73
20 18 60 6×9.5×8.5 3000 2.3
43.4 21.3 31.8 0.27 1.3
41.25 19.9 34.4 0.307 1.2
23 22 60 7×11×9 3000 3.3
50.8 27.2 45.9 0.459 2.2
49.2 28 46.8 0.524 2
28 26 80 9×14×12 3000 4.8
60.5 37.3 62.5 0.751 3.6
34 69.9 29 80 9×14×12 3000 50.2 81.5 1.2 5.3 6.6
45 87.4 38 105 14×20×17 3090 80.4 127.5 2.43 9.8 11
＊
M0

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model CSR variations.
G F F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model CSR Unit: mm
Model No. CSR 15 CSR 20 CSR 25 CSR 30 CSR 35 CSR 45

160 220 220 280 280 570
220 280 280 360 360 675
280 340 340 440 440 780
340 400 400 520 520 885
400 460 460 600 600 990
460 520 520 680 680 1095
520 580 580 760 760 1200
580 640 640 840 840 1305
640 700 700 920 920 1410
700 760 760 1000 1000 1515
760 820 820 1080 1080 1620
820 940 940 1160 1160 1725
940 1000 1000 1240 1240 1830
1000 1060 1060 1320 1320 1935
1060 1120 1120 1400 1400 2040
1120 1180 1180 1480
length (LO) 1560 2250
1180 1240 1240 1560
1240 1360 1300 1640 1640 2355
1360 1480 1360 1720 1720 2460
1480 1600 1420 1800 1800 2565
1600 1720 1480 1880 1880 2670
1840 1540 1960 1960 2775
1960 1600 2040 2040 2880
2080 1720 2200 2200 2985
2200 1840 2360 2360 3090
1960 2520 2520
2080 2680 2680
2200 2840 2840
2320 3000 3000
2440
Standard pitch F 60 60 60 80 80 105

G 20 20 20 20 20 22.5
Max length 2500 3000 3000 3000 3000 3090
B-156
Tapped-hole LM Rail Type of Model CSR
The model CSR variations include a type with its LM rail bottom tapped. With the X-axis LM rail hav-
ing tapped holes, this model can be secured with bolts from the top.
Table2 Dimensions of the LM Rail Tap Unit: mm
F Tapped-hole rail Model No. S1 Effective tap depth l 1
LM Guide
15 M5 8
20 M6 10
X-axis LM rail
25 M6 12
30 M8 15
Y-axis LM rail 35 M8 17
45 M12 24
Model number coding
4 CSR25 UU C0 +1200L P K/1000L P

Symbol for
B-157
B-158
MX
LM Guide
(Separate)
Model MX .......................................... B-160 Structure and features....................... A-249
Service Life ....................................... A-100

the Products".
B-159
Model MX
L
L2 F
φd φ d1
M1
M h
N φ d2
H3
W1
W2
Model No. Greasing

Height Width Length
hole
M W L L2 N d H3
MX 5M 10 15.2 23.3 11.8 5.2 0.8 1.5
MX 7WM 14.5 30.2 40.8 24.6 7.4 1.2 2
ronment.
Model number coding
4 MX7W M UU C1 +120 / 100L P T M

Model number Contamination LM rail length LM rail length LM rail is made of stainless steel
protection on the X axis on the Y axis
accessory (in mm) (in mm) Symbol for LM rail
Total No. of LM blocks symbol (*1) Radial clearance symbol (*2) jointed use
Normal (No symbol)
Normal grade (No Symbol)/Precision grade (P)
Note) If the LM rail mount of a semi-standard model is of a tapped-hole LM rail type, add symbol "K" after the accuracy symbol.
Example: 4 MX7W M UU C1+120/100L P K T M
Add symbol K
B-160
W
W2
W1
φ d2
H3
LM Guide
N
h M
M1
φ d1 φd
F L2
Unit: mm
Static Permissible
Basic load
LM rail dimensions Moment＊ Mass
rating
N-m
LM LM
Width Height Pitch Length＊ C C0 M0
block rail
0
5 10.1 4 15 2.4×3.5×1 200 0.59 1.1 2.57 0.01 0.14
– 0.02
0
14 22.1 5.2 30 3.5×6×3.2 400 2.04 3.21 14.7 0.051 0.51
– 0.025
For the LM rail mounting hole, a tapped-hole LM rail type is available as semi-standard.
5.2
M2×2l M3 through
Model MX5M Model MX7WM

When mounting the LM rail of model MX7WM, take into account the thread length of the
mounting bolt in order not to let the bolt end stick out of the top face of the LM rail.

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model MX variations.
G F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model MX Unit: mm
Model No. MX 5 MX 7W
40 50
55 80
70 110
100 140
LM rail standard
130 170
length (LO)
160 200
260
290
Standard pitch F 15 30
G 5 10
Max length 200 400
B-162
JR
LM Guide
(Separate)
Models JR-A, JR-B and JR-R ........... B-164 Structure and features....................... A-253
Second Moment of Inertia of the LM Rail A-253
Standard Length and Maximum Length Types and Features .......................... A-254
of the LM Rail................................... B-166 Rated Loads in All Directions ............ A-255
The LM Block Dimension (Dimension L) Radial Clearance Standard ............... A-115
with LaCS and Seals Attached ........... B-228 Accuracy Standards .......................... A-121

the Products".
B-163
Models JR-A, JR-B and JR-R
W
4-S B
W
B T1 T
4-S t
（K）
T1 T
（K） M
M J2
J2
θ°
θ°
J1 J1
W1 W1
Models JR25 and 35-A Models JR45 and 55-A
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions

Grease
nipple
M W L B C H S×l L1 t T T1 K N E
JR 25A 61 70 57 45 — M8＊ — 11 16 30.5 6

JR 25B 61 70 83.1 57 45 7 — 59.5 16 11 10 30.5 6 12 B-M6F
JR 25R 65 48 35 35 — M6×8 — 9 — 34.5 10
JR 35A 73 100 82 62 — M10＊ — 12 21 40 8
JR 35B 73 100 113.6 82 62 9 — 80.4 21 12 13 40 8 12 B-M6F
JR 35R 80 70 50 50 — M8×12 — 11.7 — 47.4 15
JR 45A 92 120 100 80 — M12＊ 25 13 15 50 10
JR 45B 92 120 145 100 80 11 — 98 25 13 15 50 10 16 B-PT1/8
JR 45R 102 86 60 60 — M10×17 — 15 — 59.4 20
JR 55A 114 140 116 95 — M14＊ 29 13.5 17 57 11
JR 55B 114 140 165 116 95 14 — 118 29 13.5 17 57 11 16 B-PT1/8
JR 55R 124 100 75 75 — M12×18 — 20.5 — 67 21
Note)“＊”indicates a through hole.
Model number coding
JR35 R 2 UU +1000L T
Type of Contamination LM rail Symbol for LM rail
protection
LM block accessory length jointed use
symbol (*1) (in mm)
Model No. of LM blocks
number used on the same rail
B-164
W
W
4-S×l B
4-φ H B
T
t T T1
（K）（K）
M M
J2 J2
θ°
θ°
LM Guide
J1 J1
W1 W1
Model JR-B Model JR-R

（E） L
L1
C
N
M1
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
Width Height Length＊ C C0
block rail
1 Double 1 Double 1
W1 J1 J2 θ° M1 Max kN kN kg kg/m
0.59
48 4 5 12 47 2000 19.9 34.4 0.307 1.71 0.307 1.71 0.344 0.59 4.2
0.54
1.6
54 7 8 10 54 4000 37.3 61.1 0.782 3.93 0.782 3.93 0.905 1.6 8.6
1.5
2.8
70 8 10 10 70 4000 60 95.6 1.42 7.92 1.42 7.92 1.83 2.8 15.2
2.6
4.5
93 4.8 11.6 12 90 4000 88.5 137 2.45 13.2 2.45 13.2 3.2 4.5 18.3
4.3

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model JR variations. If the maxi-
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model JR Unit: mm
Model No. JR 25 JR 35 JR 45 JR 55
1000 1000 1000 1000
LM rail standard 1500 2000 2000 2000
length (LO) 2000 4000 4000 4000
Max length 2000 4000 4000 4000

Note2) For jointing two or more rails, a metal fitting like the one shown in Fig.1 is available. Contact THK for details.
Fig.1
B-166
HCR
LM Guide
(Separate)
R Guide Type Model HCR ................ B-168 Structure and features....................... A-259
Options............................................. B-223 Rated Loads in All Directions ............ A-260
The LM Block Dimension (Dimension L) Equivalent Load ................................ A-260
with LaCS and Seals Attached ........... B-228 Service Life ....................................... A-100
Cap C ................................................ B-250 Radial Clearance Standard ............... A-115

the Products".
B-167
R Guide Model HCR
T1 T
M
H3
W1 W2
Model No. Height Width Length H3

Grease
nipple
M W L B C S L1 T T1 N E
HCR 12A+60/100R 18 39 44.6 32 18 M4 30.5 4.5 5 3.4 3.5 PB1021B 3.1

HCR 15A+60/150R 56.2 24
HCR 15A+60/300R 24 47 56.4 38 28 M5 38.8 10.3 11 4.5 5.5 PB1021B 3.5
HCR 15A+60/400R 56.5 28
HCR 25A+60/500R
HCR 25A+60/750R 36 70 83 57 45 M8 59.5 14.9 16 6 12 B-M6F 5.5
HCR 25A+60/1000R
HCR 35A+60/600R 109.2
HCR 35A+60/800R 109.3
48 100 82 58 M10 80.4 19.9 21 8 12 B-M6F 7.5
HCR 35A+60/1000R 109.3
HCR 35A+60/1300R 109.3
HCR 45A+60/800R 138.7
HCR 45A+60/1000R 138.8
60 120 100 70 M12 98 23.9 25 10 16 B-PT1/8 10
HCR 45A+60/1200R 138.8
HCR 45A+60/1600R 138.9
HCR 65A+60/1000R 197.8
HCR 65A+60/1500R 197.9
HCR 65A+45/2000R 90 170 197.9 142 106 M16 147 34.9 37 19 16 B-PT1/8 14
HCR 65A+45/2500R 197.9
HCR 65A+30/3000R 197.9
Model number coding
HCR25A 2 UU +60 / 1000R T

Model number Contamination R-Guide LM rail length
protection center (in mm)
accessory angle
symbol (*1)
Symbol for LM rail jointed use
No. of LM blocks used on the same rail
B-168
n1-φ d1 through, φ d2 counter bore depth h
（U） B
4-S C
（n1-1）×θ 2
θ
θ2
LM Guide
θ1 （
Ri
1）
R
Ro
L0
（E）（L）
（L1）
N
M1
Unit: mm

LM rail dimensions rating moment kN-m＊
MA MB MC
Width Height C C0
1 Double 1 Double 1
R R0 Ri L0 U W1 W2 M1 d1×d2×h n1 θ ° θ 1° θ 2° kN kN
100 106 94 100 13.4 12 13.5 11 3.5×6×5 3 60 7 23 4.7 8.53 0.0409 0.228 0.0409 0.228 0.0445
150 157.5 142.5 150 20.1 3 7 23 6.66 10.8
300 307.5 292.5 300 40 15 16 15 4.5×7.5×5.3 5 60 6 12 8.33 13.5 0.0805 0.457 0.0805 0.457 0.0844
400 407.5 392.5 400 54 7 3 9 8.33 13.5
500 511.5 488.5 500 67 9 2 7
750 761.5 738.5 750 100 23 23.5 22 7×11×9 12 60 2.5 5 19.9 34.4 0.307 1.71 0.307 1.71 0.344
1000 1011.5 988.5 1000 134 15 2 4
600 617 583 600 80 7 3 9
800 817 783 800 107 11 2.5 5.5
34 33 29 9×14×12 60 37.3 61.1 0.782 3.93 0.782 3.93 0.905
1000 1017 983 1000 134 12 2.5 5
1300 1317 1283 1300 174 17 2 3.5
800 822.5 777.5 800 107 8 2 8
1000 1022.5 977.5 1000 134 10 3 6
45 37.5 38 14×20×17 60 60 95.6 1.42 7.92 1.42 7.92 1.83
1200 1222.5 1177.5 1200 161 12 2.5 5
1600 1622.5 1577.5 1600 214 15 2 4
1000 1031.5 968.5 1000 134 8 60 2 8
1500 1531.5 1468.5 1500 201 10 60 3 6
2000 2031.5 1968.5 1531 152 63 53.5 53 18×26×22 12 45 0.5 4 141 215 2.45 13.2 2.45 13.2 3.2
2500 2531.5 2468.5 1913 190 13 45 1.5 3.5
3000 3031.5 2968.5 1553 102 10 30 1.5 3
Note) LM rail radiuses other than the radiuses in the above table are also available. Contact THK for details.
The R-Guide center angles in the table are maximum manufacturing angles. To obtain angles greater than them, rails
must be additionally connected. Contact THK for details.

B-170
HMG
LM Guide
(Separate)
Model HMG ....................................... B-172 Structure and features....................... A-263
Jointed LM rail................................... B-174 Rated Loads in All Directions ............ A-265
Cap C ................................................ B-250 Shoulder Height of the Mounting Base
Examples of Table Mechanisms ....... A-267

the Products".
B-171
Model HMG
（L）
W （L'）
（E）
２−Ｓ×l B
L1
N 〃〃
W1 W2
Outer dimensions LM block dimensions LM rail dimensions

LM rail Height
Model No.
M W L L´ B S×l L1 N E W1 W2 F M1
HMG15A 25 47 48 28.8 38 M5×11 16 4.3 5.5 15 16 60 15
HMG25A 36 70 62.2 42.2 57 M8×16 25.6 6 12 23 23.5 60 22
HMG35A 48 100 80.6 54.6 82 M10×21 32.6 8 12 34 33 80 29
HMG45A 60 120 107.6 76.6 100 M12×25 42.6 10 16 45 37.5 105 38
HMG65A 90 170 144.4 107.4 142 M16×37 63.4 19 16 63 53.5 150 53
B-172
d2
h
M1
d1
F
Straight rail
R
LM Guide
B
θ1
θ２ θ１
（ｎ−1）
×θ 2
θ
Curved rail
Unit: mm
Basic dynamic
Basic static load rating (C0)
Mounting hole Curved rail load rating (C)
Resultant load Straight section Curved section
d1×d2×h R n θ° θ 1° θ 2°
(C) kN (Cost) kN (Cor) kN
150 3 60 7 23
4.5×7.5×5.3 300 5 60 6 12 2.56 4.23 0.44
400 7 60 3 9
500 9 60 2 7
7×11×9 750 12 60 2.5 5 9.41 10.8 6.7
1000 15 60 2 4
600 7 60 3 9
800 11 60 2.5 5.5
9×14×12 17.7 19 11.5
1000 12 60 2.5 5
1300 17 60 2 3.5
800 8 60 2 8
1000 10 60 3 6
14×20×17 28.1 29.7 18.2
1200 12 60 2.5 5
1600 15 60 2 4
1000 8 60 2 8
1500 10 60 3 6
18×26×22 2000 12 45 0.5 4 66.2 66.7 36.2
2500 13 45 1.5 3.5
3000 10 30 1.5 3
With HMG, a single LM block is capable of receiving moments in all directions.
Table 1 shows the permissible moment of an LM block in the MA, MB and MC directions.
Table1 Static Permissible Moments of Model HMG Unit: kN-m
MA MB MC
Model No.
Straight section Curved section Straight section Curved section Straight section Curved section
HMG15 0.008 0.007 0.008 0.01 0.027 0.003
HMG25 0.1 0.04 0.1 0.05 0.11 0.07
HMG35 0.22 0.11 0.22 0.12 0.29 0.17
HMG45 0.48 0.2 0.48 0.22 0.58 0.34
HMG65 1.47 0.66 1.47 0.73 1.83 0.94

Jointed LM rail
[Level Difference Specification for the Joint]

An accuracy error in LM rail installation has Table2 Level Difference Specification for the Joint
influence on the service life of the product. Unit: mm
When installing the LM rail, take care to mini- Maximum

Ball
clearance
mize the level difference in the joint within the Model No. raceway, Upper face
of the joint
specification indicated in Table2. For the joint side face
section
between curved rails and another between the 15 0.01 0.02 0.6
curved section and the joint rail, we recommend 25 0.01 0.02 0.7
using a flushing piece like the one shown in 35 0.01 0.02 1.0
Fig.1. When using the flushing piece, place the 45 0.01 0.02 1.3
fixed butt piece on the outer side, push the rail 65 0.01 0.02 1.3
against the butt piece, and then adjust the level
difference in the joint section by turning the
adjustment screw from the inner side.
Note) Place the pin on the outer circumference and the bolt on the inner circumference.
Pin or butt piece
adjustment bolt
Fig.1 Flush piece
[About the Curved Section]

The curved section of model HMG has a clearance for a structural reason. Therefore, this model may
not be used in applications where highly accurate feed is required. In addition, the curved section
cannot withstand a large moment. When a large moment is applied, it is necessary to increase the
number of LM blocks or LM rails. For permissible moment values, see Table1 on B-173.
[Jointed LM Rail]
Model HMG always requires a jointed rail where
a
an LM block travels from the straight section to b
the curved section and where the curve is
inverted such as an S curve. Take this into G F F/2
account when design the system. L
d2
h
M1
Wo d1 W1
B-174
Table3 Dimension of the Jointed Rail Unit: mm
Dimension of the jointed rail
Mounting Taper
Model No. Height Pitch Width Taper length Radius
hole depth
M1 F d1×d2×h W1 W0 a b R
14.78 0.22 150
15A 15 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 15 14.89 28 0.11 300
14.92 0.08 400
LM Guide
22.83 0.17 500
25A 22 60 7×11×9 23 22.89 42 0.11 750
22.92 0.08 1000
33.77 0.23 600
33.83 0.17 800
35A 29 80 9×14×12 34 54
33.86 0.14 1000
33.9 0.1 1300
44.71 0.29 800
44.77 0.23 1000
45A 38 105 14×20×17 45 76
44.81 0.19 1200
44.86 0.14 1600
62.48 0.52 1000
62.66 0.34 1500
65A 53 150 18×26×22 63 62.74 107 0.26 2000
62.8 0.2 2500
62.83 0.17 3000
500
50
°
60
R1
0
30
R
60°
60
°
Fig.2 Examle of model No.
Model number coding

When 2 rails are used
HMG15A 2 UU C1 +1000L T + 60/150R 6T + 60/300R 6T -Ⅱ

Model number Contamination
protection Overall linear Center angle No. of inner Radius of outer Symbol for
LM rail length of one inner curved LM rails curved rail No. of rails (*2)
accessory
symbol (*1) per rail curved rail jointed
Symbol for Radius of inner Center angle of No. of outer curved
No. of LM blocks Radial clearance linear LM rail curved rail one outer curved LM rails jointed
per rail symbol joint rail
Normal (No symbol)
Light preload (C1)/Medium preload (C0)

Note) This model number indicates that an LM block and an LM rail constitute one set (i.e., the required number of sets when
2 rails are used is 2).
Model HMG does not have a seal as standard. For the model number above, Fig.2 applies.
B-175
B-176
NSR-TBC
LM Guide
(Separate)
Model NSR-TBC ............................... B-178 Structure and features....................... A-269
Standard Length and Maximum Length B-180 Rated Loads in All Directions ............ A-270
of the LM Rail................................... Equivalent Load ................................ A-270
Service Life ....................................... A-100
Dedicated Bellows J for Model NSR-TBC B-245 and the Corner Radius ...................... A-326

the Products".
B-177
Model NSR-TBC
4−φ ＨＷ（E）
Ｂ
T N
（K）
M
H3
Ｗ2 Ｗ1 （E1）
Outer dimensions LM casing dimensiones
Model No.
Height Width Length
Grease
nipple
M W L B C H T K N E E1 H3
NSR 20TBC 40 70 67 55 50 6.6 8 34.5 5.5 8.5 7 A-M6F 5.5

NSR 25TBC 50 90 78 72 60 9 10 43.5 6 8.5 7.5 A-M6F 6.5
NSR 30TBC 60 100 90 82 72 9 12 51 8 8.5 9.5 A-M6F 9
NSR 40TBC 75 120 110 100 80 11 13 64 10 8.5 12 A-M6F 10.5
NSR 50TBC 82 140 123 116 95 14 15 74 9 15 15 A-PT1/8 8
NSR 70TBC 105 175 150 150 110 14 18 95.5 10 15 16.5 A-PT1/8 9.5
Model number coding
NSR50TBC 2 UU C1 +1200L P T -Ⅱ
Model number Contamination LM rail length
protection (in mm) Symbol for
accessory Symbol for No. of rails used
symbol (*1) LM rail on the same plane (*4)
No. of LM cases Radial clearance symbol (*2) jointed use
rail Accuracy symbol (*3)
B-178
Ｌ
Ｃ
φ ｄ2
LM Guide
h
M1
φ ｄ1
Ｆ
Unit: mm
Static Permissi-
Basic load
LM rail dimensions ble Moment＊ Mass
rating
kN-m
MA MB
Width Height Pitch Length＊ C C0 LM casing LM rail
W1 Double Double
± 0.05 casings casings
23 23.5 23 60 6×9.5×8.5 2200 9.41 18.6 0.31 0.27 0.62 3.1
28 31 28 80 7×11×9 3000 14.9 26.7 0.53 0.46 1.13 4.7
34 33 34.5 80 7×11×9 3000 22.5 38.3 0.85 0.74 1.8 7.2
45 37.5 44.5 105 9×14×12 3000 37.1 62.2 1.7 1.5 3.5 12.2
48 46 47.5 120 11×17.5×14 3000 55.1 87.4 2.7 2.4 5.2 14.3
63 56 62 150 14×20×17 3000 90.8 152 9.8 4.9 9.4 27.6
＊
Static permissible moment ＊ : double caseings: static permissible moment value with 2 casings closely contacting with
each other

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model NSR-TBC variations. If the
details.
G F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model NSR-TBC Unit: mm
Model No. NSR 20TBC NSR 25TBC NSR 30TBC NSR 40TBC NSR 50TBC NSR 70TBC
220 280 280 570 780 1270
280 440 440 885 1020 1570
340 600 600 1200 1260 2020
460 760 760 1620 1500 2620
640 1000 1000 2040 1980
LM rail standard
820 1240 1240 2460 2580
length (LO)
1000 1640 1640 2985 2940
1240 2040 2040
1600 2520 2520
3000 3000
Standard pitch F 60 80 80 105 120 150

G 20 20 20 22.5 30 35
Max length 2200 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
B-180
HSR-M1
LM Guide
(Separate)
Models HSR-M1A and HSR-M1LA ... B-182 Structure and features....................... A-273
Models HSR-M1B and HSR-M1LB ... B-184 Types and Features .......................... A-275
Models HSR-M1R and HSR-M1LR... B-186 Rated Loads in All Directions ............ A-277
Model HSR-M1YR............................. B-188 Equivalent Load ................................ A-277
Service Life ....................................... A-100
Standard Length and Maximum Length Radial Clearance Standard ............... A-114
of the LM Rail................................... B-190 Accuracy Standards .......................... A-119

the Products".
B-181
Models HSR-M1A and HSR-M1LA
W
4-S B
T1 T
M （K）
H3
W2 W1
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions

Grease
nipple
M W L B C S L1 T T1 K N E H3
HSR 15M1A 24 47 59.6 38 30 M5 38.8 6.5 11 19.3 4.3 5.5 PB1021B 3.5
HSR 20M1A 76 50.8
30 63 53 40 M6 9.5 10 26 5 12 B-M6F 4
HSR 20M1LA 92 66.8
HSR 25M1A 83.9 59.5
36 70 57 45 M8 11 16 30.5 6 12 B-M6F 5.5
HSR 25M1LA 103 78.6
HSR 30M1A 98.8 70.4
42 90 72 52 M10 9 18 35 7 12 B-M6F 7
HSR 30M1LA 121.4 93
HSR 35M1A 112 80.4
48 100 82 62 M10 12 21 40.5 8 12 B-M6F 7.5
HSR 35M1LA 137.4 105.8
Note) The length L of the high temperature type LM Guide model HSR is longer than normal type of model HSR. (Dimension L1
is the same.)
Model number coding
HSR25 M1 A 2 UU C1 +1240L P T -Ⅱ
Model number Type of Contamination LM rail length Symbol Symbol for
LM block protection (in mm) for LM rail No. of rails used
symbol (*1)
Symbol for high No. of LM blocks Radial clearance symbol (*2) Accuracy symbol (*3)
temperature used on the same Normal (No symbol) Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
type LM Guide rail Light preload (C1) Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
B-182
（E） L
L1
C
φ d2 N
LM Guide
h
M1
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
15 16 15 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 1240 8.33 13.5 0.0805 0.457 0.0805 0.457 0.0844 0.2 1.5
13.8 23.8 0.19 1.04 0.19 1.04 0.201 0.35
20 21.5 18 60 6×9.5×8.5 1500 2.3
21.3 31.8 0.323 1.66 0.323 1.66 0.27 0.47
19.9 34.4 0.307 1.71 0.307 1.71 0.344 0.59
23 23.5 22 60 7×11×9 1500 3.3
27.2 45.9 0.529 2.74 0.529 2.74 0.459 0.75
28 46.8 0.524 2.7 0.524 2.7 0.562 1.1
28 31 26 80 9×14×12 1500 4.8
37.3 62.5 0.889 4.37 0.889 4.37 0.751 1.3
37.3 61.1 0.782 3.93 0.782 3.93 0.905 1.6
34 33 29 80 9×14×12 1500 6.6
50.2 81.5 1.32 6.35 1.32 6.35 1.2 2

Models HSR-M1B and HSR-M1LB
W W
4-φ H 4-φ H
B B
t T T1 T1 T
M （K）（K）
M
H3 H3
W2 W1 W2 W1
Models HSR15, 25 to 35M1B/M1LB Models HSR20M1B/M1LB
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions

Grease
nipple
HSR 15M1B 24 47 59.6 38 30 4.5 38.8 11 6.5 7 19.3 4.3 5.5 PB1021B 3.5
HSR 20M1B 76 50.8
30 63 53 40 6 — 9.5 10 26 5 12 B-M6F 4
HSR 20M1LB 92 66.8
HSR 25M1B 83.9 59.5
36 70 57 45 7 16 11 10 30.5 6 12 B-M6F 5.5
HSR 25M1LB 103 78.6
HSR 30M1B 98.8 70.4
42 90 72 52 9 18 9 10 35 7 12 B-M6F 7
HSR 30M1LB 121.4 93
HSR 35M1B 112 80.4
48 100 82 62 9 21 12 13 40.5 8 12 B-M6F 7.5
HSR 35M1LB 137.4 105.8
is the same.)
Model number coding
HSR20 M1 LB 2 UU C0 +1000L P T -Ⅱ
symbol (*1)
B-184
（E） L
L1
C
φ d2
N
LM Guide
h
M1
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
15 16 15 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 1240 8.33 13.5 0.0805 0.457 0.0805 0.457 0.0844 0.2 1.5
13.8 23.8 0.19 1.04 0.19 1.04 0.201 0.35
20 21.5 18 60 6×9.5×8.5 1500 2.3
21.3 31.8 0.323 1.66 0.323 1.66 0.27 0.47
19.9 34.4 0.307 1.71 0.307 1.71 0.344 0.59
23 23.5 22 60 7×11×9 1500 3.3
27.2 45.9 0.529 2.74 0.529 2.74 0.459 0.75
28 46.8 0.524 2.7 0.524 2.7 0.562 1.1
28 31 26 80 9×14×12 1500 4.8
37.3 62.5 0.889 4.37 0.889 4.37 0.751 1.3
37.3 61.1 0.782 3.93 0.782 3.93 0.905 1.6
34 33 29 80 9×14×12 1500 6.6
50.2 81.5 1.32 6.35 1.32 6.35 1.2 2

Models HSR-M1R and HSR-M1LR
W
4-S×l
B
（K）
M
H3
W2 W1

Grease
nipple
HSR 15M1R 28 34 59.6 26 26 M4×5 38.8 6 23.3 8.3 5.5 PB1021B 3.5
HSR 20M1R 76 36 50.8
30 44 32 M5×6 8 26 5 12 B-M6F 4
HSR 20M1LR 92 50 66.8
HSR 25M1R 83.9 35 59.5
40 48 35 M6×8 8 34.5 10 12 B-M6F 5.5
HSR 25M1LR 103 50 78.6
HSR 30M1R 98.8 40 70.4
45 60 40 M8×10 8 38 10 12 B-M6F 7
HSR 30M1LR 121.4 60 93
HSR 35M1R 112 50 80.4
55 70 50 M8×12 10 47.5 15 12 B-M6F 7.5
HSR 35M1LR 137.4 72 105.8
is the same.)
Model number coding
HSR35 M1 R 2 UU C0 +1080L P T -Ⅱ
Model number Type of Contamination LM rail length Symbol
protection
Symbol for
LM block (in mm) for LM rail No. of rails used
accessory
symbol (*1)
jointed use on the same plane (*4)
B-186
（E） L
L1
C
φ d2 N
LM Guide
h
M1
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
15 9.5 15 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 1240 8.33 13.5 0.0805 0.457 0.0805 0.457 0.0844 0.2 1.5
13.8 23.8 0.19 1.04 0.19 1.04 0.201 0.35
20 12 18 60 6×9.5×8.5 1500 2.3
21.3 31.8 0.323 1.66 0.323 1.66 0.27 0.47
19.9 34.4 0.307 1.71 0.307 1.71 0.344 0.59
23 12.5 22 60 7×11×9 1500 3.3
27.2 45.9 0.529 2.74 0.529 2.74 0.459 0.75
28 46.8 0.524 2.7 0.524 2.7 0.562 1.1
28 16 26 80 9×14×12 1500 4.8
37.3 62.5 0.889 4.37 0.889 4.37 0.751 1.3
37.3 61.1 0.782 3.93 0.782 3.93 0.905 1.6
34 18 29 80 9×14×12 1500 6.6
50.2 81.5 1.32 6.35 1.32 6.35 1.2 2

Model HSR-M1YR
4-S×l
Ｗ
B1
B
（K）
M
H3
W1
W2
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions

Grease
nipple
M W L B1 B C S×l L1 K N E H3
HSR 15M1YR 28 33.5 59.6 4.3 11.5 18 M4×5 38.8 23.3 8.3 5.5 PB1021B 3.5
HSR 20M1YR 30 43.5 76 4 11.5 25 M5×6 50.8 26 5 12 B-M6F 4
HSR 25M1YR 40 47.5 83.9 6 16 30 M6×6 59.5 34.5 10 12 B-M6F 5.5
HSR 30M1YR 45 59.5 98.8 8 16 40 M6×9 70.4 38 10 12 B-M6F 7
HSR 35M1YR 55 69.5 112 8 23 43 M8×10 80.4 47 15 12 B-M6F 7.5
Note) The length L of the high temperature type LM Guide model HSR-YR is longer than normal type of model HSR-YR.
(Dimension L1 is the same.)
Model number coding
HSR25 M1 YR 2 UU C0 +1200L P T -Ⅱ
symbol (*1)
B-188
（E） L
L1
C
φ d2 N
LM Guide
h
M1
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
15 24 15 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 1240 8.33 13.5 0.0805 0.457 0.0805 0.457 0.0844 0.2 1.5
20 31.5 18 60 6×9.5×8.5 1500 13.8 23.8 0.19 1.04 0.19 1.04 0.201 0.35 2.3
23 35 22 60 7×11×9 1500 19.9 34.4 0.307 1.71 0.307 1.71 0.344 0.59 3.3
28 43.5 26 80 9×14×12 1500 37.3 62.5 0.524 2.7 0.524 2.7 0.562 1.3 4.8
34 51.5 29 80 9×14×12 1500 37.3 61.1 0.782 3.93 0.782 3.93 0.905 1.6 6.6

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model HSR-M1 variations. If the
details.
G F F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model HSR-M1 Unit: mm
Model No. HSR 15M1 HSR 20M1 HSR 25M1 HSR 30M1 HSR 35M1
160 220 220 280 280
220 280 280 360 360
280 340 340 440 440
340 400 400 520 520
400 460 460 600 600
460 520 520 680 680
520 580 580 760 760
580 640 640 840 840
640 700 700 920 920
700 760 760 1000 1000
LM rail standard 760 820 820 1080 1080
length (LO) 820 940 940 1160 1160
940 1000 1000 1240 1240
1000 1060 1060 1320 1320
1060 1120 1120 1400 1400
1120 1180 1180 1480 1480
1180 1240 1240
1240 1360 1300
1480 1360
1420
1480
G 20 20 20 20 20
Max length 1240 1500 1500 1500 1500
Note3) The values for HSR-M1 also apply to HSR-M1YR.
B-190
SR-M1
LM Guide
(Separate)
Models SR-M1W and SR-M1V ......... B-192 Structure and features....................... A-281
Models SR-M1TB and SR-M1SB...... B-194 Thermal Characteristics of LM Rail
and LM Block Materials ..................... A-281
and the Corner Radius......................... A-326

the Products".
B-191
Models SR-M1W and SR-M1V
4-S×l
（E） L
W
L1
B
C
φ d2
T N
（K） h
M
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Model SR-M1W
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions

Grease
nipple
SR 15M1W 57 26 39.5
24 34 26 M4×7 6 19.5 6 5.5 PB1021B 4.5
SR 15M1V 40.4 — 22.9
SR 20M1W 66.2 32 46.7
28 42 32 M5×8 7.5 22 6 12 B-M6F 6
SR 20M1V 47.3 — 27.8
SR 25M1WY 83 35 59
33 48 35 M6×9 8 26 7 12 B-M6F 7
SR 25M1VY 59.2 — 35.2
SR 30M1W 96.8 40 69.3
42 60 40 M8×12 9 32.5 8 12 B-M6F 9.5
SR 30M1V 67.9 — 40.4
SR 35M1W 111 50 79
48 70 50 M8×12 13 36.5 8.5 12 B-M6F 11.5
SR 35M1V 77.6 — 45.7
Model number coding
SR30 M1 W 2 UU C0 +1160L P T -Ⅱ
number LM block accessory jointed use No. of rails used
Symbol for high No. of LM blocks Radial clearance symbol (*2)
temperature used on the same Normal (No symbol) Accuracy symbol (*3)
type LM Guide rail Light preload (C1) Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
B-192
2-S×l
（E） L
L1
φ d2
N
LM Guide
h
M1
φ d1
F
Model SR-M1V
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
9.51 19.3 0.0925 0.516 0.0567 0.321 0.113 0.2
15 9.5 12.5 60 3.5×6×4.5 1240 1.2
5.39 11.1 0.0326 0.224 0.0203 0.143 0.0654 0.12
12.5 25.2 0.146 0.778 0.0896 0.481 0.194 0.3
20 11 15.5 60 6×9.5×8.5 1500 2.1
7.16 14.4 0.053 0.332 0.0329 0.21 0.11 0.2
20.3 39.5 0.286 1.52 0.175 0.942 0.355 0.4
23 12.5 18 60 7×11×9 1500 2.7
11.7 22.5 0.103 0.649 0.0642 0.41 0.201 0.3
30 56.8 0.494 2.55 0.303 1.57 0.611 0.8
28 16 23 80 7×11×9 1500 4.3
17.2 32.5 0.163 1.08 0.102 0.692 0.352 0.5
41.7 77.2 0.74 4.01 0.454 2.49 1.01 1.2
34 18 27.5 80 9×14×12 1500 6.4
23.8 44.1 0.259 1.68 0.161 1.07 0.576 0.8

Models SR-M1TB and SR-M1SB
4-φ H
W （E） L
B L1
C
φ d2
T1 T N
（K） h
M
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Model SR-M1TB

Grease
nipple
M W L B C H L1 T T1 K N E H3
SR 15M1TB 57 26 39.5
24 52 41 4.5 6.1 7 19.5 6 5.5 PB1021B 4.5
SR 15M1SB 40.4 — 22.9
SR 20M1TB 66.2 32 46.7
28 59 49 5.5 8 9 22 6 12 B-M6F 6
SR 20M1SB 47.3 — 27.8
SR 25M1TBY 83 35 59
33 73 60 7 9 10 26 7 12 B-M6F 7
SR 25M1SBY 59.2 — 35.2
SR 30M1TB 96.8 40 69.3
42 90 72 9 8.7 10 32.5 8 12 B-M6F 9.5
SR 30M1SB 67.9 — 40.4
SR 35M1TB 111 50 79
48 100 82 9 11.2 13 36.5 8.5 12 B-M6F 11.5
SR 35M1SB 77.6 — 45.7
Model number coding
SR30 M1 W 2 UU C0 +1000L P T -Ⅱ
Model number Type of Contamination LM rail length Symbol for
LM block protection (in mm) LM rail Symbol for
accessory jointed use No. of rails used
Symbol for high No. of LM blocks Radial clearance symbol (*2)
temperature used on the same Normal (No symbol) Accuracy symbol (*3)
type LM Guide rail Light preload (C1) Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
B-194
2-φ H
（E） L
L1
〃〃
LM Guide
φ d2
N
h
M1
φ d1
F
Model SR-M1SB
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
9.51 19.3 0.0926 0.516 0.0567 0.321 0.113 0.2
15 18.5 12.5 60 3.5×6×4.5 1240 1.2
5.39 11.1 0.0326 0.224 0.0203 0.143 0.0654 0.12
12.5 25.2 0.146 0.778 0.0896 0.481 0.194 0.3
20 19.5 15.5 60 6×9.5×8.5 1500 2.1
7.16 14.4 0.053 0.332 0.0329 0.21 0.11 0.2
20.3 39.5 0.286 1.52 0.175 0.942 0.355 0.4
23 25 18 60 7×11×9 1500 2.7
11.7 22.5 0.103 0.649 0.0642 0.41 0.201 0.3
30 56.8 0.494 2.55 0.303 1.57 0.611 0.8
28 31 23 80 7×11×9 1500 4.3
17.2 32.5 0.163 1.08 0.102 0.692 0.352 0.5
41.7 77.2 0.74 4.01 0.454 2.49 1.01 1.2
34 33 27.5 80 9×14×12 1500 6.4
23.8 44.1 0.259 1.68 0.161 1.07 0.576 0.8

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model SR-M1 variations. If the max-
imum length of the desired LM rail exceeds them, jointed rails will be used. Contact THK for details.
G F F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model SR-M1 Unit: mm
Model No. SR 15M1 SR 20M1 SR 25M1 SR 30M1 SR 35M1

160 220 220 280 280
220 280 280 360 360
280 340 340 440 440
340 400 400 520 520
400 460 460 600 600
460 520 520 680 680
520 580 580 760 760
580 640 640 840 840
640 700 700 920 920
700 760 760 1000 1000
LM rail standard
760 820 820 1080 1080
length (LO)
820 940 940 1160 1160
940 1000 1000 1240 1240
1000 1060 1060 1320 1320
1060 1120 1120 1400 1400
1120 1180 1240 1480 1480
1180 1240 1300
1240 1300 1360
1360 1420
1420 1480
G 20 20 20 20 20
Max length 1240 1500 1500 1500 1500
B-196
RSR-M1
LM Guide
(Separate)
Models RSR-M1, RSR-M1V and RSR-M1N ... B-198 Structure and features....................... A-287
Models RSR-M1WV and RSR-M1WN . B-200 Thermal Characteristics of LM Rail
and LM Block Materials ..................... A-287

the Products".
B-197
Models RSR-M1K, RSR-M1V and RSR-M1N
W L
B 4-S×l L1
φd C
N φ d2
h
M （K）
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Models RSR9M1K/9M1N and RSR12M1V/M1N
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions
Greas-
hole Grease
nipple
RSR 9M1K 30.8 10 19.8

10 20 15 M3×3 — 7.8 — — — — 2.2
RSR 9M1N 41 16 29.8
RSR 12M1V 35 15 20.6
13 27 20 M3×3.5 — 10 3 — 2 — 3
RSR 12M1N 47.7 20 33.3
RSR 15M1V 43 20 25.7 3.6
16 32 25 M3×4 — 12 3.5 — PB107 4
RSR 15M1N 61 25 43.5 3.7
RSR 20M1V 66.5 45.2
25 46 38 38 M4×6 5.7 17.5 5 6.4 — A-M6F 7.5
RSR 20M1N 86.3 65
Model number coding
2 RSR15 M1 V UU C1 +230L P T -Ⅱ
Model number Type of Contamination LM rail length Symbol for Symbol for
LM block protection
accessory (in mm) LM rail No. of rails used
symbol (*1) jointed use on the same plane (*4)
No. of LM blocks Symbol for high Radial clearance symbol (*2)
used on the same temperature Normal (No symbol) Accuracy symbol (*3)
rail type LM Guide Light preload (C1) Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
B-198
4-S×l
W （E） L
B L1
C
φ d2
LM Guide
T N
（K）
M h
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Models RSR15 and 20M1V/M1N

Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
1 Double 1 Double 1
0 1.47 2.25 7.34 43.3 7.34 43.3 10.4 0.018
9 5.5 5.5 20 3.5×6×3.3 1000 0.32
– 0.02 2.6 3.96 18.4 97 18.4 97 18.4 0.027
0 2.65 4.02 11.4 74.9 10.1 67.7 19.2 0.037
12 7.5 7.5 25 3.5×6×4.5 1340 0.58
– 0.025 4.3 6.65 28.9 163 25.5 145 31.8 0.055
0 4.41 6.57 23.7 149 21.1 135 38.8 0.069
15 8.5 9.5 40 3.5×6×4.5 1430 0.925
– 0.025 7.16 10.7 63.1 330 55.6 293 63 0.093
0 8.82 12.7 75.4 435 66.7 389 96.6 0.245
20 13 15 60 6×9.5×8.5 1800 1.95
– 0.03 14.2 20.6 171 897 151 795 157 0.337

Models RSR-M1WV and RSR-M1WN
W L
4-S×l
B L1
φd C
φ d2
N
T h
M （K）
M1
H3
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Models RSR9 and 12M1WV/M1WN
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions
Greas-
hole Grease
nipple
RSR 9M1WV 39 21 12 M2.6×3 27

12 30 — 7.8 2 — 1.6 — 4.2
RSR 9M1WN 50.7 23 24 M3×3 38.7
RSR 12M1WV 44.5 15 30.9
14 40 28 M3×3.5 4.5 10 3 — 2 — 4
RSR 12M1WN 59.5 28 45.9
RSR 15M1WV 55.5 20 38.9
16 60 45 M4×4.5 5.6 12 3.5 3 — PB107 4
RSR 15M1WN 74.5 35 57.9
Model number coding
2 RSR12 M1 WN UU C1 +310L P T
Model number Type of Contamination LM rail length Symbol for LM rail
LM block protection (in mm) jointed use
accessory
No. of LM blocks Symbol for high symbol (*1) Accuracy symbol (*3)
used on the same temperature Normal grade (No Symbol)/High accuracy grade (H)
Radial clearance symbol (*2) Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
rail type LM Guide Normal (No symbol) Ultra precision grade (UP)
Light preload (C1)
Medium preload (C0)
B-200
W （E） L
B 4-S×l L1
C
LM Guide
φ d2
T h N
M （K）
H3 M1
W3 φ d1
W2 W1 F
Models RSR15M1WV/M1WN
Unit: mm

moment N-m＊
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
1 Double 1 Double 1
0 2.45 3.92 16 92.9 16 92.9 36 0.035
18 6 — 7.5 30 3.5×6×4.5 1000 1.08
– 0.05 3.52 5.37 31 161 31 161 49.4 0.051
0 4.02 6.08 24.5 138 21.7 123 59.5 0.075
24 8 — 8.5 40 4.5×8×4.5 1340 1.5
– 0.05 5.96 9.21 53.9 274 47.3 242 90.1 0.101
0 6.66 9.8 50.3 278 44.4 248 168 0.17
42 9 23 9.5 40 4.5×8×4.5 1430 3
– 0.05 9.91 14.9 110 555 97.3 490 255 0.21

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model RSR-M1 variations.
G F F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model RSR-M1 Unit: mm
Model No. RSR 9M1 RSR 12M1 RSR 15M1 RSR 20M1 RSR 9M1W RSR 12M1W RSR 15M1W
55 70 70 220 50 70 110
75 95 110 280 80 110 150
95 120 150 340 110 150 190
115 145 190 460 140 190 230
135 170 230 640 170 230 270
155 195 270 880 200 270 310
175 220 310 1000 260 310 430
195 245 350 290 390 550
275 270 390 320 470 670
LM rail 375 320 430 550 790
standard length 370 470
(LO) 470 550
570 670
870
Standard pitch F 20 25 40 60 30 40 40
G 7.5 10 15 20 10 15 15
Max length 1000 1340 1430 1800 1000 1430 1800
B-202
HSR-M2
LM Guide
(Separate)
Model HSR-M2A ............................... B-204 Structure and features....................... A-293
Service Life ....................................... A-100

the Products".
B-203
Model HSR-M2A
Ｗ
B
4-S
T
T1
M （K）
H3
W2 W1

Grease
nipple
M W L B C S L1 T T1 K N E H3
HSR 15M2A 24 47 56.6 38 30 M5 38.8 6.5 11 19.3 4.3 5.5 PB1021B 3.5
HSR 20M2A 30 63 74 53 40 M6 50.8 9.5 10 26 5 12 B-M6F 4
HSR 25M2A 36 70 83.1 57 45 M8 59.5 11 16 30.5 6 12 B-M6F 5.5
Note) For the high corrosion resistance type LM Guide, a stainless steel end plate is optionally available. (symbol…I)
Model number coding
HSR20M2 A 2 UU C1 Ⅰ +820L P T -Ⅱ
Model number Type of Contamination End plate is LM rail length Symbol Symbol for
(high corrosion LM block protection made of (in mm) for LM rail No. of rails used
resistance type accessory stainless steel jointed use on the same plane (*4)
LM Guide) symbol (*1)
B-204
（E） L
L1
C
φ d2 N
LM Guide
h
M1
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
load rating moment N-m＊
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
15 16 15 60 4.5×7.5×5.3 1000 2.33 2.03 12.3 70.3 12.3 70.3 10.8 0.2 1.5
20 21.5 18 60 6×9.5×8.5 1000 3.86 3.57 29 160 29 160 26.5 0.35 2.3
23 23.5 22 60 7×11×9 1000 5.57 5.16 46.9 261 46.9 261 45.1 0.59 3.3
The basic load rating of the high corrosion resistance type LM Guide is smaller than ordinary stainless steel LM Guides.

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model HSR-M2 variations. If the
details.
G F F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model HSR-M2 Unit: mm
Model No. HSR 15M2 HSR 20M2 HSR 25M2

160 280 280
280 460 460
length (LO) 640 820 820
1000
Standard pitch F 60 60 60
G 20 20 20
Max length 1000 1000 1000
B-206
SRG
(Separate)
Models SRG-A, SRG-LA, SRG-C and SRG-LC .. B-208 Structure and features....................... A-301
Models SRG-V, SRG-LV, SRG-R and SRG-LR .. B-210 Types and Features .......................... A-302
Incremental dimension with grease nipple Error Allowance of the Mounting Surface A-305
(when LaCS is attached) ................... B-232
with LiCS Attached ........................ B-233
(when LiCS is attached) .................... B-234
Dedicated Bellows JSRG for Model SRG B-246
Cap C ................................................ B-250
Greasing Hole for Model SRG .......... B-257

the Products".
B-207
Models SRG-A, SRG-LA, SRG-C and SRG-LC
4-S×l 1 C2 2-S×l 2
C
W （E） L 4-φ D0
＊＊
φ d2 L1
N
T
M （K） h
M1
φ d1
W2 W1
F
Models SRG15A and 20A/LA
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions
Height Width Length

Model No.
Grease
nipple
M W L B C C2 S H l 1 l 2 L1 T T1 K N E e0 f0 D0
SRG 15A 24 47 69 38 30 26 M5 — 8 7.5 45 7 — 20 4 4.5 — — 2.9 PB107

SRG 20A 86 58
30 63 53 40 35 M6 — 10 9 10 — 25.4 5 4.5 — — 2.9 PB107
SRG 20LA 106 78
SRG 25C 95.5 65.5
36 70 57 45 40 M8 6.8 — — 9.5 10 31.5 5.5 12 6 6.4 5.2 B-M6F
SRG 25LC 115 85.1
SRG 30C 111 75
42 90 72 52 44 M10 8.5 — — 12 14 37 6.5 12 6 6.2 5.2 B-M6F
SRG 30LC 135 99
SRG 35C 125 82.2
48 100 82 62 52 M10 8.5 — — 11.5 10 42 6.5 12 6 6.5 5.2 B-M6F
SRG 35LC 155 112.2
SRG 45C 155 107
60 120 100 80 60 M12 10.5 — — 14.5 15 52 10 16 7 7 5.2 B-PT1/8
SRG 45LC 190 142
SRG 55C 185 129.2
70 140 116 95 70 M14 12.5 — — 17.5 18 60 12 16 9 7.7 5.2 B-PT1/8
SRG 55LC 235 179.2
SRG 65LC 90 170 303 142 110 82 M16 14.5 — — 229.8 19.5 20 78.5 17 16 9 12.4 5.2 B-PT1/8
Model number coding
SRG45 LC 2 QZ KKHH C0 +1200L P T Z -Ⅱ

Model Type of With QZ Contamination LM rail length With plate Symbol for
number LM block protection
Lubricator (in mm) cover No. of rails used
accessory on the same
symbol (*1) Symbol for LM plane (*4)
No. of LM blocks Radial clearance symbol (*2) rail jointed use
B-208
B
6-S C2
LM Guide
（φ H through） C
W （E） L
e0
＊＊
4-φ D0
L1
φ d2 f0
T T1 N
M （K） h
M1
φ d1
W2 W1
F
Models SRG25 to 65C/LC
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
W1
1 Double 1 Double 1
-0.05
4 15 16 15.5 30 4.5×7.5×5.3 2500 11.3 25.8 0.21 — 0.21 — 0.24 0.20 1.58
21 46.9 0.48 0.48 0.58 0.42
4.6 20 21.5 20 30 6×9.5×8.5 3000 — — 2.58
26.7 63.8 0.88 0.88 0.79 0.57
27.9 57.5 0.641 3.7 0.641 3.7 0.795 0.7
4.5 23 23.5 23 30 7×11×9 3000 3.6
34.2 75 1.07 5.74 1.07 5.74 1.03 0.9
39.3 82.5 1.02 6.21 1.02 6.21 1.47 1.2
5 28 31 26 40 9×14×12 3000 4.4
48.3 108 1.76 9.73 1.76 9.73 1.92 1.6
59.1 119 1.66 10.1 1.66 10.1 2.39 1.9
6 34 33 30 40 9×14×12 3000 6.9
76 165 3.13 17 3.13 17 3.31 2.4
91.9 192 3.49 20 3.49 20 4.98 3.7
8 45 37.5 37 52.5 14×20×17 3090 11.6
115 256 6.13 32.2 6.13 32.2 6.64 4.5
131 266 5.82 33 5.82 33 8.19 5.9
10 53 43.5 43 60 16×23×20 3060 15.8
167 366 10.8 57 10.8 57 11.2 7.8
11.5 63 53.5 54 75 18×26×22 3000 278 599 22.7 120 22.7 120 22.1 16.4 23.7
Note) The greasing hole on the top face and the pilot hole of the side nipple＊＊ are not drilled through in order to prevent foreign
material from entering the block.
See B-257 for details.

Models SRG-V, SRG-LV, SRG-R and SRG-LR
4-S×l 1 C 2-S×l 2
W （E） L
L1
＊＊
4-φ D0
φ d2
T N
M （K） h
M1
φ d1
W2 W1
F
Models SRG15V and 20V/LV
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions
Height Width Length

Model No.
Grease
nipple
M W L B C S l l 1 l 2 L1 T K N E e0 f0 D0
SRG 15V 24 34 69 26 26 M4 — 5 7.5 45 6 20 4 4.5 — — 2.9 PB107

SRG 20V 86 36 58
30 44 32 M5 — 7 9 8 25.4 5 4.5 — — 2.9 PB107
SRG 20LV 106 50 78
SRG 25R 95.5 35 65.5
40 48 35 M6 9 — — 9.5 35.5 9.5 12 6 10.4 5.2 B-M6F
SRG 25LR 115 50 85.1
SRG 30R 111 40 75
45 60 40 M8 10 — — 12 40 9.5 12 6 9.2 5.2 B-M6F
SRG 30LR 135 60 99
SRG 35R 125 50 82.2
55 70 50 M8 12 — — 18.5 49 13.5 12 6 13.5 5.2 B-M6F
SRG 35LR 155 72 112.2
SRG 45R 155 60 107
70 86 60 M10 20 — — 24.5 62 20 16 7 17 5.2 B-PT1/8
SRG 45LR 190 80 142
SRG 55R 185 75 129.2
80 100 75 M12 18 — — 27.5 70 22 16 9 22 5.2 B-PT1/8
SRG 55LR 235 95 179.2
SRG 65LV 90 126 303 76 120 M16 20 — — 229.8 19.5 78.5 17 16 9 12.4 5.2 B-PT1/8
Model number coding
SRG45 LR 2 QZ KKHH C0 +1200L P T Z -Ⅱ

Model Type of With QZ Contamination LM rail length With plate Symbol for
number LM block Lubricator protection (in mm) cover No. of rails used
No. of LM blocks jointed use
B-210
B
6-S×l C
LM Guide
W （E） L 4-φ D0
＊＊
L1 e0
φ d2
T N f0
M （K）
h
M1
φ d1
W2 W1 F
Models SRG25 to 65R/LR/LV

Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
W1
1 Double 1 Double 1
-0.05
4 15 9.5 15.5 30 4.5×7.5×5.3 2500 11.3 25.8 0.21 — 0.21 — 0.24 0.15 1.58
21 46.9 0.48 0.48 0.58 0.28
4.6 20 12 20 30 6×9.5×8.5 3000 — — 2.58
26.7 63.8 0.88 0.88 0.79 0.38
27.9 57.5 0.641 3.7 0.641 3.7 0.795 0.6
4.5 23 12.5 23 30 7×11×9 3000 3.6
34.2 75 1.07 5.74 1.07 5.74 1.03 0.8
39.3 82.5 1.02 6.21 1.02 6.21 1.47 0.9
5 28 16 26 40 9×14×12 3000 4.4
48.3 108 1.76 9.73 1.76 9.73 1.92 1.2
59.1 119 1.66 10.1 1.66 10.1 2.39 1.6
6 34 18 30 40 9×14×12 3000 6.9
76 165 3.13 17 3.13 17 3.31 2.1
91.9 192 3.49 20 3.49 20 4.98 3.2
8 45 20.5 37 52.5 14×20×17 3090 11.6
115 256 6.13 32.2 6.13 32.2 6.64 4.1
131 266 5.82 33 5.82 33 8.19 5
10 53 23.5 43 60 16×23×20 3060 15.8
167 366 10.8 57 10.8 57 11.2 6.9
11.5 63 31.5 54 75 18×26×22 3000 278 599 22.7 120 22.7 120 22.1 12.1 23.7

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model SRG variations. If the maxi-
G F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model SRG Unit: mm
Model No. SRG 15 SRG 20 SRG 25 SRG 30 SRG 35 SRG 45 SRG 55 SRG 65
160 220 220 280 280 570 780 1270
220 280 280 360 360 675 900 1570
280 340 340 440 440 780 1020 2020
340 400 400 520 520 885 1140 2620
400 460 460 600 600 990 1260
460 520 520 680 680 1095 1380
520 580 580 760 760 1200 1500
580 640 640 840 840 1305 1620
640 700 700 920 920 1410 1740
700 760 760 1000 1000 1515 1860
760 820 820 1080 1080 1620 1980
820 940 940 1160 1160 1725 2100
940 1000 1000 1240 1240 1830 2220
1000 1060 1060 1320 1320 1935 2340
1060 1120 1120 1400 1400 2040 2460
1120 1180 1180 1480
length (LO) 1560 2250 2700
1180 1240 1240 1560
1240 1360 1300 1640 1640 2355 2820
1360 1480 1360 1720 1720 2460 2940
1480 1600 1420 1800 1800 2565 3060
1600 1720 1480 1880 1880 2670
1840 1540 1960 1960 2775
1960 1600 2040 2040 2880
2080 1720 2200 2200 2985
2200 1840 2360 2360 3090
1960 2520 2520
2080 2680 2680
2200 2840 2840
2320 3000 3000
2440
Standard pitch F 30 30 30 40 40 52.5 60 75

G 20 20 20 20 20 22.5 30 35
Max length 2500 3000 3000 3000 3000 3090 3060 3000
B-212
SRN
(Separate)
Models SRN-C and SRN-LC............. B-214 Structure and features....................... A-307
Models SRN-R and SRN-LR............. B-216 Types and Features .......................... A-308
Cap C ................................................ B-250 Error Allowance of the Mounting Surface A-310
Greasing Hole for Model SRN........... B-258

the Products".
B-213
Models SRN-C and SRN-LC
T1 T
M （K）
H3
W2 W1
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions
Height Width Length

Model No.
Grease
nipple
M W L B C C2 S H L1 T T1 K N E e0 f0 D0 H3
SRN 35C 125 82.2

44 100 82 62 52 M10 8.5 7.5 10 38 6.5 12 8 6.5 5.2 B-M6F 6
SRN 35LC 155 112.2
SRN 45C 155 107
52 120 100 80 60 M12 10.5 7.5 15 45 7 12 8.5 7 5.2 B-M6F 8
SRN 45LC 190 142
SRN 55C 185 129
63 140 116 95 70 M14 12.5 10.5 18 53 8 16 10 8 5.2 PT1/8 10
SRN 55LC 235 179.2
SRN 65LC 75 170 303 142 110 82 M16 14.5 229.8 19.5 20 65 14 16 9 11 5.2 PT1/8 11.5
Model number coding
SRN45 C 2 KK C0 +1160L P T Z -Ⅱ
Model Type of Contamination LM rail length With plate
protection (in mm) cover Symbol for
symbol (*1) Symbol for LM rail on the same plane (*4)
B-214
B
LM Guide
6-S
C2
(φ H through) C
（E） L ＊＊
4-φ D0
L1 e0
φ d2
N f0
h
M1
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
W1
1 Double 1 Double 1
-0.05
59.1 119 1.66 10.1 1.66 10.1 2.39 1.6
34 33 30 40 9×14×12 3000 6.9
76 165 3.13 17 3.13 17 3.31 2
91.9 192 3.49 20 3.49 20 4.98 3
45 37.5 36 52.5 14×20×17 3090 11.3
115 256 6.13 32.2 6.13 32.2 6.64 3.6
131 266 5.82 33 5.82 33 8.19 4.9
53 43.5 43 60 16×23×20 3060 15.8
167 366 10.8 57 10.8 57 11.2 6.4
63 53.5 49 75 18×26×22 3000 278 599 22.7 120 22.7 120 22.1 12.7 21.3

Models SRN-R and SRN-LR
（K）
M
H3
W2 W1
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions
Height Width Length

Model No.
Grease
nipple
M W L B C S×l L1 T K N E e0 f0 D0 H3
SRN 35R 125 50 82.2

44 70 50 M8×9 7.5 38 6.5 12 8 6.5 5.2 B-M6F 6
SRN 35LR 155 72 112.2
SRN 45R 155 60 107
52 86 60 M10×11 7.5 45 7 12 8.5 7 5.2 B-M6F 8
SRN 45LR 190 80 142
SRN 55R 185 75 129
63 100 75 M12×13 10.5 53 8 16 10 8 5.2 PT1/8 10
SRN 55LR 235 95 179.2
SRN 65LR 75 126 303 76 120 M16×16 229.8 19.5 65 14 16 9 11 5.2 PT1/8 11.5
Model number coding
SRN45 LR 2 KK C0 +1200L P T Z -Ⅱ
Model Type of Contamination LM rail length With plate
protection (in mm) cover Symbol for
symbol (*1) Symbol for LM rail on the same plane (*4)
B-216
B
LM Guide
6-S×l C
（E） L
L1 e0
＊＊
4-φ D0
φ d2
N f0
h
M1
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
MA MB MC LM LM
block rail
W1
1 Double 1 Double 1
-0.05
59.1 119 1.66 10.1 1.66 10.1 2.39 1.1
34 18 30 40 9×14×12 3000 6.9
76 165 3.13 17 3.13 17 3.31 1.4
91.9 192 3.49 20 3.49 20 4.98 1.9
45 20.5 36 52.5 14×20×17 3090 11.3
115 256 6.13 32.2 6.13 32.2 6.64 2.5
131 266 5.82 33 5.82 33 8.19 3.2
53 23.5 43 60 16×23×20 3060 15.8
167 366 10.8 57 10.8 57 11.2 4.5
63 31.5 49 75 18×26×22 3000 278 599 22.7 120 22.7 120 22.1 9.4 21.3

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model SRN variations. If the maxi-
G F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model SRN Unit: mm
Model No. SRN 35 SRN 45 SRN 55 SRN 65

280 570 780 1270
360 675 900 1570
440 780 1020 2020
520 885 1140 2620
600 990 1260
680 1095 1380
760 1200 1500
840 1305 1620
920 1410 1740
1000 1515 1860
1080 1620 1980
1160 1725 2100
1240 1830 2220
1320 1935 2340
length (LO) 1480 2145 2580
1560 2250 2700
1640 2355 2820
1720 2460 2940
1800 2565 3060
1880 2670
1960 2775
2040 2880
2200 2985
2360 3090
2520
2680
2840
3000
Standard pitch F 40 52.5 60 75

G 20 22.5 30 35
Max length 3000 3090 3060 3000
B-218
SRW
(Separate)
Model SRW-LR ................................. B-220 Structure and features....................... A-313
Service Life ....................................... A-100
Options............................................. B-223 Radial Clearance............................... A-115
Dedicated Bellows JSRW for Model SRW .. B-247 and the Corner Radius ...................... A-329
Cap C ................................................ B-250 Permissible Error of the Mounting Surface . A-316
Greasing Hole for Model SRW.......... B-259

the Products".
B-219
Model SRW-LR
（K）
M
H3
W2 W1
Outer
LM block dimensions
dimensions

Grease
nipple
M W L B B1 C S×l L1 T K N E e0 f0 D0 H3
SRW 70LR 70 135 190 115 34 80 M10×20 142 20 62 20 16 7 17 5.2 B-PT1/8 8

SRW 85LR 80 165 235 140 40 95 M12×19 179.2 28 70 22 16 9 17.7 5.2 B-PT1/8 10
SRW 100LR 100 200 303 172 50 110 M14×20 229.8 20 88.5 27 16 9 22.4 5.2 B-PT1/8 11.5
Model number coding
SRW70LR 2 QZ KKHH C0 +1200L P T Z -Ⅱ

Model number With QZ Contamination LM rail length With plate Symbol for
protection
Lubricator (in mm) cover No. of rails used
B-220
W3 B1 B
LM Guide
8-S×l C
(E) L
4-φ D0
＊＊
L1 e0
φ d2
N f0
h
M1
φ d1
F
Unit: mm
Length MA MB MC LM LM
Width Height Pitch C C0
＊
block rail
0 W2 W3 M1 F d1×d2×h Max kN kN kg kg/m
-0.05 block blocks block blocks block
70 32.5 28 37 52.5 11×17.5×14 3090 115 256 6.13 32.2 6.13 32.2 10.2 6.3 18.6
85 40 32 43 60 14×20×17 3060 167 366 10.8 57 10.8 57 17.5 11.0 26.7
100 50 38 54 75 16×23×20 3000 278 599 22.7 120 22.7 120 33.9 21.6 35.9
Note) 1. Model SRW is attached with “SS” as standard.
2. This model number indicates that a single-rail unit constitutes one set. (i.e., required number of sets when 2 rails are
3. For the standard LM rail length, see Table1 on B-222.
4. The greasing hole on the top face and the pilot hole of the side nipple＊＊ are not drilled through in order to prevent
foreign material from entering the block.
For details, see B-259.
5. The removing/mounting jig is not provided as standard. When desiring to use it, contact THK.

Table1 shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of model SRW variations. If the maxi-
mum length of the desired LM rail exceeds them, jointed rails will be used.
If desiring connected use of this model, be sure to indicate the overall length so that we can manu-
facture the product without leaving a level difference in the joint.
G F G
L0
Table1 Standard Length and Maximum Length of the LM Rail for Model SRW Unit: mm
Model No. SRW 70 SRW 85 SRW 100

570 780 1270
675 900 1570
780 1020 2020
885 1140 2620
990 1260
1095 1380
1200 1500
1305 1620
1410 1740
1515 1860
1620 1980
LM rail standard length 1725 2100
(L0) 1830 2220
1935 2340
2040 2460
2145 2580
2250 2700
2355 2820
2460 2940
2565 3060
2670
2775
2880
2985
Standard pitch F 52.5 60 75
G 22.5 30 35
Max length 3090 3060 3000
B-222
LM Guide
Options
B-223
Dimensions of Each Model with an Option Attached
0
The LM Block Dimension (Dimension L) with LaCS and Seals Attached
L
Overall LM block length
with LaCS attached
(Standard LM block length)
Unit: mm
L
Model No. Standard
overall UU SS DD ZZ KK SSHH DDHH ZZHH KKHH
length
15C/V/R 64.4 64.4 64.4 69.8 66.8 72.2 78.6 84 79.8 85.2
15LC/LV 79.4 79.4 79.4 84.8 81.8 87.2 93.6 99 94.8 100.2
20C/V 79 79 79 85.4 83 89.4 93.6 100 96 102.4
20LC/LV 98 98 98 104.4 102 108.4 112.6 119 115 121.4
25C/V/R 92 92 92 101.6 100.4 107.6 112 119.2 114.4 121.6
25LC/LV/LR 109 109 109 118.6 117.4 124.6 129 136.2 131.4 138.6
30C/V/R 106 106 106 116 113.8 122.4 129.4 138 131.8 140.4
30LC/LV/LR 131 131 131 141 138.8 147.4 154.4 163 156.8 165.4
SHS
35C/V/R 122 122 122 134.8 132.4 142.2 148 157.8 150.4 160.2
35LC/LV/LR 152 152 152 164.8 162.4 172.2 178 187.8 180.4 190.2
45C/V/R 140 140 140 152.8 151.2 161 169 178.8 172.2 182
45LC/LV/LR 174 174 174 186.8 185.2 195 203 212.8 206.2 216
55C/V/R 171 171 171 186.6 184.2 195.4 202 213.2 205.2 216.4
55LC/LV/LR 213 213 213 228.6 226.2 237.4 244 255.2 247.2 258.4
65C/V 221 221 221 238.6 236.2 248.6 258 270.4 261.2 273.6
65LC/LV 272 272 272 289.6 287.2 299.6 309 321.4 312.2 324.6
15XVY 40.3 40.3 40.3 47.3 44.9 50.7 59.5 65.3 60.7 66.5
15XWY/XTBY 56.9 56.9 56.9 63.9 61.5 67.3 76.1 81.9 77.3 83.1
20XV 47.7 47.7 47.7 54.6 53.4 60.3 67.7 74.6 70.1 77
20XW/XTB 66.5 66.5 66.5 73.4 72.2 79.1 86.5 93.4 88.9 95.8
SSR
25XVY 60 60 60 67.4 65.7 73.1 80 87.4 82.4 89.8
25XWY/XTBY 83 83 83 90.4 88.7 96.1 103 110.4 105.4 112.8
30XW 97 97 97 105.1 102.7 110.8 121 129.1 123.4 131.5
35XW 110.9 110.9 110.9 119.9 117.7 126.7 136.9 145.9 139.3 148.3
25R/C 82.8 82.8 82.8 90.4 89.2 96.8 100.1 107.7 102.5 110.1
25LR/LC 102 102 102 109.6 108.4 116 119.3 126.9 121.7 129.3
30R/C 98 98 98 107.8 104.4 114.2 118.5 128.3 120.9 130.7
30LR/LC 120.5 120.5 120.5 130.3 126.9 136.7 141 150.8 143.4 153.2
SNR/ 35R/C 109.5 109.5 109.5 119.7 117.1 127.3 131.1 141.3 133.5 143.7
SNS 35LR/LC 135 135 135 145.2 142.6 152.8 156.6 166.8 159 169.2
45R/C 138.2 138.2 138.2 148.4 146.6 156.8 163.2 173.4 166.4 176.6
45LR/LC 171 171 171 181.2 179.4 189.6 196 206.2 199.2 209.4
55R/C 163.3 163.3 163.3 172.7 171.1 181.3 187.8 198 191 201.2
55LR/LC 200.5 200.5 200.5 209.9 208.3 218.5 225 235.2 228.2 238.4
B-224
Unit: mm
L
Model No. Standard
overall length UU SS DD ZZ KK SSHH DDHH ZZHH KKHH
65R/C 186 186 186 196.2 194.2 204.8 214.3 224.9 217.5 228.1
SNR/
65LR/LC 246 246 246 256.2 254.2 264.8 274.3 284.9 277.5 288.1
SNS
85LR/LC 302.8 302.8 302.8 313.8 311.8 322.8 — — — —
12CAM/CRM 37 37 37 — — — — — — —
LM Guide (Options)
12HRM 50.4 50.4 50.4 — — — — — — —
14CAM/CRM 45.5 45.5 45.5 — — — — — — —
17CAM/CRM 51 51 51 54 53.4 56.4 — — — —
SHW
21CA/CR 59 59 59 64 63.2 68.2 75.6 80.6 77.2 82.2
27CA/CR 72.8 72.8 72.8 78.6 77.8 83.6 89.4 95.2 91.8 97.6
35CA/CR 107 107 107 114.4 112 119.4 129 136.4 131.4 138.8
50CA/CR 141 141 141 149.2 147.4 155.6 166 174.2 168.4 176.6
7 23.4 23.4 23.4 — — — — — — —
7W 31 31 31 — — — — — — —
9 30.8 30.8 30.8 — — — — — — —
9W 39 39 39 — — — — — — —
12 34.4 34.4 34.4 — — — — — — —
SRS
12W 44.5 44.5 44.5 — — — — — — —
15 43 43 43 — — — — — — —
15W 55.5 55.5 55.5 — — — — — — —
20 50 50 50 — — — 67.2 — — —
25 77 77 77 — — — 95.2 — — —
15S 64.4 64.4 64.4 69.8 66.8 72.2 78.9 84.4 79.9 85.2
20S 79 79 79 85.4 83 89.4 94 100 96 102.5
20 98 98 98 104.4 102 108.4 113 119 115 121.5
25 109 109 109 118.6 117.4 124.6 129 136.2 131.4 138.6
SCR
30 131 131 131 141 138.8 147.4 154.4 163 156.8 165.4
35 152 152 152 164.8 162.4 172.2 178 187.8 180.4 190.2
45 174 174 174 186.8 185.2 195 203 212.8 206.2 216
65 272 272 272 289.6 287.2 299.6 309 321.4 312.2 324.6
8RM 24 24 — — — — — — — —
10RM 31 31 — — — — — — — —
12RM 45 45 — — — — — — — —
15A/B/R/YR 56.6 56.6 56.6 61.8 58.2＊ 63.4＊ 76 81.2 77.2 82.4
20A/B/R/CA/CB/YR 74 74 74 80.6 76.6 83.2 92 98.6 95.2 101.8
20LA/LB/LR/HA/HB 90 90 90 96.6 92.6 99.2 108 114.6 111.2 117.8
25A/B/R/CA/CB/YR 83.1 83.1 83.1 90.7 86.7 94.3 101 108.6 105.3 112.9
25LA/LB/LR/HA/HB 102.2 102.2 102.2 109.8 105.8 113.4 120.1 127.7 124.4 132
30A/B/R/CA/CB/YR 98 98 98 105.6 101.6 109.2 119.9 127.5 124.2 131.8
30LA/LB/LR/HA/HB 120.6 120.6 120.6 128.2 124.2 131.8 142.5 150.1 146.8 154.4
35A/B/R/CA/CB/YR 109.4 109.4 109.4 117 113 120.6 132.4 140 135.6 143.2
HSR 35LA/LB/LR/HA/HB 134.8 134.8 134.8 142.4 138.4 146 157.8 165.4 161 168.6
45A/B/R/CA/CB/YR 139 139 139 146.2 144.2 151.4 — — — —
45LA/LB/LR/HA/HB 170.8 170.8 170.8 178 176 183.2 — — — —
55A/B/R/CA/CB/YR 163 163 163 170.2 168.2 175.4 — — — —
55LA/LB/LR/HA/HB 201.1 201.1 201.1 208.3 206.3 213.5 — — — —
65A/B/R/CA/CB/YR 186 186 186 193.2 191.2 198.4 — — — —
65LA/LB/LR/HA/HB 245.5 245.5 245.5 252.7 250.7 257.9 — — — —
85A/B/R/CA/CB/YR 245.6 245.6 245.6 252.8 252.4 259.6 — — — —
85LA/LB/LR/HA/HB 303 303 303 310.2 309.8 317 — — — —
100HA/HB/HR 334 334 334 — — — — — — —
120HA/HB/HR 365 365 365 — — — — — — —
150HA/HB/HR 396 396 396 — — — — — — —
B-225
Unit: mm
L
Model No. Standard
length
15W/TB 57 57 57 62.2 58.4＊ 63.6＊ — — — —
15V/SB 40.4 40.4 40.4 45.6 41.8＊ 47＊ — — — —
20W/TB 66.2 66.2 66.2 72.8 70.6＊ 77.2＊ — — — —
20V/SB 47.3 47.3 47.3 53.9 51.7＊ 58.3＊ — — — —
25WY/TBY 83 83 83 90.6 87.4 95 — — — —
25VY/SBY 59.2 59.2 59.2 66.8 63.6 71.2 — — — —
30W/TB 96.8 96.8 96.8 104.4 99.4 107 — — — —
30V/SB 67.9 67.9 67.9 75.5 70.5 78.1 — — — —
SR 35W/TB 111 111 111 118.6 113.6 121.2 — — — —
35V/SB 77.6 77.6 77.6 85.2 80.2 87.8 — — — —
45W/TB 126 126 126 134.6 129.4 138 — — — —
55W/TB 156 156 156 164.6 159.4 168 — — — —
70T 194.6 194.6 194.6 201.8 200.8 208 — — — —
85T 180 180 180 — — — — — — —
100T 200 200 200 — — — — — — —
120T 235 235 235 — — — — — — —
150T 280 280 280 — — — — — — —
25XR/XA/XB 82.8 82.8 82.8 90.4 89.2 96.8 100.1 107.7 102.5 110.1
25XLR/XLA/XLB 102 102 102 109.6 108.4 116 119.3 126.9 121.7 129.3
30R/A/B 98 98 98 107 104.4 113.4 119.3 128.3 121.7 130.7
30LR/LA/LB 120.5 120.5 120.5 129.5 126.9 135.9 141.8 150.8 144.2 153.2
35R/A/B 109.5 109.5 109.5 119.7 117.1 127.3 131.1 141.3 133.5 143.7
35LR/LA/LB 135 135 135 145.2 142.6 152.8 156.6 166.8 159 169.2
45R/A/B 139 139 139 149.2 147.4 157.6 164.4 174.6 167.6 177.8
45LR/LA/LB 171 171 171 181.2 179.4 189.6 196.4 206.6 199.6 209.8
NR/ 55R/A/B 162.8 162.8 162.8 173 171.4 181.6 188.1 198.3 191.3 201.5
NRS 55LR/LA/LB 200 200 200 210.2 208.6 218.8 225.3 235.5 228.5 238.7
65R/A/B 185.6 185.6 185.6 196.2 194.2 204.8 214.9 225.5 218.1 228.7
65LR/LA/LB 245.6 245.6 245.6 256.2 254.2 264.8 274.9 285.5 278.1 288.7
75R/A/B 218 218 218 229 226.6 237.6 — — — —
75LR/LA/LB 274 274 274 285 282.6 293.6 — — — —
85R/A/B 246.7 246.7 246.7 257.7 256.1 267.1 — — — —
85LR/LA/LB 302.8 302.8 302.8 313.8 312.2 323.2 — — — —
100R/A/B 288.8 288.8 288.8 297.8 295.6 307.2 — — — —
100LR/LA/LB 328.8 328.8 328.8 337.8 335.6 347.2 — — — —
12LRM 37 37 37 — — — — — — —
14LRM 45.5 45.5 45.5 — — — — — — —
17CA/CR 50.8 50.8 — 54.8 54.4 60.2 — — — —
21CA/CR 58.8 58.8 — 64.2 62.8 69 — — — —
HRW
27CA/CR 72.8 72.8 72.8 79 75.6 81.8 — — — —
35CA/CR 106.6 106.6 106.6 113.8 112 119.2 — — — —
50CA/CR 140.5 140.5 140.5 147.7 143.3 150.5 — — — —
60CA 158.9 158.9 158.9 169.7 165.1 175.9 — — — —
3M 12 — — — — — — — — —
3N 16 — — — — — — — — —
3WM 14.1 14.9 — — — — — — — —
3WN 19.1 19.9 — — — — — — — —
RSR/
5M 15.5 16.9 — — — — — — — —
RSR-W
5N 18.7 20.1 — — — — — — — —
5WM 20.7 22.1 — — — — — — — —
5WN 26.7 28.1 — — — — — — — —
7M 22 23.4 — — — — — — — —
B-226
Unit: mm
L
Model No. Standard
length
7N 31.6 33 — — — — — — — —
7WM 30 31 — — — — — — — —
7WN 39.9 40.9 — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — —
LM Guide (Options)
9KM 27.8 30.8
9N 37.8 41 — — — — — — — —
9WV 36 39 — — — — — — — —
9WVM 36 39 — — — — — — — —
9WN 47.7 50.7 — — — — — — — —
12VM 31 35 — — — — — — — —
12N 43.7 47.7 — — — — — — — —
RSR/
12WV 41.3 44.5 — — — — — — — —
RSR-W
12WVM 41.3 44.5 — — — — — — — —
12WN 56.3 59.5 — — — — — — — —
14WV 47.3 50 — — — — — — — —
15VM 38.9 43 — — — — — — — —
15N 56.5 61 — — — — — — — —
15WV 51.5 55.5 — — — — — — — —
15WVM 51.5 55.5 — — — — — — — —
15WN 70.5 74.5 — — — — — — — —
20VN 61.5 66.5 — — — — — — — —
20N 81.3 86.3 — — — — — — — —
7ZM 21.6 23.4 — — — — — — — —
9ZM 29.1 30.8 — — — — — — — —
12ZM 32.6 35 35 — — — — — — —
RSR-Z/ 15ZM 40.2 43 43 — — — — — — —
WZ 7WZM 29.2 31.5 — — — — — — — —
9WZM 37.6 39 39 — — — — — — —
12WZM 42.1 44.5 44.5 — — — — — — —
15WZM 53.1 55.5 55.5 — — — — — — —
7M 20.4 23.4 — — — — — — — —
RSH 9KM 27.8 30.8 — — — — — — — —
12VM 31 35 — — — — — — — —
7ZM 20.4 23.4 — — — — — — — —
9ZM 29.1 30.8 — — — — — — — —
12ZM 32.6 35 35 — — — — — — —
RSH-Z/ 15ZM 40.2 43 43 — — — — — — —
WZ 7WZM 28 31.5 — — — — — — — —
9WZM 37.6 39 39 — — — — — — —
12WZM 42.1 44.5 44.5 — — — — — — —
15WZM 53.1 55.5 55.5 — — — — — — —
918 45 45 — — — — — — — —
1123 52 52 — — — — — — — —
1530 69 69 — — — — — — — —
2042 91.6 91.6 — — — — — — — —
2042T 110.7 110.7 — — — — — — — —
2555 121 121 — — — — — — — —
HR
2555T 146.4 146.4 — — — — — — — —
3065 145 145 — — — — — — — —
3065T 173.5 173.5 — — — — — — — —
3575 154.8 154.8 — — — — — — — —
3575T 182.5 182.5 — — — — — — — —
4085 177.8 177.8 — — — — — — — —
B-227
Unit: mm
L
Model No. Standard
length
4085T 215.9 215.9 — — — — — — — —
50105 227 227 — — — — — — — —
HR
50105T 274.5 274.5 — — — — — — — —
60125 329 329 — — — — — — — —
15T 59.8 59.8 59.8 65 65.8 71 — — — —
15V 47.1 47.1 47.1 52.3 53.1 58.3 — — — —
20T 74 74 74 80.6 77.6 84.2 — — — —
20V 58.1 58.1 58.1 64.7 61.7 68.3 — — — —
GSR
25T 88 88 88 95 91.6 98.6 — — — —
25V 69 69 69 76 72.6 79.6 — — — —
30T 103 103 103 110.6 107.2 114.8 — — — —
35T 117 117 117 124.6 121.2 128.8 — — — —
25T-R 88 88 88 95 91.6 98.6 — — — —
25V-R 69 69 69 76 72.6 79.6 — — — —
GSR-R
30T-R 103 103 103 110.6 107.2 114.8 — — — —
35T-R 117 117 117 124.6 121.2 128.8 — — — —
15 56.6 56.6 56.6 61.8 58.2＊ 63.4＊ — — — —
20S 74 74 74 80.6 76.6 83.2 — — — —
20 90 90 90 96.6 92.6 99.2 — — — —
25S 83.1 83.1 83.1 90.7 86.7 94.3 — — — —
CSR 25 102.2 102.2 102.2 109.8 105.8 113.4 — — — —
30S 98 98 98 105.6 101.6 109.2 — — — —
30 120.6 120.6 120.6 128.2 124.2 131.8 — — — —
35 134.8 134.8 134.8 142.4 138.4 146 — — — —
45 170.8 170.8 170.8 178 176 183.2 — — — —
5M 22.3 23.3 — — — — — — — —
MX
7WM 39.8 40.8 — — — — — — — —
25A/B/R 83.1 83.1 83.1 90.7 89.4 97 — — — —
35A/B/R 113.6 113.6 113.6 125.6 122 134＊ — — — —
JR
45A/B/R 145 145 145 159 150.8 164.8＊ — — — —
55A/B/R 165 165 165 175.4 170.4 180.8＊ — — — —
12A+60/100R 44.6 44.6 — — — — — — — —
15A+60/150R 56.2 56.2 56.2 61.8 57.8 63 — — — —
15A+60/300R 56.4 56.4 56.4 62 58 63.2 — — — —
15A+60/400R 56.5 56.5 56.5 62.1 58.1 63.3 — — — —
25A+60/500R 83 83 83 90.6 86.6 94.2 — — — —
25A+60/750R 83 83 83 90.6 86.6 94.2 — — — —
25A+60/1000R 83 83 83 90.6 86.6 94.2 — — — —
35A+60/600R 109.2 109.2 109.2 116.7 112.7 120.3 — — — —
35A+60/800R 109.3 109.3 109.3 116.8 112.8 120.4 — — — —
35A+60/1000R 109.3 109.3 109.3 116.8 112.8 120.4 — — — —
HCR
35A+60/1300R 109.3 109.3 109.3 116.8 112.8 120.4 — — — —
45A+60/800R 138.7 138.7 138.7 145.9 143.9 151.1 — — — —
45A+60/1000R 138.8 138.8 138.8 146 144 151.2 — — — —
45A+60/1200R 138.8 138.8 138.8 146 144 151.2 — — — —
45A+60/1600R 138.9 138.9 138.9 146.1 144.1 151.3 — — — —
65A+60/1000R 197.8 197.8 197.8 204.7 202.7 209.9 — — — —
65A+60/1500R 197.9 197.9 197.9 204.8 202.8 210 — — — —
65A+60/2000R 197.9 197.9 197.9 204.8 202.8 210 — — — —
65A+60/2500R 197.9 197.9 197.9 204.9 202.9 210.1 — — — —
65A+60/3000R 197.9 197.9 197.9 204.9 202.9 210.1 — — — —
HMG 15A 48 48 — — — — — — — —
B-228
Unit: mm
L
Model No. Standard
length
25A 62.2 62.2 — — — — — — — —
35A 80.6 80.6 — — — — — — — —
HMG
45A 107.6 107.6 — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — —
LM Guide (Options)
65A 144.4 144.4
20TBC 67 67 — — — — — — — —
25TBC 78 78 — — — — — — — —
NSR- 30TBC 90 90 — — — — — — — —
TBC 40TBC 110 110 110 — — — — — — —
50TBC 123 123 123 — — — — — — —
70TBC 150 150 150 — — — — — — —
15M1A/M1B/M1R/M1YR 59.6 59.6 59.6 — — — — — — —
20M1A/M1B/M1R/M1YR 76 76 76 — — — — — — —
20M1LA/M1LB/M1LR 92 92 92 — — — — — — —
25M1A/M1B/M1R/M1YR 83.9 83.9 83.9 — — — — — — —
HSR-
25M1LA/M1LB/M1LR 103 103 103 — — — — — — —
M1
30M1A/M1B/M1R/M1YR 98.8 98.8 98.8 — — — — — — —
30M1LA/M1LB/M1LR 121.4 121.4 121.4 — — — — — — —
35M1A/M1B/M1R/M1YR 112 112 112 — — — — — — —
35M1LA/M1LB/M1LR 137.4 137.4 137.4 — — — — — — —
15M1W/M1TB 57 57 57 — — — — — — —
15M1V/M1SB 40.4 40.4 40.4 — — — — — — —
20M1W/M1TB 66.2 66.2 66.2 — — — — — — —
20M1V/M1SB 47.3 47.3 47.3 — — — — — — —
SR- 25M1W/M1TB 83 83 83 — — — — — — —
M1 25M1V/M1SB 59.2 59.2 59.2 — — — — — — —
30M1W/M1TB 96.8 96.8 96.8 — — — — — — —
30M1V/M1SB 67.9 67.9 67.9 — — — — — — —
35M1W/M1TB 111 111 111 — — — — — — —
35M1V/M1SB 77.6 77.6 77.6 — — — — — — —
9M1K 27.8 30.8 — — — — — — — —
9M1N 37.8 41 — — — — — — — —
9M1WV 36 39 — — — — — — — —
9M1WN 47.7 50.7 — — — — — — — —
12M1V 31 35 — — — — — — — —
12M1N 43.7 47.7 — — — — — — — —
RSR- 12M1WV 41.3 44.5 — — — — — — — —
M1 12M1WN 56.3 59.5 — — — — — — — —
15M1V 38.9 43 — — — — — — — —
15M1N 56.5 61 — — — — — — — —
15M1WV 51.5 55.5 — — — — — — — —
15M1WN 70.5 74.5 — — — — — — — —
20M1V 61.5 66.5 — — — — — — — —
20M1N 81.3 86.3 — — — — — — — —
15M2A 56.6 56.6 56.6 — — — — — — —
HSR-
20M2A 74 74 74 — — — — — — —
M2
25M2A 83.1 83.1 83.1 — — — — — — —
15A/V 69 69 69 71 — — — — — —
20A/V 86 86 86 88 91.4 93.4 106.6 108.6 109 111
20LA/LV 106 106 106 108 111.4 113.4 126.6 128.6 129 131
SRG
25C/R 95.5 95.5 95.5 100.5 100.5 105.5 115.3 120.3 117.7 122.7
25LC/LR 115.1 115.1 115.1 120.1 120.1 125.1 134.9 139.9 137.6 142.3
30C/R 111 111 111 118 116 123 130.8 137.8 133.2 140.2
B-229
Unit: mm
L
Model No. Standard
length
30LC/LR 135 135 135 142 140 147 154.8 161.8 157.2 164.2
35C/R 125 125 125 132.8 133.4 141.4 148.6 151 151 159
35LC/LR 155 155 155 162.8 163.4 171.2 178.6 181 181 188.8
45C/R 155 155 155 164.2 164.2 173.4 182 185.2 185.5 194.5
SRG
45LC/LR 190 190 190 199.2 199.2 208.4 217 220.2 220.2 229.4
55C/R 185 185 185 194.2 194.2 203.4 212 215.2 215.5 224.5
55LC/LR 235 235 235 244.2 244.2 253.4 262 265.2 265.2 274.4
65LC/LV 303 303 303 314.2 314.2 325.4 335.4 338.6 338.6 349.8
35C/R 125 125 125 132.8 133.4 141.4 148.6 151 151 159
35LC/LR 155 155 155 162.8 163.4 171.2 178.6 181 181 188.8
45C/R 155 155 155 164.2 164.2 173.4 182 185.2 185.5 194.5
SRN 45LC/LR 190 190 190 199.2 199.2 208.4 217 220.2 220.2 229.4
55C/R 185 185 185 194.2 194.2 203.4 212 215.2 215.5 224.5
55LC/LR 235 235 235 244.2 244.2 253.4 262 265.2 265.2 274.4
65LC/LR 303 303 303 314.2 314.2 325.4 335.4 338.6 338.6 349.8
70LR 190 190 190 199.2 197.2 206.4 217 226.2 220.2 229.4
SRW 85LR 235 235 235 244.2 242.2 251.4 262 271.2 265.2 274.4
100LR 303 303 303 314.2 311.4 322.6 335.4 346.6 338.6 349.8
A grease nipple cannot be attached. Contact THK for details.
Model number coding

Symbol With Symbol for No.
Model Type of With QZ LM rail length for LM rail steel of rails used on
number LM block Lubricator (*1) (in mm) jointed use tape the same plane (*5)
Radial clearance Accuracy symbol (*4)
No. of LM blocks Contamination symbol (*3) Normal grade (No Symbol)
used on the same protection Normal (No symbol) High accuracy grade (H)
rail accessory Light preload (C1) Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
symbol (*2) Medium preload (C0) Ultra precision grade (UP)
(*1) See A-361. (*2) See A-368. (*3) See A-113. (*4) See A-118. (*5) See A-59.
B-230
Incremental Dimension with Grease Nipple (When LaCS is Attached)
Grease nipple H Grease nipple
LM Guide (Options)
K : Reference surface E
LaCS Endplate LaCS Endplate

Grease nipple mounting location Grease nipple mounting location
for models SHS, SSR, SNR/SNS, SRG and NR/NRS for models SHW, SRS and HSR
Unit: mm
Model No. Nipple type
H
15C/LC — PB107
15R/V/LV 4.7 PB107
20C/LC — PB107
20V/LV 4.5 PB107
25C/LC — PB107
25R/LR/V/LV 4.7 PB107
30C/LC — A-M6F
30R/LR/V/LV 7.4 A-M6F
SHS
35C/LC — A-M6F
45C/LC — A-M6F
55C/LC — A-M6F
65C/LC — A-M6F
65V/LV 6.9 A-M6F
15XVY/XWY 4.4 PB107
15XTBY — PB107
20XV/XW 4.6 PB107
20XTB — PB107
SSR
25XVY/XWY 4.5 PB107
25XTBY — PB107
30XW 5 PB1021B
35XW 5 PB1021B
25C/LC — PB1021B
25R/LR 4.9 PB1021B
30C/LC — PB1021B
30R/LR 4.5 PB1021B
35C/LC — A-M6F
35R/LR 7.8 A-M6F
SNR/SNS
45C/LC — A-M6F
45R/LR 7.9 A-M6F
55C/LC — A-M6F
55R/LR 7.7 A-M6F
65C/LC — A-PT1/8
65R/LR 15.8 A-PT1/8
B-231
Unit: mm
E
21CA/CR 4.2 PB1021B
27CA/CR 10.7 B-M6F
SHW
35CA/CR 10.0 B-M6F
50CA/CR 21 B-PT1/8
SRS 25 4 PB1021B
15A/B/R/YR 2.9 PB1021B
20A/B/R/CA/CB/YR 9.4 B-M6F
20LA/LB/LR/HA/HB 9.4 B-M6F
25A/B/R/CA/CB/YR 9 B-M6F
HSR 25LA/LB/LR/HA/HB 9 B-M6F
30LA/LB/LR/HA/HB 9 B-M6F
35LA/LB/LR/HA/HB 8 B-M6F
25A/B/LA/LB — PB1021B
25R/LR 4.8 PB1021B
30A/B/LA/LB — PB1021B
30R/LR 4.5 PB1021B
35A/B/LA/LB — A-M6F
35R/LR 7.4 A-M6F
NR/NRS
45R/LR 7.4 A-M6F
55R/LR 6.9 A-M6F
65A/B/LA/LB — A-PT1/8
65R/LR 15.3 A-PT1/8
35LC — A-M6F
35LR 7.2 A-M6F
45LC — A-M6F
45LR 7.2 A-M6F
SRG
55LC — A-M6F
55LR 7.2 A-M6F
65LC — A-M6F
65LR 6.2 A-M6F
Note1) When desiring the mounting location for the grease nipple other than the above, contact THK.
Note2) Those models equipped with QZ Lubricator cannot have a grease nipple. When desiring both QZ Lubricator and a
grease nipple, contact THK.
Note3) When desiring a grease nipple for model SHW or SRS without QZ Lubricator, indicate “with grease nipple” when plac-
ing an order. (If not, a grease nipple will not be attached.)
Note4) Model HSR15 attached with ZZ or KK cannot have a grease nipple. Contact THK for details.
B-232
LM Block Dimension (Dimension L) with LiCS Attached
L
with LiCS attached
LM Guide (Options)
Unit: mm
L
Model No.
Standard overall length GG PP
15XVY 40.3 48.7 48.7
15XWY/XTBY 56.9 65.3 65.3
20XV 47.7 55.8 55.8
20XW/XTB 66.5 74.6 74.6
SSR
25XVY 60 67.6 67.6
25XWY/XTBY 83 90.6 90.6
30XW 97 106.7 106.7
35XW 110.9 121.7 121.7
15A 67 77 77
SRG
15V 67 77 77
Model number coding
SSR20 XW 2 GG C1 +600L P T -Ⅱ
Model Type of With LiCS LM rail length Symbol Symbol for No. of rails used on
number LM block (*1) (in mm) for LM rail the same plane (*4)
Radial clearance jointed use
Light preload (C1) Precision grade (P) /Super precision grade (SP)
(*1) See A-355 (*2) See A-113 (*3) See A-118 (*4) SeeA-59
B-233
Incremental Dimension with Grease Nipple (When LiCS is Attached)
Grease nipple
LiCS Endplate
Location for Mounting the Grease Nipple
Unit: mm
E
15XVY 2.9 PB1021B
15XWY/XTBY 2.9 PB1021B
20XV 9 B-M6F
20XW/XTB 9 B-M6F
SSR
25XVY 9 B-M6F
25XWY/XTBY 9 B-M6F
30XW 9 B-M6F
35XW 8 B-M6F
15A 4.5 PB107
SRG
15V 4.5 PB107
Model number coding
SSR20 XW 2 GG C1 +600L H -Ⅱ
Model Type of With LiCS LM rail length Symbol for No. of rails
number LM block (*1) (in mm) used on the same plane (*4)
Radial clearance
used on the same rail Light preload (C1) High accuracy grade (H)/Precision grade (P)
Medium preload (C0) Super precision grade (SP)/Ultra precision grade (UP)
(*1) See A-355 (*2) See A-113 (*3) See A-118 (*4) SeeA-59
B-234
Bellows
[Dedicated Bellows JSH for Model SHS]
The table below shows the dimensions of dedicated bellows JSH for model SHS. Specify the corre-
sponding model number of the desired bellows from the table.
W
LM Guide (Options)
b b1 S Lmax W
Lmin W
a
P t1
H
H1 H1
t4 t2
P t3
S1 b2 S1
Models SHS15 to 30 Models SHS35 to 65

Unit: mm
Main dimensions Supported
Model No. model
W H H1 P b1 C V R b2 t2 t3 t4 numbers
15 53 26 26 15 22.4 4 4 8 — — 8 — 15
20 60 30 30 17 27.6 7.5 7.5 — — — 8 6 20
25 75 36 36 20 38 9.1 9.1 13.1 — — 9 7 25
30 80 38 38 20 44 11 11 14 — — 11 8 30
JSH SHS
35 86 40.5 40.5 20 50 11 11 18 20 21.5 — — 35
45 97 46 46 20 64.6 13.5 13.5 23.5 26 26.5 — — 45
55 105 48 48 20 68 13 13 23 30 31.5 — — 55
65 126 63 63 25 80 18 18 — 34 45 — — 65
Unit: mm
Supported Other dimensions

A
model Mounting bolt a b Lmax
numbers S S1 C V R C V R Lmin
15 M2×8 l M4×8 l 5 5 1 3 9.5 9.5 5
20 M2.6×8 l M3×6 l 5 5 — – 1.5 8 — 6
25 M3×8 l M3×6 l 6 6 2 2.5 13.5 13.5 7
30 M3×10 l M3×6 l 3 3 0 –5 10 10 7
SHS
35 M4×10 l M4×8 l 0 0 –7 –7 8 8 7
45 M4×12 l M4×8 l –5 –5 – 15 – 11.7 5.5 5.5 7
55 M5×12 l M5×10 l –9 –9 – 19 – 17.5 2.5 2.5 7
65 M6×14 l M6×12 l –8 –8 — – 22 0 — 9
Note1) When desiring to use the dedicated bellows other than in horizontal mount (i.e., vertical, wall and inverted mount), or
when desiring a heat-resistant type of bellows, contact THK.
Note2) For lubrication when using the dedicated bellows, contact THK.
Note3) When using the dedicated bellows, the LM block and LM rail need to be machined so that the bellows can be mounted.
Be sure to indicate that the dedicated bellows is required when ordering the LM Guide.
Model number coding Note) The length of the bellows

JSH35 - 60/420 is calculated as follow.
S
Lmin ＝ S: Stroke length (mm)
Model number of Dimensions of the bellows （A– 1）
bellows for SHS35 (length when compressed Lmax ＝ Lmin•A A: Extension rate
/ length when extended)
B-235
[Dedicated Bellows JSSR-X for Model SSR]
The table below shows the dimensions of dedicated bellows JSSR-X for model SSR. Specify the cor-
responding model number of the desired bellows from the table.
W W
b b1 S
a
P t1
H H1
t4
t3 t2
P S
b2
Models SSR15X to 25X Models SSR30X and 35X

Unit: mm
Main dimensions Sup-
b A ported
Model No. Mount-
Lmax model
ing bolt XW/
W H H1 P b1 t1 b2 t2 t3 t4 a XTB Lmin numbers
S XV
15X 51 24 26 15 20.5 4.7 — — 8 — M3×5 l 5 8.5 – 0.5 5 15X
20X 58 26 30 15 25 4.2 — — 6 6 M3×5 l 4 8 – 0.5 5 20X
JSSR 25X 71 33 38 20 29 5 — — 6 7 M3×5 l 7 11.5 –1 7 SSR 25X
30X 76 37.5 37.5 20 35 9 12 17 — — M4×6 l 3 8 — 7 30X
35X 84 39 39 20 44 7 14 20 — — M5×10 l 2 7 — 7 35X

JSSR35X - 60/420 is calculated as follow.
S
bellows for SSR35X (length when compressed Lmax ＝ Lmin•A A: Extension rate
B-236
[Dedicated Bellows JSN for Models SNR and SNS]
For models SNR/SNS-C, SNR/SNS-LC, SNR/SNS-R and SNR/SNS-LR, a simplified bellows is avail-
able. Attach the simplified bellows when the LM Guide is used in locations subject to a coolant or the
like. To gain a higher contamination protection effect, attach a telescopic cover outside the simplified
bellows after the bellows is mounted.
W
b S Lmax W W
LM Guide (Options)
Lmin t3
t1
P
H H1 H1
t2 t2
P T S1 S1
Models SNR25 to 45 Models SNR55 and 65

Unit: mm
A
Model No. Mounting bolt Lmax model
W H H1 P b t1 t2 t3 S S1 T Lmin numbers
25 50 25.5 24.5 10 26.6 4.6 13 — M3×5 l M4×4 l 1.5 7 25

30 60 31 30 14 34 5.5 17 — M4×8 l M4×4 l 1.5 9 30
35 70 35 34 15 36 6 20.5 — M4×8 l M5×4 l 2 10 35
SNR/
JSN 45 86 40.5 39.5 17 47 6.5 24 — M5×10 l M5×4 l 2 10 45
SNS
55 100 49 48 19.5 54 10 29.5 18 M5×10 l M5×4 l 2 13 55
65 126 60 59 22 64 13.5 36.2 20 M6×12 l M6×5 l 3.2 13 65
85 156 70.5 70.5 30 110 15.5 39.5 28 M6×12l M6×5l 3.2 20 85
Note1) When desiring to use the simplified bellows other than in horizontal mount (i.e., vertical, wall and inverted mount), or
Note2) For lubrication when using the simplified bellows, contact THK.
Note3) For the bellows for models SNR/SNS-CH, SNR/SNS-LCH, SNR/SNS-RH and SNR/SNS-LRH, contact THK.
Note4) When using the simplified bellows, the LM block and LM rail need to be machined so that the bellows can be mounted.
Be sure to indicate that the simplified bellows is required when ordering the LM Guide.

JSN25 - 60/420 is calculated as follow.
S
bellows for SNR/SNS25 (length when compressed Lmax ＝ Lmin•A A: Extension rate
Table Telescopic cover Simplified bellows
Base
Fig.1 Example of Mounting the Simplified Bellows
B-237
[Dedicated Bellows JSHW for Model SHW]
The table below shows the dimensions of dedicated bellows JSHW for model SHW. Specify the cor-
W Lmax W
b b1 Lmin
S
a
P1
H H1
t1
t2
P2 S1 b2
Unit: mm
Model No. model
W H H1 P1 P2 b1 t1 b2 t2 numbers
17 68 22 23 15 15.4 39 2.6 18 6 17
21 75 25 26 17 17 35.8 2.9 22 7 21
JSHW 27 85 33.5 33.5 20 20 25 3.5 20 10 SHW 27
35 120 35 35 20 20 75 7.5 40 13 35
50 164 42 42 20 20 89.4 14 50 16 50
Unit: mm
Other dimensions
Mounting bolt a b A
Model No. Lmax
Model Model
S
＊
S1 Lmin
CA CR
17 M2×4 l M3×6 l 8 4 9 5
21 M2×5 l M3×6 l 8 3.5 10.5 6
JSHW 27 M2.6×6 l M3×6 l 10 2.5 11.5 7
35 M3×8 l M3×6 l 6 0 10 7
50 M4×12 l M4×8 l — 1 17 7
Note3) For the mounting bolts marked with "＊", use tapping screws.

JSHW21 - 60/360 is calculated as follow.
S
bellows for SHW21 (length when compressed Lmax ＝ Lmin•A A: Extension rate
B-238
[Dedicated Bellows JH for Model HSR]
The table below shows the dimensions of dedicated bellows JH for model HSR. Specify the corre-
b W Lmax W W
b1 S Lmin
a
P t1
LM Guide (Options)
H H1 H1
t4
t3 t2
P S b2
Models HSR15 to 30 Models HSR35 to 85

Unit: mm
Main dimensions
Model A Supported
t1 Mounting a b model
No. bolt Lmax
numbers
W H H1 P b1 A/B R b2 t2 t3 t4 S A/B R A/B R Lmin
15 55 27 30 15 25 2.5 6.5 — — 10 — ＊
M4×8 l 7.5 3.5 – 4 – 10.5 5 15
20 66 32 35 17 34 5 5 — — 6 8 M3×6 l 7 7 – 1.5 – 11 6 20
25 78 38 38 20 30 7 11 — — 10 8 M3×6 l 8.5 4.5 – 4 – 15 7 25
30 84 42 42 20 40 8 11 — — 11 10 M4×8 l 7 4 3 – 12 7 30
JH 35 88 43 43 20 40 9 16 14 23 — — M4×8 l 4 — 6 –9 7 HSR 35
45 100 51 51 20 58 10 20 20 29 — — M5×10 l — — 10 –7 7 45
55 108 54 54 20 66 11 21 26 35 — — M5×10 l — — 16 –4 7 55
65 132 68 68 20 80 19 19 32 42 — — M6×12 l — — 19 –3 7 65
85 170 88 88 30 105 23 23 44 50 — — M6×12 l — — 22.5 – 7 10 85
Note1) For model JH15's location marked with " ＊ ", mounting bolts are used only on the LM rail side while the LM block side
uses M2 x 5 (nominal) tapping screws.

JH25 - 60/420 is calculated as follow.
S
bellows for HSR25 (length when compressed Lmax ＝ Lmin•A A: Extension rate
B-239
[Dedicated Bellows DH for Model HSR]
For models HSR15, 20 and 25, bellows DH, which has the following features, is also available other
than the dedicated bellows JH. Specify the corresponding model number of the desired bellows from
the table.
z Features
(1) Has a width and height smaller than the conventional product so that any part of the bellows
does not stick out of the top face of the LM block. The extension rate is equal to or greater than
that of the conventional type.
(2) Has an intermediate plate for each crest so that it will not easily lift and the bellows can be used
with vertical mount, wall mount and slant mount.
(3) Operable at high speed, at up to 120 m/min.
(4) Since a Velcro tape can be used to install the bellows, a regular-size model can be cut to the
desired length, or two or more regular-size bellows can be taped together.
(5) Can be installed using screws just as bellows JH.
In this case, a plate (thickness: 1.6 mm) must be placed between the bellows and the LM bock.
W Velcro l max Velcro W

a
b b1 d l min S
P t1
H H
t4
t3
P
Intermediate plate Secured with an adhesive or screw
Unit: mm
Main dimensions
Model Exten Supported
t1 a b sion Factor model
No. rate numbers
W H P b1 A/B R t3 t4 d A/B R A/B R l max l min A E k
15 35 19.5 8.5 25 2.5 6.5 10 — 3.5 0 4 6 – 0.5 10 2.5 4 2 1.2 15
DH 20 45 25 10 34 5 5 6 8 4 0 0 9 – 0.5 13 2.5 5 2 1.3 HSR 20
25 52 29.5 12 30 7 11 10 8 4 0 4 9 –2 15 3 5 2 1.3 25
Model number coding Note) The maximum length of the bellows itself
DH20 - 50/250
is calculated as follows.
Lmax（Lmin）＝ l max（l mim）×200
Model number of Dimensions of the bellows Example of calculating bellows dimensions:
bellows for HSR20 (length when compressed When the stroke of model HSR20 is: l s＝530mm
ls 530
Lmin ＝＝＝ 132.5 ≒ 135
（A– 1） 4
Lmax ＝ A•Lmin ＝ 5× 135 ＝ 675
Number of required crests n
Lmax 675
n ＝＝＝ 51.9 ≒ 52 crests
P•k 10×1.3
Lmin ＝ n•l min＋E ＝ 52×2.5＋2 ＝132
(E indicates the plate thickness of 2)

Therefore, the model number of the required
bellows is DH20-132/675.
B-240
[Dedicated Bellows JS for Model SR]
The table below shows the dimensions of dedicated bellows JS for model SR. Specify the corre-
b W Lmax
S b1 a Lmin W
LM Guide (Options)
H t1 H1
t4 t2
P t3
S S b2
Models SR15 to 25 Models SR30 to 70

Unit: mm
A
Model No. Mount- b Lmax model
ing bolt numbers
W H H1 P b1 t1 b2 t2 t3 t4 S a W/V TB/SB Lmin
15 51 24 26 15 22 3.4 — — 8 — M3×6l 5 8.5 – 0.5 5 15
20 58 26 30 15 25 4.2 — — 6 6 M3×6l 4 8 – 0.5 5 20
25 71 33 38 20 29 5 — — 6 7 M3×6l 7 11.5 –1 7 25
30 76 37.5 37.5 20 42 5 12 17 — — M4×8l 3 8 –7 7 30
JS SR
35 84 39 39 20 44 6.5 14 20 — — M5×10l 1.5 7 –8 7 35
45 95 47.5 47.5 20 60 8 22 27 — — M5×10l – 1.5 5 – 12.5 7 45
55 108 55.5 55.5 25 70 10 24 28 — — M6×12l – 0.5 4 – 16 9 55
70 144 67 67 30 90 13 34 35 — — M6×12l – 3 9 — 10 70

JS55 - 60/540 is calculated as follow.
S
bellows for SR55 (length when compressed Lmax ＝ Lmin•A A: Extension rate
B-241
[Dedicated Bellows DS for Model SR]
For models SR15, 20 and 25, bellows DS, which has the following features, is also available other
than the dedicated bellows JS. Specify the corresponding model number of the desired bellows from
the table.
z Features
(1) Has a width and height smaller than the conventional product so that any part of the bellows
does not stick out of the top face of the LM block. The extension rate is equal to or greater than
that of the conventional type.
(2) Has an intermediate plate for each crest so that it will not easily lift and the bellows can be used
with vertical mount, wall mount and slant mount.
(3) Operable at high speed, at up to 120 m/min.
(4) Since a Velcro tape can be used to install the bellows, a regular-size model can be cut to the
desired length, or two or more regular-size bellows can be taped together.
(5) Can be installed using screws just as the conventional type.
In this case, a plate (thickness: 1.6 mm) must be placed between the bellows and the LM bock.
W W
b b1 d a Velcro l max Velcro
l min d
P t1
H H
t4
t3
P Intermediate plate Secured with an adhesive or screw
Unit: mm
Main dimensions
Model Supported
Extension
b Factor model
No. rate
numbers
W H P b1 t1 t3 t4 d a W/V TB/SB l max l min A E k
15 38 19 10 22 3.4 8 — 3.5 0 7 2 13 2.5 5 2 1.3 15
DS 20 49 22 10 25 4.2 6 6 4 0 5 3.5 13 2.5 5 2 1.3 SR 20
25 56 26 12 29 5 6 7 4 0 8.5 4 15 3 5 2 1.3 25
Model number coding Note) The maximum length of the bellows itself is
DS20 - 50/250 calculated as follows.
Lmax（Lmin）＝ l max（l min）× 200
Model number of Dimensions of the bellows Example of calculating bellows dimensions:
bellows for SR20 (length when compressed When the stroke of model SR20 is: l s＝530mm
ls 530
Lmin ＝＝＝ 132.5 ≒ 135
（A– 1） 4
Lmax ＝ A•Lmin ＝ 5×135 ＝ 675
Number of required crests n
Lmax 675
n ＝＝＝ 51.9 ≒ 52 crests
P•k 10×1.3
Lmin ＝ n•l min＋E ＝ 52×2.5＋2 ＝132
(E indicates the plate thickness of 2)
Therefore, the model number of the required
bellows is DH20-132/675.
B-242
[Simplified Bellows JN Dedicated for Models NR/NRS]
For models NR/NRS, a simplified bellows is available. To gain a higher contamination protection
effect, attach a telescopic cover outside the simplified bellows after the bellows is mounted.
b W
b1 Lmax W W
S t3
Lmin
t1
P H1
H H1
LM Guide (Options)
t2 t2
P S1 S1
T
Models NR/NRS 25X to 45 Models NR/NRS 55 to 100
Unit: mm
Main dimensions
Model A Supported
Mounting bolt b Lmax model
No. A,LA numbers
Lmin
W H H1 P b1 t1 t2 t3 S S1 B,LB T
25 48 25.5 25.5 10 26.6 4.6 13 — M3×5 l M4×4 l 11 1.5 7 25X
30 60 31 31 14 34 5.5 17 — M4×8 l M4×4 l 15 1.5 9 30
35 70 35 35 15 36 6 20.5 — M4×8 l M5×4 l 15 2 10 35
45 86 40.5 40.5 17 47 6.5 24 — M5×10 l M5×4 l 17 2 10 45
NR/
JN 55 100 49 49 20 54 10 29.5 18 M5×10 l M5×4 l 20 2 13 55
NRS
65 126 57.5 57.5 20 64 13.5 36.2 20 M6×12 l M6×5 l 22 3.2 13 65
75 145 64 64 30 80 10.5 34.2 26 M6×12 l M6×5 l 25 3.2 20 75
85 156 70.5 70.5 30 110 15.5 39.5 28 M6×12 l M6×5 l 39.5 3.2 20 85
100 200 82 82 30 140 15 40 34 M8×16 l M6×5 l 30 3.2 20 100
Note1) When desiring to use the simplified bellows other than in horizontal mount (i.e., vertical, wall and inverted mount), or
Note2) For lubrication when using the simplified bellows, contact THK.
Note3) When using the simplified bellows, the LM block and LM rail need to be machined so that the bellows can be mounted.
Be sure to indicate that the simplified bellows is required when ordering the LM Guide.

JN25 - 60/420 is calculated as follow.
S
bellows for NR/NRS25X (length when compressed Lmax ＝ Lmin•A A: Extension rate
Table Telescopic cover Simplified bellows
Base
Fig.2 Example of Mounting the Simplified Bellows
B-243
[Dedicated Bellows JHRW for Model HRW]
The table below shows the dimensions of dedicated bellows JHRW for model HRW. Specify the cor-
Ｗ Lmax
b1 S Lmin W
ａ
P t1
Ｈ H1
t2
ｂ S b2
P
Unit: mm
Main dimensions
A Supported
Model No. Mounting b model
Lmax
bolt Model Model numbers
W H H1 P b1 t1 b2 t2 a Lmin
S CA CR
17 68 22 23 15 43 3 18 6 ＊
M3×6 l 8 4 9 5 17
21 75 25 26 17 48 3 22 7 M3×6l 8 3.5 10.5 6 21
JHRW 27 85 33.5 33.5 20 48 3 20 10 M3×6l 10 2.5 11.5 7 HRW 27
35 120 35 35 20 75 3.5 40 13 M3×6l 6 0 10 7 35
50 164 42 42 20 100 9 50 16 M4×8l –3 1 17 7 50
Note1) For model JHRW17's location marked with "＊", mounting bolts are used only on the LM rail side while the LM block side
uses M2.5 x 8 (nominal) tapping screws.

JHRW21 - 60/360 is calculated as follow.
S
bellows for HRW21 (length when compressed Lmax ＝ Lmin•A A: Extension rate
B-244
[Dedicated Bellows J for Model NSR-TBC]
The table below shows the dimensions of dedicated bellows J for model NSR-TBC. Specify the cor-
W Lmax W
b1 S Lmin
LM Guide (Options)
a
t1 b2 S S
P
H H1
t4
t2 t3
P
Models NSR30 Models NSR20
to 70TBC and 25TBC
Unit: mm
Model A
Mounting Lmax model
No.
W H H1 P b1 t1 b2 t2 t3 t4 bolt S a Lmin numbers
20 65 39 43 20 26 8 — — 9 8 M4×8l 8 7 20TBC
25 75 43 45 20 40 11 — — 12 8 M4×8l 3 7 25TBC
30 85 46 46 20 50 12 12 25 — — M4×8l — 7 30TBC
J NSR
40 115 59 59 25 60 13 16 32 — — M5×10l — 9 40TBC
50 115 66 66 25 75 11 20 32 — — M5×10l — 9 50TBC
70 124 84 78 25 96 16 36 40 — — M6×12l — 9 70TBC

J50 - 60/540 is calculated as follow.
S
bellows for NSR50TBC (length when compressed Lmax ＝ Lmin•A A: Extension rate
B-245
[Dedicated Bellows JSRG for Model SRG]
The table below shows the dimensions of dedicated bellows JSRG for model SRG. Specify the cor-
b W
b1 S W W
a
t1
p
H H1 H1
t4
t3 t2
P S1 b2 S1
Models SRG15 and 30 Models SRG35 to 65
Unit: mm
Main dimensions
Model A Supported
t1 Screw Mount- a b Lmax model
No. size ing bolt numbers
W H H1 P p b1 A/C R/V b2 t2 t3 t4 S S1 A/C R/V A/C R/V Lmin
15 55 27 27 14.2 12.7 28 10.3 10.3 — — 10.6 — M2 M4 7 7 4 10.5 5 15
20 66 32 32 17 15 38.5 9.6 9.6 — — 7.4 8 M2 M3 6.6 6.6 1.5 11 6 20
25 78 38 38 23 18 27.6 3.9 7.9 — — 10 8 M2 M3×6l – 6.5 – 2.5 4 15 6 25
30 84 42 42 22 19 37.4 10.4 13.4 — — 11 10 M3 M4×8l – 5 – 2 3 12 7 30
JSRG SRG
35 88 42 42 22 15 35 5 12 13 23 — — M3 M4×4l 0 7 6 – 9 5 35
40 100 51 51 20 20 32 7 17 15 29 — — M3 M5×4l 0 10 10 – 7 7 45
50 108 57 57 20 20 36 10 20 25 35 — — M3 M5×4l 3 13 16 – 4 7 55
65 132 75.5 75.5 28.5 25 46 9 9 28 42 — — M4 M6×5l 3 3 19 – 3 9 65

JSRG35 - 60/420 is calculated as follow.
S
bellows for SRG35 (length when compressed Lmax ＝ Lmin•A A: Extension rate
B-246
[Dedicated Bellows JSRW for Model SRW]
The table below shows the dimensions of dedicated bellows JSRW for model SRW. Specify the cor-
b W
b1 S
W
a t1
LM Guide (Options)
p
H H1
t2
P b2 S1
Unit: mm
Main dimensions
A Supported
Model No. Mounting model
Screw size Lmax
bolt numbers
W H H1 P p b1 t1 b2 t2 S a b Lmin
S1
70 125 51 51 20 20 57 17 35 32 M3 M5×4L 10 5 7 70
JSRW 85 138 57 57 20 20 68 20 42 36 M3 M5×4L 13 13.5 7 SRW 85
100 169 75.5 75.5 28.5 25 83 19 50 46 M4 M6×5L 13 15.5 9 100
Model number coding
JSRW70 - 60/420
Model number of Dimensions of the bellows
bellows for SRW70 (length when compressed
B-247
LM Cover
[Dedicated LM Cover TPH for Model HSR]
The tables below show the dimensions of dedicated LM cover TPH for model HSR. Specify the cor-
Lmax W
Lmin D S
b1
t1
H
t4
t2
t3
S b2 S
Models HSR25 and 30
Unit: mm

Model No. D Mounting model
W H b1 t1 b2 t2 t3 t4 numbers
(max) bolt S
25 55 42 28 30 7 — — 10 8 M3×6l 25
30 60 48 34 40 8 — — 11 10 M4×8l 30
TPH 35 70 55 38 40 9 14 23 — — M4×8l HSR 35
45 90 75 48 58 10 20 29 — — M5×10l 45
55 100 88 55 66 11 26 35 — — M5×10l 55
Unit: mm Unit: mm
L L
Model No. Stage Stroke Model No. Stage Stroke
min max min max
3 200 530 330 3 350 980 630
25 3 150 380 230 3 300 830 530
45
3 100 230 130 3 250 680 430
3 250 680 430 3 200 530 330
TPH
30 3 200 530 330 4 400 1460 1060
TPH
3 150 380 230 4 350 1330 980
55
3 300 830 530 4 300 1060 760
3 250 680 430 4 250 860 610
35
3 200 530 330 Note1) For lubrication when using the dedicated LM cover,
3 150 380 230 contact THK.
Note2) When using the dedicated LM cover, the LM block
and LM rail need to be machined so that the bellows
can be mounted. Be sure to indicate that the dedi-
cated bellows is required when ordering the LM
Guide.
Model number coding
TPH55 - 400/1460
Model number of Lmax
LM cover for HSR55 (cover length when extended)
Lmin (cover length when compressed)
B-248
[Dedicated LM Cover TPS for Model SR]
The tables below show the dimensions of dedicated LM cover TPS for model SR. Specify the corre-
Lmax W
Lmin b1
S
D
LM Guide (Options)
t1
H
t4
t2
t3
S S
b2
Models SR30 to 55 Model SR25

Unit: mm
Main dimensions
Supported
Model No. Mounting model
D
W H b1 t1 b2 t2 t3 t4 bolt numbers
(max)
S
25 42 30 26.5 29 5 — — 6 7 M3×6 l 25
30 54 37 34.5 42 5 12 17 — — M4×8 l 30
TPS 35 64 42 38 44 6.5 14 20 — — M5×10 l SR 35
45 76 55 48 60 8 22 27 — — M5×10 l 45
55 90 61 54.5 70 10 24 28 — — M6×12 l 55
Unit: mm Unit: mm
L L
Model No. Stage Stroke Model No. Stage Stroke
min max min max
3 200 530 330 3 350 980 630
25 3 150 380 230 3 300 830 530
45
3 100 230 130 3 250 680 430
3 250 680 430 3 200 530 330
TPS
30 3 200 530 330 4 400 1460 1060
TPS
3 150 380 230 4 350 1330 980
55
3 300 830 530 4 300 1060 760
3 250 680 430 4 250 860 610
35
3 200 530 330 Note1) For lubrication when using the dedicated LM cover,
3 150 380 230 contact THK.
Note2) When using the dedicated LM cover, the LM block
and LM rail need to be machined so that the bellows
can be mounted. Be sure to indicate that the dedi-
cated bellows is required when ordering the LM
Guide.
Model number coding
TPS55 - 400/1460
Model number of Lmax
LM cover for SR55 (cover length when extended)
Lmin (cover length when compressed)
B-249
Cap C
Table1 List of Model Numbers Supported for the Dedicated Cap C for LM Rail Mounting Holes
Main dimen-
Supported model number
sions (mm)
Model Bolt SHS
No. used SRS SRS-W
SNR NR HSR SHW SRG NSR-
D H SSR SCR SR SNS NRS CSR HMG HRW SRN GSR HR RSR RSR-W TBC SRW
RSH RSH-W
HCR
1123 12
C3 M3 6.3 1.2 — — 15 — — 12 — — — — 9 — —
1530 15
12, 14,
C4 M4 7.8 1.0 15Y — — — — 15 15 17, 21, 15 15 — 14 — — —
27
C5 M5 9.8 2.4 20 — 20 25 25X 20 — — 20 20 2042 20 — 20 —
25Y 25Y 25
C6 M6 11.4 2.7 25 30 30 25 25 35 25 25 — 25 — —
30 30 30
30 30 30 2555
C8 M8 14.4 3.7 35 35 35 35 35 50 30 — — 40 —
35 35 35 3065
C10 M10 18.0 3.7 — — 45 — — — — 60 — 35 3575 — — 50 70
C12 M12 20.5 4.7 — 45 55 45 45 45 45 — 45 — 4085 — — 70 85
C14 M14 23.5 5.7 — — — 55 55 55 — — 55 — — — — — 100
70
C16 M16 26.5 5.7 — 65 65 65 65 65 — 65 — 50105 — — — —
85
C22 M22 35.5 5.7 — — — — 85 85 — — — — — — — — —
Note) The dedicated cap for the LM rail mounting hole can be made of other materials (e.g., metal). Contact THK for details.
B-250
LM Block Dimension (Dimension L) with QZ Attached
L
with QZ attached
LM Guide (Options)
Unit: mm
L
Model No. Standard
overall QZUU QZSS QZDD QZZZ QZKK QZSSHH QZDDHH QZZZHH QZKKHH
length
15C/V/R 64.4 84.4 84.4 89.8 86.8 92.2 100 105.4 101.2 106.6
15LC/LV 79.4 99.4 99.4 104.8 101.8 107.2 115 120.4 116.2 121.6
20C/V 79 99 99 105.4 103 109.4 115.4 121.8 117.8 124.2
20LC/LV 98 118 118 124.4 122 128.4 134.4 140.8 136.8 143.2
25C/V/R 92 114.4 114.4 121.6 120.4 127.6 132 139.2 134.4 141.6
25LC/LV/LR 109 131.4 131.4 138.6 137.4 144.6 149 156.2 151.4 158.6
30C/V/R 106 127.4 127.4 136 133.8 142.4 149.4 158 151.8 160.4
30LC/LV/LR 131 152.4 152.4 161 158.8 167.4 174.4 183 176.8 185.4
SHS
35C/V/R 122 145 145 154.8 152.4 162.2 168 177.8 170.4 180.2
35LC/LV/LR 152 175 175 184.8 182.4 192.2 198 207.8 200.4 210.2
45C/V/R 140 173 173 182.8 181.2 191 199 208.8 202.2 212
45LC/LV/LR 174 207 207 216.8 215.2 225 233 242.8 236.2 246
55C/V/R 171 205.4 205.4 216.6 214.2 225.4 232 243.2 235.2 246.4
55LC/LV/LR 213 247.4 247.4 258.6 256.2 267.4 274 285.2 277.2 288.4
65C/V 221 256.2 256.2 268.6 266.2 278.6 288 300.4 291.2 303.6
65LC/LV 272 307.2 307.2 319.6 317.2 329.6 339 351.4 342.2 354.6
15XVY 40.3 59.3 59.3 65.1 62.7 68.5 75.5 81.3 76.7 82.5
15XWY/XTBY 56.9 75.9 75.9 81.7 79.3 85.1 92.1 97.9 93.3 99.1
20XV 47.7 66.2 66.2 73.1 72.1 79 83.7 90.6 86.1 93
20XW/XTB 66.5 85 85 91.9 90.9 97.8 102.5 109.4 104.9 111.8
SSR
25XVY 60 82.6 82.6 90 88.4 95.8 100 107.4 102.4 109.8
25XWY/XTBY 83 105.6 105.6 113 111.4 118.8 123 130.4 125.4 132.8
30XW 97 119.7 119.7 127.8 125.4 133.5 141 149.1 143.4 151.5
35XW 110.9 134.3 134.3 143.3 141.3 150.3 156.9 165.9 159.3 168.3
25R/C 82.8 105.2 105.2 112.8 110.9 118.5 122.5 130.1 124.9 132.5
25LR/LC 102 124.4 124.4 132 130.1 137.7 141.7 149.3 144.1 151.7
30R/C 98 121.2 121.2 131 126.9 136.7 141.7 151.5 144.1 153.9
30LR/LC 120.5 143.7 143.7 153.5 149.4 159.2 164.2 174 166.6 176.4
35R/C 109.5 142.7 142.7 152.9 149.5 159.7 164.3 174.5 166.7 176.9
SNR/ 35LR/LC 135 168.2 168.2 178.4 175 185.2 189.8 200 192.2 202.4
SNS 45R/C 138.2 171.4 171.4 181.6 179 189.2 196.4 206.6 199.6 209.8
45LR/LC 171 204.2 204.2 214.4 211.8 222 229.2 239.4 232.4 242.6
55R/C 163.3 204.5 204.5 214.7 213.2 223.4 231 241.2 234.2 244.4
55LR/LC 200.5 241.7 241.7 251.9 250.4 260.6 268.2 278.4 271.4 281.6
65R/C 186 227.6 227.6 238.2 236.3 246.9 257.5 268.1 260.7 271.3
65LR/LC 246 287.6 287.6 298.2 296.3 306.9 317.5 328.1 320.7 331.3
12CAM/CRM 37 47 47 — — — — — — —
SHW
12HRM 50.4 60.4 60.4 — — — — — — —
B-251
Unit: mm
L
Model No. Standard
length
14CAM/CRM 45.5 55.5 55.5 — — — — — — —
17CAM/CRM 51 63 63 66 65.4 68.4 — — — —
21CA/CR 59 75 75 80 77.8 82.8 91.6 96.6 93.2 98.2
SHW
27CA/CR 72.8 92.8 92.8 98.6 96.4 102.2 109.4 115.2 111.8 117.6
35CA/CR 107 127 127 134.4 132 134.4 149 156.4 151.4 158.8
50CA/CR 141 161 161 169.2 167.4 175.6 186 194.2 188.4 196.6
7 23.4 33.4 33.4 — — — — — — —
7W 31 41 41 — — — — — — —
9 30.8 40.8 40.8 — — — — — — —
9W 39 49 49 — — — — — — —
12 34.4 44.4 44.4 — — — — — — —
SRS
12W 44.5 54.5 54.5 — — — — — — —
15 43 55 55 — — — — — — —
15W 55.5 67.5 67.5 — — — — — — —
20 50 66 66 — — — 83.2 — — —
25 77 97 97 — — — 115.2 — — —
15S 64.4 84.4 84.4 89.8 86.8 92.2 100.4 105.4 101.4 106.9
20S 79 99 99 105.4 103 109.4 115.5 122 118 124.5
20 98 118 118 124.4 122 128.4 134.5 141 137 143.5
25 109 131.4 131.4 138.6 137.4 144.6 149 156.2 151.4 158.6
SCR
30 131 152.4 152.4 161 158.8 167.4 174.4 183 176.8 185.4
35 152 175 175 184.8 182.4 192.2 198 207.8 200.4 210.2
45 174 207 207 216.8 215.2 225 233 242.8 236.2 246
65 272 307.2 307.2 319.6 317.2 329.6 339 351.4 342.2 354.6
15A/B/R/YR 56.6 79.6 79.6 87.6 84.2 92.2 98.8 106.8 100.0 108.0
20A/B/R/CA/CB/YR 74 96.2 96.2 104.4 102 110.2 113.6 121.8 116 124.2
20LA/LB/LR/HA/HB 90 112.2 112.2 120.4 118 126.2 129.6 137.8 132 140.2
25A/B/R/CA/CB/YR 83.1 104.1 104.1 112.1 109.8 117.8 121.4 129.4 123.8 131.8
25LA/LB/LR/HA/HB 102.2 123.2 123.2 131.2 128.9 136.9 140.5 148.5 142.9 150.9
30A/B/R/CA/CB/YR 98 119 119 127 124.7 132.7 140.3 148.3 142.7 150.7
30LA/LB/LR/HA/HB 120.6 141.6 141.6 149.6 147.3 155.3 162.9 170.9 165.3 173.3
HSR 35A/B/R/CA/CB/YR 109.4 132.2 132.2 142 139 148.8 154.6 164.4 157 166.8
35LA/LB/LR/HA/HB 134.8 157.6 157.6 167.4 164.4 174.2 180 189.8 182.4 192.2
45A/B/R/CA/CB/YR 139 174.8 174.8 181.6 176.6 186.4 — — — —
45LA/LB/LR/HA/HB 170.8 206.6 206.6 213.4 208.4 218.2 — — — —
55A/B/R/CA/CB/YR 163 197.2 197.2 208.4 202 213.2 — — — —
55LA/LB/LR/HA/HB 201.1 235.3 235.3 246.5 240.1 251.3 — — — —
65A/B/R/CA/CB/YR 186 221.4 221.4 233.8 226.6 239 — — — —
65LA/LB/LR/HA/HB 245.5 280.9 280.9 293.3 286.1 298.5 — — — —
25XR/XA/XB 82.8 105.2 105.2 112.8 110.9 118.5 122.5 130.1 124.9 132.5
25XLR/XLA/XLB 102 124.4 124.4 132 130.1 137.7 141.7 149.3 144.1 151.7
30R/A/B 98 120.4 120.4 129.4 126.1 135.1 141.7 150.7 144.1 153.1
30LR/LA/LB 120.5 142.9 142.9 151.9 148.6 157.6 164.2 173.2 166.6 175.6
35R/A/B 109.5 142.7 142.7 152.9 149.5 159.7 164.3 174.5 166.7 176.9
NR/ 35LR/LA/LB 135 168.2 168.2 178.4 175 185.2 189.8 200 192.2 202.4
NRS 45R/A/B 139 172.2 172.2 182.4 179.8 190 197.6 207.8 200.8 211
45LR/LA/LB 171 204.2 204.2 214.4 211.8 222 229.6 239.8 232.8 243
55R/A/B 162.8 204.8 204.8 215 213.5 223.7 231.3 241.5 234.5 244.7
55LR/LA/LB 200 242 242 252.2 250.7 260.9 268.5 278.7 271.7 281.9
65R/A/B 185.6 227.6 227.6 238.2 236.3 246.9 258.1 268.7 261.3 271.9
65LR/LA/LB 245.6 287.6 287.6 298.2 296.3 306.9 318.1 328.7 321.3 331.9
B-252
Unit: mm
L
Model No. Standard
length
9 31 40.8 — — — — — — — —
9N 41 50.8 — — — — — — — —
RSR
9W 39 49 — — — — — — — —
LM Guide (Options)
9WN 51 60.7 — — — — — — — —
12 35 45 — — — — — — — —
12N 47.5 57.7 — — — — — — — —
12W 44.5 54.5 — — — — — — — —
12WN 59.5 69.5 — — — — — — — —
RSR
15 43 55 — — — — — — — —
15N 61 72.7 — — — — — — — —
15W 55.5 67.5 — — — — — — — —
15WN 74.5 86.5 — — — — — — — —
15A/V 69 92 92 94 — — — — — —
20A/V 86 109 109 111 112.4 114.4 126.6 128.6 129 131
20LA/LV 106 129 129 131 132.4 134.4 146.6 148.6 149 151
25C/R 95.5 125.5 125.5 130.5 130.5 135.5 145.3 151.7 147.7 154.1
25LC/LR 115.1 145.1 145.1 150.1 150.1 155.1 164.9 171.3 167.3 173.7
30C/R 111 141 141 148 146 153 160.8 169.2 164.6 171.6
30LC/LR 135 165 165 172 170 177 184.8 193.2 188.6 195.6
SRG
35C/R 125 155 155 162.8 163.4 171.2 178.6 186.4 181 188.8
35LC/LR 155 185 185 192.8 193.4 201.2 208.6 216.4 211 218.8
45C/R 155 185 185 194.2 194.2 203.4 212 221.2 215.2 224.5
45LC/LR 190 220 220 229.2 229.2 238.4 247 256.2 250.2 259.4
55C/R 185 225 225 234.2 234.2 243.4 252 261.2 255.2 264.4
55LC/LR 235 275 275 284.2 284.2 293.4 302 311.2 305.2 314.4
65LC/LV 303 343 343 354.2 354.2 365.4 375.4 386.6 378.6 389.8
35C/R 125 155 155 162.8 163.4 171.2 178.6 186.4 181 188.8
35LC/LR 155 185 185 192.8 193.4 201.2 208.6 216.4 211 218.8
45C/R 155 185 185 194.2 194.2 203.4 212 221.2 215.2 224.5
SRN 45LC/LR 190 220 220 229.2 229.2 238.4 247 256.2 250.2 259.4
55C/R 185 225 225 234.2 234.2 243.4 252 261.2 255.2 264.4
55LC/LR 235 275 275 284.2 284.2 293.4 302 311.2 305.2 314.4
65LC/LR 303 343 343 354.2 354.2 365.4 375.4 386.6 378.6 389.8
70 190 220 220 229.2 229.2 238.4 247 256.2 250.2 259.4
SRW 85 235 275 275 284.2 284.2 293.4 302 311.2 305.2 314.4
100 303 343 343 354.2 354.2 365.4 375.4 386.6 378.6 389.8
Model number coding

Symbol With Symbol for No.
Model Type of With QZ LM rail length for LM rail steel of rails used on
number LM block Lubricator (*1) (in mm) jointed use tape the same plane (*5)
Radial clearance Accuracy symbol (*4)
No. of LM blocks Contamination symbol (*3) Normal grade (No Symbol)
used on the same protection Normal (No symbol) High accuracy grade (H)
rail accessory Light preload (C1) Precision grade (P)/Super precision grade (SP)
symbol (*2) Medium preload (C0) Ultra precision grade (UP)
(*1) See A-361. (*2) See A-368. (*3) See A-113. (*4) See A-118. (*5) See A-59.
B-253
Lubrication Adapter
An oil lubricant-only lubrication adapter is available for models NR/NRS.
Even if the LM Guide is installed in an orientation where oil lubrication is difficult, such as wall mount
and inversed mount, the adapter is capable of feeding a constant quantity of lubricant to the four
raceways.
[Features]
The dedicated lubrication adapter for models (M8) on the front and the side of the lubrication
NR-NRS is built in with a constant quantity dis- adapter.
tributor. Therefore, the adapter can accurately
Lubrication plate
feed a constant quantity of lubricant to each
raceway regardless of the mounting orientation.
The adapter is economical since it is capable of
constantly feeding the optimum amount of lubri- To lubrication
pump
cant and helping eliminate the supply of surplus Lubrication plate
lubricant.
To provide pipe arrangement, simply connect an Constant quantity
intermittent lubrication pump widely used for distributor
ordinary machine tools to the greasing holes To lubrication pump
Fig.3 Structural Drawing
[Specifications]
Viscosity range of M×l 2-M1×l 1

32 to 64 mm2/s recommended W T
lubricant used 2-d through hole B T1
Discharge 0.03×4, 0.06×4cc/1shot N
N
Diameter of pipe M1 E
φ 4, φ 6 M
connected
Material Aluminum alloy
W1
Fig.4
Table2 Dimension Table for Lubrication Adapter Unit: mm

Main dimensions Quantity
Model No. Width Height per shot
W M T W1 M1 B E N T1 d M×l M1×l 1 (cc/shot)
A30N 56 29 25 29 14.5 46 14 5 5.3 3.5 M8×8 M8×8
A35N 66 33 25 35 17 54 16.5 6 5.3 4.5 M8×8 M8×8 0.03×4
A45N 81 38 25 48 20 67 16.5 7 7.8 6.6 M8×8 M8×8
A55N 94 45.5 25 56 22 76 20.5 7 7.8 6.6 M8×8 M8×8
A65N 119 55.5 25 67 26.3 92 25.5 11.5 7.8 9 M8×8 M8×8 0.06×4
A85N 147 68.5 25 92 34 114 32 15.5 7.8 9 M8×8 M8×8
B-254
End Piece EP
For those models whose balls may fall if the LM rail is pulled out of the LM block, an end piece is
attached to the product to prevent the LM block from being removed from the LM rail.
For models that can use the end piece, see the table below.
If removing the end piece when using the LM Guide, be sure that the LM block will not overshoot.
The end piece can also be used as a fixing jig for a steel tape, and is available also for the LM rail of
LM Guide (Options)
models SSR, SR and HSR.
Table3 Dimension Table for End Piece EP for Models NR/NRS
Unit: mm
Model No. A B C T
A B
NR/NRS 25X 26 14 25 1.5
NR/NRS 30 31 14 31 1.5
NR/NRS 35 38 16 32.5 2
NR/NRS 45 49 18 41 2
C
NR/NRS 55 57 20 46.5 2
T
NR/NRS 65 69.4 22 59 3.2
NR/NRS 75 81.7 28 56 3.2
NR/NRS 85 91.4 22 68 3.2
Fig.5 End Piece EP for Models NR/NRS NR/NRS 100 106.4 25 73 3.2
B-255
Greasing Hole
[Grease Nipple and Greasing Hole for Models SHW and SRS]
Models SHW and SRS do not have a grease nipple as standard. Installation of a grease nipple and
the drilling of a greasing hole is performed at THK. When ordering SHW and SRS, indicate that the
desired model requires a grease nipple or greasing hole. (For greasing hole dimensions and sup-
ported grease nipple types and dimensions, see Table4.)
When using SHW and SRS under harsh conditions, use QZ Lubricator* (optional) or Laminated Con-
tact Scraper LaCS* (optional).
Note1) Grease nipple is not available for models SHW12, SHW14, SRS9M, SRS9WM, SRS12M and SRS12WM. They can
have a greasing hole.
Note2) Using a greasing hole other than for greasing may cause damage.
Note3) For QZ Lubricator*, see A-361. For Laminated Contact Scraper LaCS*, see A-353.
Note4) When desiring a grease nipple for a model attached with QZ Lubricator, contact THK.
Table4 Table of Grease Nipple and Greasing Hole Dimen-

sions
E L Unit: mm
Grease nipple or
Model No. E
End seal End seal greasing hole
17 5 PB107
SHW 21 5.5 PB1021B
Fig.6 Dimensions of the Grease Nipple for Model SHW 27 12 B-M6F
35 12 B-M6F
End seal
50 16 B-PT1/8
E L
End seal 9M — φ 1.5 drilled hole
Fig.7 Dimensions of the Grease Nipple for Model SRS 4.0
SRS 15M PB107
(5.0)
Note) For the L dimension, see the corresponding specifica- 4.0
tion table. 15WM PB107
(5.0)
3.5
20M PB107
(5.0)
4.0
25M PB1021B
(5.5)
Note) Figures in the parentheses indicate dimensions with-
out a seal.
B-256
[Greasing Hole for Model SRG]
Model SRG allows lubrication from both the side and top faces of the LM block. The greasing hole of
When using the greasing hole on the top face of models SRG-R and SRG-LR, a greasing adapter is
separately required. Contact THK for details.
LM Guide (Options)
φ D2 depth 1
e1
φ D0
e0 Side nipple
(M6 pilot hole)
f0
V
Unit: mm
Model No.
15A
4 4 2.9 PB107 9.2 (P6) 0.5 5.5
15V
20A
4 5 2.9 PB107 9.2 (P6) 0.5 6.5
20LA
20V
4 5 2.9 PB107 9.2 (P6) 0.5 6.5
20LV
25C
6 6.3 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.5 6
25LC
25R
6 10.3 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 4.5 6
25LR
30C
6 5.8 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 6
30LC
30R
6 8.8 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 3.4 6
30LR
SRG
35C
6 6 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 6
35LC
35R
6 13 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 7.4 6
35LR
45C
7 7 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 7
45LC
45R
7 17 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 10.4 7
45LR
55C
9 8.5 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 11
55LC
55R
9 18.5 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 10.4 11
55LR
65LC 9 13.5 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 10
65LV 9 13.5 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 10
details.
B-257
[Greasing Hole for Model SRN]
Model SRN allows lubrication from both the side and top faces of the LM block. The greasing hole of
φ D2 depth 1
e1
φ D0
e0 Side nipple
(M6 pilot hole)
f0
V
Unit: mm
Model No.
35C
8 6.5 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 6
35LC
35R
8 6.5 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 6
35LR
45C
8.5 7 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 7
45LC
45R
SRN 45LR 8.5 7 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 7
55C
10 8 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 11
55LC
55R
10 8 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 11
55LR
65LC 9 11 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 10
65LR 9 11 5.2 M6F 10.2 (P7) 0.4 10
details.
B-258
[Greasing Hole for Model SRW]
Model SRW allows lubrication from both the side and top faces of the LM block. The greasing hole of
LM Guide (Options)
φ D2 depth 1 e1 Greasing hole on the top face
φ D0 e0 Side nipple
V
f0
Unit: mm
Model No.
70 7 17 5.2 M6F 13 (P10) 0.4 33.7
SRW 85 9 17.7 5.2 M6F 13 (P10) 0.4 42.75
100 9 22.4 5.2 M6F 13 (P10) 0.4 55
details.
Rack and Pinion

[Pinion for rack - type A]
The keyway worked type
F
E 3-G
J
K
H
φ A PCDB φ DH7 φ C
Keyway
Unit: mm
Tip circle Meshing Boss Hole Tooth Overall Supported
Keyway
Model No. Pitch Number
of teeth diameter PCD diameter diameter width length G H model
C D E J×K
A B F numbers
GP 6-20A 20 42.9 39 30 18
6 16.5 24.5 M3 4 6×2.8 GSR 25-R
GP 6-25A 25 51.9 48 35 18
GP 8-20A 20 57.1 52 40 20 M3
8 19 26 5 8×3.3 GSR 30-R
GP 8-25A 25 69.1 64 40 20 M4
GP10-20A 20 70.4 64 45 25 8×3.3
10 22 30 M4 5 GSR 35-R
GP10-25A 25 86.4 80 60 25 10×3.3
Note1) When placing an order, specify the model number from the table.
Note2) Non-standard pinions with different numbers of teeth are also available upon request. Contact THK for details.
B-259
[Pinion for rack - type C]
The reworkable hole diameter type
F
E
φA PCDB φ DH7 φ C
Unit: mm
Tip circle Meshing Boss Hole Tooth Overall Supported
Number
Model No. Pitch diameter PCD diameter diameter width length model
of teeth
A B C D E F numbers
GP 6-20C 20 42.9 39 30 12
6 16.5 24.5 GSR 25-R
GP 6-25C 25 51.9 48 35 15
GP 8-20C 20 57.1 52 40 18
8 19 26 GSR 30-R
GP 8-25C 25 69.1 64 40 18
GP10-20C 20 70.4 64 45 18
10 22 30 GSR 35-R
GP10-25C 25 86.4 80 60 18
Note1) When placing an order, specify the model number from the table.
Note2) Non-standard pinions with different numbers of teeth are also available upon request. Contact THK for details.
[The dimension when the LM rail is used in combination with a pinion]
B
Rh＋
2
Rh
Unit: mm
LM rail Pinion
Model GSR Pinion
Pitch line height Meshing PCD Rh+B/2
Model No. Model No.
Rh B
GP 6-20A
39 62.5
GP 6-20C
GSR 25-R 43
GP 6-25A
48 67
GP 6-25C
GP 8-20A
52 74
GP 8-20C
GSR 30-R 48
GP 8-25A
64 80
GP 8-25C
GP 10-20A
64 89
GP 10-20C
GSR 35-R 57
GP 10-25A
80 97
GP 10-25C
B-260
LM Guide Actuator
General Catalog

(Separate)
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table Model KR.......................................... A-386
Model KR .......................................... B-263 Structure and features....................... A-386
Model Number Coding ...................... B-290 Types and Features .......................... A-390
Mass of Moving Element................... B-290 Load Ratings in All Directions
and Static Permissible Moment ..... A-391
Model SKR ........................................ B-291 Maximum Travel Speed and the Maximum Length A-396
Model Number Coding ...................... B-300 Lubrication......................................... A-398
Mass of Moving Element................... B-300 Service Life ....................................... A-399
Options............................................. B-301 Example of Calculating the Nominal Life. A-403
Bellows.............................................. B-302 Accuracy Standards .......................... A-412
Sensor............................................... B-308
Motor Bracket.................................... B-312 Model SKR ....................................... A-416
Motor Wrap Type (for Reference) ..... B-342 Structure and features....................... A-416
XY Bracket (for Reference) ............... B-343 Caged Ball/Roller Technology........... A-419
and Permissible Moment ............... A-422
Lubrication......................................... A-425
Service Life ....................................... A-426
Options............................................. A-430
Cover................................................. A-431
Bellows.............................................. A-432
Sensor............................................... A-433
Motor Bracket.................................... A-434

Precautions on Using Models KR/SKR A-436

the Products".
B-261
B-262
KR
LM Guide Actuator
(Separate)
Model KR15 Standard Type ....................... B-264 Structure and features....................... A-386
Model KR15 (with a Cover)........................ B-265 Types and Features .......................... A-390
Model KR20 Standard Type ....................... B-266 Load Ratings in All Directions
Model KR20 (with a Cover)........................ B-267 and Static Permissible Moment ..... A-391
Model KR26 Standard Type ....................... B-268
Model KR26 (with a Cover)........................ Maximum Travel Speed
B-269
Model KR30H Standard Type Long Nut Block ... B-270 and the Maximum Length .............. A-396
Model KR30H (with a Cover) Long Nut Block ... B-271 Lubrication......................................... A-398
Model KR30H Standard Type Short Nut Block... B-272 Service Life ....................................... A-399
Model KR30H (with a Cover) Short Nut Block... B-273 Static Safety Factor........................... A-402
Model KR33 Standard Type Long Nut Block ... B-274 Example of Calculating the Nominal Life. A-403
Model KR33 (with a Cover) Long Nut Block ... B-275 Accuracy Standards ..........................
Model KR33 Standard Type Short Nut Block... A-412
B-276
Model KR33 (with a Cover) Short Nut Block... B-277
Model KR45H Standard Type Long Nut Block ... Options............................................. A-430
B-278
Model KR45H (with a Cover) Long Nut Block ... B-279 Cover................................................. A-431
Model KR45H Standard Type Short Nut Block... B-280 Bellows.............................................. A-432
Model KR45H (with a Cover) Short Nut Block... B-281 Sensor............................................... A-433
Model KR46 Standard Type Long Nut Block ... B-282 Motor Bracket.................................... A-434
Model KR46 (with a Cover) Long Nut Block ... B-283
Model KR46 Standard Type Short Nut Block... B-284
Model KR46 (with a Cover) Short Nut Block... B-285
Model KR55 (with a Cover)........................ B-287
Model KR65 (with a Cover)........................ B-289
Model Number Coding ...................... B-290
Mass of Moving Element................... B-290
Options............................................. B-301
Bellows.............................................. B-302
Sensor............................................... B-308
Motor Bracket.................................... B-312
the Products".
B-263
Model KR15 Standard Type
Model KR15□□A (with a Single Nut Block)
Model KR15□□B (with Two Nut Blocks)
L1
44 LM rail length 10
7.5 5 7 （31.6*）
33 5
23
φ 3h6
14
4-M3 depth 4
12
2-M2 depth 3
2×n-3.4 through hole, φ 6 counter bore depth 2
(Fixed using M3 hexagon socket button bolt)
6.5 25.5 12
33MIN
2 6 (Dimension with
5 two nut blocks
1.9
B in close contact)
φ 20H7
A
φ 17
B
5.5
2× 2-M2 depth 3 50
(Same position on the opposite side) 4 G （n−1）
×50 （G）4
30 19
4-φ 3 through 24.4 φ 2 greasing hole 4.5
6.9
9.2
2
22.5
22.8
15
9.5
9.85
2.3
0.3
25.3 8 14
1
2−
（
30
R
2）
A arrow view B-B cross section
Overall Available stroke range (mm) Overall main unit mass (kg)
LM rail length G
length n
(mm) Type A Type B (mm) Type A Type B
L1(mm)
75 129 31.4 — 12.5 2 0.19 —
100 154 56.4 — 25 2 0.22 —
125 179 81.4 48.4 12.5 3 0.25 0.292
150 204 106.4 73.4 25 3 0.28 0.322
175 229 131.4 98.4 12.5 4 0.31 0.352
200 254 156.4 123.4 25 4 0.34 0.382
Note1) The available stroke range of model KR15□□B indicates the value when two nut blocks are used in close contact with
each other.
For model number coding, see B-290.
Note2) * indicates the block length when calculating the available stroke range. With type B, it is 64.6 mm.
B-264
Model KR15 (with a Cover)
L1
LM rail length
23
14 4-M3 depth 6
LM Guide Actuator
38
4
2× 2-M2 depth 3
7.5
B (Same position on the opposite side)
30 44
（1.8）
4-φ 3 through 24.4 32

6.9
22.8
22.5
25
13
9.5
0.3 9.2
2.6
25.3 30
2−
（
R
2）
LM rail length
length
(mm) Type A Type B Type A Type B
L1(mm)
75 129 31.4 — 0.23 —
100 154 56.4 — 0.26 —
125 179 81.4 48.4 0.3 0.364
150 204 106.4 73.4 0.33 0.394
175 229 131.4 98.4 0.36 0.424
200 254 156.4 123.4 0.4 0.464
Note) The available stroke range of model KR15□□B indicates the value when two nut blocks are used in close contact with
each other.
Description of Each Option⇒A-430 Dimensions⇒B-301 B-265

L1
14 8.5 （44*）
46 2×n-3.4 through hole, 6
8 33.2 φ 6.5 counter bore depth 3
20
φ 4h7
4-M3 depth 4.5
18
2-M2.6 depth 6
(Mouth C1.3)
12 25 12 46MIN
(Dimension with two
10 nut blocks in
0.9
B close contact)
φ 20H7
A
10
2× 2-M2.6 depth 4 B 60
(Same position on the opposite side) 3.5 G （nー1）
×60 （G） 2.5
39.6 Nipple orientation

33.6 23
4-φ 3.4 through With a single nut block
5
3.4
30°
12.5
9.5
29.5
30
15.8
20
30°
13
With two nut blocks

3.3
29
11 18
2
0.5
2−
（
D
4-M3 depth 6 40
R
PC
2）
LM rail length G
length n
L1(mm)
100 159 41.5 — 20 2 0.45 —
150 209 91.5 45.5 15 3 0.58 0.655
200 259 141.5 95.5 40 3 0.72 0.795
Note1) The available stroke range of model KR2001B indicates the value when two nut blocks are used in close contact with
each other.
Note2) * indicates the block length when calculating the available stroke range. With type B, it is 90mm.
B-266
L1
LM rail length
33.2 4-M4 depth 14.5
LM Guide Actuator
45 20
2×2-M2 depth 4
6
8.5
B (Same position on the opposite side)
39.6 52
（1）
4-M3 depth 6 33.6 37

30°
29.5
32
30
0.5 12.5
17.5
9.5
30°
13
3.3
40
2−
D2
（
R
4-φ 3.4 through

PC
2）
LM rail length
length
L1(mm)
100 159 41.5 — 0.51 —
150 209 91.5 45.5 0.66 0.78
200 259 141.5 95.5 0.8 0.92
Note) The available stroke range of model KR2001B indicates the value when two nut blocks are used in close contact with
each other.

L1
16.5 13 （62*）
64 6
10 47.4 2-M3 depth 6
φ 5h7
30 (Mouth C1.5)
25
24
4-M4 depth 6.5
2×n-4.5 through hole, φ 8 counter bore depth 4
12 34 14 64MIN
(Dimension with
15 two nut blocks in
0.9
B close contact)
φ 24H7
2× 2-M2.6 depth 4
12
B 80
(Same position on the opposite side)
3.5 G （nー1）
×80 （G） 2.5
49.4
Nipple orientation
4-φ 3.5 through 43 31
8 With a single nut block
45ﾟ
6
38.5
38
26
0.5 15.5
21
11
16
With two nut blocks

45ﾟ
2
6.5
2−
3
12.5 25
D3
（
R
PC
4-M3 depth 6 50
3）
LM rail length G
length n
L1(mm)
150 220 69 — 35 2 0.99 —
200 270 119 55 20 3 1.2 1.38
250 320 169 105 45 3 1.41 1.59
300 370 219 155 30 4 1.62 1.8
each other.
B-268
L1
LM rail length
47.4 4-M4 depth 17
30
55
LM Guide Actuator
8.5 2×2-M2 depth 4
12
62
49.4 47
（0.32）
4-φ 3.5 through 43 24

45°
38.5
40
38
23
11
0.5 15.5
16
45°
6.5
50
2−
3
D3
（
R
PC
3）
4-M3 depth 6
LM rail length
length
L1(mm)
150 220 69 — 1.12 —
200 270 119 55 1.34 1.605
250 320 169 105 1.56 1.825
300 370 219 155 1.78 2.045
each other.

Model KR30H Standard Type
Model KR30H□□A (with a Single Long Nut Block)
Model KR30H□□B (with Two Long Nut Blocks)
L1
16 11 （72.2*）
74.4 2×n-5.5 through hole, 8
9 4-M5 depth 8 54 φ 9.5 counter bore depth 4.5
φ 6h7
30
30
2-M2.6 depth 5 2×n1-M2.6 depth 3.5

F
H （n1ー1）
×F （H）
10 31 18 74.4MIN
3 12 8.5 (Dimension with
two nut blocks in
close contact)
2
B
φ 30H8
A
φ 28
14
B 100
G (nー1)×100 （G）
Nipple orientation
59.7 38
2-M3 depth 5 34 8 With a single nut block
30°
5
42.5
43
0.5 20.8
23.5
2.5
21.3
30
30°
With two nut blocks

15 30
2−
0
（
D4
4-M4 depth 8
R
60
PC
6）
Overall Available stroke Overall main unit

LM rail length range (mm) H G F mass (kg)
length n n1
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
L1(mm) Type A Type B Type A Type B
150 220 58.8 — 25 25 100 2 2 1.4 —
200 270 108.8 — 50 50 100 2 2 1.6 —
300 370 208.8 134.4 50 50 200 3 2 2.2 2.5
400 470 308.8 234.4 100 50 200 4 2 2.7 3
500 570 408.8 334.4 50 50 200 5 3 3.2 3.5
600 670 508.8 434.4 100 50 200 6 3 3.8 4.1
Note1) The available stroke range of model KR30H □□ B indicates the value when two nut blocks are used in close contact
with each other.
Note2) * indicates the block length when calculating the available stroke range. With type B, it is 146.6mm.
B-270
Model KR30H (with a Cover)
L1
LM rail length
54
30 4-M5 depth 10
70
LM Guide Actuator
74
5 4-M2 depth 4
(from the backside)
59.7 80
（0.85）
2-M3 depth 5 34 60
30°
42.5
45
43
0.5 20.8
21.3
25
30°
60
2−
0
（
D4
4-M4 depth 8
R
PC
6）
LM rail length
length
L1(mm)
150 220 58.8 — 1.6 —
200 270 108.8 — 1.8 —
300 370 208.8 134.4 2.4 2.83
400 470 308.8 234.4 3 3.43
500 570 408.8 334.4 3.5 3.93
600 670 508.8 434.4 4.1 4.53
Note) The available stroke range of model KR30H□□B indicates the value when two nut blocks are used in close contact with
each other.

Model KR30H□□C (with a Single Short Nut Block)
Model KR30H□□D (with Two Short Nut Blocks)
L1
16 11 （46.7*）
48.9 2×n-5.5 through hole, 8
9 28.5 φ 9.5 counter bore depth 4.5
φ 6h7
30
2-M2.6 depth 5 2-M5 depth 8 2× n1-M2.6 depth 3.5

F
H （n1ー1）
×F （H）
10 31 18 48.9MIN
3 12 8.5 (Dimension with
two nut blocks in
2
B close contact)
φ 30H8
A
φ 28
14
B 100
G （nー1）
×100 （G）
Nipple orientation
59.7 38
30°
5
42.5
43
0.5 20.8
23.5
2.5
21.3
30
30°
With two nut blocks

2−
15 30
0
（
D4
4-M4 depth 8 60
6）
PC
Overall Available stroke Overall main unit

LM rail length range (mm) H G F mass (kg)
length n n1
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
L1(mm) Type C Type D Type C Type D
150 220 84.3 35.4 25 25 100 2 2 1.3 1.47
200 270 134.3 85.4 50 50 100 2 2 1.5 1.67
300 370 234.3 185.4 50 50 200 3 2 2.1 2.27
400 470 334.3 285.4 100 50 200 4 2 2.6 2.77
500 570 434.3 385.4 50 50 200 5 3 3.1 3.27
600 670 534.3 485.4 100 50 200 6 3 3.7 3.87
Note1) The available stroke range of model KR30H □□ D indicates the value when two nut blocks are used in close contact
with each other.
Note2) * indicates the block length when calculating the available stroke range. With type D, it is 95.6mm.
B-272
L1
LM rail length
28.5
2-M5 depth 10
74
LM Guide Actuator
70
4-M2 depth 4 5 21
(from the backside)
59.7 80
（0.85）
2-M3 depth 5 34 60
30°
45
42.5
43
0.5 20.8
21.3
25
30°
60
2−
0
（
D4
4-M4 depth 8
R
PC
6）
LM rail length
length
(mm) Type C Type D Type C Type D
L1(mm)
150 220 84.3 35.4 1.4 1.64
200 270 134.3 85.4 1.6 1.84
300 370 234.3 185.4 2.2 2.44
400 470 334.3 285.4 2.8 3.04
500 570 434.3 385.4 3.3 3.54
600 670 534.3 485.4 3.9 4.14
Note) The available stroke range of model KR30H□□D indicates the value when two nut blocks are used in close contact with
each other.

Model KR33□□A (with a Single Long Nut Block)
Model KR33□□B (with Two Long Nut Blocks)
L1
11 2× n-5.5 through hole, φ 9.5 counter bore depth 5.4 5.5
（72*）
76
φ 6h7
54 4-M5 depth 8
16
30
30
9
8
4-M2 depth 5
F 2×n1-M2.6 depth 4
H （n1−1）
×F （H）
10 31 18
76MIN
(Dimension with two
15 nut blocks in close
B contact)
1
φ 28H8
A
15
B 100
50 （n−1）
×100 （50）
(25 if the LM rail length is 150) (25 if the LM rail length is 150)
60 Nipple orientation
40
6.5 With a single nut block
45°
6.5
44.5
44
30.7
0.5 22.5
33
23
°
45
With two nut blocks

3.1
15 30
2−
0
D4
4-M4 depth 10
C
60
PC
2）
Overall Available stroke range Overall main unit mass

LM rail length (mm) H F (kg)
length n n1
(mm) (mm) (mm)
150 220 61.5 — 25 100 2 2 1.7 —
200 270 111.5 — 50 100 2 2 2 —
300 370 211.5 135.5 50 200 3 2 2.6 2.95
400 470 311.5 235.5 100 200 4 2 3.2 3.55
500 570 411.5 335.5 50 200 5 3 3.9 4.25
600 670 511.5 435.5 100 200 6 3 4.5 4.85
each other.
B-274
L1
LM rail length
54 4-M5 depth 15
30
74
LM Guide Actuator
8 2×2-M3 depth 6
(from the backside)
86
（0.2）
60 64
4-M4 depth 10 40 62
45°
44.5
48
44
33
0.5 22.5
23
45°
0
2−
60
D4
（
C
PC
2）
LM rail length
length
L1(mm)
150 220 61.5 — 1.9 —
200 270 111.5 — 2.2 —
300 370 211.5 135.5 2.8 3.28
400 470 311.5 235.5 3.5 3.98
500 570 411.5 335.5 4.2 4.68
600 670 511.5 435.5 4.8 5.28
each other.
It must be noted that the cover-mounting bolt is 0.2 mm higher than the top face of the top table.

Model KR33□□C (with a Single Short Nut Block)
Model KR33□□D (with Two Short Nut Blocks)
L1
11 5.5
2× n-5.5 through hole,
φ 6h7
2-M5 depth 8 （46.5*）

50.5 φ 9.5 counter bore depth 5.4
16
28.5
30
9
4-M2 depth 5 5
F 2×n1-M2.6 depth 4
H （n1−1）
×F （H）
10 30 18
50.5MIN
(Dimension with
10 two nut blocks
B in close contact)
1
φ 28H8
A
15
B 100
50 （n−1）
×100 （50）
(25 if the LM rail length is 150) (25 if the LM rail length is 150)
40
6.5 With a single nut block
45°
6.5
44.5
44
30.7
33
0.5 22.5
23
°
45
With two nut blocks

3.1
15 30
0
2−
D4
60
C
4-M4 depth 10
PC
2）

LM rail length (mm) H F (kg)
length n n1
(mm) (mm) (mm)
150 220 87 36.5 25 100 2 2 1.6 1.83
200 270 137 86.5 50 100 2 2 1.9 2.13
300 370 237 186.5 50 200 3 2 2.5 2.73
400 470 337 286.5 100 200 4 2 3.1 3.33
500 570 437 386.5 50 200 5 3 3.8 4.03
600 670 537 486.5 100 200 6 3 4.4 4.63
Note1) The available stroke range of model KR33□□D indicates the value when two nut blocks are used in close contact with
each other.
Note2) * indicates the block length when calculating the available stroke range. With type D, it is 97mm.
B-276
L1
LM rail length
28.5 2-M5 depth 15
74
LM Guide Actuator
2× 2-M2 depth 5 5 21
(from the backside)
86
（0.2）
60 64
4-M4 depth 10 40 62
45°
44.5
48
44
33
0.5 22.5
23
45°
0
2−
60
D4
（
C
PC
2）
LM rail length
length
L1(mm)
150 220 87 36.5 1.7 2
200 270 137 86.5 2.1 2.4
300 370 237 186.5 2.7 3
400 470 337 286.5 3.3 3.6
500 570 437 386.5 4 4.3
600 670 537 486.5 4.7 5
Note) The available stroke range of model KR33□□D indicates the value when two nut blocks are used in close contact with
each other.
It must be noted that the cover-mounting bolt is 0.2 mm higher than the top face of the top table.

L1
28 12.4 （105.6*）
108 4-M6 depth 9 9
φ 10h7
18 81 2×n-6.6 through hole,

46 φ 11 counter bore depth 6.5
43
46
2-M3 depth 6 2× n1-M2.6 depth 3.5
200
H （n1ー1）
×200 （H）
14 51 23 108MIN
3.5 14 10 (Dimension with
two nut blocks in
close contact)
4
B
φ 50H8
φ 44
A
19
B 100
70 （nー1）
×100 （70）
4-M5 depth 10
79.6 53 Nipple orientation
4-M4 depth 8
45°
30°
4
62.5
63
45
30.5
32
30
With two nut blocks

30°
45°
0.5
2−
0
PC
17 46
D6
（
R
D7
PC
80
8）
0
LM rail length H
length n n1
L1(mm)
340 440 213 105 70 3 2 5.1 6.05
440 540 313 205 20 4 3 6.1 7.05
540 640 413 305 70 5 3 7.1 8.05
640 740 513 405 20 6 4 8.1 9.05
740 840 631 505 70 7 4 9.1 10.05
840 940 713 605 20 8 5 10.1 11.05
940 1040 813 705 70 9 5 11.2 12.15
Note1) The available stroke range of model KR45H □□ B indicates the value when two nut blocks are used in close contact
with each other.
B-278
L1
LM rail length
81
46
LM Guide Actuator
92
94
5
4-M6 depth 12 4-M2.6 depth 5
(from the backside)
4-M5 depth 10 104

（1.8）
79.6 80
4-M4 depth 8
77
45°
30°
62.5
67
63
35
30.5
30°
30
45°
0.5
PC
2−
80
0
D6
（
D7
R
PC
8）
0
LM rail length
length
L1(mm)
340 440 213 105 5.7 7.01
440 540 313 205 6.8 8.11
540 640 413 305 7.9 9.21
640 740 513 405 9 10.31
740 840 613 505 10.1 11.41
840 940 713 605 11.2 12.51
940 1040 813 705 12.3 13.61
Note) The available stroke range of model KR45H□□B indicates the value when two nut blocks are used in close contact with
each other.

L1
28 12.4 2×n-6.6 through hole, φ 11 counter bore depth 6.5 9
18 （68.1*） 2-M6 depth 9
70.5
φ 10h7
43.5
46
43
2-M3 depth 6 2×n1-M2.6 depth 3.5
200
H （n1ー1）
×200 （H）
14 51 23 70.5 MIN
3.5 14 10 (Dimension with
two nut blocks in
close contact)
4
B
φ 50H8
A
φ 44
19
B 100
70 （nー1）
×100 （70）
4-M5 depth 10
79.6 53 Nipple orientation
4-M4 depth 8
45°
30°
4
62.5
63
45
30.5
32
30
With two nut blocks

30°
45°
0.5
2−
PC
0
17 46
D6
（
R
D7
PC
80
8）
0
LM rail length H
length n n1
(mm) Type C Type D (mm) Type C Type D
L1(mm)
340 440 250.5 180 70 3 2 4.7 5.23
440 540 350.5 280 20 4 3 5.7 6.23
540 640 450.5 380 70 5 3 6.7 7.23
640 740 550.5 480 20 6 4 7.7 8.23
740 840 650.5 580 70 7 4 8.7 9.23
840 940 750.5 680 20 8 5 9.7 10.23
940 1040 850.5 780 70 9 5 10.8 11.33
each other.
Note) * indicates the block length when calculating the available stroke range. With type D, it is 138.6mm.
B-280
L1
LM rail length
43.5 2-M6 depth 12
94
LM Guide Actuator
92
5 33.5
4-M2.6 depth 5
(from the backside)
4-M5 depth 10 104

（1.8）
79.6 80
4-M4 depth 8
77
45°
30°
62.5
63
67
30°
30.5
35
30
45°
0.5
PC
2−
80
0
（
D6
D7
R
PC
8）
0
LM rail length
length
L1(mm)
340 440 250.5 180 5.1 5.82
440 540 350.5 280 6.2 6.92
540 640 450.5 380 7.3 8.02
640 740 550.5 480 8.4 9.12
740 840 650.5 580 9.5 10.22
840 940 750.5 680 10.6 11.32
940 1040 850.5 780 11.7 12.42
each other.

L1
87.5 LM rail length 13
28 17 （106*）
110 2×n-6.6 through hole, 9
18 81 φ 11 counter bore depth 6.5
φ 8h7
46 4-M6 depth 12
46
4-M2 depth 5 8 2×n1-M2.6 depth 4

200
H （n1−1）
×200 （H）
14 50.5 23 110MIN
3.5 (Dimension with
15 two nut blocks in
B close contact)
1
φ 50H8
φ 44
A
28
B 100
70 （n−1）
×100 （70）
83
4-M4 depth 8 10 Nipple orientation
60
With a single nut block
45°
31 27.5
32 9
64
63
43.5
46
4.5
45°
With two nut blocks

20
1
46
2−
4
（
D6
86
C
2）
PC
LM rail length H
length n n1
L1(mm)
340 440.5 208 98 70 3 2 7.7 8.9
440 540.5 308 198 20 4 3 9 10.2
540 640.5 408 298 70 5 3 10.3 11.5
640 740.5 508 398 20 6 4 11.6 12.8
740 840.5 608 498 70 7 4 12.8 14
840 940.5 708 598 20 8 5 14.1 15.3
940 1040.5 808 698 70 9 5 15.3 16.5
each other.
B-282
L1
LM rail length
81 4-M5 depth 22
46 4-M6 depth 22
30
LM Guide Actuator
100
8 2×2-M3 depth 6
(from the backside)
112
（0.9）
83 88
4-M4 depth 8 60 85
45°
27.5
68
63
64
46
32
31
45°
1
2−
86
4
D6
（
C
PC
2）
LM rail length
length
L1(mm)
340 440.5 208 98 8.3 9.79
440 540.5 308 198 9.7 11.19
540 640.5 408 298 11 12.49
640 740.5 508 398 12.4 13.89
740 840.5 608 498 13.7 15.19
840 940.5 708 598 15 16.49
940 1040.5 808 698 16.3 17.79
each other.

L1
28 17 2×n-6.6 through hole, 9
18 （68.5*）
72.5 φ 11 counter bore depth 6.5
φ 8h7
43.5 2-M6 depth 12
46
4-M2 depth 5 8
200 2× n1-M2.6 depth 4
H （n1ー1）
×200 （H）
14 50.5 23 72.5 MIN

3.5 (Dimension with
15
two nut blocks in
B close contact)
1
φ 50H8
φ 44
A
28
B 100
70 (nー1)×100 （70）
83
4-M4 depth 8 10 Nipple orientation
60
With a single nut block
45°
31 27.5
32 9
64
63
43.5
46
4.5
45°
With two nut blocks

20
1
46
2−
4
（
D6
86
C
PC
2）
LM rail length H
length n n1
(mm) Type C Type D (mm) Type C Type D
L1(mm)
340 440.5 245.5 173 70 3 2 7.3 8.1
440 540.5 345.5 273 20 4 3 8.6 9.4
540 640.5 445.5 373 70 5 3 9.9 10.7
640 740.5 545.5 473 20 6 4 11.2 12
740 840.5 645.5 573 70 7 4 12.4 13.2
840 940.5 745.5 673 20 8 5 13.7 14.5
940 1040.5 845.5 773 70 9 5 14.9 15.7
each other.
Note) * indicates the block length when calculating the available stroke range. With type D, it is 141mm.
B-284
L1
LM rail length
43.5 2-M6 depth 22
100
LM Guide Actuator
2×2-M3 depth 6 8 32
(from the backside)
B
112
（0.9）
83 88
4-M4 depth 8 60 85
45°
27.5
68
63
64
46
32
31
45°
1
2−
4
86
D6
（
C
PC
2）
LM rail length
length
L1(mm)
340 440.5 245.5 173 7.8 8.79
440 540.5 345.5 273 9.1 10.09
540 640.5 445.5 373 10.5 11.49
640 740.5 545.5 473 11.9 12.89
740 840.5 645.5 573 13.2 14.19
840 940.5 745.5 673 14.5 15.49
940 1040.5 845.5 773 15.8 16.79
each other.

Model KR5520A (with a Single Nut Block)
Model KR5520B (with Two Nut Blocks)
L1
32 15 128* 2×n-9 through hole, 11
22 95.2 φ 14 counter bore depth 8.6
φ 12h7
50 50 4-M8 depth 15
8
4-M3 depth 6 2×n1-M2.6 depth 4
200
H (n1ー1)×200 （H）
128MIN
22 45 27 (Dimension with
20
two nut blocks in
1.4
B close contact)
φ 50H8
A
27
B 150
G (nー1)×150 （G）
12
45°
12
71.5
72
55
0.5 31.5
4.4
40
With two nut blocks

32
45°
0
2−
25 50
D7
（
PC
100
3）

LM rail length (mm) H G (kg)
length n n1
(mm) (mm) (mm)
980 1089 826 698 90 40 7 5 19.9 21.6
1080 1189 926 798 40 15 8 6 21.7 23.4
1180 1289 1026 898 90 65 8 6 23.4 25.1
1280 1389 1126 998 40 40 9 7 25.1 26.8
1380 1489 1226 1098 90 15 10 7 26.9 28.6
each other.
B-286
L1
LM rail length
95.2 4-M8 depth 36

50
110
LM Guide Actuator
8 2×2-M3 depth 6
(from the backside)
B
124
99 95
（0.9）
78 92
45°
80
71.5
72
44
0.5 31.5
32
45°
2−
0
100
D7
（
C
PC
3）
4-M5 depth 10
LM rail length
length
L1(mm)
980 1089 826 698 22.7 26.2
1080 1189 926 798 24.6 28.1
1180 1289 1026 898 26.4 29.9
1280 1389 1126 998 28.1 31.6
1380 1489 1226 1098 30 33.5
each other.

L1
29 14.4 （144.6*）
145 2×n-11 through hole, 11
16 110 φ 17.5 counter bore depth 10.8
70 4-M10 depth 20
70
φ 15h7
4-M3 depth 6 8
200 2× n1-M2.6 depth 4
H （n1−1）
×200 （H）
30 35 35 145MIN
3.5 20 (Dimension with
two nut blocks in
1.4
B close contact)
φ 70H8
φ 60
A
30
B 150
G （n−1）
×150 （G）
Nipple orientation
128
18
45°
15
82
83
With two nut blocks

65
47
38
37
45°
5.2
1
30 70
2−
D9
130
PC
C
2）

LM rail length (mm) H G (kg)
length n n1
(mm) (mm) (mm)
980 1098 810 665 90 40 7 5 31.6 34.6
1180 1298 1010 865 90 65 8 6 37 40
1380 1498 1210 1065 90 90 9 7 42.4 45.4
1680 1798 1510 1365 40 90 11 9 50.5 53.5
each other.
B-288
L1
LM rail length
145
110 4-M8 depth 40
50
150
LM Guide Actuator
140
8 2×2-M3 depth 6
(from the backside)
170
128 129
（1.5）
4-M6 depth 12 102 126

45°
92
82
83
52
38
37
45°
1
2−
130
D9
（
C
PC
2）
LM rail length
length
L1(mm)
980 1098 810 665 36.3 43
1180 1298 1010 865 42 48.7
1380 1498 1210 1065 47.6 54.3
1680 1798 1510 1365 56.1 62.8
each other.

Model number coding
Model number coding
KR33 10 A +400L P 0 - 0 0 0 0
Model No. Motor bracket type
(housing A, intermediate flange) See B-312 onward.
Sensor specification See B-308.

With/without a cover
0: none, 1: with a cover, 2: with a bellows
With/without a motor
0: none, 1:with a motor (mounted at THK)
Accuracy grade
No Symbol: Normal grade, H: High accuracy grade, P: Precision grade
LM rail length (in mm) See A-396.
Block type See A-394.
Ball screw lead (in mm) See A-396.
Mass of Moving Element

Table1 shows the mass of the nut block and sub table of model KR.
Table1 Mass of the Nut Block and Sub Table of KR Unit: kg
Block A (long block) type Block C (short block) type
Model No.
Nut block Sub table Nut block Sub table
KR15 0.042 0.022 — —
KR20 0.075 0.045 — —
KR26 0.180 0.085 — —
KR30H 0.30 0.13 0.17 0.07
KR33 0.35 0.13 0.23 0.07
KR45H 0.95 0.36 0.53 0.19
KR46 1.20 0.29 0.80 0.19
KR55 1.70 1.80 — —
KR65 3.00 3.70 — —
B-290
SKR
Caged Ball LM Guide Actuator
(Separate)
Model SKR33 Standard Type Long Block ..... B-292 Structure and features....................... A-416
Model SKR33 (with a Cover) Long Block ..... B-293 Caged Ball/Roller Technology........... A-419
Model SKR33 Standard Type Short Block .... B-294 Types and Features .......................... A-421
Model SKR33 (with a Cover) Short Block..... B-295 Load Ratings in All Directions
Model SKR46 Standard Type Long Block ..... B-296 and Permissible Moment ............... A-422
Model SKR46 (with a Cover) Long Block ..... B-297 Lubrication......................................... A-425
Model SKR46 Standard Type Short Block .... B-298 Service Life ....................................... A-426
Model SKR46 (with a Cover) Short Block..... B-299 Accuracy Standards .......................... A-428
Model Number Coding ...................... B-300 Options............................................. A-430

Mass of Moving Element................... B-300 Cover................................................. A-431
Sensor............................................... A-433
Options............................................. B-301 Motor Bracket.................................... A-434
Sensor............................................... B-308
Motor Bracket.................................... B-336

the Products".
B-291
Model SKR33 Standard Type
Model SKR33□□A (with a Single Long Block)
Model SKR33□□B (with Two Long Blocks)
L1
76
φ 8h7
54 2×n1-M2.6 depth 4
16
11 30 4-M5 depth 6 8
30
9
23
8.5 2×n-5.5 through hole
F
2-M2 depth 5 φ 9.5 counter bore depth 5.4
H (n1-1)×F (H)
10 27 22
76 MIN
(Dimension with
two nut blocks in
B close contact)
φ 30H8
2
φ 28
A
20
3 B 100
G (n-1)×100 (G)
2-M3 depth 5 59.6 2-M4 through

34 37.4
3 0 ° 30 °
20.3
42.6
43.3
33
29
2.6
15 30
0.7
2-M4 depth 8
2−
D4
60
（
PC
R
5）
Overall Available stroke range

LM rail H G F Overall main unit mass (kg)
length (mm) n n1
length (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
150 220 55 — 25 25 100 2 2 1.7 —
200 270 105 — 50 50 100 2 2 2.1 —
300 370 205 129 50 50 200 3 2 2.8 3.1
400 470 305 229 100 50 200 4 2 3.5 3.8
500 570 405 329 50 50 200 5 3 4.2 4.5
600 670 505 429 100 50 200 6 3 5.0 5.3
700 770 605 529 50 50 200 7 4 5.7 6.0
Note) The available stroke range of model SKR 33 □□ B indicates the value when two blocks are used in close contact with
each other.
B-292
Model SKR33 (with a Cover)
54
4-M5 depth 10
30
74
LM Guide Actuator
5 4-M2 depth 4
(from the backside)
59.6 86
(0.85)
2-M3 depth 5 2-M4 through

34 64
30° 30°
20
45.5
42.3
48
41
2.6
31
29
0.7
60
0
2−
2-M4 depth 8
D4
（
R
PC
5）

length (mm) n n1
150 220 55 — 25 25 100 2 2 1.9 —
200 270 105 — 50 50 100 2 2 2.3 —
300 370 205 129 50 50 200 3 2 3.1 3.5
400 470 305 229 100 50 200 4 2 3.8 4.2
500 570 405 329 50 50 200 5 3 4.6 5.0
600 670 505 429 100 50 200 6 3 5.3 5.7
700 770 605 529 50 50 200 7 4 6.1 6.5
each other.

Model SKR33□□C (with a Single Short Block)
Model SKR33□□D (with Two Short Blocks)
L1
50.5
φ 8h7
16 2-M2 depth 5 28.5 2×n1-M2.6 depth 4

11 8
23
9
30
8.5 2-M5 depth 6
2×n-5.5 through hole
F φ 9.5 counter bore depth 5.4
H (n1-1)×F (H)
10 27 22 50.5
(Dimension with
two nut blocks
B
2
in close contact)
φ 30H8
φ 28
A
20
3 B 100
G (n-1)×100 (G)
2-M3 depth 5 59.6 2-M4 through

34 37.4
30° 30°
20.3
43.3
42.6
33
29
2.6
15 30
0.7
2-M4 depth 8
2−
D4
60
（
PC
R
5）

length (mm) n n1
150 220 80.5 30 25 25 100 2 2 1.6 1.8
200 270 130.5 80 50 50 100 2 2 2.0 2.1
300 370 230.5 180 50 50 200 3 2 2.7 2.8
400 470 330.5 280 100 50 200 4 2 3.4 3.6
500 570 430.5 380 50 50 200 5 3 4.1 4.3
600 670 530.5 480 100 50 200 6 3 4.8 5.0
700 770 630.5 580 50 50 200 7 4 5.5 5.7
Note) The available stroke range of model SKR33 □□ D indicates the value when two blocks are used in close contact with
each other.
B-294
28.5
74
LM Guide Actuator
4-M2 depth 4 5 21 2-M5 depth 10
(from the backside)
59.6 86
(0.85)
2-M3 depth 5 2-M4 through

34 64
30° 30°
20
45.5
42.3
48
41
2.6
31
29
0.7
60
0
2−
2-M4 depth 8
D4
（
R
PC
5）

length (mm) n n1
150 220 80.5 30 25 25 100 2 2 1.8 2.0
200 270 130.5 80 50 50 100 2 2 2.2 2.3
300 370 230.5 180 50 50 200 3 2 2.9 3.1
400 470 330.5 280 100 50 200 4 2 3.7 3.8
500 570 430.5 380 50 50 200 5 3 4.4 4.6
600 670 530.5 480 100 50 200 6 3 5.2 5.3
700 770 630.5 580 50 50 200 7 4 5.9 6.1
each other.

L1
110
φ 10h7
28 2-M6 depth 9 81 2× n1-M2.6 depth 4

18 12.5 46 9
46
10 2-M2 depth 5 2× n-6.6 through hole

H (n1−1)×200 (H)
14 48.5 25
110
(Dimension with two
nut blocks in close
B contact)
2
φ 46H8
φ 42
A
29
B 100
G (n−1)×100 (G)
4-M4 depth 8
85.4 54.4
30 ° 30 °
26.3
58.3
57.1
40.8
5.7
46
20 46
1.2
2−
86
D6
（
PC
R
8）

LM rail H G Overall main unit mass (kg)
length (mm) n n1
length (mm) (mm) (mm)
340 440.5 208.5 98.5 70 70 3 2 6.4 7.4
440 540.5 308.5 198.5 20 70 4 3 7.8 8.7
540 640.5 408.5 298.5 70 70 5 3 9.2 10.1
640 740.5 508.5 398.5 20 70 6 4 10.6 11.5
740 840.5 608.5 498.5 70 70 7 4 12.0 12.9
940 1040.5 808.5 698.5 70 70 9 5 14.8 15.7
each other.
B-296
81
4-M6 depth 12 46 4-M5 depth 10
30
LM Guide Actuator
4-M2.6 depth 5 5
(from the backside)
112
100
4-M4 depth 8
(1.8)
85.4 88
30° 30°
26
56.8
68
64
56
40.8
5.7
43
1.2
86
60
2−
（
D
R
PC
8）

length (mm) n n1
340 440.5 208.5 98.5 70 70 3 2 7.1 8.3
440 540.5 308.5 198.5 20 70 4 3 8.6 9.8
540 640.5 408.5 298.5 70 70 5 3 10.0 11.3
640 740.5 508.5 398.5 20 70 6 4 11.5 12.7
740 840.5 608.5 498.5 70 70 7 4 13.0 14.2
940 1040.5 808.5 698.5 70 70 9 5 16.0 17.2
each other.

L1
77
φ 10h7
28 2-M6 depth 9 2×n1-M2.6 depth 4

18 12.5 48 9
46
10 2-M2 depth 5 2×n-6.6 through hole
H (n1−1)×200 (H)
14 48.5 25
77
(Dimension with
two nut blocks
B in close contact)
2
φ 46H8
φ 42
A
29
3.5 B 100
G (n−1)×100 (G)
4-M4 depth 8
85.4 54.4
30° 30°
26.3
58.3
57.1
40.8
5.7
46
20 46
1.2
2−
86
D6
（
R
PC
8）

length (mm) n n1
340 440.5 241.5 164.5 70 70 3 2 6.1 6.7
440 540.5 341.5 264.5 20 70 4 3 7.5 8.1
540 640.5 441.5 364.5 70 70 5 3 8.9 9.5
640 740.5 541.5 464.5 20 70 6 4 10.3 10.8
740 840.5 641.5 564.5 70 70 7 4 11.7 12.2
940 1040.5 841.5 764.5 70 70 9 5 14.5 15.0
each other.
B-298
48
2-M6 depth 12
LM Guide Actuator
4-M2.6 depth 5 5 35.5
(from the backside)
B
112
100
4-M4 depth 8
(1.8)
85.4 88
30° 30°
26
56.8
68
64
56
40.8
5.7
43
1.2
86
0
2−
D6
（
R
PC
8）

length (mm) n n1
340 440.5 241.5 164.5 70 70 3 2 6.6 7.4
440 540.5 341.5 264.5 20 70 4 3 8.1 8.9
540 640.5 441.5 364.5 70 70 5 3 9.6 10.3
640 740.5 541.5 464.5 20 70 6 4 11.0 11.8
740 840.5 641.5 564.5 70 70 7 4 12.5 13.3
940 1040.5 841.5 764.5 70 70 9 5 15.5 16.3
each other.

Model Number Coding
Model number coding
SKR33 10 A +400L P 0 - 0 0 0 0
Model No. Motor bracket type
(housing A, intermediate flange) See B-337 onward.
Sensor specification See B-308.

With/without a cover
0: none, 1: with a cover, 2: with a bellows
With/without a motor
0: none, 1:with a motor (mounted at THK)
Accuracy grade
No Symbol: Normal grade, H: High accuracy grade, P: Precision grade
LM rail length (in mm) See A-418.
Block type See A-424.
Ball screw lead (in mm) See A-418.
Mass of Moving Element

Table1 shows the mass of the nut block and sub table of model SKR.
Table1 Mass of the Nut Block and Sub Table of SKR Unit: kg
Block A (long block) type Block C (short block) type
Model No.
Nut block Sub table Nut block Sub table
SKR33 0.31 0.13 0.17 0.07
SKR46 0.91 0.34 0.57 0.20
B-300
LM Guide Actuator
Options
B-301
Bellows
For model KR, a bellows is available for contamination protection in addition to a cover.
[Block A Type]
T1
T
L
A S B
l1
Unit: mm
Counter-
LM rail Stroke Motor side
Model No.
length L length S
MIN/MAX
A
motor side l 1 W T T1
B
75 25 12.5/37.5 25
100 37 19/56 31.5
125 50 25/75 38.5
KR15 23 49 23.5 15.5
150 62 31.5/93.5 44
175 75 37.5/112.5 50
200 87 44/131 56.5
100 35 14.4/50.4 33 32.2
KR20 150 63 25.9/88.9 44.5 43.8 33.2 60 30 20
200 91 36.9/127.9 55.5 54.7
150 57 20.3/80.3 45
200 87 30.3/120.3 55
KR26 47.4 74 38 20
250 115 40.3/160.3 65
300 145 50.3/200.3 75
150 58 16/74 46
200 92 24/116 54
300 160 40/200 70
KR30H 54 80 39 17.5
400 226 57/283 87
500 290 75/365 105
600 358 91/449 121
150 57 14/76 48 45
200 104 17/123 48 48
300 180 30/210 59 61
KR33 54 84 44.5 20
400 260 40/300 69 71
500 330 55/385 84 86
600 410 65/475 94 96
B-302
Counter-
Model No.
length L length S
MIN/MAX
A
B
340 190 30/220 74.5 75.5
440 270 40/310 84.5 85.5
540 340 55/395 99.5 100.5
KR45H 640 420 65/485 109.5 110.5 81 104 56 28
740 500 75/575 119.5 120.5
840 580 85/665 129.5 130.5
940 650 100/750 144.5 145.5

340 178 29.5/207.5 81 81
440 258 39.5/297.5 91 91
540 328 54.5/382.5 106 106
KR46 81 110 56 20
640 418 59.5/477.5 111 111
740 488 74.5/562.5 126 126
940 648 94.5/742.5 146 146
980 770 55.4/825.4 105 105
1080 856 62.4/918.4 112 112
KR55 1180 944 68.4/1012.4 118 118 95.2 154 77 42
1280 1030 75.4/1105.4 125 125
1380 1116 82.4/1198.4 132 132
980 746.5 58/804.5 115 118.5
1180 914.5 74/988.5 131 134.5
KR65 110 184 87 49
1380 1082.5 90/1172.5 147 150.5
1680 1334.5 114/1448.5 171 174.5
Note) For use other than in horizontal mount (e.g., vertical mount and wall mount), the extension rate differs from the specifica-
tion value. Contact THK for details.
Model No. A (extension rate)
Note : The length of the bellows is calculated as follow.
KR15 3
S KR20 3
（A−1） KR26 4
Lmax ＝ Lmin•A A: Extension rate (see right table) KR30H 5
KR33 7
KR45H 7
KR46 7
KR55 13
KR65 13
B-303
[Block B Type]
T1
T
L
A l2 S B
l1
Unit: mm
Counter-
Model No.
length L length S
MIN/MAX
A
motor side l1 l2 W T T1
B
125 33 17/50 29.5
150 46 23/69 35.5
KR15 56 33 49 23.5 15.5
175 58 29.5/87.5 42
200 71 35.5/106.5 48
150 38 15.4/53.4 34 33.2
KR20 79.2 46 60 30 20
200 66 26.4/92.4 45 44.2
200 46 17.8/68.8 42.5
KR26 250 77 27.8/108.8 52.5 111.4 64 74 38 20
300 107 37.8/148.8 62.5
200 40 12.8/52.8 42.8
300 108 28.8/136.8 58.8
KR30H 400 176 44.8/220.8 74.8 128.4 74.4 80 39 17.5
500 240 62.8/302.8 92.8
600 308 78.8/386.8 108.8
300 114 25/139 54 56
400 194 35/229 64 66
KR33 130 76 84 44.5 20
500 264 50/321 79 81
600 344 60/404 89 91
340 102 20/122 64.5 65.5
440 182 30/212 74.5 75.5
540 252 45/297 89.5 90.5
KR45H 640 332 55/387 99.5 100.5 189 108 104 56 28
740 412 65/477 109.5 110.5
840 492 75/567 119.5 120.5
940 572 85/657 129.5 130.5
340 90 15.5/111.5 73 67
440 168 29.5/197.5 81 81
540 248 39.5/287.5 91 91
KR46 191 110 110 56 20
640 318 54.5/372.5 106 106
740 408 59.5/467.5 111 111
940 548 89.5/637.5 141 141
B-304
Counter-
Model No.
length L length S
MIN/MAX
A
motor side l1 l2 W T T1
B
980 652 50.4/702.4 100 100
1080 738 57.4/795.4 107 107
KR55 1180 826 63.4/889.4 113 113 223.1 128 154 77 42
1280 912 70.4/982.4 120 120
1380 998 77.4/1075.4 127 127
980 625.5 46/671.5 103 106.5
1180 795.5 61/856.5 118 121.5

KR65 225 145 184 87 49
1380 959.5 79/1038.5 136 139.5
1680 1211.5 103/1314.5 160 163.5
KR15 3
S KR20 3
（A−1） KR26 4
Lmax ＝ Lmin•A A: Extension rate (see right table) KR30H 5
KR33 7
KR45H 7
KR46 7
KR55 13
KR65 13
B-305
[Block C Type]
T1
T
L
A S B
l1
Unit: mm
Counter-
Model No.
length L length S
MIN/MAX
A
B
150 73 21.25/94.25 38.5
200 107 29.25/136.25 46.5
300 175 45.25/220.25 62.5
KR30H 28.5 80 39 17.5
400 243 61.25/304.25 78.5
500 307 79.25/386.25 96.5
600 375 95.25/470.25 112.5
150 78.7 17/98.5 36 35.3
200 119.4 23/142.5 39.3 41.3
300 195.4 35/230.5 51.3 53.3
KR33 28.5 84 44.5 20
400 269.4 48/317.5 64.3 66.3
500 345.4 60/405.5 76.3 78.3
600 425.4 70/495.5 86.3 88.3
340 219 34.25/253.25 60 61
440 299 44.25/343.25 70 71
540 369 59.25/428.25 85 86
KR45H 640 449 69.25/518.25 95 96 43.5 104 56 28
740 529 79.25/608.25 105 106
840 609 89.25/698.25 115 116
940 679 104.25/783.25 130 131
340 205.4 34.5/240 67.3 67.3
440 279.4 47.5/327 80.3 80.3
540 355.4 59.5/415 92.3 92.3
KR46 43.5 110 56 20
640 439.4 67.5/507 100.3 100.3
740 509.4 82.5/592 115.3 115.3
940 675.4 99.5/775 132.3 132.3
KR30H 5
S KR33 7
（A−1） KR45H 7
Lmax ＝ Lmin•A A: Extension rate (see right table) KR46 7
B-306
[Block D Type]
T1
T
L
l2

A S B
l1
Unit: mm
Counter-
Model No.
length L length: S
MIN/MAX
A
motor side l 1 l 2 W T T1
B
150 40 13.3/53.3 30.55
200 74 21.3/95.3 38.55
300 142 37.3/179.3 54.55
KR30H 77.4 48.9 80 39 17.5
400 210 53.3/263.3 70.55
500 274 71.3/345.3 88.55
600 342 87.3/429.3 104.55
150 31.2 14/51 36 32.3
200 78.2 17/98 36 35.3
300 154.9 30/185 46.3 48.3
KR33 79 50.5 84 44.5 20
400 234.9 40/275 56.3 58.3
500 304.9 55/360 71.3 73.3
600 384.9 65/450 81.3 83.3
340 167 25/192 50.75 51.75
440 247 35/282 60.75 61.75
540 317 50/367 75.75 76.75
KR45H 640 397 60/457 85.75 86.75 114 70.5 104 56 28
740 477 70/547 95.75 96.75
840 557 80/637 105.75 106.75
940 627 95/722 120.75 121.75
340 142.9 29.5/167.5 62.3 62.3
440 222.9 39.5/262.5 72.3 72.3
540 292.9 54.5/347.5 87.3 87.3
KR46 116 72.5 110 56 20
640 382.9 59.5/442.5 92.3 92.3
740 452.9 74.5/527.5 107.3 107.3
940 612.9 94.5/707.5 127.3 127.3
KR30H 5
S KR33 7
（A−1） KR45H 7
Lmax ＝ Lmin•A A: Extension rate (see right table) KR46 7
B-307
Sensor
Optional proximity sensors and photo sensors are available for models KR and SKR. Models
equipped with a sensor are also provided with a dedicated sensor rail/sensor dog (detecting plate).
Some models with a short rail are attached with a sensor and sensor rail on both sides. See the table
below.
Model No. Rail length
75L
KR15A
100L
KR15B 125L
75L
KR20A 100L
125L
125L
KR20B
150L
100L
KR26A 125L
150L
175L
KR26B
200L
Table1 With/without a sensor

Symbol Description Type Accessory
0 None — —
1 With sensor rail — Mounting screw
Mounting screw/nut, detecting plate, sensor rail,
2 Photo Sensor EE-SX671 (Omron)
mounting plate, connector (EE-1001)
Proximity Sensor a-contact Mounting screw/nut, detecting plate, sensor rail,
4 GL-12F (SUNX)
(ON when close) fixture (MS-GL12)
Proximity Sensor a-contact Mounting screw/nut, detecting plate, sensor rail,
5 GXL-N12F (SUNX)
(ON when close) fixture (MS-GXL12)
Mounting screw/nut, detecting plate, sensor rail,
6 Photo Sensor EE-SX674 (Omron)
mounting plate, connector (EE-1001)
Proximity Sensor a-contact APM-D3A1-001
7 Mounting screw/nut, detecting plate, sensor rail
(ON when close) (Yamatake)
Proximity Sensor a-contact
8 GL-N12F (SUNX) Mounting screw/nut, detecting plate, sensor rail
(ON when close)
Proximity Sensor b-contact
9 GL-N12FB (SUNX) Mounting screw/nut, detecting plate, sensor rail
(ON when away)
Proximity Sensor b-contact Mounting screw/nut, detecting plate, sensor rail,
A GXL-N12FB (SUNX)
(ON when away) fixture (MS-GXL12)
Proximity Sensor b-contact APM-D3B1-003
B Mounting screw/nut, detecting plate, sensor rail
(ON when away) (Yamatake)
Proximity Sensor a-contact GL-N12F (1 unit),
C Mounting screw/nut, detecting plate, sensor rail
(1 unit), b-contact (2 units) GL-N12FB (2 units)
Proximity Sensor a-contact GXL-N12F (1 unit), Mounting screw/nut, detecting plate, sensor rail,
D
(1 unit), b-contact (2 units) GXL-N12FB (2 units) fixture (MS-GXL12)
Proximity Sensor a-contact APM-D3A1-001 (1 unit),
E Mounting screw/nut, detecting plate, sensor rail
(1 unit), b-contact (2 units) APM-D3B1-003 (2 units)
B-308
[Proximity Sensor]
APM-D3A1-001 (Yamatake) 3 units
APM-D3B1-003 (Yamatake) 3 units
GL-12F (SUNX) 3 units
GXL-N12F (SUNX) 3 units
GX-N12F (SUNX) 3 units
GL-N12FB (SUNX) 3 units
GXL-N12FB (SUNX) 3 units
z Proximity Sensor: APM-D3A1-001 APM-D3B1-003 (Yamatake)

Unit: mm
Model No. a b c d
KR15 27.8 – 5.8 1.4 1.4
KR20 32.5 6.6 6 6
a
KR26 37.5 6.4 8 8
KR30H 43.3 3.3 8.8 9
b KR33 42.5 – 0.6 8.8 9
KR45H 53.2 1.2 14 14
c d KR46 55.4 – 0.6 21.8 22
KR55 62.4 0.4 22 22
KR65 77.4 – 7.5 25.1 25
SKR33 43.05 0.3 14.8 15
SKR46 56.2 0.2 26.8 22
z Proximity Sensor: GL-12F, GL-N12F, GXL-N12F, GL-N12FB, GXL-N12FB (SUNX)

Unit: mm
Model No. a b c d
b
a KR20 34 8 3.6 4
KR26 39 7.9 6 6
KR30H 45 5 8.8 9
KR33 44.5 1.5 8.8 9
KR45H 54.8 2.8 13.8 14
c d KR46 57.4 1.5 21.8 22
KR55 63.5 1.5 22 22
KR65 79 –6 25.1 25
SKR33 44.7 2 13.8 14
SKR46 57.7 1.8 24.8 22
B-309
[Photo Sensor]
EE-SX671 (Omron) 3 units
EE-SX674 (Omron) 3 units
Connector EE-1001 (Omron) 3 units
Note) The connector is a standard attachment to the photo sensor.
z Photo Sensor: EE-SX671 (Omron)

Unit: mm
Model No. e f g h i j
f g KR20 41 54 15 9.5 1 9.5
e KR26 46 58.5 15 11.5 3 11.5
KR30H 51.3 64.3 11.3 13.8 1.4 13.5
KR33 50.8 63.7 7.8 12.8 1.6 13
KR45H 61.2 74.2 9.3 18.3 6.4 18.5
h j
KR46 63.6 76.6 7.6 25.8 14.6 26
i
KR55 70.7 83.5 8.6 24.5 13.6 25
KR65 85.5 98.5 0.6 28.1 16.6 28
SKR33 51.1 63.6 8.3 18.8 7.4 19.5
SKR46 64.1 76.6 8.3 29.8 16.4 26.5
z Photo Sensor: EE-SX674 (Omron)
Unit: mm
Model No. e f g h i j
f g
e KR20 38.5 45 12.5 11 0.8 11
KR26 43.5 50 12.5 13 2.8 13
KR30H 46.2 52.8 6.3 13.8 1.1 14
KR33 43.9 50.3 0.9 12.8 1.6 13
KR45H 56.2 62.7 4.2 19 6.1 19
g j KR46 56.7 63.2 0.7 25.8 14.6 26
i KR55 63.8 70.1 1.8 24.5 13.6 25
KR65 78.8 85.1 – 6.2 28.1 16.6 28
SKR33 45.9 52.1 3.3 17.8 7.1 20
SKR46 58.9 65.1 3.2 28.8 16.1 27
B-310
[Sensor Rail]
The sensor rail can be attached alone.
5
2.4 0.8
5.8 4.3 8

H
A L
Sensor rail
Unit: mm Unit: mm
Model No. Rail length H A L Model No. Rail length H A L

75 88 340 336
100 113 440 436
125 138 540 536
KR15 5.5 37.5 KR46 28 89.5
150 163 640 636
175 188 740 736
200 213 940 936
100 111 980 976
KR20 150 10 43 161 1080 1076
200 211 KR55 1180 27 96 1176
150 161 1280 1276
200 211 1380 1376
KR26 12 54
250 261 980 976
300 311 1180 1176
KR65 30 102
150 146 1380 1376
200 196 1680 1676
300 296 150 146
KR30H 14 61
400 396 200 196
500 496 300 296
600 596 SKR33 400 20 61 396
150 146 500 496
200 196 600 596
300 296 700 696
KR33 15 61
400 396 340 336
500 496 440 436
600 596 540 536
SKR46 29 89.5
340 336 640 636
440 436 740 736
540 536 940 936
KR45H 640 19 90 636
740 736
840 836
940 936
B-311
Motor Bracket
[Motors Used in Model KR and Corresponding Motor Brackets]
For model KR, motor brackets are available that allow different motors to be attached. Each motor
bracket model has an administration number according to the motor to be used. Specify the corre-
sponding administration number when placing an order.
Table2 Table of Motors Used and Corresponding Motor Brackets
Model No.
Dimen- KR15 KR20 KR26 KR30H KR33 KR45H KR46 KR55 KR65
Motor model No. sion angle
SGMM-A1 (10W) 0B 3N 0N — — — — — —
Σ -mini
SGMM-A2 (20W) □25 0B 3N 0N — — — — — —

SGMM-A3 (30W) — 3N 0N — — — — — —
SGMAH-A3 (30W) — 0B 0B 0B 5H 0B 0F — —
Yaskawa Electric
SGMAH-A5 (50W) □40 — 0B 0B 0B 5H 0B 0F — —

SGMAH-01 (100W) — — — 0B 5H 0B 0F — —
SGMPH-01 (100W) — — — — — 0D 40 00 0A
Σ -Ⅱ
SGMAH-02 (200W) □60 — — — — — 0D 40 00 0A

SGMAH-04 (400W) — — — — — 0D 40 00 0A
SGMPH-02 (200W) — — — — — — — 0B 00
SGMPH-04 (400W) □80 — — — — — — — 0B 00
SGMAH-08 (750W) — — — — — — — 0B 0G
HC-AQ013 (10W) 0A 3M 0M — — — — — —
J2-Jr
HC-AQ023 (20W) □28 0A 3M 0M — — — — — —

HC-AQ033 (30W) — 3M 0M — — — — — —
Mitsubishi Electric
HC-MFS053 (50W) — 0B 0B 0B 5H 0B 0F — —
□40
MELSERVO
AC servomotor
HC-MFS13 (100W) — — — 0B 5H 0B 0F — —
HC-MFS23 (200W) — — — — — 0D 40 00 0A
J2 Super
HC-KFS23 (200W) — — — — — 0D 40 00 0A
□60
HC-MFS43 (400W) — — — — — 0D 40 00 0A
HC-KFS43 (400W) — — — — — 0D 40 00 0A
HC-MFS73 (750W) — — — — — — — 0B 0G
□80
HC-KFS73 (750W) — — — — — — — 0B 0G
MSMA3A (30W) — 0A 0A 0A 5K 0A 0G — —
Matsushita Electric
MSMA5A (50W) □38 — 0A 0A 0A 5K 0A 0G — —

MSMA01 (100W) — — — 0A 5K 0A 0G — —
MINAS A
MQMA01 (100W) — — — — — 0C 30 — —
MSMA02 (200W) □60 — — — — — 0C 30 — —
MSMA04 (400W) — — — — — 0C 30 — —
MSMA08 (750W) □80 — — — — — — — 0A 2B
Q1AA04003D (30W) — 0B 0B 0B 5H 0B 0F — —
SANMOTION Q1
SANYO Electric
Q1AA04005D (50W) □40 — 0B 0B 0B 5H 0B 0F — —

Q1AA04010D (100W) — — — 0B 5H 0B 0F — —
Q1AA06020D (200W) — — — — — 0D 40 00 0A
□60
Q1AA06040D (400W) — — — — — 0D 40 00 0A
Q1AA07075D (750W) □76 — — — — — — — 0A 2B
B-312
Model No.
Dimen- KR15 KR20 KR26 KR30H KR33 KR45H KR46 KR55 KR65
Motor model No. sion angle
R88M-W03030 (30W) — 0B 0B 0B 5H 0B 0F — —
R88M-W05030 (50W) □40 — 0B 0B 0B 5H 0B 0F — —
OMNUC W
Omron
R88M-W10030 (100W) — — — 0B 5H 0B 0F — —
R88M-W20030 (200W) — — — — — 0D 40 00 0A
AC servomotor
□60
R88M-W40030 (400W) — — — — — 0D 40 00 0A
R88M-W75030 (750W) □80 — — — — — — — 0B 0G

β 0.2/5000is (50W) — 0B 0B 0B 5H 0B 0F — —
□40
β0.3/5000is (100W) — — — 0B 5H 0B 0F — —
β is series
Fanuc
β0.4/5000is (125W) — — — — — 0D 40 00 0A
β0.5/5000is (200W) □60 — — — — — 0D 40 00 0A
β 1/5000is (400W) — — — — — 0D 40 00 0A
ASC3* □28 0D 0F 0F — — — — — —
— 0E 0E XC 5I — — — —
αStep
AS 46, ASC46 □42

AS 6*, ASC66 □60 — — — 0E 5G 0F 10 — —
AS 9* □85 — — — — — — — 0G 2F
Stepping motor
Oriental Motor
PMU33/35 (PMM33/35) 0D 0F 0F — — — — — —
PMU
□28
PMC33/35 (PMM33/35) 0D 0F 0F — — — — — —
5 phase
RK54□ □42 — 0E 0E XC 5I — — — —
— — — — —
RK
RK56□ □60 0E 5G 0F 10
RK59□ □85 — — — — — — — 0G 2F
— 0E 0E XC 5I — — — —
2 phase
UMK24* (PK24*) □42

UMK
UMK26* (PK26*) □56.4 — — — 0D 5F — — — —

Note1) The symbols in the table each indicate the last two digits of an administration number.
Note2) For the coupling for mounting a motor in the table, contact THK.
Note3) Model KR15 has a limit in input torque. The permissible input torque for model KR1501 is 51 N-mm at a maximum and
that for model KR1502 is 103 N-mm at a maximum. If the maximum torque of the motor mounted to model KR15
exceeds the permissible input torque, take a safety measure such as setting a torque limit.
B-313
[Motor Bracket Dimensional Table for Model KR]
z For Model KR15
F□□-□ …Intermediate flange model number
□□ …Last two digits of administration number
Note) "-" for intermediate flange model number indicates
that only housing A is attached.
Housing A
—
00 6.5 25.5 12
30
4-φ 3 through 24.4
2 6
6.9
9.2
22.5
φ 20H7
22.8
φ 17
2.3
25.3 0.3 2×2-M2 depth 3

Intermediate Flange
Each intermediate flange is made of steel and provided with THK AP-C treatment, a surface treat-
ment for high corrosion resistance.
F15-A 6.5
0A 5
30
3
45°
φ 20H7
φ 17
28
14
φ 20ｈ7
4.5
33
4-M2.6 depth 5
D
PC
(90° equidistant)
F15-B
6.5
0B
30 5
1.5
6.5 6.5 3
φ 20H7
φ 17
26
13
φ 20ｈ7
3.5
4-3.5 through hole

(PCD28, 90° equidistant)
B-314
F15-C
2.5 30
0C 3-3.5 through hole 7.5
ＰＣ
Ｄ (120° equidistant)
16
φ 10H7
24
12
φ 20ｈ7
2.5

60° °
60
F15-D 7.5
0D
3 30 6
□23 2
φ 22H7
φ 17
28
14
φ 20ｈ7
4.5
4-3 through hole
B-315
z For Model KR20
Housing A
—
00 39.6 12 25 12
4-φ 3.4 through 33.6
30°
12.5
9.5
φ 20H7
29.5
30
30°
3.3
2×2-M2.6 depth 4
29
0.5
D
4-M3 depth 6 (Same position on the opposite side)

PC
Intermediate Flange
F20-A □38 8.5

0A 3.5
30°
φ 31
φ 20
30°
6
4-3.4 through hole
4-M3 through φ 6.5 counter bore depth 7
(PCD45, 90° equidistant)（PCD29）
F20-B □40 8.5

0B 3
30°
φ 31
φ 20
30°
4-3.4 through hole

4-M4 through φ 6.5 counter bore depth 6.5
(PCD46, 90° equidistant) （PCD29）
B-316
F20-E □42 7
0E □31 2.5
φ 23
φ 20

4-3.4 through hole 4-M3 through
8
φ 6 counter bore depth 3.5
(from the backside)
F20-F
0F 39.5 6
□23 2
φ 23
φ 20
28
5 4-M3 through
1
4-3 through hole
F20-G
8.5
0G 39.5 4.5
φ 11
φ 22
24
4-M3 through
6-3.4 through hole
F20-M
7
3M
39.5 5
φ 20
28
4-M3 through
1
4-M2.6 through
B-317
F20-N
7
3N
39.5 5
φ 20
26
6.5 4-M3 through
4-3.4 through hole
B-318
z For Model KR26
Housing A

00 49.4 12 34 14
4-φ 3.5 through 43
45ﾟ
φ 24H7
38.5
38
0.5 15.5
11
45ﾟ
2×2-M2.6 depth 4
6.5
3
D3

PC
4-M3 depth 6
Intermediate Flange
F26-A 8.5
0A □38 3.5
φ 31
φ 24
4-3.4 through hole 3

(PCD45, 90° equidistant) (PCD33, 90° equidistant)
F26-B 8.5
0B □40 3
φ 31
φ 24
4-M4 through 4-3.4 through hole

(PCD46, 90° equidistant) φ 6.5 counter bore depth 6.5
B-319
F26-E 49 6.5
0E □31
φ 24
42
4-M3 through
5
4-3.4 through hole
(from the backside)
F26-F
0F
49 6
□23
φ 24
28
5
4-3 through hole 4-M3 through
F26-G
0G 5
49
φ 11
26
4-M3 through
6-3.4 through hole
F26-M
0M 7
5
49
φ 20
28
4-M2.6 through 4-M3 through

B-320
F26-N
0N 7
5
49
φ 20
26
6.5

4-M3 through
4-3.4 through hole
B-321
z For Model KR30H
Housing A
—
00 59.7 10 31 18
2-M3 depth 5 34 3 12
30°
φ 30H8
42.5
φ 28
43
0.5 20.8
30°
0
D4
4-M4 depth 8
PC
Intermediate Flange
F30-A
0A 10
42 3.5
φ 31
φ 28
38

F30-B
0B 10
42 3
φ 31
φ 28
40

B-322
F30-C
□42
XC □31 7
φ 22

φ 6 counter bore depth 4
(from the backside)
F30-D
□56 10
0D □47.14 2
φ 39
φ 28
6.7
F30-E □60 10
0E □50 2
φ 37
φ 28

8.7
B-323
z For Model KR33
Housing A
—
10 31 18
00
60
40
45°
φ 28H8
44.5
44
0.5 22.5
°
45
0
D4
4-M4 depth 10
PC
— 60
10 40 2-3.5 through hole

32
44
22.5
0H8
0.5
φ2
— 60
50 40 2-3.5 through hole
32
8
44
22.5
0.5
φ 28H8
0
4-M4 depth 10
D4
PC
(90° equidistant)
B-324
Housing A for a Separate Motor
— 3 15
60
30 16
52 9
φ 30h8
φ 6h7

44
33
22.5
0.5
4.5
4-M4 depth 8
Turnaround Housing A
— 3 15
40 60 16
□27 9
φ 30.4
φ 6h7
44
22.5
0.5
4-M4 depth 8
Intermediate Flange
Each intermediate flange is made of steel and provided with THK AP-C treatment, a surface treat-
ment for high corrosion resistance.
F33-F 7
□56.4
5F □47.14 2
φ 39
φ 28
4-M4 through 4-M3 through

5.2
B-325
F33-G □60 7
5G □50 2
φ 39
φ 28
7
4-M4 through 4-M3 through
F33-H
5H □40 10
3.5
φ 31
φ 28
4-M4 through 4-M3 depth 6
(PCD46, 90° equidistant) (from the backside)
F33-I
□42
5I □31 10
7
φ 22

φ 6.5 counter bore depth 3.3
(from the backside)
F33-K
5K 10
□40
3.5
φ 31
φ 28
4-M3 through 4-M3 depth 6

(PCD45, 90° equidistant) (from the backside)
B-326
z For Model KR45H
Housing A

4-M5 depth 10
00 79.6 14 51 23
4-M4 depth 8
3.5 14
45°
30°
62.5
φ 50H8
φ 44
63
30
30°
45°
0.5
PC
D6
D7
PC
Intermediate Flange
F45-A
62 10
0A
30°
φ 30
53
30°
4-M3 depth 4.5 4-4.5 through hole

(PCD45, 90° equidistant) φ 8 counter bore depth 4.5
（PCD60）
F45-B
62 10
0B
30°
φ 30
53
30°
4-M4 depth 6 4-4.5 through hole

（PCD60）
B-327
F45-C
10
0C 62 3.5
30°
φ 50
φ 44
60
30°
（PCD60）
F45-D
10
0D 62 3.5
30°
φ 50
φ 44
60
30°

（PCD60）
F45-F 62
0F □50 10
30°
φ 36
60
30°

（PCD60）
B-328
z For Model KR46
Housing A

83
00 14 50.5 23
4-M4 depth 8 60 3.5
45°
31 27.5
φ 50H8
φ 44
64
63
45°
1
4
D6
PC
—
10
83
60
□50
8
φ 36H
63
31
1
4-M4 depth 8
—
20 83
60
45°
8
φ 50H
58.5
63
φ4
4
31
1
4-M4 depth 8
D6
PC
(90° equidistant)
B-329
—
30 83
60
8
45°
φ 50H
58.5
63
φ4
4
31
1
70
4-M4 depth 8
D
PC
(90° equidistant)
—
40 83
60
8
45°
φ 50H
58.5
63
φ4
4
31
1
4-M5 depth 10
D7
PC
(90° equidistant)
Housing A for a Separate Motor
̶
50 3 20
83
4-M5 depth 10
73 28
18
φ 40h8
φ 8h7
63
45
31
1
5
B-330
̶
60 83 3 20
4-M5 depth 10
□40 28
18
φ 40.4
φ 8h7

63
31
1
Intermediate Flange
F46-F □60 10
0F
φ 31
4-4.5 through hole, 2-M4 through

φ 8 counter bore depth 4 (PCD46, 180°equidistant)
F46-G 12
□60
0G 10 2
φ 30
4-4.5 through hole, 4-M3 depth 6

φ 8 counter bore depth 4.4 (PCD45, 90° equidistant)
B-331
z For Model KR55
Housing A
̶
00 99
4-M5 depth 10 78 22 45 27
45°
φ 50H8
71.5
72
0.5 31.5
45°
0
D7
PC
Note) Indicate the mounting holes when placing an order.
̶ 99
10 32 27
78
22
φ 12h7
71.5
31.5
0.5
Intermediate Flange
F55-A 15
□80 12 3
0A
3.5
φ 70
φ 45

8
(PCD90, 90° equidistant) φ 9.5 counter bore depth 5.4

B-332
F55-B 15
□80 12 3
0B 3.5
φ 75
φ 45

4-5.5 through hole
8
(PCD90, 90° equidistant) (PCD70, 90° equidistant)
F55-G 15
□85
0G 12 3
□70
2.5
φ 60
φ 45
10.5
(90° equidistant) (PCD70, 90° equidistant)
B-333
z For Model KR65
Housing A
̶
128 30 35 35
00
4-M6 depth 12 102 3.5
45°
φ 70H8
φ 60
82
83
37
45°
1
0
D9
PC
Note) Indicate the mounting holes when placing an order.
̶
128
10 29 35
102
16
φ 15h7
82
37
Intermediate Flange
F65-A 15
0A □74 12 3
φ 70
φ 50

B-334
F65-B 15
12 3
2B 100 3.5
30°
φ 70
φ 60
80
30°

2
（PCD100）
F65-F 100 15
□70 12 3
2F
30°
φ 70
φ 60
85
30°
4.5
（PCD100）
F65-G 18
0G □80 15 3
3.5
φ 60
φ 70
4-7 through hole

2
Housing A
̶ 128
20 102
30°
82
37
00
1
4-M6 depth 12
D1
PC
B-335
[Motors Used in Model SKR and Corresponding Motor Brackets]
Several types of intermediate flanges for mounting motors are available for model SKR. Each inter-
mediate flange model has an administration number according to the motor to be used and to the
actuator model number. Specify the corresponding administration number when placing an order.
Table3 Table of Motors Used and Corresponding Motor Brackets
Motor model No. Flange angle SKR33 SKR46
SGMAH-A3 (30W) 0H 0F
Yaskawa Electric
SGMAH-A5 (50W) □40 0H 0F

SGMAH-01 (100W) 0H 0F
Σ -Ⅱ
SGMPH-01 (100W) — 04
SGMAH-02 (200W) □60 — 04
SGMAH-04 (400W) — 04
HC-MFS 053 (50W) 0H 0F
Mitsubishi Electric
HC-KFS 053 (50W) 0H 0F

□40
MELSERVO
HC-MFS 13 (100W) 0H 0F
J2 Super
HC-KFS 13 (100W) 0H 0F
HC-MFS 23 (200W) — 04
HC-KFS 23 (200W) — 04
□60
HC-MFS 43 (400W) — 04
HC-KFS 43 (400W) — 04
MSMA 3A (30W) 0K 0G
SANYO Electric Matsushita Electric
MSMA 5A (50W) □38 0K 0G

MINAS A
Servomotor
MSMA 01 (100W) 0K 0G
MQMA 01 (100W) — 03
MSMA 02 (200W) □60 — 03
MSMA 04 (400W) — 03
Q1AA04003D (30W) 0H 0F
OMNUC W SANMOTION Q1
Q1AA04005D (50W) □40 0H 0F

Q1AA04010D (100W) 0H 0F
Q1AA06020D (200W) — 04
□60
Q1AA06040D (400W) — 04
R88M-W03030 (30W) 0H 0F
R88M-W05030 (50W) □40 0H 0F
Omron
R88M-W10030 (100W) 0H 0F
R88M-W20030 (200W) — 04
□60
R88M-W40030 (400W) — 04
β 0.2/5000is (50W) 0H 0F
□40
βis series
β 0.3/5000is (100W) 0H 0F
Fanuc
β 0.4/5000is (125W) — 04
β 0.5/5000is (200W) □60 — 04
β 1/5000is (400W) — 04
AS 46, ASC46 0I —
αStep
□42
AS 6□, ASC66 □60 0G 01
Stepping motor
Oriental Motor
RK54□ 0I —
5 phase
□42
RK
RK56□ □60 0G 01
UMK24□ □42 0I —
CSK UMK
2 phase
UMK26□ □56.4 0F —
CSK24□ □42 0I —
CSK26□ □56.4 0F —
Note1) The symbols in the table each indicate the last two digits of an administration number.
Note2) For the coupling for mounting a motor in the table, contact THK.
B-336
[Motor bracket dimensional table for model SKR]
z For Model SKR33
Housing A

̶
59.6 10 27 22
00 2-M4 through
34
2-M3 depth 5
30°
20.3
φ 30H8
φ 28
43.3
42.6
30°
0.7
2-M4 depth 8
D4
PC
Intermediate Flange
̶ 12
54 10
0B 3
45
30°
°
φ 50
φ 28
30°
°
45
4-M4 through (PCD60)

(90° equidistant)
4-4.5 through hole, φ 8 counter bore depth 4.5
̶ 56.4 12
0F 47.14 10
2
30°
φ 38.1
φ 28
30°
5.2
4-M4 through (90° equidistant)

B-337
̶ 60 12
0G 50 10
2
30°
φ 36
φ 28
30°
7
4-M4 through
̶ 12
42 10
0H
34 3
45°
φ 30
φ 28
40
6

(90° equidistant)
2-3.5 through hole
̶
42 9
0I
7
31
30°
φ 22

4-3.5 through hole, φ 6 counter bore depth 4
(from the backside)
̶ 12
0K 42 10
34 3.5
45°
φ 30
φ 28
38
6

(90° equidistant)
2-3.5 through hole
B-338
z For Model SKR46
Housing A

4-M4 depth 8
00
85.4 14 48.5 25
30°
26.3
φ 46H8
58.3
57.1
φ 42
30°
1.2
0
D6
PC
Intermediate Flange
̶ 14.5
12
0A □76
3.5
30°
φ 70
φ 42
30°
4-M5× 0.8 through

6
4-4.5 through hole （PCD90）

̶ 12.5
0F 62 10
30°
φ 30
53
30°
4-M4×0.7 through
4-4.5 through hole
(PCD60)
B-339
̶ 12.5
0G 62 10
30°
φ 30
53
30°
4-M3×0.5 depth 4.5
4-4.5 through hole
(PCD60)
̶ 62 12.5
01 □50 10
30°
φ 36
60
30°
4-M4×0.7 through
4-4.5 through hole
(PCD60)
̶ 12.5
10
02 3.5
62
30°
φ 50
φ 42
60
30°
4-M4× 0.7 through

4-4.5 through hole
(PCD60)
̶ 12.5
10
03 3.5
62
30°
φ 50
φ 42
60
30°
4-M4×0.7 through
4-4.5 through hole
(PCD60)
B-340
̶ 12.5
10
04 4
62
30°
φ 50
φ 42
60
30°
4-M5×0.8 through

4-4.5 through hole
(PCD60)
B-341
Motor Wrap Type (for Reference)
Motor wrap types are available that allow the motor to be turned around in order to minimize the
dimension in the longitudinal direction. Contact THK for details. (Pulley ratio: 1:1)
[Example of Motor Turnaround with Model KR33]
（1.2）
AC servomotor 100W
A
70.5
113.3
（1.2） 21.8
A
（8.2）
21 9
（2） 42 28 15
A-A cross section
[Example of Motor Turnaround with Model KR46]

（1.2）
AC servomotor 200W
A
163.5
102
（1.2） 30.5
（12.5）
A
31 12
（1） 62 （1） 34 20
A-A cross section
Note) The specifications vary according to the motor. Contact THK for details.
B-342
XY Bracket (for Reference)
Brackets for installing models KR33 and 46 only are available as standard. The brackets use alumi-
num to reduce the weights and keep the inertia as low as possible.
[KR-008XS (for Model KR33, Single-Shaft Type)]
30 20 31 2-M5 helisert 2D

15
62 30
80 65
35
15 2-R5 18
2-6.6 through hole, φ 11 counter bore depth 6.5 17.5 46 17.5 20 20

81 40
[KR-008XL (for Model KR46, Single-Shaft Type)]
30 20 31 2-M6 helisert 2D11
20
90 87 45
105
39
15 2ーR5 18
2-6.6 through hole, φ 11 counter bore depth 6.5 17.5 46 17.5 20 20
81 40
[KR-003XS (for Model KR33, LM Rail Fixed)]
KR46A+KR33A 30 20 31 4-M5 helisert 2D
15
65 62 30
80
2ーR5 35
15 18
4-6.6 through hole, φ 11 counter bore depth 6.5 17.5 46 17.5 7 100 7
81 114
B-343
[KR-003XL (for Model KR46, LM Rail Fixed)]
KR46A+KR46A 30 20 31 4-M6 helisert 2D
20
90 87 46
105
39
15 2ーR5 18
81 114
[KR-002XS (for Model KR33, Slider Fixed)]
KR46A+KR33A 4-5.5 through hole, φ 9.5 counter bore depth 5.4

30 20 31(from the backside)42 30 42
6
87 74
105 90
15 2ーR5 18 25
81 114
B-344
[Example of Combinations]

For single shaft Slider fixed
Rail fixed
B-345
B-346
LM Actuator
General Catalog

(Separate)
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table Model GL
Model GL........................................... B-347 Structure and features....................... A-438
• Ball Screw Drive Type • Feature of the LM Actuator Model GL .. A-438
Long table type of model GL15......... B-348 Structure and features .................... A-438
Short table type of model GL15 ........ B-349 • Types of the LM Actuator Model GL .... A-440
Long table type of model GL20......... B-350 Types and Features ....................... A-440
Short table type of model GL20 ........ B-351
Point of Selection .............................. A-442
• Belt Drive Type • Load Rating ..................................... A-442
Long table type of model GL15......... B-352 • Maximum Travel Speed .................... A-443
Short table type of model GL15 ........ B-353 • Accuracy Standards ......................... A-443
Long table type of model GL20......... B-354
Short table type of model GL20 ........ B-355 Options.............................................. A-444
• Cover ............................................. A-444
• Model Number Coding ...................... B-356 • Bellows ........................................... A-445
• Endplate ......................................... A-445
Options............................................. B-358 • Sensor ............................................ A-445
• Bellows ........................................... B-358 • Plate Nut for Mounting the Base ......... A-445
• Endplate ......................................... B-362
• Plate Nut for Mounting the Base ......... B-362 Precautions on Use........................... A-446

the Products".
B-347
Ball Screw Drive Type Long Table Type of Model GL15
154
4-M6 through (helisert: 2D) 90
φ 9.5 counter bore depth 7 (from the backside)
C 140 D
（24） Stroke 154 Stroke

φ 10
φ 8h7
38
36
16
2
25 15
L0
12 12
（75.6）
2 70.3 1.5 25
5.5 9
5.8
3.9
1.5
Detail view of section A

1
4.3
11
154
124
116
114
118
90
11
Detail view of section B
54 A 27 B
C arrow view D arrow view
Base length L0
340 460 580 700 820 1060 1240 1420
(mm)
Stroke (mm) 100 220 340 460 580 820 1000 1180
Mass (kg) 5.7 6.8 7.9 9.0 10.2 12.4 14.1 15.8
* Mass of moving element (table): 1.7 (kg)

B-348
Ball Screw Drive Type Short Table Type of Model GL15
126
140
C D
LM Actuator
φ 10
φ 8h7
38
36
16
2
25 15
L0
12 12
（75.6）
2 70.3 1.5 25
5.5 5.8 9
3.9
1.5

1
4.3
11
154
124
114
118
116
90
11

54 A 27 B
Base length L0
340 460 580 700 820 1060 1240 1420
(mm)
Stroke (mm) 100 220 340 460 580 820 1000 1180
Mass (kg) 6.0 7.1 8.3 9.4 10.5 12.8 14.5 16.1


Ball Screw Drive Type Long Table Type of Model GL20
180
φ 11 counter bore depth 7.5 (from the backside)
C 165 D

φ 10h7
φ 10
44
42
19
2
29 12.5
L0
12 12
（90）
2 85 1.5 5.8 27
5.5 9.5
3.5
0.5
4.5

1.5
3.5
11
180
120
100
130
120
118
11
7

1 5 4.5 A 35.5 B
Base length L0
460 580 700 820 1060 1240 1420 1600 1780
(mm)
Stroke (mm) 200 320 440 560 800 980 1160 1340 1520
Mass (kg) 9.6 11.2 12.8 14.3 17.9 20.3 22.7 25.0 27.4
* Mass of moving element (table): 3 (kg)

B-350
Ball Screw Drive Type Short Table Type of Model GL20
160
165
LM Actuator
C D

φ 10h7
φ 10
44
42
19
2
29 12.5
L0
12 12
（90）
27 1.5 85 2
9.5 5.8 5.5
3.5
0.5
4.5

1.5
3.5
11
120
130
100
120
180
118
11
6
7

B 35.5 A 1 5 4.5
Base length L0
460 580 700 820 1060 1240 1420 1600 1780
(mm)
Stroke (mm) 200 320 440 560 800 980 1160 1340 1520
Mass (kg) 9.6 11.2 12.8 14.3 17.9 20.3 22.7 25.0 27.4


Belt Drive Type Long Table Type of Model GL15
154
50 10
140
C D
12
φ 10h7
37 （8） Stroke 154 Stroke （108）

66
16
33
（7.5）
74 L0
12 12
（75.6）
25 1.5 70.3 2
9 5.5
3.9
2.4
5.8

4.3
1
1.5
11
124
154
116
118
114
90
42
4
11
（40.5） Detail view of section B A B

9 27
Base length L0
340 460 580 700 820 1060 1240 1420 1600 1780 1960
(mm)
Stroke (mm) 70 190 310 430 550 790 970 1150 1330 1510 1690
Mass (kg) 7.9 8.8 9.8 10.8 11.8 13.7 15.2 16.6 18.1 19.6 21.0

B-352
Belt Drive Type Short Table Type of Model GL15
126
140
50 10
LM Actuator
C D
12
φ 10h7
37 （8） Stroke 126 Stroke （106）

66
16
33
（7.5）
74 L0
12 12
2 70.3 1.5 （75.6）

5.5 25
3.9
2.4
5.8

4.3
1
1.5
114
118
11
154
124
116
90
42
4
11
（40.5） Detail view of section B A B

9 9 27
Base length L0
340 460 580 700 820 1060 1240 1420 1600 1780 1960
(mm)
Stroke (mm) 100 220 340 460 580 820 1000 1180 1360 1540 1720
Mass (kg) 7.0 8.0 9.0 9.9 10.9 12.9 14.3 15.8 17.3 18.7 20.2


Belt Drive Type Long Table Type of Model GL20
180
165
10
D
62
C
12
φ 10h7
40 （15） Stroke 180 Stroke （105）

76
38
19
（12.5）
80 L0
12 12
2 85 1.5 （90）
5.5 27
5.8
1 4 0.5
1.5

3.5
11
118
180
120
100
130
120
1 5 4.5
48
11

6
7
（50.5） A B
9.5 35.5
Base length L0
460 580 700 820 1060 1240 1420 1600 1780 1960 2200 2320 2500 3000
(mm)
Stroke (mm) 160 280 400 520 760 940 1120 1300 1480 1660 1900 2020 2200 2700
Mass (kg) 11.5 12.8 14.2 15.5 18.1 20.1 22.1 24.1 26.1 28.1 30.7 32.0 34.0 39.6

B-354
Belt Drive Type Short Table Type of Model GL20
160
10
165
62
C D
LM Actuator
12
φ 10h7
100
（15） Stroke 160 Stroke （105）

40
76
38
19
（12.5）
80 L0
12 12
2 85 1.5 （90）
5.5 27
5.8
0.5
1.5

1 4
3.5
11
120
180
120
100
130
118
1 5 4.5
48

11
6
7
B
A
（50.5） 9.5 35.5
Base length L0
460 580 700 820 1060 1240 1420 1600 1780 1960 2200 2320 2500 3000
(mm)
Stroke (mm) 180 300 420 540 780 960 1140 1320 1500 1680 1920 2040 2220 2720
Mass (kg) 11.2 12.5 13.8 15.2 17.8 19.8 21.8 23.8 25.8 27.7 30.4 31.7 33.7 39.2


Model Number Coding
Model number coding

GL 4
Model number Assembly symbol
GL15, GL20 ASSY: Assembly and adjustment done
KIT : Without assembly and adjustment
Base length
0.34: 340mm to 300: 3000mm
Cover symbol
No Symbol: None, C: With Cover, J: With Bellows
Symbol for LM block
V4: Short type, T4: Long type
Symbol for Endplate (Ball Screw drive type only)
No Symbol: Without Endplate, P: With Endplate
Symbol for top table
S: Short type (V4 only), L: Long type (T4 only)
Symbol for drive method
B05: Ball screw lead 5mm
B16: Ball screw lead 16mm (Model GL15 only)
E : Belt drive
Model number coding

Example 1 (finished assembly)
GL15-082-T4-L-B30-P-J-ASSY
Example 2 (kit parts)

GL20-070-T4-L-E-C-KIT
Note) Kit parts that are not assembled or adjusted are delivered as a whole.
B-356
LM Actuator
B-357
Options LM Actuator (Options)
Bellows
For model GL, a bellows is available for contamination protection in addition to a cover.
[Model GL15]
Table side Endplate side

38 12 38
8.4 2.4 2.4 1.7
２ーφ ４ 6
２ーφ ４
102
134
153
153
64
Fig.1 External Dimensions of the Bellows
74
Fig.2 Mounting Height of the Bellows
Endplate side Table side Endplate side
(Motor side) Table (Counter-motor side)
Stroke end Stroke

Base length: L0
Stroke starting point
Fig.3 Schematic Drawing of Mounting the Bellows
B-358
Table1 Stroke of the Ball Screw Drive Type of Model GL15
Base length: L0 (mm) 340 460 580 700 820 1060 1240 1420
Stroke (mm) 100 220 340 455 560 770 910 1070
Stroke starting Type S 57 57 57 59.5 67 82 102 112

point (mm) Type L 43 43 43 45.5 53 68 88 98
Table2 Stroke of the Belt Drive Type of Model GL15
Base length: L0 (mm) 340 460 580 700 820 1060 1240 1420 1600 1780 1960
Type S 78 188 308 408 508 728 868 1008 1148 1288 1488
Stroke (mm)
Type L 50 160 280 380 480 700 840 980 1120 1260 1400
Stroke starting point (mm) 30 40 50 65 80 105 125 145 165 185 205
* The stroke starting point has the same dimensions for both the S-shape table and the L-shape table.
B-359
[Model GL20]
Table side Endplate side
42 2.4 2.4 12 42
2-φ 4 6 (2)
(9)
2-φ 4
150
178
102
178
64
Fig.4 External Dimensions of the Bellows
89
Fig.5 Mounting Height of the Bellows
Endplate side Table side Endplate side
(Motor side) (Counter-motor side)
Stroke end Stroke

Base length: L0
Stroke starting point
Fig.6 Schematic Drawing of Mounting the Bellows
B-360
Table3 Stroke of the Ball Screw Drive Type of Model GL20
Base length: L0 (mm) 460 580 700 820 1060 1240 1420 1600 1780
Stroke (mm) 200 320 440 560 780 940 1100 1260 1400
Stroke starting Type S 50 50 50 50 60 70 80 90 110

point (mm) Type L 40 40 40 40 50 60 70 80 100
Table4 Stroke of the Belt Drive Type of Model GL20
Base length: L0 (mm) 460 580 700 820 1060 1240 1420 1600 1780 1960 2200 2320 2500 3000
Type S 160 260 360 460 680 840 1110 1160 1300 1440 1640 1720 1860 2280
Stroke (mm)
Type L 140 240 340 440 660 820 990 1140 1280 1420 1620 1700 1840 2260
Stroke starting point (mm) 40 50 80 100 110 120 125 145 160 180 200 220 240 280
* The stroke starting point has the same dimensions for both the S-shape table and the L-shape table.
Precautions on Using the Bellows

When mounting a bellows longer than the table of model GL onto the table for model GL, secure an
area that sticks out of the table’s longitudinal length by at least 1 mm.
B-361
Endplate
With the ball screw drive type of model GL, the end plate on the motor mounting side is machined
according to the motor used. Indicate the motor to be used when placing an order to THK.
64 2-M3 depth 8
64 2-M3 depth 8
12
12
6
120
6
114
4-4.5 through hole 4-4.5 through hole
φ 8 counter bore depth 4.5 φ 10 through hole φ 8 counter bore depth 4.5
φ 10 through hole
70.3
85
36
8 19
13 25
42
57
23 68 23 60
20 74 20 19 82 19
Model GL15 Model GL20
Plate nut for mounting the base

For model GL, a plate nut for mounting the base is available. It is attached as standard when mode
GL is delivered.
M5 through
〃
10.5
〃〃
20
4
Fig.7 Plate Nut
Table5 Number of Plate Nuts for Mounting the Base
Standard base
340 460 580 700 820 1060 1240 1420 1600 1780 1960 2200 2320 2500 3000
length (mm)
Pcs 4 4 6 6 8 10 10 12 14 14 16 16 18 18 20
B-362
Ball Spline
General Catalog
B-363
Ball Spline
General Catalog

Model LBS, LBF, LBH, LBST and LBR .... B-367
• Miniature Ball Spline ................................ B-368
• Model LBS (Medium Load Type) ................ B-370
• Model LBST (Heavy Load Type) ................ B-372
• Model LBF (Medium Load Type) ................ B-374
• Type LBR ............................................... B-376
• Type LBH ............................................... B-378
• Model LBS with Recommended Shaft End Shape ... B-380
• Spline shaft............................................. B-381

• Accessories ............................................ B-384

Models LT and LF ............................... B-385
• Model LT ................................................ B-386
• Model LF ................................................ B-388
• Model LT with Recommended Shaft End Shape . B-390
• Spline shaft............................................. B-391

• Accessories ............................................ B-393

Models LBG and LBGT....................... B-395
• Type LBG ............................................... B-396
• Model LBG ............................................. B-398
• Spline shaft............................................. B-400

Model LTR,and LTR-A ........................ B-403
• Models LTR-A Compact type..................... B-404
• Model LTR.............................................. B-406
• Spline shaft............................................. B-408
Maximum Manufacturing Length by Accuracy ... B-410
B-364
(Separate)
Features and Types ............................... A-450 • Accuracy Standards ................................. A-499
Features of the Ball Spline .................... A-450 • Housing Inner-diameter Tolerance ............. A-499
• Structure and features.............................. A-450 • Spline shaft ............................................ A-499
Classification of Ball Splines ................ A-452
Point of Selection................................... A-454 Model LTR,and LTR-A............................ A-500
Flowchart for Selecting a Ball Spline ...... A-454 • Structure and features .............................. A-500
• Steps for Selecting a Ball Spline ................ A-454 • Types and Features ................................. A-502
• Selecting a Type ..................................... A-456 • Service Life ............................................ A-503
• Studying the Spline Shaft Strength ............. A-458 • Clearance in the Rotation Direction ............ A-503
• Predicting the Service Life ........................ A-465 • Accuracy Standards ................................. A-503
Selecting a Preload ................................ A-479 • Housing Inner-diameter Tolerance ............. A-503
• Clearance in the Rotation Direction ............ A-479 • Spline shaft ............................................ A-503
• Preload and Rigidity................................. A-479
• Conditions and Guidelines for Selecting of a Preload .. A-480 Point of Design ....................................... A-504
Determining the Accuracy..................... A-482 Checking List for Spline Shaft End Shape ..... A-504
• Accuracy grade ....................................... A-482 Housing Inner-diameter Tolerance ....... A-505
• Accuracy Standards................................. A-482 Positions of the Spline-nut
Keyway and Mounting Holes ............. A-505
Model LBS, LBST, LBF, LBR and LBH . A-484 Mounting Procedure and Maintenance.... A-506
• Structure and features .................................. A-484 Assembling the Ball Spline ................... A-506
• Applications ............................................ A-485 • Mounting the Spline ................................. A-506
• Types and Features ................................. A-486 • Installing the Spline Nut ............................ A-508
• Service Life ............................................ A-489 • Installation of the Spline Shaft ................... A-508
• Accuracy Standards................................. A-489 Options.................................................... A-509
• Housing Inner-diameter Tolerance ............. A-489 Lubrication.............................................. A-509
• Spline shaft ............................................ A-489 Material, surface treatment.................... A-509
• Accessories ............................................ A-489 Contamination Protection ..................... A-509
• Specifications of the Bellows ..................... A-510
Models LT and LF................................... A-490 Precautions on Use................................ A-511
• Structure and features.............................. A-490 • Handling ................................................ A-511
• Types and Features ................................. A-492 • Lubrication ............................................. A-511
• Service Life ............................................ A-494 • Precautions on Use ................................. A-511
• Clearance in the Rotation Direction ............ A-494 • Storage .................................................. A-512
• Accuracy Standards................................. A-494 • Other ..................................................... A-512
• Spline shaft ............................................ A-494
• Accessories ............................................ A-494

Models LBG and LBGT .......................... A-496
• Structure and features.............................. A-496
• Service Life ............................................ A-499
B-365
B-366
Models LBS, LBST, LBF, LBR and LBH
Ball Spline
(Separate)
Miniature Ball Spline ......................... B-368 Structure and features....................... A-484
Model LBS (Medium Load Type) ...... B-370 Applications....................................... A-485
Model LBST (Heavy Load Type)....... B-372 Types and Features .......................... A-486
Model LBF (Medium Load Type)....... B-374 Service Life ....................................... A-489
Type LBR .......................................... B-376 Clearance in the Rotation Direction .. A-489
Type LBH .......................................... B-378 Accuracy Standards .......................... A-489
Model LBS with Recommended Shaft End Shape B-380 Housing Inner-diameter Tolerance.... A-489
Spline shaft ....................................... A-489
Spline shaft ....................................... B-381 Accessories....................................... A-489
Accessories....................................... B-384
Maximum Manufacturing Length by Accuracy. B-410

the Products".
B-367
Miniature Ball Spline
L2
(Overall length with two seals)
L
(Overall length without two seals)
2-φ d0 L3
C
C
d5 D0 φ D2 φ D
b
l0
t
30°
Models LBS6 and 8
Spline nut dimensions
Outer diameter Length Keyway dimensions

Model No.
t
b
D Tolerance L Tolerance L2 L3 D2
H8
+0.05 l 0 C
0
LBS 6 12 0 20 20.8 11 11.5 2 0.8 10 0.3
LBS 8 16 – 0.011 25 0 26.4 14.5 15.5 2.5 1.2 12.5 0.3
– 0.2
0
LBS 10 19 30 — — — 3 1.5 17 0.3
– 0.013
Note) Models LBS6 and 8 are of end cap type.
Keep the end caps of models LBS6 and 8 from impact.
THK does not offer a high temperature type of miniature Ball Spline.
Model number coding
2 LBS6 UU CL +200L H
Model No. Symbol for clearance Accuracy symbol (*3)
in the rotational direction
(*2)
Number of spline nuts Contamination protection Overall spline shaft length

on one shaft accessory symbol (in mm)
(no symbol for one nut) (*1)
(*1) See A-509. (*2) See A-481. (*3) See A-482.
B-368
L
2-φ d0 C C
C C
d5
D0 φD
b
l0
t
30°
Model LBS10
M A.1 M A.2
Ball Spline
Unit: mm
Spline shaft Basic load rating Static permissible
Basic torque rating Mass
outer diameter (radial) moment
Greas-
ing hole
CT C0T C C0 MA.1** MA.2** Spline Nut Spline shaft
d0 D0 d5
N-m N-m kN kN N-m N-m g kg/m
1.2 6 5.3 1.53 2.41 0.637 0.785 2.2 19.4 6.6 0.22
1.2 8 7.3 4.07 6.16 1.18 1.42 5.1 39.6 15.4 0.42
1.5 10 8.3 7.02 10.4 1.62 1.96 8.1 67.6 36.7 0.55
Note) **MA.1indicates the permissible moment value in the axial direction when a single spline nut is used, as shown in the fig-
ure above.
**MA.2 indicates the permissible moment value in the axial direction when two spline nuts in close contact with each other
are used, as shown in the figure above.
(Single spline nut configuration is not stable in accuracy. We recommend using two spline nuts in close contact with each
other.)
For details on the maximum lengths of ball spline shafts by accuracy, please see B-410.
Description of Each Option⇒A-509 B-369

Model LBS (Medium Load Type)
l0
b L
3-φ d0 r
t
φD

Greasing
Model No. hole
t
b
D Tolerance L Tolerance
H8
+0.05 l 0 r d0
0
0
LBS 15 23 40 0 3.5 2 20 0.5 2
– 0.013
– 0.2
{z LBS 20 30 50 4 2.5 26 0.5 2
0
{z LBS 25 37 60 5 3 33 0.5 2
– 0.016
{z LBS 30 45 70 7 4 41 1 3
0
{z LBS 40 60 0 90 10 4.5 55 1 3
– 0.3
{z LBS 50 75 – 0.019 100 15 5 60 1.5 4
{z LBS 70 100 0 110 18 6 68 2 4
{z LBS 85 120 – 0.022 140 20 7 80 2.5 5
0
0 – 0.4
{z LBS 100 140 160 28 9 93 3 5
– 0.025
Note) {: indicates model numbers for which high temperature types are available (with metal retainer; service temperature: up to 100℃).
(Example) LBS20 A CL+500L H
High temperature symbol
z: indicates model numbers for which felt seal types are available (see A-509).
A felt seal cannot be attached to Ball Spline models using metal retainer.
Model number coding
2 LBS40 UU CL +1000L P K
Model No. Symbol for clearance Accuracy symbol
in the rotational direction (*3)
(*2) Symbol for standard hollow spline shaft (*4)
(*1) See A-509. (*2) See A-481. (*3) See A-482. (*4) See B-381.
B-370
M A.1 M A.2
Ball Spline
Unit: mm
Basic torque rating Basic load rating (radial) Static permissible moment Mass

N-m N-m kN kN N-m N-m kg kg/m
30.4 74.5 4.4 8.4 25.4 185 0.06 1
74.5 160 7.8 14.9 60.2 408 0.14 1.8

154 307 13 23.5 118 760 0.25 2.7
273 538 19.3 33.8 203 1270 0.44 3.8
599 1140 31.9 53.4 387 2640 1 6.8
1100 1940 46.6 73 594 4050 1.7 10.6
2190 3800 66.4 102 895 6530 3.1 21.3
3620 6360 90.5 141 2000 12600 5.5 32
5190 12600 126 237 3460 20600 9.5 45
ure above.
(Single LBS-unit configuration is not stable in accuracy. We recommend using a single LBST unit or two LBS units in
close contact with each other.)

Model LBST (Heavy Load Type)
l0
b L
3-φ d0 r
t
φD

Greasing
Model No. hole
t
b
H8
+0.05 l 0 r d0
0
{z LBST 20 30 60 0 4 2.5 26 0.5 2
– 0.2
0
{z LBST 25 37 – 0.016 70 5 3 33 0.5 2
{z LBST 30 45 80 7 4 41 1 3
{z LBST 40 60 0 100 0 10 4.5 55 1 3
{z LBST 50 75 – 0.019 112 – 0.3 15 5 60 1.5 4
{ LBST 60 90 127 18 6 68 1.5 4
{z LBST 70 100 0 135 18 6 68 2 4
– 0.022
{z LBST 85 120 155 0 20 7 80 2.5 5
{z LBST 100 140 175 – 0.4 28 9 93 3 5
0
{ LBST 120 160 – 0.025 200 28 9 123 3.5 6
0
{ LBST 150 205 0 250 – 0.5 32 10 157 3.5 6
– 0.029
(Example) LBST25 A CM+400L H
Model number coding
2 LBST50 UU CM +800L H K
B-372
M A.1 M A.2
Ball Spline
Unit: mm
Basic torque rating Basic load rating (radial) Static permissible moment Mass

90.2 213 9.4 20.1 103 632 0.17 1.8

176 381 14.9 28.7 171 1060 0.29 2.7
312 657 22.5 41.4 295 1740 0.5 3.8
696 1420 37.1 66.9 586 3540 1.1 6.8
1290 2500 55.1 94.1 941 5610 1.9 10.6
1870 3830 66.2 121 1300 8280 3.3 15.6
3000 6090 90.8 164 2080 11800 3.8 21.3
4740 9550 119 213 3180 17300 6.1 32
6460 14400 137 271 4410 25400 10.4 45
8380 19400 148 306 5490 32400 12.9 69.5
13900 32200 196 405 8060 55400 28 116.6
ure above.

Model LBF (Medium Load Type)
L
H F
h
φ d2 φ d1
PC
D φ D1 φD
3-φ d0

Greasing
Model No. Outer diameter Length Flange diameter
hole
D Tolerance L Tolerance D1 Tolerance H F d0 PCD
0
LBF 15 23 40 0 43 7 13 2 32
– 0.013
– 0.2
{z LBF 20 30 50 49 7 18 2 38
0 0
{z LBF 25 37 60 60 – 0.2 9 21 2 47
– 0.016
{z LBF 30 45 70 70 10 25 3 54
{z LBF 40 57 90 0 90 14 31 3 70
0 – 0.3
{z LBF 50 70 100 108 16 34 4 86
– 0.019
{ LBF 60 85 127 124 0 18 45.5 4 102
{z LBF 70 95 110 142 – 0.3 20 35 4 117
0
{z LBF 85 115 – 0.022 140 168 22 48 5 138
0
0 – 0.4 0
{z LBF 100 135 160 195 25 55 5 162
– 0.025 – 0.4
(Example) LBF20 A CL+500L H
Model number coding
2 LBF20 DD CL +900L P K
B-374
M A.1 M A.2
Ball Spline
Unit: mm
Basic load rating Static permissible
(radial) moment
Mounting hole
d1×d2×h
4.5×8×4.4 30.4 74.5 4.4 8.4 25.4 185 0.11 1
4.5×8×4.4 74.5 160 7.8 14.9 60.2 408 0.2 1.8

5.5×9.5×5.4 154 307 13 23.5 118 760 0.36 2.7
6.6×11×6.5 273 538 19.3 33.8 203 1270 0.6 3.8
9×14×8.6 599 1140 31.9 53.4 387 2640 1.2 6.8
11×17.5×11 1100 1940 46.6 73 594 4050 1.9 10.6
11×17.5×11 1870 3830 66.2 121 1300 8280 3.5 15.6
14×20×13 2190 3800 66.4 102 895 6530 3.6 21.3
16×23×15.2 3620 6360 90.5 141 2000 12600 6.2 32
18×26×17.5 5910 12600 126 237 3460 20600 11 45
ure above.
(Single spline nut configuration is not stable in accuracy. We recommend using two spline nuts in close contact with each
other.)

Model LBR
L
H E
F
φ d1
PC
D φ D1 φ D3 φD
3-φ d0

Outer Flange
Model No. Outer diameter Length
diameter diameter
D Tolerance D3 L Tolerance D1 H E PCD
0
LBR 15 25 25.35 40 0 45.4 9 15.5 34
– 0.013
– 0.2
{z LBR 20 30 30.35 60 56.4 12 24 44
0
{z LBR 25 40 40.35 70 70.4 14 28 54
– 0.016
{z LBR 30 45 45.4 80 75.4 16 32 61
{z LBR 40 60 0 60.4 100 0 96.4 18 41 78
{z LBR 50 75 – 0.019 75.4 112 – 0.3 112.4 20 46 94
{ LBR 60 90 90.5 127 134.5 22 52.5 112
0
{z LBR 70 95 95.6 135 140.6 24 55.5 117
– 0.022
{z LBR 85 120 120.6 155 170.6 26 64.5 146
0
0 – 0.4
{z LBR 100 140 140.6 175 198.6 34 70.5 170
– 0.025
(Example) LBR40 A CM+600L H
Model number coding
2 LBR30 UU CM +700L H K
B-376
M A.1 M A.2
Ball Spline
Unit: mm
Basic load rating Static permissible
(radial) moment
Mounting Greasing
hole hole
d1 F d0
4.5 7.5 2 30.4 74.5 4.4 8.4 25.4 185 0.14 1
5.5 12 2 90.2 213 9.4 20.1 103 632 0.33 1.8

5.5 14 2 176 381 14.9 28.7 171 1060 0.54 2.7
6.6 16 3 312 657 22.5 41.4 295 1740 0.9 3.8
9 20.5 3 696 1420 37.1 66.9 586 3540 1.7 6.8
11 23 4 1290 2500 55.1 94.1 941 5610 2.7 10.6
11 26 4 1870 3830 66.2 121 1300 8280 3.7 15.6
14 27 4 3000 6090 90.8 164 2080 11800 6 21.3
16 32 5 4740 9550 119 213 3180 17300 8.3 32
18 35 5 6460 14400 137 271 4410 25400 14.2 45
ure above.

Model LBH
W
B L
W1 4-S C
N
T l
J
K
M
R
Model No. Height Width Length J W1
M W L B C S×l ± 0.15 ±0.15 T K
{ LBH 15 29 34 43 26 26 M4×10 15 17 6 20
{z LBH 20 38 48 62 35 35 M6×12 20 24 7 26
{z LBH 25 47.5 60 73 40 40 M8×16 25 30 8 33
{z LBH 30 57 70 83 50 50 M8×16 30 35 10 39
{z LBH 40 70 86 102 60 60 M10×20 38 43 15 50
{z LBH 50 88 100 115 75 75 M12×25 48 50 18 63
(Example) LBH30 A CM+600L H
Model number coding
2 LBH40 UU CL +700L P K

B-378
MA
Ball Spline
Unit: mm
Basic load rating Static permis-
Basic torque rating sible moment Mass
(radial)
Grease
nipple CT C0T C C0 MA** Spline Nut Spline shaft
R N
N-m N-m kN kN N-m kg kg/m
φ 4 drive
14 5 30.4 74.5 4.4 8.4 25.4 0.23 1
Nipple
18 7 A-M6F 90.2 213 9.4 20.1 103 0.58 1.8
22 6 A-M6F 176 381 14.9 28.7 171 1.1 2.7
26 8 A-M6F 312 657 22.5 41.4 295 1.73 3.8
32 10 A-M6F 696 1420 37.1 66.9 586 3.18 6.8
40 13.5 A-PT1/8 1290 2500 55.1 94.1 941 5.1 10.6
Note) **MA indicates the permissible moment value in the axial direction when a single spline nut is used, as shown in the figure
above.

Model LBS with Recommended Shaft End Shape
Chamfer A Chamfer A
φ d3
SM S
l4 l5
l2
Unit: mm
Model No. d3 Tolerance l 2 SM l 4 S×l 5
LBS 15 10 0 23 M10×1.25 14 M6×10

– 0.015
LBS 20 14 30 M14×1.5 18 M8×15
0
– 0.018
LBS 25 18 42 M18×1.5 25 M10×18
LBS 30 20 46 M20×1.5 27 M12×20
0
– 0.021
LBS 40 30 70 M30×2 40 M18×30
LBS 50 36 0 80 M36×3 46 M20×35

– 0.025
Note) For details of chamfer A, see B-382.
B-380
Spline Shaft
Since production of a spline shaft with a specific shape is performed at your request, provide a draw-
ing of the desired shaft shape when asking an estimate or placing an order.
[Sectional Shape of the Spline Shaft]
Table1 shows the sectional shape of a spline φd
shaft. If the spline shaft ends need to be cylindri- φ D0
cal, the minor diameter (φ d) value should not be
exceeded if possible. φ dp
Ball Spline
Table1 Sectional Shape of the Spline Shaft Unit: mm
Nominal shaft
15 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 85 100 120 150
diameter
Minor diameter φ
d 11.7 15.3 19.5 22.5 31 39 46.5 54.5 67 81 101 130
Major diameter φ
D0 14.5 19.7 24.5 29.6 39.8 49.5 60 70 84 99 117 147
Ball center-to-cen-
ter diameter φ dp 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 85 100 120 150
Mass (kg/m) 1 1.8 2.7 3.8 6.8 10.6 15.6 21.3 32 45 69.5 116.6
[Hole Shape of the Standard Hollow Type Spline Shaft]
Table2 shows the hole shape of the standard
φd
hollow type spline shaft. Use this table when a
requirement such as piping, wiring, air-vent or φ Do
weight reduction needs to be met.
φ dp (φ d 4 )
Type K
Table2 Sectional Shape of the Standard Hollow Type Spline Shaft Unit: mm
Nominal shaft
20 25 30 40 50 60 70 85 100 120 150
diameter
Minor diameter φ
d 15.3 19.5 22.5 31 39 46.5 54.5 67 81 101 130
Major diameter φ
D0 19.7 24.5 29.6 39.8 49.5 60 70 84 99 117 147
Ball center-to-cen-
ter diameter φ dp 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 85 100 120 150
Hole diameter (φ d4) 6 8 12 18 24 30 35 45 56 60 80
Mass (kg/m) 1.6 2.3 2.9 4.9 7 10 13.7 19.5 25.7 47.3 77.1
B-381
[Chamfering of the Spline Shaft Ends]
To facilitate the insertion of the spline shaft into a spline nut, the shaft ends are normally chamfered
with dimensions as indicated below unless otherwise specified.
z Chamfer A
If the spline shaft ends are stepped, tapped or
A
drilled for specific use, they are machined with
30°
chamfer A dimensions indicated in Table3.
Stepped end
30°
Tapped end
Fig.1 Chamfer A
z Chamfer B
If either end of the spline shaft is not used, such
as cantilever support, it is machined with cham- B
fer B dimensions indicated in Table3.
30°
Fig.2 Chamfer B
Table3 Chamfer Dimensions of Spline Shaft Ends Unit: mm

Nominal shaft
15 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 85 100 120 150
diameter
Chamfer A 1 1 1.5 2.5 3 3.5 5 6.5 7 7 7.5 8
Chamfer B 3.5 4.5 5.5 7 8.5 10 13 15 16 17 17 18
Note) Spline shafts with nominal diameters 6, 8 and 10 are chamfered to C0.5.
B-382
[Length of Imperfect Area of a Special Spline Shaft]
If the middle area or the end of a spline shaft is to be thicker than the minor diameter (φ d), an imper-
fect spline area is required to secure a recess for grinding. Table4 shows the relationship between
the length of the incomplete section (S) and the flange diameter (φ df).
(This table does not apply to overall length of 1,500 mm or greater. Contact THK for details.)
Gr
ind
ing
sto
ne
rad
ius
S R
Ball Spline
φ df
Table4 Length of Imperfect Spline Area: S Unit: mm

Flange
diameter φ df
15 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Nominal shaft
diameter
15 26 40 48 55 60 — — — — — — — — — —
20 — 30 45 54 61 67 — — — — — — — — —
25 — — 33 47 56 62 73 — — — — — — — —
30 — — — 35 48 57 69 79 — — — — — — —
40 — — — — — 39 59 71 88 — — — — — —
50 — — — — — — 42 61 82 96 — — — — —
60 — — — — — — — 45 75 91 103 — — — —
70 — — — — — — — — 65 85 99 109 — — —
85 — — — — — — — — 34 72 90 102 — — —
100 — — — — — — — — — 52 79 95 106 — —
120 — — — — — — — — — — 54 81 97 108 —
150 — — — — — — — — — — — 30 72 91 104
* This table does not apply to overall length of 1,500 mm or greater. Contact THK for details.
B-383
Accessories
Ball Spline models LBS and LBST are provided with a standard key as indicated in Table5.
R R
h C
b l
Table5 Standard Keys for Models LBS and LBST Unit: mm
Nominal shaft Width b Height h Length l

R C
diameter Tolerance(p7) Tolerance(h7) Tolerance(h12)
0
LBS 6 2 1.3 10 1
+0.016 0 – 0.150
0.3
LBS 8 2.5 +0.006 2 – 0.025 12.5 0 1.25
LBS 10 3 2.5 17 – 0.180 1.5
LBS 15 3.5 3.5 20 1.75
0
LBS 20 – 0.210
4 +0.024 4 0 26 2
LBST 20
+0.012 – 0.030
LBS 25 0.5
5 5 33 2.5
LBST 25 0
LBS 30 – 0.250
7 7 41 3.5
LBST 30 +0.030
LBS 40 +0.015 0
10 8 55 5
LBST 40 – 0.036
0.8
LBS 50
15 10 60 0 7.5
LBST 50
+0.036 – 0.300
LBST 60 +0.018
LBS 70 18 12 68 9
LBST 70
LBS 85 0 0
20 13 80 14 1.2
LBST 85 – 0.043 – 0.350
+0.043
LBS 100
28 +0.022 18 93 14
LBST 100
0
LBST 120 28 18 123 14
– 0.400
+0.051 0
LBST 150 32 20 157 16 2
+0.026 – 0.052
B-384
Models LT and LF
Ball Spline
(Separate)
Model LT ........................................... B-386 Structure and features....................... A-490
Model LF ........................................... B-388 Types and Features .......................... A-492
Model LT with Recommended Shaft End Shape . B-390 Service Life ....................................... A-494
Clearance in the Rotation Direction .. A-494
Spline shaft ....................................... B-391 Accuracy Standards .......................... A-494
Accessories....................................... B-393 Housing Inner-diameter Tolerance.... A-494
Spline shaft ....................................... A-494
Maximum Manufacturing Length by Accuracy. B-410 Accessories....................................... A-494

the Products".
B-385
Model LT
2-φ d0 3-φ d0
b b
M A.1
t t

Greasing
Model No. hole
t
b
H8
+0.05 l 0 r d0
0
0
Note) LT 4 10 16 2 1.2 6 0.5 —
– 0.009
Note) LT 5 12 20 2.5 1.2 8 0.5 —
0
LT 6 14 25 2.5 1.2 10.5 0.5 1
– 0.011 0
LT 8 16 25 2.5 1.2 10.5 0.5 1.5
– 0.2
LT 10 21 33 3 1.5 13 0.5 1.5
0
LT 13 24 36 3 1.5 15 0.5 1.5
– 0.013
{ LT 16 31 50 3.5 2 17.5 0.5 2
{ LT 20 35 63 4 2.5 29 0.5 2
0
{ LT 25 42 71 4 2.5 36 0.5 3
– 0.016
{ LT 30 47 80 0 4 2.5 42 0.5 3
{ LT 40 64 0 100 – 0.3 6 3.5 52 0.5 4
{ LT 50 80 – 0.019 125 8 4 58 1 4
{ LT 60 90 0 140 12 5 67 1 5
{ LT 80 120 – 0.022 160 0 16 6 76 2 5
0 – 0.4
{ LT 100 150 185 20 7 110 2.5 5
– 0.025
Note) Models LT4 and 5 do not have a retainer. Do not remove the shaft from the spline nut. (It will cause balls to fall off.)
{: indicates model numbers for which high temperature types are available (with metal retainer; service temperature: up to 100℃).
(Example) LT20 A CL＋500L H
Model number coding
2 LT30 UU CL +500L H K
B-386
l0
M A.2
L
r
φD φ D0
Ball Spline
Unit: mm
Spline shaft Rows of Static permissible
Basic torque rating Basic Load Rating Mass
diameter balls moment
D0 CT C0T C C0 MA.1** MA.2** Spline Nut Spline shaft

h7 N-m N-m kN kN N-m N-m g kg/m
4 4 0.59 0.78 0.44 0.61 0.88 6.4 5.2 0.1

5 4 0.88 1.37 0.66 0.88 1.5 11.6 9.1 0.15
6 4 0.98 1.96 1.18 2.16 4.9 36.3 17 0.23
8 4 1.96 2.94 1.47 2.55 5.9 44.1 18 0.4
10 4 3.92 7.84 2.84 4.9 15.7 98 50 0.62
13 4 5.88 10.8 3.53 5.78 19.6 138 55 1.1
16 6 31.4 34.3 7.06 12.6 67.6 393 165 1.6
20 6 56.9 55.9 10.2 17.8 118 700 225 2.5
25 6 105 103 15.2 25.8 210 1140 335 3.9
30 6 171 148 20.5 34 290 1710 375 5.6
40 6 419 377 37.8 60.5 687 3760 1000 9.9
50 6 842 769 60.9 94.5 1340 7350 1950 15.5
60 6 1220 1040 73.5 111.7 1600 9990 2500 22.3
80 6 2310 1920 104.9 154.8 2510 16000 4680 39.6
100 6 3730 3010 136.2 195 3400 24000 9550 61.8
ure above.
(Single LT-unit configuration is not stable in accuracy. We recommend using two units in close contact with each other.)

Model LF
4-φ d1 through hole, φ d2 counter bore depth h 4-φ d1 through hole, φ d2 counter bore depth h
° 45° 2-φ d0 ° 45°

45 45
3-φ d0
PCD
PC
D
Model LF13 or smaller Model LF16 or greater

Outer Flange Greas-
Model No. Length ing hole Mounting hole
diameter diameter
Toler- Toler- Toler-
D L D1 H F C r d0 PCD d1×d2×h
ance ance ance
LF 6 14 0 25 30 5 7.5 0.5 0.5 1.5 22 3.4×6.5×3.3
LF 8 16 – 0.011 25 32 5 7.5 0.5 0.5 1.5 24 3.4×6.5×3.3
LF 10 21 33 0 42 6 10.5 0.5 0.5 1.5 32 4.5×8×4.4
0 – 0.2
LF 13 24 36 44 7 11 0.5 0.5 1.5 33 4.5×8×4.4
– 0.013
{ LF 16 31 50 51 0 7 18 0.5 0.5 2 40 4.5×8×4.4
{ LF 20 35 63 58 – 0.2 9 22.5 0.5 0.5 2 45 5.5×9.5×5.4
0
{ LF 25 42 71 65 9 26.5 0.5 0.5 3 52 5.5×9.5×5.4
– 0.016
{ LF 30 47 80 0 75 10 30 0.5 0.5 3 60 6.6×11×6.5
{ LF 40 64 100 – 0.3 100 14 36 1 0.5 4 82 9×14×8.6
0
{ LF 50 80 – 0.019 125 124 16 46.5 1 1 4 102 11×17.5×11
(Example) LF30 A CL＋700L H

Model number coding
2 LF20 UU CM +400L P N
B-388
M A.1
L
H F
φ D1 φ D0 φ D M A.2
Ball Spline
C
C
Unit: mm
Spline shaft Rows of Static permissible
Basic torque rating Basic load rating Mass
diameter balls moment
D0 CT C0T C C0 MA.1** MA.2** Spline Nut Spline shaft

h7 N-m N-m kN kN N-m N-m g kg/m
6 4 0.98 1.96 1.18 2.16 4.9 36.3 35 0.23
8 4 1.96 2.94 1.47 2.55 5.9 44.1 37 0.4
10 4 3.92 7.84 2.84 4.9 15.7 98 90 0.62
13 4 5.88 10.8 3.53 5.78 19.6 138 110 1.1
16 6 31.4 34.3 7.06 12.6 67.6 393 230 1.6
20 6 56.9 55.9 10.2 17.8 118 700 330 2.5
25 6 105 103 15.2 25.8 210 1140 455 3.9
30 6 171 148 20.5 34 290 1710 565 5.6
40 6 419 377 37.8 60.5 687 3760 1460 9.9
50 6 842 769 60.9 94.5 1340 7350 2760 15.5
ure above.
(Single LF-unit configuration is not stable in accuracy. We recommend using two units in close contact with each other.)

Model LT with Recommended Shaft End Shape
φ d3
SM S
l4 l5
l2
Unit: mm
Model No. d3 Tolerance l 2 SM l 4 S×l 5

LT 6 5 12 M5×0.8 7 M2.5×4
0
– 0.012
LT 8 6 14 M6×1 8 M3×5
LT 10 8 18 M8×1 11 M4×6
0
– 0.015
LT 13 10 23 M10×1.25 14 M5×8
LT 16 14 30 M14×1.5 18 M6×10
0
– 0.018
LT 20 16 38 M16×1.5 22 M8×15
LT 25 22 50 M22×1.5 28 M10×18
0
– 0.021
LT 30 27 60 M27×2 34 M14×25
LT 40 36 80 M36×3 45 M18×30
0
– 0.025
LT 50 45 100 M45×4.5 58 M22×40
B-390
Spline Shaft
Table1 shows the sectional shape of a spline
shaft. If the spline shaft ends need to be cylindri- φd φ D0
cal, the minor diameter (φ d) value should not be φ D0
exceeded if possible. φd
Ball Spline
φ dp
φ dp

Nominal shaft
4 5 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 30 40 50 60 80 100
diameter
Minor diameter φ d 3.5 4.5 5 7 8.5 11.5 14.5 18.5 23 28 37.5 46.5 56.5 75.5 95
Major diameter φ D0 h7 4 5 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 30 40 50 60 80 100
Ball center-to-cen-
ter diameter φ dp 4.6 5.7 7 9.3 11.5 14.8 17.8 22.1 27.6 33.2 44.2 55.2 66.3 87.9 109.5
Mass(kg/m) 0.1 0.15 0.23 0.4 0.62 1.1 1.6 2.5 3.9 5.6 9.9 15.5 22.3 39.6 61.8
hollow type spline shaft (types K and N). φ D0 φ D0
Use this table when a requirement such as pip- (φ d 4 ) (φ d4)
ing, wiring, air-vent or weight reduction needs to
be met.
φ dp φ dp
Type K Type N
(Thick) (Thin)
Nominal shaft diameter 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 30 40 50 60 80 100
Major diameter φ D0 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 30 40 50 60 80 100
Ball center-to-center
7 9.3 11.5 14.8 17.8 22.1 27.6 33.2 44.2 55.2 66.3 87.9 109.5
diameter φ dp
Hole diameter
2.5 3 4 5 7 10 12 16 22 25 32 52.5 67.5
Type K (φ d4)
Mass(kg/m) 0.2 0.35 0.52 0.95 1.3 1.8 3 4 6.9 11.6 16 22.6 33.7
Hole diameter
— — — — 11 14 18 21 29 36 — — —
Type N (φ d4)
Mass(kg/m) — — — — 0.8 1.3 1.9 2.8 4.7 7.4 — — —
Note) The standard hollow type Spline Shaft is divided into types K and N. Indicate "K" or "N" at the end of the model number
to distinguish between them when placing an order.
B-391
(G
rin
din
R
g
sto
ne
rad
ius
S
)
φ df
Table3 Length of Imperfect Spline Area: S Miniature type

Unit: mm
Flange
diameter φ df
4 5 6 8 10
Nominal shaft
diameter
4 13 20 24 31 —
5 — 14 21 28 33
Standard Type Unit: mm

Flange
diameter φ df
6 8 10 13 16 20 25 30 40 50 60 80 100 120 140 160
Nominal shaft
diameter
6 18 28 33 39 — — — — — — — — — — — —
8 — 18 28 35 41 — — — — — — — — — — —
10 — — 19 31 38 45 — — — — — — — — — —
13 — — — 21 36 46 56 — — — — — — — — —
16 — — — — 23 40 53 62 — — — — — — — —
20 — — — — — 23 43 55 71 — — — — — — —
25 — — — — — — 28 49 72 88 — — — — — —
30 — — — — — — — 29 62 80 95 — — — — —
40 — — — — — — — — 32 63 81 107 — — — —
50 — — — — — — — — — 35 65 96 118 — — —
60 — — — — — — — — — — 38 87 114 134 — —
80 — — — — — — — — — — — 42 89 115 135 —
100 — — — — — — — — — — — — 44 90 116 136
* This table does not apply to overall length of 1,500 mm or greater. Contact THK for details.
B-392
Accessories
Ball Spline model LT is provided with a standard key as indicated in Table4.
R R
Ball Spline
h C
b l
Table4 Standard Key for Model LT Unit: mm
Nominal shaft Width b Height h Length l

R C
diameter Tolerance(p7) Tolerance(h7) Tolerance(h12)
0
LT 4 2 2 6 1 0.3
– 0.120
0
LT 5 2.5 2.5 8 1.25 0.5
+0.016 0 – 0.150
LT 6 +0.006 – 0.025
2.5 2.5 10.5 1.25
LT 8
LT 10 3 3 13 0 1.5
– 0.180
LT 13 3 3 15 1.5
LT 16 3.5 3.5 17.5 1.75
0
LT 20 4 4 29 2 0.5
+0.024 0 – 0.210
LT 25 4 +0.012 4 – 0.030 36 0 2
LT 30 4 4 42 – 0.250 2
LT 40 6 6 52 3
+0.030
LT 50 8 7 58 0 4
+0.015 0 – 0.300
LT 60 12 +0.036 8 – 0.036 67 6
LT 80 16 +0.018 10 76 8
0.8
+0.043 0 0
LT 100 20 13 110 10
+0.022 – 0.043 – 0.350
B-393
B-394
Models LBG and LBGT
Ball Spline
(Separate)
Model LBR ........................................ B-396 Structure and features....................... A-496
Model LBG ........................................ B-398 Types and Features .......................... A-498
Service Life ....................................... A-499
Spline shaft ....................................... B-400 Clearance in the Rotation Direction .. A-499
Maximum Manufacturing Length by Accuracy. B-410 Housing Inner-diameter Tolerance.... A-499
Spline shaft ....................................... A-499

the Products".
B-395
Model LBG
L
E H E
φ D5 φ D 4 φ D PCD
L1 L1
Spline nut outer

Model No. Length Outer diameter Width
diameter
D Tolerance L Tolerance D4 Tolerance L1 Tolerance H E
0 0 0
z LBG 20 30 60 47 20 12 24
– 0.009 – 0.011 – 0.16
z LBG 25 40 0 70 0 60 0 23 0 14 28
– 0.011 – 0.2 – 0.013 – 0.19
z LBG 30 45 80 65 27 16 32
z LBG 40 60 0 100 85 31 18 41
– 0.013 0
z LBG 50 75 112 100 32 20 46
– 0.015 0
LBG 60 90 127 0 120 38 – 0.25 22 52.5
0 – 0.3
– 0.015 0
z LBG 85 120 155 150 40 26 64.5
– 0.025
Note) z: indicates model numbers for which felt seal types are available (see A-509).
Model number coding
2 LBG50 UU CM +700L H K
B-396
MA
Ball Spline
Unit: mm
Static
Gear specifications* Basic torque rating Basic load rating permissible Mass
moment
Tip circle Standard pitch Number Spline Spline

Module CT C0T C C0 MA**
diameter diameter of teeth nut unit shaft
PCD m N-m N-m kN kN N-m
D5 z kg kg/m
56 52 2 26 90.2 213 9.4 20.1 103 0.61 1.8
70 65 2.5 26 176 381 14.9 28.7 171 1.4 2.7

75 70 2.5 28 312 657 22.5 41.4 295 2.1 3.8
96 90 3 30 696 1420 37.1 66.9 586 3 6.8
111 105 3 35 1290 2500 55.1 94.1 941 4.1 10.6
133 126 3.5 36 1870 3830 66.2 121 1300 6.3 15.6
168 160 4 40 4740 9550 119 213 3180 11.8 32
Note) *The gear specifications in the table represent the dimensions with maximum module.
Special gear types such as helical gear and worm gear can also be manufactured at your request.
**MA indicates the permissible moment value in the axial direction when a single spline nut is used, as shown in the figure
above.

Type LBGT
L
E H E
φ D5 φ D 4 φ D PCD
L1 G G L1
Spline nut Thrust

Model No. Length Outer diameter Width raceway
outer diameter width
D Tolerance L Tolerance D4 Tolerance L1 Tolerance G H E
0 0 0
z LBGT 20 30 60 47 20 4 12 24
– 0.009 – 0.011 – 0.16
z LBGT 25 40 0 70 0 60 0 23 0 5 14 28
– 0.011 – 0.2 – 0.013 – 0.19
z LBGT 30 45 80 65 27 5 16 32
z LBGT 40 60 0 100 85 31 8 18 41
– 0.013 0
z LBGT 50 75 112 100 32 10 20 46
– 0.015 0
LBGT 60 90 127 0 120 38 – 0.25 12 22 52.5
0 – 0.3
– 0.015 0
z LBGT 85 120 155 150 40 16 26 64.5
– 0.025
Note) z: indicates model numbers for which felt seal types are available (see A-509).
Model number coding
2 LBGT40 UU CL +700L P K
B-398
MA
Ball Spline
Unit: mm
Static
Gear specifications* Basic torque rating Basic load rating permissible Mass
moment
Tip circle Standard pitch Number Spline nut Spline

Module CT C0T C C0 MA**
diameter diameter of teeth unit shaft
PCD m N-m N-m kN kN N-m
D5 z kg kg/m
56 52 2 26 90.2 213 9.4 20.1 103 0.67 1.8
70 65 2.5 26 176 381 14.9 28.7 171 1.5 2.7

75 70 2.5 28 312 657 22.5 41.4 295 2.2 3.8
96 90 3 30 696 1420 37.1 66.9 586 3.3 6.8
111 105 3 35 1290 2500 55.1 94.1 941 4.8 10.6
133 126 3.5 36 1870 3830 66.2 121 1300 7.2 15.6
168 160 4 40 4740 9550 119 213 3180 13.4 32
Note) *The gear specifications in the table represent the dimensions with maximum module.
Special gear types such as helical gear and worm gear can also be manufactured at your request.
**MA indicates the permissible moment value in the axial direction when a single spline nut is used, as shown in the figure
above.

Spline Shaft
φd
shaft. If the spline shaft ends need to be cylindri-
cal, the minor diameter (φ d) value should not be φ D0
exceeded if possible.
φ dp

Nominal shaft
20 25 30 40 50 60 85
diameter
Minor diameter φ d 15.3 19.5 22.5 31 39 46.5 67
Major diameter φ D0 19.7 24.5 29.6 39.8 49.5 60 84
Ball center-to-cen-
20 25 30 40 50 60 85
ter diameter φ dp
Mass (kg/m) 1.8 2.7 3.8 6.8 10.6 15.6 32
φd
hollow type spline shaft (type K) for models LBG
φ D0
and LBGT.
Use this table when a requirement such as pip- φ d4
φ dp
be met.
Type K
Nominal shaft
20 25 30 40 50 60 85
diameter
Minor diameter φ d 15.3 19.5 22.5 31 39 46.5 67
Major diameter φ D0 19.7 24.5 29.6 39.8 49.5 60 84
Ball center-to-cen-
20 25 30 40 50 60 85
ter diameter φ dp
Hole diameter φ d4 6 8 12 18 24 30 45
Mass (kg/m) 1.6 2.3 2.9 4.9 7 10 19.5
B-400
For details,see B-382.
Gr
ind
ing
sto
ne
rad
ius
Ball Spline
S R
φ df

Flange
diameter φ df
20 25 30 35 40 50 60 80 100 120 140
Nominal shaft
diameter
20 25 36 43 48 53 — — — — — —
25 — 32 46 55 62 73 — — — — —
30 — — 35 48 56 69 78 — — — —
40 — — — — 38 59 71 88 — — —
50 — — — — — 42 61 82 96 — —
60 — — — — — — 45 74 91 102 —
70 — — — — — — — 64 85 98 108
85 — — — — — — — 34 72 90 102
B-401
B-402
Ball Spline
(Separate)
Model LTR-A ..................................... B-404 Structure and features....................... A-500
Model LTR......................................... B-406 Types and Features .......................... A-502
Ball Spline Model LTR....................... A-502
Spline shaft ....................................... B-408 Ball Spline Model LTR-A ................... A-502
Service Life ....................................... A-503
Maximum Manufacturing Length by Accuracy. B-410 Clearance in the Rotation Direction .. A-503
Housing Inner-diameter Tolerance.... A-503
Spline shaft ....................................... A-503

the Products".
B-403
Model LTR-A Compact Type
Standard type
L
L1 E
6-φ d1 H Type K
(60° equidistant) 6-S×l F E
(60° equidistant)
φ D φ D7 φ D0 φ D6 φ D1
PCD1
PCD
Model LTR16A or greater
Outer Stan-
Model No. Flange Oil hole
Length diameter dard Type K position
diameter type
D6
D Tolerance L D1 D7 H L1 E E F E1 PCD PCD1 S×l
h7
LTR 8A 32 25 44 24 16 3 10.5 6 8.5 4 3 38 19 M2.6×3
– 0.009
LTR 10A 36 33 48 28 21 3 10.5 9 11.5 4 — 42 23 M3×4
– 0.025
LTR 16A 48 50 64 36 31 6 21 10 10 10.5 — 56 30 M4×6
LTR 20A 56 63 72 43.5 35 6 21 12 12 10.5 — 64 36 M5×8
– 0.010
LTR 25A 66 71 86 52 42 7 25 13 13 12.5 — 75 44 M5×8
– 0.029
LTR 32A 78 80 103 63 52 8 25 17 17 12.5 — 89 54 M6×10
– 0.012
LTR 40A 100 100 130 79.5 64 10 33 20 20 16.5 — 113 68 M6×10
– 0.034
Model number coding
2 LTR32A K UU ZZ CL +500L P K
Model No. Flange orientation Symbol for clearance Accuracy symbol
symbol(*1) in the rotational (*5)
direction(*4) Symbol for standard hollow spline shaft (*6)
Number of spline nuts Spline nut Support bearings Overall spline shaft length
on one shaft contamination protection contamination protection (in mm)
(no symbol for one nut) accessory symbol(*2) accessory symbol(*3)
(*2) See A-509. (*3) See A-509. (*4) See A-481. (*5) See A-482. (*6) See B-408.
(*1) No Symbol: standard K: flange inversed
B-404
L
L1 E
H
Standard type Type K
F E
E1
4-φ d1 φ D φ D7 φ D6 φ D1
(90° equidistant) 4-S×l
(90° equidistant)
Model LTR8A
Ball Spline
L1 E
PCD1 Standard type H Type K
F E
PCD
Model LTR8A Model LTR10A

φ D φ D7 φ D6 φ D1
Model LTR10A
Unit: mm
Spline Static Support bearing
shaft Basic torque rating Basic load rating permissi- Mass
diameter ble moment basic load rating
D0 Rows CT C0T C C0 MA** C C0 Spline Nut Spline shaft

d1 of balls
h7 N-m N-m KN KN N-m kN kN kg kg/m
3.4 8 4 1.96 2.94 1.47 2.55 5.9 0.69 0.24 0.08 0.4
3.4 10 4 3.92 7.84 2.84 4.9 15.7 0.77 0.3 0.13 0.62
4.5 16 6 31.3 34.3 7.05 12.6 67.6 6.7 6.4 0.35 1.6
4.5 20 6 56.8 55.8 10.2 17.8 118 7.4 7.8 0.51 2.5
5.5 25 6 105 103 15.2 25.8 210 9.7 10.6 0.79 3.9
6.6 32 6 180 157 20.5 34 290 10.5 12.5 1.25 5.6
9 40 6 418 377 37.8 60.4 687 16.5 20.7 2.51 9.9
below.
MA

Model LTR
L
(60° equidistant) (60° equidistant) E L1
6-S×l 6-φ d1 H
φ D 1 φ D6 φ D0 φ D
PCD1 UNote
PCD
Model No. Flange

Outer diameter Length
diameter
D6
D Tolerance L D1 H L1 E PCD PCD1 S×l
h7
LTR 16 52 50 68 39.5 5 37 10 60 32 M5×8
LTR 20 56 0 63 72 43.5 6 48 12 64 36 M5×8
LTR 25 62 – 0.007 71 78 53 6 55 13 70 45 M6×8
LTR 32 80 80 105 65.5 9 60 17 91 55 M6×10
LTR 40 100 0 100 130 79.5 11 74 23 113 68 M6×10
LTR 50 120 – 0.008 125 156 99.5 12 97 25 136 85 M10×15
LTR 60 134 0 140 170 115 12 112 25 150 100 M10×15

– 0.009
Model number coding
2 LTR50 K UU ZZ CM +1000L H K
Model No. Flange orientation Symbol for clearance Accuracy symbol
symbol(*1) in the rotational (*5)
direction(*4) Symbol for standard hollow spline shaft (*6)
Number of spline nuts Spline nut Support bearings Overall spline shaft length
on one shaft contamination protection contamination protection (in mm)
(no symbol for one nut) accessory symbol(*2) accessory symbol(*3)
(*2) See A-509. (*3) See A-509. (*4) See A-481. (*5) See A-482. (*6) See B-408.
(*1) No Symbol: standard K: flange inversed
B-406
MA
Ball Spline
Unit: mm
Spline Static Support bearing
shaft Basic torque rating Basic load rating permissible Mass
diameter moment basic load rating
D0 Rows CT C0T C C0 MA** C C0 Spline Nut Spline shaft

d1 UNote of balls kg kg/m
h7 N-m N-m KN KN N-m kN kN
4.5 5 16 6 31.4 34.3 7.06 12.6 67.6 12.7 11.8 0.51 1.6
4.5 7 20 6 56.9 55.9 10.2 17.8 118 16.3 15.5 0.7 2.5
4.5 8 25 6 105 103 15.2 25.8 210 17.6 18 0.93 3.9
6.6 10 32 6 180 157 20.5 34 290 20.1 24 1.8 5.6
9 13 40 6 419 377 37.8 60.5 687 37.2 42.5 3.9 9.9
11 13 50 6 842 769 60.9 94.5 1340 41.7 54.1 6.7 15.5
11 13 60 6 1220 1040 73.5 111.7 1600 53.1 68.4 8.8 22.3
above.
Dimension U represents the dimension from the head of the hexagonal-socket-head type bolt to the spline nut end.

Spline Shaft
shaft. If the spline shaft ends need to be cylindri- φ D0
cal, the minor diameter (φ d) value should not be
exceeded if possible. φd
φ dp

Nominal shaft
8 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 60
diameter
Minor diameter φ d 7 8.5 14.5 18.5 23 30 37.5 46.5 56.5
Major diameter φ D0 h7 8 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 60
Ball center-to-cen-
9.3 11.5 17.8 22.1 27.6 35.2 44.2 55.2 66.3
ter diameter φ dp
Mass (kg/m) 0.4 0.62 1.6 2.5 3.9 5.6 9.9 15.5 22.3
φ D0 φ D0
hollow type spline shaft (types K and N).
Use this table when a requirement such as pip- φ d4 φ d4
be met. φ dp φ dp
Type K Type N
(Thick) (Thin)
Nominal shaft diameter 8 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 60
Major diameter φ D0 8 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 60
Ball center-to-center
9.3 11.5 17.8 22.1 27.6 35.2 44.2 55.2 66.3
diameter φ dp
Hole diameter
3 4 7 10 12 18 22 25 32
Type K φ d4
Mass(kg/m) 0.35 0.52 1.3 1.8 3 4.3 6.9 11.6 16
Hole diameter
— — 11 14 18 23 29 36 —
Type N φ d4
Mass(kg/m) — — 0.8 1.3 1.9 3.1 4.7 7.4 —
Note) The standard hollow type Spline Shaft is divided into types K and N. Indicate "K" or "N" at the end of the model number
to distinguish between them when placing an order.
B-408
For details,see B-382.
(G
rin
di
ng
R
st
on
Ball Spline
e
ra
di
us
S
)
φ df

Flange
diameter φ df
6 8 10 13 16 20 25 30 40 50 60 80 100 120 140 160
Nominal shaft
diameter
8 — 16 24 30 35 — — — — — — — — — — —
10 — — 17 27 32 37 — — — — — — — — — —
16 — — — — 21 36 46 54 — — — — — — — —
20 — — — — — 21 38 48 62 — — — — — — —
25 — — — — — — 23 39 56 67 — — — — — —
32 — — — — — — — 24 49 62 72 — — — — —
40 — — — — — — — — 27 50 63 81 — — — —
50 — — — — — — — — — 29 51 74 89 — — —
60 — — — — — — — — — — 28 56 71 82 — —
B-409
Maximum Manufacturing Length by Accuracy
Table1 and Table2 show the maximum manufacturing lengths of ball spline shafts by accuracy.
Table1 Maximum Manufacturing Length of Models LBS, LBST, LBF, LBR, LBH, LBG and LBGT by Accuracy Unit: mm
Accuracy
Nominal shaft diameter
Normal grade (No symbol) High accuracy grade (H) Precision Grade (P)
6 200 150 100
8 600 200 150
10 600 400 300
15 1800 600 600
20 1800 700 700
25 3000 1400 1400
30 3000 1400 1400
40 3000 1400 1400
50 3000 1400 1400
60 3800 2500 2000
70 3800 2500 2000
85 3800 3000 3000
100 4000 3000 3000
120 3000 3000 3000
150 3000 3000 3000
Table2 Maximum Manufacturing Length of Models LT, LF, LTR and LTR-A by Accuracy Unit: mm
Accuracy
Nominal shaft diameter
Normal grade (No symbol) High accuracy grade (H) Precision Grade (P)
4 600 200 200
5 600 315 200
6 600 400 315
8 1000 500 400
10 1000 630 500
13 1000 800 630
16 2000 1000 1000
20 2000 1500 1000
25 3000 1500 1000
30 3000 1600 1250
40 3000 2000 1520
50 3000 2000 1500
60 4000 2000 2000
80 4000 2000 2000
100 4000 3000 3000
1. The length in the table represents the overall shaft length.
2. With standard hollow shaft type (K), the values in the table apply.
3. With standard hollow shaft type (N), the available maximum length for both the normal grade and the high accuracy grade
is up to the length defined for the precision grade in the table.
B-410
Spline Nut
General Catalog

(Separate)
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table Features ........................................... A-514
Model DPM ....................................... B-412 Features of the Spline Nut ................ A-514
Model DP .......................................... B-414 • Structure and features ...................... A-514
• Clearance in the Rotation Direction ..... A-516

Selecting a Spline Nut....................... A-517
Point of Design................................ A-520

Fit ...................................................... A-520

Installation ......................................... A-521
Lubrication......................................... A-521

the Products".
B-411
Model DPM
Spline Nut Outer dimensions Spline nut dimensions

Outer diameter
Flange
Model No. Tolerance Length
D diameter H B PCD r F d
h9 L D1
DPM 1220 20
22 44 6 5.4 31 1.5 7 1.5
DPM 1230 30
DPM 1520 0 20
22 44 6 5.4 31 1.5 7 1.5
DPM 1530 – 0.052 30
DPM 1723 23
28 51 7 6.6 38 1.5 8 1.5
DPM 1735 35
DPM 2028 28
32 56 7 6.6 42 1.5 10.5 1.5
DPM 2040 40
DPM 2536 0 36
36 61 8 6.6 47 2 14 2
DPM 2550 – 0.062 50
DPM 3040 40
44 76 10 9 58 2 15 2
DPM 3056 56
DPM 3544 44
52 84 10 9 66 2.5 17 2.5
DPM 3560 60
DPM 4050 50
58 98 12 11 76 2.5 19 3
DPM 4068 0 68
DPM 4555 – 0.074 55
64 104 12 11 80 2.5 21.5 3
DPM 4575 75
DPM 5060 60
68 109 12 11 85 2.5 24 3.5
DPM 5080 80
Note) The dynamic permissible torque (T) indicates the torque at which the contact surface pressure on the spline teeth is 9.8
N/mm2.
Clearance in the rotational direction: α ≦20' MAX
Model number coding

Combination of spline nut and
spline shaft
2 DPM2040 +360L
Overall spline shaft length (in mm)
Model No. of spline nut
Number of spline nuts used on the same shaft
B-412
L
H F
3-φ d
r
φ D1 PCD φ D φ Dr φ Do φ Dk
Spline Nut
4-φ B
Unit: mm
Standard Maximum Dynamic
Spline shaft Spline details Mass
shaft length shaft length permissible
torque Spline Spline
Pitch Major Minor Number
Model No. TNote Nut Shaft
diameter diameter diameter of teeth
D0 Dk Dr Z N-m g kg/m
17.6 80
SS 12 12 12.8 10.9 16 1500 1500 0.9
26.5 90
30.4 70
SS 15 15 16.1 13.5 16 1500 2000 1.4
46.1 80
43.1 120
SS 17 17 18.2 15.4 16 1500 2000 1.7
65.7 150
70.6 160
SS 20 20 21.5 18.3 16 1500 3200 2.5
100 200
152 220
SS 25 25 26.9 22.6 16 1500 3200 3.8
211 270
212 400
SS 30 30 31.8 28.2 20 1500 3200 5.5
297 480
325 560
SS 35 35 37.1 32.8 20 1500 3200 7.5
443 670
480 830
SS 40 40 42.4 37.5 20 1500 3200 9.8
673 970
680 980
SS 45 45 47.7 42.1 20 1500 3200 12.4
927 1110
910 1080
SS 50 50 53 46.8 20 1500 3200 15.4
1220 1290
Model number coding

Spline shaft SS20 +1500L
Model number of spline shaft
B-413
Model DP
Spline Nut Outer dimensions Spline nut dimensions

Outer diameter L Keyway dimensions
Model No. Tolerance 0 Tolerance
D b t l d r
h9 – 0.3 N9
DP 12 22 22 4 2 16 1.5 1
0 0
DP 15 22 22 4 2 16 1.5 1
– 0.052 – 0.030
DP 17 28 26 5 2.5 18 1.5 1
DP 20 32 31 7 2.5 22 1.5 1
0 0
DP 25 36 40 7 2.5 26 2 1
– 0.062 – 0.036
DP 30 44 45 10 4 32 2 1.5
DP 35 52 49 12 4.5 40 2.5 1.5
DP 40 58 0 57 15 0 5 42 3 1.5
DP 45 64 – 0.074 62 15 – 0.043 5 48 3 1.5
DP 50 68 67 15 5 52 3.5 1.5
Note) The dynamic permissible torque (T) indicates the torque at which the contact surface pressure on the spline teeth is 9.8
N/mm2.
Clearance in the rotational direction: α ≦20' MAX
Model number coding

Combination of spline nut and
spline shaft
2 DP20 +360L
Model No. of spline nut
Number of spline nuts used on the same shaft
B-414
l
r
t
φD φ Dr φ Do φ Dk
r 3-φ d
Spline Nut
L
Unit: mm
Standard Maximum Dynamic
Spline shaft Spline details Mass
shaft length shaft length permissible
torque Spline Spline
Pitch Major Minor Number
Model No. TNote Nut Shaft
diameter diameter diameter of teeth
D0 Dk Dr Z N-m g kg/m
SS 12 12 12.8 10.9 16 1500 1500 19.6 40 0.9
SS 15 15 16.1 13.5 16 1500 2000 33.3 30 1.4
SS 17 17 18.2 15.4 16 1500 2000 48 65 1.7
SS 20 20 21.5 18.3 16 1500 3200 77.5 100 2.5
SS 25 25 26.9 22.6 16 1500 3200 169 135 3.8
SS 30 30 31.8 28.2 20 1500 3200 238 230 5.5
SS 35 35 37.1 32.8 20 1500 3200 362 360 7.5
SS 40 40 42.4 37.5 20 1500 3200 547 510 9.8
SS 45 45 47.7 42.1 20 1500 3200 767 640 12.4
SS 50 50 53 46.8 20 1500 3200 1020 710 15.4
Model number coding

Spline shaft SS20 +1500L
Model number of spline shaft
B-415
B-416
Linear Bushing
General Catalog

(Separate)
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table Features and Types ........................ A-524
Model LM .......................................... B-418 Features of the Linear Bushing ......... A-524
Model LM-GA (Metal Retainer Type) ... B-420 • Structure and features ...................... A-524
Model LM-MG (Stainless Steel Type) .. B-422 • Dedicated Shafts for Model LM .......... A-526
Model LME ........................................ B-424 • Standard LM Shafts .......................... A-526
Model LM-L ....................................... B-426 • Specially Machined Types ................. A-526
Model LMF ........................................ B-428 • Table of Rows of Balls and Masses for
Model LMF-M (Stainless Steel Type)... B-430 Clearance-adjustable Types and Open
Model LMK ........................................ B-432 Types of the Linear Bushing .............. A-527
Model LMK-M (Stainless Steel Type)... B-434 Types of the Linear Bushing ............. A-528
Model LMF-L ..................................... B-436 • Types and Features .......................... A-528
Model LMF-ML (Stainless Steel Type) . B-438 Classification Table ........................... A-534
Model LMK-L..................................... B-440
Model LMK-ML (stainless steel type) ... B-442 Point of Selection............................ A-536
Model LMH........................................ B-444 Flowchart for Selecting a Linear Bushing ... A-536
Model LMH-L..................................... B-446 • Steps for Selecting a Linear Bushing ... A-536
Models SC6 to 30.............................. B-448 Rated Load and Nominal Life............ A-537
Models SC35 to 50............................ B-450 Table of Equivalent Factors .............. A-540
Model SL ........................................... B-452 Accuracy Standards .......................... A-541
Model SH .......................................... B-454
Model SH-L ....................................... B-456 Point of Design................................ A-542
Model SK........................................... B-458 Assembling the Linear Bushing......... A-542
Dedicated Shafts for Model LM......... B-459 Options............................................. A-549

Standard LM Shafts .......................... B-460 Lubrication......................................... A-549
Options............................................. B-461 Material, surface treatment ............... A-549

Felt Seal Model FLM ......................... B-461 Contamination Protection.................. A-550
• Felt Seal Model FLM......................... A-550

the Products".
B-417
Model LM
L
L1
L2 L2
φ D φ D0
Model No. Main

Inscribed bore diameter Outer diameter Length
Ball Tolerance Tolerance
Clearance-
Precision/
Standard type adjustable Open type rows dr Precision Upper D high L Tolerance
type
LM 3 — — 4 3 7 10
0 0 0 0
LM 4 — — 4 4 8 12
– 0.005 – 0.008 – 0.009 – 0.12
LM 5 — — 4 5 10 15
LM 6 LM 6-AJ — 4 6 12 19
0
LM 8S LM 8S-AJ — 4 8 15 17
– 0.011
LM 8 LM 8-AJ — 4 8 15 24
0 0
LM 10 LM 10-AJ — 4 10 19 29 0
– 0.006 – 0.009
LM 12 LM 12-AJ LM 12-OP 4 12 21 0 30 – 0.2
LM 13 LM 13-AJ LM 13-OP 4 13 23 – 0.013 32
LM 16 LM 16-AJ LM 16-OP 5 16 28 37
LM 20 LM 20-AJ LM 20-OP 5 20 32 42
0 0 0
LM 25 LM 25-AJ LM 25-OP 6 25 40 59
– 0.007 – 0.010 – 0.016
LM 30 LM 30-AJ LM 30-OP 6 30 45 64
LM 35 LM 35-AJ LM 35-OP 6 35 52 0 70
0 0 0
LM 40 LM 40-AJ LM 40-OP 6 40 60 – 0.019 80 – 0.3
– 0.008 – 0.012
LM 50 LM 50-AJ LM 50-OP 6 50 80 100
0
0 0
LM 60 LM 60-AJ LM 60-OP 6 60 90 – 0.022 110
– 0.009 – 0.015
Note) Since this model contains a synthetic resin retainer, do not use it at temperature exceeding 80℃.
If the ambient temperature exceeds 80℃, use the type equipped with a metal retainer (model LM-GA).
If requiring a type equipped with a seal, indicate it when placing an order.
(Example) LM13 UU
Seal attached on both ends of the nut
The accuracy of clearance-adjustable types (-AJ) and open types (-OP) in inscribed bore diameter and outer diameter
indicates the value before division.
B-418
φ dr φ dr φ dr
Linear Bushing
h0
h1
θ°
Model LM Model LM-AJ Model LM-OP

Unit: mm
dimensions Eccentricity (max) Radial Basic load rating
μm clearance
tolerance C C0 Mass
L1 Tolerance L2 D0 h0 h1 θ° Precision Upper μm N N g
— — — — — — — 4 8 –2 88.2 108 1.4

— — — — — — — 4 8 –3 88.2 127 1.9
10.2 1.1 9.6 — — — 4 8 –3 167 206 4
13.5 1.1 11.5 1 — — 8 12 –5 206 265 8
11.5 1.1 14.3 1 — — 8 12 –5 176 225 11
17.5 1.1 14.3 1 — — 8 12 –5 265 402 16
0
22 1.3 18 1 — — 8 12 –5 373 549 30
– 0.2
23 1.3 20 1.5 8 80 8 12 –5 412 598 31.5
23 1.3 22 1.5 9 80 8 12 –7 510 775 43
26.5 1.6 27 1.5 11 60 8 12 –7 775 1180 69
30.5 1.6 30.5 1.5 11 60 10 15 –9 863 1370 87
41 1.85 38 2 12 50 10 15 –9 980 1570 220
44.5 1.85 43 2.5 15 50 10 15 –9 1570 2750 250
49.5 2.1 49 2.5 17 50 12 20 – 13 1670 3140 390
0
60.5 – 0.3
2.1 57 3 20 50 12 20 – 13 2160 4020 585
74 2.6 76.5 3 25 50 12 20 – 13 3820 7940 1580
85 3.15 86.5 3 30 50 17 25 – 16 4710 10000 2000
Note) When using the Linear Bushing on a single shaft, use two or more units (instead of one unit) on the same shaft to avoid
a moment load, and secure a large distance between the units.

Model LM-GA (Metal Retainer Type)
L
L1
L2 L2
φ D φ D0
d0
Model No. Main

Clearance-
Precision/
Standard type adjustable Open type rows dr Precision Upper D high L Tolerance
type
LM 6GA — — 3 6 12 19
0
LM 8SGA — — 3 8 15 17
– 0.011
LM 8GA — — 3 8 15 24
0 0
LM 10GA — — 3 10 19 29 0
– 0.006 – 0.009
LM 12GA LM 12GA-AJ LM 12GA-OP 4 12 21 0 30 – 0.2
LM 13GA LM 13GA-AJ LM 13GA-OP 4 13 23 – 0.013 32
LM 16GA LM 16GA-AJ LM 16GA-OP 4 16 28 37
0 0 0
– 0.007 – 0.010 – 0.016
0 0
LM 38GA LM 38GA-AJ LM 38GA-OP 6 38 0 0 57 76
– 0.019 – 0.3
LM 40GA LM 40GA-AJ LM 40GA-OP 6 40 – 0.008 – 0.012 60 80
0
LM 60GA LM 60GA-AJ LM 60GA-OP 6 60 0 0 90 110
– 0.022
LM 80GA LM 80GA-AJ LM 80GA-OP 6 80 – 0.009 – 0.015 120 140
0
LM 100GA LM 100GA-AJ LM 100GA-OP 6 100 0 0 150 0 175
– 0.4
LM 120A LM 120A-AJ LM 120A-OP 8 120 – 0.010 – 0.020 180 – 0.025 200
Note) If requiring a type equipped with a seal, indicate it when placing an order. (seal heat resistance: 80℃.)
(Example) LM50GA UU
B-420
φ dr φ dr φ dr
Linear Bushing
h0
h1
θ°
Model LM-GA Model LM-GA-AJ Model LM-GA-OP

Unit: mm
Greasing Eccentricity
dimensions hole Radial Basic load rating
(max)
μm clearance
tolerance C C0 Mass
L1 Tolerance L2 D0 h0 h1 θ° d0 Precision Upper μm N N g
13.5 1.1 11.5 — — — — 8 12 –5 206 265 8

11.5 1.1 14.3 — — — — 8 12 –5 176 225 11
17.5 1.1 14.3 — — — — 8 12 –5 265 402 16
22 0 1.3 18 — — — 2 8 12 –5 373 549 30
23 – 0.2 1.3 20 1.5 7.5 80 2 8 12 –5 412 598 31.5
23 1.3 22 1.5 9 80 2 8 12 –7 510 775 43
26.5 1.6 27 1.5 11 60 2.3 8 12 –7 775 1180 69
30.5 1.6 30.5 2 11 60 2.3 10 15 –9 863 1370 87
41 1.85 38 2 13 60 3 10 15 –9 980 1570 220
44.5 1.85 43 2.5 15 50 3 10 15 –9 1570 2750 250
49.5 2.1 49 2.5 17 50 3 12 20 – 13 1670 3140 390
0
58.5 2.1 54.5 3 18 50 3 12 20 – 13 2160 4020 565
– 0.3
60.5 2.1 57 3 20 50 3 12 20 – 13 2160 4020 585
74 2.6 76.5 3 25 50 3 12 20 – 13 3820 7940 1580
85 3.15 86.5 3 30 50 4 17 25 – 16 4710 10000 2000
105.5 4.15 116 3 40 50 4 17 25 – 16 7350 16000 4520
0
125.5 4.15 145 3 50 50 4 20 30 – 20 14100 34800 8600
– 0.4
158.6 4.15 175 4 85 80 5 20 30 – 25 16400 40000 15000
Note) When using the Linear Bushing on a single shaft, use two or more units (instead of one unit) on the same shaft to avoid

Model LM-MG (Stainless Steel Type)
L1
L2 L2
φ D φ D0
Model No. Main

Clearance- Precision/
Standard type Open type rows dr Precision Upper D high L Tolerance
adjustable type
LM 3M — — 4 3 7 10
0 0 0 0
LM 4M — — 4 4 8 12
– 0.005 – 0.008 – 0.009 – 0.12
LM 5M — — 4 5 10 15
＊ LM 6MG LM 6MG-AJ — 4 6 12 19
0
＊ LM 8SMG LM 8SMG-AJ — 4 8 15 17
– 0.011
＊ LM 8MG ＊ LM 8MG-AJ — 4 8 15 24
0 0
＊ LM 10MG ＊ LM 10MG-AJ — 4 10 19 29 0
– 0.006 – 0.009
＊ LM 12MG ＊ LM 12MG-AJ — 4 12 21 0 30 – 0.2
＊ LM 13MG ＊ LM 13MG-AJ ＊ LM 13MG-OP 4 13 23 – 0.013 32
＊ LM 16MG ＊ LM 16MG-AJ ＊ LM 16MG-OP 4 16 28 37
0 0 0
– 0.007 – 0.010 – 0.016
＊ LM 30MG ＊ LM 30MG-AJ ＊ LM 30MG-OP 6 30 45 64 0
＊ LM 35MG ＊ LM 35MG-AJ ＊ LM 35MG-OP 6 35 0 0 52 0 70 – 0.3
＊ LM 40MG ＊ LM 40MG-AJ ＊ LM 40MG-OP 6 40 – 0.008 – 0.012 60 – 0.019 80
If the ambient temperature exceeds 80℃, use the type equipped with a metal retainer and indicate "A" at the end of the
model number.
(For those marked with ＊ in the table, metal retainers are available.)
(Metal retainer types of models LM6MG, 8SMG and 8MG each have 3 rows of balls.)
(Example) LM30MG A
If requiring a type equipped with a seal, indicate it when placing an order. (seal heat resistance: 80℃.)
For an open type, only type A is available.
(Example) LM30MG UU
B-422
φ dr φ dr φ dr
Linear Bushing
h0 h1
θ°
Model LM-MG Model LM-MG-AJ Model LM-MG-OP

Unit: mm
dimensions Eccentricity (max) Radial Basic load rating
μm clearance
tolerance C C0 Mass
L1 Tolerance L2 D0 h0 h1 θ° Precision Upper μm N N g
— — — — — — — 4 8 –2 88.2 108 1.4
— — — — — — — 4 8 –3 88.2 127 1.9
10.2 1.1 9.6 — — — 4 8 –3 167 206 4
13.5 1.1 11.5 1 — — 8 12 –5 206 265 8
11.5 1.1 14.3 1 — — 8 12 –5 176 225 11
17.5 1.1 14.3 1 — — 8 12 –5 265 402 16
0
22 1.3 18 1 — — 8 12 –5 373 549 30
– 0.2
23 1.3 20 1.5 — — 8 12 –5 412 598 31.5
23 1.3 22 1.5 9 80 8 12 –7 510 775 43
26.5 1.6 27 1.5 11 80 8 12 –7 775 1180 69
30.5 1.6 30.5 1.5 11 60 10 15 –9 863 1370 87
41 1.85 38 2 12 50 10 15 –9 980 1570 220
44.5 0 1.85 43 2.5 15 50 10 15 –9 1570 2750 250
49.5 – 0.3 2.1 49 2.5 17 50 12 20 – 13 1670 3140 390
60.5 2.1 57 3 20 50 12 20 – 13 2160 4020 585
Note) Since the nut and the balls use stainless steel, these models are highly resistant to corrosion and environment.
Stainless-steel type does not have an oil hole (OA type specification is required).
When using the Linear Bushing on a single shaft, use two or more units (instead of one unit) on the same shaft to avoid

Model LME
L
L1
L2 L2
φ D φ D0
Model No. Main

Inscribed bore
Outer diameter Length
diameter
Ball
Clearance-
Standard type adjustable Open type rows dr Tolerance D Tolerance L Tolerance
type
LME 5 LME 5-AJ — 4 5 12 0 22
+0.008
LME 8 LME 8-AJ — 4 8 16 – 0.008 25
0 0
LME 12 LME 12-AJ LME 12-OP 4 12 22 0 32
– 0.2
LME 16 LME 16-AJ LME 16-OP 5 16 +0.009 26 – 0.009 36
LME 20 LME 20-AJ LME 20-OP 5 20 – 0.001 32 45
0
LME 25 LME 25-AJ LME 25-OP 6 25 +0.011 40 58
– 0.011
LME 30 LME 30-AJ LME 30-OP 6 30 – 0.001 47 68 0
LME 40 LME 40-AJ LME 40-OP 6 40 62 0 80 – 0.3
+0.013
LME 50 LME 50-AJ LME 50-OP 6 50 75 – 0.013 100
– 0.002
LME 60 LME 60-AJ LME 60-OP 6 60 90 125
0 0
+0.016
LME 80 LME 80-AJ LME 80-OP 6 80 120 – 0.015 165 – 0.4
– 0.004
Note) Since Linear Bushing models LME50 or smaller models are incorporated with a synthetic resin retainer, do not use them
at temperature exceeding 80℃.
If the ambient temperature exceeds 80℃, use the type equipped with a metal retainer and indicate "A" at the end of the
model number.
(Example) LME20G A
If requiring a type equipped with a seal, indicate it when placing an order. (seal heat resistance: 80℃.)
(Example) LME16 UU
B-424
φ dr φ dr φ dr
Linear Bushing
h0
h1
θ°
Model LME Model LME-AJ Model LME-OP

Unit: mm
Eccentricity
dimensions Radial Basic load rating
(max)
clearance
tolerance C C0 Mass
L1 Tolerance L2 D0 h0 h1 θ° μm μm N N g
14.5 1.1 11.5 1 — — 12 –5 206 265 11

16.5 1.1 15.2 1 — — 12 –5 265 402 20
0
22.9 1.3 21 1.5 7.5 78 12 –7 510 775 41
– 0.2
24.9 1.3 24.9 1.5 10 78 12 –7 775 1180 57
31.5 1.6 30.3 2 10 60 15 –9 863 1370 91
44.1 1.85 37.5 2 12.5 60 15 –9 980 1570 215
52.1 0 1.85 44.5 2 12.5 50 15 –9 1570 2750 325
60.6 – 0.3 2.15 59 3 16.8 50 17 – 13 2160 4020 705
77.6 2.65 72 3 21 50 17 – 13 3820 7940 1130
101.7 3.15 86.5 3 27.2 54 20 – 16 4710 10000 2220
0
133.7 – 0.4 4.15 116 3 36.3 54 20 – 16 7350 16000 5140
Note) If a metal retainer is used, the Linear Bushing has the shape as shown below.
When using the Linear Bushing on a single shaft, use two or more units (instead of one unit) on the same shaft to avoid
Model LME-GA

Model LM-L
r
φd
Model LM-L
Model No. Main

Ball
Standard type rows dr Tolerance D Tolerance L Tolerance
LM 3L 4 3 7 19
LM 4L 4 4 8 23
0
LM 5L 4 5 10 29
– 0.013
LM 6L 4 6 12 35
0
LM 8L 4 8 15 45 0
– 0.010
LM 10L 4 10 19 55 – 0.3
LM 12L 4 12 21 0 57
LM 13L 4 13 23 – 0.016 61
LM 16L 5 16 28 70
LM 20L 5 20 32 80
0 0
LM 25L 6 25 40 112
– 0.012 – 0.019
LM 30L 6 30 45 123
LM 35L 6 35 52 135
0 0 0
LM 40L 6 40 60 154 – 0.4
– 0.015 – 0.022
LM 50L 6 50 80 192
0 0
LM 60L 6 60 90 211
– 0.020 – 0.025
(Example) LM13L UU
B-426
L
L1
L2 L2
φ D0 φ D
Linear Bushing
Unit: mm
Eccentricity
dimensions Radial Basic load rating
(max)
clearance
tolerance C C0 Mass
L1 Tolerance L2 D0 μm μm N N g
— — — 10 –2 139 216 3
—
— — — 10 –3 139 254 4
20 1.1 9.6 10 –3 263 412 8
27 1.1 11.5 15 –5 324 529 16
35 1.1 14.3 15 –5 431 784 31
44 0 1.3 18 15 –5 588 1100 62
46 – 0.3 1.3 20 15 –5 657 1200 80
46 1.3 22 15 –7 814 1570 90
53 1.6 27 15 –7 1230 2350 145
61 1.6 30.5 20 –9 1400 2750 180
82 1.85 38 20 –9 1560 3140 440
89 1.85 43 20 –9 2490 5490 580
99 2.1 49 25 – 13 2650 6270 795
0
121 – 0.4
2.1 57 25 – 13 3430 8040 1170
148 2.6 76.5 25 – 13 6080 15900 3100
170 3.15 86.5 25 – 16 7650 20000 3500
Note) A stainless steel type is also available. Contact THK for details.

Model LMF
PC
D
φ dr
Model LMF
Model No. Main dimensions

Inscribed bore
Outer diameter Length Flange diameter
diameter
Ball
Standard type rows dr Tolerance D Tolerance L Tolerance D1 Tolerance
LMF 6 4 6 12 19 28
0
LMF 8S 4 8 15 17 32
– 0.011
LMF 8 4 8 15 24 32
0
LMF 10 4 10 19 29 0 39
– 0.009
LMF 12 4 12 21 0 30 – 0.2 42
0
LMF 13 4 13 23 – 0.013 32 43
– 0.2
LMF 16 5 16 28 37 48
LMF 20 5 20 32 42 54
0 0
LMF 25 6 25 40 59 62
– 0.010 – 0.016
LMF 30 6 30 45 64 74
LMF 35 6 35 52 70 82
0 0 0
LMF 40 6 40 60 80 – 0.3
96
– 0.012 – 0.019
LMF 50 6 50 80 100 116 0
0 0 – 0.3
LMF 60 6 60 90 110 134
– 0.015 – 0.022
(Example) LMF25 UU
B-428
h
φ d2 φ d1
φ D1 φD
Linear Bushing
L
Unit: mm
Flange Eccentricity
Radial Basic load rating
perpendicularity (max)
Mounting hole clearance
tolerance C C0 Mass
H PCD d1×d2×h μm μm μm N N g
5 20 3.4×6.5×3.3 12 12 –5 206 265 26.5
5 24 3.4×6.5×3.3 12 12 –5 176 225 34
5 24 3.4×6.5×3.3 12 12 –5 265 402 40
6 29 4.5×8×4.4 12 12 –5 373 549 78
6 32 4.5×8×4.4 12 12 –5 412 598 76
6 33 4.5×8×4.4 12 12 –7 510 775 94
6 38 4.5×8×4.4 12 12 –7 775 1180 134
8 43 5.5×9.2×5.4 15 15 –9 863 1370 180
8 51 5.5×9.2×5.4 15 15 –9 980 1570 340
10 60 6.6×11×6.5 15 15 –9 1570 2750 460
10 67 6.6×11×6.5 20 20 – 13 1670 3140 795
13 78 9×14×8.6 20 20 – 13 2160 4020 1054
13 98 9×14×8.6 20 20 – 13 3820 7940 2200
18 112 11×17.5×10.8 25 25 – 13 4710 10000 2960

Model LMF-M (Stainless Steel Type)
PC
D
φ dr
Model LMF-M

Inscribed bore
diameter
Ball
LMF 6M 4 6 12 19 28
0
LMF 8SM 4 8 15 17 32
– 0.011
LMF 8M 4 8 15 24 32
0
LMF 10M 4 10 19 29 0 39
– 0.009
LMF 12M 4 12 21 0 30 – 0.2 42 0
LMF 13M 4 13 23 – 0.013 32 43 – 0.2
LMF 16M 5 16 28 37 48
LMF 20M 5 20 32 42 54
0 0
LMF 25M 6 25 40 59 0 62
– 0.010 – 0.016
LMF 30M 6 30 45 64 – 0.3 74
(Example) LMF20M UU
B-430
h
φ d2 φ d1
φ D1 φD
H
L
Linear Bushing
Unit: mm
Flange Eccentricity
tolerance C C0 Mass
5 20 3.4×6.5×3.3 12 12 –5 206 265 26.5
5 24 3.4×6.5×3.3 12 12 –5 176 225 34
5 24 3.4×6.5×3.3 12 12 –5 265 402 40
6 29 4.5×8×4.4 12 12 –5 373 549 78
6 32 4.5×8×4.4 12 12 –5 412 598 76
6 33 4.5×8×4.4 12 12 –7 510 775 94
6 38 4.5×8×4.4 12 12 –7 775 1180 134
8 43 5.5×9.2×5.4 15 15 –9 863 1370 180
8 51 5.5×9.2×5.4 15 15 –9 980 1570 340
10 60 6.6×11×6.5 15 15 –9 1570 2750 460

Model LMK
PC
D
φ dr
K
□
Model LMK

Inscribed bore
diameter
Ball
LMK 6 4 6 12 19 28
0
LMK 8S 4 8 15 17 32
– 0.011
LMK 8 4 8 15 24 32
0
LMK 10 4 10 19 29 0 39
– 0.009
LMK 12 4 12 21 0 30 – 0.2 42
0
LMK 13 4 13 23 – 0.013 32 43
– 0.2
LMK 16 5 16 28 37 48
LMK 20 5 20 32 42 54
0 0
LMK 25 6 25 40 59 62
– 0.010 – 0.016
LMK 30 6 30 45 64 74
LMK 35 6 35 52 70 82
0 0 0
LMK 40 6 40 60 80 – 0.3
96
– 0.012 – 0.019
LMK 50 6 50 80 100 116 0
0 0 – 0.3
LMK 60 6 60 90 110 134
– 0.015 – 0.022
(Example) LMK13 UU
B-432
h
φ d2 φ d1
φ D1 φD
Linear Bushing
L
Unit: mm
Flange Eccentricity
tolerance C C0 Mass
K H PCD d1×d2×h μm μm μm N N g
22 5 20 3.4×6.5×3.3 12 12 –5 206 265 18.5
25 5 24 3.4×6.5×3.3 12 12 –5 176 225 23
25 5 24 3.4×6.5×3.3 12 12 –5 265 402 29
30 6 29 4.5×8×4.4 12 12 –5 373 549 61
32 6 32 4.5×8×4.4 12 12 –5 412 598 56
34 6 33 4.5×8×4.4 12 12 –7 510 775 75
37 6 38 4.5×8×4.4 12 12 –7 775 1180 104
42 8 43 5.5×9.2×5.4 15 15 –9 863 1370 145
50 8 51 5.5×9.2×5.4 15 15 –9 980 1570 300
58 10 60 6.6×11×6.5 15 15 –9 1570 2750 375
64 10 67 6.6×11×6.5 20 20 – 13 1670 3140 692
75 13 78 9×14×8.6 20 20 – 13 2160 4020 864
92 13 98 9×14×8.6 20 20 – 13 3820 7940 2020
106 18 112 11×17.5×10.8 25 25 – 13 4710 10000 2520

Model LMK-M (Stainless Steel Type)
PC
D
φ dr
K
□
Model LMK-M

Inscribed bore
diameter
Ball
LMK 6M 4 6 12 19 28
0
LMK 8SM 4 8 15 17 32
– 0.011
LMK 8M 4 8 15 24 32
0
LMK 10M 4 10 19 29 0 39
– 0.009
LMK 12M 4 12 21 0 30 – 0.2 42 0
LMK 13M 4 13 23 – 0.013 32 43 – 0.2
LMK 16M 5 16 28 37 48
LMK 20M 5 20 32 42 54
0 0
LMK 25M 6 25 40 59 0 62
– 0.010 – 0.016
LMK 30M 6 30 45 64 – 0.3 74
(Example) LMK25M UU
B-434
h
φ d2 φ d1
φ D1 φD
Linear Bushing
L
Unit: mm
Flange Eccentricity
tolerance C C0 Mass
22 5 20 3.4×6.5×3.3 12 12 –5 206 265 18.5
25 5 24 3.4×6.5×3.3 12 12 –5 176 225 23
25 5 24 3.4×6.5×3.3 12 12 –5 265 402 29
30 6 29 4.5×8×4.4 12 12 –5 373 549 61
32 6 32 4.5×8×4.4 12 12 –5 412 598 56
34 6 33 4.5×8×4.4 12 12 –7 510 775 75
37 6 38 4.5×8×4.4 12 12 –7 775 1180 104
42 8 43 5.5×9.2×5.4 15 15 –9 863 1370 145
50 8 51 5.5×9.2×5.4 15 15 –9 980 1570 300
58 10 60 6.6×11×6.5 15 15 –9 1570 2750 375

Model LMF-L
PC
D
φ dr
Model LMF-L

Inscribed bore
Ball Outer diameter Length Flange diameter
diameter
LMF 6L 4 6 12 0 35 28
LMF 8L 4 8 15 – 0.013 45 32
LMF 10L 4 10 0 19 55 39
0
LMF 12L 4 12 – 0.010 21 0 57 42
– 0.3
LMF 13L 4 13 23 – 0.016 61 43 0
LMF 16L 5 16 28 70 48 – 0.2
LMF 20L 5 20 32 80 54
0 0
LMF 25L 6 25 40 112 62
– 0.012 – 0.019
LMF 30L 6 30 45 123 74
LMF 35L 6 35 52 135 82
0 0 0
LMF 40L 6 40 60 154 – 0.4
96
– 0.015 – 0.022
LMF 50L 6 50 80 192 116 0
0 0 – 0.3
LMF 60L 6 60 90 211 134
– 0.020 – 0.025
(Example) LMF35L UU
B-436
h
φ d2 φ d1
φ D1 φD
Linear Bushing
L
Unit: mm
Flange Eccentricity Radial
Basic load rating
perpendicularity (max) clearance
Mounting hole tolerance C C0 Mass
5 20 3.4×6.5×3.3 15 15 –5 324 529 32
5 24 3.4×6.5×3.3 15 15 –5 431 784 53
6 29 4.5×8×4.4 15 15 –5 588 1100 105
6 32 4.5×8×4.4 15 15 –5 657 1200 100
6 33 4.5×8×4.4 15 15 –7 814 1570 130
6 38 4.5×8×4.4 15 15 –7 1230 2350 187
8 43 5.5×9.2×5.4 20 20 –9 1400 2750 260
8 51 5.5×9.2×5.4 20 20 –9 1560 3140 515
10 60 6.6×11×6.5 20 20 –9 2490 5490 655
10 67 6.6×11×6.5 25 25 – 13 2650 6270 970
13 78 9×14×8.6 25 25 – 13 3430 8040 1560
13 98 9×14×8.6 25 25 – 13 6080 15900 3500
18 112 11×17.5×10.8 25 25 – 13 7650 20000 4500

Model LMF-ML (Stainless Steel Type)
PC
D
φ dr
Model LMF-ML

Inscribed bore
diameter
LMF 6ML 4 6 12 0 35 28
LMF 8ML 4 8 15 – 0.013 45 32
LMF 10ML 4 10 0 19 55 39
0
LMF 12ML 4 12 – 0.010 21 0 57 42
– 0.3 0
LMF 13ML 4 13 23 – 0.016 61 43
– 0.2
LMF 16ML 5 16 28 70 48
LMF 20ML 5 20 32 80 54
0 0
LMF 25ML 6 25 40 112 0 62
– 0.012 – 0.019
LMF 30ML 6 30 45 123 – 0.4 74
(Example) LMF13ML UU
B-438
h
φ d2 φ d1
φ D1 φD
Linear Bushing
L
Unit: mm
Basic load rating
5 20 3.4×6.5×3.3 15 15 –5 324 529 32
5 24 3.4×6.5×3.3 15 15 –5 431 784 53
6 29 4.5×8×4.4 15 15 –5 588 1100 105
6 32 4.5×8×4.4 15 15 –5 657 1200 100
6 33 4.5×8×4.4 15 15 –7 814 1570 130
6 38 4.5×8×4.4 15 15 –7 1230 2350 187
8 43 5.5×9.2×5.4 20 20 –9 1400 2750 260
8 51 5.5×9.2×5.4 20 20 –9 1560 3140 515
10 60 6.6×11×6.5 20 20 –9 2490 5490 655

Model LMK-L
PC
D
φ dr
K
□
Model LMK-L

Inscribed bore
diameter
LMK 6L 4 6 12 0 35 28
LMK 8L 4 8 15 – 0.013 45 32
LMK 10L 4 10 0 19 55 39
0
LMK 12L 4 12 – 0.010 21 0 57 42
– 0.3
LMK 13L 4 13 23 – 0.016 61 43 0
LMK 16L 5 16 28 70 48 – 0.2
LMK 20L 5 20 32 80 54
0 0
LMK 25L 6 25 40 112 62
– 0.012 – 0.019
LMK 30L 6 30 45 123 74
LMK 35L 6 35 52 135 82
0 0 0
LMK 40L 6 40 60 154 – 0.4
96
– 0.015 – 0.022
LMK 50L 6 50 80 192 116 0
0 0 – 0.3
LMK 60L 6 60 90 211 134
– 0.020 – 0.025
(Example) LMK50L UU
B-440
h
φ d2 φ d1
φ D1 φD
H
L
Linear Bushing
Unit: mm
Basic load rating
22 5 20 3.4×6.5×3.3 15 15 –5 324 529 26
25 5 24 3.4×6.5×3.3 15 15 –5 431 784 46
30 6 29 4.5×8×4.4 15 15 –5 588 1100 88
32 6 32 4.5×8×4.4 15 15 –5 657 1200 82
34 6 33 4.5×8×4.4 15 15 –7 814 1570 108
37 6 38 4.5×8×4.4 15 15 –7 1230 2350 160
42 8 43 5.5×9.2×5.4 20 20 –9 1400 2750 230
50 8 51 5.5×9.2×5.4 20 20 –9 1560 3140 475
58 10 60 6.6×11×6.5 20 20 –9 2490 5490 575
64 10 67 6.6×11×6.5 25 25 – 13 2650 6270 870
75 13 78 9×14×8.6 25 25 – 13 3430 8040 1380
92 13 98 9×14×8.6 25 25 – 13 6080 15900 3300
106 18 112 11×17.5×10.8 25 25 – 13 7650 20000 4060

Model LMK-ML (Stainless Steel Type)
PC
D
φ dr
K
□
Model LMK-ML

Inscribed bore
diameter
LMK 6ML 4 6 12 0 35 28
LMK 8ML 4 8 15 – 0.013 45 32
LMK 10ML 4 10 0 19 55 39
0
LMK 12ML 4 12 – 0.010 21 0 57 42
– 0.3 0
LMK 13ML 4 13 23 – 0.016 61 43
– 0.2
LMK 16ML 5 16 28 70 48
LMK 20ML 5 20 32 80 54
0 0
LMK 25ML 6 25 40 112 0 62
– 0.012 – 0.019
LMK 30ML 6 30 45 123 – 0.4 74
(Example) LMK8ML UU
B-442
h
φ d2 φ d1
φ D1 φD
H
L
Linear Bushing
Unit: mm
Basic load rating
22 5 20 3.4×6.5×3.3 15 15 –5 324 529 26
25 5 24 3.4×6.5×3.3 15 15 –5 431 784 46
30 6 29 4.5×8×4.4 15 15 –5 588 1100 88
32 6 32 4.5×8×4.4 15 15 –5 657 1200 82
34 6 33 4.5×8×4.4 15 15 –7 814 1570 108
37 6 38 4.5×8×4.4 15 15 –7 1230 2350 160
42 8 43 5.5×9.2×5.4 20 20 –9 1400 2750 230
50 8 51 5.5×9.2×5.4 20 20 –9 1560 3140 475
58 10 60 6.6×11×6.5 20 20 –9 2490 5490 575

Model LMH
r
φd
dr
φ D1 B φ D1 φ B
K K
Models LMH6 to 13 Models LMH16 to 30

Inscribed bore
diameter
LMH 6 4 6 12 0 19 28
LMH 8 4 8 15 – 0.011 24 32
LMH 10 4 10 0 19 29 39
0
LMH 12 4 12 – 0.009 21 0 30 42
– 0.2 0
LMH 13 4 13 23 – 0.013 32 43
– 0.2
LMH 16 5 16 28 37 48
LMH 20 5 20 32 42 54
0 0
LMH 25 6 25 40 59 0 62
– 0.010 – 0.016
LMH 30 6 30 45 64 – 0.3 74
(Example) LMH16 UU
B-444
h
φ d2 φ d1
φD
Linear Bushing
H
L
Unit: mm
Eccentricity Radial
Flange Basic load rating
(max) clearance
Mounting hole perpendicularity tolerance C C0 Mass
K H B C d1×d2×h μm μm μm N N g
18 5 20 — 3.4×6.5×3.3 12 12 –5 206 265 18
21 5 24 — 3.4×6.5×3.3 12 12 –5 265 402 28
25 6 29 — 4.5×8×4.4 12 12 –5 373 549 50
27 6 32 — 4.5×8×4.4 12 12 –5 412 598 55
29 6 33 — 4.5×8×4.4 12 12 –7 510 775 70
34 6 31 22 4.5×8×4.4 12 12 –7 775 1180 95
38 8 36 24 5.5×9.2×5.4 15 15 –9 863 1370 150
46 8 40 32 5.5×9.2×5.4 15 15 –9 980 1570 275
51 10 49 35 6.6×11×6.5 15 15 –9 1570 2750 350

Model LMH-L
r
φ D1 φ dr B φ D1 φd B
K K
Models LMH6L to 13L Models LMH16L to 30L

Inscribed bore
diameter
LMH 6L 4 6 12 0 35 28
LMH 8L 4 8 15 – 0.013 45 32
LMH 10L 4 10 0 19 55 39
0
LMH 12L 4 12 – 0.010 21 0 57 42
– 0.3 0
LMH 13L 4 13 23 – 0.016 61 43
– 0.2
LMH 16L 5 16 28 70 48
LMH 20L 5 20 32 80 54
0 0
LMH 25L 6 25 40 112 0 62
– 0.012 – 0.019
LMH 30L 6 30 45 123 – 0.4 74
(Example) LMH20L UU
B-446
h
φ d2 φ d1
φD
Linear Bushing
L
Unit: mm
Eccentricity Radial
Flange Basic load rating
(max) clearance
Mounting hole perpendicularity tolerance C C0 Mass
K H B C d1×d2×h μm μm μm N N g
18 5 20 — 3.4×6.5×3.3 15 15 –5 324 529 28
21 5 24 — 3.4×6.5×3.3 15 15 –5 431 784 40
25 6 29 — 4.5×8×4.4 15 15 –5 588 1100 75
27 6 32 — 4.5×8×4.4 15 15 –5 657 1200 82
29 6 33 — 4.5×8×4.4 15 15 –7 814 1570 107
34 6 31 22 4.5×8×4.4 15 15 –7 1230 2350 143
38 8 36 24 5.5×9.2×5.4 20 20 –9 1400 2750 225
46 8 40 32 5.5×9.2×5.4 20 20 –9 1560 3140 450
51 10 49 35 6.6×11×6.5 20 20 –9 2490 5490 575

Models SC6 to 30
W 4-S×l
Reference surface B1 B
W1
T
J
r
M K φd
THK
logo side
R
4-S2
W2
Models SC6 to 30
Model No. Center

Height Width Length Mounting hole position Tap Through bolt
height
J W1
M W L B B1 C S×l model No,S2
± 0.02 ± 0.02
SC 6UU 18 30 25 20 5 15 M4×8 M3 9 15
SC 8UU 22 34 30 24 5 18 M4×8 M3 11 17
SC 10UU 26 40 35 28 6 21 M5×12 M4 13 20
SC 12UU 29 42 36 30.5 5.75 26 M5×12 M4 15 21
SC 13UU 30 44 39 33 5.5 26 M5×12 M4 15 22
SC 16UU 38.5 50 44 36 7 34 M5×12 M4 19 25
SC 20UU 42 54 50 40 7 40 M6×12 M5 21 27
SC 25UU 51.5 76 67 54 11 50 M8×18 M6 26 38
SC 30UU 59.5 78 72 58 10 58 M8×18 M6 30 39
A stainless steel Linear Bushing model LM-MG, which is highly corrosion resistant, can also be incorporated at your
request.
Example of Model Number for Use in Combination with Linear Bushing Units
Linear Bushing Examle of

to be combined model No.
Both end attached Standard
SC 13UU
with seal stock
Build to
Without seal SC 13
order
Made of stainless steel; Build to
SC 13MUU
both end attached with seal order
B-448
L
C
Linear Bushing
Unit: mm
Model No. of
Linear Bushing Basic load rating Unit
to be combined
Inscribed bore
C C0 Mass
diameter
K W2 T R dr Tolerance N N g
15 28 6 9 6 LM6UU 206 265 34
18 32 6 11 8 LM8UU 265 402 52
22 37 8 13 10 0 LM10UU 373 549 92
25 39 8 14 12 – 0.009 LM12UU 412 598 102
26 41 8 15 13 LM13UU 510 775 123
35 46 9 19.5 16 LM16UU 775 1180 189
36 52 11 21 20 LM20UU 863 1370 237
0
41 68 12 25.5 25 LM25UU 980 1570 555
– 0.010
49 72 15 29.5 30 LM30UU 1570 2750 685

Models SC35 to 50
W 4-S×l
Reference surface B1 B
W1
T
J
r
M K φd
THK
logo side
4-S2
R
W2
Models SC35 to 50
Model No. Lengt Mounting hole Center

Height Width Tap Through bolt
h position height
J W1
M W L B B1 C S×l model No,S2 K
± 0.02 ±0.02
SC 35UU 68 90 80 70 10 60 M8×18 M6 34 45 54
SC 40UU 78 102 90 80 11 60 M10×25 M8 40 51 62
SC 50UU 102 122 110 100 11 80 M10×25 M8 52 61 80
request.
(Model SC50 does not include a stainless type.)

SC 40UU
with seal stock
Build to
Without seal SC 40
order
SC 40MUU
B-450
L
C
4-
R
Linear Bushing
1
L1 W3
Unit: mm
Model No. of
to be combined
Inscribed bore
C C0 Mass
diameter
W2 W3 L1 T R R1 dr Tolerance N N g
85 60 42 18 34 5 35 LM35UU 1670 3140 1100
0
96 80 44 20 38 8 40 LM40UU 2160 4020 1600
– 0.012
116 100 64 25 50 8 50 LM50UU 3820 7940 3350

Model SL
W N
Reference surface B1 B 4-S×l
W1
T
J A-MT6
M K φ dr
THK
logo side
R
4-S2
W2
Model SL
Model No. Center

height
J W1
M W L B B1 C S×l model No,S2
± 0.02 ± 0.02
SL 6UU 18 30 48 20 5 36 M4×8 M3 9 15
SL 8UU 22 34 58 24 5 42 M4×8 M3 11 17
SL 10UU 26 40 68 28 6 46 M5×12 M4 13 20
SL 12UU 29 42 70 30.5 5.75 50 M5×12 M4 15 21
SL 13UU 30 44 75 33 5.5 50 M5×12 M4 15 22
SL 16UU 38.5 50 85 36 7 60 M5×12 M4 19 25
SL 20UU 42 54 96 40 7 70 M6×12 M5 21 27
SL 25UU 51.5 76 130 54 11 100 M8×18 M6 26 38
SL 30UU 59.5 78 140 58 10 110 M8×18 M6 30 39
request.

SL 13UU
with seal stock
Build to
Without seal SL 13
order
SL 13MUU
B-452
L
C
Linear Bushing
Unit: mm
Model No. of
to be combined
Inscribed bore
C C0 Mass
diameter
K W2 T R N dr Tolerance N N g
15 28 6 9 7 6 LM6U 324 529 68
18 32 6 11 7 8 LM8U 431 784 105
22 37 8 13 7 10 0 LM10U 588 1100 185
25 39 8 14 6.5 12 – 0.009 LM12U 657 1200 205
26 41 8 15 6.5 13 LM13U 814 1570 242
35 46 9 19.5 6 16 LM16U 1230 2350 403
36 52 11 21 7 20 LM20U 1400 2750 520
0
41 68 12 25.5 4 25 LM25U 1560 3140 1120
– 0.010
49 72 15 29.5 5 30 LM30U 2490 5490 1440

Model SH
W
2-S1
h
C
φ d2
J
M φ dr 2-S3
W1
Model SH
Model No.
M W L B B1 C S1 S2×l model No,S3

SH 3UU 14 10 13 — 8 3 M3 M3×5.5 M2
SH 4UU 16 12 15 — 10 3 M3 M3×6 M2
SH 5UU 18 14 17 — 12 3 M3 M3×6 M2
SH 6UU 22 16 24 18 9 5 M4 M4×8 M3
SH 8UU 26 20 27 20 10 5 M4 M5×8.5 M3
SH 10UU 32 26 35 27 15 6 M5 M6×9.5 M4
SH 12UU 34 28 35 27 15 6 M5 M6×9.5 M4
SH 13UU 36 30 36 28 16 6 M5 M6×9.5 M4
SH 16UU 42 36 40 32 18 6 M5 M6×10 M4
SH 20UU 49 42 44 36 22 7 M6 M6×12 M5
request.

SH 13UU
with seal stock
Build to
Without seal SH 13
order
SH 13MUU
B-454
2-S2×l
L
B
B1
Top surface of models SH6 to SH20

S2×l
Linear Bushing
Top surface of models SH3 to SH5
Unit: mm
Model No. of
to be combined
Center Inscribed bore
C C0 Mass
height diameter
J W1
d2 h dr Tolerance N N g
± 0.02 ± 0.02
9 5 4.2 1.5 3 LM3UU 88.2 108 4.5
0
10 6 4.2 1.5 4 LM4UU 88.2 127 7
– 0.008
11 7 4.2 1.5 5 LM5UU 167 206 11
14 8 6.5 3.3 6 LM6UU 206 265 21.6
16 10 6.5 3.3 8 LM8UU 265 402 32
19 13 8 4.4 10 0 LM10UU 373 549 65
20 14 8 4.4 12 – 0.009 LM12UU 412 598 81
21 15 8 4.4 13 LM13UU 510 775 90
24 18 8 4.4 16 LM16UU 775 1180 150
0
28 21 9.5 5.4 20 LM20UU 863 1370 215
– 0.010

Model SH-L
W
2-S1
h
C
φ d2
J
M
φ dr 2-S3
W1
Model SH-L
Model No.
M W L B B1 C S1 S2×l model No,S3

SH 3LUU 14 10 23 10 18 3 M3 M3×5.5 M2
SH 4LUU 16 12 27 14 22 3 M3 M3×6 M2
SH 5LUU 18 14 32 18 26 3 M3 M3×6 M2
SH 6LUU 22 16 40 20 30 5 M4 M4×8 M3
SH 8LUU 26 20 52 30 42 5 M4 M5×8.5 M3
SH 10LUU 32 26 60 36 50 6 M5 M6×9.5 M4
SH 12LUU 34 28 62 36 50 6 M5 M6×9.5 M4
SH 13LUU 36 30 66 40 54 6 M5 M6×9.5 M4
SH 16LUU 42 36 76 52 66 6 M5 M6×10 M4
SH 20LUU 49 42 86 58 72 7 M6 M6×12 M5
request.

SH 13LUU
with seal stock
Build to
Without seal SH 13L
order
SH 13MLUU
B-456
L
2-S2×l B1
B
Linear Bushing
Unit: mm
Model No. of
to be combined
Center Inscribed bore
C C0 Mass
height diameter
J W1
d2 h dr Tolerance N N g
± 0.02 ± 0.02
9 5 4.2 1.5 3 LM3U 139 216 8.5
0
10 6 4.2 1.5 4 LM4U 139 254 13
– 0.008
11 7 4.2 1.5 5 LM5U 263 412 22
14 8 6.5 3.3 6 LM6U 324 529 35
16 10 6.5 3.3 8 LM8U 431 784 65
19 13 8 4.4 10 0 LM10U 588 1100 125
20 14 8 4.4 12 – 0.009 LM12U 657 1200 155
21 15 8 4.4 13 LM13U 814 1570 190
24 18 8 4.4 16 LM16U 1230 2350 295
0
28 21 9.5 5.4 20 LM20U 1400 2750 425
– 0.010

Model SK
A
Tightening bolt
I
d
2-S H
h
THK
SK30 g
b B
Reference surface
W
L
Unit: mm
Main dimensions
Shaft
Mounting diameter Tightening Mass
Model No. bolt bolt
model h A model
H W L B S No. b g l d No. g
± 0.02 ± 0.05
SK 10 32.8 42 14 32 5.5 M5 20 21 5 6 18 10 M4 24
SK 12 37.5 42 14 32 5.5 M5 23 21 5 6 20 12 M4 30
SK 13 37.5 42 14 32 5.5 M5 23 21 5 6 20 13 M4 30
SK 16 44 48 16 38 5.5 M5 27 24 5 8 25 16 M4 40
SK 20 51 60 20 45 6.6 M6 31 30 7.5 10 30 20 M5 70
SK 25 60 70 24 56 6.6 M6 35 35 7 12 38 25 M6 130
SK 30 70 84 28 64 9 M8 42 42 10 12 44 30 M6 180
SK 35 83 98 32 74 11 M10 50 49 12 15 50 35 M8 270
SK 40 96 114 36 90 11 M10 60 57 12 15 60 40 M8 420
B-458
Dedicated Shafts for Model LM
The LM shaft of the Linear Bushing needs to be manufactured with much consideration for hardness,
surface roughness and dimensional accuracy of the shaft since balls roll directly on it.
THK manufactures dedicated LM shafts for the Linear Bushing. See the specification table for stan-
dard LM shafts on B-460.
Among other factors, the surface hardness of an LM shaft affects the service life of your Linear Bush-
ing system most significantly. Therefore, take much care in selecting a material and a heat treatment
method when assembling the system. In addition, as the surface hardness of the LM shaft greatly
affects the service life as stated above, use care in selecting and/or handling a material and heat
treatment.
[Material]
Generally, the following materials are used for surface hardening through induction-hardening.
Linear Bushing
For special applications, martensite stainless steel SUS440C, which is corrosion resistant, may also
be used.
[Hardness] Table1 Dimensions of Hollow LM Shafts
We recommend surface hardness of 58 HRC ( Unit: mm
≒653 HV) or higher. The depth of the hardened Supported LM shaft Inner
Mass
layer is determined by the size of the Linear model outer diameter diameter
(kg/m)
numbers d (φ d4)
Bushing; we recommend approximately 2 mm
for general use. LM 8 8 3 0.4
[Surface Roughness] LM 10 10 4 0.6

To achieve smooth motion, the surface should
LM 12 12 6 0.7
preferably be finished to 0.40a or less.
LM 13 13 7 0.8
[Dimensions of Hollow LM Shafts]
If a hollow LM shaft is required for purposes LM 16 16 9 1.1
such as weight reduction, use the desired mate- LM 20 20 10 1.9
rial from Table1 for the dimensions of hollow LM
LM 20 20 14 1.3
shafts that THK keeps in stock.
Models marked with " ＊ " are build-to-order LM 25 25 15 2.5
items. LM 30 30 16 4
LM 35 35 20 5.1
＊ LM 38 38 22 6
LM 40 40 22 6.9
φd
LM 50 50 25 11.6
(φ d4) LM 60 60 32 16
＊ LM 80 80 52.5 22.6
＊ LM 100 100 67.5 33.7
B-459
Standard LM Shafts
THK manufactures high quality, dedicated LM (1) [Major materials]
shafts for Linear Bushing model LM series. THK5SP (THK standard material)
SUJ2 (high-carbon chromium bearing steel)
Model number coding
[Hardness]
SF25 g6 -500L K HRC58 to 64
[Hardened layer depth]
Model number LM shaft outer 0.8 to 2.5mm(varies with shaft diameter)
diameter tolerance
[Surface roughness]
Overall LM shaft length 0.20a to 0.40a
(in mm)
[Straightness of the LM shaft]
Special symbol* 50 μ m/300 mm or less
no symbol: solid shaft K: standard hollow shaft
M: special material F: with surface treatment
(2) Precision-grade LM shafts with shaft diame-
ter tolerance of g5 or h5 are also manufac-
*If two or more symbols are given, they are shown in
an alphabetical order. tured as standard.
(3) Corrosion resistance, martensite stainless
steel LM shafts are also available.
(4) When asking an estimate or placing an
order, refer to the model number coding
shown on the left.
φd
L
Shaft Supported
Overall LM shaft length: L mm
Model No. diameter model
d g6μ m 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 1000 1200 1300 1500 2000 3000 numbers
Tolerance
–2
SF 3 3 –8 ◎ ◎ LM 3
SF 4 4 ◎ ◎ LM 4
–4
SF 5 5 ◎ ◎ ◎ LM 5
– 12
SF 6 6 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ LM 6
SF 8 8 –5 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ LM 8, 8S
SF 10 10 – 14 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ LM 10
SF 12 12 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ LM 12
–6
SF 13 13 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ LM 13
– 17
SF 16 16 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ LM 16
SF 20 20 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ LM 20
–7
SF 25 25 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ LM 25
– 20
SF 30 30 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ LM 30
SF 35 35 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ LM 35
SF 38 38 –9 { { { { LM 38
SF 40 40 – 25 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ { LM 40
SF 50 50 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ { LM 50
SF 60 60 – 10 { { { { LM 60
SF 80 80 – 29 { { { { LM 80
– 12
SF 100 100 – 34 { { { { LM 100
Note) ◎ indicates standard stock; { indicates semi-standard stock.
B-460
Options Linear Bushing (Option)
Felt Seal Model FLM

Linear Bushing model LM series include types equipped with a special synthetic rubber seal (LM …
UU, U). If there is a need for additional contamination protection, or a need to lower the seal resis-
tance, use the felt seal model FLM. (See Table1.)
[Dimensions of the Felt Seal]
Table1 Major Dimensions of FLM
Unit: mm
B Supported Main dimensions Supoprted
model linear bushing
numbers d D B H model
FLM 6 6 12 2 2 LM 6
Linear Bushing (Option)

φd FLM 8 8 15 2 2 LM 8
φD
FLM 10 10 19 3 3 LM 10
FLM 12 12 21 3 3 LM 12
FLM 13 13 23 3 3 LM 13
H FLM 16 16 28 4 5 LM 16
FLM 20 20 32 4 5 LM 20
FLM 25 25 40 5 6 LM 25
FLM 30 30 45 5 5 LM 30
FLM 35 35 52 5 6 LM 35
FLM 38 38 57 5 6 LM 38
FLM 40 40 60 5 6 LM 40
FLM 50 50 80 10 11 LM 50
FLM 60 60 90 10 11 LM 60
FLM 80 80 120 10 11 LM 80
FLM 100 100 150 10 11 LM 100
B-461
B-462
LM Stroke
General Catalog

(Separate)
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table LM Stroke Models ST, ST-B, STI ......... A-554
LM Stroke Models ST, ST-B and STI Structure and features....................... A-554
• Models ST and ST-B ........................ B-464 Types and Features .......................... A-555
• Models ST…UU and ST…UUB B-468 Rated Load and Nominal Life............ A-556
Miniature Stroke Model MST Fit ...................................................... A-559
• Model MST ...................................... B-472 ST shaft............................................. A-559
Installation of the ST Shaft ................ A-559
Die-setting Ball Cage Models KS and BS
• Models KS / BS ................................ B-474 Miniature Stroke Model MST .......... A-560
Fit ...................................................... A-561
Travel Distance of the Ball Cage....... A-561
Die-setting Ball Cage Models KS and BS ... A-562

Rated Load and Service Life............. A-562
Fit ...................................................... A-563
Installation of the Ball Cage .............. A-563

the Products".
B-463
Models ST / ST-B
L
L1 φ d0
L2 L2
r
φD φ dr
r
Model ST
(For light load)
Inscribed bore diameter Outer diameter

Model No. Maximum stroke
dr Tolerance D Tolerance
+0.018
ST 6 14 6 12
+0.010 0
ST 8 24 – 0.008
8 15
ST 8B 8 +0.022
ST 10 30 +0.013
10 19
ST 10B 8
ST 12 32 0
12 23
ST 12B 8 +0.027 – 0.009
ST 16 40 +0.016
16 28
ST 16B 16
ST 20 54
20 32
ST 20B 28
ST 25 54 +0.033 0
25 37
ST 25B 28 +0.020 – 0.011
ST 30 82
30 45
ST 30B 44
ST 35 92 +0.041 0
35 52
ST 35B 54 +0.025 – 0.013
B-464
L
L1 φ d0
L2 L2
r
φD φ dr
r
Model ST-B
LM Stroke
(For medium load)
Unit: mm
Basic
Basic static
dynamic Mass
Length load rating
load rating
C C0
L Tolerance L1 L2 t d0 r g
kN kN
19 13.5 1.1 0.25 — 0.3 0.98 0.23 8
0.98 0.27 16.4

24 20.1 1.5 0.5 1.5 0.5
2.06 0.55 17.6
2.35 0.62 31.5
30 25.7 1.5 0.5 1.5 0.5
4.61 1.27 34.5
0
– 0.2 4.02 1.08 47
32 27.5 1.5 0.5 1.5 0.5
8.14 2.25 53.5
4.02 1.27 77
37 32.1 1.5 0.5 1.5 0.5
8.04 2.65 85
4.12 1.57 109
45 39.8 2 0.5 2 0.5
8.33 3.24 120
4.12 1.76 128
45 39.8 2 0.5 2 1
8.14 3.63 142
0 9.31 4.12 240
65 58.5 2.5 0.5 2.5 1
– 0.3 18.7 8.14 275
9.41 4.51 370
70 63.5 2.5 0.7 2.5 1.5
18.7 9.02 410
B-465
Models ST / ST-B
L
L1 φ d0
L2 L2
r
φD φ dr
r
Model ST
(For light load)

ST 40 108
40 60
ST 40B 66
ST 45 108 +0.041
45 65
ST 45B 66 +0.025 0
ST 50 138 – 0.013
50 72
ST 50B 88
ST 55 138
55 80
ST 55B 88
ST 60 138
60 85
ST 60B 88 +0.049
ST 70 138 +0.030
70 95
ST 70B 88 0
ST 80 132 – 0.015
80 110
ST 80B 76
ST 90 132
90 120
ST 90B 76 +0.058
ST 100 132 +0.036 0
100 130
ST 100B 76 – 0.018
B-466
L
L1 φ d0
L2 L2
r
φD φ dr
r
Model ST-B
LM Stroke
(For medium load)
Unit: mm
Basic
Basic static
dynamic Mass
Length load rating
load rating
C C0
kN kN
12.5 6.18 570
80 73.3 2.5 0.7 2.5 1.5
25 12.4 635
12.6 6.76 625
80 73.3 2.5 0.7 2.5 1.5
25.2 13.5 695
0 16.3 8.82 910
100 92.4 3 1 3 1.5
– 0.3 32.5 17.7 1020
16.6 9.71 1270
100 92.4 3 1 3 2
33 19.3 1380
16.8 10.5 1360
100 92.4 3 1 3 2
33.6 21 1480
16.9 11.7 1530
100 92.4 3 1 3 2
33.8 23.3 1670
21.3 15.3 2220
100 92 3 1.5 3 2
0 42.5 30.6 2430
– 0.4 21.7 16.9 2440
100 92 3 1.5 3 2
43.3 33.7 2670
22 18.3 2670
100 92 3 1.5 3 2
43.9 36.8 2910
B-467
Models ST…UU/ST…UUB
L
L1 φ d0
L2 L2
r
φD φ dr
r
Model ST…UU
(For light load)

0
ST 8UU 14 8 +0.022 15
– 0.008
+0.013
ST 10UU 16 10 19
0
ST 12UU 17 12 +0.027 23
– 0.009
ST 16UU 24 16 +0.016 28
ST 20UU 32
20 32
ST 20UUB 12
ST 25UU 32 +0.033 0
25 37
ST 25UUB 12 +0.020 – 0.011
ST 30UU 65
30 45
ST 30UUB 27
ST 35UU 75
35 52
ST 35UUB 37
ST 40UU 91 +0.041 0
40 60
ST 40UUB 49 +0.025 – 0.013
ST 45UU 91
45 65
ST 45UUB 49
B-468
L
L1 φ d0
L2 L2
r
φD φ dr
r
Model ST…UUB
LM Stroke
(For medium load)
Unit: mm
Basic
Basic static
dynamic Mass
Length load rating
load rating
C C0
kN kN
24 15.3 1.5 0.5 1.5 0.5 0.98 0.27 17
30 18.5 1.5 0.5 1.5 0.5 2.35 0.62 31

0
32 20.1 1.5 0.5 1.5 0.5 4.02 1.08 49
– 0.2
37 24.1 1.5 0.5 1.5 0.5 4.02 1.27 80
4.12 1.57 112
45 30.8 2 0.5 2 0.5
8.33 3.24 125
4.12 1.76 132
45 30.8 2 0.5 2 1
8.14 3.63 145
9.31 4.12 245
65 50.1 2.5 0.5 2.5 1
18.7 8.14 280
0 9.41 4.51 375
70 55.1 2.5 0.7 2.5 1.5
– 0.3 18.7 9.02 420
12.5 6.18 580
80 64.9 2.5 0.7 2.5 1.5
25 12.4 640
12.6 6.76 635
80 64.9 2.5 0.7 2.5 1.5
25.2 13.5 705
B-469
Models ST…UU/ST…UUB
L
L1 φ d0
L2 L2
r
φD φ dr
r
Model ST…UU
(For light load)

ST 50UU 120 +0.041

50 72
ST 50UUB 70 +0.025 0
ST 55UU 120 – 0.013
55 80
ST 55UUB 70
ST 60UU 120
60 85
ST 60UUB 70 +0.049
ST 70UU 120 +0.030
70 95
ST 70UUB 70 0
ST 80UU 114 – 0.015
80 110
ST 80UUB 58
ST 90UU 114
90 120
ST 90UUB 58 +0.058
ST 100UU 114 +0.036 0
100 130
ST 100UUB 58 – 0.018
B-470
L
L1 φ d0
L2 L2
r
φD φ dr
r
Model ST…UUB
LM Stroke
(For medium load)
Unit: mm
Basic
Basic static
dynamic Mass
Length load rating
load rating
C C0
kN kN
16.3 8.82 920
100 83.4 3 1 3 1.5
32.5 17.7 1030
0 16.6 9.71 1280
100 83.4 3 1 3 2
– 0.3 33 19.3 1400
16.8 10.5 1370
100 83.4 3 1 3 2
33.6 21 1490
16.9 11.7 1540
100 83.4 3 1 3 2
33.8 23.3 1680
21.3 15.3 2240
100 83 3 1.5 3 2
0 42.5 30.6 2450
– 0.4 21.7 16.9 2470
100 83 3 1.5 3 2
43.3 33.7 2700
22 18.3 2700
100 83 3 1.5 3 2
43.9 36.8 2940
B-471
Model MST
Lm
φ Da
φ D φ dS φ dt
L
Lt
Ball cage Nut

Combined Permissible
Mass
model No. Lm load
Model No. Da Model No. D
(A) C0
g
N
M3510 10 68.6 0.7 S5710
MST 3-A•B•C M3515 1 15 98 1.1 S5720 7 –0
0.006
M3520 20 137 1.4 S5730
M4610 10 78.4 0.9 S6810
MST 4-A•B•C M4615 1 15 118 1.4 S6820 8 –0
0.006
M4620 20 157 1.9 S6830
M5710 10 98 1.1 S71010
MST 5-A•B•C M5715 1 15 137 1.7 S71020 10 – 0
0.006
M5720 20 186 2.3 S71030
M6810 10 108 1.2 S81120
MST 6-A•B•C M6815 1 15 157 2.0 S81130 11 – 0
0.011
M6820 20 216 2.6 S81140
Note) If the radial clearance needs to be zero or below, add symbol "C1" at the end of the model number.
(Example) MST5-203080 C1
Combined radial clearance
Symbol for zero or below
Combination of models M5720, S71030 and T580.
Model number coding
MST 4-10 20 60 M
ST shaft outer Nut length Using stainless steel
diameter dimension (mm) (B)
(mm)
Ball cage length ST shaft length
(mm) (A) (mm) (C)
Combined model number

(ball cage): M4610 (nut): S6820 (ST shaft): T460 Combination of these components
Note) The model numbers of ball cage, nut and ST shaft are indicated in the corresponding specification table.
B-472
Unit: mm
Nut ST shaft
Combined radial
Mass Mass clearance
L Lt
dS Model No. dt
(B) (C)
g g μm
LM Stroke
10 1.4
T350 50 2.8
5 ± 0.002 20 2.9 3 –0
0.003 – 2 to +5
T360 60 3.3
30 4.5
10 1.7
T450 50 4.5
6 ± 0.002 20 3.6 4 –0
0.003 – 2 to +5
T460 60 5.6
30 5.0
10 2.9
T550 50 7.1
7 ± 0.002 20 6.3 5 –0
0.003 – 2 to +5
T580 80 12.6
30 10.0
20 7.1
T650 50 10.0
8 ± 0.002 30 10.0 6 –0
0.003 – 2 to +5
T680 80 16.6
40 12.6
B-473
Models KS / BS
Lm
φ Da
φ dS φ dt
Unit: mm
Main dimensions Radial Basic load rating Mass

Combined clearance
Da tolerance C C0
model No. dt dS Lm
(inch) μm kN kN g
KS 1955 19 3 25 55 –7 10.3 3.82 31.7
BS 1955 19 3.175 (1/8) 25.35 55 –7 11.7 4.22 33.2
KS 2260 22 3 28 60 –7 10.7 4.22 37.6
BS 2260 22 3.175 (1/8) 28.35 60 –7 12.2 4.71 39.1
KS 2565 25 3 31 65 –7 11.7 5 45.4
BS 2565 25 3.175 (1/8) 31.35 65 –7 13.2 5.59 47.1
KS 2870 28 4 36 70 –9 18 7.65 80.4
BS 2870 28 3.969 (5/32) 35.938 70 –9 17.7 7.55 80.0
KS 3275 32 4 40 75 –9 19.7 9.12 96.5
BS 3275 32 3.969 (5/32) 39.938 75 –9 19.3 8.92 96.0
KS 3880 38 5 48 80 – 10 25 12 156
BS 3880 38 4.762 (3/16) 47.525 80 – 10 22.5 10.9 150
Note) The outer surface of model BS has a groove to help distinguish it from KS.
Shafts for models KS and BS are also manufactured. Contact THK for details.
B-474
General Catalog

(Separate)
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table Features ........................................... A-566
Model ER .......................................... B-476 Features of the Precision Linear Pack . A-566
• Structure and features ...................... A-566

the Products".
B-475
Model ER
M L
K H C H φD
R
W
T
G 2-S×l (Maximum tap depth) F G

T1 E L0
Inner block dimensions

Maximum
Model No. Width Height Length
tap depth
M
W
± 0.05
L C H E R S l T
ER 513 13 4.5 22 7 7.5 1.1 4.2 M2 1.3 0.9

ER 616 15.6 6 36 29 3.5 1.7 9.2 M3 1.8 1.1
ER 920 20 8.5 46 40 3 2.3 7.3 M3 2.5 1.9
ER 1025 25 10 56 48 4 2.9 9.3 M4 2.8 2.2
Model number coding
2 ER616 C1 +95L
Model number Outer rail length (in mm)
Number of inner blocks used on the same rail
(*1) See A-569.
B-476
Unit: mm
Outer rail dimensions Basic load rating Mass
C C0 Inner block Outer rail
K T1 D L0 F G N N g g/m
4 1.1 2.4 40, 60, 80 20 10 54.9 72.5 2.4 166

5.5 1.4 2.9 45, 70, 95 25 10 71.6 125 5.6 268
7.5 1.9 3.5 50, 80, 110 30 10 144 201 14.4 474
9 2.2 4.5 60, 100, 140 40 10 215 315 27 677
Note) To fix the outer rail of models ER513 and ER616, use cross-recessed screws for precision equipment (No. 0 screw).
Nominal name of
Model No. Type
screw × pitch
ER 513 No. 0 pan-head M2×0.4
screw
ER 616 (class 1) M2.6×0.45
Japan Camera Industry Association Standard JCIS 10-70
B-477
B-478
General Catalog

(Separate)
Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR1).... B-480 Features of the Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide A-572
Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR2).... B-482 • Structure and features ...................... A-572
Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR3).... B-484 Types of the Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide ... A-574
Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR4).... B-486 • Types and Features .......................... A-574
Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR6).... B-488
Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR9).... B-490 Point of Selection............................ A-575
Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR12).. B-492 Rated Load and Nominal Life............ A-575
Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR15).. B-494 Accuracy Standards .......................... A-578
Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR18).. B-496
Ball Cage Model B ............................ B-498 Point of Design................................ A-579
Installation procedure........................ A-579
Options............................................. B-499 Example of Clearance Adjustment.... A-580
Dedicated Mounting Bolt ................... B-499 Preload.............................................. A-580
Options............................................. A-581
Dedicated Mounting Bolt ................... A-581

the Products".
B-479
Cross Roller Guide Model VR (VR1)
B
M
φd φD
C
S h
F
G n×F G
T L0 T
Main
Maximum
Model No. Combined dimensions Mounting
stroke
M A L0 n×F G B C S d
VR 1-20×5Z 12 20 1×10
VR 1-30×7Z 22 30 2×10
VR 1-40×10Z 27 40 3×10
VR 1-50×13Z 32 8.5 4 50 4×10 5 3.9 1.8 M2 1.65
VR 1-60×16Z 37 60 5×10
VR 1-70×19Z 42 70 6×10
VR 1-80×21Z 52 80 7×10
Model number coding
VR1 -30 H × 8Z
Number of rollers or balls
Accuracy symbol
Dedicated rail dimension in mm
(example of indication for a combination of different overall lengths: 40/50)
Combined model number (for Ball Guide: VB)
Note) "One set" in the model No. above indicates a combination of four rails and two cages.
B-480
Z (quantity)
φ Da
g P
R
Unit: mm
Permissible Basic load rating Mass
dimensions preload (per roller) (rail)
No. of
dimensions δ CZ C0Z
rollers
D h T Da R g P Z μm kN kN kg/m
14 5

19 7
26.5 10
3 1.4 1.6 1.5 34 2 2.5 13 –2 0.098 0.069 0.11
41.5 16
49 19
54 21
Note) When desiring a Ball Guide in combination with a ball cage, refer to Ball Cage Model B on B-498 and indicate the
required number of balls.
(Example) VB1-50H x 12Z
Number of balls
The mass in the table indicates the value per rail/m.
Stainless steel type with high corrosion resistance is also available. (symbol M, e.g., VR1M)
To fix the dedicated rail of model VR1, use cross-recessed screws for precision equipment (No. 0 screw).
Model No. Type Nominal name of screw × pitch

No. 0 pan-head screw
For model VR1 M1.4×0.3
(class 3)
Japan Camera Industry Association Standard JCIS 10-70

B
M
φd φD
C
S h
F
G n×F G
T L0 T
Main
Maximum
stroke
VR 2- 30×5Z 18 30 1×15
VR 2- 45×8Z 24 45 2×15
VR 2- 60×11Z 30 60 3×15
VR 2- 75×13Z 44 75 4×15
VR 2- 90×16Z 50 90 5×15
VR 2-105×18Z 64 12 6 105 6×15 7.5 5.6 2.5 M3 2.55
VR 2-120×21Z 70 120 7×15
VR 2-135×23Z 84 135 8×15
VR 2-150×26Z 90 150 9×15
VR 2-165×29Z 96 165 10×15
VR 2-180×32Z 102 180 11×15
Model number coding
VR2 -30 H × 6Z
Accuracy symbol
B-482
Z (quantity)
φ Da
g P
R
Unit: mm
No. of
rollers
21 5

33 8
45 11
53 13
65 16
4.4 2 1.5 2 73 2.5 4 18 –3 0.176 0.127 0.23
85 21
93 23
105 26
117 29
129 32
Number of balls
To fix the dedicated rail of model VR2, use cross-recessed screws for precision equipment (No. 0 screw).
Model No. Type Nominal name of screw × pitch

For model VR2 Pan Head Screw M2×0.4
Cross-recessed screw JIS B 1111 (pan head screw)

B
M
φd φD
C
S h
F
G n×F G
T L0 T
Main
Maximum
stroke
VR 3- 50×7Z 28 50 1×25
VR 3- 75×10Z 48 75 2×25
VR 3-100×14Z 58 100 3×25
VR 3-125×17Z 78 125 4×25
VR 3-150×21Z 88 150 5×25
VR 3-175×24Z 108 18 8 175 6×25 12.5 8.3 3.5 M4 3.3
VR 3-200×28Z 118 200 7×25
VR 3-225×31Z 138 225 8×25
VR 3-250×35Z 148 250 9×25
VR 3-275×38Z 168 275 10×25
VR 3-300×42Z 178 300 11×25
Model number coding
VR3 -75 H × 9Z
Accuracy symbol
B-484
Z (quantity)
φ Da
g P
R
Unit: mm
No. of
rollers
36 7

51 10
71 14
86 17
106 21
6 3.1 2 3 121 3 5 24 –4 0.363 0.275 0.45
141 28
156 31
176 35
191 38
211 42
Number of balls

B
M
φd φD
C
S h
F
G n×F G
T L0 T
Main
Maximum
stroke
VR 4- 80×7Z 58 80 1×40
VR 4-120×11Z 82 120 2×40
VR 4-160×15Z 106 160 3×40
VR 4-200×19Z 130 200 4×40
VR 4-240×23Z 154 240 5×40
VR 4-280×27Z 178 22 11 280 6×40 20 10.2 4.5 M5 4.3
VR 4-320×31Z 202 320 7×40
VR 4-360×35Z 226 360 8×40
VR 4-400×39Z 250 400 9×40
VR 4-440×43Z 274 400 10×40
VR 4-480×47Z 298 480 11×40
Model number coding
VR4 -80 P × 9Z
Accuracy symbol
B-486
Z (quantity)
φ Da
g P
R
Unit: mm
No. of
rollers
51 7

79 11
107 15
135 19
163 23
8 4.2 2 4 191 4.5 7 27 –5 0.764 0.637 0.8
219 31
247 35
275 39
303 43
331 47
Number of balls

B
M
φd φD
C
S h
F
G n×F G
T L0 T
Main
Maximum
stroke
VR 6-100×7Z 56 100 1×50
VR 6-150×10Z 96 150 2×50
VR 6-200×13Z 136 200 3×50
VR 6-250×17Z 156 250 4×50
VR 6-300×20Z 196 300 5×50
VR 6-350×24Z 216 30 15 350 6×50 25 14.4 6 M6 5.2
VR 6-400×27Z 256 400 7×50
VR 6-450×31Z 276 450 8×50
VR 6-500×34Z 316 500 9×50
VR 6-550×38Z 336 550 10×50
VR 6-600×41Z 376 600 11×50
Model number coding
VR6 -100 P × 6Z
Accuracy symbol
B-488
Z (quantity)
φ Da
g P
R
Unit: mm
No. of
rollers
72 7

102 10
132 13
172 17
202 20
9.5 5.2 3.2 6 242 6 10 24 –7 1.91 1.76 1.5
272 27
312 31
342 34
382 38
412 41
(Example) VB6-300H x18Z
Number of balls

B
M
φd φD
C
S h
F
G n×F G
T L0 T
Main
Maximum
stroke
VR 9- 200×10Z 118 200 1×100
VR 9- 300×15Z 178 300 2×100
VR 9- 400×20Z 238 400 3×100
VR 9- 500×25Z 298 500 4×100
VR 9- 600×30Z 358 600 5×100
40
VR 9- 700×35Z 418 20 700 6×100 50 19.2 8 M8 6.8
(40.74)
VR 9- 800×40Z 478 800 7×100
VR 9- 900×45Z 538 900 8×100
VR 9-1000×50Z 598 1000 9×100
VR 9-1100×55Z 658 1100 10×100
VR 9-1200×60Z 718 1200 11×100
Model number coding
VR9 -600 H × 30Z

Accuracy symbol
B-490
Z (quantity)
φ Da
g P
R
Unit: mm
No. of
rollers
141 10

211 15
281 20
351 25
421 30
9
10.5 6.2 4 491 7.5 14 35 – 10 4.31 4.36 3.2
(9.525)
561 40
631 45
701 50
771 55
841 60
Note) The dimensions in the parentheses above indicate the dimensions of the Ball Guide.
When desiring a Ball Guide in combination with a ball cage, refer to Ball Cage Model B on B-498 and indicate the
Number of balls

B
M
φd φD
C
S h
F
G n×F G
T L0 T
Main
Maximum
stroke
VR12- 200× 7Z 110 200 1×100
VR12- 300×10Z 190 300 2×100
VR12- 400×14Z 230 400 3×100
VR12- 500×17Z 310 500 4×100
VR12- 600×21Z 350 600 5×100
58
VR12- 700×24Z 430 28 700 6×100 50 28 12 M10 8.5
(57.86)
VR12- 800×28Z 470 800 7×100
VR12- 900×31Z 550 900 8×100
VR12-1000×34Z 630 1000 9×100
VR12-1100×38Z 670 1100 10×100
VR12-1200×41Z 750 1200 11×100
Model number coding
VR12 -200 P × 9Z
Accuracy symbol
B-492
Z (quantity)
φ Da
g P
R
Unit: mm
No. of
rollers
145 7

205 10
285 14
345 17
425 21
12
14 8.2 5 485 12.5 20 24 – 13 7.25 7.65 5.3
(11.906)
565 28
625 31
685 34
765 38
825 41
Number of balls

B
M
φd φD
C
S h
F
G n×F G
T L0 T
Main
Maximum
stroke
VR15- 300× 8Z 190 300 2×100
VR15- 400×11Z 240 400 3×100
VR15- 500×13Z 340 500 4×100
VR15- 600×16Z 390 600 5×100
VR15- 700×19Z 440 71 700 6×100
36 50 34.4 14 M12 10.5
VR15- 800×22Z 490 (71.11) 800 7×100
VR15- 900×25Z 540 900 8×100
VR15-1000×27Z 640 1000 9×100
VR15-1100×30Z 690 1100 10×100
VR15-1200×33Z 740 1200 11×100
Model number coding
VR15 -300 H × 10Z

Accuracy symbol
B-494
Z (quantity)
φ Da
g P
R
Unit: mm
No. of
rollers
205 8

280 11
330 13
405 16
15 480 19
17.5 10.2 6 15 25 – 16 11.3 12.4 8.3
(15.081) 555 22
630 25
680 27
755 30
830 33
Number of balls

B
M
φd φD
C
S h
F
G n×F G
T L0 T
Main
Maximum
stroke
VR18- 300× 6Z 228 300 2×100
VR18- 400× 9Z 248 400 3×100
VR18- 500×11Z 328 500 4×100
VR18- 600×13Z 408 600 5×100
VR18- 700×16Z 428 700 6×100
83 40 50 40.2 18 M14 12.5
VR18- 800×18Z 508 800 7×100
VR18- 900×20Z 588 900 8×100
VR18-1000×23Z 608 1000 9×100
VR18-1100×25Z 688 1100 10×100
VR18-1200×27Z 768 1200 11×100
Model number coding
VR18 -400 H × 10Z

Accuracy symbol
B-496
Z (quantity)
φ Da
g P
R
Unit: mm
No. of
rollers
186 6

276 9
336 11
396 13
486 16
20 12.2 6 18 18 30 – 18 15.9 17.8 10.5
546 18
606 20
696 23
756 25
816 27
Note) The mass in the table indicates the value per rail/m.

Ball Cage Model B
g P
t
B
φ Da
Unit: mm
Basic load rating

Main dimensions
(per ball)
Combined
Model No.
CZ C0Z rail
Da t B P g N N
B1 1.5 0.2 3.5 2.5 2 7.84 21.6 V1
B2 2 0.3 5 4 3 12.7 39.2 V2
B3 3 0.4 7 6 4.5 27.5 87.3 V3
B4 4 0.5 9 7 4.5 45.1 155 V4
B6 6 0.6 13.5 10 6 98 353 V6
B9 9.525 1 19 14 8.5 216 784 V9
B 12 11.906 1 25 20 12.5 324 1420 V12
B 15 15.081 1.2 31 25 15 490 2160 V15
B-498
Options Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide (Options)

To mount the rail where normal clearance is to
be adjusted, use the screw hole drilled on the D1
rail as shown in Fig.1. The holes of the bolt (d1
and D1) must be machined so that they are
d1
greater by the adjustment allowance.
Fig.1
If it is inevitable to adopt a mounting method like

the one shown in Fig.2 for a structural reason,
use the dedicated mounting bolt (S) indicated in
Fig.3.
Cross Roller Guide/Ball Guide (Options)

Dedicated mounting bolt (S)
Fig.2
Table1 Dedicated Mounting Bolt

Unit: mm
Supported
Model No. S d D H L B rail
S3 M3 2.3 5 3 12 2.5 V3
S4 M4 3.1 5.8 4 15 3 V4
S6 M5 3.9 8 5 20 4 V6 C D d S
S9 M6 4.6 8.5 6 30 5 V9
S 12 M8 6.25 11.3 8 40 6 V12 B H L
S 15 M10 7.9 13.9 10 45 8 V15
S 18 M12 9.6 15.8 12 50 10 V18
Fig.3 Dedicated Mounting Bolt
B-499
B-500
Cross Roller Table
General Catalog

(Separate)
Model VRT Miniature Type (Tapped Base Type)..... B-502 Features of the Cross Roller Table ... A-586
Model VRT-A Miniature Type (Tapped Base Type) .. B-504 • Structure and features ...................... A-586
Model VRU........................................ B-506

the Products".
B-501
Model VRT Miniature Type (Tapped Base Type)
G n×F G A
F H
m
φ D1
B B1 W S1 W1
F1 T1 f1
G1 n1×F1 G1 T g1 n×f1 g1
L M L
Main dimensions Table surface dimensions
Model No. Maximum Width Height Length Mass Table mounting tap position
stroke W M L g
± 0.1 ± 0.1 B n×F G S n1×F1 B1 D1 G1
VRT 1025 12 25 23 1×18 3.5 1×10
VRT 1035 18 35 32 1×28 3.5 2×10
VRT 1045 25 45 42 1×20 12.5 3×10
VRT 1055 32 20 8 55 52 14 1×30 12.5 M2.6 4×10 12.4 4.1 7.5
VRT 1065 40 65 62 2×20 12.5 5×10
VRT 1075 45 75 72 1×30 22.5 6×10
VRT 1085 50 85 82 2×30 12.5 7×10
VRT 2035 18 35 78 1×28 3.5 1×15
VRT 2050 30 50 113 1×43 3.5 2×15
VRT 2065 40 65 147 1×30 17.5 3×15
VRT 2080 50 30 12 80 184 22 1×45 17.5 M3 4×15 20 6 10
VRT 2095 60 95 220 2×30 17.5 5×15
VRT 2110 70 110 257 1×45 32.5 6×15
VRT 2125 80 125 290 2×45 17.5 7×15
VRT 3055 30 55 229 1×40 7.5 1×25
VRT 3080 45 80 336 1×65 7.5 2×25
VRT 3105 60 105 442 1×50 27.5 3×25
VRT 3130 75 40 16 130 551 30 1×75 27.5 M4 4×25 28.4 7.5 15
VRT 3155 90 155 657 2×50 27.5 5×25
VRT 3180 105 180 766 1×75 52.5 6×25
VRT 3205 130 205 871 2×75 27.5 7×25
Note) All stainless steel type with high corrosion resistance is also available.
(Example) VRT 2035 M
Symbol for stainless steel type
B-502
MA MB MC
Maximum stroke
Accuracy: ΔC Accuracy: ΔD
Unit: mm
Base surface dimensions Basic load Static permissible Accuracy
Side surface dimensions
Mounting hole position rating moment μm
No. of
rollers C C0 MA MB MC
Cross Roller Table

T T1 H W1 A m S1 n×f1 g1 Z kN kN N-m N-m N-m ΔC ΔD
2×7.5 5 5 0.28 0.27 0.75 0.46 0.69
4
2×10 7 0.38 0.41 1.23 0.85 1.03
3×10 10 0.56 0.69 2.18 1.67 1.72
7.5 3.5 4 6.7 5.5 M2.6 4×10 12 0.65 0.82 2.97 2.35 2.06
5×10 7.5 14 0.73 0.96 3.87 3.17 2.4 5
6×10 18 0.87 1.27 6.05 5.16 3.19
7×10 20 0.94 1.37 7.32 6.37 3.43
1×20 5 0.51 0.51 2.29 1.37 2.21
2 4
2×15 7 0.69 0.76 3.76 2.65 3.32
3×15 9 0.85 0.98 5.62 4.22 4.25
11.5 5.5 6 12.2 8.5 M2 M3 4×15 12 0.98 1.27 9.1 7.26 5.52
5×15 10 14 1.18 1.57 11.8 9.71 6.8
6×15 17 1.47 2.06 16.7 14.1 8.93 5
7×15 19 1.57 2.25 20.4 17.5 9.77
1×35 6 1.27 1.37 9.85 6.57 7.97
2×35 10 2.16 2.84 22.2 17 16.5
3×25 13 2.94 4.22 34.8 28.1 24.4
15.5 7.5 8 16 11.5 M4 4×25 17 3.63 5.69 55.8 47.1 33.3
15
5×25 20 3.92 6.37 74.7 64.6 36.9 3 6
6×25 24 4.02 6.57 104 92.3 38.1
7×25 26 4.22 7.16 120 107 41.5
B-503
Model VRT-A Miniature Type (Tapped Base Type)
G n×F G A
F H
h
m
φ D1 φd
B B1 W φ D W1
S
F1 T1 l1
G1 n1×F1 G1 T g1 l2 g1
L M L
Model No. Maximum Width Height Length Mass Table mounting tap position
stroke W M L g
± 0.1 ± 0.1 B n×F G S n1×F1 B1 D1 G1
VRT 1025A 12 25 23 1×18 3.5 1×10
VRT 1035A 18 35 32 1×28 3.5 2×10
VRT 1045A 25 45 42 1×20 12.5 3×10
VRT 1055A 32 20 8 55 52 14 1×30 12.5 M2.6 4×10 12.4 4.1 7.5
VRT 1065A 40 65 62 2×20 12.5 5×10
VRT 1075A 45 75 72 1×30 22.5 6×10
VRT 1085A 50 85 82 2×30 12.5 7×10
VRT 2035A 18 35 78 1×28 3.5 1×15
VRT 2050A 30 50 113 1×43 3.5 2×15
VRT 2065A 40 65 147 1×30 17.5 3×15
VRT 2080A 50 30 12 80 181 22 1×45 17.5 M3 4×15 20 6 10
VRT 2095A 60 95 217 2×30 17.5 5×15
VRT 2110A 70 110 254 1×45 32.5 6×15
VRT 2125A 80 125 287 2×45 17.5 7×15
VRT 3055A 30 55 226 1×40 7.5 1×25
VRT 3080A 45 80 333 1×65 7.5 2×25
VRT 3105A 60 105 439 1×50 27.5 3×25
VRT 3130A 75 40 16 130 548 30 1×75 27.5 M4 4×25 28.4 7.5 15
VRT 3155A 90 155 652 2×50 27.5 5×25
VRT 3180A 105 180 761 1×75 52.5 6×25
VRT 3205A 130 205 866 2×75 27.5 7×25
Note) All stainless steel type with high corrosion resistance is also available.
(Example) VRT 2035A M
B-504
MA MB MC
Maximum stroke
Accuracy: ΔC Accuracy: Δ D
Unit: mm
Side surface dimensions
No. of
C C0 MA MB MC
rollers
Cross Roller Table

T T1 H W1 A m d×D×h l 1 l 2 g1 Z kN kN N-m N-m N-m ΔC ΔD
— 18 3.5 5 0.28 0.27 0.75 0.46 0.69
4
— 25 5 7 0.38 0.41 1.23 0.85 1.03
25 38 3.5 10 0.56 0.69 2.18 1.67 1.72
7.5 3.5 4 6.7 5.5 2.5×4.1×2.2 29 48 3.5 12 0.65 0.82 2.97 2.35 2.06
31 55 5 14 0.73 0.96 3.87 3.17 2.4 5
35 65 5 18 0.87 1.27 6.05 5.16 3.19
40 75 5 20 0.94 1.37 7.32 6.37 3.43
— 25 5 5 0.51 0.51 2.29 1.37 2.21
2 4
— 35 7.5 7 0.69 0.76 3.76 2.65 3.32
33 55 5 9 0.85 0.98 5.62 4.22 4.25
11.5 5.5 6 12.2 8.5 M2 3.5×6×3.2 40 70 5 12 0.98 1.27 9.1 7.26 5.52
45 85 5 14 1.18 1.57 11.8 9.71 6.8
50 95 7.5 17 1.47 2.06 16.7 14.1 8.93 5
55 110 7.5 19 1.57 2.25 20.4 17.5 9.77
— 40 7.5 6 1.27 1.37 9.85 6.57 7.97
43 68 6 10 2.16 2.84 22.2 17 16.5
55 90 13 2.94 4.22 34.8 28.1 24.4
15.5 7.5 8 16 11.5 4.5×7.5×4.2 65 115 17 3.63 5.69 55.8 47.1 33.3
95 140 7.5 20 3.92 6.37 74.7 64.6 36.9 3 6
85 165 24 4.02 6.57 104.3 92.3 38.1
90 190 26 4.22 7.16 120.8 107.9 41.5
B-505
Model VRU
G1 n1×F1 G1 A h
G2 G2 m2
φd
φD
K φ D1
B1 B W b 1 m1 B2
m1
S t1 f2
G n×F G T H g f1 g
L M
2×2-S1×l
Model No. Width Height Length Mass Table mounting tap

Maximum
(Note)
Side surface mounting tap position
W position
-0.2 M L kg
stroke
-0.4 ± 0.1 B n×F G S B1 n1×F1 G1 G2 b1 t1 S1×l
VRU 1025 12 25 0.08(0.04) — 1×10 2.5

VRU 1035 18 35 0.11(0.05) 1×10 2×10 4.5
VRU 1045 25 45 0.15(0.07) 2×10 3×10 6
VRU 1055 32 30 17 55 0.18(0.09) 10 3×10 12.5 M2 18.4 4×10 7.5 7.5 12 2.5
VRU 1065 40 65 0.21(0.1) 4×10 5×10 8.5
VRU 1075 45 75 0.24(0.12) 5×10 6×10 11
VRU 1085 50 85 0.27(0.13) 6×10 7×10 13.5
M2×4
VRU 2035 18 35 0.2(0.09) — 1×15 3
VRU 2050 30 50 0.26(0.13) 1×15 2×15 4.5
VRU 2065 40 65 0.34(0.17) 2×15 3×15 7
VRU 2080 50 40 21 80 0.42(0.21) 15 3×15 17.5 M3 25 4×15 10 9.5 16 3.4
VRU 2095 60 95 0.5(0.25) 4×15 5×15 12
VRU 2110 70 110 0.58(0.29) 5×15 6×15 14.5
VRU 2125 80 125 0.66(0.33) 6×15 7×15 17
Note) Stainless steel type with high corrosion resistance is also available.
The value in the parentheses represents the mass of a stainless steel type.
(Example) VRU 2035 M
(table base: aluminum)
B-506
MA MB MC
Maximum stroke
Accuracy: Δ C Accuracy: ΔD
Unit: mm
No. of
C C0 MA MB MC
rollers
Cross Roller Table

T H K d×D×h D1 m1 A m2 B2 f1 f2 g Z kN kN N-m N-m N-m ΔC ΔD
18 — 5 0.28 0.27 0.75 0.46 1.24

28 — 7 0.38 0.41 1.23 0.85 1.85 4
38 — 10 0.56 0.69 2.18 1.67 3.09
11 5.5 6.5 2.55×4.1×2.5 4.1 M2 9 M2 22 48 28 3.5 12 0.65 0.82 2.97 2.35 3.71
58 38 14 0.73 0.96 3.87 3.17 4.33
5
68 48 18 0.87 1.27 6.05 5.16 5.74
2
78 58 20 0.94 1.37 7.32 6.34 6.18
25 — 5 0.51 0.51 2.29 1.4 3.06
4
40 — 7 0.69 0.76 3.76 2.6 4.59
55 — 9 0.85 0.98 5.62 4.17 5.89
14 6.5 7.5 3.5×6×3.5 6 M3 11 M3 30 70 40 5 12 1.18 1.57 9.1 7.22 9.42 5
85 55 14 1.27 1.76 11.8 9.7 10.5
100 70 17 1.47 2.06 16.7 14.1 12.3
3 6
115 85 19 1.57 2.25 20.4 17.5 13.5
B-507
Model VRU
G1 n1×F1 G1 A h f3
G2 G2 m2
φd
φD
K φ D1
B1 B W b 1 m1 B2
m1
S t1 f2
G n×F G T H g f1 g
L M
2×2-S1×l
Model No. Table mounting tap

Maximum Width Height Length Mass* Side surface mounting tap position
W M L position
stroke kg
± 0.1 ± 0.1 B n×F G S B1 n1×F1 G1 G2 b1 t1 S1×l
VRU 3055 30 55 0.57(0.3) — 1×25 5.5
VRU 3080 45 80 0.8(0.4) 1×25 2×25 10.5
VRU 3105 60 105 1.03(0.6) 2×25 3×25 15.5
VRU 3130 75 60 28 130 1.26(0.7) 25 3×25 27.5 M4 39 4×25 15 20.5 40 5.5
VRU 3155 90 155 1.49(0.9) 4×25 5×25 25.5
VRU 3180 105 180 1.72(1) 5×25 6×25 30.5
VRU 3205 130 205 1.95(1.1) 6×25 7×25 30.5 M3×6
VRU 4085 50 85 1.5(0.8) — 1×40 10.5
VRU 4125 75 125 2.3(1.2) 1×40 2×40 18
VRU 4165 105 165 3.1(1.5) 2×40 3×40 23
80 35 40 42.5 M5 53 22.5 55 6.5
VRU 4205 135 205 3.8(1.9) 3×40 4×40 30.5
VRU 4245 155 245 4.6(2.2) 4×40 5×40 38
VRU 4285 185 285 5.3(2.6) 5×40 6×40 43
B-508
MA MB MC
Maximum stroke
Accuracy: Δ C Accuracy: ΔD
Unit: mm
No. of
C C0 MA MB MC
rollers
Cross Roller Table

T H K d×D×h D1 m1 A m2 B2 f1 f2 f3 g Z kN kN N-m N-m N-m ΔC ΔD
35 — — 6 1.47 1.67 9.85 6.54 15.5
2 5
60 — — 10 2.06 2.75 22.2 17 25.6
85 — — 13 2.35 3.33 34.8 28.1 31.1
18.5 9 10 4.5×7.5×5 7.5 14.5 40 110 — — 10 17 2.94 4.41 55.8 47.1 41.2 6
135 — 85 20 3.53 5.49 74.7 64.6 51.2 3
160 — 110 24 4.02 6.57 104 92.3 61.3
7
M4 M4 185 85 135 26 4.22 7.16 120 107 66.8
65 — — 10 7 3.53 4.8 48.7 33.7 64 2 5
80 — — 11 5.2 8.04 101 79.1 107 6
120 — — 14 6.77 11.3 153 125 150
24 10.5 12.5 5.5×9.5×6 9.5 18.5 60
160 80 — 22.5 18 8.14 14.5 239 204 193 3
7
200 120 — 22 9.42 17.7 344 302 235
240 160 — 26 10.7 20.9 468 418 278
B-509
Model VRU
G1 n1×F1 G1 A h f3
G2 G2 m2 f4
φd
φD
K φ D1
B1 B W b2 b1 m1 B2
m1
S t1 t2 f2
G n×F G T H g f1 g
L M
2×4-S1×l
Model No. Table mounting

Maximum Width Height Length Mass* Side surface mounting tap position
stroke W M L kg
tap position
± 0.1 ± 0.1 B n×F G S B1 n1×F1 G1 G2 b1 b2 t1 t2 S1×l
VRU 6110 60 110 3.2(1.7) — 1×50 16
VRU 6160 95 160 4.6(2.5) 1×50 2×50 23.5
VRU 6210 130 210 6(3.2) 2×50 3×50 31
VRU 6260 165 100 45 260 7.4(4) 50 3×50 55 M6 63 4×50 30 38.5 60 92 8 15
VRU 6310 200 310 8.7(4.8) 4×50 5×50 46
VRU 6360 235 360 10.1(5.6) 5×50 6×50 53.5
VRU 6410 265 410 11.5(6.4) 6×50 7×50 63.5
VRU 9210 130 210 12(7.1) — 1×100 27
M4×8
VRU 9310 180 310 17.6(7.9) 1×100 2×100 52
VRU 9410 350 410 23.2(—) 2×100 3×100
VRU 9510 450 510 28.8(—) 3×100 4×100
VRU 9610 550 145 60 610 34.4(—) 85 4×100 105 M8 96 5×100 55 90 135 11 20
VRU 9710 650 710 40(—) 5×100 6×100 17
VRU 9810 750 810 45.6(—) 6×100 7×100
＊
VRU 9910 850 910 51.2(—) 7×100 8×100
＊
VRU 91010 950 1010 56.8(—) 8×100 9×100
Models VRU9910 and VRU91010 are build to order.
B-510
MA MB MC
Maximum stroke
Accuracy: Δ C Accuracy: Δ D
Unit: mm
No. of
C C0 MA MB MC
rollers
Cross Roller Table

T H K d×D×h D1 m1 A m2 B2 f1 f2 f3 f4 g Z kN kN N-m N-m N-m ΔC ΔD
90 — — — 6 7.45 10.6 121 80.5 158 3 6
140 — — — 9 9.31 14.1 231 171 211 3 6
190 — 90 — 13 12.5 21.1 428 345 317 3 7
31 13 15 7×11×7 11 M5 23.5 M5 60 240 — 140 — 10 16 15.6 28.2 616 516 423 3 7
290 — 190 — 19 17.1 31.8 838 720 476 4 8
340 140 240 — 22 19.8 38.8 1090 958 582 4 8
390 190 290 — 26 22.5 45.9 1480 1320 688 4 8
100 — — — 9 20.9 34.9 837 622 838 3 7
200 — — — 14 31.9 61.1 1760 1440 1460 3 7
300 — 100 — 15 31.9 61.1 1990 1650 1460 4 8
400 — 200 — 19 38.4 78.5 3030 2600 1880 4 8
43 16 21 9×14×9 14 M8 32 M6 90 500 100 300 — 55 22 44.7 96 3950 3460 2300 4 9
600 200 400 — 26 50.6 114 5380 4810 2730 4 9
700 300 500 100 29 53.5 123 6600 5960 2940 5 10
800 400 600 200 33 59.1 139 8410 7680 3340 5 10
900 500 700 300 37 64.6 157 10400 9620 3760 5 10
B-511
B-512
Linear Ball Slide
General Catalog

(Separate)
Model LSP......................................... B-514 Features of the Linear Ball Slide ....... A-594
Model LS ........................................... B-516 • Structure and features ...................... A-594
Model LSC ........................................ B-518 Types of the Linear Ball Slide ........... A-596
Speed Controller ............................... B-520
Dedicated Unit Base Model B ........... B-520 Point of Selection............................ A-599
Limit Switch ....................................... B-521 Rated Load and Nominal Life............ A-599

the Products".
B-513
Model LSP
lS
W 2 L
B L1
4-S F
φ d2
l
M T h
H
φ d1
f1
W1 L0
Slider dimensions
Max. Height Width Length
Model No.
Stroke M W L T L1 B F S×l
ls ±0.25 ± 0.25
LSP 1340 15 13 25 42.6 12.5 39 11 30 M3×5
LSP 1365 25 13 25 67.6 12.5 64 11 55 M3×5
LSP 1390 50 13 25 92.6 12.5 89 11 80 M3×5
LSP 2050 25 20 44 54 18.3 47 20 35 M5×8.4
LSP 2080 50 20 44 84 18.3 77 20 65 M5×8.4
LSP 20100 75 20 44 104 18.3 97 20 85 M5×8.4
LSP 25100 50 25 66 105.2 24 97 35 75 M5×8.5
LSP 25125 75 25 66 130.2 24 122 35 100 M5×8.5
LSP 25150 100 25 66 155.2 24 147 35 125 M5×8.5
B-514
MA MB MC
Unit: mm
Base dimensions Static permissible moment* Basic load rating Mass
Width Height Length
MA, MB MC C C0
W1 H d1×d2×h L0 f1 g
N-m N-m N N
12.2 7.7 3.3×6×3.3 42.6 30 0.88 0.49 68.6 118 37
Linear Ball Slide

12.2 7.7 3.3×6×3.3 67.6 55 1.76 0.98 118 206 60
12.2 7.7 3.3×6×3.3 92.6 80 3.04 1.27 157 275 85
22.3 11 5.3×9×5.3 54 35 1.37 2.25 157 284 114
22.3 11 5.3×9×5.3 84 65 3.53 4.51 304 559 184
22.3 11 5.3×9×5.3 104 85 5 5.69 392 706 231
38 16 5.3×9×5.3 105.2 75 9.22 14.5 588 1069 433
38 16 5.3×9×5.3 130.2 100 12.9 18.1 735 1333 547
38 16 5.3×9×5.3 155.2 125 17.5 21.9 882 1598 652
Note) *MA, MB and MC each indicate the permissible moment per LM system, as shown in the figure above.
B-515
Model LS
lS
W 2 L
B L1
4-S F
φ d2
l
M T h
H
φ d1
f1
W1 L0
Slider dimensions
Max. Height Width Length
Model No.
Stroke M W L T L1 B F S×l
ls ±0.25 ± 0.25
LS 827 13 8 14.2 29.6 7.6 26 5.5 16 M2×2.7
LS 852 25 8 14.2 54.6 7.6 51 5.5 41 M2×2.7
LS 877 50 8 14.2 79.6 7.6 76 5.5 66 M2×2.7
LS 1027 13 10 19 29.6 9.2 26 8.5 16 M3×3.2
LS 1052 25 10 19 54.6 9.2 51 8.5 41 M3×3.2
LS 1077 50 10 19 79.6 9.2 76 8.5 66 M3×3.2
B-516
MA MB MC
Unit: mm
Width Height Length
MA, MB MC C C0
W1 H d1×d2×h L0 f1
N-m N-m N N g
6.2 4.7 2.2×3.9×1.4 29.6 19 0.2 0.29 39.2 68.6 9
Linear Ball Slide

6.2 4.7 2.2×3.9×1.4 54.6 35 0.49 0.39 68.6 118 15
6.2 4.7 2.2×3.9×1.4 79.6 60 0.88 0.59 98 167 21
9.6 6.2 3.3×6×3.1 29.6 19 0.29 0.59 58.8 108 13
9.6 6.2 3.3×6×3.1 54.6 35 0.78 1.08 108 186 23
9.6 6.2 3.3×6×3.1 79.6 60 1.47 1.57 157 275 34
B-517
Model LSC
Stroke
±
lS
2
J Q 2× 2-M4 depth 8 T g1 f1
12 4-φ m 4-S×l 5.5 h H S3 4-M5×12
φ d2 φ d1
BW A W1 B2
2-S2×l 1
R Hole for
air piping g2
F2 G2 M1 f2
F1 G1 5.5 L0
L M
Slider dimensions
Max.
Stroke Theoretical
Cylinder Height Width
Model No. thrust
Inner diameter
(at 500 kPa) M W L T B
l s +0.5
0 N ± 0.05
LSC 1015 15 10 38.2 25 50 80 24 20
LSC 1515 15 15 86.3 30 70 80 21 30
LSC 1530 30 15 86.3 30 70 110 21 30
LSC 1550 50 15 86.3 30 70 150 21 30
Slider dimensions Base dimensions

Model No.
L0 B2 f2 g2 f1 g1 d1×d2×h A S3
LSC 1015 80 20 40 20 — — 3.3×5.5×3.5 13 M4

LSC 1515 80 30 40 21 23 29.5 5.2×9×5.5 17 M6
LSC 1530 110 30 60 25 40 35 5.2×9×5.5 17 M6
LSC 1550 150 30 100 25 78 36 5.2×9×5.5 17 M6
Model number coding
LSC1515 B S L
Model number
With unit base
With external stopper
With limit switch
Note) Unit base, external stopper and limit switch are not available for model LSC1015.
The speed controller is optional.
B-518
MA MB MC
Unit: mm
Slider dimensions
F1 G1 S×l m G2 F2 J Q R M1
40 20 M4×7 5.5 12.5 40 — — — 16.5

40 19 M5×8 9 28.5 40 29 22 4 21
60 25 M5×8 9 35 60 44 22 4 21
Linear Ball Slide

100 25 M5×8 9 50 50 64 22 4 21
MA, MB MC C C0
W1 H S2×l 1 kg
N-m N-m N N
31.2 5.5 M5×5 4.9 7.45 392 676 0.25

45 10.5 M5×4.5 4.9 11.1 392 676 0.37
45 10.5 M5×4.5 8.43 15.4 549 951 0.52
45 10.5 M5×4.5 15.4 22.1 794 1350 0.72
B-519
Speed Controller
Fig.1 shows the shape of the speed controller.
10
Note) The speed controller is optional.
(control method: meter out) 9.8
Opposite side8 φ4
11
27 to 29.7 φ 9.8
22.8
2.9
M5
Fig.1 Shape of the Speed Controller (common to all model numbers)
Dedicated Unit Base Model B

With Linear Ball Slide model LSC, a limit switch
Slider
for detecting the stroke end can be mounted Detecting-bar stage 15.5
using a dedicated unit base (Fig.2). When fine Detecting collar
positioning is required, a dedicated stopper can Bar
be mounted on the unit base to adjust the posi-
tion. (excluding model LSC1015) Limit switch
Limit switch Stopper screw for
mounting plate Unit base fine adjustment
Fig.2 Unit Base and Limit Switch Installation
L
18.5 n K n
10 F G
4-M6
59
45
30
70
9 2×2-M5 f1 g1
N g2
5.5
10
4.3
5.5
2×4-M3×8
9
Unit: mm
Unit base dimensions

Unit base
Length Mass
Model B
L F G f1 g1 K n N g2 kg
LSC1515 80 40 21 23 29.5 56 12 68 6 0.12
LSC1530 110 60 25 40 35 74 18 94 8 0.16
LSC1550 150 100 25 78 36 114 18 134 8 0.21
B-520
Limit Switch
The specifications of the limit switch are as follows.
<Limit switch specifications>
Type D2VW-5L2A-1 (Omron)

NC
Contact type contact (1C contact)
NO
COM
<Rated Specifications>
Non-inductive load (A) Inductive load (A)

Rated voltage Resistance load Ramp load Inductive load
Type
(V)
Normally Normally Normally Normally Normally Normally
closed open closed open closed open
125 5 0.5 4
AC
250 5 0.5 4
D2VW-5
30 5 3 4
DC
125 0.4 0.1 0.4
Note1) The above figures indicate the constant current.

Note2) Inductive load refers to power factor of 0.7 or greater (alternate current) and time constant of 7 ms or less (direct cur-
rent).
Note3) Ramp load implies a rush current 10 times greater.
Linear Ball Slide

Note4) The above rated values apply when a test is conducted with the following conditions in accordance with JIS C 4505.
(1) Ambient temperature: 20℃± 2℃
(2) Ambient humidity: 65% ± 5% RH
(3) Operating frequency: 30 times/min
Note) For applications under a minute load (5 to 24 VDC), a minute-load type is available. Contact THK for details.
B-521
B-522
LM Roller
General Catalog

(Separate)
Models LR and LR-Z ......................... B-524 Features of the LM Roller.................. A-604
Models LRA and LRA-Z .................... B-525 • Structure and features ...................... A-604
Models LRB and LRB-Z .................... B-526 Types of the LM Roller ...................... A-606
Model LRU ........................................ B-527 • Types and Features .......................... A-606
Options............................................. B-528 Point of Selection............................ A-608

Spring Pad ........................................ B-528 Nominal Life ...................................... A-608
Models SM and SMB ........................ B-529 Accuracy Standards .......................... A-611
Models SE and SEB.......................... B-530
Point of Design................................ A-612
Raceway ........................................... A-612
Installing the LM Roller...................... A-613
Guidance for Adjusting the Clearance . A-614
Examples of Arranging LM Roller Units .. A-615
Examples of Installing the LM Roller. A-616
Options............................................. A-617
Spring Pad Model PA........................ A-617
Fixture Models SM/SMB and SE/SEB .... A-618

the Products".
B-523
Models LR and LR-Z
l l
l1 4−φ H
l1
W0 W1 B W0 W1 B
4−φ H
t A T t A T
G L
L G
Model LR Model LR-Z
Unit: mm
Basic Basic
Main dimensions Mass dynamic
load
static
load
rating rating
Model No. Mounting
W1 Length Thick-
ness
Width l Mounting
bolt C C0
hole pitch
0 0
– 0.1
L T W0 A t G
– 0.2
l 1 B H S g kN kN
LR 1547Z 15 47 16 30 11 7 5 20 12 23 3.4 0.2 M3＊ 60 15.2 17.6
LR 2055Z 20 55 17.3 36 12 8 5.3 30 18 29 4.5 0.2 M4＊ 110 26 37.8
LR 2565Z 25 65 20.6 45 14 9 6.6 35 20 36 5.5 0.1 M5＊ 190 40.4 61.1
LR 3275Z 32 75 21.6 55 15 10 6.6 45 27 44 5.5 0.1 M5＊ 320 52.5 91
LR 4095 40 95 30 68 21 14 9 55 35 54 6.6 0.3 M6 800 84.5 140
LR 50130 50 130 42 82 30 20 12 78 50 66 9 0.3 M8 1810 149 255
Note) Using a hexagonal-socket-head type bolt as the mounting bolt marked with ＊ may cause interference.
Roller protrusion
G+0.3MIN
Model LR or LR-Z W1+0.1MIN
B-524
Models LRA and LRA-Z
l l
W0 W1 W0 W1
t A T
t A T
L G
L G
Model LRA Model LRA-Z
Unit: mm
Basic Basic
dynamic static
Main dimensions Mass load load
rating rating
Model No. Thick-
W1 Length
ness
Width l C C0
LM Roller
0 0
L T W0 A t G S g kN kN
– 0.1 – 0.2
LRA 1547Z 15 47 16 22.2 11 7 5 20 0.2 54 15.2 17.6
LRA 2055Z 20 55 17.3 30 12 8 5.3 30 0.2 104 26 37.8
LRA 2565Z 25 65 20.6 38.1 14 9 6.6 35 0.1 180 40.4 61.1
LRA 3275Z 32 75 21.6 45 15 10 6.6 45 0.1 310 52.5 91
LRA 4095 40 95 30 55 21 14 9 55 0.3 740 84.5 140
LRA 50130 50 130 42 76.2 30 20 12 78 0.3 1770 149 255
Roller protrusion
SM SE G+0.3MIN
Model LRA or LRA-Z W1+0.1MIN

Models LRB and LRB-Z
l l
W0 W1 W0 W1
t T t T
L L
Model LRB Model LRB-Z
Unit: mm
Basic Basic
dynamic static
Main dimensions Mass
load load
rating rating
Model No.
Thick-
W1 Length Width
ness
l C C0
0 0
L W0 T t S g kN kN
– 0.1 – 0.2
LRB 1547Z 15 47 22.2 17 13 20 0.2 60 15.2 17.6
LRB 2055Z 20 55 30 18 14 30 0.2 117 26 37.8
LRB 2565Z 25 65 38.1 21 16 35 0.1 205 40.4 61.1
LRB 3275Z 32 75 45 22 17 45 0.1 340 52.5 91
LRB 4095 40 95 55 31 24 55 0.3 800 84.5 140
LRB 50130 50 130 76.2 43 33 78 0.3 1970 149 255
Roller protrusion
SMB SEB
Model LRB or LRB-Z
B-526
Model LRU
l1
W1 B
4−φ H
Roller protrusion
T t
S
L
Unit: mm
Basic Basic
dynamic static
load load
rating rating
Model No. Thick-
Width Length C C0
LM Roller
ness
Toler-
T W1
ance
t L l 1 B H S kg kN kN
0
LRU 22.2 14.283 22.23 10.48 51 19.05 17.07 3 0.253 0.09 11.9 14.5
– 0.050
0
LRU 25.4 19.05 25.4 13.97 73 25.4 20.6 3.4 0.2 0.22 28.1 39.8
– 0.050
0
LRU 38.1 28.573 38.1 20.953 101.6 38.1 30.96 4.5 0.22 0.7 59.4 88.2
– 0.050
0
LRU 50.8 38.098 50.8 27.938 139.7 50.8 41.28 5.6 0.46 1.7 103 159
– 0.075
0
LRU 76.2 57.15 76.2 41.15 206.4 76.2 61.9 6.6 0.5 5.7 245 402
– 0.075
Model LRU

Options LM Roller (Options)
Spring Pad Model PA
L h
B W
Unit: mm
Maximum Spring Supported
Main dimensions Installation related dimensions(see A-618) permissible constant LM Roller
load
Model No. S
Adjust-
+0.15 ment bolt
W B L h H F P kN kN/mm
+0.05
PA 15 15 22.2 20 9 21 22.2 11.5 65 M5 1.02 5.4 LRA 1547Z
PA 20 20 30 30 9.5 22.5 30 12 75 M6 2.74 7.5 LRA 2055Z
PA 25 25 38.1 35 12 27 38.1 14.5 90 M8 4.11 9.1 LRA 2565Z
PA 32 32 45 45 12.5 28.5 45 15 100 M8 4.11 11.2 LRA 3275Z
PA 40 40 55 55 16 38 55 18.5 126 M10 4.8 15.3 LRA 4095
PA 50 50 76.2 78 21 52 76.2 23.5 170 M12 6.86 15.5 LRA 50130
B-528
Fixtures Models SM/SMB
L L
C C
W B W B
d1 d1
t t
h h
H H
d d
l l
Model SM Model SMB
Unit: mm
Model No.
LM Roller (Options)
W B L C l H t d d1 h g
SM 15 15 22.2 53 16 45 9 3 5.5 9.5 5.4 38
SMB 15 15 22.2 53 16 45 15 3 5.5 9.5 5.4 60
SM 20 20 30 53 18 45 10 3 6.6 11 6.5 60
SMB 20 20 30 53 18 45 16 3 6.6 11 6.5 95
SM 25 25 38.1 65 23 55 12 4 9 14 8.6 115
SMB 25 25 38.1 65 23 55 19 4 9 14 8.6 120
SM 32 32 45 65 23 55 13 4 9 14 8.6 135
SMB 32 32 45 65 23 55 20 4 9 14 8.6 215
SM 40 40 55 81 28 71 19 6 11 17.5 10.8 290
SMB 40 40 55 81 28 71 29 6 11 17.5 10.8 455
SM 50 50 76.2 102 38 92 28 9 14 20 13 890
SMB 50 50 76.2 102 38 92 41 9 14 20 13 1320
B-529
Fixtures Models SE/SEB
E L1 E L1
L2 L2
W B W B
C C
d1 d1
t t
h h
G H1 G H1
d
F d
F
Model SE Model SEB
Unit: mm
Model No.
W B L1 L2 E F C H1 G t d d1 h g
SE 15 15 22.2 26.5 22.5 18 40.5 16 10 7 3 5.5 9.5 5.4 35
SEB 15 15 22.2 26.5 22.5 18 40.5 16 16 13 3 5.5 9.5 5.4 64
SE 20 20 30 26.5 22.5 19 41.5 18 11 8 3 6.6 11 6.5 60
SEB 20 20 30 26.5 22.5 19 41.5 18 17 14 3 6.6 11 6.5 105
SE 25 25 38.1 32.5 27.5 21.5 49 23 13 9 4 9 14 8.6 110
SEB 25 25 38.1 32.5 27.5 21.5 49 23 20 16 4 9 14 8.6 175
SE 32 32 45 32.5 27.5 21.5 49 23 14 10 4 9 14 8.6 140
SEB 32 32 45 32.5 27.5 21.5 49 23 21 17 4 9 14 8.6 220
SE 40 40 55 40.5 35.5 24 59.5 28 20 14 6 11 17.5 10.8 295
SEB 40 40 55 40.5 35.5 24 59.5 28 30 24 6 11 17.5 10.8 415
SE 50 50 76.2 51 46 29 75 38 29 20 9 14 20 13 840
SEB 50 50 76.2 51 46 29 75 38 42 33 9 14 20 13 1245
B-530
Flat Roller
General Catalog

(Separate)
Model FT ........................................... B-532 Features of the Flat Roller................. A-622
Model FTW........................................ B-533 • Structure and features ...................... A-622
Types of the Flat Roller ..................... A-624

Point of Design................................ A-629

Raceway ........................................... A-629
Installing the Flat Roller..................... A-630

the Products".
B-531
Model FT
φ Da
l
B b
Unit: mm
Basic Basic
Main dimensions Roller dimensions dynamic static Mass
Model No. No. of
Width Length Diameter Length Pitch C C0
rollers
b l Da B Z P kN kN g
FT 2010-32 10 32 2 7.8 7 4 5.2 10.4 1.9
FT 2515-45 15 45 2.5 11.8 7 4.75 10.9 25.2 5.6
FT 3020-60 20 60 3 15.8 8 5.51 17.4 42.8 12.5
FT 3525-75 25 75 3.5 19.8 8 7 27.4 72.7 23
FT 4030-150 30 150 4 25.8 18 7.3 55.7 176 73
FT 4035-150 35 150 4 30.8 18 7.3 64.2 212 86
FT 4026V-150 26 150 2.828 22.8 22 6 45.1 155 45
FT 5038-250 38 250 5 32.8 21 11 109 387 195
FT 5043-250 43 250 5 37.8 21 11 122 449 200
FT 5030V-250 30 250 3.535 21.8 33 7 78 290 103
FT 10054-400 54 400 10 46 24 15.8 279 1000 870
FT 10080-500 80 500 10 71.8 29 16 459 1900 1610
FT 10060V-500 60 500 7.071 52.8 35 13.5 301 1270 870
Model number coding
FT5038 P1 -750L
Model number Accuracy indication Overall cage length
symbol (*1) (in mm)
(*1) See A-628.
B-532
Model FTW
φ Da
l
B b1
b
Unit: mm
Basic Basic
Main dimensions Roller dimensions dynamic static Mass
Model No. No. of
Width Length Diameter Length Pitch C C0
rollers
b b1 l Da B Z P kN kN g
FTW 4030V-150 30 24.5 150 2.828 22.8 22×2 6 59 220 94
FTW 5045-250 45 35.5 250 5 32.8 21×2 11.1 142 548 410
FTW 5050-250 50 40.5 250 5 37.8 23×2 10 160 634 460
FTW 5035V-250 35 29 250 3.535 26.8 33×2 7 102 411 220
FTW 6022.4-320 22.4 14.4 320 6 12.8 16×2 19 53 141 180
Flat Roller
FTW 10036V-380 36 26.6 380 7.071 25 23×2 16 149 507 700
FTW 10043.5V-380 43.5 34 380 7.071 31.8 23×2 16 182 660 845
FTW 10070V-500 70 56.5 500 7.071 52.8 35×2 13.5 394 1804 1790
Model number coding
FTW5050 P1 -750L
Model number Accuracy indication Overall cage length
symbol (*1) (in mm)
(*1) See A-628.
B-533
B-534
Slide Pack
General Catalog

(Separate)
Models FBW 2560R and 3590R ....... B-536 Features of Slide Pack ...................... A-636
Models FBW 50110R and 50110H ...... B-537 • Structure and features ...................... A-636
Types of the Slide Pack .................... A-638
Options............................................. B-538 • Type ............................................... A-638
Metal Dustproof Cover ...................... B-538 • Clearance ....................................... A-639
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance... B-539 Options............................................. A-640

Installation ......................................... B-539 Contamination Protection.................. A-640
Jointed Slide Rails............................. A-640

Installation ......................................... A-641
Lubrication......................................... A-642

the Products".
B-535
Models FBW 2560R and 3590R
Model FBW2560R
（3） 66 Stroke length
13 40 4-M4
4 Section A
Magnified view of section A 24.8 42 34

2.3 80
12 G n1×80 G
4.6 L0
Model FBW3590R 100 Stroke length

15 70 4-M5 (pilot hole φ 4.3) Section A
5.3 5
37 60 50
2.9 100
16.2 （2.3） G n1×100 G
L0
[Model FBW 2560R (Made of Stainless Steel)] [Model FBW 3590R]

Unit: mm Unit: mm
Main Slide rail Main Slide rail
Slide rail dimensions Stroke length mass Slide rail dimensions Stroke length mass
length length
Without With g Without With g
L0 n1 G L0 n1 G
seal seal (70) seal seal (250)
160 1 40 88 83 70 300 2 50 200 195 260
240 2 40 168 163 110 350 3 25 250 245 300
320 3 40 248 243 140 400 3 50 300 295 350
400 4 40 328 323 180 450 4 25 350 345 390
480 5 40 408 403 210 500 4 50 400 395 430
560 6 40 488 483 250 550 5 25 450 445 480
640 7 40 568 563 290 600 5 50 500 495 520
720 8 40 648 643 320 650 6 25 550 545 560
800 9 40 728 723 360 700 6 50 600 595 600
880 10 40 808 803 390 750 7 25 650 645 650
960 11 40 888 883 430 800 7 50 700 695 690
1040 12 40 968 963 460 900 8 50 800 795 780
1200 14 40 1128 1123 540 1000 9 50 900 895 860
Note) THK also manufactures a long-size type at your 1200 11 50 1100 1095 1000
request. 1500 14 50 1400 1395 1300
The values in the parentheses each indicate a slider 1800 17 50 1700 1695 1600
mass.
Table1 Static Permissible Load Unit: N
Pa Static permissible load
Model No.
Pa Pb Pc
Pb FBW 2560R 590 150 70

FBW 3590R 880 200 100
FBW 50110R
1960 500 390
FBW 50110H
Pc
B-536
Models FBW 50110R and 50110H
Model FBW50110R
126 Stroke length
Magnified view of section A 23 80 4-M5 Section A
7.5
6 85 70
50
100
7 3.2 G n1×100 G
17 L0
Model FBW50110H 126 Stroke length

7.5 23 80 4-M5 2-φ 6 drilled through, φ 9.5 counter bore depth 2.2
54.4 30 85 70
100
3.2 G n1×100 G
20 L0
[Models FBW 50110R and 50110H]
Unit: mm
Main dimensions Stroke length Slide rail mass g
Slide rail length
L0 FBW50110R FBW50110H
n1 G Without seal With seal
(420) (420)
Slide Pack
300 2 50 170 164 360 740
350 3 25 220 214 420 870
400 3 50 270 264 480 990
450 4 25 320 314 540 1100
500 4 50 370 364 600 1200
600 5 50 470 464 720 1400
700 6 50 570 564 840 1700
800 7 50 670 664 960 2000
900 8 50 770 764 1100 2200
1000 9 50 870 864 1200 2500
1200 11 50 1070 1064 1400 3000
1500 14 50 1370 1364 1800 3700
1800 17 50 1670 1664 2200 4400
Note) THK also manufactures a long-size type at your request.
The values in the parentheses each indicate a slider mass.
Model number coding
2 FBW50110R UU +800L - T
Model number Overall slide rail length
(in mm)
No. of sliders connected on the same rail Jointed slide rails symbol
(no symbol for a single slider)
With seal
(no symbol for without seal)

Options Slide Pack (Options)
Metal Dustproof Cover

For Slide Pack model FBW, steel covers that cover the whole slide rail to prevent foreign material
from entering the slide are available.
Model FBW2560RG
(Equipped with a contamination protection cover) L
G n×80 G
19.4 80 φ 12
26.0 13.6 30
23 30
2.3 4.6×5.3 13 20 20 3-M4

13.2 66
Model FBW3590RG
G n×100 G
24.4 100 φ 12
38.2 19.7
42
32 42
2.9 4.6×5.3 15 35 35 3-M5 (pilot hole φ 4.3)

17.4 100
Model FBW50110RG
G n×100 G
24.4 6×7 100 φ 12
26.2
51.2 55
38 48
3.2 23 40 40 3-M5 (pilot hole φ 4.3)

18.2 126
Note) For models equipped with a contamination protection cover, the rubber seal is not available.
B-538
Mounting Procedure and Maintenance Slide Pack
Installation
[Groove Dimensions]
Fig.1 shows the dimensions of grooves for applications where model FBW-R (H) is installed in a
groove.
Unit: mm
Model No. W H
+0.15
FBW 2560R 24.8 7.4
+0.1
W +0.15
FBW 3590R 37 10
+0.1
+0.15
FBW 50110R 50 10
+0.1
H
+0.15
Fig.1 FBW 50110H 54.4 13
+0.1
Slide Pack
B-539
B-540
Slide Rail
General Catalog

(Separate)
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table Features and Types
Model FBL 27S ................................. B-542 Features of the Slide Rail.................. A-646
Model FBL 27S-P14.......................... B-543 • Structure and features ...................... A-646
Model FBL 35S ................................. B-544 Types of the Slide Rail ...................... A-647
Model FBL 35M................................. B-545 • Types and Features .......................... A-647
Model FBL 35J .................................. B-546 Single Slides for Light Load ............. A-647
Model FBL 35J-P13 .......................... B-547 Single Slides for Medium Load ......... A-650
Model FBL 35J-P14 .......................... B-548 Double Slides for Light Load ............ A-650
Model FBL 35B ................................. B-549 Double Slides for Medium Load........ A-651
Model FBL 35T.................................. B-550 Double Slides for Heavy Load .......... A-653
Model FBL 27D ................................. B-551 Linear Type Slides ......................... A-654
Model FBL 35E-P14.......................... B-552 Aluminum Alloy Slide Rail ................ A-655
Model FBL 35G-P13 ......................... B-553 Classification Table for Slide Rails.... A-656
Model FBL 35G-P14 ......................... B-554
Model FBL 35D ................................. B-555 Mounting Procedure and Maintenance... A-658
Model FBL 35W ................................ B-556 Mounting the Slide Rail ..................... A-658
Model FBL 51H ................................. B-557
Model FBL 51H-P13.......................... B-558 Precautions on Use......................... A-659
Model FBL 51H-P14.......................... B-559
Model FBL 35K ................................. B-560
Model FBL 56H ................................. B-561
Model FBL 56H-P13.......................... B-562
Model FBL 56H-P14.......................... B-563
Model FBL 35F.................................. B-564
Model FBL 56F.................................. B-565
Model FBL 48DR............................... B-566
Model E15 ......................................... B-567
Model E20 ......................................... B-568
Model D20......................................... B-569

the Products".
B-541
Model FBL 27S
Stroke length S±3 Rail length L± 0.8

20±0.5 B±0.3
A±0.3
2-φ 4.5 (both ends)
100±0.3
4.2×6
Access hole 20±0.3
Access hole
20±0.3
4.2× 6 2-φ 4.5 (both ends)
100±0.3
C± 0.3
D±0.3
20±0.5 E±0.3
Rail length (L-3)±0.8
9.5±0.5
Outer rail
Inner rail
27±0.5
1.6 1.6
Retainer
Cross section
Unit: mm
Rail length Stroke Mounting hole dimensions Mounting hole Permissible Mass
L S load
A B C D E Inner rail Outer rail N/pair kg/pair
(± 0.8) (± 3)
200 135 140.0 160.0 — 140.0 160.0 5 5 260 0.32
250 185 190.0 210.0 150.0 190.0 210.0 6 5 240 0.40
300 222 240.0 260.0 190.0 240.0 260.0 6 5 240 0.48
350 260 290.0 310.0 225.0 290.0 310.0 6 5 230 0.56
400 297 340.0 360.0 265.0 340.0 360.0 6 5 210 0.64
450 334 390.0 410.0 300.0 390.0 410.0 6 5 200 0.72
500 371 440.0 460.0 337.0 440.0 460.0 6 5 180 0.80
Note) The permissible load and the mass each indicate the value for a pair of 2 units.
Model number coding
FBL27S +300L
Model number Overall rail length (in mm)
B-542
Model FBL 27S-P14
Stroke length S±3 Rail length L±0.8
20±0.5 E±0.3
D± 0.3
2-φ 4.5 (both ends) Lead stick 100±0.3
4.2× 6 20±0.3 4.2×6
20±0.3 Automatic free 2-φ 4.5 (both ends)

disconnection spring
A± 0.3 Rubber cushion
B±0.3
20±0.5 C±0.3 9.5±0.5
Outer rail
Inner rail
27±0.5
1.6 1.6
Retainer
Slide Rail
Cross section
Unit: mm
L S load
A B C D E Inner rail Outer rail N/pair kg/pair
(±0.8) (± 3)
200 116 65.0 — 170.0 140.0 160.0 4 5 260 0.32
250 152 100.0 — 210.0 190.0 210.0 4 5 240 0.40
300 202 100.0 — 260.0 240.0 260.0 4 5 240 0.48
350 251 100.0 — 310.0 290.0 310.0 4 5 230 0.56
400 297 100.0 — 360.0 340.0 360.0 4 5 210 0.64
450 332 100.0 390.0 410.0 390.0 410.0 5 5 210 0.72
500 371 100.0 440.0 460.0 440.0 460.0 5 5 200 0.80
550 407 100.0 490.0 510.0 490.0 510.0 5 5 180 0.80
Model number coding
FBL27S-P14 +500L
B-543
Model FBL 35S
Stroke length S± 3 Rail length L±0.8

15.9±0.5 G±0.3
F±0.3
E±0.3
D±0.3
Access hole 4.5×5.3 111.1±0.3
4.5×5.3
101.6± 0.3 12.7±0.3

A± 0.3 25.4±0.3
B±0.3
25.4±0.5 C±0.3
9.5±0.5
Rail length (L-3)±0.8 Outer rail
Inner rail
1.6 1.6
35.3±0.5
Retainer
Cross section
Unit: mm
L S load
A B C D E F G Inner rail Outer rail N/pair kg/pair
(± 0.8) (± 3)
305 229 — 152.4 254.0 — 149.2 260.3 273.0 4 7 490 0.6
356 279 — 203.2 304.8 — 200.0 311.1 323.8 4 7 400 0.7
406 305 — 254.0 355.6 — 250.8 361.9 374.6 4 7 390 0.8
457 330 203.2 304.8 406.4 212.7 301.6 412.7 425.4 5 8 380 0.9
508 381 228.6 355.6 457.2 238.1 352.4 463.5 476.2 5 8 330 1.0
559 406 254.0 406.4 508.0 263.5 403.2 514.3 527.0 5 8 320 1.1
610 432 279.4 457.2 558.8 288.9 454.0 565.1 577.8 5 8 310 1.2
660 483 304.8 508.0 609.6 314.3 504.8 615.9 628.6 5 8 280 1.3
711 508 330.2 558.8 660.4 339.7 555.6 666.7 679.4 5 8 270 1.4
Model number coding
FBL35S +457L
B-544
Model FBL 35M
Stroke length S± 3 Rail length L±0.8

15.9±0.5 G±0.3
F± 0.3
E±0.3
D±0.3
Access hole 4.5× 5.3 111.1±0.3
4.5×5.3
101.6± 0.3 12.7±0.3

A± 0.3 25.4±0.3
B±0.3
25.4±0.5 C±0.3
9.5±0.5
Outer rail
Inner rail
1.6 1.6
35.3± 0.5 Retainer
Slide Rail
Cross section
Unit: mm
L S load
(±0.8) (± 3)
305 229 — 152.4 254.0 — 149.2 260.3 273.0 4 7 490 0.6
356 279 — 203.2 304.8 — 200.0 311.1 323.8 4 7 400 0.7
406 305 — 254.0 355.6 — 250.8 361.9 374.6 4 7 390 0.8
457 330 203.2 304.8 406.4 212.7 301.6 412.7 425.4 5 8 380 0.9
508 381 228.6 355.6 457.2 238.1 352.4 463.5 476.2 5 8 330 1.0
559 406 254.0 406.4 508.0 263.5 403.2 514.3 527.0 5 8 320 1.1
610 432 279.4 457.2 558.8 288.9 454.0 565.1 577.8 5 8 310 1.2
660 483 304.8 508.0 609.6 314.3 504.8 615.9 628.6 5 8 280 1.3
711 508 330.2 558.8 660.4 339.7 555.6 666.7 679.4 5 8 270 1.4
Model number coding
FBL35M +406L
B-545
Model FBL 35J

15.9±0.5 G± 0.3
F±0.3
E±0.3
D± 0.3
111.1±0.3
Access hole Lead ball 25.4±0.3
4.5× 5.3 12.7±0.3 4.5× 5.3
101.6± 0.3
A± 0.3
B±0.3 9.5±0.5 Outer rail
25.4±0.5 C±0.3
Inner rail
1.6 1.6
35.3± 0.5 Retainer
Cross section
Unit: mm
L S load
(± 0.8) (± 3)
305 229 — 152.4 254.0 — 149.2 260.3 273.0 4 7 490 0.6
356 279 — 203.2 304.8 — 200.0 311.1 323.8 4 7 400 0.7
406 305 — 254.0 355.6 — 250.8 361.9 374.6 4 7 390 0.8
457 330 203.2 304.8 406.4 212.7 301.6 412.7 425.4 5 8 380 0.9
508 381 228.6 355.6 457.2 238.1 352.4 463.5 476.2 5 8 330 1.0
559 406 254.0 406.4 508.0 263.5 403.2 514.3 527.0 5 8 320 1.1
610 432 279.4 457.2 558.8 288.9 454.0 565.1 577.8 5 8 310 1.2
660 483 304.8 508.0 609.6 314.3 504.8 615.9 628.6 5 8 280 1.3
711 508 330.2 558.8 660.4 339.7 555.6 666.7 679.4 5 8 270 1.4
Model number coding
FBL35J +660L
B-546
Model FBL 35J-P13
28.6±0.5 F± 0.3
E± 0.3
D± 0.3
C± 0.3
Access hole 98.4±0.3

4.5× 5.3 Lead stick 12.7±0.3
101.6± 0.3 4.5× 5.3

A± 0.3 Disconnection spring
9.5±0.5 Outer rail
25.4±0.5 B±0.3
Rail length (L-4)±0.8 Inner rail
1.6 1.6
35.3± 0.5
Retainer
Slide Rail
Cross section
Unit: mm
L S load
A B C D E F Inner rail Outer rail N/pair kg/pair
(±0.8) (± 3)
305 224 152.4 — 136.5 — 247.6 260.3 3 6 490 0.6
356 275 203.2 — 187.3 — 298.4 311.1 3 6 400 0.72
406 315 254.0 — 238.1 — 349.2 361.9 3 6 390 0.84
457 330 203.2 406.4 200.0 228.9 400.0 412.7 4 7 380 0.96
508 381 228.6 457.2 225.4 339.7 450.8 463.5 4 7 330 1.04
559 406 254.0 508.0 250.8 390.5 501.6 514.3 4 7 320 1.16
610 432 279.4 558.8 276.2 441.3 552.4 565.1 4 7 310 1.24
660 483 304.8 609.6 301.6 492.1 603.2 615.9 4 7 280 1.36
711 493 330.2 660.4 327.0 542.9 654.0 666.7 4 7 270 1.48
Model number coding
FBL35J-P13 +559L
B-547
Model FBL 35J-P14
28.6±0.5 F±0.3
E± 0.3
D± 0.3
C±0.3

Lead stick 12.7±0.3
4.5× 5.3
101.6± 0.3 4.5× 5.3

Automatic free
A± 0.3 disconnection spring
25.4±0.5 B±0.3 9.5±0.5 Outer rail
Rail length (L-4)±0.8 Inner rail
1.6 1.6
35.3± 0.5
Retainer
Cross section
Unit: mm
L S load
A B C D E F Inner rail Outer rail N/pair kg/pair
(± 0.8) (± 3)
305 224 152.4 — 136.5 — 247.6 260.3 3 6 490 0.6
356 275 203.2 — 187.3 — 298.4 311.1 3 6 400 0.72
406 315 254.0 — 238.1 — 349.2 361.9 3 6 390 0.84
457 330 203.2 406.4 200.0 228.9 400.0 412.7 4 7 380 0.96
508 381 228.6 457.2 225.4 339.7 450.8 463.5 4 7 330 1.04
559 406 254.0 508.0 250.8 390.5 501.6 514.3 4 7 320 1.16
610 432 279.4 558.8 276.2 441.3 552.4 565.1 4 7 310 1.24
660 483 304.8 609.6 301.6 492.1 603.2 615.9 4 7 280 1.36
711 493 330.2 660.4 327.0 542.9 654.0 666.7 4 7 270 1.48
Model number coding
FBL35J-P14 +559L
B-548
Model FBL 35B
Stroke length S±3 Rail length L±0.8 0 to 35
63.5 139.7 213.9
41.4
4.7 6.5 3– 4.6×5.3 7.9
4.6×10.3 4.6×5.3 2– φ 4.3
3– 4.2×9.5 Mounting bracket

4.8 P11.6×4 12.7
101.6
3.7×6.4 3– φ 4.8
Rail length (L-4)±0.8 Mounting bracket
2– φ 4.5
4.6×31.8
48.5
Mounting bracket
Mounting bracket 9.6
4.66.8
Inner rail
23.9
30.5
33
（10.5）
9.5±0.5
4–
R
35.3±0.5 Outer rail 4.
5
Retainer （37.3）（37.3）
Slide Rail
Cross section 5.2×9.5
Unit: mm
Rail length Stroke Mounting hole Permissible load Mass

L S
Inner rail Outer rail N/pair kg/pair
(± 0.8) (±3)
324 216 7 7 115 0.8
375 267 7 7 105 0.92
425 305 7 7 100 1
476 318 7 7 90 1.12
527 368 7 7 83 1.24
578 419 7 7 73 1.32
629 445 7 7 66 1.44
679 495 7 7 61 1.6
Model number coding
FBL35B +375L
B-549
Model FBL 35T
15.9±0.5 C±0.3
B± 0.3
A± 0.3
（14.2） Access hole 111.1±0.3
4.5×5.3
36.1±0.5
101.6±0.3 4.5×5.3
D± 0.3
E±0.3 12.7±0.8
25.4±0.5 F± 0.3 Cabinet rail
Rail length (L-3)±0.8 Drawer rail
71.4± 0.8
1.6 1.6
Retainer
Cross section
Unit: mm
Rail length Stroke Mounting hole dimensions Mounting hole Permissible

Mass
L S load
A B C D E F Inner rail Outer rail kg/pair
(± 0.8) (± 3) N/pair
305 227 — 149.2 273.0 — 152.8 254.4 4 4 1120 2.16
356 278 — 200.0 323.8 — 203.6 305.2 4 4 1070 2.56
406 303 — 250.8 374.6 — 254.4 356.0 4 4 1020 2.96
457 354 212.7 301.6 425.4 203.2 305.2 406.8 5 5 1000 3.3
508 367 238.1 352.4 476.2 228.6 356.0 457.6 5 5 971 3.64
559 430 263.5 403.2 527.0 254.0 406.8 508.4 5 5 922 4.04
610 456 288.9 454.0 577.8 279.4 457.6 559.2 5 5 873 4.32
660 468 314.3 504.8 628.6 304.8 508.4 610.0 5 5 843 4.72
711 506 339.7 555.6 679.4 330.2 559.2 660.8 5 5 784 5.1
Model number coding
FBL35T +559L
B-550
Model FBL 27D

20±0.5 B±0.3
A± 0.3
100±0.3
2-φ 4.5 (both ends) 4.2×6 20±0.3
20±0.3 Access hole 4.2×6 2-φ 4.5 (both ends)

100±0.3
A± 0.3
B± 0.3 20±0.5 Center rail
Rail length L± 0.8 Cabinet rail
Drawer rail
27±0.5
1.6 1.6
Retainer
19.1±0.5
Cross section
Slide Rail
Unit: mm
Rail length Stroke Mounting hole Permissible

Mounting hole Mass
L S dimensions load
kg/pair
(±0.8) (±3) A B Drawer rail Cabinet rail N/pair
200 229 140.0 160.0 5 5 370 0.64

250 276 190.0 210.0 5 5 360 0.8
300 327 240.0 260.0 5 5 350 0.96
350 376 290.0 310.0 5 5 330 1.12
400 426 340.0 360.0 5 5 310 1.28
450 475 390.0 410.0 5 5 290 1.46
500 524 440.0 460.0 5 5 280 1.6
Model number coding
FBL27D +200L
B-551
Model FBL 35E-P14

15.9±0.5 D±0.3
C± 0.3
B±0.3
A±0.3
Automatic free
disconnection spring 111.1±0.3
25.4±0.3
12.7±0.3
12.7±0.3
25.4±0.3
4.5×5.3 Access hole Rubber cushion 4.5×5.3
101.6±0.3
E± 0.3 13±0.5 Outer rail
F± 0.3 Center rail
15.9±0.5 G± 0.3
35.3±0.5
1.6 1.6
15.3
24.9
1.6
Inner rail
Retainer
Cross section
Unit: mm
L S load
(± 0.8) (± 3)
305 330 — 149.2 260.3 273.0 233.1 254.0 266.7 7 7 294 0.88
356 381 — 200.0 311.1 323.8 258.5 304.8 317.5 7 7 284 1.04
406 432 — 250.8 361.9 374.6 283.9 355.6 368.3 7 7 275 1.16
457 483 212.7 301.6 412.7 425.4 309.3 406.4 419.1 7 8 255 1.32
508 533 238.1 352.4 463.5 476.2 334.7 457.2 469.9 7 8 235 1.48
Model number coding
FBL35E-P14 +508L
B-552
Model FBL 35G-P13

15.9±0.5 E± 0.3
123.8±0.3 D±0.3
12.7±0.3 Disconnection spring F± 0.3
Access hole 4.5×5.3 Lock mechanism
4.5×5.3 Lead stick 12.7±0.3 Rubber cushion

A± 0.3 25.4±0.3 Rubber cushion
B± 0.3 111.1±0.3
C± 0.3
D± 0.3 19.1±0.5
E± 0.3
15.9±0.5 Cabinet rail
Drawer rail
35.3± 0.5
1.6 1.6
Retainer
Slide Rail
Center rail
Cross section
Unit: mm

Mass
L S Drawer Cabinet load
A B C D E F kg/pair
(±0.8) (± 3) rail rail N/pair
305 327 — — — 260.3 273.0 — 5 6 623 1.2
356 378 — — 298.4 311.1 323.8 — 6 6 586 1.4
406 429 — — 349.2 361.9 374.6 250.8 6 7 555 1.6
457 480 212.7 — 400.0 412.7 425.4 301.6 7 7 516 1.8
508 530 238.1 365.1 450.8 463.5 476.2 352.4 8 7 475 2
559 581 263.5 415.9 501.6 514.3 527.0 403.2 8 7 444 2.2
610 632 288.9 466.7 552.4 565.1 577.8 454.0 8 7 413 2.4
660 683 314.3 517.5 603.2 615.9 628.6 504.8 8 7 382 2.6
711 734 339.7 568.3 654.0 666.7 679.4 555.6 8 7 355 2.8
Model number coding
FBL35G-P13 +356L
B-553
Model FBL 35G-P14

15.9±0.5 E± 0.3
123.8±0.3 Automatic free D± 0.3
12.7±0.3 disconnection spring F±0.3
Access hole 4.5× 5.3 Lock mechanism
4.5× 5.3 12.7±0.3 Rubber cushion

Lead stick
A± 0.3 25.4±0.3 Rubber cushion
B± 0.3 111.1±0.3
C± 0.3
D± 0.3 19.1± 0.5
E± 0.3
15.9±0.5 Cabinet rail
Rail length (L-4)±0.8 Drawer rail
35.3± 0.5
1.6 1.6
Retainer
Center rail
Cross section
Unit: mm

Mass
L S Drawer Cabinet load
A B C D E F kg/pair
(± 0.8) (± 3) rail rail N/pair
305 327 — — — 260.3 273.0 — 5 6 623 1.2
356 378 — — 298.4 311.1 323.8 — 6 6 586 1.4
406 429 — — 349.2 361.9 374.6 250.8 6 7 555 1.6
457 480 212.7 — 400.0 412.7 425.4 301.6 7 7 516 1.8
508 530 238.1 365.1 450.8 463.5 476.2 352.4 8 7 475 2
559 581 263.5 415.9 501.6 514.3 527.0 403.2 8 7 444 2.2
610 632 288.9 466.7 552.4 565.1 577.8 454.0 8 7 413 2.4
660 683 314.3 517.5 603.2 615.9 628.6 504.8 8 7 382 2.6
711 734 339.7 568.3 654.0 666.7 679.4 555.6 8 7 355 2.8
Model number coding
FBL35G-P14 +610L
B-554
Model FBL 35D
Stroke length S± 3 Rail length L± 0.8

15.9±0.5 D±0.3
C± 0.3
B± 0.3
A±0.3
111.1±0.3
25.4±0.3
4.5× 5.3 12.7±0.3
12.7±0.3 Access hole 4.5× 5.3

25.4±0.3
111.1±0.3 19.1±0.5
A±0.3 Cabinet rail
B±0.3 Drawer rail
C± 0.3
D± 0.3 15.9±0.5
35.3± 0.5
1.6 1.6
Rail length L±0.8
Retainer
Slide Rail
Center rail
Cross section
Unit: mm

Mass
L S load
A B C D Drawer rail Cabinet rail kg/pair
(± 0.8) (± 3) N/pair
305 327 — 149.2 260.3 273.0 7 7 588 1.28
356 378 — 200.0 311.1 323.8 7 7 578 1.48
406 429 — 250.8 361.9 374.6 7 7 559 1.72
457 480 212.7 301.6 412.7 425.4 8 8 549 1.96
508 530 238.1 352.4 463.5 476.2 8 8 529 2.12
559 581 263.5 403.2 514.3 527.0 8 8 500 2.4
610 632 288.9 454.0 565.1 577.8 8 8 480 2.56
660 683 314.3 504.8 615.9 628.6 8 8 461 2.8
711 734 339.7 555.6 666.7 679.4 8 8 441 3
Model number coding
FBL35D +711L
B-555
Model FBL 35W
15.9± 0.5 D± 0.3
C± 0.3
B± 0.3
A± 0.3
25.4±0.3
12.7±0.3
4.5× 5.3
4.5×5.3
12.7±0.8
Access hole
12.7±0.3
25.4±0.3
1.6
35.3±0.5
111.1±0.3
A±0.3
B± 0.3
C± 0.3
D± 0.3 15.9±0.5
Rail length L± 0.8
81.3± 0.8
46± 0.5
Drawer rail
Center rail
1.6
1.6
Retainer
Cabinet rail
Cross section
Unit: mm

Mass
L S load
A B C D Drawer rail Cabinet rail kg/pair
(±0.8) (± 3) N/pair
305 327 — 149.2 260.4 273.1 7 7 706 1.68
356 378 — 200.0 311.2 323.9 7 7 676 2
406 429 — 250.8 362.0 374.7 7 7 637 2.32
457 480 225.4 301.6 412.8 425.5 8 8 598 2.64
508 530 250.8 352.4 463.6 476.3 8 8 569 2.88
559 581 276.2 403.2 514.4 527.1 8 8 520 3.2
610 632 301.6 454.0 565.2 577.9 8 8 480 3.52
660 683 327.0 504.8 616.0 628.7 8 8 422 3.84
711 734 352.4 555.6 666.8 679.5 8 8 353 4.12
Model number coding
FBL35W +356L
B-556
Model FBL 51H

19.1± 0.5 G±0.3
F±0.3
E±0.3
D±0.3
25.4± 0.3
4.5×5.3
A± 0.3 Rubber cushion 4.5× 5.3

Access hole
B± 0.3
Outer rail
19.1±0.5 C±0.3 Center rail t＝1.6
1.6
51.5± 0.5
Inner rail
1.8
Retainer
Slide Rail
12.7±0.5
Cross section
Unit: mm
L S load
(± 0.8) (± 3) A B C D E F G Inner rail Outer rail N/pair kg/pair
305 330 76.2 177.8 254.0 76.2 190.5 241.3 266.7 4 6 850 1.46
356 381 101.6 203.2 304.8 88.9 215.9 292.1 317.5 4 6 820 1.72
406 432 127.0 228.6 355.6 127.0 241.3 342.9 368.3 4 6 770 1.89
457 483 127.0 279.4 406.4 127.0 292.1 393.7 419.1 4 6 730 2.26
508 533 152.4 304.8 457.2 152.4 317.5 444.5 469.9 4 6 710 2.52
559 584 177.8 330.2 508.0 177.8 342.9 495.3 520.7 4 6 690 2.72
610 635 177.8 381.0 558.8 177.8 393.7 546.1 571.5 4 6 660 3.00
660 686 203.2 406.4 609.6 203.2 419.1 596.9 622.3 4 6 630 3.25
711 737 228.6 431.8 660.4 228.6 444.5 647.7 673.1 4 6 610 3.54
762 787 228.6 457.2 711.2 228.6 469.9 698.5 723.9 4 6 580 3.86
Model number coding
FBL51H +610L
B-557
Model FBL 51H-P13

19.1±0.5 G± 0.3
F± 0.3
E± 0.3
4.5×5.3 D±0.3 Lock
Disconnection spring
Lead stick 25.4±0.3 mechanism
A± 0.3 Access hole

Rubber cushion 4.5× 5.3
B± 0.3
19.1±0.5 C±0.3 Outer rail
Rail length (L-11)± 0.8 Center rail t＝1.6
Inner rail
51.5± 0.5
1.8 1.6
Retainer
12.7±0.5
Cross section
Unit: mm
L S load
(± 0.8) (±3) A B C D E F G Inner rail Outer rail N/pair kg/pair
305 330 76.2 — 190.5 76.2 190.5 241.3 266.7 3 6 850 1.46
356 381 101.6 — 266.7 88.9 215.9 292.1 317.5 3 6 820 1.72
406 432 127.0 — 304.8 127.0 241.3 342.9 368.3 3 6 770 1.89
457 483 127.0 317.5 368.3 127.0 292.1 393.7 419.1 4 6 730 2.26
508 533 152.4 355.6 406.4 152.4 317.5 444.5 469.9 4 6 710 2.52
559 584 177.8 381.0 457.2 177.8 342.9 495.3 520.7 4 6 690 2.72
610 635 177.8 430.8 508.0 177.8 393.7 546.1 571.5 4 6 660 3.00
660 686 203.2 457.2 558.8 203.2 419.1 596.9 622.3 4 6 630 3.25
711 737 228.6 508.0 609.6 228.6 444.5 647.7 673.1 4 6 610 3.54
762 787 228.6 533.4 660.4 228.6 469.9 698.5 723.9 4 6 580 3.86
Model number coding
FBL51H-P13 +559L
B-558
Model FBL 51H-P14

19.1±0.5 G± 0.3
F±0.3
Automatic free E± 0.3
disconnection spring D±0.3
4.5× 5.3 25.4±0.3
Lead stick
A± 0.3
Access hole Rubber cushion 4.5×5.3
B± 0.3
Outer rail
19.1±0.5 C±0.3
Center rail t＝1.6
Rail length (L-11)± 0.8
1.6
Inner rail
51.5± 0.5
1.8
Retainer
12.7±0.5
Slide Rail
Cross section
Unit: mm
L S load
(± 0.8) (± 3) A B C D E F G Inner rail Outer rail N/pair kg/pair
305 330 76.2 — 254.0 76.2 190.5 241.3 266.7 3 6 850 1.46
356 381 127.0 — 304.8 88.9 215.9 292.1 317.5 3 6 820 1.72
406 432 152.4 317.5 355.6 127.0 241.3 342.9 368.3 4 6 770 1.89
457 483 177.8 368.3 406.4 127.0 292.1 393.7 419.1 4 6 730 2.26
508 533 152.4 419.1 457.2 152.4 317.5 444.5 469.9 4 6 710 2.52
559 584 177.8 469.9 508.0 177.8 342.9 495.3 520.7 4 6 690 2.72
610 635 177.8 520.7 558.8 177.8 393.7 546.1 571.5 4 6 660 3.00
660 686 203.2 571.5 609.6 203.2 419.1 596.9 622.3 4 6 630 3.25
711 737 228.6 622.3 660.4 228.6 444.5 647.7 673.1 4 6 610 3.54
762 787 228.6 673.1 711.2 228.6 469.9 698.5 723.9 4 6 580 3.86
Model number coding
FBL51H-P14 +305L
B-559
Model FBL 35K

15.9±0.5 C±0.3
B±0.3
A±0.3
4.5× 5.3 111.1±0.3
36.1
Access hole 4.5×5.3
111.1±0.3 Cabinet rail t=1.6
A±0.3 Center rail t=1.6
B±0.3
C± 0.3 15.9±0.5
Rail length L± 0.8
71.4± 0.8
1.6 1.6
23.9±0.8 Drawer rail t=1.6
Cross section
Unit: mm

Mass
L S load
A B C Drawer rail Cabinet rail kg/pair
(±0.8) (±3) N/pair
305 327 — 149.2 273.0 4 4 2670 4.04
356 378 — 200.0 323.8 4 4 2630 4.8
406 429 — 250.8 374.6 4 4 2540 5.6
457 480 212.7 301.6 425.4 5 5 2450 6.04
508 530 238.1 352.4 476.2 5 5 2360 6.92
559 581 263.5 403.2 527.0 5 5 2250 7.56
610 632 288.9 454.0 577.8 5 5 2120 8.4
660 683 314.3 504.8 628.6 5 5 1960 9
711 734 339.7 555.6 679.4 5 5 1780 9.68
Model number coding
FBL35K +711L
B-560
Model FBL 56H

19.1±0.5 G±0.3
F±0.3
E±0.3
4.5× 5.3 D±0.3
25.4±0.3
Access hole Rubber cushion 4.5× 5.3
Outer rail
A± 0.3
B±0.3 Center rail t=1.6
19.1±0.5 C±0.3 Inner rail
Rail length (L-9.5)±0.8
2.0 2.0
56±0.5
Retainer
Slide Rail
16±0.5
Cross section
Unit: mm

Mass
L S load
A B C D E F G Inner rail Outer rail kg/pair
(±0.8) (± 3) N/pair
305 330 76.2 177.8 254.0 76.2 190.5 241.3 266.7 4 6 961 1.76
356 381 101.6 203.2 304.8 88.9 215.9 292.1 317.5 4 6 951 2.04
406 432 127.0 228.6 355.6 127.0 241.3 342.9 368.3 4 6 941 2.36
457 483 127.0 279.4 406.4 127.0 292.1 393.7 419.1 4 6 922 2.64
508 533 152.4 304.8 457.2 152.4 317.5 444.5 469.9 4 6 902 2.96
559 584 177.8 330.2 508.0 177.8 342.9 495.3 520.7 4 6 882 3.24
610 635 177.8 381.0 558.8 177.8 393.7 546.1 571.5 4 6 863 3.6
660 686 203.2 406.4 609.6 203.2 419.1 596.9 622.3 4 6 843 3.84
711 737 228.6 431.8 660.4 228.6 444.5 647.7 673.1 4 6 824 4.06
762 787 228.6 457.2 711.2 228.6 469.9 698.5 723.9 4 6 784 4.44
Model number coding
FBL56H +406L
B-561
Model FBL 56H-P13
Stroke length S± 3 Rail length L± 0.8

19.1±0.5 G±0.3
F± 0.3
Disconnection spring E± 0.3
4.5× 5.3 D± 0.3
25.4± 0.3 Lock mechanism
A± 0.3
B± 0.3 Lead stick 4.5×5.3
19.1±0.5 C±0.3 Rubber cushion
Access hole
Rail length (L-11)±0.8 Outer rail
Center rail t=1.6
Inner rail
Retainer
2.0 2.0
56± 0.5
16± 0.5
Cross section
Unit: mm

Mass
L S load
A B C D E F G Inner rail Outer rail kg/pair
(± 0.8) (± 3) N/pair
305 330 76.2 — 254.0 76.2 190.5 241.3 266.7 3 6 961 1.76
356 381 127.0 — 304.8 88.9 215.9 292.1 317.5 3 6 951 2.04
406 432 152.4 317.5 355.6 127.0 241.3 342.9 368.3 4 6 941 2.36
457 483 177.8 368.3 406.4 127.0 292.1 393.7 419.1 4 6 922 2.64
508 533 152.4 419.1 457.2 152.4 317.5 444.5 469.9 4 6 902 2.96
559 584 177.8 469.9 508.0 177.8 342.9 495.3 520.7 4 6 882 3.24
610 635 177.8 520.7 558.8 177.8 393.7 546.1 571.5 4 6 863 3.6
660 686 203.2 571.5 609.6 203.2 419.1 596.9 622.3 4 6 843 3.84
711 737 228.6 622.3 660.4 228.6 444.5 647.7 673.1 4 6 824 4.06
762 787 228.6 673.1 711.2 228.6 469.9 698.5 723.9 4 6 784 4.44
Model number coding
FBL56H-P13 +762L
B-562
Model FBL 56H-P14

19.1±0.5 G±0.3
F±0.3
Automatic free E±0.3
disconnection spring Lead stick D±0.3
25.4±0.3
4.5× 5.3
A± 0.3
4.5× 5.3
B±0.3 Access hole
Rubber cushion
19.1±0.5 C±0.3 Outer rail
Rail length (L-11)± 0.8 Center rail t=1.6
Inner rail
Retainer
2.0 2.0
56±0.5
Slide Rail
16±0.5
Cross section
Unit: mm

Mass
L S load
(±0.8) (± 3)
305 330 76.2 — 254.0 76.2 190.5 241.3 266.7 3 6 961 1.76
356 381 127.0 — 304.8 88.9 215.9 292.1 317.5 3 6 951 2.04
406 432 152.4 317.5 355.6 127.0 241.3 342.9 368.3 4 6 941 2.36
457 483 177.8 368.3 406.4 127.0 292.1 393.7 419.1 4 6 922 2.64
508 533 152.4 419.1 457.2 152.4 317.5 444.5 469.9 4 6 902 2.96
559 584 177.8 469.9 508.0 177.8 342.9 495.3 520.7 4 6 882 3.24
610 635 177.8 520.7 558.8 177.8 393.7 546.1 571.5 4 6 863 3.6
660 686 203.2 571.5 609.6 203.2 419.1 596.9 622.3 4 6 843 3.84
711 737 228.6 622.3 660.4 228.6 444.5 647.7 673.1 4 6 824 4.06
762 787 228.6 673.1 711.2 228.6 469.9 698.5 723.9 4 6 784 4.44
Model number coding
FBL56H-P14 +457L
B-563
Model FBL 35F
Rail length L±0.8
1.6 （A± 0.8） Stroke length S±3
8 （B± 0.3） 4– φ 4.5 101.6±0.3
6.2
4.5×5.3 1.6
Access hole
47.6±0.3
60± 0.8
C± 0.3
D± 0.3
E± 0.3
25.4±0.5 Mounting plate
Outer rail
Inner rail
Retainer
35.3± 0.5
1.6
（9.5）
11.1±0.5 1.6
Cross section
Unit: mm
Model No. #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 Dimension of the outer
Mounting plate
Length (A±0.8) 76.2 101.6 127 152.4 177.8 203.2 rail mounting hole (± 0.3)
Rail length L(± 0.8) Stroke length S (±3) * Varies with the combination with the mounting plate above. C D E
305 225.4 200.0 174.6 149.2 — — — 152.4 254.0
356 276.2 250.8 225.4 200.0 174.6 149.2 — 203.2 304.8
406 327.0 301.6 276.2 250.8 225.4 200.0 — 254.0 355.6
457 377.8 352.4 327.0 301.6 276.2 250.8 203.2 304.8 406.4
508 428.6 403.2 377.8 352.4 327.0 301.6 228.6 355.6 457.2
559 479.4 454.0 428.6 403.2 377.8 352.4 254.0 406.4 508.0
610 530.2 504.8 479.4 454.0 428.6 403.2 279.4 457.2 558.8
660 581.0 555.6 530.2 504.8 479.4 454.0 304.8 508.0 609.6
711 631.8 606.4 581.0 555.6 530.2 504.8 330.2 558.8 660.4
762 682.6 657.2 631.8 606.4 581.0 555.6 355.6 609.6 711.2
Pitch of the mounting plate
60.2 85.6 111.0 136.4 161.8 187.2 — — —
mounting hole (B± 0.3)
Permissible load (N/pair) 294 392 490 588 686 784 — — —
Note) The permissible load indicates the value for a pair of 2 units.
Model number coding
FBL35F +356L #5
Model number Model number of mounting plate
Overall rail length (in mm)
B-564
Model FBL 56F
Outer rail length L±0.8
2 （A± 0.8） Stroke length S±3 2
8 （B± 0.3） 4– φ 4.5 4.5×5.3
Access hole
67.6± 0.3
80± 0.8
101.6±0.3
6.2
C±0.3
16±0.5
D±0.3
25.4± 0.5 E±0.3 14±0.5
Inner rail
56±0.5
2
Retainer
Outer rail
Mounting plate
Slide Rail
Cross section 2
Unit: mm
Model No. #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 Dimension of the outer
Mounting plate
Length (A±0.8) 76.2 101.6 127 152.4 177.8 203.2 rail mounting hole (± 0.3)
Rail length L(± 0.8) Stroke length S (±3) * Varies with the combination with the mounting plate above. C D E
305 224.6 199.2 173.8 148.4 — — — 152.4 254.0
356 275.4 250.0 224.6 199.2 173.8 148.4 — 203.2 304.8
406 326.2 300.8 275.4 250.0 224.6 199.2 — 254.0 355.6
457 377.0 351.6 326.2 300.8 275.4 250.0 203.2 304.8 406.4
508 427.8 402.4 377.0 351.6 326.2 300.8 228.6 355.6 457.2
559 478.6 453.2 427.8 402.4 377.0 351.6 254.0 406.4 508.0
610 529.4 504.0 478.6 453.2 427.8 402.4 279.4 457.2 558.8
660 580.2 554.8 529.4 504.0 478.6 453.2 304.8 508.0 609.6
711 631.0 605.6 580.2 554.8 529.4 504.0 330.2 558.8 660.4
762 681.8 656.4 631.0 605.6 580.2 554.8 355.6 609.6 711.2
Pitch of the mounting plate
60.2 85.6 111.0 136.4 161.8 187.2 — — —
mounting hole (B±0.3)
Permissible load (N/pair) 588 784 980 1176 1372 1568 — — —
Model number coding
FBL56F +305L #6
Model number Model number of mounting plate
Overall rail length (in mm)
B-565
Model FBL 48DR
Rail length L1
2 Inner rail length L2 Stroke length S 2
20 40 40 40 40 20 n-φ 6 through
P＝350 6-M5 through

Access hole
30 A 30
7.3
Inner rail
28.2
48 2 2
Retainer
Outer rail t=1.6
11.2 Reinforced channel
14.6
Cross section
Unit: mm
Outer rail length Inner rail length Stroke length Mounting hole pitch No. of mounting holes
L1 L2 S A n
1110 496 610 P350×3 4
1110 696 410 P350×3 4
1460 496 960 P350×4 5
1460 696 760 P350×4 5
1810 696 1110 P350×5 6
2160 496 1660 P350×6 7
2160 696 1460 P350×6 7
Model number coding
FBL48DR +1810/696L
B-566
Model E15

10±0.5 A±0.3
Access hole
2-M3 through
10±0.5 A± 0.3
Countersunk for 2-M2.6
Rail length L±0.8 (for class 1 countersunk screw No. 0)
4.5 Outer rail

1
Inner rail
15± 0.5
9
Ball
5±0.5
Slide Rail
Cross section
Unit: mm
Rail length Stroke Mounting hole dimensions Permissible load

L(± 0.8) S (± 3) A± 0.3 N/pair
50 20 30.0 5
80 45 60.0 8
100 60 80.0 10
120 75 100.0 10
Model number coding
E15 +100L
B-567
Model E20

15±0.5 B± 0.3
n-M4 through
A±0.3
(Access hole)
A± 0.3
15±0.5 B±0.3 n-φ 3.5 90° countersunk (φ 6)
Rail length L±0.8
7.2
Outer rail
1.6
20±0.5
12
Inner rail
Ball
8±0.5
Cross section
Unit: mm

L (± 0.8) S (±3) A± 0.3 B±0.3 n (pcs) N/pair
80 45 50.0 — 2 20
100 60 70.0 — 2 30
150 85 60.0 120.0 3 80
200 120 85.0 170.0 3 140
300 180 135.0 270.0 3 145
Model number coding
E20 +150L
B-568
Model D20

15± 0.5 B± 0.3
Countersunk for n-M3
A± 0.3
A± 0.3 Access hole Countersunk for n-M3

15±0.5 B±0.3
Rail length L±0.8
7.2
1.6
Cabinet rail Center rail
20±0.5
Ball
12
Slide Rail
Drawer rail
16±0.5
Cross section
Unit: mm

L (± 0.8) S (±3) A±0.3 B±0.3 n (pcs) N/pair
80 80 50.0 — 2 20
100 100 70.0 — 2 30
150 160 60.0 120.0 3 80
200 223 85.0 170.0 3 140
300 345 135.0 270.0 3 145
Model number coding
D20 +300L
B-569
B-570
Ball Screw
General Catalog
B-571
Ball Screw
General Catalog
(Separate)
Dimensional Drawing, Dimensional Table Features and Types................................ A-664
Precision, Caged Ball Screw Features of the Ball Screw..................... A-664
Models SBN, SBK and HBN ............... B-575 • Driving Torque One Third of the Sliding Screw A-664
Standard-Stock Precision Ball Screw Unfinished Shaft Ends • Ensuring High Accuracy............................ A-667
Models BIF, BNFN, MDK, MBF and BNF.. B-583 • Capable of Micro Feeding ......................... A-668
Standard-Stock Precision Ball Screw • High Rigidity without Backlash ................... A-669
Finished Shaft Ends Model BNK ....... B-607 • Capable of Fast Feed ............................... A-670
Precision Ball Screw Types of Ball Screws.............................. A-672
Models BIF, DIK, BNFN, DKN, BLW,
BNF, DK, MDK, BLK/WGF and BNT... B-651 Point of Selection ................................... A-674
Precision Rotary Ball Screw Flowchart for Selecting a Ball Screw.... A-674
Models DIR and BLR .......................... B-719 Accuracy of the Ball Screw ................... A-677
Precision Ball Screw / Spline • Lead angle accuracy ................................ A-677
Models BNS-A, BNS, NS-A and NS ... B-725 • Accuracy of the Mounting Surface .............. A-680
Rolled Ball Screw • Axial clearance ........................................ A-685
Models JPF, BTK, MTF, BLK/WTF, CNF and BNT..... B-735 • Preload .................................................. A-686
Rolled Rotary Ball Screw Model BLR ... B-747 Selecting a Screw Shaft ......................... A-690
• Maximum Length of the Screw Shaft .......... A-690
Maximum Length of the Ball Screw Shaft ... B-750 • Standard Combinations of Shaft Diameter and Lead for the Precision Ball Screw A-692
• Standard Combinations of Shaft Diameter and Lead for the Rolled Ball Screw .. A-693
Ball Screw Peripherals........................... B-753 • Permissible Axial Load ............................. A-694
Model EK Square Type Support Unit on the Fixed Side. B-754 • Permissible Rotational Speed .................... A-696
Model BK Square Type Support Unit on the Fixed Side. B-756 Selecting a Nut........................................ A-699
Model FK Round Type Support Unit on the Fixed Side.. B-758 • Types of Nuts .......................................... A-699
Model EF Square Type Support Unit on the Supported Side . B-762 Selecting a Model Number..................... A-702
Model BF Square Type Support Unit on the Supported Side. B-764 • Calculating the Axial Load ......................... A-702
Model FF Round Type Support Unit on the Supported Side.. B-766 • Static Safety Factor .................................. A-703
Recommended Shapes of Shaft Ends - Shape • Studying the Service Life .......................... A-704
H (H1, H2 and H3) (Support Unit Models FK and EK) B-768 Studying the Rigidity.............................. A-707
Recommended Shapes of Shaft Ends - Shape • Axial Rigidity of the Feed Screw System ..... A-707
J (J1, J2 and J3) (Support Unit Model BK) ..... B-770 Studying the positioning accuracy....... A-711
Recommended Shapes of Shaft Ends - Shape K • Causes of Error in Positioning Accuracy ...... A-711
(Support Unit Models FF, EF and BF)............ B-772 • Studying the Lead Angle Accuracy ............. A-711
Nut bracket.............................................. B-774 • Studying the Axial Clearance ..................... A-711
Lock Nut .................................................. B-776 • Studying the Axial Clearance of the Feed Screw System... A-713
• Studying the Thermal Displacement through Heat Generation . A-715
Options.................................................... B-777 • Studying the orientation change during traveling . A-716
Dimensions of the Ball Screw Nut Attached Studying the rotational torque .............. A-717
with Wiper Ring W and QZ Lubricator..... B-778 • Friction Torque Due to an External Load ..... A-717
• Torque Due to a Preload on the Ball Screw . A-718
• Torque required for acceleration ................ A-718
Studying the Driving Motor ................... A-719
• When Using a Servomotor ........................ A-719
• When Using a Stepping Motor (Pulse Motor) ............ A-721
Examples of Selecting a Ball Screw ..... A-722
• High-speed Transfer Equipment (Horizontal Use) A-722
• Vertical Conveyance System ..................... A-736
B-572
Accuracy of Each Model........................ A-747 Rolled Ball Screw
Precision, Caged Ball Screw Models SBN, SBK and HBN .. A-748 Models JPF, BTK, MTF, BLK/WTF, CNF and BNT .... A-790
• Structure and features.............................. A-749 • Structure and features .............................. A-791
• Ball Cage Effect ...................................... A-749 • Types and Features ................................. A-792
• Types and Features ................................. A-752 • Service Life ............................................ A-704
• Service Life ............................................ A-704 • Axial clearance ....................................... A-685
• Axial clearance ....................................... A-685 • Accuracy Standards ................................. A-678
• Accuracy Standards................................. A-678
Rolled Rotary Ball Screw Model BLR ... A-796
Standard-Stock Precision Ball Screw Unfinished Shaft Ends • Structure and features .............................. A-797
Models BIF, BNFN, MDK, MBF and BNF . A-754 • Type ...................................................... A-797
• Structure and features.............................. A-755 • Service Life ............................................ A-704
• Types and Features ................................. A-756 • Axial clearance ....................................... A-685
• Service Life ............................................ A-704 • Accuracy Standards ................................. A-798
• Nut Types and Axial Clearance ................. A-758 • Example of Assembly............................... A-799
Standard-Stock Precision Ball Screw Finished Shaft Ends Model BNK A-760 Ball Screw Peripherals........................... A-801
• Features ................................................ A-761 Support Unit Models EK, BK, FK, EF, BF and FF .... A-802
• Types and Features ................................. A-761 • Structure and features .............................. A-802
• Table of Ball Screw Types with Finished Shaft Ends • Type ...................................................... A-804
and the Corresponding Support Units and Nut Brackets .. A-762 • Types of Support Units and Applicable
Screw Shaft Outer Diameters ................... A-805
Precision Ball Screw Models BIF, DIK, BNFN, • Model Numbers of Bearings and Characteristic Values A-806
DKN, BLW, BNF, DK, MDK, BLK/WGF and BNT .. A-764 • Example of Installation ............................. A-807
• Structure and features.............................. A-765 • Mounting Procedure ................................ A-808
• Types and Features ................................. A-769 • Types of Recommended Shapes of the Shaft Ends . A-810
• Service Life ............................................ A-704 Nut Bracket Model MC ........................... A-812
• Axial clearance ....................................... A-685 • Structure and features .............................. A-812
• Accuracy Standards................................. A-678 • Type ...................................................... A-812
Lock Nut Model RN ................................ A-813
Precision Rotary Ball Screw Models DIR and BLR .. A-772 • Structure and features .............................. A-813
• Structure and features.............................. A-773 • Type ...................................................... A-813
• Type ...................................................... A-775
• Service Life ............................................ A-704 Options.................................................... A-815
• Axial clearance ....................................... A-685 Lubrication.............................................. A-816
• Accuracy Standards................................. A-776 Corrosion Prevention (Surface Treatment, etc.) ..... A-816
• Example of Assembly .............................. A-778 Contamination Protection ..................... A-816
• QZ Lubricator.......................................... A-817
Precision Ball Screw / Spline Models BNS-A, BNS, NS-A and NS A-780 • Wiper Ring W ......................................... A-819
• Structure and features.............................. A-781 • Specifications of the Bellows ..................... A-822
• Type ...................................................... A-782
• Service Life ............................................ A-704 Mounting Procedure and Maintenance.... A-824
• Axial clearance ....................................... A-685 Method for Mounting the Ball Screw Shaft . A-824
• Accuracy Standards................................. A-783 Maintenance Method.............................. A-826
• Action Patterns ....................................... A-784 • Amount of Lubricant ................................. A-826
• Example of Assembly .............................. A-787
• Example of Using .................................... A-788 Precautions on Use................................ A-827
• Precautions on Use ................................. A-789
B-573
B-574
Ball Screw
(Separate)
Model SBN ........................................ B-576 Structure and features....................... A-749
Model SBK ........................................ B-578 Ball Cage Effect ................................ A-749
Model HBN........................................ B-580 Types and Features .......................... A-752
Service Life ....................................... A-704
Options Axial clearance.................................. A-685
Dimensions of the Ball Screw Nut Attached Accuracy Standards .......................... A-678
with Wiper Ring W and QZ Lubricator ....... B-778

the Products".
B-575
Model SBN
A Tm
(Greasing hole)
30°
Plug
D
PC
30° 30°
Screw shaft Ball center- Thread No. of

outer Lead to-center minor loaded Basic load rating Rigidity
diameter diameter diameter circuits
Model No.
Ca C0a K
d Ph dp dc Rows x turns kN kN N/μ m
{ SBN 3210-7 32 10 33.75 26.4 1×3.5 43 73.1 836.7
{ SBN 3212-5 32 12 34 26.1 1×2.5 37.4 58.7 612.2
{ SBN 3610-7 36 10 37.75 30.4 1×3.5 45.6 82.3 920.9
{ SBN 3612-7 36 12 38 30.1 1×3.5 53.2 92.6 934.5
{ SBN 3616-5 36 16 38 30.1 1×2.5 39.7 66.4 676
{ SBN 4012-5 40 12 42 34.1 1×2.5 42 73.6 735.4
{ SBN 4016-5 40 16 42 34.1 1×2.5 41.9 73.8 736.6
{ SBN 4512-5 45 12 47 39.2 1×2.5 44.4 82.9 809.1
{ SBN 4516-5 45 16 47 39.2 1×2.5 44.3 83.1 810.1
{ SBN 5012-5 50 12 52 44.1 1×2.5 46.6 92.2 880.9
{ SBN 5016-5 50 16 52 44.1 1×2.5 46.6 92.4 881.7
{ SBN 5020-5 50 20 52 44.1 1×2.5 46.5 92.6 882.8
Note) With model SBN, the raising of both ends of the thread groove is not available. When designing your system this way,
contact THK.
Those models marked with { can be attached with QZ Lubricator or the wiper ring. For dimensions of the ball screw nut
with either accessory being attached, see B-778.
Model number coding
SBN4012-5 RR G0 +1400L C5
Model number Seal symbol (*1) Overall screw shaft
length (in mm)
Clearance in the axial direction Accuracy symbol (*3)
(G0 for all SBN variations) (*2)
(*1) See A-816. (*2) See A-685. (*3) See A-678.
B-576
L1
H B1
h
φ d1
φ d2
φ D 1 φ dp φ dc φ d φ Dg6
Unit: mm
Nut dimensions Screw shaft

Nut Shaft
inertial
mass mass
Outer Flange Overall Greasing moment/mm
diameter diameter length hole
D D1 L1 H B1 PCD d1×d2×h Tm A kg•cm2/mm kg kg/m
74 108 120 15 105 90 9×14×8.5 38 M6 8.08×10 -3
3.1 3.6
76 121 117 18 99 98 11×17.5×11 39 M6 8.08×10-3 3.7 3.5
77 120 123 18 105 98 11×17.5×11 40 M6 1.29×10-2 3.8 5.0
Ball Screw
81 124 140 18 122 102 11×17.5×11 42 M6 1.29×10-2 4.7 4.8
81 124 140 18 122 102 11×17.5×11 42 M6 1.29×10-2 4.7 5.6
84 126 119 18 101 104 11×17.5×11 43 M6 1.97×10-2 4.2 6.4
84 126 144 18 126 104 11×17.5×11 43 M6 1.97×10-2 4.9 7.3
90 130 119 18 101 110 11×17.5×11 46 PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 4.6 8.6
90 130 140 18 122 110 11×17.5×11 46 PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 5.3 9.6
95 141 119 22 97 117 14×20×13 48 PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 5.3 11.1
95 141 143 22 121 117 14×20×13 48 PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 6.1 12.2
95 141 169 22 147 117 14×20×13 48 PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 7.0 12.8
Note) The rigidity values in the table represent the spring constants obtained from the
load and the elastic deformation when providing a preload 10% of the basic
dynamic load rating (Ca) and applying an axial load three times greater than the 1
Fa0 3
preload.
These values do not include the rigidity of the components related to mounting the
KN＝K
（）0.1Ca
ball screw nut. Therefore, it is normally appropriate to regard roughly 80% of the
K: Rigidity value in the
value in the table as the actual value.
dimensional table.
If the applied preload (Fa0) is not 0.1 Ca, the rigidity value (KN) is obtained from the
following equation.

Model SBK
6-φ d1
45°
45°
PC
D
A
(Greasing hole)
22°
TW
Screw Ball center- Thread No. of

shaft outer Lead to-center minor loaded Basic load rating Rigidity
Model No.
Ca C0a K
d Ph dp dc Rows x turns kN kN N/μ m
SBK 3620-7.6 36 20 37.75 30.4 2×3.8 48.5 85 870
SBK 4020-7.6 40 20 42 34.1 2×3.8 59.7 112.7 970
SBK 4030-7.6 40 30 42 34.1 2×3.8 59.2 107.5 970
SBK 5020-7.6 50 20 52 44.1 2×3.8 66.8 141.9 1170
SBK 5030-7.6 50 30 52 44.1 2×3.8 66.5 135 1170
SBK 5036-7.6 50 36 52 44.1 2×3.8 65.9 135 1170
SBK 5520-7.6 55 20 57 49.1 2×3.8 69.8 156.4 1250
SBK 5530-7.6 55 30 57 49.1 2×3.8 69.2 147 1250
SBK 5536-7.6 55 36 57 49.1 2×3.8 69.1 148.7 1260
Note) With model SBK, the raising of both ends of the thread groove is not available. When designing your system this way,
contact THK.
Those models marked with { can be attached with QZ Lubricator or the wiper ring. For dimensions of the ball screw nut
with either accessory being attached, see B-778.
Model number coding
SBK3620-7.6 RR G0 +1500L C5
length (in mm)
Symbol for clearance Accuracy symbol (*3)
in the axial direction (*2)
(*1) See A-816. (*2) See A-685. (*3) See A-678.
B-578
L1
H B1
φ D1 φ D φ dc φ d φ Dg6
Unit: mm
Nut dimensions Screw shaft inertial Nut Shaft

moment/mm mass mass
Outer Flange Overall Greasing
diameter diameter length hole
D D1 L1 H B1 PCD d1 TW A kg•cm2/mm kg kg/m
73 114 110 18 81 93 11 86 PT 1/8 1.29×10-2 3.4 5.0
Ball Screw
80 136 110 20 79 112 14 103 PT 1/8 1.97×10-2 4.5 5.7
80 136 148 20 117 112 14 103 PT 1/8 1.97×10-2 5.6 7.0
90 146 110 22 77 122 14 110 PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 5.3 10.2
90 146 149 22 116 122 14 110 PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 6.6 11.9
90 146 172 22 139 122 14 110 PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 7.4 12.5
96 152 110 22 77 128 14 114 PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 5.7 13.0
96 152 149 22 116 128 14 114 PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 7.2 14.8
96 152 172 22 139 128 14 114 PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 8.1 15.5
Fa0 3
preload.
KN＝K
（）0.1Ca
dimensional table.
following equation.

Model HBN
L1
H T1 T2
U
30° 30°
PCD
φ D1 φdφD
V
5–φ d1 Greasing hole A (from the backside)
Models HBN3210 to 3612
Screw Ball center- Thread No. of

Permissible
shaft outer Lead to-center minor loaded Basic load rating load* Rigidity
Model No.
Ca C0a FP K
d Ph dp dc Rows x turns kN kN kN N/μm
HBN 3210-5 32 10 34 26 2×2.5 102.9 191.3 31.9 1077
HBN 3610-5 36 10 38 30 2×2.5 108.2 220.4 33.5 1176
HBN 3612-5 36 12 38.4 29 2×2.5 141.1 267.7 43.7 1207
HBN 4010-7.5 40 10 42 34 3×2.5 162.6 336 50.4 1910
HBN 4012-7.5 40 12 42.4 33 3×2.5 212.4 441.6 65.8 1922
HBN 5010-7.5 50 10 52 44 3×2.5 179.1 462.7 55.5 2279
HBN 5012-7.5 50 12 52.4 43 3×2.5 235.7 572.2 73.1 2345
HBN 5016-7.5 50 16 53 39.6 3×2.5 379.6 820.9 117.7 2392
HBN 6316-7.5 63 16 66 52.6 3×2.5 427.1 1043.8 132.4 2898
HBN 6316-10.5 63 16 66 52.6 3×3.5 577.1 1461.3 178.9 4029
HBN 6320-7.5 63 20 66.5 49.6 3×2.5 578.8 1283.1 179.4 3030
Note) The permissible load FP* indicates the maxim axial load that the Ball Screw can receive.
This model is capable of achieving a longer service life than the conventional Ball Screw under a high load.
For the axial clearance, this model has clearance G2 as the standard. Other clearance is also available at your request.
Model number coding
HBN3210-5 RR G2 +1200L C7
Model number Seal symbol (*1) Accuracy symbol (*3)
Overall screw shaft length (in mm)
Symbol for clearance in the axial direction (*2)
(*1) See A-816. (*2) See A-685. (*3) See A-678.
B-580
L1
H T1 T2 T2
φ D1 φdφD
Greasing hole A (from the backside)
Models HBN4010 to 6320
Unit: mm

Nut Shaft
inertial
mass mass
Outer Flange Overall Greas- moment/mm
diameter diameter length ing hole
D D1 L1 H PCD d1 T1 T2 UMAX VMAX RMAX A kg•cm2/mm kg kg/m
58 85 98 15 71 6.6 22 30 43 46 43.5 M6 8.08×10-3 1.8 2.9
62 89 98 15 75 6.6 22 30 45 50 46 M6 1.29×10 -2
1.9 4.2
66 100 116 18 82 9 26 36 49 52.5 50 M6 1.29×10-2 2.8 3.2
Ball Screw
66 100 135 18 82 9 23.5 30 46.5 54 48 M6 1.97×10-2 2.9 5.7
70 104 152 18 86 9 26 36 51 56 52 M6 1.97×10 -2
3.7 4.6
78 112 135 18 94 9 23.5 30 52 63.5 54.5 M6 4.82×10-2 3.7 10.2
80 114 152 18 96 9 26 36 56 66 58.5 M6 4.82×10-2 4.4 8.9
95 135 211 28 113 9 37.5 48 64.5 69.6 65.2 PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 10.0 5.0
105 139 211 28 122 9 37.5 48 70.5 82 72.5 PT 1/8 1.21×10 -1
10.6 11.5
105 139 259 28 122 9 53.5 64 70.5 82 73 PT 1/8 1.21×10-1 17.4 11.5
117 157 252 32 137 11 44 60 79 86.5 80 PT 1/8 1.21×10-1 17.2 8.1
load and the elastic deformation when providing an axial load, 30% of the basic 1
dynamic load rating (Ca). Fa 3
KN＝K
（）0.3Ca
value in the table as the actual value. K: Rigidity value in the

If the axial load (Fa) is not 0.3 Ca, the rigidity value (KN) is obtained from the follow- dimensional table.
ing equation.

B-582
Standard-Stock Precision Ball Screw Unfinished Shaft Ends
Ball Screw
(Separate)
Unfinished Shaft Ends....................... B-584 Structure and features....................... A-755
| Types and Features .......................... A-756
B-604 Service Life ....................................... A-704
Nut Types and Axial Clearance......... A-758
Options

the Products".
B-583
L1
4-φ d1 through hole H B1
30° 30°
φ d3 φ D1 φ Dg6 φd φ d4
Tw K （l 0）
PCD l2 l3 l1
L
Model MDK
Ball screw specifications Nut

Screw Lead Ball Thread No. of Basic load Outer Overall
shaft center-to- minor rating diameter Flange length
Model No. outer center diameter loaded diameter
diameter diameter circuits Ca C0a
Rows
d Ph dp dc kN kN D D1 L1 H
x turns
MDK 0401-3 4 1 4.15 3.4 3×1 0.29 0.42 9 19 13 3
MBF 0401-3.7 4 1 4.15 3.2 1×3.7 0.59 0.93 11 24 18 4
MDK 0601-3 6 1 6.2 5.3 3×1 0.54 1 11 23 14.5 3.5
MBF 0601-3.7 6 1 6.15 5.2 1×3.7 0.74 1.5 13 30 21 5
Note) Models MDK/MBF 0401 and 0601 are not provided with a labyrinth seal.
Model number coding
MDK0401-3 GT +95L C5 A
Model number Overall screw shaft Symbol for standard-stock type
length (in mm) (A: with unfinished shaft ends)
(*1) See A-685. (*2) See A-678.
B-584
2-φ d1 through hole, φ d2 counter bore depth h L1
H B1
Tw K （l 0）
PCD l2 l3 l1
L
Model MBF
Unit: mm
Dimensions Screw shaft dimensions
Overall Nut Shaft
length mass mass
Standard-
stock
symbol
B1 PCD d1 d2 h Tw L l 0 l 1 l 2 l 3 d3 d4 K kg kg/m
95 47 10 35 50 6.2 3.2 3 0.01 0.07
10 14 2.9 — — 13 A 115 67 10 35 70 6.2 3.2 3 0.01 0.07
145 97 10 35 100 6.2 3.2 3 0.01 0.07
Ball Screw
90 48 10 30 50 4.3 3.2 2 0.02 0.07
14 17 3.4 6.5 2.5 13 A 110 68 10 30 70 4.3 3.2 2 0.02 0.07
130 88 10 30 90 4.3 3.2 2 0.02 0.07
120 67 10 40 70 8.2 5.3 3 0.02 0.14
11 17 3.4 — — 15 A 150 97 10 40 100 8.2 5.3 3 0.02 0.14
180 127 10 40 130 8.2 5.3 3 0.02 0.14
131 58 20 50 61 6.3 5.2 3 0.04 0.14
16 21.5 3.4 6.5 3 17 A 161 88 20 50 91 6.3 5.2 3 0.04 0.14
201 128 20 50 131 6.3 5.2 3 0.04 0.14

L1
30° 30°
Tw K （l 0）
PCD l2 l3 l1
L
Model MDK

Rows
x turns
MDK 0801-3 8 1 8.2 7.3 3×1 0.64 1.4 13 26 15 4
MDK 0802-3 8 2 8.3 7 3×1 1.4 2.3 15 28 22 5
MBF 0802-3.7 8 2 8.3 6.4 1×3.7 2.5 4.2 20 40 28 6
Note) Model MDK 0801 is not provided with a labyrinth seal.
Model number coding
MBF0802-3.7 RR GT +218L C5 A
Model number Seal symbol (*1) Overall screw shaft Symbol for standard-stock type
(*1) See A-816. (*2) See A-685. (*3) See A-678.
B-586
H B1
Tw K （l 0）
PCD l2 l3 l1
L
Model MBF
Unit: mm
Overall Nut Shaft
length mass mass
Standard-
stock
symbol
130 67 15 45 70 10.2 7.3 3 0.02 0.29
160 97 15 45 100 10.2 7.3 3 0.02 0.29
11 20 3.4 — — 17 A
190 127 15 45 130 10.2 7.3 3 0.02 0.29
Ball Screw
240 177 15 45 180 10.2 7.3 3 0.02 0.29
140 76 15 45 80 10.2 7 4 0.04 0.27
170 106 15 45 110 10.2 7 4 0.04 0.27
17 22 3.4 — — 19 A
200 136 15 45 140 10.2 7 4 0.04 0.27
250 186 15 45 190 10.2 7 4 0.04 0.27
168 85 25 55 88 8.3 6.2 3 0.1 0.19
22 30 4.5 8 4 24 A 193 110 25 55 113 8.3 6.2 3 0.1 0.19
218 135 25 55 138 8.3 6.2 3 0.1 0.19

L1
30° 30°
Tw K （l 0）
PCD l2 l3 l1
L
Model MDK

Rows
x turns
MDK 1002-3 10 2 10.3 9 3×1 1.5 2.9 17 34 22 5
MBF 1002-3.7 10 2 10.3 8.6 1×3.7 2.8 5.3 23 43 28 6
MDK 1202-3 12 2 12.3 11 3×1 1.7 3.6 19 36 22 5
MBF 1202-3.7 12 2 12.3 10.6 1×3.7 3 6.5 25 47 30 8
Model number coding
MDK1202-3 RR GT +165L C5 A
(*1) See A-816. (*2) See A-685. (*3) See A-678.
B-588
H B1
Tw K （l 0）
PCD l2 l3 l1
L
Model MBF
Unit: mm
Overall Nut Shaft
length mass mass
Standard-
stock
symbol
160 86 15 55 90 12.2 9 4 0.05 0.47
210 136 15 55 140 12.2 9 4 0.05 0.47
17 26 4.5 — — 21 A
260 186 15 55 190 12.2 9 4 0.05 0.47
Ball Screw
310 236 15 55 240 12.2 9 4 0.05 0.47
183 95 25 60 98 10.3 8.2 3 0.11 0.36
22 33 4.5 8 4 27 A 223 135 25 60 138 10.3 8.2 3 0.11 0.36
273 185 25 60 188 10.3 8.2 3 0.11 0.36
165 86 15 60 90 14.2 11 4 0.05 0.71
215 136 15 60 140 14.2 11 4 0.05 0.71
17 28 4.5 — — 23 A 265 186 15 60 190 14.2 11 4 0.05 0.71
315 236 15 60 240 14.2 11 4 0.05 0.71
365 286 15 60 290 14.2 11 4 0.05 0.71
210 117 30 60 120 12.3 10.2 3 0.15 0.58
22 36 5.5 9.5 5.5 29 A 235 142 30 60 145 12.3 10.2 3 0.15 0.58
285 192 30 60 195 12.3 10.2 3 0.15 0.58

L1
30° 30°
Tw K （l 0）
PCD l2 l3 l1
L
Model MDK

Rows
x turns
MDK 1402-3 14 2 14.3 13 3×1 1.8 4.3 21 40 23 6
MBF 1402-3.7 14 2 14.3 12.5 1×3.7 3.3 7.5 26 48 30 8
Model number coding
MBF1402-3.7 RR GT +245L C3 A
(*1) See A-816. (*2) See A-685. (*3) See A-678.
B-590
H B1
Tw K （l 0）
PCD l2 l3 l1
L
Model MBF
Unit: mm
Overall Nut Shaft
length mass mass
Standard-
stock
symbol
175 86 25 60 90 15.2 13 4 0.07 1.0
225 136 25 60 140 15.2 13 4 0.07 1.0
17 31 5.5 — — 26 A 275 186 25 60 190 15.2 13 4 0.07 1.0
Ball Screw
325 236 25 60 240 15.2 13 4 0.07 1.0
425 336 25 60 340 15.2 13 4 0.07 1.0
205 102 40 60 105 14.3 12.2 3 0.16 0.85
245 142 40 60 145 14.3 12.2 3 0.16 0.85
22 37 5.5 9.5 5.5 32 A
295 192 40 60 195 14.3 12.2 3 0.16 0.85
345 242 40 60 245 14.3 12.2 3 0.16 0.85

L1
30° 30°
Tw K （l 0）
PCD l2 l3 l1
L
Model MDK

Rows
x turns
MDK 1404-3 14 4 14.65 11.9 3×1 4.2 7.6 26 45 33 6
MBF 1404-3.7 14 4 14.3 11.8 1×3.7 5.7 11.1 30 54 38 8
MDK 1405-3 14 5 14.75 11.2 3×1 7 11.6 26 45 42 10
Model number coding
MDK1404-3 RR G2 +240L C7 A
(*1) See A-816. (*2) See A-685. (*3) See A-678.
B-592
H B1
Tw K （l 0）
PCD l2 l3 l1
L
Model MBF
Unit: mm
Overall Nut Shaft
length mass mass
Standard-
stock
symbol
240 150 25 60 155 15.2 11.9 5 0.14 0.8
290 200 25 60 205 15.2 11.9 5 0.14 0.8
27 36 5.5 — — 28 A 340 250 25 60 255 15.2 11.9 5 0.14 0.8
Ball Screw
440 350 25 60 355 15.2 11.9 5 0.14 0.8
540 450 25 60 455 15.2 11.9 5 0.14 0.8
233 129 40 60 133 14.3 11.2 4 0.25 1.2
293 189 40 60 193 14.3 11.2 4 0.25 1.2
30 42 5.5 9.5 5.5 34 A
353 249 40 60 253 14.3 11.2 4 0.25 1.2
413 309 40 60 313 14.3 11.2 4 0.25 1.2
250 160 25 60 165 14 11.2 5 0.19 1.2
300 210 25 60 215 14 11.2 5 0.19 1.2
32 36 5.5 — — 28 A 350 260 25 60 265 14 11.2 5 0.19 1.2
450 360 25 60 365 14 11.2 5 0.19 1.2
550 460 25 60 465 14 11.2 5 0.19 1.2
M6 4-φ d1 through hole L1

(Greasing hole) H B1
30° 30°
5
φ D1 φ Dg6
Tw
PCD Model MDK 1405

L1
H B1
h
φ d1
φ d2 φ dp φ Dg6
A
(Greasing hole)
60° φ d3 φ d φ D1 φ d4
C
5
C1
0.
0.
5
C
PCD
l2 （l 0 ） l1
L
Model BNFN

Screw Lead Ball Thread No. of Basic load Applied Outer Overall
Mass
shaft center-to- minor rating preload diameter Flange length
Rows
d Ph dp dc kN kN N D D1 L1 kg
x turns
BNFN 1605-2.5 390 76 0.6

BNF 1605-2.5 16 5 16.75 13.2 1×2.5 7.4 13.9 — 40 60 41 0.37
BIF 1605-5 390 56 0.48
BNFN 1810-2.5 1×2.5 7.8 15.9 390 119 1.0

BNF 1810-2.5 18 10 18.8 15.5 1×2.5 7.8 15.9 — 42 65 69 0.67
BIF 1810-3 1×1.5 5.1 9.6 250 75 0.75
BNFN 2005-5 2×2.5 15.1 35 740 106 0.9

BNF 2005-5 20 5 20.75 17.2 2×2.5 15.1 35 — 44 67 56 0.57
BIF 2005-5 1×2.5 8.3 17.4 440 56 0.57
Model number coding
BNFN2005-5 RR G0 +610L C5 A
length (in mm) (symbol A or B)
(*1) See A-816. (*2) See A-685. (*3) See A-678.
B-594
L1 L1
H B1 H B1
h h
φ d1 φ d1
φ d2 φ d2
φ D1 φ Dg6 φ D1 φ Dg6
Model BNF Model BIF

Unit: mm
Greasing Overall Shaft
hole length mass
Standard-
stock
symbol
H B1 PCD d1 d2 h A L l 0 l 1 l 2 d3 d4 kg/m
410 200 50 160 16 12.8 0.92
66 510 300 50 160 16 12.8 0.92
10 31 50 4.5 8 4.5 M6 A
46 610 400 50 160 16 12.8 0.92
Ball Screw
710 500 50 160 16 12.8 0.92
410 200 50 160 18 15.3 1.62
107 510 300 50 160 18 15.3 1.62

12 57 53 5.5 9.5 5.5 M6 A 610 400 50 160 18 15.3 1.62
63 710 500 50 160 18 15.3 1.62
810 600 50 160 18 15.3 1.62
410 200 50 160 20 15.3 1.65
510 300 50 160 20 15.3 1.65
610 400 50 160 20 15.3 1.65
95 A
710 500 50 160 20 15.3 1.65
11 45 55 5.5 9.5 5.5 M6
45 810 600 50 160 20 16.8 1.65
1010 800 50 160 20 16.8 1.65
610 300 50 260 20 16.8 1.65
B
710 400 50 260 20 16.8 1.65

L1
H B1
h
φ d1
φ d2 φ dp φ Dg6
A
(Greasing hole)
60° φ d3 φ d φ D1 φ d4
C
5
C1
0.
0.
5
C
PCD
l2 （l 0 ） l1
L
Model BNFN

Mass
Rows
x turns
BNFN 2505-5 2×2.5 16.7 44 830 105 1.2

BNF 2505-5 25 5 25.75 22.2 2×2.5 16.7 44 — 50 73 55 0.75
BIF 2505-5 1×2.5 9.2 22 440 55 0.75
BNFN 2510A-2.5 780 120 2.0

BNF 2510A-2.5 25 10 26.3 21.4 1×2.5 15.8 33 — 58 85 70 1.43
BIF 2510A-5 780 100 1.87
Model number coding
BIF2505-5 RR G0 +720L C5 B
Symbol for clearance Accuracy symbol
in the axial direction (*2) (*3)
(*1) See A-816. (*2) See A-685. (*3) See A-678.
B-596
L1 L1
H B1 H B1
h h
φ d1 φ d1
φ d2 φ d2
Model BNF Model BIF

Unit: mm
hole length mass
Standard-
stock
symbol
520 300 60 160 25 20.3 2.84
620 400 60 160 25 20.3 2.84
720 500 60 160 25 20.3 2.84
Ball Screw
94 A 820 600 60 160 25 20.3 2.84
11 44 61 5.5 9.5 5.5 M6 1020 800 60 160 25 21.8 2.84
44 1220 1000 60 160 25 21.8 2.84
1420 1200 60 160 25 21.8 2.84
720 400 60 260 25 21.8 2.84
B
820 500 60 260 25 21.8 2.84
620 400 60 160 25 20.3 2.68
102 820 600 60 160 25 20.3 2.68

18 52 71 6.6 11 6.5 M6 A 1020 800 60 160 25 20.3 2.68
82 1220 1000 60 160 25 20.3 2.68
1420 1200 60 160 25 20.3 2.68

L1
H B1
h
φ d1
φ d2 φ dp φ Dg6
A
(Greasing hole)
60° φ d3 φ d φ D1 φ d4
C
5
C1
0.
0.
5
C
PCD
l2 （l 0 ） l1
L
Model BNFN

Mass
Rows
x turns
BNFN 2806-5 2×2.5 17.5 49.4 880 122 1.7

BNF 2806-5 2×2.5 17.5 49.4 — 68 1.13
28 6 28.75 25.2 55 85
BIF 2806-5 1×2.5 9.6 24.6 490 68 1.0
BIF 2806-10 2×2.5 17.5 49.4 880 104 1.57
BNFN 3205-5 2×2.5 18.5 56.4 930 106 1.54

BNF 3205-5 2×2.5 18.5 56.4 — 56 0.93
32 5 32.75 29.2 58 85
BIF 3205-5 1×2.5 10.2 28.1 490 56 0.87
BIF 3205-10 2×2.5 18.5 56.4 930 86 1.32
Model number coding
BNFN2806-5 RR G0 +1020L C5 A
(*1) See A-816. (*2) See A-685. (*3) See A-678.
B-598
L1 L1
H B1 H B1
h h
φ d1 φ d1
φ d2 φ d2
Model BNF Model BIF

Unit: mm
hole length mass
Standard-
stock
symbol
520 300 60 160 28 20.3 3.89
620 400 60 160 28 20.3 3.89
720 500 60 160 28 20.3 3.89
Ball Screw
A 920 700 60 160 28 20.3 3.89
110
56 1020 800 60 160 28 24.8 3.89
12 69 6.6 11 6.5 M6
56 1220 1000 60 160 28 24.8 3.89
92
1420 1200 60 160 28 24.8 3.89
720 400 70 250 28 24.8 3.89
B 920 500 70 350 28 24.8 3.89
1100 700 70 330 28 24.8 3.89
730 500 70 160 32 25.3 5.03
930 700 70 160 32 25.3 5.03
94
44 1230 1000 70 160 32 25.3 5.03
12 71 6.6 11 6.5 M6 A
44 1430 1200 70 160 32 25.3 5.03
74
1630 1400 70 160 32 27.8 5.03
1830 1600 70 160 32 27.8 5.03

L1
H B1
h
φ d1
φ d2 φ dp φ Dg6
A
(Greasing hole)
60° φ d3 φ d φ D1 φ d4
C
C1
5
0.
0.
5
C
PCD
l2 （l 0 ） l1
L
Model BNFN

Mass
Rows
x turns
BNFN 3206-5 2×2.5 25.2 70.4 1270 123 2.0

BNF 3206-5 2×2.5 25.2 70.4 — 63 1.2
32 6 33 28.4 62 89
BIF 3206-5 1×2.5 13.9 35.2 690 63 1.2
BIF 3206-10 2×2.5 25.2 70.4 1270 99 1.76
BNFN 3210A-5 2×2.5 47.2 112.7 2350 190 5.5

33.7
BNF 3210A-5 32 10 26.4 2×2.5 47.2 112.7 — 74 108 100 2.8
5
BIF 3210A-5 1×2.5 26.1 56.2 1270 100 2.8
Model number coding
BNFN3206-5 RR G0 +1100L C5 B
(*1) See A-816. (*2) See A-685. (*3) See A-678.
B-600
L1 L1
H B1 H B1
h h
φ d1 φ d1
φ d2 φ d2
Model BNF Model BIF

Unit: mm
hole length mass
Standard-
stock
symbol
730 500 70 160 32 25.3 4.63
930 700 70 160 32 25.3 4.63
1230 1000 70 160 32 25.3 4.63
A
Ball Screw
111 1430 1200 70 160 32 25.3 4.63
51
12 75 6.6 11 6.5 M6 1630 1400 70 160 32 27.8 4.63
51
87 1830 1600 70 160 32 27.8 4.63
930 500 70 360 32 27.8 4.63
B 1100 700 70 330 32 27.8 4.63
1430 1000 70 360 32 27.8 4.63
730 500 70 160 32 25.3 3.66
175 930 700 70 160 32 25.3 3.66
15 85 90 9 14 8.5 M6 A
85 1430 1200 70 160 32 25.3 3.66
1830 1600 70 160 32 25.3 3.66

L1
H B1
h
φ d1
φ d2 φ dp φ Dg6
A
(Greasing hole)
60° φ d3 φ d φ D1 φ d4
C
C1
5
0.
0.
5
C
PCD
l2 （l 0 ） l1
L
Model BNFN

Mass
Rows
x turns
BNFN 3610-5 2×2.5 50.1 126.4 2500 201 6.0

BNF 3610-5 2×2.5 50.1 126.4 — 111 3.4
36 10 37.75 30.5 75 120
BIF 3610-5 1×2.5 27.6 63.3 1370 111 3.4
BIF 3610-10 2×2.5 50.1 126.4 2500 171 4.8
BNFN 4010-5 2×2.5 52.7 141.1 2650 193 6.8

BNF 4010-5 2×2.5 52.7 141.1 — 103 3.58
40 10 41.75 34.4 82 124
BIF 4010-5 1×2.5 29 70.4 1470 103 3.58
BIF 4010-10 2×2.5 52.7 141.1 2650 163 5.18
Model number coding
BIF3610-5 RR G0 +1830L C5 A
Symbol for clearance Accuracy symbol
in the axial direction (*2) (*3)
(*1) See A-816. (*2) See A-685. (*3) See A-678.
B-602
L1 L1
H B1 H B1
h h
φ d1 φ d1
φ d2 φ d2
Model BNF Model BIF

Unit: mm
hole length mass
Standard-
stock
symbol
730 500 70 160 36 30.3 5.03
930 700 70 160 36 30.3 5.03
A
183 1430 1200 70 160 36 30.3 5.03
Ball Screw
93
18 98 11 17.5 11 M6 1830 1600 70 160 36 30.3 5.03
93
153 930 500 100 330 36 30.3 5.03
B 1100 700 100 300 36 30.3 5.03
1830 1200 100 530 36 30.3 5.03
1230 1000 70 160 40 30.3 6.59
175
85 1730 1500 70 160 40 30.3 6.59
18 102 11 17.5 11 M6 A
85 2030 1800 70 160 40 30.3 6.59
145
2230 2000 70 160 40 30.3 6.59

L1
H B1
h
φ d1
φ d2 φ dp φ Dg6
A
(Greasing hole)
60° φ d3 φ d φ D1 φ d4
C
C1
5
0.
0.
5
C
PCD
l2 （l 0 ） l1
L
Model BNFN

Mass
Rows
x turns
BNFN 4012-5 2×2.5 61.6 158.8 3090 227 6.3

BNF 4012-5 2×2.5 61.6 158.8 — 119 4.2
40 12 42 34.1 84 126
BIF 4012-5 1×2.5 33.9 79.2 1720 119 4.2
BIF 4012-10 2×2.5 61.6 158.8 3090 191 6.24
BNFN 5010-5 2×2.5 58.2 176.4 2890 193 7.2

BNF 5010-5 2×2.5 58.2 176.4 — 103 4.4
50 10 51.75 44.4 1×2.5 32 88.2 1620 93 135
BIF 5010-5 103 4.4
BIF 5010-10 2×2.5 58.2 176.4 2890 163 6.35
Model number coding
BNFN4012-5 RR G0 +1230L C5 A
(*1) See A-816. (*2) See A-685. (*3) See A-678.
B-604
L1 L1
H B1 H B1
h h
φ d1 φ d1
φ d2 φ d2
Model BNF Model BIF

Unit: mm
hole length mass
Standard-
stock
symbol
1230 1000 70 160 40 30.3 6.39
1730 1500 70 160 40 30.3 6.39
209 A
101 2030 1800 70 160 40 30.3 6.39
18 104 11 17.5 11 M6
Ball Screw
101 2230 2000 70 160 40 30.3 6.39
173
1730 1200 100 430 40 33.8 6.39
B
2030 1200 100 730 40 33.8 6.39
1300 1000 100 200 50 40.3 11.36
175
85 1800 1500 100 200 50 40.3 11.36
18 113 11 17.5 11 PT 1/8 A
85 2300 2000 100 200 50 40.3 11.36
145
2800 2500 100 200 50 40.3 11.36

B-606
Standard-Stock Precision Ball Screw Finished Shaft Ends
Model BNK
Ball Screw
(Separate)
BNK0401-3 Shaft Diameter: 4; Lead: 1 ... B-608 Features ............................................ A-761
BNK0501-3 Shaft Diameter: 5; Lead: 1 ... B-610 Types and Features .......................... A-761
BNK0601-3 Shaft Diameter: 6; Lead: 1 ... B-612 Table of Ball Screw Types with Finished
BNK0801-3 Shaft Diameter: 8; Lead: 1 ... B-614 Shaft Ends and the Corresponding
BNK0802-3 Shaft Diameter: 8; Lead: 2 ... B-616 Support Units and Nut Brackets ......... A-762
BNK0810-3 Shaft Diameter: 8; Lead: 10.. B-618
BNK1004-2.5 Shaft Diameter: 10; Lead: 4.. B-622
BNK1010-1.5 Shaft Diameter: 10; Lead: 10 B-624
BNK1520-3 Shaft Diameter: 15; Lead: 20 B-640
Options

the Products".
B-607
BNK0401-3 Shaft diameter: 4; lead: 1
D G 0
5 -0.2
H A 13
10 3
-0.005
-0.014
0.005 E
φ 3h6 -0.006
X
φ 9g6
φ 4 -0.001
-0.006
0
0.3
3
30°
0.
φ4
φ6
φ 19
C
G A R: 0.2 or less E
0.
3
X 2.5 6.5 M4×0.5
I G
J E 0.0025 E
L1 3 6 18 5
L2 23
L3
Screw shaft length

Model No. Stroke
L1 L2 L3
BNK 0401-3G0+77LC3Y
BNK 0401-3G0+77LC5Y 20 45 54 77
BNK 0401-3G2+77LC7Y
BNK 0401-3G0+97LC3Y
BNK 0401-3G0+97LC5Y 40 65 74 97
BNK 0401-3G2+97LC7Y
BNK 0401-3G0+127LC3Y
BNK 0401-3G0+127LC5Y 70 95 104 127
BNK 0401-3G2+127LC7Y
Note) A stainless steel type is also available for model BNK0401. When placing an order, add symbol "M" to the end of the
model number.
(Example) BNK0401-3G0+77LC3Y M
For accuracy grades C3 and C5, clearance GT is also available as standard.
B-608
Ball Screw Specifications
30° 30° Lead (mm) 1

4-φ 2.9 through hole
BCD(mm) 4.15
Thread minor diameter (mm) 3.4
Threading direction,
Rightward, 1
14 No. of threaded grooves
PCD
No. of circuits 1 turn × 3 rows
Clearance symbol G0 GT G2
Axial clearance (mm) 0 0.005 or less 0.02 or less
Basic dynamic load rating Ca (kN) 0.29 0.29 0.29
Basic static load rating C0a(kN) 0.42 0.42 0.42
Preload torque (N-m) to 9.8×10-3 — —
13 Spacer ball None None None
Rigidity value(N/μ m) 35
Circulation method Deflector
X-X arrow view
Unit: mm
Runout of the Lead angle accuracy
Runout of the Runout of the Flange Nut Shaft
screw shaft axis nut circumference perpendicularity thread groove mass mass
surface Representative
travel distance Fluctuation
D H I J error kg kg/m
Ball Screw
0.015 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.008 0.008 0.01 0.07
0.025 0.012 0.01 0.01 ±0.018 0.018 0.01 0.07
0.035 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.01 0.07
0.02 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.008 0.008 0.01 0.07
0.025 0.012 0.01 0.01 ±0.018 0.018 0.01 0.07
0.035 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.01 0.07
0.025 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.008 0.008 0.01 0.07
0.035 0.012 0.01 0.01 ±0.018 0.018 0.01 0.07
0.05 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.01 0.07

0
φ 5 -0.2
D H A
G
-0.005
-0.014
13 0.005 E
J E
10 3
φ 10g6
X
-0.006
E
0
-0.001
-0.006
φ 3h6
A M4×0.5
φ6
φ4
G
φ 20
φ5
C
R: 0.2 or less
5
30°
0.
0.
0.
C
3
0.3 6.5
2.5
I G 0.0025 E
X
L1 3 6 18 5
L2 23
L3
Screw shaft length

Model No. Stroke
L1 L2 L3
BNK 0501-3G0+77LC3Y
BNK 0501-3G0+77LC5Y 20 45 54 77
BNK 0501-3G2+77LC7Y
BNK 0501-3G0+97LC3Y
BNK 0501-3G0+97LC5Y 40 65 74 97
BNK 0501-3G2+97LC7Y
BNK 0501-3G0+127LC3Y
BNK 0501-3G0+127LC5Y 70 95 104 127
BNK 0501-3G2+127LC7Y
model number.
B-610
Lead (mm) 1
BCD(mm) 5.15
4-φ 2.9 through hole 30° 30° Thread minor diameter (mm) 4.4
Rightward, 1
PC No. of threaded grooves
D1
5 No. of circuits 1 turn × 3 rows
Spacer ball None None None
14
X-X arrow view Rigidity value(N/μ m) 47
Unit: mm
Ball Screw
0.015 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.008 0.008 0.012 0.11
0.025 0.012 0.01 0.01 ±0.018 0.018 0.012 0.11
0.035 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.012 0.11
0.02 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.008 0.008 0.012 0.11
0.025 0.012 0.01 0.01 ±0.018 0.018 0.012 0.11
0.035 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.012 0.11
0.025 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.008 0.008 0.012 0.11
0.035 0.012 0.01 0.01 ±0.018 0.018 0.012 0.11
0.05 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.012 0.11

0
7 -0.2
D G
H A 14.5
11
-0.006
-0.017
3.5 0.005 E
-0.008
X
0.5
φ 11g6
φ 5 -0.001
-0.006
0
30°
φ 4h6
0.
C
φ 23
φ6
φ8
C
0.
G A R: 0.2 or less E
3
X 3 6.5 M5×0.5
I G
J E 0.0025 E
L1 3 7 19 6
L2 25
L3
Screw shaft length

Model No. Stroke
L1 L2 L3
BNK 0601-3G0+100LC3Y
BNK 0601-3G0+100LC5Y 40 65 75 100
BNK 0601-3G2+100LC7Y
BNK 0601-3G0+130LC3Y
BNK 0601-3G0+130LC5Y 70 95 105 130
BNK 0601-3G2+130LC7Y
BNK 0601-3G0+160LC3Y
BNK 0601-3G0+160LC5Y 100 125 135 160
BNK 0601-3G2+160LC7Y
model number.
B-612
Lead (mm) 1
30° 30° BCD(mm) 6.2
4-φ 3.4 through hole Thread minor diameter (mm) 5.3
Rightward, 1
No. of threaded grooves
D17 No. of circuits 1 turn × 3 rows
PC
15 Spacer ball None None None
X-X arrow view
Unit: mm
Ball Screw
0.015 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.008 0.008 0.017 0.14
0.025 0.012 0.01 0.01 ±0.018 0.018 0.017 0.14
0.035 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.017 0.14
0.02 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.008 0.008 0.017 0.14
0.035 0.012 0.01 0.01 ±0.018 0.018 0.017 0.14
0.05 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.017 0.14
0.025 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.01 0.008 0.017 0.14
0.035 0.012 0.01 0.01 ±0.02 0.018 0.017 0.14
0.05 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.017 0.14

0
8 -0.2
D G
H A 15 J E-F
-0.006
-0.017
-0.008
11 4
-0.06
0
0
φ 6 -0.001
-0.006
φ 13g6
φ 4.5h6
φ 5.7
-0.002
-0.010
0.5
φ 9.5
C
30°
3
0.
0.
2
C
φ6
φ 26
φ8
5
0.
C
R: 0.2 or less
0.
C
F R: 0.2 or less G E
3
X A
0.8 +0.1
0
I G M6×0.75
6.8 +0.1
0 3 7
J E-F 0.0025 E-F
0.0025 E-F
L1 3 7 22.5 7.5
9 L2 30
L3
Screw shaft length

Model No. Stroke
L1 L2 L3
BNK 0801-3G0+115LC3Y
BNK 0801-3G0+115LC5Y 40 66 76 115
BNK 0801-3G2+115LC7Y
BNK 0801-3G0+145LC3Y
BNK 0801-3G0+145LC5Y 70 96 106 145
BNK 0801-3G2+145LC7Y
BNK 0801-3G0+175LC3Y
BNK 0801-3G0+175LC5Y 100 126 136 175
BNK 0801-3G2+175LC7Y
BNK 0801-3G0+225LC3Y
BNK 0801-3G0+225LC5Y 150 176 186 225
BNK 0801-3G2+225LC7Y
model number.
B-614
Lead (mm) 1
30° 30° BCD(mm) 8.2
4-φ 3.4 through hole Thread minor diameter (mm) 7.3
Rightward, 1
20
PCD No. of circuits 1 turn × 3 rows
17
X-X arrow view
Unit: mm
Ball Screw
0.025 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.008 0.008 0.024 0.29
0.025 0.012 0.01 0.01 ±0.018 0.018 0.024 0.29
0.035 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.024 0.29
0.03 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.008 0.008 0.024 0.29
0.035 0.012 0.01 0.01 ±0.018 0.018 0.024 0.29
0.05 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.024 0.29
0.03 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.01 0.008 0.024 0.29
0.035 0.012 0.01 0.01 ±0.02 0.018 0.024 0.29
0.05 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.024 0.29
0.035 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.01 0.008 0.024 0.29
0.05 0.012 0.01 0.01 ±0.02 0.018 0.024 0.29
0.065 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.024 0.29

D G 0
8 -0.2
22
H A
17 5 J E-F
-0.006
-0.017
-0.008
-0.06
0
X
0
φ 6 -0.001
-0.006
φ 15g6
φ 4.5h6
-0.002
-0.010
φ 5.7
φ 9.5
0.5
30°
C
3
0.
0.
2
C
φ6
φ 28
φ8
5
0.
C
R: 0.2 or less
0.
C
F G E
3
A R: 0.2 or less
0.8 +0.1
0
I G X M6×0.75
6.8 +0.1
0 3 7
J E-F 0.0025 E-F
0.0025 E-F
L1 4 7 22.5 7.5
9 L2 30
L3
Screw shaft length

Model No. Stroke
L1 L2 L3
BNK 0802-3RRG0+125LC3Y
BNK 0802-3RRG0+125LC5Y 40 75 86 125
BNK 0802-3RRG0+155LC5Y 70 105 116 155
BNK 0802-3RRG0+185LC5Y 100 135 146 185
BNK 0802-3RRG0+235LC5Y 150 185 196 235
model number.
(Example) BNK0802-3RRG0+125LC3Y M
B-616
Lead (mm) 2
30° 30° BCD(mm) 8.3
Thread minor diameter (mm) 7
Rightward, 1
22 No. of threaded grooves
Preload torque (N-m) to 2×10-2 — —
19
X-X arrow view
Unit: mm
Ball Screw
0.025 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.008 0.008 0.034 0.27
0.025 0.012 0.01 0.01 ±0.018 0.018 0.034 0.27
0.035 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.034 0.27
0.03 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.01 0.008 0.034 0.27
0.035 0.012 0.01 0.01 ±0.02 0.018 0.034 0.27
0.05 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.034 0.27
0.03 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.01 0.008 0.034 0.27
0.035 0.012 0.01 0.01 ±0.02 0.018 0.034 0.27
0.05 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.034 0.27
0.035 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.01 0.008 0.034 0.27
0.05 0.012 0.01 0.01 ±0.02 0.018 0.034 0.27
0.065 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.034 0.27

D G H A 0
8 -0.2
J E-F 24
-0.006
-0.017
13 4 7 J E-F
-0.008
X
φ 18g6
F E
φ 5.7 -0.06
0
R: 0.2
-0.002
-0.010
φ 6 -0.001
-0.006
0
φ 4.5h6
A
φ 9.5
or less M6×0.75
G
φ6
φ 31
φ8
C
C
5
30 R: 0.2 or less 7
0.
0.
0.
0.8 +0.1 °
5
3
C
0 0.5
6.8 +0.1
0 3
0.0025 E-F I G X 0.0025 E-F
L1 5 7 22.5 7.5
9 L2 30
L3
Screw shaft length

Model No. Stroke
L1 L2 L3
BNK 0810-3GT+205LC5Y
100 154 166 205
BNK 0810-3G2+205LC7Y
150 204 216 255
BNK 0810-3G2+255LC7Y
200 254 266 305
BNK 0810-3G2+305LC7Y
250 304 316 355
BNK 0810-3G2+355LC7Y
300 354 366 405
BNK 0810-3G2+405LC7Y
B-618
Lead (mm) 10
BCD(mm) 8.4
4-φ 3.4 through hole 30° 30° Thread minor diameter (mm) 6.7
Rightward, 2
PC
D2 No. of circuits 1.5 turns × 2 rows
5
Clearance symbol GT G2
Axial clearance (mm) 0.005 or less 0.02 or less
Basic dynamic load rating Ca (kN) 2.16 2.16
Basic static load rating C0a(kN) 3.82 3.82
Preload torque (N-m) — —
Spacer ball None None
20
X-X arrow view Circulation method End cap
Unit: mm
Ball Screw
0.05 0.012 0.01 0.01 ±0.02 0.018 0.049 0.30
0.065 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.049 0.30
0.05 0.012 0.01 0.01 ±0.023 0.018 0.049 0.30
0.065 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.049 0.30
0.05 0.012 0.01 0.01 ±0.023 0.018 0.049 0.30
0.065 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.049 0.30
0.06 0.012 0.01 0.01 ±0.023 0.018 0.049 0.30
0.075 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.049 0.30
0.07 0.012 0.01 0.01 ±0.025 0.018 0.049 0.30
0.09 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.049 0.30

0
10 -0.2
D G
22
H A
-0.006
-0.017
17 5 J E-F
X
φ 5.7 -0.06
φ 6h6 -0.008
φ 17g6
0
-0.008
φ 8 -0.002
φ 11.5
0
0.5
-0.002
-0.010
30°
C
5
0.
0.
C
2
φ6
φ 10
φ 34
C
5
0.
0.
C
5
F R: 0.2 or less G E
A R: 0.2 or less
0.8 +0.1 X 9 M8×1
0 I G 4
6.8 +0.1
0 J E-F 0.0025 E-F
0.0025 E-F L1 4 8 27 10
9 L2 37
L3
Screw shaft length

Model No. Stroke
L1 L2 L3
BNK 1002-3RRG0+143LC5Y 50 85 97 143
BNK 1002-3RRG0+193LC5Y 100 135 147 193
BNK 1002-3RRG0+243LC5Y 150 185 197 243
BNK 1002-3RRG0+293LC5Y 200 235 247 293
model number.
B-620
Lead (mm) 2
30° 30° BCD(mm) 10.3
Rightward, 1
2 6
21
X-X arrow view
Unit: mm
Ball Screw
0.02 0.009 0.008 0.007 ±0.008 0.008 0.045 0.47
0.035 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.018 0.018 0.045 0.47
0.04 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.045 0.47
0.03 0.009 0.008 0.007 ±0.01 0.008 0.045 0.47
0.035 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.02 0.018 0.045 0.47
0.04 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.045 0.47
0.03 0.009 0.008 0.007 ±0.01 0.008 0.045 0.47
0.04 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.02 0.018 0.045 0.47
0.055 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.045 0.47
0.03 0.009 0.008 0.007 ±0.012 0.008 0.045 0.47
0.04 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.023 0.018 0.045 0.47
0.055 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.045 0.47

BNK1004-2.5 Shaft diameter: 10; lead: 4
0
12 -0.25
D E-F
H A 34
-0.007
0.020
24 10
J E-F
-0.08
φ 26g6
-0.009
X
0
-0.008
φ 10 -0.002
M10×1
0
-0.004
-0.012
φ 7.6
φ 8h6
C
5
0.
0.
0.
C
2
C
8
φ 14
φ 46
φ 10
C
5
G
0.
0.
C
5
F E
A
R: 0.2 or less
R: 0.2 or less
0.003 E-F X
I G
0.003 E-F
J E-F
0.9 +0.1
0 5 10
7.9 +0.1
0 L1 5 10 30 15
10 L2 45
L3
Screw shaft length

Model No. Stroke
L1 L2 L3
BNK 1004-2.5RRG0+180LC3Y
BNK 1004-2.5RRG0+180LC5Y 50 110 125 180
BNK 1004-2.5RRG2+180LC7Y
BNK 1004-2.5RRG0+230LC3Y
BNK 1004-2.5RRG0+230LC5Y 100 160 175 230
BNK 1004-2.5RRG2+230LC7Y
BNK 1004-2.5RRG0+280LC3Y
BNK 1004-2.5RRG0+280LC5Y 150 210 225 280
BNK 1004-2.5RRG2+280LC7Y
BNK 1004-2.5RRG0+330LC3Y
BNK 1004-2.5RRG0+330LC5Y 200 260 275 330
BNK 1004-2.5RRG2+330LC7Y
BNK 1004-2.5RRG0+380LC3Y
BNK 1004-2.5RRG0+380LC5Y 250 310 325 380
BNK 1004-2.5RRG2+380LC7Y
Note) For accuracy grades C3 and C5, clearance GT is also available as standard.
B-622
Lead (mm) 4
4-φ 4.5 through hole, φ 8 counter bore depth 4
BCD(mm) 10.5
M6
30° 30° (Greasing hole)
Rightward, 1
No. of circuits 2.5 turns × 1 row
14 Clearance symbol G0 GT G2
42 Axial clearance (mm) 0 0.005 or less 0.02 or less
PC
D3 Basic static load rating C0a(kN) 2.7 5.4 5.4
6
9.8×10-3
to 4.9×10-2
28 Spacer ball 1:1 None None
Rigidity value(N/μ m) 50 100
X-X arrow view Circulation method Return pipe
Unit: mm
Ball Screw
0.02 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.01 0.008 0.15 0.32
0.035 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.02 0.018 0.15 0.32
0.04 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.15 0.32
0.03 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.01 0.008 0.15 0.32
0.04 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.02 0.018 0.15 0.32
0.055 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.15 0.32
0.03 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.012 0.008 0.15 0.32
0.04 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.023 0.018 0.15 0.32
0.055 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.15 0.32
0.04 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.012 0.008 0.15 0.32
0.05 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.023 0.018 0.15 0.32
0.065 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.15 0.32
0.04 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.012 0.008 0.15 0.32
0.05 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.023 0.018 0.15 0.32
0.065 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.15 0.32

D E-F
H A 39 0
12 -0.25 J E-F
-0.007
-0.020
29 10
φ 8h6 -0.009
φ 26g6
X
-0.08
-0.008
φ 10 -0.002
M10×1
0
0
-0.004
-0.012
φ 7.6
C
5
φ 46
φ 10
0.
0.
0.
φ8
C
2
C
φ 14
C
5
0.
0.
C
5
F R: 0.2 or less E
A
R: 0.2 or less
0.003 E-F I G X
+0.1 0.003 E-F
0.9 0 J E-F
7.9 +0.1
0 5 10
L1 8 10 30 15
10 L2 45
L3
Screw shaft length

Model No. Stroke
L1 L2 L3
BNK 1010-1.5RRG0+240LC5Y
100 167 185 240
BNK 1010-1.5RRG2+240LC7Y
BNK 1010-1.5RRG0+290LC5Y
150 217 235 290
BNK 1010-1.5RRG2+290LC7Y
BNK 1010-1.5RRG0+340LC5Y
200 267 285 340
BNK 1010-1.5RRG2+340LC7Y
BNK 1010-1.5RRG0+390LC5Y
250 317 335 390
BNK 1010-1.5RRG2+390LC7Y
BNK 1010-1.5RRG0+440LC5Y
300 367 385 440
BNK 1010-1.5RRG2+440LC7Y
Note) For accuracy grade C5, clearance GT is also standardized.
B-624
4-φ 4.5 through hole, φ 8 counter bore depth 4 Lead (mm) 10
M6 BCD(mm) 10.5
30° 30° (Greasing hole) Thread minor diameter (mm) 7.8
Rightward, 1
PC Basic dynamic load rating Ca (kN) 1.3 2.1 2.1
D3
6
9.8×10-3
28 to 4.9×10-2
Spacer ball 1:1 None None
X-X arrow view
Circulation method Return pipe
Unit: mm
Ball Screw
0.04 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.02 0.018 0.17 0.5
0.055 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.17 0.5
0.04 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.023 0.018 0.17 0.5
0.055 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.17 0.5
0.05 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.023 0.018 0.17 0.5
0.065 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.17 0.5
0.05 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.025 0.02 0.17 0.5
0.065 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.17 0.5
0.065 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.025 0.02 0.17 0.5
0.08 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.17 0.5

0
12 -0.25
D G
22
H A
17 5
-0.007
-0.020
J E-F
-0.08
φ 8h6 -0.009
-0.002
-0.008
0
φ 19g6
0.5
0
φ 7.6
-0.004
-0.012
30°
C
5
φ 10
0.
0.
2
C
φ8
φ 12
φ 14
φ 36
5
C
0.
0.
C
5
E
R: 0.2 or less A R: 0.2 or less M10×1
0.9 +0.1 5 10
0 X
7.9 +0.1 I G
0
J E-F 0.003 E-F
0.003 E-F
L1 4 10 30 15
10 L2 45
L3
Screw shaft length

Model No. Stroke
L1 L2 L3
BNK 1202-3RRG0+154LC5Y 50 85 99 154
BNK 1202-3RRG0+204LC5Y 100 135 149 204
BNK 1202-3RRG0+254LC5Y 150 185 199 254
BNK 1202-3RRG0+304LC5Y 200 235 249 304
BNK 1202-3RRG0+354LC5Y 250 285 299 354
model number.
B-626
Lead (mm) 2
BCD(mm) 12.3
30° 30° Thread minor diameter (mm) 11
Rightward, 1
No. of circuits 1 turn × 3 rows
28
PCD Clearance symbol G0 GT G2
9.8×10-3
to 3.4×10-2
23 Rigidity value(N/μ m) 120
X-X arrow view
Unit: mm
surface Representa-
tive travel dis- Fluctuation
Ball Screw
D H I J tance error kg kg/m
0.02 0.01 0.008 0.007 ±0.008 0.008 0.05 0.71
0.035 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.018 0.018 0.05 0.71
0.04 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.05 0.71
0.03 0.01 0.008 0.007 ±0.01 0.008 0.05 0.71
0.04 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.02 0.018 0.05 0.71
0.055 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.05 0.71
0.03 0.01 0.008 0.007 ±0.01 0.008 0.05 0.71
0.04 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.02 0.018 0.05 0.71
0.055 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.05 0.71
0.04 0.01 0.008 0.007 ±0.012 0.008 0.05 0.71
0.05 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.023 0.018 0.05 0.71
0.055 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.05 0.71
0.04 0.01 0.008 0.007 ±0.012 0.008 0.05 0.71
0.05 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.023 0.018 0.05 0.71
0.065 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.05 0.71

0
D E-F 12 -0.25
H A 40
-0.007
-0.020
30 10 J E-F
φ 30g6
φ 8h6 -0.009
X
-0.08
-0.008
φ 10 -0.002
M10×1
0
0
-0.004
-0.012
φ 7.6
5
0.
0.
0.
2
φ8
C
φ 14
φ 12
φ 50
C
5
0.
0.
G
C
5
F E
R: 0.2 or less A
X R: 0.2 or less
0.003 E-F I G
0.003 E-F
+0.1 J E-F
0.9 0 5 10
+0.1
7.9 0 L1 5 10 30 15
10 L2 45
L3
Screw shaft length

Model No. Stroke
L1 L2 L3
BNK 1205-2.5RRG0+180LC3Y
BNK 1205-2.5RRG0+180LC5Y 50 110 125 180
BNK 1205-2.5RRG2+180LC7Y
BNK 1205-2.5RRG0+230LC3Y
BNK 1205-2.5RRG0+230LC5Y 100 160 175 230
BNK 1205-2.5RRG2+230LC7Y
BNK 1205-2.5RRG0+280LC3Y
BNK 1205-2.5RRG0+280LC5Y 150 210 225 280
BNK 1205-2.5RRG2+280LC7Y
BNK 1205-2.5RRG0+330LC3Y
BNK 1205-2.5RRG0+330LC5Y 200 260 275 330
BNK 1205-2.5RRG2+330LC7Y
BNK 1205-2.5RRG0+380LC3Y
BNK 1205-2.5RRG0+380LC5Y 250 310 325 380
BNK 1205-2.5RRG2+380LC7Y
Note) For accuracy grades C3 and C5, clearance GT is also available as standard.
B-628
4-φ 4.5 through hole, φ 8 counter bore depth 4
Lead (mm) 5
M6
BCD(mm) 12.3
30° 30° (Greasing hole)
Rightward, 1
15
45
PC Basic dynamic load rating Ca (kN) 2.3 3.7 3.7
D4
0
9.8×10-3
32 Preload torque (N-m) — —
to 4.9×10-2
X-X arrow view Rigidity value(N/μ m) 60 120
Unit: mm
Ball Screw
0.02 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.01 0.008 0.22 0.61
0.035 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.02 0.018 0.22 0.61
0.04 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.22 0.61
0.03 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.01 0.008 0.22 0.61
0.04 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.02 0.018 0.22 0.61
0.055 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.22 0.61
0.03 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.012 0.008 0.22 0.61
0.04 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.023 0.018 0.22 0.61
0.055 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.22 0.61
0.04 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.012 0.008 0.22 0.61
0.05 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.023 0.018 0.22 0.61
0.065 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.22 0.61
0.04 0.009 0.008 0.008 ±0.012 0.008 0.22 0.61
0.05 0.012 0.01 0.011 ±0.023 0.018 0.22 0.61
0.065 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.22 0.61

D G H A 0
12 -0.25 J E-F
46
-0.007
-0.020
J E-F
36 10 E
φ 8h6 -0.009
φ 29g6
F
-0.08
-0.008
φ 10 -0.002
X
0
0
-0.004
-0.012
M10×1
A
φ 7.6
R: 0.2 or less
φ 14
G R0.5
φ8
φ 12
φ 50
R: 0.2 or less
C
C
2
5
0.
0.
0.
0.
10
C
5
C
5
0.
0.9 +0.1
2
0 5
X
7.9 +0.1
0
I G
0.003 E-F
0.003 E-F L1 5 10 30 15
10 L2 45
L3
Screw shaft length

Model No. Stroke
L1 L2 L3
BNK 1208-2.6RRG2+180LC7Y 50 110 125 180
BNK 1208-2.6RRG2+230LC7Y 100 160 175 230
BNK 1208-2.6RRG2+280LC7Y 150 210 225 280
BNK 1208-2.6RRG2+330LC7Y 200 260 275 330
BNK 1208-2.6RRG2+380LC7Y 250 310 325 380
B-630
Lead (mm) 8
BCD(mm) 12.65
4-φ 4.5 through hole, φ 8 counter bore depth 4.5
30° 30°
M6 Threading direction,
Rightward, 1
(Greasing hole) No. of threaded grooves
Clearance symbol G2
15
Axial clearance (mm) 0.02 or less
45
Basic dynamic load rating Ca (kN) 4.7
PC Basic static load rating C0a(kN) 7.5
D4
0 Preload torque (N-m) —
Spacer ball None
32
X-X arrow view
Unit: mm
Runout of the
surface Lead angle accuracy
Ball Screw
D H I J kg kg/m
0.04 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.269 0.64
0.055 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.269 0.64
0.055 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.269 0.64
0.065 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.269 0.64
0.065 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.269 0.64

0
12 -0.25
D G
H A 23 J E-F
-0.007
-0.020
17 6
-0.009
-0.09
X
M12×1
-0.004
-0.012
φ 12 -0.003
-0.011
0
0
φ 21g6
0.5
φ 9.6
φ 10h6
C
5
30°
0.
φ 10
0.
C
2
φ 15
φ 40
φ 14
C
5
G
0.
0.
R: 0.2 or less
C
5
F R: 0.2 or less E
A 10
+0.14
1.15 0 5
+0.1 I G X
9.15 0
0.004 E-F
J E-F
0.004 E-F
L1 4 10 30 15
22 L2 45
L3
Screw shaft length

Model No. Stroke
L1 L2 L3
BNK 1402-3RRG0+166LC5Y 50 85 99 166
BNK 1402-3RRG0+216LC5Y 100 135 149 216
BNK 1402-3RRG0+266LC5Y 150 185 199 266
BNK 1402-3RRG0+316LC5Y 200 235 249 316
BNK 1402-3RRG0+416LC5Y 300 335 349 416
model number.
B-632
Lead (mm) 2
BCD(mm) 14.3
30° 30° 4-φ 5.5 through hole
Rightward, 1
3 1
P CD No. of circuits 1 turn × 3 rows
4.9×10-3
26 to 4.9×10-2
Unit: mm
Ball Screw
0.02 0.01 0.008 0.009 ±0.008 0.008 0.15 1.0
0.025 0.012 0.01 0.012 ±0.018 0.018 0.15 1.0
0.04 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.15 1.0
0.025 0.01 0.008 0.009 ±0.01 0.008 0.15 1.0
0.03 0.012 0.01 0.012 ±0.02 0.018 0.15 1.0
0.045 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.15 1.0
0.025 0.01 0.008 0.009 ±0.01 0.008 0.15 1.0
0.03 0.012 0.01 0.012 ±0.02 0.018 0.15 1.0
0.045 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.15 1.0
0.03 0.01 0.008 0.009 ±0.012 0.008 0.15 1.0
0.04 0.012 0.01 0.012 ±0.023 0.018 0.15 1.0
0.055 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.15 1.0
0.04 0.01 0.008 0.009 ±0.013 0.01 0.15 1.0
0.05 0.012 0.01 0.012 ±0.025 0.02 0.15 1.0
0.06 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.15 1.0

0
12 -0.25
D G
H A 33 J E-F
-0.007
-0.020
27 6
-0.009
-0.09
X
M12×1
-0.004
-0.012
φ 12 -0.003
-0.011
0
0
φ 26g6
0.5
φ 9.6
φ 10h6
C
5
30°
0.
0.
φ 10
C
2
φ 45
φ 14
φ 15
5
C
G
0.
0.
R: 0.2 or less
C
5
F R: 0.2 or less E
A 10
+0.14
1.15 0 5
+0.1 I G X
9.15 0
0.004 E-F
J E-F
0.004 E-F
L1 5 10 30 15
22 L2 45
L3
Screw shaft length

Model No. Stroke
L1 L2 L3
BNK 1404-3RRG0+230LC5Y 100 148 163 230
BNK 1404-3RRG0+280LC5Y 150 198 213 280
BNK 1404-3RRG0+330LC5Y 200 248 263 330
BNK 1404-3RRG0+430LC5Y 300 348 363 430
BNK 1404-3RRG0+530LC5Y 400 448 463 530
model number.
B-634
Lead (mm) 4
BCD(mm) 14.65
30° 30° Thread minor diameter (mm) 12.2
Rightward, 1
D 36
PC No. of circuits 1 turn × 3 rows
9.8×10-3
28 to 6.9×10-2
Unit: mm
Ball Screw
0.025 0.01 0.008 0.009 ±0.01 0.008 0.13 0.8
0.03 0.012 0.01 0.012 ±0.02 0.018 0.13 0.8
0.045 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.13 0.8
0.025 0.01 0.008 0.009 ±0.01 0.008 0.13 0.8
0.03 0.012 0.01 0.012 ±0.02 0.018 0.13 0.8
0.045 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.13 0.8
0.03 0.01 0.008 0.009 ±0.012 0.008 0.13 0.8
0.04 0.012 0.01 0.012 ±0.023 0.018 0.13 0.8
0.055 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.13 0.8
0.04 0.01 0.008 0.009 ±0.013 0.01 0.13 0.8
0.05 0.012 0.01 0.012 ±0.025 0.02 0.13 0.8
0.06 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.13 0.8
0.045 0.01 0.008 0.009 ±0.015 0.01 0.13 0.8
0.055 0.012 0.01 0.012 ±0.027 0.02 0.13 0.8
0.075 0.02 0.014 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.13 0.8

46 D E-F
0
H A 35 11 12 -0.25 J E-F
-0.009
-0.025
5
-0.009
-0.09 X
φ 12 -0.003
-0.011
0
φ 34g6
-0.004
-0.012
M12×1
0
φ 10h6
φ 9.6
C
φ 15 0.2
5
φ 10
0.
0.
5
C
φ 14
φ 57
C
5
0.
0.
G
C
5
F A E
R: 0.2 or less
R: 0.2 or less
0.004 E-F I X
G
+0.14
0.004 E-F
1.15 0 J E-F
+0.1
9.15 0 5 10
L1 5 10 30 15
22 L2 45
L3
Screw shaft length

Model No. Stroke
L1 L2 L3
BNK 1408-2.5RRG0+321LC5Y
150 239 254 321
BNK 1408-2.5RRG2+321LC7Y
BNK 1408-2.5RRG0+371LC5Y
200 289 304 371
BNK 1408-2.5RRG2+371LC7Y
BNK 1408-2.5RRG0+421LC5Y
250 339 354 421
BNK 1408-2.5RRG2+421LC7Y
BNK 1408-2.5RRG0+471LC5Y
300 389 404 471
BNK 1408-2.5RRG2+471LC7Y
BNK 1408-2.5RRG0+521LC5Y
350 439 454 521
BNK 1408-2.5RRG2+521LC7Y
BNK 1408-2.5RRG0+571LC5Y
400 489 504 571
BNK 1408-2.5RRG2+571LC7Y
BNK 1408-2.5RRG0+621LC5Y
450 539 554 621
BNK 1408-2.5RRG2+621LC7Y
BNK 1408-2.5RRG0+671LC5Y
500 589 604 671
BNK 1408-2.5RRG2+671LC7Y
BNK 1408-2.5RRG0+721LC5Y
550 639 654 721
BNK 1408-2.5RRG2+721LC7Y
BNK 1408-2.5RRG0+771LC5Y
600 689 704 771
BNK 1408-2.5RRG2+771LC7Y
BNK 1408-2.5RRG0+871LC5Y
700 789 804 871
BNK 1408-2.5RRG2+871LC7Y
Plug the unused oil hole before using the product.
B-636
4-φ 5.5 through hole, φ 9.5 counter bore depth 5.5 Lead (mm) 8
M6 BCD(mm) 14.75
30° 30°
(Greasing hole) Thread minor diameter (mm) 11.2
Rightward, 1
17
50
PC Axial clearance (mm) 0 0.005 or less 0.02 or less
D4
5 Basic dynamic load rating Ca (kN) 4.3 6.9 6.9
34 2×10-2
to 7.8×10-2
X-X arrow view
Unit: mm
Ball Screw
0.035 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.023 0.018 0.29 0.84
0.055 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.29 0.84
0.035 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.023 0.018 0.29 0.84
0.055 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.29 0.84
0.04 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.025 0.02 0.29 0.84
0.06 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.29 0.84
0.04 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.025 0.02 0.29 0.84
0.06 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.29 0.84
0.05 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.027 0.02 0.29 0.84
0.075 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.29 0.84
0.05 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.027 0.02 0.29 0.84
0.075 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.29 0.84
0.05 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.03 0.023 0.29 0.84
0.075 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.29 0.84
0.065 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.03 0.023 0.29 0.84
0.09 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.29 0.84
0.065 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.035 0.025 0.29 0.84
0.09 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.29 0.84
0.065 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.035 0.025 0.29 0.84
0.09 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.29 0.84
0.085 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.035 0.025 0.29 0.84
0.12 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.29 0.84

D E-F
44
H A 0
12 -0.25
-0.009
-0.025
24 10 10 J E-F
-0.009
X
-0.09
φ 12 -0.003
-0.011
0
φ 34g6
-0.004
-0.012
M12×1
0
φ 10h6
φ 9.6
5
2
φ 10
0.
0.
C
C
φ 15
φ 57
φ 15
φ 34
G
5
C
0.
0.
F E
C
5
R: 0.2 or less
X R: 0.2 or less
0.004 E-F I G
+0.14 0.004 E-F
1.15 0 J E-F
+0.1
9.15 0 5 10
L1 5 10 30 15
22 L2 45
L3
Screw shaft length

Model No. Stroke
L1 L2 L3
BNK 1510-5.6G0+321LC5Y
150 239 254 321
BNK 1510-5.6G2+321LC7Y
BNK 1510-5.6G0+371LC5Y
200 289 304 371
BNK 1510-5.6G2+371LC7Y
BNK 1510-5.6G0+421LC5Y
250 339 354 421
BNK 1510-5.6G2+421LC7Y
BNK 1510-5.6G0+471LC5Y
300 389 404 471
BNK 1510-5.6G2+471LC7Y
BNK 1510-5.6G0+521LC5Y
350 439 454 521
BNK 1510-5.6G2+521LC7Y
BNK 1510-5.6G0+571LC5Y
400 489 504 571
BNK 1510-5.6G2+571LC7Y
BNK 1510-5.6G0+621LC5Y
450 539 554 621
BNK 1510-5.6G2+621LC7Y
BNK 1510-5.6G0+671LC5Y
500 589 604 671
BNK 1510-5.6G2+671LC7Y
BNK 1510-5.6G0+721LC5Y
550 639 654 721
BNK 1510-5.6G2+721LC7Y
BNK 1510-5.6G0+771LC5Y
600 689 704 771
BNK 1510-5.6G2+771LC7Y
BNK 1510-5.6G0+871LC5Y
700 789 804 871
BNK 1510-5.6G2+871LC7Y
BNK 1510-5.6G0+971LC5Y
800 889 904 971
BNK 1510-5.6G2+971LC7Y
B-638
4-φ 5.5 through hole, φ 9.5 counter bore depth 5.5 Lead (mm) 10
M6×0.75
30° 30° BCD(mm) 15.75
(Greasing hole)
Rightward, 2
12.5 No. of circuits 2.8 turns × 2 rows
50
PC Clearance symbol G0 GT G2
D4
Basic dynamic load rating Ca (kN) 9 14.3 14.3
34 Basic static load rating C0a(kN) 13.9 27.9 27.9
X-X arrow view 2×10-2
to 9.8×10-2
Circulation method End cap
Unit: mm
0.035 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.023 0.018 0.22 0.76
Ball Screw
0.055 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.22 0.76
0.035 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.023 0.018 0.22 0.76
0.055 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.22 0.76
0.04 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.025 0.02 0.22 0.76
0.06 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.22 0.76
0.04 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.025 0.02 0.22 0.76
0.06 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.22 0.76
0.05 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.027 0.02 0.22 0.76
0.075 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.22 0.76
0.05 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.027 0.02 0.22 0.76
0.075 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.22 0.76
0.05 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.03 0.023 0.22 0.76
0.075 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.22 0.76
0.065 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.03 0.023 0.22 0.76
0.09 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.22 0.76
0.065 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.035 0.025 0.22 0.76
0.09 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.22 0.76
0.065 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.035 0.025 0.22 0.76
0.09 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.22 0.76
0.085 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.035 0.025 0.22 0.76
0.12 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.22 0.76
0.085 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.04 0.027 0.22 0.76
0.12 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.22 0.76

45 D E-F
H A 28 10 7 0
12 -0.25
-0.025
0.009
J E-F
5
-0.009
-0.09 X
0
φ 32g6
φ 12 -0.003
-0.004
-0.012
-0.011
0
M12×1
φ 10h6
φ 9.6
C
φ 15 0.2
φ 10
5
C
0.
0.
0.
C
5
φ 15
φ 57
φ 32
C
0.
F A E G
5
R: 0.2 or less
X R: 0.2 or less
0.004 E-F I G
J E-F 0.004 E-F
+0.14
1.15 0
+0.1
9.15 0 5 10
L1 8 10 30 15
22 L2 45
L3
Screw shaft length

Model No. Stroke
L1 L2 L3
BNK 1520-3G0+321LC5Y
150 236 254 321
BNK 1520-3G2+321LC7Y
BNK 1520-3G0+371LC5Y
200 286 304 371
BNK 1520-3G2+371LC7Y
BNK 1520-3G0+421LC5Y
250 336 354 421
BNK 1520-3G2+421LC7Y
BNK 1520-3G0+471LC5Y
300 386 404 471
BNK 1520-3G2+471LC7Y
BNK 1520-3G0+521LC5Y
350 436 454 521
BNK 1520-3G2+521LC7Y
BNK 1520-3G0+571LC5Y
400 486 504 571
BNK 1520-3G2+571LC7Y
BNK 1520-3G0+621LC5Y
450 536 554 621
BNK 1520-3G2+621LC7Y
BNK 1520-3G0+671LC5Y
500 586 604 671
BNK 1520-3G2+671LC7Y
BNK 1520-3G0+721LC5Y
550 636 654 721
BNK 1520-3G2+721LC7Y
BNK 1520-3G0+771LC5Y
600 686 704 771
BNK 1520-3G2+771LC7Y
BNK 1520-3G0+871LC5Y
700 786 804 871
BNK 1520-3G2+871LC7Y
BNK 1520-3G0+971LC5Y
800 886 904 971
BNK 1520-3G2+971LC7Y
B-640
4-φ 5.5 through hole, φ 9.5 counter bore depth 5.5 Ball Screw Specifications
M6 Lead (mm) 20
(Greasing hole)
3 0 ° 3 0° BCD(mm) 15.75
Rightward, 2
50 No. of circuits 1.5 turns × 2 rows
PC
D4 Clearance symbol G0 GT G2
5
Basic dynamic load rating Ca (kN) 5.1 8 8
34 Basic static load rating C0a(kN) 7.9 15.8 15.8
to 8.8×10-2
Unit: mm
0.035 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.023 0.018 0.32 1.05
Ball Screw
0.055 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.32 1.05
0.035 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.023 0.018 0.32 1.05
0.055 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.32 1.05
0.04 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.025 0.02 0.32 1.05
0.06 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.32 1.05
0.04 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.025 0.02 0.32 1.05
0.06 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.32 1.05
0.05 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.027 0.02 0.32 1.05
0.075 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.32 1.05
0.05 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.027 0.02 0.32 1.05
0.075 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.32 1.05
0.05 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.03 0.023 0.32 1.05
0.075 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.32 1.05
0.065 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.03 0.023 0.32 1.05
0.09 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.32 1.05
0.065 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.035 0.025 0.32 1.05
0.09 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.32 1.05
0.065 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.035 0.025 0.32 1.05
0.09 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.32 1.05
0.085 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.035 0.025 0.32 1.05
0.12 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.32 1.05
0.085 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.04 0.027 0.32 1.05
0.12 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.32 1.05

0
D E-F 12 -0.25
H A 42
-0.009
-0.025
23 10 9 J E-F
-0.009
X
-0.09
0
φ 32g6
φ 12 -0.003
-0.004
-0.012
-0.011
0
M12×1
φ 10h6
φ 9.6
C
φ 15 0.2
φ 10
5
0.
0.
5
C
φ 57
φ 16
φ 32
5
C
G
0.
0.
E
C
F A
5
R: 0.2 or less
X R: 0.2 or less
0.004 E-F I G
0.004 E-F
+0.14
1.15 0 J E-F
+0.1
9.15 0 5 10
L1 10 10 30 15
22 L2 45
L3
Screw shaft length

Model No. Stroke
L1 L2 L3
BNK 1616-3.6G0+321LC5Y
150 234 254 321
BNK 1616-3.6G2+321LC7Y
BNK 1616-3.6G0+371LC5Y
200 284 304 371
BNK 1616-3.6G2+371LC7Y
BNK 1616-3.6G0+421LC5Y
250 334 354 421
BNK 1616-3.6G2+421LC7Y
BNK 1616-3.6G0+471LC5Y
300 384 404 471
BNK 1616-3.6G2+471LC7Y
BNK 1616-3.6G0+521LC5Y
350 434 454 521
BNK 1616-3.6G2+521LC7Y
BNK 1616-3.6G0+571LC5Y
400 484 504 571
BNK 1616-3.6G2+571LC7Y
BNK 1616-3.6G0+621LC5Y
450 534 554 621
BNK 1616-3.6G2+621LC7Y
BNK 1616-3.6G0+671LC5Y
500 584 604 671
BNK 1616-3.6G2+671LC7Y
BNK 1616-3.6G0+721LC5Y
550 634 654 721
BNK 1616-3.6G2+721LC7Y
BNK 1616-3.6G0+771LC5Y
600 684 704 771
BNK 1616-3.6G2+771LC7Y
BNK 1616-3.6G0+871LC5Y
700 784 804 871
BNK 1616-3.6G2+871LC7Y
BNK 1616-3.6G0+971LC5Y
800 884 904 971
BNK 1616-3.6G2+971LC7Y
B-642
4-φ 5.5 through hole, φ 9.5 counter bore depth 5.5
Lead (mm) 16
M6×0.75
30° 30°
(Greasing hole)
BCD(mm) 16.65
Rightward, 2
12.5
50 No. of circuits 1.8 turns × 2 rows
PC Clearance symbol G0 GT G2
D45
34
to 9.8×10-2
Unit: mm
0.035 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.023 0.018 0.2 1.25
Ball Screw
0.055 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.2 1.25
0.035 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.023 0.018 0.2 1.25
0.055 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.2 1.25
0.04 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.025 0.02 0.2 1.25
0.06 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.2 1.25
0.04 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.025 0.02 0.2 1.25
0.06 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.2 1.25
0.05 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.027 0.02 0.2 1.25
0.075 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.2 1.25
0.05 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.027 0.02 0.2 1.25
0.075 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.2 1.25
0.05 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.03 0.023 0.2 1.25
0.075 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.2 1.25
0.065 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.03 0.023 0.2 1.25
0.09 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.2 1.25
0.065 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.035 0.025 0.2 1.25
0.09 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.2 1.25
0.065 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.035 0.025 0.2 1.25
0.09 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.2 1.25
0.085 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.035 0.025 0.2 1.25
0.12 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.2 1.25
0.085 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.04 0.027 0.2 1.25
0.12 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.2 1.25

D E-F
54
0
H A 41 13 17 -0.25
J E-F
-0.009
-0.025
6
X
-0.011
-0.11
φ 46g6
φ 15 -0.004
-0.012
0
-0.004
-0.012
0
M15×1
φ 14.3
φ 12h6
C
3
0.
5
φ 15
0.
0.
3
C
φ 19.5
φ 74
φ 20
C
5
0.
G
0.
5
C
F A E
R: 0.2 or less
R: 0.2 or less
0.004 E-F I G X
0.004 E-F
+0.14
1.150 J E-F
+0.1
10.15 0 5 15
L1 10 15 40 20
25 L2 60
L3
Screw shaft length

Model No. Stroke
L1 L2 L3
BNK 2010-2.5RRG0+499LC5Y
300 389 414 499
BNK 2010-2.5RRG2+499LC7Y
BNK 2010-2.5RRG0+599LC5Y
400 489 514 599
BNK 2010-2.5RRG2+599LC7Y
BNK 2010-2.5RRG0+699LC5Y
500 589 614 699
BNK 2010-2.5RRG2+699LC7Y
BNK 2010-2.5RRG0+799LC5Y
600 689 714 799
BNK 2010-2.5RRG2+799LC7Y
BNK 2010-2.5RRG0+899LC5Y
700 789 814 899
BNK 2010-2.5RRG2+899LC7Y
BNK 2010-2.5RRG0+999LC5Y
800 889 914 999
BNK 2010-2.5RRG2+999LC7Y
BNK 2010-2.5RRG0+1099LC5Y
900 989 1014 1099
BNK 2010-2.5RRG2+1099LC7Y
BNK 2010-2.5RRG0+1199LC5Y
1000 1089 1114 1199
BNK 2010-2.5RRG2+1199LC7Y
BNK 2010-2.5RRG0+1299LC5Y
1100 1189 1214 1299
BNK 2010-2.5RRG2+1299LC7Y
Plug the unused oil hole before using the product.
B-644
4-φ 6.6 through hole, φ 11 counter bore depth 6.5 Ball Screw Specifications
M6 Lead (mm) 10
30° 30°
(Greasing hole) BCD(mm) 21
Rightward, 1
24
66
PC
D59 Axial clearance (mm) 0 0.005 or less 0.02 or less
Basic static load rating C0a(kN) 11 22 22
46 2×10-2
to 9.8×10-2
X-X arrow view
Unit: mm
Ball Screw
0.04 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.025 0.02 0.58 1.81
0.06 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.58 1.81
0.05 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.027 0.02 0.58 1.81
0.075 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.58 1.81
0.065 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.03 0.023 0.58 1.81
0.09 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.58 1.81
0.065 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.035 0.025 0.58 1.81
0.09 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.58 1.81
0.085 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.035 0.025 0.58 1.81
0.12 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.58 1.81
0.085 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.04 0.027 0.58 1.81
0.12 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.58 1.81
0.11 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.04 0.027 0.58 1.81
0.15 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.58 1.81
0.11 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.046 0.03 0.58 1.81
0.15 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.58 1.81
0.15 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.046 0.03 0.58 1.81
0.19 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.58 1.81

D E-F
52 0
H A 17 -0.25
31 10 11
J E-F
-0.009
-0.025
X
-0.011
φ 14.3 -0.11
φ 39g6
φ 15 -0.004
-0.012
0
-0.004
-0.012
0
M15×1
φ 12h6
C
3
0.
5
φ 15
0.
0.
3
C
φ 19.5
φ 39
φ 74
φ 20
C
5
0.
G
0.
5
C
F A E
R: 0.2 or less
R: 0.2 or less
0.004 E-F X
I G 0.004 E-F
+0.14
1.15 0 J E-F
+0.1
10.15 0 5 15
L1 10 15 40 20
25 L2 60
L3
Screw shaft length

Model No. Stroke
L1 L2 L3
BNK 2020-3.6G0+520LC5Y
300 410 435 520
BNK 2020-3.6G2+520LC7Y
BNK 2020-3.6G0+620LC5Y
400 510 535 620
BNK 2020-3.6G2+620LC7Y
BNK 2020-3.6G0+720LC5Y
500 610 635 720
BNK 2020-3.6G2+720LC7Y
BNK 2020-3.6G0+820LC5Y
600 710 735 820
BNK 2020-3.6G2+820LC7Y
BNK 2020-3.6G0+920LC5Y
700 810 835 920
BNK 2020-3.6G2+920LC7Y
BNK 2020-3.6G0+1020LC5Y
800 910 935 1020
BNK 2020-3.6G2+1020LC7Y
BNK 2020-3.6G0+1120LC5Y
900 1010 1035 1120
BNK 2020-3.6G2+1120LC7Y
BNK 2020-3.6G0+1220LC5Y
1000 1110 1135 1220
BNK 2020-3.6G2+1220LC7Y
BNK 2020-3.6G0+1320LC5Y
1100 1210 1235 1320
BNK 2020-3.6G2+1320LC7Y
B-646
4-φ 6.6 through hole, φ 11 counter bore depth 6.5 Ball Screw Specifications
M6×0.75 Lead (mm) 20
30° 30° (Greasing hole) BCD(mm) 20.75
Rightward, 2
15.5 No. of circuits 1.8 turns × 2 rows
PC
D5 Axial clearance (mm) 0 0.005 or less 0.02 or less
9
46 2×10-2
to 9.8×10-2
X-X arrow view
Unit: mm
Ball Screw
0.05 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.027 0.02 0.39 2.04
0.075 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.39 2.04
0.05 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.03 0.023 0.39 2.04
0.075 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.39 2.04
0.065 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.03 0.023 0.39 2.04
0.09 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.39 2.04
0.085 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.035 0.025 0.39 2.04
0.12 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.39 2.04
0.085 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.04 0.027 0.39 2.04
0.12 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.39 2.04
0.11 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.04 0.027 0.39 2.04
0.15 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.39 2.04
0.11 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.046 0.03 0.39 2.04
0.15 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.39 2.04
0.11 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.046 0.03 0.39 2.04
0.15 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.39 2.04
0.15 0.015 0.011 0.012 ±0.046 0.03 0.39 2.04
0.19 0.03 0.018 0.014 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.39 2.04

D E-F
53
H A 0
22 -0.35
30 12 11
-0.009
-0.025
6 J E-F
X
-0.011
φ 47g6
-0.21
φ 20 -0.005
-0.014
-0.005
-0.014
0
M20×1
0
φ 15h6
C
φ 19
3
C
0.
5
0.
φ 20
0.
0.
3
C
5
C
φ 25
φ 47
φ 74
φ 25
C
G
0.
5
F A E
R: 0.2 or less
R: 0.2 or less
I G X
0.004 E-F 0.004 E-F
J E-F
+0.14
1.35 0 10 16
+0.1
15.35 0 L1 10 20 53 27
31 L2 80
L3
Screw shaft length

Model No. Stroke
L1 L2 L3
BNK 2520-3.6G0+751LC5Y
500 610 640 751
BNK 2520-3.6G2+751LC7Y
BNK 2520-3.6G0+851LC5Y
600 710 740 851
BNK 2520-3.6G2+851LC7Y
BNK 2520-3.6G0+1051LC5Y
800 910 940 1051
BNK 2520-3.6G2+1051LC7Y
BNK 2520-3.6G0+1251LC5Y
1000 1110 1140 1251
BNK 2520-3.6G2+1251LC7Y
BNK 2520-3.6G0+1451LC5Y
1200 1310 1340 1451
BNK 2520-3.6G2+1451LC7Y
BNK 2520-3.6G0+1651LC5Y
1400 1510 1540 1651
BNK 2520-3.6G2+1651LC7Y
BNK 2520-3.6G0+1851LC5Y
1600 1710 1740 1851
BNK 2520-3.6G2+1851LC7Y
B-648
4-φ 6.6 through hole, φ 11 counter bore depth 6.5
M6
(Greasing hole) Lead (mm) 20
30° 30° BCD(mm) 26
Rightward, 2
No. of circuits 1.8 turns × 2 rows
PC Axial clearance (mm) 0 0.005 or less 0.02 or less
D6
0
Basic static load rating C0a(kN) 19 38 38
49 4.9×10-2
to 2.2×10-2
X-X arrow view
Unit: mm
Ball Screw
0.055 0.015 0.011 0.013 ±0.03 0.023 0.53 3.03
0.07 0.03 0.018 0.02 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.53 3.03
0.065 0.015 0.011 0.013 ±0.035 0.025 0.53 3.03
0.085 0.03 0.018 0.02 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.53 3.03
0.085 0.015 0.011 0.013 ±0.04 0.027 0.53 3.03
0.1 0.03 0.018 0.02 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.53 3.03
0.11 0.015 0.011 0.013 ±0.046 0.03 0.53 3.03
0.13 0.03 0.018 0.02 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.53 3.03
0.11 0.015 0.011 0.013 ±0.054 0.035 0.53 3.03
0.13 0.03 0.018 0.02 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.53 3.03
0.14 0.015 0.011 0.013 ±0.054 0.035 0.53 3.03
0.17 0.03 0.018 0.02 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.53 3.03
0.14 0.015 0.011 0.013 ±0.065 0.04 0.53 3.03
0.17 0.03 0.018 0.02 Travel distance: ± 0.05/300 0.53 3.03

B-650
Models BIF, DIK, BNFN, DKN, BLW,
BNF, DK, MDK, BLK/WGF and BNT
Ball Screw
(Separate)
Preload Type of Precision Ball Screw B-652 Structure and features....................... A-765
| Types and Features .......................... A-769
B-684 Service Life ....................................... A-704
No Preload Type of Precision Ball Screw B-686 Axial clearance.................................. A-685
| Accuracy Standards .......................... A-678
B-714
No Preload Type of Precision Ball Screw
(Square Nut) .................................... B-716
Options

the Products".
B-651
Preload Type of Precision Screw shaft
outer diameter
14 to 18
Ball Screw Lead 4 to 16
L1
Tw H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
PCD φ D1 φ dp φ dc φ d
φ Dg6
A B2
60° (Greasing hole)
DIK (1404 to 2510)
L1
30° 30°
H B1
4-φ d1 B2 B3
φ Dg6 φ D2
A
Tw (Greasing hole) N1
BLW
Screw Lead Ball Thread No. of Basic load rating Rigidity

shaft center-
outer to-center minor loaded Ca C0a K Outer Flange
diameter Model No. diameter diameter circuits diameter diameter
Rows x
d Ph dp dc kN kN N/μ m D D1 D2
turns
DIK 1404-4 14.5 11.8 2×1 3 5.1 190 26 45 —
14 4
DIK 1404-6 14.5 11.8 3×1 4.2 7.7 280 26 45 —
15 10 BLW 1510-5.6 15.75 12.5 2×2.8 14.3 27.8 680 43 64 34
4 BNFN 1604-3 16.5 13.8 2×1.5 5.1 10.5 350 36 59 —
BIF 1605-5 16.75 13.2 1×2.5 7.4 13.9 330 40 60 —
DIK 1605-6 16.75 13.2 3×1 7.4 13 310 30 49 —
5 BNFN 1605-2.5 16.75 13.2 1×2.5 7.4 13.9 330 40 60 —
16 BNFN 1605-3 16.75 13.2 2×1.5 8.7 16.8 390 40 60 —
BNFN 1605-5 16.75 13.2 2×2.5 13.5 27.8 640 40 60 —
6 BIF 1606-5 16.8 13.2 1×2.5 7.5 14 330 40 60 —
10 BNFN 1610-1.5 16.8 13.2 1×1.5 4.8 8.5 210 40 63 —
16 BLW 1616-3.6 16.65 13.7 2×1.8 7.1 14.3 440 41 60 32
BIF 1810-3 18.8 15.5 1×1.5 5.1 9.6 230 42 65 —
18 10 BNFN 1810-2.5 18.8 15.5 1×2.5 7.8 15.9 360 42 65 —
BNFN 1810-3 18.8 15.5 2×1.5 9.2 19.1 430 42 65 —
Note) The model numbers in dimmed type indicate semi-standard types.
If desiring them, contact THK.
Model BLW cannot be attached with seal.
B-652
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
60° φ D1 φ dp φ dc φ d φ Dg6
A
(Greasing hole)
BIF
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
B2
Ball Screw
BNFN
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
Overall Greasing inertial
mass mass
length hole moment/mm
L1 H B1 B2 B3 PCD d1 d2 h Tw N1 A kg•cm2/mm kg kg/m
48 10 38 10 — 35 4.5 8 4.5 29 — M6 2.96×10 -4
0.2 1.0
60 10 50 10 — 35 4.5 8 4.5 29 — M6 2.96×10-4 0.23 1.0
89 10 69 18.7 28.6 52 5.5 — — 46 5 M6 3.9×10-4 0.81 1.07
85 11 74 — — 47 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 5.05×10-4 0.67 1.35
56 10 46 — — 50 4.5 8 4.5 — — M6 5.05×10-4 0.56 1.25
60 10 50 10 — 39 4.5 8 4.5 31 — M6 5.05×10-4 0.3 1.25
76 10 66 55 — 50 4.5 8 4.5 — — M6 5.05×10-4 0.66 1.25
96 10 86 75 — 50 4.5 8 4.5 — — M6 5.05×10-4 0.81 1.25
106 10 96 85 — 50 4.5 8 4.5 — — M6 5.05×10-4 0.88 1.25
62 10 52 — — 50 4.5 8 4.5 — — M6 5.05×10-4 0.56 1.3
72 11 61 — — 51 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 5.05×10-4 0.67 1.41
84.5 10 65.5 18.1 27.1 49 4.5 — — 44 6 M6 5.05×10-4 0.67 1.42
75 12 63 — — 53 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 8.09×10-4 0.75 1.81
119 12 107 94 — 53 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 8.09×10-4 1.09 1.81
135 12 123 110 — 53 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 8.09×10-4 1.21 1.81

outer diameter
20
L1
Tw H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
A B2
DIK (1404 to 2510)
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BIF

center-to-
shaft outer center minor loaded
diameter diameter circuits Ca C0a K
Model No. diameter
Rows x
d Ph dp dc kN kN N/μ m
turns
BIF 2004-5 20.5 17.8 1×2.5 4.8 10.9 360
DIK 2004-6 20.5 17.8 3×1 5.2 11.6 380
4 DIK 2004-8 20.5 17.8 4×1 6.6 15.5 510
BNFN 2004-2.5 20.5 17.8 1×2.5 4.8 10.9 360
BNFN 2004-5 20.5 17.8 2×2.5 8.6 21.8 700
20 BIF 2005-5 20.75 17.2 1×2.5 8.3 17.4 390
DIK 2005-6 20.75 17.2 3×1 8.5 17.3 310
BNFN 2005-2.5 20.75 17.2 1×2.5 8.3 17.4 390
5
BNFN 2005-3 20.75 17.2 2×1.5 9.7 21 470
BNFN 2005-3.5 20.75 17.2 1×3.5 11.1 24.5 550
BNFN 2005-5 20.75 17.2 2×2.5 15.1 35 760
B-654
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
B2
BNFN
Ball Screw
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
Outer Flange Overall Greasing inertia
mass mass
diameter diameter length hole moment/mm
D D1 L1 H B1 B2 PCD d1×d2×h Tw A kg•cm2/mm kg kg/m
40 63 53 11 42 — 51 5.5×9.5×5.5 — M6 1.23×10-3 0.49 2.18
32 56 62 11 51 15 44 5.5×9.5×5.5 35 M6 1.23×10-3 0.34 2.18
32 56 70 11 59 15 44 5.5×9.5×5.5 35 M6 1.23×10-3 0.37 2.18
40 63 69 11 58 — 51 5.5×9.5×5.5 — M6 1.23×10-3 0.58 2.18
40 63 93 11 82 — 51 5.5×9.5×5.5 — M6 1.23×10-3 0.74 2.18
44 67 56 11 45 — 55 5.5×9.5×5.5 — M6 1.23×10-3 0.57 2.06
34 58 61 11 50 10 46 5.5×9.5×5.5 36 M6 1.23×10-3 0.38 2.06
44 67 76 11 65 53 55 5.5×9.5×5.5 — M6 1.23×10-3 0.77 2.06
44 67 97 11 86 74 55 5.5×9.5×5.5 — M6 1.23×10-3 0.93 2.06
44 67 85 11 74 62 55 5.5×9.5×5.5 — M6 1.23×10-3 0.86 2.06
44 67 106 11 95 83 55 5.5×9.5×5.5 — M6 1.23×10-3 0.98 2.06

outer diameter
20
L1
Tw H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
A B2
DIK (1404 to 2510)
L1
30° 30°
H B1
4-φ d1 B2 B3
φ Dg6 φ D2
A
BLW

shaft center-
outer to-center minor loaded Ca C0a K
Outer Flange
Rows x
turns
BIF 2006-3 20.75 17.2 1×1.5 5.4 10.5 250 48 71 —
BIF 2006-5 20.75 17.2 1×2.5 8.3 17.5 390 48 71 —
DIK 2006-6 21 16.4 3×1 11.4 21.5 410 35 58 —
6 BNFN 2006-2.5 20.75 17.2 1×2.5 8.3 17.5 390 48 71 —
BNFN 2006-3 20.75 17.2 2×1.5 9.7 21 470 48 71 —
BNFN 2006-3.5 20.75 17.2 1×3.5 11.1 24.5 550 48 71 —
20
BNFN 2006-5 20.75 17.2 2×2.5 15.1 35 760 48 71 —
DIK 2008-4 21 16.4 2×1 8.1 14.4 280 35 58 —
8
BNFN 2008-2.5 21 16.4 1×2.5 15.1 35 760 46 74 —
10 BNFN 2010A-1.5 21 16.4 1×1.5 7.2 13.2 250 46 74 —
12 BNFN 2012-1.5 21 16.4 1×1.5 7.1 12.5 250 48 71 —
20 BLW 2020-3.6 20.75 17.5 2×1.8 11.1 24.7 570 48 69 39
B-656
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BIF
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
B2
Ball Screw
BNFN
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
56 11 45 — — 59 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 1.23×10-3 0.74 2.13
62 11 51 — — 59 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 1.23×10-3 0.8 2.13
76 11 65 15 — 46 5.5 9.5 5.5 36 — M6 1.23×10-3 0.48 1.93
86 11 75 — — 59 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 1.23×10-3 1.05 2.13
110 11 99 — — 59 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 1.23×10-3 1.3 2.13
98 11 87 — — 59 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 1.23×10-3 1.17 2.13
122 11 111 — — 59 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 1.23×10-3 1.42 2.13
69 11 58 15 — 46 5.5 9.5 5.5 36 — M6 1.23×10-3 0.45 2.06
100 15 85 — — 59 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 1.23×10-3 1.08 2.06
98 15 83 67 — 59 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 1.23×10-3 1.06 2.14
100 18 82 — — 59 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 1.23×10-3 1.3 2.19
105 10 84 25 36 57 5.5 — — 50 5 M6 1.23×10-3 0.54 2.25

outer diameter
25
L1
Tw H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
A B2
DIK (1404 to 2510)
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BIF

shaft outer center-to- minor loaded
center Ca C0a K
diameter Model No. diameter diameter circuits
Rows x
turns
DIK 2504-6 25.5 22.8 3×1 5.7 15 470
DIK 2504-8 25.5 22.8 4×1 7.4 19.9 620
4
{ BNFN 2504-2.5 25.5 22.8 1×2.5 5.2 13.7 420
{ BNFN 2504-5 25.5 22.8 2×2.5 9.5 27.3 820
DIK 2505-6 25.75 22.2 3×1 9.7 22.6 490
{ BIF 2505-3 25.75 22.2 1×1.5 6 13.1 280
25 { BIF 2505-5 25.75 22.2 1×2.5 9.2 22 470
5 { BNFN 2505-2.5 25.75 22.2 1×2.5 9.2 22 470
{ BNFN 2505-3 25.75 22.2 2×1.5 10.8 26.4 560
{ BNFN 2505-3.5 25.75 22.2 1×3.5 12.3 30.7 650
{ BNFN 2505-5 25.75 22.2 2×2.5 16.7 44 910
DIK 2506-4 26 21.4 2×1 9.1 18 330
6
DIK 2506-6 26 21.4 3×1 12.8 27 490
Note) The model numbers in dimmed type indicate semi-standard types. If desiring them, contact THK.
Those models marked with { can be attached with QZ Lubricator or the wiper ring.
For dimensions of the ball screw nut with either accessory being attached, see B-778.
B-658
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
B2
BNFN
Ball Screw
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
Outer Flange Overall Greasing inertial
mass mass
38 63 63 11 52 15 51 5.5×9.5×5.5 39 M6 3.01×10-3 0.43 3.5
38 63 71 11 60 15 51 5.5×9.5×5.5 39 M6 3.01×10-3 0.47 3.5
46 69 68 11 57 — 57 5.5×9.5×5.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 0.69 3.5
46 69 92 11 81 — 57 5.5×9.5×5.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 0.88 3.5
40 63 61 11 50 10 51 5.5×9.5×5.5 41 M6 3.01×10-3 0.47 3.35
50 73 52 11 41 — 61 5.5×9.5×5.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 0.7 3.35
50 73 55 11 44 — 61 5.5×9.5×5.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 0.75 3.35
50 73 75 11 64 52 61 5.5×9.5×5.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 0.92 3.35
50 73 102 11 91 79 61 5.5×9.5×5.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 1.19 3.35
50 73 85 11 74 62 61 5.5×9.5×5.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 1.02 3.35
50 73 105 11 94 82 61 5.5×9.5×5.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 1.22 3.35
40 63 60 11 49 10 51 5.5×9.5×5.5 41 M6 3.01×10-3 0.46 3.19
40 63 72 11 61 15 51 5.5×9.5×5.5 41 M6 3.01×10-3 0.54 3.19

outer diameter
25
L1
Tw H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
A B2
DIK (1404 to 2510)
L1
30° 30°
H B1
4-φ d1 B2 B3
φ Dg6 φ D2
A
BLW

shaft center-
Rows x
turns
{ BNFN 2506-2.5 26 21.4 1×2.5 12.5 27.3 490 53 76 —
{ BNFN 2506-3 26 21.4 2×1.5 14.6 32.8 580 53 76 —
6
{ BNFN 2506-3.5 26 21.4 1×3.5 15.1 35.9 670 53 76 —
{ BNFN 2506-5 26 21.4 2×2.5 22.5 54.8 940 53 76 —
DIK 2508-4 26 21.4 2×1 9.2 18.8 340 40 63 —
DIK 2508-6 26 21.4 3×1 13.1 28.1 500 40 63 —
{ BIF 2508-5 26.25 20.5 1×2.5 15.8 32.8 500 58 85 —
8 { BNFN 2508-2.5 26.25 20.5 1×2.5 15.8 32.8 500 58 85 —
25 { BNFN 2508-3 26.25 20.5 2×1.5 18.5 39.4 600 58 85 —
{ BNFN 2508-3.5 26.25 20.5 1×3.5 21.2 46 690 58 85 —
{ BNFN 2508-5 26.25 20.5 2×2.5 28.7 65.8 970 58 85 —
DIK 2510-4 26 21.6 2×1 9 18 330 40 63 —
10 { BIF 2510A-5 26.3 21.4 1×2.5 15.8 33 500 58 85 —
{ BNFN 2510A-2.5 26.3 21.4 1×2.5 15.8 33 500 58 85 —
12 { BNFN 2512-2.5 26 21.9 1×2.5 12.3 27.6 490 53 76 —
16 { BNFN 2516-1.5 26 21.4 1×1.5 7.9 16.7 300 53 76 —
25 BLW 2525-3.6 26 22 2×1.8 16.6 38.7 700 57 82 47
For dimensions of the ball screw nut with either accessory being attached, see B-778. Model BLW cannot be attached
with seal.
B-660
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BIF
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
B2
Ball Screw
BNFN
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
86 11 75 — — 64 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 3.01×10-3 1.19 3.19
110 11 99 — — 64 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 3.01×10-3 1.47 3.19
98 11 87 — — 64 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 3.01×10-3 1.33 3.19
122 11 111 — — 64 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 3.01×10-3 1.61 3.19
71 12 59 15 — 51 5.5 9.5 5.5 41 — M6 3.01×10-3 0.54 3.35
94 12 82 25 — 51 5.5 9.5 5.5 41 — M6 3.01×10-3 0.68 3.35
82 15 67 — — 71 6.6 11 6.5 — — M6 3.01×10-3 1.52 3.13
106 15 91 — — 71 6.6 11 6.5 — — M6 3.01×10-3 1.89 3.13
135 15 120 — — 71 6.6 11 6.5 — — M6 3.01×10-3 2.32 3.13
122 15 107 — — 71 6.6 11 6.5 — — M6 3.01×10-3 2.12 3.13
154 15 139 — — 71 6.6 11 6.5 — — M6 3.01×10-3 2.6 3.13
85 15 70 20 — 51 5.5 9.5 5.5 41 — M6 3.01×10-3 0.65 3.45
100 18 82 — — 71 6.6 11 6.5 — — M6 3.01×10-3 1.86 3.27
120 18 102 83 — 71 6.6 11 6.5 — — M6 3.01×10-3 2.16 3.27
108 11 97 — — 64 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 3.01×10-3 1.44 3.52
108 11 97 — — 64 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 3.01×10-3 1.44 3.6
124.5 12 101.5 33 44 68 6.6 — — 60 5 M6 3.01×10-3 0.94 3.52

outer diameter
28
Tw
L1
A 22.5° H B1
h
(Greasing hole)
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
90° B2
DIK (2805 to 6312)

center Ca C0a K
Rows x
turns
BIF 2805-5 28.75 25.2 1×2.5 9.7 24.6 520
BIF 2805-10 28.75 25.2 2×2.5 17.4 49.4 1000
DIK 2805-6 28.75 25.2 3×1 10.5 26.4 560
DIK 2805-8 28.75 25.2 4×1 13.4 35.2 730
5 BNFN 2805-2.5 28.75 25.2 1×2.5 9.7 24.6 520
BNFN 2805-3 28.75 25.2 2×1.5 11.3 29.5 620
BNFN 2805-3.5 28.75 25.2 1×3.5 12.9 34.4 720
BNFN 2805-5 28.75 25.2 2×2.5 17.5 49.4 1000
BNFN 2805-7.5 28.75 25.2 3×2.5 24.8 73.8 1470
BIF 2806-5 28.75 25.2 1×2.5 9.6 24.6 520
BIF 2806-10 28.75 25.2 2×2.5 17.5 49.4 1000
28
DIK 2806-6 29 24.4 3×1 14 32 530
6 BNFN 2806-2.5 28.75 25.2 1×2.5 9.6 24.6 520
BNFN 2806-3.5 28.75 25.2 1×3.5 12.9 34.5 710
BNFN 2806-5 28.75 25.2 2×2.5 17.5 49.4 1000
BNFN 2806-7.5 28.75 25.2 3×2.5 24.8 73.8 1470
BNFN 2808-2.5 29.25 23.6 1×2.5 16.8 36.8 550
8 BNFN 2808-3 29.25 23.6 2×1.5 19.6 44.2 660
BNFN 2808-5 29.25 23.6 2×2.5 30.4 73.7 1060
BIF 2810-3 29.75 22.4 1×1.5 15.7 29.4 350
10 DIK 2810-4 29.25 23.6 2×1 12.3 25 380
BNFN 2810-2.5 29.75 22.4 1×2.5 24 48.2 560
B-662
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BIF
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
B2
BNFN
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
Ball Screw
mass mass
55 85 59 12 47 — 69 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 4.74×10-3 0.98 4.27
55 85 89 12 77 — 69 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 4.74×10-3 1.34 4.27
43 71 69 12 57 15 57 6.6×11×6.5 55 M6 4.74×10-3 0.61 4.27
43 71 79 12 67 20 57 6.6×11×6.5 55 M6 4.74×10-3 0.68 4.27
55 85 74 12 62 49 69 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 4.74×10-3 1.16 4.27
55 85 94 12 82 69 69 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 4.74×10-3 1.4 4.27
55 85 84 12 72 59 69 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 4.74×10-3 1.28 4.27
55 85 104 12 92 79 69 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 4.74×10-3 1.52 4.27
55 85 134 12 122 109 69 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 4.74×10-3 1.88 4.27
55 85 68 12 56 — 69 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 4.74×10-3 1.09 4.36
55 85 104 12 92 — 69 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 4.74×10-3 1.52 4.36
43 71 73 12 61 15 57 6.6×11×6.5 55 M6 4.74×10-3 0.64 4.36
55 85 86 12 74 61 69 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 4.74×10-3 1.3 4.36
55 85 98 12 86 73 69 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 4.74×10-3 1.45 4.36
55 85 122 12 110 97 69 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 4.74×10-3 1.73 4.36
55 85 158 12 146 133 69 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 4.74×10-3 2.16 4.36
60 104 116 18 98 — 82 11×17.5×11 — M6 4.74×10-3 2.47 4.02
60 104 144 18 126 — 82 11×17.5×11 — M6 4.74×10-3 2.9 4.02
60 104 164 18 146 — 82 11×17.5×11 — M6 4.74×10-3 3.2 4.02
65 106 88 18 70 — 85 11×17.5×11 — M6 4.74×10-3 2.33 3.66
45 71 84 15 69 20 57 6.6×11×6.5 55 M6 4.74×10-3 0.82 4.18
65 106 146 18 128 — 85 11×17.5×11 — M6 4.74×10-3 3.41 3.66

outer diameter
32
Tw
L1
A 22.5° H B1
h
(Greasing hole)
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
90° B2
DIK (2805 to 6312)

center Ca C0a K
Rows x
turns
BIF 3204-10 32.5 30.1 2×2.5 10.5 35.4 1010
DIK 3204-6 32.5 30.1 3×1 6.4 19.6 580
4
DIK 3204-8 32.5 30.1 4×1 8.2 26.1 760
DIK 3204-10 32.5 30.1 5×1 10 32.7 940
DIK 3205-6 32.75 29.2 3×1 11.1 30.2 620
DIK 3205-8 32.75 29.2 4×1 14.2 40.3 810
{ BIF 3205-5 32.75 29.2 1×2.5 10.2 28.1 570
{ BIF 3205-10 32.75 29.2 2×2.5 18.5 56.4 1110
5 { BNFN 3205-2.5 32.75 29.2 1×2.5 10.2 28.1 570
{ BNFN 3205-3 32.75 29.2 2×1.5 12 33.8 690
32 { BNFN 3205-4.5 32.75 29.2 3×1.5 17 50.7 1000
{ BNFN 3205-5 32.75 29.2 2×2.5 18.5 56.4 1110
{ BNFN 3205-7.5 32.75 29.2 3×2.5 26.3 84.5 1640
DIK 3206-6 33 28.4 3×1 14.9 37.1 630
DIK 3206-8 33 28.4 4×1 19.1 49.5 820
{ BIF 3206-5 33 28.4 1×2.5 13.9 35.2 600
{ BIF 3206-7 33 28.4 1×3.5 18.5 49.2 810
6
{ BIF 3206-10 33 28.4 2×2.5 25.2 70.4 1150
{ BNFN 3206-2.5 33 28.4 1×2.5 13.9 35.2 600
{ BNFN 3206-3 33 28.4 2×1.5 16.3 42.2 710
{ BNFN 3206-5 33 28.4 2×2.5 25.2 70.4 1150
B-664
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BIF
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
B2
BNFN
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
Ball Screw
mass mass
54 81 76 11 65 — 67 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 0.97 5.86
45 76 64 11 53 15 63 6.6×11×6.5 59 M6 8.08×10-3 0.57 5.86
45 76 72 11 61 15 63 6.6×11×6.5 59 M6 8.08×10-3 0.62 5.86
45 76 80 11 69 20 63 6.6×11×6.5 59 M6 8.08×10-3 0.66 5.86
46 76 62 12 50 10 63 6.6×11×6.5 59 M6 8.08×10-3 0.60 5.67
46 76 73 12 61 15 63 6.6×11×6.5 59 M6 8.08×10-3 0.67 5.67
58 85 56 12 44 — 71 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 0.94 5.67
58 85 86 12 74 — 71 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 1.31 5.67
58 85 76 12 64 51 71 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 1.19 5.67
58 85 103 12 91 78 71 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 1.52 5.67
58 85 123 12 111 98 71 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 1.77 5.67
58 85 106 12 94 81 71 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 1.56 5.67
58 85 136 12 124 111 71 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 1.93 5.67
48 76 73 12 61 15 63 6.6×11×6.5 59 M6 8.08×10-3 0.74 6.31
48 76 87 12 75 20 63 6.6×11×6.5 59 M6 8.08×10-3 0.85 6.31
62 89 63 12 51 — 75 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 1.21 6.31
62 89 75 12 63 — 75 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 1.39 6.31
62 89 99 12 87 — 75 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 1.75 6.31
62 89 87 12 75 62 75 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 1.57 6.31
62 89 111 12 99 86 75 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 1.93 6.31
62 89 123 12 111 98 75 6.6×11×6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 2.11 6.31

outer diameter
32
Tw
L1
A 22.5° H B1
h
(Greasing hole)
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
B2
90°
DIK (2805 to 6312)
L1
30° 30°
H B1
4-φ d1 B2 B3
φ Dg6 φ D2
A
BLW

shaft center-
Rows x
turns
{ BIF 3208A-5 33.25 27.5 1×2.5 17.8 42.2 610 66 100 —
{ BIF 3208A-7 33.25 27.5 1×3.5 23.8 59.1 840 66 100 —
{ BNFN 3208A-2.5 33.25 27.5 1×2.5 17.8 42.2 610 66 100 —
8
{ BNFN 3208A-3 33.25 27.5 2×1.5 20.9 50.7 730 66 100 —
{ BNFN 3208A-4.5 33.25 27.5 3×1.5 29.5 76 1070 66 100 —
{ BNFN 3208A-5 33.25 27.5 2×2.5 32.3 84.4 1180 66 100 —
DIK 3210-6 33.75 26.4 3×1 25.7 52.2 600 54 87 —
32 { BIF 3210A-5 33.75 26.4 1×2.5 26.1 56.2 640 74 108 —
{ BNFN 3210A-2.5 33.75 26.4 1×2.5 26.1 56.2 640 74 108 —
10
{ BNFN 3210A-3 33.75 26.4 2×1.5 30.5 67.4 750 74 108 —
{ BNFN 3210A-3.5 33.75 26.4 1×3.5 34.8 78.6 870 74 108 —
{ BNFN 3210A-5 33.75 26.4 2×2.5 47.2 112.7 1230 74 108 —
DIK 3212-4 33.75 26.4 2×1 18.8 37 430 54 87 —
12
{ BNFN 3212-3.5 34 26.1 1×3.5 40.4 88.5 890 76 121 —
32 BLW 3232-3.6 33.25 28.3 2×1.8 23.7 59.5 880 68 99 58
B-666
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BIF
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
B2
Ball Screw
BNFN
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
82 15 67 — — 82 9 14 8.5 — — M6 8.08×10-3 1.93 5.39
98 15 83 — — 82 9 14 8.5 — — M6 8.08×10-3 2.21 5.39
106 15 91 — — 82 9 14 8.5 — — M6 8.08×10-3 2.36 5.39
135 15 120 — — 82 9 14 8.5 — — M6 8.08×10-3 2.88 5.39
167 15 152 — — 82 9 14 8.5 — — M6 8.08×10-3 3.45 5.39
154 15 139 — — 82 9 14 8.5 — — M6 8.08×10-3 3.21 5.39
110 15 95 25 — 69 9 14 8.5 66 — M6 8.08×10-3 1.57 4.98
100 15 85 — — 90 9 14 8.5 — — M6 8.08×10-3 2.92 4.98
130 15 115 99 — 90 9 14 8.5 — — M6 8.08×10-3 3.64 4.98
167 15 152 136 — 90 9 14 8.5 — — M6 8.08×10-3 4.53 4.98
150 15 135 119 — 90 9 14 8.5 — — M6 8.08×10-3 4.12 4.98
190 15 175 159 — 90 9 14 8.5 — — M6 8.08×10-3 5.08 4.98
98 15 83 25 — 69 9 14 8.5 66 — M6 8.08×10-3 1.43 5.2
170 18 152 — — 98 11 17.5 11 — — M6 8.08×10-3 5.26 4.9
155 15 127 42.4 55.4 81 9 — — 70 6 M6 8.08×10-3 3.19 5.83

outer diameter
36
Tw
L1
A 22.5° H B1
h
(Greasing hole)
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
B2
90°
DIK (2805 to 6312)
L1
30° 30°
H B1
4-φ d1 B2 B3
φ Dg6 φ D2
A
BLW

shaft center-
Rows x
d Ph dp dc turns kN kN N/μ m D D1 D2
{ BNFN 3606-2.5 36.75 33.2 1×2.5 10.7 31.8 630 65 100 —
{ BNFN 3606-3 36.75 33.2 2×1.5 12.5 38 740 65 100 —
6
{ BNFN 3606-5 36.75 33.2 2×2.5 19.4 63.4 1220 65 100 —
{ BNFN 3606-7.5 36.75 33.2 3×2.5 27.5 95.2 1790 65 100 —
{ BNFN 3608-2.5 37.25 31.6 1×2.5 18.8 47.5 670 70 114 —
8 { BNFN 3608-5 37.25 31.6 2×2.5 34.1 95.1 1290 70 114 —
{ BNFN 3608-7.5 37.25 31.6 3×2.5 48.3 142.1 1910 70 114 —
DIK 3610-6 37.75 30.5 3×1 28.8 63.8 710 58 98 —
DIK 3610-8 37.75 30.5 4×1 36.8 85 940 58 98 —
DIK 3610-10 37.75 30.5 5×1 44.6 106.3 1160 58 98 —
36 { BIF 3610-5 37.75 30.5 1×2.5 27.6 63.3 700 75 120 —
10
{ BIF 3610-10 37.75 30.5 2×2.5 50.1 126.4 1350 75 120 —
{ BNFN 3610-2.5 37.75 30.5 1×2.5 27.6 63.3 700 75 120 —
{ BNFN 3610-5 37.75 30.5 2×2.5 50.1 126.4 1350 75 120 —
{ BNFN 3610-7.5 37.75 30.5 3×2.5 71.1 190.1 1990 75 120 —
{ BNFN 3612-2.5 38 30.1 1×2.5 32.1 71.4 720 78 123 —
12
{ BNFN 3612-5 38 30.1 2×2.5 58.4 142.1 1370 78 123 —
{ BNFN 3616-2.5 38 30.1 1×2.5 32.1 71.4 720 78 123 —
16
{ BNFN 3616-5 38 30.1 2×2.5 58.3 143.1 1380 78 123 —
20 { BNFN 3620-1.5 37.75 30.5 1×1.5 17.6 38.3 430 70 103 —
36 BLW 3636-3.6 37.4 31.7 2×1.8 30.8 78 980 79 116 66
For dimensions of the ball screw nut with either accessory being attached, see B-778. Model BLW cannot be attached with seal.
B-668
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BIF
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
B2
BNFN
Ball Screw
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
89 15 74 58 — 82 9 14 8.5 — — M6 1.29×10-2 1.85 7.39
110 15 95 79 — 82 9 14 8.5 — — M6 1.29×10-2 2.18 7.39
125 15 110 94 — 82 9 14 8.5 — — M6 1.29×10-2 2.41 7.39
161 15 146 130 — 82 9 14 8.5 — — M6 1.29×10-2 2.96 7.39
116 18 98 — — 92 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.29×10-2 3.03 6.96
164 18 146 — — 92 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.29×10-2 3.95 6.96
212 18 194 — — 92 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.29×10-2 4.87 6.96
122 18 104 30 — 77 11 17.5 11 75 — M6 1.29×10-2 2.03 6.51
143 18 125 35 — 77 11 17.5 11 75 — M6 1.29×10-2 2.3 6.51
164 18 146 45 — 77 11 17.5 11 75 — M6 1.29×10-2 2.57 6.51
111 18 93 — — 98 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.29×10-2 3.45 6.51
171 18 153 — — 98 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.29×10-2 4.84 6.51
141 18 123 104 — 98 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.29×10-2 4.15 6.51
201 18 183 164 — 98 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.29×10-2 5.54 6.51
261 18 243 224 — 98 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.29×10-2 6.93 6.51
147 18 129 — — 100 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.29×10-2 4.69 6.41
219 18 201 — — 100 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.29×10-2 6.54 6.41
172 18 154 — — 100 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.29×10-2 5.33 6.8
268 18 250 — — 100 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.29×10-2 7.8 6.8
135 15 120 — — 85 9 14 8.5 — — M6 1.29×10-2 3.06 7.24
181 17 147.9 49.4 65.4 95 11 — — 82 7 M6 1.29×10-2 5.99 7.34

outer diameter
40
Tw
L1
A 22.5° H B1
h
(Greasing hole)
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
90° B2
DIK (2805 to 6312)

center Ca C0a K
Rows x
turns
BNFN 4005-3 40.75 37.2 2×1.5 13 42.3 810
BNFN 4005-4.5 40.75 37.2 3×1.5 18.5 63.5 1200
5
BNFN 4005-5 40.75 37.2 2×2.5 20.3 70.6 1320
BNFN 4005-6 40.75 37.2 4×1.5 23.7 84.7 1580
BNFN 4006-2.5 41 36.4 1×2.5 15.3 44.1 710
6 BNFN 4006-5 41 36.4 2×2.5 27.7 88.1 1360
BNFN 4006-7.5 41 36.4 3×2.5 39.2 132.3 2010
BNFN 4008-2.5 41.25 35.5 1×2.5 19.6 52.8 730
8 BNFN 4008-3 41.25 35.5 2×1.5 22.9 63.4 860
40
BNFN 4008-5 41.25 35.5 2×2.5 35.7 105.8 1410
BIF 4010-5 41.75 34.4 1×2.5 29 70.4 750
BIF 4010-10 41.75 34.4 2×2.5 52.7 141.1 1470
DIK 4010-6 41.75 34.7 3×1 29.8 69.3 750
DIK 4010-8 41.75 34.7 4×1 38.1 92.4 1000
10
BNFN 4010-2.5 41.75 34.4 1×2.5 29 70.4 750
BNFN 4010-3 41.75 34.4 2×1.5 33.8 84.5 900
BNFN 4010-3.5 41.75 34.4 1×3.5 38.8 99 1050
BNFN 4010-5 41.75 34.4 2×2.5 52.7 141.1 1470
These models can be attached with QZ Lubricator or the wiper ring.
B-670
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BIF
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
B2
BNFN
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
Ball Screw
mass mass
67 101 106 15 91 — 83 9×14×8.5 — M6 1.97×10 -2
2.07 9.06
67 101 126 15 111 — 83 9×14×8.5 — M6 1.97×10-2 2.37 9.06
67 101 109 15 94 — 83 9×14×8.5 — M6 1.97×10-2 2.11 9.06
67 101 156 15 141 — 83 9×14×8.5 — M6 1.97×10-2 2.82 9.06
70 104 90 15 75 — 86 9×14×8.5 — M6 1.97×10-2 2.05 8.82
70 104 126 15 111 — 86 9×14×8.5 — M6 1.97×10-2 2.67 8.82
70 104 162 15 147 — 86 9×14×8.5 — M6 1.97×10-2 3.29 8.82
74 108 106 15 91 — 90 9×14×8.5 — M6 1.97×10-2 2.69 8.72
74 108 135 15 120 — 90 9×14×8.5 — M6 1.97×10-2 3.28 8.72
74 108 154 15 139 — 90 9×14×8.5 — M6 1.97×10-2 3.67 8.72
82 124 103 18 85 — 102 11×17.5×11 — M6 1.97×10-2 3.69 8.22
82 124 163 18 145 — 102 11×17.5×11 — M6 1.97×10-2 5.33 8.22
62 104 113 18 95 25 82 11×17.5×11 79 PT 1/8 1.97×10-2 2.09 8.22
62 104 137 18 119 35 82 11×17.5×11 79 PT 1/8 1.97×10-2 2.42 8.22
82 124 133 18 115 96 102 11×17.5×11 — M6 1.97×10-2 4.51 8.22
82 124 170 18 152 133 102 11×17.5×11 — M6 1.97×10-2 5.52 8.22
82 124 153 18 135 116 102 11×17.5×11 — M6 1.97×10-2 5.06 8.22
82 124 193 18 175 156 102 11×17.5×11 — M6 1.97×10-2 6.16 8.22

outer diameter
40
Tw
L1
A 22.5° H B1
h
(Greasing hole)
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
90° B2
DIK (2805 to 6312)
L1
30° 30°
H B1
4-φ d1 B2 B3
φ Dg6 φ D2
A
BLW

shaft center-
Rows x
turns
BIF 4012-5 42 34.1 1×2.5 33.9 79.2 770 84 126 —
BIF 4012-10 42 34.1 2×2.5 61.6 158.8 1490 84 126 —
DIK 4012-6 41.75 34.4 3×1 30.6 72.3 790 62 104 —
12 DIK 4012-8 41.75 34.4 4×1 39.2 96.4 1030 62 104 —
BNFN 4012-2.5 42 34.1 1×2.5 33.9 79.2 770 84 126 —
40 BNFN 4012-3.5 42 34.1 1×3.5 45.4 110.7 1070 84 126 —
BNFN 4012-5 42 34.1 2×2.5 61.6 158.8 1490 84 126 —
DIK 4016-4 41.75 34.4 2×1 21.5 68.4 540 62 104 —
16
BNFN 4016-5 42 34.1 2×2.5 61.4 158.8 1500 84 126 —
20 DKN 4020-3 41.75 34.7 3×1 29.4 69.3 750 62 104 —
40 BLW 4040-3.6 41.75 35.2 2×1.8 38.7 99.2 1090 84 121 73
B-672
Tw L1
H B1
A 22.5° h
(Greasing hole) φ d1
φ d2
φ Dg6
B2
90° DKN
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BIF
PCD L1
H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
Ball Screw
A
(Greasing hole)
B2
BNFN
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
119 18 101 — — 104 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.97×10-2 4.36 8.12
191 18 173 — — 104 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.97×10-2 6.47 8.12
138 18 120 35 — 82 11 17.5 11 79 — PT 1/8 1.97×10-2 2.44 8.5
163 18 145 45 — 82 11 17.5 11 79 — PT 1/8 1.97×10-2 2.78 8.5
155 18 137 118 — 104 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.97×10-2 5.42 8.12
179 18 161 142 — 104 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.97×10-2 6.12 8.12
227 18 209 190 — 104 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.97×10-2 7.52 8.12
120 18 102 30 — 82 11 17.5 11 79 — PT 1/8 1.97×10-2 2.19 8.83
280 22 258 — — 104 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.97×10-2 9.27 8.55
223 18 205 25 — 82 11 17.5 11 79 — PT 1/8 1.97×10-2 3.61 9.03
191 17 158 54.5 70.5 100 11 — — 87 7 M6 1.97×10-2 6.16 9.01

outer diameter
45
PCD
60°
A
(Greasing hole)
BNFN

center Ca C0a K
Rows x
turns
BNFN 4506A-2.5 46 41.4 1×2.5 16 49.6 770
6 BNFN 4506A-5 46 41.4 2×2.5 29 99 1500
BNFN 4506A-7.5 46 41.4 3×2.5 41.2 150 2210
BNFN 4508-2.5 46.25 40.6 1×2.5 20.7 59.5 790
8 BNFN 4508-5 46.25 40.6 2×2.5 37.4 118.6 1540
BNFN 4508-7.5 46.25 40.6 3×2.5 53.1 178.4 2270
45
BNFN 4510-2.5 46.75 39.5 1×2.5 30.7 79.3 830
BNFN 4510-3 46.75 39.5 2×1.5 35.9 95.2 990
10
BNFN 4510-5 46.75 39.5 2×2.5 55.6 158.8 1610
BNFN 4510-7.5 46.75 39.5 3×2.5 78.8 238.1 2370
12 BNFN 4512-5 47 39.2 2×2.5 65.2 178.4 1640
20 BNFN 4520-1.5 47.7 37.9 1×1.5 44.2 99 690
B-674
L1
H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
φ D1 φ dp φ dc φ d φ Dg6
B2
BNFN
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
D D1 L1 H B1 B2 PCD d1×d2×h A kg•cm2/mm kg kg/m
80 114 89 15 74 — 96 9×14×8.5 PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 2.59 11.31
Ball Screw
80 114 125 15 110 — 96 9×14×8.5 PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 3.42 11.31
80 114 161 15 146 — 96 9×14×8.5 PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 4.25 11.31
85 127 116 18 98 — 105 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 4.09 11.21
85 127 164 18 146 — 105 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 5.41 11.21
85 127 212 18 194 — 105 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 6.74 11.21
88 132 141 18 123 104 110 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 5.26 10.65
88 132 164 18 146 127 110 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 5.96 10.65
88 132 201 18 183 164 110 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 7.09 10.65
88 132 261 18 243 224 110 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 8.92 10.65
90 130 227 18 209 — 110 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 8.24 10.54
98 142 175 20 155 — 120 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 8.31 10.37

outer diameter
50
Tw
L1
A 22.5° H B1
h
(Greasing hole)
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
90° B2
DIK (2805 to 6312)

center Ca C0a K
Rows x
turns
{ BNFN 5005-3 50.75 47.2 2×1.5 14.2 53 970
5
{ BNFN 5005-4.5 50.75 47.2 3×1.5 20.2 79.5 1420
{ BNFN 5008-2.5 51.25 45.5 1×2.5 21.6 66.2 860
8 { BNFN 5008-5 51.25 45.5 2×2.5 39.1 132.3 1680
{ BNFN 5008-7.5 51.25 45.5 3×2.5 55.4 198.9 2470
DIK 5010-6 51.75 44.4 3×1 33.9 90.7 940
DIK 5010-8 51.75 44.4 4×1 43.4 120.5 1230
50 DIK 5010-10 51.75 44.4 5×1 52.5 150.9 1530
{ BIF 5010-5 51.75 44.4 1×2.5 32 88.2 900
{ BIF 5010-10 51.75 44.4 2×2.5 58.2 176.4 1750
10
{ BNFN 5010-2.5 51.75 44.4 1×2.5 32 88.2 900
{ BNFN 5010-3 51.75 44.4 2×1.5 37.5 105.8 1080
{ BNFN 5010-3.5 51.75 44.4 1×3.5 42.8 123.5 1240
{ BNFN 5010-5 51.75 44.4 2×2.5 58.2 176.4 1750
{ BNFN 5010-7.5 51.75 44.4 3×2.5 82.5 264.6 2580
B-676
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BIF
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
B2
BNFN
Unit: mm
Ball Screw
Nut Shaft
mass mass
80 114 108 15 93 — 96 9×14×8.5 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 2.71 14.42
80 114 128 15 113 — 96 9×14×8.5 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 3.12 14.42
87 129 109 18 91 — 107 11×17.5×11 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 3.8 14.0
87 129 157 18 139 — 107 11×17.5×11 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 5.08 14.0
87 129 205 18 187 — 107 11×17.5×11 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 6.35 14.0
72 123 114 18 96 30 101 11×17.5×11 92 PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 2.65 13.38
72 123 137 18 119 35 101 11×17.5×11 92 PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 3.03 13.38
72 123 160 18 142 45 101 11×17.5×11 92 PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 3.41 13.38
93 135 103 18 85 — 113 11×17.5×11 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 4.31 13.38
93 135 163 18 145 — 113 11×17.5×11 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 6.26 13.38
93 135 133 18 115 96 113 11×17.5×11 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 5.28 13.38
93 135 170 18 152 133 113 11×17.5×11 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 6.49 13.38
93 135 153 18 135 116 113 11×17.5×11 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 5.94 13.38
93 135 193 18 175 156 113 11×17.5×11 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 7.24 13.38
93 135 253 18 235 216 113 11×17.5×11 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 9.19 13.38

outer diameter
50
Tw
L1
A 22.5° H B1
h
(Greasing hole)
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
B2
90°
DIK (2805 to 6312)
L1
30° 30°
H B1
4-φ d1 B2 B3
φ Dg6 φ D2
A
BLW

shaft center-
Rows x
turns
DIK 5012-6 52.25 43.3 3×1 45.8 113 970 75 129 —
DIK 5012-8 52.25 43.3 4×1 58.6 150.6 1270 75 129 —
12 { BNFN 5012-2.5 52.25 43.3 1×2.5 43.4 109.8 930 100 146 —
{ BNFN 5012-3.5 52.25 43.3 1×3.5 58 153.9 1280 100 146 —
{ BNFN 5012-5 52.25 43.3 2×2.5 78.8 220.5 1810 100 146 —
DIK 5016-4 52.25 43.3 2×1 32.3 75.5 660 75 129 —
50
DIK 5016-6 52.25 43.3 3×1 45.7 113.3 970 75 129 —
16
{ BNFN 5016-2.5 52.7 42.9 1×2.5 72.6 183.3 1230 105 152 —
{ BNFN 5016-5 52.7 42.9 2×2.5 132.3 366.5 2360 105 152 —
DKN 5020-3 52.25 43.6 3×1 44.2 108.8 930 75 129 —
20
{ BNFN 5020-2.5 52.7 42.9 1×2.5 72.5 183.3 1230 105 152 —
50 BLW 5050-3.6 52.2 44.1 2×1.8 57.8 155 1340 106 149 90
B-678
L1
Tw H B1
22.5°
h
A
φ d2
φ Dg6
90° B2
DKN
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
B2
Ball Screw
BNFN
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
145 22 123 35 — 105 14 20 13 98 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 3.83 12.74
170 22 148 45 — 105 14 20 13 98 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 4.31 12.74
159 22 137 114 — 122 14 20 13 — — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 7.75 12.74
183 22 161 138 — 122 14 20 13 — — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 8.71 12.74
231 22 209 186 — 122 14 20 13 — — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 10.63 12.74
129 22 107 30 — 105 14 20 13 98 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 3.52 13.41
175 22 153 45 — 105 14 20 13 98 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 4.41 13.41
196 25 171 — — 128 14 20 13 — — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 10.64 12.5
292 25 267 — — 128 14 20 13 — — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 15.03 12.5
243 28 215 30 — 105 14 20 13 98 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 6.0 13.8
241 28 213 — — 128 14 20 13 — — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 12.9 13.1
245 20 203.8 70.7 91.7 126 14 — — 108 8 M6 4.82×10-2 9.06 14.08

outer diameter
55
PCD
60°
A
(Greasing hole)
BNFN

center Ca C0a K
Rows x
turns
BNFN 5510-2.5 56.75 49.5 1×2.5 33.4 97 970
10 BNFN 5510-5 56.75 49.5 2×2.5 60.7 194 1890
BNFN 5510-7.5 56.75 49.5 3×2.5 85.9 291.1 2770
BNFN 5512-2.5 57 49.2 1×2.5 39.3 108.8 990
BNFN 5512-3 57 49.2 2×1.5 46 131.3 1180
12 BNFN 5512-3.5 57 49.2 1×3.5 52.4 152.9 1360
55
BNFN 5512-5 57 49.2 2×2.5 71.3 218.5 1920
BNFN 5512-7.5 57 49.2 3×2.5 100.9 327.3 2830
BNFN 5516-2.5 57.7 47.9 1×2.5 76.1 201.9 1310
16
BNFN 5516-5 57.7 47.9 2×2.5 138.2 402.8 2550
BNFN 5520-2.5 57.7 47.9 1×2.5 76 201.9 1320
20
BNFN 5520-5 57.7 47.9 2×2.5 138.2 403.8 2550
B-680
L1
H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
B2
BNFN
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
D D1 L1 H B1 PCD d1×d2×h A kg•cm2/mm kg kg/m
102 144 141 18 123 122 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 6.54 16.43
Ball Screw
102 144 201 18 183 122 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 8.88 16.43
102 144 261 18 243 122 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 11.23 16.43
105 147 165 18 147 125 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 8.07 16.29
105 147 191 18 173 125 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 9.17 16.29
105 147 189 18 171 125 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 9.09 16.29
105 147 237 18 219 125 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 11.13 16.29
105 147 309 18 291 125 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 14.19 16.29
110 158 196 25 171 133 14×20×13 PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 11.28 15.46
110 158 292 25 267 133 14×20×13 PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 15.94 15.46
112 158 227 28 199 134 14×20×13 PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 13.49 16.1
112 158 347 28 319 134 14×20×13 PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 19.61 16.1

outer diameter
63
Tw
L1
A 22.5° H B1
h
(Greasing hole)
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
90° B2
DIK (2805 to 6312)

center Ca C0a K
Rows x
turns
DIK 6310-8 64.75 57.7 4×1 49.5 160.7 1550
BNFN 6310-2.5 64.75 57.7 1×2.5 35.4 111.7 1090
10
BNFN 6310-5 64.75 57.7 2×2.5 64.2 222.5 2100
BNFN 6310-7.5 64.75 57.7 3×2.5 90.9 334.2 3090
DIK 6312-6 65.25 56.3 3×1 51.9 147.4 1200
DIK 6312-8 65.25 56.3 4×1 66.4 196.6 1570
12
63 BNFN 6312A-2.5 65.25 56.3 1×2.5 48.1 139.2 1120
BNFN 6312A-5 65.25 56.3 2×2.5 87.4 278.3 2160
BNFN 6316-2.5 65.7 55.9 1×2.5 81.1 231.3 1470
16
BNFN 6316-5 65.7 55.9 2×2.5 147 462.6 2840
BNFN 6320-2.5 65.7 55.9 1×2.5 81 231.3 1470
20 BNFN 6320-5 65.7 55.9 2×2.5 147 463.5 2640
DKN 6320-3 65.7 55.9 3×1 83.5 229.3 1470
B-682
L1
Tw H B1
22.5°
h
A
φ d2
φ Dg6
90° B2
DKN
L1
PCD H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
B2
Ball Screw
BNFN
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
85 146 141 22 119 35 122 14×20×13 110 PT 1/8 1.21×10-1 4.16 21.93
108 154 137 22 115 — 130 14×20×13 — PT 1/8 1.21×10-1 6.98 21.93
108 154 197 22 175 — 130 14×20×13 — PT 1/8 1.21×10-1 9.4 21.93
108 154 257 22 235 — 130 14×20×13 — PT 1/8 1.21×10-1 11.81 21.93
90 146 146 22 124 35 122 14×20×13 110 PT 1/8 1.21×10-1 4.93 21.14
90 146 171 22 149 45 122 14×20×13 110 PT 1/8 1.21×10-1 5.56 21.14
115 161 159 22 137 — 137 14×20×13 — PT 1/8 1.21×10-1 9.32 21.14
115 161 231 22 209 — 137 14×20×13 — PT 1/8 1.21×10-1 12.84 21.14
122 184 208 24 184 — 152 18×26×17.5 — PT 1/8 1.21×10-1 14.61 20.85
122 184 304 24 280 — 152 18×26×17.5 — PT 1/8 1.21×10-1 20.19 20.85
122 180 227 28 199 — 150 18×26×17.5 — PT 1/8 1.21×10-1 15.91 20.85
122 180 347 28 319 — 150 18×26×17.5 — PT 1/8 1.21×10-1 22.88 20.85
95 159 243 28 215 30 129 18×26×17.5 121 PT 1/8 1.21×10-1 9.5 20.85

outer diameter
70 to 100
PCD
60°
A
(Greasing hole)
BNFN

center Ca C0a K
Rows x
turns
BNFN 7010-2.5 71.75 64.5 1×2.5 36.8 123.5 1180
10 BNFN 7010-5 71.75 64.5 2×2.5 66.9 247 2280
BNFN 7010-7.5 71.75 64.5 3×2.5 94.9 371.4 3350
70 BNFN 7012-2.5 72 64.2 1×2.5 43.5 139.2 1200
12 BNFN 7012-5 72 64.2 2×2.5 78.9 278.3 2320
BNFN 7012-7.5 72 64.2 3×2.5 111.7 417.5 3420
20 BNFN 7020-5 72.7 62.9 2×2.5 153.9 514.5 3090
BNFN 8010-2.5 81.75 75.2 1×2.5 38.9 141.1 1300
10 BNFN 8010-5 81.75 75.2 2×2.5 70.6 283.2 2530
BNFN 8010-7.5 81.75 75.2 3×2.5 100 424.3 3720
80
12 BNFN 8012-5 82.3 74.1 2×2.5 96.5 353.8 2620
BNFN 8020A-2.5 82.7 72.9 1×2.5 90.1 294 1770
20
BNFN 8020A-5 82.7 72.9 2×2.5 163.7 589 3430
BNFN 10020A-2.5 102.7 92.9 1×2.5 99 368.5 2110
100 20 BNFN 10020A-5 102.7 92.9 2×2.5 179.3 737 4080
BNFN 10020A-7.5 102.7 92.9 3×2.5 253.8 1105.4 6010
B-684
L1
H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
B2
BNFN
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
D D1 L1 H B1 PCD d1×d2×h A kg•cm2/mm kg kg/m
125 167 141 18 123 145 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 1.85×10-1 9.19 27.4
Ball Screw
125 167 201 18 183 145 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 1.85×10-1 12.57 27.4
125 167 261 18 243 145 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 1.85×10-1 15.96 27.4
128 170 165 18 147 148 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 1.85×10-1 11.26 27.24
128 170 237 18 219 148 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 1.85×10-1 15.63 27.24
128 170 309 18 291 148 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 1.85×10-1 20.0 27.24
130 186 325 28 297 158 18×26×17.5 PT 1/8 1.85×10-1 23.4 27.0
130 176 137 22 115 152 14×20×13 PT 1/8 3.16×10-1 9.15 36.26
130 176 197 22 175 152 14×20×13 PT 1/8 3.16×10-1 12.41 36.26
130 176 257 22 235 152 14×20×13 PT 1/8 3.16×10-1 15.67 36.26
135 181 231 22 209 157 14×20×13 PT 1/8 3.16×10-1 16.02 35.26
143 204 227 28 199 172 18×26×17.5 PT 1/8 3.16×10-1 20.08 35.81
143 204 347 28 319 172 18×26×17.5 PT 1/8 3.16×10-1 28.97 35.81
170 243 231 32 199 205 22×32×21.5 PT 1/8 7.71×10-1 28.15 57.13
170 243 351 32 319 205 22×32×21.5 PT 1/8 7.71×10-1 39.99 57.13
170 243 471 32 439 205 22×32×21.5 PT 1/8 7.71×10-1 51.84 57.13

No Preload Type of Precision Screw shaft
outer diameter
4 to 15
L1
30° 30°
H B1
4-φ d1
φ Dg6
A
Tw (Greasing hole) WGF N1
L1
Tw H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
A B2
60° (Greasing hole) DK

shaft center-to-
outer center minor loaded Outer Flange
Ca C0a K
Rows x
d Ph dp dc kN kN N/μm D D1
turns
4 1 MDK 0401-3 4.15 3.4 3×1 0.29 0.42 35 9 19
6 1 MDK 0601-3 6.2 5.3 3×1 0.54 0.94 60 11 23
1 MDK 0801-3 8.2 7.3 3×1 0.64 1.4 80 13 26
8 2 MDK 0802-3 8.3 7 3×1 1.4 2.3 80 15 28
12 WGF 0812-3 8.4 6.6 2×1.65 2.2 3.9 110 18 31
2 MDK 1002-3 10.3 9 3×1 1.5 2.9 100 17 34
10
15 WGF 1015-3 10.5 8.3 2×1.65 3.3 6.2 140 23 40
12 2 MDK 1202-3 12.3 11 3×1 1.7 3.6 120 19 36
13 20 WGF 1320-3 13.5 10.8 2×1.65 4.7 9.6 180 28 45
2 MDK 1402-3 14.3 13 3×1 1.8 4.3 190 21 40
MDK 1404-3 14.65 11.9 3×1 4.2 7.6 190 26 45
14 4 DK 1404-4 14.5 11.8 4×1 5.4 10.2 180 26 45
DK 1404-6 14.5 11.8 6×1 7.7 15.4 270 26 45
5 MDK 1405-3 14.75 11.2 3×1 7 11.6 140 26 45
10 BLK 1510-5.6 15.75 12.5 2×2.8 14.3 27.8 340 34 57
WGF 1520-1.5 15.75 12.5 1×1.5 4.4 7.9 100 32 53
20
WGF 1520-3 15.75 12.5 2×1.5 8.1 15.8 190 32 53
15
WGF 1530-1 15.75 12.5 2×0.6 3.5 5.4 90 32 53
30
WGF 1530-3 15.75 12.5 2×1.6 8.1 14.6 220 32 53
40 WGF 1540-1.5 15.75 12.5 2×0.75 3.9 7.4 110 32 53
Note) Models MDK0401, 0601 and 0801 is not provided with a labyrinth seal.
Models MDK0401, 0601, 0801, model WGF and Large Lead Precision Ball Screw model BLK cannot be attached with
seal.
B-686
L1
30° 30°
H B1
4-φ d1
φ Dg6
Tw N1
A
(Greasing hole)
BLK
L1
Tw H B1
A
(Greasing hole) 4-φ d1
PCD φ D1 φ dp φ dc φ d φ Dg6
60°
MDK
Unit: mm
Ball Screw
Nut Shaft
mass mass
L1 H B1 B2 PCD d1 d2 h Tw N1 A kg•cm2/mm kg kg/m
13 3 10 — 14 2.9 — — 13 — — 1.97×10-6 0.01 0.07
14.5 3.5 11 — 17 3.4 — — 15 — — 9.99×10-6 0.017 0.14
15 4 11 — 20 3.4 — — 17 — — 3.16×10-5 0.024 0.29
22 5 17 — 22 3.4 — — 19 — — 3.16×10-5 0.034 0.27
27 4 17 — 25 3.4 — — 20 — — 3.16×10-5 0.054 0.35
22 5 17 — 26 4.5 — — 21 — — 7.71×10-5 0.045 0.47
33 5 22 — 32 4.5 — — 25 — — 7.71×10-5 0.11 0.55
22 5 17 — 28 4.5 — — 23 — — 1.6×10-4 0.05 0.71
43 5 29 — 37 4.5 — — 30 — — 2.2×10-4 0.18 0.96
23 6 17 — 31 5.5 — — 26 — — 2.96×10-4 0.15 1.0
33 6 27 — 36 5.5 — — 28 — — 2.96×10-4 0.13 0.8
48 10 38 10 35 4.5 8 4.5 29 — M6 2.96×10-4 0.2 1
60 10 50 10 35 4.5 8 4.5 29 — M6 2.96×10-4 0.23 1
42 10 32 — 36 5.5 — — 28 — M6 2.96×10-4 0.18 0.91
44 10 24 — 45 5.5 — — 40 5 M6 3.9×10-4 0.34 0.31
45 10 28 — 43 5.5 — — 33 5 M6 3.9×10-4 0.29 1.22
45 10 28 — 43 5.5 — — 33 5 M6 3.9×10-4 0.29 1.22
33 10 17 — 43 5.5 — — 33 5 M6 3.9×10-4 0.23 1.26
63 10 47 — 43 5.5 — — 33 5 M6 3.9×10-4 0.38 1.26
42 10 26.3 — 43 5.5 — — 33 5 M6 3.9×10-4 0.28 1.28

outer diameter
16 to 18
L1
H B1
PCD h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BNF

shaft center-
outer to-center minor loaded
Ca C0a K
Outer Flange
Rows x
turns
4 BNF 1604-3 16.5 13.8 2×1.5 5.1 10.5 180 36 59
BNF 1605-2.5 16.75 13.2 1×2.5 7.4 13.9 170 40 60
BNF 1605-3 16.75 13.2 2×1.5 8.7 16.8 200 40 60
5 BNF 1605-5 16.75 13.2 2×2.5 13.5 27.8 320 40 60
DK 1605-3 16.75 13.1 3×1 7.4 13 160 30 49
16 DK 1605-4 16.75 13.1 4×1 9.5 17.4 210 30 49
BNF 1606-2.5 16.8 13.2 1×2.5 7.5 14 170 40 60
6
BNF 1606-5 16.8 13.2 2×2.5 13.5 28 320 40 60
10 BNF 1610-1.5 16.8 13.5 1×1.5 4.8 8.5 100 40 63
BLK 1616-2.8 16.65 13.7 1×2.8 5.2 9.9 180 32 53
16
BLK 1616-3.6 16.65 13.7 2×1.8 7.1 14.3 220 32 53
BNF 1810-2.5 18.8 15.5 1×2.5 7.8 15.9 190 42 65
18 10
BNF 1810-3 18.8 15.5 2×1.5 9.2 19.1 220 42 65
Large Lead Precision Ball Screw model BLK cannot be attached with seal.
B-688
L1
30° 30°
H B1
4-φ d1
φ Dg6
Tw N1
A
(Greasing hole)
BLK
L1
Tw H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
A B2
Ball Screw
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
45 11 34 — 47 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 5.05×10 -4
0.32 1.35
41 10 31 — 50 4.5 8 4.5 — — M6 5.05×10-4 0.37 1.24
51 10 41 — 50 4.5 8 4.5 — — M6 5.05×10-4 0.47 1.24
56 10 46 — 50 4.5 8 4.5 — — M6 5.05×10-4 0.49 1.24
45 10 35 10 39 4.5 8 4.5 31 — M6 5.05×10-4 0.24 1.25
50 10 40 10 39 4.5 8 4.5 31 — M6 5.05×10-4 0.26 1.25
44 10 34 — 50 4.5 8 4.5 — — M6 5.05×10-4 0.41 1.3
62 10 52 — 50 4.5 8 4.5 — — M6 5.05×10-4 0.49 1.3
42 11 31 — 51 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 5.05×10-4 0.32 1.41
54 10 37.5 — 42 4.5 — — 38 5 M6 5.05×10-4 0.32 1.41
38 10 21.5 — 42 4.5 — — 38 5 M6 5.05×10-4 0.21 1.41
69 12 57 — 53 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 8.09×10-4 0.67 1.81
75 12 63 — 53 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 8.09×10-4 0.63 1.81

outer diameter
20
L1
H B1
PCD
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BNF
L1
Tw H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
A B2

shaft center-to-
Ca C0a K
Rows x
turns
BNF 2004-2.5 20.5 17.8 1×2.5 4.8 10.9 180 40 63
BNF 2004-5 20.5 17.8 2×2.5 8.6 21.8 350 40 63
4
DK 2004-3 20.5 17.8 3×1 5.2 11.6 190 32 56
DK 2004-4 20.5 17.8 4×1 6.6 15.5 250 32 56
BNF 2005-2.5 20.75 17.2 1×2.5 8.3 17.4 200 44 67
BNF 2005-3 20.75 17.2 2×1.5 9.7 21 240 44 67
BNF 2005-3.5 20.75 17.2 1×3.5 11.1 24.5 270 44 67
5
BNF 2005-5 20.75 17.2 2×2.5 15.1 35 380 44 67
DK 2005-3 20.75 17.1 3×1 8.5 17.3 200 34 58
DK 2005-4 20.75 17.1 4×1 11 23.1 260 34 58
BNF 2006-2.5 20.75 17.2 1×2.5 8.3 17.5 200 48 71
BNF 2006-3 20.75 17.2 2×1.5 9.7 21 240 48 71
20 BNF 2006-3.5 20.75 17.2 1×3.5 11.1 24.5 270 48 71
6
BNF 2006-5 20.75 17.2 2×2.5 15.1 35 380 48 71
DK 2006-3 21 16.4 3×1 11.4 21.5 410 35 58
DK 2006-4 21 16.4 4×1 14.6 28.6 540 35 58
BNF 2008-2.5 21 16.4 1×2.5 11.1 21.9 210 46 74
8
DK 2008-4 21 16.4 4×1 14.6 28.8 270 35 58
10 BNF 2010A-1.5 21 16.4 1×1.5 7.2 13.2 130 46 74
12 BNF 2012-1.5 21 16.4 1×1.5 7.1 13.2 130 48 71
BLK 2020-2.8 20.75 17.5 1×2.8 8.1 17.2 230 39 62
20
BLK 2020-3.6 20.75 17.5 2×1.8 11.1 24.7 290 39 62
WGF 2040-1 20.75 17.5 2×0.65 4.3 8 110 37 57
40
WGF 2040-3 20.75 17.5 2×1.65 9.5 20.2 280 37 57
60 WGF 2060-1.5 20.75 17.5 2×0.75 4.5 11 140 37 57
Model WGF and Large Lead Precision Ball Screw model BLK cannot be attached with seal.
B-690
L1
30° 30° H B1
4-φ d1
φ Dg6
Tw N1
A
(Greasing hole) BLK
L1
30° 30°
4-φ d1 H B1
φ Dg6
A
Tw N1
(Greasing hole) WGF
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
Ball Screw
37 11 26 — 51 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 1.23×10-3 0.3 2.18
49 11 38 — 51 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 1.23×10-3 0.49 2.18
42 11 31 10 44 5.5 9.5 5.5 35 — M6 1.23×10-3 0.26 2.18
46 11 35 10 44 5.5 9.5 5.5 35 — M6 1.23×10-3 0.27 2.18
41 11 30 — 55 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 1.23×10-3 0.46 2.05
52 11 41 — 55 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 1.23×10-3 0.53 2.05
45 11 34 — 55 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 1.23×10-3 0.53 2.05
56 11 45 — 55 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 1.23×10-3 0.6 2.05
46 11 35 10 46 5.5 9.5 5.5 36 — M6 1.23×10-3 0.31 2.06
51 11 40 10 46 5.5 9.5 5.5 36 — M6 1.23×10-3 0.34 2.06
44 11 33 — 59 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 1.23×10-3 0.51 2.12
56 11 45 — 59 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 1.23×10-3 0.68 2.12
50 11 39 — 59 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 1.23×10-3 0.62 2.12
62 11 51 — 59 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 1.23×10-3 0.8 2.12
52 11 41 10 46 5.5 9.5 5.5 36 — M6 1.23×10-3 0.36 1.93
59 11 48 10 46 5.5 9.5 5.5 36 — M6 1.23×10-3 0.39 1.93
60 15 45 — 59 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 1.23×10-3 0.69 2.06
69 11 58 15 46 5.5 9.5 5.5 36 — M6 1.23×10-3 0.45 2.06
58 15 43 — 59 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 1.23×10-3 0.77 2.14
64 18 46 — 59 5.5 9.5 5.5 — — M6 1.23×10-3 0.9 2.19
65 10 47.5 — 50 5.5 — — 46 5 M6 1.23×10-3 0.49 2.25
45 10 27.5 — 50 5.5 — — 46 5 M6 1.23×10-3 0.35 2.25
41 10 25 — 47 5.5 — — 38 5.5 M6 1.23×10-3 0.24 2.34
81 10 65 — 47 5.5 — — 38 5.5 M6 1.23×10-3 0.48 2.34
60 10 40.1 — 47 5.5 — — 38 5 M6 1.23×10-3 0.4 2.37

outer diameter
25
L1
H B1
PCD h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BNF

shaft center-
Ca C0a K
Outer Flange
Rows x
turns
BNF 2504-2.5 25.5 22.8 1×2.5 5.2 13.7 210 46 69
BNF 2504-5 25.5 22.8 2×2.5 9.5 27.3 410 46 69
4
DK 2504-3 25.5 22.8 3×1 5.7 15 230 38 63
DK 2504-4 25.5 22.8 4×1 7.4 19.9 310 38 63
BNF 2505-2.5 25.75 22.2 1×2.5 9.2 22 240 50 73
BNF 2505-3 25.75 22.2 2×1.5 10.8 26.4 280 50 73
BNF 2505-3.5 25.75 22.2 1×3.5 12.3 30.7 320 50 73
5
BNF 2505-5 25.75 22.2 2×2.5 16.7 44 460 50 73
DK 2505-3 25.75 22.1 3×1 9.7 22.6 250 40 63
DK 2505-4 25.75 22.1 4×1 12.4 30.3 320 40 63
BNF 2506-2.5 26 21.4 1×2.5 12.5 27.3 250 53 76
BNF 2506-3 26 21.4 2×1.5 14.6 32.8 290 53 76
BNF 2506-3.5 26 21.4 1×3.5 15.1 35.9 330 53 76
6
25 BNF 2506-5 26 21.4 2×2.5 22.5 54.8 470 53 76
DK 2506-3 26 21.4 3×1 12.8 27 250 40 63
DK 2506-4 26 21.4 4×1 16.8 37.4 330 40 63
BNF 2508-2.5 26.25 20.5 1×2.5 15.8 32.8 250 58 85
BNF 2508-3 26.25 20.5 2×1.5 18.5 39.4 290 58 85
BNF 2508-3.5 26.25 20.5 1×3.5 21.2 46 340 58 85
8
BNF 2508-5 26.25 20.5 2×2.5 28.7 65.8 480 58 85
DK 2508-3 26 21.4 3×1 13.1 28.1 500 40 63
DK 2508-4 26 21.4 4×1 16.8 37.5 330 40 63
BNF 2510A-2.5 26.3 21.4 1×2.5 15.8 33 250 58 85
10 DK 2510-3 26 21.6 3×1 12.7 27 250 40 63
DK 2510-4 26 21.6 4×1 16.7 37.6 330 40 63
12 BNF 2512-2.5 26 21.9 1×2.5 12.3 27.6 250 53 76
16 BNF 2516-1.5 26 21.4 1×1.5 7.9 16.7 150 53 76
B-692
L1
Tw H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
A B2
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
L1 H B1 B2 PCD d1 d2 h TW A kg•cm2/mm kg kg/m
36 11 25 — 57 5.5 9.5 5.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 0.21 3.5
48 11 37 — 57 5.5 9.5 5.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 0.55 3.5
43 11 32 10 51 5.5 9.5 5.5 39 M6 3.01×10-3 0.33 3.5
47 11 36 10 51 5.5 9.5 5.5 39 M6 3.01×10-3 0.35 3.5
Ball Screw
40 11 29 — 61 5.5 9.5 5.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 0.52 3.34
52 11 41 — 61 5.5 9.5 5.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 0.66 3.34
45 11 34 — 61 5.5 9.5 5.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 0.6 3.34
55 11 44 — 61 5.5 9.5 5.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 0.68 3.34
46 11 35 10 51 5.5 9.5 5.5 41 M6 3.01×10-3 0.38 3.35
51 11 40 10 51 5.5 9.5 5.5 41 M6 3.01×10-3 0.41 3.35
44 11 33 — 64 5.5 9.5 5.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 0.61 3.19
56 11 45 — 64 5.5 9.5 5.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 0.85 3.19
50 11 39 — 64 5.5 9.5 5.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 0.79 3.19
62 11 51 — 64 5.5 9.5 5.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 0.91 3.19
52 11 41 10 51 5.5 9.5 5.5 41 M6 3.01×10-3 0.41 3.19
60 11 49 10 51 5.5 9.5 5.5 41 M6 3.01×10-3 0.46 3.19
58 15 43 — 71 6.6 11 6.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 1.07 3.12
71 15 56 — 71 6.6 11 6.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 1.27 3.12
66 15 51 — 71 6.6 11 6.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 1.29 3.12
82 15 67 — 71 6.6 11 6.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 1.44 3.12
62 12 50 10 51 5.5 9.5 5.5 41 M6 3.01×10-3 0.48 3.35
71 12 59 15 51 5.5 9.5 5.5 41 M6 3.01×10-3 0.54 3.35
70 18 52 — 71 6.6 11 6.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 1.43 3.27
80 15 65 15 51 5.5 9.5 5.5 41 M6 3.01×10-3 0.62 3.45
85 15 70 20 51 5.5 9.5 5.5 41 M6 3.01×10-3 0.65 3.45
60 11 49 — 64 5.5 9.5 5.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 0.86 3.51
60 11 49 — 64 5.5 9.5 5.5 — M6 3.01×10-3 0.96 3.6

outer diameter
25 to 30
L1
30° 30°
4-φ d1 H B1
φ Dg6
A
Tw N1
(Greasing hole) WGF
L1
Tw H B1
A 22.5° h
φ d2
φ Dg6
90° DK B2

shaft center-
Ca C0a K
Outer Flange
Rows x
turns
BLK 2525-2.8 26 22 1×2.8 12.2 26.9 270 47 74
25
BLK 2525-3.6 26 22 2×1.8 16.6 38.7 350 47 74
25
WGF 2550-1 26 21.9 2×0.65 6.4 12.5 140 45 69
50
WGF 2550-3 26 21.9 2×1.65 14.3 31.7 340 45 69
BNF 2805-2.5 28.75 25.2 1×2.5 9.7 24.6 250 55 85
BNF 2805-3 28.75 25.2 2×1.5 11.3 29.5 300 55 85
BNF 2805-3.5 28.75 25.2 1×3.5 12.9 34.4 350 55 85
5 BNF 2805-5 28.75 25.2 2×2.5 17.5 49.4 500 55 85
BNF 2805-7.5 28.75 25.2 3×2.5 24.8 73.8 740 55 85
DK 2805-3 28.75 25.2 3×1 10.5 26.4 270 43 71
DK 2805-4 28.75 25.2 4×1 13.4 35.2 360 43 71
BNF 2806-2.5 28.75 25.2 1×2.5 9.6 24.6 250 55 85
BNF 2806-3.5 28.75 25.2 1×3.5 12.9 34.5 350 55 85
28
BNF 2806-5 28.75 25.2 2×2.5 17.5 49.4 500 55 85
6
BNF 2806-7.5 28.75 25.2 3×2.5 24.8 73.8 740 55 85
DK 2806-3 29 24.4 3×1 14 32 280 43 71
DK 2806-4 29 24.4 4×1 18 42.5 370 43 71
BNF 2808-2.5 29.25 23.6 1×2.5 16.8 36.8 270 60 104
8 BNF 2808-3 29.25 23.6 2×1.5 19.6 44.2 320 60 104
BNF 2808-5 29.25 23.6 2×2.5 30.4 73.7 530 60 104
BNF 2810-2.5 29.75 22.4 1×2.5 24 48.2 280 65 106
10
DK 2810-4 29.25 23.6 4×1 22.4 50 370 45 71
WGF 3060-1 31.25 26.4 2×0.65 8.9 18 170 55 89
60
30 WGF 3060-3 31.25 26.4 2×1.65 19.9 45.7 410 55 89
90 WGF 3090-1.5 31.25 26.4 2×0.75 9.7 25.8 200 55 89
Model WGF and Large Lead Precision Ball Screw model BLK cannot be attached with seal.
B-694
L1
H B1
PCD
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BNF
L1
30° 30° H B1
4-φ d1
φ Dg6
Tw N1
A
(Greasing hole) BLK
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
Ball Screw
80 12 60 — 60 6.6 — — 56 6 M6 3.01×10 -3
0.89 3.52
55 12 35 — 60 6.6 — — 56 6 M6 3.01×10-3 0.64 3.52
52 12 31.5 — 57 6.6 — — 46 7 M6 3.01×10-3 0.43 3.66
102 12 81.5 — 57 6.6 — — 46 7 M6 3.01×10-3 0.85 3.66
44 12 32 — 69 6.6 11 6.5 — — M6 4.74×10-3 1.02 4.27
54 12 42 — 69 6.6 11 6.5 — — M6 4.74×10-3 0.92 4.27
49 12 37 — 69 6.6 11 6.5 — — M6 4.74×10-3 0.86 4.27
59 12 47 — 69 6.6 11 6.5 — — M6 4.74×10-3 1.06 4.27
74 12 62 — 69 6.6 11 6.5 — — M6 4.74×10-3 1.16 4.27
49 12 37 10 57 6.6 11 6.5 55 — M6 4.74×10-3 0.48 4.27
54 12 42 10 57 6.6 11 6.5 55 — M6 4.74×10-3 0.51 4.27
50 12 38 — 69 6.6 11 6.5 — — M6 4.74×10-3 0.87 4.36
56 12 44 — 69 6.6 11 6.5 — — M6 4.74×10-3 0.94 4.36
68 12 56 — 69 6.6 11 6.5 — — M6 4.74×10-3 1.09 4.36
86 12 74 — 69 6.6 11 6.5 — — M6 4.74×10-3 1.3 4.36
53 12 41 10 57 6.6 11 6.5 55 — M6 4.74×10-3 0.5 4.36
61 12 49 10 57 6.6 11 6.5 55 — M6 4.74×10-3 0.56 4.36
68 18 50 — 82 11 17.5 11 — — M6 4.74×10-3 1.75 4.02
80 18 62 — 82 11 17.5 11 — — M6 4.74×10-3 1.93 4.02
92 18 74 — 82 11 17.5 11 — — M6 4.74×10-3 2.11 4.02
86 18 68 — 85 11 17.5 11 — — M6 4.74×10-3 2.3 3.66
84 15 69 20 57 6.6 11 6.5 55 — M6 4.74×10-3 0.82 4.18
62 15 37 — 71 9 — — 56 9 M6 6.24×10-3 1.11 5.28
122 15 97 — 71 9 — — 56 9 M6 6.24×10-3 1.9 5.28
92 15 61.3 — 71 9 — — 56 9 M6 6.24×10-3 1.51 5.34

outer diameter
32
Tw L1
22.5°
H B1
h
A
(Greasing hole)
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
90° B2
DK

shaft center-
Ca C0a K
Outer Flange
Rows x
turns
BNF 3204-7.5 32.5 30 3×2.5 14.8 52.7 740 54 81
4 DK 3204-3 32.5 30.1 3×1 6.4 19.6 290 45 76
DK 3204-4 32.5 30.1 4×1 8.2 26.1 380 45 76
{ BNF 3205-2.5 32.75 29.2 1×2.5 10.2 28.1 280 58 85
{ BNF 3205-3 32.75 29.2 2×1.5 12 33.8 340 58 85
{ BNF 3205-4.5 32.75 29.2 3×1.5 17 50.7 500 58 85
{ BNF 3205-5 32.75 29.2 2×2.5 18.5 56.4 560 58 85
5
{ BNF 3205-7.5 32.75 29.2 3×2.5 26.3 84.5 810 58 85
DK 3205-3 32.75 29.2 3×1 11.1 30.2 300 46 76
DK 3205-4 32.75 29.2 4×1 14.2 40.3 400 46 76
DK 3205-6 32.75 29.2 6×1 20.1 60.4 600 46 76
{ BNF 3206-2.5 33 28.4 1×2.5 13.9 35.2 290 62 89
{ BNF 3206-3 33 28.4 2×1.5 16.3 42.2 350 62 89
6 { BNF 3206-5 33 28.4 2×2.5 25.2 70.4 580 62 89
32
DK 3206-3 33 28.4 3×1 14.9 37.1 310 48 76
DK 3206-4 33 28.4 4×1 19.1 49.5 410 48 76
{ BNF 3208A-2.5 33.25 27.5 1×2.5 17.8 42.2 300 66 100
{ BNF 3208A-3 33.25 27.5 2×1.5 20.9 50.7 360 66 100
8
{ BNF 3208A-4.5 33.25 27.5 3×1.5 29.5 76 530 66 100
{ BNF 3208A-5 33.25 27.5 2×2.5 32.3 84.4 590 66 100
{ BNF 3210A-2.5 33.75 26.4 1×2.5 26.1 56.2 310 74 108
{ BNF 3210A-3 33.75 26.4 2×1.5 30.5 67.4 380 74 108
{ BNF 3210A-3.5 33.75 26.4 1×3.5 34.8 78.6 440 74 108
10
{ BNF 3210A-5 33.75 26.4 2×2.5 47.2 112.7 620 74 108
DK 3210-3 33.75 26.4 3×1 25.7 52.2 300 54 87
DK 3210-4 33.75 26.4 4×1 33 69.7 390 54 87
{ BNF 3212-3.5 34 26.1 1×3.5 40.4 88.5 440 76 121
12
DK 3212-4 33.75 26.4 4×1 34.2 73.9 420 54 87
B-696
L1
H B1
PCD h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BNF
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
L1 H B1 B2 PCD d1 d2 h Tw A kg•cm2/mm kg kg/m
60 11 49 — 67 6.6 11 6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 0.81 5.86
44 11 33 10 63 6.6 11 6.5 59 M6 8.08×10-3 0.44 5.86
48 11 37 10 63 6.6 11 6.5 59 M6 8.08×10-3 0.47 5.86
41 12 29 — 71 6.6 11 6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 0.76 5.67
53 12 41 — 71 6.6 11 6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 0.91 5.67
63 12 51 — 71 6.6 11 6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 1.03 5.67
Ball Screw
56 12 44 — 71 6.6 11 6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 0.94 5.67
71 12 59 — 71 6.6 11 6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 1.13 5.67
47 12 35 10 63 6.6 11 6.5 59 M6 8.08×10-3 0.5 5.67
52 12 40 10 63 6.6 11 6.5 59 M6 8.08×10-3 0.53 5.67
62 12 50 10 63 6.6 11 6.5 59 M6 8.08×10-3 0.6 5.67
45 12 33 — 75 6.6 11 6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 0.94 5.47
57 12 45 — 75 6.6 11 6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 1.12 5.47
63 12 51 — 75 6.6 11 6.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 1.21 5.47
53 12 41 10 63 6.6 11 6.5 59 M6 8.08×10-3 0.58 6.31
61 12 49 10 63 6.6 11 6.5 59 M6 8.08×10-3 0.65 6.31
58 15 43 — 82 9 14 8.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 1.5 5.39
71 15 56 — 82 9 14 8.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 1.73 5.39
87 15 72 — 82 9 14 8.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 2.02 5.39
82 15 67 — 82 9 14 8.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 1.93 5.39
70 15 55 — 90 9 14 8.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 2.2 4.98
87 15 72 — 90 9 14 8.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 2.6 4.98
80 15 65 — 90 9 14 8.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 2.44 4.98
100 15 85 — 90 9 14 8.5 — M6 8.08×10-3 2.92 4.98
80 15 65 15 69 9 14 8.5 66 M6 8.08×10-3 1.22 4.98
90 15 75 20 69 9 14 8.5 66 M6 8.08×10-3 1.34 4.98
98 18 80 — 98 11 17.5 11 — M6 8.08×10-3 3.4 4.9
98 15 83 25 69 9 14 8.5 66 M6 8.08×10-3 1.43 5.2

outer diameter
32 to 36
L1
H B1
PCD
h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BNF

shaft center-
Ca C0a K
Outer Flange
Rows x
turns
BLK 3232-2.8 33.25 28.3 1×2.8 17.3 41.4 340 58 92
32 32
BLK 3232-3.6 33.25 28.3 2×1.8 23.7 59.5 440 58 92
{ BNF 3606-2.5 36.75 33.2 1×2.5 10.7 31.8 310 65 100
{ BNF 3606-3 36.75 33.2 2×1.5 12.5 38 370 65 100
6
{ BNF 3606-5 36.75 33.2 2×2.5 19.4 63.4 610 65 100
{ BNF 3606-7.5 36.75 33.2 3×2.5 27.5 95.2 890 65 100
{ BNF 3608-2.5 37.25 31.6 1×2.5 18.8 47.5 330 70 114
8 { BNF 3608-5 37.25 31.6 2×2.5 34.1 95.1 650 70 114
{ BNF 3608-7.5 37.25 31.6 3×2.5 48.3 142.1 950 70 114
{ BNF 3610-2.5 37.75 30.5 1×2.5 27.6 63.3 350 75 120
{ BNF 3610-5 37.75 30.5 2×2.5 50.1 126.4 680 75 120
10 { BNF 3610-7.5 37.75 30.5 3×2.5 71.1 190.1 990 75 120
36
DK 3610-3 37.75 30.5 3×1 28.8 63.8 350 58 98
DK 3610-4 37.75 30.5 4×1 36.8 85 470 58 98
{ BNF 3612-2.5 38 30.1 1×2.5 32.1 71.4 350 78 123
12
{ BNF 3612-5 38 30.1 2×2.5 58.4 142.1 690 78 123
16 { BNF 3616-2.5 38 30.1 1×2.5 32.1 71.4 350 78 123
{ BNF 3620-1.5 37.75 30.5 1×1.5 17.6 38.3 220 70 103
20
BLK 3620-5.6 37.75 31.2 2×2.8 54.9 134.3 760 70 110
24 BLK 3624-5.6 38 30.7 2×2.8 63.8 151.9 770 75 115
BLK 3636-2.8 37.4 31.7 1×2.8 22.4 54.1 390 66 106
36
BLK 3636-3.6 37.4 31.7 2×1.8 30.8 78 490 66 106
B-698
L1
30° 30° H B1
4-φ d1
φ Dg6
Tw N1
A
(Greasing hole) BLK
L1
Tw H B1
A 22.5° h
φ d2
φ Dg6
90° DK B2
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
Ball Screw
102 15 77 — 74 9 — — 68 7.5 M6 8.08×10-3 1.78 5.83
70 15 45 — 74 9 — — 68 7.5 M6 8.08×10-3 1.32 5.83
53 15 38 — 82 9 14 8.5 — — M6 1.29×10-2 1.29 7.39
62 15 47 — 82 9 14 8.5 — — M6 1.29×10-2 1.43 7.39
71 15 56 — 82 9 14 8.5 — — M6 1.29×10-2 1.57 7.39
89 15 74 — 82 9 14 8.5 — — M6 1.29×10-2 1.85 7.39
68 18 50 — 92 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.29×10-2 2.11 6.96
92 18 74 — 92 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.29×10-2 2.57 6.96
116 18 98 — 92 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.29×10-2 3.03 6.96
81 18 63 — 98 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.29×10-2 2.75 6.51
111 18 93 — 98 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.29×10-2 3.45 6.51
141 18 123 — 98 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.29×10-2 4.15 6.51
82 18 64 15 77 11 17.5 11 75 — M6 1.29×10-2 1.52 6.51
93 18 75 20 77 11 17.5 11 75 — M6 1.29×10-2 1.66 6.51
87 18 69 — 100 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.29×10-2 3.14 6.41
123 18 105 — 100 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.29×10-2 4.07 6.41
92 18 74 — 100 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.29×10-2 3.27 6.8
75 15 60 — 85 9 14 8.5 — — M6 1.29×10-2 1.91 7.24
78 17 45 — 90 11 — — 80 8.5 M6 1.29×10-2 2.23 6.49
94 18 59 — 94 11 — — 86 9 M6 1.29×10-2 3.05 6.39
113 17 86 — 85 11 — — 76 8.5 M6 1.29×10-2 2.61 7.34
77 17 50 — 85 11 — — 76 8.5 M6 1.29×10-2 1.93 7.34

outer diameter
40
L1
H B1
PCD h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BNF

shaft center-
Ca C0a K
Outer Flange
Rows x
turns
BNF 4005-3 40.75 37.2 2×1.5 13 42.3 400 67 101
5 BNF 4005-4.5 40.75 37.2 3×1.5 18.5 63.5 600 67 101
BNF 4005-6 40.75 37.2 4×1.5 23.7 84.7 780 67 101
BNF 4006-2.5 41 36.4 1×2.5 15.3 44.1 350 70 104
6 BNF 4006-5 41 36.4 2×2.5 27.7 88.1 690 70 104
BNF 4006-7.5 41 36.4 3×2.5 39.2 132.3 1010 70 104
BNF 4008-2.5 41.25 35.5 1×2.5 19.6 52.8 360 74 108
40 8 BNF 4008-3 41.25 35.5 2×1.5 22.9 63.4 430 74 108
BNF 4008-5 41.25 35.5 2×2.5 35.7 105.8 710 74 108
BNF 4010-2.5 41.75 34.4 1×2.5 29 70.4 380 82 124
BNF 4010-3 41.75 34.4 2×1.5 33.8 84.5 450 82 124
BNF 4010-3.5 41.75 34.4 1×3.5 38.8 99 520 82 124
10
BNF 4010-5 41.75 34.4 2×2.5 52.7 141.1 740 82 124
DK 4010-3 41.75 34.4 3×1 29.8 69.3 380 62 104
DK 4010-4 41.75 34.4 4×1 38.1 92.4 500 62 104
B-700
Tw L1
22.5°
H B1
h
A
(Greasing hole)
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
90° B2
DK
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
Ball Screw
56 15 41 — 83 9 14 8.5 — M6 1.97×10 -2
1.31 9.06
66 15 51 — 83 9 14 8.5 — M6 1.97×10-2 1.46 9.06
81 15 66 — 83 9 14 8.5 — M6 1.97×10-2 1.69 9.06
48 15 33 — 86 9 14 8.5 — M6 1.97×10-2 1.32 8.82
66 15 51 — 86 9 14 8.5 — M6 1.97×10-2 1.63 8.82
84 15 69 — 86 9 14 8.5 — M6 1.97×10-2 1.94 8.82
58 15 43 — 90 9 14 8.5 — M6 1.97×10-2 1.7 8.72
71 15 56 — 90 9 14 8.5 — M6 1.97×10-2 1.97 8.72
82 15 67 — 90 9 14 8.5 — M6 1.97×10-2 2.19 8.72
73 18 55 — 102 11 17.5 11 — M6 1.97×10-2 2.86 8.22
90 18 72 — 102 11 17.5 11 — M6 1.97×10-2 3.33 8.22
83 18 65 — 102 11 17.5 11 — M6 1.97×10-2 3.14 8.22
103 18 85 — 102 11 17.5 11 — M6 1.97×10-2 3.69 8.22
83 18 65 15 82 11 17.5 11 79 PT 1/8 1.97×10 – 2 3.14 8.22
93 18 75 20 82 11 17.5 11 79 PT 1/8 1.97×10 – 2 3.41 8.22

outer diameter
40
L1
H B1
PCD h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BNF

shaft center-
Ca C0a K
Outer Flange
Rows x
turns
{ BNF 4012-2.5 42 34.1 1×2.5 33.9 79.2 390 84 126
{ BNF 4012-3.5 42 34.1 1×3.5 45.4 110.7 530 84 126
12 { BNF 4012-5 42 34.1 2×2.5 61.6 158.3 750 84 126
{ DK 4012-3 41.75 34.4 3×1 30.6 72.3 390 62 104
{ DK 4012-4 41.75 34.4 4×1 39.2 96.4 520 62 104
40
{ BNF 4016-5 42 34.1 2×2.5 61.4 158.8 740 84 126
16
{ DK 4016-4 41.75 34.4 4×1 39.1 96.8 520 62 104
20 { DK 4020-3 41.75 34.7 3×1 29.4 69.3 750 62 104
BLK 4040-2.8 41.75 35.2 1×2.8 28.2 68.9 430 73 114
40
BLK 4040-3.6 41.75 35.2 2×1.8 38.7 99.2 550 73 114
B-702
Tw L1
22.5°
H B1
h
A
(Greasing hole)
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
90° B2
DK
L1
30° 30°
H B1
4-φ d1
φ Dg6
Tw N1
A
(Greasing hole)
BLK
Ball Screw
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
83 18 65 — 104 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.97×10 -2
3.31 8.12
95 18 77 — 104 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.97×10-2 3.66 8.12
119 18 101 — 104 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.97×10-2 4.36 8.12
90 18 72 20 82 11 17.5 11 79 — PT 1/8 1.97×10 – 2 1.77 8.5
103 18 85 25 82 11 17.5 11 79 — PT 1/8 1.97×10 – 2 1.95 8.5
152 22 130 — 104 11 17.5 11 — — M6 1.97×10-2 5.52 8.55
120 18 102 30 82 11 17.5 11 79 — PT 1/8 1.97×10 – 2 2.19 8.83
123 18 105 30 82 11 17.5 11 79 — PT 1/8 1.97×10 – 2 2.23 9.03
125 17 96.5 — 93 11 — — 84 8.5 M6 1.97×10-2 3.4 9.01
85 17 56.5 — 93 11 — — 84 8.5 M6 1.97×10-2 2.48 9.01

outer diameter
40 to 45
L1
30° 30°
H B1
4-φ d1
φ Dg6
A

shaft center-
Ca C0a K
Outer Flange
Rows x
turns
WGF 4080-1 41.75 35.2 2×0.65 15 32.1 220 73 114
40 80
WGF 4080-3 41.75 35.2 2×1.65 33.4 81.4 530 73 114
BNF 4506A-2.5 46 41.4 1×2.5 16 49.6 390 80 114
6 BNF 4506A-5 46 41.4 2×2.5 29 99 750 80 114
BNF 4506A-7.5 46 41.4 3×2.5 41.2 150 1100 80 114
BNF 4508-2.5 46.25 40.6 1×2.5 20.7 59.5 400 85 127
8 BNF 4508-5 46.25 40.6 2×2.5 37.4 118.6 770 85 127
BNF 4508-7.5 46.25 40.6 3×2.5 53.1 178.4 1140 85 127
45
BNF 4510-2.5 46.75 39.5 1×2.5 30.7 79.3 420 88 132
BNF 4510-3 46.75 39.5 2×1.5 35.9 95.2 500 88 132
10
BNF 4510-5 46.75 39.5 2×2.5 55.6 158.8 800 88 132
BNF 4510-7.5 46.75 39.5 3×2.5 78.8 238.1 1190 88 132
12 BNF 4512-5 47 39.2 2×2.5 65.2 178.4 820 90 130
20 BNF 4520-1.5 47.7 37.9 1×1.5 44.2 99 350 98 142
Model WGF cannot be attached with seal.
B-704
L1
H B1
PCD h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BNF
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
Overall Greasing inertia
mass mass
L1 H B1 PCD d1 d2 h Tw N1 A kg•cm2/mm kg kg/m
Ball Screw
79 17 50.5 93 11 — — 74 8.5 M6 1.97×10 -2
2.34 9.38
159 17 130.5 93 11 — — 74 8.5 M6 1.97×10-2 4.18 9.38
53 15 38 96 9 14 8.5 — — PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 1.76 11.31
71 15 56 96 9 14 8.5 — — PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 2.18 11.31
89 15 74 96 9 14 8.5 — — PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 2.59 11.31
68 18 50 105 11 17.5 11 — — PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 2.76 11.21
92 18 74 105 11 17.5 11 — — PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 3.42 11.21
116 18 98 105 11 17.5 11 — — PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 4.09 11.21
81 18 63 110 11 17.5 11 — — PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 3.43 10.65
94 18 76 110 11 17.5 11 — — PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 3.83 10.65
111 18 93 110 11 17.5 11 — — PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 4.35 10.65
141 18 123 110 11 17.5 11 — — PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 5.26 10.65
119 18 101 110 11 17.5 11 — — PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 4.74 10.54
95 20 75 120 11 17.5 11 — — PT 1/8 3.16×10-2 5.04 10.37

outer diameter
50
Tw L1
22.5°
H B1
h
A
(Greasing hole)
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
90° B2
DK

shaft center-
Ca C0a K
Outer Flange
Rows x
turns
5 { BNF 5005-4.5 50.75 47.2 3×1.5 20.2 79.5 710 80 114
{ BNF 5008-2.5 51.25 45.5 1×2.5 21.6 66.2 430 87 129
8 { BNF 5008-5 51.25 45.5 2×2.5 39.1 132.3 840 87 129
{ BNF 5008-7.5 51.25 45.5 3×2.5 55.4 198.9 1230 87 129
{ BNF 5010-2.5 51.75 44.4 1×2.5 32 88.2 450 93 135
{ BNF 5010-3 51.75 44.4 2×1.5 37.5 105.8 540 93 135
50
{ BNF 5010-3.5 51.75 44.4 1×3.5 42.8 123.5 620 93 135
{ BNF 5010-5 51.75 44.4 2×2.5 58.2 176.4 880 93 135
10
{ BNF 5010-7.5 51.75 44.4 3×2.5 82.5 264.6 1290 93 135
DK 5010-3 51.75 44.4 3×1 33.9 90.7 470 72 123
DK 5010-4 51.75 44.4 4×1 43.4 120.5 610 72 123
DK 5010-6 51.75 44.4 6×1 62.7 186.8 930 72 123
B-706
L1
H B1
PCD h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BNF
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
Ball Screw
68 15 53 — 96 9 14 8.5 — PT 1/8 4.82×10 -2
1.91 14.4
61 18 43 — 107 11 17.5 11 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 2.52 14.0
85 18 67 — 107 11 17.5 11 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 3.16 14.0
109 18 91 — 107 11 17.5 11 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 3.8 14.0
73 18 55 — 113 11 17.5 11 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 3.33 13.38
90 18 72 — 113 11 17.5 11 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 3.88 13.38
83 18 65 — 113 11 17.5 11 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 3.66 13.38
103 18 85 — 113 11 17.5 11 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 4.31 13.38
133 18 115 — 113 11 17.5 11 — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 5.28 13.38
83 18 65 15 101 11 17.5 11 92 PT 1/8 4.82×10 – 2 2.14 13.38
93 18 75 20 101 11 17.5 11 92 PT 1/8 4.82×10 – 2 2.3 13.38
114 18 96 30 101 11 17.5 11 92 PT 1/8 4.82×10 – 2 2.65 13.38

outer diameter
50
L1
H B1
PCD h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BNF

shaft center-
Ca C0a K
Outer Flange
Rows x
turns
DK 5012-3 52.25 43.3 3×1 45.8 113 490 75 129
DK 5012-4 52.25 43.3 4×1 58.6 150.6 640 75 129
12 { BNF 5012-2.5 52.25 43.3 1×2.5 43.4 109.8 470 100 146
{ BNF 5012-3.5 52.25 43.3 1×3.5 58 153.9 640 100 146
{ BNF 5012-5 52.25 43.3 2×2.5 78.8 220.5 910 100 146
DK 5016-3 52.25 43.3 3×1 45.7 113.3 490 75 129
50 DK 5016-4 52.25 43.3 4×1 58.5 151 640 75 129
16
{ BNF 5016-2.5 52.7 42.9 1×2.5 72.6 183.3 620 105 152
{ BNF 5016-5 52.7 42.9 2×2.5 132.3 366.5 1180 105 152
DK 5020-3 52.25 43.6 3×1 44.2 108.8 470 75 129
20
{ BNF 5020-2.5 52.7 42.9 1×2.5 72.5 183.3 620 105 152
BLK 5050-2.8 52.2 44.1 1×2.8 42.2 107.8 530 90 135
50
BLK 5050-3.6 52.2 44.1 2×1.8 57.8 155 670 90 135
B-708
Tw L1
22.5°
H B1
h
A
(Greasing hole)
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
90° B2
DK
L1
30° 30°
H B1
4-φ d1
φ Dg6
Tw N1
A
(Greasing hole)
BLK
Ball Screw
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
97 22 75 20 105 14 20 13 98 — PT 1/8 4.82×10 –2
2.91 12.74
110 22 88 25 105 14 20 13 98 — PT 1/8 4.82×10 – 2 3.16 12.74
87 22 65 — 122 14 20 13 — — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 4.57 12.74
99 22 77 — 122 14 20 13 — — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 5.05 12.74
123 22 101 — 122 14 20 13 — — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 6.02 12.74
111 22 89 25 105 14 20 13 98 — PT 1/8 4.82×10 – 2 3.18 13.41
129 22 107 30 105 14 20 13 98 — PT 1/8 4.82×10 – 2 3.52 13.41
116 25 91 — 128 14 20 13 — — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 6.98 12.5
164 25 139 — 128 14 20 13 — — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 9.18 12.5
136 28 108 30 105 14 20 13 98 — PT 1/8 4.82×10 – 2 3.94 13.8
141 28 113 — 128 14 20 13 — — PT 1/8 4.82×10-2 8.32 13.08
156 20 122 — 112 14 — — 104 10 M6 4.82×10-2 6.18 14.08
106 20 72 — 112 14 — — 104 10 M6 4.82×10-2 4.45 14.08

outer diameter
50 to 55
L1
30° 30°
H B1
4-φ d1
φ Dg6
A

shaft center-
Ca C0a K
Outer Flange
Rows x
turns
WGF 50100-1 52.2 44.1 2×0.65 22.4 50.1 270 90 135
50 100
WGF 50100-3 52.2 44.1 2×1.65 49.9 127.2 650 90 135
BNF 5510-2.5 56.75 49.5 1×2.5 33.4 97 490 102 144
10 BNF 5510-5 56.75 49.5 2×2.5 60.7 194 950 102 144
BNF 5510-7.5 56.75 49.5 3×2.5 85.9 291.1 1390 102 144
BNF 5512-2.5 57 49.2 1×2.5 39.3 108.8 500 105 147
BNF 5512-3 57 49.2 2×1.5 46 131.3 590 105 147
12 BNF 5512-3.5 57 49.2 1×3.5 52.4 152.9 680 105 147
55
BNF 5512-5 57 49.2 2×2.5 71.3 218.5 960 105 147
BNF 5512-7.5 57 49.2 3×2.5 100.9 327.3 1420 105 147
BNF 5516-2.5 57.7 47.9 1×2.5 76.1 201.9 650 110 158
16
BNF 5516-5 57.7 47.9 2×2.5 138.2 402.8 1280 110 158
BNF 5520-2.5 57.7 47.9 1×2.5 76 201.9 660 112 158
20
BNF 5520-5 57.7 47.9 2×2.5 138.2 403.8 1280 112 158
Model WGF cannot be attached with seal.
B-710
L1
H B1
PCD h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BNF
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
L1 H B1 PCD d1 d2 h Tw N1 A kg•cm2/mm kg kg/m
Ball Screw
98 20 64 112 14 — — 92 10 M6 4.82×10 -2
4.18 14.66
198 20 164 112 14 — — 92 10 M6 4.82×10-2 7.63 14.66
81 18 63 122 11 17.5 11 — — PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 4.19 16.43
111 18 93 122 11 17.5 11 — — PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 5.36 16.43
141 18 123 122 11 17.5 11 — — PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 6.54 16.43
93 18 75 125 11 17.5 11 — — PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 5.01 16.29
107 18 89 125 11 17.5 11 — — PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 5.6 16.29
105 18 87 125 11 17.5 11 — — PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 5.52 16.29
129 18 111 125 11 17.5 11 — — PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 6.54 16.29
165 18 147 125 11 17.5 11 — — PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 8.07 16.29
116 25 91 133 14 20 13 — — PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 7.4 15.46
164 25 139 133 14 20 13 — — PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 9.73 15.46
127 28 99 134 14 20 13 — — PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 8.4 16.1
187 28 159 134 14 20 13 — — PT 1/8 7.05×10-2 11.45 16.1

outer diameter
63
L1
H B1
PCD h
φ d2 φ d1
A
(Greasing hole)
BNF

shaft center-
Ca C0a K
Outer Flange
Rows x
turns
BNF 6310-2.5 64.75 57.7 1×2.5 35.4 111.7 550 108 154
BNF 6310-5 64.75 57.7 2×2.5 64.2 222.5 1050 108 154
10 BNF 6310-7.5 64.75 57.7 3×2.5 90.9 334.2 1550 108 154
DK 6310-4 64.75 57.7 4×1 49.5 160.7 780 85 146
DK 6310-6 64.75 57.7 6×1 70.3 242.1 1140 85 146
BNF 6312A-2.5 65.25 56.3 1×2.5 48.1 139.2 560 115 161
63 BNF 6312A-5 65.25 56.3 2×2.5 87.4 278.3 1090 115 161
12
DK 6312-3 65.25 56.3 3×1 51.9 147.4 600 90 146
DK 6312-4 65.25 56.3 4×1 66.4 196.6 785 90 146
16 BNF 6316-5 65.7 55.9 2×2.5 147 462.6 1420 122 184
BNF 6320-2.5 65.7 55.9 1×2.5 81 231.3 740 122 180
20 BNF 6320-5 65.7 55.9 2×2.5 147 463.5 1420 122 180
DK 6320-3 65.7 55.9 3×1 83.5 229.3 1470 95 159
B-712
Tw L1
22.5°
H B1
h
A
(Greasing hole)
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
90° B2
DK
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
Ball Screw
77 22 55 — 130 14 20 13 — PT 1/8 1.21×10 –1
4.57 21.93
107 22 85 — 130 14 20 13 — PT 1/8 1.21×10– 1 5.77 21.93
137 22 115 — 130 14 20 13 — PT 1/8 1.21×10– 1 6.98 21.93
97 22 75 20 122 14 20 13 110 PT 1/8 1.21×10 – 1 3.28 21.93
118 22 96 30 122 14 20 13 110 PT 1/8 1.21×10 – 1 3.7 21.93
87 22 65 — 137 14 20 13 — PT 1/8 1.21×10– 1 5.8 21.14
123 22 101 — 137 14 20 13 — PT 1/8 1.21×10– 1 7.56 21.14
98 22 76 20 122 14 20 13 110 PT 1/8 1.21×10 – 1 3.71 21.14
111 22 89 25 122 14 20 13 110 PT 1/8 1.21×10 – 1 4.04 21.14
160 24 136 — 152 18 26 17.5 — PT 1/8 1.21×10– 1 11.82 20.85
127 28 99 — 150 18 26 17.5 — PT 1/8 1.21×10– 1 10.1 21.57
187 28 159 — 150 18 26 17.5 — PT 1/8 1.21×10– 1 13.58 21.57
136 28 108 30 129 18 26 17.5 121 PT 1/8 1.21×10 – 1 6.17 21.57

outer diameter
70 to 100
PCD
60°
A
(Greasing hole)
BNF

shaft center-
Ca C0a K
Outer Flange
Rows x
turns
BNF 7010-2.5 71.75 64.5 1×2.5 36.8 123.5 590 125 167
10 BNF 7010-5 71.75 64.5 2×2.5 66.9 247 1140 125 167
BNF 7010-7.5 71.75 64.5 3×2.5 94.9 371.4 1680 125 167
70 BNF 7012-2.5 72 64.2 1×2.5 43.5 139.2 600 128 170
12 BNF 7012-5 72 64.2 2×2.5 78.9 278.3 1160 128 170
BNF 7012-7.5 72 64.2 3×2.5 111.7 417.5 1710 128 170
20 BNF 7020-5 72.7 62.9 2×2.5 153.9 514.5 1550 130 186
BNF 8010-2.5 81.75 75.2 1×2.5 38.9 141.1 650 130 176
10 BNF 8010-5 81.75 75.2 2×2.5 70.6 283.2 1270 130 176
BNF 8010-7.5 81.75 75.2 3×2.5 100 424.3 1860 130 176
80
BNF 8020A-2.5 82.7 72.9 1×2.5 90.1 294 890 143 204
20 BNF 8020A-5 82.7 72.9 2×2.5 163.7 589 1720 143 204
BNF 8020A-7.5 82.7 72.9 3×2.5 231.6 883.2 2520 143 204
BNF 10020A-2.5 102.7 92.9 1×2.5 99 368.5 2110 170 243
100 20 BNF 10020A-5 102.7 92.9 2×2.5 179.3 737 4080 170 243
BNF 10020A-7.5 102.7 92.9 3×2.5 253.8 1105.4 6010 170 243
B-714
L1
H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
BNF
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
mass mass
L1 H B1 PCD d1 d2 h A kg•cm2/mm kg kg/m
Ball Screw
81 18 63 145 11 17.5 11 PT 1/8 1.85×10 -1
5.8 27.4
111 18 93 145 11 17.5 11 PT 1/8 1.85×10-1 7.49 27.4
141 18 123 145 11 17.5 11 PT 1/8 1.85×10-1 9.19 27.4
93 18 75 148 11 17.5 11 PT 1/8 1.85×10-1 6.89 27.24
129 18 111 148 11 17.5 11 PT 1/8 1.85×10-1 9.08 27.24
165 18 147 148 11 17.5 11 PT 1/8 1.85×10-1 11.26 27.24
185 28 157 158 18 26 17.5 PT 1/8 1.85×10-1 14.5 27.0
77 22 55 152 14 20 13 PT 1/8 3.16×10-1 5.9 36.26
107 22 85 152 14 20 13 PT 1/8 3.16×10-1 7.53 36.26
137 22 115 152 14 20 13 PT 1/8 3.16×10-1 9.15 36.26
127 28 99 172 18 26 17.5 PT 1/8 3.16×10-1 12.68 35.81
187 28 159 172 18 26 17.5 PT 1/8 3.16×10-1 17.12 35.81
247 28 219 172 18 26 17.5 PT 1/8 3.16×10-1 21.56 35.81
131 32 99 205 22 32 21.5 PT 1/8 7.71×10-1 18.28 57.13
191 32 159 205 22 32 21.5 PT 1/8 7.71×10-1 24.2 57.13
251 32 219 205 22 32 21.5 PT 1/8 7.71×10-1 30.12 57.13

outer diameter
14 to 45
Ball Screw (Square Nut) Lead 4 to 12
W
B
W1
4-S×l
T
F
M N2
（MAX）
A
(Greasing hole)
BNT

center Ca C0a K
Rows x
turns
4 BNT 1404-3.6 14.4 11.5 1×3.65 6.8 12.6 190
14
5 BNT 1405-2.6 14.5 11.2 1×2.65 7.2 12.6 150
16 5 BNT 1605-2.6 16.75 13.5 1×2.65 7.8 14.7 170
18 8 BNT 1808-3.6 19.3 14.4 1×3.65 18.2 34.4 270
5 BNT 2005-2.6 20.5 17.2 1×2.65 8.7 18.3 200
20
10 BNT 2010-2.6 21.25 16.4 1×2.65 14.7 27.8 220
5 BNT 2505-2.6 25.5 22.2 1×2.65 9.6 23 240
25
10 BNT 2510-5.3 26.8 20.2 2×2.65 43.4 92.8 520
BNT 2806-2.6 28.5 25.2 1×2.65 10.1 25.8 270
28 6
BNT 2806-5.3 28.5 25.2 2×2.65 18.3 51.6 510
BNT 3210-2.6 33.75 27.2 1×2.65 27.3 59.5 330
32 10
BNT 3210-5.3 33.75 27.2 2×2.65 49.6 118.9 640
BNT 3610-2.6 37 30.5 1×2.65 28.7 65.6 360
36 10
BNT 3610-5.3 37 30.5 2×2.65 52.1 131.2 700
45 12 BNT 4512-5.3 46.5 39.2 2×2.65 68.1 186.7 860
B-716
L1
C
φ dp φ dc φ d
N1
BNT
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
Greasing inertial
Width Center Overall
height length Mounting hole moment/mm
mass mass
hole
W F L1 B C S×l W1 T M N1 N2 A kg•cm2/mm kg kg/m
Ball Screw
34 13 35 26 22 M4×7 17 6 30 6 2 M6 2.96×10 -4
0.15 0.93
34 13 35 26 22 M4×7 17 6 31 6 2 M6 2.96×10-4 0.15 0.92
42 16 36 32 22 M5×8 21 21.5 32.5 6 2 M6 5.05×10-4 0.3 1.24
48 17 56 35 35 M6×10 24 10 44 8 3 M6 8.09×10-4 0.47 1.46
48 17 35 35 22 M6×10 24 9 39 5 3 M6 1.23×10-3 0.28 2.06
48 18 58 35 35 M6×10 24 9 46 10 2 M6 1.23×10-3 0.5 1.99
60 20 35 40 22 M8×12 30 9.5 45 7 5 M6 3.01×10-3 0.41 3.35
60 23 94 40 60 M8×12 30 10 55 10 — M6 3.01×10-3 1.18 2.79
60 22 42 40 18 M8×12 30 10 50 8 — M6 4.74×10-3 0.81 4.42
60 22 67 40 40 M8×12 30 10 50 8 — M6 4.74×10-3 0.78 4.42
70 26 64 50 45 M8×12 35 12 62 10 — M6 8.08×10-3 1.3 4.98
70 26 94 50 60 M8×12 35 12 62 10 — M6 8.08×10-3 2.0 4.98
86 29 64 60 45 M10×16 43 17 67 11 — M6 1.29×10-2 1.8 6.54
86 29 96 60 60 M10×16 43 17 67 11 — M6 1.29×10-2 2.4 6.54
100 36 115 75 75 M12×20 50 20.5 80 13 — M6 3.16×10-2 4.1 10.56

Model number coding
Model number coding
BNFN 20 05 L -5 RR G0 + 620L C5 A
Model number Standard Ball Screw assembly
A,B: Unfinished Shaft Ends
Y: Finished Shaft Ends
Accuracy symbol
Symbol for clearance in the axial direction
Seal symbol
(Labyrinth seal attached to both ends)
No. of circuits (Rows × turns)

Threading direction
No symbol: right-hand thread L: left-hand thread
RL: right-hand and left-hand threads are formed on one screw shaft
Lead (in mm)
Screw shaft outer diameter (in mm)
B-718
Model DIR and BLR
Ball Screw
(Separate)
Model DIR Standard-Lead Structure and features....................... A-773
Rotary-Nut Ball Screw ................... B-720 Type .................................................. A-775
Model BLR Large Lead Service Life ....................................... A-704
Rotary-Nut Precision Ball Screw ... B-722 Axial clearance.................................. A-685
Example of Assembly........................ A-778

the Products".
B-719
Model DIR Standard-Lead Rotary-Nut Ball Screw
6-φ d1
(60° equidistant)
6-S×t
(60° equidistant)
P2
P1
Screw Lead Ball Basic load rating Rigidity

Thread
shaft minor center-to-
outer center
diameter K
diameter diameter
Model No.
Outer Flange Overall
Ca C0a diameter diameter length D3
d dc Ph dp kN kN N/μ m D D1 L1 h7
DIR 1605-6 16 13.2 5 16.75 7.4 13 310 48 64 79 36
DIR 2005-6 20 17.2 5 20.75 8.5 17.3 310 56 72 80 43.5
DIR 2505-6 22.2 5 25.75 9.7 22.6 490 66 86 88 52
25
DIR 2510-4 21.6 10 26 9 18 330 66 86 106 52
DIR 3205-6 29.2 5 32.75 11.1 30.2 620 78 103 86 63
DIR 3206-6 32 28.4 6 33 14.9 37.1 630 78 103 97 63
DIR 3210-6 26.4 10 33.75 25.7 52.2 600 78 103 131 63
DIR 3610-6 36 30.5 10 37.75 28.8 63.8 710 92 122 151 72
DIR 4010-6 34.7 10 41.75 29.8 69.3 750 100 130 142 79.5
40
DIR 4012-6 34.4 12 41.75 30.6 72.3 790 100 130 167 79.5
Model number coding
DIR2005-6 RR G0 +520L C1
length (in mm)
(*1) See A-816. (*2) See A-685. (*3) See A-678.
B-720
L1
B5 B4 B3
H B1
φ Dg6
φ D1 φ D3 φ dp φ dc φ d
φ D2
Unit: mm
Ball screw dimensions Support Nut
Nut Shaft
bearing basic inertial
mass mass
load rating moment
Ca C0a
D2 B5 B4 B3 P1 P2 H B1 S t d1 kN kN kg•cm2 kg kg/m
30 8 21 50 56 30 6 15 M4 6 4.5 8.7 10.5 0.61 0.49 1.24
Ball Screw
34 9 21 50 64 36 6 15 M5 8 4.5 9.7 13.4 1.18 0.68 2.05
40 13 25 50 75 43 7 18 M6 10 5.5 12.7 18.2 2.65 1.07 3.34
40 11 25 70 75 43 7 18 M6 10 5.5 12.7 18.2 2.84 1.16 3.52
46 11 25 50 89 53 8 17 M6 10 6.6 13.6 22.3 5.1 1.39 5.67
48 11 25 61 89 53 8 17 M6 10 6.6 13.6 22.3 5.68 1.54 5.47
54 11 25 95 89 53 8 17 M6 10 6.6 13.6 22.3 8.13 2.16 4.98
58 14 33 104 105 61 10 23 M8 12 9 20.4 32.3 14.7 3.25 6.51
62 14 33 95 113 67 10 23 M8 12 9 21.5 36.8 20.6 3.55 8.22
62 14 33 120 113 67 10 23 M8 12 9 21.5 36.8 22.5 3.9 8.5
Note) The rigidity values in the table represent spring constants each obtained from the
Fa0 3
preload.
KN＝K
（）0.1Ca
dimensional table.
following equation.

Model BLR Large Lead Rotary-Nut Precision Ball Screw
θ (60° equidistant)
4-S 6-φ d1
P2
P1
Screw Lead Ball Basic load rating

Thread
shaft minor center-
outer to-center
diameter
diameter diameter
Model No.
Outer Flange Overall
Ca C0a diameter diameter length
d dc Ph dp kN kN D D1 L1 D3
BLR 1616-3.6 16 13.7 16 16.65 7.1 14.3 52 – 0

0.007 68 43.5 40 – 0
0.025
BLR 2020-3.6 20 17.5 20 20.75 11.1 24.7 62 – 0
0.007 78 54 50 – 0
0.025
BLR 2525-3.6 25 22 25 26 16.6 38.7 72 – 0
0.007 92 65 58 – 0
0.03
BLR 3232-3.6 32 28.3 32 33.25 23.7 59.5 80 – 0
0.007 105 80 66 – 0
0.03
BLR 3636-3.6 36 31.7 36 37.4 30.8 78 100 – 0
0.008 130 93 80 – 0
0.03
BLR 4040-3.6 40 35.2 40 41.75 38.7 99.2 110 – 0
0.008 140 98 90 – 0
0.035
BLR 5050-3.6 50 44.1 50 52.2 57.8 155 120 – 0
0.008 156 126 100 – 0
0.035
Model number coding
BLR2020-3.6 K UU G1 +1000L C5
Model number Flange orientation Symbol for clearance Accuracy symbol (*4)
symbol (*1) in the axial direction (*3)
Symbol for support Overall screw shaft
bearing seal (*2) length (in mm)
(*1) See A-778 (*2) UU: Seal attached on both ends No symbol: Without seal (*3) See A-685 (*4) See A-678
B-722
L1
B5 B4
H
Te
φ D1 φ D3 φ D4 φ dp φD φ dc φ d
Unit: mm
Ball screw dimensions Support Nut
Nut Shaft
bearing basic inertial
mass mass
load rating moment
Ca C0a
D4 H B4 B5 Te P1 P2 S t d1 θ° kN kN kg•cm2 kg kg/m
32 +0.025
0 5 27.5 9 2 60 25 M4 12 4.5 40 19.4 19.2 0.48 0.38 1.41
Ball Screw
39 +0.025
0 6 34 11 2 70 31 M5 16 4.5 40 26.8 29.3 1.44 0.68 2.25
47 +0.025
0 8 43 12.5 3 81 38 M6 19 5.5 40 28.2 33.3 3.23 1.1 3.52
58 +0.03
0 9 55 14 3 91 48 M6 19 6.6 40 30 39 6.74 1.74 5.83
66 +0.03
0 11 62 17 3 113 54 M8 22 9 40 56.4 65.2 16.8 3.2 7.34
73 +0.03 11 68 16.5 3 123 61 M8 22 9 50 59.3 74.1 27.9 3.95 9.01
90 +0.035
0 12 80 25 4 136 75 M10 28 11 50 62.2 83 58.2 6.22 14.08

B-724
Ball Screw
(Separate)
Model BNS-A Compact Type: Structure and features....................... A-781
Straight-curved Motion .................. B-726 Type .................................................. A-782
Model BNS Heavy-load Type: Service Life ....................................... A-704
Straight-curved Motion .................. B-728 Axial clearance.................................. A-685
Model NS-A Compact Type: Accuracy Standards .......................... A-783
Straight Motion .............................. B-730 Action Patterns.................................. A-784
Model NS Heavy-load Type: Example of Assembly........................ A-787
Linear Motion................................. B-732 Example of Using .............................. A-788
Precautions on Use........................... A-789

the Products".
B-725
Model BNS-A Compact Type: Straight-curved Motion
6-φ d1
4-S
(60° equidistant)
(90° equidistant)
P2
P1
4-S 4-φ d1
(90° equidistant) (90° equidistant)
P2
P1
Models BNS 0812A and 1015A

Ball screw unit
Screw Screw Lead Ball screw dimensions
shaft shaft
outer inner Outer
diameter diameter
Basic load rating Ball diameter
center-to-
Model No. center Thread Flange Overall
Ca C0a diameter minor D diameter length D3 D4
diameter
d db Ph kN kN dp dc g6 D1 L1 h7 H7
BNS 0812A 8 — 12 1.1 1.8 8.4 6.6 32 44 28.5 22 19
BNS 1015A 10 — 15 1.7 2.7 10.5 8.3 36 48 34.5 26 23
BNS 1616A 16 11 16 3.9 7.2 16.65 13.7 48 64 40 36 32
BNS 2020A 20 14 20 6.1 12.3 20.75 17.5 56 72 48 43.5 39
BNS 2525A 25 18 25 9.1 19.3 26 22 66 86 58 52 47
BNS 3232A 32 23 32 13 29.8 33.25 28.3 78 103 72 63 58
BNS 4040A 40 29 40 21.4 49.7 41.75 35.2 100 130 88 79.5 73
Ball spline
Ball spline dimensions
Outer
Basic load rating Static Basic torque rating diameter
permissible
Model No. C C0 moment CT C0T D7 Flange Overall
D6
diameter length
MA
kN kN N-m N-m g6 D5 L2 h7 BE1
N-m
BNS 0812A 1.5 2.6 5.9 2 2.9 32 44 25 24 16
BNS 1015A 2.7 4.9 15.7 3.9 7.8 36 48 33 28 21
BNS 1616A 7.1 12.6 67.6 31.4 34.3 48 64 50 36 31
BNS 2020A 10.2 17.8 118 56.8 55.8 56 72 63 43.5 35
BNS 2525A 15.2 25.8 210 105 103 66 86 71 52 42
BNS 3232A 20.5 34 290 180 157 78 103 80 63 52
BNS 4040A 37.8 60.5 687 418 377 100 130 100 79.5 64
Model number coding
BNS2020A +500L
Model number Overall shaft length (in mm)
B-726
L1 L2
B5 B4 B6 B7
H H1 6-φ dS1
t (60° equidistant) 6-S1×t1
φ BE φ D φ D7 φ BE1 (60° equidistant)
Te
φ D1 φ D3 φ D4 φ dp φ db φ d φ D6 φ D5
L2 P4
L2
P3
B6 B7 B6 B7
4-φ dS1
H1 H1 4-S1×t1
(90° equidistant)
(90° equidistant)
H2
φ D7 φ BE1 φ D6 φ D5 φ D7 φ BE1 φ D6 φ D5
P4
P3
Model BNS 0812A Model BNS 1015A Models BNS 0812A and 1015A
Unit: mm
Support Nut Screw shaft
Nut Shaft
bearing basic inertial inertial
load rating mass mass
moment moment/mm
Ca C0a
BE H B4 B5 Te P1 P2 S t d1 kN kN kg•cm2 J kg•cm2/mm kg kg/m
19 3 10.5 7 1.5 38 14.5 M2.6 10 3.4 0.8 0.5 0.03 3.16×10– 5 0.08 0.35
Ball Screw
23 3 10.5 8 1.5 42 18 M3 11.5 3.4 0.9 0.7 0.08 7.71×10– 5 0.15 0.52
32 6 21 10 2 56 25 M4 13.5 4.5 8.7 10.5 0.35 3.92×10– 4 0.31 0.8
39 6 21 11 2.5 64 31 M5 16.5 4.5 9.7 13.4 0.85 9.37×10– 4 0.54 1.21
47 7 25 13 3 75 38 M6 20 5.5 12.7 18.2 2.12 2.2×10– 3 0.88 1.79
58 8 25 14 3 89 48 M6 21 6.6 13.6 22.3 5.42 5.92×10– 3 1.39 2.96
73 10 33 16.5 3 113 61 M8 24.5 9 21.5 36.8 17.2 1.43×10– 2 3.16 4.51
Unit: mm
Support bearing Nut inertial Nut

basic load rating moment mass
C C0
H1 B6 B7 H2 P3 P4 S1×t1 dS1 kN kN kg•cm2 kg

3 10.5 6 3 38 19 M2.6×3 3.4 0.6 0.2 0.03 0.08
3 10.5 9 — 42 23 M3×4 3.4 0.8 0.3 0.08 0.13
6 21 10 — 56 30 M4×6 4.5 6.7 6.4 0.44 0.35
6 21 12 — 64 36 M5×8 4.5 7.4 7.8 0.99 0.51
7 25 13 — 75 44 M5×8 5.5 9.7 10.6 2.2 0.79
8 25 17 — 89 54 M6×10 6.6 10.5 12.5 5.17 1.25
10 33 20 — 113 68 M6×10 9 16.5 20.7 16.1 2.51

Model BNS Heavy-load Type: Straight-curved Motion
(60° equidistant)
θ 6-φ d1
4-S
P2
P1
Ball screw unit

shaft shaft
outer inner Basic load rating
diameter diameter Ball
center-
Model No. to-center Thread Flange Overall
Ca C0a diameter minor Outer diameter diameter length D3
diameter
d db Ph kN kN dp dc D D1 L1 h7
0
BNS 1616 16 11 16 3.9 7.2 16.65 13.7 52 – 0.007 68 43.5 40
0
BNS 2020 20 14 20 6.1 12.3 20.75 17.5 62 – 0.007 78 54 50
0
BNS 2525 25 18 25 9.1 19.3 26 22 72 – 0.007 92 65 58
0
BNS 3232 32 23 32 13 29.8 33.25 28.3 80 – 0.007 105 80 66
0
BNS 4040 40 29 40 21.4 49.7 41.75 35.2 110 – 0.008 140 98 90
0
BNS 5050 50 36 50 31.8 77.6 52.2 44.1 120 – 0.008 156 126 100
Ball spline
Basic load rating Static Basic torque rating
permissible Flange Overall
Model No. C C0 moment CT C0T Outer diameter diameter length
MA
kN kN N-m N-m D7 D5 L2
N-m
0
BNS 1616 7.1 12.6 67.6 31.4 34.3 52 – 0.007 68 50
0
BNS 2020 10.2 17.8 118 56.8 55.8 56 – 0.007 72 63
0
BNS 2525 15.2 25.8 210 105 103 62 – 0.007 78 71
0
BNS 3232 20.5 34 290 180 157 80 – 0.007 105 80
0
BNS 4040 37.8 60.5 687 418 377 100 – 0.008 130 100
0
BNS 5050 60.9 94.5 1340 842 768 120 – 0.008 156 125
Note) Dimension U indicates the length from the head of the hexagonal-socket-head type bolt to the ball screw nut end.
Model number coding
BNS2525 +600L
B-728
L2
L1 B7
B6
B5 B4 H1
H 6-φ dS1 (60° equidistant)
t 6-S1×t1
Te
φ D1 φ D3 φ D4 φ dp φ db φD φ D7 φ d φ D6 φ D5
Note) U P4
P3
Unit: mm
Nut Screw shaft
Support bearing Nut Shaft
basic load rating inertial inertial
mass mass
moment moment/mm
D4 Ca C0a
H7 H B4 B5 Te P1 P2 S t d1 θ° kN kN kg•cm2 J kg•cm2/mm kg kg/m
32 5 27.5 9 2 60 25 M4 12 4.5 40 19.4 19.2 0.48 3.92×10– 4 0.38 0.8
39 6 34 11 2 70 31 M5 16 4.5 40 26.8 29.3 1.44 9.37×10– 4 0.68 1.21
47 8 43 12.5 3 81 38 M6 19 5.5 40 28.2 33.3 3.23 2.2×10– 3 1.1 1.79
Ball Screw
58 9 55 14 3 91 48 M6 19 6.6 40 30 39 6.74 5.92×10– 3 1.74 2.96
73 11 68 16.5 3 123 61 M8 22 9 50 59.3 74.1 27.9 1.43×10– 2 3.95 4.51
90 12 80 25 4 136 75 M10 28 11 50 62.2 83 58.2 3.52×10– 2 6.22 7.16
Unit: mm
Support bearing Nut inertial Nut
basic load rating moment mass
D6 C C0
h7 H1 B6 B7 P3 P4 S1×t1 dS1 U kN kN kg•cm2 kg

39.5 5 37 10 60 32 M5×8 4.5 5 12.7 11.8 0.52 0.51
43.5 6 48 12 64 36 M5×8 4.5 7 16.2 15.5 0.87 0.7
53 6 55 13 70 45 M6×8 4.5 8 17.6 18 1.72 0.93
65.5 9 60 17 91 55 M6×10 6.6 10 20.1 24 5.61 1.8
79.5 11 74 23 113 68 M6×10 9 13 37.2 42.5 14.7 3.9
99.5 12 97 25 136 85 M10×15 11 13 41.6 54.1 62.5 6.7

Model NS-A Compact Type: Straight Motion
6-φ d1
4-S
(60° equidistant)
(90° equidistant)
P2
P1
4-φ d1
4-S (90° equidistant)
(90° equidistant)
P2
P1
Models NS 0812A and 1015A

Ball screw unit
shaft shaft
outer inner Outer
diameter diameter
Basic load rating Ball diameter
center-to-
Model No. center Thread Flange Overall
Ca C0a diameter minor D diameter length D3 D4
diameter
d db Ph kN kN dp dc g6 D1 L1 h7 H7
NS 0812A 8 — 12 1.1 1.8 8.4 6.6 32 44 28.5 22 19
NS 1015A 10 — 15 1.7 2.7 10.5 8.3 36 48 34.5 26 23
NS 1616A 16 11 16 3.9 7.2 16.65 13.7 48 64 40 36 32
NS 2020A 20 14 20 6.1 12.3 20.75 17.5 56 72 48 43.5 39
NS 2525A 25 18 25 9.1 19.3 26 22 66 86 58 52 47
NS 3232A 32 23 32 13 29.8 33.25 28.3 78 103 72 63 58
NS 4040A 40 29 40 21.4 49.7 41.75 35.2 100 130 88 79.5 73
Ball spline
permissible Outer Flange
Model No. C C0 CT C0T
moment diameter diameter
MA 0
kN kN N-m N-m D7 D5 – 0.2
N-m
0
NS 0812A 1.5 2.6 5.9 2 2.9 16 – 0.011 32
0
NS 1015A 2.8 4.9 15.7 3.9 7.8 21 – 0.013 42
0
NS 1616A 7.1 12.6 67.6 31.4 34.3 31 – 0.013 51
0
NS 2020A 10.2 17.8 118 56.8 55.8 35 – 0.016 58
0
NS 2525A 15.2 25.8 210 105 103 42 – 0.016 65
0
NS 3232A 20.5 34 290 180 157 49 – 0.016 77
0
NS 4040A 37.8 60.5 687 418 377 64 – 0.019 100
Model number coding
NS2020A +500L
B-730
L1 4-φ dS1 through hole,
B5 B4 φ d2 counter bore depth h
L2
H (90° equidistant)
t B6 H1
Te
φ BEφ D 45° 45°
φ D7 r
φ D1 φ D3 φ D4 φ dp φ db φ d φ D5
3-φ d0
P3
L1
B5 B4 4-φ dS1 through hole,
H φ d2 counter bore depth h
L2
t B6 H1 (90° equidistant)
φ BEφ D 45° 45°
Te
φ D7 r
φ D1 φ D3φ D4φ dp φ dφ D5
2-φ d0 P3
Models NS 0812A and 1015A

Unit: mm
Nut Screw shaft
basic load rating inertial inertial
mass mass
moment moment/mm
Ca C0a
BE H B4 B5 Te P1 P2 S t d1 kN kN kg•cm2 J kg•cm2/mm kg kg/m
19 3 10.5 7 1.5 38 14.5 M2.6 10 3.4 0.8 0.5 0.03 3.16×10– 5 0.08 0.35
Ball Screw
23 3 10.5 8 1.5 42 18 M3 11.5 3.4 0.9 0.7 0.08 7.71×10– 5 0.15 0.52
32 6 21 10 2 56 25 M4 13.5 4.5 8.7 10.5 0.35 3.92×10– 4 0.31 0.8
39 6 21 11 2.5 64 31 M5 16.5 4.5 9.7 13.4 0.85 9.37×10– 4 0.54 1.21
47 7 25 13 3 75 38 M6 20 5.5 12.7 18.2 2.12 2.2×10– 3 0.88 1.79
58 8 25 14 3 89 48 M6 21 6.6 13.6 22.3 5.42 5.92×10– 3 1.39 2.96
73 10 33 16.5 3 113 61 M8 24.5 9 21.5 36.8 17.2 1.43×10– 2 3.16 4.51
Unit: mm
Nut
Mounting hole mass
Overall Greasing
length hole
L2 H1 B6 r d0 P3 dS1 d2 h kg
25 5 7.5 0.5 1.5 24 3.4 6.5 3.3 0.04
33 6 10.5 0.5 1.5 32 4.5 8 4.4 0.09
0
50 – 0.2 7 18 0.5 2 40 4.5 8 4.4 0.23
0
63 – 0.2 9 22.5 0.5 2 45 5.5 9.5 5.4 0.33
0
71 – 0.3 9 26.5 0.5 3 52 5.5 9.5 5.4 0.45
0
80 – 0.3 10 30 0.5 3 62 6.6 11 6.5 0.58
0
100 – 0.3 14 36 0.5 4 82 9 14 8.6 1.46

Model NS Heavy-load Type: Linear Motion
(60° equidistant)
θ 6-φ d1
4-S
P2
P1
Ball screw unit

shaft shaft
outer inner Basic load rating
diameter diameter Ball
center-
Model No. to-center Thread Flange Overall
Ca C0a diameter minor Outer diameter diameter length D3
diameter
d db Ph kN kN dp dc D D1 L1 h7
0
NS 1616 16 11 16 3.9 7.2 16.65 13.7 52 – 0.007 68 43.5 40
0
NS 2020 20 14 20 6.1 12.3 20.75 17.5 62 – 0.007 78 54 50
0
NS 2525 25 18 25 9.1 19.3 26 22 72 – 0.007 92 65 58
0
NS 3232 32 23 32 13 29.8 33.25 28.3 80 – 0.007 105 80 66
0
NS 4040 40 29 40 21.4 49.7 41.75 35.2 110 – 0.008 140 98 90
0
NS 5050 50 36 50 31.8 77.6 52.2 44.1 120 – 0.008 156 126 100
Ball spline
permissible
Model No. C C0 CT C0T Outer diameter
moment
MA
kN kN N-m N-m D7
N-m
0
NS 1616 7.1 12.6 67.6 31.4 34.3 31 – 0.013
0
NS 2020 10.2 17.8 118 56.9 55.9 35 – 0.016
0
NS 2525 15.2 25.8 210 105 103 42 – 0.016
0
NS 3232 20.5 34 290 180 157 49 – 0.016
0
NS 4040 37.8 60.5 687 419 377 64 – 0.019
0
NS 5050 60.9 94.5 1340 842 769 80 – 0.019
Model number coding
NS2525 +600L
B-732
L1 (90° equidistant)
B5 B4 L2 4-φ dS1 through hole,
H B6 H 1 φ d2 counter bore depth h
t
45°
45°
Te
r
φ D1φ D3φ D4φ dp φ db φD φ D7 φ d φ D5
3-φ d0
P3
Unit: mm
Nut Screw shaft
inertial inertial
basic load rating mass mass
moment moment/mm
D4 Ca C0a
H7 H B4 B5 Te P1 P2 S t d1 θ° kN kN kg•cm2 J kg•cm2/mm kg kg/m
32 5 27.5 9 2 60 25 M4 12 4.5 40 19.4 19.2 0.48 3.92×10– 4 0.38 0.8
39 6 34 11 2 70 31 M5 16 4.5 40 26.8 29.3 1.44 9.37×10– 4 0.68 1.21
47 8 43 12.5 3 81 38 M6 19 5.5 40 28.2 33.3 3.23 2.2×10– 3 1.1 1.79
Ball Screw
58 9 55 14 3 91 48 M6 19 6.6 40 30 39 6.74 5.92×10– 3 1.74 2.96
73 11 68 16.5 3 123 61 M8 22 9 50 59.3 74.1 27.9 1.43×10– 2 3.95 4.51
90 12 80 25 4 136 75 M10 28 11 50 62.2 83 58.2 3.52×10– 2 6.22 7.16
Unit: mm
Nut
Mounting hole mass
Flange Greasing
Overall length
diameter hole
D5 L2 H1 B6 r d0 P3 dS1 d2 h kg
0
51 50 – 0.2 7 18 0.5 2 40 4.5 8 4.4 0.23
0
58 63 – 0.2 9 22.5 0.5 2 45 5.5 9.5 5.4 0.33
0
65 71 – 0.3 9 26.5 0.5 3 52 5.5 9.5 5.4 0.45
0
77 80 – 0.3 10 30 0.5 3 62 6.6 11 6.5 0.58
0
100 100 – 0.3 14 36 0.5 4 82 9 14 8.6 1.46
0
124 125 – 0.3 16 46.5 1 4 102 11 17.5 11 2.76

B-734
Rolled Ball Screw
Ball Screw
(Separate)
Preload Type of Rolled Ball Screw.... B-736 Structure and features....................... A-791
No Preload Type of Rolled Ball Screw . B-738 Types and Features .......................... A-792
No Preload Type of Rolled Ball Screw Service Life ....................................... A-704
(Square Nut) ................................... B-744 Axial clearance.................................. A-685
Options

the Products".
B-735
Preload Type of Rolled Screw shaft
outer diameter
14 to 40
PCD
60°
A (Greasing hole)
JPF
Lead Ball Basic load rating

Screw Thread No. of
center-to-
shaft outer minor loaded Outer
center Ca C0a
diameter Model No. diameter circuits diameter
diameter
Rows x
d Ph dp dc kN kN D
turns
4 JPF 1404-4 14.4 11.5 2×1 2.8 5.1 26
14
5 JPF 1405-4 14.5 11.2 2×1 3.9 8.6 26
16 5 JPF 1605-4 16.75 13.5 2×1 3.7 8.2 30
20 5 JPF 2005-6 20.5 17.2 3×1 6 16 34
5 JPF 2505-6 25.5 22.2 3×1 6.9 20.8 40
25
10 JPF 2510-4 26.8 20.2 2×1 11.4 24.5 47
5 JPF 2805-6 28.75 25.2 3×1 7.3 23.9 43
28
6 JPF 2806-6 28.5 25.2 3×1 7.3 23.9 43
32 10 JPF 3210-6 33.75 27.2 3×1 19.3 49.9 54
36 10 JPF 3610-6 37 30.5 3×1 20.6 56.2 58
40 10 JPF 4010-6 41.75 35.2 3×1 22.2 65.3 62
Note) The ball screw nut and the screw shaft of model JPF are not sold alone.
B-736
L1
H B1
h
φ d2 φ d1
φ Dg6
φ D1 φ dp φ dc φ d
（B2）
JPF
Unit: mm
Nut dimensions
Screw shaft
Nut Shaft
Flange Overall Greasing inertial
mass mass
diameter length hole moment/mm
D1 L1 H B1 B2 PCD d1×d2×h A kg•cm2/mm kg kg/m

46 52 10 42 16.5 36 4.5×8×4.5 M6 2.96×10 –4
0.22 1.0
Ball Screw
46 60 10 50 20 36 4.5×8×4.5 M6 2.96×10– 4 0.24 0.99
49 60 10 50 19.5 39 4.5×8×4.5 M6 5.05×10– 4 0.3 1.34
57 80 11 69 26.5 45 5.5×9.5×5.5 M6 1.23×10– 3 0.46 2.15
66 80 11 69 26 51 5.5×9.5×5.5 M6 3.01×10– 3 0.6 3.45
72 112 12 100 42 58 6.6×11×6.5 M6 3.01×10– 3 1.2 3.26
69 80 12 68 25 55 6.6×11×6.5 M6 4.74×10– 3 0.66 4.27
69 90 12 78 35 55 6.6×11×6.5 M6 4.74×10– 3 0.72 4.44
88 135 15 120 53.5 70 9×14×8.5 M6 8.08×10– 3 1.84 5.49
98 138 18 120 53.5 77 11×17.5×11 M6 1.29×10– 2 2.22 6.91
104 138 18 120 53.5 82 11×17.5×11 PT 1/8 1.97×10– 2 2.42 8.81

No Preload Type of Rolled Screw shaft
outer diameter
6 to 16
L1
2-φ d1 H B1
PCD φ D1 φ dp φ dc φ d φ D
Tw MTF
M1 L1 M1
30° 30°
4-φ d1 H B1
φ Dg6
A
BLK
30° 30° M1 L1 M1
4-φ d1 H B1
φ Dg6 φ dc φ d
PCD φ D1 φ dp
A
Tw (Greasing hole) WTF N1

shaft center-to-
Ca C0a K
Rows x
turns
6 1 MTF 0601-3.7 6.15 5.3 1×3.7 0.7 1.2 70 13 30
8 2 MTF 0802-3.7 8.3 6.6 1×3.7 2.1 3.8 90 20 40
2 MTF 1002-3.7 10.3 8.6 1×3.7 2.3 4.8 110 23 43
10
6 BTK 1006-2.6 10.5 7.8 1×2.65 2.8 4.9 88 26 42
2 MTF 1202-3.7 12.3 10.6 1×3.7 2.5 5.8 130 25 47
12
8 BTK 1208-2.6 12.65 9.7 1×2.65 3.8 6.8 108 29 45
4 BTK 1404-3.6 14.4 11.5 1×3.65 5.5 11.5 150 31 50
14
5 BTK 1405-2.6 14.5 11.2 1×2.65 5 11.4 116 32 50
10 BLK 1510-5.6 15.75 12.5 2×2.8 9.8 25.2 260 34 57
WTF 1520-3 15.75 12.5 2×1.5 5.5 14.2 140 32 53
20
WTF 1520-6 15.75 12.5 4×1.5 10.1 28.5 280 32 53
15
WTF 1530-2 15.75 12.5 4×0.6 4.3 9.3 120 32 53
30 WTF 1530-3 15.75 12.5 2×1.6 5.6 12.4 160 32 53
CNF 1530-6 15.75 12.5 4×1.6 10.1 24.7 310 32 53
5 BTK 1605-2.6 16.75 13.5 1×2.65 5.4 13.3 130 34 54
16 BLK 1616-3.6 16.65 13.7 2×1.8 5.8 12.9 170 32 53
16
BLK 1616-7.2 16.65 13.7 4×1.8 10.5 25.9 340 32 53
Note) Model MTF cannot be attached with seal.
B-738
M1 L1 M1
30° 30°
6-φ d1 H B1
φ Dg6
A
(Greasing hole) CNF N1
L1
30° 30° H B1
A (Greasing hole)
4-φ d1
Tw
Models BTK 1006 and 1208
L1
H B1
N1
30° 30° A (Greasing hole)
4-φ d1
Ball Screw
PCD
Tw
Models BTK 1404 to 5016
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
Overall Greasing Standard inertial
Seal Axial mass mass
length hole shaft length moment/mm
clear-
L1 H B1 PCD d1 TW N1 A M1 ance kg•cm2/mm kg kg/m
21 5 16 21.5 3.4 17 — — — 0.05 9.99×10– 6 0.03 0.19
150, 250
28 6 22 30 4.5 24 — — — 0.05 3.16×10– 5 0.08 0.31
28 6 22 33 4.5 27 — — — 0.05 7.71×10– 5 0.1 0.52
36 8 28 34 4.5 29 — 3 — 0.05 7.71×10– 5 0.19 0.48
200, 300
30 8 22 36 5.5 29 — — — 0.05 1.6×10– 4 0.13 0.77
44 8 36 37 4.5 32 — 3 — 0.05 1.6×10– 4 0.20 0.72
40 10 30 40 4.5 37 5 M6 — 0.1 2.96×10– 4 0.23 1.0
40 10 30 40 4.5 38 5 M6 — 0.1 2.96×10– 4 0.24 0.99
44 10 24 45 5.5 40 5 M6 3.5 0.1 3.9×10– 4 0.26 1.16
45 10 28 43 5.5 33 5 M6 3.5 0.1 3.9×10– 4 0.20 1.17
45 10 28 43 5.5 33 5 M6 3.5 0.1 3.9×10– 4 0.20 1.17
33 10 17 43 5.5 33 5 M6 3.5 0.1 500, 1000 3.9×10– 4 0.22 1.19
63 10 47 43 5.5 33 5 M6 3.5 0.1 3.9×10– 4 0.4 1.19
63 10 47 43 5.5 — 5 M6 3.5 0.1 3.9×10– 4 0.42 1.19
40 10 30 44 4.5 40 5 M6 — 0.1 5.05×10– 4 0.27 1.34
38 10 21.5 42 4.5 38 5 M6 3.5 0.1 5.05×10– 4 0.21 1.35
38 10 21.5 42 4.5 38 5 M6 3.5 0.1 5.05×10– 4 0.25 1.35

outer diameter
18 to 30
M1 L1 M1
30° 30° H B1
4-φ d1
φ Dg6
Tw N1
A
(Greasing hole)
BLK
M1 L1 M1
30° 30° H B1
4-φ d1
φ Dg6 φ dc φ d
PCD φ D1 φ dp
Tw
A N1
(Greasing hole) WTF

shaft center-to-
Ca C0a K
Rows x
turns
18 8 BTK 1808-3.6 19.3 14.4 1×3.65 13.1 31 210 50 80
5 BTK 2005-2.6 20.5 17.2 1×2.65 6 16.5 150 40 60
10 BTK 2010-2.6 21.25 16.4 1×2.65 10.6 25.1 160 52 82
BLK 2020-3.6 20.75 17.5 2×1.8 7.7 22.3 210 39 62
20
20 BLK 2020-7.2 20.75 17.5 4×1.8 13.9 44.6 410 39 62
WTF 2040-2 20.75 17.5 4×0.65 5.4 13.6 160 37 57
40 WTF 2040-3 20.75 17.5 2×1.65 6.6 17.2 200 37 57
CNF 2040-6 20.75 17.5 4×1.65 12 34.4 400 37 57
5 BTK 2505-2.6 25.5 22.2 1×2.65 6.7 20.8 180 43 67
10 BTK 2510-5.3 26.8 20.2 2×2.65 31.2 83.7 400 60 96
BLK 2525-3.6 26 22 2×1.8 12.1 35 270 47 74
25
25 BLK 2525-7.2 26 22 4×1.8 21.9 69.9 520 47 74
WTF 2550-2 26 21.9 4×0.65 8.5 21.2 200 45 69
50 WTF 2550-3 26 21.9 2×1.65 10.4 26.9 260 45 69
CNF 2550-6 26 21.9 4×1.65 18.9 53.9 460 45 69
BTK 2806-2.6 28.5 25.2 1×2.65 7 23.4 200 50 80
28 6
BTK 2806-5.3 28.5 25.2 2×2.65 12.8 46.8 390 50 80
WTF 3060-2 31.25 26.4 4×0.65 11.8 30.6 240 55 89
30 60 WTF 3060-3 31.25 26.4 2×1.65 14.5 38.9 310 55 89
CNF 3060-6 31.25 26.4 4×1.65 26.2 77.7 600 55 89
B-740
M1 L1 M1
30° 30° H B1
6-φ d1
φ Dg6
A
N1
(Greasing hole)
CNF
L1
H B1
N1
4-φ d1
Tw
Ball Screw
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
clear-
61 12 49 65 6.6 60 5 M6 — 0.1 500, 1000 8.09×10– 4 0.98 1.71
40 10 30 50 4.5 46 5 M6 — 0.1 1.23×10– 3 0.35 2.15
61 12 49 67 6.6 64 5 M6 — 0.1 1.23×10– 3 1.08 2.16
45 10 27.5 50 5.5 46 5 M6 3.5 0.1 1.23×10– 3 0.35 2.18
45 10 27.5 50 5.5 46 5 M6 3.5 0.1 1.23×10– 3 0.35 2.18
500, 1000,
41.5 10 25.5 47 5.5 38 5.5 M6 3.5 0.1 1.23×10– 3 0.25 2.12
1500
81.5 10 65.5 47 5.5 38 5.5 M6 3.5 0.1 1.23×10– 3 0.5 2.12
81 10 65 47 5.5 — 5.5 M6 3.5 0.1 1.23×10– 3 0.5 2.12
40 10 30 55 5.5 50 5 M6 — 0.1 3.01×10– 3 0.37 3.45
98 15 83 78 9 72 5 M6 — 0.1 3.01×10– 3 2.06 3.26
55 12 35 60 6.6 56 6 M6 3.5 0.1 3.01×10– 3 0.64 3.41
55 12 35 60 6.6 56 6 M6 3.5 0.1 3.01×10– 3 0.64 3.41
1000, 1500,
52 12 31.5 57 6.6 46 7 M6 3.5 0.1 3.01×10– 3 0.45 3.34
2000
102 12 81.5 57 6.6 46 7 M6 3.5 0.1 3.01×10– 3 0.85 3.34
102 12 81.5 57 6.6 — 7 M6 3.5 0.1 3.01×10– 3 0.85 3.34
47 12 35 65 6.6 60 6 M6 — 0.1 500, 1000, 4.74×10– 3 0.66 4.44
65 12 53 65 6.6 60 6 M6 — 0.1 2000, 2500 4.74×10– 3 0.84 4.44
62.5 15 37.5 71 9 56 9 M6 3.8 0.14 6.24×10– 3 0.8 4.84
1000, 2000,
122.5 15 97.5 71 9 56 9 M6 3.8 0.14 6.24×10– 3 1.7 4.84
3000, 4000
122 15 97 71 9 — 9 M6 3.8 0.14 6.24×10– 3 1.7 4.84

outer diameter
32 to 50
M1 L1 M1
30° 30° H B1
4-φ d1
φ Dg6
Tw N1
A
(Greasing hole)
BLK

shaft center-to-
Ca C0a K
Rows x
turns
BTK 3210-2.6 33.75 27.2 1×2.65 19.8 53.8 250 67 103
10
BTK 3210-5.3 33.75 27.2 2×2.65 36 107.5 490 67 103
32
BLK 3232-3.6 33.25 28.3 2×1.8 17.3 53.9 330 58 92
32
BLK 3232-7.2 33.25 28.3 4×1.8 31.3 107.8 650 58 92
BTK 3610-2.6 37 30.5 1×2.65 20.8 59.8 270 70 110
10
BTK 3610-5.3 37 30.5 2×2.65 37.8 118.7 530 70 110
20 BLK 3620-5.6 37.75 31.2 2×2.8 39.8 121.7 570 70 110
36
24 BLK 3624-5.6 38 30.7 2×2.8 46.2 137.4 590 75 115
BLK 3636-3.6 37.4 31.7 2×1.8 22.4 70.5 370 66 106
36
BLK 3636-7.2 37.4 31.7 4×1.8 40.6 141.1 730 66 106
10 BTK 4010-5.3 41.75 35.2 2×2.65 40.3 134.9 590 76 116
BLK 4040-3.6 41.75 35.2 2×1.8 28.1 89.8 420 73 114
40 40
BLK 4040-7.2 41.75 35.2 4×1.8 51.1 179.6 810 73 114
WTF 4080-2 41.75 35.2 4×0.65 19.8 54.5 320 73 114
80
WTF 4080-3 41.75 35.2 2×1.65 24.3 69.2 400 73 114
45 12 BTK 4512-5.3 46.5 39.2 2×2.65 49.5 169 650 82 128
16 BTK 5016-5.3 52.7 42.9 2×2.65 93.8 315.2 930 102 162
BLK 5050-3.6 52.2 44.1 2×1.8 42.1 140.4 510 90 135
50
50 BLK 5050-7.2 52.2 44.1 4×1.8 76.3 280.7 1000 90 135
WTF 50100-2 52.2 44.1 4×0.65 29.6 85.2 390 90 135
100
WTF 50100-3 52.2 44.1 2×1.65 36.3 108.1 500 90 135
B-742
M1 L1 M1
30° 30° H B1
4-φ d1
φ Dg6 φ dc φ d
PCD φ D1 φ dp
Tw
A N1
(Greasing hole) WTF
L1
H B1
N1
4-φ d1
Tw

Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
Ball Screw
clear-
68 15 53 85 9 78 5 M6 — 0.14 500, 1000, 8.08×10– 3 1.77 5.49
98 15 83 85 9 78 5 M6 — 0.14 2000, 2500 8.08×10– 3 2.35 5.49
70 15 45 74 9 68 7.5 M6 3.8 0.14 1000, 1500, 8.08×10– 3 1.14 5.69
70 15 45 74 9 68 7.5 M6 3.8 0.14 2000, 2500 8.08×10– 3 1.14 5.69
70 17 53 90 11 82 7 M6 — 0.17 500, 1000, 2000, 1.29×10– 2 1.94 6.91
100 17 83 90 11 82 7 M6 — 0.17 2500, 3000 1.29×10– 2 2.55 6.91
78 17 45 90 11 80 8.5 M6 5 0.17 1.29×10– 2 1.74 7.09
94 18 59 94 11 86 9 M6 5 0.17 1000, 1500, 1.29×10– 2 2.42 7.02
77 17 50 85 11 76 8.5 M6 5 0.17 2000, 3000 1.29×10– 2 1.74 7.12
77 17 50 85 11 76 8.5 M6 5 0.17 1.29×10– 2 1.74 7.12
1000, 1500, 2000,
100 17 83 96 11 88 7 M6 — 0.17 1.97×10– 2 2.91 8.81
3000, 3500
85 17 56.5 93 11 84 8.5 M6 5.4 0.17 1.97×10– 2 2.16 8.76
85 17 56.5 93 11 84 8.5 M6 5.4 0.17 1000, 1500, 1.97×10– 2 2.16 8.76
79 17 50.5 93 11 74 8.5 M6 5.4 0.17 2000, 3000 1.97×10– 2 2.1 8.66
159 17 130.5 93 11 74 8.5 M6 5.4 0.17 1.97×10– 2 3.67 8.66
118 20 98 104 14 94 8 M6 — 0.17 1000, 1500, 2000, 3.16×10– 2 3.9 11.08
145 25 120 132 18 104 12.5 PT 1/8 — 0.2 3000, 3500 4.82×10– 2 7.8 13.66
106 20 72 112 14 104 10 M6 5.4 0.2 4.82×10– 2 3.89 13.79
106 20 72 112 14 104 10 M6 5.4 0.2 1000, 1500, 4.82×10– 2 3.86 13.79
98 20 64 112 14 92 10 M6 5.4 0.2 2000, 3000 4.82×10– 2 3.5 13.86
198 20 164 112 14 92 10 M6 5.4 0.2 4.82×10– 2 6.4 13.86

outer diameter
14 to 45
Ball Screw (Square Nut) Lead 4 to 12
W
B
W1 4-S×l
T
F
M
N2
（MAX）
A
(Greasing hole)
BNT
Screw Lead Ball No. of Basic load rating Rigidity

shaft center- Thread
outer
minor
to-center diameter loaded Center Overall
circuits Ca C0a K Width
diameter Model No. diameter height length
Rows x
d Ph dp dc kN kN N/μ m W F L1
turns
4 BNT 1404-3.6 14.4 11.5 1×3.65 5.5 11.5 150 34 13 35
14
5 BNT 1405-2.6 14.5 11.2 1×2.65 5 11.4 110 34 13 35
16 5 BNT 1605-2.6 16.75 13.5 1×2.65 5.4 13.3 130 42 16 36
18 8 BNT 1808-3.6 19.3 14.4 1×3.65 13.1 31 210 48 17 56
5 BNT 2005-2.6 20.5 17.2 1×2.65 6 16.5 150 48 17 35
20
10 BNT 2010-2.6 21.25 16.4 1×2.65 10.6 25.1 160 48 18 58
5 BNT 2505-2.6 25.5 22.2 1×2.65 6.7 20.8 180 60 20 35
25
10 BNT 2510-5.3 26.8 20.2 2×2.65 31.2 83.7 400 60 23 94
BNT 2806-2.6 28.5 25.2 1×2.65 7 23.4 200 60 22 42
28 6
BNT 2806-5.3 28.5 25.2 2×2.65 12.8 46.8 390 60 22 67
BNT 3210-2.6 33.75 27.2 1×2.65 19.8 53.8 250 70 26 64
32 10
BNT 3210-5.3 33.75 27.2 2×2.65 36 107.5 490 70 26 94
BNT 3610-2.6 37 30.5 1×2.65 20.8 59.3 270 86 29 64
36 10
BNT 3610-5.3 37 30.5 2×2.65 37.8 118.7 530 86 29 96
45 12 BNT 4512-5.3 46.5 39.2 2×2.65 49.5 169 650 100 36 115
B-744
L1
C
φ dp φ dc φ d
N1
BNT
Unit: mm
Nut Shaft
inertial
Mounting hole Axial mass mass
moment/mm
clear-
B C S×l W1 T M N1 N2 A ance kg•cm2/mm kg kg/m
26 22 M4×7 17 6 30 6 2 M6 0.1 2.96×10 –4
0.15 1.0
26 22 M4×7 17 6 31 6 2 M6 0.1 2.96×10– 4 0.15 0.99
32 22 M5×8 21 21.5 32.5 6 2 M6 0.1 5.05×10– 4 0.3 1.34
35 35 M6×10 24 10 44 8 3 M6 0.1 8.09×10– 4 0.47 1.71
Ball Screw
35 22 M6×10 24 9 39 5 3 M6 0.1 1.23×10– 3 0.28 2.15
35 35 M6×10 24 9 46 10 2 M6 0.1 1.23×10– 3 0.5 2.16
40 22 M8×12 30 9.5 45 7 5 M6 0.1 3.01×10– 3 0.41 3.45
40 60 M8×12 30 10 55 10 — M6 0.1 3.01×10– 3 1.18 3.26
40 18 M8×12 30 10 50 8 — M6 0.1 4.74×10– 3 0.81 4.44
40 40 M8×12 30 10 50 8 — M6 0.1 4.74×10– 3 0.78 4.44
50 45 M8×12 35 12 62 10 — M6 0.14 8.08×10– 3 1.3 5.49
50 60 M8×12 35 12 62 10 — M6 0.14 8.08×10– 3 2.0 5.49
60 45 M10×16 43 17 67 11 — M6 0.17 1.29×10– 2 1.8 6.91
60 60 M10×16 43 17 67 11 — M6 0.17 1.29×10– 2 2.4 6.91
75 75 M12×20 50 20.5 80 13 — M6 0.2 3.16×10– 2 4.1 11.08

Model number coding
Model number coding
Ball Screw Nut
BTK1405-2.6 ZZ
Model number Seal symbol
no symbol: without seal
ZZ: brush seal attached to both ends of the ball screw nut (see page 1466)
Screw Shaft
TS 14 05 +500L C7
Accuracy symbol (see page 1140) (no symbol for class C10)
Lead (in mm)
Screw shaft outer diameter (in mm)
Symbol for rolled ball screw shaft
Combination of the Ball Screw Nut and the Screw Shaft
BTK1405-2.6 ZZ +500L C7 T
Model number Symbol for rolled shaft
Accuracy symbol (see page 1140) (no symbol for class C10)
Seal symbol
no symbol: without seal
ZZ: brush seal attached to both ends of the ball screw nut (see page 1466)
B-746
Model BLR
Ball Screw
(Separate)
Model BLR Large Lead Rotary Nut Structure and features....................... A-797
Rolled Ball Screw .......................... B-748 Type .................................................. A-797
Maximum Length of the Ball Screw Shaft B-750 Service Life ....................................... A-704
Axial clearance.................................. A-685
Example of Assembly........................ A-799

the Products".
B-747
Model BLR Large Lead Rotary Nut Rolled Ball Screw
θ (60° equidistant)
4-S 6-φ d1
P2
P1
Screw Ball Basic load

Thread Lead
shaft
minor
center- rating
outer diameter to-center
diameter diameter
Model No.
Flange Overall
Ca C0a Outer diameter diameter length
d dc Ph dp kN kN D D1 L1 D3
0 0
BLR 1616-3.6 16 13.7 16 16.65 5.8 12.9 52 68 43.5 40
– 0.007 – 0.025
0 0
BLR 2020-3.6 20 17.5 20 20.75 7.7 22.3 62 78 54 50
– 0.007 – 0.025
0 0
BLR 2525-3.6 25 22 25 26 12.1 35 72 92 65 58
– 0.007 – 0.03
0 0
BLR 3232-3.6 32 28.3 32 33.25 17.3 53.9 80 105 80 66
– 0.007 – 0.03
0 0
BLR 3636-3.6 36 31.7 36 37.4 22.4 70.5 100 130 93 80
– 0.008 – 0.03
0 0
BLR 4040-3.6 40 35.2 40 41.75 28.1 89.8 110 140 98 90
– 0.008 – 0.035
0 0
BLR 5050-3.6 50 44.1 50 52.2 42.1 140.4 120 156 126 100
– 0.008 – 0.035
Model number coding
BLR2020-3.6 K UU +1000L C7 T
Model number Flange orientation Overall screw shaft Symbol for rolled Ball Screw
symbol (*1) length (in mm)
Symbol for support Accuracy symbol (*3)
bearing seal (*2)
(*1) See A-799. (*2) UU: seal attached on both ends; No symbol: without seal (*3) See A-678.
Note) For clearance in the axial direction, see A-685.
B-748
L1
B5 B4
H
Te
φ D1 φ D3 φ D4 φ dp φD φ dc φ d
Unit: mm
Ball screw dimensions Support

Nut inertial Nut Shaft
bearing basic
moment mass mass
load rating
Ca C0a
D4 H B4 B5 Te P1 P2 S t d1 θ° kN kN kg•cm2 kg kg/m
Ball Screw
+0.025
32 5 27.5 9 2 60 25 M4 12 4.5 40 19.4 19.2 0.48 0.38 1.35
0
+0.025
39 6 34 11 2 70 31 M5 16 4.5 40 26.8 29.3 1.44 0.68 2.17
0
+0.025
47 8 43 12.5 3 81 38 M6 19 5.5 40 28.2 33.3 3.23 1.1 3.41
0
+0.03
58 9 55 14 3 91 48 M6 19 6.6 40 30 39 6.74 1.74 5.69
0
+0.03
66 11 62 17 3 113 54 M8 22 9 40 56.4 65.2 16.8 3.2 7.12
0
+0.03
73 11 68 16.5 3 123 61 M8 22 9 50 59.3 74.1 27.9 3.95 8.76
+0.035
90 12 80 25 4 136 75 M10 28 11 50 62.2 83 58.2 6.22 13.79
0

Maximum Length of the Ball Screw Shaft
The maximum length of the precision Ball Screw by accuracy grade is shown in Table1, and that of
the rolled Ball Screw in Table2.
If the shaft dimensions exceed the manufacturing limit in Table1 or Table2, contact THK.
Table1 Maximum Length of the Precision Ball Screw by Accuracy Grade Unit: mm

outer diameter C0 C1 C2 C3 C5 C7
4 90 110 120 120 120 120
6 150 170 210 210 210 210
8 230 270 340 340 340 340
10 350 400 500 500 500 500
12 440 500 630 680 680 680
13 440 500 630 680 680 680
14 530 620 770 870 890 890
15 570 670 830 950 980 1100
16 620 730 900 1050 1100 1400
18 720 840 1050 1220 1350 1600
20 820 950 1200 1400 1600 1800
25 1100 1400 1600 1800 2000 2400
28 1300 1600 1900 2100 2350 2700
30 1450 1700 2050 2300 2570 2950
32 1600 1800 2200 2500 2800 3200
36 2100 2550 2950 3250 3650
40 2400 2900 3400 3700 4300
45 2750 3350 3950 4350 5050
50 3100 3800 4500 5000 5800
55 2000 3450 4150 5300 6050 6500
63 5200 5800 6700 7700
70 6450 7650 9000
4000
80 6300 7900 9000
10000
100 10000 10000
B-750
Table2 Maximum Length of the Rolled Ball Screw by Accuracy Grade
Unit: mm

outer diameter C7 C8 C10
6 to 8 320 320 —
10 to 12 500 1000 —
14 to 15 1500 1500 1500
16 to 18 1500 1800 1800
20 2000 2200 2200
25 2000 3000 3000
28 3000 3000 3000
30 3000 3000 4000
32 to 36 3000 4000 4000
40 3000 5000 5000
45 3000 5500 5500
50 3000 6000 6000
Ball Screw
B-751
B-752
Ball Screw
B-753
Model EK Square Type Support Unit on the Fixed Side
2-φ d1 through hole, M

φ d2 counter bore depth h （L2） L3
1
B1 7 4 2 5
2-φ d1 through hole
H φd
H1
h1
□
T
6 3
b
P L1 L
B
Models EK 4 and 5 Models EK 6 and 8
Shaft
diameter
Model No.
b
d L L1 L2 L3 B H
± 0.02
EK 4 4 15 5.5 17.5 3 34 19 17
EK 5 5 16.5 5.5 18.5 3.5 36 21 18
EK 6 6 20 5.5 22 3.5 42 25 21
EK 8 8 23 7 26 4 52 32 26
EK 10 10 24 6 29.5 6 70 43 35
EK 12 12 24 6 29.5 6 70 43 35
EK 15 15 25 6 36 5 80 49 40
EK 20 20 42 10 50 10 95 58 47.5
Models EK 4 to 8
Part No. Part name No. of units
1 Housing 1
2 Bearing 1 set
3 Set nut 1
4 Collar 2
5 Seal 1
6 Lock Nut 1
7 1
(with a set piece)
B-754
M
（L2） L3
2-φ d1 through hole B1 1
7 4 2 5
φd
H
h1 H 1
□
T
6 3
b
P L1 L
B
Models EK 10 to 20
Unit: mm
Mass

Bearing used
h1
B1 H1 P d1 d2 h M T kg
±0.02
10 18 7 26 4.5 — — M2.6 10 AC4-12P5 0.06
11 20 8 28 4.5 — — M2.6 11 AC5-14P5 0.08
13 18 20 30 5.5 9.5 11 M3 12 AC6-16P5 0.14
17 25 26 38 6.6 11 12 M3 14 79M8DFGMP5 0.24
25 36 24 52 9 — — M3 16 7000HTDFGMP5 0.46
25 36 24 52 9 — — M3 19 7001HTDFGMP5 0.44
30 41 25 60 11 — — M3 22 7002HTDFGMP5 0.55
30 56 25 75 11 — — M4 30 7204HTDFGMP5 1.35
Models EK 10 to 20
1 Housing 1
2 Bearing 1 set
3 Holding lid 1
4 Collar 2
5 Seal 2
6 Lock Nut 1
7 1
(with a set piece)
B-755
Model BK Square Type Support Unit on the Fixed Side
1
4-φ d1 through hole, φ d2 counter bore depth h M
B1 4-φ d3
□
T
H
H1
E
h1
b
P
B
Shaft
diameter
Model No.
b h1
d L L1 L2 L3 B H B1 H1
± 0.02 ±0.02
BK 10 10 25 5 29 5 60 39 30 22 34 32.5
BK 12 12 25 5 29 5 60 43 30 25 35 32.5
BK 15 15 27 6 32 6 70 48 35 28 40 38
BK 17 17 35 9 44 7 86 64 43 39 50 55
BK 20 20 35 8 43 8 88 60 44 34 52 50
BK 25 25 42 12 54 9 106 80 53 48 64 70
BK 30 30 45 14 61 9 128 89 64 51 76 78
BK 35 35 50 14 67 12 140 96 70 52 88 79
BK 40 40 61 18 76 15 160 110 80 60 100 90
B-756
（L2） L3
7 4 2 5
φd
6 3
C1 C2
L1 L
Unit: mm
Mass

E P C1 C2 d3 d1 d2 h M T Bearing used kg
15 46 13 6 5.5 6.6 10.8 5 M3 16 7000HTDFGMP5 0.39

18 46 13 6 5.5 6.6 10.8 1.5 M3 19 7001HTDFGMP5 0.41
18 54 15 6 5.5 6.6 11 6.5 M3 22 7002HTDFGMP5 0.57
28 68 19 8 6.6 9 14 8.5 M4 24 7203HTDFGMP5 1.27
22 70 19 8 6.6 9 14 8.5 M4 30 7004HTDFGMP5 1.19
33 85 22 10 9 11 17.5 11 M5 35 7205HTDFGMP5 2.3
33 102 23 11 11 14 20 13 M6 40 7206HTDFGMP5 3.32
35 114 26 12 11 14 20 13 M8 50 7207HTDFGMP5 4.33
37 130 33 14 14 18 26 17.5 M8 50 7208HTDFGMP5 6.5

1 Housing 1
2 Bearing 1 set
3 Holding lid 1
4 Collar 2
5 Seal 2
6 Lock Nut 1
7 1
(with a set piece)
B-757
Model FK Round Type Support Unit on the Fixed Side
L （L1） 4-φ d1 through hole,

F H φ d2 counter bore depth h
5 2 4 3 7 6 (90° equidistant) M
□
T
φ Dg6 φd PCD φ A
B
□
1
T1 E
Mounting method A Models FK 4 to 8
Shaft
Model No. diameter
d L H F E D A PCD B
– 0.006
FK 4 4 15 6 9 17.5 18 32 24 25
– 0.017
– 0.007
FK 5 5 16.5 6 10.5 18.5 20 34 26 26
– 0.02
– 0.007
FK 6 6 20 7 13 22 22 36 28 28
– 0.02
– 0.007
FK 8 8 23 9 14 26 28 43 35 35
– 0.02
B-758
L （L2）
H F
φd
T2 E
Mounting method B
Unit: mm
Installation Installation
Mass
procedure A procedure B Bearing used

L1 T1 L2 T2 d1 d2 h M T kg
5.5 3 6.5 4 3.4 6.5 4 M2.6 10 AC4-12P5 0.05
5.5 3.5 7 5 3.4 6.5 4 M2.6 11 AC5-14P5 0.06
5.5 3.5 8.5 6.5 3.4 6.5 4 M3 12 AC6-16P5 0.08
7 4 10 7 3.4 6.5 4 M3 14 79M8DFGMP5 0.15

1 Housing 1
2 Bearing 1 set
3 Set nut 1
4 Collar 2
5 Seal 1
6 Lock Nut 1
7 1
(with a set piece)
B-759
Model FK Round Type Support Unit on the Fixed Side
L （L1）
4-φ d1 through hole,
F H φ d2 counter bore depth h M
5 2 4 3 7 6
(90° equidistant)
□
T
φ Dg6 φd PCD φ A
B
□
1
T1 E
Mounting method A Models FK 10 to 30
Shaft
Model No. diameter
d L H F E D A PCD B
– 0.009
FK 10 10 27 10 17 29.5 34 52 42 42
– 0.025
– 0.009
FK 12 12 27 10 17 29.5 36 54 44 44
– 0.025
– 0.009
FK 15 15 32 15 17 36 40 63 50 52
– 0.025
– 0.01
FK 20 20 52 22 30 50 57 85 70 68
– 0.029
– 0.01
FK 25 25 57 27 30 60 63 98 80 79
– 0.029
– 0.01
FK 30 30 62 30 32 61 75 117 95 93
– 0.029
B-760
L （L2）
H F
φd
T2 E
Mounting method B
Unit: mm
Installation Installation
Mass
procedure A procedure B Bearing used

L1 T1 L2 T2 d1 d2 h M T kg
7.5 5 8.5 6 4.5 8 4 M3 16 700

THK

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

THK

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

THK

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PRODUCTS

Caged Ball LM Guide

Cross LM Guide Miniature Cross Guide Structural Member Rail R Guide

Straight-Curved Guide Self-aligning High Temperature High Temperature

LM Guide Actuator Caged Ball LM Guide Actuator LM Actuator

High Torque Type Ball Spline

Medium Torque Type Ball Spline

LBR A-484 LBH A-484 LT A-490 LF A-490

LBG A-496 LBGT A-496 LTR A-500 LTR-A A-500

Spline Nut Linear Bushing

DPM A-514 DP A-514 LM A-524 LM-GA A-524

LM-MG A-524 LM-L A-524 LME A-524 LMF A-524

Shaft diameter: φ 3 to 40 Shaft diameter: φ 3 to 60 Shaft diameter: φ 5 to 80 Shaft diameter: φ 6 to 60

LMF-M A-524 LMF-L A-524 LMF-ML A-524 LMK A-524

Shaft diameter: φ 6 to 30 Shaft diameter: φ 6 to 60 Shaft diameter: φ 6 to 30 Shaft diameter: φ 6 to 60

LMK-M A-524 LMK-L A-524 LMK-ML A-524 LMH A-524

Shaft diameter: φ 6 to 30 Shaft diameter: φ 6 to 60 Shaft diameter: φ 6 to 30 Shaft diameter: φ 6 to 30

LMH-L A-524 SC A-524 SL A-524 SH A-524

Shaft diameter: φ 6 to 30 Shaft diameter: φ 6 to 50 Shaft diameter: φ 6 to 30 Shaft diameter: φ 3 to 20

Miniature Stroke Die-setting Ball Cage

ST-B A-554 STI A-554 MST A-560 KS A-562

Cross Roller Table Linear Ball Slide

VRT A-586 VRT-A A-586 VRU A-586 LSP A-594

Unit Base LM Roller

LS A-594 LSC A-594 LSC A-594 LR A-604

LR-Z A-604 LRA A-604 LRA-Z A-604 LRB A-604

Slide Pack Slide Rail

FTW A-622 FBW A-636 FBL A-646 E15/20 A-646

Precision, Caged Ball Screw

Rail length: 80 to 300 Shaft diameter: φ 32 to 50 Shaft diameter: φ 36 to 55 Shaft diameter: φ 32 to 63

BIF A-754 BNFN A-754 MDK A-754 MBF A-754

Precision Ball Screw

Shaft diameter: φ 16 to 50 Shaft diameter: φ 4 to 25 Shaft diameter: φ 16 to 50 Shaft diameter: φ 14 to 63

BNFN A-764 DKN A-764 BLW A-764 BNF A-764

DK A-764 MDK A-764 BLK A-764 WGF A-764

Shaft diameter: φ 14 to 63 Shaft diameter: φ 4 to 14 Shaft diameter: φ 15 to 50 Shaft diameter: φ 8 to 50

BNT A-764 DIR A-772 BLR A-772 BNS-A A-780

Shaft diameter: φ 14 to 45 Shaft diameter: φ 16 to 40 Shaft diameter: φ 16 to 50 Shaft diameter: φ 8 to 40

Rolled Ball Screw

Shaft diameter: φ 16 to 50 Shaft diameter: φ 8 to 40 Shaft diameter: φ 16 to 50 Shaft diameter: φ 14 to 40

BTK A-790 MTF A-790 BLK A-790 WTF A-790

Shaft diameter: φ 10 to 50 Shaft diameter: φ 6 to 12 Shaft diameter: φ 15 to 50 Shaft diameter: φ 15 to 50

Rolled Rotary Ball Screw Lead Screw Nut

CNF A-790 BNT A-790 BLR A-796 DCM A-830

Shaft diameter: φ 15 to 30 Shaft diameter: φ 14 to 45 Shaft diameter: φ 16 to 50 Shaft diameter: φ 12 to 50

Separable Outer Ring Type Two-piece Inner Ring

Stud diameter: φ 5 to 12 Stud diameter: φ 6 to 30 Stud diameter: φ 6 to 30 Inner diameter: φ 6 to 50

Inner diameter: φ 7 to 60 Inner diameter: φ 5 to 50 Inner diameter: φ 12 to 65 Inner diameter: φ 12 to 70

AL A-922 BL A-922 RBL A-922 RBI A-922

Original Grease Original Grease Original Grease Original Grease

Detailed Dimensional Drawings Detailed Specifications

Technical Information FAQ

Technical Calculation 2D CAD Data Downloads

3D CAD Data Downloads Catalog Information

A Technical Descriptions of the Products mainly contains product

■Point of Selection include test data and service life

B Product Specifications contains dimensional drawings

General Table of Contents

Point of Design........................................ A-318